《Darkening System Start From Naruto》


 Chapter 1: Trying to Keep Smiling

    Chapter 1: Trying to Keep Smiling


    Winter. Konoha Vige.


    At 3 years old, Uzumaki Naruto walked on the snow very hard.


    Every step was as difficult as a hurdle. Even so, Uzumaki Naruto always kept a cheerful smile on his face.


    With his short stature, he came to a grocery store near the house and knocked on the wooden board in front of the counter. "Boss! Give me a hot water bottle. The one in my house is broken."


    "Go away! Don''t buy here!" After that, the clerk closed the window at the counter. He didn''t even want to look at Uzumaki Naruto.


    In Uzumaki Naruto''s mind, a voice sounded, "Give up. No one will sell it to you."


    It was Li Yaoxiang, who had traveled to the world of Naruto for three years. He has the same surname as Rock Lee(Li), but actually has no rtionship with him.


    Li Yaoxiang was initially an ordinary senior student from Earth.


    He randomly made a wish to soar across All Heavens Myriad Realms at his birthday party but didn''t really mean to when he said that. Despite that, God really gave him such a chance.


    After he came here, he discovered that he couldn''t extract Chakra at all. He could only be an ordinary person. This was obviously different from the transmigration he had imagined.


    Fortunately, God did notpletely fail to give him a chance to make aeback.


    After Li Yaoxiang transmigrated, he awakened a system.


    A ckening System.


    As the name implies, if Li Yaoxiang wants to change the current situation of being cut by the sword or continuing to soar across All Heavens Myriad Realms, he mustplete his mission in this world, which is to cken Uzumaki Narutopletely.


    The main initial function of the system is to allow Li Yaoxiang to invade Uzumaki Naruto''s consciousness space tomunicate or to control Uzumaki Naruto''s body while Uzumaki Naruto is asleep, unconscious, or emotionally broken.


    This is why Li Yaoxiang''s voice can appear in Uzumaki Naruto''s mind anytime and anywhere.


    Until now, Uzumaki Naruto still didn''t know who the owner of this voice was and what was going on.


    No one taught him. No one corrected him. He thought it was normal to have such a conversation with a person from time to time in his mind. The only thing he knew was that the owner of this voice has been taking care of him and apanying him.


    Naruto''s house is always in chaos. But whenever he wakes up, he would find his home suddenly bes clean. He knew that this was the owner of this voice.


    Because no one would care about him.


    Whenever his diaper is wet and dirty, the same thing happened. He would find the original dirty diapers reced by newfortable and dry diapers. He knew that this was also the owner of the voice.


    Because no one would care about him.


    He didn''t understand how the voice owner did it, but he never felt afraid knowing the voice owner controlled his body. After all, they had been together for so long. Naruto trusted the owner of the voice very much, and Naruto knew he would not harm him.


    He had long regarded the owner of the voice as his closest person.


    The only w was that the owner of this voice always likes to beat Naruto.


    Whatever Naruto said, no matter how hard Naruto tried, he would always say it''s impossible to make friends or impossible to get recognition.


    Uzumaki Naruto certainly does not want to believe this!


    Because the greatest grandfather Hokage in the vige said this before: "As long as you persist and work hard, you can make friends!"


    Despite being mentally prepared, the shopkeeper''s fierce reaction still surprised Uzumaki Naruto.


    Naruto quickly recovered his smile. He was very optimistic in his mind and gave a response, "No. Not every house is like this. Someone will sell it to me."


    After vetoing Li Yaoxiang''s statement, Uzumaki Naruto smiled again and walked hard on the white snow to the next store.


    ....


    2nd store: "Go away! I don''t sell!"


    Naruto was not discouraged, and the smile on his face remained.


    3rd store: "Monster! Get out!"


    Naruto still kept smiling.


    He didn''t give up and came to the fourth store. The owner of the fourth store didn''t even say a word. With a tter, an empty can smashed into Naruto''s head.


    The empty can bounced off, and Naruto was stunned on the spot.


    "Hey..." Li Yaoxiang sighed, "How long are you going to try? Didn''t I tell you? You really think that as long as you keep smiling, others will think you won''t hurt them? Will they want to be friends with you? Stop dreaming. Give up."


    Naruto did not refute this time. But he kept smiling. It''s just that he didn''t go to the next store this time. He turned and set foot on his way home.


    ...


    As he walked, he came to an empty snowfield.


    There were four children on the snowfield. It was a group of children of simr age to Naruto, who was ying around.


    The cotton coats worn by this group of children looked very warm andfortable. It waspletely different from the sloppy and slightly thin cotton coats worn by Naruto.


    Seeing the scene in front of him, Naruto''s smile that was barely maintained becameughter from the bottom of his heart. Optimistic, he soon left behind the unhappy things.


    You can tell from his eyes that he was very envious of this group of children. Envied them that they can y happily together.


    He also wanted to join in and have fun with everyone.


    It''s just that, just as he took a step, Li Yaoxiang''s voice sounded again: "Let''s go. Stop watching. They won''t y with you. Have you forgotten those previous experiences?" Percussion sounded again.


    Naruto hesitated this time Because he understood. Li Yaoxiang was right. It''s just that he didn''t want to admit it.


    The reason why he kept trying to put a smile in front of others was to try to change their minds.


    At the same time, it was to prove that what Li Yaoxiang said is wrong.


    He always believed that the problem was with himself, not with others. As long as you work hard enough, you can change all this.


    Although Naruto didn''t want to admit it, he stopped approaching the children. After all, no matter how he didn''t want to admit it, his previous experiences were indeed like that, which made him face reality.


    At first, he didn''t want to believe what the ''Master of Voice'' said.


    He didn''t give up. He didn''tpromise.


    After trying countless times, the results can be obtained. But instead, it was always a hot face pasted on a cold-ass*.


    [*TL note: Beijing ng used to refer to an unrequited rtionship]


    Luckier times, he would be ridiculed. Unluckier times, they would even throw stones.


    Recalling the past scenes, his face turned pale. He was scared. He was afraid that if he stepped forward, he would face a bad result again.


    There were enough blows today.


    He was afraid if he were beaten again, he would never be able to bear it.


    After thinking about it, Naruto only felt a little regret. But in the end, he finally chose to keep smiling and continue on the way home.


    Naruto was willing to go away, but what about those children?


    His eye-catching yellow hair and his conspicuous sloppy cotton coat were just like a lighthouse. It soon attracted the attention of the group of children

 Chapter 2: Ungrateful Fellows

    Chapter 2: Ungrateful Fellows


    From the moment Uzumaki Naruto was discovered, the group of children started to be surprised.


    "Wa! It''s a demon fox! It''s a demon fox!"


    "Quick! Look! It''s the demon fox! The demon fox ising!"


    "Throw something!"


    "Let''s throw at him!"


    "Throw something at him to death!"


    When the children saw Naruto, there was no fear. They squeezed one after other stiff snowballs from the snow on the ground, ruthlessly smashed them on Naruto''s body.


    For them, this was just a game.


    A game of justice.


    Children like to y this gamethe game where they beat monsters, bandits, bad guys, etc.


    But, the thing is... Naruto is the bad guy in the game.


    They didn''t understand at all why Naruto is called ''Demon Fox''. They were just under the subtle influence of the adults. They learned from adults to hate Naruto.


    Pa! Pa! Pa! Pa!


    One snowball after another. Constantly pped all over Naruto''s body.


    Naruto walked staggery.


    It was hard enough to walk in the snow. Almost every one or two steps he took, he fell to the side. He used his tiny hands to prop himself up and stood up again.


    Who knows how many times he fell?


    What everyone didn''t know was that these seemingly painful snowball attacks felt nothing to Naruto. Because of the huge pain in his heart, he felt nothing on the outside.


    Each snowball that hit Naruto''s body as if it was shattering the newly healed wound in his heart again.


    A sh of thought appeared within Naruto. He thought about whether he should live in this world or not.


    He didn''t understand. He hid far away. He didn''te close. So, why wouldn''t they let him go?


    The adults who were watching the children didn''te out to stop them. They even gloated a little.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen, the Third-Hokage, sent an Anbu to monitor Naruto for 24 hours, yet didn''t stop them either.


    Uzumaki Naruto, the son of Fourth-Hokage, was like a rat crossing the street, smashed back by everyone.


    He endured the numbness of his short legs and quickly escaped from them. But during the escape, he did not forget to keep a hearty smile and shouted back, "Hahahaha! Just wait! I will definitely take revenge!"


    Just like that, he fled.


    .....


    The sloppy cotton coat was covered with more snow. He felt ice-cold.


    Finally, he ran back to his house and couldn''t help but sneeze.


    "Hachoo!"


    A short and long snot came out of the nostril. Naruto pped and circled his head, "Oops. Hahaha! I caught a cold."


    He took out the key.


    However, when the door was closed again... He was only 3 years old, he could no longer bear the ufortable feeling in his heart and cried out


    "Hic, hic, hic~ Why? Why did they do this to me? What did I do wrong? Hic, hic, hic~."


    Naruto, who was always lively, cheerful, and optimistic, cried so miserably at that moment.


    Li Yaoxiang couldn''t help feeling a little ufortable inside.


    If it were not for witnessing Naruto''s entire birth process, Li Yaoxiang would not feel as mad as he was right now. He couldn''t imagine how cruel and ungrateful Konoha''s group of old fellows are to treat their saviors'' son this way.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen, the old fellow, promised Minato to take good care of Naruto.


    ''What''s the result?! You call that "caring"?! The nanny who was sent to take care of him treated Naruto with a hatred attitude. She called him "Demon Fox". Whenever there''s bedwetting or shit, everything''s ignored.''


    ''Teachers who were sent for him to teach him to read and write are no different! Whether Naruto has learned it or not, they wouldn''t care at all.''


    Li Yaoxiang felt this would be one of the main reasons for Naruto''s poor academic performance in the future.


    Moreover, what made Li Yaoxiang feel speechless was that their hatred is way too much. Couldn''t they wait for at least until Naruto could take care of himself? But at 2 years old?! Only 2 years old! After Naruto walked and talked, they never came again.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen didn''t care either. He didn''t say anything.


    If it weren''t for Li Yaoxiang controlling Naruto''s body, Naruto would be screwed.


    He was the one who taught Naruto to read and write. He really couldn''t imagine how Naruto would survive without him.


    ''Also, don''t think that the only ungrateful and unfeeling person is Sarutobi Hiruzen. Most people in the Konoha Vige are no better than Sarutobi Hiruzen.''


    ''Does the other high levels of Hidden Leaf Vige, the prominent Noble n, Jonin, etc., know who Uzumaki Naruto is? Haha... Are you kidding?! Who wouldn''t know the surname "Uzumaki", the yellow hair, and the child born in the same year as "Demon Fox Incident"?''


    ''Without the surname "Uzumaki", no one will know whose son Naruto is. Also, the entire vige spread the word "Demon Fox".''


    ''Are they really that stupid? Of course not!''


    ''It''s not that they don''t realize. It''s just they are just pretending not to know!''


    Because of this, Li Yaoxiang, who was dealing shits from other people with Naruto, was even angrier at what Konoha Vige did.


    He had be more determined about darkening Naruto!


    Li Yaoxiang quickly calmed down. Because he knows that as long as Naruto is on the road of darkening, he is destined to be very meddlesome in the future, he could not be emotionally involved. Otherwise, all his efforts will be lost, or even his own life will be lost.


    "You still believe that your efforts can change all this?" The cold water-like words sounded again in Naruto''s mind.


    Li Yaoxiang had said this kind of shocking words in Naruto''s mind more than once.


    But in the past, when Naruto heard these blows (except for a moment of depression), he would quickly cheer up and try his best to prove himself again. Prove to others that he is not a demon fox. He will not hurt anyone.


    He just wants to make friends with everyone.


    Li Yaoxiang, familiar with the anime Naruto and familiar with Naruto''s character, was not in a hurry. Because Li Yaoxiang knew that Asura''s soul* influenced Naruto, that means, if you want to darken Naruto, it would be on a Hell of Difficulty.


    [*TL note: Asura tsutsuki was the younger son of Hagoromo tsutsuki. Asura always loved and respected his older brother and only wished to be reincarnated over and over again to battle Indra to eventually end the feud between them, a dream which would be realized in Naruto and Sasuke. His chakra reincarnated into various individuals throughout history. Naruto Uzumaki became the next inheritor of Asura''s chakra and will, with Sasuke Uchiha inheriting Indra''s chakra and will. /wiki/Asura_%C5%8Ctsutsuki]


    Therefore, Li Yaoxiang seemed to be scolding Naruto on the surface. But in fact, he had been letting Naruto work hard to let himself hit his head and shed blood. The purpose was to let Naruto realize that no matter how strongly he persists, he could not change this irond fact.


    Let his hopeful and optimistic characterpletely change.


    Only in this way will Naruto cherish everything Li Yaoxiang brings to him.


    Li Yaoxiang''s 1st Step n had been sessful. Otherwise, the data disyed on the system interface would not have changed

 Chapter 3: A Powerful System That Tells The Truth

    Chapter 3: A Powerful System That Tells The Truth


    As soon as Naruto came home and cried, the system data also changed.


    [Host: Li Yaoxiang


    Darkening Target: Uzumaki Naruto


    Target Soul: 5/40


    Darkening Degree: 1.6%


    Darkening Value: 7800


    Mall: Slightly]


    This is the Darkening System that Li Yaoxiang awakened.


    In addition to being able to invade Naruto''s consciousness space and controlling Naruto''s body under certain conditions, there are these things disyed on an interface.


    Very simple and straightforward.


    ''Soul'' represents a person''s willpower, spiritual energy, etc.


    The soul value of ordinary adults is between 8-10.


    The reason why Naruto''s soul value disys 5/40 because his current soul value was 5, and the upper limit of his soul value is 40.


    As his age and mind grow, his soul value will also increase.


    This also means that if the soul value is higher, darkening a person will be more difficult.


    Before being transmigrated, Li Yaoxiang had heard many Naruto fans thought that the reason Naruto Uzumaki was so naive and so stupid when he was a child, perhaps because he was hit by Shimura Danzo''s "Kotoamatsukami".*


    [*TL note: Kotoamatsukami is a djutsu that casts a powerful yet subtle mind-controlling genjutsu on the target.


    Danz Shimura was an elder of Konohagakure. As the founder and leader of Root, Danz gained notoriety as The Darkness of the Shinobi.]


    However, when Li Yaoxiang transmigrated to Naruto World, he carefully analyzed Naruto''s life and the original work plot but found that this probability is not significant.


    After all, the "extremely optimistic" Naruto was actually gradually revealed when he was 2-3 years old. But when Shimura Danzo got Uchiha Shisui''s Mangekyo Sharingan, Uzumaki Naruto was about 5 years old.


    The timeline would not be correct.


    Therefore, Li Yaoxiang had reason to suspect that the culprit that caused Naruto''s difficulty to darken soar rapidly should be because of the lingering ''Asura''s soul''.


    It''s just that because for whom Naruto will be so naive and so silly was not very important for Li Yaoxiang.


    The most important thing was that he could get a clear answer from this analysis, that is, in the next two years, he didn''t need to worry about Naruto being exposed to ''Kotoamatsukami''.


    The ''Darkening Degree'' is Naruto''s current darkening percent.


    If the Darkening Degree is 100%, it means that Li Yaoxiang haspleted his mission in Naruto World, and he can leave Naruto World at any time.


    The seed buried in Naruto''s heart seeded in raising Naruto''s darkening degree from 0% to 1.6%. Because of this, the system rewarded him with a darkening value of 7800 points.


    As for the ''Darkening Value'' usage, it is very useful! That is rted to whether Li Yaoxiang can be his currency in Naruto World. These darkening points can be used to buy any item in Naruto World in the system mall!


    The "any" here includes various Ninjutsu, various Taijutsu, various Genjutsu, etc. Even Rinnegan, Tenseigan, Sage Body, various Kekkei Genkai, etc. are not a problem!


    That is to say, as long as his darkening point is enough, Uchiha Obito, Uchiha Madara, Otsutsuki Kaguya, etc., are no problem. These final Big Bosses will be just a few scums for Li Yaoxiang!


    Unfortunately, the changes this time were not most worthy of Li Yaoxiang''s pleasure. Not because of the 1.6% increase in darkening degree, nor the 7800 darkening value reward. He needed proof! A proof that the direction of his efforts over the years was not wrong!


    As long as he proves that he is right, it means that in the days toe, as long as he sticks to and continues doing this, he doesn''t have to be afraid to waste his efforts anymore! As for the darkening value If there are no idents, if things continue to develop normally, the darkening value will have another chance to skyrocketter. And there''s no time limit to use the darkening value anyway.


    Li Yaoxiang did not rush to use the points. He exited the system interface.


    The mind returned to Naruto, who was still crying and doubting his life.


    "hic hic hic~ But didn''t the Grandpa Hokage say, as long as you work hard, you will seed? Could it be that I didn''t work hard enough?"


    Hearing Naruto''s response, it was Li Yaoxiang, who had been mentally prepared for a long time and could not help but cursed Asura. It seems that Uzumaki Naruto''s ''sickness'' is severe.


    But it doesn''t matter. Go ording to n.


    "Oh, the Grandpa? Do you still believe his words?"


    Hearing that Li Yaoxiang dared to question Naruto, the heartbroken Naruto was stunned for a while but soon recovered. After all, at this moment, he doesn''t have the mind to care about these things.


    "Is Grandpa Hokage wrong too? Is there really no way to change? I can only live alone?"


    Just when Naruto was about to despair, Li Yaoxiang suddenly suffocated such a sentence: "Actually... it''s not hopeless..."


    Naruto''s eyes widened. He lifted his head. He gasped. He wiped the tears and snot on the face.


    "...Can change? You have a way to change? What is it?"


    After a moment of silence, Li Yaoxiang''s hesitation sounded again in Naruto''s mind: "This method may let you face a more brutal reality in the near future. Do you really want to know?"


    Naruto did not care whether the future is cruel. Nothing was more important than solving his current situation.


    "YES! I would like to know! Please tell me, please!" Naruto had such a fierce reaction.


    How could Li Yaoxiang, who was with him forever, not understand? After all, since Naruto became sensible, he had only faced two walls, except for Sarutobi Hiruzen, who sometimes came to visit him once or twice.


    There is no inte. No games. No mobile phone. There are no web posts.


    Not to mention Naruto, even Li Yaoxiang, an otaku before transmigration, could not stand it.


    Because of this understanding, every time Li Yaoxiangmunicates with Naruto; he has the upper hand.


    "Actually you don''t have to work so hard to prove yourself. Because you are the hero of the vige, you saved everyone. Everyone misunderstood you."


    Naruto was stunned and mistakenly thought that Li Yaoxiang wasforting Naruto. Naruto then mocked himself: "How could I be a hero in the vige? Forget it, although I don''t understand why you said that, I still thank you forforting me."


    "I''m not... I didn''tfort you. I said that; because The Fourth-Hokage that saved the lives of the entire vige, Namikaze Minato is your father."

 Chapter 4: Telling The Truth

    Chapter 4: Telling The Truth


    When the words came out, Naruto was dumbfounded. He never expected that the voice in his mind would say such an unbelievable thing.


    ''Are you kidding? A Hokage, whom I have admired for a long time, and my father is one of them? How can this be?''


    "What happened? Still don''t believe me?"


    The voice in his mind still insisted that he was the son of Namikaze Minato. Naruto couldn''t help but hesitate, but he didn''t question again. Instead, he was nervous and waited for Li Yaoxiang to continue talking.


    "If you still don''t believe me... Then rx your mind, don''t resist. I''ll take you to a ce."


    ...


    The scene changed. Uzumaki Naruto came into a dark space. The entire space was flooded with dark water.


    The water was as deep as Naruto''s knee. This ce put made Naruto feel at a loss: "Where is this? Why did you bring me here? Why am I here?"


    "Aren''t you curious, the reason everyone calls you Demon Fox? You don''t believe that the Fourth-Hokage is your father, right? Then go forward. Go straight ahead, and you''ll find the answer you want to know." Li Yaoxiang''s voice, like a devil, kept circling in Naruto''s mind.


    Feeling the cold ck water, Naruto knew that he was not dreaming. He really was in a ''mysterious'' ce.


    At the same time, Naruto believed that Li Yaoxiang, who has been with him for a long time, will not frame Naruto. Naruto resisted the fear in his heart. He clenched his tiny fist, gritted his teeth, and walked forward.


    At every step, the sound of water echoed. The ck water rippled in circles.


    Naruto walked very slowly. Who knows how long he had walked?


    He finally saw a bright spot ahead.


    He looked overjoyed and then started to walk towards the bright ce.


    Step by step on the ck water.


    Water sshed all over him.


    Because of his short stature and being blocked by ck water, he fell several times in a row during the run, making his body wet. But Naruto didn''t give up because of it. Instead, he got more and more excited.


    There was only one word silently in his mind.


    Answer! Answer!


    He must know the truth no matter what!


    ''Why does everyone hate me so much?''


    ''Why don''t people want to be friends with me?''


    ''Also, Minato is my father?''


    Naruto''s pace gradually slowed down, not because he was tired, but because in his field of view, he began to see the outline of the bright spot ahead.


    It was a veryrge iron cage.


    Inside the iron cage, there seemed to be a veryrge ''creature'' held imprisoned.


    He cautiously came closer.


    Naruto''s footsteps finally stopped. He didn''t dare move forward.


    Naruto was suddenly frightened and fell into the ck water pool.


    "What''s wrong? Aren''t you wondering why everyone calls you Demon Fox? That''s because you really are a demon fox. The monster in front of you is the demon fox that has been sealed in your body!" Li Yaoxiang''s words kept circling in Naruto''s mind.


    His face was scared, so pale. He looked at the scene in front of him incredulously.


    ''It''s over...''


    Although it was still unclear whether the Fourth-Hokage, Namikaze Minato, was his father, the scene in front of him was enough to make him feel broken and desperate


    After all, it turns out that everyone is right. He is really a monster! There really is a demon fox in him!


    So does that mean he can''t make friends?


    That''s right. Until the end, Naruto''s first reaction after seeing Kyuubi(Nine-Tails) was that he was concerned about whether he could make friends or not. His carefree personality made him even ignore the Kyuubi within his own body and forgot his past.


    Whether Namikaze Minato was his father or not, it was still a matter of doubt.


    "Go ahead. The answer you want is right there."


    Naruto swallowed his saliva and stood up again. He did not refuse Li Yaoxiang''s temptation to continue to move forward.


    Although he had walked very carefully and tried not to make any noise, the ripples on the water still woke up the Nine-Tailed Demon Fox that had been sleeping for a long time.


    .....


    When Kyuubi opened his eyes and saw Naruto, who was only 3 years old, the violent anger Naruto had imagined did not appear. Instead, it showed a delighted expression.


    Although imprisoned in this sealed space, Kyuubi still knew what was happening outside.


    It knew Naruto''s growth process. It was apparent how eager this child in front of him was to make friends!


    Its prone body immediately came to spirit: "Boy! How did you get here?"


    The thick voice of Kyuubi scared Naruto again. He also didn''t expect the big fox could even speak: "I I I don''t know I suddenly came here..." Naruto stammered. He began to say what Li Yaoxiang had taught him.


    Kyuubi didn''t think too much and began to tempt him: "Boy, you really want to make friends? Come here and help the old man tear off the seal in front of the cage! If you tear off the seal, this old man will be your friend!"


    Not only was Kyuubi tempting Naruto, but even Li Yaoxiang also encouraged him.


    "Do it. Go tear it."


    But Naruto still hesitated.


    In Naruto''s mind, hemunicated with Li Yaoxiang: "I I Can I not tear it? Is he the same as the demon fox everyone said? If I pull it, will this big fox run out of the cage and hurt everyone? I... I don''t want to know the answer. If it hurts everyone, I don''t want to know the truth. "


    "It''s okay. Trust me. He can''te out and hurt everyone."


    Naruto struggled for a long time and finally chose to follow Li Yaoxiang''s instructions and walked towards the seal on the iron cage.


    Kyuubi''s eyes straightened, full of expectation. The oppressive aura in his body became even more dignified. But to avoid affecting Naruto''s actions, it tried to suppress it.


    Naruto raised his head to look at the huge Kyuubi that looked like a hill and was really shocked.


    "Boy! Tear it quickly."


    Naruto, who came back to his senses, looked at the top of his head. There was a nearly 2 meter high ''Sealing Tag Curse''.


    He didn''t hesitate anymore.


    He began to climb up. He mped the iron with both hands and both knees.


    He slowly climbed up

 Chapter 5: Reunion

    Chapter 5: Reunion


    Naruto was getting closer to the Sealing Tag spell.


    Seeing that he had reached a distance where he could touch the Sealing Tag spell, Naruto couldn''t help but feel a sense of anticipation.


    He supported his body on the iron bar. He raised his right hand and stretched out.


    But the instant he was about to touch the Sealing Tag curse, there was an invisible force suddenly, and it flew him into the ck liquid pool again.


    Before Naruto could know what was going on, Kyuubi''s roar suddenly sounded throughout the sealed space: "Roar! Fourth-Kage! You dare to appear here! This old man is going to kill you!"


    Kungdng!


    There was a loud noise.


    Kyuubi''s ws suddenly protruded out of the cage.


    The entire cage was shaken violently.


    The tip of the w was just less than a centimeter before reaching Namikaze Minato''s back. It then was unable to move for half a minute.


    Not far from what Li Yaoxiang expected. As long as he guides Naruto to tear the Sealing Tag spell, it will surely cause Namikaze Minato''sst Chakra in Naruto toe out and stop it in advance! This was why he dared to assure Naruto that Kyuubi would not be able to get out of the chaos.


    Namikaze Minato appeared here and ignored the roaring Kyuubi behind him.


    All kinds ofplex, guilty, and excited expressions all gathered on his face at the moment. He was silent for a long time. For a while, he didn''t know how to face his son.


    The scene in front of him already dumbfounded naruto.


    The strange man appeared in front of him. How could he not have recognized him?


    He had been walking alone on the streets of Konoha for a long time. He climbed the roof and looked at the majestic Hokage Rock with a look of admiration.


    ''Who is this man in front of me, if not the Fourth-Hokage?''


    "That is your biological father, Fourth-Hokage, Namikaze Minato! If you still don''t believe me, then ask him in person." Li Yaoxiang reminded Naruto in his mind.


    Naruto swallowed saliva. His face was pale with shock. But he still listened to Li Yaoxiang''s opinion and summoned the courage to ask: "Are you my father?"


    Namikaze Minato frowned upon hearing this. He hesitated for a moment but ultimately nodded.


    Naruto''s first reaction was a joy. Seeing that so many people have fathers and mothers, he also had countless fantasies about his parents, but hepletely didn''t expect that his own father turned out to be the Hokage that he had admired for so long!


    However, this joy was just a sh. Soon it turned into puzzlement and doubt.


    ''Why...? If my father is Namikaze Minato, why do people treat me like that? Why do people hate me? Shouldn''t Hokage be the most respected and recognized by most people?''


    ''Didn''t Grandpa Hokage say that the Fourth-Hokage Namikaze Minato sacrificed himself to save the vige? Then my father should be a hero. Shouldn''t that make me the son of a hero?''


    That being the case. Why does everyone treat Naruto like this?


    Before Naruto figured out what was going on, Li Yaoxiang gave him another strong dose at this time: "The monster in front of you is the one that your father, Namikaze Minato, personally sealed into you."


    Naruto heard it. He was enlightened on the spot.


    Recalling the bullying he faced since he was a kid. Recalling the disgusting "eyes" that everyone showed him. Naruto''s face became dull, and he couldn''t help confirming this to Namikaze Minato: "You sealed this big fox in my body?"


    Namikaze Minato nodded again.


    Naruto''s expression soon changed from dull to angry! Even in the original work, when the grown-up Naruto met Namikaze Minato for the first time, he could not bear to punch him... Let alone the current Naruto?


    Not surprisingly... When Naruto knew the truth, the first reaction was to rush straight up.


    At the irresponsible father, Naruto gave him a series of punches and kicks.


    Namikaze Minato, who was guilty, didn''t stop Naruto. He let Naruto keep hitting him.


    Naruto broke into tears again. Tears burst into a howling.


    "Uuuuuu~ Why?! Why are you doing this to me? Do you know how I''ve lived these years?"


    Namikaze Minato''s face was full of guilt, and of course, he knew exactly how his son had been treated. After all, he, like Kyuubi, witnessed Naruto''s growth. He also didn''t expect things to be like this.


    So, he just stood there and let Naruto, who was only 3 years old, vent all the grievances he had suffered over the years, vent it all on him.


    Until Naruto was tired and stopped hitting, he said, "It''s too noisy here. Let''s go to another ce to talk."


    ...


    The scene changed. The two came to a white space.


    Kyuubi, who was still roaring around a while ago, suddenly disappeared.


    Naruto froze, looked around all around, and said nothing. He wiped away his tears. He raised his head and waited for Namikaze Minato to give him an exnation.


    "Naruto I''m sorry. I know I''m not qualified for you to forgive me. I didn''t fulfill my responsibility as a father. But I just want to tell you that this is not what you think it is. I never thought your life would be like this."


    Seeing Naruto''s expression of dissatisfaction, Namikaze Minato didn''t know what to say. He sighed and released thest trace of Chakra of Uzumaki Kushina he kept.


    A burst of white smoke slowly rose. Immediately after the smoke dissipated, Uzumaki Kushina''s figure appeared in front of two people.


    While Uzumaki Kushina was still at a loss, Namikaze Minato also said at this time: "Kushina, this is our son. Naruto, this is your mother."


    Unlike Namikaze Minato, Uzumaki Kushina was only thest trace of Chakra that was sealed. She could not witness Naruto''s growth. Her memory persists in thest moment before her death.


    After seeing the baby-sized Naruto, which has grown to be 3 years old, Kushina''s expression showed excitement and joy. She didn''t even look at Namikaze Minato. She rushed directly to Naruto and hugged Naruto tightly in her arms. She was moved to tears.


    Feeling Kushina''s maternal love, Naruto was also unable to suppress his emotions and cried again.


    Because he finally knew who his father and mother were.


    He is not a monster like everyone said. He also has a father and a mother

 Chapter 6: The True Protagonist Appears

    Chapter 6: The True Protagonist Appears


    The mother and son hugged and cried for a while.


    Kushina then pushed away Naruto a little and began to look up and down at her precious son. She stroked his forehead. She wiped his tears. She wiped the cold water for him.


    She cared about everything Naruto had done over the years, but she knew that the time left for her was running out, and she could only do her part as a mother as much as she can.


    "Naruto, be good. Let mom take a good look. How have you been in the past few years? Are you full? Are there any girls you like?"


    These questions caused an awkward atmosphere throughout the scene. Not because these questions were too much. It''s because neither Naruto nor Minato know how to answer this question for a while. Because Naruto''s life in the past few years didn''t really go well.


    Namikaze Minato''s eyes showed agony in his heart.


    At a different time from the original work, at this time, Namikaze Minato was still unable to know how most people will recognize Uzumaki Naruto in the future, so he only felt more guilty for Naruto.


    "Kushina" Namikaze Minato whispered.


    Kushina ignored the call, waved her hand, motioning him not to disturb her time with her son.


    He didn''t really think much about it. But then he really understood the saying, "Children are a treasure to their mother". Naruto buried himself in his mother''s arms and started to cry coquettishly.


    Naruto began toin about the hardship over the years.


    Holding Naruto tightly, turning her head to her husband, she red at Minato: "Look at you! What kind of person have you entrusted our child to?! I was willing to sacrifice at first, just to let you take good care of Naruto! The results of it?! This is the bright future you want to leave for our son?! I''m so blind! Turns out, I don''t know how to choose a man!"


    Sure enough, when there is a child involved, the husband will lose. The son is the love of mother''s life, after all.


    Kushina had no intention of giving her husband a face at all. Hearing that her son has experienced such a hard day, no mother in the world can bear it!


    One was willing to fight, and the other was willing to suffer.


    Knowing that she only had little time left, Kushina no longer wastes time. Her mind returned to the little Naruto again. She exhorted: "Naruto, don''t be discouraged, don''t be discouraged. Everything will be fine, you know? After mom leaves, you must take good care of yourself. When others bully you, remember to fight back! Our beloved son, how could they bully you so easily?


    The deep maternal love made Naruto felt that today is the happiest day since he was sensible. He put aside all his troubles and gave a refreshing ''hum''.


    After venting all the frustrations in his heart, Naruto''s resentment towards his father, Minato, also subsided. Only then he began to face his father.


    Namikaze Minato also crouched down, took him into his arms, and said again: "I''m sorry Naruto."


    After feeling the father''s love buried in the depths, he pushed away Namikaze Minato. He asked reluctantly, "Are you going to leave? Can you not leave? Can I meet you again? Can you just stay with me? I don''t want to be alone."


    This scene of Naruto''s begging made Uzumaki Kushina, who had finally calmed down, burst into tears again. She said nothing this time because she knew that some things were unavoidable.


    In the days toe, Naruto will have to face it all by himself.


    Namikaze Minato came out with great concern at this time andforted: "Naruto, you have grown up. You are a man. You must live a good life. Also, mom and dad are not leaving you. We will watch and guard you from the sky. You''re not alone." Heforted Naruto for a while.


    Naruto reluctantly epted the fact that they were about to leave.


    However, just as the two sides were about to say goodbye, Namikaze Minato suddenly squatted down, facing Naruto''s eyes, and cautiously said: "Naruto, can you tell your dad, who has taught you so much these years? Who is taking care of you? Who told you about a seal?"


    That''s right. In fact, Namikaze Minato had long been aware of Naruto''s abnormalities.


    After all, as a father, he is more attentive to Naruto''s every move than other people.


    Unlike Sarutobi Hiruzen, nor the Anbu sent by Sarutobi Hiruzen. Even though Sarutobi had a ''crystal ball'', and even if Anbe stayed with Naruto for 24 hours, they were not concerned about the small details of Naruto''s life.


    Therefore, Naruto cleaned the house by himself. He changed his diapers by himself. At most, they only thought that Uzumaki Naruto was more independent and sensible than other children. After all, the children of Naruto World are rtively precocious, and people are used to it.


    When Naruto heard this, he was taken aback. He did not know how to answer this question.


    There is someone who taught him, took care of him, and told him the truth. The problem is, he doesn''t even know who this person is at all? How to answer the question?


    Just when Naruto was confused, Li Yaoxiang''s voice sounded at this time: "Naruto, don''t worry. Let me talk to your father personally."


    Naruto was relieved after hearing this. The voice''s owner will help him answer this question for his father. That would be great.


    It didn''t take long for Naruto, who has initially been full of tenderness, to turn around and change.


    Suddenly his expression turned into a look that did not match his age.


    Li Yaoxiang controlled Uzumaki Naruto''s small body, his hands draped over his shoulders, and the corners of his mouth slightly raised: "You''re looking for me?"


    Namikaze Minato, who was initially still in close contact with Naruto, was immediately frightened and retreated back a few steps, keeping a certain distance from Li Yaoxiang. Even Kushina, who was standing behind him, was confused by the sudden movement.


    Detecting the abnormality, she was asked quickly: "Naruto, what''s wrong with you? Are you okay? Don''t scare your mother, okay?"


    She was about to rush forward, but Namikaze Minato stretched out an arm to block the way and coldly said: "Don''t go! He is not Naruto now."


    Suddenly, the atmosphere on the scene became extremely solemn.


    Kushina was worried. Namikaze Minato hesitated.


    Li Yaoxiang was rxed all the way through, keeping his seemingly harmless smile...

 Chapter 7: Ample Gain and Commitment

    Chapter 7: Ample Gain and Commitment


    Namikaze Minato''s heart was tense to the extreme. He felt that this Li Yaoxiang in front of him had an ulterior secret.


    Since he noticed Naruto''s abnormality, he always felt a little uneasy in his heart. This sense of uneasiness became stronger as Li Yaoxiang revealed himself. He felt that the purpose of this Li Yaoxiang in front of him was far less simple than what he seemed on the surface.


    "Who are you? Why are you with Naruto?"


    Li Yaoxiang was not surprised. The moment he decided to take care of Naruto, he had expected this scene in the future and the encounter with Namikaze Minato.


    The reason why he uncovered the truth so quickly, besides the part of the darkening Naruto n, there was also the most important reason, that is, he wants to remove Namikaze Minato as a "lighthouse" out of Naruto''s consciousness as soon as possible. After all, his purpose cannot be known.


    If, during the nning period, Minato noticed something was wrong, and then he exined everything to Naruto, everything will be over. There was no ce for him toin.


    At the same time, because Minato and Kushina had little time left, Li Yaoxiang didn''t actually need to bother with them and can just keep hiding.


    Li Yaoxiang squinted and smiled, looking at Minato silently for a long time. There was no intention to answer. That meaning was obvious.


    ''If you ask a question like that, don''t even try asking. Do you think I will answer it?''


    The atmosphere at the scene, with the attitude shown by Li Yaoxiang, became tense.


    Kushina, who was scared to her wits, saw that the situation was not good but couldn''t hold on any longer. She looked at her husband and her son. In a hurry, she quickly came out from Minato''s blocking, and under the tense situation, she knelt down directly to Li Yaoxiang: "Please, I don''t care who you are or your purpose, but I beg you not to hurt Naruto."


    This time, not only Minato but even Li Yaoxiang was shocked by Kushina''s action.


    At the same time, Li Yaoxiang was moved by her maternal love. Li Yaoxiang had to keep reminding himself to harden his heart, not to soften in this situation. His attitude became no longer rigid.


    The atmosphere at the scene was relieved as a result.


    "Hey~" Li Yaoxiang sighed. He was not cruel enough to let this go on. Heforted, "Rx. I won''t hurt Naruto. How I''ve treated Naruto- your husband knows best. If you don''t believe it, you can ask him. As for my goal I''m sorry, I have noment."


    Kushina turned her head and looked up towards her husband, Minato.


    As a mother, she only cares about one thing, that is, her son. Even if heaven falls, as long as Li Yaoxiang does not harm her son''s life, she does not care about anything else.


    Seeing Minato nodded and gave her a positive answer, Kushina then stood up, wiped the tears from her face, and returned to Minato.


    When Minato saw this, it made it hard for him to keep asking. After all, he knew very well what Li Yaoxiang had done to Naruto over the years.


    As a dead person, he couldn''t stop everything that would happen in the future.


    There was not much chakra left for him to stay here. Even if he wants to do something he couldn''t. Because after all, Li Yaoxiang is in control of his son''s body. If he is determined to do something, does that mean he must kill his own son? If he really tries, the first one who will run out to stop him would most likely be the person holding his arm tightly, the wife Kushina next to him.


    Thinking of this, Minato sighed.


    When he looked at Li Yaoxiang again, he lost his vignce. He became somewhat helpless and unwilling. At the same time, he was a little bit tired of Konoha''s scolding.


    ''But forget it. I''m already dead anyway. I can''t do much.''


    "Forget it. Since you don''t want to say it, I won''t force you. But anyway, I still feel that you care about Naruto. Thank you very much for taking care of Naruto." He said, and who knows from where Minato took out a scroll, he then continued: "It''s all the Ninjutsus I learned in my life with Kushina. I hope this will help you and Naruto." Minato came over and passed the scroll to Li Yaoxiang. At the same time, there was a look of "please" in his eyes.


    Needless to say, Li Yaoxiang also knew that it was to help Li Yaoxiang take good care of Minato''s son, Naruto, in the future.


    Li Yaoxiang took the scroll very calmly. He seemed calm, but in fact, he was suffocating with excitement!


    ''Hahahaha! A blessing in disguise! It took no effort at all!''


    ''What''s this scroll? This is what Minato + Kushina has learned in their life!''


    ''I feel excited thinking about it!''


    The Ninjutsu in this scroll can make most people in the Ninja World envious to death! In addition, the moment Naruto and Namikaze Minato met, the darkening value soared again. The gains this time were far more abundant than he had imagined!


    ding~ ding~


    Li Yaoxiang tried to control his emotions, so he pretended to cough twice: "Cough, cough! Rest assured. I will take care of Naruto. You don''t need to worry about his safety." Li Yaoxiang affirmed once again.


    Minato and Kushina felt relieved. The two looked at each other and smiled gently. They were interlocking their fingers, snuggling each other. They understood each other by looking at each other''s eyes.


    Immediately afterward, both of them turned their heads to look at Li Yaoxiang, expressing gratitude.


    Seeing that the two were about to disappear, Minato suddenly remember something at this time and quickly said, "Can you promise me something again?"


    Li Yaoxiang nodded: "What is it?"


    "If one day in the future, Naruto really stands on the opposite side of Konoha. I hope you can help me bring a few words to Naruto."


    Li Yaoxiang hesitated slightly but did not refuse, waiting for him to continue.


    "Not everyone is as cruel as you think. I hope you can leave a glimmer of survival for Konoha in the future..."


    After hearing this, Li Yaoxiang couldn''t help being taken aback.


    Minato asked Li Yaoxiang to convey the message to Naruto. And Minato said it as if he was expecting Naruto to be on Konoha''s enemy side.


    He didn''t know whether his guess was correct, but in an instant before leaving, a light shed in his mind, and he finally understood the uneasiness in his heart was. Minato was afraid that one day in the future, Li Yaoxiang would make Naruto and Konoha enemies. Therefore, Minato spent thest bit of his strength telling his worst guess.


    Li Yaoxiang lookedplicated. He hesitated again and again. But in the end, he nodded agreed to Minato''s promise, even though he didn''t have to nod.


    Of course, fulfilling the promise meant that it might hinder his n to darken Naruto. If it did hinder the n, then he might not fulfill the promise. He would have to apologize to Minato.


    But still. Although Li Yaoxiang wanted to darken Naruto, he didn''t want to turn Naruto into a sentimental demon without emotion, like a walking corpse. As long as the circumstances permits, Li Yaoxiang doesn''t mind saving some innocent people at thest moment.


    After seeing Li Yaoxiang nodding in agreement, the figure of Minato and Kushina became more and more blurred, forming a mass of rays of light, slowly dissipating between Heaven and Earth

 Chapter 8: Unyielding Attitude, Full of Confidence

    Chapter 8: Unyielding Attitude, Full of Confidence


    The disappearance of Naruto and Minato made Kyuubi full of anger and had nowhere to vent.


    Since being sealed again by Namikaze Minato, he hadn''t been as angry as he is today for a long time.


    ''The damned Fourth-Hokage, not only took away half of my body but also sealed me inside this brat''s body. The most damning thing is that the damn human being actually left behind some Chakra, guarding the seal this entire time!''


    Doesn''t it mean that every Kyuubi''s attempt to escape was treated as a joke?! And the damned human being dared to turn a blind eye to Kyuubi! How could Kyuubi tolerate it?!


    ROAR!


    The beast roared through the sealed space. The beast''s ws constantly beat on the iron bars, making a violent ''ng'' sound. Kyuubi tried to vent all the anger it suffered today.


    Not any long after, Kyuubi suddenly stopped going crazy. It was stunned looking at the ''Uzumaki Naruto'' who knows since when he returned: "Boy! Where did you just go?!"


    Standing in front of Kyuubi was, of course, not Naruto himself. It was Li Yaoxiang who was controlling Naruto''s body. After the couple disappeared, Li Yaoxiang did not rush to return control to Naruto.


    Naruto didn''t know what happened.


    What Li Yaoxiang had to do now was to have a "good" negotiation with Kyuubi toy the groundwork for the next step!


    Facing Kyuubi''s reproach, Li Yaoxiang not at all answered. He just smiled and looked at the rare big fox in front of him.


    Although Kyuubi felt strange, he had no ns to get to the bottom of it. After all, what he was most concerned about is how to fool the kid in front of him, unlock the seal and get out of the cage!


    "Boy! Come over and help the old man tear off this spell!"


    There was no tension at the beginning. There was no fear at the beginning. ''Uzumaki Naruto'' still lookedcent and kept smiling at Kyuubi.


    In this situation, Kyuubi could not help but be surprised. But soon, he was irritated by Li Yaoxiang''s underwhelming appearance.


    "Little demon! If you don''t help the old man tear off the spell, the old man will kill you!"


    "Oh, really? Then why don''t youe out and give it a try? I''m standing here and not moving. Come bite me."


    This time was a little better. At least Li Yaoxiang responded. But during Li Yaoxiang''s provocation, he stretched out his neck to make it easier for Kyuubi to bite.


    It really made Kyuubi so angry. Kyuubi, who have lived for thousands of years, couldn''t wait to bite Li Yaoxiang into pieces right away! However, Kyuubi, who also watched Naruto''s growth, quickly noticed the abnormality.


    ''Wrong! He is not that kid!''


    His eyes were blinded by anger just now, and now he finally reacted somewhat calmly: "You are not that Boy! Who the hell are you?!"


    Li Yaoxiang looked at the fox as huge as a hill with interest. But he was not angry because of Kyuubi''s defiant attitude.


    "Who am I... Is this important? Compared to my identity Don''t you think It''s more interesting to discuss the topic of the old fox who has thousands of years. The longer you live, the more things you can look back on, right? ...Ku. Ra. Ma." Li Yaoxiang said ''Kurama'' word by word. He also put away his cynical attitude. Both his expression and tone became serious.


    When Kyuubi heard someone call him the name Kurama, his head was nk and buzzed. Even Li Yaoxiang''s provocative words before became nk.


    Immediately afterward, there was a shocked expression.


    ''This.. How is this possible?!''


    Who knows how many years have passed since anyone calls him like this?


    That is the name that Six-Paths Sage* gave him 1000 years ago.


    [*TL note: Hagoromo tsutsuki (tsutsuki Hagoromo), known to Earth''s poption atrge as the Sage of Six Paths was a legendary god-like figure who is regarded as the ancestor of shinobi, for his act of founding ninsh which led to the creation of the ninja world. Inspired by his younger son, Hagoromo separated the Ten-Tails'' Chakra within his body and used his Creation of All Things Technique to divide it into nine separated bodies, creating the tailed beasts and giving each a name.]


    Except for Six-Paths Sage and the other Tailed Beasts, it is almost impossible for anyone else to know his name. But the question is, why does this ''mysterious person'' know Kurama''s name?!


    "What happened? Shocked? You really thought no one in this world knows your origin?"


    Kyuubi''s hair suddenly froze, and its whole body put on a fighting posture. His vignce rose: "Who the hell are you?!"


    "It doesn''t matter who I am! More importantly, what do you, Tailed Beasts, think of Six-Paths''st words?! Didn''t he want you all to get along peacefully with humans?! Why the hell are you raging and killing human beings?!"


    Hearing a series of Li Yaoxiang''s shouts, Kyuubi''s confidence became a little insufficient. He couldn''t see through Li Yaoxiang, but he still said hard: "This is what those humans are persecuting us! They want to seal us first!"


    "Very good! Does that mean that as long as the humans return you to freedom, then you''re willing to follow Six-Paths''st words and live in peace with humanity?


    "That that of course!"


    Li Yaoxiang was waiting for this ''of course''!


    Li Yaoxiang immediately seized the opportunity and seriously warned repeatedly: "That''s good! Now I''ll tell you that that day is not far away. Please just stay still and don''t mess with me, especially with Naruto. Remember to control your Chakra well! Don''t affect his growth!" Li Yaoxiang warned again and again.


    Of course, Kyuubi refused to ept: "Hmph! Why should the old man believe you?"


    Li Yaoxiang seemed to have expected that Kyuubi would say so. He immediately took out the scroll that Minato had just given him and shook it in front of Kyuubi.


    "I forgot to tell you. This contains all the Sealing Jutsus owned by Uzumaki n. If you believe me, then cooperate with me obediently, and everyone will have a happy ending. If you dare to make trouble, then don''t me me for being merciless! When that happens, that will be your own fault!"


    The big eyes shook with the scroll in Li Yaoxiang''s hand. Kyuubi''s face clearly showed resentment and unwillingness.


    But this time, he didn''t refute. Because he knew it was useless to refute.


    In addition to Wood-Style and Sharingan, the Tailed Beasts were naturally restrained by the Sealing Jutsu of Uzumaki n, which forced them to submit.


    When Li Yaoxiang saw that Kyuubi still put on an unwilling expression, he knew that this old fox couldn''t let go of his face. But Li Yaoxiang never nned to bargain with Kyuubi, to begin with!


    What are you kidding? Li Yaoxiang hadn''t even learned any Ninjutsu on the scroll yet. He was just scaring Kyuubi.


    You know, there were still some darkening points that have not been used yet!


    If you really dare to put on ''I rather die than submit'' posture, Li Yaoxiang would not mind buying a one-time ''Adamantine Sealing Chains''** in the mall so that Kyuubi can learn how to make a ''Three Good Model Fox''!


    [**TL note: This is a sealing technique that is characteristic of the Uzumaki n. Users produce chains made out of their own Chakra, which emerge from their torso. Users control the chains as they extend outwards from their body, mostmonly to wrap around targets and restrain them.

 Chapter 9: Execute The Second Step of The Plan

    Chapter 9: Execute The Second Step of The n


    Li Yaoxiang exited the sealed space. He returned to Uzumaki Naruto''s house. Li Yaoxiang also returned the control of the body to Naruto.


    When Naruto noticed that the surrounding environment had changed again, Naruto suddenly became nervous and quickly asked in his mind: "Where''s dad? Mom? Are they gone?"


    Li Yaoxiang did not respond.


    Naruto knew what this silence meant. He slowly lowered his head. He looked a little lost. But soon, Naruto''s head lifted up, and his eyes became brighter and piercing!


    Although it was short, it was enough! Because today is the happiest day, he ever felt in his life!


    He also has parents! He knows who his father and mother are!


    And more importantly, since his father is the Hokage, Namikaze Minato, who saved the whole vige, does that mean that as long as everyone knows the truth, they will not hate Naruto anymore?


    The more he thought about it, the more excited he felt.


    The scene of him making friends with everyone and having fun together shed in his mind.


    Needless to say, Li Yaoxiang also knew what Naruto was thinking. He was not surprised. Anyway, he was used to Naruto always thinking positively. Naruto, who was influenced by Asura''s soul, became cheerful and optimistic since he was born.


    Li Yaoxiang immediately interrupted Naruto''s thoughts: "Really? I thought everyone already knew that your father was Namikaze Minato? Did everyone willing to make friends with you so far? Did they?"


    Naruto Uzumaki was still obsessed with the various scenes in his fantasy. After hearing this sentence, he was taken aback. He was puzzled.


    Without waiting for Naruto to ask, Li Yaoxiang continued: "Don''t be delusional! The people in the vige are more ungrateful than you think! More ruthless than you think! Otherwise, they won''t treat you like this all these years!"


    Naruto was shocked by Li Yaoxiang''s words. He retorted again and again: "No! No! No! They just don''t know who I am! Otherwise, they wouldn''t treat me like this! That''s right! It must be that! As long as they know who I am. They will definitely change!"


    "Heh." Li Yaoxiang sneered, "What about the Hokage grandpa? Does he know who you are? At first, your father entrusted him to take care of you. But the result? In addition to being afraid of you, he sent someone to monitor for 24 hours. Besides that, what else did he do? Does he really care about you?"


    Uzumaki Naruto listened incredulously to everything Li Yaoxiang said, and he captured the key points in Li Yaoxiang''s words.


    That is, ''Grandpa Hokage has sent someone to monitor him 24 hours.''


    But the problem is... how can that be?!


    If someone really monitors him for 24 hours, why do they and Grandpa Hokage ignore Naruto after knowing what happened to him?


    ''Is it true that the people in the vige are so cruel and ungrateful, as the "Owner of the Voice" said?''


    ''NO! It can''t be!''


    ''I''m going to ask Grandpa Hokage himself what is going on!''


    Naruto gave no response. He opened and shut the door very emotionally and rushed over the snowy road to the Hokage Residence.


    Seeing this, Li Yaoxiang smiled.


    The reason why he threw out the rhetoric questions were to guide Uzumaki Naruto into ming Sarutobi Hiruzen! Obviously, his goal had been achieved. Next was the sessful countdown of the 2nd Step n.


    The previous step was to let Uzumaki Naruto feel that no matter how hard he tried, he could not change the minds of others. To let his life fall to the bottom entirely.


    So now was the time to make Narutopletely rebound from the bottom!


    Go to the pinnacle of life!


    To help Naruto get everything he wants!


    Because Li Yaoxiang knew that the higher he stood, the heavier you fall.


    Only in this way will the final effect of darkening Naruto be more perfect!


    .....


    Hokage Residence, in the high-level Conference Hall.


    There is a long table in the Conference Hall.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen was sitting in the main seat. Mitokado Homura* and Utatane Koharu* sat side by side on the right side of Sarutobi Hiruzen. Shimura Danzo sat was sitting on the left row.


    [*TL note: Ever since childhood, Homura and Hiruzen Sarutobi have been close friends. Under the guidance of the Second Hokage, Tobirama Senju, they and their third team-mate, Koharu Utatane, havepleted numerous missions together.]


    The four people are all talking, discussing various policies, problems, and solutions in the vige,rge and small. From the rtionship between vige to vige, and down to ordinary people''s daily lives.


    They suddenly moved to Uchiha n''s topic.


    "Hiruzen, are you still going to endure it?! Uchiha n''s attitude has be more and more obvious! Do you really have to wait for them to do it before you can make up your mind?! Do you know how serious the consequences are?!" It was Shimura Danzo who spoke.


    He had already transnted Sharingan through Orochimaru. That''s why he knew the power of Sharingan very well. He was also very eager to get more Sharingan.


    Therefore, over the years, he continued to use various reasons to urge Sarutobi Hiruzen and the others to quickly sanctioned Uchiha n and further force the Uchiha n to rebel.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen sucked in the tobo pipe: "The vige has lost too much talent. We can''t keep up with it."


    "What''s the matter? Are you regretting now? Did you forget how Tobirama-sensei died?" Hearing Shimura Danzo uttering the words'' Tobirama-sensei'', Sarutobi Hiruzen and the others were all moved by that.


    After all, Shimura Danzo was right.


    In the beginning, the Second Raikage of Kumo Vige was ambushed by the Gold and Silver Brothers** and barely escaped with his life. In the end, Kumo Vige suffered huge losses and even affected their Konoha.


    [**TL note: Years ago, before the First Shinobi World War, the Gold and Silver Brothers made names for themselves in their attempt to capture the Nine-Tailed Fox for their vige. They were instead swallowed whole by the beast. The brothers survived inside Kurama for two weeks by eating the beast''s flesh; this would eventually lead to the fox regurgitating them. This left them with unusuallyrge chakra-reserves and abilities simr to those of a jinchriki. With their newfound powers, the brothers assaulted the Second Raikage during his peace pact with the Second Hokage Tobirama Senju to stage a coup d''etat. Managing to bring the Second Hokage to the verge of death, the brothers have dered disgraces for their treacherous actions and deceptive natures.]


    Because of this, over the years, they will not be soft on any ''unstable factor'' in managing Konoha!


    However, gradually, Sarutobi Hiruzen felt a bit hesitant. He began to doubt whether their actions over the years were right or wrong. Because of their approach, Konoha has already lost too much strength and talent.


    "The death of Sakumo at that time has caused the vige to lose too much strength Jiraiya and Tsunade also left the vige because of this. We can no longer make a rash decision. If we use tough methods to deal with Uchiha n and there''s a slight mistake, Konoha may fall into a huge crisis." Sarutobi Hiruzen expressed his concerns.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen was telling the truth. But Shimura Danzo was upset. He was mirroring Sarutobi Hiruzen. "Hmph! Are youining now? Don''t forget, at that time, everyone agreed with Sakumo***!" Shimura Danzo immediately retorted.


    [***TL note: Sakumo Hatake was a famous and powerful ninja of Konohagakure who, during his lifetime, held fame that was said to overshadow even that of the Legendary Three Ninja. His son, Kakashi, proved himself a genius like Sakumo and idolized him, desiring to be just as great a ninja as his father. His wife died when Kakashi was very young.]

 Chapter 10: Ins and Outs

    Chapter 10: Ins and Outs


    Seeing Shimura Danzo pointing his finger at himself and the others, Mitokado Homura immediately retorted: "We agreed to suppress Sakumo, but did we ever let you force him tomit suicide?"


    "Hmph!" With a cold snort, Shimura Danzo continued, "Don''tugh. If you didn''t agree, do you have another option? You can''t tell me because you at that time would have no ability to stop it."


    The three people present were dumbstruck and unable to reply. There was no way to refute. After all, that was precisely the case.


    If the four people present disagreed with this approach, Hatake Sakumo, who was the leader of Anbu, would have spread the content of his task.


    Because of this, Hatake Sakumo understood Sarutobi Hiruzen and the others'' intentions. He avoided fighting with them and chose tomit suicide in the end.


    The reason why they made this decision was very simple. It was because, at the time, Hatake Sakumo was already the next Hokage that everyone expected, but this does not mean that Hatake Sakumo is the ideal candidate for their mind.


    After all, to them, only people like Namikaze Minato who would sacrifice their lives, family, and everything for Konoha are the best candidates for Hokage. And Hatake Sakumo is obviously not such a person. The mission he gave up to save hispanions meant that he was not suitable for Hokage. Therefore, he, who was too popr, had be the ''unstable factor'' in the hearts of several old fellows.


    Death was the best attribution for Hatake Sakumo. The same was true for Orochimaru.


    Now that Namikaze Minato was selected, Orochimaru naturally became an unstable factor. It must be eradicated. Otherwise, it would be impossible to condemn Orochimaru for continuing to do human research. After all, in the beginning, Sarutobi Hiruzen personally agreed to the research.


    Seeing the awkward scene, Sarutobi Hiruzen coughed twice and deliberately closed the topic: "Forget it. Don''t talk about the past. The Uchiha n- if we can''t do it, it''s better not to do it. If Konoha lose a great n like Uchiha, then the other Four-Great Ninja Viges may take advantage of it. Moreover, the Uchiha n has now been surrounded by the regiments at each of the Great n''s stations. No major event can happen. Let''s take a look first."


    At this moment, there was a rapid knock on the door outside the door.


    "Report, Lord-Hokage. Uzumaki Naruto is desperately trying to rush into Hokage Residence. Even if someone tried to block him, he would not care."


    When the four heard the words, they were slightly confused, and they all looked at each other.


    Truthfully, when they heard this person outside the door talking about Uzumaki Naruto, the people in the Conference Hall almost forgot that Naruto is Namikaze Minato''s son.


    After all, since the Demon Fox incident, most of the time, in addition to dealing with official business, they have also focused on the "unstable factor" of the Uchiha n.


    After Sarutobi Hiruzen sent someone to monitor Naruto for 24 hours, he didn''t pay much attention. At most, he would visit once every one or two months.


    The same was true for Shimura Danzo.


    In the beginning, there were only two purposes for deliberately leaking the news that Naruto was the "Demon Fox".


    1) See if you can gain control of Uzumaki Naruto and train Naruto.


    2) If no one knows that Naruto is Jinchuriki, then Sarutobi Hiruzen had an excuse to continue to dy the Uchiha n''s incident. Even if the Uchiha n rebelled, the harm would still be under his control.


    However, since everyone knows that Uzumaki Naruto is Jinchuriki, if Uchiha n decides to rebel, they will definitely try to take Naruto. This means that the Uchiha n''s rebellion will be out of control.


    So, Sarutobi Hiruzen had to decide as soon as possible to solve the "time bomb" of the Uchiha n.


    Therefore, for the above reasons, the old fellows in the Conference Hall did not have time to care for Naruto. This also caused Naruto to be piling frustrations all the time.


    Dumbfounded for a moment, Sarutobi Hiruzen casually instructed: "Let hime in."


    After the order was passed on, there was a sound of rapid footsteps in the corridor outside the conference room. He didn''t even knock on the door. Naruto just pushed the door open and ran in excitedly.


    He saw the scene in Conference Hall. He was stunned at first, but soon, he subconsciously ignored the others in the field of view. Only the Grandpa Hokage, Sarutobi Hiruzen, was left.


    He walked up quickly and climbed to the table with his left hand in his waist. His right hand pointed at Sarutobi Hiruzen and said vigorously, "Old fogey! I ask you! Why did you hide that my dad is Fourth-Hokage?!"


    As soon as the voice fell, the atmosphere in the Conference Hall suddenly became extremely solemn.


    Shimura Danzo''s tone became serious. "Who told you about this?"


    Naruto looked at this one-eyed guy. Naruto didn''t recognize him. Regardless, he stared at Sarutobi Hiruzen again, waiting for his reply. And Sarutobi Hiruzen''s face became ugly.


    It didn''t matter who told Naruto the truth. The old fellows in the Conference Hall paid more attention to Naruto''s Jinchuriki than Naruto himself. After all, they couldn''t let a Konoha-hostile Jinchurikie back again.


    So, he asked the same question, butpared to Shimura Danzo, Sarutobi Hiruzen looked much more kind: "Naruto, can you tell Grandpa Hokage first, who told you that the Fourth-Hokage is your father?"


    Naruto Uzumaki still didn''t notice that there was something wrong with the atmosphere and said very angrily: "Hmph! Don''t try to lie to me again! It was my dad who told me personally! I saw my dad and mom with my own eyes!"


    Mitokado Homura: "You saw Minato with your own eyes? How is that possible?"


    Utatane Koharu: "Naruto, tell us what''s going on!"


    Hearing the news that Namikaze Minato still existed, their expressions were varied.


    Excited. Guilty. And there was worry.


    As for Shimura Danzo''s expression, it''s as ugly as eating shit.


    Uzumaki Naruto did not understand why they care so much about this matter.


    "I saw a cage with a big fox. The fox told me to tear off the charm on the cage, and then dad and mom came out."


    Although the description was not too clear, old fellows with broad knowledge can guess a rough idea, except that Namikaze Minato left a countermeasure.


    After knowing the cause of the matter, they were rxed. But their emotions were quickly stretched and taut again because they captured one of the main points in Naruto''s words!


    Fox... Kyuubi, Demon Fox, actually asked Naruto to tear off the seal? That can be done?!

 Chapter 11: Wish

    Chapter 11: Wish


    Utatane Koharu quickly warned: "Naruto, don''t ever tear it off alright?"


    Mitokado Homura: "Yes, that''s right, Naruto. Next time you''re in that space, remember not to move at all. Don''t talk to the demon fox too. Do you understand?"


    Naruto became a little impatient by these two people''s nagging. He was here to hold them ountable!


    "You''re so annoying! Old man, why aren''t you saying anything! Why did you hide my identity? My father is the Fourth-Hokage; I am the son of Fourth-Hokage! Why did you send someone to monitor me to not help me?! And don''t you care knowing that everyone treats me like that and misunderstands me?!"


    Naruto, who was only 3 years old, pointed to Sarutobi Hiruzen''s nose and asked a series of angry questions.


    Recalling everything in the past. The more he thought about it, the angrier he got!


    When the old fellows see this, they looked at Naruto, and Naruto looked back at them.


    The problem returns to the most serious part, that is, it must be considered whether the current Naruto is hostile to the vige!


    The old fellows focused their attention on Sarutobi Hiruzen and signaled him to solve the problem. Sarutobi Hiruzen also understood the meaning of these ''friends''.


    He did not shirk. He changed his face and said with a sincere voice: "Hey... Naruto. The reason why we concealed your identity is for your safety. Many things are not as simple as you think You also know that a demon fox is sealed in your body. If your identity is exposed, other viges will definitely be detrimental to you. I once promised your father, to take good care of you, so I must not put your life in danger. I hope you can understand my difficulties."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s heart-wrenching series of words flickered Naruto, who was only three years old. Fortunately, with Li Yaoxiang''s ''reminder'' in his mind, Naruto quickly reacted.


    "You liar! You said you were afraid that I would be in danger! But howe the entire vige already knew that I am the demon fox?! What''s the difference?! Do you know how everyone treats me now?! I''ll never live this kind of life again!"


    Naruto repeatedly shouted. He didn''t care about who they are; provoking their authority.


    In the Conference Hall, except for Sarutobi Hisaki, the eyes of the other three people got worse.


    Seeing that the situation was not good, Sarutobi Hiruzen hurriedly said to Naruto: "Naruto, I''m sorry. It''s my fault. I was too busy that I ignored your feelings. You are right Since everyone already knows about the true existence of "Demon Fox". Then I will call everyone in the vige as soon as possible to reveal your identity in public, do you think it''s good?"


    When the words came out, Naruto''s eyes widened on the spot.


    Full of excitement, he looked towards Sarutobi Hiruzen in disbelief.


    "Old old old man. You you you''re not lying? You''re... really willing to tell everyone who I am?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen squinted and nodded with a smile.


    Followed by- Naruto shouted with excitement.


    Cheered and jumped on the desk.


    "Hahahaha! Great! Great! I can finally make friends! I can finally y with everyone!"


    After shouting and jumping for a while, Naruto was so excited that he quickly got down and used his elbows and knees to climb in front of Sarutobi Hiruzen and looked at him at close range: "Old fogey! Quick! Call everyone and tell them!"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen still maintained a kind smile: "Naruto, you calm down first. It''s not like they can''te. In this period of time, everyone is currently busy with their own affairs. How do you make everyonee? Rest assured. Go back and wait patiently. I''ll tell someone to pass it onter. Three days! In three days. After three days, I''ll let the whole vigee together and then announce your identity in public."


    Naruto frowned half his eyebrows, suspiciously: "Really? You''re not lying, right?"


    "Un." Sarutobi Hiruzen nodded.


    Naruto was finally willing to give up and leave. He leapt out of the door: "Yes! Great! I can finally make friends!"


    With cheers gradually get further apart, this brought the solemn atmosphere back to the Conference Hall.


    "Hiruzen! It can''t go on like this! This demon fox has known the truth. Sooner orter, he will be detrimental to the vige and hostile to everyone. The best way is to take out the roots to take care of it! I can make sure that this will not happen!"


    Of course, Shimura Danzo would not let this opportunity pass. However, what was ushered in is Sarutobi''s tough attitude.


    "..."


    Sarutobi Hizen nced at him with a sour look. Seeing Shimura Danzo''s eyes drifting made him sick.


    The priority was supposed to be to look for the culprit responsible for this situation. Of course, everyone knows this. But, everyone just didn''t have time to manage. It was just tacit understanding.


    ''Everything I do is for Konoha, I''m not wrong! ''


    He was suddenly full of confidence again. He got angry again and continued to look at this friend who seemed to be condemning him.


    Seeing this, Sarutobi Hiruzen only started to talk and said:


    "There is no need to talk about this matter anymore. In the past, I was busy with other things and ignored Naruto''s feelings. Since most people in the vige already know about Naruto''s Jinchuriki identity. Then there is no need to hide it anymore After 3 days, I will summon everyone and announce Naruto''s identity on the spot. As for the danger Oh, didn''t everyone see the Naruto''s attitude just now? He is just a child. He just wants to make friends and y with everyone. He has never hated the vige as a whole at all. In this case, why bother anger him? Moreover, is it not a good thing for the vige disclosing his identity, letting him make more friends, and by then make him fell in love with the vige?"


    As thest sentence was said, no one else in the room could refute it.


    Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu did not say anything, which means they defaulted on this decision. After all, Sarutobi Hiruzen was right. And this was their consistent style of cultivating new seedlings.


    As long as there is a bond. Then Naruto can''t not be involved with the vige.


    As long as there is a bond. Will of Fire''s* "guardian" can be better maintained.


    [*TL note: The Will of Fire is a recurring element throughout the Naruto series. It is an ideal rooting in Asura tsutsuki''s belief that love is the key to peace. It would eventually be the life philosophy Hashirama founded, and the Senju n lived by, which has since been passed on to many ninja from Konohagakure as a part of their spiritual heritage. It states that the entire vige is like arge family unit, and every Konoha shinobi with the Will of Fire loves, believes, cherishes, and fights to protect the vige, as previous generations had done before them.]


    Shimura Danzo had different ideas, but Seeing that the other two did not refute, he said nothing.


    .....


    Sarutobi Hiruzen did not vite his promise.


    Three dayster, Third-Hokage called everyone to say that there were important things to announce.


    After hearing the news, Naruto was so excited on the spot that he couldn''t sleep for 2 consecutive nights.


    And in the past 2 days, he expressed his longing to Li Yaoxiang in his mind. ''As long as everyone understood my identity, everyone will never hate me again.'' something along those lines.


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t hit him this time. He didn''t say anything. He let Naruto be happy.


    As for the oue of the event, will it really be as perfect as Naruto imagined it?


    ''Haha... I can only say everything is under my control!''

 Chapter 12: Gathering

    Chapter 12: Gathering


    3 dayster. Early in the morning. Uzumaki Naruto''s house.


    Due to insomnia for 2 days, on the 3rd day night, Naruto was finally too tired and slept unconsciously. As a result, he was about to miss the meeting time.


    Naruto was still lying in a ''big'' shape in bed. Still snoring and sleeping.


    Soon, a masked Anbu ninja broke into Naruto''s room and woke him up.


    "Hu~ Who? Don''t be annoying! Why do you bother people sleeping?" Naruto pulled away the man''s palm in confusion.


    Anbu ninja withdrew his palm and lightly said, "The rally is about to begin. Lord-Hokage told me to call you. If you want to continue sleeping, then I will go back and report."


    Uzumaki Naruto was shocked! His whole body bounced!


    "What!!!!! The meeting! The meeting! You wait for me! Wait for me!"


    Immediately afterward, Naruto rushed to the bathroom, washed his face at random, picked up a toothbrush, and walked out while brushing his teeth and changing his clothes: "Wait! I''m getting ready. You go tell Grandpa Hokage to wait for me~"


    Seeing that Naruto had already begun preparations, the Anbu left Naruto''s house.


    Naruto walked to the closet and scanned the clothes in the closet with his fingers. Finally, his fingers stopped. The best-preserved cotton coat was the orange and blue set in the original work.


    It was rtively small.


    Naruto had been reluctant to wear this ''new coat''. But for him today, the significance was too great. He can''t ignore appearances as he always did.


    ''Be sure not to shame your own father!''


    Finished dressing... sorted out the messy hair a little.


    After witnessing the most handsome self in front of the mirror, Naruto then left the house in high spirits and walked towards the square where the meeting was held.


    ...


    This so-called convening venue is actually the meeting ce of Chunin Exams in original work.


    In the venue, at this moment, in addition to the crowds in the auditorium, even the empty space in the middle also gathered a lot of people. There was no other reason for it. Konoha is nominally a vige, but its size is no smaller than some towns, or evenrger.


    Today, although the entire Konoha was currently experiencing up and down, they still gathered here, though not every people.


    Soon, Naruto also arrived at this venue.


    Due to histe arrival, he could only enter the venue where the ce is used to have a ''duel''.


    It''s just that when he first appeared in everyone''s field of vision, he quickly attracted resentment and ridicule from those around him.


    "Hmph! What a shame. The monsteres here too."


    "Doesn''t he know that everyone doesn''t wee him? Still appearing here so swaggeringly?"


    "If I were him, I wouldn''t stay here. It''s disgraceful. A demon fox is the demon fox."


    All sorts of contempt sounded into Naruto''s ears. Everywhere he passed, someone would subconsciously give way, avoiding him deliberately, pointing fingers at him. As if he was like a virus, a gue, and they would be disgusted when they encountered him.


    All of this, Naruto has long been ustomed to it. He just took it for granted.


    In the past, whenever he heard such vicious words and disgusted eyes, his heart could not help feeling lost and sad.


    But not today! He doesn''t care what they said!


    Because he firmly believed that at the end of today, everything would be fine!


    ...


    With the arrival of the protagonist, Uzumaki Naruto, Sarutobi Hiruzen didn''t let everyone wait too long. He soon appeared in everyone''s field of view and walked slowly to the position of the Hokage seat.


    Seeing the appearance of Sarutobi Hiruzen, the loud noise in the scene was loud again.


    "Wow! Lord-Hokage today even wears the Hokage robe and Hokage hat. So grand. You said, Lord-Hokage told us toe today, what the hell is he going to announce?"


    "Of course, things are not simple. Otherwise, he wouldn''t call so many people here."


    "Bah! Look, at that damned demon fox has the skin to stay. Let me say that on such an important asion, he should not be let in!"


    "Who said we disagree to you? Didn''t you realize that nobody wanted to see him from the start?"


    The vicious voices were getting worse.


    Naruto kept admonishing himself in his heart and cheering himself up. "It''s okay, it''s okay. When old man reveals my identity, everyone will never treat me like this again! That''s right! It must be like this!"


    ...


    Soon, Sarutobi Hiruzen came to the tform of the Hokage seat under so much attention and expectations. He stood in front of the tform, looked around. His eyes finally fell on the excited little Naruto. He smiled and nodded at Naruto.


    Immediately after he coughed twice, the vigers on the scene became quiet.


    He began his speech: "I am very happy that everyone spared their precious busy time..." Sarutobi Hiruzen''s voice seemed very rxed. But its volume is enough for the nearly tens of thousands of vigers present to hear clearly.


    That''s it, let''s talk a lot of opening remarks...


    Seeing Naruto called a gnashing one''s teeth, little fist clenched, secretly whispered: "Damn it, old man! Just say it!"


    Talk, talk...


    Sarutobi Hiruzen finally got to the point.


    "The reason for calling everyone here today is actually to tell you clearly about the incident in the ''Demon Fox''s Attack'' back then."


    Immediately after he said it, everyone was in an uproar. They took a breath. It was a night that no one wanted to remember. They don''t know why Lord-Hokage had to bring it up again to uncover everyone''s scars.


    Some people even looked towards Naruto, standing angrily at the center, resentfully wishing to fry him and tear him apart!


    It wasn''t until Sarutobi Hiruzen ''coughed'' twice, beckoning everyone to be quiet, and everyone present stopped the noise.


    "I can understand the pain of losing your family. It is also very clear that no one wants to recall what happened back then. But there is one thing I must remind everyone. In order to alleviate the pain, we choose to escape the reality and escape the past; this is definitely not a good way to solve the problem! Moreover, if the heroes, friends, and family members who sacrificed to save us in those years know that we are still living in the past; they will not be happy! They protected us, so that everyone can have a better future! I don''t want you to continue to live in the shadows of the past! Therefore, if we want to thank them and honor them, we should live more wonderfully than before! This is worthy of their sacrifice for everyone!"


    Some emotional remarks moved everyone on the scene too much.


    Some people wept silently. Some people were moved by this. Some people were excited by this.


    Gradually, as the first person pped and apuded, waves of intense apuse sounded.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen, the Third-Hokage, was once again recognized and loved by the vigers.


    Because of these sensational words, some vigers who were still bitter and heartbroken over the past were finally relieved. And secretly vowed to live morefortably than ever! Even getting more excited!

 Chapter 13: The Truth Revealed, The Identity Revealed

    Chapter 13: The Truth Revealed, The Identity Revealed


    Seeing the atmosphere at the scene gradually getting heated, Sarutobi Hiruzen immediately seized the opportunity and said, "The reason why I called everyone toe here is to remember the heroes! Let them know that their sacrifice is not in vain! Let them see, Konoha has lived a stable life because of their guardianship!"


    "Lord-Hokage is right! We are all doing well now!"


    "Yes! I want to live a better life, proving that their choice was not wrong!"


    The voices of approval resounded throughout the venue.


    The enthusiasm, excitement, and atmosphere almost converged to the highest point.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen wanted exactly it!


    Seeing that the atmosphere was rendered almost the same, his style of painting changed: "But..."


    This "but" made the audience quiet again, holding their breath, waiting for their Lord-Hokage to continue talking.


    "Do you still remember the hero who really saved us from this disaster?"


    After a pause, he looked around the venue. "I believe that no one on the scene will forget! He was the Fourth-Hokage, Namikaze Minato, who sacrificed his life to save everyone!"


    Hearing the name Namikaze Minato, everyone presents subconsciously looked at Hokage Rock not far away. They looked towards the stone statue ranked fourth.


    On the surface, there was not much mood swing. But in everyone''s heart, there was a touch of gratitude.


    Obviously, they would never talk about the Fourth-Hokage over and over. But as soon as an outsider or child asks, they would proudly say, ''That''s our Fourth-Hokage, Namikaze Minato!'' And began to introduce his heroic deeds.


    The vigers remembered everything.


    Gradually, as the first person in the field shouted the words, "Fourth-Hokage".


    The voice also shouted one after another.


    "FOURTH-HOKAGE!"


    "FOURTH-HOKAGE!"


    "FOURTH-HOKAGE!"


    Naruto, surrounded by this turbulent public opinion, listened to everyone chanting his father''s name, he was so excited that his entire cheeks turned red, and his whole body was trembling.


    Excited!


    Shocked!


    ''That''s right! This is my dad, Namikaze Minato!''


    At this moment, Naruto was proud of his father like never before. His father was the hero who saved the whole vige, and he is this hero''s son!


    He was so small that he could not help raising his head and his chest and followed everyone to shout the name of his proud father.


    At this time, the massive public sentiment was once again interrupted by Sarutobi Hiruzen''s "but", and everyone was quiet again, ready to listen to Third-Hokage''s next words.


    "One thing really makes me feel very guilty. Because I didn''t take care of the child left by Minato."


    The voice fell, and the scene was silent. Then there was an uproar.


    "This?! The Fourth-Hokage has a child? Why haven''t we heard of it?!"


    "I remember Fourth-Hokage''s wife was indeed pregnant. But didn''t theyter say that they died together in that disaster?"


    For civilians like them, the news they get is often deliberately spread and tinkered by the Konoha.


    In order to conceal the news that Naruto was a child of Namikaze Minato, Sarutobi Hiruzen imed to the public that Namikaze Minato and his family had died in the disaster. This also caused these civilians to be kept in the dark.


    "You don''t know about this matter, and it should be that way... Because I wanted to make Minato''s son safe and peaceful and live a life as an ordinary person, I fabricated this news." Sarutobi Hiruzen exined.


    Then, people in the crowd began to ask Sarutobi Hiruzen on the high tform:


    "Lord-Hokage, who is this Fourth-Hokage''s child? Where is he?"


    "Yes, Lord-Hokage. If Fourth-Hokage really left a bloodline, then we must repay him well. We will not forget the favor of Fourth-Hokage!"


    They all asked about the situation of Namikaze Minato''s son. Everyone spokes the truth from their heart. They were indeed very grateful to Namikaze Minato.


    If it were not for Namikaze Minato''s sacrifice, they would not be here. The damage that the demon fox caused to the vige at that time would only be more serious.


    Naruto swallowed and stared at Sarutobi Hiruzen in a daze, waiting for him to say his most anticipated moment today.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen did not disappoint Naruto, nor did he no longer bridge the situation.


    "In the past few years, I''m sure everyone had heard the demon fox incarnation bing a child, right? I don''t need to say more. I believe everyone knows who this child is?"


    Halfway Sarutobi Hiruzen finishing his sentence, every eye could not help but concentrate on the little Naruto standing in the center of the square.


    Although they don''t understand why Lord-Hokage suddenly talked about this annoying beast. But it does not prevent everyone from staring at Naruto with a disgusted look.


    ''It''s him! It is because of this demon fox, this disaster happened back then! That''s why so many people die!''


    ''The respected Fourth-Hokage died! It''s all because of him!''


    Just like this, a three-year-old child was treated as an enemy by everyone. He was overwhelmed by the disgusting look of the tens of thousands of spectators present.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen realized what a huge wrong decision he had made. He ignored Naruto''s feelings. It was he who once again broke his promise to others.


    Senju Hashirama''s wife, Uzumaki Mito, entrusted him to take care of his children and grandchildren before he died. As a result, Senju n was gone. Land-of-Whirlpools* also disappeared.


    [*TL note: The Land of Whirlpools (Uzu no Kuni, Viz: Land of Eddies) is where the Uzumaki n originates from. It no longer exists, having been destroyed and the rest of the survivors scattered across the world. The surname Uzumaki was verymon in this country. It was located on an ind off of the coast of the Land of Fire.]


    It was him who promised in front of Hatake Sakumo that his boss would lead Sakumo together and let Konoha go to glory. As a result, he followed his confidant for many years but was forced to death by his own decision.


    It was he who agreed to let his disciple, Orochimaru, to study First-Kage''s cells and study Wood-Style**, but in the end, for this exact reason, he forced his disciple to rebel against the vige.


    [**TL note: Wood Release (Mokuton, Viz: Wood Style) is a nature transformation kekkei genkai, abination of Earth and Water Release. It was famously used by Hashirama Senju. In fact, it is not known to have naturally urred in anyone else, leading to it being regarded as impossible to use without having his cells. Because of Wood Release''s power and versatility, there have been various efforts to reproduce it after Hashirama''s death. Wood Release techniques aremonly affiliated with the Snake hand seal.]


    His disciple, Tsunade, disappointed with him, left the vige.


    His disciple, Jiraiya, who was also disappointed with him, was away for a long time.


    Although they didn''t say anything, how would Sarutobi Hiruzen not guess what his apprentices were thinking?


    And now, because of him, that Naruto, his grand disciple Minato''s son, who was only 3 years old, suffered this treatment.


    Looking at the center of the square, Naruto was overwhelmed by everyone''s stare, not knowing what to do.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen felt guilty. He couldn''t help but doubt himself, doubting whether everything he had done over the years was right or wrong He nced at his close friend hidden in the dark, Shimura Danzo.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen sighed helplessly.


    ''He doesn''t care about that much anymore.''


    He spoke loudly towards everyone: "The im that the demon fox incarnated into a child is actually wrong. The real situation is that the Fourth-Hokage sealed the demon fox into an innocent baby. And this baby is Naruto, Uzumaki Naruto! At the same time, he is also Fourth-Hokage''s, Namikaze Minato''s biological son!"

 Chapter 14: Beautiful Imaginations Are Broken

    Chapter 14: Beautiful Imaginations Are Broken


    The huge venue became silent!


    Everyone was shocked by the news brought by Sarutobi Hiruzen!


    ''I couldn''t believe it!''


    An impossible look was fully disyed on all five senses. But just before, they wereforting themselves.


    ''It''s impossible!''


    ''How can Uzumaki Naruto be the son of Fourth-Hokage?!''


    ''If Uzumaki Naruto is the son of Namikaze Minato, why didn''t Third-Hokage tell us the truth? Why let us treat our benefactor''s child like this and bully him so much?''


    Instantly... Uzumaki Naruto, the little one, became the only focus of the audience.


    Everyone''s eyes were all focused on this child, who is only 3 years old.


    No action. The scene remained silent.


    For a while, everyone really didn''t understand how to ept this cruel fact.


    Even if they knew that this is unlikely, they were more willing to believe that Sarutobi Hiruzen was cracking a joke with them, because only in this way would their hearts feel better. They wouldn''t need to feel guilty for what they have done in the past. Because they really appreciated Fourth-Hokage from the bottom of their hearts, they were even more unable to ept what they had done to this benefactor''s child over the years.


    In order to prove his im one step further, Sarutobi Hiruzen continued: "In the past, in order to conceal Naruto''s identity, we decided to change his surname to Uzumaki, which is the surname of Minato''s wife Uzumaki Kushina... I thought that Naruto could grow up happily like an ordinary person as long as this is the case. But I didn''t expect that everyone''s misunderstanding of Naruto would be so deep. I am ashamed of Minato. I am ashamed of everyone. You don''t have to me yourself Everything is my fault. I have only focused on official businesses, ignoring Naruto, and ignoring everyone''s views on Naruto."


    Everyone on the scene heard Sarutobi Hiruzen''s words, and their hearts felt like a bolt from the blue sky, and they were so shocked that they couldn''t speak.


    Uzumaki Naruto surname Uzumaki. Namikaze Minato''s wife was also named Uzumaki.


    How can they deceive themselves again?


    Thest touch of hope in their heart copsed instantly. Suddenly, almost everyone showed a variety ofplex expressions. They were ashamed of Fourth-Hokage. Ashamed of Uzumaki Naruto.


    They were very embarrassed to look up at that stone statue of Namikaze Minato.


    Recalling their attitude towards Uzumaki Naruto over the years This was inferior to a pig and a dog!


    At Uzumaki Naruto in the middle of the square, everyone was silent. They didn''t know what to say. They didn''t know how to face Uzumaki Naruto.


    They all treated Uzumaki Naruto as a monster and even instilled this concept and hatred into the next generation. But now? Suddenly, someone told them the child they regard as the enemy, and a monster turned out to be a child of the benefactor?


    How could they ept this fact immediately? How could they face what they have done in the past?


    However, Naruto Uzumaki, who was facing everyone''s gaze, was not feeling well at the moment Because the ''beautiful picture'' he imagined didn''t appear at all. He initially thought that as long as the old man disclosed his identity, everyone would recognize him, no longer hate him, ande to make friends with themselves.


    But what is the situation now? How did this happen? That kind of "disgusting" looks are gone, but what is going on now?


    He looked around the venue. He saw that someone''s expression was veryplicated, and he didn''t understand what he was thinking. He also saw someone''s expression as indifferent; he didn''t seem surprised by Naruto''s identity.


    In this way, the whole meeting ce, the vigers were quiet, the ninjas were quiet, the major Noble n ns were quiet, and the high levels were also quiet.


    .....


    After everyone had been quiet for a while, the rally finally gave a helpless sigh at Sarutobi Hiruzen and officially dered the end and disbanded.


    The group sentiment was gone.


    Without the enthusiasm just now.


    All of them left this venue one after another with a heavy heart.


    On the way back, everybody was not in the mood to talk to other people and had too muchmunication.


    Uzumaki Naruto stood in the middle of the square, looking at the vigers one by one in a daze. He watched as they left one after another. Until the whole square became empty.


    Uzumaki Naruto still watched the whole process with a dull expression. Both his eyes were lifeless. There was a nk in his head. His mouth was even more dry and slightly open.


    "Everyone has left. Let''s go back" Li Yaoxiang''s voice sounded in Naruto''s mind.


    Naruto''s body slightly trembled. There was still a nk in his mind, and his expression was still dull. But unconsciously, following Li Yaoxiang''s instructions, he walked back to his home.


    During the process of returning home, there was nomunication between the two parties.


    Naruto couldn''t feel the cold of the snow. He couldn''t feel the surrounding pictures. Just like this, one step at a time, he walked back.


    It wasn''t until he arrived at the house and the door closed that he became puzzled. He asked Li Yaoxiang: "Why why is everyone doing this? I''m a child of a hero. Since they are so grateful to dad, everyone shouldn''t hate me, right? Shouldn''t everyone ept me?"


    "Naruto I''ve told you already. The people in the vige are cruller and ungrateful than you think. Didn''t you see? After many people know your true identity, many people didn''t show any unexpected expressions after they learned your true identity. That''s because they already knew the truth! They won''t thank your father or you... They won''t be thankful because the demon fox was sealed inside your body. They just think that this is what your father and his son should do! Your father''s death is deserved! Your mother''s death is also deserved! What they are thinking is only themselves!"


    Naruto''s fragile heart was being bombarded with cuts and bruises by Li Yaoxiang''s series of words. He always imagined things so beautifully. He didn''t want to believe Li Yaoxiang''s words, and he didn''t want to believe that the vige Li Yaoxiang said was really so dark, but the problem was that he couldn''t give a reasonable exnation for why those people who knew his identity would treat him like this.


    This made him feel very ufortable. The beautiful world he longed for was almost torn apart by reality.


    It was just that, while he felt most at a loss, there was an unprecedented knock on the door.


    Knock! Knock! Knock!


    This sudden knock on the door brought Naruto''s thoughts back to reality in an instant.


    After all, at his home, no one woulde to visit him on a good day. Even if someonees, it can only be the old man, Grandpa Hokage.


    But the problem is, it was not at the end of the month yet. It was not the time to give him the monthly money. It stood to reason that Grandpa Hokage will note at this time. Why did someonee suddenly?


    So, Naruto, who was still letting his imagination run wild, was suddenly attracted by the "guest" outside the door.


    With doubts, Naruto went to open the door...

 Chapter 15: All Hardships Come

    Chapter 15: All Hardships Come


    The door opened.


    What came into sight was a young man wearing ordinary cotton clothes. The quality of the cotton clothes was not too high or too bad.


    Naruto recognized the man in front of him. He was the clerk who had previously worked in a grocery store and refused to sell his kettle.


    It''s just that the man at the moment looked towards Naruto''s eyes, which no longer showed disgust but rather an embarrassed smile. He also carried a brand-new hot water bottle in his hand.


    "Haha, Naruto. Didn''t you say that the kettle at your home broke? I brought it to you specially."


    Naruto looked dumbfounded. He suddenly asked, "This how much? I''ll get it to you know."


    "Ah, no need. I''m just giving it to you. You''re wee."


    After a few awkward conversations, the clerk stopped talking and quickly left.


    This sudden scene made Naruto be confused and asked in his mind: "What''s going on?"


    Only this time, Li Yaoxiang didn''t answer.


    The door closed.


    It didn''t take long for another knock on the door.


    Knock! Knock! Knock!


    Naruto opened the door again in a daze.


    The guest was also a young man with a kettle in his hand. Naruto recognized the man, who was the clerk of the second grocery store.


    One big and one small, two people with four eyes facing each other, both sides holding a kettle. The situation is somewhat funny.


    Naruto: "Are you... also here to deliver a kettle?"


    The young man who reacted spared his head and said, haha: "It''s okay, it''s okay. There is an extra kettle. Hope you don''t mind and ept it!"


    Leaving the kettle behind, the clerk of the second grocery store also left soon.


    It didn''t take long for Naruto to close the door.


    Immediately after, the clerks in the third and fourth grocery stores came one after another. They also made an excuse at random, and they just wanted to leave their "heart" behind.


    Eventually, it caused Naruto to be startled. His hands were trying to wrap the 4 brand-new kettles. He became so excited that he impatiently unted Li Yaoxiang in his mind: "Look! Look! I knew it! I knew it! As long as everyone knows, everyone will ept me! Hahahahaha! Sess! I seeded! Everyone no longer hates me!"


    Li Yaoxiang said nothing as if he couldn''t find any word to refute him. It made Naruto feel even more excited!


    Bing even more excited!


    Because this not only proved that his ''beautiful vision'' was right, it was also the first time that he has ''beaten'' Li Yaoxiang since he was sensible! It made it even more satisfying.


    ''I knew it! The vige is not as dark as what he said! Not everyone is so ungrateful!''


    However, Naruto did not realize that under the influence of Li Yaoxiang, he had taken the phrase ''not everyone is so ungrateful'' to take it for granted. In other words, he had already agreed that there were indeed such a group of ungrateful guys in the vige.


    Without waiting for Naruto''s emotions to calm down, there was a knock on the door again.


    Naruto didn''t feel dumbfounded this time. He put down the kettles in his arms and said happily: "Come! Come!"


    He opened the door.


    This time, it was a kid and a couple behind the kid. Somewhat funny is that the kid was holding a fruit basketrger than his body in his arms, and the fruit basket covered almost half of his body. The man and the woman behind the kid were smiling apologetically at Naruto.


    Naruto also recognized this family. The kid was one of the people who hit him with snowballs before. He was the one who hit Naruto the most! And the two men and women behind them were the parents of the little kid who was in trouble.


    They didn''t wait for Naruto to say anything. The parents behind the kid pushed him, as if urging him.


    Seeing the road ahead, the brat quickly stretched out half of his head from behind the fruit basket and said to Naruto: "I''m sorry, I was wrong before. I shouldn''t have thrown snowballs at you. I won''t do that again. These fruits are for you."


    Straightforward. Obviously, someone taught the brat to say this.


    Naruto, who was simple and direct, took the fruit basket very happily and smiled heartily: "Hahahaha! It doesn''t matter! I never med you. Let''s y together in the future!"


    The couple behind him pushed the brat, nodded, and said a few words of apology. They also quickly left.


    Immediately afterward, with the four clerks who delivered the kettles and a family left Naruto''s house, other vigers also came to Uzumaki Naruto''s home. Or visit. Or give gifts. Or apologize.


    Of course, these visitors only include those who are in the know; that is, they already know the existence of Naruto''s identity. Almost as long as anyone above Jonin Level, or those Noble n young generation, will know this news.


    But it didn''t matter.


    The number of gratitude brought by those visitors, such as new clothes, various fruits, food, toys, etc., can still fill the entrance of Naruto''s house, piled up to almost make it impossible to squeeze in.


    .....


    After the night came, the visiting crowd gradually stopped.


    Naruto was totally excited for a whole afternoon.


    Looking at the pile of thank-you gifts in front of him, Naruto plunged in with cheers. His small body formed a "big" shape, lying on the pile of gratitude gifts.


    He opened one of the fruit baskets.


    There was a banana in the left mouth, and his right cheek rubbed on the new clothes with satisfaction.


    Feeling the suppleness on the cheeks, Naruto spontaneously unted again in his mind: "Look? I''ll say it. As long as everyone knows my identity, they will ept me! Hehehehe! I can y with everyone in the future!"


    Li Yaoxiang looked at this little man''s sess, constantly showing off.


    Li Yaoxiang smiled.


    ''That''s right!''


    Li Yaoxiang intentionally let Naruto take the ''Life Peak'' path properly. Li Yaoxiang will, of course, not miss this opportunity, using the vigers'' movements to make Uzumaki Naruto appear in the spotlight!


    Make Naruto proud! Make Naruto satisfied! Make Naruto misunderstand that he finally defeated Li Yaoxiang for once!


    However, the truth of the matter was that Li Yaoxiang already knew that the vigers wereing to visit Naruto. After all, how could Li Yaoxiang, who also lived in Konoha Vige, can''t even detect this movement?


    The reason why Li Yaoxiang deliberately created this result was all because of the need to speed up the progress of his n! In order to let Naruto fully realize the sense of aplishment in defeating Li Yaoxiang and regain confidence! In order to have a perfect start to this "2nd step n"!


    Obviously, based on Naruto''s current appearance, it means that Li Yaoxiang''s purpose had been achieved.


    If there were no ident, Naruto would be happily silent in this ''false illusion'' for many days toe. When this ''false illusion'' was over, it would be the moment when Li Yaoxiang appears again!


    Seeing that in the short-term, Naruto wouldn''t make a huge change, for the time being, Li Yaoxiang chose to stop talking to Naruto and let Naruto enjoy this beautiful moment. And he shifted his focus back to his main body

 Chapter 16: The Daily Life of An Ordinary Person

    Chapter 16: The Daily Life of An Ordinary Person


    Konoha Vige.


    Inside a certain restaurant.


    The decoration and furnishings of this restaurant are exactly the same as the one in the anime, Ramen Ichiraku. It is a storefront with an open door. Just a few pieces of fabric are hanging on the store''s entrance to cover the sun or the situation in the restaurant.


    At this time, Li Yaoxiang was cooking all kinds of food in front of customers sitting side by side.


    His connection with Naruto is like eating food and chatting with friends. It just depends on whether he wants to focus on tasting food carefully. And it''s very useful. His connection with Naruto can''t affect his daily life and various normal activities at all.


    He has been in this state for the past few years since he got to this world.


    At the beginning, only his fleshy body transmigrated here. Not only his appearance but his age has not changed. Even the name is the same. The system gave him such identity.


    A certain parents died, leaving this restaurant free to take. So, he took it to not arouse suspicion from others. But because of his new identity, he always has a lot of constraints when ites to darkening Naruto.


    After all, Konoha is way too exposed.


    Konoha Vige is indeed too dangerous for an ordinary person. Not to mention that Konoha Vige is a disaster-prone ce. There''s a lot of chasing and fighting between those ''ninjas and spies''. It became a great disaster for an ordinary person like him. Because he didn''t know when or in which direction would there be so many shurikens or boulders that could suddenly smash him to death.


    Living here is far more dangerous than what the anime makes it to be.


    Despite having many darkening points, he can easily improve his strength and avoid these unpredictable dangers. How can he casually increase his strength or exchange various self-defense items when he is in Konoha? You need to know whether a person has chakras in his body.


    If an ordinary person like him has a refined Chakra; wouldn''t that be suspicious?


    This is no different from looking for death!


    Even if he was really that reckless and even if he could really exin it clearly in front of a group of Konoha ninjas or managed to escape alive, Li Yaoxiang would not do it. After all, if Naruto knew about him in advance because of this, it would be worth the loss. Perhaps the entire darkening n might fail because of this. This was one of the reasons why Li Yaoxiang has not used the darkening point.


    This was why the most important thing for Li Yaoxiang, who just transmigrated to this world, is to leave Konoha as soon as possible!


    Stay away from danger! Stay away from Naruto!


    ''It''s a pity that I have to leave Konoha.''


    For an ordinary person, it was far more difficult than expected. Because he was not the only one who has this idea. Many Konoha civilians actually want to leave this dangerous ce.


    After all, living in Konoha Vige, except for the civilians who were born and raised in Konoha, other people actually don''t have too much sense of belonging to Konoha. Otherwise, With this number of people in Konoha Vige, it is impossible to survive one disaster after another and still maintain a certain number of residents. Therefore, if there is no suitable reason, Konoha can''t let people in and out at will.


    In addition, Konoha is the military base of the Land of Fire*. The base is definitely more rigorous than other ces in terms of ''in and out''. It can be said that it is easy toe in and difficult toe out.


    [*TL note: The Land of Fire (Hi no Kuni) is one of thergest and most powerful countries seen and is the home of the main characters of the series. Its government leader is the Fire Daimy. The Land of Fire was the first country to adopt a ninja vige, Konohagakure, a custom other countries would soon adopt. The Land of Fire is appropriately oriented towards the element of fire, typically having very bright and warm weather. While not the physicallyrgest country, it has thergest hidden vige.]


    Therefore, before this, Li Yaoxiang''s main body did not dare to act rashly and had been acting in a low-key manner, looking for opportunities. He didn''t want to attract the attention of the senior management. Nor did he want to attract Naruto''s attention.


    As for Naruto, will his life be threatened because of the ''butterfly effect''?


    Haha! Li Yaoxiang has never worried about this issue.


    Naruto was the only Jinchuriki of Konoha Vige! As long as Naruto did not behave too abnormally or was hostile to the vige, then the two old fellows, Sarutobi Hiruzen and Shimura Danzo, would not do anything Naruto! They needed Naruto''s strength to shake up other viges!


    Moreover, Li Yaoxiang was familiar with the original work plot. He knew that Sarutobi Hiruzen, Shimura Danzo, and the others almost put all their minds on the incident of ''Uchiha n Rebellion''. Do you think they want to take care of Naruto right now?


    This was why Li Yaoxiang dared to tell the truth to Naruto brazenly. And the only thing he needed to worry about was whether Naruto will be imprisoned or brainwashed because of the ''butterfly effect''. Of course, Li Yaoxiang was not unprepared for Naruto to be in such a difficult situation.


    Isn''t saving the darkening points the best solution? After all, in addition to permanent items, system malls can also buy one-time items. For example, ''One-time Kotoamatsukami'', ''One-time Izanagi'', and so on. The price is much cheaper than the permanent one.


    Of course, Li Yaoxiang didn''t think to use ''One-time Kotoamatsukami'' topletely darken Naruto andplete the mission. It''s just that the system clearly told him that this kind of wicked method is not feasible. The system will not increase Naruto''s darkening degree using that option. Therefore, the best way is to keep these darkening points in case of unexpected situations.


    In case something really went wrong, there would be a way to remedy it. Because even the "brainwashing myth", Kotoamatsukami''s ability, is actually not impossible to crack.


    In the First Type approach, he can inform Naruto of the Kotoamatsukami''s ability in advance. Let Naruto record his memory and thoughts in advance, then Li Yaoxiang can try to use this record afterward to wake up Naruto. After all, the ability of ''Kotoamatsukami'' is not invincible. It only changes a person''s memory and thinking, not a person''s IQ.


    To break free, the simplest solution is to p the hypnotized person. It''s like when a person''s thinking is changed after being pped from the bottom of their heart, which is very refreshing and painless.


    But when one really feels the taste of being pped, it may feel strange.


    Of course, suppose this method does not work. In that case, you can use the second method, which is to divert the attention of the owner of Kotoamatsukami, so that they do not use their precious opportunity of ''Kotoamatsukami'' on Naruto. Because, as far as Li Yaoxiang knows, Kotoamatsukami has a cooldown.


    As for the issue of being imprisoned, it''s much simpler for Li Yaoxiang! Li Yaoxiang has already prepared for this, and he should not worry too much.


    Therefore, based on the above various reasons, coupled with enough darkening points, it was time for Li Yaoxiang to implement his n to leave Konoha...

 Chapter 17: A Small Group Who Hate Ninjas

    Chapter 17: A Small Group Who Hate Ninjas


    Inside the restaurant.


    While cooking, Li Yaoxiang, who was thinking of how to implement the "Leave Konoha Project" while cooking, behaved very naturally.


    From time to time, Li Yaoxiang will talk andugh with customers. But at this moment, a middle-aged man selling vegetables delivered to his shop door. This person''s dress was very ordinary. It looks nothing special. He pushed aside the covering cloth at the door.


    When Li Yaoxiang saw the personing, his first reaction was to look down, but he quickly recovered his natural expression.


    "Yo! Boss Li, business is doing good?"


    "Yeah it''s doing fine? Is it fresh today too?"


    "Of course! This batch of radishes is particrly sweet, and it is best for you to make soup!" As he said, the middle-aged man handed white radishes that were slightly thicker than calves to Li Yaoxiang.


    Under the radish, a note was hidden.


    Li Yaoxiang weighed radish. The note was put away smoothly.


    Immediately afterward, Li Yaoxiang praised naturally: "Not bad! Can I keep the basket?"


    "Hahaha! It''s okay! You''re the customer, you''re in charge. After I deliver this batch of goods, I''ll go back and send you a new batch!"


    After that, the middle-aged man left.


    Li Yaoxiang continued to entertain his customers as if there was nothing unusual. But no one found out that while Li Yaoxiang continued cooking and chatting with customers, he secretly took out the note and read it.


    There was not much information on the note. Just the words'' Tonight meets at 6 o''clock.


    After reading the note, Li Yaoxiang threw the note into the stove and burned it to ashes.


    The whole process looked like flowing water. No one knew.


    .....


    Inside the restaurant. 8 o''clock in the evening.


    Normally, Li Yaoxiang will only open the store until 8 o''clock. But today at 7 o''clock, he started to put the closed wooden board in front of the store. The meaning is obvious: the store is about to close and no longer greets new customers. However, when the time reached 8 o''clock after the standing boards had covered the entire door, there was still a faint light in the shop, prating through the slits.


    In the shop at the moment, in addition to Li Yaoxiang standing in the cooking ce, there were 2 people sitting in the customer''s position.


    One of them was the vegetable seller who delivered radish this afternoon.


    The other was a ''middle-aged Genin'' wearing a ninja costume.


    "Li Yaoxiang! You tell me, how long do you have to wait?! Every time you say it''s dangerous, it''s dangerous! For 2 years! It''s been 2 years! You have been looking for various excuses to procrastinate, are you not nning to take revenge?!"


    It was the food delivery guy this afternoon named Yuichi. He spoke this angry word in a very low voice.


    Obviously, he and Li Yaoxiang have known each other for a long time. It was just that in the past, in front of outsiders, they only showed a normal rtionship. But in essence, they were in a small group.


    A small group with hatred for ninja.


    As mentioned before, the Konoha Vige''smoners will be affected by the fight between ninjas. Some, in fact, have lost their lives because of it. Yuichi''s family is one of these unfortunate people. This caused him to hate ninja very much. The level of hatred has reached the idea of killing one without minding their own lives.


    The reason why Li Yaoxiang joined this small group was all due to the identity given by the system. Because their loved ones died because of ''idents,'' so he ushered in the solicitation of these two people.


    Speaking of solicitation, it was more likepulsively asking Li Yaoxiang to join. If you don''t join, it''s death!


    Because of their behavior and purpose, it was impossible to let outsiders know.


    Since it has been revealed to Li Yaoxiang, and because he was currently in his real body, he has no choice but to join.


    However, in order not to be affected by these two pig teammates, since the day of joining, he has dyed their ''perish together'' or ''suicide'' n for various reasons. This procrastination dragged on for two years, resulting in the tolerance of these two people reaching its limit.


    "Didn''t I tell you? Ninja has a lot of all kinds of weird Ninjutsu. And a ninja, even just a Genin, they have a certain sense of danger almost all the time. If we are holding the idea of killing one of them, they could discover us before we could get close. How do you kill them then? Wouldn''t you be sacrificing your lives in vain then? Moreover, even if we do get lucky not get found, how do we get close to a ninja. How many ninjas can we kill as much as possible with only three of us? Is your hatred just satisfied by killing one or two Genin?"


    In fact, with Li Yaoxiang''s current darkening points, he no longer needed to be afraid of the two people in front of him. But to avoid these two people from ruining his n to ''leave Konoha'', Li Yaoxiang had to continue to appease them and to dy their n of ''perish together'' as much as possible.


    "Enough! You don''t have to exin anymore! Although I don''t understand how you know so much about ninjas. But after such a long dy, you never give a detailed n, we can''t wait any longer! Every day I get home, I''m facing four walls alone. I believe you know this feeling very well! We don''t want to bear it anymore! Just one!"


    This time, it was the middle-aged Genin who had remained silent, Yuya Miyada.


    His situation was like Yuichi. His family also died in the "ident" where ninja was fighting, but Konoha was very indifferent to this. The ninja who identally killed his family was still free. So he also hated ninja very much! Especially Konoha''s Ninja!


    And what Li Yaoxiang worries about was this emotionally unstable middle-aged Genin.


    After all, the strength lies there. The strength gap between an ordinary person and a ninja is still quiterge.


    If it were not for this ninja, Li Yaoxiang would not have joined this small group. And it was this Miyada Yuya who has been threatening him!


    Seeing Li Yaoxiang still hesitating, Miyata gritted his teeth and said: "You are not afraid of death, are you?! If you don''t give a satisfactory answer today, don''t me me for being impolite now!"


    Having said that, Miyada Yuzai and Koichi were staring at Li Yaoxiang fiercely, waiting for his reply.


    If Li Yaoxiang disagrees, they will do it directly.


    Li Yaoxiang was also full of fire in his heart. He had endured these two''s teases for 2 years!


    ''Since you are so anxious to find death, don''t me me!''


    The hesitant expression passed away in a sh, and it turned out that Li Yaoxiang pretended to make a firm resolution: "Well then! Just do it! Kill one without losing! Kill two for blood!"


    Miyada Yuzai: "When will you start?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "In 2 days!"


    "Good! See you in 2 days!"

 Chapter 18: Temporary Change of Plans

    Chapter 18: Temporary Change of ns


    Although it was decided that the hands-on time was 2 dayster, Yuichi and Yuya Miyada would not believe Li Yaoxiang so easily. After all, in these past years, Li Yaoxiang made various excuses to dy their actions more than once.


    This had to make them highly doubt whether Li Yaoxiang really wanted to avenge the ninjas.


    "You said two dayster, how should you act in those two days?" Middle-aged Genin, Miyada Yuya looked towards Li Yaoxiang with a solemn expression.


    They did not wait for Li Yaoxiang to reply.


    Fortunately, the vegetable seller sitting by the side directly ridiculed: "What''s wrong? You said to act in 2 days, you don''t just want to perfuse us right? Don''t you usually have a lot of ns? Are you going to act now with no preparation?"


    Both tried to probe Li Yaoxiang.


    Obviously, if Li Yaoxiang couldn''t tell the truth, they wouldn''t give up today!


    Li Yaoxiang''s heart was gradually bing indifferent to the constant entanglement of these two people. Originally he intended to dy for a while. After he left Konoha, it wouldn''t matter how these two guys will toss. But since the situation has developed to such a point. Then, Li Yaoxiang had to change the n of ''Leave Konoha''.


    Immediately, Li Yaoxiang pretended to be serious and began to exin the n, as if he did not notice the imperfections in their tone: "We only have three people. Since everyone will go out on that day, then of course, the more we kill, the better it is! First of all...


    Li Yaoxiang recounted the whole course of action. Including the ce and time of the action, the timing of starting, etc., all are arranged very clearly.


    Seeing that Li Yaoxiang didn''t seem to be perfunctory, the tense atmosphere in the shop was relieved. The two people also started discussing Li Yaoxiang in some detail.


    After the discussion, the time was almost 9 o''clock.


    It would be inconvenient for them to stay any longer. After all, walking on the streets of Konoha at night made it easy to attract the attention of Konoha''s Ninjas.


    As usual, to avoid being discovered about their rtionship, they didn''t leave the shop at the same time.


    The first to leave was the vegetable seller.


    After a while, it was middle-aged Genin Yuya Miyada''s turn. However, just as Miyada was about to leave, Li Yaoxiang stopped him at this moment: "Yuya, wait. I have something to discuss with you."


    Miyata Yuza, who was about to leave, stopped. He mistakenly thought that Li Yaoxiang was looking for an excuse to back away, and he turned around badly while expressing words that threatened Li Yaoxiang: "I tell you! Don''t"


    But before he finished talking, he saw a pair of scarlet eyes, which caused his vision to spin around. Then there was nothing.


    After a while, Miyada Yuya walked out of Li Yaoxiang''s shop as if nothing had happened.


    ...


    Early the next morning. The sky was just getting bright.


    Li Yaoxiang walked out of the house.


    In the past, he always went out at 9 o''clock and then went to the store to open the shop. But today was two hours earlier than before; to prevent some people from discovering his whereabouts.


    Soon, Li Yaoxiang arrived at his destination today, which is the Hokage Residence.


    However, before he approached Hokage Residence, two Anbu ninjas suddenly appeared in front of him, blocking his way.


    "What do you want? Don''t you know what this ce is?"


    "Leave. Not everyone can get here."


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t care about their attitude and directly said: "I want to find Lord-Hokage. I have something to report to him."


    "If you have something, you can tell us directly. We will help you pass it up."


    Li Yaoxiang shook his head: "No, I don''t know who you are. I can''t trust you. I will see Lord-Hokage before I say it."


    Hearing Li Yaoxiang questioning them, the tone of the two Anbu ninjas became even worse: "Do you know what you are talking about? We are the elite troops under Lord-Hokage. Do you doubt our loyalty to Lord-Hokage?"


    Seeing the attitude of these two Anbu ninjas, he became more and more unhappy. Although the probability against him was tiny, Li Yaoxiang was still ready to use the darkening points at any time, just in case.


    But at this time, another masked Anbu ninja came out of Hokage Residence.


    The newly arrived Anbu ninja came behind the two and asked, "What''s wrong?"


    Immediately, two Anbu ninjas reported the situation to the new Anbu ninja just now.


    Judging from their attitude and tone of voice alone, it can be seen that the new Anbu ninja in front of him has a higher status than the two gatekeepers. And even if this new Anbu ninja was masked, Li Yaoxiang recognized who he is!


    White hair. ck mask.


    Who else would it be, if not Hatake Kakashi?


    Even if masked, Li Yaoxiang could recognize him. However, based on Kakashi''s tone and speech, the Kakashi at this time was still in a very indifferent stage. He might not have recovered from the shadow of the previous events yet.


    It was only a while ago that Shimura Danzo sent ''Yamato'' over and over again to try his Sharingan again and again.


    However, when he reported the situation of an assassination attempt to his colleagues to Sarutobi Hiruzen, Kakashi just took it normally.


    How is this Kakashi be so indifferent? Why did he give up just like that?


    After understanding the situation, Kakashi came to Li Yaoxiang: "You can tell me anything. I will report it for you. If you don''t want to say it, please go back. I can''t let you in."


    Kakashi''s words were like a hammer. There was absolutely no room for twisting.


    "If it is you, then I can tell you."


    "Oh? Do you know me?"


    "No, but I think you are two higher-levels than them. You shouldn''t look like someone who will betray Lord-Hokage."


    "En. Then say it."


    "I learned that in two days, someone wanted to be against Konoha''s ninja. So, I came over to report to Lord-Hokage."


    After he said the words, the atmosphere on the scene immediately became serious.


    Kakashi waved his hand, indicating the two Anbu ninjas to leave.


    Xiu!


    Xiu!


    Two sounds. Two Anbu ninjas suddenly disappeared.


    Kakashi said coldly: "Come with me, I will take you to see Lord-Hokage."


    Li Yaoxiang followed Kakashi.


    They passed various corridors and stairs and arrived at the Hokage room.


    ....


    Kakashi whispered in Sarutobi Hiruzen''s ear and described the whole process just now. Then, under the direction of Sarutobi Hiruzen, Kakashi left the Hokage room with a bang to begin investigating Li Yaoxiang''s identity.


    Only two people, Sarutobi Hiruzen and Li Yaoxiang, were left in the Hokage room.


    After listening to the news, Sarutobi Hiruzen, who was still dignified, immediately changed a kind expression and sucked a tobo pipe: "You said Someone is going to be harmful to Konoha''s Ninja? Where did you hear about it?"

 Chapter 19: Time To Execute The Plan

    Chapter 19: Time To Execute The n


    "Lord-Hokage, I heard this news in my shop. Two customers were drunk in my store and they leaked their n." Li Yaoxiang blushed and responded breathlessly.


    It didn''t look like a lie.


    "Un." Sarutobi Hiruzen nodded, "Who is this people trying to do harm to the vige''s ninja?"


    "Uh those two people are regr customers in my shop. One named Yuichi, who sells vegetables. The other is Miyada Yuya, a ninja."


    "They seem to be saying that they will act in two days. As for the specific details, I don''t know. When they were drunk, they only said a little. I don''t understand what they said is true or false, but I''m afraid things they said are true. I don''t want to see any Konoha''s Ninja injured, so I''m reporting this right now."


    During the story, Li Yaoxiang began to show a little nervousness. It really looked like an ordinarymoner that fears Konoha Ninja''s injury.


    Not long after, the masked Kakashi suddenly appeared beside Sarutobi Hiruzen and whispered Li Yaoxiang''s identity background in his ear.


    Sarutobi Hizaki seems the kind of person to wee people with a smile. But he still listened very carefully.


    After confirming that there was no problem with Li Yaoxiang''s identity, he replied: "En. Very good. I understood this matter. Thank you for telling us this news. You go back first. I will send someone special for those two people."


    Li Yaoxiang smile like an honest man who seemed to be in awe of Hokage, "Thank you. If it weren''t for the ninjas guarding Konoha, I wouldn''t be here still living in the vige safely. "


    After Li Yaoxiang left, Sarutobi Hiruzen turned to Kakashi instructed aside: "Send someone to check this person who sells vegetables, called Yuichi. And that ninja named Miyada Yuya."


    Kakashi did not answer.


    But just when he was about to leave, Sarutobi Hiruzen seemed to remember something, adding again: "The two people and including the one who just reported; sent people to monitor to see if there is anything abnormal."


    "Yes!"


    ...


    After leaving the Hokage room, as if nothing happened, Li Yaoxiang returned to the store as usual to entertain customers.


    On this day, no matter whether it was the vegetable seller Yuichi or the middle-aged Genin Miyada Yuya, they had no further contact with Li Yaoxiang. This was the approach proposed by Li Yaoxiang when nning how to act yesterday. To avoid arousing suspicion from others, both of them agreed.


    Because of this, in the process of monitoring their three people, Konoha''s Ninja found nothing unusual. Their lives were nothing special.


    However, after investigating the identity and background of these three people, the Konoha''s Ninjas found that they all have one thing inmon, that was, their family members were identally killed by Konoha Ninja during the fight between ninjas, and now, they were the only left alone in the family.


    After discovering this suspicious point, it made them believe a little bit more about the news given by Li Yaoxiang. However, Li Yaoxiang''s suspicion was not dismissed. After all, Li Yaoxiang''s family also had a simr ident. Therefore, they would not rule out the probability that Li Yaoxiang is an associate.


    After reporting the conclusions to Sarutobi Hiruzen, he did not pay much attention to it at this time. After all, the person involved was only amoner and a Genin.


    Even with the possible aplice Li Yaoxiang, as long as they are prepared, nothing will escape. Sarutobi Hiruzen felt that he couldn''t afford any big waves to happen. Therefore, he just sent someone to continue monitoring them.


    As for why not send Yamanaka n* people to spy on their real thoughts?


    [*TL note: The Yamanaka n (Yamanaka Ichizoku) is a family of shinobi found in Konohagakure. They specialize in mind-rted techniques, and they own and run a flower shop in the vige. They traditionally lead the Konoha Barrier Team.]


    The reason was very simple: even if they peep out that they really want to harm Konoha Ninja, then what? Can they kill the killer early? Obviously, this will not work. After all, there would be no proof.


    How would the Konoha exin to the mass that they nned to do harm?


    If they rashly deal with themon people but could not give any firm evidence, wouldn''t this chill the hearts of the vigers? How could the rest of themoner live in Konoha with peace of mind? Wouldn''t everyone start being afraid and live in fear?


    Therefore, no matter what Yuichi, Miyada, and the others have in mind, as long as they don''t do it, Konoha will not act on them. At most, they will only pay more attention to the suspects.


    .......


    Just like that, two consecutive days passed.


    None of the ninjas who watched found anything unusual. None of the three had any contact.


    It was peaceful, but it was not until the hands-on time reported by Li Yaoxiang that they discovered the anomaly.


    That is, Yuichi, the vegetable seller, hid a handful of kunai with a detonating charm at home. And today, he carried it on him. The same was true for Miyada Yuya. Only Li Yaoxiang with no abnormality. The store is still open as usual.


    Not long after, the two people joined together on one of the bustling streets.


    This street is one of the roads leading to the Academy.


    And their goal was also obvious: the students in the Academy or the ninja instructors.


    This was also the suggestion that Li Yaoxiang gave them, saying that it would be more convenient for them to start here. After all, the instructors have retired from the frontline for a long time, and perhaps their vignce would not be so strong.


    Also, even if the n fails, they can find a few "future ninjas" to back them up.


    To avoid arousing suspicion from the surrounding crowd, the twomunicated softly after the meeting.


    "Where''s Li Yaoxiang? Why didn''t Li Yaoxiange?"


    Yuichi, the vegetable seller, the first thought that came to his mind was that damned Li Yaoxiang must have shrunk!


    However, what made him didn''t expect was that middle-aged ninja Yuya Miyada patted his shoulder at this time and immediately covered Li Yaoxiang: "Rx, it''s okay. I gave him another task. If our side is exposed and attracts the attention of others, it may be easier for him to seed."


    Yuichi, the vegetable seller, his stomach full of anger disappeared when he heard the words.


    Immediately afterward, the two acted ording to n.


    Yuichi walked ahead and act first. After all, as an ordinary person, he can''t detonate the ''detonating charm'', so he still needed the ninja Miyada to be in the distance.


    However, not long after the distance between the two of them was opened and before they could even get close to the Academy, the two masked Anbu ninjas suddenly appeared in front of them, blocking Yuichi''s path: "What you nned has been discovered! Obediently surrender!"


    Yuichi was taken aback at first, and then his face became extremely hideous!


    "Damn it! Go to hell!" Yuichi roared loudly. He took out a kunai with a detonator cham attached to it and rushed forward.

 Chapter 20: Nothing to Lose

    Chapter 20: Nothing to Lose


    In the face of Yuichi''s sprint, the two Anbu ninjas on the opposite side behaved very inly. As if Yuichi''s attack was not worth mentioning to them. It was until the Yuchi''s kunai about to approach them, the two pupils hidden under their masks shrank suddenly!


    They felt the fluctuation of Chakra!


    One of the Anbu ninjas was shouted angrily: "Damn! Get away!"


    BOOM!


    The two Anbus shed one by one. All of them were far away from Koichi.


    Yuichi''s arm was blown up, and his body was heavily injured.


    The two Anbu ninjas were a bit lucky. They didn''t expect him to be so ruthless, to try hurting the students, and even to blow themselves up. Fortunately, they knew in advance that the other side had a detonator. Otherwise, they would not choose to deal with Yuichi first instead of dealing with Miyada Yuya first. After all, if Yuichi rushed into the Academy while they were subduing Miyada Yuya, the consequences would be really unimaginable.


    Seeing that Yuichi''s ability to act has been greatly reduced, one of the Anbu ninjas said to hispanion: "Look after him. I will subdue the other one."


    And just when 2 people are about to act, there was a loud noise again!


    BOOM!


    Koichi, who was only injured a short time ago, was blown up once again.


    And this time, the explosion was located in the head.


    No one found out that this detonation charm was actually hidden in his cor at the moment Miyada Yuya pped Yuichi''s shoulder.


    "Damn it!"


    Seeing this, the two Anbu ninjas cursed secretly. They never thought that the other side would be so ruthless too.


    If you don''t seed in one blow, you will die with them!


    The two Anbu responded very quickly. They stopped looking in Yuichi''s direction and rushed directly to Miyada Yuya.


    It''s just that before they got close, they saw Miyada Yuya sneered at them strangely. And then, an incredible scene suddenly appeared in front of their eyes. That is, Miyada Yuya opened his own ninja outfit, which was filled with detonating charms!


    What made these two Anbe ninjas most frightened was that Miyada Yuya also attached one of the detonating charms to his head.


    The situation was reversed in an instant!


    It was not the two Anbu ninjas that rushed over. Instead, Miyada rushed towards them.


    BANG!


    The two Anbu ninjas had no time to dodge. They were all blown away by Miyada Yuya''s "human flesh bomb".


    As for Miyada Yuya himself, it goes without saying that he died.


    ...


    Inside the restaurant.


    At the same time, when the Anbu ninjas and Miyada Yuya fought, Li Yaoxiang was entertaining the customers inside the restaurant as usual.


    "Boss! Collect money!"


    "Okay!" Li Yaoxiang wiped his greasy hands on the damp cloth on the table, "a bowl of white rice, a cup of green tea, a bowl of Dongbo meat; a total of 280 yen!"


    After there were no more customers in the restaurant, Li Yaoxiang''s original smiley face suddenly became cold. He took something out from the apron pocket. He took out a photo.


    That was a photo of Li Yaoxiang and a group of customers. Yuichi and Yuya Miyada were also inside.


    It was also the only photo they took together.


    He looked at the two people in the photo. Li Yaoxiang secretly whispered: "It''s probably over Yuichi Yuya If you want someone to me you, me only yourselves."


    Li Yaoxiang threw the photos into the stove. He just watched the photo slowly burning by the fire and shrank until it finally burned to ashes.


    That''s right! This series of things can be said to be nned by Li Yaoxiang!


    In addition to giving Yuichi and Miyada Yuya ns that day, Li Yaoxiang also used 7000 darkening points in the system mall and purchased the ''One-time Kotoamatsukami''.


    He changed Miyada''s thinking. He changed it to make Li Yoaxiang be the most trusted partner, and this action was done jointly by Yuichi and Miyada Yuya.


    Li Yaoxiang became Miyada''s backup n. If they fail, it is good that someone will continue to stick to their ideals.


    As for the detonation charms, this matter was also very simple.


    Li Yaoxiang, who was familiar with the anime, has not forgotten that Yamanaka n has a trick that can spy on the memory of the dead person''s head. Therefore, he arranged for Miyada Yuya to must explode the ''criminal evidence'' before they die! The Yamanaka n has no way to investigate because of it. Then, his rtionship with them would never be revealed.


    As for Li Yaoxiang spending a One-time Kotoamatsukami on an ordinary person, is it worth it? Li Yaoxiang, of course, would not consider this issue.


    As long as he can be out of Konoha''s sight and out of Konoha''s control, he was very confident.


    Even if it is ten or 100 or 10000, for him, it doesn''t matter! For Li Yaoxiang, his own safety was the most important thing at present.


    Compared with their lives, these 7000 points are nothing.


    .....


    After the incident, it was as expected by Li Yaoxiang. Some people from the Yamanaka n came over and took over the case.


    The purpose is to look into the memory of the dead man''s head to see if there are other potential associates. They all shook their heads when they saw the corpse immediately.


    This case was over. They would report the situation to Third-Hokage.


    ...


    Two dayster. Early in the morning.


    When Li Yaoxiang was about to open the shop, the masked Kakashi came slowly towards him.


    Li Yaoxiang pretended to be stunned: "Lord-Ninja, what''s wrong?"


    "The Lord-Hokage. Please."


    "Oh, I see. Wait for me."


    He took the board in his hand and put it back again, closing the door.


    Immediately afterward, he followed Kakashi and walked towards the Hokage Residence.


    While they were walking, Kakashi suddenly asked: "The two people you reported before are really going to be detrimental to the vige''s ninja, and they are now dead."


    Li Yaoxiang pretended to be shocked and then said a little regretfully: "Unbelievable... Why did they do this...?"


    "..."


    While Li Yaoxiang spoke, Kakashi inadvertently observed Li Yaoxiang''s expression and tone very carefully.


    The two said nothing more after that.


    .....


    Not long after, they arrived at Hokage Residence.


    Kakashi brought Li Yaoxiang to the Hokage Room.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen, who was still approving the document, put down the pen in his hand. He raised his head and looked at them kindly. He focused his attention on Kakashi first. After seeing Kakashi shook his head slightly to him, this turned his attention to Li Yaoxiang.


    "Li Yaoxiang, right?"


    "Hehehehe, Lord-Hokage, hello, hello. I did not expect Lord-Hokage to know my name. I feel so honored!"


    Li Yaoxiang''s performance was in ce.


    You can''t see any abnormality.


    Coupled with Kakashi''s ''shaking head'' just now, Sarutobi Hiruzen''s suspicion of him has weakened a lot.

 Chapter 21: The matter is over, hide from the sky

    Chapter 21: The matter is over, hide from the sky


    "Thank you very much for providing this information to us this time. The news you heard is correct. The two people really want to be detrimental to the ninja in the vige. Moreover, their goal is the Academy. If it weren''t for your warning, I don''t know how many people will be hurt from this."


    Appreciated by Sarutobi Hiruzen, Li Yaoxiang seemed to be very happy and scratched his head: "Hahaha, thank goodness. This all what everyone should do, after all. As a part of Konoha, I certainly don''t want to see anyone in the vige injured."


    "Un." Sarutobi Hiruzen nodded with satisfaction, "If everyone loves the vige as much as you do, then no such thing will happen."


    After saying these words of emotion, Sarutobi Hitoshi became a little lost.


    Li Yaoxiang also behaved somewhat lost.


    Silence for a moment.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen regained his kind tone and said, "You have made a great achievement this time. Have you ever thought of any rewards?"


    Hearing that Sarutobi Hiruzen wants to reward himself, Li Yaoxiang hurriedly shook his head, and his palms kept swinging in front of him.


    "No, no no, Lord-Hokage. I report that thing, not for reward. I really don''t want to see anyone injured in the vige."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s attitude towards Li Yaoxiang only felt more and more satisfied. He nodded, persuaded: "You don''t have to be polite. Rewarding you is a good thing for you and for the vige. It is a statement for everyone who loves the vige."


    Li Yaoxiang was a bit embarrassed: "Lord-Hokage, but."


    Before Li Yaoxiang refused again, Sarutobi Hiruzen interrupted: "I heard that your parents died in an ident. If you really can''t think of any reward, how about I engrave their names on the monument of heroes instead?"


    Speaking of which. Whether it was Sarutobi Hiruzen or Kakashi, Li Yaoxiang''s expression was carefully observed.


    However, they couldn''t find any clues. Li Yaoxiang perfectly showed the depression of recalling his deceased parents.


    Immediately afterward, Li Yaoxiang sighed and said: "Lord-Hokage, no need. If Lord-Hokage really wants to reward me, I hope Lord-Hokage will grant me permission to leave Konoha."


    "Oh?" Sarutobi Hiruzen was slightly surprised, "Why do you want to leave Konoha?"


    "Ahh, Lord-Hokage. Frankly, Konoha did bring me a lot of good times. But Konoha also brought me a lot of sad memories. I''ve never been outside of Konoha in my life. I want to go out for a walk. Just rx and take a look at the outside world."


    For Li Yaoxiang''s requirements, Sarutobi Hiruzen didn''t feel anything wrong.


    After all, Li Yaoxiang was the only one who left in his own family.


    Moreover, maybe Li Yaoxiang''s departure would be a good thing for Konoha.


    At least no one would remember Li Yaoxiang because his parents died in an ident.


    Silence for a moment.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen ultimately nodded: "Very well. I will sign an approval letter to let you leave here. If you need any help, just tell me. Also, Konoha will always be your home. You are wee toe back at any time."


    "Thank you, Lord-Hokage."


    "Well, then you go back first. After the approval isplete, I will let someone send it to you."


    After that, Kakashi took Li Yaoxiang and left Hokage Residence.


    The two people''s suspicion about Li Yaoxiang waspletely eliminated because of the end of this matter.


    But what they would never know is that the behind-the-scenes nner of this whole incident was the Konohamoner, Li Yaoxiang himself, who seemed to be honest and had no problems in front of them!


    In order to win their trust! In order to get this approval letter from Konoha! Regarding this everything was under the control of Li Yaoxiang!


    As for why didn''t he use Kotoamatsukami directly on Sarutobi Hiruzen? Hehe. Why would Li Yaoxiang do such a thankless thing?


    Not to mention how high the risk of doing so, if you are not careful, clues will be found, and he can be tracked. Even if he is so lucky that he hasn''t been discovered, what will happen to the darkening after that?


    Without Sarutobi Hiruzen, the ''natural'' darkening teammate, wouldn''t darkening Naruto cost more in the future? Therefore, a handy darkening tool like Sarutobi Hiruzen still makes him authentic, which is in the best interest of Li Yaoxiang.


    ...


    3 dayster.


    The approval to leave Konoha came down. Li Yaoxiang also sold his property in Konoha.


    However, before leaving Konoha, Li Yaoxiang came to Konoha''s ''mission reception''. That is where Konoha Ninja wasmissioned to receive the mission.


    Upon hearing the news, Sarutobi Hiruzen soon sent an Anbu ninja toe and ask about the situation.


    "Lord-Hokage, please."


    Li Yaoxiang followed the Anbu ninja again and came to the Hokage room.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen sucked the tobo pipe and asked, "I heard that you want to hire a ninja to escort you away from Konoha? What''s going on? Do you have any problems?"


    Li Yaoxiang bowed his head with a stern expression: "No, no no, Lord-Hokage. I haven''t encountered any difficulties. I was just thinking, I have also made some savings in Konoha in these years, and before I leave, I want to give back some to the vige. And I grew up so old, lived in Konoha for so long, and have nevermissioned a ninja mission. Isn''t that justified? Hahaha. I also want to try the experience ofmissioning a ninja."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen nodded, then wondered: "But why do you call Uchiha Itachi for this mission? Do you know him?"


    "Haha, Lord-Hokage, Uchiha Itachi is the genius youngster of the Uchiha n this generation. This news has spread throughout the vige. I''ve never really thought about it until now. I have lived in Konoha for so long and have never met the vige''s genius ninja. Isn''t that a joke? So, I named him. And... And..." Speaking of which, Li Yaoxiang seemed a little embarrassed. He immediately continued: "And my budget, among Konoha''s many geniuses, Uchiha Itachi is the most suitable."


    Hearing this, Sarutobi Hiruzen froze. Then heughed heartily.


    It''s all so clear.


    Why wouldn''t Sarutobi Hiruzen understand Li Yaoxiang''s shyness now?


    The suspicion about Li Yaoxiang was eliminated again.


    As for the real purpose of Li Yaoxiang, of course, it would not be as simple as he said on the surface. Li Yaoxiang didn''t feel that he had just escaped from a dangerous situation before hepletely escaped Konoha one day. After all, Konoha was not alone in Sarutobi''s decision.


    There are three main reasons why Uchiha Itachi was named to escort him.


    1) Price problem


    Li Yaoxiang did not have that much money to hire Jonin. In this period, among the Genin, the most cost-effective, of course, is Uchiha Itachi.


    2) Security issues


    Among the Genins, it was Uchiha Itachi who was really worthy of the trust of Li Yaoxiang. After all, Uchiha Itachi''s character was there. Li Yaoxiang believes that Uchiha Itachi will definitely do his utmost to protect him, no matter who the opponent is.


    3


    As for the third reason, it doesn''t matter. After all, the third reason; Li Yaoxiang was just trying his luck.


    It may or may not be what he expected. If it''s not happening, it won''t be a loss for Li Yaoxiang. He can just let it go.


    After a heartyugh, Sarutobi Hiruzen said: "Okay, I understand. You go through the entrustment process. I will order someone to give you the best price."

 Chapter 22: Leaving Konoha

    Chapter 22: Leaving Konoha


    At the same time, after Li Yaoxiang left Hokage Residence. He ushered in the arrival of Uchiha Itachi.


    It''s just that after he heard that someone specifically named him and asked him toplete the mission, he had a little trouble.


    The person at the mission reception: "Uchiha Itachi, you must know that the vige rules are like this. No matter how good your results are, Genin can''t go out alone to do a mission. You have to choose your teammates."


    This period of Uchiha Itachi has just unlocked his Sharingan.


    That is when his teammates were killed recently.


    At the same time, it was also when he was disappointed with his father''s attitude. Because his father, Uchiha Fugaku, didn''t care about the death of his teammates at all, and he was proud that his son had opened Sharingan so early. Because of this, the temperament of Uchiha Itachi in this time became a bit cold.


    "No need. I canplete the mission by myself."


    The person at the mission reception desk: "But, this ispletely out of the rules."


    Without waiting for the person at the task reception desk, suddenly one more person appeared in the room. This person was also wearing Uchiha n''s standard high-necked clothing and a 3-corner protective gear.


    This person was Uchiha Shisui.


    Soon after Uchiha Shisui appeared, he came behind Uchiha Itachi, patted his shoulder, and then said to the person at the mission reception desk: "I and Itachi will take this mission together. It should be okay, right?"


    After Uchiha Itachi saw the person was Shisui, his indifferentplexion also softened a lot: "Big Brother Shisui!"


    The two looked at each other. He nodded. Then, he looked towards mission reception, waiting for his reply.


    The result was very clear.


    With Uchiha Shisui''s lead, the people at the mission reception will not look for trouble and offend Uchiha n''s people: "Hahaha, fine. I will submit your message here."


    Two people left the mission reception. Walk side by side on the street.


    ....


    Shisui: "Itachi, I understand how you feel. But since ourpanions have sacrificed their lives for you. Then we should live better. Together with their share of work. Together to protect this beautiful home. I hope you can understand this truth."


    Compared to other people. Uchiha Itachi''s attitude towards Shisui was obviously much better. He did not answer. But he was seriously thinking about what his Big Brother Shisui said.


    Shisui did not bother anymore.


    After a while, Shisui continued to say: "I will not carry out this mission with you. I will hide in the dark and observe carefully. I hope your performance will not disappoint me."


    ...


    Early the next morning, Li Yaoxiang packed his clothes. Then he left to wait at the mission reception.


    It didn''t take long.


    He soon saw Uchiha Itachi as a child and came here on time.


    Seeing Uchiha Itachi, Li Yaoxiang immediately went up: "Looking at your clothes, you should be Uchiha Itachi? Hello, I''m your client this time, Li Yaoxiang. Pleased to work with you."


    Li Yaoxiang held out his right hand and wanted to shake hands with Uchiha Itachi.


    Li Yaoxiang thought he would be rejected. Instead, Uchiha Itachi really shook hands with him and thanked him kindly.


    "Hello, I am Uchiha Itachi. Thank you for trusting me, and named me to take this mission. I will escort you to the destination safely."


    This scene slightly surprised Li Yaoxiang.


    Li Yaoxiang was familiar with the original series. But it''s very clear that during this period, Uchiha Itachi, who has experienced all the deaths of his teammates, has be much colder in character. This made him wonder why Uchiha Itachi would be so friendly towards him.


    "Good, good!" After a few praises, Li Yaoxiang continued, "Uh, you''re the only one?"


    It was strange to see Uchiha Itachi alone.


    As far as he knows, ording to Konoha''s rules, Uchiha Itachi, who was still a Genin, should not be able to take a mission out of the vige alone.


    Uchiha Itachi said with a smile: "Rx, Mr. Li. Your mission is just C-Rank''s Escort Mission. I canplete it by myself. There will be no problems."


    Hearing Uchiha Itachi''s words, Li Yaoxiang was still a little worried. It''s not that he doesn''t believe in Uchiha Itachi''s ability. But more concerned about a Jonin hiding in the distance, secretly protecting Uchiha Itachi the Genin.


    To avoid causing suspicion from others, before leaving the sight of these ninjas, Li Yaoxiang decided to continue to maintain his ''sincere'' appearance.


    "Hahaha! You are the genius ninja in the vige. How could I be uneasy? Don''t get me wrong. I''m just curious. I specifically entrusted you to ept this mission. I just want to know you more. I hope you don''t mind."


    Uchiha Itachiughed, saying he didn''t mind.


    The reason why his attitude towards Li Yaoxiang was so friendly was that he did not want to disappoint Shisui. He knew that Shisui in the vicinity was watching him. Therefore, facing the ''customer'' Li Yaoxiang, he did his best to show a friendly attitude.


    After the short exchange, the two went outside the vige.


    ...


    Konoha Vige, Root base.


    This is underground in a hidden ce in Konoha Vige. All around is covered with huge roots. The air is filled with a thick humid smell of mud.


    At this time, Shimura Danzo was at the base, handling some of his daily official duties.


    At this moment, a Root Ninja with a cough came to Shimura Danzo and reported to him: "Cough! Cough! Cough! Lord Danzo, just now someone reported that a viger got a Third-Hokage''s approval. An approval about leaving the vige."


    Shimura Danzo stopped his official duties. His expression became slightly angry, questioning: "Hiruzen? Is he getting older and more confused? How can he let people leave the vige casually? ... Who''s leaving the vige?"


    Root ninja: "Cough! Cough! Cough! His name is Li Yaoxiang."


    Immediately after this, Root Ninja, who coughed from time to time, told him about Li Yaoxiang''s message and what happened recently. Even about Li Yaoxiangmissioned ninjas to do an Escort Mission for him.


    Shimura Danzo''s face became gloomier after hearing it. He didn''t care whether Li Yaoxiang was innocent in this matter or not. As long as there is a hint of probability that bes an ''unstable factor'', Shimura Danzo would rather kill the wrong one than let it go! Moreover, as long as Li Yaoxiang died as soon as he left the vige, Konoha''s people would know how dangerous the outside world is! They all won''t hold the thought of leaving Konoha!


    "Who took over this mission?"


    "It''s Uchiha Itachi and Uchiha Shisui."


    Hearing that these two people took the task, Shimura Danzo''s face became a bit ugly. He knew very well that the two of them could not move yet. But with a little carelessness, Uchiha n may immediately create


    Before the vige was prepared, he didn''t want to take this risk.


    "No need to deal with the people of Uchiha n. Send someone to stop them for a moment to see if there is a chance to kill that Li Yaoxiang. If you really let him escape into a city then forget it."


    The reason why there is such a choice because as long as he enters the city of Land-of-Fire, Danzo won''t be able to move that easily anymore. Otherwise, it would be trouble for him if someone investigates it.


    You need to know that in today''s Ninja Vige, even if you are qualified to be a shadow in the vige, you still need the consent of Daimyo*.


    [*TL notes: A daimy (English TV: Feudal Lord, literally meaning: Great Name) is the political leader of a country. A daimy is responsible for all decisions concerning their country, from alliances to the annual budget to the privileges allowed to the country''s hidden vige. Daimy is, therefore, one of the single most important individuals in the entire country and holds the highest degree of political power, such that they are given special protection by the Allied Shinobi Forces during the Fourth Shinobi World War.]


    "Cough, cough, cough. Yes!"

 Chapter 23: Excellent Acting Skills

    Chapter 23: Excellent Acting Skills


    After leaving Konoha, Li Yaoxiang and Uchiha Itachi walked side by side on the dirt road together.


    There is a jungle on both sides of the dirt road.


    Naruto World''s roads are terrible. As one of the richest Five Great Countries, Land-of-Fire, they don''t have much idea about road construction. However, from Konoha Vige until Li Yaoxiang''s destination this time, the journey is said to be not long and not short.


    Naruto World doesn''t have cars, and they don''t have rental horses. So it is estimated that this section of the road will not go too well.


    It takes at least a half-day walk to arrive.


    Uchiha Itachi was already used to it like nothing. But Li Yaoxiang, a modern world person, doesn''t have such good footwork. So almost every hour he walked, he needed to stop and rest for a while.


    At this time, they just stopped on the road to rest.


    Li Yaoxiang sat on the boulder, patting his calf muscles, full of apologies: "Sorry, I''m stopping you to wait for me. I''ve never been outside of Konoha before. This is my first time walking a long road. Knowing this is the case, I should have rented a carriage and hurried away."


    Li Yaoxiang was still the same. Dressed up as an ordinarymoner. But he was so tired that he had to stop and take a rest, which was not fake.


    Uchiha Itachi maintained a shy smile: "It''s okay. It''s more convenient for me to protect you. If you get on the carriage, it might not be so convenient."


    In order to satisfy Big Brother Shisui. Along the way, Uchiha Itachi made great efforts to show his friendly side.


    Anyway, Li Yaoxiang was now a customer of Konoha. If Konoha Ninja''s reputation is damaged because of his bad attitude, this is not what he wants to see.


    In this way, the two guys who hide their true colors have a little talk about some irrelevant topics in the journey.


    Chatting and chatting.


    Uchiha Itachi, who couldn''t find a new topic, suddenly came to this sentence: "That''s right. Is Konoha bad? Why did you leave Konoha?"


    "Ahh~"


    Li Yaoxiang sighed and talked about his ''parents'' immediately. Then, he said he wanted to leave this sad ce, go out, and take a look.


    This was also the first time Uchiha Itachi talked with Konoha civilians, and the conversation was so in-depth. If Li Yaoxiang hadn''t said anything, he really wouldn''t realize that themoners of Konoha, even just living in the vige normally, was such a dangerous thing.


    After hearing this, he couldn''t help but be stunned. He felt a bit confused inside. It turns out that the vige is not a paradise for ordinary people. He became quiet for a long time.


    Uchiha Itachi involuntarily spoke: "What is the meaning of life?"


    This sentence surprised Li Yaoxiang. He didn''t expect Uchiha Itachi would ask him such a question at such a time and ce. If Li Yaoxiang remembers correctly, Uchiha Itachi asks this question to several people in the original work; Uchiha Shisui, Kakashi, Orochimaru, etc.


    The answer they gave will also be one of the main reasons for changing Uchiha Itachi''s final decision on which side to stand. In other words, if Li Yaoxiang wants to change the fate of Uchiha''s n, he might be able to start from this aspect now.


    He could try to shake Uchiha Itachi''s future decisions. However, Li Yaoxiang quickly rejected this idea. Because in his n, if Uchiha n was destroyed, it would be a rare incident that could help to darken Naruto.


    He wouldn''t change this ending because of his soft heart.


    "Haha! If you suddenly asked me such an esoteric question, I won''t know how to answer you." Li Yaoxiang turned his head around and unloaded the topic with embarrassment.


    Uchiha Itachi was also awakened by Li Yaoxiang''s response. He never expected Li Yaoxiang to answer his question. After all, Li Yaoxiang is only an ordinary person in his mind. How can he understand the difficulty of ninjas? How is it possible to give an answer?


    The reason why he said this question was just that after listening to Li Yaoxiang''s story, he felt emotional for a while, and it just kind of happened. It was purely self-talk.


    "It''s fine! It''s gettingte. Let''s go on the road." Uchiha Itachiughed.


    "Oh, oh! Okay, okay. I have enough rest. Let''s go."


    Just as the two were about to leave, Uchiha Itachi suddenly stopped Li Yaoxiang behind him and shouted violently in the direction of the northwest: "Who is it?! Come out!"


    With that said, Uchiha Itachi took two Kunai from his pocket and threw them towards the northwest.


    DING! DING!


    The Kunai suddenly bounced off.


    Immediately afterward, two masked ninjas came out from the shadows of the jungle: "As expected of the new generation of genius from the Uchiha n, you discovered us so soon."


    Uchiha Itachi''s expression condensed: "The Root...? What do you mean?"


    "It''s nothing. You give us the spy behind you, and your mission will bepleted. You can go back and report it. There is nothing for you here." One of the root ninjas said in a tone that could not be denied.


    The most intense reaction was Li Yaoxiang standing behind Uchiha Itachi. He was frightened and sat down on the ground. His face was pale: "No, no no! Lord-Ninja, is there any misunderstanding? How could I be a spy? I was born and raised in Konoha, and I''ve never been out of the vige. I also got Lord-Hokage''s approval before leaving the vige!


    Of course, this was just a y performed by Li Yaoxiang.


    To avoid a wave of chasers in the future, which will disturb his life, he will not reveal his identity unless he is forced to do so. And he also took advantage of this opportunity to see if he could test out if there was any Jonin following Uchiha Itachi.


    In case he guessed wrong and his life was threatened, isn''t there still a batch of darkening points that haven''t been used yet?


    Seeing Li Yaoxiang''s reaction, the two Root ninjas in front could not help butugh.


    Seeing this, Uchiha Itachi believed that Li Yaoxiang was just an ordinary person who was wronged. He posed in a fighting pose. Then, he turned on his Sharingan.


    He took out the short de that was equipped behind him and held it in front of him with a backhand grip and said with a serious expression: "You two are joking. I don''t think my client is a spy. Both of you please go back."


    "Sure enough Uchiha n''s people are really stubborn." One of them sighed with emotion.


    The two Root ninjas suddenly disappeared in ce!


    Immediately afterward, Li Yaoxiang''s ears heard the sound of ''ding ding dong dong'' constant weapons collision.


    The action of double-ying fighting, as an ordinary person, he couldn''t see clearly at all.


    During the fight, Uchiha Itachi even mmed: "Get away from here!"

 Chapter 24: Real Purpose

    Chapter 24: Real Purpose


    Two Chunins should be fighting Uchiha Itachi. But, with Uchiha Itachi''s current level alone, it would be impossible one against two.


    However, even so, there was the existence of Li Yaoxiang that cannot be ignored today.


    Because in addition to seeing the body of the two parties constantly moving during the battle, and the movements of their hands in the battle werepletely invisible, even the shadow cannot be seen at all.


    After hearing the anger of Uchiha Itachi, Li Yaoxiang was very nervous and quickly got up from a slumped state and fled away. At this moment, he still did not forget to maintain the identity of ''Konohamoner''.


    As for his real feeling, how exactly... Hehe. He has enough darkening points.


    Li Yaoxiang wasn''t worried at all.


    When Li Yaoxiang got up and haven''t run that far, the light from the end of his eyes suddenly swept the sparks produced when the weapon collided at close range!


    CLANG!


    When Li Yaoxiang saw exactly what was going on, the two kunai had already been shot to the ground in front of him, plunged into the soil separately.


    As expected! Things are were not so simple! Sure enough, someone followed Uchiha Itachi. Otherwise, it was impossible for someone to throw some kunai to save Li Yaoxiang.


    When Li Yaoxiang raised his head, there was already an extra figure in front of him. It was a ck-clothed wearing a high cor with a red and white fan pattern on the ck-clothed back!


    Seeing this person''s hairstyle. Seeing this person''s clothing. Seeing the 3-corner protector Kinoe on the costume. Li Yaoxiang knew that the person was Uchiha Shisui!


    On the surface, he was still at a loss, but in fact, Li Yaoxiang''s heart was already secretly overjoyed Because this is the third reason why hemissioned Uchiha Itachi to escort him!


    The reason is to elicit Uchiha Shisui! The purpose is to naturallye into contact with Uchiha Shisui without being suspected!


    It''s just that when things have developed in this situation, his life looks as if he ispletely in the hands of others. The enemy simply ignored him. And Uchiha Itachi and Uchiha Shisui; apart from treating him as an ''item'' to protect, they also no longer paid any attention to him.


    "Damn it!"


    During the battle, Uchiha Itachi unwillingly cursed. He immediately yelled, "Sorry Big Brother Shisui! I let you down!"


    Uchiha Shisui, who held Li Yaoxiang behind him, although his eyes never left the enemy for a moment, his mouth responded naturally: "It''s okay! You can hold back two root ninjas; that''s already very good. I also didn''t expect for two Root Ninjas to even intervene in this kind of thing."


    "Uchiha Shisui, ignore this matter."


    "The Root will not let dangerous signs out of the vige."


    Uchiha Shisui shook his head: "I don''t know what a dangerous sign is. I only know that he is not only our client, he is also a viger of Konoha! I have an obligation to protect his safety."


    After that, Uchiha Shisui also opened Three-Tomoe Sharingan.


    He rushed in to fight.


    .....


    In a moment, the two sides fought for no less than a hundred rounds.


    The fighting process seemed very intense and very long.


    But for Li Yaoxiang, these things happened only in a split second. He only saw the air around him has many sparks shing. Then all kinds of weapons were bombed to the ground.


    Judging from the current situation, it is Uchiha Itachi and Shisui who have the upper hand. Otherwise, they would not be able to fight while blocking all the enemy''s attacks on Li Yaoxiang. If it were not for the safety of Li Yaoxiang, the battle might have ended long ago.


    The Root ninjas, who were at war with Uchiha Shisui, the leader of this operation, also secretly suffered. They seriously underestimated Uchiha Itachi''s strength.


    They initially thought that as long as one person blocked Uchiha Itachi, the other person could attack Li Yaoxiang. But the two Chunins were not worthy for Uchiha Itachi, a Genin.


    Seeing that things did not go the way they expected, the leader quickly exchanged nces with several colleagues. They nned to retreat first. When they encounter an opportunity on the way, they can start again.


    It''s just that his idea is doomed to impossible.


    As previously stated, the reason why Li Yaoxiang chose Uchiha Itachi to protect him was that he took a fancy to his sense of responsibility and the importance he attached to the vige and Uchiha n''s reputation. Now, with the appearance of Shisui, it would be more impossible that Li Yaoxiang would have an ident.


    Immediately, three of them leapt together with great tacit understanding and quit the battle.


    The three looked at each other and nodded.


    Immediately after a few shes, they left the scene.


    The appearance of this scene made Li Yaoxiang and others who remained at the scene a little dazed. They didn''t know why the Root ninjas gave up so easily.


    For a moment, they did not dare to rx his vignce. The tense moodsted for a while.


    It was found that there were no abnormalities or any traps. The tense atmosphere eased down.


    Li Yaoxiang immediately acted very excited and very grateful. He held Uchiha Itachi''s and Uchiha Shisui''s hands and thanked both of them: "Thank you! Thank you! Thank you for saving me! Otherwise, I would really be killed this time!"


    Uchiha Shisui''s character and attitude were obviously much softer than Uchiha Itachi. Also, better atmunicating with outsiders. He put his hands on Li Yaoxiang''s hands and patted them, trying to ease Li Yaoxiang''s emotions.


    "You''re wee. Rest assured, as long as we are here, we will guarantee your safety. When we arrive in a town, they won''t dare to mess around anymore. You should be in no danger."


    "Oh! Good, good! Thank you! Thank you very much!"


    .....


    On the next journey.


    Since his existence has been exposed, and the danger of the mission has increased, Uchiha Shisui has no ns to hide himself anymore.


    Three of them headed towards the town and continued on their way.


    However, after the appearance of Uchiha Shisui, Li Yaoxiang has more topics to talk about than when it was at first.


    He talked a lot. He looked like he found a great rare treasure. The questions one after another never stopped.


    Fortunately, Uchiha Shisui''s character was more patient and not bored by it. Almost everything that Li Yaoxiang asked, he answered. As a result, the rtionship between the two parties has be more harmonious.


    "By the way, I saw your eyes just now suddenly became red. How did this happen?"


    "This is Sharingan. Only people from our Uchiha n can use it."


    "Then this Sharingan, is there anything special? Why must you use it when you fight?"


    "Sharingan can"


    Due to the topic of conversation is not a secret matter, Uchiha Shisui was happy to answer Li Yaoxiang.


    But as the topic of chatting between the two parties grew deeper, Li Yaoxiang finally asked the most critical question!

 Chapter 25: Out of control. The sky is high enough for a bird to fly through

    Chapter 25: Out of control. The sky is high enough for a bird to fly through


    "Wow, the Sharingan of your Uchiha n is so powerful. Wouldn''t so many people want to have it? Do you think a non-Uchiha can own Sharingan?"


    This seems to be a simple-minded problem, but it hides a huge amount of information.


    Uchiha Shisuiughed, did not answer. But the silhouette of Hatake Kakashi emerged involuntarily in his mind.


    Seeing this situation, Li Yaoxiang not only failed to constrain, but like a second stunner, he continued to ask without a wink at all: "Since you ninjas'' abilities are so weird. Say... Will there be an ability that can bring people back to life?"


    When the words came out, Uchiha Shisui''s walks suddenly paused!


    However, he soon recovered his natural expression.


    He knew the ability ''resurrect the dead'' that Li Yaoxiang said.


    Uchiha n does have this ability, which is Forbidden Jutsu ''Izanagi*''!


    *TL note: With Izanagi, the user applies an illusion to reality itself, giving the user control over what is and is not real for as long as Izanagi is active. Users typically do this in order to protect themselves, negating any injuries they receive or even their deaths. When this happens, their injured self fades away as an illusion and their non-injured self immediately materialises in the previous self''s ce.


    Izanagi is based on the Creation of All Things Technique, used by the Sage of Six Paths to turn imagination into reality. The process is exined to use spiritual energy  which forms the basis of Yin Release  to create shape from nothingness. Then, through the application of physical energy  which forms the basis of Yang Release  the shape has life breathed into it.


    It is impossible for him to say this ability in front of outsiders, because this ability is like having a ''second life''. Very powerful! Very attractive! Letting people know that Uchiha n has this Forbidden Jutsu, may make a lot more people want to have Sharingan. Uchiha n''s situation will only be more dangerous.


    Therefore, he did not answer Li Yaoxiang.


    Just nodded and smiled.


    But Li Yaoxiang was very interested. Though he did not continue to struggle on this issue. Because his purpose has been achieved!


    That''s right!


    The reason why Li Yaoxiang wanted to meet Uchiha Shisui was to contact Uchiha Shisui. Its main purpose is here!


    For the sake of reminding Uchiha Shisui that maybe someone has already transnted their family''s Sharingan! In order to remind him, Sharingan also has the ability of ''Izanagi''!


    As mentioned before, in order to prevent Naruto from falling into the power of ''Kotoamatsukami'', there are 3 solutions. And today Li Yaoxiang''s purpose is to nt the fourth solution! That is, trying to influence Shimura Danzo''s process of getting ''Kotoamatsukami'' smoothly.


    As long as Shimura Danzo does not get ''Kotoamatsukami'', then he would not be able to brainwash Naruto.


    Of course, it''s really hard to say if the solution will work or not. After all, in order to avoid exposing his true purpose and identity, Li Yaoxiang only served as a reminder in this n.


    Whether it can seed or not, for Li Yaoxiang, it''s all the same.


    After all, it was just a secret move he made while leaving Konoha.


    If you can seed, that''s the best. It doesn''t matter if it''s unsessful. He won''t lose anything.


    In this way, after asking his own key questions, Li Yaoxiang became less like a fool along the way.


    They never encountered a sneak attack again.


    It took about 7 to 8 hours before they arrived at their destination.


    That is, Land-of-Fire''s closest town to Konoha Vige.


    "Mr. Li, why don''t we stay with you in this town for a period of time? This is to ensure your safety. I''m really sorry from before. I didn''t expect Konoha to have that misunderstanding. After going back, I will definitely exin it to them! Rest assured, no one will trouble you anymore." Uchiha Shisui said politely.


    "It''s no problem. I also believe that Lord-Hokage will definitely return my innocence."


    Shied away for a while, Li Yaoxiang still can''t get rid of this enthusiastic Uchiha Shisui. He had to bear it.


    In the end, the three people went to one of the unremarkable hotels in the city as a ce to stay.


    During this period, the enthusiastic Uchiha Shisui did not forget to care about Li Yaoxiang''s future days: "By the way, Mr. Li. Don''t you have any ns after leaving Konoha?"


    (o) Li Yaoxiang cursed him in his heart. He did not show any abnormalities on the surface. "It''s nothing special. Probably just going back to my old business. Open a restaurant and make a living here."


    In the next few days.


    The two Uchihas made an all-out effort to protect Li Yaoxiang''s life.


    Li Yaoxiang had no choice but to find a''ji shop'' nearby, asking prices, investigating the market, and so on. He really put acting skills into his life abruptly.


    Uchiha Shisui didn''t want to leave until he confirmed that the Root didn''t send any more people to chase him down.


    "Mr. Li, during this period of time, I''m very happy to get along with you. You let me understand more deeply about what Konohamoner really needs. Although it is a pity, but we have been out for so long, it is time for us to leave."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Hahahaha, it''s okay, it''s okay! I can understand your difficulty! I hope there will be another chance to meet next time."


    In this way, the two left the small town.


    And Li Yaoxiang refunded the hotel rent overnight, rented a carriage, and walked non-stop toward a more prosperous town.


    At this point, Li Yaoxiang finally managed to get out of Konoha''s sight!


    From now on, the sky is high enough for a bird to fly through!


    ...


    2 dayster.


    One of the bustling towns in the Land-of-Fire.


    In a shop. The decoration and furnishings here are almost the same as Li Yaoxiang''s restaurant in Konoha. Only difference here is that this shop is quite wide and can hold several tables. And Li Yaoxiang became the new owner of this shop.


    Li Yaoxiang''s original n was to wait until he left Konoha safely, to remain anonymous, to be an ordinary person, and concentrate on darkening Naruto.


    But when he was rewarded by the system for the first time, he found that this idea was impossible to realize. Because darkening Naruto is so hard, too hard!


    From the first n, until now, he has seeded a total of 3 times, improving Naruto''s darkening degree.


    This is the first time, an increase of 1.6%. That time, Li Yoaxiang was promoted because Naruto found that no matter how hard he tried, he could not make friends.


    The second time, it increased by 3.0%. That time because Naruto discovered his identity, he couldn''t believe Konoha''s ingratitude.


    The second time, it increased by 3.4%. That time, it was after Sarutobi Hiruzen made his public appearance, the vigers leave one after another and returned to their own homes, and after Li Yaoxiang''s very ruthless words that crushed Naruto''s beautiful vision.


    Those three times add up to only 8%!


    This shows how difficult it is topletely darken Naruto to 100%.


    Only relying the higher-ups of Konoha, the dirty methods, the past disgusting truth, it is impossible toplete the mission of darkening Naruto. Therefore, it is clear that if Li Yaoxiang wants topletely darken Naruto, he must also make extra ns in other aspects besides Konoha!


    Otherwise, it would absolutely be impossible!


    Of course, he has already had a preliminary n for the ''extrayout''.


    Not to mention it now, judging from the current situation, the most important thing for Li Yaoxiang is how to deal with this batch of darkening points. Now, it can finally be used...

 Chapter 26: Consciousness Space, Exchange Items

    Chapter 26: Consciousness Space, Exchange Items


    After everything has settled down, Li Yaoxiang turned around and came to the consciousness space.


    This so-called consciousness space is actually a white space with two bedrooms and one living room. It can be said that almost everyone has such a consciousness space. The consciousness space of an ordinary person is nothing special. The doors of both rooms are open, and the ontological consciousness is the master of this space. You can go where you want to and do anything. What it means is that one''s consciousness can control one''s own body as much as it wants.


    Abnormal people, like those with multiple personalities, have many more rooms in their consciousness space. What are closed in these rooms are their second, third, fourth, and so on.


    When the main consciousness sleeps, is in aa, or wants to escape something and does not want to face it, the consciousness space will open the door of a certain room ording to different situations and different needs. At that time, the other personalities locked in the room can logically control the body of the main consciousness. The main body will therefore bepletely different in its voice, personality, habits, etc. Of course, suppose there are no special circumstances. In that case, ordinary people will never be able to enter this space by their own ability.


    The special ability given to Li Yaoxiang by the system is that he can enter this space at will and link his consciousness space with Naruto''s consciousness space, and indirectly deposits it in Naruto''s conscious space in the form of a second personality. And he can freely open and close the door in Naruto''s consciousness space.


    Normally speaking, Li Yaoxiang can awaken the sleeping Naruto and meet with him in the consciousness space. It''s just that Li Yaoxiang did not do so. Because he didn''t want to expose his identity in front of Naruto prematurely, in case Naruto bump into Li Yaoxiang identally. When that timees, it will make it harder to darken Naruto.


    After all, there is this impression towards him as the ''Owner of the Voice''. If Li Yaoxiang tells Naruto what he wants him to do, he will follow the instructions to do it. Therefore, over the years, Li Yaoxiang onlymunicated with Naruto by voice.


    Also, everything that happens in the space of consciousness, in reality, is only a matter of a moment. It''s like taking Naruto into the seal spacest time and meeting Kyuubi and Namikaze Minato. That incident seemed to be very long. But in reality, it only happened in a sh.


    And the reason why Li Yaoxiang came into this consciousness space this time was to use the darkening point. It was because the ''item'' he wanted to exchange this time was really not convenient to bring out into the real world. It can be easily destroyed or found by others.


    The reason why he didn''t redeem it until now was because he still had a huge problem with his own safety, and he needed to keep some darkening points just in case.


    The Ninjutsu Scroll that was given by Namikaze Minato and Uzumaki Kushina was, of course, also impossible to be brought to the real world. After all, it was a gift they gave in the space of consciousness.


    Open the system interface.


    [Host: Li Yaoxiang


    Darkening Target: Uzumaki Naruto


    Target Soul: 6/40


    Darkening Degree: 8%


    Darkening Value: 39000


    Mall: Slightly]


    As Naruto experienced more dark events, his soul value also grew. It took less than a month, and Naruto''s soul value has increased from 5 to 6 points. This also means it will only be more difficult.


    And the reward for the n this time was a total of 46000 darkening values. He spent 7000 points to buy ''one-time Kotoamatsukami'' to brain-wash Miyada Yuzai. So now there were 39000 points left.


    Li Yaoxiang''s first thought was not to increase his strength. Instead, he was looking for the most useful item in the Item column of the system mall! That is the crystal ball of Sarutobi Hiruzen*! The countless Naruto''s fans yearn for something even in dreams!


    [*TL note: Crystal Ball Jutsu. By peering into a crystal ball, the user can see the current activities of anyone whose chakra signature they know. Users can view subjects from any location, regardless of distance or potential obstructions, making it ideal for intelligence gathering. The Third Hokage uses this technique to monitor the vigers of Konohagakure and thus maintain public order.]


    Of course, redeeming this crystal ball was not only to fulfill that dream. Nor was it for something unscrupulous. It was to observe the movement of everyone in the Konoha Vige!


    After all, Li Yaoxiang, who wanted to darken Naruto as his ultimate goal, was destined to need information as it bes extremely important to him. This is no longer the Anime World that is full of enthusiasm.


    This is the real world! All people in this world have flesh and blood, their own thoughts, and their own goalsa real life.


    It can be said that there are many subtle information, news, or details that are not mentioned in the original work. Coupled with Li Yaoxiang''s butterfly effect, the future direction of development will be even more unpredictable.


    Therefore, in order to obtain the most urate information, as well as the various ns and trends that various important figures have changed due to the appearance of Li Yaoxiang, the crystal ball was definitely the most pressing thing that Li Yaoxiang needed at present. With the crystal ball, Li Yaoxiang''s operations in terms ofyout, or cooperation, or prevention would be much easier.


    Not long after, Li Yaoxiang finally found this crystal ball worth 8000 points in the item column of the system mall.


    Li Yaoxiang felt a little strange.


    ''Such a powerful thing... Is that cheap?''


    He hesitated for a moment. But he redeemed the crystal ball decisively anyway.


    Instantly, a crystal ball ced on a small pillow suddenly appeared in Li Yaoxiang''s consciousness space.


    Li Yaoxiang went to test it impatiently.


    He looked at the situation in Konoha.


    At the Academy... At a hot spring... At the Hokage Residence... Take another look at a hot spring... At the vegetable market ... At a hot spring ... At a hot spring ...


    "Cough! Cough! Cough!"


    ''Not bad! The picture is quite clear.''


    Li Yaoxiang finally understood why the price of the crystal ball was so cheap after switching several screens continuously. It turns out that the so-called crystal ball is actually not as powerful as Li Yaoxiang imagined.


    In addition to having the person''s chakra appears on the monitor, it is only within Konoha Vige''s area; not every ce can be checked. For example, the Root base, Uchiha n station, Noble n station, etc. These ces are set up with an anti-monitoring array. That''s why the crystal ball has so many restrictions.


    This also made Li Yaoxiang understand one thing that is why even with the crystal ball, Sarutobi Hiruzen''s n for Shimura Danzo and Uchiha n''s situation was not so clear.


    But that''s just the crystal ball of Sarutobi Hiruzen! For Li Yaoxiang, it was not a problem at all! Because he has a sufficiently powerful system! He couldpletely make up for this crystal ball''s weakness! As long as he spends a certain amount of darkening points, he can upgrade the crystal ball!


    Li Yaoxiang, not saying anything further, chose to upgrade.


    It took 5000 points to upgrade. The next upgrade requires 25000 points.


    After this upgrade, it covers the entire Konoha Vige, including even those ces where the anti-monitoring array is set up!


    Li Yaoxiang was very satisfied with this. Since the most urgent item has been got.


    Then the next step is to n to improve his own strength most effectively. It was the most in line with his current interests...

 Chapter 27: Improving Strength

    Chapter 27: Improving Strength


    There were only 26000 darkening points left.


    Li Yaoxiang looked at various items in the system mall.


    Rinnegan*, the price is 4010000 points.


    [*TL note: The Rinnegan (literally meaning: Sasra Eye) is reputed as the most exalted eye amongst the "Three Great Djutsu", the others being the Sharingan and the Byakugan. It is said that in times of disorder, one who wields the Rinnegan is sent down from the heavens to be either a "God of Creation" who will calm the world or a "God of Destruction" who will reduce everything to nothingness. The Rinnegan is characterized by concentric circles covering the eyeball.]


    Tenseigan**, the price is 4010000 points.


    [**TL note: The Tenseigan (literally meaning: Reincarnation Eye) is a djutsu introduced in The Last: Naruto the Movie. The movie''s novelization exins that the Tenseigan can be acquired when an tsutsuki is imnted with the Byakugan of a Hyga. Thisbination of the two ns'' Chakra transforms the Byakugan into Tenseigan. When Toneri tsutsuki imnts himself with Hanabi Hyga''s Byakugan, the transformation takes several days toplete. As the transformation advances, Toneri experiences increasingly painful pulsations in his eyes that subside with rest.]


    Sage Mode***, the price is 4010000 points.


    [***TL note: Sage Mode is an empowered state that can be entered by blending natural energy with one''s Chakra, creating senjutsu chakra. Sage Mode allows users to tap into the natural force of the world, opening up new techniques to them and allowing them to power up existing ones with the new senjutsu chakra.]


    Li Yaoxiang: ....


    Nauseating~


    It''s really expensive!


    But after reading the details given by the system, Li Yaoxiang felt that it is worth the money. Because these products sold by the system can be said to be of top quality, the bread contains all the capabilities of these products.


    For example, if Li Yaoxiang bought Rinnegan for 4010000 points, he can use all the capabilities of Rinnegan with ease, and it would be the most powerful type.


    Sage Mode is the same.


    If he purchased the Senju Hashirama''s Sage Mode, Li Yaoxiang could also use Wood Style.


    [TL note: Hashirama Senju (Senju Hashirama) was a member of the famed Senju n. He himself was hailed as the "God of Shinobi" for his unmatched ninja prowess. Hashirama sought peace for the shinobi world, and to that end, founded Konohagakure with his n, his childhood friend and rival: Madara Uchiha and the Uchiha n. He wouldter be the First Hokage (Shodai Hokage, literally meaning: First or Founding Fire Shadow) of Konohagakure. Although he could not achieve peace during his lifetime, his legacy and vision for the world would continue to shape the vige and the entire shinobi world even after his death.]


    [TL note: Wood Release (Mokuton, Viz: Wood Style) is a nature transformation kekkei Genkai, abination of Earth and Water Release. It was famously used by Hashirama Senju. In fact, it is not known to have naturally urred in anyone else, leading to it being regarded as impossible to use without having his cells. Because of Wood Release''s power and versatility, there have been various efforts to reproduce it after Hashirama''s death. Wood Release techniques aremonly affiliated with the Snake hand seal.]


    It''s a pity that these modities'' that make people drool looking at it, the current Li Yaoxiang wasn''t able to think about it.


    One word. Poor~


    Subconsciously ignoring these temptations, He turned his attention to themodities with rtively moderate prices.


    26000 points...


    26000 points...


    26000 points that can buy a permanent ''A-Rank Ninjutsu''. The permanent ''A-Rank Taijutsu''. A cheaper Kekkei Genkai and so on.


    [TL note: A kekkei Genkai (literally meaning: Bloodline Limit) is an anomaly of the DNA that allows the wielder to use unique techniques. A kekkei genkai''s name describes both the anomaly and the resulting technique. Most kekkei Genkai is passed down between generations of a n, an exception being Hashirama Senju''s Wood Release. Likewise, most individuals only inherit one kekkei Genkai, but Mei Terum is known to naturally possess two.]


    Li Yaoxiang, who was dazzled, first quit from the system mall. He started weighing the pros and cons.


    First of all, Ninjutsu was not necessary. Even if he was given an ''A-level ninjutsu'' for free, there still wouldn''t be a drop chakra in his body anyway.


    Taijutsu was also not appropriate. Even with this technique, he won''t have the strength and endurance to fight. His fleshy body was too far away from ninja''s.


    Thinking about it. Judging from the current situation, if he wants to effectively maximize these few darkening points and maximize the benefits, he can just purchase an ''innate talent'' so that he can extract the most reliable Chakra.


    After all, there are already Namikaze Minato and Uzumaki Kushina''s lifelong experience scroll in the consciousness space, waiting for him to dig. Just learn all the Ninjutsu inside.


    Even if Li Yaoxiang no longer uses darkening points to increase his strength in the days toe, he would still be a strong person. But herees the problem.


    Innate talents are divided into S, A, B, C, D Ranks.


    Innate talent like Namikaze Minato belongs to the A+ level. The price is about 25000 points.


    In other words, as long as Li Yaoxiang purchase this innate talent, his training innate talent can be as powerful as Namikaze Minato''s. Unfortunately, Li Yaoxiang was worried that if he redeemed this innate talent, but he still could not extract Chakra?


    For his own assurance, Li Yaoxiang decided that it was necessary to exchange a Kekkei Genkai first. And this was the most economical method anyway.


    Open the system store.


    His eyes turned to the Kekkei Genkai column.


    Uchiha n Bloodline, the price is 2510000 points.


    Hyuga n Bloodline, the price is 2010000 points.


    Uzumaki n Bloodline, the price is 2010000 points.


    ''Fuck!''


    Slightly eye-catching, but also expensive!


    After retreating and begging for it, Li Yaoxiang had no choice but to pull the Kekkei Genkai column to the very bottom.


    There were also Uchiha n, Hyuga n, Uzumaki n, and their price is ten times cheaper. That is to say, it is not as powerful as that 200,000 points. With that expensive one, he can immediately open Mangekyo Sharingan or immediately learn Eight-Trigrams Palm Mastery and so on. He will need to start practicing from scratch again with the less expensive one.


    His thoughts circte back and forth among these Kekkei Genkai.


    Li Yaoxiang''s eyes finally fell on Uzumaki n Bloodline.


    After all, there is Uzumaki n''s inheritance in the consciousness space. Perhaps he can learn the scroll easily with this bloodline? Besides, wouldn''t it be easier to control Naruto''s body in the future?


    Therefore, for various reasons...


    ''Uzumaki n Bloodline! I choose you!''


    With this decision, Li Yaoxiang''s mind also withdrew from the consciousness space.


    ....


    He returned to reality, not for anything else.


    Just to see what will happen to his body after purchasing the Kekkei Genkai.


    -20000 points


    The purchase was sessful.


    He waited for a while.


    ''Uh...''


    Nothing special seemed to happen. There was no warm feeling, no pain, no nothing. The body was still his body.


    Li Yaoxiang came to the restroom in the restaurant and looked in the mirror.


    Still the same, so handsome, no change.


    Li Yaoxiang, who still couldn''t believe it, simply closed the restaurant, not doing business today.


    He directly moved out the seats, sat on the ground, and began to read the scroll left by Namikaze Minato in the space of consciousness. In fact, without reading the instruction in the scroll, Li Yaoxiang also knew that Chakra is refined by mental power and cells.


    This knowledge, almost all Naruto''s fans know. But what Li Yaoxiang needed to understand is how to extract one''s Chakra.


    After reading the exnation of Namikaze Minato.


    Li Yaoxiang only felt that refining Chakra is really fascinating and dreamy...


    Although he had already had a preliminary understanding of refining chakras as early as when he first crossed into the world of Naruto, he did not want to learn it or train to be a ninja. The real training method is really unreliable. Most of it would be just meditation.


    In other words, imagine that your spiritual energy is alive. Imagine that your own cells are alive. Then, ording to one''s own imagination, imagine the picture of thebination of cells and mental power and slowly try to refine it until it seeds...


    Such a child''s y? Somewhat helpless, Li Yaoxiang could only try ording to this method.


    If it really depends on imagination, Li Yaoxiang has never been afraid of losing in that department!


    After all, before transmigrated, he could not less imagine...


    "Ahem! Cough! Cough!"


    Training start.


    An hour has passed...


    2 hours have passed ...


    Cell, spiritual energy, cell, spiritual energy,bination! Combine!


    About the third hour, Li Yaoxiang''s body really felt strange!


    He could clearly feel that a little energy that didn''t exist in his body was produced in the upper part of his abdomen. The moment this energy appeared, Li Yaoxiang instantly felt full of energy!


    Moreover, in addition to being full of energy, he also felt that his sense of hearing, sense of smell, and vision were much stronger! His power seemed to have grown a lot, and then there was a feeling of powerlessness.


    There were also some old injuries before he came to his world, which has all beenpletely recovered!


    It''s like looking down at a cell phone all day, causing neck pain. It''s like holding the mouse all year round, causing wrist and elbow pain. These troubles that had haunted Li Yaoxiang for many years were finally healed!


    ''What! So, this is Chakra!''

 Chapter 28: Ontological planning, mind returns to Naruto

    Chapter 28: Ontological nning, mind returns to Naruto


    After sessfully extracting Chakra, of course, Li Yaoxiang would not miss the opportunity for experience for oneself and Ninjutsu.


    Unfortunately, Ninjutsu is not as easy to perform as he imagined. At his age, not only did his fingers stiff and the seal was slow, even the Chakra that was finally extracted was exhausted before he could sessfully use Ninjutsu.


    In desperation, Li Yaoxiang had no choice but to continue to refine. He slowly umted Chakra.


    After practicing until he felt tired, he stops and then starts practicing hand seals. In this way, except for eating and sleeping, Li Yaoxiang repeated this process for the past two days.


    He didn''t open the restaurant for business either.


    Li Yaoxiang has always been obsessed with the process of cultivation.


    The feeling of having Chakra is really amazing!


    To confirm that it was not an illusion, Li Yaoxiang did a physical strength test. The result was really verified by him.


    ''Not an illusion!''


    In the past, he would only get up to the ground fifty times, and he would be exhausted. But since having Chakra, his physical strength has more than doubled. He continued to get up one hundred and fifty times without getting tired!


    Obviously, this is the difference between an ordinary person and a ninja.


    As for his body that has never been exercised, his physical fitness has also improved so much because of Chakra, not to mention those ninjas who exercise all year round. Sure enough, as described in the original work, there is a big difference between people with Chakra and people without Chakra. Just like Naruto, who was sealed by Chakra and almost like an ordinary person, there is no resistance.


    ....


    So, under Li Yaoxiang''s persistence and hard work, two days passed.


    Whether it is the amount of Chakra in the body or the speed of the seal, he has made very good progress. The time hase.


    He stood up from the cross-sitting position. Tried the simplest Three-Style Jutsu again. His expression condensed. Both hands form a seal.


    ''CLONE JUTSU!''


    Instantly, with the hand sealpleted, Chakra involuntarily flowed out of the body and flowed to the left-hand side. Immediately afterward, this Chakra formed a phantom.


    This is the phantom of a very fat Li Yaoxiang.


    At the same time, because the Chakra in his body became empty, Li Yaoxiang felt tired. n You don''t have to guess. It must have been too many Chakras entered during the hand seal, which caused Clone Jutsu to fail this time. However, Li Yaoxiang did not feel discouraged or lost because of it, but was very excited!


    ''Aftering to Naruto World for so long, I can finally feel the feeling of using Ninjutsu.''


    After finally experiencing for oneself, Li Yaoxiang''s curiosity was greatly reduced. No longer as fascinated by it as before.


    He took a break.


    Li Yaoxiang began to sum up his gains in the past two days and the conclusions he had reached.


    One, Chakra Reserves. The body is like a water ss. Chakra is like water. It''s easy to restore chakras. Even if you don''t do anything, as long as you have enough rest, your mental energy and cells will produce water by themselves until the cup is filled. Of course, if you add meditation, it will speed up the recovery. However, it is very difficult to erge the cup. This is definitely not an overnight matter.


    Every time he expands a little bit, he has to fill the cup with water first and then use the water to expand the cup little by little. Just like meditating and refining chakras at the beginning, Only by umting little by little can this be done.


    Two, hand seal speed. This problem is far more difficult than Li Yaoxiang imagined. What kind of Ninjutsu, Like Uchiha Itachi, that makes six seals in one second, or Ninjutsu that needs 21 hand seals to make Water Dragon Bullet in a few seconds?


    ''I''m bothered!''


    Compared with his hand seal speed, Li Yaoxiang really didn''t understand how they did it. Even if his physical fitness has improved a lot now, this is also a big problem for him.


    Li Yaoxiang wanted to be stronger on his own in a short time.


    Moreover, he couldn''t learn all Ninjutsu.


    It would be miserable if the result is inconsistent.


    Therefore, either don''t learn or learn as proficient as you want to learn! Learning will be of great help to your next n!


    There was no doubt that the key is the ''seal technique''.


    As mentioned before, Kyuubi will be one of the links in his next n that cannot be ignored. He must master the technique of seal and fully control Kyuubi. Whether it is for him or for Naruto or for other people, it is a crucial part.


    As for the ''Flying Thunder God Jutsu'' that most transmigrators choose, you don''t have to rush to learn. Anyway, judging from his current situation, there was a high probability that he won''t encounter any danger that requires him to escape. Moreover, even if he wants to learn it, he may fail. After all, ''Flying Thunder God Jutsu'' requires a certain amount of space innate talent.


    After drawing a conclusion, Li Yaoxiang did not n to continue practicing.


    It was also time to implement his main n. That is to expand the business and expand its influence through wealth, thereby intervening in the power center of the ordinary person world within the realm and intervening in the World of Daimyos!


    When he was watching the anime, Li Yaoxiang always felt confused.


    Why are there constant disputes in the Ninja World?


    Why is there a famine in Naruto World?


    Why are ninjas so powerful but have to obey the Daimyo?


    You must know that Naruto World''s technological level, except for having no inte, no mobile phone, and no car, is not that bad. There are also electric lights, lighthouses, running water, etc. With such a technological level, even if it is impossible to guarantee that everyone will be a big fish, it will definitely not make the World so bad!


    All of the above doubts, until Li Yaoxiang transmigrated to Naruto World and came to Land-of-Fire for a long time, he finally had a certain guess, that is, this World must not be as simple as it seems on the surface!


    There must be something strange!


    Li Yaoxiang also firmly believed that the truth here must have important materials for darkening Naruto! Therefore, he thought of an idea to be a low-key in Ninja World and a high-key in the ordinary person world. Of course, making the business big enough to intervene the Daimyo''s World seems a bit difficult, but for a transmigrator like him, Li Yaoxiang felt that it would be simple for him. With all the insights before being transmigrated and the methods of making money, Li Yaoxiang felt that he could crush anyone in this World! Including that rich "cardo(?)"!


    Li Yaoxiang was confident that even if he puts most of his mind on Naruto in the next days, he could still handle this matter well! Moreover, he thought he won''t fall behind in the training progress either!


    After clearing his thoughts, Li Yaoxiang didn''t n to put too much mind on his body. After all, he has already observed Naruto''s ''imaginary vision'' through Naruto''s consciousness space, and it''s almost time for it to be broken.


    The second step of the darkening n; to bring Naruto to the pinnacle of life...

 Chapter 29: Encouraging Naruto

    Chapter 29: Encouraging Naruto


    Konoha Vige. Naruto''s house.


    At this moment, Naruto''s small house was already filled with all kinds of thanks. There were too many people who have benefited from Namikaze Minato.


    In the beginning, only the vigers came to visit, but as more and more people visited, they either thanked or apologized, etc. Seeing some of this situation, some ninjas finally felt sorry and brought ''on the surface'' a thank you gift. Of course, this did not include those who were already informed.


    This also led to the fact that during this time, when Li Yaoxiang left Konoha, Naruto was almost busy socializing with each and everyone who came to visit.


    Although he was overwhelmed, Naruto enjoyed it. Because Naruto thought that the more enthusiastic everyone is and the more gratitude people gave to him, it meant that he became more popr.


    The long-awaited days finally appeared.


    And the time came on this day, the visiting crowd finally stopped. Naruto finally got the opportunity to go out for experience for himself to see his dream life.


    Naruto looked solemnly across the floor; it was filled with one after another thanks. He looked inside the closet. Now the clothes in the closet werepletely newno need to wear clothes like before.


    After getting a new coat at random, Naruto put it on directly. Then, he ran out. He walked on the snow in hurdles, but at this time, his pace seemed a lot joyful with a kind of impatient feeling and a big smile on his face.


    Not much time passed, the yful sounds of the children, ''hehe haha'', passed into his ears.


    Naruto was overjoyed. He sped up to the direction where the voice came out.


    What came into view was a group of children of his age who were frolicking in the snow.


    "Hahahaha! I want to y too! Let''s y together!"


    Naruto ran past with augh. He thought from the bottom of his heart that everyone would y with him and that they wouldn''t hate him as much as before.


    However, the reality ispletely inconsistent with his imagination.


    Heughed ''hehe'' and came to everyone, waiting for everyone''s warm wee. But everyone on the scene stopped the pstick. They stupidly stood there.


    The first reaction came from the parents who took care of the children. They quickly went to the child, and dragged the child behind them, then apologized to Naruto: "Sorry, Naruto. It''s gettingte, and it''s time for us to return."


    "Yes, yes. It''s been too long today, and the children are tired."


    "Yeah, there''s still some chores to do at home. I have to go to the market to buy food."


    With the first person uttered the words. Other people follow one after another.


    Naruto was only momentarily quiet and then said with a big smilepletely improperly: "Hahaha, it''s okay! Let''s y together next time."


    Witnessing everyone leaving at a hurried pace, Naruto turned around and ran happily.


    Not long after, he came to a group of yful children again. He asked to y together. It is a pity that the situation at the scene was exactly the same as just now. After the parents gave various reasons, they then rushed away with the child.


    "Hey~ It seems that it''s a littlete to go out today." He looked at everyone leaving in front of him again. The always cheerful and optimistic Naruto couldn''t help feeling a little lost in his heart, but he quickly reminded himself angrily said, "It''s okay! Go out early tomorrow!"


    .....


    Early the next morning, Naruto wanted to quickly experience the pleasure of having fun with everyone. He ran out without even having breakfast. However, the situation encountered was exactly the same as yesterday.


    The child''s parents said a lot of reasons and then quickly took the child away.


    This was the first day. The same was true for the second day. On the third day, it became more exaggerated. Naruto could not even find the children.


    At this moment, Naruto finally realized that something was wrong. Although everyone did not look at him with that kind of "disgust", they still avoided him as before.


    What the hell is this all about?


    ''Didn''t everyone give me gifts a while ago?''


    ''Didn''t everyone already ept me?''


    ''Why is this still the case?''


    Just as Naruto was about to be unable to ept the fact in front of him, Li Yaoxiang not only did not speak mockeries this time but also exined his confusion: "It''s normal for them to have this reaction."


    The appearance of the voice made Naruto calm down.


    "Why? Why is this normal? Didn''t everyone epts me? Don''t you hate me? Why do you treat me like this?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "What they agree with is your father, not you. Don''t you forget the fact that inside your body resides a demon fox? How does this allow everyone to approach you with confidence? How would they y with you feeling safe?"


    Hearing that it was because of Kyuubi that caused this; at this time, Naruto became even more nervous. Because the sealed Kyuubi inside his body was not something that he can change.


    "Then, what should I do? Do I have to live my old life again?"


    Li Yaoxiang exined patiently: "It''s very simple If you think about it. If the demon fox is not sealed in your body but sealed inside your father''s body, will everyone still be like this? They won''t need to worry about you."


    Naruto was stunned for a moment and then was a bit embarrassed: "But... but... isn''t dad dead? How do you seal the big fox to dad''s body?"


    "Hah..." Li Yaoxiang took a deep breath. He almost got mad by this second fool.


    It seems that the 8% ckening level really cannot change how much Naruto is.


    Naruto heard this ''inhtion sound'', and thought that the ''Owner of Sound'' would scold Naruto stupidly and other ufortable words. He was all ready to be scolded, but then there were no more words uttered.


    Hearing that Li Yaoxiang didn''t say a word for a long time, Naruto asked only weakly: "Don''t tell me..... Don''t tell me..... Is there really no other method other than sealing the big fox in my dad''s body?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "..."


    Li Yaoxiang tried hard to suppress his emotions. He kept reminding himself to be calm. What is to be done now is to encourage Naruto and let Naruto reach the pinnacle of life.


    Immediately, Li Yaoxiang changed his tone to coax a child for the first time: "Of course, there is a way! The reason why they are not afraid of the demon fox inside your body is because your father was the one who sealed it! They are rest assured because they recognized your father''s strength. It''s very simple, actually. As long as you practice hard and prove to everyone that you can be like your father and have enough ability to prevent the demon fox from harming everyone, everyone will ept you and y with you!"


    Naruto rekindled hope again: "Really... really?!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Of course!"

 Chapter 30: The first meeting, the only relative

    Chapter 30: The first meeting, the only rtive


    "Hahahaha! Great! Great! Then I want to train! I want to train hard! So I can prove to everyone that I will not let the big fox hurt anyone!"


    Although it was justmunication in his mind, hearing Li Yaoxiang said that there was a solution, Naruto couldn''t help but jump in joy in reality.


    It''s just that, before he was happy for long, he was stunned there soon, wondering: "But... but... how do you train?"


    "Naruto, please rx. I will take you to a ce."


    Upon hearing Li Yaoxiang''s words '', please rx'', Naruto was shocked for no reason in his heart: "You... you... will you take me to see the big fox again? I... I... Can I not see him? Grandpa Hokage said not to see the big fox again."


    Naruto did not forget what Sarutobi Hiruzen and the others told him in the Conference Hall. Moreover, the vigers were afraid of Kyuubi, which also caused him to feel a little frightened when facing Kyuubi. However, this feeling of fear was quickly dispelled by Li Yaoxiang.


    Becausepared to other people, Li Yaoxiang was undoubtedly more worthy of trust by Naruto. "Naruto, do you believe me?"


    Hearing this, Naruto only reacted an ''um!'' without the slightest hesitation.


    No matter who it was or what he said, as long as the ''Owner of Voice'' insisted on letting him do one thing, he would do it without hesitation! Because the "Owner of Voice" was his only rtive in this world.


    Naruto immediately rxed his mind and let Li Yaoxiang take him to another ce.


    ...


    After a while. In the consciousness space.


    Li Yaoxiang opened the door without permission. He came to Naruto''s room.


    At this time, Naruto in the consciousness spacey there motionlessly. However, his breathing was very steady.


    This is also the normal state of everyone in the consciousness space. If there is no special reason, it will never be possible to wake them up. And the reason why Li Yaoxiang chose to bring Naruto to meet here this time was that it was rted to his third-step n to darken Naruto, not to mention it now.


    ''That''s it''.


    Li Yaoxiang walked in front of Little Naruto.


    Poke his round face.


    Did not wake up...


    Poke again!


    Did not wake up...


    Poke again!


    An impatient Li Yaoxiang pulled his nose this time!


    "Ahhhhhhhh!!!" Naruto in the consciousness space covered his nose. Then, he bounced up, "Who?! Who?! Which scoundrel pulled my nose!"


    Take a look at left and right!


    In the end, his eyes fell on a handsome big brother. Ignoring the environment at this time and why he appeared here, he vigorously walked over to the handsome big brother, pointing at him and screaming: "You! You pulled my nose right?!"


    Li Yaoxiang ignored Naruto''s scolding.


    Getting along for a few years. Taking care of Naruto for several years. This was the first time Li Yaoxiang has close contact with Naruto. He squatted down. He smiled softly at Naruto: "What''s wrong? Don''t you even recognize me?"


    Hearing the voice, Naruto, who was very angry because of the pain on his face, became enlightened on the spot!


    He pointed at Li Yaoxiang: "Is... Is... Is... Is it you?"


    Li Yaoxiang''s voice- for Naruto, it''s impossible to forget even if he dies!


    But he really couldn''t believe that he and the "Owner of Voice" would meet one day!


    He didn''t think that the ''Owner of Voice'' is more than just a sound. That''s great.


    But this idea just passed away in a sh, so he didn''t dare to think about it again. Because he was afraid that the greater his hope, the greater his disappointment.


    Because of this, when Naruto saw Li Yaoxiang''s real face and made a sound that he was too familiar with, he did not forget to confirm. He was afraid of everything in front of him that it was just a dream that he had imagined. And this dream will soon end, and it will soon be broken.


    Li Yaoxiang stroked Naruto''s messy yellow hair and nodded. Then, Naruto''s tears couldn''t help streaming. He swarmed him! Holding Li Yaoxiang tightly!


    He was afraid that Li Yaoxiang would suddenly disappear.


    And Li Yaoxiang also involuntarily shed a tear because of Naruto''s action.


    Truthfully speaking, he has been in the Naruto World for many years, trembling with fear for years. However, this was also the first time Li Yaoxiang really felt the feeling of having a loved one waiting for him to ''go home''.


    Naruto was his only rtive in Naruto World. The feelings of both parties are so sincere.


    After wiping the tears and clearing up his mood, Li Yaoxiang broke apart Naruto''s hands tightly around his neck: "Okay, okay. It''s not that we won''t see each other again."


    Li Yaoxiang''s tears were gone. The mood calmed down.


    But Naruto was still crying in tears. Holding Li Yaoxiang''s clothes, he didn''t let go. "You... are real? Are you real? Are you real?"


    Li Yaoxiang put his hands on Naruto''s cheeks and wiped the tears on Naruto''s face with his thumb: "Fool, how old are you to still cry? Of course, I am real! Rest assured, we will have many opportunities to meet in the future."


    Naruto sniffed a few snots and said with a cry: "Why call me stupid again? Can you stop scolding me stupid again?"


    Li Yaoxiang smiled softly: "As long as you are not stupid, I will stop calling you stupid. Okay, stop crying. Quickly wipe your tears. I brought you here this time to teach you to be stronger."


    He initially thought that as long as Naruto heard the word ''be stronger'', he would stop. But Naruto didn''t want to. Compared to bing stronger,pared to making friends and ying with others, Naruto cared more about Li Yaoxiang. Since he was sensible, he has been apanied by this ''Owner of Voice''.


    Naruto looked forward with hope: "What''s your name? What should I call you?"


    Li Yaoxiang was also confused by Naruto''s question. He really didn''t think about this problem. But he said quickly, "Just call me big brother."


    Naruto was overjoyed. He stammeringly said: "I... I really... Can I really call you big bro?"


    Li Yaoxiang nodded.


    After receiving a positive response from Li Yaoxiang, Naruto immediately turned around, jumped, danced, and cheered. "Great! Great! I also have a big brother! I am not an orphan! I''m not alone! I have a big brother! I have a big brother!" Hopping and jumping.


    Naruto took Li Yaoxiang''s hands again and continued to jump. Until finally, Li Yaoxiang was tightly hugged again in his arms and murmured: "Big brother, don''t leave me alone anymore, okay?"


    The three-year-old Naruto...


    This was the Naruto that Li Yaoxiang has taken care of for 3 years since he was a baby.


    Li Yaoxiang did not answer or refuse. But his right hand naturally patted Naruto''s back, as if telling Naruto that; rest assured, the big brother will not leave you...

 Chapter 31: Harvest

    Chapter 31: Harvest


    After embracing each other for a while, Naruto stopped crying. He took a little distance from Li Yaoxiang. Immediately, he took a serious look at Li Yaoxiang''s appearance up and down, fearing that he would forget him.


    Without waiting for what Li Yaoxiang said, Naruto quickly ttened his mouth andined: "Big brother, why did you only meet me now?"


    As mentioned before, Naruto always thought that it was just a voice talking to him in his mind. Even if he sees the true face of Li Yaoxiang today, he has never thought about whether there is a person like Li Yaoxiang in the real world anyway.


    He just wondered why the big brother obviously has this ability. And now that big brother was willing to meet him.


    "Naruto, the big brother doesn''t meet you for no reason."


    Naruto didn''t interrupt Li Yaoxiang, with his gloomy eyes, waiting for Li Yaoxiang to continue.


    "Naruto, in fact, we canmunicate in such a special way. Other people are not like us. Before you, you were young and ignorant. If you rashly meet with me, you might identally let others discover my existence... Whether it is dangerous to you or to me..."


    Naruto was puzzled: "Why is it dangerous? Am I not having a big brother? Why is it dangerous?"


    "Naruto, did you forget what I told you? The people in the vige are cruel. A demon fox is sealed inside you, then you are a dangerous presence for them. They will not remember the contribution your father once made to the vige. As long as they find anything abnormal about you, they will ruthlessly deal with you or me."


    Naruto retorted nervously: "No! No! After everyone knows my identity, don''t they alle to apologize? And big brother, didn''t you say it? As long as I work hard, let everyone rest assured, they will ept us.


    "Naruto... Are you sure everyone in the vige is like this?" Li Yaoxiang stared at Naruto seriously.


    Naruto, who originally wanted to say something, got the words stuck in his lips. Because he remembered those who apparently knew his identity but had always ignored him and allowed others to bully him. He remembered the cold faces of those crowd. He recalled that even though the vigers understood his identity, they deliberately alienated him because of fear of danger.


    Although he has been very reluctant to believe that there is such a nasty side in this world, the actual situation made him believe the fact in front of him.


    Facing Li Yaoxiang''s stern eyes, Naruto could no longer think of a good reason to deceive himself.


    "Then... that... the big brother meeting me now. Will they find you? Are you in danger?"


    Naruto was still kind-hearted as always. He was worried that Li Yaoxiang, the big brother, would be in danger too.


    ''I never thought about my situation that way.''


    Li Yaoxiang smiled slightly and messed Naruto''s hair: "Naruto, don''t you want to make friends? How can I be a big brother but can''t help you? And, Naruto, you''re grown up now, aren''t you? I believe you can take care of yourself."


    This seemingly normal sentence contains a huge meaning that Li Yaoxiang inadvertently revealed. Unfortunately, Naruto could not understand the true meaning of this sentence. He thought Li Yaoxiang praised that he had grown up and was sensible, which means there was no problem. He wascent and hummed.


    At the same time, Li Yaoxiang also deliberately dismissed the topic at this time: "Okay, let''s stop talking about these. Today, your brother here is going to tell you how to be stronger! Don''t bezy because you have to work hard, alright?"


    "En!"


    Immediately afterward, Li Yaoxiang began to teach Naruto how to refine Chakra.


    Since childhood, Li Yaoxiang taught speech and literacy to Naruto. Naruto, in this life, has a much better understanding.


    It didn''t take long to teach, and Naruto soon understood the knowledge taught by Li Yaoxiang.


    Immediately after Li Yaoxiang reassured him that there was still a chance to meet, Naruto reluctantly withdrew from the consciousness space.


    ...


    Returning to reality.


    The surrounding environment has not changed. The sky has not changed. In the world, only a split second has passed.


    The carefree Naruto, in the blink of an eye, left behind those unhappy things.


    What vigers deliberately alienated him, what children did not y with him, all gone.


    He ran home with anticipation, leaving only one word in his heart.


    Training!


    Training!


    Training!


    ...


    Not long after, Naruto quickly stumbled back home.


    Immediately afterward, he immediately sat in meditation in ordance with the method taught by Li Yaoxiang.


    It didn''t take long for Naruto to be taken aback and flustered quickly in his mind: "Big brother! Big brother! Sess! Sess! I have the Chakra you said above my abdomen!"


    Li Yaoxiang was not surprised at Naruto''s training speed, even anticipated it.


    The reason for this result is also due to Li Yaoxiang''s previousyout n. A long time ago, he had already decided on the 2nd Step ckening n to let Naruto go to the Peak of life. Since Naruto is going to be a Peak in life, making Naruto be a genius must be one of the links in this n.


    This is why Li Yaoxiang had that series of actions before.


    Telling the truth, parents and son meet, threatening Kyuubi.


    This seems like a series of unrted actions, but the truth behind it was Li Yaoxiang''s tricks! And these tricks were not only as simple as they seem on the surface. It allowed him to get a lot of profit from it!


    The reason why Li Yaoxiang was so determined is that as long as Kyuubi stands down, Naruto can be a genius of extraordinary talents. The reason was very simple. Because he was familiar with the anime, it became clear. Until now, what hindered Naruto from bing genius, that is, Kyuubi. This guy.


    After all, even with Kyuubi''s interference, his innate talent could rival Uchiha Sasuke, who was the chief student. What''s more, with no interference from Kyuubi, now? Therefore, Li Yaoxiang only thought that this situation is normal.


    3 years of nning.


    This was just the moment when he harvests the results, and these results will continue toe!


    Li Yaoxiang did not feelcent because of this achievement. Because he knew that this was just the beginning.


    Seeing Naruto started to feel a little smug. As his big brother, he immediately warned repeatedly: "What''s the matter? Just a little bit of training, and you feel satisfied? Or do you think you can make people feel at ease now? Will they make friends with you now?"


    Naruto, who was taught by Li Yaoxiang, quickly calmed down.


    Concentrate on training again.


    At the same time, during the next few days when Li Yaoxiang urged Naruto to train, he happened to be in the space of consciousness. Through the crystal ball, he observed an interesting scene...

 Chapter 32: Divine Assist or Pig Teammates

    Chapter 32: Divine Assist or Pig Teammates


    Hokage Residence. In Conference Hall.


    At the conference hall at the moment, there were Sarutobi Hiruzen, Shimura Danzo, Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu four people. They discussed various policies on Konoha Vige in Conference Hall. However,pared to thest time, they quickly talked about Naruto this time.


    Mitokado Homura: "Hiruzen, I heard... Naruto started training without anyone teaching?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen, hearing this, sucked the tobo pipe and did not answer.


    Utatane Koharu: "Hiruzen, don''t you think Naruto''s recent moves are getting more and more strange? His way of training is unlike a 3 years old child who came up with it himself."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen kept sucking the tobo pipe without answering.


    Seeing that Sarutobi Hiruzen remained silent, Shimura Danzo finally shot to the table with an unable ''p'', and then shouted at him angrily: "Do you think you can''t talk about this matter, can you pass it?!"


    "Obviously, Namikaze Minato is teaching Naruto about whatever demon fox training!"


    "We can''t dy anymore!"


    "How do you ensure that Namikaze Minato is not hostile to the vige?!"


    "Don''t forget, what kind of life did that demon fox make us live all these years!"


    Three people''s eyes, simultaneously watching Sarutobi Hiruzen, forced him to respond to this question. But he hesitated for a long time or was out of the words of Namikaze Minato and Naruto: "I believe... Minato will understand my pain. He... will not resent the vige."


    Speaking of which, Sarutobi Hiruzen''s tone became uncertain. He was also not sure whether Namikaze Minato would really resent the vige. After all, the Namikaze Minato''s family has sacrificed so much for the vige. But the vige treats their descendants like this...


    Seeing that Sarutobi Hiruzen was still indecisive, Shimura Danzo, who was out of breath, immediately shouted again: "Very good! In this case, let''s ignore whether Namikaze Minato has resentment for the vige! But didn''t you say that before? As long as the demon fox gets along with the vige, he can''t escape our control! But now?! Don''t tell me you don''t see what''s happening now! Simply no one in the vige wants to be friends with that demon fox! How can we control him?! Do you really want to let a Jinchuriki who has the opportunity to hate the vige continue to grow like this? As a Hokage, do you still think about Konoha?!"


    Shimura Danzo did point out the problem this time.


    In the beginning, the old fellows in the Conference Hall continued to let Naruto go because they saw Naruto just wanted to make friends and had no evil intent for Konoha. In addition, they had no time to take care of this Naruto'' trivial problem'' because of the Uchiha n.


    But now? It''s different now!


    After this period of time observation, Naruto, who wanted to make friends, did not make friends. How would they be sure that Naruto would not hate the vige? Therefore, thebel of ''unstable factor'' gradually entered Naruto.


    Seeing these ''old close friends'' in front of him, on the topic of Naruto and still unrelenting, Sarutobi Hiruzen cut through the wastnd suddenly exuded the imposing-manner that belongs to his Hokage persona: "Enough! I am Hokage or are you the Hokage?! About Naruto, I have my own solution to this matter! So do not bother him!"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s angry anger made the atmosphere in the Conference Hall suddenly cold.


    Who knows how long they have seen Sarutobi Hiruzen in this imposing-manner?


    But they were not at all happy because of this. Instead, after a moment of stun, they began to feel dissatisfied with Sarutobi Hiruzen in their hearts. Dissatisfied that he changed his style of doing things.


    Several people have a lot of opinions in their hearts, but they did not try to shake the majesty Hokage that belongs to Naruto at this time. Everyone was silent.


    The meeting at this time, again because of Naruto''s topic, eventually led to disappointment.


    ....


    After Sarutobi Hiruzen returned to his Hokage room, he tapped a few code words on the desk.


    Knock. Knock, knock. Knock...


    After typing the code word, an Anbu ninja suddenly appeared in front of the table.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen gaze at the scenery outside the window, said solemnly: "How is Naruto recently?"


    "Report Lord-Hokage. The past few days, Naruto is repeating various exercise programs without stopping."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen spit out a cigarette: "Who do you think... in the vige... is the best friend of Naruto?"


    Immediately afterward, the Anbu ninja began to express his own analysis and insights.


    After the two discussed for a while, Sarutobi Hiruzen was instructed: "Very good, then let this matter be done by you."


    "Yes!" Anbu ninja left with a ''bang''.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen, who stayed alone in the Hokage room, secretly whispered: "Naruto, Naruto... I hope you won''t make it difficult for me..."


    ....


    Seeing the picture of the crystal ball from here, Li Yaoxiang smiled. After purchasing the crystal ball so soon, he didn''t expect he would see such an interesting scene.


    Also, because of this scene, he solved some doubts when he was watching the Anime.


    But this is not the point. The point is...


    Should heugh at Shimura Danzo and the others for being pig teammates? Orughing at Sarutobi Hiruzen for the divine assist?


    This action of Sarutobi Hiruzen coincides with Li Yaoxiang''s purpose.


    Even without Sarutobi Hiruzen''s n, Li Yaoxiang would deliberately arrange this matter soon. Therefore, it can be said to cken Naruto, Sarutobi Hiruzen, and these old fellows are really indispensable.


    No way. Let me hold the popcorn.


    It''s good to watch this big show in the consciousness space.


    ...


    A few dayster.


    Since Li Yaoxiang taught Naruto training, in this period of time, Naruto lived his training career day after day. Every morning, before dawn, Li Yaoxiang forced him to wake up, run, and exercise. Naruto would exercise until noon. Then, after a short rest, Li Yaoxiang would call him to go swimming and climbing.


    Naruto was so tired that he just wanted to rest on the ground, but Li Yaoxiang woke him up again. He kept nagging in his ears, asking him to keep clean and calling him to take a shower.


    After taking a shower, Naruto ate a bento. Then he has to start meditation again, Refining Chakra.


    It was not until he went to bed in the evening that this ended his training journey of the day.


    This kind of day, after a long time, the silly and foolish Naruto realizes that something is wrong.


    ''Huh? Wrong! Being as powerful as dad, I can make everyone feel at ease and y with everyone... But, wouldn''t that be at least ten yearster?! So, what''s the difference?!''


    Isn''t he still living alone?


    After realizing this, he quickly contacted Li Yaoxiang in his mind, arguing angrily: "Big brother! Big brother! No! You''re not right! What I want is that I can y with everyone now! But you told me to exercise as strong as dad before I can y with everyone. Won''t that happen ten yearster? I don''t want it! I don''t want to take this long! Big brother, is there any other way faster?"

 Chapter 33: Destined Encounter

    Chapter 33: Destined Encounter


    Li Yaoxiang breathed a sigh of relief when he heard that Naruto finally realized what was wrong with this matter. He waited for the chance. He waited so long, what he waited for was in this brief moment. Waiting for Naruto to ask this question spontaneously.


    Only in this way, he could naturally lead Naruto to the direction he expected and continue to develop. Otherwise, if it is too deliberate, maybe things will not achieve the effect he wants.


    Looking at this silly little brother who was stupidly influenced by Asura, Li Yaoxiang couldn''t help but smile bitterly. Fortunately, he was not too silly.


    There is still salvation. At least he can find out what the problem is, even though a bitte.


    It''s just that Li Yaoxiang doesn''t n to tell Naruto the answer now. After all, he did not forget the pictures he had observed in Hokage Residence. I believe that in a short time, Sarutobi Hiruzen''s ''divine assist'' will help him solve this problem perfectly.


    So, Li Yaoxiang''s tone pretended to be dissatisfied and said: "I tell you to exercise and exercise! Why do youin so much? Rest assured, as long as you continue to exercise, you will be able to make friends soon."


    Naruto suspiciously said: "Really?"


    "Of course!" Li Yaoxiang.


    With Li Yaoxiang''s affirmative answer, Naruto moved his little legs with ''haha'' and continued to run on the snow.


    ...


    At the same time, in this period of time when Li Yaoxiang told Naruto to continue to exercise.


    Hyuga n''s residence, in the courtyard of the Main House.


    At this time, Hyuga Hinata was happily ying with the very tall wooden pile in front of him.


    "HAH!"


    "HYA!"


    "HAH!"


    "HA!"


    She thinks thought she was very ferocious. But if the scene is seen by others, she can only be described as ''Kawai''.


    This scene looks cute and lovely. But for the person involved, Hyuga Hinata, it was not easy at all!


    The weather was cold. And not to mention, it was very painful to beat on the wooden pile palm by palm! Beating the wooden pile, her little hands became red and even blistered!


    It''s a pity that anyone who saw this scene felt sorry for her. In Hyuga Hiashi''s opinion, it was nothing! Compared with the sacrifice of his younger brother, Hyuga Hizashi, he felt that the daughter should work harder 100 times than other people!


    [*TL note: Hiashi Hyga (Hyga Hiashi) is a shinobi from Konohagakure, as well as the current head of the Hyga n.]


    Be more powerful! In the future, take the responsibility to carry forward the n! This is worthy of the younger brother Hyuga Hizashi''s contribution!


    {**TL note: Some timeter, in an event that would be known as the Hyga Affair, Hiashi killed the Head Ninja of Kumogakure to save Hinata. Kumogakure demanded Hiashi''s body as restitution; in reality, they wanted to obtain the secrets of the Byakugan. The Hyga elders and Konoha''s leadership proposed that Hizashi be used instead; as Hiashi''s body double. In addition to protecting Hiashi - the Hyga''s leader - doing so would keep the Byakugan''s secrets from being discovered; Hizashi agreed. When Hiashi tried to protest, Hizashi immobilised him with a single blow. He then exined that he was not doing this to preserve the Hyga''s structure, but to save the life of his brother, to prevent war, and to choose his own fate for the first time in his life.]


    And Hyuga Hinata, who was only 3 years old, also understood why her father was so severe to her suddenly. She also knew that her uncle had sacrificed her life because of her recent affairs. So, she really understood.


    Dare notin. Dare not be coquettish with father. Try to be as strong as possible.


    After punching Eight-Trigrams Palm at a very slow speed, Hyuga Hinata put away his little hand and hid his little hand behind his back, breathing heavily, only weakly said: "Father... Father... Father... I finished my practice."


    How could Hyuga Hiashi not notice these small movements of Hinata?


    This was not the first time his daughter has practiced and get injured. He was not distressed when he saw how a little girl looked like this. It''s just that every time when he thinks about the sacrifice of the younger brother, he will be hard-hearted again, posing a stern gesture in front of his daughter.


    "Un." Hyuga Hiashi lightly ''un''ed and then said, "Remember to practice once every day before you can go out to y, understand?"


    Hearing her father saying that she can go out, the 3 years old Hinata couldn''t hide her excitement. Her eyes glowed, nodded very hard, and then she yelled an "um" and promised it.


    She could go for a walk and have a look in such a hard day. This was the happiest moment for Hinata throughout the day!


    It didn''t take long for Hinata to change clothes.


    She left the house with a personal guard.


    ....


    After leaving for a long distance, this bodyguard behind Hinata was suddenly stopped by several Anbu ninjas: "Is something wrong?"


    Anbu ninja: "It''s nothing. But there are some things I would like to ask."


    They did not give the personal guard the opportunity to refuse. Anbu ninja just wanted to pestered him.


    Hinata, who was so cute, didn''t notice what was happening behind her and went on. She walked towards the route she would usually take on the weekdays.


    The reason for this route was all because of a boy. A boy who she wanted to know for a long time. The boy''s character is always lively and cheerful. No matter what happens, he will keep a hearty smile every day.


    Hinata hopes that she can have a character that is not introverted or cowardly like the boy.


    Because she knew that this was the most ideal daughter in her father''s mind. Although she knew this hope was very difficult to realize, she still wanted to see the boy more. Because whenever she saw the boy''s hearty smile, her mood would also follow involuntarily with happiness.


    The boy''s smile kept circling in her mind. But walking around, Hinata found that the surrounding environment had changed!


    The store is gone! The crowd is gone! The rest is just the dark and scary jungle on the left and right sides.


    Before she could react to it, there was a huge pain in her head.


    Immediately afterwards, she heard variousughs not far away.


    "Hahahahaha! White-eyed monster! How dare youe out today without a guard? See if I won''t kill you!"


    "Hahaha! Stinky coward, how dare you run out to be scary? Kill you white-eyed monster!"


    She looked towards the direction of the sound.


    Those were a few boys a little older than her. Hinata recognized these boys.


    Every time she walks this route, she will encounter these boys ying. She felt that these boys do not like her. What puzzled her is that normally, as long as there are guards, these boys will not treat her like this. Why dare to bully her today?


    Hinata subconsciously looked behind her. She wanted to ask the guard for help. It''s a pity that no matter where she looks, she can''t find any trace of the guard.


    She became very scared and began to panic.


    Completely at a loss.


    She looked at these ''tall'' boys. Hinata''s tears gradually soaked her eyes.


    It''s a pity that her pitiful appearance did not wee the pity of the boys. The boys showed an expression of excitement and began to throw snowballs at her, hitting on Hinata''s body.


    PA!


    PA!


    PA!


    PA!


    Hinata couldn''t bear it and fell to the ground.


    They still did not intend to stop. Even more so because of the sudden addition of a target like Hinata, they felt very happy.


    Just at the moment when Hinata felt the most helpless and the most feared, there was a domineering voice not far away: "Stop! You guys should stop!"


    It was a yellow hair with a few strange whiskers on his face, and a boy of her age.


    After seeing this little boy in front of him, Hinata''s pitiful look couldn''t help but show a smile.


    ''It''s him...''


    ''The boy ising...''

 Chapter 34: Defining the Relationship

    Chapter 34: Defining the Rtionship


    "I''m telling you to stop! Didn''t hear it?" Naruto rushed over angrily and stopped in front of Hinata.


    Naruto''s small silhouette at the moment seems to be infinitely erged in the eyes of Hinata. How reliable he looks. What a sense of security.


    As for the boys who bullied Hinata on the opposite side, after seeing the personing is Naruto, their faces couldn''t help but look difficult. After all, Naruto''s identity has been revealed, and he is the hero''s son.


    Coupled with the repeated orders from their parents, these boys could no longer bully Naruto like before, called Naruto a monster.


    "Naruto! What are you doing here?! You are the son of a hero, and we don''t want to embarrass you! You step aside! She is a monster!"


    "That''s right! She''s a monster with white eyes! He is different from us, Naruto!"


    Naruto opened his hands and formed a "big" shape, blocking Hinata: "I don''t care! I don''t allow you to bully her! If you still want to bully her, then deal with me first!"


    Having been bullied by others, Naruto couldn''t bear it when he saw others being bullied. As long as this happens, Naruto will easily resonance with that person. That''s why in the original work, the person Naruto at first likes is Haruno Sakura. Naruto saw Haruno Sakura being bullied andughed at for high forehead, so Naruto subconsciously resonated with Haruno Sakura.He mistakenly thought themoner girl Haruno Sakura and himself were the same kinds of person.


    The current situation is the same. He saw Hinata being bullied and called a monster by others, so he naturally resonated with Hinata.


    The reason for her rescue was entirely due to natural reactions. There is no other purpose.


    And Naruto in this life, because of the appearance of Li Yaoxiang, the "butterfly effect" took ce. He was not beaten as he did in the original work. Those few naughty kids were not like this. But now, they just clenched their teeth, leaving angrily.


    Naruto sat on the ground instantly. Not because he was afraid, but because he exercised for so long, he was drained.


    After they disappeared without a trace, Naruto, who reacted, turned around from a paralyzed posture and climbed up to Hinata and said kindly: "Are you all right?"


    Seeing Naruto getting closer and closer to her, Hinata''s face grew red and red. Her breathing was even more rapid. She dared not look directly at Naruto, shaking her head repeatedly, and said softly: "No... nothing."


    "It''s fine now. It''s okay. Come, I will pull you up."


    Naruto stood up and held out his hand.


    Hinata squeezed for a moment, but in the end, she gathered courage and put her hand on Naruto''s hand.


    But as soon as she caught it, Hinata let out a sound of ''hya'', then quickly retracted her palm.


    "What''s wrong? What''s wrong with you?"


    "I... I... I''m okay. This was hurt while I was training."


    Seeing Hinata seemed to be afraid of what he looked like, Naruto shut his mouth.


    The two just moved towards the direction outside the jungle.


    In the original work, it was also because Hinata was too shy. She didn''t dare to talk to Naruto. So, it caused a misunderstanding between the two sides. Naruto mistakenly thought that Hinata, like other people, hated Naruto. And in the end, the love was lost.


    Of course, whether it is in original work or what happened today, it was all arranged by Sarutobi Hiruzen, the old fogey behind the scenes. After all, whether it is original work or the reality now, Sarutobi Hiruzen has the same purpose. That is to let Naruto make friends and bonds.


    Obviously, Hinata''s attitude towards Naruto must have been noticed at the time by Sarutobi.


    ''That''s why I finally set my goal on Hinata.''


    It''s just because of Li Yaoxiang''s appearance that the meeting time of Naruto and Hinata has been advanced. After all, the appearance of Li Yaoxiang has caused Shimura Danzo and the others to make Sarutobi Hiruzen out of breath.


    Underpelled by circumstances, Sarutobi Hiruzen had no choice but to n the actions at this time. As long as Naruto makes friends, then he would at least add one more reason to stop the mouths of those old close friends. nting the idea of preventing them from taking one step further action against Naruto.


    ....


    After watching the whole incident, Li Yaoxiang solved some of the doubts he felt when watching the anime.


    I mean,e on! A good Hyuga n''s Eldest Young Lady has no guard, alone, and lost in the jungle for no reason? A few naughty kids came to the jungle for no reason? Uzumaki Naruto just happened toe to this jungle? If all this is arranged by Sarutobi Hiruzen, then it makes sense.


    The guards were led away by Sarutobi Hiruzen. Hinata and Naruto, including those naughty kids, were also sent by Sarutobi Hiruzen by performing Genjutsu on them, attracting them to this jungle.


    This n is simply fantastic.


    This also confirms from the side that Naruto''s entire childhood was controlled by one hand in this way.


    Although it is hateful, Li Yaoxiang will not destroy Sarutobi Hiruzen''s "good intentions" this time, but he will even push a hand. After all, in his 2nd Step n, letting Naruto get acquainted with the fetters is also very important, which is one of the important links.


    After watching the drama for so long, it''s time for his protagonist to appear!


    "Naruto, don''t you want to make friends? Now is the opportunity. Why not take the opportunity to make friends with this little girl?"


    Hearing Li Yaoxiang''s suggestion, Naruto tangled: "But... but... but big brother, she seems to be afraid of me. How can I make friends with her?"


    "It''s okay, Naruto. Trust me. Friends will note to you by themselves. You need to take the initiative."


    After the big brother said so, Naruto twitched. After all, it was he who wants to make friends.


    So, he breathes deeply and says to Hinata on the side: "Hello, my name is Naruto. Uzumaki Naruto, what is your name?"


    "I... I... My name is Hinata, Hyuga Hinata."


    Naruto didn''t think that he would get an answer. But, the girl next to him really responded to him!


    This makes Naruto happy!


    He quickly cheered up and said: "Can we be friends after this? Is that okay?"


    Hinata followed Naruto''s pace, lowered her head and the index fingers of her hands kept circling in front of her abdomen, then she made an ''um''.


    The sound "um" was very quiet, but still caught by Naruto!


    He was so happy that he became smug. With no trace of politeness, he hugged Hinata''s shoulders and pulled her to his side. He said with a big smile: "Hahahaha! That''s great! After today, we will train together and y together!"


    Feeling Naruto''s warm body temperature. Hinata''s forehead suddenly became hot, and her cheeks were red! Her body bes straight and stiff!


    Immediately after that, there was a bang, and she fell to the ground.


    Naruto was unresponsive and had no idea what was going on. He looked at Hinata, who was unconscious for no reason, and then cry out in surprise: "Eh?! Why did you copse?!"


    Seeing this in the picture, the encounter between Hinata and Naruto finally ended sessfully.


    With the help of Li Yaoxiang, the rtionship between Naruto and Hinata in this life will be much closer than in the original work!


    Of course, it is not enough for Hinata to get Naruto into the Peak of life and get everything he wants. In order to make future ns more smoothly, it is also time to target the other person ...

 Chapter 35: Frail Hinata

    Chapter 35: Frail Hinata


    Time flies. In a blink of an eye, a few days passed.


    Hyuga n, in the courtyard of the Main House.


    Ever since the encounter between Hinata and Naruto, Hinata has be more energetic.


    No longer has a troubled look. No longer so sentimental.


    Even in the past, the exercise program given by Hyuga Hiashi waspleted very quickly and actively. Of course, the reason why Hinata was so motivated was because she wants toplete the mission sooner to go out to find her Naruto.


    At the moment, she was still facing the tall wooden pile, constantly pping it.


    Onlypared to a few days ago, Hinata''s movements became neater or more agile.


    There was no sloppy feeling at all.


    "HAH!"


    "HYA!"


    "HAH!"


    "HA!"


    She finished her work cutely.


    "Father! I''ve finished practicing!"


    Hyuga Hiashi, with a serious expression, nodded with an "um" sound.


    "Then... then... Father, can I go out and y?"


    Hyuga Hiashi alsoplied.


    Immediately, Hinata left the courtyard happily and walked towards the ce agreed with Naruto.


    Seeing the back of the girl''s departure, Hyuga Hiashi couldn''t help but wonder what happened. What can make the girl changed so much? So, he called a guard and asked: "Did Eldest Young Lady encounter any special circumstances recently?"


    The escort reported to Hyuga Hiashi all the events that happened that day and recently. "n Leader, do we need..."


    Before waiting for the guard to finish, Hyuga Hiashi waved his hand: "No need. Let them."


    After the conversation, the guard left the courtyard.


    Hyuga Hiashi thought about this matter sadly. He was very pleased with the girl''s change. But the Anbu''s sudden appearance was specially prepared for the girl and Uzumaki Naruto to be acquainted. It made him feel a little worried. He wasn''t sure whether the high-level Konoha fellows were behind this.


    He looked in the direction of Hokage Residence. Hyuga Hiashi involuntarily sighed.


    Even if they were nning something... What can he do?


    At that time, when the vige was going to sacrifice his younger brother. As the Main House n Leader of Hyuga n, would he be able to change anything?


    He sighed at his ipetence.


    ...


    Konoha Vige. A certain park.


    After Hinata left the Hyuga n''s residence, she quickly arrived at the ce she had agreed with Naruto.


    It was different from the excitement and anticipation when she finally went out.


    When she saw the energetic Naruto already doing gymnastics in the park waiting for her for a long time, she instantly became shy and calmed down all her emotions.


    The originally cute pace became very slow. Her head down. Step by step, she walked over to Naruto.


    As for the guards who followed her, they had long been blocked by the Anbu who was monitoring Naruto. After all, these Anbu would not allow threatening objects to approach Naruto casually.


    Her guards have long been ustomed to this treatment these days. There was no conflict between them anymore.


    This happened to be the ''romantic couple''s world'' for the two little children.


    "Ha! Hinata, you''re finally here!"


    "Ok..."


    "Why are you sote today? What are you doing?"


    "I... I... I just passed a store, and that... three-color Dango in that store looked delicious, so I bought some and nned to eat with you." Throughout the conversation, Hinata kept her head down and dared not look directly at Naruto.


    "Really?! That''s great! I just happened to be a little hungry." Naruto stopped his movements and walked quickly to Hinata.


    Hinata took out the three-color Dango hidden behind.


    "Huh? Is there only one?"


    "I... before I came, I couldn''t help but eat first. I left this one for you."


    Naruto, with no trace of politeness, took the three-color Dango from Hinata.


    First, he took the pink ball at the top, then eat it. While chewing it in his mouth, he spoke, "Come on, here you are. We eat each one."


    Naruto''s inadvertent move made Hinata dumbfounded on the spot!


    The children in this world are rtively early mature. Hinata, as a girl, is even more so.


    With a nk head, she didn''t know how to respond to Naruto''s doings to the three-color Dango. She dumbly looked at the only white and green balls and the bamboo sticks that Naruto had touched.


    In her small head, numerous pictures appeared suddenly. Her imagination ran wild.


    ''This... Is this... Am I eating the same Dango with Naruto? Indirect...?''


    Thinking of this, Hinata blushed for a moment and felt a little dizzy. But in order not to be ugly in front of Naruto, she resisted the dizziness and kept telling herself: can''t faint, can''t faint.


    It''s a pity that he didn''t wait for her emotions to calm down. Naruto made a new move. He saw that Hinata was holding the three-color balls slowly and simply grabbed Hinata''s hand, and then just put the three-color balls in front of Hinata''s mouth...


    ''The touch of a small hand... The touch at the lips...''


    This time, Hinata, whose heart was already beating fast, can''t bear it anymore.


    The result was a bang again. Holding the three-color Dango in her hand, and even with her cute mushroom head, she fainted happily...


    The panic-stricken Naruto even cry out in surprise again: "Eh?! Hinata! Why did you faint again?!"


    There were no idents like the bullying yesterday, though. Yet, this appointment fell through.


    Hinata was personally sent home by her escort.


    Naruto looked a little lost at the retreating Hinata and the guards.


    Seeing that it was finally time, Li Yaoxiang would certainly not miss this opportunity: "What''s the matter, Naruto? Having made friends are you still not happy?"


    "Ne~ big brother, you don''t understand. Hinata''s body is too weak. So easy to faint. We simply cannot y well together."


    Li Yaoxiang put on a tone of hate iron for not bing steel: "What''s so disheartening? Then meet more friends!"


    "But... but... But will anyone still make friends with me? Isn''t everyone afraid of the big fox inside me?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Naruto, making friends is a two-sided matter. Why don''t you make friends with people who are worthy to you?"


    "Does anyone really ept me?" Naruto''s eyes lit up.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Of course! Have you ever wondered why Hinata is not afraid of you? That''s because her n is strong enough that they''re not afraid that the fox in your body will hurt Hinata. So, as long as you make friends with the Great ns'' children, even if they don''t want to, at least they won''t be so afraid of you, will they?"


    "Really?! That''s great! But... big bro, who am I going to find?"


    Speaking of it. Naruto finally got to the point of the topic.


    Li Yaoxiang was relieved. Coaxing a child is really not easy.


    Soon, Li Yaoxiang changed his rxed tone. He said seriously: "Naruto, do you know the origin of the vige?"

 Chapter 36: The Fetters of Deliberate Care

    Chapter 36: The Fetters of Deliberate Care


    "The origin of the vige?"


    "Yes, the origin of the vige! How the Konoha Vige was created!"


    "Oh! I know, I know! Grandpa Hokage told me that the Konoha Vige was founded by 2 top-level ns and many ns together!"


    "Then... do you know which two top ns are?"


    When being asked that, Naruto was speechless. Because Sarutobi Hiruzen didn''t talk about this matter with him at all. Or to say, Sarutobi Hizen did not have the face to talk about this matter. After all, the two Great ns in the past have withered since he took charge. So how can he mention this matter?


    Of course, the reason why Li Yaoxiang mentions this matter today is not to dismantle the true face of the old fox but to continue the topic of ''making friends'' and guide Naruto to his goal.


    Without waiting for Naruto, Li Yaoxiang directly replied: "They are the First-Hokage, Senju Hashirama of the Senju n, and the Uchiha n. Guardians of Konoha."


    "Oh, oh!" Although Naruto hasn''t heard Senju n, hearing the reputation of the Guardians of Konoha, Naruto was unable to bear his excitement. After all, he had been walking on the street since he was a child and often saw guards patrolling.


    Their outfits are in Naruto''s heart. They are so handsome!


    "Since you want to make friends, of course go to thergest n in the vige. As long as they are the children of the n, they will definitely not be afraid of you!"


    That''s right! Li Yaoxiang''s goal this time is Uchiha Sasuke!


    As mentioned before, the genocide of the Uchiha n has long been included in Naruto''s darkening event book by Li Yaoxiang. Therefore, if you want Naruto to achieve the maximum darkening effect on this matter, it is to undoubtedly let Naruto participate in this event early!


    The prerequisite for participating in this matter is, of course, to let Naruto and Sasuke meet each other in advance. As long as their rtionship is better, then, when Naruto discovers the truth of this incident, his senses of the vige will copse and despair!


    This is the purpose of Li Yaoxiang''s operation.


    Naruto had no doubt about Li Yaoxiang''s remarks, but he put on an embarrassed face because he didn''t know where Uchiha n''s residence is at all.


    "But... big brother, where is Uchiha n''s residence? Do you know? Also, will there be a child as old as I am in their family? Even if there is, what can I do to be friends with them?"


    Li Yaoxiang, who has a crystal ball and knew Uchiha n''s specific location, certainly can''t be bothering him. He quickly answered all Naruto''s questions and taught him how to make friends with Sasuke.


    After hearing this, Naruto did not doubt that he was there.


    Soon, he moved towards the direction that the big brother Li Yaoxiang told him to go.


    However, when he was about to run into the influence range of the Uchiha n, several Anbu ninjas who had been monitoring him blocked his way in front of him: "Uzumaki Naruto, this ce is not something you cane to. You should go back."


    Seeing the appearance of these ninjas, Naruto soon understood that they were Anbu ninjas who monitored him 24 hours a day.


    Recalling the picture of being bullied at the beginning, he remembered this group of watchers'' deeds. Without the slightest hesitation, Narutobeled the "to forget favors and vite justice" to them.


    Of course, the senses and attitudes towards them didn''t get better. He immediately yelled angrily: "Why can''t I go here?! Why can''t you let me go here?! I am not your cat or dogs! Wherever I want to go, it''s not your right!"


    No matter how much Naruto argued, he still couldn''t get rid of these ''ungrateful'' fellows.


    In the end, he had to run into the Hokage Residence with anger and reasoned with the old man instead.


    .....


    Hokage Residence, Hokage room.


    As soon as Naruto was approved to enter here, he unceremoniously akimbo his hips, facing Sarutobi Hiruzen, and angrily asked: "Old fogey, why do they restrict me to where I go?! What do you think of me? Am I your cat and dog?! That you have to take care of wherever you go?! Even inside Konoha Vige you have to limit where I go. Wouldn''t you just be happy to shut me up for a life instead?!"


    Since Naruto sessfully got acquainted with Hyuga Hinata a few days ago, Sarutobi Hiruzen''s tolerance for Naruto has be higher and higher. So even if Naruto was rude to him as a Hokage now, he was not angry.


    Simrly, Sarutobi Hiruzen, who had already received the news regarding Naruto''s series of questions, was not surprised. However, he was a little curious. Why would Naruto go to Uchiha n''s premises for no reason?


    Whether there is nothing wrong with it, he still has to treat everything with caution.


    "Naruto, can you tell this grandpa Hokage; why do you want to go there so much?"


    There was no doubt in Naruto. He replied without hesitation: "What else? Am I not trying to make friends? Everyone is afraid of me; how do I make friends? I think they''re strong, they shouldn''t be afraid of me. Of course, I want to make friends there!"


    Naruto said the exact words that Li Yaoxiang had taught him to answer without changing his face.


    Hearing the fact that Naruto was just for making friends, Sarutobi Hiruzen''s vignce was relieved. He didn''t know what he was afraid for.


    After thinking again for a moment, in the end, he still epted Naruto''s request.


    Hemanded the Anbu ninjas to not stop Naruto. Only instructed them to send a few more people to guard around Naruto just in case.


    ...


    Uchiha n''s residence.


    Several members of the guards who were still on patrol noticed that the situation was abnormal and then returned to the n to report the situation to the n Leader, Uchiha Fugaku.


    "n Leader, many Anbu are moving towards the direction of our n. Will there be any problems?"


    TL note: Fugaku Uchiha (Uchiha Fugaku) was a shinobi of Konohagakure. He was the head of the Uchiha n as well as the leader of the Konoha Military Police Force.


    "How many people are there?" Uchiha Fugaku said solemnly.


    "About ten people."


    It didn''t take long. Another member of Uchiha walked in: "n Leader, Jinchuriki of Kyuubi, Uzumaki Naruto, shouted outside our gates, saying he wanted to challenge our Uchiha n. Let us send peers out to take up the challenge."


    After hearing it, the members of the guard who came to report quickly cry out in surprise. "n Leader, is this the Third-Kage''s trap?"


    "Is there any possibility...?"


    "Are they going to do something to us?"


    A few people spoke out their doubts.


    Simrly, these were also Uchiha Fugaku''s inner doubts. He did not understand why the Third-Kage would let Jinchuriki Kyuubie to their n residence during this period. He also does not understand what Sarutobi Hiruzen really means.


    ''Is it a trap? Or to probe?''


    Uchiha Fugaku narrowed his eyes and looked towards the direction of Hokage Residence. He thought for a moment. "It''s okay, I''ll go out and see. Told the nsmen to stay where they are and don''t act rashly."

 Chapter 37: Fierce Battle

    Chapter 37: Fierce Battle


    Uchiha Residence, outside the gate.


    With his left hand in his waist, Naruto pointing at the door of Uchiha with his right hand, yelled: "Hey! Uzumaki Naruto, the son of Fourth-Hokage, now officially announced that he will challenge you Uchiha n! If you don''te out to fight, that means you''re afraid of me!"


    Naruto looks very arrogant on the surface. But, actually, he was worried about dying.


    He kept asking more and more questions in his mind, "Big bro, this... this method is really possible? Wouldn''t be right?"


    "It''s okay, you''re right to listen to me! Uchiha n is a Noble n Great n correct? If you rush to contact them like this, they will recognize you. Rest assured, this is right!"


    It didn''t take long tomunicate. The first person greeted Naruto quickly at the gate. That was Uchiha Fugaku.


    Naruto, who had his big brother''s repeated assurances, did not shudder. Instead, he continued to yell: "Hey! Who are you? What''s the matter? Your Uchiha n has no one else to send out?"


    Uchiha Fugaku nced at this little tease. Not taking it too seriously. He immediately sensed the ten Anbu ninjas who were hiding in the surrounding area.


    Seeing that they did nothing, Uchiha Fugaku grinned slightly and probed slightly: "What''s wrong? Do you want to challenge Uchiha n? How about I be your opponent?"


    Sure enough, when this remark came out, the ten Anbu ninjas hidden in the surroundings all have obvious fluctuations in their Chakra. But this vtility was quickly suppressed by them again.


    Seeing that the other side had no ns to do anything more, Uchiha Fugaku couldn''t help but get curious.


    Curious about what they were doing.


    It didn''t take him too long to understand what was going on. Naruto''s little voice crack attracted his attention again: "No no no! Does the Uchiha n bully the weak?! I don''t want you to be my opponent! I want to challenge Uchiha member who is about my age!"


    "I see!" Uchiha Fugaku paused and continued. "But before that, you need to tell me why you want to challenge our Uchiha n?"


    "Does that still need to be said? Of course, I want to make friends-" Naruto, who knew he just slipped, quickly covered his mouth. He then rolled his eyes and changed his words, "You care about me? You are afraid of me, no? You don''t dare to fight?"


    Whether it was Uchiha Fugaku or the Uchiha members staying in the residence... When they heard Naruto''s slip, everyone''s expressions were strange.


    Say that the reason Sarutobi Hiruzen, the Hokage, let the Jinchurikie to them was no reason at all; they would not believe it. But since the other party didn''t n to do anything, Uchiha Fugaku guessed that this might just be a probe to them by the Konoha''s high level. To probe Uchiha n''s attitude towards the vige is good or bad. And his guess was true.


    ''That must be the reason why Sarutobi Hiruzen let Naruto came here...''


    Firstly, it is not good to reject Naruto. Naruto mustn''t get hostile to the vige after getting acquainted with the Uchiha.


    Secondly, it''s about the ''Demon Fox Incident''. Although he believed that this matter had nothing to do with Uchiha n, he could not understand who would have leaked Uzumaki Kushina''s birth time.


    In order to guard against the unexpected, he had to follow the guidelines of Shimura Danzo and the others to iste Uchiha n.


    The current intention is obvious. Jinchuriki was already in front of them. It depends on how they respond.


    Of course, this was also because Sarutobi Hiruzen did not know that someone from the Uchiha n had already awakened the Mangekyo Sharingan. Otherwise, Sarutobi Hiruzen wouldn''t do something like this.


    Uchiha Fugaku, who guessed the truth pretty close, looked at the little thing in front of him with interest. Naruto''s age was about the same age as his little son.


    Looking at Naruto full of goose bumps, he began to feel guilty.


    Uchiha Fugaku smiled slightly. He hooked his finger towards the rear. Immediately afterward, one Uchiha member came behind him. He turned his head to the n member and whispered, "Go and call Sasuke out."


    Not much timeter, Sasuke, who was about the same height as Naruto, came out of the residence. He was confused.


    As soon as he walked out and saw Uchiha Fugaku''s silhouette, he ran happily and yelled, "Otou-san(dad)."


    Uchiha Fugaku didn''t look at Sasuke and still continued to watch Naruto and said, "The child in front of you is about to challenge our Uchiha n. Go protect Uchiha n''s reputation. Don''t let me down, understand?"


    Sasuke looked in the direction of his father''s eyes. Then, he saw Naruto, who was about the same age as him.


    His father didn''t wait for him to speak.


    Naruto was overjoyed because he couldn''t feel fear from Sasuke''s eyes. He was immediately excited.


    Isn''t this what Naruto wanted?


    ''Big brother is right! The Great n''s child isn''t afraid of me!''


    But Naruto soon concealed this excited expression. He didn''t forget what the big brother said. If you want to make friends with the people of the Uchiha n, you must act more arrogantly than they do!


    "Hey! Are you the representative sent by Uchiha n? Doesn''t look like it~."


    Sasuke took a few steps angrily: "Scoundrel! You are nothing!"


    "Come on! Let me see how good you are."


    "Come on! Who is afraid of whom?!"


    The two big farts made a funnyparison. Just like this, under the gaze of everyone, they walked to the opposite side and put out the ''Seal of Opposition'' very seriously.


    The picture looked funny enough.


    As soon as the seal of opposition ended, the two rushed fiercely toward the other side.


    "HA!!!!"


    "HA!!!!"


    Imposing-manner on both sides looked pretty good. But the actual situation made everyone spectating speechless


    This wasn''t a challenge or a duel. This was just two brats who are just extracting Chakra.


    Sasuke is better. At least he put on a correct posture and punches.


    As for Naruto he kept spinning his hands a lot, and then he just rushed over to fight. He, who had never learned any Taijutsu skills, relied on just rashness.


    Not to mention, this strange way of attack really subverts Sasuke''s worldview. The general knowledge taught by his family members waspletely useless in front of Naruto.


    When someone hits a straight punch, you have to hold up your hand to block it.


    These were all nonsense.


    This caused Sasuke toy down and to conform with Naruto.


    Moreover, what made Sasuke even angrier was that he didn''t know who the yellow-haired Scoundrel in front of him was. From who he learned this indecent style?


    Naruto didn''t forget to whisper to him when he attacked: "Hey! Watch me! Watch me bite you!"


    ...


    At the end of the fight, the two adorable brats were all hugging each other. Pulling their opponent''s clothes tightly.


    If it weren''t for Uchiha Fugaku to call someone to pull the two brats away, Who knows how long they would fight!


    After being pulled away, the two people also forgot to put ''Seal of Reconciliation''.


    With a blue nose and a swollen nose, Naruto pointed at Sasuke andughed arrogantly: "Hahahaha! You''re good! This time, I beat you only a little bit. I hope you will be able to maintain your level in the next fight!"


    Sasuke, with a bruised nose and a swollen face, was also carried away by someone. Hearing this, he kept struggling and cursing: "Scoundrel! It was me who beat you!"


    So, the first war between Naruto and Sasuke ended here...

 Chapter 38: The End of the Road

    Chapter 38: The End of the Road


    A weekter, early in the morning.


    The four Sasuke''s family member were enjoying their breakfast warmly in the living room. Their breakfast was not too luxury. It is no different from the average family. It was a natto bibimbap, a small fried fish, and a bowl of miso soup.


    Uchiha n''s family style was rtively serious. And generally speaking, they tend to be more reticent when dining. However, ever since Sasuke met Naruto, he has be more cheerful, lively, and active.


    The atmosphere at home has be very lively.


    Although Uchiha Fugaku sometimes scolded Sasuke, the scolding was just verbal, nothing serious. In fact, their family was very satisfied with the new atmosphere brought by Sasuke. This also made Sasuke''s behavior be bolder.


    Today, after he had just eaten a few bites of rice, he then put down the tableware and said, "Otou-san, Okaa-san, Nii-san, I am full. Can I go out?"


    "What nonsense-?! How much have you eaten? Don''t worry about ying now, and eat. Otherwise, I won''t let you out!" Uchiha Mikoto told Sasuke angrily to finish.


    Sasuke was startled. With a miserable expression on his face, he walked to her mother, shaking her wrists and shaking: "Uh~~~ Mother, I have an appointment with Naruto, that scoundrel. I will fight him again today. If I''mte, he would talk nonsense to me again, saying that I was afraid of him. I don''t want to bete~ Mother."


    "I don''t care. Anyway, if you don''t finish eating, you won''t go out!" Uchiha Mikoto suddenly put on the appearance of a strict mother.


    Seeing that acting coquettishly didn''t work, Sasuke hurried back to his seat and quickly ate the rice.


    And at this moment, Uchiha Itachi also showed a smile of rarely seen, looked towards Sasuke: "What''s wrong? Are you not Naruto''s opponent?"


    Sasuke immediately replied with wide eyes: "What''s not ''an opponent''? That scoundrel Naruto is not my opponent of course! Also, if only Nii-san finally teach me, then there''s no way that scoundrel Naruto could hurt me!"


    Uchiha Itachi pushed Sasuke''s forehead with his finger and said with a smile: "Aren''t I busy? Don''t worry, I''ll teach you whenever I have time."


    "Che, liar. You say that every time." Sasuke rubbed his forehead, a face of bitterness said.


    Immediately afterward, he stopped talking to everyone.


    To avoid beingte, Sasuke used an unprecedented speed of eating.


    The breakfast that belonged to him was swept away in a blink of an eye. Even miso wasn''t left a bit. Without looking back, he hurriedly ran out of the door: "Otou-san, Okaa-san, Nii-san, I''m full! I''m going out first!"


    The footsteps gradually receded.


    After Sasuke left, the living room returned to a serious atmosphere.


    Uchiha Fugaku, who was enjoying breakfast elegantly, asked casually: "What''s wrong? Busy these days? Have you encountered any difficulties?"


    "No, I just wanted to exercise more, so I took more missions."


    "That''s right. Even if you awakened Sharingan, don''t get careless."


    Hearing this, the ball of rice caught by his chopsticks was put down. And an "official" smile was put on: "Understood, father. I will definitely work hard. I''m stuffed. I still have a mission to do, so I will go out first. Otou-san, Okaa-san, please take it easy."


    Neither Uchiha Mikoto nor Uchiha Fugaku noticed Itachi''s strangeness.


    .....


    After breakfast was over, Uchiha Fugaku quickly returned to the Konoha Guard building.


    [TL note: The Konoha Military Police Force is  as the name suggests  the judicial organisation of Konohagakure. Initially believed to have been founded by the Uchiha, in actuality, it was founded by the Second Hokage, and was given to the Uchiha as a sign of trust and good faith between the Senju and themselves.]


    Shortly after arriving, nearly 7 members of the n ran into his office. These 7 members were almost all representatives of the younger generation in the n.


    Before Uchiha Fugaku''s chair hadn''t been warmed up yet, the group of people in front of him made him feel down.


    "n Leader, they didn''t trust us at all! Otherwise, the Jinchuriki wouldn''t juste to us. Why should we send someone to guard him?!"


    "Yes, n Leader. If we don''t do it now, do we have to wait for death?"


    "n Leader! We can''t wait any longer! Since Third-Kage took over Konoha, none of the big influences of the past have had a good result! This is the case for the Uzumaki family, and the same is for the Senju n! The next one is our turn!"


    Uchiha Fugaku''s heart was veryplicated. He did not want to start a civil war. But the n members were right.


    Uzumaki n was gone. Senju n, the top n like them, was gone too.


    Coupled with the deliberate suppression and istion from Third-Kage and the others over the years, this made the entire Uchiha n family members felt very uneasy., Making them wonder whether Third-Kage and the others have an ulterior motive and worry about whether the next n who will be exterminated is them.


    In order not to sit still, most members of the n chose to rise up to resist. Everyone''s emotions have even reached an uncontrolled level.


    "You calm down first. The matter may not be as serious as you said. Didn''t they send the Jinchuriki only to probe us? As long as we stand down, there should be no problem." Uchiha Fugaku did not give up trying to persuade them.


    Unfortunately, in recent years... every day, he was scorned and watched by his ownpanions.


    The location of the n residence was intentionally surrounded by the rest of the Great ns. Every day, they lived in frightening days. The members of Uchiha n have long been driven to go crazy by Konoha. How can they hear Uchiha Fugaku''s dissuasion again anymore?


    "n Leader! Have you ever thought about the n?!"


    "Do you know that your decision may cost the whole n''s life?!"


    Everyone kept saying the same thing to him.


    The sentiment was raging.


    If they don''t achieve their goal, they won''t let go either.


    In desperation, after procrastinating for so long, Uchiha Fugaku finally epted the matter of ''power seizure'' and repeatedly warned: "Remember, everyone. Without full preparation, do not to act alone!"


    Although it was promised, Uchiha Fugaku still hoped to dy it for a while. Hoping to find a solution that has the best of both worlds. The best thing is to solve the whole thing perfectly without shedding single blood.


    After the n members got a positive answer from Uchiha Fugaku, they all expressed excitement because they finally saw hope! No need to sit and wait anymore!


    After making that decision, of course, it was indispensable for everyone to discuss the specific details of the ''power seizure'' and the allocation work. Some people went to investigate the terrain and the time when the Great ns would be in and out. Some people go to strengthen their armed forces and so on.


    After the initial n was implemented, the Uchiha n member in the office left with satisfaction.


    In this way, Naruto''s appearance did not affect the decision of the Uchiha n. They still went to the original track...

 Chapter 39: Two Years Later

    Chapter 39: Two Years Later


    Time flies.


    In a sh, 2 years have passed.


    Konoha Vige.An open space near the jungle.


    DING!


    DING!


    CLANG!


    CLANG!


    At the moment, two five-year-old children were fighting fiercely in the open space. The Kunai in their hands kept attacking and blocking, making a loud collision sound.


    They fought for a while.


    Wearing a ck turtleneck with a fan pattern on the back, the child was clearly in a disadvantaged position. Seeing himself who was in a bad position, he clenched his teeth. He did several backflips in a row.


    It opened a certain distance against his opponent.


    He smoothly retracted his Kunai back to his waist and quickly did a hand seal with both hands. Immediately afterward, the Chakra made his body gradually be hot. Next, to the esophagus, pouring into the throat cavity, the hot energy swelled the entire mouth. Then, a raging fire squirted out of his mouth!


    ''GREAT FIREBALL JUTSU!''


    Arge fireball ruthlessly attacked his opponent.


    After the Ninjutsu wasunched, the ck smoke rose from the ce where his opponent was.


    Waiting for the ck smoke to dissipate...


    Unfortunately, his opponent was missing.


    The rest was just a piece of charred wood.


    At this moment, an unpleasant voice came into the ears of the child who had justunched the Ninjutsu: "Hahahaha! Sasuke, are you stupid? Even if you know how to use Ninjutsu, you still have to hit the opponent! Now that you don''t have Chakra anymore, why are you still my opponent? Admit defeat! This is your 599th loss to me! Hahahahaha!"


    Sasuke, gasping for breath, looked reluctantly towards the direction of the sound.


    It was a yellow-haired kid who looked arrogant and despotic.


    At that moment, the kid with yellow hair was standing on a tree trunk with his hands shoulder-to-shoulder, looking down on Sasuke on the ground, who looked a little embarrassed on the ground.


    "Damn it! Scoundrel Naruto! I haven''t lost yet! Youe down to me! Let''s keep fighting!"


    "Come on! Who is afraid of whom?" After speaking, Naruto''s soles pressed against the tree trunk ran down and rushed towards Sasuke.


    The two men fought with Taijutsu this time.


    This confrontation was no longer the kind of fight that was 2 years ago. Both sides were methodical in fighting. Obviously, in the past two years, the two people have grown a lot.


    Hitting, hitting...


    Sasuke gradually fell into the losing end.


    First, a punch in the abdomen, then a palm in the cheek, and finally, the whole person was beaten back by Naruto. Sasuke clutched his abdomen and face, staring at Naruto with resentment, and said, "Damn it! Who taught you Taijutsu? How can you improve so much?"


    "Ha! I''m extraordinarily talented! I am self-taught! Anyway, you lost! Don''t forget, if you lose again, you will break through the 600th mark!"


    Seeing that the two stopped fighting, Hinata, who was watching the whole process, walked over with two boxes of bento and said weakly: "I have been practicing for so long, let''s have a meal together. This is the food I made myself..."


    Hinata handed a bento to Sasuke and one to Naruto.


    The two people took the lunch, they opened at the same time to see.


    Sasuke looked at his bento and at Naruto''s bento.


    The inside of his bento was ordinary. Filled with onigiri(triangr seaweed rice balls).


    And Naruto''s bento; although it was also filled with onigiri, the shape of that onigiri is a ''love'' shape. There were several small sausages next to it as side dishes.


    This scene made Sasuke speechless.


    However, what''s even more hateful is that Naruto didn''t forget tough at him. "Hahahaha! Sasuke, you''re so unlucky! You chose the bad lunch box again."


    Sasuke was so angry that he turned away immediately.


    Looking at these two guys, Hinata blushed and looked down when Naruto reacted.


    "Huh? Hinata, what about you?"


    "I... I... I forgot to bring ..."


    "Hey~ why are you always like this? It''s okay, I''ll eat with you."


    "Un."


    Sasuke, who turned his back to them, was almost so angry that he didn''t catch their conversation. He grabbed the onigiri and bit it hard! He seemed to treat his onigiri as Naruto to vent.


    So, the two of them spent their happy day happily like this.


    In the past 2 years, the rtionship between Naruto and Sasuke can be said to be closer than in the original work. Hinata was even more so. The three people would gather together almost every day. To exercise. Or go shopping. Or ying.


    The rtionship of the three people has gradually be inseparable.


    Of course, in addition to the close rtionship, the strengths of the three have also progressed by leaps and bounds.


    Tree climbing, walking on water, and other techniques to control Chakra. Needless to say, Li Yaoxiang had already taught Naruto in advance, and Hinata and Sasuke also learned them with Naruto, by the way.


    Sasuke was the first to learn Ninjutsu due to his n.


    Hinata had also been able to use ''Eight Trigrams and Sixteen Palms'' perfectly because of these 6 years of exercise. Her performance has been praised and recognized by Hyuga Hiashi. She has not stopped her from staying with Naruto and Sasuke from time to time.


    [TL note: The Eight Trigrams Sixteen Palms is a manoeuvre of the Gentle Fist fighting style. It is essentially a halved version of the already halved Eight Trigrams Thirty-Two Palms. This technique is used to close off the flow of chakra through sixteen chakra points of an opponent''s chakra pathway system. This eliminates their ability to use chakra for quite some time and renders them unconscious.]


    Naruto; in addition to the Three-Style Jutsu taught by Li Yaoxiang thoroughly, what he is most proud of is his basic body technique. This is where his strength is far ahead of Sasuke and Hinata. The main contributor to this result is, of course, Li Yaoxiang. After all, Naruto''s basic main body technique was carefully taught by Li Yaoxiang.


    But why did he have such a strong result in basic body technique too? Very simple. That is because Li Yaoxiang had already consumed 2 darkening points through the system mall two years ago and purchased the ability of ''base main body proficient''.


    The main purpose was to make Naruto''s strength one step ahead of others! The reason why he only taught Naruto Three-Style Jutsu and the main body technique but did not teach other exceptional Ninjutsu, all just to let Naruto embark on ''Peak of Life''!


    It wasn''t to make Naruto a top powerhouse! Instead, from beginning to end, Li Yaoxiang''s purpose darkening Naruto.


    What''s the connection between strong Naruto and darkening him, you ask? Wouldn''t that make Naruto directly use force to solve everything perfectly? Therefore, in a good period of time in the future, if not necessary, Li Yaoxiang will not improve Naruto''s strength again and even deliberately prevent others from improving Naruto''s strength! Otherwise, a little carelessness will affect his subsequent darkening n.


    Seeing such a warm picture of Naruto and the others today, Li Yaoxiang couldn''t help but feel a little relieved. After all these years of hard work has not been in vain.


    While Li Yaoxiang looked at the scene in front of him with satisfaction, the crystal ball in the space of consciousness suddenly showed a picture that he had to pay attention to...

 Chapter 40: I want to be a bitch, and I want to be a torii

    Chapter 40: I want to be a bitch, and I want to be a torii


    Hokage Residence, Conference Hall.


    In the Conference Hall at the moment, in addition to Sarutobi Hiruzen, Shimura Danzo, Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu present, Uchiha Shisui was here.


    But they were not sitting around and discussing something.


    Uchiha Shisui was standing opposite them, which seemed a bit like being examined.


    "Shisui, you asked us give you time, and we have already given it. But now your n situation; I believe we do not need to say more. You should also know it. Your n has recently begun to strengthen its armed forces. What the intention is obvious. Is it time for you to have a choice?" It was Shimura Danzo who spoke.


    In order to get more Sharingan, he would ruthlessly push the Uchiha n to death almost as soon as he finds an opportunity. But, of course, what he said was not unrealistic.


    Ever since Uchiha n members forced Uchiha Fugaku to submit two years ago, Uchiha n members began to move around. Deploy various ns.


    It''s just that even if they do it secretly, it was still unavoidable that these old foxes, who have long been wary of them, found signs.


    The reason why Shimura Danzo would say that Shisui was given enough time is that shortly after the Uchiha were discovered, the four old men sent the most ''sociable'' Sarutobi Hiruzen to face Shisui honestly. The result was no surprise. This Shisui, which had high hopes from the n, was easily countered by Sarutobi Hiruzen.


    The excuses described were nothing more than the question of whether the vige will really be besieged and so on after both lose.


    Shisui, who was heavily influenced by grandfather Uchiha Kagami, certainly couldn''t bear to see this happen. Therefore, in order to prevent the vige from facing the n''s de, Shisui promised the n in name and would look for opportunities to start, and then inform the Hokage. In fact, he has be a double agent.


    He would report the situation in the n to the Konoha high-level folks. And on the one hand, he reported the n''s situation to those old fellows to show his loyalty so that they can feel at ease. He kept telling the n that he couldn''t find an opportunity and kept dying time.


    His purpose was to act as a peacemaker. To try to get as much time as possible, hoping to find a bnce point to let the vige and the n resolve this matter peacefully.


    Unfortunately... After working hard for so long, he still couldn''t eliminate the mistrust of the n members towards the vige. This sense of distrust, instead, grows with each passing day.


    Of course, what he didn''t know is that thanks to Shimura Danzo''s various small actions, no matter how hard he tried, it was destined to be this way.


    Hearing Shimura Danzo''s words, Shisui quickly cry out in surprise: "Please trust me, and give me a little more time! Then, I will definitely be able to change the idea of n!"


    Seeing Shisui still persisting, even the other three elders couldn''t overlook it.


    Mitokado Homura: "Shisui, it''s not that we don''t want to give you time, but that the situation is critical and we can''t dy it any longer."


    Utatane Koharu: "Yes, Shisui. If you get your n ready, it may cause both sides to suffer. When the timees..."


    "Please believe me! Believe me for thest time. I will do it this time!" Shisui struggled so hard that his movements became panic.


    Seeing this, they looked at Sarutobi Hiruzen subconciously. Motioned him to solve the problem in front of him soon.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen also sighed: "Shisui- I have been with your grandfather for many years. We watched you grow up together. Your grandfather and us all hope you can inherit the Will of Fire. I hope you don''t let us down."


    It''s grandfather again.


    Grandfather was also used to influence Shisui''s ideas. Sarutobi Hiruzen''s favorite is ying the emotional cards. To firmly lock his target in the vige.


    In the beginning, Sarutobi Hiruzen was constantly using Uchiha Kagami in front of Shisui. So, it was so easy to sessfully instigate Shisui. And it was the same now.


    Hearing Sarutobi Hiruzen talking about the word ''grandfather'', Shisui couldn''t help but struggle.


    Immediately after he clenched his teeth, he said firmly again: "Please believe me, I will seed this time!"


    While speaking, Shisui this time is even red... open... he opened his Mangekyo Sharingan naked in front of them.


    They were shocked! Emotionally tension! The atmosphere in the Conference Hall instantly dimmed to the extreme.


    Until now, wasn''t what they were most afraid of the Mangekyo Sharingan? They knew very well that Mangekyo Sharingan was the main Dojutsu that can even control Kyuubi!


    Now that Shisui has opened Mangekyo Sharingan, what does this mean? How does this not make them nervous?


    Without waiting too long, Shisui quickly confessed: "My pair of eyes- this Dojutsu can change the memory and thinking of others! Please believe me! If I were to use Dojutsu this time, I would definitely solve the n problem!"


    Shisui said like it was nothing. But his Dojutsu''s ability...


    In this Conference Hall, the four old faces became extremely ugly. How could they not think of the horror of Dojutsu?


    Just a split second ago, they had already thought of countless kinds of applications of this Dojutsu. Because of this, they only became more afraid of Shisui now.


    After four people exchanged nces... still Sarutobi Hiruzen came forward to solve this problem. Sarutobi Hiruzen immediately reced his expression with a kind expression: "Very good, Shisui. You didn''t let me- let you grandfather disappointed. In that case, I won''t stop you. We will let it go. I believe you will be able to solve this problem perfectly."


    "Thank you very much! Third-Kage, please rest assured that I will not let you down this time!" Shisui''s expression rejoiced. Immediately with a determined look, he left the Conference Hall.


    After Shisui leaves.


    The atmosphere in the Conference Hall seemed to be a pool of stagnant water. They could not speak for a long time.


    In the end, Shimura Danzo took the lead to start to talk and said: "How serious is the problem with Shisui; I believe I don''t need to say it. That child cannot be left alone!"


    After Shimura Danzo expressed his thoughts, there was no rebuttal from the rest of the three people. After all, Shimura Danzo was right.


    Now, Shisui... the threat to them was too great!


    The most disturbing thing was that in addition to controlling Kyuubi, Shisui couldpletely change people''s memory and thinking!


    The four elders who are suspicious, how can they put everyone''s safety on Shishui''s loyalty?


    This brainwashing n; no one can say for sure!


    Shisui said he would use Dojutsu on his nsman. But who would dare to guarantee that Shisui will not fight back against them and use it on them?


    For an instant, the pressure Shisui put on them was even better than the other Uchiha n''s ''political... change'' n!


    Seeing the three old close friends didn''t refute or stop him. Shimura Danzo, who was familiar with them, knew what was going on. Isn''t this the kind of thing that hurts your own friend, and that''s why you don''t want to say it from your own mouth?


    Hehe. The typical one is to be both a bitch and a torii.


    [TL note: A torii (Japanese: toii) is a traditional Japanese gate mostmonly found at the entrance of or within a Shinto shrine, where it symbolically marks the transition from the mundane to the sacred.]


    Shimura Danzo nced at them contemptuously and then turned and left the Hokage Residence...

 Chapter 41: Dark chess works, butterfly effect

    Chapter 41: Dark chess works, butterfly effect


    In the jungle.


    After leaving Hokage Residence, Shisui did not walk back to Uchiha n''s residence from the right path. Instead, he entered the jungle. He intended to bypass the side because he knew that this matter could no longer be dyed.


    He intended to start today!


    But when he just wanted to move forward, he was suddenly attacked! He avoided this wave of attacks with a jump. But the attackers had no intention of stopping.


    The attacks were endless.


    Finally, after avoiding a series of attacks by this group of attackers, Shisui took the opportunity to escape from the jungle to get a better field of view.


    Because of this, he finally saw the true face of the attackers!


    Root ninjas!


    It was the same as his original guess. But, even when the truth was in front of him, he still couldn''t relieve his heart because he didn''t understand whether the Root''s attack on him this time was made by some people, or...


    Shisui no longer dared to think anymore.


    It didn''t take long for the secret mastermind who nned the attack. Shimura Danzo walked out of the jungle unabashedly and expressed his views tantly.


    It is said that the ability of Shisui''s Mangekyo Sharingan should not be used for such small things as "politics change".


    Because the vige would no longer take Uchiha n lightly again, Uchiha n will also walk to the opposite side of the vige sooner orter. He did not conceal his intention to make Shisui''s Mangekyo Sharingan be his.


    Both sides have an equal chance of winning. So, in order to probe the strength of Shisui, Danzo first ordered his subordinates to retreat, and then the two began to fight.


    During the fight, Shisui can be said to hold back at all times. There was no killing intent at all.


    But just as the battle between the two was about to end, Shisui''s mind shed involuntarily 2 years ago, amoner who left Konoha and inadvertently asked him a few words!


    ''Wouldn''t so many people want to have it? Do you think a non-Uchiha can own Sharingan?''


    As soon as these two sentences shed, Shisui''s view of Danzo became involuntarily suspicious. He looked subconsciously at Danzo''s right eye wrapped in bandages.


    After hesitating for a while, he made a decision. That is, he was going to verify a probability that even he himself found unbelievable!


    ''Mangekyo Sharingan!''


    He looked directly at Danzo''s right eye. He began to feel it carefully.


    Just as expected He got the answer he didn''t want most!


    Konoha''s high level, Shimura Danzo!


    Sure enough, he transnted a Sharingan from his n! Even though Danzo, at this time, wasn''t using Sharingan, but that feeling of his pupil''s power of the same n, he would not mistake it!


    ''Asshole! What exactly does this mean?!''


    ''If someone from the top Konoha covets our n''s Sharingan, does it mean that regardless of the development between the vige and the n, it will never have a good result for Uchiha n?! If for the sake of the big picture, we sacrificed ourselves, it won''t matter at all?''


    The thought that it was because of this unscrupulous thing that causes harm to the n made Shisui unable to bear it.


    That''s right. For the vige, maybe he will sacrifice n...


    For the reputation of the n and for the continuation of the n, he would not hesitate to bear the infamy of using Genjutsu against his own n members.


    ''But anyway, this guy who res like a tiger watching his prey to my n''s eyes absolutely can''t leave alive!''


    The vige and the n... but first, eliminate this tumor that hurts Konoha!


    At this moment, when Shisui faced Danzo, he finally moved his killing intention! In the next attack, he would not keep his hand anymore!


    Sensing it, Danzo wanted to call his subordinates toe to the rescue, but unfortunately, it was toote. The serious Shisui used the Mangekyo Sharingan. Danzo finally couldn''t escape Shisui''s ultimate move and eventually fell down.


    A group of Root ninjas shed to the edge of the jungle. Looking at Danzo''s corpse, they were all at a loss.


    Shisui had no mercy on the fallen Danzo.


    Seeing the group of Root ninjas in front of him, Shisui turned around and left without any intention of doing anything.


    But at that moment, the words from the civilian who left Konoha shed again in Shisui''s mind. ''Since your ninjas'' abilities are so weird. Say... Is there an ability that can bring people back to life?''


    As soon as this sentence floated through his head, Shisui suddenly became alert!


    ''Izanagi!''


    Thinking of Danzo''s right eye, Shisui thought of Izanagi. But all this was toote. Because when he was about to jump off, Danzo took the lead. Danzo came from behind and gave him a fatal blow.


    "Pu..." Shisui''s mouth was full of fresh blood.


    But it was unlike in the original series. Shisui was vignt in advance. Although he did not escape Danzo''s fatal blow, he managed to escape from Danzo''s palm that wanted to capture his eyes.


    After Danzo pulled his hand, Shisui, who was suffering from serious injury, couldn''t help kneeling down on one knee. A lot of blood oozed out of his mouth. He looked up and stared at Danzo. "...Why?"


    As if Danzo had already won, he had no ns to hide it. He walked toward Shisui and said, "Let your eyes make the most contribution to the vige."


    Shisui sneered, really...


    In order not to let Danzo''s treachery seed, Shisui took out a Smoke Bomb and smashed it.


    Then he tried his best to escape from the scene.


    Of course, Danzo would not allow him to leave. So, he ordered the Root ninjas to chase him down.


    In the process of chasing and fleeing, it was exactly the same as the development of original work. Itachi appeared when Shisui was about to die. His timely appearance saved Shisui from the Root''s hands.


    After telling Itachi the reason for the incident, Itachi obeyed Shisui''s instructions. However, he didn''t take Shisui to treatment but instead came to the cliff of Naka River.


    [TL note: The Naka River, Naka no Kawa, Viz: Nakano River, literally meaning: River of Southern Joy is a river flowing through Konohagakure. The river is located on thend where the Uchiha n once lived and prospered, and at some point, it passes through a deep ravine.]


    Although Shishui can use ''Izanagi'' to recover from his injuries, he did not do so because he knew that it would not help.


    Regardless of whether the attack was made by Danzo or the vige''s decision, the other party will not give up his eyes as long as he survives for a day. It may start the riot in advance.


    Therefore, to prevent everyone from getting hurt in order to fight for his eyes, Shisui chose the river to kill himself, just like in the original work.


    Before dying, he entrusted his will to Itachi. He also handed over his pair of Mangekyo Sharingan to Itachi, hoping to help Itachi solve the conflict between the n and the vige.


    And thus, Itachi also opened his Mangekyo Sharingan!

 Chapter 42: The Unchangeable Plot

    Chapter 42: The Unchangeable Plot


    Seeing the scene, Li Yaoxiang couldn''t help but feeling that Konoha''s four elders were cruel. Shisui said to them that he would do it regardless of his past sentiments.


    Shisui was also the grandson of their old close friend, Uchiha Kagami. The four elders didn''t even think twice. They collectively agreed.


    In fact, before transmigrated, Li Yaoxiang once suspected that Shisui''s plead didn''t really matter. After all, Shisui''s choice was made only after Sarutobi Hiruzen agreed.


    For every Shisui''s actions, wouldn''t Sarutobi Hiruzen and the others pay close attention to him? And with the crystal ball of Sarutobi Hiruzen and the other two elders'' many manpower; wouldn''t they understand that Danzo wants to kill Shisui?


    Therefore, based on various doubts, Li Yaoxiang suspected that Shisui''s death was Konoha''s four elders'' decision. And now, after transmigrating here and seeing this picture through the crystal ball, it confirmed Li Yaoxiang''s conjecture.


    Although he had some sympathy for Shisui''s experience, Li Yaoxiang was still hard-hearted and has no intention of changing Shisui''s destiny. He didn''t want to ruin his entire darkening n because of his temporary weakness.


    And one more important point is that Li Yaoxiang suspected that the people or things involved in the Uchiha n''s destruction might not be as simple as it seems. He suspected that Uchiha Madara, Obito, and ck Zetsu, and the others hidden behind the scenes might also be involved.


    You know, although these three all have amon goal, which is to collect the Tailed Beast!


    This big n; there will be a group of 2, 3, 4 members awakening the Mangekyo Sharingan in the future. How would they collect the Tailed Beast then?


    If their member can control every Tailed Beast when the timees, wouldn''t Uchiha n be their biggest stumbling block?


    In addition to the original work, when Itachi was wiping the n, Obito was already there to help, making Li Yaoxiang more confident in his guess. Therefore, whether it''s his own darkening n that demands it or to avoid these big bosses, as long as Li Yaoxiang is a little sane, he cannot prevent this tragedy.


    After clearing his thoughts, Li Yaoxiang stopped thinking too much.


    However, one thing he was thankful for was that he didn''t expect his random move in the dark chess would have such a huge effect in his favor.


    Shimura Danzo did not get ''Kotoamatsukami''. In other words, in the days toe, Li Yaoxiang would no longer have to worry about Naruto being affected by Danzo''s Kotoamatsukami!


    This was good news for him! No longer need to be checked and bnced because of Kotoamatsukami! It made it more convenient to act!


    But being happy can wait. In this period of time, it was not the time for Li Yaoxiang to be idle. After all, no one knows whether the butterfly effect will cause or prevent the death of Shisui, which can make a huge difference. Therefore, he must pay close attention to the movements of all parties, just in case.


    ...


    Uchiha n''s residence, n hall.


    At this moment, almost all members of the Uchiha n gathered in the n hall.


    The reason why there is such a grand scene was because they received the news of Shisui''s death, which for them, like thunder from a clear sky. Because Shisui was an important ace in their n to seize power.


    In the entire Uchiha n, only Shisui could enter and leave the Hokage Residence at will. Therefore, as long as they do not want to cause a lot of casualties when they seize power, they must have a spy like Shisui, which could cooperate with them inside and outside.


    It can be said that Shisui''s deathpletely disrupted their overall n.


    "Damn it! Why did Shisui suddenly die?!"


    "Did the vige discover something?"


    "Thest person I saw when Shisui died is Itachi! Could it be Itachi..."


    There were noises in the hall.


    When he heard someone doubting his son, Uchiha Fugaku immediately interrupted: "Enough! Shisui''s things end here! Now it''s no use saying that! The most important thing at the moment is that we must know what the vige attitude is. We must prepare in advance! The original n; we put on hold for now. After this matter fades, everyone will make a decision. Moreover, now that there is no Shisui to cooperate with us both internally and externally, we are not in a good spot."


    In the hall, most members of the Uchiha n were full of unwilling expressions. But the facts are exactly as n Leader Fugaku said. They had nothing to say.


    In the end, they had to follow Fugaku''s instructions to bide one''s time.


    ...


    Hokage Residence, In Conference Hall.


    After confirming that Shisui had died, Sarutobi Hiruzen, Mitokado Homura, and Utatane Koharu did not feel saddened by the death of their grandson but felt relieved.


    Only Shimura Danzo''s face looked as ugly as eating shit.


    Seeing his old friends who didn''t take it seriously, Shimura Danzo was unable to bear it and said: "What''s wrong? Do you think this thing is over? Don''t forget, we can''t find Shisui''s corpse until now! You believe the words of Itachi? Uchiha''s problems have not been solved yet, so are you rxing now?"


    Mitokado Homura: "Danzo, there is nothing we can do. Without Shisui''s report, we have no clue about Uchiha''s internals. We shouldn''t act careless. Do you want to see arge number of casualties in the vige?"


    Utatane Koharu: "That''s right. In case other viges take advantage of it, it''s not good."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen: "Let me probe the child, Itachi. He is a little different from other Uchiha n people. Maybe we can let him rece Shisui''s position, so that the vige loss can be minimized."


    ...


    Hokage room.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen called Itachi to meet him alone.


    "Itachi, I''ve heard what happened. I am very sorry for Shisui''s death. The loss of Shisui is a great loss to the vige. The vige can''t stand anymore loss. I hope you can rece Shisui and fulfill his mission during his lifetime." Sarutobi Hiruzen thought he would need to use a lot of lip service before Itachi could ept.


    "Of course, Lord-Hokage. Needless to say, I agreed to this matter. But I have a request."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen was slightly surprised, then nodded and said: "Say it."


    "I need you to give me a period of time to solve the problem of n. If it really cannot be changed, then I will act ording to your arrangements. Before that, I will also exin the situation of the n."


    After a moment of consideration, Sarutobi Hiruzen finally agreed.


    If the Uchiha n can be solved without a single dead, it is undoubtedly the best result for the vige. So he had no reason to refuse.

 Chapter 43: Waiting for the opportunity, a perfect life

    Chapter 43: Waiting for the opportunity, a perfect life


    After watching the scene in the crystal ball, Li Yaoxiang was finally relieved. Except for the Shisui''s pair of Mangekyo Sharingan, other things have not changed much.


    Uchiha n chose to postpone the action for the sake of safety. Likewise, the Konoha four elders also chose to postpone the action for the sake of safety.


    As for Itachi...


    Why he readily agreed to Sarutobi Hiruzen''s request despite knowing that the person who wanted the kill Shisui had a transnted Sharingan, Li Yaoxiang felt that this was also well understood. After all, from the standpoint of Itachi, regardless of whether the attack on Shisui was carried out by Shimura Danzo or whether he had a transnted Sharingan, it was actually not important for the current Itachi.


    Because of what was ced in front of him, there were only two choices.


    First, stand on the vige side and then finalizing the n.


    Second, stand on the n side and overtake the vige.


    If he chose the first option, the n would be destroyed. However, if he chose the second option, Danzo will also be killed, then he doesn''t need to worry about this issue.


    No matter which option it is, Itachi cannot decide in a moment, so he chose the same method as in the original book, that is, to drag!


    Inherit the will of Shisui Try to dy the time as much as possible and try to change the idea of the vige or the n!


    In order to dy the time, he chose topromise. He chose to let go of the hatred against Danzo. He reported the n''s situation to Sarutobi Hiruzen and the others to let them feel at ease. He chose to promise the n to bring the news inside Konoha back to the n to let them know that they were doing things and to find opportunities to start.


    He became another Shisui.


    A double agent.


    And one of the most important reasons was that Itachi''s favorite younger brother, Sasuke, was still young. He didn''t want Sasuke to lose his family''s warmth when he is that young. Therefore, based on the reasons, the ideas of the three sides; Uchiha n, Konoha four elders, and Itachi all coincide, led to this current situation.


    After Shisui''s death, the ''the n''s genocide event'' was dyed again.


    But it would return.


    Things have now reached this stage. If there are no idents, the next situation will be calm for a long time.


    There shouldn''t be any problems for Li Yaoxiang.


    All he needs to do was to wait silently for things to ferment until the time is right!


    ...


    Time flies.


    In the blink of an eye, another year has passed.


    During this year, as Li Yaoxiang spected, life in the Konoha Vige was very peaceful without any idents. What should everyone do?


    As the days passed, Naruto finally waited for the day he most looked forward to!


    That is the opening ceremony of the Academy!


    Long ago, he was full of longing for the Academy. Because in the past few years, when he wandered outside of his home, he could see the students in the Academy, studying and sparring together.


    ''What a wonderful day this is~''


    Of course, although he was looking forward to the life in the Academy, this did not mean that he is not satisfied with his current life with Hinata and Sasuke. On the contrary, he just wanted to be recognized by more people.


    Just like his big brother said at the beginning. He hopes he can prove to everyone that he is no worse than his father. Even if a big fox is sealed inside of him, he wants everyone to get along with him at ease.


    Today, the sky was just getting bright.


    Although Naruto was still lying on the bed, his eyes were already wide. He even had a pair of panda eyes. He was so excited that he couldn''t sleep all night. He was so afraid that he would miss the opening ceremony today.


    Ring! Ring! Ring!


    The rm clock went off.


    Naruto pped the button with his palm. Sat up in excitement.


    After waiting for so many hours, it finally arrived!


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t need to nag Naruto. Naruto quickly went to the bathroom and started washing. Tidied up appearance. He chose a suit he was most satisfied with.


    He will be the most beautiful cub today!


    After finishing everything, he took a brisk pace and walked towards the direction of the Academy.


    ...


    During the walk, he was in a very good mood, but he never forgot to say hello.


    "Good morning, Auntie!"


    "Oh, Naruto. So early today?"


    "Yeah, I''m going to school starting today!"


    "Hahaha, no wonder. Remember to listen to the teacher, alright?"


    "En!"


    Along the way, the vigers who greeted Naruto were among the few. This is all due to the efforts of Naruto over the past few years. His lively and cheerful character gradually affected everyone. Even if everyone is not at ease in contact with Naruto for too long, this is much better than the attitude of retreating three feet at the beginning.


    Stop-and-go. Chat with this. A little chat with that.


    It didn''t take long; he finally arrived in the Academy''s range.


    On the scene, there were already many parents who took their children to attend today''s opening ceremony. When everyone saw the arrival of Naruto, they no longer looked afraid. They even smiled and nodded at Naruto.


    It was not surprising that there was such reaction. After all, Naruto was not afraid to work hard every day, and everyone could see it. Even if they still can''t bepletely at ease, they had unconsciously recognized Naruto''s efforts. They believe that sooner orter, Naruto will be able to fully control the demon fox inside of him and not let it hurt everyone.


    Everyone who met Naruto''s eyes, Naruto would return the smile very politely.


    Until he found a light purple mushroom head in the crowd, he immediately looked overjoyed. Then, ignoring the eyes of those around him, he ran over: "Hinata, you''re here too!"


    "Un."


    "What about Sasuke?"


    "No, I didn''t see him."


    "Let''s go. I''ll take you to find him."


    "Un."


    Naruto took Hinata''s small hand. No shame, no dizziness. Hinata seemed to have gotten used to this way of getting along with Naruto.


    Sasuke, who had just arrived here, was not surprised to see that the two held hands. Anyway, he was already used to the love birds act in front of him from time to time. Sasuke''s totally third-wheeling.


    The second fool, Naruto, must have mistakenly thought that holding hands with Hinata was just a normal thing between friends.


    After seeing Sasuke, Naruto immediately raised his hand and shook it sharply: "Sasuke! Here! Here! We are here!"


    Sasuke''s face was ck. Covering his face slightly with his hands, he walked overining: "Can you get any louder?! Why are you so excited?"


    "Of course, I''m excited! In the future, we can walk to school together and study together! We can also have more opponents to spar!"


    Hearing this, Sasuke was speechless.


    ''I don''t know if this Naruto is really stupid or pretending to be stupid. Does he realize his own strength? Will there be any opponent for you in the school?''


    Sasuke''s face was ck.


    Naruto held Hinata''s hand, and he didn''t seem to have any ns to let go.

 Chapter 44: Meaning, Complex Teaching

    Chapter 44: Meaning, Complex Teaching


    When the three gathered together, they became the focus of the audience at that moment. There was no other reason. The lineup was too dazzling.


    The top n, the child of Hyuga n.


    The top n, the child of Uchiha n.


    The child of Namikaze Minato/the Fourth-Hokage.


    It was hard not to pay attention.


    What the onlookers have to envy is that the children in front of them were not only well-behaved and sensible but also suffer a lot of hardships, and they were not afraid to work hard every day.


    The parents subconsciously nced down at their children.


    Parents:...


    Child: [ (oo) ]?


    While the parents werementing ''how good is the other''s child, the loudspeaker on the podium rang.


    "Good morning everyone! Wee everyone to the Academy''s opening ceremony today. And now we have our Lord-Hokage to address us for the opening ceremony!"


    Pa pa pa pa!


    There were apuses everywhere.


    When they saw Sarutobi Hiruzen wearing the Hokage clothes and walking from a short distance, the children showed their admiring eyes even more.


    All the children stared at Sarutobi Hiruzen brightly!


    After he came to the stage, Sarutobi Hiruzen looked around for a bit. Seeing the children in great spirits, he nodded with satisfaction. "Hello everyone! I am very happy to be able to see everyone''s energy today! Whenever I see you growing up vigorously, it reminds me of the heroes who have sacrificed for the vige over the years. They are not in vain...."


    There is no doubt that after Sarutobi Hiruzen has juste to the scene, he began to incite emotions. Bringing the children or the parents into an atmosphere that needs to be grateful to the vige.


    When the atmosphere was almost over, Sarutobi Hiruzen began to instill ''Will of Fire'': "Where tree leaves dance... one shall find mes... the fire''s shadow will illuminate the vige... and once again tree leaves shall bud anew."


    The Konoha Vige has been very sessful in shaping the "shadow" image. Therefore, it can be said that most of the children born and raised in Konoha hope to be a Hokage in the future. The reason is simple. Because it''s majestic!


    The minds of the children are simple, after all.


    Who doesn''t want to be engraved on Hokage Rock and be worshipped by everyone as a hero?


    The reason for this result is due to the unintentional decision of Senju Hashirama. In order topensate Uchiha Madara and to make Madara more attributable or a more sense of belonging, he said that after Madara bes the Hokage, Madara''s face should be carved on the cliff as a symbol of protecting the vige. So this kind of effect evolved naturally.


    Senju Tobirama''s distant thoughts continued and strengthened this effect and added a ''Will of Fire'' course to the Academy. Hokage Rock can make children full of longing and in awe of the "shadow" in the vige.


    The Academy can instill Will of Fire so that the new generation of children will not be ''long crooked''. This is why Konoha can cultivate so many honest ninjas in the future. However,pared with Sarutobi Hiruzen''s crafty plots and machinations in his generation, we, fans of the original work, know how far the difference is.


    Today, the situation was the same. The children listened to Sarutobi Hiruzen''s speech, and they all heard as if they were drunk and stupefied.


    Naruto''s second fool is among the first.


    The reaction of the Noble ns'' younger generation was slightly better. After all, their family has a bit different set of teaching. At least on the surface, they were not as obsessed as othermoner children.


    At this moment, Li Yaoxiang''s voice suddenly appeared in Naruto''s mind, pulling his mind back to reality: "What''s the matter, Naruto? Do you think what Third-Kage said is all the truth? Are they as great as they say?"


    Naruto cheerfully replied: "Yes! Isn''t it? Didn''t dad sacrifice his life to save the whole vige?" Naruto answered happily. There was no hesitation.


    And Li Yaoxiang did not continue to talk about this topic. After all, the darkening time he was waiting for was not yet mature. This ''Life Peak'' hasn''t reached most peaks yet. It is estimated that it still takes more time to brew.


    And the reason for the question this time was purely to bring Naruto''s mind back to reality. He didn''t want Naruto to be influenced too much by the brain-wash expert Sarutobi Hiruzen, which could lead to mistakes in subsequent ns.


    Seeing that Li Yaoxiang did not answer his question, Naruto didn''t care either. He continued to listen. It''s just that his emotions are obviously not as excited as he was just now. This time he listened to Sarutobi Hiruzen''s ''performance'' with a normal attitude.


    That''s it. Just talks and talks.


    Seeing the Will of Fire was almost instilled, Sarutobi Hiruzen ended the speech. The opening ceremony thus officially ended.


    Parents went home, and the children began to be ced into sses.


    There are about 150 students in each ss. They were divided into three sses.


    ''I don''t know if this is strange or perhaps intentional with this; those Noble ns'' younger generation and Naruto all happened to be in the same ss.''


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t see anything through the crystal ball. But he estimated that behind this should also be the shadow of Sarutobi Hiruzen.


    ''The high probability is that he wants Naruto, the Jinchuriki, to make friends with more fetters. After all, Sarutobi Hiruzen also noticed that only the Noble ns'' younger generation would not be as ignorant as other people. So they wouldn''t worry that the demon fox would run out of Naruto''s body at any time.''


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t think too much of this. Anyway, this does not affect his darkening n. As long as Hinata, Sasuke and Naruto are not separated, that''s fine.


    .....


    After the new students were divided into sses, sses started directly.


    It would be a big mistake to think that instilling the "Will of Fire" is a one-off. In the teaching courses, there are still various contents that transform the Will of Fire into children''s values. This is also the main purpose of the vige''s school.


    So, the beginning of the ss content is not about teaching Ninjutsu or and so on, but deepening their knowledge of Will of Fire. The history lessons, for example. The glorious deeds are magnified infinitely.


    Apart from this, through studying the assigned textbooks, Li Yaoxiang could see that the things to learn in the Academy were moreplicated than he imagined.


    What kind of parab? What is the principle of Ninjutsu? What is the weight of the weapon, and so on.


    Although it is some basic knowledge, for this group of children, it should not be easy to understand. So it''s no wonder that in the original work, Naruto lost at the starting line became a scum from head to tail.


    However, in this life, with Li Yaoxiang as a talented teacher, Naruto was destined to no longer be scum in original work. As long as you study hard, you may have the opportunity to be a master student!


    Just like that, the days passed day by day.


    Basic knowledge and history tutorials. With a rough understanding, the teaching content in the first-year ss finally began the actualbat teaching of Ninjutsu, which also means that the real good show...


    Finally started!

 Chapter 45: The Model Student Naruto

    Chapter 45: The Model Student Naruto


    Academy, in the first-year ss.


    Umino Iruka became the ss Teacher of this ss.


    [TL note: Iruka Umino is a chnin of Konohagakure, who served primarily as an instructor at the Academy until being promoted to Headmaster yearster.]


    In the original work, he is the first guy who made Naruto feel a sense of belonging.


    Since they were about to start the actual teaching of Ninjutsu, it is an inevitable thing to test the students'' foundation first. After a series of tests, he finally got a general understanding of the students'' foundation and background.


    At this moment, he stood in front of a group of Academy, holding a score sheet in his hand. The main content of this score sheet is to record the scores obtained by the students during the previous test.


    Iruka announced their scores eloquently. In this way, Iruka began to announce the students with low scores. Until announced to the top 10.


    "8th ce! Nara Shikamaru! 50 points for throwing test, 40 points for physical strength test, 30 points for Clone Jutsu, 30 points for Body Substitution Jutsu, 30 points for Transformation Jutsu. 180 points total!"


    "No. 7! Ino Yamanaka..."


    All the students could not help but focus on the named students.


    Eyes revealed all kinds of envy and worship.


    The gap was really too big. After all, somemoner children haven''t even refined Chakra yet. In their eyes, the performance of the top 10 is like the difference between Superman and an ordinary person. The higher the rankings and scores, the more you feel better.


    Reading, reading...


    Iruka finally reached third ce.


    "3rd ce! Hyuga Hinata! 70 points for throwing test, 60 points for physical strength test, 60 points for Clone Jutsu, 90 points for Body Substitution Jutsu, 70 points for Transformation Jutsu. 350 points total!"


    At this point, many students held their breath involuntarily, dumbly listening to the score read by Iruka.


    ''Monster!''


    ''An absolute monster!''


    ''Madder than other people!''


    Just after entering school, got 350 points. For them, this score was simply unattainable.


    ording to Iruka-sensei, the senior students only had about 400 points upon graduation!


    "2nd ce! Uchiha Sasuke! 90 points for throwing test, 80 points for physical strength test, 70 points for Clone Jutsu, 70 points for Body Substitution Jutsu, 70 points for Transformation Jutsu. A total of 380 points!"


    Hiss--!


    The students in the ssroom could not help but take a breath. Even the children of Noble ns!


    Although from the test just now, anyone can already see from Sasuke''s performance that there is a certain gap between him and them. But they didn''t expect when the scorees out. The gap will be so obvious.


    Everyone has been trained by their n since childhood. Why is the gap so big? Is it because the Uchiha n and Hyuga n''s aptitude so much stronger than their own n?


    However, for the shocked eyes of the students, Sasuke only snorted very ufortably and then put on a stinky face.


    After the voice of discussion gradually ceased, Iruka was now ready to announce the first-ce result.


    And everyone''s eyes also involuntarily shifted to Naruto! Because everyone knew that Naruto is the 1st ce in the ss. In the test, Naruto''s abnormal performance has made everyone dumbfounded. So now everyone is very curious about Naruto''s score.


    Iruka gave Naruto aplicated look. Then, finally, it was announced loudly: "First ce! Uzumaki Naruto! 80 points for throwing test, 100 points for physical strength test, 100 points for Clone Jutsu, 100 points for Body Substitution Jutsu, 100 points for Transformation Jutsu. 480 points total!"


    Just as the sentence finished, all the students in the ssroom were in an uproar. Of course, this made it difficult for the students present not to be shocked!


    ording to Iruka-sensei, this test is based on Genin''s criteria to give scores. In other words, this weirdo Naruto, his various abilities have reached or even surpassed certain Genin levels as soon as he enters school!


    ''Fuck!''


    ''Why he needs that to be so abnormal?!''


    This makes others feel depressed.


    "Naruto, you are just too strong? Just graduate. Forget this."


    "Yeah, yeah! You have won glory for us! I heard from my parents that the children of Noble ns only graduate as early as 6-7 years old. Hahaha! Naruto, you just graduated from school and broke the record!"


    "Too strong! Worthy of Hokage''s son-."


    Many people were shocked and jealous.


    It became identification and cheer.


    When they determine that the person in front of them is not of the same ss as themselves, they will no longerpare themselves. Only look up to them and agree with them.


    It''s like a street food seller and a restaurant owner.


    People who sell food on this street maypare themselves with those who open restaurants, believing that one day they will surpass them.


    But what if the other side opened an international chain store? Do people who sell food on the street couldpare themselves to them?


    Of course not! They won''t!


    Only envy!


    Compared with Naruto''s strength today, it is like the difference between opening a cross-international chain store and selling food on the street. They couldn''tpare themselves to Naruto anymore.


    They could only be proud of him!


    Who said that when amoner was born, they can''tpare themselves with the Noble n?


    Isn''t Naruto a good role model?


    Because of this, after the grades came out, the girls in the ss changed on how they see Naruto. They started admiring him a little. Unknowingly, they posed the most beautiful angle in the direction of Naruto, hoping that Naruto would notice them.


    From this moment! Naruto in this life is no longer the disgusting demon fox in the original work!


    In the world of children, Naruto''s poprity has reached a point where he never even dared to think before!


    They gradually became enthusiastic about Naruto. Support him.


    "Naruto, how are you strong? Can you teach us to be stronger?"


    "Yeah, Naruto. Teach us. We want to be stronger like you."


    This hard-won scene made Naruto so excited! Isn''t this the life of his yearn for something even in dreams? Did his efforts pay off? Everyone finally epted him!


    Naruto faced this situation for the first time didn''t know what to do, but in order not to disappoint everyone, he quickly turned to everyone and responded heartily: "Okay! Me, Hinata, and Sasuke, we all can exercise together every day. If you also want to be stronger, join us in the future! We won''t mind.


    With that, Naruto turned his head towards Sasuke and Hinata and said, "Right, Hinata? Sasuke?"


    Hinata: "Un."


    Sasuke turned his head: "Humph."


    After hearing these answers, there was another noise.


    "Wa~ No wonder Hinata and Sasuke are so powerful! It turned out that Naruto taught them to be stronger--!"


    "Ohh! So that''s how it is! And after I learn from Naruto and be stronger, I can definitely beat them!"


    In an instant, the reason why Hinata and Sasuke were so powerful was also made up by everyone. The faces of the Noble n younger generation couldn''t help but be a little ugly. They are beingpared. When ites to the face of the n, even theziest Shikamaru became ufortable.


    Only Sasuke and Hinata, who are closely rted, don''t care about these things.


    Although Sasuke appeared to be somewhat disdainful on the surface, he recognized Naruto''s strength from the bottom of his heart. After all, he had sparred Naruto so many times. Not to mention Hinata.


    ''Naruto is good. And Hinata is just fine.''


    Throughout the process, Hinata just looked at Naruto with an admiring expression on his face.


    Seeing Naruto so happy, she felt pleased herself.


    ''I hope Naruto will be happy forever...''


    The voice in the ssroom was very noisy and was about to explode when Iruka''s voice rang again...

 Chapter 46: The Gap, The Real Showdown

    Chapter 46: The Gap, The Real Showdown


    "Okay! Quiet, quiet! The reason why Naruto performed so well depends on his daily hard work! I believe you have seen Naruto exercising in recent years, right? How about you guys? When others are exercising, you are still ying casually! Remember! If you want to be strong, learn more from Naruto. Follow him as an example and work hard together! Got it?"


    "Yes!" The students in the whole ss said in unison.


    After seeing the ss finally settled down, Iruka continued: "Everyone must remember that the previous test is just the foundation test. Even if your foundation reaches the Genin standard, this does not mean that you have the Genin strength! A real ninja needs to pass many tests. Now everyone, follow me to the open space outside. The next step is to test your actualbat ability!"


    There was another burst of cheers. This kind of Ninjutsu course is an actualbat course. For them, it''s like the physical education in the modern world. It''s much more interesting than reading boring books.


    ....


    Not long.


    A group of students followed Iruka to the open space outside the ssroom.


    Iruka said to the students: "Okay. When I named,e out andpete with your opponent. Remember to give me a serious shot. This is a good opportunity for you to increase your actualbat experience! For those who have not yet refined their Chakra, you can avoid this time''s actualbat training. But you still have to observe how the students fight against each other, understand?"


    "Yes!" The whole members responded in unison.


    Soon, one student after another was named by Iruka. And began to fight.


    Iruka did not select the students withparable strength as opponents, but instead, he let the top 10 highest scores in the test be the opponent of the group ofmoner children. The purpose is to let this group ofmoner children clearly understand how their strength differs from the strength of these Noble n younger generations so that they can reflect on themselves. It also allows them to have a clear direction for improvement. And one of the most important reasons is that when the strength of the two sides is disparity, the chance of injury will be greatly reduced. After all, the stronger party does not need to use all their strength to deal with weaker opponents so they can learn to control their strength.


    Iruka also made it rtively easy to exin. Otherwise, the students will be covered with scars not long after going to school. That''s all.


    ....


    One after another actualbat training was continuously performed in front of everyone''s eyes. The result was no surprise. Commoner children were not the top ten''s opponents at all. In less than a few rounds, they all were defeated.


    After thest battle betweenmoner children and Noble n''s younger generation was over, the next was in the time everyone''s looking forward to! That is the actualbat training of the top 10! It is said to be actualbat training, but in the eyes of children, it has long been regarded as a ranked match!


    A ranking match that determines the top ten experts in the ss!


    All children watched the ten people in front of them intently. Everyone knows that the real battle is finally on! It''s just that, just when everyone thought that there would be one battle after another, their ss Teacher, Iruka, had another n. This time it was Naruto, Hinata, Sasuke. The top 3 people took turns against the remaining 7 students.


    The results were unexpected.


    Their strength and speed were inferiorpared to Naruto and the others. The remaining Noble n younger generation have not fullyprehended their family ninjutsu. It was simply impossible to be an opponent for Naruto and the others. The gap between the two sides is like themoner children they yed with before. Not at the same level!


    This time, Naruto and the others really taught them what genius is and what mediocre is.


    Haruno Sakura and Ino Yamanaka werepletely abused by Hinata. Nara Shikamaru, Akimichi Choji, Aburame Shino, and Inuzuka Kiba were also abused by Naruto and Sasuke.


    Girls lose to girls. Boys lose to boys.


    This result left thempletely speechless and convinced.


    Seeing this result, the group of brats sitting on the side acting as an audience that didn''t even get a B score at all couldn''t say anything.


    "Hahahaha! I thought we were the only ones getting abused. It turns out that abuser still has another high abuser!"


    "That''s it! Hahahaha! When they abused us just now, they looked invincible. Now they''re all defeated! Hahaha! Naruto! Good job! I stand up to you!"


    "It seems that they''re not very strong. Maybe, as long as we''re able to extract Chakra, we can surpass them."


    "Wait after I learn from Naruto! Then, I''lle back for revenge!"


    "Bah! I''ll say it first; I''ll learn first!"


    "No, I will learn first!"


    Seeing the atmosphere was a bit wrong, Iruka hurriedly came out and rounded the field: "Okay, okay! Weren''t you guyspletely lost to them? Do you have the face tough at others? Wait until you reach their level first." Then he turned to Naruto and said, "Do you guys still want to fight?"


    Sasuke: "Of course!"


    Naruto: "Does this still need to be said?"


    While saying this, the two looked at each other involuntarily. Their eyes filled with fighting intent! As if it will be a fateful duel next. The spectating crowd aside cheered even more.


    "DUEL!"


    "DUEL!"


    "DUEL!"


    It''s just that no one noticed that Hinata, who was standing on the side, was posing with a face full of embarrassment. It looked like something got stuck in her throat.


    "Uh... Sorry, I... Uh... Excuse me, I..." She wanted to reach out and attract the attention of others. But her little hand had to stretch out again and again, giving a feeling of hesitation. The whole world seemed to ignore her existence. No one at the scene cared about her feelings. Everyone, including Iruka, did not notice her.


    Naruto: "Ha! Sasuke, after losing so many times, don''t you want to give up?"


    Sasuke: "Hmph! That was before. I tell you, I strengthened my special training not long ago. I will definitely defeat you this time!"


    Iruka: "Okay, okay, you two are of equal strength. If you can''t keep your hands from hurting your opponent, it''s not good. Remember to stop there. Understood?"


    Seeing that Naruto and Sasuke were about to start a duel, Hinata was really anxious this time. She closed her eyes tightly, and she took a deep breath. Then, she shouted with all her strength, "I want to join the duel too!!!!!!"

 Chapter 47: Different Hinata

    Chapter 47: Different Hinata


    Hearing Hinata, the originally lively atmosphere suddenly became silent.


    Honestly, if it weren''t for Hinata shouting, everyone would really forget her existence.


    In everyone''s mind, Hinata was regarded as the third-ce by default. After all, Hinata has no sense of existence from beginning to end. Her battle with Haruno Sakura and Ino Yamanaka also ended quickly.


    As a winner, she bowed and apologized like doing something wrong. There is no imposing-manner belonging to the expert at all. So everyone subconsciously thought that there should be nothing wrong with Hinata in this top threepetition. Whether she should fight or should not fight for it; who knows what Hinata, who had been silent, was thinking about.


    For a while, everyone really doubted that the girl in front of them was still Hinata himself.


    Seeing the atmosphere at the scene suddenly became so quiet. Hinata shouted imposing-manner just now and then shrank back again, lowering her head, sorry and saying: "Eh... Eh... I''m sorry. Is that fine? If it doesn''t, forget it..."


    This voice! This cowardly performance. That''s right! This is Hinata, no doubt!


    At this time, the audience finally recovered.


    "DUEL! DUEL! DUEL!"


    "Hahahaha! Hinata, I support you! Beat them!"


    "Hinata, keep it up! Glory for our women!"


    Then Naruto came to Hinata excitedly, holding her arms with both hands: "Hinata, are you serious? Are you really going to duel with us?"


    Actually, these past years, whether it is Naruto, Sasuke, or Hinata, the three of them did not learn much from each other. It''s just that when facing Hinata, everyone fights her less seriously. After all, in this small group, the cute mushroom head Hinata is their favorite. So they didn''t want to hurt her.


    Now hearing that Hinata wants to fight against them, the happiest person was Naruto. Because he also hoped to see Hinata be stronger and less cowardly.


    Facing Naruto face to face and catching her arms like this, Hinata''s cheeks blushed, unsure: "Is this fine? Naruto, if you don''t like it, then I won''t fight."


    "Of course, I don''t mind! I like it so much!" Naruto quickly interrupted Hinata and then turned to Sasuke. "Sasuke, Hinata joined us in the duel, is that alright? Or don''t tell me, you''re afraid of losing to Hinata?"


    "Ceh! Who''s afraid?" Sasuke nced at the couple disdainfully. But thinking about the growth for Hinata makes his heart happy.


    Seeing all wille together, Iruka didn''t really feel good at rejecting Hinata''s determination. After all, ninja is gender-neutral.


    "Okay. Since Hinata, you were the 3rd in the basic test just now. You first choose who you want to challenge." Iruka.


    Hinata didn''t even think it and directly replied: "I want to challenge Sasuke."


    Hearing the words, Sasuke couldn''t help turning his head and looked at Hinata with some confusion. He didn''t understand why Hinata chose to challenge him first. But this puzzled expression quickly faded away, "Hinata, although I don''t understand why you chose me, I am not Naruto. Therefore, today I will not be merciful."


    Naruto was well aware of Sasuke''s character. So when Sasuke said he would not hold back, he really would not hold back. At this time, even he was a little worried that Hinata would be hurt in the next battle. However, what Naruto didn''t know is that Hinata did this to prove to him that she has also grown up!


    She can be alone! Naruto doesn''t need to shelter her from the wind and rain! She should not be a burden for Naruto! She wants to keep up with Naruto''s pace!


    Therefore, Sasuke''s careful warning not only didn''t greet Hinata''s hesitation, but she also gave a very firm nod: "Well, Sasuke-Kun, please don''t hold back. I won''t hold back either."


    Now that things have been decided, Iruka no longer dyed it. Soon, Iruka and Naruto returned to the crowd of people to make space for Sasuke and Hinata.


    The two kept a certain distance. After that, a ''Seal of Opposition'' was formed at the same time.


    After the hand seal just finished, the ce where 2 people stood originally suddenly became an afterimage.


    Immediately afterward, the collision of weapons continued to sound.


    Students who haven''t refined Chakra yet couldn''t capture the silhouette of Hinata and Sasuke with their naked eyes. As for the rest, as long as they look closely, they can observe the situation at this time.


    Currently, the two of them were in a situation of one advancing and one retreating. And to everyone''s surprise, it was Sasuke who was retreating, not Hinata. Only Naruto, who was watching the battle, felt normal about the situation in front of him. After all, the three have been spared so many times over the years. They understood well of each other''s strengths and weaknesses.


    On Taijutsu, Sasuke was definitely not Hinata''s opponent. So, against Hinata, his biggest advantage is Ninjutsu and Uchiha n''s most proud throwing technique! That''s why Sasuke was at a disadvantage in the beginning.


    Sasuke threw weapons at Hinata while keeping a certain distance from Hinata. And Hinata took out a Kunai in hand and rushed to Sasuke while blocking the throwing weapons, in order not to give Sasuke a good room to show his best Ninjutsu!


    Of course, until now, the battle between the two sides has only been an appetizer. Both haven''t tried their best.


    Seeing that the battle continued like this, then there was no other way. Sasuke clenched his teeth, reminding: "Hinata, I''m going to be serious. You must be careful."


    "Hmm!" Hinata nodded. At the same time, the veins around her eyes suddenly pierced! Byakugan. Open!


    Seeing that, Hinata opened her Byakugan. Sasuke''s expression also became serious. He threw two shurikens tied with thin wires. Unsurprisingly, Hinata evaded this wave of attacks easily. But Hinata''s ear soon heard a ''buzz, buzz'' sound. That was the sound of the wind-breaking, and the two shurikens that she had just been evaded stopped in the sky!


    ''Ugh, Shurikenjutsu!''


    [TL note: Shurikenjutsu pertains to techniques that entail the throwing of shuriken, kunai, senbon, or any other number of ded, hand-held weapons. Shurikenjutsu can be used inbination with taijutsu, Ninjutsu, and/or chakra flow in order to create more devastating techniques. Additionally, shurikenjutsu can pertain to techniques used through ninjutsu-made weapons.]


    Sasuke hooked his finger and yanked. Immediately after that, two shurikens attacked Hinata from the rear.


    CLANG! CLANG!


    ''Hateful Byakugan!''


    Hinata stretched out her hand to her back handsomely without turning her head and blocked the attack again.


    Sasuke was aggrieved in this scene.


    ''It seems that I can only win by quantity. Since 2 won''t work, then 4! 4 will not work, then 8! Let''s see how many attacks you can withstand!''


    But just when Sasuke was about to pull out 4 shurikens tied with thin threads from his pocket and caught them between his fingers, the next scene made him even more speechless.


    Because when Hinata saw him doing this, a scroll was hung around her waist at the same time.


    Seeing this scroll... Sasuke suddenly had a bad feeling ...

 Chapter 48: Rogue Trick

    Chapter 48: Rogue Trick


    ''Not good. Not good. But the shurikens were already tied. I have to send it!''


    Four shurikens were already sandwiched between his fingers; how can there be any reason to shrink back?


    Sasuke clenched his teeth and threw the shurikens to probe some of Hinata''s intentions. He was hoping that the scroll is not as bloody as he imagined...


    It''s a pity that his hope was destined to be shattered. Not long after the shuriken was thrown out, Hinata''s actions didn''t surprise Sasuke! It was as if he had guessed it.


    The moment Hinata saw Sasuke throw the shurikens, she immediately formed a hand seal. Immediately after the shurikens fell on Hinata, there was a sound of "BOOM" and white smoke rolled. Hinata turned into a giant wood. The shurikens pierced into the giant tree.


    ''Body Substitution Jutsu.''


    Sasuke was not surprised. After getting along for so long, how would he not know about it? The problem is, this damned Body Substitution Jutsu!


    ''That damn Naruto! He taught her way too good! Hinata is also a great learner. She learned some of Naruto''s rogue strategies!''


    With the speed and power of both sides being the same, Sasuke could not have any advantage under this rogue tactic. Just as expected! What happened next was simr to what Sasuke had expected.


    Hinata really used the rogue tactics that Naruto yed when facing him.


    Whenever Sasuke wanted to use ''Shurikenjutsu'', Hinata will immediately raise her small hands and will use Body Substitution Jutsu at any time.


    Another shuriken was thrown.


    BOOM!


    Another Body Substitution Jutsu.


    Sasuke didn''t give up and threw some out again.


    Another Body Substitution Jutsu.


    Back and forth.


    After the same situation happened several times in a row, all shurikens tied with thin threads in Sasuke''s pockets were almost empty! Yet, Hinata was still calm.


    As for so much wood, where does ite from? Needless to say, the thing that hangs around her waist is nothing more than a storage scroll! The items stored inside were all wood!


    Ninja, usually in a battle, would not be able to use the Body Substitution Jutsu too many times because they don''t prepare so much wood to rece their position, to begin with. If you rece a living creature''s position, you will consume more Chakra.


    Who knows who taught this damn Naruto such a wonderful trick?


    A specially prepared storage scroll, just to fill it with wood.


    This was one of the main reasons why Sasuke hasn''t won fighting Naruto over the years. Naruto was not only better at Taijutsu, stronger than him, faster than him, but also shameless enough to use this trick to restrain Sasuke''s Ninjutsu and Shurikenjutsu.


    ''How can I fight this?''


    Naruto''s Three-Style Jutsu is 100 points!


    Sasuke had been wondering before why Hinata''s Body Substitution Jutsu had such a high 90 points?


    He frowned!


    The answer appeared here. Hinata practiced secretly at home without him or Naruto knowing!


    Seeing this, Naruto couldn''t help butugh out loud. He smiled and covered his belly, unable to close his mouth. "Hahahahahaha! Sasuke, you sure have it rough! Hinata, good! Keep it up! If the wood isn''t enough, I''ll lend you some! Hahahahaha!"


    At this time, even Iruka, who was watching from the side, was speechless. Under normal circumstances, ninja wouldn''t prepare so much wood. After all, they have to face a battle when they are carrying out the mission. Therefore, they will end the battle as soon as possible. If they can''t, they will escape as soon as they can. Who would ever try to continue using this substitution trick?


    As Naruto''sughter sounded, the spectators finally became unable to bear andughed together. The tense atmosphere of the original top three decisive battles disappeared instantly.


    ....


    The more Sasuke hits, the more he aggrieved. Finally, he just kept throwing weapons, and Hinata was ready to hand seal. Hinata could see his Chakra''s Flow with Byakugan. If there is something wrong, the ''Body Substitution Jutsu'' is waiting.


    Even the new trick he prepared in order to deal with Naruto, ''hide the hand seal behind his back'', waspletely a joke in front of Hinata. This was not okay. If he dares to use this move in front of Hinata, it will only make him more stupid.


    There is no solutionnothing to start with.


    Sasuke flew into a rage out of humiliation. Finally unable to bear it, he angrily roared: "Hinata, do you want to fight?! Is doing Body Substitution Jutsu, Body Substitution Jutsu, and Body Substitution Jutsu interesting?"


    It''s just that Hinata didn''t wait until he finished speaking or even let him vent the anger. Her next move made his face go bewildered again, and he immediately became angry!


    ''Am I justining to a wall? I even stopped attacking. Why are you using the Body Substitution Jutsu again? Now, it''s difficult for me to even talk. Or do you want to show me that you can''t run out of wood?!''


    Before Sasuke understood what exactly Hinata wanted to do, he suddenly felt a cold behind. A breeze blew by, blowing his hair. He looked behind subconsciously.


    His head hadn''t beenpletely turned yet. From the corner of his eyes, sweeping to the scene behind him, his original angry expression instantly turned into terror!


    It''s over...


    That is, Hinata put on an ''Eight-Trigrams Palm gesture style'' handsomely...


    Sasuke: "Hinata, no... wait..."


    She didn''t wait for him to finish talking. Oing is none other than Eight Trigrams Sixteen Palms, especially the 7th and the 1st palms.


    Hinata''s and Sasuke''s eyes met.


    Sasuke covered his face-


    PIA!


    A loud noise.


    Sasuke almost bit his tongue, even spitting out of the corner of his mouth.


    Followed by the orthodox Eight Trigrams Sixteen Palms!


    Four palms!


    Eight palms!


    Sixteen palms!


    Hinata finished her job handsomely.


    Sasuke flew out with endless sorrow.


    While spinning in the sky, Sasuke had only one sentence left in his heart: Naruto... I hate you...


    Patter!


    The momentum dragged Sasuke a few meters away more.


    Flying upside down,nding perfectly.


    The battle is over.


    The sprouting mushroom head changed back to the bewildered and apologetic Hinata.


    The spectators on the side, of course, inevitably cheered everywhere.


    Naruto immediately ran to Hinata, took her hands, and jumped around. "Great! Great! Hinata, you win! You win! Hahahaha!"


    Naruto unabashedly expressed that he was happy for Hinata. Hinata, who has a weak body and fainted for no reason from time to time, was so strong currently that she could even beat Sasuke. So naturally, Naruto was overjoyed for Hinata. He pulled Hinata to jump up and down and go around in circles in front of the crowd.


    As for Sasuke lying not far away... Speechlessly looked sideways towards the couple.

 Chapter 49: Narutos Concealed

    Chapter 49: Naruto''s Concealed


    After the battle, Iruka announced the results.


    Finally, seeing a decent battle, the spectators were so excited that they kept discussing the situation just now. Thus, the atmosphere at the scene was lively. At the same time, Sasuke walked back to Naruto and Hinata.


    Seeing that someone was approaching, they looked back towards theing person.


    Hinata, who was a little sad, came to Sasuke to apologize: "I''m sorry, Sasuke. I didn''t mean it."


    Naruto pointed at Sasuke andughed: "Hahahahaha! Sasuke, you''re embarrassed! It turns out that you are the weakest of the three of us! Hahahaha!"


    Sasuke fended off Hinata''s hand: "Hmph! I just haven''t awakened my Sharingan yet! If I have it, you''re definitely not my opponent!"


    "Yes, yes. Your Sharingan is the best eyes... I don''t understand how many times I''ve heard this sentence." Naruto shrugged, his expression indifferent.


    And at this moment, Iruka also came over. "Sasuke, how is your injury? Should I take you to the Medical Room?"


    "No. Just a minor injury." Sasuke refused coldly. He didn''t want to miss the match between Hinata and Naruto because of this minor injury.


    Hit by Hinata''s Eight Trigrams Sixteen Palms, at most, his acupuncture points were blocked, and there was some faint pain and a feeling of powerlessness. It won''t matter whether he goes to the Medical Room or not.


    "Okay, don''t move around and adjust your breath first." After that, Iruka turned his head towards Hinata. "Are you in good condition? Do you need to take a break?"


    Simple Hinata, shake one''s head, answered truthfully: "Thank you, teacher, for your concern. No, I didn''t use much energy in the match just now. I can continue."


    Sasuke: -_-


    "Pu! Hahahahaha!" Naruto pointed at Sasuke again andughed.


    Hinata: (_)?


    "Cough! Cough!" Iruka coughed awkwardly. "Okay, next is your battle with Naruto. Sasuke, Hinata, you two form a ''Unison Sign'' to each other. This is a necessary etiquette for ninjas in the same vige. Don''t forget it, understand?"


    [TL note: "The Seal of Reconciliation" (Wakai no In, Viz: Unison Sign)]


    The twoplied ''um'', then cleverly formed a ''Unison Sign'' to each other.


    Immediately afterward, Iruka helped Sasuke to return to the crowds. It''s just that when Iruka tried to help Sasuke, he was quickly blocked by Sasuke.


    ....


    Next, Naruto and Hinata looked face to face. Seeing him, Hinata blushed. At the same time, a variety of cheering sounds were heard outside the court.


    "Naruto ! Keep it up ! Don''t lose our boys'' face like Sasuke!"


    "Hinata ! Keep it up ! Beat Naruto! Let this group of boys know who is the boss of the ss!"


    The two ignored the noise. The world in their eyes seemed to only exist for both of them. Naruto was very pleased with Hinata''s look. He was very happy when he recalled the picture of Hinata''s weakness and being bullied, grow to the current Hinata that can stand in front of him and even challenge him.


    "Hinata, use your full strength. Don''t hold back.


    "Un."


    The two made a ''Sign of Opposition'' to each other.


    After the ''Sign of Opposition'' was finished, Hinata''s face also became firm. She did not forget the purpose of today. She worked hard for so long just to prove to Naruto. Hinata has been chasing Naruto''s footsteps, notgging behind!


    The two looked straight for a long time with no action.


    Hinata, who couldn''t find Naruto''s weak spot at all, had to attack first. So Hinata used her softest attack first. However, no matter how Hinata attacked, she was still parried by Naruto. Naruto only defended against her attacks. This angered Hinata. What she wanted was not such a duel! She wanted Naruto to fight seriously!


    After condensing Chakra in the palm of her hand, Naruto was forced back a half step. Hinata''s expression condensed. She suddenly used the shes technique! She moved quickly around Naruto.


    Immediately afterward, in all Naruto''s directions appeared Hinata''s afterimages!


    Naruto stood on the spot and looked around at the afterimages without any nervous expression.


    It was at this moment that Hinata caught a gap in Naruto!


    sh!


    She appeared behind Naruto.


    It was exactly the same as Sasuke''s situation just now. Hinata posed the gesture style of Eight-Trigrams Palm.


    Everyone saw such a situation, including Sasuke and Iruka. They could not help but feel nervous, worried about Naruto. However, this worry soon turned into shock. An incredible scene appeared before them!


    Naruto turned and took the same posture as Hinata exactly the same!


    ''This...!''


    ''How can this be?! Are you kidding?!''


    ''Naruto doing an Eight-Trigrams Palm?''


    Even Sasuke was surprised. He had sparred Naruto so many times, and he had seen Hinata and Naruto spar so many times but had he never seen Naruto using an Eight-Trigrams Palm. This made him wonder if Naruto was bluffing.


    Seeing this, Hinata, who was in the middle of the battle, was slightly surprised. But she didn''t care too much. As soon as her teeth were clenched, Eight Trigrams Sixteen Palms attack!


    In the first palm, Naruto used the exact same fist strokes as her, gently blocking her attack with a subtle situation.


    Second palm...


    The same is true for the third palm!


    Hinata became more and more shocked. Whether it was up, down, or any various positions, Naruto was exactly the same as her! And with every move, Naruto''s speed was just one point faster than her.


    No more, no less.


    Hinata''s Eight Trigrams Sixteen Palms was blocked by Naruto one after another. No. To be precise, it is more appropriate to call it pushing away.


    4 palms.


    8 palms.


    16 palms finished.


    Hinata had even forgotten her posture, just maintaining the attacking posture of thest move. She was so shocked that she was speechless.


    Naruto stood there and squinted at Hinata.


    At this time, there was an uproar in the audience.


    Someone cried out in surprise: "How is this possible? How can Naruto also use Eight-Trigrams Palm of Hyuga n? And you see, Naruto''s Eight-Trigrams Palm seems to be better than Hinata!"


    "Naruto-Kun... this is too strong..."


    "This... is he my student?" Even Iruka, who is Chunin, looks stunned.


    Not to mention Eight-Trigrams Palm.


    Naruto really brought Li Yaoxiang too many surprises. Although he hadn''t seen Uchiha Itachi''s strength when he was 6 years old. He always had a feeling that the current Naruto''s strength,pared to Uchiha Itachi, wasn''t that different...

 Chapter 50: The Peak of Life

    Chapter 50: The Peak of Life


    "Naruto, this is..."


    Hinata looked towards Naruto with a dazed expression. She didn''t understand why her skills were all known to Naruto. Did he copy her? Obviously, she never taught Naruto.


    ''Naruto, who did you learn this from?''


    And in terms of skill, Naruto seemed to be more perfect than her...


    Seeing Hinata''s stunned look, Naruto knew what Hinata thought. However, there was nothing to exin. He had sparred with Sasuke no less than 1000 times, and naturally with Hinata too. Obviously, the saying ''Even though one has never eaten pork, at least one has seen pigs run'' also applies to Naruto, but it was still too perfect for him...


    He had sparred more than 1000 times, and he had learned ''base main body skill proficiency'' from his big brother, Li Yaoxiang. So how could he not understand Hinata''s Eight-Trigrams Palm fist? But, of course, that''s just imitating. After all, the real essence of Hyuga n Eight-Trigrams Palm is to release Chakra from the pores and drive Chakra into the enemy''s within-the-body, which leads to the chaos within the opponents'' body. This is not something that can be learned only by imitation.


    However, for the current Naruto, it was enough to crack Hinata''s Eight-Trigrams Palm.


    Just like before, every Hinata''s attack was pushed away by him skillfully, so there was no need to worry about the Chakra inside being disrupted.


    Naruto ignored the shocking eyes of the crowd around him, and he said softly to Hinata: "Hinata, try not to release the Chakra. Just use your fist and hit me again."


    Hinata was shocked again. But she quickly nodded refreshingly, ''um!''. She figured it out. Naruto was much better than her. Even if she used full strength yourself, she couldn''t force Naruto to take it seriously.


    Although she didn''t understand why Naruto asked her to do it again, she did just that. So, in front of Naruto, Hinata once again showed the gesture style of Eight-Trigrams Palm. The same for Naruto.


    This time, Naruto didn''t push Hinata''s attack anymore but instead put each palm on Hinata''s hand to guide Hinata in a more perfect posture.


    The two''s current situation.


    It''s like when Linghu Chong and Yue Lingshan are practicing Chong Ling Sword Art. It is not so much a Sword Art, but instead a sword dance.


    This scene made the spectators gone wild.


    It''s getting crazier and crazier!


    Sprinkling dog food in front of Sasuke seems to be not enough, and instead, tantly sprinkling dog food in front of the public.


    [TL note: s guling  "to sprinkle/scatter dog food"; to disy affection in public. (Usually, in front of people who are not in a rtionship, the so-called: dnshngu, "single dogs"). gi  s guling  to disy affection in front of someone (an ex, for example)]


    It is unbearable!


    The spectators could no longer help booing. The female students were biting the lips even more. They looked angry and unwilling.


    ...


    4 palms.


    8 palms.


    16 palms.


    Every Naruto''s palm movement followed Hinata to show this ''Martial Dao'' in front of everyone.


    During the match, Naruto did not forget to mention Hinata''s shorings.


    "Right hand is higher."


    "Hinata, you need to straighten your feet here for a better effort."


    Finally, after sixteen palms were finished, Hinata let out a sigh and put away the fighting posture. She gazed at Naruto contentedly and said: "I lost... Naruto... I''m not your opponent."


    Not waiting for Iruka to announce the result, the two formed a ''Unison Sign'' with each other. Then, Naruto took Hinata''s small hand very smoothly and walked back towards the crowd step by step.


    While walking, Hinata whispered behind Naruto: "Naruto, I will definitely work harder to catch up with you and will not let you down."


    The voice was not loud, but Naruto heard it. He took one step, stopped, did not look back, and said warmly: "Actually, you don''t need to work so hard, you can, but with me here, I will not let anyone hurt you."


    Hinata breathed deeply. Her face flushed instantly.


    ''Can''t hold it anymore! Can''t hold it anymore!''


    The horizon revolves around the world.


    Just as she was about to faint backward with a bang, Naruto caught her body in time this time. She was about to lose consciousness, so she was a little awake for a split second to hear something.


    In the mist, Hinata heard the hero who caught her, sighing and said: "Hey~ Hinata, it seems that you''ve got to work harder. At least enough, so you don''t pass out that easily."


    Romantic colors.


    Hinata, who was still in happiness just now, was suddenly brought back to reality by Naruto''s remark. She stood up slowly, continued to be led by Naruto, and walk back to the crowd.


    The booing crowd stopped the noise when the two people feeding the dog food came back.


    Iruka looked at Hinata and Naruto and then looked at the excited students. Of course, he knew what this group of fart kids was thinking, and he didn''t n to disappoint. He directly announced: "Okay! Did everyone see that? Now I officially announce! Uzumaki Naruto is the number one in our ss!"


    The crowd of students rushed to Naruto in a swarm with cheers everywhere. Hinata was constantly being pushed out of the crowd. Naruto looked at the turbulent ssmates, not knowing what to do. He really didn''t know how to deal with this situation.


    Without waiting for what he said, someone in the crowd shouted: "Lift Naruto! Lift Naruto!"


    Students near Naruto hearing this- It doesn''t matter if Naruto is willing or not. They just lifted Naruto together.


    And everyone threw Naruto in the sky together, cheering.


    "CHIEF STUDENT!"


    "CHIEF STUDENT!"


    "CHIEF STUDENT!"


    Naruto''s kindness. Naruto''s approachable attitude. This identity of Naruto as amoner ninja.


    As a result, his chief student status was more popr than Sasuke, the chief student in original work. Everyone had no psychological barriers and wasn''t afraid of offending Naruto and so on. So everyone was happy to celebrate it and feel happy for him.


    Even Hinata, who was pushed out of the crowd, saw Naruto being supported by so many people and seeing Naruto so popr, felt so happy for him. She wasn''tining. Even if it was just watching from a distance, as long as Naruto was happy... it was enough.


    Standing outside the crowd, Sasuke looked a little cold on his face but was also happy for his confidant. Because whether it was him or Hinata, who has been with Naruto for so long, how could they not know Naruto''s past? How can they not know what Naruto was looking forward to most?


    Because of their rtionship, they know how much effort Naruto has put into this goal!


    So, Naruto can have it for today. They will not envy because this is the result that Naruto deserves.


    ...


    Naruto was in a much-anticipated situation. He was thrown up and down. In his field of view, only the blue sky and white clouds left and right.


    A little dazzling. A little dizzy. Not veryfortable. But he enjoyed it.


    His mood was beyond words to describe.


    ''3 years... It''s been 3 years...''


    Recalling the various experiences in the past three years... Everyone finally epted him. His efforts and perseverance finally yielded results.


    Being thrown into the air, with a smile from the heart, Naruto''s eyes couldn''t help getting wet. And inside his mind, he impatiently shared the joy with his closest person: "Big bro... you see. I finally did it."


    Naruto received no response from Li Yaoxiang. He didn''t know why the big brother didn''t share this joy with him. But he did not care about these details.


    However, what he didn''t know was that Li Yaoxiang had left him not much time to enjoy ''Peak in Life''.


    If there is no ident... After a period of time... It is the beginning of his imminent confrontation with the endless abyss...

 Chapter 51: When The Third Step is Planned

    Chapter 51: When The Third Step is nned


    Time flies. Years are like a shuttle. In the blink of an eye, a year has passed.


    During one year, since the news that Naruto became the chief student this year was widely spread, the vigers'' attitude towards him gradually became more friendly. Moreover, over time, people have found that Naruto seemed to be not a danger. Some people have even forgotten the matter of Naruto''s "demon fox".


    This led Naruto to finally enjoy the good life he should have as the son of Fourth-Hokage, Namikaze Minato.


    And time hase to the 2nd year ss, the first day after the start of school.


    Naruto did not apply for graduation in advance. However, he enjoyed his current Academy career very much.


    .....


    The bell of the school had just rung.


    Not waiting for Naruto to leave, in his mind, Li Yaoxiang''s voice appeared: "Naruto, you and Hinata have been working so hard recently. Have a rest and go roam around. Also, invite them toe to your home. I will personally reward you with my cooking."


    Naruto, hearing this was overjoyed: "Really? Big brother, really?! Very good! I haven''t eaten big brother''s dishes for a long time! I will tell Hinata now!"


    "Hinata, Sasuke. After youe out, we''ll go to the market to buy food! Come to my house today, and I''ll cook for you guys!" Naruto said to Hinata and Sasuke, who were sitting next to the door.


    Sasuke looked suspicious: "You can cook? Why haven''t I heard that before?"


    Hinata rejoices: "Okay! It''s an honor to eat the food you cook, Naruto."


    "Che, you won''t go? If you don''t want toe, then you won''t have your share today! I''m going to the grocery market with just Hinata then!"


    "Wha! Sure! Why not, then? I''ll see if you can really cook!" Sasuke was reluctant to hear that Naruto wants to abandon him just to let Hinata''s romantic couple world happen!


    It was boring to stay at home anyway.


    ''Look at me be a third wheel to this couple!''


    After a burst ofughter, they went back to their home.


    .....


    After taking a bath, everyone changed clothes. Then, they gathered in one ce. That is the park they used to go to.


    Three people chatted and walked towards the market.


    Sasuke: "Naruto, why did you suddenly think of cooking? And, what are you going to cook?"


    While holding the small hand of Hinata, Naruto said: "Aish, you have too many questions. It''s not on a whim. I want to cook in person to celebrate our friendship after many years! You won''t understand it even if I say it. Anyway, it''s gonna be delicious!"


    Naruto followed Li Yaoxiang''s instructions. They bought the specified vegetables, meat, condiments, etc. Even how to choose which is fresh, Li Yaoxiang also taught that Naruto.


    This scene secretly surprised Sasuke. He was constantly questioning Naruto, why are you doing this, and why is it like that. Naruto was hesitating and didn''t know how to answer him. Simply, he just made an excuse at random, and it was right to prevaricate.


    Not much time, all the necessary purchase wasplete.


    .....


    They arrived at Naruto''s house.


    Naruto took the two to the living room: "You wait here. I will cook now." Naruto''s original bright smile suddenly converged, letting go of Hinata''s little hand.


    Hinata asked kindly: "Naruto, is there anything I can help with?"


    Naruto turned his head and smiled slightly at Hinata: "No need. You can just wait here."


    After that, Naruto turned and left.


    This time, even Hinata felt strange. She couldn''t exin it, but she felt that Naruto just now... seemed to be a little different. Not to mention Sasuke. From the moment Naruto said he was going to cook in person, Sasuke had been suspicious.


    The two in the living room looked at each other in nk dismay. For a while, they couldn''t understand what was going on. After that, there was no discussion of this topic. They were afraid that Naruto would be upset when he heard it.


    Soon, the sound of the knife colliding with the cutting board was heard in the kitchen, then the sound of cooking and so on. Immediately afterward, there was the scent of food.


    This made Sasuke and Hinata even more surprised.


    ''Unexpectedly, Naruto can really cook?''


    The two people, with great curiosity, were unable to bear it and went to the kitchen to see what happened.


    Naruto was standing on a stool.


    All kinds of dishes were processed exactly.


    Sasuke, unable to bear it, came behind Naruto: "Wha! Are you really good at cooking? Let me try if it tastes good."


    With that said, Sasuke wanted to reach into the pot, but Naruto patted his palm: "Don''t touch it. Go outside and wait. It will be done soon."


    Sasuke''s face was full of grudges, and he was mumbling something. Hinata looked deeply at the back of Naruto.


    ....


    Not long after, the foods were ready.


    Three dishes and one soup were set on the living room table. They were stir-fried cabbage with mushrooms, lemon fried chicken, mapo tofu, and tomato cabbage soup.


    Looking at this table of delicious dishes, the most delighted were not Hinata nor Sasuke, but Naruto, the guy who cooked it himself. His hearty smile came back. "Wa! It smells so good! It looks delicious~"


    Naruto''s reaction made Sasuke''s eyes wide open incredulously: "Are you sick? Why do I feel like you''re a different person when you''re cooking?"


    Hinata did not ask, but she was also curious about this issue. She turned her head, waiting for his response.


    "Wh... what! ... What''s the difference! Don''t worry about it! Eat quick, eat quick. If the food is cold, then it won''t taste good." Then, Naruto handed the tableware to the two, motioning them to start soon.


    Naruto, who was already impatient, folded his palms together and squinted his eyes, "Itadakimasu!"


    The two were not the type to get entangled in this problem. Anyway, as long as Naruto is fine, it''s whatever.


    Three dishes and one soup were quickly swept away by the three little brats.


    All three peopley on the ground holding their little bellies.


    Sasuke: "Hu~ It''s so delicious. I haven''t eaten such a dish before."


    Hinata: "Well, me too."


    Naruto: "Hu ~ so satisfying ~, I haven''t had such a satisfying meal in a long time."


    Seeing that it was gettingte, Hinata and Sasuke said goodbye to Naruto and left. Naruto happily sent the two people away from home and gazing at the back of the two leaving.


    After their figures faded away, Naruto didn''t return home but instead jumped outside a few times in a row and came to a random roof. He sat on the edge of the roof, looking towards Hokage Rock not far away. Gazing at his father''s picture filled with emotion.


    Today, for him, he felt so happy...


    "Big brother, if I can stay like this forever, that would be great..."


    He thought the big brother would make fun of him, but Li Yaoxiang said something strange to him at this time: "Naruto, do you really think the vige is as beautiful as it looks on the surface?"

 Chapter 52: The Unbelievable Truth

    Chapter 52: The Unbelievable Truth


    "Big brother, you''re so strange today. Why are you suddenly like this? The vige is beautiful now. The vigers live and work in peace. Isn''t everyone very happy?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Naruto, your idea is really naive. That''s just what you see on the surface."


    At this time, Naruto was reluctant.


    ''My life is so good, isn''t that the best proof? So why does big brother still say so?''


    "It''s okay, big bro, just tell me, what''s wrong with the vige?" Naruto''s tone seemed confident. Making sure that Li Yaoxiang cannot give a perfect answer!


    "Your surname, Uzumaki, do you know the origin of the surname Uzumaki?"


    Naruto was stunned and could not understand why the big brother suddenly came to this topic, but he still spoke out the information he knew: "Isn''t Uzumaki my mom''sst name? I saw in the history textbook that Uzumaki is from the Land-of-Whirlpools? Is there anything wrong with it? "


    "Now that you know Land-of-Whirlpools, I''ll ask you, Naruto, a good country like that; why do you think it''s destroyed? And what''s more terrifying is that this country was one of Five-Great Ninja Viges and deep-rooted allies with the Konoha Vige. Yet, it was so easily destroyed; don''t you think it''s unimaginable?"


    Naruto felt an uneasy feeling in his heart. He did not know why the Land-of-Whirlpools were destroyed. Because the history textbooks in Academy didn''t exin the reason. If it weren''t for the big brother to mention it, he really hadn''t thought about it.


    "Big brother, do you... know why?" Despite some uneasiness, Naruto asked the question with a ghostly spirit. He has a simple mind and has not yet discovered the meaning of Li Yaoxiang''s words.


    "It''s very simple."


    "There are so many people in the vige, and your father chose you? Why did he choose his newborn baby to put the demon fox in him? You don''t need to guess. I will tell you the answer! That''s because in the whole vige, except your mother, there''s only you alone, the only heir of Uzumaki n. At the same time, only you, Uzumaki Naruto, can withstand this seal! Because if the Kyuubi is sealed in anyone else''s body, it will break out again!" Li Yaoxiang''s speech speed changed from slow to fast. The tone changed from light to heavy. To mobilize Naruto''s emotions to the extreme.


    But Naruto, with a simple mind and a darkening degree of only 8%, couldn''t hear the meaning of this series of messages. He still disagreed.


    ''Oh... it turns out that dad sealed the demon fox in my body for a reason. This is very good! No one will need to sacrifice themselves.''


    "But... big brother, what does this have to do with the destruction of Land-of-Whirlpools?"


    "Hey~" Li Yaoxiang sighed, "Naruto, use your brain to think more. Can''t you see some clues in the Academy''s history textbooks? First-Hokage''s wife, Uzumaki Mito, is the vige''s first generation to seal the demon fox. If her death ising, then I ask you, what should they do with the sealed demon fox? Who else in the vige can rece Uzumaki Mito to seal the demon fox? Can''t you see the obvious answer?"


    Naruto: "My mom, right? What''s wrong with this?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "..."


    If someone came to Li Yaoxiang at this moment and imed Naruto''s thinking wasn''t influenced by Asura, Li Yaoxiang would p him!


    "Yes, yes! You are awesome! They look for your mother! But have you ever thought about how your mother would be so willing to leave your hometown ande to the vige to be a monster in everyone''s eyes?! Do I still need to spell it?! Isn''t it because her country is destroyed that your mother has nowhere to go?! She needed to stay in Konoha and seal the demon fox to her body!"


    Naruto was stunned, hesitantly said: "Big brother... you mean, mom stayed in Konoha because ofst resort? The Land-of-Whirlpools was destroyed... has something to do with this vige?"


    Without waiting for Li Yaoxiang''s answer, Naruto quickly rejected himself: "No! No! Didn''t the history textbooks say that the Land-of-Whirlpools was defeated in the war! So how could this be rted to the vige? It''s not the vige that attacked the Land-of-Whirlpools!"


    "Haha! Really? Is there really such a coincidence in the world? Well, you believe the history textbooks, right? Then let me ask you something again. The history textbooks also said that the vige was attacked during the World War 2 period, and Land-of-Whirlpools rescued the vige. But why was it, when it was the Land-of-Whirlpools turn to be attacked, the vige didn''te to rescue Land-of-Whirlpools? Don''t be joking with me! As one of Five-Great Ninja Viges, if Konoha really wanted to save the Land-of-Whirlpools, do you think they would not seed?"


    Naruto''s face turned pale. He couldn''t find any rebuttal words at all.


    "This... this... this..."


    At the same time, Li Yaoxiang did not give Naruto gasp for breath the opportunity to continue taunted: "Haha! The huge Land-of-Whirlpools just happened to leave your mother with the vige? For the amazing Land-of-Whirlpools, the vige did not save them as a whole, but instead, they managed to perfectly and coincidentally save the Uzumaki n''s inheritance Sealing Jutsu. As a result, the Uzumaki n''s inheritance has be the Ninjutsu for everyone in the vige. Haha! What a coincidence! Naruto, you are right! Do you see how good the vige is? Even if they didn''t save the people or even their own allies, the vige doesn''t forget to help others carry forward their inheritance! The vige is really great!"


    But, after hearing somementary from Li Yaoxiang, even Naruto''s thinking couldn''t find any optimistic conjectures because there are, indeed, too many coincidences in this whole incident.


    Coincidentally, Land-of-Whirlpools were destroyed. Konoha Vige seemed to have lost arge ally, and their strength was greatly damaged. But, the real situation is that Konoha was the real ultimate profiter in this whole event!


    Not only the sealed demon fox is here! Even someone else''s entire n''s inheritance is also included in the soil!


    Who else has gained more than Konoha in this war?


    No need for Li Yaoxiang to say it. Naruto can answer this by himself.


    Thinking of this, even if Naruto didn''t want to believe that this matter had nothing to do with the vige, he couldn''t deceive himself anymore. After all, as long as you follow this logic, continue to specte, and connect the various events together... All the spearheads are indeed directed at Konoha.


    Naruto suddenly stood up. "No! No! The real situation must not be like this! I will go and ask old fogey! He must tell me the truth!"


    Naruto ran in the direction of Hokage Residence.

 Chapter 53: Unwilling to Believe

    Chapter 53: Unwilling to Believe


    But Naruto, after just ran a few steps, he stopped again.


    "My stupid younger brother--. Have you been living a peaceful life for too long? Have you forgotten how the vige treated you? Did you forget how much the vige is to forget favors? You run like this, questioning them face to face, really think that they will let you go with peace of mind? If they ask how you got the news, how should you answer them? Naruto, Naruto, aren''t you feeling toofortable? Well, even if you really asked the old fogey face-to-face, the old fogey would say that it was because the war was over shortly after that that they had no spare time to rescue Land-of-Whirlpools. What about you? Will you believe this excuse? Do you ept this excuse? If you don''t believe or ept it, what can you do? Pointing at the old fogey''s nose and scolding him?"


    A series of questions.


    Naruto was dumbstruck and unable to reply. But what he considered first was not his own safety but the truth of the matter. The words of the big brother were indeed true. He would not believe this excuse, and he could not ept it at all.


    Others help you, and then you just watch other people''s country be wiped out? Even if the reason is really the case, is this still the Will of Fire that everyone said?


    ''Is this still the vige that I know? Is this the vige still the vige that dad wanted to protect?''


    Even Naruto was frightened by this thought.


    As for thest sentence of Li Yaoxiang who ridiculed him, he subconsciously ignored the past.


    However, although this news does change Naruto''s perception of the vige, the impact will not be too great. After all, he still grew up in this vige. Conversely, what about Land-of-Whirlpools? Although he is of the same family, he had only seen the three words Land-of-Whirlpools in history textbooks. If you really want to talk about feelings, it is still not as deep as the vige.


    It was impossible to ask him to suddenly feel a strong feeling for Land-of-Whirlpools and feel revenge for nsman. Therefore, even at this moment, Naruto still did not give up and wanted to find a suitable reason for the vige so that his heart would not feel so ufortable.


    "Maybe... maybe... maybe the vige has its problems? Land-of-Whirlpools is also the home country of the First-Hokage''s wife. Old fogey shouldn''t be doing that..."


    There is no ident in the eyes of Li Yaoxiang. He knew this would be like this. He didn''t stagger and made another shot immediately: "What''s the matter? Do you still have a beautiful fantasy about the vige? Really think that the vige hasn''t done the unscrupulous things?"


    Naruto''s lowered head suddenly lifted up. Both eyes were wide open. But even if he wanted to stop it, it was impossible. If the big brother insists on what he wants to say, Naruto can only be forced to listen. After all, he''s talking inside Naruto''s mind. Covering your ears can''t hide his voice.


    "These days, you haven''t heard too much about your father, right? Then you should know that there are other people who are familiar with your father besides your mother, right? You''re not curious why they never visited you?"


    Naruto swallowed saliva. He was afraid that if he allowed the big brother to continue talking, what the big brother will say would be unimaginable. How can he face the vige calmly in the future?


    As if he could read his mind, Li Yaoxiangughed: "Rx, it''s not something that makes you want to vomit. Except that they really didn''t take you seriously, they are actually a victim themselves."


    Naruto''s mouth twitched. This matter had always been a thorn in Naruto''s heart. He couldn''t understand why a person who once had such a good rtionship with his father would let him be bullied.


    ''It''s so difficult as my brother said...''


    ''Are most of the people in the vige cold and ruthless?''


    With the days in recent years getting better and better, he almost forgot these unhappy things. But Naruto never expected that the big brother mentioned them again at this time and had to remind Naruto that the other side never took him seriously at all. This made Naruto''s impression of them only worse. But when he heard that they were also victims, Naruto couldn''t help getting curious.


    To the best of his knowledge, apart from his mother, he heard the most news about his father from his brother. One is the father''s master, Lord-Jiraiya of Konoha, one of the Sannin. The other is the student of his father, Hatake Kakashi, also one of Konoha''s famous genius students except for Uchiha Itachi. Now he was currently a Jonin in the vige. In this period of time, many peoplepared him with Uchiha Itachi.


    ''The problem is that where are these two currently in Konoha. How could they be the victims mentioned by the big brother?''


    It didn''t take long. Li Yaoxiang quickly solved his confusion for him: "The father of Hatake Kakashi was killed indirectly by the old fogey. The funny thing is that Kakashi doesn''t know the truth of this matter. He''s bitter about this matter and has rejected his father''s teaching to him for many years now. If everes a time when he finally figures it out, he will get caught in another thing. The old-fogey can be said to have changed Kakashi''s life. As a result, Kakashi cannote out of the shadows. Doubt of self. Doubt everything. As for Jiraiya of Konoha one of the Sannin... No one can''t pursue his affairs anymore. In short, Naruto, the reason why I told you all this today is that I don''t want you to be like Kakashi, who was influenced by the old fogey for most of his life and has note out of the shadows. Moreover, they''re not rare; people like Kakashi and Jiraiya. Fortunately, they saw the nature of the vige, so they gave up on the vige and left the vige. Those who are unlucky, like Kakashi, live in pain. I don''t want you to keep being naive like this, alright? If you do not recognize the true nature of the vige in advance, you will only lose yourself in the future."


    After listening, Naruto felt warm. This turned out to be the real intention of the big brother. Instantly, Naruto couldn''t help but raise a thought in his heart.


    ''I, Uzumaki Naruto, without father, without mother. It''s ok. I have a big brother who loves me so much.


    Of course, he was moved. It is impossible for Naruto to ept this cruel reality dly. After all, who doesn''t want to live in a carefree fairy tale world forever?


    Seeing Naruto''s distorted face, Li Yaoxiang spoke: "What''s wrong? Unwilling to ept this fact? Then you can go check with the vigers. So many people should know about what happened to Kakashi."

 Chapter 54: Long-term layout

    Chapter 54: Long-termyout


    While Naruto listened to the vigers and heard about the ''Hatake Sakumo Incident'', Li Yaoxiang also saw the picture he most wanted to see through the crystal ball!


    ....


    Hokage Residence. Hokage room.


    A masked Anbu ninja was reporting to Sarutobi Hiruzen about Naruto. And this Anbu ninja was one of the people who monitored Naruto''s every move for 24 hours.


    "Lord-Hokage, Uzumaki Naruto is now on the street, asking about Kakashi. Before this, a very strange thing also happened. He cooked dishes that had never been in the vige. We can''t determine what is going on. Please personally decide."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen brows tightly frowned. Before this, someone had already reported to him about the anomaly of Naruto. The old close friends of Shimura Danzo also reflected this to him from time to time.


    Who taught these to Naruto? And who taught Naruto then the orthodox main body technique? It is impossible to learn by yourself!


    Now, even more outrageous!


    Perhaps it was possible to give a reason and justify it. Could it be Minato''s leftover chakra or Naruto''s extraordinary talent? The question is, is this really possible? Can Minato''s chakrast for so long? Well, even if it can. What about these so-called new dishes today? How do you exin this? He is still a 7 years old child. Can it be done?


    So, it''s Kushina''s turn to teach Naruto how to cook?


    The more you think, the more you feel it''s outrageous.


    The moreplex Sarutobi Hiruzen''s mood became.


    Recently, in this period of time, Uchiha n''s ''coup-d''tat'' problem has made him very upset. But, of course, he didn''t expect such a thing to happen with Naruto again... He couldn''t make a decision immediately but sighed helplessly and then instructed: "Call Kakashi toe to me and say that I have something to see him."


    "Sir!"


    ....


    Not long after, Kakashi came to the Hokage room. Even with the Anbu mask, Sarutobi could feel his coldness as always.


    When Kakashi saw Sarutobi Hiruzen, he didn''t even say a word. He just continued to stand there, waiting for instructions. The atmosphere in the Hokage room was a bit cold. The two faced each other and looked straight at them for a while.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen said, "Kakashi, it''s been so many years. Minato''s son; you haven''t seen him much, right?"


    "Lord-Hokage, what''s the matter? Please ask directly."


    "..." There was a moment of silence, Sarutobi Hiruzen no longer circumscribed. "Naruto is now on the street, asking about something about you. I hope you will meet him; ask why he is suddenly interested in you and how does he know about you."


    Kakashi didn''t even answer ''yes''. He turned and left the Hokage room. Sarutobi Hiruzen gazed at Kakashi''s leaving back. He remained silent for a long time. Another sigh, then turn around towards the Konoha scenery outside the window.


    ....


    And through the crystal ball, Li Yaoxiang, who sees the whole process insight, smiled faintly. That''s right. This is what he wants to see the most! At the same time, this was also the first step in Li Yaoxiang''s Third Step n!


    The previous reason to meet Naruto in the consciousness space and every subsequent decision, including teaching Naruto''s peculiar exercise methods, teaching Naruto''s refined basic main body technique, ''self-cooking, and now inducing Naruto to seek the truth with great fanfare and so on.


    The purpose is here!


    This is all for making his own existence appear in everyone''s field of vision step by step! But, of course, the "him" mentioned here is the identity of the big brother in Naruto''s consciousness space, not his main body.


    The purpose is to let the field of view of Sarutobi Hiruzen and the others be locked back to Naruto! Only in this way, this group of very ruthless elders will one step further attack Naruto! Only in this way will Naruto really appreciate the nasty side of the vige. Rather than just listening to ''the story of others'' as it is now. It won''t be just a little bit of trouble anymore!


    Obviously, the first link has been sessfully reached.


    Li Yaoxiang''s action just seemed a big mistake on the surface, but actually on purpose. This time, the identity of ''big brother'' was deliberately exposed. In addition to the above reasons, this is also rted to his subsequentyout!


    If there is no ident, he can wait until the whole thing is over.


    This is the beginning of his maniption of the whole game!


    ...


    Konoha Vige, on a street.


    Naruto shook the sleeve of a fish-selling uncle and said, "Eh~ Uncle Eagle, just tell me what happened?"


    "Go go go, don''t bother me with that. How can I remember such a long time?" As he said this, suddenly uncle Eagle looked like hell. He spoke towards behind Naruto: "K... Kaka... Kakashi-sama, hello! By the way, Naruto. Just ask Kakashi-sama directly. I''m still busy, so I''m leaving now!"


    After finishing talking, Uncle Eagle pretended to be busy closing the stalls and stopped talking to Naruto.


    And Naruto turned around. He looked at his father''s former student, Hatake Kakashi!


    At the moment, Kakashi was not wearing an Anbu mask. When he saw Naruto, his first reaction was... no response. His heart was veryplicated, but he did not reveal his emotions on the surface.


    The instant that both sides met, they stood there stunned, for a while, really did not know what to say. So the two kept a certain distance in this way and look directly at the other side for a long time.


    In the end, Kakashi, who was an adult, broke the awkward atmosphere first: "Naruto, right? I used to be your father''s student..."


    "You don''t need to say it. I understand this."


    Kakashi: ...


    Naruto: ...


    "Sorry, I haven''te to visit these years ..."


    "You don''t have to. My father is close to you, not me. You''re not obliged to take care of me, so you don''t owe me anything."


    Kakashi: ...


    Naruto: ...


    Even the ruthless Kakashi was so confused by Naruto that he didn''t know how to deal with this situation.


    Immediately, he expressed his expression. He winked, gesturing to the monitoring Anbu to left them alone. After this group of Anbu ninjas has left, he rxed his expression. And when he looked towards Naruto again, it was reced by a look towards the juniors.


    Kakashi: "I heard that... you are asking about me? If you have any questions, you can ask me directly. I will be happy to tell you."

 Chapter 55: Deteriorating Will of Fire

    Chapter 55: Deteriorating Will of Fire


    Just as Kakashi finished talking, Li Yaoxiang seemed to have caught the opportunity. He taunted Naruto''s mind: "Look. Look how much the old fellows care about you. You just want to know about Kakashi this time, and they just him to you. It''s really good service~~."


    It is different from the original work. In the original work, Li Yaoxiang vaguely remembered that Kakashi seemed to have bought things to visit Naruto when he was a child. Only in this life, Li Yaoxiang has not encountered this situation.


    Perhaps, it''s because of the butterfly effect.


    Because of this, Naruto, who knows his identity in this life, will meet Kakashi and the others even more.


    Now that Li Yaoxiang added that sentence in his mind, Naruto was immediately in a bad mood because he met Kakashi now. His face was slightly ck. But, of course, he wasn''t angry with Kakashi. On the contrary, after listening to the big brother''s sarcasm in his mind, his heart became unable to bear it and became angry. Naruto didn''t expect that his actions have been made public. Old fogey was still sending someone to monitor him for 24 hours!


    If he''s worried about the big fox running away- forget it! The problem is that even this kind of trivial matter is reported!


    ''What does it mean?! What do they think of me?!''


    Anyone who is being watched for 24 hours a day will definitely feel ufortable. Uzumaki Naruto included! But Naruto did not forget the purpose of this time. Now that the current situation had be a fact, he would simply use this to let Kakashi, the party involved, understand the truth for himself!


    "I want to know more about you and father."


    Naruto didn''t give Kakashi a good face. Although it was expected. But when Naruto asked this question, he still inevitably felt some pain. Recalling Namikaze Minato... He couldn''t help but recall his past with Rin and Obito. Until now, he evaded this matter most of the time. Only every year, on the day of Rin''s death, will he face this matter in front of Rin''s grave.


    This is also one of the reasons why Kakashi has never visited Naruto. For the same reason, when he sees Naruto, he will think of his teacher, Namikaze Minato. He will naturally think of the picture he least wants to remember.


    Kakashi let out a suffocating breath. "Your father, my teacher, he has two other students..."


    "Stop! Stop! Stop!" Naruto interrupted Kakashi''s words with disgust, "Don''t talk about my dad and me in front of me. It will only make me feel very ufortable. What I want to know is about you and your father."


    Kakashi, who was originally rxed, was taken aback.


    "Naruto, why would you want to know about this? Who told you?"


    "I heard people say something about you, so I''m curious and want to know. What''s wrong? Don''t want to say? If you don''t want to say it, forget it. I will ask others myself."


    Regarding his father, Hatake Sakumo. Due to Obito, Kakashi has actuallye out of this matter. He agreed with his father''s approach. Otherwise, Itachi would not be affected by him to destroy the n himself.


    After a moment of hesitation, Kakashi told Naruto what he knew about the "truth", that is, the version that could not bear the pressure and was forced tomit suicide. "My father back then..."


    While telling the story, Li Yaoxiang did make up a lot of guns in Naruto''s mind.


    "Look. If you don''t wake up, you will be like Kakashi in front of you. So ridiculous, so sad. He had been cheated by many people." Li Yaoxiang said.


    "Big brother, what''s wrong with his story? Even Kakashi himself said so. So how could you say that Kakashi''s father was killed by the old fogey indirectly?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "My stupid younger brother-- ~, I have to say that the brain is a very useful thing, can''t you use your brain to think about it? How could a person who was an Anbu leader have such a bad psychological quality? He can''t help but want tomit suicide because of some gossips? Also, as the leader of his Anbu, wouldn''t it make sense that all his mission is confidential? Why would the content be spread throughout the vige so casually? There''s nothing strange about this, do you believe it? Also, in that rumor, Kakashi''s father said that the vige suffered a huge loss because of the abandonment of the mission. But what is this so-called loss? The vige can''t live on? Is the war still going? In the next few years, hasn''t the vige spent the days so peacefully? And, don''t you think it''s weird that the so-calledpanion who was saved by him used him in return? He was saved by his boss, and then he med his boss. Who gave him this courage? Still don''t get it? This person doesn''t feel sorry for his boss and savior... what kind of bullshit? If you say that the whole thing is not manipted by anyone behind the scenes, then you are beyond stupid."


    Naruto has almost always been regarded as stupid by his big brother, and he has be ustomed to it. As a result, he now has an immune effect on these words, not taking them seriously at all. But after Li Yaoxiang exined the serious doubts of this incident, Naruto woke up from a big dream!


    Naruto, who learned to use his brain, immediately asked: "But like you said, big brother, Kakashi''s father can''t be simple since he was an Anbu leader. He must have known that someone is manipting this thing behind the scenes? Why did hemit suicide?"


    "Hey~" Li Yaoxiang sighed, "Kakashi''s father was forced to make this choice because he knew that this matter was manipted behind the scenes. Throughout the entire Konoha Vige, the people who can manipte this matter are the old fellows you saw in Hokage Residence. Kakashi''s father certainly knows the truth. And in order to avoid conflict with them and damage the interests of the vige. So he eventually chose tomit suicide. I have to say that Hatake Sakumo is the real hero here! Compared to those old fellows, he is the one who really inherited the ''Will of Fire''."


    Hearing this, Naruto couldn''t help but remember the true meaning of the "Will of Fire" described in the textbook!


    ''Youngster is the hope for the future. The trust, protection, and sacrifice of the older generation will not be meaningless because these new seedlings will rece them and lead Konoha to a better light.''


    Thinking of ''Will of Fire'', while also recalling Konoha''s four elders'' deeds, Naruto couldn''t help but feel sick.


    ''What about the good trust, protection, and sacrifice? Why is it all the other way around?''


    ''Let others trust them, let others sacrifice themselves, and protect them...''


    ''Haha, is this Konoha

 Chapter 56: The truth is not important

    Chapter 56: The truth is not important


    At the same time, when Li Yaoxiang and Narutomunicated, Kakashi also finished his father''s story.


    "How is it, Naruto? I have finished talking about my father. What do you think of this matter?"


    ''I don''t know how many years now. I don''t think I''ve ever shared this matter with others.''


    Now in front of Naruto, telling the story. Kakashi only felt light. Of course, he was prepared to wait for Naruto to give his personal opinion and then teach Naruto to do his responsibilities as an elder.


    "What do I think? Oh, but don''t you think the whole thing is weird?" Naruto sneered.


    Kakashi was taken aback. He didn''t know why Naruto said so. So he did not speak but waited for Naruto to continue speaking.


    "The Academy has taught it. As a ninja, the content of the mission cannot be leaked casually. But why did your father''s mission in that spread throughout the vige without anyone stopping it?"


    Naruto stood up.


    Just as he was about to leave, his footsteps paused and spoke without looking back: "No matter what, I feel that your father''s choice was correct. However, suppose he abandoned hispanion for the purpose of a mission. In that case, this is not the Will of Fire I learned in Academy."


    Kakashi gazed at Naruto left with a shocked look.


    After listening to Naruto, Kakashi was unable to bear his whole body trembling. When his fathermitted suicide, he was still young. He was still sad about his death. There was no time to think about it then. After the incident faded, he had little experience. Even if he wanted to, he couldn''t think of a reason. Untilter, he gradually grew up alone.


    If it weren''t for the appearance of Obito, perhaps he might still live in the shadow of his father''s death. Let alone thinking about the things of that year. He finally walked out of the shadow. But because of killing Rin with his own hand, he fell into another shadow. As a result, he never dared to face these two things. He did not intend to delve into these two things.


    The man who betrayed his father back then; did Kakashi ever thought about avenging his father?


    No.


    At that time, as the person who put the Tailed Beast seal on Rin, did he actively think of avenging Rin?


    No.


    Kakashi''s whole life has been yed around by these things! That''s why. Even after so many years, he had no doubt about the cause of his father''s death.


    Now reminded by Naruto, Kakashi, who has been in contact with the dark side of the vige for a long time, wouldn''t he be able to see through what was happening in the past, which is unusual?!


    For a split second, Kakashi''s head became nk. He dared not think about it anymore. He was afraid that if he thought about it, he would think of an answer he did not want to know.


    After Naruto left, Kakashi looked like a wood, standing there motionless.


    ...


    As for Li Yaoxiang, who sees the whole process in his eyes, he can''t help but feel a little happy! Rejoicing that Naruto is finally awakened! Compared with before, Naruto''s words and deeds are obviously different from the original work.


    Li Yaoxiang did not bother to arrange the script of Hatake Sakumo. The reason is also very simple. After all, whether before or after he arrived in this world, the truth about the Hatake Sakumo incident can no longer be investigated by Li Yaoxiang.


    Some people may guess that Hatake Sakumomitted suicide because of self-me. But, on the other hand, some people may guess that Hatake Sakumomitted suicide in order to satisfy the elders.


    However, no matter which one is the truth of the matter... does it matter?


    That''s right! This was not important to Li Yaoxiang!


    After all, Li Yaoxiang''s purpose was only to darken Naruto from the beginning to the end. Therefore, regardless of the truth or not, for everything that happened in the vige, as long as he arranges the script to the side that is beneficial to darkening Naruto, it is enough!


    As for whether it will be revealed by Naruto... Haha! Li Yaoxiang will certainly not let that happen!


    As long as he is reasonably and fair logical, and people can''t find loopholes in his logic, he really doesn''t have to worry about this unexpected situation in the future.


    Take the incident of Hatake Sakumo, for example.


    Does Li Yaoxiang tell the truth absolutely and decisively? No!


    He merely asked various doubts in a rhetorical manner. He just let Naruto do the brain work himself.


    If everes a person that suddenly appeared and told Naruto the so-called ''truth''... Haha! When the timees, Naruto wouldn''t believe it 100%.


    Naruto couldn''t even find out the truth!


    Therefore, no matter before or in the future, as long as everything Li Yaoxiang talks about is organized ording to this standard. He doesn''t need to be afraid that the darkening will be counterproductive!


    Thinking about it, Li Yaoxiang even identally showed a treacherous expression. But, nevertheless, he was satisfied that he sessfully changed Naruto.


    ...


    Hokage Residence. In Conference Hall.


    Shortly after Kakashi left, Sarutobi Hiruzen was called to the Conference Hall to discuss things. Unfortunately, as a result, he did not have time to use the crystal ball and observe the conversation between Kakashi and Naruto.


    And now in the Conference Hall. Except for the Konoha four elders that always sit side by side, standing in front of them was Uchiha Itachi, who looked cold.


    Compared with Shisui, Uchiha Itachi''s attitude to these four old fellows was obviously much worse. After all, he knew very well who killed Big Brother Shisui.


    Konoha four elders'' attitude towards Itachi was also more dreadful than Shisui. In addition to the fear of Itachi''s Mangekyo Sharingan, they were even more afraid of Itachi''s attitude! Because Itachi was not like Shisui, who wasn''t guarded against them.


    If they act blindly without thinking, they dare not imagine what crazy actions Itachi will make.


    Moreover, what worries them, even more was that between the Uchiha n and the vige, they now learned from Itachi''s mouth that a mysterious organization joined this game. It''s called Akatsuki!


    And the people who contact Itachi and invite him to join the organization not only own Mangekyo Sharingan but even imed to be Uchiha Madara!


    This person is probably the culprit that released the demon fox!


    Such a guy who made chaos in the vige everywhere, how can they not be afraid?! How not to worry?!


    So, in order to fool Itachi into doing it himself to bring them more information about Akatsuki, they had no choice but to endure their attitude towards Itachi. Even kept making concessions. Letting Itachi dy things for so long, and nothing was happening...

 Chapter 57: Before the Storm

    Chapter 57: Before the Storm


    Until things develop to the present. There was really nothing to drag on any more.


    Seeing that the Uchiha n was about to start, they had to call Itachi again and told him to make a decision as soon as possible to avoid making a big mistake.


    "You asked me toe, is there something?" Itachi asked.


    Shimura Danzo: "Uchiha Itachi, your n''s questions have been dyed for so long. Is it time to give us an answer?"


    Just as he said the words, Itachi looks condensed!


    ''Mangekyo Sharingan. Open!''


    The long table in front of Sarutobi Hiruzen and the others was suddenly ignited by the ck mes!


    Xiu!


    Xiu!


    The four people moved away from ck inmmation in a split second. They retreated to the wall, keeping a certain distance from Itachi. In addition to Sarutobi Hiruzen, the rest of the people couldn''t help but set up a fighting stance.


    The atmosphere in the Conference Hall instantly became with ''swords drawn and bows bent. However, Itachi did not take one step further. Instead, the red Mangekyo Sharingan was withdrawn.


    The intention is obvious. He made it clear that the four old men in front of him, especially Shimura Danzo.


    Shimura Danzo: "Uchiha Itachi! What do you mean? Is this your choice?"


    "What do you mean?" Itachi behaved very inly. "How should I choose? I don''t need you to point fingers. I will arrange the time, and I will inform you naturally."


    Seeing Itachi had no ns to continue, Utatane Koharu and Mitokado Homura draw something to a scroll at this time.


    Immediately, the trick from the original work like Jiraiya''s seal ck inmmation was used. The ck inmmation at the scene was sealed in the scroll.


    Several people turned their attention back to Itachi again at the same time.


    Utatane Koharu: "Itachi, it''s not that we want to rush you. The situation now; you know it better than us. Do you think it is possible to dy it anymore?"


    "Don''t worry, as long as you don''t betray the vige, in exchange, we will agree to your previous request and let your younger brother, Sasuke, live in the vige normally."


    Hearing it, Itachi''s gaze shifted subconsciously to Sarutobi Hiruzen. The meaning was obvious. Among these four people, he trusted the old fogey, Third-Kage. He needed Third-Kage to give him a guarantee.


    The four elders certainly understand Itachi''s intentions.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen looked sadly and asked: "Itachi, did you really decide to make this choice? Maybe..."


    "Lord-Hokage, no need to say more. As long as you abide by that promise, then I will certainly do what you want me to do." Itachi directly interrupted Sarutobi Hiruzen''s persuasion.


    So far, he didn''t know whether Sarutobi Hiruzen is good or bad. But this is no longer important to him. He believed only in himself. As long as he shows strong enough strength. As long as he''s still alive. Regardless of whether the four people in front of him are people or ghosts, they will certainly not easily act on Sasuke.


    Only in this way can the maximum loss be reduced for the vige.


    Only in this way can the glory of the n be preserved and will not be rejected by others.


    Only in this way, the n... or Sasuke will survive ...


    "Na~" Sarutobi Hiruzen sighed and put on a look like ''I will stop persuading'', and then gave him his worthless promise as always, "Well, you can rest assured. As long as this old man is still alive, I won''t allow anyone to hurt Sasuke!"


    After finishing speaking, Sarutobi Hitizan also deliberately red at Shimura Danzo.


    Itachi knew the truth... They still didn''t know if it''s true or false. But it doesn''t matter whether true or false. Itachi asked Sarutobi Hizen to give another guarantee just for peace of mind.


    Now that the matter has reached a point where it cannot be reversed, Itachi did not intend to postpone it any longer: "Time for action... Wait until I get in touch with ''that person. I will let you know in advance."


    Itachi didn''t care about their reaction.


    Without looking back, he left the Conference Hall.


    ....


    When he passed the corridor, he met an acquaintance.


    Itachi: "Captain."


    Kakashi: "Un."


    The two passed by like this. No one knows that the other side is facing something that is enough to change their destiny in their lives.


    .....


    Not much time after, an announcement came from outside the meeting room.


    "Lord-Hokage, Hatake Kakashi came to see you."


    Inside Conference Hall, Shimura Danzo, full of anger, asked: "Hiruzen, what''s wrong with this Kakashi? Knowing that Conference Hall is a ce to discuss the major event, hees to disturb?"


    Because it was impossible to get Kakashi''s Sharingan, plus the incident of Yamato, Shimura Danzo had long been disappointed by Kakashi. Now that Kakashi was here, he didn''t mind venting his angry me hair on him.


    "Something is wrong with Naruto. I just told Kakashi to check him out... Let hime in, and you should listen as well."


    Of course, Sarutobi knew the true face of this good friend. After all, he knew everything about the assassination, Yamato''s Wood-Style, and the n to seize Kakashi Sharingan.


    After hearing about Naruto, the people''s faces in the Conference Hall became very ugly.


    One wave did not stop after another.


    It was almost time to start with the Uchiha n. But, then, there mustn''t be mistakes with Naruto.


    So, several old fellows were very tacit understanding and suppressed their anger they had just received from Itachi.


    .....


    Kakashi was called into the Conference Hall.


    "Kakashi, you are so anxious to find me; is there something wrong with Naruto?" Sarutobi Hiruzen still looked kind.


    Kakashi was not very calm. But it did not appear on the surface. On the contrary, Kakashi was as cold as ever. And just when he was about to speak for ountability, he suddenly changed his words: "...No, there is nothing unusual."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen and the others did not feel anything wrong. They didn''t even doubt Kakashi''s conclusion. After all, Kakashi has worked in Root or Anbu, and everyone still trusted his judgment and ability.


    "Then, why is Naruto suddenly interested in your business?"


    "Recently, many people have mentioned things about me in front of him. So, it only caused his curiosity."


    The two questioned and answered. But in actuality, Sarutobi Hiruzen does not ask, and Kakashi does not respond. The rtionship between the two parties seemed to be no different. But in fact, what the four elders in Conference Hall did not know is that Kakashi''s perception of them was no longer as respectful as before. Of course, Kakashi didn''t mean to hide from Naruto or anything. But he was still in chaos. It was impossible to focus on the subtle changes of Naruto while he was thinking about Hatake Sakumo.


    ...


    After Kakashi leaves the Conference Hall...


    "Hiruzen, the demon fox must be managed by me! Uchiha n is about to take action. There can be no more mistakes in demon fox here!" Shimura Danzo was pervasive.


    Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu did not reject Danzo''s proposal this time.


    Remaining silent, Sarutobi Hiruzen, who saw through their thoughts, waved his hand. He was very firm and said: "Didn''t Kakashi say everything is okay? Just send a few more people to look after Naruto."


    After that, Sarutobi Hiruzen closed his eyes tightly. The meaning was obvious. He didn''t want to hear any morements about this matter.


    The three nced at each other. But their heart was more dissatisfied with Sarutobi Hiruzen''s Hokage way of doing things...

 Chapter 58: Frightened

    Chapter 58: Frightened


    A few dayster, in the Academy. In the first ss of the second year.


    Naruto seemed to be divided at the moment. The atmosphere of the entire ss was no longer as lively as it used to be. Sincemunicating with Kakashi, Naruto has always been in this state of being depressed. Seeing that, Hinata was deeply worried.


    After hesitating for a few days, Hinata finally became unable to bear, and asked Naruto sitting next to her: "Naruto... what happened to you recently? Why do you seem so unhappy?"


    Sasuke, who was also sitting next to Naruto, also agreed: "Yeah, Naruto. What problem did you encounter? Tell us. We will definitely find a way to help you."


    "I''m fine. You don''t have to worry. Just recently thought of something unhappy; it should be fine in a few days." Naruto answered them with a narrowed smile.


    This expression made Hinata even more worried.


    Sasuke didn''t think too much. He really believed that Naruto will be fine after a few days... right?


    The three continued to concentrate on the lecture.


    .....


    When the school bell rang, Hinata gave Sasuke a wink.


    The knowing Sasuke immediately asked, "I''ve been tired from exercising recently. Why not rx today? Let''s go swimming and fishing! Hinata, what do you think?"


    Hinata gave a slightly excited ''um''.


    Then, the two looked towards Naruto together, waiting for his reply.


    "No. Since there is no exercise, then I want to rest at home today. I''ll talk about itter."


    With that said, Naruto was about to get up and leave. But at this time, ss Teacher Iruka, apuding from outside the door, walked in. "Pa! Pa! Pa! Pa!"


    "Listen, everyone. The vige is under martialw. Everyone must stay in Academy first. Everyone can leave school after martialw is over."


    There was an uproar in an instant. One after another expressed dissatisfaction. They felt very puzzled. They didn''t understand why the vige was suddenly under martialw. This was something they had never encountered.


    There were also Naruto, Hinata, and Sasuke, who were all puzzled.


    "Do you know what this is?" Naruto frowned and asked the two people on the side.


    Hinata and Sasuke shook their heads.


    It was toote to ask ss Teacher Iruka. After Iruka announced the news, regardless of whether the students were dissatisfied or not, he quickly left the ssroom. In exchange, two masked Anbu ninjas were guarding the door of the ss.


    Seeing these 2 Anbu ninjas, everyone in the ss suddenly stopped making noise. Compared to Iruka, their ss Teacher, they were even more scared at the Anbu ninjas wearing cold masks.


    Seeing everyone in the ss was clueless, Naruto suddenly had a thought, why not ask his omniscient big brother?


    "Big brother, the vige is suddenly under martialw. Do you know what the situation is?"


    Throughout his childhood, as long as he has a problem, his big brother will be able to answer it for him. He believes that the big brother will not let him down this time.


    The voice of the big brother he expected gave a response in his mind: "Naruto, are you sure... you want to know the answer?"


    Hearing his big brother say that, Naruto was suddenly stunned. A bad hunch rose involuntarily from his heart. And this feeling was getting stronger and stronger!


    He breathed deeply: "Big brother, just say it."


    "Naruto... you have read the history of the vige, right? Have you noticed what has changed in the vige since the old man in Third-Kage took office?"


    Naruto thought hard. But no matter how much he recalls the well-known Konoha history. He did not find any strange changes in the Third-Kage before and after taking office.


    Li Yaoxiang reminded: "Since that old fogey took office, the top n that founded Konoha, Senju n, has fallen. The Land-of-Whirlpools of Konoha''s alliance were destroyed. There were other top experts in the vige, and each and every one disappeared. Not leaving the vige... just passed away. If you think about it, there''s a connection."


    Naruto fell into thought again. But no matter how hard he thought, he couldn''t think of an answer. This time he almost went crazy by Li Yaoxiang. Impatiently, he urged: "Oh, brother! Can you just tell me the answer? Also, what do these things have to do with this martialw?"


    "Have you not found out yet? Ever since the vige was controlled by the elders in the Hokage Residence, anything and anyone that could threaten their power or status have disappeared!"


    Naruto''s mood was as shocked as thunder from a clear sky!


    If it wasn''t for his big brother reminding him, he really wouldn''t be able to findmon ground in these kinds of events!


    ''It''s just like what the big brother said! All the threatening existence of those old men disappeared one by one!''


    Naruto, in reality, frightened by this idea, stood up suddenly!


    His sudden move made Hinata and Sasuke frightened.


    "Naruto, what''s wrong?" Hinata asked


    "Naruto, what happened to you? Why are you so strange these days?" Sasuke looked at him, puzzled.


    Naruto who recovered his senses. His lips were slightly pale. He suppressed his emotions by force. "No... no... nothing. You don''t have to worry. I just thought of something suddenly, so I was rude. I''m sorry to scare you."


    Naruto sat down. He continued tomunicate with Li Yaoxiang in his mind: "Big brother, what do you mean?! You mean... martialw this time is rted to these things?"


    "Oh, you already have an answer, don''t you? So why bother to ask a question when you already know the answer?"


    After Li Yaoxiang reminded him again and again, Naruto did have an answer in his heart. But the answer; Naruto was not willing to believe it!


    He didn''t want to face it!


    Now, in the vige, the n that can threaten the existence of the elders in the Hokage Residence... isn''t it just the top ns?! Among these top-level ns, who is the most powerful and the most threatening? If not the Uchiha n, who else would it be?!


    Naruto subconsciously nced at Sasuke, who was still worried about him. In his mind, he kept vetoing. "They won''t! They won''t! The vige won''t do it! The vige won''t be so cruel! I must have guessed wrong! Big brother must have thought wrong! Yes! It must be so!"


    Naruto had just given a dose of reassurance for himself. Li Yaoxiang''s next words, like a te of cold water, drowned in the head: "What''s wrong? Want to deceive yourself? Well, since you don''t want to believe it. You can ask Hinata sitting next to you. Hyuga n used to be the goal of those old fellows too!"

 Chapter 59: Annihilation, resentment, and unwillingness

    Chapter 59: Annihtion, resentment, and unwillingness


    Speaking of Hinata, Naruto suddenly turned to Hinata with a shocked look. But he quickly recovered his natural expression.


    And ording to what Li Yaoxiang taught him, he asked Hinata: "Ne... ne... hey, Hinata. Before I know you, you don''t seem to be very happy every time I see you passing by... Also, why did you exercise so hard at that time?"


    Hinata was taken aback. Then, she immediately involuntarily thought of her second uncle, Hyuga Hizashi. Her emotions have be low. But there was no n to hide it.


    Soon, Naruto was informed of the original things without omission and in detail. Sasuke also acted as an audience on the sidelines. But, of course, the version known to Hinata was just one-sided.


    She briefly exined the reason for the matter gently.


    However, this was enough for Naruto because he got the answer he needed to know from this brief message in Hinata!


    Li Yaoxiang''s voice even made up a gun in his mind: "Don''t you think that someone came to your Vige just to kidnap you, but then, you identally killed this kidnapper... As a result, you have to sacrifice the people in your Vige to make amends. How strange is this thing? Also, the Hyuga n, who has passed on for thousands of years, just swallowed the humiliation like that. Isn''t this more unimaginable?"


    Just as expected!


    After Li Yaoxiang asked Naruto again in this way of asking questions, Naruto involuntarily started to brainstorm.


    ''The more I think about it, the more I think that big brother is right.''


    ''The more I think about it, the more I feel terrified of the vige!''


    Seeing that the time was ripe, Li Yaoxiang did not forget to deliberately guide Naruto to guess in this regard: "So... now it is finally a blessing in misfortune. At least you don''t have to worry about something happening in Hinata''s n. Obviously, her n has made a statement to those elders andpromised?"


    In reality, Naruto could no longer control his expression. He showed a shocked expression.


    Hinata thought Naruto was surprised because of her, so she started to talkforted: "Naruto, you don''t have to worry about me. I''m fine now. I will try my best to be stronger, not to disappoint father, and not to let Uncle''s sacrifice be in vain."


    Sasuke interjected aside: "Hmph! Those Kumo Ninjas, it''s too hateful! But, Hinata, you can rest assured that if you encounter a ninja from Kumo Vige in the future, I will definitely help you get revenge!"


    Naruto''s eyes were dull, and he turned his head slowly. He looked towards this friend who was still kept in the dark. He swallowed saliva.


    He thought in my mind: "But... but... big brother, this doesn''t prove the martialw this time. Is the Vige going to act on Sasuke''s n?"


    "Naruto, you have been to the Sasuke''s n residence so many times, so it''s hard to wonder how do they, as the Konoha Guard, live so far? Also, carefully recall the location of each Great ns. Why do they all surround the Uchiha n? Stop fooling yourself, my stupid younger brother. The Vige''s cruel, haven''t you also experienced it? Is it hard for you to see that they are going to act on Uchiha n? Not one dayter from now, and not two dayster from now."


    Naruto, in reality, suddenly stood up!


    The chair made a scraping sound on the floor.


    ''Big brother is right! The Vige is simply not as beautiful as expected! They''re not right! Cruel and ungrateful! Those hateful guys in Hokage Residence! It must be like this! No! I must not let this happen! I want to tell Sasuke! I want to stop this with Sasuke!''


    Li Yaoxiang, who seems to have seen Naruto''s heart, liver, spleen, lungs, and kidneys, started to talk taunted at this time: "Very good! Go, tell Sasuke. Then tell him the truth about martialw; if you want Sasuke to die, that is!"


    Naruto''s actions stopped abruptly. He babbled and asked with doubt: "Why, Big brother!? Why? Why can''t I tell Sasuke the truth?! I must stop this! That''s Sasuke''s family! I can''t let Sasuke''s family die like this!"


    Li Yaoxiang exined: "Since the Vige is going to act on Sasuke''s n but still keeping Sasuke here, it means they will not hurt Sasuke. But the premise is that Sasuke does not know the truth of this matter. Do you think that if Sasuke understood the truth, those old people would let a hostile Sasuke live? If you''re not pushing Sasuke to hell, then what is it? Also, how do you stop it? Haha! Based on your current strength? Relying on your mouth to change them? If you do this, besides getting yourself in, what''s the effect?"


    Sasuke, who was startled by Naruto''s frightened and flustered actions, waspletely confused. He didn''t understand why Naruto today was so strange. Sometimes dazed, sometimes angry.


    This scene also worried Hinata.


    Li Yaoxiang suddenly said seriously: "Naruto, if your reaction is showing, you might involve Sasuke and Hinata. Don''t forget the two Anbu ninjas at the door!"


    Naruto woke up.


    The facts were exactly as the big brother said. Although the faces of the two Anbu ninjas were not facing here, Naruto could feel it indistinctly. They have not rxed their attention to them and the others for a moment!


    He suppressed his emotions again. He sat slowly. And find an excuse for your brazen behavior: "Sasuke, you''re right! If I see any Kumo Ninjas in the future, we must avenge Hinata''s Uncle!"


    Because of this sentence, the two Anbu''s watchful eyes were relieved a little.


    They did not continue this topic.


    Naruto pretended to be calm and started to talk about other stuffs.


    ....


    They didn''t know how long it has been.


    The two Anbu ninja standing at the door suddenly shouted: "Uchiha Sasuke,e out."


    Sasuke looked confused. Although he didn''t know what was going on with these two Anbu ninjas calling him out alone, he still obeyed the instructions.


    Followed by... Naruto was surprised when he saw Sasuke''s expression. Sasuke immediately ran away in a hurry.


    The two Anbu turned around and announced to everyone: "Vige has lifted the martialw. So you can leave now."


    After that, the two Anbu ninjas turned around and left. Naruto looked at their leaving backs. It looked like nothing happened on the surface.


    The pair of fists hidden under his table was clenched tightly!


    The strength was so great that he got blood from his nails...

 Chapter 60: A Shocking Scene

    Chapter 60: A Shocking Scene


    After the two Anbu ninjas dered that the martialw ended, a crowd of students in the first ss of the second year suddenly cheered. Then, like a swarm of bees rushed out of the door.


    Naruto, with an eager expression, also had to leave. Even if his palm had bled, he didn''t even know about it. It wasn''t until Hinata stopped him that he stopped. "Naruto..."


    Naruto was taken aback. In a hurry, he almost forgot about Hinata. He turned around and looked sorrily towards Hinata. He thought about what he should say to her, but he was stopped by Hinata''s movements. She took out cotton directly from her pocket and cleaned Naruto''s wound.


    Naruto found out that his hand was injured.


    But Naruto, at this time, why would he care about being injured or not? Anxious. He just wanted to make an excuse to leave: "Hinata, I..."


    She didn''t wait for him to finish again. Hinata interrupted again. Hinata continued to clean the wound, minding her own business: "Naruto, no matter what happened to you... remember... I will always stand by you..."


    Naruto was dumbfounded for a while.


    When the reaction came over, there was a warmth in his heart. Because of this remark from Hinata, he calmed down a little. He didn''t speak again. He just quietly looked at Hinata, bandaging his wound. Hinata took out the bandage and bandaged Naruto''s injured palms one after another. The process was very gentle.


    ''I''m afraid I will hurt Naruto.''


    But what she didn''t know is that her actions today finally touched Naruto and let Naruto really feel that there is such a person besides the big brother in this world, caring for him.


    Not long after, the wound was quickly bandaged.


    Hinata lifted her head, silently looked towards Naruto. There was no sound. Her eyes, not at all avoiding this time, seemed to tell Naruto, ''I will support you for whatever you want to do''.


    Seeing Hinata''s gaze, Naruto smiled.


    "Just now, Sasuke''s expression was tense. I was worried about him. So let''s go and see him together."


    "Un." Hinata nodded.


    ...


    Soon, Naruto took Hinata''s tiny hand and ran out of the school.


    They did not run far. They were just leaving school. But they already heard many lies and nders around.


    "Hello, have you heard? The martialw just now was just because Uchiha Itachi betrayed the vige!"


    "Yeah, I also heard that Uchiha Itachi not only betrayed the vige but also killed the nsman!"


    "Hey~ I can''t believe it~. A good genius like him... how could he be so vicious and merciless?"


    These lies and nders...


    The martialw just ended, and the rumors spread fast to the entire vige. Needless to say, this was, of course, the work of Konoha''s four elders. Otherwise, the news would not spread so quickly.


    Naruto and Hinata were immediately nervous when they heard the news. Hinata was shocked by the news, leaving her head nk.


    The news was really unbelievable.


    Naruto became more anxious. He seemed normal on the surface. But in fact, he was gnashing his teeth: ''Damn it! Damn it! Big brother is right! This group of bastards!!!!!! Shit!!!''


    Their pace was getting faster and faster.


    Not waiting for them to go far, they were blocked again. Naruto just wanted to yell at him but found that it was the guard who often followed Hinata in the past. Naruto opened his mouth but didn''t scold.


    The guard did not look at Naruto. Instead, looking directly at Hinata, behind Naruto, he said respectfully: "Eldest Young Lady, Lord n Leader ordered the Eldest Young Lady to leave the Academy and go home immediately. Please, Eldest Young Lady. Please don''t make it difficult."


    "This..."


    The guard''s words pulled Hinata back from reality into a dull state.


    Hearing the words of the guard, Hinata''s heart sank even more. If it weren''t for the guard''s remark, maybe she still had hope, hope that the rumor was false The problem is... Now that the guard has appeared, and with her father''s orders.


    ''Does it mean that even father knows about Sasuke''s n?! How could this be false?!''


    Hinata, who analyzed the truth of the matter in a moment, didn''t know what to do for a while. She really wanted to visit Sasuke. But the problem was, judging from the posture of this guard, it was impossible for him to let her go.


    If she doesn''t obey, maybe it will even affect Naruto.


    At this time, even Hinata, who always worked hard and neverined, had to hesitate to follow Naruto or not. Because it was obvious that her father did not want her to participate in this matter, so he issued this order...


    Hinata was panicking. She was so nervous that her nose was sour, and her eyes were involuntarily filled with tears.


    As if to see the Naruto who was thinking of her, at this moment, Hinata''s other little hand that was suspended in the air was also brought up. He put her hands with his own hands, trying to make Hinata feel warm, feeling at ease. "Hinata, it''s okay. You can go back with him. I only need to see Sasuke. You can rest assured."


    Hinata looked at Naruto and at the guard again, still hesitant.


    "Go. Believe me." Naruto gave her a warm smile.


    Hinata was reluctant and walked back to the Hyuga n residence while being guarded by the guard.


    After the silhouette of Hinata disappeared in his field of view, Naruto, with all his strength, ran towards Uchiha n''s residence.


    .....


    The time on the road seems to pass very slowly. Naruto had never felt that Sasuke''s home was so far away.


    While running, Naruto med himself.


    ''Damn it!''


    If these doubts were gone long ago, maybe he could prevent this from happening!


    ''Damn it, old fogey! Why are you so cruel?!''


    Naruto was full of anger. He ran for about two minutes before reaching the Uchiha residence. This shows how far away the Uchiha n''s residence is from the vige''s core range.


    It''s just that when he saw the situation at the residence, Naruto''s inner anger was instantly disappeared.


    Standing there stunned, there was a nk in his mind. His face turned pale. He saw a shocking scene that he had never seen before, and he didn''t want to see it!


    The vigers have long been dispersed. There is no viger here!


    One after another corpses were greeted by the masked ninja from the gate of Sasuke''s house and passed in front of him without any disguise.


    As if he didn''t exist...

 Chapter 61: Deepening Hatred

    Chapter 61: Deepening Hatred


    Seeing so many terrifying corpses, Naruto suddenly felt nausea. This was the first time he had seen a corpse up close. And these corpses, not long ago, were the people he had seen!


    Naruto bent down and put his hands on his knees. His eyes widened. Cold sweat permeated the forehead. He wanted to vomit but couldn''t vomit. Only vomited a little bit of saliva. He was short of breath, wiped the spit on the corner of his mouth, took a deep breath, and calmed his emotions a little before looking directly in the direction of Sasuke''s door.


    He knows very well what the situation is now! This is not the time for him to be cowardly!


    Sasuke! He is going to find Sasuke! Cheer him up!


    Naruto trotted towards the gate again.


    After entering the gate, the scene just now hadn''t changed. There were still masked ninjas, carrying one corpse after another. Moreover, the other party carried more than just the corpse this time. Naruto also saw boxes after boxes of Ninjutsu Scroll being carried out.


    He couldn''t understand what was going on.


    But Li Yaoxiang quickly exined to him in his mind, "Look at it. How great is the vige? As soon as a n was exterminated, the vige immediately took corresponding measures. Therefore, I believe that the inheritance of Uchiha n will shine like the inheritance of Uzumaki n in the vige."


    They were so ridiculously obvious.


    At this time, his views on the vige only felt more chilling. Even disgusted!


    But now was not the time to care about these things Naruto soon took another step, looking for Sasuke.


    Before he could walk far, he saw one, the one-eyed guy he had seen in the Hokage Residence, Shimura Danzo! Although Naruto has tried his best to control his emotions, his ''acting'' in front of Danzo was still too tender. How can the experienced Danzo not notice the little bit of hatred emanating from Naruto''s eyes?


    The two walked in front of each other like this, keeping a certain distance and looking directly at the other side for a long time.


    In order to confirm whether he felt wrong, Danzo simply probed: "You are... Uzumaki Naruto, correct? In a blink of an eye, you grew up so big. I also coached your father. So if you want to be stronger, juste to me."


    However, while Danzo was saying this, Li Yaoxiang and Naruto alsomunicated in their heads: "Naruto, this person is one of the main culprits that caused the destruction of Sasuke n."


    "Why! Big brother, why? If they''re so worried about Sasuke''s n threatening their status, why would they do it?!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Of course it''s more than that! The things that these old fellows have done are never as simple as you think. Haven''t you seen the bandage on this person''s right eye and arm? Haha! That is one of the reasons that led to the destruction of Sasuke''s n! So that there will be a lot of Sharingan."


    Naruto tightened his heart!


    Sharingan, this one word he had heard from Sasuke''s mouth! But hepletely didn''t expect that they... they... they killed theirpanions in order to get Sharingan?! He couldn''t imagine how cruel a person must be to do such a dehumanizing thing!


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t exin too much this time. Naruto filled the whole thing naturally. After all, in his heart, this is not the first time that vige has done this, has it?


    Senju n is like this! Land-of-Whirlpools is like this! The same is true of Sasuke''s n today!


    In reality, Naruto''s hatred when facing Danzo was a little more: "No. I will find a way to be stronger myself. I will not talk to you anymore. I''m very worried about Sasuke. I''ll go to Sasuke first."


    When Danzo looked directly at Naruto, his head moved back slightly. This is an action that urs to him when a person resists him. After realizing the hatred of Naruto''s faint trace, Danzo further confirmed that he did not feel wrong this time.


    ''It seems that after Uchiha n was destroyed... The next ''unstable factor'' is this demon fox!''


    "That''s fine. Sasuke is in the courtyard inside. It''s a big blow for him. You can stay with him." Danzo responded friendlily.


    The two passed by like this.


    But at the moment of staggering, both sides inadvertently nced at each other.


    No one knows what the each other were thinking.


    .....


    In the courtyard, Sasuke sat there motionless with his knees.


    nsman''s corpse was taken away, but he did not even respond.


    The inheritance of the n was taken away; he also did not respond.


    The whole person was as silly as he was sitting there with a dull face. Root ninjas walking around him, the surrounding scenery changes, it seemed to him nowadays like a revolvingntern. It spins fast.


    He could not feel the ebbing of time. He couldn''t feel the pain inside. His whole body was still trembling. The only feeling was the bloody smell spreading in the air.


    Naruto, who saw such a situation, his original anger and hatred all disappeared in a moment. He was full of worries. He came to Sasuke.


    The distance between the two was only one step away: "Sasuke..."


    Sasuke did not answer.


    Naruto stood there, not knowing what to do. Seeing Sasuke''s appearance today, he also felt very sad, and at the same time was very angry! He hates why he didn''t find out earlier! He hates himself for being ipetent! He hates he couldn''t change everything in front of him!


    It''s a pity... everything is toote...


    The two sit and stand.


    .....


    The night gradually dimmed.


    Who knows how long it took? But until all the Root ninjas in residence left, the two still maintained this posture.


    BANG! BANG! BANG!"


    A thunder sounded. A little raindrop gradually dropped onto the two. Naruto moved at this time. He only walked behind Sasuke and sat down, sitting back-to-back with Sasuke. The sound of rain, wind, and thunder began to grow louder. The two children were drenched and soaked.


    Because of this, the bloody smell spreading in the air and the traces left by the n members at thest moment before death were all thoroughly washed away by this heavy rain.


    After feeling the cold chill of the rain, Sasuke finally responded.


    It''s just that his first sentence is: "...go..."


    Hearing Sasuke''s voice, Naruto''s first reaction was delighted, even excitedly stood up straight!


    However, when he heard Sasuke''s short sentence, Naruto couldn''t help feeling lost again: "Sasuke..."


    "I told you to go! Can''t you hear it?!"


    Sasuke didn''t look up, but his voice suddenly became cruel.

 Chapter 62: The Crumbled Sasuke

    Chapter 62: The Crumbled Sasuke


    Sasuke''s angry roar made Naruto even more bewildered. But Naruto was still unwilling, nor rest assured. He didn''t want Sasuke to face this difficult time alone.


    "Sasuke, listen to me! I understand your feelings, and I..."


    Not waiting for Naruto to finish talking, Sasuke suddenly stood up and punched Naruto on the cheek!


    That punch was his best and also, too sudden!


    As a result, Naruto was beaten out by Sasuke before he could react. He could only sit down on the ground while his left hand was covering the beaten cheek.


    Sasuke walked up to him and pulled him up, "''Understand''?! How do you understand my feelings?! Your parents died long ago! And my family?! My family, until this morning, was still alive! But now?! Now they are all dead! All are dead! How do you understand me?! You tell me! How do you understand meeeee?!"


    Sasuke pulled Naruto''s sleeves, shaking and roaring ferociously. Emotionally triggered, Sasuke didn''t even realize that he opened Three-Tomoe Sharingan, which has 2 more tomoe than the original work.


    Naruto was even more bewitched by Sasuke. He did not feel angry because Sasuke said his parents had died long ago. Instead, he was awakened by Sasuke''s words.


    As for the scarlet Sharingan, Naruto felt sadder when he saw it. Until now, Sasuke had shown how much he desired to open his own Sharingan. But now that it is turned on... he didn''t expect it to be turned on in this case.


    If Sasuke can choose, Naruto can tell that he would rather never open this Sharingan than what happened today.


    Ignoring the feeling of Sharingan, Naruto remembered what Sasuke said just now.


    ''Yes indeed... When I was born, I had no parents. I don''t even know how it feels when a family lives together...''


    But Sasuke?


    Sasuke originally had a happy and happy family but lost everything overnight... how could he understand Sasuke''s feelings? He really didn''t deserve to say that. He really didn''t have the qualification to understand Sasuke''s feelings.


    Naruto could only felt more guilty and even med himself when facing Sasuke.


    Guilty because he couldn''t help Sasuke.


    ming himself for not being able to stop this from happening.


    Because of this, even if Sasuke had beaten him just now, he has no intention to refute or resist. If Sasuke would feel better after hitting him, he wouldn''t mind. He was willing to bear it ... Naruto only hoped that Sasuke would feel better after venting his emotions.


    Sasuke, blinded by hatred, resentment, and various hatreds, didn''t understand Naruto''s thoughts at all. He had no intention of stopping. Instead, he kept shouting, "SAY! HOW DO YOU UNDERSTAND ME?!"


    Naruto was beaten down again. He received two consecutive full blows from Sasuke. Naruto''s cheeks were slightly red and swollen. But he stood up again and walked to Sasuke again.


    Sasuke, with a greasy expression, was sober for a bit. But his emotions were still out of control. "Go! Go away! I don''t want to see you!" Sasuke punched him again.


    Naruto was beaten to the ground, stood up again, and walked slightly in front of Sasuke.


    Drop!


    Da!


    Drop!


    Da!


    The sound of rain beating on the ground resounded all around. Sasuke punched Naruto over and over again, yet Naruto kept standing up again and again.


    The two were like this. In this heavy rain, they repeated the same action constantly.


    "Why?! Why are you still here?! Are you looking for a joke?!" Sasuke panted, looking towards Naruto with an angry look. Then, he rushed over and hit Naruto hard.


    Naruto, being blown away, stood up again. However, Naruto no longer had his original look. His cheeks were beaten by Sasuke, almost be swollen blue. The eyes were so swollen that only a thin slit of the field of view remains. There was also a faint trace of blood at the corner of the mouth. He did not answer Sasuke''s question. With his current injury, it was simply impossible to answer Sasuke''s question. But he still tried to support his own body, barely maintaining a smile, and walked to Sasuke again.


    "Huf!"


    "Huf!"


    "Huf!"


    "Huf!"


    Sasuke breathing heavily, he clenched his teeth and rushing up toward Naruto again. But this time, Naruto didn''t move even a step back because Sasuke''s strength was not enough to make him fall back.


    ....


    Sasuke was finally tired. He felt weak. All the feelings of resentment were vented by him in this heavy rain Finally, thest tap was on Naruto''s chest. It was just lightly crossed. Immediately afterward, the original gruesome appearance disappeared. Sasuke knelt weakly in front of Naruto. He crumbled and burst into tears.


    "Wu wu wu~ why? Why is this happening? Mom... Dad... are still alive and well this morning. Why did they disappear suddenly? Everything is gone... W w w w~ why? Naruto, tell me why?"


    This was the first time Naruto had seen Sasuke so pitiful. In his perception, the victorious Sasuke had never given up in front of him. Seeing the appearance of Sasuke, Naruto also felt very ufortable. Because of this, Naruto realized how painful this incident truly was for Sasuke.


    Naruto stiffened his wounds and endured the pain. He also knelt on the ground, embracing Sasuke in his arms. Sasuke could no longer hide his emotions and cried outpletely.


    He cried heartbreakingly, cried until his voice was hoarse.


    ...


    Who knows how much time had passed?


    The heavy rain gradually stopped. Only the moist smell after rain remained in the air.


    After venting all emotions, Sasuke''s tears were also dry. He pushed away Naruto, turned around, and returned to the position at the beginning. He sat on his knees without looking towards Naruto and said in a hoarse voice: "You go back first. I want to be alone."


    Naruto did not refuse this time. He slowly left the courtyard. Sasuke was a little surprised. Why did Naruto go away so willingly this time? But it didn''t matter that much.


    After the entire courtyard was left with only a little ''tick'' sound after the rain, Sasuke''s thoughts once again fell into the scenes of various revolvingnterns. However,pared with the beginning, it is much less.


    At least in his own eyes, he was no longer so sluggish...

 Chapter 63: Disappointment with Grandpa Hokage

    Chapter 63: Disappointment with Grandpa Hokage


    And at this moment, just after leaving the door of Sasuke''s house, there was such a silhouette suddenly on the silent street. Naruto was surprised.


    ''Thiste, why would there be any people here?''


    But after seeing clearly the appearance of theing person, Naruto''s face could not help but sink: "Why did youe here?"


    The personing was Kakashi!


    Compared to Naruto, Kakashi cared more about Sasuke, the orphan of the Uchiha n. For Kakashi, Naruto was nothing more than the teacher''s son in the past. Taking care of Naruto can be said to be thinking of the past love, not looking after Naruto, and owing nothing to Naruto. At most, people say that they don''t miss old feelings. But Sasuke was different. In this life, Kakashi felt the one he owes the most was Obito. After all, Obito sacrificed his life to rescue him. This was an undeniable fact! So, when he heard that Obito''s n was destroyed. The first thing he thought of was to see the orphan Sasuke, to see if Sasuke needs his help, hoping to make up for his debt to Obito.


    The reason why Kakashi did not make such a move in the original work is because this life is very different from the original work!


    Since learning of the death of his father, he finally came out from the shadows. His father was right! The wrong one is thepanion who framed his father! He can finally face up Obito bravely. He even goes to Obito''s tomb to talk about his own affairs every day.


    These all were obviously different from the original work, where he needed to wait until Sarutobi Hiruzen to deploy him to the team instructor like the original book to help Sasuke.


    At the same time, Kakashi also became suspicious because of his change of opinion of the Konoha four elders and the incident of Uchiha n Downfall. He doubted whether this matter was manipted by the Konoha four elders or not. After all, he also spent time with his subordinate, Itachi. Although he didn''t know him much, he still did not believe that Itachi would do such a dehumanizing thing without any reason.


    "I''m here to visit Sasuke. To see if he needs my help."


    Naruto relentlessly refused: "No. Sasuke doesn''t want to see anyone now. It''s enough to have me with him. Thank you for your kindness."


    After finishing talking, Naruto went directly over Kakashi, no longer looking at him.


    Kakashi hesitated for a moment but ended up agree with Naruto. Since Sasuke was already apanied by Naruto, it wasn''t a good time to bother Sasuke. In return, he had to wait untilter to see if Sasuke needed to talk about it in the future.


    After making a decision, Kakashi nced around. Seeing this bustling street in the past, it has now be lifeless. Kakashi couldn''t help looking sullenly in the direction of Hokage Residence.


    ....


    After Naruto left Sasuke''s courtyard, he was still around. Of course, he couldn''t follow Sasuke''s wishes and just left. From the school until now, Naruto hadn''t eaten a grain of rice. Not to mention Sasuke.


    So, Naruto''s departure was not really that he wanted to go. Instead, he just wanted to look for nearby shops to see if there are any stores open, to see if he can buy something to eat. However, his idea was doomed to be impossible. After all, the time was already sote, plus with such an unsteady day today. Don''t mention the neighborhood; all shops in Konoha Vige had already closed in advance.


    "What''s wrong? Naruto, where do you want to go?" Li Yaoxiang probably guessed Naruto''s intention but still asked in advance.


    Naruto''s voice sounded a little airy when he said: "It''s nothing. I thought Sasuke is hungry too. So I want to buy some food and bring it back to Sasuke."


    "You don''t need to look for it. Something tragic just happened today. No one is going to open the store sote. Go back. I''ll cook for you and some for Sasuke."


    "Really?! That''s great, big brother!"


    With Li Yaoxiang''s promise, Naruto began to go back home.


    However, on the way to returning home, Naruto, who had already calmed down, recalled the news from the vige today and couldn''t help feeling curious. "Big brother, the rumor has it that Sasuke''s family was killed by his big brother himself. Is that true?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Of course it is true."


    "This... this... how is it possible?! Sasuke''s big brother, why did he do that? Isn''t it the old man who wants to do something with Sasuke''s family? So why did Sasuke''s brother... do it in the end?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Naruto, some things are not as simple as you think. Don''t you find it strange? Since the vige wanted to destroy Sasuke''s n, why would they leave Sasuke alone? You don''t think that this group of cruel fellows will suddenly overflow with sympathy, right? If my guess is correct, this should be an exchange condition that forced Sasuke''s big brother to do it himself. That way, the vige can maintain its reputation


    Look? Isn''t everything good now? Sasuke''s n was destroyed due to the infighting between their n. So the vige canpletely separate their rtionship. But the biggest gain is always them. It''s the same thing as the genocide in Land-of-Whirlpools."


    Of course, Li Yaoxiang could not tell Naruto the whole story. Naruto, who had heard the matter half-understood, couldn''t help but pause after hearing the words.


    He couldn''t believe it...


    ''Grandpa Hokage, who looks... so kind...''


    ''What a cruel decision! For the sake of purpose, he does whatever it takes! He didn''t hesitate to let Sasuke''s big brother kill his loved ones himself! What a cruel thing is this?!''


    Naruto, who thought that Grandpa Hokage would be slightly better than the other three guys, couldn''t help but shake his mind about Sarutobi Hiruzen. He recalled all kinds of stuff in his childhood, the scenes of Sarutobi Hiruzen when he visited him.


    Naruto exuded an ugly and disappointing expression.


    ....


    After Naruto returned home, Naruto asked the big brother Li Yaoxiang to take control of his body so that the big brother could cook food for him quickly. And Li Yaoxiang, who was in control, did not disappoint Naruto.


    Even in the absence of any ingredients, a te of shrimp-fried rice with all kinds of vors was cooked.


    Naruto smelled the aroma of shrimp-fried rice afterward. He couldn''t care about the hunger he felt anymore. He immediately wrapped this shrimp-fried rice and once again hurriedly ran back to the residence of the Uchiha n...

 Chapter 64: The Rebellious Hinata

    Chapter 64: The Rebellious Hinata


    In the courtyard where Sasuke stayed, when Naruto returned, just as expected, Sasuke still maintained the position of sitting on his knees without moving.


    The two children''s clothes were still wet after being drenched in the rain.


    Naruto looked a little excited and brought the hot shrimp fried rice to Sasuke and opened the wrap. The aroma suddenly escaped. Naruto stared at this package of shrimp-fried rice, couldn''t help swallowing saliva.


    But in the end, he handed it to Sasuke. "Sasuke, this is my brother''s- I cooked it for you personally. You haven''t eaten anything since school. So eat it while it''s hot."


    That''s what Naruto said, but Naruto''s eyes were very sharp; they did not leave the fried rice with shrimp at all.


    The original ''don''t talk to me'' Sasuke; after the vent just now, his emotions have calmed down a lot. However, when aroma flew over, he couldn''t help but sniff a few more times.


    After taking the shrimp-fried rice, he slurped it expressionlessly.


    Eat and eat.


    He even choked a few times. Then, when some rice grains were sprayed out, he finally noticed that Naruto, who was kneeling beside him, looking intently at the shrimp-fried rice in his hand.


    Seeing that Sasuke stopped the movement in his hand, Naruto noticed that he was making a fool of himself. He quickly hit the back of his head: "Haha, it''s nothing! I''m not hungry at all. You continue to eat."


    He said he was not hungry. But the belly made a drumming sound very sincerely. "Gaao~~"


    Then, there was an awkward smile. "Hehe, hehe."


    Sasuke looked at only half a packet of fried rice with shrimps and then at Naruto. Then, he wiped the corners of his mouth and directly pushed the shrimp fried rice in front of Naruto. And then returned to the previous position again, motionless.


    Naruto was overjoyed. With no trace of politeness, he cleaned the remaining shrimp fried rice, theny on the ground and hit a "hup". However, when he saw that Sasuke did not react, he quickly sat up again. He made the same posture as Sasuke and apanied him.


    The two were silent all night. They didn''t sleep either.


    ....


    Until dawn, neither of them changed their posture.


    Nauro initially wanted to ask Sasuke if he wanted to go to school today, but when he saw Sasuke''s posture, he swallowed the words back and said, "I''m going to buy breakfast, what do you want to eat?"


    Sasuke did not answer.


    Seeing this, Naruto couldn''t help but feel lost again. But he chose to buy breakfast first. As for whether Sasuke eats or not, he will cross that bridgeter.


    .....


    After buying breakfast, Naruto returned to the courtyard again. He handed a serving of milk and three sandwiches to Sasuke. Sasuke was still motionless. But Naruto didn''t care, anyway. He put it right in front of Sasuke.


    Today, he was determined to apany Sasuke to the end!


    Although he didn''t know how long Sasuke would recover, Naruto Uzumaki would stay with him forever!


    ...


    At the same time, in Academy.


    The bell school rang.


    Today, Hinata had been unwilling to spend the whole day. Sasuke didn''te. Naruto didn''te either. This made her very worried.


    It wasn''t until she heard the bell from school that she was the first to stand up, the first to rush out of the ssroom, the first rushed out of the Academy. It''s a pity that only a few steps after she left the Academy, the escort appeared in front of her again, blocking her path.


    "Eldest Young Lady, Lord n Leader told you to go home immediately after school. Please don''t make this difficult."


    Hinata''s little fist clenched tightly, showing an unwilling expression. But eventually, she followed the guard back.


    .....


    But when she returned to the Hyuga n''s Residence and as soon as she entered the gate, she angrily asked the guard on the side: "Where is my father?"


    The guard was threatened. He had never seen the Main House Eldest Young Lady be so angry. But he still subconsciously replied: "The n... Lord n Leader is... in the backyard."


    Hinata didn''t care with what eyes the guards looked at her. After receiving the answer, she rushed to the backyard!


    ...


    Arriving in the backyard, she found the eye-catching person.


    It was her father, Hyuga Hiashi, who sits on his knees in the open corridor with her grandfather, drinking tea and chatting.


    Hinata''s footsteps took a slight pause, but then she didn''t care about any etiquette anymore! She directly ran to the two of them, panting, and asked angrily: "Why?! Why stop me from going to Sasuke''s!"


    Hyuga Hiashi frowned slightly. He put down the teacup.


    First, he spoke in a light tone: "Hyuga Hinata, where is your attitude?"


    Then, the tone changed! The face also became harsher: "Is this your attitude? As the Main House Eldest Young Lady, should you have that attitude towards your father and the n Leader?!"


    Hinata was taken back half a step. Her imposing manner also weakened. But it didn''tst long. When she thought of Sasuke and Naruto, she immediately found the courage. "I don''t care! I must find them today!"


    After that, Hinata turned away without looking back.


    It was because she knew very well that it was impossible to break through the guard who was only doing his job. Only when she goes back home and faces her father will she have the possibility of doing so.


    Hyuga Hiashi, who was shocked by his daughter''s attitude, was only dumbfounded for a moment. He immediately caught up and put one hand on Hinata''s shoulder.


    But as soon as Hinata turned around, even without Eight-Trigrams Palm''s gesture style, she directly attacked him!


    4 palms!


    8 palms!


    16 palms!


    Even if Hiashi was stunned by Hinata''s action, he still managed to block Hinata''s attacks with his years of experience.


    Just when he thought that the sixteen palms were the limit of Hinata, Hinata suddenly hit the seventeenth palm that he could not predict!


    "p" sound.


    This 17th palm hit Hyuga Hiashi''s abdomen. It drove him back two steps.


    For the first time, Hyuga Hiashi never thought that his always docile daughter would attack him. The strength of Hinata; to him, as her father, was very clear. He didn''t expect Hinata to break through at this time and hit out the 17th palm.


    Instantly, the atmosphere in the entire courtyard was silent


    Her grandfather was dumbfounded!


    The guard was dumbfounded!


    Hyuga Hiashi was even more dumbfounded!


    They had never seen such a tough Hinata!


    This was the first time that Hinata has vited the n Leader''s and father''s orders since she was sensible. So it''s more appropriate to call it resisting!


    No one knows what response to give.


    This is their ideal strong character that the Main House sessor should have... Hinata was developing towards his ideal sessor type. Seeing such a huge change in Hinata, he knew that she will obviously be it over time.


    Everyone should have been happy. But they didn''t expect this situation to happen...


    Hinata, who pped her own father on the belly, was also stunned. She never thought that she could hit the seventeenth palms. After all, sixteen palms were already her limit. She didn''t understand what was happening just now. She was just desperate to see Naruto and Sasuke, so she naturally broke through her limits and hit the seventeenth palm.


    Hinata regretted it. She didn''t mean to fight her father. But when she thought of the fact that Sasuke''s whole n has died overnight, she was out of breath. She gritted her teeth.


    While everyone hasn''t responded yet, she just turned around and left the scene, leaving everyone dumbfounded.


    .....


    After a while, an escort appeared in front of Hyuga Hiashi: "Lord n Leader, do you need me..."


    Hyuga Hiashi waved his hand: "No. Let her go... protect her."


    "Yes!"


    After everyone left, Hinata''s grandfather came to his son, Hyuga Hiashi, and gazed at the leaving Hinata with Hyuga Hiashi. Neither of them spoke. But they understood the other party''s inner thoughts very well.


    As those in power, how can they not know the dark side of the vige? How can they not understand Konoha''s intention for letting Hinata meet Naruto?


    After discovering that his daughter''s rtionship with Naruto and Sasuke was already deep in the mud, he always wanted to find a chance to let her stay away from Naruto and Sasuke.


    Unfortunately... Now, it seemed that this idea was more and more impossible.

 Chapter 65: Deliberately revealing flaws

    Chapter 65: Deliberately revealing ws


    A few days after Hinata left the house, Sasuke''s situation was still exactly the same.


    In the past few days, even Hinata stayed here every day. As a result, the number of children sitting in the courtyard changed from two to three.


    Sasuke hasn''t moved except for breakfast Naruto packs every morning.


    And time hase to this day; Naruto and Hinata had not been home for several days in a row. Seeing that Hinata was about to fail, Naruto couldn''t hold it anymore. He gritted his teeth. He picked up two days of milk on the ground and poured it directly onto Sasuke''s face!


    "Enough! Sasuke! Until when are you going to be decadent?! You don''t want to take revenge anymore?! Your family! Your nsman! You just let them die in vain?!"


    This was what Li Yaoxiang taught to Naruto. For Sasuke to regain his vitality as soon as possible, he must arouse Sasuke''s hatred towards his brother. If not, there is no way out. Besides, he couldn''t bear to see Hinata continue to suffer. Naruto really didn''t want to use this method.


    When Sasuke, who was sshed with milk, heard revenge and family, his anger couldn''t help but ignite again! He stood up, stepped forward, and grabbed Naruto''s cor directly, "Who do you think doesn''t want revenge?! Do you know how strong that person is?! Do you really think you''ve surpassed him?!"


    Naruto retorted: "Since you know you''re not strong enough, then get stronger and get that revenge! You''re so dejected like this that even Hinata is apanying you regardless of hardship. You''re not a man! You''re a coward!"


    With that, Naruto threw out a punch.


    Sasuke was beaten to the ground.


    "Who do you think is a coward?! Asshole!" Sasuke looked fierce and immediately got up and fought back!


    The two were fighting directly.


    There are no rules.


    Just punches.


    Fists to the flesh.


    Naruto wanted to wake up this guy; Sasuke also wanted to vent to the bastard.


    And Hinata, who was on the side, weakly persuaded them: "Don''t fight, don''t fight. Cough, cough, cough."


    Hinata had never suffered such pain. Finally, after a few days of suffering, it seemed that her body has given up. Today, her temperature had risen significantly, her face was flushed, and she had signs of fever.


    Of course, Hinata''s persuasion was useless; the two still continued to wrestle together.


    ...


    After who knows how long, the two were tired.


    They were lying on the ground, panting.


    Sasukeughed at himself: "Oh, I can''t even beat you. How can I get revenge on that person? How can I even have the strength to get revenge?"


    Hearing these words, Naruto couldn''t help but feel angrier. He relied on Hinata, struggling to prop up his body, and scolded Sasuke on the ground: "Then you should go on like this forever! There''s no need for revenge! Hinata, let''s go!"


    Naruto really turned around and left with Hinata this time.


    .....


    The next morning.


    Naruto and Hinata appeared again in the courtyard with a full day''s rest. The state of the two of them was obviously much better than before. And Sasuke was still lying there motionless, full of decadence. But this time, Naruto did not persuade him or scold him but instead exercised and spar with Hinata in front of Sasuke, each minding their own business.


    And there were new training patterns. That was to y with balloons.


    .....


    One dayter, the balloons were reced with rubber balls.


    The rubber balls reced by a palm condense an energy ball.


    When this energy ball from Naruto''s palm hit the ground, it made a ''rumble'' noise. Then, the ground was smashed into a giant pit. Sasuke sat up straight and could no longer calm down.


    "Naruto... this... this is?"


    Naruto nced at Sasuke and said: "This is Rasengan! Do you want to learn? I can teach you."


    Seeing the path and opportunity of be-stronger, Sasuke would certainly not let go. In order to be stronger, he got up immediately. He joined this exercise group.


    There is a goal, now.


    He is a whole person again now, no longer decadent.


    Eat when it''s time to eat. Sleep when it''s time to sleep.


    .....


    Finally, after two days, Sasuke, who was far more powerful than the original work, also learned Rasengan.


    WENG! WENG! WENG!


    Sasuke looked excitedly at Rasengan in his hands. He calmed down his emotions and extinguished them. He calmly asked Naruto, "Naruto, can you tell me who taught you so much?" Something? "


    Naruto was shocked! He was at a loss, not knowing what to do.


    Seeing Naruto''s expression, Sasuke continued, "Nevermind, you don''t have to say it. I''m still grateful for teaching me such a powerful move and letting me see the opportunity for revenge."


    With that said, Sasuke''s palm condensed a Rasengan again.


    The indifferent expression suddenly became terrible. He rushed directly to the courtyard wall and smashed it with Rasengan!


    BOOM!


    A big hole appeared in the wall.


    The dust covered the silhouette of Sasuke, but it couldn''t hide Sasuke''s heartyugh.


    "HAHAHAHAHAHA!"


    This was augh with resentment!


    Although Sasuke has lost his previous decadence, seeing Sasuke''s current state, Hinata, who was standing on the side, couldn''t help him feel sad and worried for Sasuke. However, what Hinata did not know is that at this moment, the one who felt the most ufortable was Naruto, who witnessed all this!


    Obviously, he knew the truth of the matter but could not say it. He insisted on watching Sasuke continue to be deceived, but he was powerless to it. Every time he faced Sasuke, he felt an immense sense of guilt.


    Because of this, he would only feel more disgusted with the elders of Hokage Residence!


    ....


    The small group of three people who were originally happy will never return.


    The nner behind this situation is, of course, Li Yaoxiang! He knew very well that even if Naruto didn''t do anything, Sasuke would still be like original work. Standing up again because of hatred. But he still chose to guide Naruto to do all this.


    The purpose is to harvest the results!


    In the past, in terms of strength, he let Naruto suppressed Sasuke. Letting Naruto show novel exercise methods in front of Sasuke. Deliberately cook in front of Sasuke. Deliberately teaching Rasengan at this moment!


    All in all, just for this day!


    That is, to let Sasuke discover Naruto''s anomaly!


    Obviously, the fruit is already ripe and had also been sessfully collected by Li Yaoxiang.


    If there is no ident, in the future, Sasuke will not be able to escape his palm but also be a very important chess piece in his ckening Naruto n!


    Apart from this, the Third Step n is equally foolproof!


    Because, before that, Li Yaoxiang had already arranged everything! He deliberatelymunicated with Naruto when Naruto met Danzo, causing his hatred to be discovered by Danzo!


    The purpose is to cause conflicts between the two!


    At the same time, he also believed that from the perspective of Naruto''s character, Naruto wouldn''t stand this kind of aggrieved state for long. Next, it depended on who between these two people who would break out first, which led to the next great scene!


    As for himself...


    It was also time to count the harvest this time!

 Chapter 66: Harvest and New System Functions

    Chapter 66: Harvest and New System Functions


    [Host: Li Yaoxiang


    Darkening Target: Uzumaki Naruto


    Target Soul: 10/40


    Darkening Degree: 25%


    Darkening Value: 138000


    Mall: Slightly


    Astral Projection: (unopened)


    Invasion Target: (not activated)]


    This is what Li Yaoxiang gained this time.


    Naruto''s darkening level has increased from 8% to 25%.


    The first increase was when Li Yaoxiang told Naruto about all the sloppy events in the vige. That is, Land of Whirlpools were destroyed, Senju n was gone, Hatake Sakumo''s suicide, and so on.


    The darkening effect that time increased from 8% to 13%. The reward is a 35,000 darkening value.


    The second increase was the Uchiha n downfall event. In this incident, Naruto is more convinced that the vige is as dark as Li Yaoxiang said. Also, because he learned about the ''Hyuga n Incident'' and the ''truth'' of Uchiha being eliminated by the n.


    Naruto''s darkening level soar from 13% to 25%! The reward is 100,000 darkening value!


    Li Yaoxiang used the remaining 6000 ckening value before and spent 3000 points on the "Basic Main Body Mastery". So, there are only 3000 points left. Now adding these 135,000 points, the current total is 138,000 points.


    From this darkening effect, Li Yaoxiang got two good news and one bad news.


    The first good news is that the improvement of the degree of darkening twice. It proves Li Yaoxiang''s idea and his n of until now, is absolutely correct!


    But why does the effect vary so much? Increased by 5% the first one. And the other is a 12% increase.


    Unsurprisingly, this is the difference between ''listening to the story and being in the story''! If it were not for Li Yaoxiang''s nning in advance, would Naruto, Sasuke, and Hinata have a better bond than the original work?


    The second good news is the darkening value that the system rewarded this time also confirmed Li Yaoxiang''s idea!


    At the first 1.6%, the system reward was 81000 points.


    3.0% for the second time, the system rewarded 17,000 points.


    3.4% of the third time, the system rewarded 21,000 points.


    5.0% of the fourth time, the system rewarded 35,000 points.


    12.0% of the fifth time, the system rewarded 100,000 points!


    It can be seen that as the percent number increases, the ckening point of the system will increase every time the reward is made!


    If one calcted ording to this model, one day when Li Yaoxiang willpletely darken Naruto, then the darkening points he will eventually get will be a very terrifying number!


    In other words, at thete stage, Li Yaoxiang not only will have enough darkening points but also can convert various ''strong capabilities'', such as Rinnegan, Tenseigan, Ultimate Sage Body, Ultimate Innate talent, Ultimate Senjutsu, and so on, all to his own body! If he wants to, copying one or two more Otsutsuki Kaguya''s level experts is not impossible!


    What!


    Just thinking of it makes one feel excited!


    When the timees, in this Naruto World, it can be said to be going sideways!


    As for the bad news... It is Naruto''s soul value, which has increased again...


    ''I don''t know whether it is because of the Asura''s influence, or because Naruto has a lot of experience not described in the original work, so it leads to Naruto''s current soul value, which will grow so fast.''


    As mentioned before, the higher the soul value, the stronger the Willpower.


    Due to Asura''s influence, Naruto, which has a maximum soul value of 40 points, even if it is full, his Willpower will only be stronger than anyone!


    If you want to darken him, it will start to get harder.


    This also means that Li Yaoxiang must speed up the process.


    Even if it is impossible topletely darken Naruto to 100% during Naruto''s childhood, at least he must darken his thinking into a normal person''s thoughts before he grows up. Otherwise, it is hard to say whether Li Yaoxiang canplete this 100% darkening mission.


    ...


    After counting the harvest and summing up the conclusion... The new features of the system.


    When Naruto''s darkening level was raised to more than 20%, the system opened 2 new functions.


    One is Astral Projection.


    One is Invasion Target.


    Astral Projection, as the name implies, is that Li Yaoxiang''s soul can leave the body.


    Invading is a derivative function of Astral Projection.


    Simply put, as long as Li Yaoxiang''s Astral Projection is gone, he can walk between Heaven and Earth and invade anyone''s consciousness space!


    After the invasion, his state and ability will be as if he is getting along with Naruto now. You canmunicate with the target in mind. If certain conditions are met, the target''s body can be controlled as well.


    However, the price that needs to be paid is every minute. Thus, deducting a certain darkening value, just like paying a phone bill.


    Of course, another limitation is that when he uses Astral Projection, he can no longer take care of his own main body activities andmunicate with Naruto.


    After learning about these two new features, Li Yaoxiang''s first reaction was ecstatic. After all, in his darkening n, in the not-too-distant future, many ns require him to go ahead and arrange in person. Now with these two new features, it saves him a lot of things.


    Only...


    If you want to activate these 2 functions, you need to redeem an ability in advance.


    That is the ability of ''Shinigami''!


    [TL note: The Shinigami (English TV: Reaper, literally meaning: Death god) is the spectral entity summoned through the usage of certain Uzumaki n finjutsu. The Shinigami was first summoned by Minato Namikaze, the Fourth Hokage, as ast resort, with the intention of sealing the Nine-Tailed Demon Fox into his infant son. However, as he wasn''t able to seal the entirety of Kurama''s chakra into the infant due to the beast''s size. Using the Shinigami, Minato was able to seal the yin half of the tailed beast within himself before going on to use another sealing method to seal the yang half of the fox within his son.]


    That is the Shinigami in the ''Beast Seal''.


    The price is 100,000 darkening value.


    After seeing this ''opening condition'', Li Yaoxiang didn''t even think and chose to exchange immediately! In fact, even without these 2 new features, Li Yaoxiang will still choose to exchange the ability of ''Shinigami''.


    He is familiar with Naruto World, but he is very clear that the most powerful thing in Naruto World is not Ninjutsu, or Taijutsu, or so on. It''s actually Sealing Jutsu!


    Even the strongest, Otsutsuki Kaguya, when she''s against the powerful Sealing Jutsu, she''s trapped for more than a thousand years.


    It''s just that Li Yaoxiang doesn''t have to worry about the sealing technique.


    If there everes a day when he''s sealed, it will not be a problem to spend some darkening value to solve it~


    Sealing Jutsu is no problem, but the most troublesome for him is Genjutsu! If an Infinite Tsukuyomi is activated, he might be okay with Six-Paths Naruto. But if it''s Sasuke, he wouldn''t be able to escape the destiny he gets into!


    Coming here, Li Yaoxiang''s biggest worry is that he will be caught Genjutsu of others.


    If he really hit Genjutsu, even if he has the system and darkening value, he will still be screwed.


    .And the reason why Li Yaoxiang wants to redeem the ability of the ''Shinigami'' is that, in his realization, the stronger one''s spiritual energy, the lower the chance of getting Genjutsu''d.


    The spiritual energy is the existence linked to the soul.


    Looking at the entire Naruto World, the soul is the most powerful. So it''s undoubtedly Shinigami, right?


    You can take away the souls of others, take control of the souls of others. It sounds pretty good, right? Therefore, regardless of his method of cracking Genjutsu, it is spected whether it is correct or not, the ability to exchange ''Shinigami'' is more beneficial than harmful.


    [Darkening point: -100,000.]


    [New system functions are avable.]


    And with that, Li Yaoxiang also got Shinigami''s ability


    Then the next step is to think about how to use the remaining darkening points...

 Chapter 67: Allocating Darkening Points, Current Strength

    Chapter 67: Allocating Darkening Points, Current Strength


    Li Yaoxiang will definitely not spend this batch of darkening points on improving Naruto''s strength. As mentioned before, if Naruto is too strong, he will easily break out of his control, and it is extremely likely that it will affect his subsequent darkening n.


    Li Yaoxiang should always control Naruto''s strength at a bnce point.


    This bnce is: As long as there is no death threat, Naruto will always be better than Sasuke by a little bit.


    After all, Sasuke is the next chess piece that Li Yaoxiang will use to darkening Naruto.


    And only in this way, Sasuke, after experiencing the ''genocide incident'', will have a greater extreme jealously for Naruto, and it will be more convenient for him to seed.


    So, apart from teaching Naruto Rasengan, Li Yaoxiang will also teach Naruto'' Multi Shadow Clone Jutsu''. So that Naruto can continue to overwhelm Sasuke in terms of strength. After all, if he doesn''t help Naruto increase his strength, the current Naruto is probably no longer Sasuke''s opponent, who has opened the three-jade Sharingan and also learned Rasengan.


    Moreover, the Ninjutsu ''Multi Shadow Clone'' has another advantage.


    Even if Naruto passed this Ninjutsu to Sasuke, as long as Sasuke''s Chakra Reserves can''t keep up with Naruto, the effect of using ''Multi Shadow Clone Jutsu'' will definitely not be better than Naruto. Hence why, Li Yaoxiang doesn''t have to worry about counterproductive effects.


    Judging from the current situation...


    The darkening values of 38,000 points are still used on himself or the n, which is more appropriate.


    Needless to say, it''s more for the n.


    In order to be safe, Li Yaoxiang will definitely not save the points! Just like when he had to deal with an ordinary ninja when he left the vige at the beginning, Li Yaoxiang used the ''one-time Kotoamatsukami'' to the ninja without the slightest hesitation.


    The purpose is to ensure that nothing out-of-n happens!


    Moreover, it is very clear that Money is not saved but earned! Only by constantly trying to make money will that money doubled or tripled or even more!


    The same is true. The darkening value is not saved but earned! Only by constantly trying to darken Naruto, the value of darkening will naturally increase more and more!


    The only thing Li Yaoxiang needs to pay attention to is how to make no mistakes and to ensure that every n is made without loss. That is enough.


    As for the use on himself... It must first be evaluated what the mostpelling need for the ability or item at present is.


    First, in terms of strength. Then talk about Chakra Reserves.


    In recent years, almost every day, Li Yaoxiang will spend more than 7-8 hours to Refine Chakra. Therefore, with Uzumaki n''s Bloodline, coupled with his unremitting efforts, now his Chakra Reserves is "no need to worry about this".


    Next is Ninjutsu. Just like before, whether or not he can fully control Kyuubi will be a very important part of Li Yaoxiang''s next n. Therefore, in the past few years, in addition to Refining Chakra every day and night. Li Yaoxiang spent a lot of time studying all the Sealing Jutsu of the Uzumaki n!


    There are Adamantine Sealing Chains that only Uzumaki n''s purebred red-haired descendants can learn. But, on the other hand, the Uzumaki Bloodline that Li Yaoxiang exchanged from the system can be learned even he''s not red-haired. Then there are Four-Tetragram Seal, Eight-Sign Seal, Ghost seal, contract seal, and so on.


    Because of his continuous research in recent years, at this moment, he has thoroughly studied all Sealing Jutsu and learned!


    In addition to Sealing Jutsu, in the beginning, to increase the speed of Naruto''s training, he also learned Multi Shadow Clone Jutsu specifically. Another one is Rasengan, which he learned with balloons during his leisure time.


    As for the remaining Ninjutsu and Senjutsu of Namikaze Minato, he didn''t have much time to get into it


    Then there is Taijutsu. Li Yaoxiang, who has mastered the main body skill, even if he is now fighting close to others on the spot or even if he has no fighting experience, should not be that far behind.


    In other words... the current Li Yaoxiang, in terms of strength: Ninjutsu is not bad. Taijutsu is not bad. Genjutsu, with ''Shinigami'' ability, no worries.


    Judging from the current situation, the mostcking part of Li Yaoxiang should be the physical fitness of his own main body! After all, although he has the Uzumaki Bloodline, it only increased the limit of his potential. It''s not that he changed his entire body.


    In addition, his work rule is "low-key in Ninja World, high-key in ordinary person''s world", so in the past few years, in order to avoid Ninja World discovering his existence, he has not exposed his strength in front of people, let alone worked out in full view.


    So, until now, his physical fitness, in addition to Chakra, which has just been refined, has received some improvements.


    But what about his original physical fitness?


    It''s still no progress at all.


    If you insist on makingparisons, he is probably at the level of the group of children who have exercised for a long time at the Ninja School. After all, he is already an adult. So even if he hasn''t exercised, he should be a little better than them.


    Li Yaoxiang opened the system mall, find the physical fitness column.


    [SS-Rank, the price is 50,000.


    S-Rank, the price is 30,000.


    A-Rank, the price is 15,000...]


    ''Uh... It does not seem cheap.''


    But it''s reasonable when you think about it Like Might Guy, he can run a few thousandps a day, walk a few thousandps upside down, push a few thousandps and so on, and so on, and get such a powerful physical fitness.


    You can be stronger as long as you have krypton gold.


    It''s pretty good.


    No longer tangled, Li Yaoxiang''s mind immediately returned to the main body in reality.


    It''s good to feel the changes in the body.


    ...


    In the room.


    [-15,000 points.


    Redeemed A-Rank''s physical fitness.]


    Li Yaoxiang sitting on the bed, suddenly felt his muscles stretched taut a lot. First, six packs were formed in his belly as if many years of hard work, then it was broken into eight pieces ruthlessly.


    He feels that he has endless strength!


    ''Not bad!''


    With such a change, this 15,000 is not a loss.


    If there is no ident, the rank of Li Yaoxiang''s physical fitness is now about the same as Kakashi''s. However, due to the addition of Uzumaki Bloodline, Li Yaoxiang should be better than Kakashi, and there are still many potentials that have not yet been developed.


    The problem of physical fitness was finally solved.


    There are 23,000 points left.


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t think much. He directly spent 3,000 points to exchange for ''Space-Time Innate Talent''. After all, there is ''Flying Thunder God Jutsu Technique'' in there. If you don''t learn it, something is wrong with you.


    [TL note: The Flying Thunder God Technique is a spacetime ninjutsu created by Tobirama Senju. Before the Flying Thunder God Technique can be performed, users must first mark a target with their "technique form". The form is applied after the merest touch and cannot be removed; it will remain in ce even after the user has died. By entering a dimensional void, users can instantly teleport to a technique form''s location whenever they please, regardless of distance. To an onlooker, it may look like the Body Recement Technique, but the Flying Thunder God actually has more inmon with the Summoning Technique. Anything that the user is holding, contacting, or that is linked with their chakra will teleport with them, but this requires additional chakra to do; particrlyrge objects can require so much chakra as to ce a limit on how far away the user is able to teleport. Users can choose to teleport to a different location than the objects, or they can teleport objects without teleporting themselves.]


    Seeing that at this stage everything that is needed is avable, Li Yaoxiang did not n to continue spending. He simply saved these 20,000 points for the future, or for emergency...

 Chapter 68: Development

    Chapter 68: Development


    After allocating this harvest properly in the room, Li Yaoxiang impatiently wanted to try the new functions of the system.


    ''Astral Projection!''


    In an instant, there was a soft pop.


    Li Yaoxiang''s body sitting cross-legged suddenly copsed on the bed...


    His soul floated out of the body. The scene and feeling are very wonderful. Like in most movies and TV shows, the soul appeared in the operating room and looked at their own body surrounded by a group of doctors and nurses, and operated on.


    At the same time, when Li Yaoxiang''s soul floated out of his body, he immediately broke contact with Naruto.


    Today he seems like a wandering soul. His body is light and fluttering, cool and cold ~ So dreamy ~


    Li Yaoxiang looked down at himself in a translucent state.


    His face was obviously excited.


    In the beginning, he wished to soar across All Heavens Myriad Realms. Isn''t all kinds of strange experiences the customs of every fantasy world? Now he finally enjoys such a loss of benefits.


    His hands began to p the air constantly, looking like a bird pping its wings, letting itself fly upwards, to the ceiling. Li Yaoxiang tried to reach out and touch.


    ''Hehe! You can go through it ~.''


    Through the ceiling, through the roof, to the outdoors, flying higher and higher, almost the entire contour of Land of Fire graduallyes into sight.


    Li Yaoxiang floats in the sky, looking down at this Land-of-Fire.


    ''Veryrge! Far bigger than expected!''


    Now the entire Land-of-Fire, in his eyes, is covered with small lights. No system exnation is required. Li Yaoxiang knows what these lights are. If he''s not mistaken, each light represents a soul. And the reason he can see such a shining beauty, maybe this is the field of view of ''Shinigami'' in the state of the soul. No matter how the dead soul hides, no matter where they hide, they can''t hide from its magic eyes.


    After finally being able to experience the feeling of flying, Li Yaoxiang, of course, will not be satisfied so easily. He simply let himself go. Soaring freely in the sky, he became more and more familiar.


    His flying posture gradually changed from ''pping his wings'' into a flying style like the Dragon Ball''s "Dancing Sky". His speed was getting faster and faster!


    He tried to circle the entire Land-of-Fire, and it took less than 5 minutes toplete the flight.


    This news is really good for him!


    In the future, when he goes out to make a n, he will not have to worry about the time.


    Just as Li Yaoxiang was having a good time, a sweet, slightly tense female voice suddenly appeared in his mind: "Boss! Boss! What are you doing? Wake up, Boss!"


    Li Yaoxiang was not surprised. Because he can clearly feel that this is the voice from his main body and the voice is familiar to him.


    Not saying anything further, Li Yaoxiang flew back.


    .....


    After a while. In the room.


    Li Yaoxiang, who was originally unconscious, opened his eyes suddenly!


    Now, the female creature that swayed him at close range was so scared that she couldn''t help but let out an ''ah!'', and fell to the ground.


    Li Yaoxiang sat up slowly and expressed with ease: "What''s wrong, Takako? So anxious to find me, is something wrong?"


    This female creature was Takako. She was not tall. Roughly about 162cm/5''3. She belongs to the kind of petite and cute. But although she is so small, she obviously has all the internal organs!


    Li Yaoxiang hired her back a few years ago to take care of his business and be his secretary. Li Yaoxiang has not forgotten a wise saying before his transmigration. It is also his current principle of doing business in Naruto World.


    Simply put, as an ambitious boss, how can you not hire a capable secretary?


    There is nopetent secretary.


    I mean, if he didn''t hire a secretary, how could he have so much time to practice?


    You know, the purpose of his business was never to make money! If he is really short of money, wouldn''t it be easy for him to consume a few ckening points in the system mall and exchange for a pile of gold bars? After all, the system mall can redeem any ''items'' in the Naruto World. Of course, these vulgar objects such as gold bars are included. Of course, these include gold bars and other vulgar objects.


    So, Li Yaoxiang often told his employees: Actually, I don''t like money.


    Employees have the right to treat him as bragging beer. But this is indeed a sentence from Li Yaoxiang''s heart. After all, the main reason why he wants to expand his business is that he wants to expand his influence on Land-of-Fire! So as to achieve his true purpose, the only way is through this group of Daimyo can he better understand the true face of Land-of-Fire.


    [TL note: A daimy (English TV: Feudal Lord, literally meaning: Great Name) is the political leader of a country. A daimy is responsible for all decisions concerning their country, from alliances to the annual budget to the privileges allowed to the country''s hidden vige. Daimy are one of the single most important individuals in the entire country and hold the highest degree of political power, such that they are given special protection by the Allied Shinobi Forces during the Fourth Shinobi World War. Furthermore, the final decision in the appointing of a new Kage for their nation''s respective hidden vige can rest within the daimy''s authority. In the case of Konohagakure, the Hokage typically selects their sessor, but if the Hokage dies or is otherwise incapacitated, this responsibility moves to the daimy.]


    And in this regard, expand the n!


    As for why at the beginning, he had to start from a small restaurant instead of directly exchanging gold bars to make his business bigger, the reason is also very simple. That is the question of an identity!


    What international jokes are you making?


    His ultimate goal is to get close to the frightened group of Daimyo!


    Without a reasonable and problem-free identity, how can Li Yaoxiang approach them?


    If the group of Daimyo sent people to investigate that Li Yaoxiang, who was originally just amoner from Konoha Vige, suddenly had such a fortune came out of nowhere. Wouldn''t it make people doubt him? Will his n be implemented at that point?


    So, in the beginning, Li Yaoxiang had no choice but to use his pre-migrated knowledge to properly develop his business in Land-of-Fire.


    This is the mostmon membership system!


    First, sell arge number of Membership Cards at preferential prices and get a sum of money in advance. Then use the funds to change the business into two.


    2 to 4 rooms. 4 to 8 rooms. And so on.


    Although he didn''t make much money on the books, nearly 100 businesses have been opened! In just a few years, this has been achieved, and now in the entire Hokage countries, his name is considered a small name (that is still amazing).


    But Takako, the secretary, has worked for a few years now. She has been with Li Yaoxiang ever since Li Yaoxiang only had one restaurant. Her main job is to do everything. No matter how big or small the business is, Li Yaoxiang will leave it to her.


    While Li Yaoxiang himself acted as the hand-handling shopkeeper.


    Here, Li Yaoxiang had to be proud of his vision.


    Had it not been for Li Yaoxiang''s first nce at this Takako, he would keep the poor and unaffiliated Takako and taught her how to manage his business.


    Over the past few years, Li Yaoxiang has not been so rxed.


    Of course, during this period, this secretary had a lot of ''thoughts'' about him! But his true heart is like a rock! He only thought about darkening Naruto! How could he be shaken by this child''s personal affection thing?!


    So, in recent years, even though Takako looks so cute, he has no other thoughts. Even when dealing with Takako, he is still very strict.


    Be sure to make her a female secretary alone! Then, he can concentrate on nning his darkening cause.


    Fortunately, Takako is also regarded as arrogant in terms of business management So it saved him a lot.

 Chapter 69: Famous Spokesperson

    Chapter 69: Famous Spokesperson


    Takako, who was sitting on the ground, rubbed her mouth, rubbing her painful part, andined: "Boss, I can''t wake you up. I thought you were dead!"


    "Nonsense! Aren''t I still breathing?"


    Takako was still pouting: "I thought you wouldn''t wake up, so I wanted to use cardiopulmonary resuscitation that you taught me to rescue you~ But you suddenly widened your eyes, you scared me to death..."


    Li Yaoxiang: "..."


    Li Yaoxiang looked at Takako suspiciously. However, Li Yaoxiang did not intend to continue to struggle with this issue.


    He red at Takako angrily and coldly said: "Hurriedly looking for me; what''s the matter?"


    Takako stuck out her tongue and immediately replied: "Don''t you always invite Yuri-sama to our restaurant before? He sent someone to answer today."


    Li Yaoxiang was overjoyed!


    He had been waiting for this moment.


    This Yuri-sama, whose full name is Uehara Yuri*, is not Daimyo, but Li Yaoxiang''s 1st step to getting close to Daimyo!


    [TL note: original character(?)]


    As described in the original work, this so-called Daimyo; their identity and status, to put it inly, is the same as the princes in ancient times. They have their own territory. And every territory has its own leader. Normally, an ordinary person won''t get to know any Daimyo personally. Even being able to approach Daimyo is not possible. Even some people who live in the same town as them have never seen Daimyo at a nce.


    It can be seen that Li Yaoxiang wants to infiltrate the circle of Daimyo, the difficulty of which can be imagined. Hence why until now, Li Yaoxiang runs some high-end restaurants. These high-end restaurants are specifically to greet these Daimyo, or the second-ss rich, nobles, and so on.


    Unfortunately.


    Although sometimes, Li Yaoxiang really waited until Daimyo toe to visit his restaurant, this group of supercilious Daimyo has many guards around them. In addition to food, idler and others should not be allowed to approach Daimyo''s box.


    Daimyo will not have the leisure to meet Li Yaoxiang, the owner.


    Most of the time, after the meal is over, they just pped their farts and leave.


    Although they will not meet people casually, they still have a bridge ofmunication.


    And this Uehara friend is precisely this channel!


    It is also the goal of Li Yaoxiang''s retreat! Because he is the Daimyo''s spokesperson in this town!


    What gifts need to be given, what kind of goodness can cooperate, what benefits can be divided, etc. In short, as long as your status is not sufficient to meet Daimyo directly, then you have to pass a spokesperson like Uehara Yuri to have the opportunity to reach Daimyo.


    Don''t think that because Uehara Yuri is only Daimyo''s spokesperson, which means he is easy to deal with. With Daimyo as his backer, these spokespersons can be arrogant!


    Even he didn''t take Li Yaoxiang, a newly rich man who has risen in just a few years, seriously. To be honest, Li Yaoxiang had already sent people to invite him several times, and there was no news at all.


    The reason why Uehara Yuri was invited toe this time is probably because Li Yaoxiang gave him a list of gifts when he sent someone to ask himst time. And this list of gifts is still the one that assigns ''him'' by name and surname. Otherwise, he will still be the same as before, and Li Yaoxiang will not be a bird in his eyes.


    The reason why Li Yaoxiang has tolerated the supercilious attitude of Uehara is that for Li Yaoxiang, it was simply impossible to confirm his conjecture about Five Great Countries is correct.


    After all, he did not forget the doubts he found when he left Konoha!


    ''Why would Shisui tell him that as long as he enters the town, the people of Danzo will probably not do anything?''


    ''Why did Danzo really send no one to chase him down into the town?''


    ''Also, why is the powerful Five-Great Ninja Viges strong enough to be subject to the checks and bnces of Five Great Countries?''


    These questions were all very puzzled even before Li Yaoxiang transmigrated here. And now that he has been transmigrated to Naruto World, of course, it is impossible to ignore these problems!


    These problems are likely to be important materials for his future darkening Naruto!


    After the real side of Naruto World is known, then he can better n for the future and make sure that his ns are foolproof!


    It''s just that everything is different now!!!


    With the new function of the Astral Projection system, he can check in advance whether the real situation is exactly simr to his guess. If it is correct, it means that Uehara Yuri will be included in his field of view and is eligible to be a chess piece in his future. He can throw a ''one-time Kotoamatsukami'' directly without having to talk to him for a long time.


    If the guess is not correct, it means that Uehara has no exploit value for him at all, and it is no longer necessary to get involved with him anymore.


    "Did this Uehara say when he woulde?"


    Upon hearing this news, Li Yaoxiang quickly forgot the rude behavior of Takako just now.


    Takako rxed: "The man said it was three dayster."


    Li Yaoxiang pondered.


    ''Three days... enough.''


    "Boss, is there anything I need to prepare?"


    "No need."


    That''s right!


    With Astral Projection, Li Yaoxiang can save gifts! So there is no need to waste too much energy thinking of gifts!


    .....


    After Takako left, Li Yaoxiang did not say anything further. Instead, he closed the door, then immediately use the Astral Projection to go to Uehara''s mansion to investigate.


    He soon came to the mansion of Uehara.


    The residence of Uehara is an old building of Japanese style on a few floors. It looks antique and very luxurious. All around in ancient buildings are surrounded by walls.


    Li Yaoxiang went throughyers of walls and explored all angles and rooms in the mansion, and he found some clues! Then he actually found a device that is imprisoned by Chakra originated from Land of Snow! And based on the appearance alone, this model seems to be more advanced than Land-of-Snow equipment!


    [TL note: The Land of Snow (Yuki no Kuni) is a nation introduced in Naruto the Movie: Ninja sh in the Land of Snow, that is also briefly mentioned in the anime and in the Hiden novels. Originally, the country was a small, but peaceful ce. However, it was taken over by a tyrant, Dot Kazahana, after he and his mercenaries killed his older brother and predecessor, Ssetsu Kazahana. As the name of the country suggests, the climate is rather cold with winter covering thend in snow and ice year round. Thendscape is dominated by snowy mountains with tall ciers making parts of the coastline inessible from the sea.]


    Li Yaoxiang couldn''t helpughing when he was exploring. It seems that the facts of Five Great Countries are pretty close to his guess. Things have be more and more interesting.


    The specific situation is that after three days, the fish in Uehara Yuri is hooked, and everything belongs to Akatsuki...

 Chapter 70: Years of Doubts

    Chapter 70: Years of Doubts


    Three dayster.


    Uehara Yuri came to the high-end restaurant run by Li Yaoxiang as scheduled.


    As I said before, now that Yuri Uehara has been confirmed as his goal, of course, Li Yaoxiang will act ording to his n!


    As soon as Uehara Yuri entered the box that Li Yaoxiang had arranged for him, Li Yaoxiang did not say anything further. The ''one-time Kotoamatsukami'' was dumped directly!


    Yuri Uehara''s attitude changed suddenly. When his eyes fell on Li Yaoxiang''s face again, he immediately fell in fear and trepidation. Then, he kneeled and shouted: "Master!"


    Li Yaoxiang lightly nodded: "Well, tell me, what''s the matter with the Chakra restraint in your mansion?"


    "Master, the little one doesn''t understand what you mean..."


    To put it another way...


    "What is the rtionship between you, Daimyo and ninja? Why have I lived here for so long, and I have never seen any ninja working in town."


    Uehara Yuri realized this and respectfully said, "Master, this is an agreement between the Daimyos and Ninja Vige. The content of the agreement is that ninjas can''t do anything with the Daimyo of Five Great Countries or people around Daimyo. Nor can it be done in the territory of Five Great Countries. The price that Daimyo needs to pay is to fund Ninja Vige and entrust a certain mission regrly."


    "You are so confident that they will abide by the agreement? You know, ninjas have Genjutsu, right?"


    Uehara said: "Master, don''t worry about this. The Five Great Countries, until now, have developed various equipment to restrain ninja. For example, we have equipment that can detect the fluctuations of Chakra. Therefore, any ninja that uses Genjutsu, after a little bit of inspection, we can find clues."


    "Since you have this equipment, why doesn''t the outside world notice this?"


    Yuri Uehara: "Master, this is also one of the conditions of the agreement. To prevent illegal people from using this equipment to target ninjas, The Five Great Countries requires us not to distribute this equipment."


    After some exnation by Yuri Uehara, a lot of things suddenly became clear!


    The truth of the matter and Li Yaoxiang''s guess are pretty close! He always felt doubt and confusion while watching the series. Like in the Land-of-Snow, there are Chakra restraint devices and Chakra amplifiers. Like in the none-chakra countries, owning Chakra aircraft.


    The technological equipment of these small countries is so developed, how could the strongest Five Great Countries not have any back-ups against the Ninja Viges? Moreover, if the Five Great Countries do not have these technologies as their weapon, how can the level of science and technology in Anime develop so much in theter stage of the series? Don''t you need a research process and development process from the shallower to the deeper? All popped out of the stone so suddenly?


    But if...


    The Five Great Countries, until now, all have technology research, but before that, because of the agreement, they did not show it in the field of view of everyone...


    Then everything unreasonable in the Anime... And everything that Li Yaoxiang is facing now bes more reasonable!


    Why does Shisui say that Danzo shouldn''t do it in town? Danzo, the unscrupulous, why wouldn''t he do nothing to Li Yaoxiang?


    The strength of Ninja Viges is so powerful, so why do they sometimes take orders from the Five Great Countries?


    Very simple! Isn''t the answer already there?


    Everything, apart from Daimyo''s protection of Ninja 2, also because Five Great Countries itself has an agreement with the Ninja Viges, also has various technological equipment to guard against any mischievous ninjas!


    Of course, this is because, apart from a small group of extremists, the leadership of Five-Great Ninja Viges has no desire to control other countries at all.


    They just hope the vige can live a better life to bring peace to the vige.


    As for why, at thete stage of the series'' technologies of Five Great Countries are all shared, and the development of technologies that are beneficial to people''s livelihood like the "train" is actually well understood.


    Isn''t it just that Daimyo has realized that the technology they are proud of is not worth mentioning in front of these top experts?


    At the Infinite Tsukuyomi, they were left at the mercy of others. After that, there are so many aliens who cannot resist invading their. How can this make them proud? Won''t they have to rely on ninjas to resist?


    Once Naruto World has reached thete stage, there will be a scene of advanced technology.


    Thinking of this, Li Yaoxiang directly asked hisst doubt: "How is the rtionship between the Daimyos and Ninja Vige? How much do you know?"


    In fact, Li Yaoxiang discovered that Naruto World had a strange phenomenon. That is, Five-Great Ninja Viges, or most of the goals of ninja, including Akatsuki, can be said to be the same. They only want peace. But since everyone wants peace, what was the fuse that led to the Civil War in Five-Great Ninja Viges? Why did it trigger Shinobi World War so many times?


    Now Li Yaoxiang suspects that these so-called Daimyo may trigger the constant civil war in Five-Great Ninja Viges! After all, based on the technology they developed, we can actually see some clues.


    All for Chakra service! Or for Chakra or ninja!


    If his guess is correct ...


    Then the darkening materials in the future will definitely be these Daimyo ...


    Uehara Yuri: "Uh... sorry, Master. The rtionship between Daimyos and Ninja Viges, I really don''t know. Daimyo has never mentioned this before me. But I know that Daimyo will meet them once every period of time. So maybe at that party, Master, you can get the news you want."


    Li Yaoxiang asked again: "When?"


    "I''m sorry, Master. I can''t be sure. But the Daimyo will notify me in advance of every meeting. Then I will apany Daimyo to the meeting ce." Uehara said.


    "Then... if you know the exact time, remember to send someone to notify me immediately."


    "Yes! Master!"


    ''For the connection between Five Great Countries and Five-Great Ninja Viges, I finally have some clues. Next, is just waiting for this so-called Daimyo party, and then see what happens when the timees...''


    After the event, Uehara Yuri returned to his mansion casually.


    Li Yaoxiang also continued his increasing-strength training, but he didn''t have to train long, and he soon captured an interesting scene through the crystal ball!


    It seems that both Naruto and Danzo can''t bear being lonely anymore...

 Chapter 71: Danzos Actions

    Chapter 71: Danzo''s Actions


    Hokage Residence, in Conference Hall.


    Since the Uchiha n Downfall incident passed, Sarutobi Hiruzen and the others finally appeased the emotions of the Great n andmoner. Uchiha Itachi is THE only problem in the vige.


    Now there is finally time to gather together to discuss the follow-up matters of this incident.


    Mitokado Homura reported: "The area I am in charge of is no problem. However, the vigers have believed that Itachi is the perpetrator who killed the whole n."


    Utatane Koharu: "I have no problem here. Hiruzen, there is no problem with other ns, right?"


    "Rx. Other ns will have no opinion on this matter." Sarutobi Hiruzen spitted out a cigarette with a sad expression as if remembering something. He turned his head towards Danzo, "Yes, Uchiha n''s Inheritance, and what about the corpses? After all, they also made a lot of contributions to Konoha. Even if they are not, we must bury them."


    Danzo nced at him: "Inheritance has been deposited in the Ninjutsu room. As for the corpse... just leave it to me. I will handle this matter."


    Danzo did not allow Sarutobi Hiruzen to continue speaking. Instead, he changed the topic directly to Naruto. After all, after thest probe, Naruto hated him. If he were not busy dealing with the problem of ''corpse'', he would have wanted to raise the hidden troubles about Naruto with the other three elders.


    "Now Uchiha''s hidden trouble has finally been resolved for the vige. Hiruzen, should the demon fox be handed over to Root next? The demon fox''s behavior during this time is really unusual. He recently learned Rasengan and Shadow Clone Jutsu. We temporarily regarded it as a Ninjutsu that Minato left to him. Can it be that convenient? How can he cook then? Who taught him? As far as I know, neither Minato nor Kushina is as skilled as Naruto in cooking now! And a while ago, he also specifically inquired about Land-of-Whirlpools and Hatake Sakumo. This is no longer a coincidence. It can be exined clearly!"


    What Danzo said; in fact, not only a few people in the Conference Hall know. Even the vigers in the vige have already done many wonders.


    After all, Naruto went to the grocery market to buy vegetables, asked people about Hatake Sakumo, and asked Land-of-Whirlpools, but did not hide it from everyone. However, the vigers did not think too muchpared to the several old foxes in the Conference Hall.


    They treated Naruto''s inquiries as being a kid''s curiosity.


    After listening to Danzo''s exnation, Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu, there was no objection from them this time. They all simultaneously looked towards him, to this old close friend who has not performed well recently, waiting for him to give a wise reply.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen looked at the three people with dissatisfaction: "The vige''s strength is reduced significantly. There is also an ''Akatsuki'' watching us like a tiger watching their prey. Can''t you stop this for now? But, moreover, no matter how strange Naruto did, as long as he was not hostile to the vige, and as long as he has the heart of guarding the bondage and the heart of the vige, won''t it not matter?"


    "Hiruzen! Are you getting older and more confused? It''s only at this time that you be soft-hearted? It is because the vige''s strength is now seriously damaged, so we should kill all dangerous signs! Otherwise, if something goes wrong, who is responsible?! Can the vige still afford it?!"Shimura Danzo retorted.


    Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu remained silent.


    Silence also means that they default Danzo''s statement.


    But he was so stubborn that he didn''t want to be in this situation anymore. So Sarutobi Hiruzen is destined to disappoint the three people again.


    He waved his hand: "Okay, okay. Naruto''s matter... it''s decided. I will send someone to look after him. You don''t have to intervene."


    The three people nce at each other silently. Next, they did not continue to discuss Naruto''s topic.


    ...


    End of the meeting.


    Shortly after Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu stepped out of Hokage Residence, they were intercepted by Root''s ninja: "Danzo-sama. Please."


    The two looked at each other. They did not refuse.


    .....


    After a while, they came to a secret room.


    Danzo was the only one in the secret room.


    The two did not intend to stay for a long time and went straight in.


    "Danzo, is there anything you couldn''t say just now?"


    Shimura Danzo: "Everyone has known each other for so many years. I won''t be oblivious to you. What do you think about the demon fox?"


    Mitokado Homura: "If you have any thoughts, just talk about it. We don''t mind talking to you."


    Danzo sneered.


    Some disdain these two disagreeable friends.


    "I''ll tell you frankly. After the Uchiha n Downfall, I met the demon fox once that day. I''m pretty sure he hates me!" Seeing two who seem not to be concerned, Danzo continued: "Oh, this period of time, I never once took action against that demon fox. You both know it best! But even if I didn''t take action against him, he could still hate me? That... You will not be naive thinking that he only hates me because of my appearance, will you? Although I don''t know why the demon fox suddenly inquired about Land-of-Whirlpools and things about Hatake Sakumo, but I can be sure that the reason why he hates me at this time is definitely rted to these things! Do you really think you can get rid of these things? Or do you think that if one day, when the demon fox really attacks me, no one will know what we have done?"


    The faces of Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu can''t help but look a littleplicated.


    How could they not understand what Danzo said?


    They kept silent and did not refute Danzo''s proposal. Just to wait for Danzo to take action to solve this problem.


    Now that Danzo has spoken so clearly, there is nothing to hide.


    Mitokado Homura: "What are your ns?"


    Utatane Koharu: "Obviously, Hiruzen is determined this time to protect the demon fox. If you openly disobey Hiruzen''s instructions, then I''m sorry. The two of us can''t apany you to fool around. After all, Hiruzen is also a shadow in the vige. If someone knows of our internal discord, it will not be good for you, me, or the vige. "


    "You can rest assured. You don''t need to disobey his orders. Didn''t Hiruzen often say that the demon fox is not hostile to the vige? Well! I will let Hiruzen feel the hostility of the demon fox! And you just need to stand by my side at the critical moment!"


    Shimura Danzo solemnly vowed.


    Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu nced at each other.


    involuntarily unison: "What are you going to do?"


    Danzo said with a sneer: "Heh, ''bond'' has always been a very good tool, isn''t it?"


    After hearing this sentence, the two turned around and left the secret room, not saying anything further.


    The same is the tacit understanding of old friends. If you don''t refuse, refute, or stop, that means you agree!


    It''s just that they don''t want to say this kind of unjust thing from their mouths...

 Chapter 72: Unbearable, Showdown

    Chapter 72: Unbearable, Showdown


    A few dayster.


    Uchiha n Residence, in the courtyard.


    From the moment when Li Yaoxiang''s concentration shifted back to his main body, the time passed not too long. And in this period of time, in addition to eating and sleeping, Sasuke still exercises.


    In the courtyard at the moment, They were fighting.


    Whether it is mud, walls, or houses, almost nothing is untouched


    This situation is not yet known how long it willst Because at this moment, Sasuke and Naruto were still sparring.


    The entire courtyard is now full of Multi Shadow Clone that Naruto has just learned from Li Yaoxiang. Unfortunately, these clones are not like the original work. Instead, one after another rushed up and attacked Sasuke.


    In this situation, the Shadow Clone will not only be weaker than Naruto''s main body except that it will disappear after being attacked.


    Therefore, there is already a Shadow Clone who is proficient in basic body arts. Thus, even if it is the same as Rasengan, Shadow Clone, and Sasuke with Three-Jade Sharingan turned on, it will not worsen.


    Having the Sharingan, Sasuke clearly saw the movements of Naruto''s body and the shadow clone carefully. There is nothing he can do with Naruto''s crowded tactics. It angered him.


    He hates himself for being weak.


    It doesn''t matter how much. Naruto just keeps hitting, keeps hitting.


    His body was bruised. There is not much left in Chakra.


    Naruto, who was watching from a distance, felt even more guilty about this. He wanted to deliberately release the water and let Sasuke win once. But he knows Sasuke''s character very well. If Sasuke knows he was holding back, that means he does not respect Sasuke. So Sasuke would not forgive him.


    He wanted to tell Sasuke aloud: Don''t do this anymore! The truth is not what you think! In fact, you don''t need to hate your big brother at all! Everything he did is just to protect you!


    But this can only be buried in the bottom of his heart. Because he knew that big brother was right. If Sasuke understood the truth, it would only hurt him...


    ....


    Sasuke was finally tired and lying on the ground.


    He thumped on the ground to vent and resented: "Damn it! Why? Why am I so weak! Obviously, I''ve opened the Sharingan. If Naruto gets stronger, of course, I will too. So why can''t I even win against Naruto?!"


    Naruto''s Shadow Clone, who wanted to rush up, stopped here.


    Immediately afterwards, all Shadow Clone in the courtyard turned into a white smoke after one another and dissipated between Heaven and Earth.


    Naruto''s main body came to Sasuke with a sad face: "Sasuke, that''s enough. Today''s spar will end here."


    In Sasuke''s field of view, he first saw Naruto''s shoes. Then, he slowly lifted his head. What he saw was Naruto which was unscathed and still had physical strength.


    He didn''t mean to me himself anymore. Seeing Naruto''s an instant, he became extremely excited and quickly stood up and came to Naruto.


    Holding Naruto''s arms in both hands and shaking: "Naruto, you tell me. You tell me, do you still have a method to be stronger? Who is the big brother you said?"


    Naruto was shocked!


    But his emotions quickly calmed down again. Naruto was not surprised by Sasuke''s sudden question about Li Yaoxiang. After all, since this period of time, he did not miss the word "big brother".


    But the problem is that usually, Sasuke, even if he has doubts in his heart, will not say it in person. Perhaps, because it has been too much hit recently, Sasuke was unable to bear and want to know the truth...


    But even if the reason is understood, Naruto still doesn''t know how to answer Sasuke''s question. So he can only be embarrassed and keep silent on Li Yaoxiang''s affairs.


    Seeing this, Sasuke slowly released Naruto''s arms, "Forget it... don''t talk if you don''t want to say... I won''t me you..."


    And it is at this time, two masked Root ninjas came to the courtyard and coldly said: "Uchiha Sasuke, let''s go with us. We are here to inform you that this ce has been recovered by the Vige. Next will take you to a new ce!"


    Sasuke froze.


    ''Is it gone?''


    ''Is everything gone?''


    ''Parents are gone...''


    ''n is gone...''


    ''Now I can''t even keep my own home...''


    Naruto standing aside, hearing this, became angry. He stepped forward and cursed: "Damn it! What do you mean?! This originally belonged to Sasuke! Why are you reiming his home!"


    No matter what Naruto used, they indifferently said: "This is the Vige''smand. We just follow the instructions."


    ''Damn it! Another instruction! The Vige again! Why should you treat him like this after everything he went through!''


    "Fine! You said themand, right?! I''m going to ask the Third-Kage old fogey now about who gave themand!" After a series of insults, Naruto rushed towards Hokage Residence.


    And he kept talking to himself in his mind.


    ''Big brother! Don''t persuade me! Please don''t stop me! I must ask the old man clearly this time!''


    He did not get a response from Li Yaoxiang. But even if Li Yaoxiang responded, if Li Yaoxiang wanted to stop him, he did not intend to listen to Li Yaoxiang''s opinion this time.


    It''s been too long to hold his heart!


    But what Naruto didn''t know was that after he had just left, the two Root Ninjas, whose faces were hidden under the mask, smiled with a sneaky smile.


    As for whether Sasuke left with them, they didn''t really care.


    .....


    At the same time, Li Yaoxiang, who smiled at the whole process, was smiling. He waited for this moment! He had been waiting too long!


    Shimura Danzo''s actions finally ignited Naruto''s unstoppable fuse!


    ...


    Not much time, Naruto ran to the Hokage Residence at a limitless speed.


    It''s weird. Today, Naruto was not blocked at all from going to Hokage Residence.


    Along the way, Naruto can be described as unimpeded.


    Blinded by anger, he didn''t even notice these details along the way. And these details are exactly what Shimura Danzo hasid out for him.


    Pa!


    Despair!


    Soon, the door of the Hokage room was opened!


    Naruto walked angrily to Sarutobi Hiruzen, who reviewed the documents, and angrily asked, "Old fogey! I ask you! Why do you treat Sasuke like this?!"

 Chapter 73: The Treacherous Trick Succeeds

    Chapter 73: The Treacherous Trick Seeds


    Sarutobi Hiruzen, who was busy approving the paper, was a little puzzled. Why didn''t anyonee to tell him about Naruto''s arrival? But he didn''t care too much. What he cares about is Naruto''s attitude.... And what Naruto said in his mouth.


    "Naruto, what''s going on? What are you talking about? How do I treat Sasuke?" Sarutobi Hiruzen wondered.


    Hearing Sarutobi Hiruzen refused to admit. Naruto is even angrier!


    "You...! You...!" Immediately he changed his words: "Sasuke has just encountered such a thing, why do you even send someone to snatch his home?!"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen suddenly realized what Naruto said was about this matter.


    Only he felt strange.


    This matter is obviously good for Sasuke?


    His intention was to return Sasuke to the prosperous area of the vige to live, rather than staying alone in that remote ce. But howe this is said to Naruto, but it seems to have misunderstood his meaning?


    Of course, Sarutobi Hiruzen does not stare at the crystal ball for 24 hours. So, he didn''t know at all that Danzo sent someone to distort his meaning. This caused a misunderstanding between him and Naruto.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen said: "Naruto, you misunderstand? I am worried that it would be unsafe for Sasuke to live alone in such a remote ce. That''s why he was ordered to move to a better area. So how is it my fault when it gets into your mouth?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s exnation made Naruto stop talking on the spot.


    In fact, when the Root ninjas told him the situation just now, he was blinded by his anger, which made him unable to know whether this matter was good or bad for Sasuke.


    But since he hade here. It is not so easy to forget!


    Naruto will just throw these out! Break the sand table and ask!


    "Then... that... what about the Land-of-Whirlpools?! Why did my mother''s n send support when the vige is in trouble, yet when other viges attack the Land-of-Whirlpools, the vige just stands by? The big country! The great n! Did nothing at all! What exnation do you have?!"


    Hearing Naruto''s words, Sarutobi Hiruzen''s face sank in the hall.


    Thest thing he wanted was finally happening.


    But to avoid Naruto''s greater misunderstanding of the vige or hostility to the vige, Sarutobi Hiruzen still pretended to express a sad expression: "Hey~ Naruto... Some things are not as simple as you seem... You didn''t understand the situation at the time. In fact, we also want to send people to rescue. How can the enemy who attacked the Land-of-Whirlpools not know our intentions? They have already arranged for an ambush on our way to Land-of-Whirlpools. At that time, the vige experienced a war not long ago. We simply do not have enough troops to support it. When the vige slowed down and finally has enough troops to support it, it''s toote..."


    He thought that as soon as Naruto heard his wless exnation, Naruto would stop. But Naruto is angrier after hearing hisment!


    ''Isn''t this exactly the same as what the big brother said?!''


    ''The old fogey will definitely say that vige has gone through a big battle and cannot support! Really! The big brother was right! The old fogey really says so!''


    Naruto pressed his anger slightly and asked again: "That''s good, Old fogey! Then I ask you, what is Will of Fire? What does it mean to you?"


    Naruto''s attitude. Naruto''s question. It made Sarutobi Hiruzen''s heart feel even worse. It''s just that he didn''t show it to his face.


    Still looking like a kind great-grandpa, he exined very patiently: "Will of Fire is the idea that every generation of vige Hokage, every ninja, every viger should inherit. No matter how hard it is, how difficult the road is. The older generation will protect you and create a better future for the younger generation. Naruto, your father, is the best example. Although he died, he died guarding most of the vige and you. I believe that if Minato is alive, you will inherit this Will."


    Hearing Sarutobi Hiruzen mentioning his father, Naruto felt even more fierce for no reason! Does my face even mention my father? So now I know my father has sacrificed for the vige? What were you doing then?! Where were you when I was bullied?!


    The anger filled Naruto''s head. As a result, he was not so lucid.


    Speaking of things without going through the brain. "Okay-- the Will of Fire-- why do I see thingspletely different from the Will of Fire in your mouth?! Why did Kakashi''s father die?! Why did Hinata''s uncle die?! You keep on saying that the older generation sacrifices themselves to protect the new generation of the vige. Why did I see that all the young generation die(the genocide)?! What do you have to say?!


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s kind smile gradually copsed. The tone andplexion were obviously sad. He was sad about the next thing. Maybe he couldn''t stop it anymore: "Naruto, can you tell me... who told you these things? Why did you go specially? Follow these things? "


    Naruto couldn''t hear it, nor saw the change in Sarutobi Hiruzen''s attitude.


    Burning in anger, he also wanted to dump him directly, "Don''t care how I know!"


    But he didn''t wait for him to speak out the catharsis. Sarutobi Hiruzen''s next words stopped Naruto as a whole! "Hey~" Sarutobi Hiruzen sighed, "Is it your big brother?"


    That''s right!


    Sasuke discovered Naruto''s anomaly. And the Anbu, who monitored Naruto''s every move, how could they not find it?


    The reason why Sarutobi Hiruzen didn''t pursue it was that he really didn''t want to reproduce the incident. Over the years, his own decisions and the actions of the others have caused countless tragedies in the vige. He didn''t know if it''s right or wrong. He really didn''t want to go on like this.


    Naruto, who was resolute, made Hiruzen unable to turn this problem to a blind eye.


    If he didn''t want Naruto to be in trouble, he had to understand the cause of the matter and solve the problem as soon as possible.


    Naruto was dumbfounded. Didn''t know how to answer. He only opened his mouth and didn''t understand what to say.


    At this time, Shimura Danzo, together with Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu, happened to walk into the Hokage room. The moment when Sarutobi Hizen saw these friends, he knew exactly what was going on.


    Sure enough, what Shimura Danzo said next did not meet his expectations: "Hiruzen, have nothing to say now? Or do you really want to ignore the safety of the vige?"


    Naruto looked at the group of people in a daze. He didn''t know what they were talking about. Naruto saw Third-Kage old fogey''s expression, aplicated look, and then turned his head to stop looking at him.


    Immediately afterward, there were two masked ninjas who gave Naruto to supported.


    Naruto reacted and then shouted: "Let go! What are you doing?! What do you want to do?"

 Chapter 74: Familiar People, Unfamiliar Faces

    Chapter 74: Familiar People, Unfamiliar Faces


    "Let go of me! You guys let me go!!"


    Naruto''s cry rang through Hokage Residence.


    He wanted to make a seal, but his hands and palms were controlled again. The only thing he can do is try his best to shake them up and get rid of the two root ninjas. But no matter how hard he struggled, he couldn''t get rid of the destiny being taken away by others.


    His power is not worth mentioning in front of those two Root Ninjas.


    Danzo did not intend to stun him or shut his mouth.


    Because next, Danzo still has his n in it.


    Naruto was tantly walked out of Hokage Residence.


    His noise; along the way attracted everyone''s attention.


    When they saw that the person being ''arrested'' was the son of Fourth-Kage, Uzumaki Naruto, everyone was even more surprised! They did not understand why the ninjas would arrest Naruto for no reason.


    ''Isn''t he the son of a hero?''


    ''Also, isn''t Naruto the genius of Konoha''s new generation?''


    ''Why should he be treated like this?''


    ''And the leader is Danzo-sama? What the hell is this all about?''


    Over the past few years, Naruto''s impression in everyone''s mind has gradually improved. As a result, although everyone did not dare to stop them, they also had the idea of tailing. Try to see if the ninjas can let Naruto go or give them a statement.


    And with more and more onlookers, Shimura Danzo and the two Root Ninjas behind him also stopped.


    Naruto saw the familiar face of each and every one. His face is overjoyed!


    There are his friends in it.


    There are his neighbours he knows well.


    There were also people who apologized to him that year.


    Seeing this, Naruto immediately yelled: "Save me! Everyone, save me! They caught me indiscriminately! They''re not good people--!"


    Shimura Danzo nced towards the two Root ninjas at the rear.


    The two Root ninjas knew.


    Immediately, Naruto was brought to Shimura Danzo''s side and appeared in front of everyone.


    Shimura Danzo whispered in Naruto''s ear at this time: "Uzumaki Naruto, right? Although I don''t understand why you hated me at the time, but that is no longer important. As long as you fall into my hands, it is impossible for you to keep any secrets in front of me. Also, isn''t your idea too naive? You really think that if you are so loud and noisy, then everyone will dash on bravely with no thought of personal safety to save you? Today, let me give you a good lesson and recognize the reality."


    After that, Shimura Danzo turned his head and announced to the crowd: "Everyone listen! We detected in the seal of the demon fox, there are signs of an outbreak! Starting today, no one will be allowed to approach him! Understand?"


    Everyone immediately burst into an uproar.


    Naruto was shocked by Shimura Danzo''s words.


    He was awakened by the noise of the vigers and recovered. He quickly yelled and retorted: "No! Not like this! The seal has no problem at all! He''s lying to you! He''s lying to you!! Don''t listen to him!"


    But this rebuttal was just shouted out.


    In Naruto''s vision, there was a scene he will never forget!


    The friendly ssmate was dragged behind by his parents and looked at him with fear.


    The enthusiastic neighbourhood, the face that should have been familiar, has be strange.


    The neighbour who met day and night showed a sigh of relief as if Naruto being arrested in advance is great.


    At that time, the honest vigers who each and everyone apologized to him changed their faces!


    No one helped him!


    Not even one!


    Shimura Danzo, who stood aside from the cold eye of a bystander, was not surprised by this scene in front of him as if he had expected it.


    In recent years, everyone''s attitude towards Naruto has gradually be friendly.


    Isn''t it because the time has passed for too long, coupled with the fact that no idents have urred in these years, and the recognition of Naruto''s strength that everyone has almost forgotten that Naruto is a monster?


    ''Hehe.''


    ''The vigers are like this in reality.''


    ''They will be grateful to Naruto, the son of benefactor. At the same time, they will do their best to treat Naruto and try to make up for everything that they have done before.''


    ''But the big premise of ''repaying grace'' is that the demon fox inside Naruto must not be berserk!''


    And the reason why Shimura Danzo arrested Naruto in public now, announced the fake news in public, just to make him realize the cruel scene in front of him!


    Only in this way, Naruto, who is in the limelight, suddenly disappears in the vige so that it will not arouse everyone''s curiosity and disputes!


    Only in this way will Naruto understand the reality! Complete despair for everyone!


    Then Naruto would not have the hope that ''maybe someone can save him''! Then the only thing Naruto can rely on next is Shimura Danzo!


    This is Shimura Danzo''s first gift to Naruto!


    It is also the 1st step where Shimura Danzo cultivated Naruto into a ''qualified Jinchuriki''!


    Of course, it is impossible for Shimura Danzo to have not considered his method of directly changing the Tail Beast''s container. But he knew that the unstable factor would be too much.


    After all, Naruto''s experience and treatment have been known to everyone in the entire vige over the years, not to mention finding a suitable container in the vige. Will it offend some people or n again, thus creating a new unstable factor.


    Even if he was really lucky, he was sessfully found.


    And sessfully fooling this lucky person will erase the ego without causing new hatred.


    But... What if there is a slight mistake in the process of printing, which leads to failure?


    How should he do? Is it necessary to reproduce Demon Fox Incident again and again? What about the foreign enemies?


    Although each Great Ninja Vige also has a lot of Tailed Beast berserk experience, such as Suna Vige, Kumo Vige, etc., but if the Konoha''s Kyuubi berserk, again and again, won''t each Great Ninja Vige not know that there is something wrong with Konoha''s Kyuubi?


    What are you waiting for if you don''t take advantage of it?


    Therefore, Shimura Danzo would not choose to rece the container if he had to.


    Shimura Danzo sees that the goal has been achieved. So, he ordered two Root Ninjas to continue their departure and walk towards the Root base.


    Naruto, whose heart was badly hurt, buzzed in his mind.


    He forgot to struggle, forgot to cry.


    He just stayed there for a while and was very being held left by two Root Ninjas.


    While leaving, Naruto even heard some familiar voices of the past, cheering for Shimura Danzo.


    "Danzo-sama, good work. If you weren''t here, we would be in danger."


    "Yeah, Danzo-sama has worked hard."


    Every sentence listened to Naruto''s ears as if being struck by lightning. He just felt more ufortable...


    ''Is this... reality?''

 Chapter 75: No Longer Hope for the Village

    Chapter 75: No Longer Hope for the Vige


    Root base.


    It is still in Konoha Vige, but at the underground of a secret ce.


    All around is covered with huge roots. The air is still filled with a thick humid smell of mud.


    Naruto didn''t know how long it has been. The two root ninjas held Naruto and kept turning left and right before they came here. Along the way, Naruto did not resist, shout, or struggle.


    His eyes are godless.


    He just let others walk him.


    In this sluggish situation, until two root ninjas carried him to the ce where the roots detained the prisoner, Naruto was awakened by the howling of ghosts and wolves from cell to cell.


    Realizing that someone is passing by, the "creatures" held in the cell will be so excited that they will stretch out their palms and try to catch the iing person.


    "Please, I can''t take it anymore! Let me go! Let me go!"


    "Hu hu huu~ I said it! I said everything! You guys let me out soon!"


    There are male and female voices.


    Naruto, who was only 7 years old, has never seen such a scene. He was scared on the spot, and his face was pale and pale, and he no longer had the optimistic thoughts of the past.


    ..


    Not long, the two Root ninjas, carrying Naruto, came to a cell. They opened the cell and threw Naruto in, and the cell was closed again.


    Naruto ignored the wound caused by being thrown to the ground and mmed into the only venttion ce at the cell door. It is the kind of hole used to deliver food under the door.


    Naruto leaned down and tilted his head, looking towards the root ninja outside the hole as much as possible: "Hey! What do you want? What do you want?! Let me go!"


    Unfortunately, thest thing Naruto saw was just the ankle where two Root ninjas left.


    The footsteps gradually get further apart. It disappearedpletely until the end.


    Breathing the damp air and feeling the cold mud, Uzumaki Naruto, who has always been lively, cheerful, and optimistic, has to ept the facts in front of him.


    His mood copsed instantly.


    The whole person sat down paralyzed, leaning against the door of the cell.


    ''Finished...''


    ''It''s really over...''


    ''Where is this ce? Why did they bring me here?''


    ''Why does the vige be like this?''


    ''Why did everyone be so strange?''


    The tears in Naruto''s eyes were unable to bear, but he couldn''t make a cry.


    To have everything and then lose everything again.


    Naruto has been hit hard this time as never before! In the original work, Naruto never got what he wanted, so when Iruka gave him a little favour, he asked him to treat him ramen. Iruka only said a few words in agreement with him, and he was moved to weeping bitter tears. He treated Iruka like his rtives.


    Even in the vige, there are still many people who treat him as a monster, but after so many years, he is used to it, isn''t he?


    But what about this life?


    Naruto understood his identity in this life! He is Fourth-Hokage''s son. Namikaze Minato''s son! He is the son of a hero!


    After the news became public, the vigers treated him better and better. He has a group of students who agree with him. He has a good life that he had dreamed of in the past. But when he walked to the most peak in his life, and everything was so beautiful, now he was told that everything in front of him was fake?


    ''It turns out that the students, neighborhoods, and neighbors who talk andugh at me every day are all fake?''


    The more he thinks about it, the more Naruto feels that this world is terrifying. This world is strange. This is not the world in his imagination.


    At this time, he finally became unable to bear and muttered to himself: "Why... why do you do this to me? What am I doing wrong? Father... father... what are you desperately guarding?"


    At this moment, Li Yaoxiang''s voice finally appeared in Naruto''s mind: "When you make this choice, you should expect such a result, right? The vige has never been kind to you for a moment. Until now, you are deceiving yourself, aren''t you?"


    Naruto was shocked. Then there was a wry smile.


    ''Yup--.''


    ''Big brother is right.''


    ''This so-called benevolence, until now, is just a fantasy.''


    ''This long-awaited Will of Fire has always been my own fantasy.''


    ''I don''t want to believe it.''


    ''Self-deception.''


    ''Now such a result, who''s to me?''


    Thinking of this, Naruto whole body sat there weakly. Looking up towards the dark wall in the cell, a kind of expression appears, as if to the vige, no longer expressing any hope...


    ...


    Li Yaoxiang turned his attention to the system interface in his mind.


    [Host: Li Yaoxiang


    Darkening Target: Uzumaki Naruto


    Target Soul: 12/40


    Darkening Degree: 37%


    Darkening Value: 153,950


    Mall: Omitted]


    The degree of darkening increased from 25% to 37%.


    The harvest this time was not beyond Li Yaoxiang''s expectations. It turned out to be like his previous conjecture. Naruto suffered more damage this time as a person involved than when he was a bystander.


    Although it was the same as when Sasuke was finalizing the n, it increased the darkening degree by 12%.


    But Li Yaoxiang can clearly feel that Naruto has been hit harder this time than any other time.


    The reason why the system only gives 12% is probably that it has a great rtionship with Naruto''s soul value, which has increased by 2 points.


    As for the darkening point...


    Of the 20,000 remainingst time, 7,000 were spent on Yuri Uehara. 50 is the cost of Astral Projection that night.


    Unlike 100,000 darkening points awarded by 12%st time, although this time it is also 12%, the system has rewarded 140,000 darkening points.


    He nced at the more than 150,000 ckened spots.


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t mean to use it now.


    After all, judging from the strength of his body, as long as there''s no ident, there shouldn''t be any major problems with self-protection in Naruto World. Coupled with the current ckening point, the figure of 400,000 is not far away.


    Instead of increasing such a little bit of strength every time.


    Wouldn''t it be better to save enough to 400,000 points and directly exchange for Rinnegan or Tensegan to be a party expert?


    Of course, the premise of saving is that in theyout of darkening, there is really no need to use darkening points.


    Otherwise, he would not hesitate when it was time to use it.


    ...


    Exited the system interface. The concentration returns to Naruto in reality.


    Today''s Naruto has the look of unlovable life.


    Li Yaoxiang did not rush one step further of darkening him. Because in his n, if there is no ident, it will not be long before Naruto''s darkening degree should have a chance to be increased. After all, now he is imprisoned.


    Danzo has nned a series of programs for him that he hasn''t experienced yet!


    When he personally experienced a series of projects arranged for him by the vige, when the timees, it was Li Yaoxiang''s debut again...

 Chapter 76: There Will Be Dispute

    Chapter 76: There Will Be Dispute


    Root base.


    Shimura Danzo sat on the throne.


    The two Root Ninjas who had put Naruto into the cell just now came to report to him: "Lord Danzo, Uzumaki Naruto has been detained in cell 78."


    Shimura Danzo gave an ''um'' sound and immediately signalled the two Root Ninjas to leave.


    After not much time, a fit of coughing sound came from the darkness.


    "Cough, cough, cough, cough!" A root ninja wearing a mask came.


    Hearing this cough, Shimura Danzo frowned first and then quickly recovered his natural look, waiting for the coughing root ninja to report his long-awaited news.


    "Cough, cough, cough! Lord Danzo, Uchiha Itachi has been informed to Orochimaru ording to your statement." The coughing ninja reports.


    Shimura Danzo said: "Well, how did he react?"


    "Cough, cough, cough! I am small and ipetent. I can''t see any reaction on the surface of Orochimaru."


    Shimura Danzo looking thoughtful and immediately replied: "This is not to me you. Orochimaru is a person who is good at hiding himself. It is normal to not see through What about the transnt? Has he given the exact time?"


    "Cough, cough, cough! Orochimaru said, you can bring Sharingan to him at any time."


    No matter how happy and angry Shimura Danzo was when he heard this, his pupils could not help but widen a little, betraying his true feelings at the moment.


    Only, this excitement just started.


    He was soon disturbed by the irritable coughing sound.


    "What''s wrong with your body? Why hasn''t it improved after so long?"


    "Many thanks Lord Danzo for your concern. As long as this subordinate take more rest, I should be fine."


    Shimura Danzo''s inquiry, of course, was not because he cared about the coughing ninja. It is impossible for him to care about the physical condition of a subordinate. What he cares about is that if the cough ninja''s physical condition continues to get worse. Perhaps it will affect some of his important arrangements.


    After all, in the past few years, he has had many missions carried out by his powerful assistant. A few years ago, he reported Li Yaoxiang''s departure from the vige and arranged the sneak attacker, who was also the right assistant.


    To be safe, Shimura Danzo had no choice but to say impatiently: "Then put down the mission you have on hand. Cultivate the aspects of Jinchuriki and leave it to you."


    "Cough, cough, cough. Yes! Lord Danzo."


    After talking, the coughing ninja faded away.


    Shimura Danzo summoned another capable assistant.


    Starting arranging matters about ''transnt''.


    After nning for so long, he would be lying if he said he''s not impatient. At this moment, what he attaches the most importance to is the transntation of Sharingan.


    As for Naruto Uzumaki...


    How to cultivate a ''qualified'' ninja, the Root already has aplete set of processes.


    He doesn''t need to do it himself.


    As long as it appears at the right moment, that''s all.


    ...


    Time flies.


    7... days... after.


    A box in the Hyuga n station.


    There are two guards standing guard outside the box.


    At the moment, the Japanese style sliding door of thepartment opened abruptly! The two guards immediately blocked the door with their bodies: "Eldest Young Lady, Lord n Leader has orders, so don''t run around randomly during this period of time. Please also Eldest Young Lady, don''t embarrass us."


    Hinata stared at the two guards with anger!


    The news of Naruto''s arrest, even if Hyuga Hiashi concealed it, she still knew.


    Now that she has been imprisoned for several days, she finally bes unable to bear and wants to rise to resist! She was worried that something would happen to Naruto.


    In the original work, she seemed cowardly, but when seeing her younger sister, Hanabi, was pierced by Otsutsuki Toneri, she would fight hard to resist.


    Not to mention now.


    Today, because of Naruto, she is no longer as weak as in original work.


    In the old days, there was no discernible difference. But when someone really wants to touch her Naruto''s inverse scale, her tough side will be revealed immediately. Just like now.


    "You guys get out of here! I want to get out!"


    The two guards nced at each other, both showing a helpless expression. Hyuga Hiashi is the current Main House n Leader, and this one is the sessor of the Main House. No matter who they offend, it is them who suffer in the end.


    Seeing them like this, the breathless Hinata simply chose to break through!


    She just wanted to squeeze out a path between two people.


    "Eldest Young Lady, don''t do this."


    "Please don''t make it difficult for us..."


    Seeing that she couldn''t squeeze out, Hinata took a step back and condensed Chakra on the palm of her hand. She hit the two guards back with one blow and then rushed out.


    But, before she rushed out, a man appeared in front of her, blocking her way.


    "Where do you want to go?! Didn''t I tell you that you can''t go out during this period of time?! You''re not even listening to my words now?!" Hyuga Hiashi sternlyined.


    Hinata was taken aback by the solemn father. Her imposing-manner became much weaker. But she still clenched her teeth and retorted: "Naruto was arrested! If you won''t help, then I will save him myself!"


    Yes.


    After learning that Naruto was arrested, Hinata''s first reaction was to ask for help at home. It''s just that instead of getting the result she wanted, she was ordered to stay home by Hyuga Hiashi.


    "Did I not tell you? You are the Eldest Young Lady of Main House. You should consider Hyuga n! Uzumaki Naruto is not something we can do! You will only hurt yourself if you do it alone! Harming the n!" Hyuga Hiashi red at the two guards suddenly: "From now on, if there''s no order from me, do not let Eldest Young Lady to step out of the door! The next time this happens, you are the only one responsible!"


    They immediately straightened the body andplied in unison, "Yes!"


    Then he quickly caught Hinata back and throw her into the box again.


    After listening to n Leader Hyuga Hiashi''s remarks, they also realized the seriousness of this matter, so their attitude towards Hinata will not be soft-hearted anymore!


    The Japanese style sliding door was closed fiercely.


    Feeling ipetent.


    Feeling helpless.


    She was full of sadness and helplessness, biting her red lips tightly. Her eyes were full of tears. She stood up slowly.


    Byakugan opened.


    She turned her head. Her pair of Byakugan saw through everything. Although the distance of the field of view is limited, her soul seems to sense where Naruto was imprisoned and looks involuntarily towards that direction.


    She didn''t me the guard.


    Nor me father.


    Nor me the n.


    She only med herself.


    She med herself for not having the strength to save Naruto...

 Chapter 77: A Life in Imprisonment

    Chapter 77: A Life in Imprisonment


    At the same time, Hinata was house-arrested, not far from the Root base, there is a little boy who doesn''t look tall. He looked cold, lurking in a secret ce. And this little boy was Sasuke, who had just experienced the pain of losing his family not long ago.


    Since the n was destroyed, Naruto and Hinata have always been with him. This led to his self-righteous belief that Naruto and Hinata''spany is normal and natural to be by his side, so he took thepany of Naruto and Hinata for granted.


    But when Naruto was arrested, and Hinata was banned.


    Only then did he gradually discover...


    ''Huh?''


    ''What about them?''


    ''Why didn''t Naruto and Hinatae to visit me?''


    Is it true that they are really angry with him and have given up on him?


    The more he thought about it, the more nervous and scared he felt. He has lost his parents. Lost family. He can no longer lose these two friends!


    So, he was anxious.


    Finally, he abandoned his pride and walked out of the n residence again, trying to inquire about the news of his two friends. As soon as he inquires, it makes his heart feel more ufortable.


    It turned out that Naruto went to Hokage Residence for him that day.


    The result was him being arrested.


    ''No wonder he hasn''t appeared in so many days.''


    As for Hinata, needless to say, he guessed that she must have been banned. Otherwise, with Hinata''s feelings for Naruto, Sasuke never believed that Hinata would have the heart to look at Naruto''s arrest without doing anything.


    ''It turned out that it was all caused for me. It''s because I''ve made my two friends tired.''


    At this time, Sasuke felt even more guilty.


    Next, ording to the information obtained by the investigation, he continued to search for traces in the ce where Naruto was arrested, trying to find out the direction where Naruto was taken.


    After searching for several days in a row, almost all of Konoha was searched by him.


    He finally found the entrance to the Root base.


    It''s a pity that no matter how hard he tried to fool them, the Root''s people never let him in.


    Without any choice, he had to stay behind to hide Looking for opportunities to dive in and rescue Naruto!


    As for the consequences? He didn''t think about it, except Naruto and Hinata. He had nothing to lose.


    Fortunately, his hard work paid off. He observed for several days in a row, and he really found a loophole time when Root ninja changed the guard.


    As long as he catches the right time, he can definitely sneak in!


    .....


    The sun is shining.


    The sweat on Sasuke''s forehead shed little by little.


    Finally, he waited for the opportunity.


    In an instant, when the two Root ninjas just left, he shed, forming a dark shadow and rushing past! It''s a pity that before his shadow came into the entrance, he was directly bounced back by an invisible force.


    The impulse hit Sasuke, the whole person was bounced and rolled several times, and then he fell to the ground.


    He waspletely confused about what was going on.


    When he saw the situation in front of him, it was a masked Root ninja who was staring at him, "Boy, don''t tell me you think you can hide from us?"


    When he saw the figure of this person, Sasuke''splexion turned ck!


    ''Damn it!''


    ''This is not the ninja who just left, so who is it?!''


    It turned out that they just wanted to make fun of him!


    Sasuke clenched his teeth, took the kunai from his waist, and his Three-Jade Sharingan opened. He rushed up again!


    Only after one round Sasuke was knocked back again by the opponent.


    He taunted: "Oh, Uchiha really isn''t a good thing. Brat, your brother is a rebel... and you openly attacked our Root, do you n to be a rebel too? If you attack me again, don''t me me for treating you as a traitor!"


    Sasuke, who fell on the ground, gritted his teeth and gave the ninja a fierce look. He immediately climbed up, turned around, no longer being embarrassing to stay here.


    .....


    While on the way, Sasuke was extremely resentful!


    He hates himself weak!


    Hate himself without strength!


    Not only can''t he avenge his family, but now he can''t even save Naruto!


    Damn it!


    Be-stronger!


    No matter what method is used, I must be stronger!


    ...


    In cell 78.


    There is no ce for excretion in the cell.


    So every time Naruto excretes, he can only do it in the same corner.


    Because it is too dark, he sometimes identally stepped on it, making the whole cell smelly. But Naruto doesn''t care about these anymore.


    After staying in the cell for a long time, he has long been ustomed to the smell and can''t smell the difference.


    His appearance is already sloppy and unhuman.


    The hair is messed up like a ghost. The coat came off and served as a quilt. The upper body is so dirty that even the skin colour has changed. Even the cheeks were greasy.


    But all of this, in the dark cell, he couldn''t feel it. He only feels that time is passing very long, and his stomach is very hungry.


    He just woke up. He walked to the iron wall again and scratched a straight line with my nails.


    This is already the ninth straight line he scratched.


    Every time he wakes up, he will scrape a straight line to record the outside world. In the end, a few days have passed. He''s not sure if it is urate or not. He can only use this method to record it.


    Every time a line is scratched, he will look at that line and be in a daze for a long time.


    All the past pictures passed in his mind.


    ''I don''t know how Hinata is doing...''


    ''I don''t know if Sasuke recovered...''


    ''If I only can see them... that''s fine...''


    Some footsteps suddenly came from the corridor outside the cell.


    Naruto instantly opened his eyes and smiled, and his face was overjoyed!


    As long as there are footsteps, it means that the food delivery person is here!


    He quickly walked to the iron gate, squatted down, looked forward to the food-venting vents full of expectation, and didn''t say anything like ''let me go''.


    These words, as early as two days ago, he had no strength to shout.


    The footsteps are getting closer and closer.


    Naruto''s breathing became more rapid.


    DANGDANG-


    A te was pushed in.


    What''s on the te is a slimy, unvored hunger. This kind of hunger, even during the period when Naruto was bullied, he probably would not eat it. But now he treated it like a treasure Because he had no choice.


    If you want to survive here, you have to eat.


    He picked up the te and stood up.


    Naruto was overjoyed and was about to run to the wall that had been scratched in a straight line, intending to eat there. Only by looking at those straight lines could he feel Hinata and Sasuke still apanying him.


    But after just a few steps away, he slipped by a pool of liquid on the ground.


    There was another tter.


    But this time, it was the sticky food that was knocked down.


    Naruto was nervous.


    Hastily filled that tuft of hunger, grabbed it, and swallowed it.


    But after only a few mouthfuls, Naruto was taken aback for a moment. He...he...how could he be like this? How could I be reduced to this look? Feeling such a huge change in himself, Naruto could no longer bear it. His nose was sore, cried, tears, nose, saliva, and hunger all mixed together.


    "wu wu wu~"


    "Why ~? Why did things be like this ~?"


    "Why do they treat me like this?"

 Chapter 78: Unsatisfactory Darkening Effect, Always Comforting

    Chapter 78: Unsatisfactory Darkening Effect, Always Comforting


    "Big brother, haven''t you forgiven me already? I know I''m wrong. I should''ve listened to you. Don''t ignore me, okay?"


    That''s right since Naruto was locked in and jailed, Li Yaoxiang didn''t care much about Naruto. The main reason for this is... This person, without suffering, will never remember.


    So, Li Yaoxiang wanted Naruto to suffer not only physically but also mentally. Otherwise, after this thing passed, Naruto will change back to the careless character. He was afraid that he would be unable to bear it and p this kid already.


    Li Yaoxiang nced at the system interface.


    [Host: Li Yaoxiang


    Darkening Target: Uzumaki Naruto


    Target Soul: 12/40


    Darkening Degree: 40%


    Darkening Value: 191050


    Mall: Omitted]


    This time, Li Yaoxiang was really disappointed. Only increased by 3%, and only more than 30,000 points of darkening value. However, as long as he carefully observes the current state of Naruto, he can know why the system gives this data.


    Naruto was tortured.


    Recognizing the dark side of the vige.


    Hating Konoha Elders all the time.


    But... what then?


    Then there is no more then.


    Hatred does not mean that he wants revenge.


    Hatred does not mean he wants to kill.


    These extreme thoughts did not even appear in his mind, even for a split second. It''s like the employee resenting their Boss for asking them to work overtime without a sry increase, but the employee will not do anything to the Boss in the end.


    In general, Naruto simply does not agree with Konoha 4''s old practices. That''s all.


    ''I was deceived by everyone''s apparent light, and I felt angry.''


    Compared to murder and revenge, he just hopes that he can leave this damned ce as soon as possible, rather than thinking about the ones that are not.


    After continuous observation for several days, seeing the darkening effect this time has reached the point where it can''t be raised anymore. Li Yaoxiang did not n to dy here.


    He simply started nning his next step.


    "Forgive you? Is it even useful to forgive you? Can forgiveness turn back time and erase the stupid things you did?"


    Hearing Li Yaoxiang''s voice, Naruto was overjoyed immediately.


    Naruto simply ignored Li Yaoxiang for calling him stupid again.


    "Big brother! You finally forgive me?!"


    Yes,pared to the current situation, Naruto cares more about any Li Yaoxiang''s response towards him. After all, no matter how much he suffers, the most uneptable thing for him is to lose Li Yaoxiang, his only rtive.


    Therefore, the 3% darkening level given by the system may bergely due to Li Yaoxiang''s ignorance of him and the trauma to his mind, rather than the apparent torture caused by the Root.


    "What happened?"


    "Do you think that as long as there is me chatting with you, at least the days here will not be so distressing?" Li Yaoxiang said what he really thought in his heart.


    Naruto stopped.


    A few thousand sentences that initially wanted toin to Li Yaoxiang just stifled back into his stomach.


    "Oh, you don''t want me? Very good! It seems that you have adapted to life here, Naruto. It''s my fault! It''s me who has bothered you enjoying life here."


    When Naruto heard Li Yaoxiang say this, he knew that he angered the big brother again. Fearing that the big brother won''t care about him anymore, Naruto hastily cry out in surprise: "No! No! Big brother... don''t say that, okay? Isn''t this all I can do? I have been locked up for so many days. I don''t know what they want to do to me."


    "Hah! What do they want to do, isn''t it easy to guess? You demon fox container is just a tool for them! Compared to a disobedient tool, of course a tool that has no emotions and only obeys orders is more satisfying! Can''t you understand?"


    "The next step is to turn you into an idiot, or to make youpletely forget everything! Be a feelingless, walking corpse tool!"


    Listening to Li Yaoxiang say this, Naruto became really scared.


    It was not that he had never wondered what they wanted to do. But since he is full of beautiful things in his brain, how could he think of such a world of no humanity?


    In his first response, he rejected Li Yaoxiang''s statement: "This... how is this possible? Dad- but Fourth-Hokage is my dad! How can they treat me like this?"


    After this was just spoken, Naruto regretted it.


    Because Li Yaoxiang does not need to answer.


    He also knew he was wrong.


    If the vige really takes care of his identity, how can he be treated like this now?


    Li Yaoxiang stopped speaking again.


    Naruto knew that he made the big brother angry again.


    "Big brother... I''m sorry for disappointing you. I made you worry..."


    Silence for a long time, Li Yaoxiang did not speak.


    Naruto did not dare to say anything.


    Li Yaoxiang, who has long been ustomed to Naruto''s stupidity, of course, wasn''t angry. He was just dying the business because of this chicken skin. He was just brewing the atmosphere.


    Seeing the atmosphere brewing, he directly asked in a harsh tone: "I ask you, do you want to go out?"


    Naruto was overjoyed! "Yes! Of course, I do! Big brother, do you have a way?!"


    However, Li Yaoxiang''s next sentence was anger, and Naruto was shocked. "If I said that the cost of going out may sacrifice a lot of lives, would you still go out?"


    Hearing the tone of big brother, Naruto knew that the big brother wasn''t cracking a joke this time. Moreover, Naruto also felt that this might be a test for him by the big brother.


    ''If I let the big brother down again, maybe the big brother will never take care of me forever.''


    ''But if the price of going out will kill many people...''


    This decision makes him very troubled. After considering for a long time, Naruto swallowed his saliva, stunned with a sentence: "Dead... dead... who will it be?"


    The atmosphere became extremely quiet.


    3 seconds passed...


    Li Yaoxiang said again with no emotion: "I will give you ten breathing time to consider. If you don''t want to go out, then forget it. You will live here alone in the future. Perhaps forgetting everything in the past is a good thing for you."


    Upon hearing this, Naruto was not calm on the spot!


    ''Do not!''


    ''I don''t want to lose memory!''


    ''I don''t want to be sentimental!''


    ''I can''t forget Hinata!''


    ''I can''t forget Sasuke!''


    ''And, more importantly, I cannot forget big brother!''


    Without a breath, Naruto immediately gave a firm answer: "Go out- Big brother, I want to go out! I must leave here too!"


    Seeing Naruto so quickly make a firm resolution, Li Yaoxiang suddenly felt a sense offort.


    ''My own efforts are finally not in vain. This stupid younger brother finally lost his heart.''


    "Well, Naruto, rx youself."

 Chapter 79: Trick and Confidence

    Chapter 79: Trick and Confidence


    In the seal space.


    After letting Naruto rx, Li Yaoxiang brought Naruto here again.


    That''s right!


    This is exactly what Li Yaoxiang has always prepared for! That is to unlock the seal of Kyuubi and let Naruto escape the predicamentpletely! This is why it has been said before that whether he can control Kyuubi or not is a crucial link in Li Yaoxiang''s next n!


    In the seal space that year, he threatened Kyuubi.


    After refining the chakra, the first thing he studied was the art of sealing. All of this is to prevent idents, which is the situation that Naruto has encountered today!


    This is why, when he got the ckening value for the first time, he started to waver more and more! With this darkening value, can he unlock the seal at any time?


    That''s why,tely, he was never worried about Naruto''s situation!


    ''This is my ace card.''


    ''As for whether it will be countered?''


    ''Hehe, that''s impossible.''


    Throughout the entire Konoha, no one canpletely suppress the Kyuubi''s berserk.


    Wood-Style by Yamato?


    Nope.


    Yamato and even Naruto''s Tail Beast Transformation all still need to rely on the ne left by Senju Hashirama to barely suppress it, let alone theplete body of Kyuubi.


    Maybe before Uchiha Itachi rebelled against the vige, the Mangekyo Sharingan can?


    Hehe.


    The same is true for the ckening value here He can directly release his control!


    As for Sealing Jutsu? That''s even more impossible!


    Apart from using the ckening value to crack this method, Li Yaoxiang has not been doing nothing! He had to study the seal left by Namikaze Minato from scratch. Even if he didn''t get the key that Namikaze Minato left in Jiraiya, he is confident that he canpletely unlock the seal of Kyuubi with his special research on Sealing Jutsu!


    It can be seen that Li Yaoxiang''s research on Sealing Jutsu is so profound.


    In other words, no matter what, he is invincible.


    As long as the enemy''s strength cannot defeat Kyuubi, Naruto cannot be defeated!


    Now, it''s just time to use this trump card.


    .....


    The two came to this seal space again.


    Only,pared to the first time, Li Yaoxiang did not hide this time in Naruto''s consciousness space likest time. After all, it is different from the past.


    Naruto looked around for a while. Seeing the environment here, he faintly felt familiar. His anxiety grows stronger.


    It''s just that when he saw Li Yaoxiang on the side, all the uneasiness was disappeared with it, and his face unreservedly showed a happy expression!


    It is different from that time.


    He was already 7 years old, and he didn''t rush to coquetry as he did back then.


    He just hurried to Li Yaoxiang.


    Both eyes, bright and piercing, look at his big brother, who has not been seen for several days.


    "Big brother!"


    Li Yaoxiang fiddled with his yellow hair and smiled, "Um," he said, "Do you know what I brought you here for?"


    With this reminder from Li Yaozu, Naruto hase back to his senses.


    In conjunction with what Li Yaoxiang said before, Naruto faintly guessed what his brother said about the way to escape and how many people would die.


    The expression that was originally euphoric has been depressed a lot.


    Seeing Naruto like this, Li Yaoxiang said, "What''s the matter? Don''t want to go? If you don''t want to go, it''s toote for you to regret it now."


    Naruto froze for a moment, then shook his head. In any case, he will not allow himself to forget all the past.


    Forget his meeting with his parents.


    Forget about his acquaintance with Hinata.


    Forget his friendship with Sasuke.


    He is not allowed to forget the bits and pieces of him and the big brother!


    "Go, big brother. I won''t hesitate again this time."


    Naruto''s will is firm, but his mood is obviously low. But his depressed mood was quickly revived by Li Yaoxiang''s following words.


    "Naruto, whether someone will be sacrificed this time is actually up to you. Your parents left a bundle of scrolls before they disappeared. The seal technique of the demon fox is recorded in it."


    "So, if you don''t want someone to die, you have to master it as much as possible in the next days! And wait tomunicate with the demon fox, otherwise who knows what will be the consequences when the demon fox really goes berserk."


    Li Yaoxiang handed the scroll that recorded the Four-Tetragram Seal and the Tail Seal to Naruto.


    As for the ghoul seal and Adamantine Sealing Chains, they were not handed over to him. Of course, Li Yaoxiang would do this was not because he is kind and can''t bear to see someone die or something.


    It is because it is rted to one of the links in the next step.


    After receiving the scroll, Naruto, like a treasure, wanted to open it immediately to study it, but Li Yaoxiang stopped him.


    "Come on, go see the fox first. You can read the Sealing Jutsuter."


    Knowing that there is a way to avoid hurting others, Naruto''s original haze was also swept away, and a happy "um" sounded.


    .....


    The two moved towards the huge prison cage towards Kyuubi.


    Not waiting for them to get closer, Kyuubi had already stretched his eyes and waited for the two of them with excitement for a long time! Although Kyuubi could not know what Li Yaoxiang and Naruto were talking about, but these years, after many observations by Kyuubi, he had long noticed the little bit of change in Naruto!


    Coupled with all kinds of filthy incidents that broke Konoha recently and the treatment Naruto has suffered today, Kyuubi can''t wait to meet the two!


    Things are getting more and more interesting.


    Jinchuriki of this generation and Li Yaoxiang are hidden behind the scenes; the unspeakable secrets seem to make him feel the excitement that he has been missing for a long time.


    Regardless of whether Li Yaoxiang''s previous statement is true or false, he relied on Naruto''s development alone.


    Kyuubi is very interested and wants to get involved in Li Yaoxiang''s n!


    The only thing that surprised Kyuubi now is that Li Yaoxiang dared to see him this time instead of hiding his head like he didst time.


    When the distance between the two parties was getting closer, Kyuubi'' gaze subconsciously ignored the small Naruto. He directly looked towards Li Yaoxiang, who was interested in him.


    One person and one fox, looking at each other.


    They did not speak.


    However, both parties seem to be able to steal the message expressed by the other side through the eyes of the other side.


    Kyuubi: Are you finally here?


    Li Yaoxiang: I''m here.


    Kyuubi: Need help?


    Li Yaoxiang: You can choose not to help.


    When the information wasmunicated here, Li Yaoxiang took out one chain from his back! It is ''Adamantine Sealing Chains''! This scene directly showed Kyuubi gritted his teeth.


    ''Hmph!''


    ''I know that this person ss is not so good to deal with!''


    Naruto, confused and ignorant, looked anxiously at Kyuubi''s huge and ferocious eyes. Noticing something was wrong, he looked back at his brother.


    As a result, the chain was retracted as soon as Naruto turned his head.


    Naruto didn''t find anything abnormal and turned his head back to Kyuubi.


    As a result, the chain came back out again.


    This scene itches Kyuubi with hatred!


    ''This mere human threatening me...''

 Chapter 80: Defuse Hatred

    Chapter 80: Defuse Hatred


    Kyuubi sat upright, with an excited expression, looking at them condescendingly as if to show his unyielding arrogance in front of Li Yaoxiang in this posture.


    However, Li Yaoxiang and Kyuubi both had a tacit understanding of not mentioning each other.


    He focused back on Naruto.


    "Little demon, you dare toe to the old man? Aren''t you afraid that the old man will kill you?"


    Naruto looked up.


    Kyuubi''s size really shocked him. When he saw Kyuubi for the first time, Kyuubi was just lying on his back. He felt that this fox was very big!


    He didn''t expect to sit up straight, which made him even more afraid!


    Because of this, it made Naruto understand more thoroughly that if the fox in front of him really goes berserk, and he couldn''t control him, it would have serious consequences.


    Naruto swallowed subconsciously.


    Looking back towards Li Yaoxiang. As if asking: Do you really want to do this?


    The reaction he got was that Li Yaoxiang gave him an encouraging smile.


    Only then did Naruto''s courage recover a little.


    "Great... Great... Big fox! I need some help! Can you help me?"


    Kyuubi looked interested towards them: "Oh? How do you need an old man to help you?"


    "I''m just like you, now in a cage. I want you to help me escape!" Naruto raised his head and yelled.


    This is the case.


    Kyuubi, who originally maintained an excited expression, suddenly hisplexion sank! He was not unaware of Naruto''s situation today, but when he heard the words'' Prison Cage'', he raised his anger involuntarily!


    "Smelly Brat! Now you humans also know that it feels ufortable to be imprisoned! Do you also want to escape from the cage?! Do you know how long I''ve been imprisoned in such a cage? This old man help you escape?! Then who will help the old man?! How and why should the old man help you!"


    After venting a series of angry me hair, Kyuubi''s breathing still fluctuated.


    Obviously, he really hates humans!


    Otherwise, the Kyuubi, at that time, would not massacre humans after he was released from the control.


    Naruto also bowed his head after hearing Kyuubi''s catharsis. He was imprisoned for less than 10 days, and he had already worked so hard. He couldn''t imagine how long the big fox had been imprisoned.


    When Naruto lifts his head again, his expression already showed his sympathy for Kyuubi unabashedly. He bowed down to Kyuubi and said sincerely: "I''m sorry."


    Kyuubi, who was still angry, couldn''t help but be surprised when he saw Naruto''s expression and heard his sincere apology. For the first time after so many years, he heard a human apologized to him so sincerely.


    This isn''t the first time. Although the previous Jinchuriki did not apologize to him throughout the dynasties, there were still people that was still apologetic when facing him. It''s just that even though these people apologized, they would still continue to imprison him for their own benefit!


    It''s all about cats and mice and falsepassion!


    He has had enough of this human hypocrisy!


    It won''t be easy to be fooled again.


    After being dumbfounded, what he received was a smirk, "Smelly Brat, you said sorry to the old man, don''t you know that the old man is the murderer who killed your parents? Understanding the truth, are you willing to apologize to the old man?


    Naruto was taken aback. He looked towards Li Yaoxiang. He seemed to want to confirm that what the big fox said is true or false. But the result he got was Li Yaoxiang nodded towards him.


    When Naruto looked towards Kyuubi again, his eyes instantly became a lot moreplicated... Suddenly, he did not know how to face the murderer who had killed his parents in front of him.


    Seeing this situation, Kyuubi sneered in his heart.


    ''Hmph!''


    ''Sure enough, human beings are all the same!''


    ''The first second seemed to apologize to myself sincerely, but the next second he hesitated!''


    ''Maybe he will take advantage of the old man''s ability by various threats.''


    Kyuubi seemed to be like that kind of old fox who has been in love, experienced and deceived many times. He no longer wants to believe even a word out of human mouths.


    However, Li Yaoxiang spoke a good thing for him at this time.


    "Naruto, it feels ufortable to be imprisoned, used as a tool, and disgusted by others?"


    Naruto looked back, looking towards the big brother in a daze. He doesn''t understand why the big brother said so at this time.


    "These days, just after such a short period of time, you can no longer stand it, let alone ''him''. Yes, that''s right. He killed your father and your mother. But have you ever wondered why he wants to kill your parents? Isn''t it because your parents want to imprison him again? Since the founding of Konoha, he has been imprisoned by humans and used by humans as a tool of war. How many years has it been before he was sealed in your body? Do you really think that before this, humans did not imprison him? So, ah... Naruto, the initiator of this kind of result, is not ''him'', but humans. This is the world controlled by mankind! If it were you- if you were imprisoned for ten years, twenty years, or even a hundred years. What would you do?"


    Li Yaoxiang said something earnest, and Naruto couldn''t help thinking for a long time.


    If the current Naruto were the Holy Mother Naruto in original work, maybe he would have forgiven Kyuubi immediately, the murderer who killed his parents. But Naruto in this life has been darkened by 40%. It can be said that it is very close to normal people''s thinking.


    How could it be so easy for him to let go of this hatred?


    Seeing that Naruto was still hesitating, Li Yaoxiang simply shifted the sight of hatred to the real initiator!


    Of course, the reason why he wanted to resolve this hatred between them is not without reason. If it develops ording to what he predicted, Naruto''s enemies in the future will only grow stronger. So, the only way Naruto can contend against the enemy is the hole card of Kyuubi.


    Without the free help of Kyuubi, wouldn''t Naruto in the future want Li Yaoxiang to act as his nanny? Doesn''t it cost a lot of darkening value to save Naruto?


    Therefore, it is only in his interest that Naruto and Kyuubi have a harmonious rtionship as in the original book.


    "In the end, the demon fox chaos back then; in the final analysis, this fox in front of you is actually just controlled and used by others. The murderer who really killed your parents was actually the one who broke the seal and let Kyuubi went berserk. If it weren''t for him, your mother wouldn''t be so weak just after giving birth to you. If it were not for him, your father would not sacrifice his life in order to protect the vige."


    Just as expected, after listening to this passage, Naruto''s eyes widened in surprise! Immediately, he cried out in surprise: "big brother! Do you know who this person is?!"

 Chapter 81: Coughing Ninja

    Chapter 81: Coughing Ninja


    This time, not just Naruto but even Kyuubi firmly stared at Li Yaoxiang!


    Waiting for Li Yaoxiang to say this answer!


    After all, Kyuubi can''t forget the humiliation of letting others y around. If there is a chance, he must give that person 10000 pieces to the broken body!


    Unfortunately, Li Yaoxiang did not intend to inform them of this answer. Anyway, there''s no benefit in telling them the answer.


    "If you want to know the answer, then rely on your own ability to investigate clearly. What is the most important currently? Do you prefer to be imprisoned than to let go of this misunderstanding hatred? Or do you choose to put the hatred on the real goal? Don''t me me for not telling you in advance. The strength of the person who can control the big fox in front of you is definitely stronger than this fox! With your current strength alone, it is impossible to get revenge at all. Perhaps it is easier for you to put hatred on this fox."


    No need to think too long. Naruto clenched his teeth, lifted his head, and looked at Kyuubi with a firm gaze.


    In the eyes, the timidity is gone!


    "Big Fox, although I can''t forgive the fact that you killed my parents, I still want to work with you to change all this! You don''t want to be someone else''s tool anymore! You don''t want to be imprisoned anymore! Me too! How about we work together to change all this?"


    Hearing Li Yaoxiang said that his strength is not as good as that of the mastermind. Kyuubi was very angry. But seeing Naruto''s sudden reaction, he involuntarily curled his lips again. He almost couldn''t figure out what was going on with these two human beings in front of him.


    But...


    ''Things... seems interesting?''


    Kyuubi, who was very proud being, did not personally ept Naruto''s request. But he expressed his meaning with action. He just coldly snorted.


    Immediately lying on the ground again, closed his eyes, motionless.


    Naruto looked back doubtfully towards Li Yaoxiang.


    Li Yaoxiang gave him a nodded smile as if telling Naruto: ''Well, you seeded.''


    Knowing that Naruto was overjoyed!


    With the cooperation of the big fox, it is finally possible to reduce the number of sacrifices now!


    Themunication with Kyuubi finally came to the end of a phase.


    Next, he waits for Naruto to master Sealing Jutsu, and then is his moment ofplete berserk!


    ...


    Time flies, and it has been half a monthter.


    In this half a month, Naruto''s life in the cell was much more fulfilling. Because of the need to spend a lot of time learning Sealing Jutsu, the passage of time does not seem so long to him. He was full of energy. Not so demented anymore.


    In order to reduce unnecessary casualties, Naruto was painstakingly trying to master two Sealing Jutsu as soon as possible. He was so attentive. Sometimes, even if someone brings food, he will ignore it for some time.


    Unfortunately.


    Perhaps it is because of the bad environment.


    Perhaps it''s because he didn''t get enough rest.


    Perhaps it''s because Naruto didn''t have much innate talent for Sealing Jutsu and Summoning Jutsu.


    He learned much slower than he thought.


    But so far, he still did not give up.


    Still focusing a lot of time and a lot of mind on Sealing Jutsu.


    But at the moment when his concentration was at its heaviest, the understanding of Sealing Jutsu was almost new. The familiar coughing sound came from outside the cell.


    "Cough! Cough! Cough! Cough! Cough! Cough! Cough!"


    Hearing the coughing sound, Uzumaki Naruto''s whole body cheered up.


    Who knows when but since this guy was coughing very badly, Naruto heard the familiar coughing sound almost every day.


    Because it means he has the opportunity to ''eat''!


    Naruto instantly left behind everything he had learned just now. He rushed to the vent below the iron gate of the cell, knelt. His side face was already stuck on the dirt, trying to look at his uing food.


    However, when he looked out of the hole, he found that there were four ankles.


    Seeing that it''s not just the ''coughing'' ninja who came to test oneself today, Naruto knew it was terrible.


    His emotions tightened instantly.


    Because every time this happens, it means that the owner of this pair of ankles will soon ask him some questions. If the answer does not meet the requirements of this pair of ankle owners, it means that he can only hold his hunger.


    Sure enough, before Uzumaki Naruto calmed down, the owner of the ankle, Shimura Danzo, directly asked him: "Say! What makes a qualified ninja?"


    After torturing Naruto for several days in a row, Shimura Danzo wille here to test Naruto almost every 2 to 3 days.


    The purpose is to forcibly break the Uzumaki Naruto concept under this system of rewards and penalties.


    Uzumaki Naruto swallowed his saliva. After some hesitation, he somewhat uncertainly said: "Ninja...Ninja...Ninja, just... just obey orders?"


    Hearing Uzumaki Naruto''s reply, Shimura Danzo coldly snorted, waved his sleeves, and left the scene.


    "Cough! Cough! Cough! Cough!"


    Outside the iron cell, there was only the coughing ninja.


    Following Shimura Danzo''s instructions, he gave only one of Naruto somewhat ''additional meals'' today.


    Seeing this extra meal just enough to plug his teeth, Naruto couldn''t help but feel lost and also felt a little confused. Why still punish him if he is confused and imprisoned?


    Hasn''t he answered ording to the "coughing" ninja?


    Is it still wrong?


    Or did coughing ninja really deceived Danzo?


    That''s right, the reason why Naruto was able to answer the answer just now was that this ''coughing'' ninja taught him in advance how to get better food and how to get a generous reward. Otherwise, Naruto''s previous answer still said that ''ninja is to protect everything that he values'', and he probably won''t change it until now.


    Of course, it does not mean that because Naruto said this answer which means that he agrees or understands this truth Because of Li Yaoxiang''s constant instition to Naruto ''a wise man knows when to retreat'' in his mind, Naruto will choose to cooperate with them and cater to them.


    Not waiting for Naruto to figure out exactly what was going on, ''coughing'' Ninja directly relieved him of the confusion: "Cough! Cough! Cough! You hesitated when you answered just now. Next time, remember to act firm. Also, remember, cough! Cough! Cough! To live a better life here, you have to abandon your feelings and stop thinking about other things that don''t matter."


    Naruto froze for a moment.


    Then suddenly realized "Oh" a cry.


    It''s just that when the "coughing" ninja wanted to leave, Naruto remembered what Li Yaoxiang told him about so much.


    Naruto pulled away from the te of food.


    Mouth stretched out towards the hole... moved towards ''cough'' ninja shouted: "Wait! Wait! Wait! Don''t go first! Are you ''Shin''? Do you have a younger brother called Sai?"


    [*TL note: Shin (Shin) was a Konohagakure orphan who was recruited into the Root division of the vige''s Anbu.]

 Chapter 82: The Real Protagonists Conspircay

    Chapter 82: The Real Protagonist''s Conspircay


    Naruto''s tone barely fell; the ''coughing'' ninja immediately stopped leaving.


    What no one noticed was that the face hidden under his mask was shocked.


    Because Naruto was right, he is indeed called "Shin"!


    He indeed has a younger brother named Sai!


    The question is, how can Naruto, who is being held in the cell, guess his identity? Even if he guessed his identity, how would he know that he has a younger brother named Sai?


    The shocked expression hidden under the mask quickly calmed down again. In order not to arouse suspicion from other people, Shin still vetoed Naruto''s question: "Sorry, I think, you got the wrong person. I am not Shin, nor have a younger brother named Sai."


    After that, Shin left.


    He only sympathized with Naruto''s experience, so he gave him some guidance, hoping to help Naruto live a little better here. But this does not mean that he is willing to cause unnecessary trouble for Naruto and cause him and Sai to be in danger!


    However, when Naruto saw Shin stopped, how could he let this opportunity pass?


    Naruto, who was still hesitant, said the whole sentence that Li Yaoxiang taught him. "My big brother told me, if you don''t want Sai to be trapped in this Root''s cage,e back here tonight!"


    ''Big brother?''


    ''Cage?''


    What did Naruto say about big brother?


    The more information Naruto revealed, the more surprised Shin was!


    As one of Root''s key members, of course, he had heard the news about ''Naruto has a big brother''. What made him didn''t expect was that Naruto would actually admit this matter in this situation.


    If Naruto didn''t say the words'' big brother'', maybe Shin would ignore him and report the news to Shimura Danzo. However, Shin, this time, was stopped by Naruto''s remarks only for a moment, and soon he stepped away again...


    ...


    Time passed. Time soon came that night.


    Outside Naruto''s cell.


    There should be no one in the corridor at this time, but a faint cough sounded.


    "Cough, cough, cough."


    With this coughing sound alone, it is obvious that ''Shin'' is trying to control his own coughing sound as much as possible, just to prevent people from discovering that he was ever here.


    He came quietly to the iron cage of Naruto. He bent his body close to the iron gate.


    Just when he wanted to say something, a cold voice came out of the door: "You''re here?"


    When he heard this sound, he couldn''t help but be startled. He was very sure that only Naruto was in the cell But no matter the tone of this voice, it is impossible for a 7-year-old child to make the sound.


    "You are the big brother that Uzumaki Naruto mentioned?"


    The reason why Shines here is to understand why the big brother in Naruto''s mouth knows so much information about him. He probably wouldn''t mind that much if it is about himself, but the problem is... Why even his most valued person, his younger brother, Sai, was mentioned?! How did the so-called ''big brother'' know so much?!


    You know, in order to conceal from Shimura Danzo that he loves Sai, he would get along with him only on weekdays but very carefully.


    It stands to reason that this matter should not be discovered.


    Even if it is found, it should not be by the ''big brother'' that I''ve never met before!


    The iron gate for food was opened.


    On the other side of the iron gate, ''Naruto'' was leaning against the iron wall and sitting on the ground.


    Exactly. He should not be called Naruto now. Instead, he should be called Li Yaoxiang!


    Li Yaoxiang did not answer Shin''s question. He straightly said what Shin cares most about: "Do you want to help Sai get out of this cage?"


    The expression concealed beneath the mask: "What do you mean?"


    "You don''t have to act stupid in front of me. What I said should be very obvious in your heart." Li Yaoxiang continued refuting Shin, "Shimura Danzo will find out about your rtionship with Sai sooner orter. At that time, there will inevitably be terror to the two of you. "


    Shin even took a breath.


    He couldn''t be clearer!


    At Root, no personal feelings are allowed. As Shimura Danzo''s good assistant, he understood that. If Shimura Danzo discovers any Root''s ninja has feelings for a certain person. Then this so-called Danzo-sama will surely let this root ninja kill this ''person'' with their own hands!


    If you don''t kill, then they both will die together!


    The situation between him and Sai is, of course, exactly what Li Yaoxiang said.


    From the two, only one can survive!


    This is what he intends to avoid currently.


    The question is, why does ''he'' understand so clearly?


    This is the secret that the internal members of the Root will know. All Root members have been engraved with the "Cursed Tongue Eradication Seal". It is impossible to disclose things about Danzo.


    [*TL note: Cursed Tongue Eradication Seal. This cursed seal is given to all members of the Anbu subgroup Root by Danz Shimura, to ensure no information about him or the organisation fell into the wrong hands. After Danz died, the seals disappeared from all the Root members. When the wearer of this cursed seal speaks about anything incriminating rted to Danz or Root, their entire body will be paralysed, taking away their ability to speak or move. It is applied to the tongue and takes the shape of three solid lines and two broken lines from the back of the tongue to the tip.]


    However, Shin quickly calmed down.


    Because of the situation of ''killing each other'', he hadn''t thought about it... But he has already had measures to deal with it!


    He said disdainfully: "Heh, what about that?"


    "You''re not worried? Just because you''re terminally ill? Just because you have already prepared to sacrifice yourself to save Sai? Even if Sai really survived, what then? Do you want Sai to be a person without any emotions and continue to live? If so, what is the difference for Sai between living and dying?"


    At this time, Shin can''t calm down again! He didn''t expect that Li Yaoxiang knew so well that he was terminally ill and was prepared to deal with it!


    ''This... How can this be?!''


    This matter, he always put it in his heart, he never told other people!


    ''How did ''he'' know?!''


    But soon, Shin had no intention to pursue any questions from the "he". Because Shin at this moment was too anxious, his concentration was only focused on the content of Li Yaoxiang''s words. Since Li Yaoxiang dared to say that, it means that Li Yaoxiang must have a better solution!


    Shin''s next voice clearly became a bit dry: "What can you do?"

 Chapter 83: Successful Negotiations, Windfalls

    Chapter 83: Sessful Negotiations, Windfalls


    The thought of Shin was so disturbed by Li Yaoxiang.


    Shin. Yamato.


    It can be said that they are one of the few ''failures'' in Root. They cannotpletely abandon their ''feelings''.


    This is why in the original work, Shin, as a ''failure'' will choose to sacrifice himself to let his younger brother, Sai, who is not rted to blood, survive. At the same time, to let Sai survive, he didn''t forget to tell Sai before he die, to be a ninja without emotion. Because he knew that as long as Shimura Danzo noticed that Sai still had feelings ... That means that Sai will be in danger after all.


    The problem is. In the original work, Shin made such a choice because, at the time, he had no other methods to solve this problem.


    Sai has no rtives for that reason.


    This was already the only way for him at the time.


    But now?


    Li Yaoxiang''s appearance seemed to give this dying person a glimmer of hope. If he can choose, he definitely does not want Sai to be living as a person who has no feelings, onlypletes the mission, and only listens to orders!


    So, this scene appeared in front of me.


    "It''s very simple. As long as Naruto escapes, and you help cover up Naruto''s whereabouts. Then you can also give Sai to me, and I will take him away with you and keep him safe."


    That''s right!


    This is the main reason for Li Yaoxiang tomunicate with Shin!


    Even if Sarutobi Hiruzen and the others forgive Naruto, it is estimated that Naruto would not ept this group of disgusting guys in the vige anymore. So, leaving Konoha is undoubtedly the only path after Naruto go berserk.


    Of course, it doesn''t mean that without Shin, this operation cannot seed It''s just that when he leaves Konoha, there will inevitably be a fight. Perhaps it will take a lot of time to get rid of Konoha''s tracking.


    That being the case, it just so happened that this Root''s failed product came to the door.


    Of course, Li Yaoxiang will not miss this opportunity and make the best use of it so that the whole n can proceed more smoothly.


    Shin, after hearing this, was stunned first, but then immediately angry!


    After hearing Li Yaoxiang''s remark, his first reaction was to mistakenly think that Li Yaoxiang was ying tricks on him. After all, not to mention that he was notfortable to give Sai to Li Yaoxiang, or whether he would help Li Yaoxiang to cover up Naruto''s whereabouts, even the prerequisites to meet these two requirements, the ''Escaping from Root''s cell '', Shin feels that it is no longer possible!


    This is Root''s core base.


    How strict the guard is, Shin knew it best.


    Can a 7-year-old child escape from here?!


    Shin turned to think about it, and suddenly the tone was a little bit bad: "Impossible. It''s impossible to take such a big risk to help you escape from here. If you fail, it''s likely to hurt Sai."


    Shin misunderstood the meaning of Li Yaoxiang.


    Misunderstood that Li Yaoxiang asked him to help Naruto escape from here.


    However, his words were quickly interrupted by Li Yaoxiang.


    Li Yaoxiang quipped: "Who said I need your help before I can escape from here?"


    "This is impossible. How could you escape from here alone?" Shin questioned.


    Li Yaoxiang said with a smile yfully: "Don''t you remember... who Naruto is?"


    Although it was across an iron door, when he heard Li Yaoxiang''s yful tone, he couldn''t help but suck in a cold breath!


    Because the meaning in Li Yaoxiang''s words is very obvious, if ''his'' n is really sessful, Shin can no longer imagine the consequences Konoha will face!


    And more importantly, this is no longer something he can stop!


    In other words... Even if he gave up working with Li Yaoxiang and reporting today''s events.


    Things would still happen anyway.


    He can only add some trouble to Li Yaoxiang''s n.


    Thinking of this, Shin no longer hesitated: "Okay. If you really seed, as long as you take Sai away, then I will help Naruto cover up whereabouts. But if you..."


    Li Yaoxiang knew what Shin meant. He immediately responded: "If the n fails, then we have not met today."


    Shin was shocked again by this ''him'' in the door.


    The whole conversation process; even when he came here with his own intention, he was being yed by the ''he'' this whole time. Even his own thoughts and ideas were thoroughly read by ''he'' inside and out.


    Shin only felt that the ''he'' was bing more and more unpredictable.


    But even if he was fooled by ''he'', he chose to let it go for the sake of Sai. Shin clenched his teeth: "Okay! Then it''s a deal!"


    After receiving an affirmative answer from Shin, Li Yaoxiang, who was leaning against the iron wall, raised his mouth slightly: "It''s a deal then."


    After the two discussed the main details, Shin left.


    Li Yaoxiang returned the control of body to Naruto again.


    .....


    A weekter. In the cell.


    At this moment, Naruto Uzumaki was already naked, with only a pair of pants left on his body.


    In addition to being covered with dirt, his body also exudes a foul smell.


    The whole person looks a lot thinner.


    Uzumaki Naruto looked at the lines on the iron wall used to calcte the ''days in captivity''.


    Somewhat confused.


    Somewhat uncertain.


    Not sure if he should draw the 30th straight line, 31st, or... 33rd?


    There was no window in the cell, and there was no sunlight.


    There is nothing to do.


    Sometimes he slept several times a day.


    This also led to Uzumaki Naruto not being able to figure out how many days he was imprisoned.


    The only thing he can do besides studying Sealing Jutsu is studying Sealing Jutsu.


    It''s just that the research belongs to the research.


    Without real practice, how could Naruto know whether he seeded or not?


    So Naruto, who didn''t want to have too many sacrifices, forced the Kyuubi runaway n to be dyed until now!


    Fortunately, before the n was executed, Shin didn''t give Naruto any special treatment.


    Just like that, Naruto was still suffering from this week.


    And Li Yaoxiang simply ignored him and continued to make him suffer more!


    Seeing that the time was ripe, Naruto had almost learned all the lessons. Li Yaoxiang took advantage of Naruto, trying to count the number of days to pass the time. He suddenly said in his mind: "What makes a qualified ninja?!"


    This sentence just echoed in Naruto''s mind.


    Naruto is like a startled bird! Immediately straighten the body! Replied without the slightest hesitation: "Complete the mission! Obey the order!"


    In the cell, Outside the cell.


    A silence.


    Naruto was shocked and found that the sound was noting from outside the cell. The whole person copsed instantly, kneeling on the ground and crying.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Do you really think so?"


    "No way! W w w w ~ I can''t help it ~ I won''t answer it like that, I can only eat those things~."


    Li Yaoxiang taunted: "What''s wrong with this? Didn''t you have a great time and eating here? Continue! Don''t stop saying that! Don''t learn Sealing Jutsu anymore! Anyway, I think you are quite used to life here."


    Naruto''s face wasplicated.


    With ten fingers inserted into the messy hair, he scratched, pulled, squatted, stood, and even hitting the wall with his forehead. The whole person looks like a lunatic.


    Struggling inside, struggling to the end. He stood up, his eyes full of bloodshot eyes, and shouted violently: "No matter! No matter! Big bro, I don''t care anymore! I must go out today! Must leave here! Uhhh--!"


    Darkening value + 1%


    ''What?''


    The unexpected harvest is a wee surprise!


    Oh Holy Mother, you deserve to suffer!

 Chapter 84: Kyuubi Outbreak

    Chapter 84: Kyuubi Outbreak


    At the same time, when Naruto copsed and made a firm resolution must leave the cell this night.


    Hokage Residence. In Conference Hall.


    "How is Naruto?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen originally wanted to harden his heart and not ask about Naruto. In the end, he was still unable to bear it and asked Shimura Danzo about Naruto''s situation.


    Shimura Danzo nced at him disdainfully and answered what he was not asking: "You can rest assured. There is already a seal team around the demon fox, there will be no problems."


    Danzo was proud of his recent sesses.


    Everything was smooth.


    Not long ago, arge number of Sharingan had just seeded, and in less than a month, Orochimaru had sessfully transnted it to him! His strength is even better now!


    Now with the addition of Naruto, the Jinchuriki, has fallen into his hands, which is even more indelible. As a result, when he faced the Sarutobi Hiruzen, a Hokage, his attitude became more vicious and unscrupulous.


    After all, in his view, it is only a matter of time before Naruto can bepletely controlled.


    After he got the Jinchuriki, Naruto, the entire Konoha will be his. Sarutobi Hiruzen, the Hokage, don''t matter anymore.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen certainly did not think as much as Shimura Danzo. He was just in guilt for the events such as Namikaze Minato and Uzumaki n. Therefore, he always hesitates when he will start something.


    Although Danzo belongs to the dark side, it is always Danzo who carries the back. But his bright side is also ufortable because, in front of everyone who trusts him, he is the one who gives the promise. But he was always the one who broke the promise in the end.


    When the decision was made, it didn''t matter for him.


    At that time, he was young enough and ruthless enough!


    But with age...


    Peoplethe older you are, the more you will remember the past.


    This caused him, the former Shinobu, to lose his former heroic ambitions.


    Seeing Danzo, an old close friend, he didn''t say anything anymore. He had to take the opportunity to change his words: "Well, be safe. I will let Yamato stay there too, just in case."


    Shimura Danzo: "Feel free."


    Next, the elders in the Conference Hall continue to discuss other things.


    ...


    At the same time.


    At Hyuga n''s residence. Outside Hinata''s room.


    Hyuga Hiashi came here, nced at the te of food on the ground, and frowned. He asked the two guards in front of the door: "Eldest Young Lady didn''t eat anything?"


    The guard was obviously also worried and nervous: "Yes... yes... yes, n Leader."


    Hyuga Hiashi said: "How many days have it been?"


    The guard said: "n- n Leader, this is already the 3rd day."


    Silence for a moment.


    Hyuga Hiashi waved his hand, instructed the two guards: "You leave first. Let me talk to Eldest Young Lady alone."


    After the two guards leave, Hyuga Hiashi opened the Japanese-style sliding door.


    It was Hinata with her back to his eyes. Hyuga Hiashi couldn''t help but sigh and said long-term focus: "Hinata, why are you like this? Do you know that you are not cherishing yourself like this. As a Father, I see how difficult it is..."


    But before he finished talking, Hinata''s body was suddenly on the verge of copse!


    And the air was filled with bloody smell!


    "Hinata!


    Hyuga Hiashi stopped abruptly, and before waiting for Hinata to fall to the ground, Hyuga Hiashi rushed forward to hold Hinata up and check her condition.


    A lot of blood on Hinata''s wrist.


    And Hinata''s face was even paler.


    The blood hasn''t clotted yet. Hyuga Hiashi, at first nce, knows what''s going on!


    Hinata waited for him toe before doing it!


    "Guards--! Here---"


    ...


    After a while, Hinata''s wound was healed, and she was lying on a cotton pad to rest.


    Hyuga Hiashi sat on his knees next to his daughter; his face was sad: "Hinata, why do you do this?"


    Hearing this, Hinata, who remained silent throughout the healing process, finally started to talk: "Father... you know... I want to see Naruto, I want to save Naruto..."


    "Naa~" Hyuga Hiashi sighed. He did not n to hide it from Hinata anymore and simply told her his hardship.


    "Hinata, it''s not that father does not want to help. It''s Naruto. Even our Hyuga n has no room to intervene at all. At that time your Uncle, do you know how he died? That''s because I killed someone who wanted to abduct you to save you. The vige asked us to send a person out of Hyuga n to make amends. And your Uncle- for me, for the n, instead of me- to make the amends. Do you really think that I, would like to see my own younger brother die in vain? But even if I tried to, how can I? Our Hyuga n doesn''t choose this way, it doesn''t work that way. Did you not see the consequences of Uchiha n? How can you tell me to take the whole n down together?"


    The more he exined, Hyuga Hiashi''s emotions became more agitated. Tears couldn''t help but flow out.


    Feeling the hoarse cry of her father, Hinata couldn''t help but tremble slightly. Tears also continued to slip from the corner of her eyes. This time, Hinata finally understood her father''s pain.


    She also didn''t expect that Sasuke''s n was destroyed because there is a deeper reason for it.


    After learning about the difficulty, she asked nothing more. She doesn''t n to embarrass her father anymore.


    Only...


    She still can''t let go of Naruto.


    ...


    On a cliff near Konoha Vige.


    Sasuke''s right hand lightning shes!


    The expression of excitement appeared on his face, moved towards the boulder in front of him, and smashed the ''Chidori'' in his hand towards the boulder!


    BANG!


    BANG!


    BOOM!


    There was a roar everywhere.


    The boulder was smashed out of a huge pit!


    The gravel was scattered and covered the ground.


    Kakashi, who was standing behind Sasuke, was very satisfied with the effect of this blow and was also very satisfied with the rapid progress of Sasuke''s strength! After all, he came to train Sasuke in person. In fact, it was only a week ago, that is, Sasuke left from the Root''s entrance shortly after.


    Sasuke was able to make such progress; he already felt very incredible.


    Compared to back then, he is not much better and even worse than the current Sasuke!


    Kakashi believes that in time, Sasuke will be able to surpass him!


    As for Sasuke at the time, when he heard someone willing to help him be stronger, he certainly would not refuse, no matter who Kakashi was and what his purpose was. He just epted it and followed Kakashi''s instructions to train.


    However, it was different from the satisfied Kakashi behind him.


    Sasuke, at this time, seeing the effect of Chidori, his face became gloomy!


    ''Damn it! Is this power?!''


    That''s right.


    How can Sasuke, who had learned Rasengan, see Chidori''s power as powerful? In the original work, Sasuke used only three Chidori at his limit during the Chunin exam.


    Not to mention Sasuke, whose body has not grown up yet, can only use it once!


    Chidori''s consumption was too great, and his formidable power must have been extraordinary, right? But actually, it is worse than Rasengan!


    This makes Sasuke, who wants to be stronger, be frustrated!


    He wasted more than a week of hard training, but his strength did not improve much.


    This only makes him feel more urgent about the matter of bing stronger!


    At the same time, because of the effect of this blow, it made him feel extremely disappointed with Kakashi-sensei.


    ...


    Ake near Konoha Vige.


    Shin picked up a stone and threw it towards theke at a slightly oblique angle.


    The moment the stone was released, it flew towards theke in a 360-degree continuous rotation.


    Whoosh! Whoosh!


    It skipped on the surface of the water seven times in a row before sinking to the bottom of theke.


    Standing behind Shin, Sai, who also held a stone, asked at this time: "Big brother, have you recently had concerns? How do I always feel that you are a little different recently?"


    Shin froze for a moment and soon returned to the natural expression.


    "Cough, cough, cough, cough!" Shin covered his mouth and coughed.


    After his throat felt morefortable, he stopped coughing. The palm covering his mouth was slightly removed, and he realized that there was a pool of blood on his palm. He wiped the corners of his mouth with imperceptible movements and quickly wiped the blood in his hand using his deep ck ninja pants. Immediately, he diverted Sai''s sight, turned, and squatted.


    With his other hand, he messed Sai''s hair.


    While staring at Sai, he said with a slight smile: "Cough, cough, cough! I''m fine, don''t think too much. Did you remember what I told you before?"


    Sai said with pride in his face: "Of course! Just run northeast no matter what happens to the vige as soon as you give me the code. Rest assured, big brother. You have reminded me more than once. I will never forget it."


    Shin nodded with satisfaction.


    ...


    Quiet night.


    There are various ups and downs in the vige of Konoha, happening on the same day.


    And just when everyone thought that today would be a night without fear and danger, inside the vige, at the entrance of Root, a deafening roar of the beast suddenly came!


    ROAR------!


    The roar of a beast just sounded.


    Countless family members, or children, jumped!


    The cry of babies also followed.


    Those vigers who came to Konoha after the ''Demon Fox Attack'' was better. They only felt shocked by such a sudden beast roar. They didn''t know what horrible situation they will face next.


    But how about those Vigers who were born and raised in Konoha?


    It would be impossible for them ever to forget this roar of the beast! Because the roar of the beast is exactly the same as the disaster 7 years ago! Everyone was scared and turned pale with fright!


    Many people even forgot to move.


    Those holding a teacup fell to the ground with a loud crack.


    Those cutting something in the kitchen didn''t even feel pain when the knife injured them.


    Everyone''s mind has be nk, and their whole body was terrified and trembling.


    ROAR!


    When the second roar of the beast sounded, everyone reacted.


    Immediately afterward, there were screams and exmations all over Konoha Vige!


    ...


    In the Conference Hall in Hokage Residence.


    The initial calm atmosphere- The Konoha Elders, who were discussing various vige affairs in the vige, can''t be calm! All four suddenly stood up at the same time! They looked at each other in horror and then turned their gazes to Shimura Danzo.


    Shimura Danzo''s face was particrly dark.


    It''s just that now is not the time to investigate.


    The three elders just nced at Shimura Danzo fiercely, and then they left the Conference Hall through the window.


    Seeing this, Shimura Danzo, with a horrid expression, did not dare to dy any longer.


    After all, the location of the ident, this time undoubtedly happened in his turf. It is also impossible for him to sit idly by.


    ...


    Hyuga n residence.


    Hinata''s room.


    Hearing the roar of the beast, she thought of Naruto''s identity. The original seemingly sick Hinata suddenly sat upright. Hyuga Hiashi became serious, looking towards the roar of the beast.


    "Come--!"


    Xiu! Xiu!


    Two soft sounds.


    Two guards immediately appeared in front of them.


    "Go evacuate the family members and let everyone go to a safe ce! Also, protect Eldest Young Lady!"


    As soon as Hyuga Hiashi finished talking, he was about to leave.


    But before he stood up, Hinata grabbed his sleeve, looked firmly at his father.


    At this time, how could Hyuga Hiashi not know his daughter''s thoughts? He looked at his daughter''s eyes, then looked at the wound on his daughter''s wrist. He hesitated slightly, and once he clenched his teeth, he said to the two guards: "Send someone to follow Eldest Young Lady to the scene. Remember, you must. Keep. Safe. Distance!"


    ....


    On the cliff near Konoha Vige, Kakashi and Sasuke also looked towards the direction from the roar of the beast.


    Originally, because Sasuke has made substantial progress in strength, Kakashi was in a good mood. However, after hearing this beast roar, his face could not help but be hard to look at.


    He did not forget that his teacher was killed by this beast.


    Remembering his former teacher, Kakashi thought of Naruto. He turned around and grabbed Sasuke''s arms. He solemnly warned repeatedly: "I''ll go and have a look. You stay here first, don''t go anywhere!"


    After that, Kakashi shed several times in a row.


    But why would Sasuke listen to him? He was also worried about Naruto. He just followed along without waiting for how long Kakashi had left.


    ...


    Lake near Konoha Vige.


    The roar of the beast rumbled theke.


    Shin was startled. Then he was overjoyed!


    "Sai, right now! Run directly in the northeast direction! Remember, no matter what happens, don''te back! Someone will meet you in that direction."


    As soon as Sai recovered, he wanted to start to talk to stop his big brother and ask what was happening, but Shin had disappeared without waiting for him to speak out.


    Seeing his big brother being so nervous, Sai felt an uneasy little inside. He looked in the direction of Shin... He took another look at the direction of the northeast.


    After struggling for a long time, he finally chose to obey the instructions of the big brother and ran towards the northeast.

 Chapter 85: Triple Restraint

    Chapter 85: Triple Restraint


    On this originally quiet night.


    When the deafening roar of the beast sounded, the entire Konoha Vige went up and down.


    As long as they were ninja of Chunin level or above, no matter where they were at the time or what they were doing, all would immediately go in the direction of the roar.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen and his several old close friends rushed to the scene.


    What they saw on the rooftop was that Naruto had already be a Tailed Beast Transformation form with 7 tails and even had signs of entering 8 tails mode.


    And all around, there is a lot of Root ninja fighting Naruto''s Tailed Beast Transformation.


    The crazy and hideous Naruto, facing these masked ninjas, didn''t mean to keep hold back in the slightest. The scarlet''s limbs and tail are either elongated or erged. Any ninja dared to get close to him; they would be beaten up one by one!


    Seeing this scene in front of them, the Konoha Elders'' faces were extremely ugly.


    The picture they least want to see had happened.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s tone was full of anger, and he asked Shimura Danzo to the side: "Didn''t you say that there is no problem?! What is going on now?!"


    As soon as this remark came out, Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu also stared at Danzo at the same time.


    Just now in the Conference Hall, this arrogant Danzo, his face suddenly became as ugly as eating shit. He can''t hold his words for a long time.


    But he was thick-skinned that he didn''t care about the gazes of his old friends.


    He didn''t care about Kyuubi''s berserk this time or whether someone will die. What he cares about is just how great the negative impact this Kyuubi berserk will bring him. Hiding it would be impossible. After all, he had taken Naruto away in front of everyone.


    Now that Kyuubi had gone berserk, if he can''t solve this crisis in front of everyone, he will be a big step away from the throne of Hokage!


    Seeing Danzo without any apology, Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu, who were not lightly angry, did not stay still any longer.


    It is not necessary to act on Hokage''s orders.


    The two of them said about each minding their own business.


    "I''ll go to the Loose Practitioner group first!"


    "Me too."


    After finishing speaking, the two people left the ce with a bang.


    Without waiting for Sarutobi Hiruzen to speak, Danzo also left the ce with a bang. After all, this time, he really couldn''t stand idly by.


    Danzo had just left.


    Each Great n Leader; The main personnel of Jonin Level came after one after another and came behind Sarutobi Hiruzen, waiting for him to issue an order.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen: "Yamato!"


    Yamato: "Sir!"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen: "You help suppress Kyuubi!"


    Yamato: "Yes!"


    After Yamato left, Sarutobi Hiruzen instructed again: "Everyone, be ready to fight!"


    Everyone behind him loudly says ''Yes!''.


    ...


    On the other hand, Danzo, who had just arrived not far from the battle, there was a wounded Root ninja, who appeared beside him, down on one knee.


    Shimura Danzo: "What about the seal team? Why didn''t they solve it immediately when there was a problem?!"


    Root ninja: "Lord Danzo, it happened suddenly. As soon as the demon fox appeared, the seal team hadn''t reacted yet, and had been seriously injured, leading to aa. Now our people are doing their best to suppress the demon fox, so that the people in the seal team can sessfully seal him."


    After this Root ninja has just finished reporting, Yamato also arrived here at this time. He nced at Danzo, his former boss.


    Danzo also nced at the Root''s betrayer.


    There is no dialogue between the two parties.


    Yamato rushed towards Naruto directly.


    ....


    Coming to the vicinity of the battle, Yamato nced around. He saw that at the entrance to the Root base, a radius of 50 miles away, had already be a mess. Whether it is a building or the surrounding trees, they are all destroyed by the aftermath of the war!


    Fortunately, the entrance to the Root base is also a remote ce in the vige.


    Yamato did not see any corpse or woundedmoner, but there were quite a few ninjas who were severely injured and unconscious. And some people immediately went to the rescue and took them away from the scene.


    As for the two sides of the battle, it is the root ninjas, performing all kinds of Ninjutsu and smashing them on Naruto! There are a lot of fire dragons, water dragons, and earth dragons.


    The offensive looks very powerful! But when these Ninjutsu attacked Naruto of Tailed Beast Transformation, they could only stop him for a moment.


    Then there is no more.


    Even though some people used Ninjutsu with huge, formidable power and sessfully injured Naruto, Naruto''s wounds would heal quickly at speed visible in the naked eye.


    No effect at all.


    Seeing this situation, Yamato does not intend to dy it any longer. He shed and came not far from Naruto.


    Hands seal! m to the ground!


    ''Wood-Style  The Art of Silent Killing and Binding!''


    Immediately afterward, the ground that Naruto was standing on began to crack everywhere! One after another, massive tree roots were drilled out, and Naruto''s limbs and seven tails were all tied up and pulled hard!


    Compared to the gorgeous Ninjutsu used by a group of Root members, Yamato''s Wood-Style is undoubtedly the most effective! These roots can not only absorb Chakra from Kyuubi but also weaken the strength of Kyuubi!


    For a while. Suddenly, Naruto, with seven tails, was really immobile by these tree roots.


    The appearance of this scene makes everyone present extremely happy!


    But what they don''t know is, this seemingly easy move, Yamato had done his best! His Chakra is losing fast!


    If his Chakra continues to lose at this rate, it will notst long! Seeing that the situation was not good, Yamato quickly shouted: "Seal team quickly start! I won''t be able to suppress him here for long!"


    When everyone heard the news, that was a big shock!


    The seal team ninjas were still looking for opportunities; soon, they were in their respective positions and surrounded Naruto''s Tailed Beast Transformation.


    A total of 8 people.


    8 people stand in 8 different directions, each doing a hand seal!


    After the hand seal waspleted, immediately after, in front of the four people, a thin chain was drilled, rushed towards Naruto, and bound him.


    The four of them pped the ground with their palms.


    The ck rune appeared on the ground, and it spread towards the Naruto of Tailed Beast Transformation!


    That''s right!


    It''s Uzumaki n''s "Lock Tail Seal" and "Four-Tetragram Seal"!


    As mentioned before, the inheritance of the Uzumaki n has almost be the inheritance of Konoha. This Sealing Jutsu, who can restrain Tailed Beast, how could they not learn this?


    The rune of the Four-Tetragram Seal began to spread to Naruto of Tailed Beast Transformation.


    Wood-Style, the chain, and Sealing Jutsu, almost defeated Naruto!


    Everyone who saw this situation, whether it was Sarutobi Hiruzen, Shimura Danzo, or the rest of the dignitaries, could not help but exhale the expression of relief. As if the winner was in hand.


    But just when everyone thought the matter was over, an unbelievable scene happened!

 Chapter 86: Naruto Becomes A Complete Kyuubi

    Chapter 86: Naruto Bes A Complete Kyuubi


    The chain of Tail Beast and the Wood-Style of Yamato are all tightened to the limbs, neck, and seven tails of Naruto after Tailed Beast Transformation, all very tight! The ck rune of the Four-Tetragram Seal extends from the ground to Naruto''s four limbs and then from the four limbs to Naruto''s neck!


    Naruto, who was wrapped in the dark red chakra coat, was gradually covered in ck!


    But just when the seal rune was about to extend to Naruto''s entire head, a frightening scene appeared! The ck rune not only did not continue to spread but began to fade away slowly! The chains and roots are starting to crack!


    Naruto, originally strangled with four limbs and opened his tail, gradually recovered his strength!


    Tailed Beast Transformation Naruto did a tug-of-war on them, pulling back the chains and roots that were pulling him!


    Followed by an angry roar: "ROAR ----- !!!!!!"


    While roaring, the limbs and seven tails suddenly stretched out!


    In a blink, the chain is broken open! The roots are broken! The rune evaporates and dissipates!


    In this scene, Li Yaoxiang was hiding in the consciousness space, and at the same time, opened two more seals!


    Tailed Beast Transformation Naruto was out of the shackles; all the eight members of the seal ss were shaken off! Bouncing to a distance, or smashing into the ground, or a building, making the surrounding dust and smoke billowing.


    The exhausted Yamato couldn''t resist the bacsh and vomited a mouthful of blood.


    Seeing this situation, everyone secretly said: No!


    But the scene that made everyone feel desperate without waiting for their response happened! They saw the dark red Chakra coat, which was wrapped in Naruto. On the surface of Chakra''s outerwear, sections of the beast''s bones began to grow! After he grew even more, the eight tail grows in Naruto''s spine!


    However, this is not over yet!


    When the eighth tail had fully grown out, immediately afterward, the bones were gradually wrapped inyers of flesh and blood!


    The ninth tail, as well as skin and animal hair, also grew rapidly!


    Immediately, it was Tailed Beast Transformation Naruto, beginning to expand and grow in circles at speed visible to the naked eye!


    By humanoid size.


    It became the size of the house.


    By the size of the house.


    It became the size of a park.


    Again from the park size.


    The Kyuubi Demon Fox has be as big as a hill!


    Everyone just looked at theplete Kyuubi in front of them! The entire seemingly tedious process of change only costs less than give breaths!


    These five breaths made everyone present stunned.


    This scene reminded them of the scene seven years ago.


    At the same time, in all people''s hearts, there are only two words,


    ''We''re finished...''


    Naruto, who fully released his power, was held in a small space for a long time. Naruto, at this moment, only felt extremelyfortable!


    He couldn''t help but roar to the sky again!


    "ROAR----!!!!!"


    After venting all the dissatisfaction in his heart from this long roar, he looked down towards the crowd around him. The expression is hideous, and his eyes are still covered with bloodshot eyes! He did not forget how he spent this period of time!


    Coupled with the evil energy of Kyuubi, at this moment, his heart was filled with anger!


    .....


    The ninjas who stood still in front of him were as tiny as an ant.


    They didn''t wait for Naruto tounch an offensive.


    The other side has already started!


    The first reaction came from Third-Hokage and Sarutobi Hiruzen!


    "SHOOT!"


    While Sarutobi Hiruzen shouted, he did a hand seal, summoned his Summoned Beast, Monkey King: Enma!


    [*TL note: Monkey King: Enma (Enk: Enma) was the personal summon of Hiruzen Sarutobi, the Third Hokage. Enma can use Transformation: Adamantine Staff, which allows him to turn into an extending and expanding staff that is as hard as adamantine, though despite its hardness.]


    Enma transformed into a staff; then it became bigger and longer!


    Enma pushed the huge Kyuubi out of the scope of the vige first.


    Immediately afterward, each and every ninja caught up.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s method, although good, can reduce vige losses and casualties, but this is also a very risky move. If Kyubbi ever aimed at the vige and sent a Tailed Beast Ball, then that big vige would be really finished.


    The rest of the crowd ninjas, of course, know this truth. So, they immediately caught up.


    The reason is not to allow Kyuubi the opportunity to use Tailed Beast Ball.


    Naruto''s figure quickly stopped.


    Ninjas above Jonin Level have already chased him and started a series of fierce attacks on him!


    Nara n''s experts teamed up to perform an enhanced version of the "Shadow Grasping Jutsu" in an attempt to influence the action of Kyuubi. The expert of the Akimichi n even used various Increase Transformation Techniques to attack Kyuubi.


    [*TL note: Shadow Grasping Jutsu. Lit: Shadow Clutch Technique. The user materializes their shadow and increases its power, bing like steel. The user then captures the target''s shadow and forcibly moves them about. The technique''s strength is proportionate to the Chakra put into it; even giants can be moved.]


    Danzo, who knew he could no longer hide, summoned his Summoned Beast. Baku and attacked Kyuubi together, trying to show his presence in front of everyone.


    Everyone was in a great tacit understanding. No one gets bigger in front of Kyuubi or uses arge Summoned Beast to firmly resisted Kyuubi.


    Because everyone''s heart is very clear.


    That''s just to make Kyuubi easier to find an attack target.


    Instead, as they are now, everyone was just walking in front of the huge Kyuubi.


    This type of attack is more beneficial to them.


    Only-


    This seemingly powerful offensive that gathered the power of the entire vige fell on Naruto, which has long be Kyuubi. Not only did it fail to do anything, but it also angered Naruto more and more!


    The intensity of Naruto''s hands gradually became more ruthless and violent.


    Especially when attacking those ninjas wearing masks, Naruto doesn''t matter whether they are the roots or the dark ones. He won''t divide them. In short, as long as someone is wearing a mask, he will shoot a beast w mercilessly!


    The whole process of fighting.


    Injuries, sacrifices...


    This angered these Root ninjas and Anbu ninjas.


    This scene makes Danzo feel distressed.


    That''s the influence he has cultivated for many years... gone just like that.


    After this incident is over, it is estimated that a lot of his staff will be lost. At the same time, his power in the vige will be weakened.


    Of course, other people do not have as many bottles, and jars as Danzo has in mind. They wholeheartedly want to stop Kyuubi currently.


    And standing not far away, Hinata, who greeted the whole process, looked at this scene with a worried look. When ninjas attacked Kyuubi and fell on Kyuubi, Hinata couldn''t help but feel distressed for Kyuubi. She didn''t understand whether this kind of attack would affect Naruto.


    She just hopes that Naruto will be safe and sound.


    Hinata just felt more and more wrong.


    ''Why...''


    The eyes of Kyuubi give her a sense of deja vu?


    Seeing the abnormality, she immediately opened Byakugan. She observed the entire battlefield. Just as expected! When Hinata discovered the Kyuubi after hitting most people in front of her but did not kill them, this made her surer of her guess!


    It turned out that it was Naruto who was attacked by everyone!


    This time she can''t stand it anymore.


    She just set off and rushed up!

 Chapter 87: Shocked

    Chapter 87: Shocked


    Hinata keeps running.


    She was running as hard as she could.


    There were no other ideas in her mind, and Naruto was all over her head. She couldn''t bear to see Naruto continue to suffer!


    ''Is Naruto not the son of Fourth-Hokage?''


    ''Why do you treat Naruto like this?''


    ''Why does the vige treat Naruto like this?''


    She passed through heavy trees.


    .....


    She arrived in the war zone.


    The war zone has long been destroyed into an empty field.


    But she was so small that she couldn''t attract everyone''s attention.


    Seeing every ninja using various formidable Ninjutsu to attack ''Naruto'', made Hinata even more anxious!


    She doesn''t care much about her safety.


    Rushing forward again, hoping they will notice her.


    ....


    After a while, Hinata''s short silhouette is difficult to intersperse among various Ninjutsu, almost within 50 meters of Kyuubi!


    In other words, perhaps no one needs to attack. As long as the hill-sized Kyuubi''s front foot inadvertently stepped forward, perhaps Hinata would be killed on the spot!


    But all this is not considered by Hinata.


    She came to Kyuubi, turned her back to Kyuubi, looked at a group of powerful ninjas up close, who were still disying all kinds of Ninjutsu, and hit Naruto indiscriminately.


    She couldn''t stand it anymore, and she screamed at everyone!


    "Don''t fight! Everyone, don''t fight! That''s Naruto! That''s Naruto! That''s the son of Fourth-Hokage, Uzumaki Naruto--!"


    It shocked everyone on the spot with that shout!


    Why did such a naive voice appear at the scene of the battle?


    This dumbfounded them.


    Several Root ninjas were shot directly by Naruto''s ws on the spot. The root ninja was like a kite with a broken thread, not knowing where to fly, life or death.


    The people who reacted can only curse secretly, damn it!


    Immediately put focus on Kyuubi again.


    Of course, this cry of Hinata is not insignificant except that it damages some ninjas. At least she did attract everyone''s attention.


    The first one to react is Hyuga Hiashi.


    His reaction was the fiercest. He was shocked by Hinata''s crazy behavior.


    The teamwork doesn''t matter to him anymore.


    "Hinata !"


    Suddenly with Hah! He immediately left his team and rushed to rescue the girl.


    ....


    Standing in the distance, the two guards finally found that Eldest Young Lady was lost; they were so scared that they turned pale.


    There are only three words in their hearts.


    ''It''s the end.''


    ...


    The other ninjas noticed that a child had broken into the battlefield. Except for Root''s ninja, the rest of the people, as long as they were close to Hinata, couldn''t help but want to rescue.


    After all, cold and ruthless are ultimately only applied to some adults, not everyone. Their generation all grew up in the infusion of ''Will of Fire'', more or less, still somewhatpassionate.


    Many people also flew towards Hinata.


    Before leaving the team, he did not forget to say to hisrades on the side: "You guys must bear it! I will save her!"


    What a touching picture.


    It also proved from the side that not all ninjas are as ruthless and disgusting as the Root and the Konoha Elders.


    But!


    They were as good as dead!


    In the eyes of Naruto, who is about to lose his mind, this touching scene is like a bunch of ants flying in the same direction! This happened to be an excellent opportunity for him to shoot these annoying ants in a row!


    He was mad and excited.


    He raised the huge beast w-!


    Everyone who witnessed this was inwardly shouted with a cry of ''bad!''.


    That''s toote!


    It''s impossible topete with Kyuubi''s palm for speed!


    Leaping forward, seeing this scene, Hyuga Hiashi with a grim expression and his heart was fierce: "No-----! Hinata! Run!"


    In an instant, the bits and pieces of living with her daughter Hinata suddenly appeared in Hinata''s mind and kept circling.


    There is a scene of Hinata holding Hinata for the first time when she was born.


    There is a scene of Hinata called ''father'' for the first time.


    There was a scene of Hinataughing, learning to walk for the first time, and finally fell in his arms.


    At this moment, Hyuga Hiashi has only one thought left in his mind: ''No, no, no! Hinata, don''t die!''


    ''As long as you don''t die, father will promise you anything!''


    ''Run away!''


    ''Hinata!''


    Hinata looked at everything in front of her.


    She knew nothing about her oing death.


    She turned her head towards the direction behind her.


    She saw a shadow shrouded from above.


    She looked up.


    It was an endless palm of the beast, and at a breakneck speed, it was about to crush at the ce where she was standing.


    However, Hinata was not timid. Not only did she not run away, but she also faced the huge palm of the beast with a calm expression. She shouted in the direction of the beast''s palm: "Naruto! I know it''s you! Right?! I know you heard me talking, right?! Stop fighting! Don''t fight anymore, okay?!"


    Hinata closed her eyes.


    Everyone held their breath and looked at this scene in front of them. They heard Hinata''s words and only felt how absurd this was.


    ''Kyuubi is already berserk. How could Naruto hear Hyuga Hinata''s cry?''


    ''Hyuga Hinata''s action- is no different from looking for death!''


    In everyone''s mind, the subconscious image has already appeared as expected.


    The beast''s palm with a loud sound, and then a lot of blood scattered from the beast''s palm!


    Just when everyone thinks that Hinata will die...


    Just when the beast palm is less than a few meters away from Hinata... An incredible scene appeared!


    The beast''s palm stopped forcibly in the air! And even after being attacked by Ninjutsu from the rest of the ninjas, Kyuubi didn''t respond to it! Kyuubi didn''t counterattack!


    Everyone''s eyes widened, and they looked at the scene in disbelief!


    Even those ninjas who were still attacking Kyuubi couldn''t help but stop their movements! Because the picture in front of them is bizarre!


    ''Kyuubi is not moving?''


    ''Still not fighting back?''


    ''What happened in the end?''


    For an instant, the atmosphere at the scene became silent!


    Everyone''s eyes are all focused on Hinata and Kyuubi. Everyone held their breath, not even daring to take a breath, for fear that they would break this rare and peaceful scene.


    Even more so that everyone presents immediately stopped their figure!


    No one dared to move!


    Even people who were running to rescue Hinata are the same!


    They saw that Kyuubi slightly removed his huge beast palm and then said something unexpected in everyone''s shocked eyes!


    "Hi... Hinata?"

 Chapter 88: The Only Hope for Three Older Generations

    Chapter 88: The Only Hope for Three Older Generations


    Quiet!


    The atmosphere was silent!


    When ''Kyuubi'' said the word ''Hinata'' with a rough voice, everyone was dumbfounded!


    Not only did the cruel picture expected did not happen. Instead, there is such an incredible scene?!


    ''How can this be?!''


    ''What kind of joke?!''


    ''Is it really as Hyuga Hinata said?''


    ''It turned out that after fighting for so long, we were not fighting Kyuubi but were attacking the son of Fourth-Hokage?!''


    ''Isn''t this a big joke?''


    Moreover, what shocked everyone present was that if this'' Kyuubi'' in front of him were Uzumaki Naruto, wouldn''t it mean that... Uzumaki Naruto could already perfectly control Kyuubi''s body?!


    What is the difference between normal Jinchuriki and Perfect Jinchuriki?


    This is a huge difference!


    Naruto is just embroidered pillows to shock other viges. And Naruto can be realbat power!


    Suppose the status and identity of the two parties are used forparison. In that case, the previous Naruto is dispensable for everyone!


    Even if the Konoha Elders is really going to change the Kyuubi''s Jinchuriki, it is estimated that everyone will not miss the kindness of Namikaze Minato and ran to Konoha Elders with a ''squeak''.


    But it is different now!


    With Naruto''s perfect Jinchuriki status, even if Naruto is not Namikaze Minato''s son, everyone in the vige will treat him as a treasure!


    Just like Killer B in Kumo Vige. ---Respected by everyone!


    After all, having a perfect Jinchuriki means that they won''t have to sacrifice a lot of people in the various missions and wars that follow, which is undoubtedly a great thing for the vige!


    Everyone understands the truth.


    How can Sarutobi Hiruzen as Hokage not understand the value of the current Naruto?


    When the huge Kyuubi showed an instant of Naruto''s consciousness, it was him who reacted first! It is also him who shows the most exhrating expression!


    The one in front of him is no longer Kyuubi, no longer Naruto!


    But a perfect Jinchuriki!


    A perfect Jinchuriki with feelings for them all.


    The value for the vige is self-evident and totally inestimable!


    In the events of Hyuga n that year, the vige made such a concession to Kumo Vige. Arge part of the reason is that the Kumo Vige has Killer B. ---the perfect Jinchuriki!


    What about Konoha Vige?


    The young and promising, Fourth-Hokage, and made the Kumo Vige jealous and afraid, died. Kyuubi bes an unstable factor and cannot be used. Konoha''s Legendary Three Ninjas(Sannin) left. All experts are either dead, scattered, or walking away. Plus, the hidden danger of the Uchiha n.


    A long time had passed since then How could they face Kumo Vige with a tough attitude? Fighting against Kumo Vige, do they have odds of sess?


    Therefore, the situation caused by their own hands can only be paid at the expense of the younger generation.


    But now it is different!


    As long as Konoha regains a perfect Jinchuriki during their reign, then they will never be the same as before! Their hearts wouldn''t feel so guilty anymore. Even after death, they will finally have an exnation for all those who they have let down.


    At least they can confidently tell everyone that Konoha Vige is still as strong as that!


    ......


    The same is true for Shimura Danzo.


    Danzo certainly understands that. But his mood, contrary to everyone present, was so bad! It stands to reason that the vige has the perfect Jinchuriki, which is great news.


    The problem is


    Won''t this perfect Jinchuriki hate him?


    He had just tortured him for nearly a month... And the other side even went berserk.


    To say that Naruto does not hate him, he will not believe it!


    Therefore, the current Naruto may be a treasure for others. But for him, a real unstable factor!


    At the same time, hating Shimura Danzo means hating the vige!


    He is the vige.


    The vige is him.


    In other words, the perfect Jinchuriki, which cannot bepletely controlled, will only be more dangerous for the vige!


    Thought of this, Shimura Danzo just rushed towards Hinata while everyone hadn''t reacted yet!


    His action immediately awakened everyone!


    Sarutobi Hiruzen mmed even more: "Danzo! Do you dare?!"


    It''s toote.


    With Sarutobi Hiruzen''s distance right now, he can''t keep up with Danzo!


    Just when everyone thought that Hinata was about to fall into Danzo''s hands, a group of ck shadows suddenly shed away, rushed to Danzo, and blocked his way!


    That shadow is Hatake Kakashi!


    In this life, Kakashi no longer has 100% trust in the vige leaders. So, he is always alert to Four Konoha Elders'' behavior.


    Just as expected, he caught Danzo''s intentions, so he rushed immediately to stop.


    Danzo, blocked in front of Kakashi, had a darkplexion and a somber tone: "Hatake Kakashi, what are you trying to do? Are you going to betray the vige?"


    "Lord Danzo. I should ask you, what do you want to do?" Kakashi said.


    Shimura Danzo: "Did you see that the demon fox was about to attack Hyuga n''s baby? I''m going to save her. What''s wrong?"


    With the time for exchanging those few words between the two, Sarutobi Hiruzen and the others have arrived at the scene.


    Hyuga Hiashi rushed to Hinata, picked her up, and moved away from ''Kyuubi''. ---Even though he knew that Uzumaki Naruto controlled Kyuubi''s body, he was still not at ease.


    And Sarutobi Hiruzen was also separated between Danzo and Hinata, just in case 10000.


    Despite being taken hard by Hyuga Hiashi, her eyes never leave Naruto from beginning to end.


    Naruto is no different. Because of the appearance of Hinata, he became less violent.


    One person and one fox.


    They just keep looking at each other.


    Realizing this, everyone went silent.


    ''The huge Kyuubi is just sitting silently there.''


    ''How harmonious the picture is..''


    Sarutobi Hiruzen fiercely red at his old close friend, Danzo. After a snort, he immediately changed to a kind face. He looked up at Naruto and said, "Naruto, are you there? This is all a misunderstanding. Let''s stop hurting each other."


    But Sarutobi Hiruzen is no different from Shimura Danzo. He also intentionally or unintentionally blocked Hinata behind him.


    A discerning person knows what is going on.


    There were only pure Hinata and Naruto.

 Chapter 89: Leaving Konoha

    Chapter 89: Leaving Konoha


    After hearing this, Naruto changed his eyes from Hinata to Sarutobi Hiruzen. It''s just that when he saw the old fogey face andbined with the words just now, that old disgust for the vige and the Elders rises in mind again!


    ''Misunderstanding?! You''re not even ashamed to say that?!''


    ''If it was a misunderstanding, then when the bullshit Danzo caught me, why did you not stop him?!''


    ''I''ve been tortured for so long, but I don''t even see you try!''


    The more he thought about it. Naruto felt that these people were too disgusting(except for Hinata). He didn''t want to stay here even for a quarter of an hour.


    He really didn''t want to see the disgusting face of this group of people again!


    The huge'' Kyuubi responded with a rough voice: "I want to leave here!"


    Hearing Naruto said that he was leaving, Sarutobi Hiruzen''s mood couldn''t help but sink again. With Naruto''s grim eyes and tone nowadays, Sarutobi Hiruzen knew that he couldn''t influence Naruto''s thoughts at present.


    However, he can''t let Naruto leave the vige. Because then, the vige won''t have the Jinchuriki of Kyuubi!


    Hearing what Naruto said, maybe he would directly take thest resort and use the tool of ''bond'' to threaten Naruto.


    But not now!


    Although he does not fully understand this situation, with the current Naruto in front of him, isn''t it enough to prove that the day Naruto bes the perfect Jinchuriki will not be far away! It can even be said that it has been sessful, but not necessarily!


    A perfect Jinchuriki who is willing to stay, and a perfect Jinchuriki who is threatened and hatred the vige.


    The difference between the two is even two years old child knows.


    Therefore, as long as there is a slight possibility, without an unavoidable situation, Sarutobi Haruzen didn''t want to resort to thest resort of ''threat''.


    Thought of this, in Sarutobi Hiruzen''s mind, Uchiha Itachi shed involuntarily, Uchiha Shisui shed, and Mangekyo Sharingan shed.


    ''Damn it!''


    ''If they are still there, then I wouldn''t have to be so passive now!''


    Judging from the battle situation just now, it is clear that Naruto has learned the seal technique.


    That is to say, now in the entire Konoha Vige, without Uchiha n, without Mangekyo Sharingan, the only thing that canpete with Naruto is only the ''Dead Demon Consuming Seal''.


    [*TL note: The Dead Demon Consuming Seal is a sealing technique developed by the Uzumaki n to call upon the power of the Shinigami. Its very existence is so secret that even Orochimaru knew nothing about it.]


    But the question is, can he make the Dead Demon Consuming Seal?


    Simply impossible!


    What will the vige do after Kyuubi is sealed and Kyuubi''s earthquake is gone?


    Like what Namikaze Minato, half of the Kyuubi will be sealed again, and the other half will be sealed in someone else''s body?


    Stop joking.


    This is also impossible!


    The chance of making mistakes in the process is too high!


    The more he thinks, the more Sarutobi Hiruzen feels sullen and heavy. But he does not reveal these emotions on the surface because now the only thing he can do is appease Naruto.


    ''Try to put aside the misunderstanding between the vige and Naruto, and let Naruto return to Konoha''s embrace.''


    ''And...''


    The most important thing is that as long as Hinata is in their hand!


    He didn''t believe that this perfect Jinchuriki would nevere back!


    ''As long as we make sure that the incident of Naruto''s departure has not been spread, then other Ninja Viges will only get the news of Kyuubi''s berserk at most.''


    Naruto''s departure is not uneptable.


    "Naa~"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen sighed and showed a look ofpassion for the world. "Naruto, you have too many misunderstandings with the vige. It''s good to leave for a while and go out to rx. I won''t stop you. But please remember, Konoha will always be your home. The vige wees you back at any time. "


    Not only Naruto, everyone present was dumbfounded.


    Needless to say, everyone knows the importance of Naruto to the vige. But everyone didn''t expect that the Third-Hokage would have epted Naruto''s request so easily.


    Utatane Koharu and Mitokado Homura appeared to be right next to Sarutobi Hiruzen at the time when it was safest.


    This is especially true for Shimura Danzo!


    Utatane Koharu: "Hokage, do you know what you are talking about?"


    "No, we can''t let him leave Konoha!" Mitokado Homura


    Shimura Danzo: "Hiruzen!"


    But before waiting for several old close friends to finish talking, Sarutobi Hiruzen directly interrupted: "Enough! I have my own measure about Naruto! Konoha is Naruto''s home! Naruto''s father guarded this ce with his life! Do you think Naruto will betray the vige and might note back?!"


    Yes.


    Even until now, while suppressing several of his old friends, Sarutobi Hiruzen has never forgotten to use feelings to bind Naruto.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen lifted his head. Once again, with kind eyes, he looked towards Naruto: "Go, Naruto. With me in, no one would dare to stop you."


    Hearing the old fogey, Sarutobi Hiruzen, willingly let him go so easily, Naruto was slightly surprised. It''s just that at this time, he just wanted to get away from this ce that made him feel sick as soon as possible.


    Before leaving, Naruto had someplicated eyes on Hinata.


    The same is true for Hinata.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen, who saw this situation, said strikingly: "Rx. We will take care of Hinata for you. Hinata will be fine."


    The world of 7-year-old is still very simple.


    Whether it was Naruto or Hinata, they had never thought that there was another meaning behind Sarutobi''s words.


    Some people who inherited Will of Fire also did not doubt the intention of so-called ''care''.


    As for those who have a certain age. The folks who know Konoha Elders'' real face know the intentions of Sarutobi Hiruzen and the others.


    Hyuga Hiashi''s face was even darker!


    Kakashi was equally ufortable.


    Naruto, who controls the real body of Kyuubi, still firmly stared at Hinata. All kinds ofplex expressions are written on his face, struggling for a long time, and finally, he clenched his teeth and turned away!


    Naruto slowly left everyone''s sight with the momentum of the earth shaking and the mountain shaking.


    Until the ground shakes stopped, peace was finallypletely restored.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen then, in a harsh tone, toward everyone instructed: "Everyone listen to me! No one can discuss today''s matter anymore! Vitors are immediately imprisoned!"


    Everyoneplied ''Yes!''


    After this, they began to disperse.


    Someone is responsible for tidying up the battlefield.


    Someone is responsible for helping the injured to leave.


    Some people leave each minding their own business.


    Before Sarutobi Hiruzen left, he also deliberately walked in front of the other three elders and severely warned them repeatedly: "Go back to the Conference Hall. I have something to discuss with you all."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen just jumped away after that.


    Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu looked at each other and left.


    Around Shimura Danzo, two Root ninjas appeared at this time. Both are Danzo''s right-hand men. Without Danzo''s orders, they will alsoe over to report the situation to Danzo when the matter is over.


    "Cough, cough, cough! Danzo-sama..."


    Danzo waved his hand: "Other things; I will talk about itter. Now you will immediately send someone to hunt down the demon fox! When he turns back into a human body, execute without any mercy if necessary!"


    Two root ninjas knelt on one knee at the same time: "Yes!"

 Chapter 90: Cover Up

    Chapter 90: Cover Up


    That''s right!


    For Shimura Danzo, rather than keeping a perfect Jinchuriki who hates the vige, it would be better to destroy ''him''!


    Aftermanding two subordinates, he moved towards Hokage Residence.


    ....


    After a while.


    Hokage Residence, in Conference Hall.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen has been waiting in the Conference Hall for a long time.


    Shimura Danzo was thest one to arrive.


    As soon as Shimura Danzo arrived, he heard Utatane Koharu and Mitokado Homura saying that Sarutobi Hiruzen was not.


    "Hey ~ Hiruzen, you are really reckless this time. How can you just let Naruto leave? Do you know if the news is heard by other Ninja Viges, how serious are the consequences?"


    "Hiruzen, let''s take him back. Now go and get Naruto back. Maybe it''s not toote. He has beastized once, so it should not beastized again in such a short time." Utatane Koharu


    Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu are also very realistic.


    There is no more demon fox. Now it is called Naruto.


    With his hands on his back and his back turned on them, Sarutobi Hiruzen allowed himself to be preached by Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu. However, when Shimura Danzo arrived, his attitude and imposing-manner changed immediately!


    He turned around, stared at three people.


    Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu forced back what they wanted to say.


    "Are you finished?" Sarutobi Hiruzen nced at three people. "Now it''s my turn to speak? I''m calling you here not to listen to your opinion! It''s to inform you; anything about Naruto, I won''t allow it!" Speaking of which, Sarutobi Hiruzen''s eyes also clearly looked towards Shimura Danzo: "I won''t let any news about Naruto go out! If I find out what''s wrong, I won''t keep my hands this time!" A series of warning words.


    The atmosphere at the scene was indifferent.


    At the same time, he also admitted that the few people present did have the ability to prevent ''some news circted in Konoha''! That is to say, when Hatake Sakumo was involved in this incident, they were indeed cats weeping for the dead mouse.


    [*TL note: the cat weeps for the dead mouse; the hypocritical pretense of condolence.]


    "Hiruzen, this..." Mitokado Homura.


    "Hiruzen..." Utatane Koharu.


    Now that he has torn the merciful face in front of his old close friend, Sarutobi Hiruzen doesn''t n to say anything more and waves his hand: "Enough, you can go!"


    Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu looked at each other somewhat helplessly and then left the Conference Hall.


    Shimura Danzo''s eyes narrowed.


    Without speaking, he left Conference Hall as well.


    ...


    On the other hand.


    After receiving the order from Shimura Danzo, Shin and another powerful assistant immediately hurried to the direction where Naruto left and had no time to help the remaining Root member.


    After a while, the two came to a jungle ording to the traces left by Kyuubi.


    That kind of ''obvious'' clue was no longer there when they arrived. In other words, when Naruto came here, he had already returned to his human form and was on his way.


    The two looked around for a week, trying to find traces.


    At this moment, Shin found some traces not far away. In the same way, another right-hand man, equivalent to Shin strength, also found this trace.


    However, just when he wanted to leave for the direction indicated by the trace, he was blocked by Shin:


    "I''m not sure if the traces left by this are true or not. Just in case, let''s split!"


    Shin did not wait for this colleague to answer.


    Seeing this, the right-hand man didn''t even bother and turned and ran to another ''seemingly possible direction of Naruto''s escape''. After all, everyone belongs to Danzo and is one of Danzo''s most trusted people.


    He didn''t think much.


    ....


    After Shin confirmed that the colleague had not followed, he stopped now and turned his head to look northeast. Silently curse in his heart: "Sai, I can only do it for you. It''s up to you."


    ...


    A few hourster, Root base.


    Shimura Danzo sat on his throne.


    In front of him, some people reported various messages to him: "This time the berserk of the demon fox caused the death of 4 Jonin and 7 Chunin Level members. There are more than 20 members who have suffered serious injuries and cannot recover in a short time. As for the Ninjutsu Scroll stored in the base, it was also destroyed a lot in this incident."


    Shimura Danzo''s expression is still very indifferent.


    Not much timeter, Shin and another capable assistant came back to Shimura Danzo, kneeling: "Lord Danzo, we have failed the mission."


    The anger on his face shed after hearing the news.


    "Say, what the hell is going on!"


    "Cough, cough, cough! Report Lord Danzo, we tracked to where the Kyuubi disappeared, but after that, no trace of Uzumaki Naruto was found."


    Shimura Danzo narrowed his eyes and said coldly: "Didn''t the demon fox is in your hand? How could it not be controlled in time?"


    "Cough, cough! Lord Danzo, this is my negligence. When the demon fox went berserk, this subordinate did not stay near the cell. Please forgive me."


    Shin didn''t speak again.


    Shimura Danzo did not continue to ask questions.


    The scene was solemn.


    Silence for a long time.


    Shimura Danzo changed from the original tone of ountability to a peaceful attitude: "Okay. This is not to me you. No one expected that the demon fox had already learned Sealing Jutsu. So meddlesome affection happened tonight. You are tired too, and you are also not in good health, go back and rest first."


    Finished speaking, Shimura Danzo said to another right-hand man: "You stay."


    The twoplied at the same time, ''Yes!''.


    .......


    After Shin leaves, Shimura Danzo asked the right man: "What was the situation just now? Did you notice any abnormality in Shin?"


    Naruto Uzumaki; the two consecutive problems were rted to Shin, which made Shimura Danzo, who was suspicious by nature, wondering whether Shin was at fault.


    This powerful assistant informed Shimura Danzo of the details of tracking Kyuubi without omission and in detail.


    After hearing the news, Shimura Danzo thought about it for a moment and then asked: "Is Shin closer to a child?"


    "Yes, Lord Danzo. That child''s name is Sai." (I don''t know what Sai is called at Root. It''s convenient to name something.)


    "How is his strength?" Shimura Danzo.


    "Report Lord Danzo, Sai already has an outstanding strength."


    "You go to see if the child named Sai is still in his original residence." After a pause, Shimura Danzo continued, "If he is not there, then let Shin disappear. If he is still... Then arrange them for ceremony as soon as possible."


    "Yes!"

 Chapter 91: Sais Choice

    Chapter 91: Sai''s Choice


    Shimura Danzo said ''ceremony''.


    But, it is actually the yful code within the Root.


    It is also one of the methods he used to verify whether his tools still retain feelings.


    After getting the order, the powerful assistant went to Sai''s residence to investigate.


    ...


    Early the following day, Shin was sitting in his room and had not slept all day. He knew his anomaly would soon be discovered by Danzo and sent someone to deal with it, but he didn''t care about it. What he cares about is only Sai, whether he is safe or not.


    ''Will Naruto''s ''big brother'' fulfill his promise?''


    If this mysterious person really betrayed his promise, he could do nothing about it.


    Danzo has given him time, and it is running out. He only hopes that Sai can be a normal person and live happily...


    While thinking about it.


    Knock!


    Knock!


    Knock!


    Shin''s door was suddenly knocked and opened directly.


    The person who came here was the right man Danzo sent to check Sai''s residencest night: "Shin, Lord Danzo told me to ask you, are you feeling better? If it were better, then go ahead to the closed room!"


    Speaking of closing the room, Shin was shocked!


    His rtionship with Sai was discovered!


    And this so-called closed room is where Root is used to let the members kill each other!


    ''This isn''t right!''


    ''Hasn''t Sai already left?''


    He was full of doubts in his heart, and he couldn''t control himself so much. With a tired body, he directly promised: "I''m fine. Let''s go now."


    ....


    After a while, the two people came to the closed room.


    There was already a small figure in the closed room, waiting in it for a long time.


    When Shin saw the face of this person clearly, Shin tried to hide his emotions, but his palm was also unable to bear trembling slightly! Even if both sides are masked, he can confirm with 100% that it is his younger brother Sai!


    ''How can this be?!''


    ''Didn''t I tell you to go?!''


    ''Why are you here?!''


    ''Isn''t everything I do in vain?''


    Not waiting for the stiff body to react, the sound of the iron door being closed sounded behind him. No need to exin anything with that powerful assistant. It is very clear, as long as being in this closed room, it means that between him and Sai, only one cane out alive!


    Shin, with his desperate mood, could not speak for a long time.


    Until Sai took off his mask, he only smiled bitterly.


    Now that things have reached this point, there is no choice.


    Only ording to the previous n, let Sai kill him.


    Before that, he must ask clearly what is going on!


    Instantly, both brothers pulled kunai from their pockets and rushed to the other side!


    CLANG!


    A light sound.


    Kunai and kunai collide.


    Faithful eyes looked towards Sai in front of him and whispered, "Why did youe back?"


    CLANG!


    CLANG!


    CLANG!


    CLANG!


    Another series of Kunai collision sounds.


    Sai confronted Shin and replied: "That man told me everything about you."


    Shin pupils shrank, and immediately, a sense of hatred came out of his eyes. It was hatred towards Li Yaoxiang, a guy who broke his promise.


    It''s just that his expression didn''t appear long before and was soon dismissed by Sai''s following words: "He gave me two options. One, from now on, follow him, and he will ensure my safety and freedom."


    CLANG! CLANG! CLANG! CLANG!


    Another series of attacks and parry.


    Both leaps backward at the same time!


    Sai pulled out the scroll, drew a few strokes on the scroll.


    Immediately, a few ink-painted lions jumped out of the scroll and attacked! Seeing this, he also did a quick hand seal. A series of Wind-Style cut several oing lion paintings, one after another, to make it return to a pool of ink, and it spilled all over the floor.


    Followed by, the two rushed to the other side again.


    Kunai was abandoned this time.


    Two people were fighting in close quarters.


    "What about the second choice?" Shin asked.


    "The second choice is, I wille back to Konoha to help you. He will help me resurrect you in the future."


    Hearing this, Shin froze.


    After a pause in his figure, a w was caught by Sai, and he kicked in the abdomen. He flew to the distance and fell directly to the ground, spurting blood.


    He Didn''t give him a chance to gasp for breath. Sai came to Shin with a few shes and ced Kunai around Shin''s neck, making it impossible to move even a little bit.


    Shin said with a bitter smile: "Do you believe him?"


    Sai smiled: "At least there is a glimmer of hope, isn''t it?"


    "Cough, cough!" Shin spat out a mouthful of blood again. It''s just that he got sick. As for the injury that Sai gave to him, in fact, not at all serious, "You chose the road yourself. That''s all I can do for you. I hope you won''t regret it in the future."


    Sai: "Take it easy. I won''t regret it. Compared to letting me live alone, I''m more willing to live in the future with you."


    The two looked directly at each other and smiled slightly.


    Shin: "No matter what the result is, I hope that in the future, you will not feel sorry for what happened today."


    The meaning in Shin''s words is obvious. There is not much hope for Li Yaoxiang''s resurrection method on him, so he will now give Sai a piece of advice in advance.


    Sai: "No. At least I know there was a family who loved me."


    Shin froze for a moment, then relieved: "Then let''s do it."


    A stroke of Kunai in Sai''s hand.


    ''Shin... dead...''


    Sai endured the pain inside.


    The reason is very clear.


    He directly destroys Shin''s head because he knows that there are also Yamanaka n''s important people inside Root, which can spy on the memory of the dead.


    He also did not forget the words that Shin often told him.


    ''If you want to live safely in Root, you have to abandon your feelings!''


    Sai''s expression instantly became the look in the original work. With an ''official'' smile, dragging Shin''s corpse to the iron gate.


    "The mission isplete."


    ......


    After a while, Sai was brought to Shimura Danzo.


    Shimura Danzo did not feel sad because of the death of Shin. On the contrary, Root was able to develop a qualified ninja-like Sai, and he was very satisfied.


    Shimura Danzo: "You are good! You did well."


    Sai smiled and nodded at Danzo.


    "The smile is good too. Next, I will have an important mission for you to do. Are you confident you willplete it?" Shimura Danzo said.


    Sai: "It is an honor, and this subordinate will certainly not let you down, Lord Danzo."


    Shimura Danzo, hearing this, smiledfortably...

 Chapter 92: Chess Players and Pieces

    Chapter 92: Chess yers and Pieces


    In a jungle in Konoha Vige.


    This jungle is the ce where Naruto, Hinata, and Sasuke used to do extreme training.


    At the moment, Sasuke is alone in this ce, performing all kinds of extreme training that Naruto has taught him.


    Practice, practice.


    Suddenly a shout came from behind Sasuke: "Sasuke ."


    Sasuke stopped. He looked back.


    The personing is Kakashi.


    Kakashi came to Sasuke in a few quick steps and said in a concerned tone: "Sasuke, I went back to youst night, and you weren''t there. Where did you go? Also, why didn''t youe to the agreed ce for training today?"


    It seemed obvious that Sasuke was exhausted. He has been training sincest night, and he has never rested at all.


    He, breathing heavily, said coldly: "No need. I will train myselfter. No need to trouble you anymore."


    Sasuke turned around and left. Never look at Kakashi again.


    Of course, Kakashi would not be so ignorant. Since he offered to help, but Sasuke doesn''t appreciate it, he would not force it. He was slightly disappointed. He also turned and headed back towards the vige.


    Kakashi left shortly after.


    .....


    Sasuke ran and ran.


    Just because of ack of physical strength and trembling feet, he can''t run anymore. He gritted his teeth. He wanted to keep running forward, but his feet still did not listen.


    He showed anger and unwillingness, and pped his palms to his big leg in a row, whispered: "Damn it! Move, me! You can''t do it at this level?! What revenge is there anyway?! Is there a facepared to Naruto?!"


    That''s right.


    Since Sasuke saw Naruto''s ''real strength''st night and learned that Naruto left the vige, he never worried about Naruto''s safety again.


    In fact, his jealousy of Naruto became stronger.


    There was even hatred.


    Hate himself for being ipetent!


    ''I feel like a clown. I wanted topete with Naruto all day long, but it turns out that Naruto hasn''t been seriously fighting him!''


    ''Damn it!''


    ''Then until now, am I a joke in the eyes of others?!''


    ''A clown overestimating his own capabilities!''


    Sasuke''s thoughts have been conjectured towards the extreme. As a result, he couldn''t calm down at all. The pursuit of be-stronger will only be more intense.


    Full of anger, he pulled out kunai from his waist, and he was going to stab his leg... Trying to use this extreme technique to make his legs move and continue to exercise.


    But at this moment, a voice appeared in his mind.


    "What''s wrong? Very unwilling?"


    The kunai, which was about to stab the big leg... stopped momentarily.


    Sasuke mentioned kunai, looking around with caution: "Who?"


    Immediately, the voice just appeared again, and this time with a mocking tone: "What''s the matter? Didn''t you always ask Naruto about me? You forget it so soon?"


    That''s right!


    The voice''s owner is Li Yaoxiang!


    After beingid out for so long, Sasuke''s jealousy towards Naruto has been consciously or unconsciously increased. ws are revealed from time to time so that Sasuke can discover himself so that Naruto would always be stronger than Sasuke. Yes, this day is here!


    No need to say much. Sasuke immediately guessed who the voice was when he heard Li Yaoxiang''s remark! The original expression of vignce turned into great joy in the blink of an eye!


    "Are you Naruto''s big brother? You can make me stronger, right? Come on, teach me!"


    In Sasuke''s perception, Naruto has be so strong because he depends on his mysterious big brother. Now that this mysterious big brother has finally appeared, of course, he will not let go of this opportunity to be stronger!


    He wants to be as strong as Naruto!


    -No!


    He wants to be stronger than Naruto!


    As for Naruto''s mysterious big brother, who is it, what kind of existence is it, and why can hemunicate with him in his own mind... All of this is not something he cares about.


    But...


    The reality is often not as good as imagined.


    Li Yaoxiang''s following sentence made Sasukepletely dumbfounded and immediately said: "I... why should I teach you?"


    Sasuke: ...


    Sasuke stood there stunned.


    He didn''t know how to answer this question for a while.


    His dumbfounded expression soon became stubborn and decisive: "Please teach me be-stronger?! As long as you can make me stronger, I will do whatever you want!"


    "Hehe." Li Yaoxiang sneered and continued, "Just by your strength, what do you think... What value do you have for me?"


    Sasuke was ridiculed by Li Yaoxiang again.


    It''s not that he doesn''t want to refute. But what Li Yaoxiang said is indeed true.


    After all, the owner of this voice; since he can cultivate such a powerful Naruto, his strength will certainly not be worse. This means that, based on his strength alone, Sasuke does not give much help to the owner of this voice.


    Since the voice reluctant to teach him became stronger, Sasuke didn''t want to waste time on him either.


    The tone became cold: "What are you doinging to me? Since you don''t want to teach me be-stronger, please don''t interfere with my exercise!"


    Sasuke immediately decided No matter what the Master of this voice says, he will never answer him even a word!


    But soon, he was pped by reality.


    Because Li Yaoxiang''s following sentence directly made him feel out of control!


    "Do you want revenge?"


    Sasuke said abruptly: "What do you mean?"


    "Literally. Just ask if you want revenge? If you want revenge... I can help you."


    "Oh." Sasuke dismissed, "No need, many thanks for your kindness. I will solve this hatred myself!"


    Li Yaoxiang said: "Ha! It''s up to you? If I told you... your big brother was stronger than Narutost night? Then you still believe that you can take revenge yourself?"


    "It''s impossible-!"


    Sasuke''s reaction was great.


    "Nothing is impossible. Since your big brother can ughter the entire Uchiha n alone, does this not prove his strength? It''s just that you don''t want to face it, and you don''t want to admit this fact, no?"


    This time, Li Yaoxiang touched Sasuke''s pain.


    Sasuke''s expression also became extremely painful.


    After a while, Sasuke endured the ufortable feeling and resented: "What the hell do you want?"

 Chapter 93: Hinata Learned The Truth

    Chapter 93: Hinata Learned The Truth


    "Nothing. As long as you follow my orders to do things in the days toe, then I can promise you that I will definitely let you see the scene of Uchiha Itachi''s death."


    Sasuke jumped in his heart.


    Immediately, there seems to be a weak spot in Li Yaoxiang''s words. Sasuke said with a sneer: "Oh, don''t I have any exploit value for you? If Naruto is in a bad situation right now, why are you not helping him but instead finding me at this time? What do you want me to help you with? What is your purpose?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "This... you don''t need to understand."


    Sasuke froze; his face was as ugly as an eating bug.


    The reality is so cruel.


    Even if Li Yaoxiang didn''t tell him the truth, he was helpless. After all, with his low strength, he really needed the help of Li Yaoxiang toplete his revenge.


    Sasuke, who is arrogant and pampered and unwilling to be with others, turned his thoughts and said badly with a smile: "Are you not afraid that I will tell Naruto about you?"


    As soon as this remark came out, Sasuke suddenly felt breathing difficulties. His whole body is ufortable!


    He just felt his body light, and then there was a scene in front of him that shocked him!


    ''What''


    Was his soul pulled out of his body?!


    That''s right!


    The ability that Li Yaoxiang uses at the moment is the ''Shinigami'' ability that was purchased when the function'' Astral Projection'' was first turned on! At this time, the picture is a bit like the one in the Marvel movie, when doctor strange''s soul was first pulled out by the Ancient One from his body.


    Sasuke only felt that the whole world seemed to stand still.


    ''It''s incredible!''


    And what floated in front of him was Li Yaoxiang, who appeared in a soul state with a hand in his arms while wearing a mask purchased from the system, pulling his soul out!


    Sasuke said with horror, "This... this... you are Naruto''s big brother?"


    Li Yaoxiang did not reply to Sasuke''s question. Instead, he returned to Sasuke''s sentence: "How is it? You still think that you have the opportunity to tell anyone about me?"


    Sasuke, who was in a state of soul, was suddenly weakened when he faced Li Yaoxiang today. He didn''t dare to ridicule Naruto''s mysterious big brother.


    It''s not that he was afraid of death. It''s that he still has to avenge! Can''t just die yet!


    Swallowing his saliva, Sasuke doesn''t want to fall off the topic: "Can you really help me?"


    Li Yaoxiang smiled slightly. He pushed Sasuke''s soul back into his within-the-body.


    This sudden move made Sasuke, who was still in a panic, not respond. He took a few steps back and fell to the ground.


    Immediately, Li Yaoxiang left only one sentence in his mind: "Wait for my orders! When the time is ripe, I will let you see the results you want."


    Next, no matter how Sasuke shouted, he did not get a response from Li Yaoxiang.


    However, this does not calm his mood at all. Because this is the second time in his life that he is so close to death, his feet were still shaking.


    He couldn''t exercise anymore.


    ...


    Hyuga n Residence.


    Inside Hinata''spartment.


    Although the ending is not as good as expected, at least after confirming that Naruto is no longer being imprisoned, Hinata''s heart that had been holding it for the past month, has finally let go of a lot.


    She hadn''t rested a few days ago, and the rushing and cryingst night had already exhausted her.


    After returning home, Hinata quickly fell asleep until dawn.


    At this time, she was enjoying the hearty breakfast prepared by the servant in a happy mood. She hasn''t been so satisfied with eating for a long time.


    She gobbled up the food and ended it with a hup.


    But as soon as this hup sounded, a strange voice suddenly appeared in Hinata''s mind: "What''s the matter? Are you just going to be satisfied with your performance yesterday?"


    Hinata was shocked.


    She stood up and looked around all around, "Who?"


    But she did not get a response from this voice.


    Hinata, who thought she "misheard", sat back slowly with a puzzled expression. But as soon as she sat down, the voice appeared again.


    "Eating that happily- it seems that you really thought that it was your action that saved Naruto?"


    Hinata was shocked and stood up straight again.


    She was very sure this time that she did not hear it wrong!


    There is indeed a voice that echoes in her mind!


    She did not look where the voice came from this time, instead focused on the content of the voice: "What do you mean?"


    "I mean what I said. What you didst night, not only did you not save Naruto but also became a burden for Naruto. Do you understand now?"


    Hinata''s heartbeat became rapid. She didn''t know why the owner of the voice said that. But she was really satisfied with her actionsst night because she prevented everyone from continuing to attack Naruto and restored Naruto''s sense, didn''t she?


    "What''s wrong? Don''t believe what I said? Then, wait. You will know the answer."


    After that, the owner of this voice no longer speaks.


    At this moment, Hyuga Hiashi''s angry roar came suddenly from the living room: "Impossible! I won''t let Hinata go with you! Third-Kage, don''t you think it''s too much?"


    The misty Hinata opened the door to see what happened.


    As soon as she arrived, she saw a kind-faced Third-Hokage, and he was just exining something to her father: "Hiashi, I think... you misunderstood me? I just want to take Hinata as a disciple, and I want to teach her to train personally. I have a good intention. How did it get to your mouth? It became too much?"


    The voice in Hinata''s mind sounded again: "How is it? You wouldn''t be naive enough to think that Third-Hokage is fancying your innate talent enough that he wants to take you as his disciple?"


    The voice in her head directly exined to her: "Obviously, they want to use you to threaten Naruto. Because he knows that Naruto values you... As long as they control you, they don''t need to be afraid that Naruto will not sumb. All you do is just let Naruto escape from the original cage to anotherrger one. And you, Hyuga Hinata! Is a burden to Naruto!"

 Chapter 94: Where To Go For Naruto

    Chapter 94: Where To Go For Naruto


    After this remark finished, there was no more sound in Hinata''s mind.


    At that moment, Hinata, after listening to this remark, her face becamepletely white. Although she is now only 7 years old, it is still easy for her to understand some truth with a bit of reminder.


    The Owner of Voice said that it was indeed true.


    ''How could Third-Hokage want to ept me as a disciple for no reason?''


    After thinking about the reason for the matter, Hinata''s mood was as if struck by lightning.


    Until now, she keeps training hard to chase Naruto''s pace and doesn''t want to be thrown too far by Naruto. But she didn''t expect that not only that she can''t keep up with Naruto''s pace... she is now a burden for Naruto...


    The more she thinks about it, the more it hurts her heart.


    All kinds ofplicated ideas are constantly circling in my mind.


    It was not until Hyuga Hiashi responded to Sarutobi Hiruzen that she recovered from the state of dumbfounded: "Hinata is my daughter, and I will teach her personally, so you don''t have to worry, Hokage!"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen was about to say something. However, it turned out that his goal, Hyuga Hinata, had already appeared not far away.


    He subconsciously skipped Hyuuga Hiashi and directly asked Hinata: "Hinata, is it? This Grandpa Hokage looks at your innate talent, and it is good. I want to teach you personally. What do you think?"


    Hyuuga Hiashi was shocked, only to find the arrival of the daughter. His face turned dark on the spot: "Hinata, you go back to the room first, do note out without my orders!"


    Unfortunately, Hinata did not at all obey Hyuga Hiashi''s instructions. Her expression of innocence suddenly became unprecedentedly firm: "Needless to say, Father. I want to be stronger-, I want to learn from Lord-Hokage!"


    Hyuga Hiashi froze.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen smiled with satisfaction.


    ....


    Two dayster, in the Academy.


    Although Hinata followed Sarutobi Hiruzen, it was only a part of every day to listen to the teaching of the old man, Sarutobi Hiruzen.


    Her daily life has not changed.


    After all, the main purpose of Sarutobi Hiruzen is to increase feelings with Hinata and control her behind the scenes. He will not go too far without being spelled by circumstances.


    So normally, when she needs to go to school, she still has to go to school.


    The only difference is that now she and Sasuke are separated by an empty seat.


    That empty seat is where Naruto used to sit.


    Even now that Naruto is gone, the two of them have retained this position with tacit understanding.


    During this period, many students tried toe close to them and wanted to get in touch with them. These people were sent by Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu. But they were all ignored by both of them.


    ....


    And today, when the school bell rang, Iruka brought in a transfer student.


    The personing is exactly Sai!


    After introducing the student who was in the shift, Iruka told Sai to find a ce by himself.


    But Sai was very natural. An "official" smile came to Hinata and Sasuke: "Sorry, is there anyone sitting next to you? Can I sit here?"


    Sai pointed to Naruto''s position.


    Hinata and Sasuke didn''t care about him at all.


    Usually, at this time, in this situation, the people whoe to talk will be very interesting to leave, as are the people sent by Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu. However, Sai did not immediately leave. Instead, he leaned over and whispered in Sasuke''s ear: "I''m like you, I''m doing things for that person..."


    Sai stood up straight again, smiling at Sasuke, and sat down.


    Sasuke, hearing this startled, then coldly snorted. He gave up a position and let Sai walk in.


    This scene made Hinata slightly surprised but said nothing.


    And Sai sat down in Naruto''s position without a trace of politeness and introduced himself to Hinata and Sasuke: "Hello, you can call me Sai, and I am pleased to work with you."


    That''s right.


    The arrival of Sai is the new ''mission'' that Shimura Danzo arranged for him! Simr to the purpose of Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu, it is also to send people close to Hinata so that they can hold Hinata in their hands in the future.


    As for Sasuke...


    Basically, as long as Uchiha Itachi is not dead one day, they will not confront Sasuke. After all, Uchiha Itachi''s strength still exists. Whether it is Sarutobi Hiruzen or the other three elders, they will not dare to mess up.


    Li Yaoxiang, who originally wanted to put Sai in Root to facilitate his future nning, changed the n and saw Sai smoothly join the small group of Hinata and Sasuke so that theyout in the future will be easier.


    The scenes that appeared before are the same! With Li Yaoxiang involved this time.


    Whether it is Sai, Sasuke, or Hinata, Li Yaoxiang hasmunicated with them in their consciousness. His main body has never appeared in front of people.


    In addition to Sai and Sasuke knowing that he is Naruto''s big brother, Hinata even knows who the voice owner is.


    All of this is, of course, for the preparation of darkening Naruto in the future.


    If there is no ident Only when the time is ripe soon will Naruto once again fall into the endless abyss because of all theyout of Li Yaoxiang today!


    ...


    The sun was scorching.


    Naruto''s eyes are godless, and his lips are dry and peeling; he took a twig in his hand and used it as a cane, walking feebly on a desert. After returning to human form, he has been walking in the direction guided by Li Yaoxiang and finally arrived in this desert.


    Because of the process, there was no rest.


    In addition to the newly emerging symptoms, his appearance still maintains the same situation as when he was imprisoned. His whole body is still full of dirty stench.


    It''s just that all this is no longer important in his eyes.


    At this time, he just wanted to have a cup of water to clear his thirst, as long as there was food that could be eaten. It doesn''t matter.


    Even those hungry things in captivity, he doesn''t mind.


    Because he is too hungry, too thirsty, and too tired.


    As he walked, Naruto breathing heavily asked in his head: "Big brother... Are you sure about this direction? Why haven''t I seen any silhouette after I walked so long?"


    The zing sun... Even the field of his view became slightly blurred and distorted.


    He didn''t wait for Li Yaoxiang''s response. He snapped and fell on the sand.


    It was at this moment, in the mist, he suddenly heard a conversation in his ear.


    "Look, look, someone seems to have passed out."


    "Go, let''s go and see."


    Thest scene Naruto saw was a ninja with a headband walking towards him before losing consciousness. He couldn''t see the ninja''s face clearly, but he vaguely saw that the headband was engraved with an hourss pattern...

 Chapter 95: Arrangements After Waking Up

    Chapter 95: Arrangements After Waking Up


    One dayter.


    Naruto''s whole body has been cleaned a lot. Obviously, it has been groomed.


    At the moment, he is lying on a bed...


    In the misty room, he heard two people talking in the room.


    "This is the child you brought back?" This person''s tone sounded harsh, and he seemed dissatisfied with Naruto''s arrival.


    "Yes, Lord-Kazekage, I saw him fainting in the desert, so I brought him back."


    That''s right!


    Li Yaoxiang''s destination for Naruto this time is Land-of-Wind''s Suna Vige! Of course, he who is familiar with Hokage plots is impossible to forget major events like the Konoha Crush n!


    Not forgetting the various disputes between Suna Vige and Konoha Vige!


    Li Yaoxiang led Naruto to take the initiative to participate in this matter because he knew that as long as Hinata and Sasuke remained in Konoha, sooner orter, Naruto would go back.


    That being the case. Of course, Li Yaoxiang will not miss this opportunity. A series of darkening ns have beenid out And this time, he will make Naruto feel that the darkness is not just in Konoha!


    Even the outside world is equally dark!


    He can no longer escape from reality!


    Drive him to face reality!


    But having said that, Li Yaoxiang didn''t expect an acquaintance to rescue Naruto to Suna Vige.


    In the room is the Kazekage Rasa and Gaara''s mentor, Baki.


    [*TL note: Rasa (Rasa) was the Fourth Kazekage (Yondaime Kazekage, literally meaning: Fourth Wind Shadow) of Sunagakure. Renowned for his ability to use Gold Dust, Rasa''s reign as Kazekage was marked by his frequent quelling of rampages by the One-Tailed Shukaku, which he had sealed into his youngest son, Gaara.]


    But Baki and Gaara and the others are exactly one of the links used by Li Yaoxiang to darken Naruto.


    There is nothing to say anymore. The next thing to do is to continue to observe their situation. Look at the development of things, whether it is exactly the same as he expected!


    Just as expected, when Baki answered Kazekage Rasa''s question, Rasa immediately expressed dissatisfaction: "Do you think the vige has that much money? In this period, you have to raise one more idler?"


    "Lord-Kazekage, please rest assured that this person will be left to me and will not harm the interests of the vige," Baki exined quickly.


    "Hmph! Isn''t your wealth given to you by the vige?" Rasa asked.


    "But..."


    Rasa waved his hand and interrupted: "No need to say more. Not to mention that there is a problem with this child''s identity. The vige will not support the idlers. If you want to keep him, it is not impossible. Let him be apanion for Gaara. Whether he can survive or not depends on his luck."


    "Lord-Kazekage, Lord-Kazekage..."


    Rasa left the room directly without giving Baki any chance to refuse.


    Rasa''s intentions are also obvious. Gaara in this period of time is very unstable. It can be said that as long as the child in front of him is left beside Gaara, then there is no difference between this child and death.


    Dead ends all one''s troubles.


    ''No need to waste the vige''s food.''


    ''If he doesn''t die.''


    ''That''s impossible.''


    Rasa never thought about this probability.


    Baki, who is a tutor of Gaara and for the others, certainly understands this truth. Seeing Lord-Kazekage''s resolute attitude, Baki''splexion became veryplicated. He kindly saved and brought the child back. But he didn''t expect this result.


    With aplex face looking towards Naruto lying on the bed... Baki said softly, "Don''t pretend.. you are already awake, right?"


    Yes.


    As soon as Naruto''s consciousness regained, his eyelids blinked inadvertently, and Baki had discovered this, And of course, Rasa too.


    Rasa''s relentless conversation was specifically told to Naruto.


    When Naruto learned that his ''pretending to sleep'' had been realized by others, he opened his eyes awkwardly. He slowly sat up, not knowing what to say.


    Baki continued: "It''s been a long time since you''ve eaten, right? The food has been prepared, and please finish it before you talk."


    Baki pointed to a te of food beside the bed.


    Not too much. Just a few pieces of bread. A bowl of hot soup. And a little meat.


    Naruto instantly rejoiced!


    Immediately crawled to the head of the bed and wolfed down one''s food.


    Ate too fast and choked.


    The ''gu lu, gu lu'' sound of drinking soup.


    After being imprisoned for so long, even for such nd food, for Naruto, it is the most delicious thing on earth. It has been a long time since he had eaten such a delicious meal.


    He instantly forgets everything. In his mind, in the field of view, this te of food is the only thing in front of him.


    It didn''t take long.


    Naruto soon ate up the food in front of him and finally rxed.


    After recovering, he turned his attention to Baki this time and scratched his head. "Haha, I''m sorry, I haven''t eaten for too long, so..."


    Baki did not take this matter seriously. He waved his hand and returned to the topic: "It''s okay, these foods were originally prepared for you. Did you hear the conversation just now? This is Suna Vige, and we will not ept idlers. If you''re alright, then you can leave."


    After Naruto heard this, he suddenly climbed up nervously: "No, no, no, I don''t have anywhere to go. You just take me in. I am not an idler. I am also a ninja, and I can do missions to feed myself!"


    For Naruto to say that he is a ninja, Baki was not surprised.


    After all, within the human body, with or without Chakra, he can easily sense it.


    As soon as he came back to rescue Naruto, he knew that Naruto, a child, was not an ordinary person.


    "What''s your name? Why is there such a difficult situation in the desert where you fainted?" Baki said.


    Naruto was a little nervous but still very obedient. He told him what Li Yaoxiang taught him: "My name is Naruto. Someone wanted to kill me, so I fled to the desert, and I am now homeless. Can you take me in?"


    Baki was slightly dissatisfied with Naruto''s answer.


    Originally he wanted to ask more carefully. When the words came to his mouth, he squeezed back into his stomach. The opportunity to leave has already been given to him, and it is no wonder that the child in front of him does not understand how to cherish it.


    Anyway, the current Naruto, in Baki''s eyes, looks like a dead person. Baki doesn''t n to get to the bottom of it anymore.


    ''It is right to follow the instructions of Lord-Kazekage directly.''


    As for the child in front of him, whether he can survive or not depends on his fortune.


    "The clothes are there. Put them on. Just follow me, and I will take you to meet your future partners." Baki pointed to the Sand Ninja outfit aside.


    Naruto turned to look. The current Naruto, except for the pants, is naked. He did not say much, and Naruto picked up the clothes and just put them on.


    The style of clothing is simr to that of Gaara and Kankuro, the set inside the cloak. The whole thing is dark, nothing special.


    [*TL note: Kankur (Kankur) is a shinobi of Sunagakure and the second eldest of the Three Sand Siblings. While initially terrified of his younger brother, Kankur woulde to believe in him and his dream to be the Kazekage like their father before them and would be one of Gaara''s most loyal protectors, confidant and bodyguard.]


    Of course, Baki will not prepare him with a Suna Ninja headband.


    After putting on the clothes, Naruto followed Baki''s pace and left the room...

 Chapter 96: The Darkness Is Not Only Konoha

    Chapter 96: The Darkness Is Not Only Konoha


    Suna Vige, on the street.


    Along the way, Naruto, who followed behind Baki, nced around.


    As he walked away, Naruto noticed that the direction he was heading was less popted. In the end, the entire street or nearby buildings were gone.


    The whole environment is so quiet that even the sound of sand blown by the wind can be heard.


    But Naruto, with his simple mind, didn''t think so much.


    At this time, he is full of longing for the future.


    Konoha is dark enough, but he doesn''t believe that even the outside world is so dark! Isn''t Suna Vige good? He wasatose and was rescued by them.


    He got a free meal. Able to meet the first new friend outside the vige.


    Naruto, who has regained his life, feels excited to think about it!


    When walking, he felt all light and red... an impatient look.


    Naruto''s attitude and behavior, of course, made Baki realize it. But at this moment, his heart is veryplicated. Firstly, he didn''t want the child who had just returned from him in front of him to die in vain. Second, in the future, he hopes to change Gaara through Naruto so that Gaara will no longer be a ughterer like that.


    Struggling for a long time, he chose Gaara in the end.


    Although the chances were not great, he still wanted to try.


    .....


    Not much time, Baki took Naruto to a grander building.


    This building is the residence of Gaara.


    Gaara''s situation can be said to be more serious than Naruto in the original work. None of the people in the vige dare to approach him and dare to live near him. As a result, there was no one near Gaara''s residence.


    They entered the room.


    Naruto''s head stretched out impatiently from the side of Baki''s big legs. He wanted to see what his so-called new partner looked like.


    But what wasing was an attack of sand.


    This sudden attack surprised Naruto, who waspletely unprepared.


    However, it was quickly blocked by Baki, and the sand was scattered with one hand.


    The shattered sand pushed back to the attacker''s direction, one by one.


    Immediately, Naruto heard an icy, childish voice: "Who is he? What are you doing with him?"


    They didn''t wait for Baki to answer. Another person in the house asked first: "Baki-sensei, is he the child you rescued yesterday?"


    The person who spoke was Temari carrying a big fan.


    There is also Kankuro in the room sitting in the corner and does not dare to move around.


    Unlike Konoha Vige, due to insufficient vige funding, they can only take the elite route. There were not many new ninjas every year.


    Because of this, most of their teaching methods are taught in advance by Jonin leading the team. As a result, even if Gaara is different from Temari and Kankuro, they are all led by Baki.


    Baki nodded: "Well, he was the child I rescued yesterday. Remember, he is different from other people, and he will be your new partner in the future. Gaara, remember to get along well with others, you know?"


    The ''others'' that Baki said were the assassins that Rasa kept sending to assassinate Gaara.


    Therefore, Gaara''s first reaction when he saw a stranger was an attack. After all, in his cognition, apart from those familiar, no one would dare to approach himself.


    Naruto did not care too much about the attack just now.


    In fact, he does not need Baki to block him. He wants to cope with the wave of attacks just now with his current strength, but he is startled.


    He recovered. Immediately, he introduced himself energetically: "Hello everyone! My name is... My name is Naruto. I will be 7 years old this year! Pleased to meet you!"


    A warm wee did not appear at all.


    Naruto was stunned. He didn''t expect it would be so difficult to make friends outside.


    No one responded.


    Temari and Kankuro, with apassionate look, looked towards Naruto.


    Gaara coldly snorted, turning his head, not even looking at Naruto.


    The atmosphere is awkward enough.


    However, since Gaara did not continue to attack Naruto, it was already good news for Baki. He could not help raising a glimmer of hope.


    The tone is no longer so serious: "Okay. Naruto, you will live here in the future. Everyone must get along well, you know?"


    Baki left after that. He ns to leave some space for them to get acquainted and get along well.


    After Baki left, Temari took a down-looking gesture and said frankly: "Why are you staying here?"


    Naruto, who has a problem with emotional intelligence, does not understand the meaning of Temari''s words, saying very honestly: "I have no ce to go. I hope to stay here and have a new life."


    "Oh, then good luck. You''re gonna need it." Temari left the house with sarcasm. She thought to herself secretly: ''You are going to die anyway.''


    Kankuro''s emotions tensed immediately, and he didn''t intend to stay here to dy Naruto''s continued death. He made an excuse early: "Uh... I have something to do, and I will go first."


    Only Gaara and Naruto are left.


    Of course, Naruto, who is full of longing for a new life, also aims at the only one left in the house, which is Gaara. Naruto just took a step forward and wanted to go to ''acquainted''.


    But when he heard Gaara coldly say: "Don''te near me! I will kill you one more step!"


    Naruto: ...


    Of course, Naruto, who was ckened to 41% by Li Yaoxiang, wouldn''t think like in the original work. In order to make friends, he smiled and attracted people and went to kneel and lick others.


    However, since the panda in front of him didn''t want to make friends with him, Naruto was not reluctant. He turned around and looked out the door.


    He looked at this beautiful new environment and new scenery!


    Although there is no prosperity like in Konoha Vige, Naruto is delighted with this new life feeling and believes that he can definitely live here! He doesn''t need to face the dark side of Konoha Vige!


    But just when Naruto breathed deeply, intending to take a good breath of the air in the new environment, Li Yaoxiang''s voice sounded in his mind: "What''s wrong? Is the lesson learned in Konoha not enough? Are you still so naive? Do you think the world outside is as beautiful as you think? You thought they brought you here because of good intentions?"


    Naruto tightened his heart. He hesitantly asked: "Big brother, it should not be as terrifying as you said... right? I fell in the desert, didn''t that Baki uncle immediately save me? Give me food. Give me new clothes. Now he introduced me to new friends. Isn''t that good? There should be no problem... right?"

 Chapter 97: Grow, Never forget the original intention

    Chapter 97: Grow, Never forget the original intention


    "''No problem''? Hehe, don''t you find it strange? This big Suna Vige; the ce more secluded and uninhabited?" Li Yaoxiang taunted.


    Naruto is only 7 years old.


    In this life, although his strength is more powerful than original work, he has never been in the vige, he has no life experience at all, nor has he seen local conditions and customs outside the vige.


    So, for the situation of Gaara''s residence, he is not taking it too seriously. He misunderstood that all this was normal.


    But now, with this mention, it makes him emotionally stretched taut, but he still does not want to believe that every ce is so dark.


    From the bottom of his heart, he thought Suna Vige was very good.


    After all, they did save him.


    Now they''re even willing to ept him.


    Others have done nothing, so just doubt them to have an ulterior motive, no matter how they say, can''t be justified?


    "Big brother... Aren''t you thinking too much? Perhaps Suna Vige is not as dark as you think? Didn''t they just want me to meet a new friend?" Naruto questioned.


    Question... refusal...


    Hearing Naruto questioning himself and refuting him, Li Yaoxiang couldn''t help but sink. In the past, although Naruto also questioned him and refuted him, at the time, it was at most nothing serious. Deep in his heart, he still believes in Li Yaoxiang, his big brother.


    But now? He questioned.


    Rebuttal.


    Li Yaoxiang can feel from Naruto''s attitude that Naruto did not believe his judgment on Suna Vige this time.


    Naruto had learned to observe. Learned to think No longer blindly believe the words of Li Yaoxiang, the big brother.


    In other words, Naruto, who used to be ignorant, has gradually grown up.


    It won''t be easy to fool him as before.


    This is good news and bad news for Li Yaoxiang.


    The good news is that his younger brother has finally grown up, which makes him as an elder brother feel very gratified.


    The bad news is that it also means that if he wants to darken Naruto in the future, the difficulty will be even higher! It is no longer a matter of just saying a few words casually.


    But no matter how difficult the road ahead is... Li Yaoxiang will not give up!


    After all, this is a goal he firmly wants to aplish after he recognizes the younger brother Naruto from the bottom of his heart! No longer just a simple darkening mission of the system!


    He wants Naruto to get rid of Asura''s shackles!


    Get rid of the Otsutsuki npletely!


    No longer at the mercy of anyone!


    Including himself!


    The reason is simple.


    Because he didn''t want his brother, he would fight for Konoha all his life!


    Why should his younger brother live so tiredly?


    After working hard for more than ten years, he finally became Hokage. He put all his thoughts, time, and everything else for the vige and even the most important family members he has forgotten. He even forgot his own original intention!


    Is this the Uzumaki Naruto who knows and desires the most to have a ''home''?


    No!


    Li Yaoxiang is sure that is a no!


    So, in any case, beforepleting the mission and leaving Naruto world, Li Yaoxiang will certainly help the younger brother, solve all the troubles of this world, and let Naruto truly have a happy life!


    Of course, this is also an afterthought.


    The most important thing at the moment is how to solve this situation.


    Obviously, the difficulty of darkening has increased again.


    This situation was not unforeseen by Li Yaoxiang. After all, people will always grow up, and Naruto is certainly not an exception.


    This is always the case when people grow up. Even parents and seniors, no matter how they persuade them, won''t feel pain if they don''t hit their heads and bleed.


    Nowadays, Naruto is in this period.


    In this case, he can only harden your heart and act ording to the n that was prepared before, let Naruto hit the board, and feel more pain!


    Li Yaoxiang said: "They want you to meet a new partner, yes. But... Have you ever thought about this so-called new partner?"


    Naruto''s eyes nced back at Gaara and hesitated slightly: "It shouldn''t be... right?"


    Li Yaoxiang sneered and said: "But if I tell you that he is just like you, within his body also has a monster? And his monster is not only uncontrolled, but the child himself is a ughtering madman who loves to kill? Do you still think this is just a mere acquaintance?"


    Naruto stared at Gaara in disbelief and swallowed. He was not worried about Gaara''s monster, and after all, he also has a big fox. There is nothing good about making a fuss about nothing.


    ''But the question is, if this child is really as dangerous as the big brother said, then why should they bring me to this child?''


    ''Since they saved me, why not care about my life and death?''


    It seemed that Li Yaoxiang, who was puzzled by Naruto, didn''t need Naruto to start to talk to ask him directly and answered: "What''s wrong? Curious why they saved you and let you die?"


    Naruto, in reality, subconsciously nodded.


    Li Yaoxiang began to tell Naruto about Gaara''s experience. Including Gaara''s birth, why they sealed the monster in his body. Including Gaara''s mother, all his love for him.


    Hearing this warm story, Naruto couldn''t help but feel a little warmth and smile.


    Soon, the style changed!


    The next thing is about the vige and Gaara''s father treating Gaara''s cruel side!


    Including the biological father constantly sending people to assassinate his own!


    Including the most trusted uncle, the words that cheated Gaara before he died!


    Then there is the exnation why Gaara became such a murderer.


    In short, all the information about Gaara, Li Yaoxiang was instilled into Naruto''s mind at one time. Hearing Naruto was dumbfounded!


    "How? Now you still believe this world is as beautiful as you think? Now, do you still think that Suna Vige let youe here just as a mere meeting partner?"


    Naruto doesn''t know the truth yet? Does it matter whether you die or not? For Suna Vige, does it matter?


    All they paid was a te of food and a set of clothes. If he died, he would die, and there was no loss for them. But if he doesn''t die, can he sessfully improve Gaara''s character? Then, they make a lot of money, don''t they?


    But Naruto did not focus on the crafty plots and machinations of Suna Vige.


    After listening to Gaara''s experience, Naruto focused on the guy who was almost the same]e him.


    ''Not the same at all!''


    ''I am much happier than the person in front of me!''


    At least he had parents who loved him, and his father was not trying to assassinate him. At least he now has a big brother, Hinata, Sasuke.


    ''But what about this person?''


    ''His father wanted to kill him.''


    ''Not only did people in the whole vige hate him, but even his brother and sister were afraid of him.''


    Naruto''s heart couldn''t help but feelpassion towards Gaara. Even if he knew Suna Vige harbored evil intentions, he raised a thought, trying to change Gaara.


    Because he understands how Gaara feels today He hopes to help Gaara out of this shadow.


    But when he just took a step forward, Li Yaoxiang, who seemed to see through his thoughts, stopped him again...

 Chapter 98: Own Choice

    Chapter 98: Own Choice


    "What''s wrong? Do you want to help him?"


    Naruto nodded.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Have you ever thought about how to help him?"


    Naruto was taken aback.


    Indeed, as Li Yaoxiang said, he has the heart to help Gaara. Still, he never thought about how to help, just thinking about going forward.


    He eventually turned to Li Yaoxiang for help: "Big brother, I want to help him. I understand how he feels now, and I hope to help him out of the shadows and let him know the truth. Do you have any solution?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "My stupid younger brother--. A kind-hearted child. You want to help him, but have you ever thought about your current situation? Don''t forget. You are a Jinchuriki of Konoha. What if your identity is discovered? Or do you think that as long as you help Gaara, the vige will celebrate you, thank you very much, and wee you warmly?"


    Naruto was dumbfounded and unable to reply to Li Yaoxiang.


    Seeing Naruto''s gesture, Li Yaoxiang in the space of consciousness, still unable to bear shaking his head and sighing.


    ''Naruto... Naruto''


    ''When will you learn to be selfish?''


    ''Think more about yourself?''


    It''s a n. In fact, from the beginning to the end, in every n, Li Yaoxiang only ys the role of a guide, and the final decision is always Naruto himself. If it weren''t for Naruto''s innocence and stupidity, he would not fall into Li Yaoxiang''s ns time and time again.


    Just like now.


    Based on Naruto''s unwilling expression today, Li Yaoxiang knew that Naruto would certainly be unable to bear to help Gaara. Because of this decision, he would also fall into Li Yaoxiang''s darkening n again.


    As a result, he again suffered bitterly and was beaten badly by the reality of this world.


    There is no need for Li Yaoxiang to add oil and vinegar.


    ....


    In the following time, the house is still very quiet.


    Perhaps it is rare that there are children of the same age who are not afraid of him. Perhaps it is because Naruto is not worth his action. In short, Gaara did not attack Naruto on the night when Naruto arrived.


    The two sides did not step forward to talk to the other side.


    It seems that a boundary has been drawn naturally in this house, without interfering with each other.


    .....


    The next morning.


    Naruto slept sweetly and snored unscrupulously. Gaara couldn''t help controlling the sand anymore and attacked Naruto!


    Just as the sand was about to attack Naruto, Naruto woke up suddenly.


    Immediately several backflips in a row, evading this wave of attacks.


    After getting upset, he burst out and scolded: "What are you doing?! Are you an idiot?! I''m sleeping, and you attack me for no reason?!"


    Just as short as Naruto, ruthless Gaara said: "You''re snoring, noisy!"


    Not waiting for Naruto to respond, the sand attacked again.


    Next, Naruto relied on his ''main body mastery'' to dodge. He has not forgotten the instructions of the big brother and must never reveal his identity. So, he dares not use Rasengan, or Shadow Clone, and so on.


    Baki came and screamed at the door: "Enough! What are you doing?! Isn''t it asking you to get along well? Gaara, he is different from ''other people''. Can''t you try to get along?"


    Gaara coldly snorted.


    The sand was recovered.


    Naruto first red at Gaara fiercely, then said to Baki with a smile: "Good morning! Uncle Baki!"


    Baki was surprised. He didn''t think that Naruto would survive until now.


    This gave him a glimmer of hope.


    "Okay, Naruto. Don''t be frivolous anymore. Since you want to stay in the vige, then you have to abide by the vige''s rules. The vige does not support idlers, you know?" Baki said.


    Naruto respected: "Yes! Uncle Baki! I will definitelyplete the mission and feed myself!"


    Baki handed out a bundle of scrolls and said, "This is the B-Rank Mission. Naruto, you join Gaara''s team toplete this mission together!"


    This so-called B-Rank Mission was originally intended for Gaara.


    Baki had never thought that Naruto would survive to the present. Therefore, Naruto was added to this mission in order to increase the rtionship between the two.


    After Gaara heard it, he immediately coldly said: "I refuse! I canplete the mission by myself. Why should I let him join? Are you not afraid that I will kill him?"


    Naruto''s face was slightly ugly. Because Baki''s decision meant that the people in Suna Vige did not take Naruto''s safety seriously, but he said nothing.


    It''s just that he was disappointed with Suna Vige and Uncle Baki, who rescued him.


    Baki coldly snorted, and there was no room for Gaara to choose: "Hmph, how the vige assigns tasks is not up to you. But don''t forget thest time you did the task alone, how many people you killed and brought to the vige. What trouble. For this mission, Temari and Kankuro will also be together. Don''tin so much."


    Baki threw the scroll directly to Gaara.


    There is no intention to tell Naruto the content of the mission. After all, Naruto, in his eyes, is nothing more than a ''school boy''.


    After a while, Temari and Kankuro also came to Gaara''s house.


    Seeing Naruto''s an instant, both people were surprised at the same time.


    Temari was even more surprised towards Naruto. Who knows if it''s admiration or sarcasm: "I didn''t think you''d survive."


    Kankuro also gave Naruto a thumbs up, then followed Temari and met Gaara together.


    Gaara handed the scroll to Temari.


    Temari read it and handed the scroll to Kankuro again.


    Kankuro directly destroyed the scroll after reading it. Nothing to show Naruto at all.


    After that, several people leaped out of the door one after another, just leaving a voice: "Come on."


    After seeing this series of actions, Naruto was utterly irritated,pletely unaware, and he was still in a state of being surrounded by others. He clenched his teeth and followed along.


    Several people have been leaping without stopping.


    Naruto was able to keep up with their speed and surprised them slightly.


    But this surprise was just a sh. After all, keeping up with speed doesn''t mean anything, not to mention they haven''t fully elerated.


    In this way, this group of four people has been leaping for about 1-2 hours, and finally arrived at a mountain vige...

 Chapter 99: Brother and Sisters Request

    Chapter 99: Brother and Sister''s Request


    They arrived at a vi.


    Temari extends her hand and blocks Naruto''s path.


    Naruto: "Why?"


    Temari looked down at Naruto: "It''s enough for Gaara toplete the mission alone. Let''s wait here."


    Naruto had already seen Gaara leap toward the vi alone. He asked, "What is this mission?"


    Temari lightly nced at Naruto and finally exined: "The owner of the vi; it is our goal this time. Wait a minute. Gaara will soonplete the mission."


    Immediately afterward, the three people who were left behind did not speak anymore.


    Waiting...


    Temari came suddenly and said: "Your name is Naruto, right? I don''t know how you survived. Over the years, no one can get along with Gaara for more than one day... since you can survive. It means that Gaara didn''t really want to kill you..."


    Speaking of it, Temari paused for a moment.


    Naruto did not respond, silently waiting for her to speak.


    It''s just that Naruto was taken aback by Temari''s next move! Originally in a condescending posture, suddenly the scene changed, and she knelt in front of Naruto on one knee and asked in a begging tone: "Naruto, as Gaara''s sister, please. Please, you must stay with Gaara."


    During the time to go to the vi, Temari didn''t think much about Naruto''s survival. After all, Gaara, the younger brother, has no idea how long he has not been with other people, let alone living in the same house with strangers.


    This shocked and surprised her.


    At the same time, she also saw a glimmer of hope to change the status quo of her younger brother.


    If you really want to choose between a stranger and your younger brother, Temari chooses the younger brother.


    For the younger brother, she can put down her pride.


    So, this scene appeared before him.


    She hopes that Naruto will get along well with Gaara. She hopes to resolve the misunderstanding between the two. She hopes Naruto can change her younger brother''s view of this World. ---No longer hate everyone.


    Kankuro, seeing his sister like this, hesitated for a moment. He also came to Naruto on one knee: "Please, please."


    The sudden scene scared Naruto enough, even hurriedly said: "What are you doing?"


    Temari and Kankuro; the sister and brother, looked at each other. They stood up then began to exin to Naruto their intentions and Gaara''s experience. They hope Naruto can understand Gaara''s experience, understand Gaara''s character, and get along well with Gaara.


    The general message was no different from what Li Yaoxiang said.


    It''s just that the message he got this time was from Gaara''s elder sister''s mouth and said it in person, which made the trace of doubts in Naruto''s mind that was originally therepletely disappear!


    ''Really!''


    ''Big brother didn''t lie!''


    ''Everything that big brother said is true!''


    After confirming these messages by Temari, Naruto was not only unhappy, but his emotions were moreplicated. The matter was soplex that he didn''t know what to do.


    He wanted to help Gaara.


    He wanted to help someone who had the same experience as him.


    But the question is, if he helps, how safe is he?


    ''People in Suna Vige, as the big brother said, would they be so cruel and ruthless to forget favors and vite justice?''


    He hoped that Big Brother''s guess was false. He hoped that Suna Vige would be as beautiful as he imagined. Uncle Baki rescued him out of kindness, and Suna Vige took him in with good intentions.


    Then, out of good intentions, to repay the life-saving grace of Uncle Baki, and in return for the graciousness of Suna Vige, he helped Gaara out of the shadows. In the end, Gaara sessfully stepped out of the shadows.


    The perfect ending. Everyone has a happy life together.


    The problem is...


    Is there really such a beautiful thing in this World?


    Experience told him that this was not the first time he was beaten. After leaving Konoha, he didn''t want to face those disgusting ''darkness'' anymore!


    Suddenly all kinds of frightened screams came from the mountain vige, asking for help.


    "AHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH!"


    "AH-!!! HELP!-"


    "PLEASE, PLEASE, PLEASE LET US GO!"


    These screams suddenly brought Naruto''s thoughts back to reality.


    Naruto''s eyes widened: "What''s wrong?"


    "Hey ~" Temari sighed and somewhat helplessly said, "Just like I told you just now, Gaara today is full of resentment towards the entire World. He needs to use a ughter to vent these emotions."


    Naruto soon understood what was going on. He turned his head and looked incredibly towards Temari: "This... this... how can you do this! Our mission is not just the master of the mountain?! Why kill? Those innocent people!"


    At this moment, Kankuro on the side also echoed: "Gaara''s emotions are very unstable. He was fighting with the monster inside of him all the time. If there is no track to vent his emotions and it causes the monster to go berserk, the consequences will only be more serious. You should wait here first. When he vents any more than this, we will stop him. Our mission is to follow Gaara and to prevent him from ughtering too much."


    After hearing it...


    ''It''s unbelievable in this world, there are such ridiculous and absurd things!''


    ''What kind of joke is this?''


    ''In order to vent their emotions and kill people indiscriminately?''


    Naruto couldn''t help but suffocate: "Damn it!"


    Then he rushed down!


    His speed was fast. Even Temari and Kankuro couldn''t stop him.


    Two people also red anxiously and quickly caught up!


    ......


    After a while, Naruto feels Gaara''s Chakra. He came to the ce where Gaara is.


    It was the scene that made him extremely angry!


    Gaara was operating two balls of sand, respectively, two guys were wearing servant clothes, suspended in midair, and their expressions were grim and excited!


    Seeing this, Naruto mmed, "Stop it!"


    He even raised his fist and rushed towards Gaara!


    A light sound for ''pa!''.


    Before Naruto''s fist hit Gaara, Gaara''s self-defending sand blocked his punch.


    At the same time, he also sessfully attracted Gaara''s attention!


    The sand that had tightened the necks of the two servants rxed and sessfully recovered the servant who had been killed and immediately fled the scene by crawling.


    Gaara turned his head slowly, revealing his expression with a half tongue and a crazy expression, moved towards Naruto said, "You want to die too?"

 Chapter 100: Jinchurikis Helplessness

    Chapter 100: Jinchuriki''s Helplessness


    Seeing Gaara''s crazy expression, Naruto was startled at first, and then his eyes became firm. He left a sentence in his mind, ''Big brother, please allow me to be willful onest time!''


    Then he rushed towards Gaara!


    That''s right!


    After seeing Gaara''s look, Naruto decided in an instant!


    He wants to help Gaara!


    Help Gaara, who has the same experience as him, get out of the shadows!


    ..


    Soon, the two people started fighting.


    Instantly, numerous afterimages of Naruto shed!


    Naruto used his extreme speed, kept changing positions, trying to attack from all angles! The speed is so fast that even Gaara''s self-defense sands are forced only to defend, unable to capture Naruto''s trace!


    And Naruto''s attack, every punch, every foot, broke through the sand and attacked all parts of Gaara''s body!


    This sudden scene made Gaara shocked and excited at the same time!


    ''Absolute Defense!''


    ''Hahahaha!''


    ''He actually cracked my Absolute Defense!''


    ''Hahahaha!''


    The stronger the strength disyed by Naruto, the more excited Gaara is!


    ''How long has it been?''


    ''Hahaha!''


    ''How long?''


    ''How long has there never been a person who is worth killing?!''


    The current Naruto in Gaara''s eyes is his long-awaited prey!


    But what Gaara didn''t know was. His expression, looking into Naruto''s eyes, would only make Naruto even angrier!


    ''Why is Gaara so angry!''


    ''Why vent the pain on others!''


    Naruto''s expression is condensed, and his hands do a hand seal!


    ''Multi Shadow Clone Jutsu!''


    Instantly, Shadow Clones filled with Naruto!


    This group of Shadow Clones, under Gaara''s surprised eyes, all attacked him together! Gaara clenched his teeth. He was using Absolute Defense to wrap the sand into a ball shape and wrap himself in it.


    Naruto taunted: "What''s the matter? Don''t you like killing people very much? Now that you don''t fight well, and you will just hide inside like a tortoise? Or will you only bully weaklings?!"


    The surroundings are full of harsh humm!


    That''s the voice of dozens of Shadow Clones condensing Rasengans together!


    At this moment, Temari and Kankuro finally arrived at the scene. They were shocked to see Gaara use Absolute Defense.


    Unexpectedly, the child that Baki took in would be so powerful! Even Gaara is not his opponent, forcing Gaara only to defend himself.


    Surprised.


    Temari also reacted quickly: "Naruto, don''t fight anymore."


    But Naruto just nced at Temari, not at all heeding her advice!


    Dozens of Shadow Clones, each holding a Rasengan, attacked like this!


    Every time the Rasengans hit thatyer of sand wall, the attack power is strong. It''d break the sand into a big hole! As soon as the sand tried to heal the gap, another Rasengan woulde again.


    Gaara, the proud Absolute Defense, was beaten naked by Naruto... stood there defenseless. Gaara''s eyes widened, and he looked incredulously at the scene in front of him.


    But this shocked expression just passed away. Gaara quickly regained that grim and excited look: "Okay... good... you forced me..."


    Naruto didn''t wait for him to finish talking. Naruto''s main body rushed past in a sh! Punched Gaara to the ground with one punch!


    Naruto, full of anger, had no intention of stopping. He stepped forward to grasp Gaara''s cor and lifted him, and punched him again!


    The impact is tremendous.


    Not only did the sand shell covering Gaara fall one by one, but even the corners of Gaara''s mouth were bleeding!


    But this is not over yet!


    Gaara''s automatic defense sand just wanted to return to defense.


    Even more powerful and evil chakras radiated from Naruto''s body, which was shocked and dispersed!


    That''s right! This is the result of Naruto using the Chakra coat without the slightest hesitation!


    Naruto, at the moment, the inside of his eyeballs bes a straight line, just like the eyes of a fox!


    The two tiger teeth are getting longer and sharper.


    The form of animalization is undoubtedly revealed!


    In front of this scene, everyone was shocked to see the scene! Even Gaara was surprised that there was only a nk in his head! But Naruto ignored their shocked eyes and continued to carry Gaara''s cor.


    Looking straight at Gaara, he shouted angrily: "How is it! Do you think you''re the only one with a monster in your body?! You thought it was only you in the world who suffers from this kind of thing?! Like you, I was also used by the vige as a tool! I was even imprisoned! I live a life that is not as good as a pig and a dog! Now I have to be forced to escape from the vige and be homeless! But am I like you?! Can you solve the problem by killing people like this?!"


    Quiet


    The scene became silent...


    When Naruto spoke of his situation, the three people present were shocked to speak for a long time.


    Naruto, breathing heavily, pushed Gaara to the ground and looked at Gaara with a look of hatred for iron and steel.


    [*TL note: hn ti b chng gng; literally to hate iron for not bing steel=to feel resentful towards somebody for failing to meet expectations and impatient to see improvement.]


    Gaara looked at Naruto in his eyes, no longer so ferocious, no longer so bloodthirsty. He didn''t expect that this child of his age would have the same experience as him. The original shocked expression turned to apathetic eyes, like a soulless shell, with a helpless tone: "But... but I... but what do I do? I can''t rest. As soon as I rest, the monster will run out."


    Gaara''s emotions became even more broken.


    He moved towards Naruto with a hysterical cry: "Teach me, what should I do?! You can rest peacefully every day! But for me?! I can''t even think about taking a good rest!"


    While shouting, Gaara couldn''t help but choke, and tears filled his eyes.


    The two cherish each othersympathy for the other side. But neither side can solve their problems.


    They really felt the helplessness of the other side.


    Temari and Kankuro are also sad for their younger brother and Naruto, a child who has suffered the same as the younger brother.


    But neither of them can do anything.


    Unable to change the current difficulties encountered by the two.


    At this moment, Naruto, whose anger faded a lot, broke the solemn atmosphere on the scene and said lightly: "As long as I help you solve the problem, you won''t kill people casually in the future?"

 Chapter 101: Paper Cant Wrap Up A Fire

    Chapter 101: Paper Can''t Wrap Up A Fire


    Hearing Naruto''s remark, Temari, Kankuro, Gaara were all stunned on the spot. The meaning in Naruto''s words was clear, but they didn''t understand.


    ''How to help Gaara solve the problem?''


    ''Is it possible?''


    Their vige tried everything to solve the problem. And the monster will notpromise. ''He'' will definitely try to interfere with Gaara by any means.


    In the eyes of three people dumbfounded, Naruto slowly walked over to Gaara and said gently: "I will help you seal that monster. As long as the seal is there, he will not be able to interfere in the future. Rx. Don''t resist."


    That''s right.


    The method Naruto said was the Four-Tetragram Seal that the big brother taught him not long ago!


    At the same time, this is the main reason why Li Yaoxiang had to guide Naruto to learn Sealing Jutsu! Because he knew that his purpose was to guide Naruto to Suna Vige!


    Because he knew that next, Naruto would meet Gaara!


    The result that Li Yaoxiang wants to guide is like the scene in front of him.


    Seize the right time to let Naruto know Gaara''s life and experience!


    Give Naruto a condition to help Gaara solve the problem!


    Then, he waited for Naruto to make his own choice.


    Choose whether to help Gaara or not.


    If Naruto chooses not to help, there will not be a series of things going on. But if Naruto gives up on his own safety, he must bear the consequences!


    Naruto has never changed. In the end, he chose to help Gaara solve this problem.


    Under the eyes of three people dumbfounded, he stretched out 5 fingers and carved the Four-Tetragram Seal on Gaara''s belly.


    Just as expected.


    When Gaara''s belly was engraved with the Four-Tetragram Seal, he could no longer feel the spiritual interference from the monster within. The entire world seemed to be a lot quieter.


    He stood up slowly, looking incredibly at The Four-Tetragram Seal. He can''t believe this peaceful world.


    Temari and Kankuro also rushed up at this time: "How is it? How is it? Gaara, did it work?"


    Gaara looked up towards big brother and the elder sister. The tears of joy in the corner of his eyes slipped involuntarily. The whole expression was so excited that he could not speak, and he could only nod.


    Getting a positive answer from the younger brother, Temari was so moved that her eyes were moist. Kankuro was not as exaggerated as Temari, but his eyes were red.


    Everyone took Gaara''s little hand and didn''t speak.


    In this scene, Naruto was envious, and an idea inexplicably arose in his heart: ''If big brother is not just in my mind... that''s fine.''


    Three people stared at each other for a while.


    Three people from the recovery came to Naruto and thanked Naruto.


    Temari: "Thank you, Naruto. I sincerely thank you for my younger brother."


    Kankuro seemed to remember something and suddenly cried out in surprise: "No, wait. The monster was sealed- doesn''t it mean that the vige can no longer use the power of that monster?"


    "If this were understood by father, they would not agree to this matter!"


    Temari, hearing this, also became sad.


    Gaara''splexion sank.


    But soon, Naruto''s next words again made Gaara''s gloomy face disappear: "This isn''t a big problem. I will pass on the Four-Tetragram Seal and the Lock Tail Seal to you. Then you can release it at any time. If the monster messes with you again, you can just suppress him again, right?"


    Naruto said these words indifferently. It sounds as if he were delivering food.


    But in Temari and the others'' ears, it was shocking!


    ''As a ninja, wouldn''t he know the importance of Ninjutsu inheritance?''


    ''If it can suppress Tailed Beast''s Sealing Jutsu. It must be the most precious Ninjutsu. How can ordinary people just casually teach it to others?''


    Naruto was willing to help Gaara solve the problem, giving a precious inheritance without saying or asking anything. This really shocked them, and they were very moved.


    Naruto was so embarrassed by the eyes of several people, scratching his head: "Haha, don''t you look at me like this, okay? Isn''t it just some Ninjutsu seal? After teaching it to you, I won''t lose anything, and I won''t be missing a piece of meat. And, don''t worry! In my entire n, I''m the only one left. Even if I teach Ninjutsu to any of you, no one will scold me."


    Even more, Naruto asks for nothing in return.


    The more the three of them felt sorry.


    But there is no way for them to give any actualpensation. They can only decide secretly; they should treat Naruto better in the future... After all, this Sealing Jutsu is impossible for them to refuse.


    ....


    After Naruto taught Gaara the secret of Sealing Jutsu, they set off and left the vi.


    But just after leaving the mountain, Naruto suddenly stopped and said to three people: "I''m very happy to know you; I won''t go back with you."


    As soon as this remark came out, Gaara''s reaction was great.


    This is a friend he met with great difficulty.


    How can he just leave?


    He subconsciously cried out in surprise: "Why? Why don''t you go back with us?"


    Naruto said with a bitter smile: "I believe you also know that the Sealing Jutsu I teach you is the inheritance of the Uzumaki n. And my real name is Uzumaki Naruto. At the same time, I''m also Jinchuriki of Konoha Vige. As far as I know, the rtionship between your vige and Konoha Vige is not good. Now that my identity has been exposed, how can Ie back?"


    Temari: "Where are you going in the future?"


    "Where do I go?" Naruto sighed, looking at the distant view, "I don''t know where to go."


    After the three heard, they all showed a lost look.


    Not much time, Kankuro got an idea. He excitedly said: "Naruto, you can also stay in our vige! As long as we don''t tell your vige your secret, won''t it?" He looked excitedly towards Temari and Gaara.


    Temari was motionless. She just froze for a moment.


    But Gaara heard Kankuro''s proposal. Even if he insisted on pretending to be ruthless, he still could not bear to show a trace of expectation and excitement.


    This expression, for Temari, who is an elder sister, of course, was also convinced.


    Seeing the younger brother have such a huge change, Temari also smiled.


    Immediately she made a im and made a decision for the two younger brothers, said to Naruto with a slight smile: "Naruto, you can go back with us with confidence. Your affairs; we will not leak it out."


    Naruto, who was originally prepared to wander, was overjoyed.


    He did not think too much.


    With a happy ''um'', he immediately epted it.


    A line of four people continued their journey back.


    ......


    For a long time toe.


    Naruto''s identity has not been revealed.


    Therefore, he lived a carefree life with Gaara and co. in Suna Vige.


    Unfortunately...


    The thoughts of these little kids are still too naive.


    Paper still can''t wrap the fire. Suna Vige''s high level still found clues from the life of the two and confirmed the identity of Naruto...


    [*TL note: Zh bo b zh hu=Paper can''t wrap up a fire=How true: it will burn itself out as truth will eventually reveal itself despite cover-ups.]

 Chapter 102: The High-Level Meeting in Suna Village

    Chapter 102: The High-Level Meeting in Suna Vige


    Time flies and the years are like a shuttle.


    ...


    One yearter, Suna Vige.


    Kazekage floor, in Conference Hall.


    At the conference hall at this moment, the atmosphere is extra solemn!


    In front of the round table in the center of the Conference Hall, in addition to sitting around Kazekage Rasa and 8 core members of Suna Vige, even the retired Chiyo the mother inw and her younger brother Ebizo were invited toe here.


    [*TL note: Ebiz (Ebiz), called Honoured Grandfather Ebiz (Ebiz-jiisama) by the Suna vigers, is highly revered in Sunagakure. He and his older sister, Chiyo, are known as the Honoured Siblings (Gokydai).


    Chiyo (Chiyo) was a retired counsellor of Sunagakure. She was also a famed puppeteer, the leader of Sunagakure''s Puppet Brigade, and a medical-nin.]


    The reason why they gathered here so grandly today is to discuss the anomalies recently discovered in Gaara.


    Among the 8 core staff, it can be divided into two groups.


    4 people are conservatives. 4 people are radicals.


    At the moment, Kazekage Rasa asked with serious questions: "Is the news urate? The reason why Gaara has changed so much recently is because someone has added ayer of Sealing Jutsu to him?"


    Conservatives: "Yes, Lord-Kazekage. We have sent someone to confirm again. Moreover, when the Young Master implemented the mission, we also found that this Sealing Jutsu waspletely in the hands of the Young Master. Young Master can unzip and seal at any time and use the power of One-Tails at will."


    Kazekage Rasa: "Can you confirm what Sealing Jutsu this is? Also, who is the teacher of the Sealing Jutsu?"


    Conservatives: "It should be the child Baki rescued from the beginning, and since the one who has had the most contact with the Young Master is only this child. We also sent people to investigate. If there is no ident, it is the Four-Tetragram Seal belonging to the Uzumaki n."


    Everyone on the scene had already automatically supplemented Naruto''s identity. Most people subconsciously believe that Naruto is just an orphan of the Uzumaki n. Not too much to make a fuss about nothing.


    Conservatives: "Lord-Kazekage, we also found an important message. This self-proimed child of Naruto may be a Jinchuriki. And most likely, he is Jinchuriki of Konoha Vige."


    There was an uproar instantly.


    Either radicals. Or conservatives.


    All discussed this topic one after another.


    "How is it possible! How can Jinchuriki of Konohae here?"


    "Yes! It''s impossible! Have you truly checked it out?"


    "Do you know how serious this is?! How can you just talk casually?"


    Seeing some turbulence on the scene, Kazekage Rasa vigorously pped the desk, making a loud noise, and everyone was quiet.


    Rasa stared at the conservative seriously: "Are you sure? The child staying beside Gaara is really the Jinchuuriki of Konoha?"


    This conservative seems like he couldn''t stand the pressure of everyone.


    But in the end, he still clenched his teeth, repeated: "Yes, Lord-Kazekage! We are pretty sure that that child is Jinchuriki of Konoha! When he wasmissioning with Gaara, our people had sensed the demon fox''s chakra!"


    With this conservative''s re-guarantee.


    The time before Konoha''s Kyuubi berserk and run away, and Naruto''s wandering in the desert were linked together.


    This time, everyone in the Conference Hall no longer doubts this news.


    What was transformed was the overjoy of the audience.


    Radicals: "Great! We don''t need to worry about Konoha''s strength bing stronger! Now their Jinchuriki is in our hands. As long as we kill him and then publish this news, Konoha will definitely suffer heavy losses!"


    The radicals gave a proposal.


    Many people shouted and praised.


    Kazekage Rasa, who was also delighted, was breathless, but there was no expression of excitement. He turned his head and asked the mother-inw Chiyo: "Mother Chiyo, this thing... what do you think?"


    Although Chiyo''s mother-inw retired, her prestige is still here.


    Hearing Lord-Kazekage asking about Chiyo''s mother-inw''s opinion, everyone naturally stopped talking and turned her attention to his mother-inw, waiting for her response.


    Mother-inw Chiyo sipped the cup of hot tea on the table, indifferently said: "Not good. Killing Konoha''s strength will not only weaken Konoha''s strength but also increase their hatred of us. There is no benefit to the Suna Vige, and the biggest beneficiary is the other three Great Ninja Vige. Maybe they will wait to watch our good show."


    Everyone was blinded by excitement. It suddenly dawned on them, and the thought of killing Naruto was stopped one after another.


    Conservatives: "So... what if we use this Kyuubi Jinchuriki for natural resources from Konoha?"


    Everyone looked again and fell simultaneously on Mother Chiyo.


    However, this time Ebizo started to talk: "For us, although there are some benefits, but little natural resources; Konoha would not care about giving up some of it. We still can''t solve the problem of Konoha''s increasing strength."


    Everyone became silent again.


    At this time, Rasa seemed to have decided in his heart; his eyes firmly said: "Everyone remembers a previously discussed n to invade Konoha? Wreak havoc once and greatly damage their strength?"


    Rasa said the n.


    Of course, it is the ''Konoha Crush n''.


    However, at this time, they have not finalized this n. Still in the discussion period and secretly looking for allies.


    Conservatives: "Lord-Kazekage, absolutely not! This n will damage not only the strength of Konoha Vige but also our people!"


    Rasa squeezed his hand and signaled the conservative to calm down: "I didn''t say that the n will be implemented now. Didn''t everyone hesitate before? Now that Konoha''s Jinchuriki is in hand, what is there to hesitate? We can continue to seek allies to minimize losses secretly. Even if there is something wrong, we can still use that Jinchuriki to make up for the loss after the war, right?"


    When this proposal came out, everyone in the room lit up.


    Even the veteran thousand-generation mother-inw Chiyo, and Ebizo, did not raise any objections.


    Everyone looked at each other. Give a satisfied smile.


    Conservatives: "I second!"


    Radicals: "I second!"


    All core personnel, one after another, agreed with the matter.


    Conservatives: "So... About Konoha Jinchuriki, what should we do now?"


    Radicals: "Hmph! A demon fox in our territory, what big waves can it make? You can send someone to imprison him immediately!"


    The conservatives ridiculed: "Detain him? Did you forget the Young Master''s Sealing Jutsu, which was taught by the Jinchuriki? What do we use to detain him? Even if there is this strength to suppress him, how long can we suppress it? All manpower and material resources are put on him. You want the vige to be destroyed?"


    The radicals were sprayed dumbstruck and unable to reply.


    Rasa came out to make a round: "Okay, okay. How it was, how it is now. Try not to beat the grass to scare the snake. And don''t let him discover our n. When implementing the n, just block the message and let him be in the vige. After discussing the conditions of exchange with Konoha, send him back directly."


    Rasa nced at his mother-inw Chiyo, trying to ask his mother-inw to give some advice to see if his decision had anypses.


    The mother-inw of the thousand generations made no sound and nodded.


    Rasa then let go of the big stone in his heart.

 Chapter 103: Five Years Later

    Chapter 103: Five Years Later


    Time flies. Years are like a shuttle.


    In a sh, 5 years have passed.


    Land-of-Snow.


    Sasuke''s Scarlet''s Three-Tomoe Sharingan stared coldly at the already unmanageable storm on the ground, that is, from the Naruto the Movie: Ninja sh in the Land of Snow.


    Immediately, the Three-Tomoe Sharingan faded slowly.


    And he said coldly: "Do you know why he wants us to take this mission?"


    Although Sasuke''s gaze was staring at Yukie Fujikaze, of course, the unconscious Yukie Fujikaze can''t answer, Sai answered him.


    Sai still with the official smile: "Do you think he will tell me why?"


    Hearing this answer, Sasuke''s emotions became unstable on the spot.


    "Damn it!" The whole person was trembling with anger.


    The reason why his emotions are so agitated is also very simple. It is because, in the past few years, Li Yaoxiang said in his mouth, "Follow my instruction," and there is no news at all.


    He did not contact them. Nor did he arrange any mission for them. But finally, he contacted them and asked them to take over the mission of "protecting Yukie Fujikaze."


    No reason was left.


    This led to Sasuke, who wanted to take revenge. His heart was even more irritable, wishing that Li Yaoxiang would appear in front of him immediately. Then Li Yaoxiang would be killed to death!


    Sasuke almost filled his head with anger.


    Finally couldn''t help asking Sai the answer he most wanted to know in the past few years: "Why would you do things for him? What conditions did he promise you?"


    He didn''t dare to ask before because the scene where Li Yaoxiang took out his soul at that time really gave Sasuke a big shadow. But he gradually found out that Li Yaoxiang didn''t seem to restrain him too much. His courage became bigger and bigger, and now with anger, he can''t control that much.


    Saiughed but did not conceal: "He promised to resurrect someone for me."


    Sasuke was shocked!


    The anger dissipated in an instant!


    "He'' can actually bring people back to life?!''


    In an instant, numerous thoughts crossed his mind, and his heart was veryplicated.


    At this time, too, Kakashi''s shout came from behind: "Sasuke! Sai! Hinata! Clean up, now that the mission isplete, it''s time to go back!"


    That''s right.


    Kakashi also became Team -7''s mentor.


    However, unlike original work, Might Guy and the others have not begged Sarutobi Hiruzen to deploy Kakashi as a team leader in his life. But after he learned the truth himself, he gradually hated working for Sarutobi Hiruzen and the others, so he automatically applied for this position.


    Not far away, Hinata was soothing Yukie Fujikaze.


    After hearing Kakashi''s call,


    As she turned around, the gentle expression that had originally been facing Yukie Fujikaze instantly disappeared and became indifferent.


    Since Naruto left Konoha and Hinata studied with Sarutobi Hiruzen, Hinata seemed to have changed. Every time she appeared in front of others, she would be extremely indifferent.


    Sasuke is busy bing-stronger. She is also bing-strong.


    There is no contact between the two parties. Even after being assigned to the same team after ninja Academy Graduation, the three had littlemunication.


    One with an official smile.


    One with aplex expression.


    One with a cold expression.


    A group of three people gathered in front of Kakashi.


    Kakashi nced at three people, and his heart was filled with helplessness, and he did not know whether it was a problem with his teaching or what was going on. But the three students in front of him, whether it is strength or teamwork, are impable.


    But he always felt that he couldn''t get in. He sighed silently in his heart.


    Kakashi: "After going back this time, the vige will hold arge-scale Chunin Exams. Your strength will be enough. I will just help you apply for the qualification. After you go back, you should speed up your preparations. "


    ....


    After handling Land-of-Snow matters, Kakashi led three people back to Konoha.


    The secret mastermind Li Yaoxiang, who caused this situation, did not know anything about what happened to Land-of-Snow. He didn''t have that leisure to pay attention to what happened to Land-of-Snow.


    In the beginning, the two chess pieces of Sai and Sasuke were intentionally left in Konoha.


    One of the reasons is to prevent this from happening.


    Although he was transmigrated to Naruto World, Li Yaoxiang could not confirm whether the movie version that he saw before transmigrating would appear in this world. It is also impossible to confirm which movie version will appear.


    So, just in case, to avoid Naruto''s changes that would cause a mess in the whole world ahead of time, which would affect his n.


    Since it was discovered that Yukie Fujikaze appeared in Konoha, Li Yaoxiang did not mind arranging Sasuke and the others to solve this problem.


    As for the result, he didn''t have to watch it.


    Hinata, Sasuke, Sai, three people who are stronger than in the original work. Li Yaoxiang still has a certain degree of confidence in them.


    ...


    Somewhere near Land-of-Earth.


    Since Gaara''s mood improved, his treatment in Suna Vige has gradually turned upside down. Everyone gradually trusted him.


    The reason why he appeared near this vi this time was that he and Naruto received the mission to assassinate the owner of the vi. There is no need for Temari and Kankuro "apaniment".


    It is different from the Assassination Mission at that time. The owner at this time clearly has prepared. He also went to Iwa(Stone) Vige specially and invited two Chunin from Iwa Vige to protect himself.


    This led to uninformed Naruto and Gaara, as soon as they arrived, were sensed by their chakra as soon as they arrived and attacked.


    The two easily avoided the first wave of enemy attacks. Retreated into the jungle behind them.


    Standing on a tree root. Communicating while looking towards the enemy yfully.


    Gaara: "Which one do you want?"


    Naruto: "Whichever. It''s over anyway, isn''t it?"


    This undisguised contempt made the two Chunin from Iwa Viges even angrier. One person had an ''earth dragon technique'', and he attacked the two of them!


    The gourd on the back of Gaara quickly drilled out to measure the sand, and he met the earth dragon on the other side. With no difficulty, he resisted this seemingly powerful attack of the earth dragon.


    Naruto made a seal with one hand.


    Immediately spit out a ''Wind-Style. Great Breakthrough!''


    Simrly, give the earth dragon on the other side a crack with no difficulty.


    Followed by the two sides fighting each other!


    The sand of the sea confronts the other side.


    Naruto summoned ''Multi Shadow Clone'' and attacked the opponent!


    The 2 Chunin of Iwa Vige, who know no match for the other side, also used an Earth-style Jutsu at the same time, raised a lot of rocks on the ground, surrounded themselves for protection.


    Unfortunately, they think they can breathe this move Earth-Style defense.


    In the eyes of Naruto and Gaara, they were dismissive.


    Gaara stretched out his right hand. The enemy''s location suddenly became a sandy area. Immediately afterward, the Earth-Style cast by the enemy and the other side was swept into the sand at speed visible with the naked eye!


    Naruto is certainly not to be outdone. His right hand buzzed, and a Rasengan was held in his hand in the blink of an eye.


    But this is not over yet! Naruto continues to incorporate Wind Attribute Chakra into Rasengan!


    After a while, a ''Wind-Style Rasengan'' appeared in Naruto''s hands.


    He grinned and attacked the enemy!


    BANG!


    LONG!


    LONG!


    The st sounded, smoke billowing.


    When the smoke dissipated, the rock that protected Stone Ninja had already shattered, leaving only residue. And the Iwa Ninjas were hit and flew to a distance of some meters away, not knowing their life or death.


    Only 2 people remained.


    Gaara: "Naruto, you are slow."


    Naruto: "Are you awake? Isn''t it because you''re slower?"


    In the past few years, the two people have regarded each other aspetitors. Topensate Naruto for teaching them Sealing Jutsu, Gaara and others alsomunicated with courtesy. They taught a lot of Wind Style to Naruto.


    This is why the current Naruto was able to master the Ninjutsu such as Wind-Style .Rasengan and Wind-Style .Great Breakthrough.


    The two people do not n to dy time anymore.


    Several sessive leaps, they entered the mountain vige.


    And they soon discovered the target of this trip.


    ....


    At this moment, the owner of the mountain vige, who was sitting on the ground with a terrified face, kept begging for mercy: "Please... Please... Please... Please, don''t... don''t kill me. I will give you whatever you want. Money, money, I have money. How much do they give to you? I will double it!"


    When Ninja receives the Assassination Mission, they will often encounter this situation. It is a pity thatpared to money, each Great Ninja Vige pays more attention to reputation.


    If the cement is stinky, their vige doesn''t want someone to entrust them to the mission.


    So often, they encounter this situation, and they will choose to ignore it.


    Gaara turned his head to look at Naruto: "You or me?"


    Naruto frowned.


    After turning his head, he no longer looked towards the target who fell on the ground and kept begging for mercy.


    Gaara sighed: "Naruto, as a ninja, you will have to make a choice one day sooner orter. No matter whether the goal is good or bad, as long as you ept themission, you have to do it."


    While talking, arge pile of sand has already climbed onto the owner of the mountain and wrapped him whole.


    Gaara''s outstretched palm clenched mercilessly.


    ''AH-!


    A scream, and then blood spattered from the sand.


    This is not the first time Naruto has resisted. Compared to the original work, Sarutobi Hiruzen will only constantly select and cultivate selectively in every performance of the Ninja. Suna Vige undoubtedly does not have so many scruples.


    If they have insufficient manpower, they will only keep selecting in each performance of Ninja and then train them selectively.


    Of course, even if Naruto did not perform well, they don''t care too much.


    After all, Naruto has his value.


    .....


    After the mission, the two returned to Suna Vige together.


    Naruto didn''t struggle with that matter for too long. The reason is that he understands and understands it very well, but he can''t do anything about it.


    He just returned to Suna Vige.


    The two people who wanted to go to dinner together were stopped by the oing Baki: "Gaara, Lord-Kazekage has something to find you, so you can see him now."


    Gaara gave Naruto a sorry look.


    Naruto said indifferently: "It''s okay, go ahead first. If it''s too long, then I''ll eat alone."


    Baki led Gaara and ran towards the Kazekage building together.


    ......


    Not long after, 2 people came to the Kazekage room.


    Rasa nced at Baki, and Baki spontaneously exited the Kazekage room.


    Gaara felt that the atmosphere was not right, frowned slightly, and said first: "Father, why are you looking for me in such a hurry?"


    Gaara of this life, because he met Naruto in advance, his heart was opened.


    Coupled with learning Sealing Jutsu, no longer disturbed by One-Tails, his mood and character have be much better.


    Because of this, Rasa no longer needs to send someone to assassinate Gaara. There is no need to hide Gaara from the truth about her mother and her uncle.


    Although the rtionship between the two is not much better, it is no longer as rigid as it used to be.


    Rasa takes Gaara, the child, seriously, as always: "I''m calling you to tell you that Konoha will hold a jointrge-scale Chunin Exams over time. When the timees, you, Temari, and Kankuro will also be representatives of Suna Vige to participate in this Chunin Exams."


    Gaara said, "Understood, I will spare no effort." And then wanted to leave here. After all, he still has nothing to talk about with this father, who regards him as a tool.


    Rasa shouted and stopped him again: "Wait, I haven''t finished talking."


    Gaara was slightly puzzled but still stopped.


    He turned around to face Rasa and waited for Rasa to continue.


    Rasa: "Participating in Chunin Exams is just superficial action, and the real n is our Suna Vige. In thisrge-scale event, we will join forces with Hidden Viges to do devastating destruction of Konoha!"


    Rasa stared at Gaara''s expression.


    Seeing that his mood swings are not too big, he continued: "Before that, we will leave Naruto in the vige. When the matter is over, we will use Naruto to negotiate with Konoha in exchange for more natural resources!"


    Gaara, hearing this, was stunned on the spot.


    When he heard Rasa say he was going to attack Konoha, Gaara felt a little bad in his heart. But he reluctantly can still suppress his emotions.


    But when he heard Rasa say that he would use Naruto to negotiate with Konoha, Gaara could no longer calm down!


    ''Does this mean that Naruto''s identity is revealed by the vige?!''


    Gaara responded with a great response: "How can this be?! Naruto helped me so much and taught us the Sealing Jutsu! How can we treat him like this?"


    Seeing such a big reaction from Gaara, Rasa was very dissatisfied. He suddenly shouted: "Gaara!"


    With this anger, Gaara reacted violently and stopped.


    Rasa reprimanded: "Remember your identity! You are the sessor of Kazekage! You should think about the vige everywhere! Don''t you know the vige''s issue?! What is the most beneficial to the vige, don''t you understand?! Or do you want to see Konoha increasingly be stronger, and then the ninjas in the vige will die in their hands one by one!"


    A series of scolding.


    Gaara was speechless.


    Rasa did not intend to continue to waste time on Gaara. He said coldly: "I don''t have time to talk with you anymore. I''ll have an appointment with the other Hidden Vigester about the various deployments of this n. I''m going out now. I hope you will not let me down- let the vige down!"


    Finished.


    Rasa crossed Gaara, leaving the Kazekage room, leaving the stunned Gaara alone in it...

 Chapter 104: The Light in the Darkness

    Chapter 104: The Light in the Darkness


    Land-of-Wind, on a huge rock in a desert.


    At that moment, on the giant rock, Kabuto, Orochimaru, and Kimimaro were standing there. They looked down on the three corpses lying on the sand.


    That''s right!


    The plot is exactly simr to the original work.


    The three corpses lying on the sand are Kazekage Rasa and his two entourages.


    After saying goodbye to Gaara, Rasa came to the appointed ce and wanted to talk to Orochimaru about the various deployments of the Konoha Crush n. During the detailed discussion, the two parties had a very good talk, harmonious and smooth.


    Almost as long as Rasa puts forward any suggestions, Orochimaru will readily agree and cooperate very well.


    Rasa put down the boulder in his heart. As long as they follow the n, the biggest beneficiary can be said to be Suna Vige.


    Rasa didn''t expect that just when he was very satisfied and just about to leave, this Orochimaru, who seemed to want to take revenge on Konoha, actuallyunched a sneak attack on him.


    He didn''t understand why he died.


    Why did Orochimaru kill him?


    Are the goals and interests of both parties the same?


    It''s just this answer; he will never know. In thest scene in his vision, two of his followers were attacked by others, showed an unwilling look, and died in the end.


    His strength is so strong that he can subdue the Kazekage of One-Tailed Shukaku with his own power. He didn''t even show his full strength, so he died unjustly.


    Yakushi-Kabuto, standing next to Orochimaru, asked at this time: "Don''t you want to destroy Konoha? There is a strong Kazekage as an ally, isn''t it better? Why did you kill him?"


    The Yakushi-Kabuto of this period has notpletely surrendered to Orochimaru. Although Shimura Danzo issued the order, it was Orochimaru who could kill dozens of orphans.


    Yakushi-Kabuto wanted to kill Danzo.


    Yakushi-Kabuto also wanted to kill Orochimaru.


    But he didn''t have this strength.


    Orochimaru doesn''t mind putting a "time bomb" on his side, giving him a chance of revenge, so Yakushi-Kabuto was willingly used by Orochimaru.


    In the original work, Yakushi-Kabuto even once wanted to go to the ward to assassinate Sasuke for disgusting Orochimaru. But in the end, he gave up.


    Today, when he is facing Orochimaru, he has always been questioning to confirm Orochimaru''s ideas. ---Confirms whether Orochimaru really wants to destroy Konoha, giving him the opportunity to retaliate against Danzo and take revenge on Konoha.


    Orochimaru certainly knows that thought. He just didn''t care about Yakushi-Kabuto''s evil intent.


    Just like in the original work, in Orochimaru''s eyes, Yakushi-Kabuto''s strength is onlyparable with Kakashi, which poses no threat to him at all.


    He doesn''t mind Yakushi-Kabuto''s probing attitude.


    Orochimaru licked the corner of his mouth and yed with the taste: "Don''t you think he talks too much? I still prefer to be the one who is in control."


    Yakushi-Kabuto''s eyes slightly narrowed.


    No more questions. But at this moment, strange apuse suddenly appeared in Orochimaru''s mind!


    PA!


    PA!


    PA!


    The sudden sound made Orochimaru alert!


    Even the stance is a little different. He ced one hand on his back, ready to do a hand seal to escape at any time. A hand is ced in front of him, ready to make a move at any time.


    Looking alertly at all around, and carefully sensing whether there are Chakra fluctuations in all around!


    It is a pity that no matter how he observes, there are only yellow sands around him, and there is no movement.


    When the apuse was over, a weird sarcasm appeared: "What a traitor who loves the vige."


    Realizing that something is wrong with Orochimaru, Kimimaro asked carefully, "Lord Orochimaru, what''s wrong?"


    Yakushi-Kabuto, on the side, also observed him.


    However, Orochimaru ignored them but continued to wait for the appearance of strange sounds. Just as expected, the strange owner of sound did not disappoint him.


    In Orochimaru''s mind, the sound of the other side quickly sounded again.


    "Stop looking around. You can''t find me. Also, you only need to think in your mind tomunicate with me directly." Li Yaoxiang said.


    Orochimaru: "Who are you?"


    "Me?" Li Yaoxiang yed with the taste. "You just treat me as someone... who likes to watch the performance of the ''Rebel who loves the vige''."


    "Oh, I don''t understand what you mean." Orochimaru sneered.


    "Ha, it doesn''t matter if I don''t understand. I''ll give you a breakdown. Em... what do you say? As Konoha''s traitor, the ridiculous thing is that everything you do is beneficial to Konoha. Why is it so strange? The Daimyo asked the Konoha Vige to disband the guards. We all know they are the Twelve Guardians of Ninja, and you went to assassinate them. And you just happened to be the son of your former teacher. Uchiha Itachi poses a threat to Konoha. You happen to pass by, so you go and sneak attack him. You can''t kill him, so you are eager to seize Uchiha Sasuke instead and ns to shift Uchiha Itachi''s sight from the vige to yourself. Now, this is even more strange! The mouth says Konoha Crush n, yet you killed your strong ally who wanted to destroy Konoha. Orochimaru, ah... Orochimaru, you said ridiculous?"


    A series of mockery.


    Orochimaru did not reveal a weak spot. He coldly said: "Your imagination is very rich. You''re looking for me just to say these silly things?"


    "Since you don''t want to admit it, I won''t force it." At this point, Li Yaoxiang''s tone suddenly became overbearing, "I''ll go straight to the subject. I''m here to inform you, give up Uchiha Sasuke, and he is my goal."


    Hearing this, Orochimaru, in reality, finally had a touch of expression on his face.


    It''s just that this kind of moving color is just a sh.


    Soon, he stretched out his disgusting tongue, licking the corner of his mouth, and said in a yful tone in his mind: "Oh, you said I n to seize Sasuke, to help Konoha, to shift Uchiha Itachi''s sight to me. Could it be... Are you? Are you from Konoha?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "For whatever reason, you don''t have to understand."


    "..." For a moment of silence, Orochimaru continued, "What if I don''t want to?"


    After saying this to the probe, Orochimaru waited but did not see Li Yaoxiang''s reply.


    Just when he thought that Li Yaoxiang was just a "paper tiger" who had learned some special ninjutsu, Kimimaro, who had shown Orochimaru full respect, suddenly patted him on the shoulder and said strangely with a slight smile: "Then I can only feel sorry for Konoha, losing your rebellious forbearance."


    [*TL note: Kimimaro (Kimimaro) was the sole survivor of the Kaguya n. Upon dedicating his life to Orochimaru, he became the leader of the formerly-named Sound Five]


    Not only Orochimaru, but even Yakushi-Kabuto also shed away, far away from this weird Kimimaro!


    Everyone was alert and stared at this with vignce. Not only was imposing-manner different, but even his voice had changed.


    Seeing ''Kimimaro'' facing him with a slight smile: "What''s wrong? Do you think that I only have one ability?"


    At this time Orochimaru,plexion became an ugly pole. He clearly sensed that the person in front of him could bring him a great threat! But he still took a clear stand, clenched the teeth, and said: "I will not give up."


    Orochimaru did not say what he would not give up on, but Li Yaoxiang certainly knew that what Orochimaru said would not give up on; he would not give up Sasuke.


    In front of Yakushi-Kabuto, the two people are like exchanging dumb words.


    Li Yaoxiang was not surprised by Orochimaru''s answer. If he were intimidated so easily, he would not be Orochimaru.


    ''Kimimaro'' shrugged: "Then it depends on the ability. If you have the ability to persuade him to leave with you, I will not stop you. But if you dare to use your little means... Then don''t me me for breaking the rules!"


    Speaking the words'' break the rules'', Li Yaoxiang''s imposing-manner burst out! Suddenly, there was a gust of wind around him!


    Orochimaru and Yakushi-Kabuto squinted.


    When this gust of wind receded, Orochimaru, who looked nothing on the surface, was actually cold and sweaty on his back. Li Yaoxiang gave him the feeling that imposing-manners alone are more powerful than Hanzo from the Ame Vige!


    But Orochimaru still pretended to be casual. "Then it''s a deal."


    After responding to this sentence, the ''Kimimaro'', which was originally the murderous aura, became instantly confused. Looking at his own hands and the scene in front of him, he had no idea what was going on.


    "Lord Orochimaru, this..."


    Orochimaru shed and came to Kimimaro: "Did you feel anything special?"


    Kimimaro: "Special... feel? I... I am not sure. Just a moment ago, my consciousness was blurred. When I was awake again, I found that everyone''s position was different."


    Orochimaru, hearing this, eyes narrowed. Behind him, Yakushi-Kabuto didn''t ask, but he was also looking thoughtful.


    ..


    Li Yaoxiang''s soul has already left the scene.


    He appeared here this time to give Orochimaru a dismounting power so he wouldn''t fight Sasuke. Although the effect is not obvious, it is enough.


    As long as Orochimaru didn''t curse-seal Sasuke, he naturally had a way to keep Sasuke.


    At the same time, there is no need to waste too much attention on Sasuke.


    As for the probe, it''s to probe Orochimaru''s love for Konoha.


    It is to confirm the position of the real Orochimaru. After all, Orochimaru''s actions in the original work are really not in line withmon sense. He said that he wanted to destroy Konoha. But in fact, it did not do anything harmful to Konoha.


    On the surface, it is to seize Sasuke and his Sharingan. But the behavior is exactly the opposite. There were so many opportunities to attack Sasuke, but he didn''t. There are so many ways to control Sasuke, and nothing has been done.


    He only taught Sasuke to be powerful and let Sasuke deal with Itachi.


    And that Sharingan''s statement is also somewhat unreasonable.


    All the Sharingan on Shimura Danzo''s body were transnted through his hands.


    If he really wanted Sharingan so much, he could have gotten so many of it.


    Heter dealt with Sasuke, perhaps also because he sensed Sasuke''s hatred of Konoha.


    The so-called Konoha Crush n is even more funny.


    Konoha didn''t lose much in the end. Only Sarutobi Hiruzen died.


    And even after the death of Sarutobi Hiruzen, it happened to be one of the most beneficial factors for Konoha. At this point, Konoha was no longer weak. Tsunade and Jiraiya returned, and the vige''s attitude gradually became tougher, no need to sacrifice anyone.


    Based on the above doubts, Li Yaoxiang had to doubt the real position of Orochimaru.


    Only by confirming Orochimaru''s position in the futureyout of Li Yaoxiang can he know where to put Orochimaru.


    Unfortunately...


    Orochimaru is worthy of being Orochimaru.


    He never showed his feet, and he even wanted to take the opportunity to probe Li Yaoxiang''s origins.


    If you want to know the real position of Orochimaru, it seems that you can only know the real answer when the ''Konoha Crush n'' is in progress.


    ...


    Time flies.


    Years are like a shuttle.


    All of a sudden, a period of time has passed.


    The appearance of Li Yaoxiang, not upset Orochimaru''s n. After killing Kazekage Rasa, he pretended to be Kazekage and returned to Suna Vige to make all ns.


    Unlike the usual Transformation Jutsu, because Orochimaru and the others sewed real human faces on their faces, the ninja of Suna Vige did not find any abnormality when facing their fake Kazekage.


    As for Naruto, Orochimaru didn''t want to show his horse''s feet. He didn''t talk too much with the people in the vige, and he just let Kyuubi Jinchuuriki roam around.


    However, this does not prevent Suna Vige from implementing the n already scheduled before Kazekage''s death.


    Because of this, with the Chunin Exams, the date is approaching.


    The day of the Sand Ninjas'' departure in front of Konoha ising.


    Even if ninja in Suna Vige are concealed, Naruto, bing more and more sensitive, is aware of the anomaly. In this recent period of time, Naruto appeared in the same ce from time to time. And the ce where he wanders, there just happened an 8-hexagram pattern, surrounding him wherever he is.


    In the beginning, Naruto didn''t care. But for a long time, seeing that there was no sign of retreat in this "encirclement", Naruto knew that there was a problem.


    At this time, he looked disappointed towards where Sand Ninja wandered in the distance, silently curse in his heart: ''It seems that my identity is really revealed by them... Is that true... Is the big brother right... in this world... it''s true... there''s no really bright ce?''


    "Big brother... I''m sorry... It seems that I let you down again... I shouldn''t put my safety in the thoughts of others..."


    Darkening degree...


    42%


    43%


    44%

 Chapter 105: Friendship

    Chapter 105: Friendship


    Just as Naruto''s vision of reality waspletely desperate, a voice of quarrel came not far away at this time: "Young Master, it''s almost time to go. In my opinion, let''s not dy time anymore..."


    Gaara: "Go away! Where I go, you don''t need to worry about it!"


    The quarrel ended.


    Not long after, Gaara appeared in front of Naruto.


    The first thing he saw was Naruto with no smile on his face.


    Seeing the current Naruto, Gaara involuntarily showed an expression of guilt. It''s just that before he said anything, he was taken aback by Naruto''s following sentence: "Gaara, don''t hide it anymore? Can you tell me honestly what happened?"


    Gaara was shocked. Then there is aplex expression.


    Undoubtedly, between the vige and Naruto, he eventually made a firm resolution and chose to take the vige''s interests as the priority. In addition to this n, not at all causing mortal danger to Naruto, so he cooperated with the vige, concealing what they nned to do next.


    Even with a definite decision, he still can''t resist the guilt he raised involuntarily when facing Naruto.


    The two live in the same room.


    Get along day and night for several years.


    Naruto helped him so much.


    To say that he doesn''t feel guilt is impossible.


    Because of this, in this time, he always behaves strangely when he gets along with Naruto. Whenever Naruto wants to show him kindness, give him some benefits, and so on, he refuses.


    Trying to use this to counteract the guilt in his heart.


    Now it is discovered by Naruto.


    This makes Gaara even more difficult, and I don''t know what to do.


    Looking at Naruto''s nk expression and then recalling the past, Gaara was finally still unable to bear, clenched his teeth, and told everything to Naruto, one after another.


    Gaara: "...That''s what happened. Sorry, Naruto. For the sake of the entire vige, we have to do it. If we let Konoha develop, then more people will die in the vige."


    After listening to Gaara''s exnation.


    Naruto couldn''t helpughing at himself: "So... this is what I teach you, Sealing Jutsu, what do you give me in return? Hehe, benefit... for the benefit again. Just because Konoha Vige is too powerful, you have to attack them... Just because Suna Vige''s natural resources are not enough, so you have to use me in exchange for natural resources... Why? Why is this? Is it really impossible to calm down? The two sides just sit down and talk about each other''s problems. Why must they fight? Why must they hurt innocent lives?"


    Naruto said a series of self-deprecations.


    Gaara perfectly heard every sentence.


    This made Gaara feel even more guilty. He is also very helpless. Sometimes, things are so ridiculous. Because Konoha is strong, they must preemptively take the lead and weaken Konoha''s strength.


    This sounds very domineering. But they have to do it again.


    Being the same ninja, it is destined that they will meet each other one day on a mission. As long as Konoha bes stronger, the ninjas in their vige will be more dangerous when performing missions in the future.


    This is the truth. They had topromise.


    Not waiting for Gaara to say anything, Naruto lifts his head and lightly says to Gaara, "You go, don''t you want to start? Don''t me yourself. I did not me you, and I know your difficulty. Rest assured, I have no regrets teaching you Sealing Jutsu. Even if I were given another chance to choose, I would still make the same decision."


    It is also at this time.


    "Xiu!" "Xiu!" Two sounds.


    Temari and Kankuro suddenly appeared in the room.


    Gaara looked up towards them and seemed to have an intention to call for help. Temari smiled at Gaara and stretched out his palm, interrupting Gaara''s intentions, and said heartily: "That''s right! Naruto, let''s go together!"


    Whether it''s Naruto, or Gaara, looking towards Temari with joy.


    But soon.


    The joy on Gaara''s face turned into sorrow again.


    If Naruto went to Konoha and Konoha understood their n, there might be serious consequences, which made him worry about this.


    As if to see the thoughts of the younger brother Gaara, Temari patted his shoulder: "Gaara, I understand your concerns. In the past, we may not have had the ability to stop. But have you ever thought about it? Now you and Naruto are the two most destructive existences in all of Ninja Viges if we cooperate with Naruto. Even if we really can''t prevent this from happening. As long as you two do not take action, at least the loss of both sides can be reduced, right?"


    After hearing it, he reawakened his overjoyed expression! So is Naruto!


    The thoughts of Temari and Kankuro gave Naruto''s cold heart a new warmth.


    In this world, not everyone is so ruthless!


    After a while, Gaara, Temari, Kankuro, and three people walked out of the building.


    It didn''t take long for the three to leave.


    There is a Sand Ninja passing here and there intentionally or unintentionally.


    Seeing their goal, Uzumaki Naruto was still in the building, and he left the building''s scope pretending to be alright.


    ...


    Time flies. Years are like a shuttle.


    A... little... time... after...


    The entire group of Suna Vige came to Konoha Vige.


    Along the way, before reaching the vige entrance, there is already a ninja waiting there from Konoha Vige, guiding them.


    Due to the arrival of a Vige Kage, the hospitality specifications given by Konoha Vige are very high. There is no need for them to register or and so on. Sarutobi Hiruzen, the Hokage, personally received them at the entrance of the vige of Konoha.


    Then they were quickly arranged for a more noble amodation.


    And soon, someone will give the temporary ess status token to everyone in Suna Vige.


    Even with the invited Daimyo, they had dinner together.


    After the meal.


    This batch of Sand Ninja''s full-day trip was officially concluded, and they returned to their amodation to rest.


    This is the moment.


    Gaara, Temari, Kankuro took this opportunity to gather in the same room.


    Several people just entered the room.


    Kankuro quickly put down the ''Puppet'' behind him.


    The bandage that bound the Puppet dropped one after another.


    It was Uzumaki Naruto who appeared in front of three people!


    As for the recement left in Suna Vige, of course, it is the Shadow Clone of Naruto.


    And the reason why three people hide Naruto so secretly. The reason is also very simple. It''s that they can''t let the people of Suna Vige find Naruto appear here.


    Otherwise, it may cause a war between the two sides.


    Kankuro: "You have worked hard, Naruto. I''m sorry I made you wait so long."


    Naruto patted Kankuro''s shoulder: "It''s okay. Many thanks to you guys. If I don''t have your help, it would also be impossible to go back to Konoha smoothly.


    Gaara also seriously looked at Naruto and said at this time: "Be careful about everything. If Konoha dares to do something with you, don''t forget to ask us for help."


    Getting along for so long, Gaara more or less understood Naruto''s encounter and treatment in Konoha. Worrying that Konoha would be bad for Naruto again, he said this.


    "Don''t worry. I wasn''t me back then. If they dare to treat me like that, then don''t me me for killing them." Naruto responded.


    After that, several people nced at each other and nodded.


    Immediately, Naruto jumped out of the window, leaving this building.


    ...


    Konoha Vige.


    The arrival of a group of strangers, not at all, changed Konoha Vige''s calm night as always.


    Due to the prosperous streets, various shops have already closed.


    Therefore, these invited people did not walk around in the quiet Konoha Vige at night and disrupted the life of Konoha Vige.


    Although these Ninja Viges such as Suna Vige, Kusa(Grass) Ninja Vige, and Oto(Sound) Vige were also invited, it is impossible to ask Konoha Vige to let them downpletely.


    The necessary monitoring is still necessary.


    It''s just that it won''t be so tant.


    At least a certain distance will be maintained.


    Otherwise, if the other party finds out, it would be a bit rude. After all, people are invited by the Konoha, which also means that they are their guests, not their prisoners.


    Monitor the actions of others for no reason... No matter how you say it, you can''t justify it.


    Because of this, after Naruto jumped out of the window, he did not immediately encounter any obstruction.


    But quickly, until he leaped to a certain distance, an Anbu staff appeared in front of him with a bang: "Who is your Excellency? Do you have proof of identity?"


    Because he didn''t want to be discovered by people in Suna Vige, Naruto had already put on the mask that Gaara and the others had prepared for him when he left the building where Sand Ninja lived.


    As a result, this Anbu cannot recognize his identity.


    At the same time, because of this period, too many outsiders came and went. This Anbu did not immediately start bing suspicious of Naruto.


    He chose to investigate first and then speak. Naruto slightly removed his mask, revealing half of his face: "It''s me. I''m going to see the Third-Kage old fogey, and I have important things that I need to let him know!"


    The Anbu ninja saw Naruto''s half-face; his pupils shrank immediately.


    Even after a few years. Even if there are some changes.


    But the appearance of Naruto, the whole Konoha can''t forget it!


    This Anbu ninja recognized the person in front of him at a nce. It was the Kyuubi Jinchuriki who left the vige that year! Son of Fourth-Hokage! Uzumaki Naruto!


    He was shocked by some panic.


    Even if Naruto passed him directly, he hadn''t reacted yet.


    By the time it was recovered again, Naruto had already left a long distance.


    He caught up immediately. And with Naruto leaping by his side on the roofs at a synchronous speed: "I will open the way for you. If you go like this, you will definitely encounter many people blocking you."


    Naruto nodded.


    .....


    Not much time passed.


    Because of this led by Anbu ninja, it can be described as unimpeded along the way.


    Naruto soon came to Hokage Residence. Enter the Hokage room.


    The instant when he took off his mask, Sarutobi Hiruzen''s face instantly rejoiced: "Hahahahaha, Naruto, you are finally back! This old man had always hoped for you toe back!"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen goes over to hug Naruto first. But Naruto staggered his body and dodged his hug.


    It made him embarrassed.


    But Sarutobi Hiruzen, with a certain thickness of skin, was just stunned for a while and didn''t mind too much. Instructing the Anbu to leave, he turned his head and put on a kind expression: "It''s good toe back, and it''s good toe back. How are you, Naruto? How have you been outside the past few years? Since you''re back. Then don''t leave again. You don''t knowin the vige, besides me, many people are very concerned about you."


    That''s right!


    Until now, Sarutobi Hiruzen is still unchanging. He will not forget to bind this easy-to-use tool.


    In the first sentence of the meeting, he wanted to y an emotional card with Naruto.


    Both inside and outside are hinting at Naruto''s most important Hinata and Sasuke.


    However, Naruto, who came with a purpose, did not think so much. In a hurry, he went straight to the subject and said: "Old fogey! Stop talking about it! Hurry up and stop the Chunin Exams at this time!"


    Sarutobi Hizaki''s expression condensed. He slowly walked back to his seat and sat down.


    "Naruto, you calm down first. Tell me slowly, what the hell is going on?" Sarutobi Hiruzen said.


    It is also at this time.


    Mitokado Homura, Utatane Koharu, and Shimura Danzo, who received the message that ''Naruto is back'', also rushed to the Hokage room one after another. They instantly saw Naruto.


    Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu''s first reaction was to get close to Naruto. The two people walked to Naruto with a big smile. But they didn''t wait for what they said.


    Naruto red fiercely at them: "Shut up, you guys! Stop! Don''te over!"


    They stopped on the spot. The smile froze there.


    Naruto didn''t take care of their thoughts and directly stated Suna Vige''s n to destroy Konoha. Of course not too detailed. He did not tell Sarutobi Hiruzen and the others that he lived in Suna Vige. Nor did he say how he got the news. It is even more impossible that he taught Sealing Jutsu to Gaara.


    After all, Naruto was not stunned like he used to before. Not to mention that at this time, he is facing these old fellows in front of him. It is even more impossible for him to tell everything about himself.


    Naruto: "Old fogey, you have to believe me! The people of Suna Vige really want to take advantage of the opportunity to weaken our strength! I''m not very clear about the specific n. In short, you have to stop this Chunin exam! Otherwise, it will affect many innocent people!"

 Chapter 106: A Complicated World

    Chapter 106: A Complicated World


    After Naruto finished speaking what he wanted to express, the air in the Hokage room suddenly became quiet. The imaginary tension did not appear. The scene of ''Third-Kage old fogey immediatelymanding people to do things'' did not appear.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen brows sit tightly, frowning.


    Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu stood aside.


    Shimura Danzo ignored all this coldly.


    Naruto widened his eyes, looked at Sarutobi Hiruzen, and then looked at a few old fellows beside him. He was so anxious, and his hands pped on the desktop in front of Sarutobi Hiruzen: "Old fogey! What are you waiting for?! Quickly send someone to stop"


    Naruto can''t figure out what these old fellows are waiting for.


    ''I have already said so clearly. Why not act?''


    ''Doesn''t everyone know that if there is a conflict between the two sides, there will be many casualties?!''


    Silence for a long time.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen sighed, and it was up to him to answer this doubt for Naruto after all: "Naruto... and not to mention where you heard this news from and how urate it is. But even as you said, if the Suna Vige really wants to destroy our Konoha, it''s impossible to stop the Chunin Exams this time."


    Naruto, hearing this, was stunned, and then anger rose again, facing Sarutobi Hiruzen and inquiring: "Why?!"


    "Naruto, you are still young and have not been exposed to the vige. It is very meddlesome, not as simple as you think. This time, we Konoha actively invited all parties toe here. It''s time for us to show our Konoha''s strength to the outside world. Today, representatives of various Ninja Viges of Land-of-Fire, and Daimyo have also arrived at Konoha. If we stop the Chunin Exams just by some hearsays, how will the outside world view us? This will lead to our Konoha''s cement being greatly damaged. When the timees, not many will entrust us with any more missions. If any of what you said is not right, it will cause a big war, Naruto."


    That''s right.


    This is why in the original work, even if Sarutobi Hiruzen knew that Orochimaru would cause trouble, he still continued the Chunin Exams.


    At the same time, for this reason.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen of this life, even if he understood Suna Vige is going to be a trouble, he will not stop the Chunin Exams until circumstances spell it.


    Everyone present understood this truth, including Li Yaoxiang.


    But Li Yaoxiang will not agree with their approach.


    It is because of their practice for a long time that it has caused this situation so far.


    Blindly relying on the resources of the Land-of-Fire''s, not to produce, they will always be led by the nose. Blindly relying on the mission to live on, so their future path will be so narrow.


    It can be said that any transmigrator that bes a Hokage will do better than them. They would not bring so many tragedies. Then there won''t be so many people living in Konoha who want revenge.


    It can only be said that these old guys are not very capable, but they have a lot of conspiracy and tricks, and they are purely self-inflicted! It doesn''t matter if you are self-inflicted; you have to pay for the younger generation to have enough to vomit blood!


    Now that Naruto has not yet entered the world of adults, of course, it is impossible to understand the various things of the adult world. After listening to Sarutobi Hiruzen''s exnation, he not only did not understand, but he was even angrier!


    Naruto''s view is very simple. He doesn''t understand so many reasons, and he only knows that anything, as long as it works with amon purpose, there should be a solution!


    No need to sacrifice anyone!


    This is Will of Fire in his cognition!


    ''I tried my best to get back! I don''t want a tragedy to happen.''


    ''Is this the answer you gave me?!''


    Naruto was so angry that he pped the desk again: "Without a mission, wouldn''t we find a way to find the mission?! Fear of war, should we sacrifice the people in the vige first?! Is the reputation damaged?! Can''t these things be solved afterward?! You know that there is danger! But let everyone use their lives to take this risk! Are there not enough people you sacrifice?!"


    Naruto scolded Sarutobi Hiruzen for not knowing what to say.


    In his view, Naruto is just childish, ignorant, and doesn''t analyze the pros and cons of things.


    However, Sarutobi Hiruzen realized that he never reviewed himself. He even forgot the origin of Will of Fire!


    Was the reason why they and the Great n united together to form a vige not to want to live a stable life?


    He forgot all this!


    It is useless to say anything now.


    Both parties are impossible to have amonnguage.


    Seeing that the atmosphere was a little stiff, standing aside, the silent Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu seized the opportunity and wanted toe out to make around.


    But in their mouth, this is the word that came out ''Naruto-''.


    Naruto turned his head and stared fiercely at them: "Shut up!"


    They were scolded.


    Naruto looked towards Sarutobi Hiruzen again: "Old fogey, you tell me, will you terminate this exam?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen frowned; he did not speak.


    At this time, Naruto, who doesn''t know Sarutobi Hiruzen''s choice, also stopped talking. He turned around and left the Hokage room.


    But as soon as he turned around, just a few steps before, Sarutobi Hiruzen called to stop him: "Naruto, where are you going?"


    Naruto turned his back to Sarutobi Hiruzen and responded coldly: "Where I go, why do you care?!"


    Darkening degree...


    45%


    46%


    47%


    After Naruto left, the four old fellows in the Hokage room nced at each other. Their expressions were grave, and they did not know what to think.


    ....


    Quickly, Naruto put on the mask again and returned to Kankuro''s room.


    As soon as Gaara saw Naruto, he immediately asked: "How, Naruto? Can the matter be resolved? Did they do anything to you?"


    Naruto removed the mask, and he shook his head.


    Seeing this, the loss of expression also appeared on the faces of three people.


    But soon, Gaara got up and patted Naruto''s shoulder and said: "Naruto, don''t be too discouraged. Since it doesn''t work for you, then I will persuade my father! I''ll tell him that Konoha had learned of our n, and maybe he would stop this operation."


    Hearing this, Naruto seemed to rekindle hope again.


    But his hope was destined to be disappointed.


    After all, the current Kazekage is no longer Rasa, and even if Rasa is not dead, even if he knows that the matter has been revealed, Rasa will not give up such a good opportunity!


    All battle strength has invaded Konoha; other Hidden Viges, and with Orochimaru joined.


    How could anyone spare a battlefield with such a huge advantage?


    Even if Rasa is not dead, he will not stop the n, nor will Orochimaru stop. Orochimaru came to Konoha with purpose. After hearing Gaara''s report, Orochimaru just responded to it nonchntly. Then he yelled at Gaara to go back and act as nned.


    After receiving the bad news brought by Gaara again, the four people present can onlyfort each other and pray that they can minimize unnecessary casualties in this incident.


    Next, Gaara and Temari first said goodbye to Naruto and immediately went back to their respective rooms.


    Seeing this, Naruto also chose to leave Kankuro''s room. Instead of staying in Sand Ninja''s amodation building, he decided to go back to his'' home''.


    ....


    This time he walked on the road.


    Even if he walked out of a certain range, no one stopped him. Obviously, the news that Uzumaki Naruto returned to Konoha has been known to Anbu.


    Naruto''s mood has calmed down a lot by walking on familiar streets and looking at familiar nts and trees. He didn''t feel unhappy about the matter of several old fellows anyway. Anyway, as long as he tried his best, it was enough to reduce the number of casualties.


    Naruto soon returned home.


    Standing in front of the door, he hesitated for a while.


    Eventually, he opened the door.


    At a nce, everything in the house has not been touchedjust a lot of dust on the surface.


    The air in the room is a little dirty. Obviously, it has been a long time since no one has entered this house. However, Naruto didn''t care about these things. He saw the familiar pictures in the house, and he couldn''t help but think of the past memories.


    He said with emotion, "Big brother, I didn''t think after we went around and we''de back here...."


    Naruto''s mind was very quiet.


    "Big brother...?"


    Seeing that he never got a response, Naruto couldn''t help but bitterlyugh.


    In fact, he understood many truths. He also knew that it was impossible to prevent the conflict of 2 Great Ninja Vige easily.


    But he still didn''t want to give up. He wanted to try his best to stop.


    ''But these must be stupid in big brother''s eyes, right?''


    ''If I don''t care about the consequences, I will do some silly things.''


    ''Big brother must be annoyed at me again, so he doesn''t want to take care of me anymore.''


    Recently during this period of time, the big brother has been talking to him less and less. Naruto didn''t know what had happened.


    Thinking about it, Naruto casually asked: "Hey, big fox. Do you think... Am I making the big brother angry again? Why hasn''t he responded to metely?"


    Kyuubi was lying in the seal space: "Hmph! You''re asking the old man?"


    That''s all he had to say.


    Since Naruto started tomunicate with Kyuubi, after several years of getting along, the rtionship between the two parties has also improved a lot. Even if Li Yaoxiang rarely apanied Naruto, Naruto would not feel too lonely.


    Hearing Kyuubi''s answer, Naruto was not surprised either.


    After all, the big fox is not the big brother who can solve many problems and know everything...


    Immediately, Naruto seemed to be talking to himself, but in fact, he wanted to express to the big brother: "Don''t worry, big brother. I will never do stupid things again. I won''t worry you again, and I Won''t let you down."


    After secretly making this oath for himself, Naruto rekindled again.


    ''Don''t let the big brother down!''


    ''Start by cleaning the room by myself!''


    ...


    A few dayster.


    To avoid letting the people of Suna Vige find ing out about his identity, in the past few days, Naruto has been wearing masks for the past few days and only within a certain range of his home.


    Because of this, in the past few days, Naruto rarely contacts people.


    Fortunately.


    During this period, Sarutobi Hiruzen also sent someone to let him get a definite message that his thoughts were not in vain. Although he could not terminate the Chunin Exams, he could make Konoha increase his vignce and strengthen their alertness.


    Good thing.


    However, what Naruto didn''t know was, this made him secretlycent.


    In fact, even without his intervention. As long as things follow the development of the original work plot, Konoha will still be vignt. After all, with ''Orochimaru''''s intentional presence, Sarutobi Hiruzen will, of course, make the same decision.


    The difference is that sooner orter.


    But it doesn''t matter. In Naruto''s heart, he finally got a littlefort and felt that he hadn''t worked in vain.


    Then, Naruto asked the Third-Kage to give him an identity to participate in Chunin exams so that he could work with Gaara to reduce casualties on both sides.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen was not informed of the reason, but Sarutobi Hiruzen still agreed.


    Immediately, someone soon came to give Naruto a corresponding pair of identities toe to this Chunin Exams.


    It''s just that he is different from others He has no team.


    He participated in the exam alone.


    Next is to wait for the start of the Chunin Exams.


    ...


    Early in the next morning, it''s bright.


    In a blink of an eye, it was Chunin Exams'' day.


    Naruto cleared up his mood. He just finished taking a bath and put on new clothes.


    He stepped out the door But as soon as he closed the door, he disappeared with a ''shoo''.


    ~


    Naruto appeared in vain in one of the ces five meters away.


    He was clutching an Anbu ninja by the cor. He punched Anbu in the abdomen and said viciously: "Go back and tell the old man! Don''t send any more people to watch me! Otherwise, don''t me me for being impolite!"


    This Anbu ninja, who endured the abdominal pain, nodded.


    Naruto loosened his cor, and he immediately disappeared in front of Naruto.


    At the same time, Naruto''s cold eyes swept in the other direction.


    In those directions, several ck shadows flew out immediately and flew towards the Hokage Residence.


    Naruto then turned around and set off for the exam site this time.


    ......


    Not much time, Naruto arrived at the familiar Academy.


    It is exactly simr to the original work; this is the first meeting ce for the exam. But Naruto did not immediately enter the Academy. He stood in the shade of a tree and waited silently.


    Waiting.


    There are more and more peopleing to the Academy.


    Gradually, Naruto also began to see many faces, both familiar and unfamiliar. Although he left Konoha for several years, Naruto still recognized that these people were the same people he used to know.


    He saw Haruno Sakura, Nara Shikamaru, Akimichi Choji and so on.


    But Naruto was not at all moved by seeing them.


    It wasn''t until two figures that he couldn''t be more familiar with came not far away, the face hidden under the mask, that he couldn''t help showing the color of ecstasy!

 Chapter 107: When The Exam was in Progress

    Chapter 107: When The Exam was in Progress


    That''s right!


    The people here are Hinata and Sasuke who he hadn''t seen for many years!


    Walking between them, there is also a guy he doesn''t know. But Naruto did not pay much attention.


    At this moment, he ispletely focused on Sasuke and Hinata!


    ''I haven''t seen each other for so many years!''


    ''I don''t know if I missed them like they missed me.''


    ''Hehehe!''


    ''I am now masked, and I don''t know if they will recognize me or not.''


    Narutoughed secretly.


    There''s some excitement and a little bit of proud feeling.


    He was full of anticipation!


    He was looking forward to the scene where the three of them met again.


    With the distance of several people, getting closer and closer, Naruto''s heart is beating fast, so tense!


    ...


    Hinata, Sasuke and Sai just keep walking.


    As they walked to the entrance of the Academy, Hinata suddenly stopped.


    Sasuke put his hands in his pants pockets, a seemingly indifferent face, looked towards Hinata and asked, "What''s wrong?"


    Immediately, he looked with Sai, looking in the direction that Hinata was looking, and saw a strange masked child, not far away, standing in the shade.


    He turned around, looked towards Hinata again, waiting for her reply.


    Realizing she was dumbfounded for a moment, she recovered her cold face over the past few years and said, "It''s nothing. Let''s go in."


    ....


    And Naruto looked at the back of their departure with a stunned look. All sense of anticipation was instantly extinguished.


    ''What is this feeling? My heart is as ufortable as being stabbed.''


    ''How could this be?''


    ''Didn''t Hinata recognize me?''


    ''How can the reaction be so indifferent?''


    ''Could it be that Hinata does not at all recognize me?''


    ''Right!''


    ''That must be it!''


    ''I must be masked, that''s why Hinata didn''t recognize me!''


    ''It must be so!''


    Naruto started the selffort mode, endured the ufortable feeling in his heart, barely squeezed out a smile, and set off to enter the Academy.


    ...


    Entering the Academy.


    Naruto did not encounter the scene in the original book where the two Chunin cast Genjutsu in front of everyone. Naruto was toote, the Genjutsu had already been cracked.


    Naruto went inside, and came to the ssroom where everyone gathered.


    He just opened the ssroom door.


    Whates into view is that Yakushi-Kabuto is still like the original work, trying to go forward and have a rtionship with Sasuke.


    Only this time, whether it was Sasuke or Hinata, they ignored Yakushi-Kabuto.


    Only Sai who kept the official smiley face was very polite and seemed to be very interested in listening to the cards in the hands of Yakushi-Kabuto and what he introduced.


    The arrival of Naruto attracted the attention of the audience and looked towards the door.


    Naruto ignored other people, his eyes only fell on Hinata.


    But Hinata nced at him a little, then turned her attention back to Yakushi-Kabuto''s card.


    It feels like she doesn''t know Naruto.


    The thorn in his heart seemed to fiercely go a little deeper.


    However, in order to avoid the Sand Ninja''s attention, he still resisted the impulse and wanted to step forward to meet with Hinata and Sasuke.


    Pretending to be calm, he continued to walk forward.


    After passing by several people, they also heard their discussion.


    "Who is this again?" Sasuke pointed to Naruto and asked.


    After listening to Sasuke, the pupils shrank slightly.


    Yakushi-Kabuto shook his head: "I don''t know. In this Chunin Exams, he is the only one who is alone, his identity is very mysterious, but he can be alone and get the exam qualifications. So he must be strong."


    Subconsciously sweeping towards the passing Naruto, Sasuke became interested in this mysterious guy.


    Immediately afterwards, Yakushi-Kabuto introduced ninjas to the Oto(sound) Hidden Vige.


    Hearing this, Naruto deliberately slowed down. He put his ears up and listened carefully.


    Exactly simr to the original work, when Yakushi-Kabuto said ''Oto Hidden Vige is just a small country Ninja Vige'', the Oto ninjas trio, who couldn''t swallow it, quickly interspersed in the crowd.


    [*TL note: This team was one of the three groups Orochimaru included in his n to infiltrate the Chnin Exams in Konoha. While this team entered the exams as genin representing Otogakure, another team posed as Konoha-nin, and Orochimaru himself assumed the identity of another. ordingly, due to various modifications, all three members used sound-based techniques. The team leader is Dosu Kinuta with Kin Tsuchi and Zaku Abumi as his teammates.]


    They moved towards Yakushi-Kabuto''s direction and rushed past.


    [*TL note: Otogakure (Otogakure no Sato, English TV: Vige Hidden in the Sound, literally meaning: Vige Hidden by Sound) is the personal hidden vige of Orochimaru, which was founded for the express purpose of collecting ninja for his experiments and his quest to learn all techniques. Inter years, following Orochimaru''s new appreciation for natural development of people and making a truce with Konohagakure, Orochimaru reestablished the vige as a legitimate shinobi vige.]


    Zaku Abumi, that is, a guy who will release an air cannon in the palm of his hand, jumped! The two kunai caught in the fingers, threw them directly at Yakushi-Kabuto!


    Yakushi-Kabuto took a step back. Easily avoided it.


    At the same time, another one from Oto Vige, Dosu Kinuta also rushed out of the crowd at this time, and flew towards Yakushi-Kabuto. He was about to give Yakushi-Kabuto a melee attack!


    He was so fast, it looked like a shadow.


    He had not arrived in front of Yakushi-Kabuto, but the audience could hear ''Puff!'' A loud noise!


    A lot of blood oozed out of the mouth, and the whole person fell.


    It''s been a long time since he fell...


    Everyone''s eyes were all attracted to the past by this loud noise!


    After looking at the injury of Dosu Kinuta, they turned their heads towards the culprit who was attacking Dosu Kinuta..


    The attacker is thetest guy toe in!


    That''s right!


    The one who attacked Dosu Kinuta is the masked person, Uzumaki Naruto!


    Seeing Dosu Kinuta, Naruto couldn''t help kicking!


    Initially, when he heard the news of Oto Vige, Naruto was already in a bad mood. However, seeing those Hidden Vige people again, who wanted to attack the ninja of Konoha. How could he bear it?!


    As soon as Dosu Kinuta passed Naruto, Naruto without the slightest hesitation kicked the foot with all his strength!


    As for the consequences?


    Hehe, Naruto was never worried.


    Naruto had gone through so many things. So, how could he not know his importance to Konoha?


    Naturally, someone will help him clean up the endgame.


    The other two quickly jumped over to hispanion, lifted him out, and shouted at Naruto: "Who are you?! Attacking the people from Oto Vige, you really think we are nobodies?!"


    Just as expected, before Naruto could speak, Ibiki just happened to lead a group of invigtors at the most appropriate time.


    BOOM!!


    Smoked came to the scene, attracting everyone''s attention.


    The same opening dialogue as the original work.


    The first to me is the Oto Vige trio.


    It''s just that the two ninjas in Hidden Viges, this time pointing to Naruto, retorted: "What about him? What kind of ninja is he?! You don''t me him?! Is this your Konoha attitude towards our Hidden Vige?!"


    Ibiki hearing this, his fierce eyes immediately turned to Naruto. But when he looked at Naruto''s cold eyes, he quickly shifted to another direction, and said to the inspector behind him, "Take him to heal."


    Then it''s all over.


    They deliberately divert the topic and begin to exin the content of the First Stage exam.


    This scene made many people present dumbfounded.


    Because of Ibiki''s attitude, it made everyone present to see Naruto''s eyes more dignified than before.


    ..


    There are spections about Naruto''s identity.


    Some timid guys even immediately put Naruto on a Peugeot of ''not to be trifled with''.


    They had this firm resolution ---As long as you meet this masked guy, you must turn around and escape!


    But, of course, there are also a lot of eager fellows like Sasuke who want to stamp Naruto on the soles of their feet in this exam to prove their strength!


    But all this is not something that Naruto should care about.


    The appearance of Oto Vige, let him temporarily forget Hinata''s attitude towards him. He was just thinking about how to stop the conflict between Konoha and Suna Vige.


    Naruto was in aplicated mood, and found a ce to sit down.


    ..


    After Ibiki''s introduction, the First Stage exam officially started.


    It is exactly simr to the original work, the same rules are applied.


    But unlike the original work, Naruto in this life is no longer a scum. He took the exam paper, looked at the test questions, and a familiar scene emerged in his mind involuntarily.


    Subconsciously said in his mind: "Ha! Big brother, do you remember this problem? This question was originally taught to me many times, but I didn''t learn it! Unexpectedly, there would be this question in today''s exam?


    There was silence in his mind.


    Naruto still did not get a reply from big brother.


    ''Big brother is still angry''


    Naruto was lost in his thoughts, but soon, he regained his energy and began to answer the questions.


    .....


    After the first exam time is over, the next question is of course the "question 10" test. Needless to say, Naruto will certainly not flinch. However, without Naruto''s roar in the original work, many peoplecked the courage, thus giving up this Chunin Exams.


    There are 26 groups of original work that passed the first test.


    Now there are only 20 groups left.


    Some extras are missing.


    .....


    The next is Mitarashi Anko''s dazzling debut.


    She said the next exam would take ce in the Forest of Death and told the rules.


    Soon, the second stage exam also began.


    After confirming with Gaara that the Suna Vige will not do it at this time, Naruto did not n to dy time here. He quickly assembled two scrolls of ''Heaven and Earth'' and became one of the fastest to reach Genin in the central tower.


    Gaara, Temari, and Kankuro have be the second group.


    ...


    At the same time, Forest of Death.


    Except for Naruto and Gaara''s group who arrived at the central tower, most of the contestants had just begun their wilderness journey.


    Fortunately, Gaara was influenced by Naruto in this life and is no longer so murderous. He did not kill the innocents indiscriminately like in the original work.


    At this time, Hinata, Sasuke, and Sai just happened to split up and prepare for their dinner today.


    Hinata brought back some vegetables and wild fruits.


    Sai caught a few fish in the river.


    Sasuke staged a hero saving the beauty, saved Karin, and brought a whole bear back.


    Seeing Sai''s smile frozen, Hinata looked up and down at the giant bear, nodded with satisfaction.


    Not long after, the three people easily started a fire. Grilled the bear meat and fish meat by the fire.


    While waiting, they also eat vegetables and wild fruits to serve as appetizers.


    The rxed attitude of the three people didn''t feel like they were taking an exam at all. ---Promotion Exams seemed simple to them. There is no such tension like in the original work.


    It was also at this time, suddenly the wind blew up...


    The fire was instantly extinguished.


    Hinata looked at the fire, looked at the bear meat that hadn''t been roasted, she opened Byakugan, and looked towards them directly in front. Sasuke and Sai who sensed something were also the same.


    Sasuke: "How many people are on the other side?"


    Hinata: "One."


    Sai: "How about strength?"


    Hinata: "Very strong."


    Not long after, a ninja with long hair appeared in the field of view of three people.


    When seeing this person, three people immediately put up a fighting stance.


    It''s just that before waiting for them to react, a picture of their own death appeared in the minds of the three!


    ''This is not Genjutsu!''


    It''s just the person in front of them with the murderous aura alone can make them die!


    That''s right, the personing is exactly Orochimaru!


    He did not back down from Li Yaoxiang''s threat! Still as he said that day, he will not give up! As for whether it was really greedy Sasuke''s body, or if he wanted to help Konoha solve Uchiha''s troubles, it was still unclear.


    Orochimaru licked... licked the corner of his mouth. His snake-like eyes, locked in front of 3 delicious prey. The reaction of the three people really excited him.


    The scene of feeling numb in the legs scared did not appear at all.


    On the contrary, the three little things exuded a bullying aura, each standing in the most advantageous position to face him.


    Hyuga Hinata opened Byakugan, and while holding the Gentle Fist posture, the right hand was also condensed with a Rasengan.


    Uchiha Sasuke opened Three-Tomoe Sharingan with Chidori and right hand Rasengan on the left.


    Sai, a few beasts of ink painting, already stood beside him, ready to attack at any time.


    It seems that these three brats are more interesting than he thought.


    Sasuke: "It''s Chunin Exams... it''s impossible for them to have your strength. Who are you?"


    Orochimaru did not answer.


    If you want to seduce Sasuke, you must first show enough strength!


    Orochimaru summoned 2 giant snakes, fighting with Hinata and Sai respectively and his main body attacked Sasuke!


    The result was no surprise.


    Even though Sasuke, Hinata, and Sai in this life are much stronger than in the original work, they are still not the opponent of Orochimaru at this moment!


    After the fight, three people are riddled with scars, gasping for breath, staring at Orochimaru.


    Orochimaru was uninjured, looking towards Sasuke with a yful look: "Want to be stronger? I can make you stronger."


    Sasuke: "Are you Orochimaru?"


    Orochimaru: "Do you know me?"


    Sasuke nodded: "No need. I don''t need your help."


    Sasuke''s answer made Orochimaru stunned on the spot, but he quickly reacted.


    ''The cause must be that ''mysterious person'' that day.''


    ''Otherwise, with Sasuke Uchiha''s desire to be stronger, he would not be able to reject me!''


    Orochimaru''s guess is true.


    It is indeed Li Yaoxiang.


    Li Yaoxiang has already told Sasuke about Orochimaru and his big brother, Uchiha Itachi. Of course, he didn''t talk about tooplicated things, he just said, "One of the Sannin, Orochimaru, was once defeated by Uchiha Itachi."


    This is enough.


    So now Sasuke sees Orochimaru himself, he ispletely uninterested in him.


    Instead, he is more confident in Li Yaoxiang, the more unfathomable guy.


    Seeing that Sasuke''s expression didn''t move, Orochimaru''splexion gradually became difficult to look at. Staring at Sasuke''s neck, there is a feeling of beginning to stir.


    He is very confident, as long as he allows Sasuke to try the "power" of the curse-seal, then he can''t resist his temptation!


    Just as he struggled to do something, a voice that made him scared appeared again in his mind: "What''s wrong? Want to do something? Try it."


    Immediately, Orochimaru''splexion was as ugly as cheating. He clenched his teeth and said, "You have been monitoring me?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Heh."


    Orochimaru was full of unwillingness, and finally only left a sentence ''Sasuke, want to be-stronger, want revenge, thene to me, I will make you feel unprecedented power!'', And then disappear without a trace...

 Chapter 108: Before The War

    Chapter 108: Before The War


    The emergence of Orochimaru, not at all, brought too much impact. Sarutobi Hiruzen still has no ns to terminate the Chunin Exams but simply doubles his vignce.


    And after Orochimaru left the Forest of Death, Hinata, Sasuke, and Sai also passed the second stage exam without any problems.


    Along with the others, they sessively arrived at the Central Tower of the Forest of Death.


    ....


    The third stage of the battle against spar officially began.


    With the emergence of the butterfly effect Li Yaoxiang in this life, there have been no small changes to the entire exam.


    First of all, the most impressive thing is, of course, Haruno Sakura.


    In the original work, until this point in time, Kakashi, the instructor, had taught Naruto, Sasuke, and Haruno Sakura hadn''t taught any Ninjutsu or Taijutsu except for stepping on water and climbing trees. --I don''t know if it was because of Konoha''s advice at Kakashi; that''s why he was a real novice tutor, not good at teaching.


    Naruto of this life did not stay in Konoha to graduate, and Li Yaoxiang did not have the opportunity to check through the crystal ball. However, whether Kakashi is entrusted or not, it is an indisputable fact that he wasted Haruno Sakura''s innate talent.


    Haruno Sakura in this life is very different!


    She took the ce of Hinata and joined Inuzuka Kiba and ss 8 of Aburame Shino.


    Kurenai Yuhi became her mentor.


    In addition to teaching her a lot of Genjutsu, Kurenai even taught her a lot of the Medical-Ninjutsu. This led to the fact that Ino, who was supposed to beparable to Haruno Sakura, would lose to Haruno Sakura in this life.


    The only constant is, Haruno Sakura''s affectionate target is still Sasuke.


    She didn''t contact Sasuke pretentiously, but Sasuke was just like the original work; he didn''t care for her.


    ~


    Secondly, it was the battle between Rock Lee and Gaara.


    Unlike original work, Gaara was not beaten by Rock Lee, who opened the four doors in embarrassment. Naruto''s influence on him is not just a personality change, and there are also many changes in strength.


    A few years ago, Naruto had already cracked his Absolute Defense with speed. He sees Naruto as apetitive opponent, so how could he not strengthen his own shorings?


    This led Rock Lee in this life to lose very thoroughly.


    However, due to the change of Gaara''s character, Rock Lee in this life did not leave with severe injury as the original work. It''s just that he couldn''t seed in ying handsome in front of Haruno Sakura, causing him to be depressed for a while.


    ~


    Then there is the battle between Hinata and Hyuga Neji.


    Not surprisingly, Hinata, who Naruto greatly influenced, won this victory.


    Also, because of the outstanding performance of Hinata in this life, Hyuga Neji not at all despised this Main House Eldest Young Lady. However, he still had the resentment buried in his heart.


    That''s all.


    The preliminary selection of the third stage exam has officially ended, and the official selection will begin in 1 month.


    ...


    After the exam of the third stage, Naruto has been suppressing the urge to meet Hinata and Sasuke, and suddenly, Sarutobi Hiruzen sent an Anbu on the morning of the 3rd day summoning Naruto to Hokage Residence.


    Naruto didn''t refuse because he had nothing to do.


    There was no rejection.


    Naruto didn''t expect that he would see a scene that made him very happy when he stepped into the Hokage room!


    Sasuke and Hinata were also in the Hokage room!


    As soon as Sarutobi Hiruzen saw the arrival of Naruto, heughed and said to Hinata and Sasuke: "Hahaha, hey, the acquaintance you want to meet is here."


    It is different from Sarutobi Hiruzen''s fake expression; Sasuke was full of provocative looks at this masked guy while Hinata was stunned for a moment and then quickly recovered her indifferent expression.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen stood up from his seat at this time, walked to Naruto''s side, walked over Naruto''s shoulder, walked him to Hinata and Sasuke, and said, "Who is it I wonder? Who is it? Could it be Akatsuki...?"


    Naruto didn''t care what the old fogey said next to him; when he saw Hinata and Sasuke, he was really excited.


    What is suppressed is not suppressed.


    ''Don''t care!''


    ''I haven''t seen you guys for so long!''


    Naruto''s hand slowly reached the mask.


    He immediately took it off!


    ''Oh! Oh!''


    ''Surprised?''


    ''Not surprised?''


    ''Hehehe!''


    Sasuke was dumbfounded for a moment, "So, it turns out to be you... no wonder strength is so strong. How, Naruto, in the past few years, your training must not have stopped? I tell you, if you didn''t be that big fox, you might not be my opponent."


    Sasuke is still Sasuke.


    As always, he refused to ept defeat, and he treated Naruto as an opponent and wanted to defeat him.


    Naruto didn''t see the overjoyed expression in his imagination and was slightly confused, but Naruto still responded very quickly: "Of course I don''t fall behind! There will definitely be opportunities for you to see and see in the future!"


    Finished.


    Naruto turned his attention to Hinata.


    But when Naruto saw the appearance of Hinata expressionless, his face copsed instantly, and his mood fell. However, he still barely squeezed out two words: "Hinata..."


    "Wee back." Hinata nodded, then said to Sarutobi Hiruzen aside, "Hokage, if there is nothing important, then I will say goodbye."


    "Well, go." Sarutobi Hiruzen seemed calm on the surface but actually observed Hinata''s every move.


    It didn''t take long for Hinata to cross Naruto.


    It was Sasuke''s turn to put his hands in his trouser pockets again. When passing by, he did not forget to say provocatively: "I hope you will not let me down."


    .....


    In the Hokage room, only one awkward scene remained.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen stood beside Naruto while Naruto stood there stunned, his mind nk.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen patted Naruto''s shoulders: "Hahahaha, it''s okay, Naruto. Maybe it''s been a long time since they saw you, so this is the case. It will be better if we get along for a while."


    Naruto''s mind buzzed.


    He did not listen to Sarutobi Hiruzen''s words at all.


    He took a step.


    Paused.


    He took a step.


    Paused.


    He was leaving Hokage Residence.


    ...


    At the same time, in a hot spring shop not far from Hokage Residence.


    Outside the fence of the female bathhouse, a guy with white hair and a bundle of big scrolls is squatting! This person is one of the Sannin of Konoha, Jiraiya, who has just returned!


    The dull Naruto happened to pass by after leaving the Hokage Residence But unlike the original work, Naruto cannot see anyone in his mind at the moment. He didn''t find Jiraiya''s existence at all, and he just passed Jiraiya in a daze.


    Jiraiya, who was initially focused on ''taking materials'', frowned. The afterglow of the eyes swept towards the passing Naruto, and he stopped ''collecting materials''.


    A sh appeared in front of Naruto, both hands on the hip said with a smile: "Hahahahaha! Smelly Brat, do you know that you are blocking this Sir''s way!"


    Naruto ignored him. He just moved a little bit to the side and crossed Jiraiya again.


    Jiraiya was a little embarrassed. But still not giving up.


    Another sh appeared in front of Naruto: "Hey! Smelly Brat, do you know who this Sir is?"


    Naruto''s eyes were hollow, and he looked up towards this guy in front of him.


    Naruto did not speak.


    Jiraiya was stunned for a while but then quickly regained his signature posture: "This Sir is the Mount Myboku toad elf, the Immortal Daoist, who is also known as Toad Sage!"


    Naruto''s eyelids are half-open: "Is there anything you need? Can you not block my way if it is okay?"


    Seeing Jiraiya not speak, Naruto crossed him again.


    Jiraiya, who couldn''t pretend, finally became unable to bear, rushed to Naruto''s side, followed Naruto''s pace, and said, "Hey, Smelly Brat. Are you called Uzumaki Naruto? I''m your father''s teacher. It''s not an exaggeration to call me a teacher, do you know?"


    Naruto stopped and looked towards Jiraiya coldly: "What qualifications do you have for me to call you like this?"


    Jiraiya was speechless. He stared at the back of Naruto leaving.


    ....


    After a while, in the Hokage room.


    Jiraiya pressed his hands against the table and made a loud ''pop'' sound: "Old fogey! What the hell is going on! Why did Minato''s child be like that?!"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen sighed, then he showed a look ofpassion to the world. He told Jiraiya about Naruto''s experience and the fact that Naruto has been away from Konoha for several years.


    "Damn it!" Jiraiya''s face was close to Sarutobi Hiruzen again, "How can you treat Naruto like this?! He is Minato''s child?!"


    "Hey, our original intention was also for Naruto''s good. I didn''t expect Naruto to misunderstand us too deeply. For the sake of the safety of the vige, we had no choice but to make this choice." Sarutobi Hiruzen has an expression he also didn''t like.


    Jiraiya: "What about now?! He came back to report for Konoha, and that means he still has feelings for Konoha. Why did he have that expression after he came out of Hokage Residence?"


    Immediately, Sarutobi Hiruzen exined to Jiraiya the rtionship between Hinata, Sasuke, Naruto, and others.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen: "Perhaps it was Hinata''s reaction that made him sad. It''s okay. It''s a child''s thing. They''ll get along again in no time."


    Jiraiya was speechless by anger.


    This time, the main purpose of his return is to look for the Child of the Prophecy in the mouth of ''Great Toad Sage''!


    ''These old fellows make the Child of the Prophecy this way, what can I do?!''


    If the old man in front of him weren''t his teacher, he really would swear at him!


    Knowing that it didn''t help, he could only coldly snort in the end while leaving the Hokage room.


    ...


    Time flies.


    One monthter.


    During this month, Jiraiya was trying to get close to Naruto, but Naruto gave him the cold shoulder.


    As for Naruto, he still stayed deep and simple.


    Apart from sometimes going to exchange messages with Gaara and the others at night, he will stay at home most of the time.


    As I said before, the reason is not to let people in Suna Vige discover.


    Because of this, Even if Naruto wanted to meet Hinata so much, he still tolerated it.


    He kept telling himself, as soon as this matter was over, he had to ask Hinata!


    Ask her why she treats him like this!


    He did not believe that Hinata would forget him!


    In this way, the time hase to the day of the trial. Today''s meeting ce was full of crowds. Compared to when Sarutobi Hiruzen announced Naruto''s identity, it was even more lively.


    Many Daimyo havee to the scene.


    The trialpetition also officially started, and at the beginning, there were some boring fights.


    The Daimyos didn''t pay much attention to the fights. After all, the main purpose of their visit is to see the country army... whose fist is the biggest among the next generation seedlings.


    Their concern is only the battle between the most experts.


    That is Uchiha Sasuke on behalf of Konoha and Gaara on behalf of Suna Vige.


    As for the unidentified Naruto, the guy who crushed the opponent, they would not have paid much attention. Anyway, it was just a Chunin Exam. Even if Naruto is excellent, he is just a Chunin.


    Seeing this, the organizer of Konoha, of course, wouldn''t let these Daimyos wait too long. They soon arranged the start of this battle.


    ...


    At the start of the game, Gaara stood with hands on his shoulders, while Sasuke with hands in his pockets. Both sides are very confident in their strength.


    Uncovering the fighting intent on the body, they were looking directly at the other side.


    The two are not talkative characters.


    As soon as the referee announced the start, the two immediately shot!


    Gaara uses sand as usual to attack and defends, while Sasuke has been walking the entire stadium.


    Having watched Gaara of Rock Lee''s game, of course, he also knows that long-distance attack or ordinary Ninjutsu will not y any role in Gaara. Therefore, he simply performed a melee attack like Rock Lee!


    It''s just that his speed is faster than Rock Lee, who opened the fourth gate!


    Seeing that every attack was about to attack Gaara, Sasuke mocked arrogantly while fighting: "The most expert of the Suna Vige is the new generation, right? Is this your only strength? Ah. If you have no stronger means. That''s embarrassing. I''m not interested in pestering you anymore. I also want to keep strength to deal with ''him''."


    Gaara was still so cold, and his eyes kept following Sasuke''s silhouette. At the same time, he didn''t forget to tease Sasuke: "You are far worse than ''he''. You are not the most expert of Konoha''s new generation, and I am not interested in you."


    Sasuke''s figure stopped.


    "Do you know him?" Sasuke said.


    "I heard him mention you. He said your strength is also very strong. It seems that because he hasn''te back after a long time, he was overestimating your strength." Gaara said.


    Sasuke''s expression!


    The left hand is buzzing! The right hand is thundering!


    The big names who were present at this scene craned their necks, fearing that they might miss this.


    Gaara couldn''t help but shrink the pupils, but he quickly restored the natural expression: "I take back the sentence just now. Your strength is very good."


    Sasuke grinned: "But I still think, your strength... not great?"


    Gaara''s mouth twitched slightly: "Stop it. Today is not the time. I will fight you again when I have a chance."


    As soon as he finished speaking, the whole meeting ce was in a trance...


    The audience was wide, and all were sleeping.


    .....


    Konoha Crush n, officially opened!

 Chapter 110: Influence and Change

    Chapter 110: Influence and Change


    At the same time, the audience was lethargic.


    A deafening ''rumble'' sound came from the vige boundary!


    The fastest move is Orochimaru on the Hokage seat. He followed the sound of Shinobi, and the four people, with a force of lightning speed to cover their ears,id down Four Violet mes Formation and besieged Sarutobi Hiruzen.


    Then there is the confrontation between Jonin.


    Sasuke, in the middle of the field, couldn''t help but be surprised. He looked up all around, and when his gaze fell on Gaara again, Temari, Kankuro, and Baki already appeared beside Gaara.


    Baki nced at Gaara: "Go, act ording to n!"


    The three people nodded, a few shed, and left away.


    Even if there was no injury, Gaara''s group still jumped away in the direction of original work.


    The referee also appeared in front of Sasuke at this time. While looking directly at Baki, he told Sasuke: "Go, you chase those children!"


    Sasuke originally wanted to say something, but he saw Naruto, who was masked, nced in the Four Violet mes Formation direction, and flew away in the direction Gaara left without looking back.


    As soon as he clenched the teeth, his expression full of resentment was also caught up!


    ..


    The next step is exactly simr to the original work.


    Kakashi summoned a Ninja Dog and asked it to lead a group of children to chase Gaara.


    Then each is looking for their own opponents.


    After Gaara and the others moved away from Konoha to a certain distance, they stopped.


    Sasuke, who was close behind, rushed to the scene. And the moment he saw Gaara, Sasuke not saying anything further, just attacked.


    But before he approached Gaara, a silhouette suddenly appeared in front of him, Uzumaki Naruto!


    Sasuke said fiercely wickedly: "What are you trying to do? After a few years, you help outsiders?!"


    While saying this, the Twelve-Youngest Strong also arrived at this time.


    Naruto nced at everyone, and involuntarily stayed on Hinata for a while, and then said to everyone: "Stop it, you don''t have to fight anymore."


    With that said, Naruto took off his mask.


    Except for Sasuke and Hinata, the rest of the chasers all showed joy. Even after so many years, they still remember Naruto, the former genius student!


    As long as Naruto is there, their grasp of the enemy is much greater!


    But seeing that Naruto and Gaara had no ns to fight each other, everyone couldn''t help showing their doubts.


    The first to speak was the calmest-minded Nara Shikamaru: "Naruto, what is going on?"


    Naruto: "That''s just a ridiculous game between adults. I''ve reached a consensus with Gaara and will not attack each other. Everyone stays here first and waits for the end of things."


    When they heard about it, for a while, they didn''t know what to do.


    At this moment, Sasuke''s right hand suddenly made thunder!


    Lightning shes in the direction he is in!


    Realizing that something was wrong, Naruto quickly flicked back and evaded Sasuke''s sneak attack: "Sasuke! What are you doing?!"


    Sasuke did not answer. His face was so hideous, and he continued to attack Naruto!


    Naruto dodged and shouted: "Sasuke, are you crazy?! It''s not the time to y against me! When this thing is over, I will apany you anytime!"


    Naruto''s resistance not only did not stop Sasuke. Instead, Sasuke''s offensive came even stronger!


    Except for Sai, no one will understand Sasuke''s mood!


    That''s right!


    It''s to force Li Yaoxiang to show up!


    6 years!


    It''s been 6 years!


    In the past 6 years, apart from instructing him to receive a mission with Sai escorting Princess Koyuki Kazahana, the big brother who promised to avenge him never contacted him again!


    He did not teach him to be stronger!


    How could Sasuke endure?!


    ''Ah! I don''t believe that if I killed your younger brother, you wouldn''t show up!''


    With endless hatred, Sasuke is desperately attacking Naruto!


    There is no intention of keeping hands at all!


    Gaara said coldly: "Do you need my help?"


    It''s fine for Sasuke to go berserk for no reason. No matter how much he fights, it''s Konoha''s internal affairs, but the meaning will be different if Gaara intervenes. They had to reposition Naruto, which had disappeared for a few years, whether an enemy or a friend.


    Sai has summoned 2 ink lions, facing Gaara and the others contort one''s face in agony!


    As Sasuke''s offensive grew stronger, without returning the fight, Naruto paid no extra mind to reply to Gaara.


    Seeing that the fighting between the two sides was getting more and more intense, everyone started to hesitate.


    At this moment, Sasuke''s right hand, which kept the shing of lightning, suddenly dimmed.


    At the same time, with the disappearance of lightning, Sasuke also did some backflips in a row, put away the offensive, and stopped shooting.


    No one understands what is going on even Naruto was taken aback by this emotional Sasuke.


    Only Sasuke and Sai could understand.


    Both sides looked at each other.


    Obviously, this is Naruto''s big brother, finally contacted!


    ...


    At the same time, on the roof of a building.


    In the Four Violet mes Formationid out by the four people.


    Orochimaru''s n can be said to be full of contradictions. It is said that he wants to destroy Konoha, but the action is the opposite. A series of actions hardly caused any actual harm to Konoha.


    Severalrge snakes, summoned outside the vige, greatly reduced Konoha''s losses.


    Gaara, the Jinchuriki, whether it is original work or now, is also allocated outside the vige.


    It''s even more funny for Orochimaru. He trembled so much that he shed tears. He faced the old fogey directly, and he didn''t directly do anything with Sarutobi Hizen, a decayed old man. He was just trying to disy the ''Impure World Reincarnation'', which is not fullyplete.


    This series of inscrutable actions is not so much to retaliate or destroy Konoha.


    It would be better to say that this is more like a diligent student who finally got the results and then impatiently wanted to show it off in front of the former Teacher and show his achievements.


    He used this to prove that he was right!


    He wanted to see the old fogey, Sarutobi Hiruzen, regretting not choosing him!


    However, in this life, because of the emergence of Li Yaoxiang''s butterfly effect, the conversation between the two on the roof and the development of things have all changed...

 Chapter 111: The Most Failed Hokage

    Chapter 111: The Most Failed Hokage


    Four Violet mes Formation.


    Orochimaru also exhibited Impure World Reincarnation and summoned two coffins. When the third coffin with ''3rd'' was halfway through, it was stopped in time by Sarutobi, just like in the original work.


    PA!


    PA!


    2 sounds and 2 coffin tes slipped off.


    The First-Hokage, Senju Hashirama, and Second-Hokage, Senju Tobirama, are reflected in everyone''s eyes.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen: "You dare to fool the dead... ying with time and space, such a terrible thing!"


    Things developed here are very simr to the original work.


    But when Orochimaru inserted the curned Kunai into the back of the head of two corpses, the sound that made him fear appeared again from his mind: "Orochimaru... Ah, Orochimaru. What''s wrong? Facing the teacher you care about makes you delirious?"


    Orochimaru turned pale with fright in reality. Now, in this crucial moment, a little careless, and he will fall into the sewer.


    To avoid Sarutobi Hiruzen figuring this out, Orochimaru immediately restored the natural expression and quickly exchanged words in his mind: "What is your purpose?!"


    "What are you nervous about? Are you afraid I will suddenly control your body during your fight? I won''t do it; you can rest assured. As for the purpose... there''s no purpose. I''m just interested in your rtionship between master and disciple."


    The appearance of Li Yaoxiang made Orochimaru shudder. He didn''t dare to rx his guard. For the first time, he showed his emotions unabashedly: "Don''t crack a joke with me again! Tell me something!"


    "It''s nothing... I just want to remind you; isn''t it strange? How did the old man in front of you stop you from casting the 3rd coffin ''Impure World Reincarnation''?"


    "Also, do you really think Sarutobi Hiruzen, who is famous throughout the Ninja World, is a soft-hearted person? Will he really send someone to arrest you because he can''t stand you for human body research? Danzo worked well with you, and why did he have to abandon you at this time? Don''t you realize that all of this began when you studied Impure World Reincarnation?"


    Hearing it here, Orochimaru''s heart tightened, and numerous probabilities emerged in his mind instantly. He asked, "What are you trying to say?"


    After saying those words, it''s a pity that he can never get a response from Li Yaoxiang.


    Only because of Li Yaoxiang''s reminder, when he looked towards the old fogey in front of him again, his eyes were a little different!


    Be insidious and cunning.


    Seeing these eyes, Sarutobi Hiruzen had a faint feeling.


    Orochimaru licked very excitedly... licked the corner of his mouth and said yfully: "Old fogey... you don''t have to be stupid in front of me."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s eyes were fixed: "I don''t understand what you mean."


    Orochimaru controlled the two puppets and attacked!


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s Fire-Style prevented the attack of two people. At this time, Senju Hashirama directly exhibited Deep Forest Creation, making the entire space in Four Violet mes Formation tightly sealed!


    Even Sarutobi Hiruzen took this move.


    Not only can''t you see the inside, but you can''t hear the sound inside!


    The treacherous mockery of Orochimaru sounded again at this time: "No one has heard our conversation even until right now. Do you need to be stupid again?"


    "I don''t understand what you''re talking about!" Sarutobi Hiruzen replied, summoned the Monkey, and solved the roots of the whole body for him.


    Orochimaru: "How did you stop me from performing ''Impure World Reincarnation''?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen even forgot to struggle and was stunned there.


    Monkey: "Hey! Hiruzen! What are you doing? Distracted in battle?!"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen responded by resuming his actions, but he did not intend to answer Orochimaru''s question. Seeing Sarutobi Hiruzen responding in this way, Orochimaru''s emotions are even more exciting.


    "Old fogey... I''m curious--, can you help me out?"


    "Second-Kage develops the Ninjutsu Impure World Reincarnation. Obviously, Konoha can be very powerful without fear of anyone. Why do you... resist this Ninjutsu so much?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen condensed again. He was in a trance. He was even injured by Second-Hokage with only 30% strength and was fiercely scolded by Monkey.


    Orochimaru continued excitedly: "What''s wrong? You worry that one day, there will be some people to summon the First-Kage and Second-Kage. Are you scared to see them?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen: "Enough, Orochimaru! Don''t talk nonsense here!"


    Orochimaru: "You are afraid that they will find that the Senju n and Uzumaki n have disappeared under your leadership, right? You won''t know how to face them? Or are you afraid that they will retaliate against the current Konoha? Revenge upon you? That''s why you four elders put so much effort to prevent me from studying Second-Kage''s "Impure World Reincarnation Technique", right?"


    Speaking of it, even Monkey couldn''t help but look at Sarutobi Hiruzen with a strange look. But Sarutobi Hiruzen didn''t even answer Orochimaru''s questions and continued to struggle with First-Kage and Second-Kage.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen, who feels that he is incapable, is preparing to use the ''Ghost seal'', just like in the original work, tries to seal the souls of First-Kage and Second-Kage.


    But just when he just wanted to do a hand seal, Wood Style: Deep Forest Emergence descended.


    [*TL note: Hashirama Senju creates a dense growth of trees, controlling how it grows using his chakra. The trees'' life force is immense enough to split the earth as they sprout and further pierce through any other obstructions they encounter. This growth is also fast enough that it can capture targets before they have a chance to escape. Hashirama used this technique to serve as a foundation for Konohagakure; none other than Hashirama have been capable of such a feat.]


    All Ninjutsu of the enemy suddenly flinched back.


    The two expressionless Puppets, First-Kage and Second-Kage, also returned to Orochimaru.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen apparently gasped and firmly stared at Orochimaru: "What do you mean by this?"


    Not only was Sarutobi Hiruzen puzzled, but even the crowd of Anbu ninja watching outside was also puzzled. They didn''t understand why Orochimaru, who had the upper hand, would suddenly withdraw all the offensives. Orochimaru ignored everyone''s gaze.


    With pity on his face, he looked at the former teacher in front of him. "Old fogey... didn''t you...?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen: "Orochimaru, stop being mysterious!"


    Orochimaru: "You didn''t notice... we fought for so long. Why didn''t anyonee here to help you?"


    ...


    One of the borders of Konoha Vige.


    At this time, several giant snakes were raging and destroying here at this border.


    An Anbu ninja rushed here hurriedly: "Lord-Jiraiya, you are here!"


    "Un." Jiraiya nodded, "Let me deal with these big snakes."


    Seeing that Jiraiya misunderstood what he meant, Anbu ninja quickly exined: "But Third-Hokage..."


    Jiraiya didn''t wait for him to finish. He leaped directly towards the serpents.


    After the Anbu ninja left, Jiraiya was standing on the high fence and muttered to himself: "Old fogey, hope you don''t die."


    ...


    Might Guy, who learned Eight-Inner Gates, and Kakashi, who hid Mangekyo Sharingan, are solving opponents here and rescuing some of the wounded.


    For these enemies, dealing with them is extremely easy.


    However, they all have a tacit understanding of the war between Sarutobi Hiruzen and Orochimaru. The more fights, the farther and farther they fought.


    ...


    The ce where Gaara''s trio and Twelve-Youngest Strong are.


    The two sides confronted each other for a long time.


    Akimichi Choji has even started to eat snacks.


    Seeing that no one meant fighting, Nara Shikamaru first started to talk: "Naruto, Third-Hokage may be in danger, shall we go back to help first?"


    Naruto looked towards Sarutobi Hiruzen and Orochimaru''s direction of engagement. He said lightly: "We''ll just stay here, and we don''t have to take care of their affairs."


    ...


    One of the core locations of Konoha Vige.


    Utatane Koharu, Mitokado Homura, and Shimura Danzo are all directing the actions of several hundreds of ninjas of Konoha up and down here.


    An Anbu Ninja came here hurriedly, calling the three old fellows one by one.


    The Anbu Ninja said urgently: "Lord-Hokage is at the losing end. Please also send all-Lords to rescue as soon as possible.


    Shimura Danzo gave him a cold nce: "Our mission is to ensure that every viger will not be hurt! Third-Hokage is not as vulnerable as you think!"


    Anbu ninja: "But..."


    Shimura Danzo: "Enough! If you have time, you might as well go to help loosen the Loose Practitioner group, don''t waste time here!"


    After Anbu ninjas and all the staff were assigned their respective missions, the three people, ncing at each other, who stayed at the scene, did not speak, and everyone said nothing.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s decisions over the years really disappointed them, and everyone''s ideas gradually became different.


    They have long been on the same front in dealing with Sarutobi Hiruzen.


    ...


    The screen returns to Four Violet mes Formation.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen looked around. He sensed everyone''s Chakra location, but when he found out that everyone''s location was not approaching him, Sarutobi Hiruzen knew what was going on.


    That''s right!


    What Orochimaru said is the status quo of Konoha!


    Konoha is so big, no one has thought ofing to save him, this Third-Hokage that weakened Konoha!


    Because of his very ruthless discipline, Orochimaru wants to kill him.


    Because of his unrelenting love disciple, Tsunade left Konoha.


    Because of his indulgence to Shimura Danzo and his kindness to Shimura Danzo, Jiraiya of Senjutsu was busy dealing with the serpent, but did note to save him.


    Might Guy, who can meet Eight-Inner Gates, didn''te back to save him.


    Kakashi, who hides Mangekyo Sharingan, did note back to save him.


    Naruto, who knew he was hijacked by Orochimaru, also did not return to save him.


    His indecisiveness led to getting along with his old partners of several decades, and now they all treat him dead. There were at least thousands of ninjas up and down Konoha, but they couldn''t send people toe here to rescue him.


    This is the result of his Third-Hokage and Sarutobi Hiruzen''s careful management of Konoha for several decades.


    All betrayed him!

 Chapter 112: Want to die. Not so easy

    Chapter 112: Want to die. Not so easy


    Feeling the reality, Sarutobi Hiruzen has be depressed.


    Even his fighting intent has faded a lot.


    He didn''t know whether the choices he had made over the years were right or wrong... The close friends of several decades old and the younger generation''s attitude today drive him to face reality.


    ''Maybe... I am really old.''


    ''Being too old has hindered the development of the younger generation.''


    ''Maybe... I was really wrong.''


    ''Wrong to have ruined Konoha''s bright prospects.''


    He was full of entanglement and difort, and when he looked up towards Orochimaru again, there was only a faint sentence: "Then why don''t you do it? What are you waiting for?"


    After thinking a long time, Sarutobi Hiruzen is already determined to die.


    Death, for him now, is the best ce to belong.


    As soon as he dies, his fault will disappear, and no one will mention it again.


    As long as he died today, and died in the hands of the rebel, Orochimaru, just like the previous generations of Hokage, is also a good Hokage who sacrificed to save Konoha!


    No one will me him again!


    He can retain his reputation!


    But while he was nning to give up struggling, Orochimaru was full of smiles at him: "Old fogey, I also want to do this for you, but unfortunately, it doesn''t work that way. The hidden trouble you left for Konoha is too much, and you can''t die in my hands yet."


    Seeing Sarutobi Hiruzen''s dismal appearance today, Orochimaru is filled with satisfaction. Sarutobi Hiruzen''s current performance is enough to prove that Orochimaru''s approach was right! His ideas can really make Konoha stronger!


    The people in Konoha will no longer be affected by the war!


    The fault is that he underestimated the minds of the old fellows of Konoha!


    Hearing the words of Orochimaru, Sarutobi Hiruzen''s original expression of depression once again became dignified: "What do you mean?"


    Orochimaru grinned, and he did not answer his intention. His right hand lifted suddenly, and The four people nced at each other, understanding.


    Four Violet mes Formation was revoked, following Orochimaru''s pace and leaving Konoha.


    When the Anbu ninjas saw it, the first thought was that they wanted to catch up, but Sarutobi Hiruzen gave a decisive stop: "Don''t chase! Let''s go and see what happened in other ces!"


    Orochimaru''s sudden exit... It really disrupted all the rhythms of Sarutobi Hiruzen.


    He was all ready to meet death, but he did not die.


    Things be much moreplicated. If he can''t die to ''sacrifice for Konoha'', he can''t get the best result. This is undoubtedly bad news for him. But for a while, he didn''t understand what to do.


    The chase is impossible. Orochimaru still has two Puppets, First-Kage and Second-Kage, in his hands. Sending people to pursue them will only increase the casualties. There are also a lot of things waiting for him to deal with in the vige, not allowing him to be distracted.


    Moreover, the "hidden danger" that Orochimaru said in his mouth made him particrly concerned!


    After thinking for a long time, he can''t think of why.


    A ninja from the Medic Team helped Sarutobi Hiruzen to go back to the Hokage room to rest, and this is exactly what Li Yaoxiang wanted!


    Although Li Yaoxiang has not been able to confirm Orochimaru''s and Sarutobi Hiruzen''s ideas 100% to date, they have not personally admitted Li Yaoxiang''s guess.


    This is a bit regretful.


    Unable to satisfy deep in one''s heart


    But now, this situation is undoubtedly the most advantageous ending for Li Yaoxiang! The reason why he appeared in Orochimaru''s mind at this moment was to control Orochimaru''s thoughts to guide this situation!


    People will always be selfish, and Li Yaoxiang is no exception.


    It would be a pity that Sarutobi Hiruzen died in Orochimaru''s hands.


    With Sarutobi Hiruzen, Li Yaoxiang may also bring divine assistance several times.


    And more importantly, this guy led Naruto to have a tragic childhood and needed to bear major responsibilities. Li Yaoxiang didn''t want him to suffer that cheap, letting him die with the name of "hero".


    As for the result...


    What kind of new Sarutobi Hiruzen will be born in the end Li Yaoxiang doesn''t think much about it.


    Anyway, no matter which new paths Sarutobi Hiruzen chooses, he will have the confidence to deal with it.


    With the departure of Orochimaru, this so-called ''Konoha Crush n'' was also officially terminated.


    It is exactly simr to the original work.


    Since Orochimaru appeared as Kazekage, Konoha started investigating the real Kazekage for Suna Vige, where he went. After learning that Kazekage had died in Orochimaru''s hands, the Sunas, of course, took the opportunity to shirk all guilt on Orochimaru.


    Two Great Ninja Viges also solved the "misunderstanding" and continued to be good allies to each other.


    And under Naruto Uzumaki''s repeated insistence, Konoha also promised Suna Vige to give them a certain discount on resources in the future.


    Ever since then, the two big Ninja viges are also very happy.


    The next step is to deal with the aftermath... What happened had made the Daimyos not in the mood to stay in Konoha, all impatiently wanting to leave this dangerous ce.


    Chunin Exams had to be terminated as a result.


    ......


    After everything was done, Konoha returned to calm again, almost a weekter.


    This week, it can be said that everyone up and down Konoha has a veryplicated mood.


    The original damned person did not die.


    This is awkward.


    Of course, everyone will not be naive to think that this living Third-Hokage will not know what they were thinking carefully in that war. But how should they exin it?


    Does Jiraiya say that the giant snake summoned by Orochimaru is too strong, so he is unable to rescue?


    Do the three old close friends say that Suna Ninjas and the Oto Ninjas are too strong and need to use thousands of ninjas in the vige to deal with them?


    Speaking of this, don''t youugh at the dead?


    There is no way to solve it, and everyone can only assume that this has never happened.


    What to do? Pretending to be crazy and stupid?


    Anyway, Sarutobi Hiruzen could not do it even if he wanted to settle ounts after Autumn. After all, the entire vige abandoned him.


    Of course, Sarutobi Hiruzen would not be so stupid to point out this matter. Even if it were pointed out, it would not help the matter, which would only make him more embarrassed. So the two sides are very tacit understanding and did not mention the "rescue" thing.


    And the time hase to this day. The ugly woman finally needs to see the family man.


    Escape is also impossible to escape for a lifetime.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen and the group of people who abandoned him always need to face the opposite day. Sarutobi Hiruzen has no intention of avoiding it. He summoned all the core staff of Konoha. He came to the Conference Hall, intending to discuss the follow-up matters after the whole thing...

 Chapter 113: The good show is officially staged

    Chapter 113: The good show is officially staged


    Inside the Conference Hall.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen sat on the main seat. He looked around the core staff in front.


    There are n Leaders of the Noble ns of Konoha, a group of Jonin, 3 old close friends, Jiraiya, and the important members of the various sections in charge, etc. His gaze slowly swept past everyone.


    In front of this group of guys with ghosts in their hearts, each and everyone was ufortable by his eyes. They were all embarrassed to look at him, and some even deliberately avoided his eyes. However, The three old close friends with thick skins still looked at him with confidence, and they didn''t care about his gaze.


    Utatane Koharu and Mitokado Homura even showed kind smiles.


    The corner of Sarutobi''s eyes couldn''t help but twitch.


    ''This group of guys!''


    ''Everyone present had never thought of saving me!''


    ''Not a single one!''


    Recalling the past, before, each and everyone shouted Hokage. Now this made him shiver.


    ''I have done my best for Konoha for decades, but this is the result in exchange.''


    Initially, he wanted to settle the ounts, but after thinking about it... forget it.


    ''Finding a reason to punish this group of guys, at best they will be angry, and it doesn''t help the whole situation.''


    ''I''m dozens or hundreds of years old, and I don''t know how much time is left.''


    What concerns him most now is the "hidden danger" that his apprentice Orochimaru said! He was very familiar with the character of his apprentice, and he could feel that this apprentice really wanted to kill him at the time. He also had the ability to do it...


    Now his only hope is to find all the "hidden dangers" of Konoha in his lifetime and then solve them one by one. Fortunately, after his death, he will have an exnation for Konoha.


    Today, it doesn''t matter whether he wants to stand by the three old friends and be more ruthless or help the younger generation clear the obstacles of the three old friends. The matter has developed to the present, and the contradiction between the two sides has be greater and greater.


    The younger generation does not agree with the older generation, and each and everyone wants to leave Konoha.


    Meanwhile, the older generation insisted on their own practices.


    No matter who he stands by, Konoha has to pay a very high price.


    This is not the result he wants to see.


    Perhaps this is also one of the "hidden dangers" Orochimaru said...


    But on this issue, he can only try to ease the rtionship between the two sides.


    That''s it.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s fierce gaze rxed. For some things, it is enough to give it a little while, and you can''t do too much.


    The atmosphere at the scene became less dignified.


    Seeing the aged Third-Hokage, there is no n to settle ounts after fall; everyone also breathed a sigh of relief.


    It is the beginning of each and every one in deadly earnest meeting.


    They were too busy before, and they had to appease the vigers, Daimyo, etc., which caused them to report the post-war data that was not so careful.


    This time it was much more careful, each n representative reporting the loss of their ns. Then there are some cumbersome things such as how many casualties the vigers have, how much money they have lost, how much they need topensate, etc.


    Next is to assign missions to everyone in the leadership ss present.


    Finally, he asked the opinions of the people present, how to face Suna Vige and other Ninja Viges issues in the future.


    After everything is discussed, this group of talents leaves after one.


    Shimura Danzo, Mitokado Homura, and Utatane Koharu were thest to stand up. They came to Sarutobi Hiruzen.


    Mitokado Homura: "Hiruzen, Sure enough, the sword is not old! If you were to resist the strongest military force on the other side, the vige might lose a lot this time."


    Utatane Koharu: "Yes. Sure enough, I lived up to our trust in you!"


    This time, not only Sarutobi Hiruzen but even Shimura Danzo scorned these 2 guys.


    Shimura Danzo just nced at Sarutobi Hiruzen and said nothing. His left eye squinted slightly, and then he left the Conference Hall.


    And in the huge Conference Hall, there are only 2 people left.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen turned his attention to Jiraiya with aplicated expression. Throughout the meeting, Jiraiya was absent-minded, and it was even more difficult to leave at the end of the meeting.


    He saw all these in Jiraiya''s eyes, and he also understood what this discipline was thinking.


    No matter how disappointed he was with this discipline, Sarutobi Hiruzen didn''t show it. It still had that kind appearance. Because of this expression, Jiraiya felt ufortable.


    Finally, Jiraiya clenched his teeth and stood up. He finally had the courage to say something.


    But it was interrupted by Sarutobi Hiruzen again: "Jiraiya, don''t mention the past things. This old fogey, do not at all me you."


    Jiraiya was speechless for a while, and his heart was even more guilty.


    "Hey~, Jiraiya, sit down." Sarutobi Hiruzen said.


    "This..." Jiraiya hesitated.


    "Please sit down!" Sarutobi Hiruzen pretended to be dissatisfied.


    Jiraiya sat down slowly; his expression was like sitting on a pinboard.


    Seeing this, Sarutobi Hiruzen looked towards the scenery beyond the window in the distance, as if recalling the past: "Hey~ us, as master and disciple, I don''t know how long we haven''t sat quietly and chatted."


    "Old fogey... I..." Jiraiya said.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen waved his hand: "No need to say more. I know everything. It seems that this old fogey... is really old, and it is no longer useful. Cough, cough, cough, cough!" He didn''t forget to put on a look of old age and decay.


    Jiraiya quickly helped.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen pushed Jiraiya''s hand away, gestured ''I''m fine'', and immediately solemnly said: "Jiraiya, do you... want to be Hokage?"


    "This!" Jiraiya''s expression was startled, "Old fogey, why are you asking this? Aren''t you acting well?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen was dissatisfied again: "Don''t talk nonsense! You just tell me, are you willing or not?"


    Jiraiya: "Hey~ old fogey, you know me... This Hokage, I really can''t do it..."


    Next, a scene of filial piety of teachers and disciples was staged in the Conference Hall.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen tried to persuade Jiraiya to serve as Hokage.


    Jiraiya praised Sarutobi Hiruzen''s strong body and kept pushing away.


    In the end, Sarutobi Hiruzen had to wave his hand: "Well, since you are not willing to take over Hokage''s position, then you have to find a way to find Tsunade toe back. Just say that the old fogey was badly injured by Orochimaru. Let here back to take over the Hokage position."


    Seeing he couldn''t escape, in desperation, Jiraiya had to ept themission.


    Go to find Tsunade ande back to take the ce of this Hokage.


    As for Naruto, ''Child of the Prophecy''... He can only think of a solution after hees back.


    When Jiraiya left, only Sarutobi Hiruzen was left in the big Conference Hall, seemingly sick, a world beyond the red dust of living.


    No one knew what he was thinking.


    ...


    At the same time.


    The week after the war, Naruto finally no longer needs to look at people with a mask. After saying goodbye to Gaara and the others, his first thing was to look for Hinata and ask questions.


    The situation at the time was as follows:


    Naruto waited at Hyuga n''s Residence for a long time until Hinata came out from home. But as soon as he stepped forward, he was stopped by Hinata''s guard.


    Hinata shouted at the guard and told the guard to return.


    The expression of lukewarmness ushered in.


    Hinata: "Naruto, what''s wrong? You''re looking for me?"


    when Naruto saw this expression, he couldn''t speak anymore. Naruto said desperately, "No... nothing. I just wanted toe over and see you, and I haven''t seen you for so many years. Let''s see when you are free. How about we go out for a meal together?"


    Hinata: "Okay, let''s make an appointment with Sasuke. You can make an appointment with Sasuke and ask him to tell me."


    Naruto looked at Hinata, silent.


    Hinata: "What''s wrong, Naruto? Do you have anything else?"


    Naruto returned to his senses: "Oh, no, no. I won''t bother you anymore. Go ahead and do your job."


    Hinata nodded, turned around, and left.


    Naruto looked at the back of her departure, and his heart was very ufortable.


    When he was young, he was not sensible. He doesn''t understand what it means to get tired with Hinata all day long and hold Hinata''s little hand. But now that he has grown up, Naruto certainly understands what Hinata was thinking about. He thought that as long as she saw him, the rtionship between the two would return to that closeness.


    But he didn''t expect this result.


    ''Hinata''


    ''Is it really impossible to go back to the past?''


    ''Hinata really forgot me?''


    No! It can''t be!''


    ''There must be a reason why Hinata is like this!''


    After Li Yaoxiang''s training over the years, Naruto is not an airhead. He will not be easily fooled by what he sees on the surface.


    He didn''t give up in the next few days. He still appeared in front of Hinata, intentionally or unintentionally. Even so, he could not find anything wrong


    Just when he was about to give up and was about to ept the cruel fact that ''Hinata has forgotten him'', he suddenly came across a mountain road that twists around each new peak!


    Thinking of missing the taste of the past, he bought a 3-color onigiri to invite Hinata to eat.


    It is a formal farewell to the past sentiment.


    But she didn''t want to. When Hinata saw the split second of the 3-color onigiri, she finally had a strange look!


    Although this strange thing just passed away, Naruto still caught it!


    Naruto grabbed Hinata''s shoulders violently and said, "Hinata, are you hiding something from me? You deliberately ignored me, right? Hinata, you don''t have to do this! Can''t we solve the problem together? I''ve be stronger now! Ask me. I won''t be troubled!"


    Seeing that this rascal dared to act on his eldestdy so presumptuously and the guard who was waiting in the distance, how could he bear it now?! He appeared next to Hinata in a sh, and he shot his palm at Naruto''s shoulder.


    Hinata immediately hugged Naruto and body-blocked the palm for Naruto! Hinata coughed slightly, and a trace of blood ran out of the corner of her mouth.


    Naruto: "Hinata!"


    Guard: "Eldest Young Lady!"


    "You''re looking for death!" Looking at Hinata, Naruto turned his head fiercely to stare at the guard, orange and transparent Chakra, and quickly emerged from Naruto''s body! Even his appearance has gradually shifted to the beast-shaped!


    Also, at this time, Hinata pushed away Naruto: "It''s alright, Naruto. It''s none of your business."


    With Chakras coat retracted, Naruto said: "Hinata, you..."


    Hinata shook her head and interrupted: "Don''t get me wrong, I have nothing to hide from you."


    Naruto: "Then you! Again..."


    Hinata: "I just don''t want to see someone innocently hurt by my guards. Even if it is someone else, I will definitely stop it."


    Naruto: "..."


    Hinata wiped the blood on the corners of her mouth: "Naruto, I understand your kindness. As for the 3-color onigiri... I grew up from it, and I rarely eat it anymore. Sorry."


    Hinata stopped taking care of Naruto and let the escort help her back to treatment.


    Naruto''s mood becameplicated again.


    ''Don''t tell me..... am I wrong?''


    ...


    At the same time, a waterfall somewhere near Konoha Vige.


    The sound of the waterfall shed. But even so, there is still no way to cover the sound of Sasuke standing on the water, facing the cliff in the waterfall!


    It''s been a week!


    After waiting for a week, Naruto''s damned ''big brother'' did not respond to him! And now, he was upset when he saw Naruto!


    Even when Naruto invited him to go out with Hinata for a party, he ruthlessly rejected it. --It also led to the end of the party before it even started.


    Today, Sasuke is venting wildly here! He tried to vent the anger in his heart on this cliff!


    But finally, after so long, Li Yaoxiang''s voice sounded in his mind. Suddenly, Sasuke stopped and expressed his happiness!


    ''The voice in my head finally appeared!''


    But he was full of anger in his heart. He soon revealed the sinister expression, shouting directly inside the waterfall: "You are finally willing to appear?! Didn''t you say that as long as I do things for you, you will avenge me?! How long has it been?! 6 years! It''s been 6 years! Was it that if I didn''t do that to Naruto that day, and you didn''t n to show up?! Or have you been fooling me?!"


    After saying that, Sasuke''splexion changed from stern to surprise, and then from surprise to surprise, and finally became dignified andplicated.


    Sasuke: "Why do you do this! What is your purpose! Also, what does this have to do with my revenge!"


    Not long after this question was asked, Sasuke pped angrily on the water again.


    ''Damn it!''


    ''No answer!''


    Immediately, Sasuke showed an indecisive expression...

 Chapter 114: Lost and knowing back

    Chapter 114: Lost and knowing back


    Early the next morning, on the streets of Konoha.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen didn''t stay in the Hokage room to process documents but instead wandered around on the streets. The vigers still treat him as Hokage very respectfully.


    Each Lord-Hokage before, perhaps after him.


    Compared with his partner and his subordinates, the vigers who havee into view are much simpler. They don''t know what happened to the Konoha upperyer, and their attitude towards Third-Hokage is the most sincere.


    Seeing the reactions of the vigers one by one, Sarutobi Hiruzen felt relieved.


    At least the vigers of Konoha have not abandoned him...


    While walking, Sarutobi Hiruzen came to Naruto''s house.


    As soon as they met, Naruto behaved a little stunned: "Old fogey...? Why are you here?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen smiled: "What''s the matter? Can''t old fogey see you anymore? What? Standing here, don''t you n to invite an old fogey to sit in?"


    Naruto recovered: "Uh... no, no, pleasee in. Pleasee in."


    Naruto''s mind is simple.


    Although he doesn''t like Sarutobi Hiruzen''s way of doing things very much, he hasn''t reached the point where he hates Sarutobi Hiruzen. At most, he''s disheartened by Konoha''s upperyer.


    If the same thing happens again, it is estimated that Naruto will never make the same choice again; ignoring the safety of his life toe back to report the news.


    As long as you make sure that the people you value are okay and you do what you can, you can be considered benevolent.


    One big and one small kneel, sitting at a low table.


    The atmosphere was very awkward, and Naruto didn''t know what to say. The rtionship between the two sides was so stiff a while ago, and he doesn''t understand why old fogey came to see him today.


    However, the experienced Sarutobi Hiruzen did not let this awkward atmospherest for too long. He said with a slight smile: "What''s wrong, Naruto? Remember in your childhood, when this old fogey came to visit you. You were very happy, weren''t you? Now that you grew up, you don''t like to get along with the old man? Or... still angry at me aboutst time?"


    Naruto scratched his head and smiled awkwardly: "It''s also... no, I just don''t know what to say."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen: "Then talk about your experience over the years... old fogey hasn''t heard your story in a long time. I remember that as long as I was here, you would impatiently share with me what you encountered. "Interesting thing."


    Now that the Suna Ninjas'' attack on the vige is over, Naruto did not mean to hide anything. He roughly talked about the experience over the years. However,pared with his childhood, the expression of excitement and impatience is gone, and it just talks about some superficial things.


    He only used this to ease the atmosphere, and he didn''t say much about the details.


    Suddenly, Sarutobi Hiruzen came with a guilty face and then came this sentence: "Naruto, I''m sorry."


    Naruto was dumbfounded.


    The air suddenly became very quiet.


    He even thought he had heard it wrong.


    But who knows that Sarutobi Hiruzen went on to say: "I''m sorry for you. I''ve wronged you all these years."


    Naruto, this time, was really shocked!


    ''Old fogey is apologizing to me?!''


    Without waiting for Naruto to respond, Sarutobi Hiruzen said: "I did not do well. If only I watched you well, you wouldn''t have been wronged so much over the years."


    Naruto was still sitting there dumbfounded. His mouth opened slightly, not knowing what to do to respond.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen: "Hey~ Naruto, me me if you want to me me. But, I hope you won''t hate the vige."


    Naruto cried out in surprise: "No, old fogey. I don''t hold a grudge against the vige!!"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen nodded with a smile: "That''s good, that''s good. This grandpa Hokage is too old, and I don''t know if I can see you grow up. Konoha will depend on the young people of your generation in the future." As he said, he patted Naruto on the shoulder as a sign of encouragement: "Well, this old man will leave first, lest you feel ufortable, haha."


    In addition, the old man also apologized to himself forying down his figure. Naruto was looking at grandpa Hokage''s lonely back.


    Naruto''s resentment buried in his heart has disappeared.


    ....


    After leaving Naruto''s house, Sarutobi Hiruzen walked to Sasuke''s house.


    Knock!


    Knock!


    Knock!


    Sasuke opened the gate: "Third... Third... Third-Kage?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen nodded with a smile: "Well, is it convenient for me to go in for a few words?"


    No matter how ruthless Sasuke was, he still seemed a little overwhelmed when he encountered the sudden visit of Third-Hokage, Sarutobi Hiruzen. While his head was nk, subconscious replied: "Please..."


    It''s another big one and one small one sitting kneeling at the low table.


    Sasuke: "Third-Kage, this... you have something to do with me?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen: "Don''t be nervous, I just want to see your situation. See if you are doing well."


    Sasuke: "You have a heart. I can take care of myself without a problem."


    "Hey~, Sasuke. I''m sorry for you."


    The same scene was staged again at Sasuke''s house!


    Sasuke''s shock level doesn''t seem much worse than Naruto!


    Sarutobi Hiruzen: "It''s all my fault. If I discover your brother''s problem in advance. Then...your family will not encounter this situation..."


    Hearing Sarutobi Hiruzen mentioning the word ''big brother'', Sasuke''s expression immediately became serious. Even the nervousness just now was forgotten thoroughly!


    "Enough. Don''t talk! He''s not my big brother! I swear! I must kill that man!" Sasuke resented.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen patted Sasuke''s shoulder,forting him: "I can understand your feeling. But revenge is revenge. Sasuke, I don''t want you to lose yourself because of hatred... Rest assured, even if you don''t take revenge, the vige will try its best to arrest him. Remember... Don''t force yourself. If you need any help, just tell this grandpa Hokage. If it can be done, I certainly won''t refuse."


    After listening to this remark, Sasuke was stunned at Sarutobi Hiruzen''s words.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen gave him a kind smile again: "Okay, this grandpa Hokage won''t bother you anymore, lest not make you feel so angry, haha."


    Looking at the back of Sarutobi Hitoshi''s departure, Sasuke hasn''t recovered in a long time. But he was not as naive as Naruto and was not moved by Sarutobi Hiruzen.


    ''Believe this old fogey?''


    ''Haha.''


    ''Then I might as well believe in myself!''


    ''How many years have passed? Are you justing to tell me that the vige is going all-out tracking him?''


    ''If the vige is going all-out, or if the man is not taken down, is the vige wasteful enough?''


    ''What do I expect from the vige?''


    Thinking of this, Sasuke once again identified his beliefs.


    It''s right to act ording to Li Yaoxiang''s n...

 Chapter 115: No! Its a dead end!

    Chapter 115: No! It''s a dead end!


    A few dayster, in the Hokage room.


    Today, the Hokage table is full of stacks of documents that are as tall as people, but there are many documents on the floor that have not yet been approved.


    The reason why there are so many documents that have not been approved yet was all because Sarutobi Hiruzen, in the past few days, did not put his mind to reviewing documents. He has been running around for several days and has visited many people. They are simr to the situation of Naruto and Sasuke, and he went to apologize or so on.


    And he did so for two main reasons!


    As stated before, the first reason is that he does not want to stand on either side. He does not want to damage the vige, so the only thing he can do is try to ease the rtionship between the two parties.


    Therefore, he used the simplest and most direct method.


    ''I hope that my personal visit and apology can y a role in alleviating it.''


    If some of his old close friends knew that he was so low because of such ridiculous thoughts, maybe they wouldugh at him in the back,ughing that he is no longer worthy of the title of Shinobi.


    But they didn''t know that the reason Sarutobi Hiruzen does this actually has a deeper meaning!


    This is rted to the second reason...


    In the Hokage room, sitting in the Hokage seat, absently gazing at the scenery outside the window, he is now waiting for a person, and this person is the key to the second reason!


    The scorching sun was falling slowly, and Sarutobi Hiruzen was still waiting.


    Even if someone wanted to report something to him during the period, he waved his hand and let others leave.


    He doesn''t know how long he waited, but the sky gradually began to dim.


    Just then, the voice he was waiting for was finally heard behind him!


    Yamanaka Inoichi: "Third-Kage."


    [*TL note: Inoichi Yamanaka (Yamanaka Inoichi) was the head of Konohagakure''s Yamanaka n, and along with Shikaku Nara and Chza Akimichi, he was a part of the 15th generation InoShikaCh trio. He was also the head of the Analysis Team in the vige''s Intelligence Division.]


    That''s right!


    Sarutobi Hiruzen waited so long for Yamanaka Inoichi!


    As a Hokage, he knows that Yamanaka Inoichi has a special ability, ''Mind Reading Jutsu''! And the second reason why he lowered his body before, to visit or apologize, is here! He wants Yamanaka Inoichi to spy on everyone''s thoughts afterward! Thus inferring the real hidden dangers hidden in the Konoha Vige!


    Of course, this so-called Mind Reading Jutsu is not 100% urate. He can only read the general thoughts of the other side and needs somenguage guidance.


    It''s like Yamanaka Inoichi asking the target: "Do you want to hurt the vige?"


    No matter how the other party conceals it, Yamanaka Inoichi can also rely on the ''Mind Reading Jutsu'' to read out the true thoughts of the other side.


    Yes, or no.


    As for how to hurt the other side, how to act, what to n, and a series of more detailed answers, it''s not going to be known through the jutsu.


    But, This is enough for Sarutobi Hiruzen!


    At the same time, this is one of the reasons why he opened Jiraiya. He is very clear about the character of this student. If the target that was spied out were someone whom Jiraiya also values, it would be difficult to do, and Jiraiya will definitely stop him.


    Therefore, he retreated!


    With the excuse of abdicating, he let Jiraiya go first!


    As for... if the matter has not been resolved, and if Jiraiya wille back with Tsunade...


    That does not matter!


    Just remember one word, drag!


    As long as he keeps dragging on, he believes Tsunade will not be so thick-skinned. In front of him, she would only say: "Hey! Old man! Didn''t you say you gave it to me?!"


    Therefore, all ns have been arranged.


    Now just waiting for Yamanaka Inoichi to say who has an evil intent for the vige, he can also contribute hisst energy to the vige and solve this hidden danger!


    As soon as he heard Yamanaka Inoichi''s voice, he turned around quickly along with the Hokage seat, and an expression of great joy appeared on his face: "How?"


    Yamanaka Inoichi shook his head: "No problem."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s brows slightly wrinkled, questioning: "Naruto, Sasuke, is there any problem?"


    Yamanaka Inoichi nodded.


    Thinking for a moment, Sarutobi Hiruzen continued to ask, "What about Hyuga Hinata?"


    Yamanaka Inoichi shook his head again, saying ''no problem''.


    Yes.


    Naruto, Sasuke, and Hinata are the objects he told Yamanaka Inoichi to pay attention to. Although this practice certainly greatly impacts his image, Yamanaka Inoichi''s impression of his Hokage will also fall to the bottom. As a Hokage, he couldn''t care much.


    After all, except for Hinata, Sasuke, and Naruto, the suspicion of other people is not as big as them. As for the n Leaders of the Great ns, a few old close friends, and some high-level people in the vige, this is not what Yamanaka Inoichi can spy on.


    Because everyone knows everything, including this.


    If Yamanaka Inoichi is a little abnormal, how can the other party not realize anything?


    Therefore, for these people, Sarutobi Hiruzen did not allow Yamanaka Inoichi to spy. He just relied on his own judgment to grasp the idea of the other side when he visited.


    Only,


    Even Hyuga Hinata is fine...


    There''s something strange, but he can''t pinpoint what it was.


    For the Great ns Leaders, as well as several old close friends, although he doesn''t have ''Mind Reading Jutsu'', he still has some experience in watching people. He is very sure that none of these people want to destroy Konoha.


    As long as there is no such extreme idea, everything is easy to discuss.


    At the same time, there is no such thing as a hidden danger.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen waved his hand, indicating Yamanaka Inoichi to leave.


    ..


    Again he was left alone with the huge Hokage room; He looked up and thought...


    ''No problem with Naruto''


    ''Hinata is no problem''


    ''Sasuke has no problem''


    ''No problem at all, then.''


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s expression was condensed. The sharp gaze, looking at the distant direction outside the window!


    ''The problem can only be with Uchiha Itachi!''


    ...


    While Sarutobi Hiruzen was thinking about hidden dangers, Yamanaka Inoichi also returned home.


    When his wife saw that his expression was not right, his wife said with concern: "What''s wrong?"


    Yamanaka Inoichi shook his head: "It''s okay."


    When his wife saw he was unwilling to say, she stopped asking.


    In this scene, Sarutobi Hiruzen was destined never to see it. More importantly, what he never knew was that Yamanaka had spotted Hinata''s problem. However, under the condemnation of his conscience, he did not continue to spy. He also chose to hide the truth for this little girl...

 Chapter 116: The Fierce Sasuke

    Chapter 116: The Fierce Sasuke


    Konoha Vige.


    While Sarutobi Hiruzen was visiting, Yamanaka Inoichi was spying on various people.


    However, It is not just Sarutobi Hiruzen that has undergone tremendous changes.


    Even Sasuke.


    That day, after venting emotions in the waterfall, the morning of the next day, the morning when Sarutobi Hiruzen visited him, Sasuke changed significantly. He no longer conducts his regr exercise life. Instead, he came to Naruto''s house early in the morning.


    "What is it, Naruto? Isn''t it a party? Let''s go and find Hinata together."


    Naruto, who was originally visited by Sarutobi Hiruzen, was still a little confused.


    At this time, the music broke on the spot, and he threw Sarutobi Hiruzen directly to beyond the topmost clouds.


    Then, while the two were walking to find Hinata, they each told their experiences over the past few years.


    Naruto talked about the interesting things that happened to him in the past few years, without omission and detail, to share with his close friend.


    Sasuke also told some interesting things from time to time. --How strong is he? How fast he conquered the enemy, how fast, etc.


    The rtionship between the two sides seems as harmonious as a few years ago when the Uchiha n was not destroyed.


    While walking, the two people came to the Hyuga n Residence. They also met Hinata very smoothly.


    Hinata was slightly surprised when she saw Sasuke''s long-lost smile. Of course, Hinata did not refuse the invitation of the two. After all, Sasuke was her teammate.


    Reject this offer because of Naruto?


    No matter how she says it, she can''t justify it.


    ''I haven''t seen each other for a few years, and now my attitude towards Naruto is neither salty nor indifferent. Perhaps I can use the reasons why I have not seen each other for many years and that my feelings have faded.''


    Konoha Vige recreates a scene that has been missing for a long time.


    A few years ago, the three little kids that almost all stuck together finally reunited together and walked on the streets of Konoha.


    Seeing this scene made the vigers feel a little bit emotional.


    ''Time passes really fast In a sh, the children a few years ago had grown so tall, and their friendships are still so good.''


    ''It''s very memorable.''


    It is a pity that they only noticed the surface but did not find the rtionship between them. Compared with a few years ago, it is still significantly different.


    At that time, the picture of Hinata being held by Naruto and running on the street was long gone.


    Between the two people, there is Sasuke.


    Throughout the party, Naruto had intentionally or unintentionally wanted to have a good rtionship with Hinata. But Hinata still maintained a nonchnt attitude towards him, and she even avoided Naruto''s eyes.


    This made Naruto feel a little lost, but he soon regained his energetic appearance.


    Although it is impossible to return to the previous rtionship, it is enough to be able to get along with the three as before. In the past few years, when Naruto left, the most anticipated scene is in front of him.


    The three get together again.


    ...


    Meanwhile, Sarutobi Hiruzen was waiting for Yamanaka Inoichi''s news for the past few days.


    "Sasuke still changed his abnormality and woulde to find Naruto out every day."


    "The rtionship between the two parties has therefore returned to what it was in the past."


    ....


    Today, Sasuke also asked Naruto toe out.


    He came to the Ramen Ichiraku restaurant, and Hinata also participated in this gathering.


    Originally, Hinata wanted to use Gourd to draw a scoop and use Sasuke to separate him from Naruto, but today Naruto just wants Sasuke to sit next to him.


    Seeing this, in desperation, she had to sit next to Naruto.


    Immediately afterward, the three each ordered a bowl of ramen.


    During the meal...


    Naruto: "Hinata, this is delicious. I can''t finish it. Can I give it to you?"


    Naruto: "Hinata, are you full? Should I order you another bowl?"


    Naruto: "Hinata, I want to order another bowl, but I can''t finish it. How about giving you half?


    Yes, Naruto focused almost all his attention on Hinata.


    Sasuke is regarded as a transparent person by him.


    No matter what Naruto said, Hinata would refuse one after another.


    Just when the three were about to finish their meal, Ramen Ichiraku Hall weed an unexpected guest, Sarutobi Hiruzen!


    Sarutobi Hiruzen lifted the curtains high above the door beams, showing a kind smile.


    The flickering of the light let the three looked involuntarily behind them, and they Immediately stood upright.


    Sasuke: "Third-Kage."


    Naruto: "Old fogey."


    Hinata: "Teacher."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s previous actions have had many effects. At least those who have been baptized by Will of Fire from an early age are like the three in front of them. Their attitude towards him is obviously much better.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen nodded.


    Immediately afterward, it was the Boss of the Ramen Ichiraku Pavilion.


    Seeing the arrival of Third-Hokage, he seemed a little panicked and hurriedly greeted: "Wee! Wee!"


    "Wee! Wee! Haha! I didn''t expect Lord-Hokage toe today. If I had known Lord-Hokage would be here today, I''d have clean up the store first."


    "It''s okay." Sarutobi Hiruzen waved his hand, and his eyes shifted from Boss to Naruto''s group, "Hm? You three don''t mind eating a bowl of ramen with the old man, right?"


    The three said nothing.


    Then Sarutobi Hiruzen joined this small group and ate ramen together.


    They chatted while eating.


    Naruto finally asked the focus of the topic: "Old fogey, why are you free toe here today?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen also said: "I have a task here, and I need Sasuke''s help. I visited Sasuke''s house, but he wasn''t there."


    Upon hearing this sentence, not only Naruto''s expression became solemn, even Hinata''s body slightly trembled. They wouldn''t have forgotten the cruel incident in which Sasuke''s n was destroyed a few years ago just because of Sarutobi''s sudden visit a few days ago.


    Hinata was better, barely resisting her nervousness.


    Naruto showed his concern about Sarutobi Hiruzen''s mission unabashedly.


    Naruto said: "Old fogey, what kind of mission do you need to ask Sasuke to help yourself? Can''t other people do it? Also, can I participate in this mission?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen shook his head and said: "We need to use Sasuke''s Sharingan for this mission. And it is more secretive and has certain risks, and it is not suitable for too many people to participate. But rest assured, I will let people ensure the safety of Sasuke. And it is only by virtue of his Sharingan''s ability that he will not be put in danger."


    Naruto, who still wants to say something, was interrupted by Sasuke on the side. He pulled Naruto''s shoulder and said, "No need to say. Third-Kage, I am willing to ept this mission."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen was slightly surprised. He thought that Sasuke wouldn''t agree so easily. But this is a good thing At least his n can be carried out smoothly.


    ..


    3 dayster.


    It is also a small gathering of Hinata, Naruto, and Sasuke.


    It''s just that this can be considered a farewell ceremony for Sasuke. ording to Sarutobi Hiruzen, Sasuke''s mission this time would take a month, so they were having another small party just before Sasuke''s leaving.


    The time came to the end of the party.


    Two Anbu ninjas suddenly appeared in front of the three: "Uchiha Sasuke, it''s time to go."


    Sasuke faced the two Anbu ninjas, nodded, and then smiled cheerfully to Naruto and Hinata: "Then I will go first. Don''t forget me."


    Sasuke was waving away from the two and slowly left the line of sight of the two.


    Naruto turned his head: "Hinata, we..."


    Hinata: "Naruto, I still have something to do, so I will go first. When Sasukees back, let''s meet again."


    Naruto silently stared at Hinata''s back. His heart was very lost.


    In the following days, without the red thread of Sasuke, even if Naruto tried no matter how much he tried, there was no way to meet Hinata alone.


    ...


    After leaving Konoha.


    Sasuke followed two Anbu ninjas and came to the wilderness, which is also a long-distance away from Konoha. It is extremely secret here. On the way, Sasuke saw no trace of humans.


    The two Anbu ninjas took him to only one wood house in this wilderness.


    The door was just opened, and the squeak sounded.


    What came into sight was Sarutobi Hiruzen, who had been waiting in the wood house for a long time. Sarutobi Hiruzen took a sip of hot tea while squinting and said with a slight smile: "Sasuke, you are here."


    Sasuke nodded: "Third-Kage, what is my mission this time?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen: "This period of time, you live in this wood house first. When the target character passes through this area, we need you to use Sharingan''s ability to help us observe the other side''s actions. You don''t need to worry about eating and drinking. I will send someone to deliver it to you regrly. Avoid beating the grass to scare the snake. In this period, you should stay in the house as much as possible, and don''t just walk around."


    Seeing Sasuke nodded and epting the requirements, Sarutobi Hiruzen left the wood house with satisfaction.


    ..


    When he appeared outside the wood house, the original kindness disappeared.


    What is transformed is a delightful expression!


    The most critical part of the n has already beenpleted. Then, just wait for him to return to Konoha, and wait for the time to be ripe, he can implement the following n!


    That''s right.


    All Sarutobi Hiruzen did this time was to solve the hidden danger of Konoha, which is Uchiha Itachi!


    The so-called mission to let Sasukee to this wilderness is, of course, not true He just wanted to attract Uchiha Itachi!


    If things go well, after returning to Konoha, he will wait for some time before announcing Sasuke''s death to achieve his purpose.


    He wants Uchiha Itachi to copse.


    Make Uchiha Itachi crazy.


    Let him unreasonably attack Konoha!


    Then he can be rational and clearly structured under everyone''s attention As long as the n is sessful, he can retain his reputation and be a good Hokage at the expense of Konoha!


    It can really solve this hidden danger for Konoha!


    This is undoubtedly the best choice for this old Hokage.


    As for Naruto...


    It''s also easy to exin.


    As soon as the news of Sasuke''s death began to spread in the vige, Naruto would have gone crazy to ask him in detail. So as long as he told him that the news was just a misunderstanding, Sasuke only suffered some injuries and needed to be outside for a while. Then Naruto will not resent him or the vige.


    Everything is so perfect!


    Sarutobi Hiruzen rejoiced on the road back to Konoha.


    But what Sarutobi Hiruzen didn''t know was that when he left the wood house, when only Sasuke was left in the wood house, the cheerful face that Sasuke had been trying to maintain for the past few days faded instantly!


    It was changed back to a cold and slightly ruthless expression.


    ...


    Two dayster.


    Sasuke stayed in the wood house for two days.


    It looks like there are no exceptions.


    But on the morning of the 3rd day, Sasuke opened the wood house door and went outside.


    The two Anbu ninjas who took the mission with him also ''just happened to pass by: "Huh? Why did youe out? What happened?"


    Sasuke said: "It''s nothing. I just want toe out and walk."


    From beginning to end, the purpose of Sarutobi Hiruzen is very clear.


    It is to solve the hidden danger of Uchiha Itachi and perish with him to be a hero of Konoha. He cannot allow the new generation to generate new hatred against him or Konoha and be another hidden danger.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen has a hard requirement. That is, Sasuke cannot be found to be anomalous. Therefore, he also issued a very loose monitoring order to these two Anbu ninjas.


    Because of this, after hearing Sasuke''s exnation, the two Anbu ninja only hinted: "Well, don''t go too far to avoid being caught by the target."


    Sasuke answered,plied, and left 2 Anbu ninja''s fields of view.


    To avoid being discovered by Sasuke, two Anbu ninjas did not intend to follow Sasuke and only watched.


    They could only wait.


    ....


    After waiting for almost 2 hours, there''s no sign of Sasuke''s return.


    The two Anbu ninjas realized that something was wrong and quickly moved towards the direction of departure and probed separately.


    After a while, the two regrouped.


    Both parties meet to shake their heads.


    "Damn it! Go back and report to the Third-Kage!"


    ...


    At the same time when the two Anbu ninjas hurried back to report Sasuke''s disappearance to Sarutobi Hiruzen.


    Konoha Vige.


    A child with little hollow eyes came to Naruto ignorantly: "Brother, there is a big brother outside the vige. Let me give you the note."


    Naruto took the note and read the message on the note.


    Naruto was slightly puzzled and ndered in his heart: "It''s weird. Didn''t Sasuke go out to pick up the task? How could he be back at this time? How could he make it so mysterious?"


    Naruto didn''t think much and immediately went to the ce Sasuke told him to.


    ....


    Not long after, Naruto came to the appointed ce on the note.


    It was a cliff.


    There is a big waterfall beside the cliff.


    As soon as Naruto came here, he saw a guy in a cloak standing on the edge of a cliff. The back was somewhat familiar, but Naruto was not sure.


    "Sasuke?"


    The guy in the cloak slowly turned around and slowly took off the cloak.


    Naruto was shocked and then eximed: "Sasuke! What''s wrong with you?!"

 Chapter 117: The Darkening Level Soars

    Chapter 117: The Darkening Level Soars


    Sasuke opened an instant of the cloak and surprised Naruto.


    Naruto saw Sasuke''s mouth was bleeding. Sasuke''s body is on the verge of copse as if it will fall in the next second.


    Obviously, he suffered a severe injury.


    "Sasuke! What''s wrong with you?!" Naruto rushed over to support Sasuke.


    "Who?! Who made you like this?!"


    "Aren''t you going out to do the mission?!"


    "Old fogey didn''t say it would ensure your safety?! How could you do this?!"


    "Cough, cough, cough!" Sasuke just wanted to talk and coughed up again a mouthful of blood. It was hard to slow down, so I continued, "Naruto... I''m sorry, I can''te back to meet you and Hinata. Cough, cough, cough!"


    Naruto covered Sasuke''s chest with blood wounds, "No, Sasuke, don''t speak first. I''ll take you back to treatment first."


    He Just wanted to take Sasuke away to safety.


    Sasuke tightened Naruto''s sleeve, shaking one''s head: "No, Naruto, I can''t do it. Can you promise me one thing?"


    Naruto was panicking, and he nodded again and again.


    Sasuke: "Help me, help me get revenge... Help me kill that man..."


    Naruto was taken aback. Seeing how Sasuke is so stubborn, his heart is very ufortable. He knows the truth about the destruction of the Uchiha n that the big brother has told him. But for the safety of Sasuke''s life, he never dared to tell Sasuke.


    He was afraid that Sasuke would produce an evil intent for the vige, be found by the vige, and then be removed.


    This secret has been concealed for 6 years!


    Things have passed so long, but it turns out that Sasuke has been living in pain. At the end of his life, he still does not forget to plead with himself to help him get revenge.


    At this moment, Naruto really wanted to tell Sasuke the truth about everything!


    But... Can he?


    Can he tell Sasuke?


    If Sasuke knew the truth now, it would only make Sasuke even more ufortable.


    Naruto did not want to see Sasuke leave with regrets. In order to make Sasuke better, he chose to nod, and he agreed to Sasuke''s request and then begged: "I promise you. I promise you. Don''t talk again, Sasuke. Let me take you back for treatment, okay?"


    Sasuke shook his head smiling, and he immediately pushed Naruto away. He turned around and jumped off the cliff!


    As soon as the reaction came, Naruto rushed up and tried to catch Sasuke.


    But he was toote.


    He kneeled and climbed on the cliff, but his hand was empty.


    Thest picture he saw was when Sasuke fell and smiled at him and said the words "Help me avenge" in his mouth.


    ..


    Naruto moved quickly.


    He hurried up and chased up along the cliff! Then he kept leaping by the river, trying to catch up with Sasuke!


    Trying to rescue Sasuke!


    But after chasing for a long distance, no trace of Sasuke could be seen.


    Naruto went along the direction of the river again, but still, nothing was found!


    In the end, he seemed to ept the fact that both eyes knelt down beside the river and muttered to himself: "Why... Why does this happen?"


    ''Sasuke, didn''t you say you want to wait till you get back to the party?''


    ''Sasuke, didn''t you say you want revenge?''


    ''Then don''t die!''


    ''Come back soon!''


    At the same time, Naruto''s mind is involuntarily showing the scenes of the scenes he had with Sasuke. He remembered the scene in childhood where two people met for the first time. The two people roll on the ground to make trouble, pulling the hair on the other side, and no one will ept the scene of losing. He remembered the scene of exercising together.


    Naruto''s eyes slowly changed from empty to terrible!


    "Old fogey!"


    "Old fogey!"


    "Didn''t you say it''s safe! Will it be okay? How could this be the case?!"


    Darkening degree...


    48%...


    52%...


    55%...


    58%...


    62%!


    With an angry expression, Naruto rushed back in the direction of Konoha!


    ...


    At the same time, at the top of a tall tree.


    Sasuke stood unscathed on top of the tall tree, and he watched Naruto coldly throughout his search for him.


    After seeing Naruto rushing back to Konoha frantically, he murmured: "Why do you want to do this? Can this really help me get revenge?"


    Li Yaoxiang''s voice appeared in Sasuke''s mind, "You should know, and you will know. If you shouldn''t know, don''t ask."


    An indifferent speech silenced Sasuke.


    When he saw Li Yaoxiang''s method, it really subverted Sasuke''s worldview. After all, it was too unbelievable. He can make a body exactly like Sasuke himself appear in front of him out of thin air. ---What is more terrifying is that he can integrate his soul into this brand-new body and let him carry out this series of actions.


    After the event, he let his soul return to the main body.


    The broken and severely injured body disappeared in front of him again.


    All in all.


    If Sasuke hadn''t seen it with his own eyes, he really couldn''t believe that this was the truth.


    What puzzled him was Li Yaoxiang has this kind of ability, has this kind of strength. So, why does he not help him kill the man straightforwardly, instead tell him to do so many things that he doesn''t understand?


    ''Could it be that Naruto will avenge me as long as I die?''


    ''That''s why he did this?''


    After thinking for a long time, Sasuke couldn''t think of the reason.


    In the end, he had to give up and stop thinking.


    Anyway, as long as he can get his revenge and can kill the man Then no matter what you do, no matter who you sacrifice, everything is worth it.


    That''s right!


    The secret mastermind that caused this situation is, of course, Li Yaoxiang!


    Li Yaoxiang''s original n was to let Sasuke die indirectly in Konoha''s hands. So, in the beginning, Sasuke would change his abnormality and take the initiative to restore his previous rtionship with Naruto. The purpose is to make Naruto''s feelings for Sasuke deeper.


    And then this surprise would appear!


    The idea of swaying Orochimaru at the beginning and leaving the life of Sarutobi Hiruzen was indeed right!


    The n hasn''t really started yet, and Sarutobi Hiruzen''s divine assist is delivered to the door.


    Of course, Li Yaoxiang will not miss this opportunity So there was this scene where Sasuke readily agreed to the missionmissioned by Sarutobi Hiruzen.


    The next step is the beginning of the n.


    After Sasuke escaped from the wood house, he first asked Sasuke to perform Genjutsu on a child and met Naruto. Then Li Yaoxiang exchanged his soul to a body that looked exactly like Sasuke from the system mall. ----The cheap kind, no Uchiha Bloodline kind.


    After Sasuke wounded this body, he integrated Sasuke''s soul into it, and a scene on the cliff appeared.


    Secondly, Li Yaoxiang secretly withdrew the broken body so Naruto could not find the corpse, and the vige could not find the weak spot.


    This time the operation finally ended sessfully.


    As for why Sasuke was not allowed to die directly, the reason is also very simple Because Sasuke as a chess piece is of great use to him. Li Yaoxiang will not let Sasuke quit this big show so early!


    The next thing to do is to wait for the natural development of this matter and let Sasuke witness this good show for himself!


    Let him be his loyal chess piece!

 Chapter 118: Sarutobi Hiruzen where the old god is in

    Chapter 118: Sarutobi Hiruzen where the old god is in


    Hokage Residence.


    Two Anbu ninjas suddenly appeared in the Hokage room: "Third-Kage, ording to your instructions, spread the news of Sasuke''s death."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen was satisfied and nodded, indicating that the two Anbu ninjas could leave.


    But one of the Anbu ninjas could not bear it and asked: "Third-Kage, Uchiha Sasuke, is he really dead?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen frowned.


    Some dissatisfaction said: "Go do what you should do!"


    This Anbu ninja looked like he could not walk away, and he didn''t leave until his colleague at the side pulled his sleeves.


    After the silhouette of the two peoplepletely disappeared in front of his eyes, Sarutobi Hiruzen turned to look outside the window.


    ''Fuh~''


    ''Now even the people under my own are questioning me?''


    ''I''m... really old.''


    ''As long as this n is sessful, everything will end here!''


    ...


    Inside the Konoha Vige.


    When the news of Sasuke''s death spread, all parties reacted differently. Of course, the first to notice that something was wrong was Shimura Danzo.


    With all kinds of information in the vige, he certainly couldn''t miss the fact that Sarutobi sent Sasuke out to pick up the task. He already felt that there was a problem with this matter. After all, other people may not know, but these old friends who are in a high position, but it is very clear that the vige has the problem of Uchiha Itachi.


    To move Sasuke means to talk to Uchiha Itachi, even if casting aside all considerations for a face.


    So, in any case, Shimura Danzo can''t believe that Sasuke would die during the mission given by Sarutobi.


    This is why in the original work, Shimura Danzo will try to solve this problem.


    He was pretending to disclose the news of Uchiha Itachi to Orochimaru and guiding him to attack Uchiha Itachi. Then, when Orochimaru wanted to abduct Sasuke, he tried every means to cooperate. Otherwise, if he really wanted to stop it, how could it be possible to escape from his roots with the help of the four Oto ninjas and Sasuke?


    All in all... Just to get rid of the trouble of Uchiha Itachi.


    Let Orochimaru abduct Sasuke smoothly and attract Uchiha Itachi''s hatred.


    Therefore, after reporting this news to him, he just sneered, to disdain as beneath contempt, and ordered his subordinates to continue to pay close attention to the movement of Sarutobi Hiruzen. He firmly believed that this old close friend must be nning something.


    Bide one''s time, look at the situation first and then talk about it.


    ....


    On the other hand, after Kakashi got the news, he felt very ufortable.


    He first confirmed the authenticity of the news, and it turned out that after the news came out of Anbu, he never questioned the result again. After all, he was kept in the dark about Uchiha''s extermination.


    Then his first thing was to apologize to Obito''s grave Said that he did not take care of Sasuke and let the Uchiha n''s only remaining seedlings be lost.


    ...


    The Hyuga n Residence, in the courtyard of Hyuga Main House.


    In the past few years, when Naruto left, Hinata spent most of her time with her younger sister, Hyuga Hanabi, besides studying and exercising with Sarutobi Hiruzen.


    Every day, she will teach her younger sister to train carefully. Let the younger sister be stronger and hope that her younger sister can stand alone.


    On this day, she is teaching her younger sister Eight-Trigrams Palm as always, but there was the voice of patrolling bodyguards that happened to hit Hinata''s ears.


    "Hello, have you heard? Someone outside said that Uchiha Sasuke seems to have died in this mission."


    "Really?! Isn''t that the Eldest Young Lady''s teammate? Do we need to tell the Eldest Young Lady?"


    "Hey, don''t be meddlesome. I believe it won''t take long for Eldest Young Lady to understand."


    The two patrol guards didn''t know their Eldest Young Lady was on the other side of the wall, and Hinata heard all.


    Hinata slightly trembled.


    Hanabi, who was training, noticed something was wrong and walked over: "Elder sister, what''s wrong with you?"


    Hinata wiped his eyes: "It''s okay, sister. I just got sand in my eyes."


    Immediately, Hinata''s right hand pat the younger sister''s hair: "Be good, Hanabi. Step up exercise. Didn''t you say that you want to catch up with me? When I am at your age, I am much better than you now!"


    Hyuga Hanabi looked like an admirer; her eyes glowed with gratitude and then turned back randomly to exercise.


    But what Hinata didn''t find was that at an instant, Hanabi turned around. Hanabi looked at the elder sister again, who seemed strong, was wiping her eyes again.


    ...


    At the same time, Hokage Residence.


    Hokage indoor.


    Just when Sarutobi Hizumi was satisfied with the n that went so smoothly, an Anbu ninja suddenly appeared behind him: "Third-Kage, Uzumaki Naruto, with hostility, moved towards our direction."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen, hearing this, rejoiced for a while. He waved his hand and motioned for the Anbu ninja to leave.


    Just as expected, it didn''t take long. The door of the Hokage room was "popped" with a loud noise and was directly opened by Naruto!


    Naruto mmed the desk, "Old fogey! What the hell is going on! Didn''t you say that this mission is safe! Then how could something happen to Sasuke?!"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen said unperturbed: "Naruto, you calm down first."


    Naruto suddenly swiped the file on the desktop to the ground: "Sasuke is dead now! How can you calm me down!"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen: "You listen to me first. Sasuke is not dead at all died. He just suffered some injuries. Now he still needs time to recuperate. When his injuries heal, Sasuke will naturallye back. I don''t know what happened to the news in the vige. Everyone must have misunderstood it."


    Naruto was stunned.


    ''Sasuke is not dead yet?''


    ''Did the old fogey people find Sasuke in the river?''


    ''No, no!''


    ''How can this be?!''


    ''I have been looking for a long distance by the river for a while. If old fogey sent someone to find Sasuke, how could I not find it?!''


    Just when Naruto sensed something was wrong, the two Anbu ninjas who were responsible for monitoring Sasuke came to the Hokage room at this time.

 Chapter 119: Lost Control

    Chapter 119: Lost Control


    Seeing the appearance of these two Anbu ninjas, Sarutobi Hiruzen suddenly froze.


    ''Weren''t these two people sent to take care of Sasuke?!''


    ''Whye back at this time?!''


    The more he thinks, the uneasiness in Sarutobi Hiruzen''s heart bes even stronger!


    One of them wanted to say something but was stunned by Sarutobi Hiruzen''s reactions, and then he came to Sarutobi Hiruzen''s ear to report the news about Sasuke''s disappearance.


    Naruto''s eyes were fixed on two people.


    The more he looked, the worse it was!


    The more he looked, the more familiar they were!


    ''No, it''s not right!''


    ''Are these two Anbu ninja masks exactly the same as the two Anbu ninjas who took Sasuke away?!''


    Naruto, who had reacted, immediately rushed forward and grabbed the cor of this Anbu: "Damn it! Speak! What the hell is going on?! You took Sasuke away, right?" Then Naruto stared fiercely at Sarutobi Hiruzen again: "What the hell are you hiding from me?! Did you kill Sasuke?! Wasn''t it enough that you destroyed Sasuke''s n?! You won''t even let Sasuke go?!"


    The emotional Naruto identally blurted out the events of the year. But he, who was blinded by anger, still had a lot of control. At this time, he just wanted to know the answer!


    The heart of Sarutobi Hiruzen immediately turned up the heaven overflowing giant wave!


    ''Naruto!''


    ''Why does Naruto say that I killed Sasuke''s n?!''


    ''Why does Naruto say so?!''


    ''Does he know it?!''


    ''What else does Naruto know?!''


    Sarutobi Hizen did not immediately ask. In a moment, countless possibilities shed in his mind. His feet were hidden under the table, unable to bear trembling slightly, a terrifying thought shed in his mind!


    ''Hidden dangers.''


    ''Damn it!''


    ''It turns out that this damned demon fox is this hidden danger!''


    ''No!''


    ''Wrong!''


    ''How could Naruto know what happened then? Who told him?''


    ''Big brother...!''


    ''Correct! It''s the big brother!''


    Apart from this suspicious ''big brother'', Sarutobi Hiruzen couldn''t think of where Naruto knew these secrets. Sarutobi Hiruzen now wants to die. He hates himself for not noticing it, and he even ignores an important clue.


    He just thought Naruto''s ''illness'' was gone... and that the so-called ''big brother'' was only imagined by Naruto himself.


    But how could this "Big brother" be just Naruto''s fantasy? The young Naruto, who knows so many secrets, must have a great rtionship with this ''big brother''!


    ''So that''s how it is!''


    ''It turns out that Naruto and his big brother are Konoha''s biggest hidden dangers?!''


    ''Damn it!''


    ''How could this be the case! Isn''t the n going well?''


    ''Why are there so many mistakes?''


    How does this let him carry on the n?


    How could he die with Uchiha Itachi?


    With the hidden danger of Naruto, how to give Konoha peace of mind to other people?


    ''No!''


    ''No!''


    ''I can''t die like this!''


    ''The n must be changed!''


    Sarutobi Hiruzen resented himself but did not appear on the surface. Seeing such rude Naruto, he was still calm andposed and said: "Naruto, you calm down first. He just told me that Sasuke was only missing."


    Immediately, Sarutobi Hiruzen pretended to be righteous and said to the Anbu ninja aside: "If you have anything, just tell everyone, don''t hide it!"


    Naruto loosened Anbu ninja''s cor.


    Anbu ninjaplied ''Yes'' and immediately replied: "Third-Kage, Sasuke told us to go out, and we didn''t stop him. After waiting 2 hours, Sasuke didn''te back. We went out and traced him, only to find that Sasuke was no longer anywhere."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen nodded: "Naruto, hear that? Sasuke is just missing. We''re not sure yet if he is dead or not. I''ll send someone to do my best to track him down."


    Naruto, hearing this, got even angrier!


    ''You guys are so embarrassed, to tell the truth to me?!''


    ''Sasuke suffered serious injury and jumped off the cliff in front of me!''


    Naruto was furious. Chakras coat instantly wrapped the whole body.


    Immediately afterward, a Chakra coat condenses a beast w, and one w hit the wall of the Hokage room, causing a rumble, and the wall of the Hokage room was also beaten with a huge hole.


    The entire Hokage room is exposed to the air.


    Even the documents in the Hokage room flew out of the Hokage room following the strong wind. Eventually, it fell all over the street.


    Also, because of this loud noiseing from the direction of Hokage Residence, all the people in Konoha, all ninjas, are like frightened birds, mistakenly thinking that someone has attacked the vige again.


    Ninjas above Jonin Level leap forward toward Hokage Residence.


    In a split second, arge number of ninjas gathered outside the Hokage Residence.


    Everyone stood on the street or standing on the roof.


    When they saw the scene in the Hokage room, everyone''s movements stopped. They don''t know what happened. They don''t know why Naruto waited for Third-Hokage fiercely in that gesture.


    The first to speak, and the most qualified to speak, were, of course, the other three elders except Sarutobi Hiruzen. They walked out of the crowd and approached the Hokage''s room further.


    Shimura Danzo: "Hmph! Uzumaki Naruto, what do you mean?! Openly attacking the Hokage, are you nning to betray the vige?!"


    Mitokado Homura: "Naruto, is there any misunderstanding? Don''t get angry. Let''s talk slowly."


    Utatane Koharu: "Yeah, maybe it''s just a misunderstanding..."


    Naruto fiercely red at Shimura Danzo, then scanned Mitokado Homura. His eyes finally fell on Utatane Koharu. Before Utatane Koharu finished speaking, Naruto mmed: "Misunderstanding?! What misunderstanding?! Sasuke is dead, and you guys told me it was a misunderstanding?! Before leaving, he told me that Sasuke would be safe, but now?!"


    After hearing Naruto''s reason for going mad, everyone present did not know what to say.


    The news of Sasuke''s death has indeed spread in the vige. The reason why Naruto is so agitated, everyone can understand. After all, in the entire Konoha, who is the most harmonious with Naruto? Everyone on the scene knows.


    This time, everyone''s eyes fell on Sarutobi Hiruzen again, waiting for his exnation.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen: "Naruto, this is just a misunderstanding. Sasuke is only missing for a few hours. It shouldn''t be a problem with Sasuke''s strength."


    Naruto put out the Chakra coat on his body this time and grabbed the cor of Sarutobi Hiruzen:" ''Misunderstanding''?! ''No problem''?! I saw Sasuke suffered a serious injury and jumped off the cliff in front of me! You clearly missed that part of the story! You want to clear it now?!"

 Chapter 120: Four Old Fellows

    Chapter 120: Four Old Fellows


    After Naruto said this remark, everyone present was unavoidably shocked. They don''t know what is going on.


    ''Didn''t Sasuke take Third-Hokage''s mission and leave the vige?''


    ''How could hee back at this time?


    ''How could he suffer a serious injury, and how could he jump off the cliff in front of Naruto?''


    Countless why''s hovering in everyone''s mind.


    The three scheming old foxes instantly smelled the unusual in Naruto''s words. Without Sarutobi''s orders, the three looked at each other with a tacit understanding, and the subordinates evacuated the crowd. Thenid a barrier around. Keeping other people away or eavesdropping.


    Almost all of these things were done in a blink of an eye, and then they entered the Hokage room from the broken wall in the Hokage room.


    After two Anbu ninjas left, Sarutobi Hiruzen asked: "Naruto, can you tell the old fogey what the hell is going on? When did you see Sasuke? Where did you see Sasuke?"


    Naruto: "What?! What else do you have to say now?! You promise me you will ensure that Sasuke will not be in danger?! The wounds on Sasuke; who hurt him?!"


    After listening to Naruto''s statement, the 4 old men present were all a little ugly.


    In the end, it was still Sarutobi Hiruzen''s long-term focus: "Naruto, old fogey. This time I asked Sasuke to receive the mission; there really wouldn''t be much danger. I don''t know who hurt Sasuke. Go home and wait for the news. Old fogey promises you, no matter whether Sasuke is alive or dead, I will bring him back!"


    Naruto gasped and fiercely swept across the four people and said in a low tone: "I tell you, you better give me a satisfactory result in this matter. Otherwise, I won''t just let it go!"


    No matter how angry Naruto is, he still has a touch of reason Because he still had a glimmer of hope in his heart.


    ''When Sasuke jumped off the cliff, maybe he didn''t die?''


    Therefore, when Sarutobi Hiruzen said he would send people to find Sasuke, his anger was extinguished.


    ''The most important thing now is to find Sasuke.''


    ''Whether he''s alive or dead!''


    After leaving a ruthless sentence, Naruto leaped away from the broken wall directly, without any respect for the 4 old men in the Hokage room.


    ....


    A breeze blew in from the broken wall, and the old long sleeves gently floated.


    The atmosphere is slightly embarrassing; the 4 old fellows''plexions are as ugly as eating shit.


    Being threatened face-to-face by a 13 years old junior, where does this make their old faces look?! But the problem is that they are helpless in front of Naruto, who is so ruthless.


    ''Imprisonment?''


    ''Didn''t another Kyuubi berserk happen that year because of it?''


    ''Capturing Hinata and threatening Naruto to obey?''


    ''Also impossible.''


    If it is such a field, it is irreconcble They would not do it as ast resort.


    Not possible!


    In other words, you can''t do it yourself!


    It''s up to the old guy who couldn''t help but do it first. It would be better for the other three elders to have Sarutobi Hiruzen attract Naruto''s hatred now.


    As long as you take the opportunity to build a good rtionship, you may be able to win people''s hearts.


    The four people in the Hokage room have their own ns.


    In the end, Sarutobi Hiruzen was unable to bear it and was the first to start to talk: "Go to the Conference Hall."


    This only interrupted the various sly ns in the hearts of several people.


    .....


    After a while, in the Conference Hall.


    Not long after sitting down, Mitokado Homura, Utatane Koharu, and Shimura Danzo used a ming expression, looking towards Sarutobi Hiruzen. Obviously, this is to me all the me on Sarutobi Hiruzen.


    After all, the cause of this matter was indeed caused by Sarutobi Hiruzen.


    If he didn''t use Sasuke, Sasuke would not be in trouble.


    Sasuke would not cause an ident and would not cause a series of subsequent troubles. There was no word, just waiting for Sarutobi Hiruzen to give a reasonable exnation.


    Why use Sasuke?


    It''s okay if there is no problem, they will not say anything.


    Anyway, if something goes wrong, it''s your own problem.


    Now that there is really a big problem, of course, Sarutobi Hiruzen has to carry it by himself.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen certainly understands what they want to express. Since the matter has reached this point, almost out of his control, he has no intention of concealing it for Konoha''s sake.


    Straight to the topic: "On that day, Orochimaru could have killed me, but he didn''t kill me, but he told me one thing, that Konoha has a huge hidden danger."


    Just by Sarutobi Hiruzen''s words, Shimura Danzo, an old close friend, knew his thoughts: "Hmph! So you are smart and go to Sasuke? Want to solve the hidden danger of Uchiha Itachi? If it were not for you, I might have solved the hidden danger of Uchiha Itachi!"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen frowned. "What do you mean?"


    Immediately, Shimura Danzo informed the three of his ns.


    It was Sarutobi who broke Shimura Danzo''s n. Otherwise, Sasuke might have left Konoha Vige following Orochimaru in pursuit of strength. When the timees, Uchiha Itachi''s problems will naturally be solved.


    It''s just that, with his deep-skinned face, he didn''t take his own mistake seriously, waved his hand, and continued: "Okay, I''m going to say that this is not the case. But I discovered that the so-called hidden danger in Orochimaru''s mouth is not Uchiha Itachi! There is a high probability that this hidden danger is Uzumaki Naruto! Do you remember the abnormality of Naruto? The ''big brother'' in his mouth!"


    Hearing it here, the expression of the other three also became dignified.


    The three looked at each other, no interruption. They all continued to wait for Sarutobi Hiruzen to speak.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen: "Don''t you find it weird? Why is Naruto so disgusted with our attitude? Just now, when Naruto was emotionally excited, he said that he spat it out! It turned out that he knew the truth of Uchiha n Downfall perfectly!"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen doesn''t need to say anything; the three immediately understood the seriousness of the matter!


    Has it been several years since the Uchiha n was destroyed? But Naruto kept the secret and did not tell Sasuke what the intention behind it was. Several people present thought of the answer in an instant. Could it be that he wanted to protect Sasuke?


    And since Naruto has this idea...


    That''s enough proof!


    Naruto had distrusted them many years ago!


    A perfect Jinchuriki has an extremely distrustful attitude towards these fellows, undoubtedly a heavy blow to them.


    Next, Sarutobi Hiruzen once again said, "And I suspect that the person who told Naruto the news is his big brother!"

 Chapter 121: Things Get Worse

    Chapter 121: Things Get Worse


    The seriousness of the matter drove the four people in the Conference Hall to think carefully about this matter and temporarily abandon the idea of selling their teammate.


    Mitokado Homura: "Hiruzen, can you confirm Naruto''s big brother, who is it?"


    Utatane Koharu: "Or, what kind of existence is this ''big brother''?"


    Several people stared at Sarutobi Hiruzen with dignity, but unfortunately, they were greatly disappointed in the end. After such a big battle, they couldn''t get any useful information.


    They saw Sarutobi Hiruzen shake his head.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen didn''t care about the contemptuous eyes of several old close friends and said his troubles unabashedly to see if any old close friends could solve this problem: "Who is his big brother? Let''s not talk about it. For the time being, the most important thing at the moment is, how should we face the next question now?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen did not say what the problem was.


    But the few people present knew it all.


    Uchiha Itachi!


    The news of Sasuke''s death has spread; who will greet Uchiha Itachi''s anger next?


    Sarutobi Hiruzen had initially thought about it and wanted to stay with Uchiha Itachi and perish together or to leave a "hero" reputation. But what now? Uzumaki Naruto still has this hidden danger. So, how can he die now?


    Naruto''s inadvertent disclosure of the "news", coupled with Sasuke''s disappearance, can be said to disrupt his deployment this timepletely.


    Shimura Danzo gave the first response.


    Shimura Danzo stood up, coldly said: "I don''t have any opinion on the next thing. You are the Hokage; just do whatever you want. Oh, also, there are things I need to deal with, and I will go first."


    CLICK.


    BAM!


    The three just looked at Shimura Danzo left in a daze; the atmosphere at the scene was silent.


    It wasn''t until the sound of opening and closing the door sounded that the other two elders reacted.


    Utatane Koharu: "Hiruzen, Second-Kage gave you the position of Hokage to trust your ability. Over the years, I have also agreed with Second-Kage. I believe you have thought about the solution before doing this, and I won''t intervene. The subordinates and vigers still need me to appease them, so I will go first."


    The door opened and closed again.


    CLICK.


    BAM.


    In the Conference Hall, only Sarutobi Hiruzen and Mitokado Homura are left. Two people face each other.


    Mitokado Homura smiled slightly, "Hiruzen, I agree with Koharu. I trust your ability very much, and I still have things to do so that I will go first."


    CLICK.


    BAM.


    Seeing his old friends who have been with him for many years, leaving one by one, Sarutobi Hiruzen was angry, clenched both fists.


    BAM!


    A loud noise.


    The long table in the Conference Hall was smashed by Sarutobi Hiruzen, his eyes gradually bing very ruthless.


    ''Damn it!''


    ''Didn''t expect, at such a critical juncture, these old partners still refuse to work together!''


    ''Damn it!''


    ''How did Konoha be like this?!''


    Sarutobi Hiruzen angrily breathed heavily.


    After a while, he began to take a deep breath, try to resist his emotions, and began to analyze the current situation.


    ''Things have grown to such a field, and it is useless toin.''


    ''The most important thing is to solve the problem!''


    ....


    After a while, Sarutobi Hiruzen returned to the Hokage room and summoned 2 Anbu ninjas.


    Anbu ninja: "Third-Kage."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen: "Suppress Sasuke''s death. I don''t want to hear any rumors about Sasuke''s death in the vige!"


    Anbu ninja: "Yes!"


    After Anbu ninja left, Sarutobi Hiruzen turned to look towards the scenery outside the window, and his eyes became very ruthless!


    ...


    Konoha Vige, Hyuga n Residence.


    After Naruto left the Hokage room, he did not go home immediately; instead, he came to the Hyuga n Residence to see Hinata.


    Hyuga Hiashi has told the guards not to let Naruto bother the daughter. It was difficult for the girl to clear up the rtionship with Naruto after the "disaster". So, Hyuga Hiashi did not want the girl to join in Naruto''s troubles. Therefore, the guard in front of the door categorically rejected Naruto and wanted to drive away Naruto.


    But Naruto refused to leave.


    The news finally reached Hinata''s ears, and Naruto got his wish. He finally met Hinata.


    Hinata still has that indifferent expression. Seeing the expression of Hinata, Naruto didn''t know what to say, so he said, "Sasuke is dead..."


    Hinata indifferently said: "Un."


    Naruto said again in disbelief: "Hinata, I mean... Sasuke is dead."


    Hinata nodded: "I know that ninja was injured or died in the mission. This is normal, and there is nothing strange."


    After hearing the news that Sasuke is dead, Naruto didn''t expect that Hinata''s attitude would still be so cold! He was stunned for a moment and then sped Hinata''s arms very excitedly: "What''s wrong with you?! Sasuke is dead! This is Sasuke!! He is dead! How could you be like this?!? Hinata, what happened to you?! Do you have any troubles? You must be bitter, right?"


    The emotional Naruto didn''t even catch Hinata.


    The two guards in front of the door ran immediately and pushed away Naruto: "What are you trying to do?!"


    Another escort thought about Hinata: "Eldest Young Lady, are you okay?"


    Hinata endured the pain, shook her head.


    Before approaching the two guards again, she said to Naruto: "Naruto, the vige has so many ninjas that die during the mission every year. This is normal, and I hope you don''t get too attached. If nothing else, please go back."


    Hinata turned and left.


    Naruto looked at Hinata''s back, and the whole person stood there stupidly, muttering to himself: "How can this be... how can everyone be like this..."


    ...


    Somewhere in the jungle.


    Uchiha Itachi and Hoshigaki Kisame sat in front of a fire.


    [*TL note: Kisame Hoshigaki (Hoshigaki Kisame), feared as the Monster of the Hidden Mist (Kirigakure no Kaijin), was a shinobi of Kirigakure''s Hoshigaki n. After joining the Seven Ninja Swordsmen of the Mist, he became an S-rank missing-nin and was partnered with Itachi Uchiha when thetter joined Akatsuki.]


    Two fish were grilled by the fire.


    In the original work, after 2 people were supposed to die in Sarutobi Hiruzen, Uchiha Itachi would volunteer to take themand to capture Kyuubi, went to Konoha, and then encountered Jiraiya''s restraint on the way.


    But this life has the appearance of the Li Yaoxiang butterfly effect, there are simply too many changes.


    Not only did Sarutobi Hiruzen not die, even the Kyuubi Jinchuriki, Naruto, had disappeared many years ago.


    Therefore, the movements of the two in this life are also very different.


    Nagato did not issue an order to capture the Kyuubi during this period of time, and Uchiha Itachi did not need to go back to Konoha for the death of Sarutobi Hiruzen, trying to leave the remaining 3 old fellows in the earthquake, so that they would not act blindly without thinking against Sasuke.


    But right now, the two people gazed at the 2 fish in front of the fire.


    As always, they lived in the sleepy jungle.


    But at this moment, wearing their finger, the exclusive ring belonging to Akatsuki had Chakra fluctuations...

 Chapter 122: Things Are Not

    Chapter 122: Things Are Not


    Noticing fluctuations in the ring, the two people stared at each other.


    There''s no hesitation.


    A strand of Chakra slowly poured into the ring from their respective within-the-body.


    With the influx of Chakra, the ring automatically triggered a Ninjutsu engraving in the ring.


    After a while, the image of two people appeared in front of a delicate lighthouse carved from stone.


    All around the two silhouettes is the image of Akatsuki members.


    The reticent Uchiha Itachi asked nothing.


    Hoshigaki Kisame on the side, unable to bear, was the first to start talking: "What is it this time? If there''s nothing, don''t disturb me grilling fish."


    Immediately, it was a group of Akatsuki members looking towards ''Yahiko''.


    During this period, Nagato still uses Yahiko''s Puppet to look at people: "The news of Kyuubi has been confirmed, and he has returned to Konoha. Who is interested in fighting against Kyuubi?"


    Hearing this news, as a spy, Uchiha Itachi, is also like the original work. He intentionally or unintentionally wants to take over this mission.


    The reason is that he doesn''t want Konoha to be hurt.


    Uchiha Itachi: "I can go against Kyuubi."


    Everyone looked towards Itachi.


    Hidan, who is not very busy, taunted with a smile: "You''re missing the scenery of Konoha, so you want to go back? Are you still... Are you a part of Konoha?"


    Uchiha Itachi red at Hidan suddenly, and his Three-Tomoe Sharingan slowly fused together!


    ''Mangekyo Sharingan!''


    The original frivolous Hidan suddenly panicked, and he was pulled into the Tsukuyomi space by Uchiha Itachi.


    In the Tsukuyomi space, two people have experienced a long time, and Hidan was miserable to be abused.


    But in reality, the situation of two people only happened in the blink of an eye.


    Before everyone could react, when Hidan was awake again, he was gasping for air. He was looking towards Uchiha Itachi''s eyes again, full of fear.


    Everyone present is the existence of S-Rank Missing-nin, and of course, it was impossible not to detect the strangeness of Hidan. When their eyes fell on Uchiha Itachi again, everyone was wary. They dare not continue to say something on this topic.


    However, this is also limited to ordinary Akatsuki members.


    As for Nagato, ck Zetsu, White Zetsu, and Obito, there was no special response to this.


    White Zetsu jokingly said at this time: "Heehehe! Right, you should go back to Konoha and have a good look. I just got interesting news not long ago, and it''s about you."


    Uchiha Itachi nced at White Zetsu: "What do you mean?"


    White Zetsu: "I heard that your younger brother, Uchiha Sasuke, is dead! If Kyuubi was crazy because of it, we would not have confirmed his trace so easily. Now- ah, your Hokage is still trying to suppress this news! I don''t know what he''s worried about. He''s afraid for anyone to know about this. Hehehe!"


    Uchiha Itachi''s Mangekyo Sharingan, which has already faded, was opened again. He stared at White Zetsu violently: "Impossible! Is it really true or false?"


    White Zetsu squinted and smiled, not answering again.


    Uchiha Itachi''s image suddenly disappeared at this time.


    Deidara: "Hehe, isn''t it Missing-nin? Aren''t you exterminating the n by hand? Why are you so nervous about the so-called younger brother? It seems that he is really a spy!"


    Hidan thought he was OK again: "I''ll just say--"


    Uchiha Itachi''s fierce reaction directly dumbfounded Hoshigaki Kisame. After hearing the ridicule of a few people, he reacted angrily: "Impossible! Itachi can''t be a spy! I''ll let hime back and make it clear!"


    Hoshigaki Kisame also ended the video, but when his field of view returned to reality, Uchiha Itachi was long gone.


    ...


    At the same time, inside the Konoha Vige.


    When Naruto left the Hyuga n Residence, he did not all return home. He just walked around the streets of Konoha. He was looking at the traces that the three had left in various ces in the vige.


    He walked past the old ce of the three, the ce often agreed upon, that is, the park.


    He Walked past every ce they used to exercise together.


    ''Ah, this is where Uchiha n''s former residence was.''


    ''Since the destruction of the Uchiha n, there were almost no more people here.''


    The residents who originally lived here have moved to more prosperous areas.


    At the same time, the huge courtyard of the Uchiha n was demolished, leaving only open space. No traces. It''s as if Uchiha n had never appeared here.


    ''I don''t know how long it has been.''


    Naruto just felt that the whole heart seemed empty.


    ''It seems that I don''t understand what is missing.''


    This time, Naruto passed a stall selling 3-color dango. He looked at the 3-color dango on the stall, and recalled the past scenes involuntarily in his mind.


    Naruto ghostly stepped forward: "Boss, give me a 3-color dango."


    The Boss handed a 3-color dango directly.


    Naruto wanted to pay, but when he reached into his pocket, he only found out that he was in a hurry to go out today and that his pocket was not on his body. He wanted to return the three-color balls to Boss, but he heard Boss say, "No, I''ll ask you to eat it."


    Naruto''s mor for the Hokage Residence for Sasuke is a riot in the whole vige. ---Even though Sarutobi Hiruzen has forbidden everyone to discuss this matter again, the vigers still know the general idea.


    This owner that sells 3 color dango is, of course, no exception. He did not understand how tofort Uzumaki Naruto Tofort this Fourth-Hokage''s son, he can only do his best to give Naruto a warm smile.


    Naruto froze for a moment: "Thank you, Boss."


    Immediately he continued aimlessly strolling on the street.


    While walking, he just looked at the string of 3-color dango in his hand. Who knows how long he had walked and how long he was absent-minded. He subconsciously raised the three-color dango to his mouth and tucked the topmost pink ball into his mouth.


    ''The taste is still so sweet It has not changed at all.''


    At Naruto''s feet, there was a drop of tear seeping into the soil.


    "Why... What happened in thest few years?"


    "Why do people be so strange?"


    "Why did Sasuke disappear?"


    "Why didn''t the taste of the 3-color dango change, but Hinata changed?"


    Naruto''s heart is very ufortable. He had no idea how long it had been, and he had not been as sad as he is today. ---It''s just like being abandoned by the whole world.


    Naruto: "Big brother, are you still there?"


    In his mind, there was still silence.


    Naruto wiped his tears, cautious and solemnly wrapped the remaining two balls in a tissue, and rightly regarded these two balls as his only precious memory.


    Then he walked towards the home...

 Chapter 123: The Crazy Uchiha Itachi

    Chapter 123: The Crazy Uchiha Itachi


    Twenty-four hourster, in the Hokage room.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen narrowed his eyes and stared at the two Anbu ninjas in front of him, his tone was calm, but he actually questioned: "It has passed twenty-four hours, and now, you still tell me that there is no news of Sasuke... Is he really not found... Or are you not looking for it?"


    The broken wall of the Hokage room can be quickly built back. Still, Sarutobi Hiruzen''s trust in everyone cannot be recovered.


    Bad news came one after another, and after waiting so long, he couldn''t bear it.


    ''I don''t know how many people in Konoha Vige are loyal to me.''


    Two Anbu ninjas, who are loyal to Sarutobi Hiruzen, nced at each other, somewhat helpless. But they still replied: "Third-Kage, we have followed the river that Uzumaki Naruto said, and we have carefully looked for a good distance. Not only did we not find Sasuke''s corpse. Even traces of clothes were not found."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen was still squinting at the two Anbu ninjas; his eyes seemed to see through the real thoughts of two people.


    Seeing two Anbu ninjas loyal to him, he felt ufortable and a little sad.


    After a while, Sarutobi Hiruzen said: "Since we have been searching for so long and can''t find it. Then don''t waste too much manpower in this regard. Now strengthen the vige''s defense. Keep an eye not only inside the vige but even outside the vige! If there is any trouble,e back and tell me immediately!"


    Anbu ninja: "Yes!"


    Because of Sarutobi Hiruzen''smand, the atmosphere of the entire Konoha Vige suddenly became tense. Except for a few people, no one knows why this Third-Hokage was so nervous.


    Naruto, who stayed at home silently waiting for news, had no idea about everything outside.


    Twenty-four hours passed, and no one came to report about Sasuke.


    Naruto''s heart only felt colder and colder.


    ...


    Outside the vige.


    Almost every distance, an Anbu ninja is acting as a sentry to stay behind.


    Just after the Anbu ninjas had finished arming, a shadow suddenly broke into Konoha''s realm.


    Before waiting for the Anbu ninja to make any response, he was already grabbed by Uchiha Itachi. Itachi stared at him fiercely with the Scarlet Mangekyou Sharingan!


    Uchiha Itachi: "Tell me! Is Sasuke dead?!"


    This Anbu ninja seemed to be imprisoned, and the whole person was stiff there. He was shocked by Uchiha Itachi''s aura, and he could feel that death was getting closer and closer to him.


    Just as expected, because of his dazedness, he passed out.


    Uchiha Itachi had no patience to wait for him to be recovered. Amaterasu was released, and the scream of the Anbu ninja resounds in the jungle!


    The other sentries looked at each and everyone in this direction. They did not forget that themand given by Sarutobi Hiruzen was to immediately go back to inform the news But this idea is doomed to be impossible!


    Uchiha Itachi was too fast!


    One by one sentry was captured by Uchiha Itachi and asked.


    As long as they dared to be stunned, he wouldn''t say anything, just shake the Amaterasu!


    It caused the screams in the jungle, one after another sounded.


    Until he met a slightly smarter one.


    As soon as he heard his question, he immediately told him the truth of the incident. However, this Anbu ninja still couldn''t escape the destiny burnt to death by Amaterasu!


    When Uchiha Itachi heard his news, his anger would only increase by a few points!


    As long as he heard the news from White Zetsu, he already knew that the possibility that the news was false was tiny. After all, the news received by White Zetsu has never been wrong.


    The reason for insisting on asking these people was just a hint of fantasy in his heart... He was hoping to hear a different answer.


    But when he confirmed the news from the Konoha Ninja again, at this time, he really gave up.


    ''Damn Third-Kage!''


    ''Damn Konoha!''


    ''Is this the reward you gave me?!''


    That''s right.


    Since Uchiha Itachi was at the ''Akatsuki'' meeting, the moment he turned off the video, he never thought he would go back and act as a spy.


    Over the years, he has been using Mangekyo Sharingan many times, and his physical condition has deteriorated. He has never thought of going back alive!


    So, he did not intend to hide his whereabouts!


    He came back with great fanfare to let everyone know that this Uchiha Itachi came back this time for revenge!


    In the original work, Uchiha Itachi is a person who loves the vige and the n. He used to struggle between the vige and n not to cause any harm to both parties. He spent a long time trying to ease the rtionship between the two parties.


    He tried, but no results.


    He could only choose between vige and n.


    The question is, does he have a choice?


    The vige had understood Uchiha n''s intention to betray long before he became a double-sided spy. ---If he helped the n to betray, then both parties would inevitably have a war. His father''s idea ofpleting the mutiny without bloodshed was simply impossible to achieve!


    What to do after the war?


    What happens after sess?


    Konoha''s strength must have suffered severe losses.


    If other Ninja Viges are taking advantage of the situation at that time, can you really keep Konoha safe with the ns and the strength remaining after the vige war?


    That is to say, as long as he doesn''t want Konoha or n to be swallowed up by other Ninja Viges, there is only one way before him!


    The vige!


    He can only stand on the vige side!


    It makes sense, but he still hesitated for a long time and could not make a decision.


    Until one day...


    One day, the Konoha Four Elders gave him a promise.


    A promise... That the vige will leave a seedling from Uchiha n... which is his younger brother. On the condition that his younger brother cannot know the truth.


    Also, because of this promise, the straw in his heart was finally crushed.


    The younger brother, Sasuke, became the best excuse for his actions...


    An excuse to make the soul feel better and tofort himself.


    ''I did this to protect Sasuke, so I had to deal with the n cruelly.''


    ''I didn''t exterminate the n.''


    ''Isn''t Sasuke still there?''


    ''I am to keep the honor of the n.''


    ''I believe that Sasuke can continue the Uchiha n.''


    ''But now?!''


    ''Sasuke is dead!''


    ''Sasuke is dead--!''


    In other words, for all these years, his best excuses for deceiving others andforting himself are all gone!


    Gone!


    The Uchiha n really got annihted by him!


    The emotions that have been suppressed for years burst out instantly; he can never lie to himself again!


    ''Kill!''


    ''Kill these disgusting people!''


    ''My Uchiha n is gone, then you Konoha will pay for it!''

 Chapter 124: Torn

    Chapter 124: Torn


    Hokage room.


    Anbu ninja gasping for breath appeared in front of Sarutobi Hiruzen: "Third... Third... Third-Kage-..."


    But before the Anbu ninja had finished speaking, the direction of the vige entrance was already deafening!


    BANG!


    BOOM!


    BOOM!


    Obviously, arge number of buildings were destroyed.


    After the violent impact of those wooden boards and walls, they joined together, and the sound of sting.


    Followed by


    The entire Konoha heard Uchiha Itachi, which contained a cry of endless anger: "Saru, Shimura, Mito, Uta! Get out here--!"


    After shouting, another series of sting sounds were heard.


    You don''t have to look at it to know that this is the sound of Uchiha Itachi continuing to ravage destruction in the vige.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s eyes looked out the window. Although the sight is blocked by the different heights of the roof, he can still seerge pieces of wood or wall tiles smashed flying in the air.


    His face suddenly turned ugly to the extreme!


    The Anbu ninja standing in front of Sarutobi Hiruzen heard the sound, saw the scene outside the window. Whatever he wanted to say, he forced it back into his stomach.


    Anbu ninja: "Third-Kage!"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen waved his hand: "Send someone to notify Root and the other Two Great Elders. Be sure to block Uchiha Itachi! Tell them I will be back soon!"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen leapt out of the window.


    He moved towards thepletely different direction of the vige entrance and leaped away.


    Seeing this, the Anbu ninja clenched his teeth, could only follow the instructions of Sarutobi Hiruzen.


    ....


    After a while, Naruto''s home.


    Konoha Vige can be said not to be big and is not small.


    Of course, the loud noises caused by Uchiha Itachi could be heard by Naruto here. It''s just that he did not at all give too much response because of these movements.


    Anyway, apart from the news about Sasuke, his attitude towards other things would only be indifferent. He just nced in the direction of the loud noise.


    It is also at this time, the door of Naruto''s house was knocked.


    knock!


    knock!


    knock!


    Naruto, who mistakenly thought that there was news of Sasuke, and others came to inform, immediately looked happy and rushed to open the door.


    It was Sarutobi Hiruzen''s disgusting and kind appearance.


    Naruto''s original ecstatic expression copsed. He didn''t believe that Sarutobi Hiruzen, who was a Hokage, came to visit him specifically to tell him about Sasuke.


    Naruto said coldly, "What are you doing here?"


    Without waiting for Sarutobi Hiruzen to answer, Naruto turned around and walked back into the house, sitting down without minding his business.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s eyes slightly narrowed. He stared closely at Naruto''s back, feeling Naruto''s disrespectful attitude. His facial expression became worse, but it was just a sh. His face quickly returned to his kind appearance, cheeky. He walked to Naruto and said: "The sound of destruction outside, do you hear it? Don''t you n to go and see it?"


    Naruto didn''t even look at Sarutobi Hiruzen. He put his right hand on his cheek and looked in the other direction: "What''s in it for me?"


    The more Naruto''s attitude showed the more Sarutobi Hiruzen became certain that Naruto and his big brother are the hidden dangers of Konoha!


    This makes him more confident that his next choice is correct!


    "Hey~" Sarutobi Hiruzen sighed, "The person who destroyed the vige at the vige entrance is Sasuke''s big brother, Uchiha Itachi."


    Naruto''s expression changed.


    The heart is tight.


    He did not forget the things he promised Sasuke, help Sasuke get revenge, and help Sasuke kill his big brother who destroyed the entire n! People, he would definitely kill, even if he knew that Uchiha Itachi had difficulties, he would definitely fulfill thisst wish for Sasuke.


    But he did not n to go out now.


    ''Go out and stop this disaster for Konoha?''


    ''People always have to take responsibility for what they have done.''


    The old man next to him specially came to tell himself the news. It turned out that he was holding this idea. Didn''t he just want to protect himself from the disaster?


    ''Hehe.''


    ''No wonder''


    Naruto indifferently said: "So what? It''s not enough for you to destroy the Uchiha n, even Sasuke. Didn''t you expect such a result long ago?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen: "Hey~ Naruto. Old fogey doesn''t know where you heard this news from, but it''s not what you think it is. Not to mention... Maybe old fogey did something wrong. But now, in the entire Konoha, only you can keep Uchiha Itachi in check. Do you have the heart to watch him destroy Konoha and destroy Konoha''s people without doing anything?"


    This time, Naruto turned his head with interest, looking at Sarutobi Hiruzen jokingly said: "Hah-! It''s funny! As a Hokage, you can''t stop it. Why do you think I can stop it? Sorry. I''m afraid to let Lord-Hokage down~. My strength is not as powerful as you think."


    Hearing it, Sarutobi Hiruzen''s original low-key appearance suddenly disappeared!


    He had to use thest resort!


    Seeing Sarutobi Hiruzen suddenly put his hands on his back and straighten up in a majestic posture, Naruto felt a little bit of a faint feeling.


    Just as expected.


    When Sarutobi Hiruzen started to talk again, the tone waspletely different and became somewhat overbearing: "Uzumaki Naruto! I now order you as a Hokage. You have to go this time! If you dare not go, don''t me me for being rude to Hinata!"


    Hearing the word ''Hinata'', Naruto''s body trembled.


    Then he pretended to calm down and said: "Oh, it''s different now. Hinata has nothing to do with me at all. Isn''t anyone telling you how bad Hinata''s attitude towards me is?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen looked down at Naruto and mocked: "Although I don''t know if Hinata is aware of anything, maybe she, like you, had known some things a long time ago."


    This sentence.


    Naruto was shocked!


    He was stunned.


    Seeing this, Sarutobi Hiruzen secretly sneaked and turned and left while continuing to say: "Of course, if you really don''t care about Hinata''s life or death, then you can stay here, it doesn''t matter. Believe me. My good apprentice will definitely not mind fighting Uchiha Itachi."


    Before leaving, Sarutobi Hiruzen did not forget to pause at the door, reminding: "No, hurry. You still have time; let you think slowly. But don''t me me for not reminding you, you''d better make your choice quickly. Otherwise, I can''t be sure when Hinata will be sent out to fight."


    The door closed.


    Naruto was left with a gloomy face, sitting there stupidly...

 Chapter 125: Telling the Truth on the Spot

    Chapter 125: Telling the Truth on the Spot


    In Naruto''s mind, the words Sarutobi Hiruzen kept circling.


    An unbelievable look on the meaning of Sarutobi Hiruzen''s words.


    Don''t tell me.....


    Could it be.....


    Is it because of this reason that Hinata is deliberately so indifferent to me? At the same time this spection came to mind, Naruto was even more sad.


    To his knowledge, Hinata changed his temperament shortly after he left.


    In other words...


    If this guess is correct, wouldn''t Hinata endure so many years of pain for him?!


    The more he thinks about it, Naruto''splexion grows paler.


    His heart is full of pain and guilt.


    ...


    On the other hand.


    After Sarutobi Hiruzen left Naruto''s house.


    Leaping all the way to the vige entrance.


    When he saw the situation in front of him, his face was suddenly darkened to the extreme! He saw that Uchiha Itachi had summoned orange red Susanoo.


    Susanoo is mainly divided into several stages.


    The first stage is just an energy body simr to fire and possessing an upper body human skeleton.


    The Susanoo called by Uchiha Itachi is in the second stage! In addition to the human-shaped skeleton on the upper body, the external fire energy is also a pair of armor Kinoe!


    At this time, the Second-Form Susanoo, holding a Greatsword, carried out indiscriminate attacks against the surrounding buildings and Konoha Ninja!


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s face was ugly, not because of the strength Uchiha Itachi showed at this time.


    It''s the ninjas who is fighting Uchiha Itachi at the scene.


    Damn it!


    Where''s the people?!


    Where did everyone go?!


    Do you have to watch Uchiha Itachi raging and destroying the vige?!


    Perceiving the arrival of Sarutobi Hiruzen, the Anbu ninja who was in the Hokage room just a few shes came to Sarutobi Hiruzen: "Third-Kage!"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen clenched the teeth said: "Didn''t I ask you to notify Root and two Elders to stop Uchiha Itachi from continuing to destroy it?! What about them?! Where has everyone gone?! What happened? Do you even think that I''m old now?! My words are not good, are they?!"


    The Anbu ninja was scolded by Sarutobi Hiruzen for a while, but still exined: "Third-Kage, I have told Elder ording to your instructions, but Root and the two Elder..."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s heart shivered with cold.


    Needless to say, he already knew what was going on.


    Damn it!


    At this critical juncture.


    Do they really have to stand by?!


    Sarutobi Hiruzen waved his hand to stop the subordinate from continuing to say: "Enough! Tell me directly, what is the situation now?"


    Anbu ninja: "Third-Kage, Jonin Might Guy was hit by Uchiha Itachi''s Genjitsu and passed out. Jonin Kakashi also suffered serious injury..."


    Anbu ninja continued to report on the battlefield.


    The more Sarutobi Hiruzen listens, the more solemn the expression bes.


    ...


    While Sarutobi Hiruzen listened to reports from his subordinates.


    Uchiha Itachi''s eyes don''t stop with blood.


    He who lost Sasuke, the younger brother, seemed to have lost everything.


    There is no hope in life anymore.


    At this time, while standing on Susanoo''s shoulders, heughed, taunted, and shouted: "Hahahahaha! Sarutobi Hiruzen! What''s wrong?! You in charge of Konoha; don''t you talk about Konoha every day?! Now someone is attacking Konoha, all of you dare not show up?! Are you all afraid of death?!"


    Uchiha Itachi even controls Susanoo''s Greatsword, constantly waving at the surrounding enemies!


    Although the emotions are out of control. But he still retains a trace of reason to confront the enemy.


    Different enemies use different attacks to restrain.


    Might Guy, who is good at Taijutsu, Itachi just dumped a high-level Genjutsu directly.


    Kurenai Yuhi, who is good at Genjutsu, Itachi directly use a magic mirror- Mirror Heaven and Earth Change to bounce his Genjutsu back.


    Kakashi, who is good at Ninjutsu, Itachi does not have to think about it. He used Susanoo to block his Ninjutsu, and then used Greatsword to fight back.


    With richbat experience, and because the other elders didn''t send anyone to rescue him, even if he hadn''t tried his best, he still had the advantage.


    Seeing more and more injured people.


    Seeing Uchiha Itachi is as mad as losing reason.


    Sarutobi Asuma had to try to dy Uchiha Itachi''s attack with words, hoping to wait for rescue.


    TL note: Asuma Sarutobi (Sarutobi Asuma) was a jnin of Konohagakure''s Sarutobi n and a former member of the Twelve Guardian Ninja. He was also the leader of Team 10 which consists of Shikamaru Nara, Ino Yamanaka, and Chji Akimichi.


    He dodged Susanoo''s attack and persuaded: "Itachi, have you misunderstood the vige? I have heard about your younger brother. But he is just missing, isn''t he? We will try our best to get him back."


    Uchiha Itachi hearing this, as if I heard the funniest joke in the world,ughed wildly. His eyes widened, and the state seemed crazy: "Hahahaha--! Misunderstanding? You told me a misunderstanding?! You promised me personally, as long as he is still in Konoha, he will not allow anyone to hurt Sasuke! But now? The one who sent Sasuke out to pick up this mission was this fake Hokage!"


    The ninjas who were fighting him on the scene couldn''t help but pause.


    A strange expression appeared on his face.


    And Uchiha Itachi did not take the opportunity to die, as if enjoying their present expression like this: "What''s wrong? Feeling weird? Odd? The so-called Hokage, why would he promise a Missing-nin to take good care of his younger brother? Hahahaha! That is of course the result I have today, everything is thanks to them-! It was they who insisted on destroying Uchiha n! Nopromise at all! They let me do it myself on the condition of Sasuke! And the most ridiculous thing is that I actually believed their gibberish! He even helped me infiltrate the enemy organization and search for news! What-?! Am I stupid?! Would you believe that?!"


    Without waiting for Sarutobi Asuma to react this time, Susanoo''s Greatsword waved toward him with all his strength! Sarutobi Asuma''s pupils tightened, blocking the special weapon in front of him.


    Brank! A loud noise!


    The weapon is broken.


    He was also struck by the force and flew off.


    Uchiha Itachi doesn''t intend to let him go.


    Susanoo''s big hand caught Sarutobi Asuma''s flying silhouette.


    The figure mmed into Susanoo''s hand.


    "Puff--!" With a bang, a lot of blood spurted out, and he looked so messed up that he couldn''t move anymore.


    Uchiha Itachi controls Susanoo''s palm and lifts Sarutobi Asuma''s right foot to hang it upside down in midair. Seeing this, the surrounding ninjas stopped their movements in session.


    They dare not attack at will.


    Uchiha Itachiughed and said, "Sure enough--! Your own son has already fallen into my hands. Are you still refusing toe out? It seems that your family is not very important to you~ Right! Otherwise, your whole n will be destroyed. Then, I will kindly help you solve the trouble in your family!"

 Chapter 126: The Arrival of Naruto

    Chapter 126: The Arrival of Naruto


    Just when Uchiha Itachi was about to start.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen leapt in this direction and scolded: "Enough! Uchiha Itachi! As a Missing-nin, you dare toe back to Konoha?! Don''t talk-nonsense anymore! No one will believe you!"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen has repeatedly emphasized the word Missing-nin, just to remind everyone who is present, the identity of Uchiha Itachi, so that everyone doesn''t believe every word Uchiha Itachi said!


    At the same time, this was one of his original ns.


    Today, in any case, he will not admit to what he has done in the past.


    Otherwise, he would not be able to assume the identity of Uchiha Itachi as Konoha''s enemy.


    Then even if he died together, he would just die in vain. He can''t be a good Hokage who sacrificed for Konoha in everyone''s mind.


    Seeing Sarutobi Hiruzen finally came out, Uchiha Itachi was happy, and after hearing Sarutobi Hiruzen''s remarks, he felt extremely funny: "Hahahaha! I am Missing-nin? I am Missing-nin? Hahahaha! It seems that you have not nned to spare anyone from the Uchiha n from the very beginning. I''m so stupid-- I actually believed your promise. I paid so much for Konoha. In the end, you want to wipe out everything with a Missing-nin sentence?! Well! Worthy of Hokage! A cruel heart! Human lives are not worth mentioning in your eyes! This is true even for my own family!"


    Speaking of excitement, Susanoo raised Sarutobi Asuma''s hand and raised it directly, smashing Sarutobi Asuma fiercely to the ground!


    BOOM!


    Sarutobi Asuma spurted more blood!


    But Uchiha Itachi did not intend to stop there.


    Susanoo once again raised Asuma. It seems that he wants to smash Asuma to death in this way!


    From the moment Asuma was smashed, Sarutobi Hiruzen had gloomy face. He rushed towards Uchiha Itachi at the fastest speed, and summoned Monkey during the period.


    Monkey: "Hiruzen, who is the enemy this time?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen: "Monkey, turned into a wishful diamond stick!"


    When Susanoo was about to do it again, Sarutobi Hiruzen was already looking red.


    He took the wishful diamond stick and scolded: "How dare you?!"


    Then there was the leap.


    The wishful diamond stick bes bigger and longer!


    Straight towards Susanoo, the arm carrying Asuma ran over! The arm was knocked away and Asuma dropped to the ground.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen shed and appeared next to Asuma.


    Picking him up.


    Another body shed away from Uchiha Itachi and kept a certain distance from Uchiha Itachi.


    After seeing Asuma''s injury, Sarutobi Hiruzen''s face was extremely ugly.


    Seeing the look of Sarutobi Hiruzen, Uchiha Itachi showed a little excitement: "Hahahaha! What''s wrong? When you see your family injured in front of you, as a Hokage, you also feel sad and feel distressed?" As soon as the words changed, Uchiha Itachi''s eyes became extremely unbearable: "But I was forced by you to destroy the whole n by hand--! Sarutobi Hiruzen--! DIE--! You all die for me--! Die with my Uchiha n--!"


    Mangekyo Sharingan!


    Uchiha Itachi unreservedly released Mangekyo Sharingan!


    Instantly. Everything around it ignited ck mes!


    The ck inmmation spread at a very fast speed, and the whole Konoha went up and down, screaming one after another! Uchiha Itachi''s eyes also shed a lot of blood and tears.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen looks around.


    His face is extremely ugly!


    He called an Anbu ninja, clenched the teeth instructed: "Go and see if Uzumaki Naruto hase over! If he does note, then tell him that I will lead the battlefield to the Hyuga n Residence!"


    Anbu ninja: "Third-Kage, this...!"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen fiercely red at him: "If you are asked to go, go! Don''t give me nonsense!"


    It is also at this time.


    Naruto''s figure finally appeared not far away!


    Sarutobi Hiruzen saw Naruto walking slowly! His expression instantly became overjoyed! It seems that his mind is not in vain!


    As long as Naruto shots!


    As long as Naruto and Uchiha Itachi perish together!


    No!


    To be precise, as long as Naruto died in the hands of Uchiha Itachi this time, then he would take another shot with Uchiha Itachi to perish together, which is the most perfect result for him!


    As for Hinata...


    In fact, no matter whether Narutoes or not, he will not kill her.


    After all, this is the only way to counterbnce the hidden danger of Naruto. If the n fails and Naruto does note, then he has to do his best to take Uchiha Itachi and perish together.


    The hidden danger of Naruto can only be solved by a few old partners.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen dropped Asuma, and a few shes appeared in front of Naruto, pointing in the direction of Uchiha Itachi: "Quick! Go ahead and deal with him! As long as you can solve this trouble for the vige. Then I promise you that in Konoha, no one will dare to touch Hinata again! Including me!"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s emotions are obviously a little emotional.


    His n is almost sessful!


    He has impatiently wanted to see that result.


    But his ugly face, in Naruto''s eyes, was disgusting! If it weren''t for the safety of Hinata, I don''t know what backhand this old fellow has left on Hinata. Naruto might even want to kill him directly on the spot!


    As for Sarutobi Hiruzen''s promise?


    Hehe.


    Naruto can no longer believe even one word from this old fellow''s mouth!


    A nce at Sarutobi Hiruzen and no talk.


    Then he jumped towards Uchiha Itachi.


    While jumping, orange and translucent Chakra coats poured out of the body!


    One-Tails!


    Two-Tails!


    It didn''t stop until Five tails.


    At this time, Naruto had already stood opposite Uchiha Itachi.


    After all the anger and unwillingness in his heart were released through eyes-power, Uchiha Itachi''s mood seemed to calm down a lot. But because of this, his field of view gradually blurred.


    Originally still looking for the trace of Sarutobi Hiruzen, he suddenly found a silhouette in front of him, but this silhouette was not like the target he was looking for, and his movements stopped involuntarily.


    He subconsciously asked: "Who are you? Sarutobi Hiruzen sent you to die?"


    Naruto stood on the roof. He looked directly at Uchiha Itachi standing on Susanoo''s shoulder.


    Naruto indifferently said: "My name is Naruto. Uzumaki Naruto. Your younger brother Sasuke is my friend."


    The atmosphere between them suddenly became very calm.


    Although there are still various calls for help around, but the two of them are in the state at this time, it seems that they can only hear their own heartbeats.


    Seeing that the two finally met.


    Sarutobi Hizen looked overjoyed, and immediately ordered his subordinates: "Quick! Go and evacuate the crowd! Remember! Don''t let theme near here!"


    And he hides himself somewhere, waiting for the best time toe out and give the two people a fatal blow!

 Chapter 127: Nine Tails vs. Susanoo

    Chapter 127: Nine Tails vs. Susanoo


    Uchiha Itachi and Naruto looked directly at the other side.


    Arge number of ninjas appeared around, rescued theirpanions, or evacuated the crowd to leave the scene, but both of them chose to ignore the surrounding scenes.


    They were silent for a long time.


    Uchiha Itachi started to talk and said: "I know you... Uzumaki Naruto, thank you for always being with Sasuke."


    Naruto and Sasuke have known each other since they were 3 years old. Of course, it is impossible for Uchiha Itachi not to know the rtionship between Naruto and his brother Sasuke. Moreover, over the years, he has not rarely inquired about Sasuke secretly.


    So, he knew very well that throughout Konoha, Sasuke had only two friends, Naruto and Hinata.


    Hearing this, Naruto nodded.


    Both sides remained silent again.


    Soon after, Uchiha Itachi continued: "Those old fellows instructed me to exterminate the n personally... I know you won''t believe it."


    Naruto: "No, I believe you..."


    Uchiha Itachi: "Then, why do you stop me?"


    Naruto nced in Hyuga n''s direction.


    Uchiha Itachi followed Naruto''s eyes.


    Even though the field of view is blurry, even after leaving for so many years, he still knows that the location is the Residence of the Hyuga n. Another friend of the younger brother, Hyuga Hinata, suddenly appeared in his mind, and he understood why Naruto came to stop him.


    Uchiha Itachi couldn''t help but shake his head andugh.


    ''Sure enough, this is like the behavior style of the four old fellows.''


    When Itachi looked up towards Naruto again, not at all reveal the expression of ''seeing Naruto as an enemy'': "Are you thest person to see Sasuke?"


    Naruto nodded.


    Uchiha Itachi: "He... how was it then?"


    Naruto: "He was severely injured by heavy injuries and finally fell off the cliff with injuries. I can''t stop him."


    Uchiha Itachi: "Then... did he say anything?"


    Naruto nodded again: "Yes."


    Uchiha Itachi''s body trembled. He wanted to know what Sasuke said, he was both excited to know his words, but at the same time, he was frightened.


    Excited and looking forward, if Sasuke has left anyst words, maybe this big brother can help. But he knew well what he was afraid to hear from Naruto. --He already had a vague guess in his heart.


    Naruto''s following sentence just confirmed his conjecture.


    "Sasuke asked me to avenge him..."


    After his suspicions were confirmed, his heart suddenly felt very ufortable, and his heart seemed to be held tightly by people, making it difficult to breathe. After a moment of silence, he finallyughed at himself: "Sure enough... Sasuke really dies. D-does he hate me..."


    Itachi couldn''t help but recall the pictures of childhood and the picture of the family eating.


    Naruto didn''t bother him either.


    ....


    Another time passed.


    When Uchiha Itachi looked up at Naruto again, his eyes suddenly became firm: "Then let''s do it. It will be in your hands to fulfill Sasuke''sst wish. But... If your strength is not enough to kill me... I''m sorry. I will not start leniently because I still have very important things waiting for me toplete! I have to avenge the n!"


    Uchiha Itachi''s imposing-manner skyrocketed!


    Immediately afterward, Susanoo''s figure began to grow at a rate visible to naked eyes! Orange red''s fire energy group is growing, condensing, and growing again!


    The skeleton in the armor Kinoe has grown flesh!


    Initially, it was only the shape of the upper body. But, with the growth of the energy, it gradually condensed the feet!


    This is Susanoo of Third-Stage!


    Susanoo''s Complete Body!


    At the same time, Naruto standing opposite Uchiha Itachi, was not idle. The evil Chakra, madnesses from Naruto within the body!


    The tail at the spine has also changed from Five-Tails to Six-Tails!


    Six-Tails changed to Seven-Tails!


    Seven-Tails changed to Eight-Tails!


    Body shape, flesh, animal hair, and the appearance of all beasts have also changed!


    Until the end, it became 9 tails, and Naruto''s figure also skyrocketed!


    Just like this, Susanoo and Kyuubi were simultaneously soaring in front of the other side! Until the end, the size of both sides skyrocketed like a hill.


    The formed Kyuubi demon fox looked up as it roars!


    Immediately, with fierce fox eyes, it stared at the opponent!


    The shaped Susanoo also spread his wings, flew to the sky, pulled out Twinsword from his back, and looked down at the Kyuubi with a divine and majestic face!


    The battle between the two sides is on the verge!


    Uchiha Itachi controls Susanoo, Twinsword is ten, and he is in front of him, so from top to bottom, he moved towards Naruto, rushing over!


    Naruto blocked the Twinsword with two ws. However, its huge body was still forced to retreat by the impact of the Susanoo, and even the ground was dragged back by him.


    The small buildings shattered straight away!


    While retreating, Naruto nced at the intact Hokage Residence not far away, and he stepped on it without any hesitation. --It looked like he was forced to step on it inadvertently by Uchiha Itachi.


    Uchiha Itachi also nced at his sole.


    Then both sides nced at each other, grinning.


    But they did not stop fighting. The fight between the two sides continues.


    Naruto kicked Uchiha Itachi fiercely with the sole of his foot. The great strength made Uchiha Itachi''s enormous wings have to wave again and again, which stopped the backward momentum.


    In Uchiha Itachi''s eyes, Naruto with opened a huge beast mouth. A ck and white energy ball constantly on his mouth, quickly gathering together. --Finally, the ck-Tailed Beast Ball was formed.


    Without the slightest hesitation, Naruto spurted towards him.


    Uchiha Itachi had no stage fright, he also moved towards Tailed Beast Ball, and his left-hand Greatsword dragged to the ground. His right-hand Greatsword aimed Tailed Beast Ball in a sh!


    Tailed Beast Ball was cut in half by Greatsword...


    Eventually, divided into two directions and fell into the jungle behind.


    Bang!


    Boom!


    Two mushroom clouds rose at the same time in the distance.


    ....


    In Konoha, everyone who was watching this battle opened their mouths and was so shocked that they couldn''t speak. Uchiha Itachi and Naruto''s battle range seemed to have reached a degree that they couldn''t understand.


    ''God''


    ''What power is this?''


    ''If Naruto is not fighting him, how can we resist this force?''


    Everyone couldn''t help but swallow their saliva, hoping that Naruto would never lose this battle. Otherwise... Maybe, today is the day Konoha''s vige will be destroyed...


    The reaction and gratitude of everyone, Naruto and Uchiha Itachi, who were fighting, of course, could not have known, and there was no such leisure to take care of them.


    The battle between the two sides is still going on fiercely...

 Chapter 128: A fatal blow, the protagonist interferes

    Chapter 128: A fatal blow, the protagonist interferes


    The two huge bodies fought fiercely in Konoha Vige, and both sides were offensive.


    In addition to using his two ws to resist Uchiha Itachi''s Twinsword, Naruto used the 9-tails to interfere or attack Uchiha Itachi from time to time.


    Unfortunately, in the form of a fox, Naruto kept fighting in closebat, which caused him to lose slightly.


    Uchiha Itachi Twinswords'' fierce offensive not only prevented Naruto from sending out Tailed Beast Ball but also left wounds on Naruto from time to time. No matter how fast the recovery ability of Kyuubi is, the injuries appearing are still faster than the healing.


    On the contrary, whenever Naruto attacks the Complete Body Susanoo of Uchiha Itachi, his attack power will be resisted by the energy of the outeryer.


    As for the thick energy, Itachi, who was wrapped in Susanoo''s forehead, did not suffer much damage at all. At most, it only consumes more power, and his physical strength drains faster.


    But Uchiha Itachi, who had already given up his life, simply didn''t care about this. Hepletely overdrawn all his remaining life force this time.


    Simply put, one has high offense and defense but is weak in endurance.


    One is strong in endurance, but the offense and defense are average.


    Naruto''s only hope to win this battle is to tire Uchiha Itachi. But how could Uchiha Itachi give him this opportunity?


    The two sides have been fighting for a long time.


    Not only did Uchiha Itachi''s offensive not weaken, but he fought even harder! Knowing that he couldn''t hold on for too long, he didn''t n to dy it anymore. After the sword mmed Naruto''s shoulder, Uchiha Itachi then retreated and flew directly to midair.


    He flew to a puzzling position.


    Naruto''s Kyuubi body, gasping for breath, stared at the Susanoo in the sky. He didn''t understand why Uchiha Itachi gave him a gasp for breath. Obviously, he already had the advantage, but at this time, he opened the distance, and the wound on his body was slowly healed.


    Before Naruto understood what was going on, his huge beast eyes shrank suddenly!


    Uchiha Itachi first put the Greatsword in his right hand into his back, then slowly raised the right hand, and then, hot and powerful energy quickly condensed on his hand!


    This energy seemed to drain the surrounding moisture in a split second.


    It makes the current environment extremely dry.


    Very hot.


    Not much timeter, a huge shuriken connected by 3 gouyu jade appeared in his hand, and at a very fast speed, it was spinning continuously!


    ''Yasaka Magatama''


    Naruto didn''t understand why Uchiha Itachi suddenly became so rash.


    ''This style seems to be a powerful, formidable power, but it wouldn''t be 100% urate.''


    Naruto is very confident. In his current state, he can definitely avoid this attack. As long as he escapes this attack, he believes Uchiha Itachi will not be able to persist for long! Victory will definitely belong to him!


    But when Naruto thought he was winning, he noticed Uchiha Itachi''s expression!


    ''This doesn''t look like a reckless attack!''


    When he turned his head towards his back, that direction was where Hyuga n was stationed!


    In other words, as long as he dares to dodge, this wave of Uchiha Itachi''s attack will directly fall on Hyuga n''s Residence, and the consequences can be imagined! He can only firmly resist it!


    Hinata or Hinata''s family might die in this attack. How can he tell this to Hinata in the future?!


    Naruto finally understood Uchiha Itachi''s intentions.


    Uchiha Itachi is indeed just like what he said. There is no intention of keeping hands at all! Even in order to put an end to this battle as soon as possible, he does not hesitate to use this indecent means!


    Naruto clenched his teeth, staring at Uchiha Itachi fiercely.


    Seeing Naruto finally realize his intention, Uchiha Itachi no longer hesitated.


    ''Yasaka Magatama'' ruthlessly flew!


    Wherever Yasaka Magatama passed, a raging fire ignited!


    The power is evident!


    Naruto had no other way... He didn''t want to regret it. He put his huge beast ws in front of him to catch the mes. Just like shuriken, constantly rotating Yasaka Magatama!


    The surrounding air is still rotating under Yasaka Magatama, bing drier. The surrounding buildings and walls are cracking because of this!


    Naruto''s ws are constantly being cut, burned, and restored.


    Cut again, burn again, and recover again.


    The sound of the collision between the chainsaw and the steel echoed all around.


    Until the end, even the only remaining groundwater in the soil evaporated into bursts of water vapor. Arge amount of water vapor formed a wide range of white mist, which surrounded Naruto.


    Who knows how long it has been.


    Waiting for the cutting sound to end, the water vapor dissipated Naruto''s figure finally appeared in everyone''s eyes again.


    It''s just that his form at this time is very different. Although he hasn''t been beaten back into the human body, his entire arm is only bones!


    There are many traces of burns on the body.


    Naruto was breathing heavily. He looked towards Uchiha Itachi, who still stayed in the sky with his tired expression.


    Uchiha Itachi had no mercy. He pulled Greatsword from his back again, moved towards Naruto, and swooped down!


    In the blink of an eye, he arrived close to Naruto!


    He raised the Greatsword!


    Uchiha Itachi aimed at Naruto''s head and intended to cut him on the spot! He can see that Naruto has the ability to resist. But he is very confident. With this de, he will definitely be able to end this battle!


    But just as the Greatsword was about to reach Naruto''s forehead...


    Uchiha Itachi''s offensive suddenly stopped. He slowly moved away from Greatsword, moved towards Naruto lightly, and asked: "Why don''t you resist?"


    Naruto did not immediately answer the question of Uchiha Itachi.


    Itachi saw Naruto''s wide-eyed fox''s eyes, showing an expression of disbelief and some excitement!


    Just right at the moment, Itachi dived down. A long-lost voice finally appeared in Naruto''s mind again...


    That''s right!


    It is Li Yaoxiang!


    Li Yaoxiang just said: "Sasuke is not dead yet..."


    Naruto was shocked to speak, and variousplex emotions joined together.


    "Big brother! You''re finally talking to me again?! Big brother, is it real?! What you said is true?! Is Sasuke really not dead?!"


    "Big brother..."


    "Big brother..."


    Naruto kept yelling big brother, big brother, and countless questions.


    There are so many questions that Li Yaoxiang doesn''t know how to answer. In the end, he only gave a brief overview: Sasuke was rescued by him and is currently recovering from injury.


    Of course, the reason why Li Yaoxiang chose to appear at this time and said that Sasuke is not dead, is mainly for saving Naruto''s life. Although he can be resurrected, if he can live, then don''t die.


    After all, no one knows whether Naruto, after being resurrected, will change his temperament or not. No one knows if he will get better or worse.


    If there is a ''Look through the Red Dust'', Li Yaoxiang will really have nowhere to shout for grievances.


    After hearing what Li Yaoxiang said, Naruto finally recovered. He slowly lifted his head and said to Itachi, "Sa... Sa... Sasuke... not dead..."

 Chapter 129: The End of Itachi

    Chapter 129: The End of Itachi


    Uchiha Itachi seemed to hear the most long-awaited sentence between heaven and earth His breathing was involuntarily fast!


    Now, everything that happened before is not important to him!


    Uchiha Itachi rified his thoughts.


    After looking up and down, Naruto''s expression looked legit. And after confirming that he heard correctly, he breathes deeply: "You mean... really?"


    Naruto was still wearing that dumbstruck look, stunned nodded.


    It is not easy to see this expression on the fox face of the Kyuubi demon fox.


    Although he doesn''t understand how Naruto suddenly got this news during the fight, Uchiha Itachi finally got through Naruto''s performance this time, and he''s pretty sure whether the news is true or false. Naruto definitely doesn''t look like he would lie to him now.


    Even if the news is false, and that would only be Naruto''s mistrust of the news.


    Things have grown to such a field, and both sides have no intention of fighting.


    The 2 monsters, which are huge like hills, shrink very quickly with tacit understanding at the speed of the naked eye.


    Naruto changed back to the main body, and many wounds appeared in different shades. But at least the hand injury is not as serious as expected, and Chakra of Kyuubi is still trying to help repair it.


    As for Uchiha Itachi, he is the winner of this battle. But he seemed to be in a different situation than Naruto The whole person looks a lot thinner.


    Bloody tears remained in his eyes.


    After Susanoo disappeared, as soon as his feetnded, he was faintly unsteady, giving a feeling of falling down.


    Naruto, who saw him, quickly shed over to Uchiha Itachi to support him.


    The wounds on his body and hands were very painful, but Naruto didn''t care about any of them. The first sentence of start to talk was to Uchiha Itachi, concerned: "Are you alright?"


    Uchiha Itachi''s right hand hung on Naruto''s neck, and he is entirely supported by Naruto''s body. He even didn''t have the strength to look up.


    Itachi wearily said: "Is Sasuke really not dead? How can you be sure that this news is true or false?"


    Uchiha Itachi did not ask the source of the news, nor did he care about it, and he only cared about Sasuke''s life and death.


    Naruto felt the loss of Uchiha Itachi''s life force and felt that Uchiha Itachi would die soon. He quickly affirmed: "It is true! The news is impossible to be fake!"


    In Naruto''s heart, as long as the news came out from Li Yaoxiang''s mouth, then it was impossible to be fake. He is 200% trusting Li Yaoxiang, the big brother!


    Uchiha Itachi''s body trembled, and then a long-lost smile appeared: "That''s good... that''s good..."


    Seeing the state of Uchiha Itachi, Naruto couldn''t bear it: "Can your body persist?"


    Uchiha Itachi did not answer his question: "Can you take me home to see?"


    He did not say where ''home'' is. But Naruto knew that this so-called home was the former Uchiha n Residence.


    Fortunately, the location of the two is not too far from Uchiha n''s former Residence. Naruto quickly supported Uchiha Itachi and came there. Itachi took the right hand that was hanging on Naruto''s neck and pulled it back, barely leaning on himself, standing upright and taking a deep breath of ''home'' air.


    Uchiha Itachi: "Can you tell me what happened here?"


    He had too many overdrafts in eyes-power. His field of view has only a blur, and he can''t see the situation in front of him, and he can only see some misty colors.


    Naruto: "Your eyes..."


    Uchiha Itachi interrupted: "I''m fine."


    Seeing Uchiha Itachi in this state, even if he didn''t get along with him much, Naruto still felt a faint tingling in his heart. Looking at the ruins in front of him, he couldn''t help telling a lie: "It''s still good. It hasn''t changed much after so many years. "


    Uchiha Itachi knew that the facts were not as Naruto said, but he still smiled faintly.


    In the original work, the time he killed his biological parents was thest time he shed tears. Until now, he always hides his emotions very well.


    Over the years, Sasuke is still admonishing him all the time. He wants to train Sasuke, and he wants to make Sasuke stronger. Sasuke is his best reason to escape the past. As long as Sasuke is fine, then Sasuke is his only support.


    But this time, Sasuke is ''dead, so he can no longer escape his feelings. After so many years have passed, and now facing the things of that year again, his heart still feels like a torn pain.


    Uchiha Itachi: "Naruto, can I ask you onest thing?"


    Naruto nodded again.


    Immediately afterward, he saw a horrifying scene!


    In front of him, Uchiha Itachi pulled out his eyes with his own hands! He wanted to stop it, but Uchiha Itachi blocked him with the other hand and said, "Help me bring these eyes to Sasuke..."


    Uchiha Itachi briefly talked about the Eternal Mangekyo Sharingan.


    As he talked, he gave the pair of eyes to Naruto.


    Naruto, who was shocked, thought it was over but didn''t want to. Uchiha Itachi pulled a storage scroll from his sleeve and continued: "This scroll stores my big brother''s... Uchiha Shisui''s Mangekyo Sharingan..."


    It doesn''t matter if Naruto agrees or not. He also handed it over to Naruto.


    Then each minding their own business tells the story of the year.


    And finally, he lifted his head into the sky and emotionally said: "Big Brother Shisui, it seems that your choice is wrong. The vige is no longer the vige in your mind. Even if you save it, no matter how you can''t save it."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s attitude today It let Uchiha Itachi have apletely new perspective on what happened then. Konoha is really already ruined by these 4 elders. If Big Brother Shisui and himself chose another path at the time, perhaps there would be better results...


    Completed with emotion, Uchiha Itachi left another sentence for Naruto: "Naruto, if you don''t mind, then I hope you can take these eyes, for Big Brother Shisui, for Uchiha n, and see this world clearly."


    After finished saying that, Uchiha Itachi just plopped down. He crawled towards Uchiha n knelt in the direction of the residence.


    The empty eyes, with endless remorse. He made the final confession in his heart.


    ''Father, mother''


    ''Sorry, I was wrong.''


    ''Everyone''


    ''I''m sorry.''


    After doing all this, Uchiha Itachi maintained a kneeling posture, the head that was originally raised slowly fell, and his life finally came to an end, and there was no more life...

 Chapter 130: Sasuke Going Crazy

    Chapter 130: Sasuke Going Crazy


    Distance away from Konoha, on a cliff near the edge of the jungle.


    Sasuke has lived in this area since he died in a fake fight.


    The time hadn''t long passed since that day, Sasuke remembered everything that happened there. Li Yaoxiang told him that as long as he followed Li Yaoxiang''s instructions and waited for the news, he would definitely see what he wanted to see.


    To see Uchiha Itachi die is his goal over the years.


    Until now, he mistakenly thought that Li Yaoxiang had let him ''die'' and staged this scene in front of Naruto because Li Yaoxiang wanted Naruto to avenge him and help him kill ''the man''.


    But Sasuke isn''t Naruto. He doesn''t have 200% trust in Li Yaoxiang.


    Therefore, in this period of time after the fake death, he could not help climbing to the top of a tall tree nearby, trying to observe the movement in the Konoha Vige.


    Just as expected, it didn''t take a long time...


    On the second day after the death, he saw the scene where ''that man'' opened Susanoo and made a big ruckus in Konoha!


    The scene in front of him has subverted his worldview!


    ''Why?''


    ''Why is this happening?''


    ''Why did his own death provoke ''that man''s revenge on Konoha? Shouldn''t he be dispensable to "that man"?''


    ''Why is he so angry?''


    ''Why?!''


    Unable to understand what was going on, he immediately jumped off the top of the tall tree and leaped in the direction of Konoha!


    No! He must ask ''that man'' clearly!


    He must ask the truth!


    But just after he started to leap, Li Yaoxiang''s voice sounded in his mind: "What''s wrong? Confused about Uchiha Itachi''s move?"


    Sasuke''s pace also stopped. He was anxious.


    When talking to Li Yaoxiang, he forgot the fear and was no longer quivering. His emotions are obviously unstable: "You know why- you must know why right?! Quick! Tell me quickly!"


    Li Yaoxiang''s taste: "It''s very simple--. Doesn''t your big brother, from the beginning to the end, have you ced you in a very important position?"


    Sasuke was shocked, gnashing one''s teeth, said: "Impossible!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Nothing is impossible. In the beginning, he killed all the members of the n. Why did he leave you alone? Don''t you feel strange at all? Plus, with his current actions... Isn''t it obvious? He thinks you are more important than his own life."


    "Impossible! It''s impossible!" Sasuke shook his head in disbelief. "Since he values me so much, why would he do all of that?!"


    Li Yaoxiang did not hide this time, and he directly told the truth of the year without omission and in detail.


    After Sasuke listened, the whole person was frightened at the truth of the matter, and he was a little unsteady even just standing. He couldn''t believe this fact, and he didn''t want to believe this fact.


    But the question is if this is not the case, how do you exin why ''that man'' would be so angry after learning of his death that he would return to Konoha alone, regardless of the safety of his life?


    At this time, Sasuke seems to have two voices in his heart, fighting continuously.


    One kept saying in his ear that what Li Yaoxiang said was true.


    The other kept saying in his ear that Li Yaoxiang was lying to him.


    He was struggling to understand what was going on.


    Under sensible analysis, Sasuke finally had to face the fact in front of him. That is, ''that man'' is indeed just like Li Yaoxiang said. It is because of hardships that Itachi would act on his own family.


    His eyes gradually became dazed and began to be more and more cruel.


    He started bombing wildly towards the surrounding trees!


    He was so angry that even his own pair of Three-Tomoe Sharingan turned on uncontrobly.


    Then, the three ck tomoes are connected in a line!


    Mangekyo Sharingan Awakening!


    With a terrible look and tone, Sasuke yelled at the surrounding air: "You already know that things are wrong?! You already knew everything, right?! Why didn''t you tell me early in the morning?! Why?!"


    "Hehe." Li Yaoxiang taunted, "Will you believe me? If I tell you this back then, can you forgive this big brother who killed all his family? You won''t want to kill him anymore?"


    Sasuke''s body trembled. The whole person stood there stunned and forgot to quarrel.


    Yes, Li Yaoxiang is right.


    Even if he lets him understand ahead of time the truth? Can he forgive the big brother who killed all his father, mother, and nsman?


    No, he couldn''t.


    Between Heaven and Earth, How can there be such a cheap thing?


    Kill other people''s family members, and finally spoke the sentence, "In fact, everything I do is for your own good."


    Even if there is such a cheap thing, that person is definitely not his Uchiha Sasuke!


    Like he could easily forget the tragedy of his parents when they fell in front of him?!


    It''s impossible to forget the scene of the tragic death of everyone!


    However, even after clearly understanding Li Yaoxiang''s answer and choice, Sasuke still resented Li Yaoxiang''s concealment anyway. He didn''t like this feeling of being manipted.


    But Li Yaoxiang''s following words extinguished all his anger: "What''s wrong? Feeling humiliated? Dissatisfied with me?"


    Sasuke breathing heavily, he didn''t reply. But the meaning is obvious. He resented Li Yaoxiang..


    "You don''t realize yet...? Do you feel any different in your eyes currently?"


    Sasuke froze. If it weren''t for Li Yaoxiang''s reminder, he really wouldn''t notice it.


    ''My own eyes are indeed a bit different. It feels very strange, but I don''t understand where the difference is.''


    Li Yaoxiang continued to exin: "This is your Mangekyo Sharingan from Uchiha n, and your big brother also has it. He uses words and Genjutsu to deepen your hatred for him, just to help you Awaken the eyes. You think... If I tell you the truth in advance, will you still open these eyes so smoothly?"


    Sasuke: ...


    Just as expected, after listening to Li Yaoxiang''s exnation, Sasuke''s mood gradually calmed down.


    No more noise.


    It was silent for a long time.


    Sasuke also stopped talking. Instead, minding his own business, he climbed again to the top of the tall tree, silently watching the Complete Body Susanoo fighting Kyuubi.


    He was seemingly calm. But in fact, all kinds of thoughts, memories, etc., shed in his mind.


    Seeing that Sasuke no longer intended to y a game, Li Yaoxiang flew back to Naruto''s conscious space in the state of soul and sessfully saved Naruto''s life.

 Chapter 131: Darkened Again, Sharingan Absorbed

    Chapter 131: Darkened Again, Sharingan Absorbed


    Until Uchiha Itachi died, Naruto was still standing there stunned, still not reacting to what was going on, holding a scroll in one hand and Uchiha Itachi''s mission'' in one hand.


    He couldn''t speak for a long time his mind was nk.


    The atmosphere seemed to be too quiet, and Naruto who was awakened, finally realized something was wrong.


    ''What''


    ''Howe Sasuke''s brother hasn''t moved anymore?''


    He was stunned.


    "Itachi? ...Uchiha Itachi?"


    Seeing Uchiha Itachi''s head down, there was no response. At this time, how could Naruto not know what was going on?


    Plop!


    Naruto knelt down with his feet weak.


    It''s just that this is not the kind of kneeling that Uchiha Itachi''s dead body is doing.


    Because of this cruel reality, his heart is broken, and the legs go soft- the kind of kneeling helplessly to the world. Naruto incredulously looked at Uchiha Itachi in front of him and looked at the 2 items in his hand again.


    What the vige did, and the tragedies caused made him feel extremely chilling.


    ''Why?''


    ''What''s wrong with the vige?''


    ''What''s wrong with this world?''


    ''Why do these things happen around me?''


    ''Why do these things happen to the people I love?''


    He recalled the past involuntarily.


    He remembered his father, Fourth-Hokage, Namikaze Minato. It can be said that he had contributed to the vige all his life. Even as a Hokage, he would rather sacrifice his life, wife, or son for the vige.


    But what did he get?


    What was he guarding?


    He remembered his mother, Uzumaki Kushina, who became a container of vige seal Kyuubi. Her life was greatly threatened, and she was not free.


    But what did she get?


    Who was she guarding?


    He remembered his mother''s family, Uzumaki n. The eternal alliance that was once a vige was born and died for the vige.


    But what did they get again?


    At the end of a genocide, who was abandoned by Konoha and was not saved by Konoha?


    Starting from a baby, he is the Kyuubi container of the new generation. It can be said that his own destiny is also without the freedom to act independently, locked firmly by the vige.


    ''But what did I get?''


    [Soul value: 2340]


    [Darkening degree]


    63%...


    64%...


    65%...


    66%...


    Naruto, who was paralyzed on the ground, took out a brand new scroll with a ghostly spirit and first put Uchiha''s mission" into this brand new scroll. Then he put the bundle of scrolls that Uchiha Itachi gave him to the ground, and he opened them slowly.


    Naruto murmured while doing so, "I''ll just call you Big Brother Shisui. Although I don''t know you, I believe your influence on big brother Itachi is definitely very profound. If only you... Perhaps big brother Itachi will not go on such an extreme road. If you didn''t... Perhaps Sasuke will not have such a tragic encounter. At that time, there will not be a big change in his temperament. Next, let me see the world clearly for you..."


    Uchiha Itachi said those words to Naruto. Although Naruto was still dumbfounded at the time, he still heard it. After a bit of analysis, he guessed a rough idea and got the words.


    After a while, the scroll spread on the ground was covered with scarlet blood.


    At the same time, the power of Kyuubi is also constantly repairing the wounds in Naruto''s eyes.


    The pain in his eyes gradually disappeared. Both eyes closed. He began to adapt to the pair of eyes slowly. The eyeball moved up and down..


    When Naruto opened his eyes again, it was already Mangekyo Sharingan of Uchiha Shisui!


    It is also at this time, there was some movement behind Naruto...


    He turned to look at Sarutobi Hiruzen, who was lurking for a long time!


    Because the range of the two people involved in the battle is toorge, Sarutobi Hiruzen, who originally wanted to hide in the surroundings and waited for the time to start secretly, had to retreat to the distance.


    When the two giant monsters disappeared at the same time, and when even the sound of fighting stopped, Sarutobi Hiruzen immediately rushed from the hidden ce.


    The first scene he saw happened to be the moment when Naruto turned around and stared at him with Mangekyo Sharingan!


    Naruto''s icy gaze, coupled with the dreaded Mangekyo Sharingan.


    Immediately, Sarutobi Hiruzen was trembling to the whole body, unable to bear, shaking his hand sharply at the Naruto in front of him: "You... you... you... how do you have these eyes?"


    He took a look at Naruto and then looked at Uchiha Itachi whose not moving.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen only felt more frightened and angry! He misunderstood the situation, and he thought Naruto cold-bloodedly killed and took Uchiha Itachi''s eyes.


    Seeing Sarutobi Hiruzening alone, Naruto guessed the old fellow''s thoughts for a moment. The Mangekyo Sharingan, like Kakashi''s, retreated to the three-tomoe state. --It could never be closed again to normal eyes.


    With Three-Tomoe Sharingan, Naruto just looked at the old fellow in front of him and yed with the taste: "What? Want to kill me?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen was taken aback. Naruto guessed his thoughts and did not feel embarrassed. This made his determination to kill Naruto stronger!


    Gritting his teeth, he secretly spontaneously ruthlessly thought: ''Okay! Sure enough, you are the hidden danger! It''s impossible to let you go!''


    He didn''t respond to Naruto.


    At the same time, he also didn''t intend to give Naruto a chance to react!


    He quickly did hand seal with both hands!


    The target is locked on Naruto!


    ''Dead Demon Consuming Seal!''


    [*TL note: The Dead Demon Consuming Seal is a sealing technique developed by the Uzumaki n to call upon the power of the Shinigami. After the hand seals are performed, the user''s soul is partly separated from their body and suspended behind them. Behind their soul appears the Shinigami, which restrains their soul with its hair. Only the summoner can see the Shinigami at this point. After a few moments,[3] the Shinigami wraps its left arm with prayer beads and chants unintelligibly until a cursed seal appears on its arm. It then drives its arm into the summoner''s soul, thus allowing the summoner to call upon the Shinigami to seal a target: the Shinigami''s arm emerges from the summoner''s body and grasps the target''s soul.]


    That''s right!


    Whether it is Uchiha Itachi or Naruto who survived today, he is ready to use ''Dead Demon Consuming Seal'' as ast resort to perish together with the surviving party!


    If it was Uchiha Itachi who survived, it couldn''t be better.


    He only had to wait for a while, and when the ''other'' approached, he would act in front of everyone and die with Uchiha Itachi. Then you can be sure of the great contribution he sacrificed for Konoha.


    But if it was Naruto who survived Then there is nothing to say!


    He needed to be sure to resolve Naruto before other people arrived here!


    When the timees, dead men tell no tales... Others will only think that their Hokage is there to protect Konoha and deal with the enemy.


    Even if the person of the Yamanaka n spied on the corpse''s brain, it didn''t matter!


    Sarutobi Hiruzen is very confident. At most, only a few people would know the truth, and his old close friends would certainly help him hide this truth.


    After all, what happened back then, they would not want that to be spread out...

 Chapter 132: I must kill him!

    Chapter 132: I must kill him!


    Hand sealpleted!


    Chakra poured in!


    Ninjutsu starts!


    Instantly, Naruto, locked in the eyes of Sarutobi Hiruzen, only felt that the whole body was difficult to move. Immediately afterward, he saw Sarutobi Hiruzen move towards him, rushed over, and held Naruto''s arms tightly, not letting it open!


    Naruto looked a little ugly, struggling to say: "Old... old man... What do you want to do? What is this Ninjutsu?"


    Seeing that the n was about to seed, the burden on Sarutobi Hiruzen''s shoulders seemed to be a lot easier. He was proud and involuntarily smiled triumphantly: "What''s wrong? When Minato passed Sealing Jutsu to you, he didn''t teach you this Ninjutsu?


    "Oh--. Right. How could he teach this kind of ninjutsu to his son?"


    Sarutobi Hiruzen, who thought he was winning the game, just grabbed Naruto''s arms and waited for Shinigami''s hand to drill out of his belly and took Naruto''s soul back!


    ...Waiting...


    ...Waiting...


    Sarutobi Hiruzen felt something was wrong.


    Yes, he had never used the seal before. After all, the ones who used it are already dead.


    The problem is...


    Does it take so long to start the Ninjutsu seal?


    ording to the Ninjutsu record of Uzumaki n, as long as the caster casts this Ninjutsu at the expense of his own soul, Shinigami wille from hell to the present world. Then the souls of himself and the enemy will be taken away by Shinigami.


    ''Why does it take a while?''


    ''Why doesn''t the Shinigami here take away Naruto''s soul?''


    But what Sarutobi Hiruzen didn''t know was that Shinigami, who he summoned, is now also at a loss.


    ....


    Li Yaoxiang, who was floating behind Naruto, was blind to Shinigami...


    The Shinigami can clearly feel that Li Yaoxiang has the same ability as him.


    ''Who is currently performing the ''Dead Demon Consuming Seal''?''


    ''Was it the kid who summoned a Shinigami on the opposite side? Or the old man in front of me who summoned that Shinigami?''


    ''Who should the caster''s soul belong to?''


    [*TL note: the Shinigami thought Li Yaoxiang was also a shinigami.]


    Because of this, the Shinigami, who was not sure about the situation, could not make the decision. He looked at Li Yaoxiang.


    Li Yaoxiang stared at him as well.


    Both sides refused to give in.


    In the end, Shinigami could only secretly sigh a pity because he realized that the old man who summoned him; the chakra on his body, was not enough to keep him in this world for long. The shinigami had to go back to where he came from.


    ....


    Sarutobi Hiruzen, who was still triumphant at the moment when the Shinigami was about to retreat, finally realized that he found Li Yaoxiang floating at the top of the head behind Naruto, wearing a mask and with his hands on Naruto''s shoulders!


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s proud face became very frightened... At the same time, he had to ept the facts before him.


    ''The seal that I cast myself had failed!''


    And the main reason that led to his failure to cast the seal was probably destroyed by this guy who floated behind Naruto!


    It''s just that what scared him was not the Ninjutsu''s failure.


    When he saw Li Yaoxiang''s figure, an extraordinary thought suddenly appeared in his mind involuntarily!


    ''This guy in front of me... ''


    ''Could it be Naruto''s big brother?!''


    ''If Naruto''s big brother has such a strange and powerful ability, what would be the real purpose of ''him''?!''


    Unfortunately, there is not much time left for him to distinguish the truth. He had already felt Naruto''s arms gradually starting to recover.


    And because of the seal jutsu, his Chakra became empty, and his body became weaker and weaker. His own situation will only get worse!


    No!


    He can''t die yet!


    He hasn''t solved the hidden danger of Naruto; he can''t die like this!


    Sarutobi Hiruzen decisively loosened Naruto''s arms. He turned around and ran away immediately. He didn''t think Naruto would let him go now, but he must escape!


    He must escape to a ce with many people. As long as he reached a ce with many people, as long as Naruto dares not kill him, there is still a chance!


    Naruto, who had just been released from the seal, was breathing heavily and firmly staring at Sarutobi Hiruzen''s back.


    The dark and horrible Shinigami; he also saw it. The instant the Shinigami appeared, he already felt a shadow of death directly covering the top of his head.


    Fortunately, nothing happened in the end, and the Shinigami retreated on his own.


    What surprised him was why Shinigami''s gaze had suddenly turned to the top of his head?


    ''What scene appeared on the top of my head so that Shinigami and Sarutobi Hiruzen had to pay attention?''


    Naruto subconsciously looked at the top of his head.


    Nothing can be seen.


    His eyes fell on Sarutobi Hiruzen, who was still running. Feeling that his body gradually recovered some physical strength, Naruto gritted his teeth and chased him straight up!


    Even if Sarutobi Hiruzen used Hinata to threaten him, the original Naruto would never think of killing Sarutobi Hiruzen. But after going through a series of incidents just now after the darkening level has been raised again, Naruto seems to have made up his mind. This time must first get stronger!


    ''Kill this old man!''


    ''As long as this old man is killed, no one will use Hinata to threaten me anymore!''


    ''As for the previous scruples, whether this old fellow will leave behind Hinata or not.''


    ''Hehe!''


    ''Just look at the response of the old fellow just now.''


    ''Absolutely no!''


    ''I must kill him before he kills Hinata!''


    ...


    On the other hand,


    Sarutobi Hiruzen was desperate to escape; the whole person looked very different. There is no more style that Hokage should have. As he ran away, he turned around and saw the picture behind him, feeling even more anxious.


    Because he discovered that Naruto had already started catching up.


    Initially, maybe he could still be a bluff, pretending to have a backhand in Hinata, and continue to threaten Naruto so that Naruto would not dare to hurt him.


    But, after seeing Naruto''s indifferent expression and cold eyes, he no longer dared to have many fantasies about Naruto''s kindness.


    He used his own method to guess Naruto''s decision.


    Just like he suspected Uchiha n, Hatake Sakumo, and so on, he would simply be able to understand how important Hinata is in Naruto in mind.


    So, he dares not gamble.


    This time he chose to run away directly.


    ording to his calctions, there should also be many people who are moving in this direction, so he chose to escape there, and the chance of survival is definitely more secure than bluffing.

 Chapter 133: All Betrayed

    Chapter 133: All Betrayed


    Seeing the distance between Naruto and him was getting closer, Sarutobi Hiruzen was as anxious as the ants on the hot nest.


    When Sarutobi Hiruzen looked back again, he saw that Naruto had summoned the Chakra outerwear. The orange and translucent Chakra outerwear, condensed into a beast w, and suddenly stretched out fiercely towards the ce where he was!


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s pupils shrank immediately!


    It''s toote to think.


    He decisively decided to roll forward.


    ''Only then can I escape this w of the beast!''


    Looking at the ground cracked by the beast''s ws, Sarutobi Hiruzen only felt the back chill. Judging from his current situation, if he were attacked by this, it is estimated that he would have lost at least half his life, even if he were not dead.


    ''It seems that Naruto really wants to take my life!''


    This time, Sarutobi Hiruzen is even more determined!


    Even if he rolled forward, his whole body was covered with mud, and he didn''t care. There is only one word left in his heart.


    Escape!


    But when his gaze fell to the front again, the expression of panic turned into great joy immediately! Waiting! He finally waited! Vige reinforcement has finally arrived!


    OK--.


    OK--.


    Naruto attacked him just now, and everyone saw it.


    Although there is still a distance, seeing a glimmer of light, Sarutobi Hiruzen rushed forward with more effort!


    While rushing, he shouted: "Someonee! Hurry--! Hurry, stop him--! Uzumaki Naruto is already betraying the vige! To get Itachi''s eyes, he wants to kill me now!"


    After arge number of ninja hearing this, they all looked at each other in nk dismay. Slowly stopped their pace, not knowing what to do.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen rushed to the crowd very quickly, and after seeing the number of peopleing, his confidence was abundant. He straightened his waist and chest on the spot. He patted the dust and dirt off.


    Restoring the style of belonging to Hokage, he turned to Naruto and said, "Uzumaki Naruto, how is it? Now, what else do you have to say? Just now, you attacked a Vige Kage in public, and everyone witnessed it! Look at your own eyes. What else can you quibble?! Not obediently surrender yet?!"


    Naruto stopped. With a soft gaze, he nced at everyone and said nothing.


    Facing Naruto, Sarutobi Hiruzen sneered for a moment and then instructed: "Come here, take Uzumaki Naruto! If he dares to resist, execute him without mercy!"


    Of course, the so-called winning is nothing serious.


    In any case, today, Sarutobi Hiruzen must also address the hidden danger of Naruto on the spot. Both Naruto and Uchiha Itachi just finished fighting, and he doesn''t believe that Naruto still has the ability to deal with the vige''s strength!


    For Sarutobi Hiruzen, this is a barely eptable ending.


    But what surprised him was that the order had not been carried out.


    ''Why hasn''t anyone done it yet?''


    Confused, he looked back at the crowd. He saw everyone looking towards him with a strange look, and they had no intention of carrying out orders at all.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen was stunned for a moment, and then he was furious: "What are you still doing?! Why don''t you do it yet! Do it quickly! Didn''t you see that he just attacked me openly?"


    Quiet-.


    It was still silent.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen can see doubts, confusion, and pity from everyone''s eyes, but not the eyes of absolute trust in Hokage in the past!


    What Sarutobi Hiruzen focuses on solving hidden dangers is that he has overlooked a very important thing since the beginning of the ''Konoha Crush n''.


    That is, he has gradually lost popr support.


    With the idea of solving hidden dangers by dying, he didn''t care even about the false visits and false apologies that were discovered by many people.


    Now it''s even more because of Uchiha Itachi''sing to revenge and telling a series of unknown secrets. It has chilled the hearts of many people.


    Everyone has already raised huge doubts about his lingering Hokage.


    As a result, despite witnessing Naruto attacking Sarutobi Hiruzen, everyone will not go blindly because of Sarutobi Hiruzen''s one-person statement.


    Seeing that the n is about to seed, there have been huge changes again. How can Sarutobi Hiruzen maintain a stable attitude this time?


    As long as he missed this opportunity, he could never resolve Naruto again.


    And will lose the honor of ''sacrifice for Konoha''.


    Therefore, his emotions gradually became unstable, moved towards everyone hysterical, shouting: "Do it! Please do it quickly!"


    I can''t bear to see Sarutobi Hiruzen''s Hokage, shouting like a lunatic, and finally, someone began to persuade.


    "Third-Kage, as I see it, let''s find out the truth first before making a decision."


    "Yes, Third-Kage. Naruto just dealt with Uchiha Itachi for the vige, and it doesn''t look like he would harm the vige."


    Sarutobi Hiruzen was very angry with these people. Obviously, victory is right in front of him, but something is always holding it back at this time.


    After calming down a bit, Sarutobi Hiruzen turned and pointed at Naruto: "Look at his eyes! It is the best proof! -The Sharingan! In order to get Uchiha Itachi''s Sharingan, he chose to try to murder a Hokage who went to help! Do you still see the situation clearly?"


    Hearing this, everyone gazed simultaneously at Naruto.


    Naruto''s expression remained unchanged, the Three-Tomoe Sharingan of Eyes suddenly connected.


    Mangekyo Sharingan opened!


    Followed by...


    Uchiha Shisui''s the Second-Form blue-colored Susanoo was summoned out directly by him.


    [*TL note: Shisui''s Susanoo should be green, and Itachi''s should be red or yellow or orange. So, I don''t know where thises from.]


    Everyone on the scene showed a serious expression. They were slightly ready to fight at any time.


    Naruto nced at the alerted everyone, saying nothing. He finally stared at Sarutobi Hiruzen. His tone indifferently: "I used Uchiha Shisui''s Sharingan, the person who was forced to death by you. He gave it to Itachi before he died. And now, Itachi gave it to me before his death, hoping I can rece Uchiha Shisui and take a good look at the true face of this Konoha elders."


    Naruto took out the scroll that stored Uchiha Itachi Sharinganproving to everyone that what he said was not false.


    Everyone on the scene looked at Naruto''s disy of Susanoo''s colors. Plus, the evidence Naruto holds. At this moment, how could they still not know who is talking nonsense?


    Sarutobi Hiruzen''s image umted in them for many years, directly destroyed. They all moved involuntarily, keeping a certain distance from Sarutobi Hiruzen.


    And expressionless Naruto, who controls the Greatsword of the blue Susanoo, said to Sarutobi Hiruzen: "Old man, what else can you say now?"

 Chapter 134: The most aggrieved way of death

    Chapter 134: The most aggrieved way of death


    Sarutobi Hiruzen looked at Naruto in front of him and then looked around at the crowd.


    An unwilling expression appeared on his face.


    Not that he was afraid of death, but that he was very sure that Uzumaki Naruto was the hidden danger that Orochimaru said, and he wanted to solve this hidden danger!


    Unwilling to give up, he struggled and said, "Even if I misunderstood you, so what? Does that mean you can do something to me?" Sarutobi Hiruzen continued toward everyone and said, "I will say no matter what! As the Hokage of Konoha, if you let Naruto do something to me, what would the other Ninja Viges think of us, Konoha?!"


    Hearing this, everyone revealed aplex expression.


    Like the ''Konoha Crush n'' at that time, they had reasons and excuses not to rescue Sarutobi Hiruzen and die in the hands of Orochimaru.


    But now?


    The facts are exactly as Sarutobi Hiruzen said.


    As Konoha ninjas, how could they watch their Hokage and be attacked in front of them without help?


    When the other Ninja Viges know, wouldn''t they be a joke for others?


    Naruto didn''t have as many scruples as they did and just said coldly: "Today, I must kill him! And those who stop me will die!"


    Susanoo moved towards Sarutobi Hiruzen, and Sarutobi Hiruzen had no ns to dodge. Because he knew that if no one came forward to stop him today, and Naruto insisted on killing him, then he would have no choice but to die.


    Escaping in this situation will just be an embarrassment. It will only make him look even more ugly.


    He just stood there, looking straight at Naruto.


    Susanoo is less than 3 meters from Sarutobi Hiruzen.


    The blue-colored mes Greatsword mmed at the top of the head of Sarutobi Hiruzen, and he will be cut hard.


    But at this moment, there was a cry from everyone''s ear: "Stop it! Naruto!"


    Everyone moved in the direction of the sound...


    It was Jiraiya who was told by Sarutobi Hiruzen to bring Tsunade back. Who knows what method he used, but he really took Tsunade and Shizune back.


    Naruto paused. But he didn''t care about it, still swiping the knife with all his strength.


    But also because of the pause of the split second, Jiraiya had the opportunity to take a few moments. He came to the side of Sarutobi Hiruzen and helped him avoid this de.


    The two figures appeared in the eyes of everyone again, and they were already a long way away from Susanoo.


    "Naruto, what the hell is going on? Why are you attacking old fogey?" Jiraiya first asked Naruto about the situation and then reprimanded the other everyone. "And you guys, why don''t you help stop it?!"


    Everyone felt a little guilty, and some even med themselves.


    But they were still silent.


    Naruto was still with that cold face. He firmly stared at Jiraiya: "So you''re going to help him, right?"


    While saying this sentence, Naruto''s imposing-manner also rose. He made no secret of his killing-intent to Sarutobi Hiruzen and Jiraiya.


    At this time, Tsunade, who had just returned, also said, "Enough! Uzumaki Naruto, right? Do you really think you will kill this old fellow in front of Jiraiya and me? And you guys? When the vige fell to someone who wanted to kill Hokage, Konoha''s ninjas turned a blind eye instead?!"


    Hearing the words from the two disciples... Sarutobi Hiruzen''s confidence was plentiful again. He wouldn''t let the opportunity slip!


    Relying on the fact that he was the teacher of the two, Sarutobi Hiruzen was directly instructed: "Jiraiya, Tsunade, kill him quickly. Sooner orter, he will be a hidden danger of Konoha!


    Jiraiya did not help Sarutobi Hiruzen this time but yelled at him instead: "Old fogey! Are you crazy?! He is the son of Minato!"


    Tsunade didn''t even want to look at Sarutobi Hiruzen. She had no affection for this former teacher.


    In other words. Now the two will not help Sarutobi Hiruzen to kill Naruto. Nor will they let Naruto kill Sarutobi Hiruzen in front of them and the others.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen frowned at first. Seeing that the matter was not solved, and there was no intention of entanglement. Anyway, as long as he survived this disaster, and as long as Hinata fell into his hands, he had the means to deal with Uzumaki Naruto slowly.


    Think of this, Sarutobi Hiruzen finally recovered his "civil" expression and smiled at Naruto: "Naruto, it seems that this is just a misunderstanding--. Old fogey was just really confused and doubted you. Just forget about the matter just now. I will no longer hold you ountable."


    When Naruto saw Sarutobi Hiruzen''s disgusting smile, whether he had grown in soul value or darkening degree, how could he not understand the true thoughts of the old fellow?


    ''Haha, he had already cast aside all considerations for the face.''


    Thinking that Sarutobi Hiruzen will threaten Hinata again, the anger in Naruto''s heart rose again! Not only did he not take Susanoo back, but even the Kyuubi''s Chakra coat also appeared.


    Naruto''s anger did not cause Sarutobi Hiruzen''s fear. Instead, he became more excited.


    ''YES!''


    ''Go out of control!''


    ''Out of control!''


    He was sure that as long as Naruto dared to persist in doing it, it would be impossible for everyone present today to sit idly by! Especially his two apprentices, Jiraiya and Tsunade.


    It would be great to be able to kill Naruto on the spot!


    Then he no longer has to wait for the future to use Hinata to y crafty plots and machinations.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen took advantage of Naruto''s noise and attracted most of his attention, deliberately facing Naruto, exuding a provocative expression, trying to continue to inspire Naruto''s anger.


    But when Sarutobi Hiruzen felt most proud and mistakenly thought that everything was under his control, mutation appeared again!


    He only felt a pain in his heart...


    A longsword suddenly passed through his heart!


    Sarutobi Hiruzen coughed twice, and a lot of blood oozed out of his mouth. He bowed his head in disbelief, looked towards the longsword that pierced his heart.


    ''Why?''


    ''Why is this happening?''


    ''What exactly is going on?''


    ''Who killed me?''


    He widened his eyes and turned his head slowly.


    He saw the old friend, Shimura Danzo, who has been with him for many years!


    Unwillingness, sadness, disappointment In a split second, they all were written on his face. Sarutobi Hiruzen has been in Ninja World for many years, and he didn''t expect to die at the hands of his partner for many years instead...


    ''Why...''


    ''If you won''t help, it''s okay.''


    ''Why do you have to make trouble at the most critical moment?''


    Sarutobi Hiruzen really wanted to know this answer.


    After exhausting hisst energy, he asked this old close friend for many years, "Why...?"

 Chapter 135: Danzos Purpose

    Chapter 135: Danzo''s Purpose


    "Third-Kage!"


    "Old fogey!"


    The exmation sounded.


    Everyone realized the scene here, and everyone was shocked.


    What happened today is really unpredictable.


    First, Uchiha Itachi attacked the vige, saying that it was revenge for the hatred of genocide back then. When ites to this matter, everyone just felt weirded out.


    ''Is it true that the truth back then?''


    ''If it is exactly what Uchiha Itachi said, how cruel is Konoha''s high level to make such a decision to exterminate their own kind?''


    ''Using Sasuke Uchiha as a condition to force Uchiha Itachi to kill his own family by himself, wouldn''t normal people be crazy long ago?''


    ''Do they really have to choose either the fish dies or the splits?*''


    [*TL note: y s wng p lit. either the fish dies, or the splits; a life and death struggle (idiom).]


    ''Uchiha Itachi is good?''


    For the vige, for the n''s reputation, for the younger brother... the fact that Uchiha Itachi agreed to this condition amazed everyone.


    The problem is that others have sacrificed so much, and the vige couldn''t keep its promise. They didn''t protect Uchiha Sasuke well, causing him to have an ident.


    How could Uchiha Itachi ept this fact?


    It''s really hard not to be crazy.


    It is also because of the truth expressed by Uchiha Itachi and his behavior before; they cannot find any loopholes. Everything is reasonable. So even if everyone who knows the truth is very sad about this and very unwilling to ept the vige to have such cruelty, it also drove them to believe Uchiha Itachi.


    In many people''s hearts, a sense of sadness arose involuntarily.


    ''Back then. The vige was able able to treat the Uchiha n in this way... Does that mean that the vige might treat us and our own ns like this one day?''


    When the timees, how should they choose? Can any promise given by the vige still be believed?


    The huge amount of information simply opened their minds on the spot.


    However, for the sake of the vige, everyone still forced themselves to ept this fact. They just found an appropriate reason and convinced themselves that the vige had made such a decision in the past. Therefore there must be difficulties, and it must be spelled by circumstances.


    After some self-constion, they set off again.


    Fight for the vige again!


    Fight Uchiha Itachi together!


    Although many colleagues were injured or died during the confrontation, things went very smoothly.


    Worthy of the son of Fourth-Hokage, a tiger father will not beget a dog son!*


    [*TL note: hf w qunz a great/powerful father will not raise a worthless son (typically said as apliment).]


    Also, in the most difficult moment of the vige, Naruto came forward and rescued everyone.


    However, the next scene made everyone dumbfounded.


    ''Have we made a mistake all this time?''


    ''Why is the good-looking Konoha New Generation hero, Uzumaki Naruto, hunting for Third-Hokage?''


    What made them even more speechless is that the kind-hearted Third-Hokage even staged a stab at the Konoha hero who had just saved the vige but was beaten by Naruto on the spot, and his lie was debunked on the spot.


    Everyone''s impression of Third-Kage''s ''good Hokage'' copsed instantly.


    ''kind and good Hokage?''


    ''What about Will of Fire?''


    ''You just ndered someone who has just stopped the huge disaster for Konoha, and you also want to kill him on the spot?''


    ''Not to mention Uchiha  ''s exterminating the n incident.''


    This made everyone even more convinced of Uchiha Itachi''s statement. Everyone can''t find a reason to refute it.


    But now that the misunderstanding has been resolved and the matter is over, it''s going to be okay, right?


    However, they didn''t expect Naruto to be so determined that his hatred for Third-Kage is so great that he must kill him!


    This made everyone, who was already disappointed with Sarutobi Hiruzen, have to secretly wonder whether the Messy Old Man in front of them had done something intolerable to Naruto, which led to Naruto''s unending seek of death of him?


    But it''s okay...


    At the moment when everyone felt the most confused, the saviors were here!


    The two Konoha''s Sannin, Jiraiya, and Tsunade, are back!


    With the appearance of Jiraya and Tsunade, the two sides will not be able to conflict, and everyone does not need to worry about who they are going to help.


    But, unexpectedly, Naruto still refused to give up.


    Okay?


    That being the case Had to hit the duck on the shelf.*


    [*TL note: as a metaphor forpelling to do something that the ability cannot do.]


    However, something unexpected happened again...


    Naruto hasn''t started yet, and the Third-Kage was killed.


    And the one who did it was Shimura Danzo, one of the Konoha rulers...


    At this time, everyone just wants to die!


    ''Is there no end to this?!''


    ''Is there gonna be another drama to be staged?''


    ''How big of a heart does one needs to ept the series of strange things that happened today?!''


    Of course, not only are they shocked, but even Naruto, who was ready to kill Sarutobi Hiruzen first.


    He was robbed of his head...


    However, Naruto''s thoughts were clearer than those of other people. He had known the whole sequence of events for a long time, so he was shocked by Shimura Danzo''s sudden move for a moment, but he quickly calmed down again.


    He re-examined the one-eyed guy in front of him to see what tricks he was going to y again.


    As for Sarutobi Hiruzen... he dies.


    It doesn''t matter whether Naruto does it himself or not.


    Of course, Naruto is not the only one who has doubts about Shimura Danzo''s move. After being aware of the movement here, everyone on the scene looked at Shimura Danzo.


    Jiraiya shouted ''old fogey!'' and firmly stared at Shimura Danzo.


    Tsunade didn''t feel much sentimental about Sarutobi Hiruzen being assassinated in front of her. But her heart was tight, and she had an indescribable feeling. On the contrary, seeing the blood flowing out made her react more intensely.


    Frightened, her legs gone a little soft.


    She needed Shizune to help her to stand still.


    After getting used to it a little bit, she deliberately avoided the blood, and her eyes also fell on Shimura Danzo. There seems to be a kind of, ''if you don''t give a reasonable exnation today, then don''t think about leaving easily!''


    Feeling everyone''s eyes, all gathered on himself, Shimura Danzo was very satisfied.


    This is what he wants!


    As for the "why" asked by old close friend Sarutobi Hiruzen...


    He just nced at the loser with disdain. There was no answer to him at all.


    Shimura Danzo moved towards everyone, each minding their own business, and said, "Uchiha Itachi is right! The things in those years were the things decided by Inside the vige! And the decision-makers for all these things are the Third-Hokage in front of you!"

 Chapter 136: Ending with an injustice

    Chapter 136: Ending with an injustice


    Seeing what happened, it did not cause an uproar in the audience, and everyone just looked towards Shimura Danzo with a bizarre look. It was obvious that there was great distrust in his statement. It''s just that Shimura Danzo doesn''t care what they think.


    Perhaps many people will not believe it.


    But as soon as the news spread, Even if the entire Konoha, only one person believes in him, then his purpose today can be considered sessful.


    Konoha, under the leadership of old close friend Sarutobi Hiruzen, is really rotten.


    The popr support has beenpletely lost.


    ''I, Shimura Danzo, must pull strongly against a crazy ride!''


    ''I save Konoha!''


    ''And now, let everyone have confidence and trust in Konoha again!''


    ''So, for Konoha... Hiruzen can just go to hell.''


    Shimura Danzo looked around for a while, ignoring the strange gazes of everyone, and continued to exim: "Mitokado Homura Elder and Utatane Koharu Elder have discouraged him more than once, but everything was in vain. After all, he was the Hokage, and we couldn''t stop the decision he insisted on. --So, it caused today''s tragedy. Konoha has suffered serious losses time and time again. Konoha can''t stand his tossing anymore, so this time I did it personally, just to give everyone an exnation! I assure you in the name of Root. Such a situation like the Uchiha n will never happen again in Konoha!"


    At this time, Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu also appeared behind Shimura Danzo. They showed a very regretful look, and it looked like they were sorry for not trying their best to stop Sarutobi Hiruzen from chaos.


    Mitokado Homura: "I can prove that Danzo is not wrong..."


    Utatane Koharu: "I can also prove what Danzo said."


    With the testimony of the Two Great Elders, many people are moved and have the illusion of believing in Shimura Danzo and the others. --This effect can be said to be very satisfactory to Shimura Danzo.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen, who was notpletely dead, just widened his eyes and looked incredibly closely at this close old friend who threw the pot around thoroughly. He took a look at Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu, and looked at Shimura Danzo again.


    There is a very strange feeling.


    Then he looked at everyone''s reaction.


    Finally, heughed at himself.


    ''End with a grievance.''


    Shimura Danzo cast a disgusted look at the dead Sarutobi Hiruzen and pulled the knife out of his heart. With a click, Sarutobi Hiruzen''s corpse fell to the ground.


    Shizune followed Tsunade''s instructions, and she immediately rushed to check the situation.


    After a while, she saw that Tsunade shook her head, indicating that he was not saved.


    In fact, in the situation just now, it is not that there are no medical ninjas who can try to rescue Sarutobi Hiruzen. It''s just that Shimura Danzo was on the side, so no one dared to act blindly without thinking.


    Jiraiya hurried to the corpse of Sarutobi Hiruzen and lifted him up, looking very sad.


    Shimura Danzo ignored these guys and turned his attention directly to Naruto: "Naruto, let him go in the past. I used to do things ording to Hiruzen''s will. I am also spelled by circumstances. Believe me, in the future, Konoha, the same thing will not happen again."


    Shimura Danzo did not know that Sarutobi Hiruzen used Hinata to threaten Naruto. But the "things" in his words have a very broad meaning, including the events of his imprisonment.


    In short, as long as there is a pot, it will be a big shake.


    Naruto looked at this insidious guy lightly, performing in front of him.


    No response was given.


    He did not forget what Li Yaoxiang had told him, what was hidden in the bandage of Shimura Danzo. He did not forget the picture of the disgusting guy who had imprisoned him.


    It''s just that he doesn''t have any thoughts of action now. The disgusting guy in front of him didn''t touch Naruto''s bottom line, and Naruto wouldn''t have such extreme thoughts of killing him directly because of a suspicion.


    Naruto''s indifferent eyes made Shimura Danzo''s face look a bit awkward.


    Feeling the crowd around him, Danzo knew that Naruto didn''t seem to trust him. He rashly moved towards everyone and broke the news again: "Since most people are gathered here today, then I will give the Konoha hero a fair justice!"


    Shimura Danzo''s gaze swept across the crowd. He looked at Kakashi, who was severely injured and supported by someone and continued, "Kakashi, I''m sorry. What happened to your father was actually Hiruzen''s mischief. Your father gave up the mission to save yourpanion, yes... But these things should not have spread throughout Konoha. At that time, your father''s reputation was too high. Hiruzen, in order to maintain his position as Hokage, did injustice to him. I also tried my best to suppress your father''s reputation. Today I will give you a fair justice! His contributions to the vige are endless! He is the real hero of the vige!"


    This time, the noise finally began to rise and fall in the crowd.


    Unexpectedly, there was such a secret in the things back then.


    Even Kakashi couldn''t help being a little excited when his father''s name, Sakumo Hatake, cleared. But he wouldn''t believe Shimura Danzo''s gibberish, which is beyond his consideration.


    There are still many people looking towards him with questioning eyes.


    Shimura Danzo deliberately or unintentionally cast aside Mito Menyan and turned to Koharu at a nce.


    The two hadn''t reacted from the stuntedness. After all, there was no such y in the original script. Shimura Danzo added a temporary y to make them a little unresponsive. But after another thought, it didn''t harm their interests anyway, so just keep throwing the pot.


    The two elders stood up again to prove that Shimura Danzo is not false.


    At this moment, Jiraiya fiercely stared at these old fellows and scolded: "Enough! Everyone is dead. What else do you want?"


    Several old fellows closed their mouths this time and stopped talking nonsense. But few people did not calm down. They began to show their ability to do things. They started to deal with various matters after the war.


    The crowd gradually dispersed.


    As for Sarutobi Hisaki''s corpse, it was carried by Jiraiya to who knows where.


    ...


    Shortly after his death, Sarutobi Hiruzen''s soul floated slowly out of the body.


    However, before he could adapt to his post-death state, a strange and familiar fellow suddenly appeared in front of his soul.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen froze for a moment.


    Then he turned pale with fright and said, "You... you... you... you!"


    Li Yaoxiang nodded with a smile: "Third-Kage, long time no see."


    That''s right.


    The person he pointed to was Li Yaoxiang in the state of the soul.


    However, Li Yaoxiang did not wear a mask at this time.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen recognized Li Yaoxiang. He was the figure floating behind Naruto just now, and also the Konoha civilian who applied to him to leave the vige that year!


    "It turns out to be you! It turns out that you are Naruto''s big brother! What is your purpose?!"


    Li Yaoxiang did not answer him.


    With a stretch of his right hand, he absorbed the soul of Sarutobi Hiruzen in the palm of his hand, and then he inhaled suddenly!


    The soul of Sarutobi Hiruzen was like air, all swallowed by Li Yaoxiang.


    Finally, there was a hup.


    Then, he continued to watch Shimura Danzo''s performance.

 Chapter 137: I, Danzo, Want to Be Hokage

    Chapter 137: I, Danzo, Want to Be Hokage


    Things didn''t take long to end, and the only remaining Konoha Three Elders gathered together again.


    Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu are very satisfied with this result. Sarutobi Hiruzen can''t take this boat anymore. He has lost all people''s hearts and med him on past mistakes, which is undoubtedly the best way.


    And the facts prove that their approach is correct, isn''t it?


    At least in the crowd just now, they have seen many people restore some confidence in these power holders.


    The two enjoyed the warm cup of tea in front of them leisurely, enjoying their hard-earned results.


    But at this moment, Shimura Danzo, with the gloomyplexion, mmed the desktop with a bang, "You still have leisure time to enjoy here slowly? Do you think that after all the crimesid on Hiruzen, we can rest peacefully?!"


    The remaining two looked at each other; their hearts were full of doubts. But the performance is still very calm.


    Mitokado Homura: "Danzo, hasn''t the matter been resolved? Now that the unstable factor of Uchiha Itachi has been resolved, what else do we need to worry about?"


    Utatane Koharu: "Yeah, Danzo. If there is any problem, can''t we just insist that it is all instructed by Hiruzen?"


    "Hmph! Of course, I know this, but I''m not talking about this!" Shimura Danzo nced at the two and continued, "Did you not see their attitude towards us? Didn''t you see Jiraiya and Tsunade''s attitude towards us? And, most importantly, did you not see Naruto''s attitude towards me?!"


    This time, even the other two''s faces couldn''t help but be dignified.


    Utatane Koharu: "Danzo, Uzumaki Naruto''s current strength is really too important for the vige. In my opinion... it is better to consider harmony as the most important thing."


    Shimura Danzo sneered: "Heh, the most fear is that we want to value harmony, but others don''t want it!"


    Mitokado Homura: "Danzo, don''t bluff around. Since you raise this issue, you must have a solution. Just say it."


    Shimura Danzo sits upright: "It''s simple. As long as I be Hokage, as long as I have enough manpower, then I have absolute confidence that the demon fox can not only threaten us but also can control his power!"


    Two elders nced at each other andughed.


    Mitokado Homura: "Don''t crack a joke, Danzo. How old are we? Even if you be Hokage, how many years will you have left? Also, how do you confirm that after you be a Hokage, Naruto will be right and not threaten us?"


    Shimura Danzo said sullenly: "Oh, do you think I am indecisive like Hiruzen? And, if I don''t be the next Hokage, how can you ensure that the next Hokage will not exploit our power? With no more influence, how can we contribute to Konoha again? Are you sure to give the vige to the younger generation?"


    "And, don''t forget, we are sitting on the same boat now. If we lose our power and our influence, how can we ensure our own safety? What is the reason that caused the demon fox to kill Hiruzen? We still don''t know yet. How can you ensure that the demon fox only hates Hiruzen? What if he even hates us? Relying on his strength, he dares to kill Hiruzen openly with so many people watching."


    " Who can guarantee that the next one he wants to kill will be one of us? We old guys are dead, and it won''t matter. But if Konoha is gone, we old guys are sitting here, is that okay?! Are you so relieved to let Konoha''s safety rest on that demon fox''s idea?"


    Hearing this, Utatane Koharu and Mitokado Homura''s brows were tightly locked.


    When this secret meeting ended, there was news in the vige that the only three rulers left in Konoha will call on all the core staff to meet at Hokage Residence tomorrow afternoon, saying that there are important things to be announced.


    ...


    At the same time, in Hyuga n''s Residence.


    In the previous battle, Hyuga n was simr to the rest of the Konoha Noble n. Anyway, the enemy was only Uchiha Itachi, and they didn''t send much battle strength to participate in it.


    The main energy is spent on the cement of the n members.


    But even so, this does not mean that these Konoha Noble ns just know nothing about what happened just now.


    Usually, in this situation, they will continue to send n members to the frontline to collect first-hand information. Therefore, they should not miss what they should know, things they shouldn''t know, they also know a little about two.


    Shortly after the end of the whole thing, Hyuga n finally recovered their calm. The two guards guarding the gate finally had leisure time and began to chat about the battle just now. They didn''t expect that the guy who used to see Eldest Young Lady every day would be such a good kid.


    Now they are bragging about the war they just watched.


    Suddenly, a familiar silhouette suddenly appeared in front of them...


    The personing is Uzumaki Naruto!


    After the incident, Naruto did not at all go home directly but came here instead.


    Two guards were shocked by the presence of Naruto.


    ''This is embarrassing.''


    ''We were praising him like a fan. We didn''t expect that the protagonist of the topic would actually appear here.''


    The two chatted so happily. Of course, Naruto can''t hear their content. Besides, Naruto didn''t care too much.


    A series of things happened to Uchiha Itachi. Even though Sarutobi Hiruzen, who angered him, had been killed, he was still in a bad mood, feeling a little tired.


    Naruto barely squeezed out a smile, lightly said, "I want to see your Eldest Young Lady, can you let me meet her?"


    The two guards were shocked again. If it''s in the past, they will definitely refuse on the spot. After all, this is what the n Leader exined. But today, somehow, when the two guards saw Naruto''s "real man", their attitude changed drastically! They were very excited and nervous.


    They were so miserable and stammeringly responded: "Yes... yes... yes!"


    Then hurried to the courtyard of Eldest Young Lady.


    ..


    After not much time, the guard came out again.


    But he was still alone.


    Seeing the guarding out alone, Naruto was very disappointed. He mistakenly thought that Hinata didn''t want to see him, so she didn''t follow the guard.


    Just as Naruto was about to turn around and leave, the guard hurriedly stopped him: "Eldest... Eldest... Eldest Young Lady has agreed, let me take you in to see her."

 Chapter 138: Hinatas Ideas

    Chapter 138: Hinata''s Ideas


    Quickly, the guard took Naruto to a courtyard.


    The location of the courtyard is a bit remote. Obviously, the Hyuga n Main House Eldest Young Lady can''t be there. Despite some doubts, Naruto asked nothing.


    When the two arrived at the front and back of the courtyard, the guard respectfully spoke, "Eldest Young Lady, I have brought Uzumaki Naruto."


    Hinata''s indifferent voice was heard from the room: "Well, you leave first. I have something to talk about with Naruto alone."


    Guard: "Understood, Eldest Young Lady."


    Hearing the tone of Hinata, Naruto felt ufortable. He came here today to convince Hinata, and he wasn''t sure if Hinata was really like what he guessed. --To let him not be restricted, she pretended to be cold to him. If it is, then no matter what today, Hinata must be persuaded to abandon this unrealistic idea.


    Because obviously, this method doesn''t work, does it?


    Sarutobi Hiruzen still threatened to use her?


    ''But in case I think too much... if I guessed wrong.''


    What if, because Hinata hasn''t seen him for years, so her feelings for him have faded...


    ''That...''


    He wouldn''t know what to do.


    Does he still want to try to recover or... choose to give up?


    After the guard left, Naruto''s emotions were still uncertain. He was afraid of getting the answer he didn''t want the most. He hesitated to enter but eventually found the courage to open the door.


    The door just opened.


    He saw that the ''Byakugan'' had already been opened. The appearance of violent veins, as if looking at him fiercely.


    This scene suddenly chilled Naruto''s heart, and he mistakenly thought it was terrible news.


    But he didn''t expect that Hinata''s ''Byakugan'' was quickly closed, and immediately without concealing her worried look, she immediately jumped up, hung her hands on his neck, and hugged him tightly.


    Naruto was shocked. Then he smiled softly. A warmth rose from the bottom of his heart. Needless to say, he knows that he guessed right Hinata did not forget him.


    After hugging, Hinata pushed Naruto away a little. Hinata was nervous and looked up and down at Naruto and said in a hurry: "How are you? Is there anything wrong? Did you get hurt?"


    While talking, Hinata''s tears could not help but flow wildly.


    Looking at Hinata like this, Naruto felt an indescribable sweet and greasy feeling.


    ''This...''


    ''It''s Hinata that I know.''


    In fact, Naruto was right.


    Hinata really did not want to drag Naruto anymore, so she deliberately changed her behavior, making people mistakenly believe that her rtionship with Naruto is not as good as before, then no one will take her to threaten Naruto.


    This ysted for several years.


    But when Hinata learned today that Naruto was fighting Uchiha Itachi, she would never be able to perform it again. Because she was so worried about Naruto She was afraid that something would happen to Naruto.


    So as soon as she heard someone report that Naruto came to her, she immediately agreed.


    However, to be cautious, she chose to meet Naruto in this remote courtyard. Even in an instant when Naruto had just appeared, she was not at ease and opened Byakugan to observe all around. After confirming that no one was in the vicinity, shepletely released her feelings for Naruto.


    He released the thoughts that had been buried in her heart over the years.


    Perceiving Naruto''s eyes staying still on her face and with no movement, Hinata recovered.


    While blushing, she secretly guessed, ''was I too abrupt?''


    With her previous attitude towards Naruto, would Naruto hate her and be angry at her?


    She was about to push away Naruto and wanted to exin, but this time it was Naruto''s turn to hug her into his arms and hold her tightly, fearing that Hinata would slip away.


    Then Naruto said in Hinata''s ear: "No need to exin. I know everything."


    The stunned Hinata smiled, her cheek rested securely on Naruto''s shoulder.


    No one said anything.


    Both sides cherish this hard-won moment.


    After a while, the two people kneeled up close to the opposite side of the other side. While they were talking, they did not forget to hold hands, as if as long as the body was not in contact, there would be insufficient oxygen around them.


    Hinata was afraid that Naruto would misunderstand.


    So, she chose to exin her intentions in recent years. Why did she be so indifferent? Why she was so cold to Naruto, and so on.


    Naruto didn''t interrupt Hinata''s exnation either. He looked at Hinata sweetly and looked at Hinata''s appearance because she was afraid of his misunderstanding.


    The more he looked at her, the more lovely she became.


    The more he looked, the more he liked her.


    Only... What Naruto didn''t know was.


    In fact, Hinata still has an extreme idea deep in his heart.


    In the past few years, she was making an all-out effort to cultivate the younger sister, Hyuga Hanabi. In case she has any shorings, Hanabi can rece her and be the heir of the n.


    Only in this way can she make sure that her sister will not be engraved with a "bird in a cage" and at the same time solve Naruto''s problem.


    This was the perfect solution she had at the time.


    At the same time, in order not to make Hinata sad, Naruto also didn''t say that Sarutobi Hiruzen used her to threaten him, but only told histest decision.


    "Hinata, I have be very strong now. I have enough strength to protect you and protect myself from harming the people around me and not worry you. If you''re not assured, let''s leave Konoha together. Go to a ce where no one knows us. Then you don''t have to worry about someone threatening me anymore, don''t you?"


    Hinata was shocked. She didn''t expect Naruto to have this idea, and she wanted to take herself away from Konoha. But when she thought about it, this method seemed pretty good.


    As long as they leave Konoha, plus with the younger sister''s matter, won''t everything be solved?


    Thinking of this, Hinata nodded heavily.


    After that, both parties started to imagine where they would go to live, where they would go to y, etc., after leaving Konoha.


    It''s almost time to say good night.


    The two sides had no choice but to say goodbye.


    Hinata: "Naruto, after you go out, let''s maintain the previous rtionship."


    Naruto eximed: "Why?!"


    Hinata: "I can''t let my father discover our rtionship. Otherwise, he will certainly not let me leave with you."


    Naruto rxed, "Huh...". He agreed, but he said before leaving: "When Sasukees back, I will give his big brother''s relics with him, and then I will take you away."


    "Un."


    Before leaving, Naruto had not forgotten a light kiss on Hinata''s forehead.


    It made Hinata so embarrassed...

 Chapter 139: The pawn starts, and the meeting begins

    Chapter 139: The pawn starts, and the meeting begins


    At the same time, in the area where Sasuke lived.


    After seeing Konoha''s direction and seeing no more movement, Sasuke knew that the battle was over. He also understands that the dead one must be ''that man''. Because of Naruto''s big brother, it''s impossible for Naruto to die.


    But even if the matter was over, Sasuke still stood at the top of the tall tree for a long time and did note don. His body felt the strong wind at that high altitude, and various thoughts were constantly circling in his mind.


    In the original work, after learning the truth of the matter, Sasuke may have moved towards Konoha''s direction, and wanted to destroy Konoha to avenge his n.


    But in this life, because of the emergence of Li Yaoxiang, he didn''t have that impulse.


    Who knows how long have the strong winds beat him...


    Sasuke''s emotions gradually changed from anger to indifference and then from indifference to slowly to firmness.


    Eventually, he jumped back and forth between the two trees and returned to the ground from the top of the tall tree in a few breaths.


    He picked up a branch.


    Sasuke first drew a circle on the dirt, then drew a 6-pointed star pattern inside the circle. After doing all this, Sasuke sat quietly beside the pattern, silently waiting for the news.


    The six-pointed star pattern is a pattern agreed upon by Li Yaoxiang and him. As long as Sasuke is looking for Li Yaoxiang in a hurry, he can draw this pattern.


    When Li Yaoxiang found out, he came over to find him.


    Just as expected, it didn''t take long...


    After discovering the scene here through a crystal ball, Li Yaoxiang came to Sasuke again in the state of soul and invaded his consciousness space: "What''s wrong? Is there something you need with me?"


    Sasuke''s joy flushed away. There are no roundabouts. He directly asked his doubts: "I heard Sai say that you once promised him that as long as he helps you with things, you will resurrect his brother. Is this true? Can you really resurrect people? No matter how long they''ve died?"


    That''s right.


    This is what Sasuke thinks today.


    Previously, he was blinded by hatred and wanted revenge, so he never thought about this matter. But when the hatred buried in the bottom of his heart was resolved, an unrealistic thought shed in his mind.


    ''Since Li Yaoxiang can help Sai resurrect his big brother.''


    ''That...''


    ''Does this mean that Li Yaoxiang can also resurrect my family?''


    Compared with the big event of resurrecting his family, seeking revenge on Konoha has be less critical.


    After hearing Sasuke''s question, Li Yaoxiang grinned. This is exactly what he expected It was also one of the ways to make Sasuke his loyal chess piece. However, he didn''t expect Sasuke to make a decision so soon. He thought it would take some time before Sasuke could choose between ''destroying Konoha'' or ''resurrection of his family''.


    Li Yaoxiang indifferently said: "Yes."


    Sasuke: "What price do I have to pay before you can help me resurrect my family?"


    Li Yaoxiang deliberately didn''t answer Sasuke and expressed his appetite.


    Sasuke was nervous to death, fearing that he had no use for Li Yaoxiang.


    Seeing Li Yaoxiang remained silent, Sasuke couldn''t bear it and started to talk again: "As long as you resurrect my family, I will pay any price!"


    Li Yaoxiang was silent, leaving Sasuke on a cold note for a while.


    Seeing that Sasuke was dying by himself, Li Yaoxiang just left a sentence: "Stay calm. I will naturallymand you if necessary. Also, remember to stay here for a while before returning to Konoha. Don''t forget, you''re ''injured'' now and need to recover."


    After that, no matter how Sasuke shouted, Li Yaoxiang didn''t respond to him.


    ...


    In the courtyard of the Shimura n.


    There was less than an hour left before the high-level meeting held by Shimura Danzo and others.


    At this moment, Shimura Danzo was looking in the mirror, looking at his own appearance today. It was especially important to him today, and he had been looking forward to it for so long.


    After confirming, again and again, there is no problem. He looked at his arm wrapped in bandages and his right eye. Although the process is a bit tedious and many people have also been sacrificed. But all this is worth it!


    As long as this day has passed, Konoha will return to glory under his leadership!


    He breathed deeply.


    Shimura Danzo walked out of his courtyard with confidence and walked towards Hokage Residence.


    ..


    Along the way.


    When manymoners saw him passing by, they all expressed panic and stopped to say hello. Putting it in the past, he will definitely not look at these people more, but this time is different.


    He will soon be a Hokage.


    These people will also change from ''other vigers'' to ''his vigers'', and the more they look, the more pleasing to the eye.


    Shimura Danzo reluctantly said "um", and gave a response. In his view, it will not be possible to hide in the dark like before, and it''s time for Root to see the light again.


    As Shimura Danzo walked, he looked at everything around him and inadvertently swept to the location of the Great n. He had already begun to think about how to deal with these ''unstable factors'' in the future and make thempletely obey his orders.


    Unconsciously, he had arrived at the Hokage Residence.


    "Lord Danzo."


    "Lord Danzo."


    Every time he walked a distance, every Anbu ninja he met would honor him with ''Lord Danzo''.


    In the past, he would only think about how to deal with these guys. However, today, he changed his mind and started to think about how to integrate them into his root and train them into ''qualified'' ninja.


    ...


    Shimura Danzo arrived at the Conference Hall.


    All the core personnel in the vige have been waiting here for a long time. Among them are Tsunade, Jiraiya, various Great n Leaders, high-level key figures, Mitokado Homura, Utatane Koharu, etc.


    Before he opened the door, he heard someone asking: "Elder Yan, what is so important to call everyone toe today? You know, there was a war in the vige just yesterday, and there are many things waiting for us to deal with."


    More than one person was asked.


    It''s just that the Two Great Elders, Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu, have maintained the same attitude from the beginning to the end.


    Utatane Koharu: "Don''t worry, don''t worry, when Danzo arrives, we will naturally announce."


    Mitokado Homura: "Yeah, wait a minute."


    The door being opened sounded and suddenly attracted everyone''s attention.


    Shimura Danzo ignored everyone''s gaze, and he went to the position next to the two old friends and sat down. Due to the death of Sarutobi Hiruzen, the throne was still vacant.


    Jiraiya also put his arms on his shoulders and said with some dissatisfaction: "Okay, now that everyone is here, can you talk about it?"


    The three nced at each other, nodded.


    Immediately, Mitokado Homura stood up, walked to the position of the throne, and announced to everyone: "The reason why everyone is called today is mainly to announce something. Hiruzen has just died, and it may not be appropriate to talk about this now. However, I agree with Utatane Koharu Elder that the location of Hokage should not be vacant for too long, which is harmful to the development of the entire vige. So, we unanimously rmend Shimura Danzo as Fifth-Hokage!"

 Chapter 140: You, Danzo, want to eat shit!

    Chapter 140: You, Danzo, want to eat shit!


    Mitokado Homura just barely finished and there was a lot of discussion in the conference hall suddenly.


    The most violent reaction was when Jiraiya was interrupted to do the work for Sarutobi Hiruzen. Jiraiya, one of the Sannin, certainly has his seat, and he was sitting on the opposite of three elders.


    Jiraiya mmed the desk, stood up, nced at three people, and rejected: "Impossible! Old fogey has appointed Tsunade as Fifth-Hokage. That''s why I brought Tsunade back! I will not agree with your arrangement!"


    With Jiraiya as the start, other people have begun to express their opinions.


    "Elder Yan, isn''t your decision too sudden?"


    "Yeah, it''s too short of breath. Third-Kage is just dead, and there is still a meddlesome feeling waiting for us to deal with. In my opinion... It''s not toote to discuss other candidates for Fifth-Kage after the matter is over."


    Can someone who can be a n Leader be ipetent? Of course, they couldn''t believe the previous nonsense of Shimura Danzo and others so easily.


    Seeing that the situation is not beneficial to the n, or even harmful, of course, they have expressed opposing views.


    As for the other key members, although they don''t have much say, their expressions are all not supportive of the elders'' decision.


    Seeing everyone''s reaction, Shimura Danzo''s original good mood was entirely destroyed by those present. His eyes gradually became indifferent.


    ''The vige is really ruined by Hiruzen''s losers!''


    ''Each and every one ignores the development of the vige for the benefit of their own n!''


    ''Damn it!''


    He fiercely red at Utatane Koharu, beckoning Utatane Koharu to start to speak that it was not yet the time for him to appear as a ''rmended person''.


    Utatane Koharu knew what he wanted. Soon he stood up: "Quiet--"


    After the discussion stopped, Utatane Koharu continued: "Elder Yan and I made this decision after careful consideration."


    Speaking of which, Utatane Koharu looked towards one of the n Leaders who justmented: "As you said, there are still many things waiting for us to deal with. But do you think it is just a matter in the vige to deal with? Don''t we need to guard Konoha against the other great Ninja Viges that are watching us like a tiger watching his prey?"


    " So, at this time, we need to choose a new Hokage to control the overall situation! No matter the qualifications, experience, or contribution to the vige, and with Danzo''s root, it''s obvious to everyone. So Elder Yan and I agreed that Danzo is undoubtedly the best candidate for Fifth-Kage! As for Tsunade..."


    Utatane Koharu''s eyes turned to Jiraiya: "Us, Elder''s Group, have never heard Hiruzen mention this, and of course, it is impossible to do. Of course, Elder Yan and I haven''t thought of Tsunade as Fifth-Kage. But... Tsunade has little experience in management. It''s okay during the quiet period. But in current''s chaotic situation, it is more appropriate for Danzo, who has rich experience, to serve as the Fifth-Kage."


    Hearing it here, the hot-tempered Tsunade was also unable to bear it. She directly retorted: "Enough! The vige matters are not your Elder''s Group''s deal! Today, no matter what, I would not approve of Shimura Danzo as the fifth Hokage!"


    Of course, Shimura Danzo can''t stand it.


    Seeing these juniors vetoing him again and again and again, Shimura Danzo was also unable to bear to start talking, using Tsunade of this ''candidate'': "Huh! What''s wrong!? Do you want to be the Fifth-Kage yourself? Are you qualified? How long have you been away from the vige? How long have you been in trouble? How much do you know about the size of the vige? Also, a Hokage who is afraid of blood! Is it not a joke to tell people?!"


    With that said, Shimura Danzo decisively cut blood in his palm and then sprinkled it on the tabletop and in front of Tsunade.


    Just as expected, after seeing the blood in front of her, Tsunade showed some lost self-control.


    Everyone seeing this performance all showed ugly expressions.


    Compared to Shimura Danzo, most people still prefer to make Tsunade a Hokage. But Tsunade''s performance made everyone really unable to survive.


    Jiraiya, out of breath, shoved the blood away and yelled in front of Tsunade: "Shimura Danzo! Don''t go too far! So what if Tsunade is afraid of blood? The old man, you elders, and you yourself! How many times have you done anything for the vige in the past few years?! With my help on the side, Tsunade as a Hokage, there is no need for her to go out to fight! Blood is not a problem at all!"


    At this time, Tsunade patted Jiraiya''s shoulder: "Enough."


    Immediately, she barely supported her body and pushed Jiraiya away to face the blood!


    What Elder''s Group and Shimura Danzo did today seemed to really irritate her. Initially regarded as an inappropriate Hokage, she did not care too much. But now she was holding back her difort, and she wanted to break her wrist with Shimura Danzo!


    Seeing Tsunade in such a gesture, the rest of everyone all expressed joyful expressions.


    Although it has not beenpletely ovee, at least there are signs of recovery, isn''t it?


    Seeing the other two old men in a bad situation, they nced at each other. Mitokado Homura immediately came forward and said: "Okay, okay. Anyway, choosing Hokage is our Elder Group''s business. Tsunade, don''t force yourself too much. This is not a good thing for you, for the vige. Now we officially announce..."


    Before Mitokado Homura had finished speaking, Tsunade gritted his teeth and scolded: "Enough-! I don''t care what you elders said! If you have to choose Hokage today, let everyone present make a statement! If more than half of the people agree with Shimura Danzo as the Fifth Hokage, then I have nothing to say!"


    Not waiting for two elders'' consents or objections, Jiraiya said directly: "Speak out your position now! Shimura Danzo bes the Fifth-Kage. Who agrees?! Who opposes it?!"


    Tsunade said viciously, "I object!"


    Yamanaka Inoichi, who had little understanding of the four elders and various incidents, became the first Noble n Leader to dere his position: "I object."


    Thus, one after another, they all made a statement.


    The words "I object" sounded one after another in the Conference Hall.


    The three elders''plexion bes uglier.


    Shimura Danzo even looked at each and every one who rejected him with a vicious look.


    Except for a few who belonged to the Shimura Danzo''s party and said ''I agree'', almost everyone on the scene said the words ''I object''.


    Tsunade''s expression gradually became more interesting.


    Jiraiya said cooperatively: "The one who chooses Tsunade as Fifth-Kage, who is in favor and who is against!"


    Nothing unexpected.


    Everyone passed this decision in front of several of the elders.


    And it''s the kind of ''direct appointment''.


    Before leaving, Tsunade didn''t forget to tease: "As you said, Konoha needs me, the newly appointed Hokage, to control the overall situation. So, I''ll go ahead. Moreover, the current Konoha needs a lot of manpower! In the name of Fifth-Hokage, I officially announced that from now on, everyone in Konoha will be dispatched by me! Without my order, no one can act without arbitrarily!"


    The people in the meeting room gathered and left in a tacit understanding.


    Looking at the backs of everyone leaving, Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu''s faces were as ugly as eating shit.


    Shimura Danzo was so angry that he couldn''t speak, and his whole body was trembling...

 Chapter 141: Vicious Plan, Sasuke Returns

    Chapter 141: Vicious n, Sasuke Returns


    In the empty Conference Hall.


    Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu nced at each other. Both exuded a sad expression. They were not worried about their subordinate forces. After so many years in power in Konoha, no matter how bad it was, there were still subordinates loyal to them.


    No matter how much Tsunade deprived them, it was impossible to deprive them of the past. --Just like the roots are in Danzo''s hands. Even if the roots are disbanded, the ninjas who originally belonged to the roots will still take orders from Shimura Danzo.


    The only thing they worry about is power...


    Without power, it''s very meddlesome and very inconvenient.


    Bad name, bad words


    Thinking of it, the two were unable to bear to sigh. They both nced at Shimura Danzo and saw that he still looked like he was sted. They didn''t know what to say.


    They shook their head, turned around, and left.


    At this time, they lostpletely. Unexpectedly, the three of them in power have all joined together, and they still have no chance against these young people.


    Konoha''s future is really worrying.


    Seeing the two losers also leave his sight, Shimura Danzo''s anger became more intense.


    If the forces under these two wastes were also managed correctly, it might not be the case today!


    ...


    After a while, Shimura Danzo also left Hokage Residence.


    He walked back towards the root base, and his face was darker than the bottom of the pot.


    Seeing him, the ordinary people didn''t dare to say hello to him anymore. However, Shimura Danzo didn''t pay attention to the group of ants and kept thinking about the countermeasures in his mind.


    Since being Hokage was not sessful, that meant his influence was not enough to bnce the demon fox Naruto... Unable to bnce the demon fox, it means that his life is in danger at any time!


    In case he has three longs and two shorts, who can Konoha rely on?!


    In this case, there are only three methods left before him.


    One: draw the demon fox and let him be his own help. But the first way is to stop thinking about it. He can''t forget the indifferent eyes when the demon fox looked at him yesterday and forget the hatred that the demon fox radiated towards him back then.


    Two: use thest resort to control Hinata, threaten the demon fox, and let the demon fox take orders from him.


    This method is the simplest and most direct.


    Only...


    For this method to work, the prerequisite is that Hinata can cooperate with him. Otherwise, no matter how much he cares about her, he will not be able to control Hinata''s every move all the time.


    As long as Hinata chooses tomit suicide, he will be wiped out.


    Three: in case the first two methods do not work...


    ''Heh.''


    Since the demon fox has always been hostile to him, and Tsunade, these little children, are trying to exploit their power and influence, then they have to push the demon fox to the opposite side of the vige!


    As long as the vige is in line with his intention, they will treat Naruto as an enemy.


    The vige will have to deal with the demon fox!


    Thinking about it, Shimura Danzo''s face couldn''t help but show a sinister smile. At the same time, he returned to the Root base unconsciously.


    ....


    Root Base


    Shimura Danzo said to a Root ninja: "Let Saie and see me!"


    Root ninja: "Yes!"


    Not much time...


    Sai, who was low-key for a long time, came to Shimura Danzo and respectfully said: "Lord Danzo."


    Shimura Danzo: "How is the situation? You have been with her for so long. Have you noticed anything unusual? How is her rtionship with Naruto?"


    Sai told Shimura Danzo without omission and in detail; the "disharmony" version, that is.


    This version is undoubtedly the worst news for Shimura Danzo. However, he has exactly the same choice as Sarutobi Hiruzen. And since he has already made a decision, he will not hesitate anymore.


    A new mission was given to Sai now.


    ...


    A few dayster.


    In the past few days, the news that Tsunade will take over the fifth generation of Hokage has spread throughout Konoha. As soon as this news came out, it finally stabilized the emotions of many people.


    And Tsunade also started her busy life.


    Naruto, after hearing the news, did not at all care too much. --Anyway, he waspletely absorbed now, and he was not in Konoha. He just wanted to wait for Sasuke toe back and return Uchiha Itachi''s relics to him and then take Hinata away.


    However, what makes Naruto feel embarrassed most is that he and Hinata obviously miss each other But he insisted on pretending to be a stranger.


    It was so ufortable.


    Therefore, in this period of time, Naruto did not hesitate to buy a three-color Dango to relieve thirst and relieve the ''worries'' in his heart.


    Just as Naruto was intoxicated, enjoying the three-color balls in the hot world, a great piece of good news finally reached his ears.


    Sasuke is back!


    He didn''t say anything further and hurried to find Sasuke.


    When Sasuke saw Naruto, he was dumbfounded. Naruto''s eyes turned out to have Sharingan?!


    To avoid Sasuke from misunderstanding himself, Naruto quickly exined: "Sasuke, don''t get me wrong. My eyes are the Sharingan of Uchiha Shisui, and it was entrusted to me by your big brother. And your big brother''s eyes are here."


    While Naruto was exining, Naruto took out the scroll that stored Uchiha Itachi Sharingan and handed it to Sasuke. And he told Sasuke Uchiha Itachi''sst words, expectations, purpose, and the truth of the year.


    Although Sasuke has heard these things from Li Yaoxiang, hearing it again from Naruto''s mouth again made his moodplicated.


    He took the scroll in a daze and stared at the scroll for a long time. He was speechless. He didn''t know what to say. However, he finally chose to ept thest legacy of Uchiha Itachi.


    He opened the scroll and called out the ''item'' inside.


    There is no bloody picture as imagined.


    Sasuke just absorbed the eyes-power of Uchiha Itachi''s eyes, and then his original Mangekyo Sharingan was sessfully promoted to the eternal Mangekyo Sharingan.


    Feeling the new powerful force, Sasuke was not happy or worried.


    Even with this powerful force, he cannot resurrect his family...


    Leaving aside the unhappy topic, the two people started chatting about the recent situation of both parties, how well they are going, where Sasuke is healing, etc.


    Sasuke recounted what was taught by Li Yaoxiang to Naruto.


    After that, it was Naruto who told him about Hinata.


    Naruto: "I will leave Honoha with Hinata. What about you? What are your ns? Do you want to leave with us?"


    Sasuke smiled slightly: "Then, congrattions. I will not leave with you."


    They were chatting and chatting.


    On the farewell asion, Naruto took Sasuke''s shoulders: "Remember, we will always be good friends. If you have anything you need, just ask."


    Sasuke nodded: "Well, a good friend forever."


    ...


    Two dayster.


    Sasuke is not dead.


    The news of Sasuke''s return to Konoha, unharmed, of course, spread throughout Konoha.


    Upon receiving the news, Hinata was very happy, and she and Naruto quickly reached out through the signal. And in the evening, when the moon was dark, and the wind was high, they discussed the n of ''walking far and flying high''.


    It was agreed that the night two dayster, that is, this night, they would sneak away together.


    From morning to noon, in this period of time, to avoid suspicion, Hinata conducted various activities as usual. But just after she handed over a D-Rank Mission, Sai came to her.


    "Hinata, Danzo-sama asked me to take you to see him."


    The face of ''cold'' Hinata froze.


    Sai: "What''s wrong? Is there a problem?"


    Hinata reacted indifferently and said: "It''s okay, let''s go."

 Chapter 142: Showing Fox Tail

    Chapter 142: Showing Fox Tail


    Hinata pretended to be indifferent. She followed Sai and arrived at Root base.


    Shimura Danzo waved his hand, motioning Sai to leave.


    After a while, Shimura Danzo greeted Hinata, "Hyuga Hinata, do you know why I called you today?"


    Hinata was expressionless: "Lord Danzo, Hinata does not know."


    Seeing the attitude of Hinata, Shimura Danzo''s eyes narrowed. --Looking at the girl in front of him, he seemed to be examining whether Hinata was acting or whether her character had really changed so thoroughly.


    After a long inspection, no weak spot was found.


    Shimura Danzo smiled secretly.


    True or false is not important anymore.


    Shimura Danzo pretended to be kind and said: "In fact, it''s okay. I valued you long before Third-Hokage epted you as a disciple... Now that the Third-Kage is gone, I hope you stay with me and do things for me."


    In order not to reveal the weak spot, Hinata replied without the slightest hesitation: "Lord Danzo, it is an honor for Hinata to be able to work for you and Konoha. If you have anything in the future, please don''t hesitate to give orders to Lord Danzo."


    Shimura Danzoughed: "Hahahaha! Very good. Then you will be a member of Root! I will let you take you to familiarize yourself with the environment of Root first, and then you will go with me at night."


    Hinata: "Yes!"


    ...


    At the same time, Naruto''s house.


    Today''s Naruto is particrly excited. He was full of energy whenever he thought he could leave with Hinata tonight and have a new life. He unconsciously did everything a little bit faster.


    Today, he has already packed up his baggage.


    As long as the timees, he can leave at any time.


    Seeing that it was still too early, Naruto went to the streets first to see if any daily necessities were missing and needed to be restocked.


    As a result, he bought too much.


    He was afraid that Hinata would be tired and that Hinata would be hungry. So, he prepared a lot of cold food and hot food.


    But even so, when he passed the three-color dango, he still couldn''t bear to stop.


    ''After leaving, maybe we won''t be able to eat it in the future, so let''s buy some more.''


    As a result, he was screwing arge bag of things, and the extra bag of 3 color dango had to be put in his pocket.


    Of course, apart from wanting tomemorate, he and Hinata both like to eat.


    That''s it.


    The shopping is over.


    Naruto returned home with a heart full of rewards.


    The next thing he did was look forward to the scenery outside the window, from sunrise to sunset. From sunset to evening, seeing the closer the agreed time between himself and Hinata, Naruto became more nervous...


    ..


    As time goes, it was finally the appointment time.


    They both agreed to meet in Naruto''s ce.


    Naruto kept spinning back and forth. The more he waits, the worse he feels.


    ''It''s already sote... Why hasn''t Hinatae yet?''


    ''Was Hinata discovered by her father when he visited?''


    Naruto was anxious about Hinata, but at this moment, there was a knock on the door.


    knock!


    Knock!


    Knock!


    Naruto''s face was overjoyed, and he rushed up to open the door, but the root ninja wearing a mask was greeted. His joy look disappeared in an instant.


    Naruto: "Who are you? Is there something here?"


    Root ninja: "Uzumaki Naruto, Lord Danzo, please."


    Naruto: "I have nothing to talk to him. If you have anything to say, just say it now."


    Root ninja: "I''m just in charge of speaking, but Lord Danzo said that if you don''t go, you may regret it for a lifetime."


    A murderous aura suddenly broke out!


    Even this experienced Root Ninja was forced back several steps by this murderous aura.


    However, this is the ''qualified'' ninja cultivated by Shimura Danzo. He was not at all afraid and, therefore, only flinched. He continued to stand there, ready to lead Naruto.


    Naruto''s eyes narrowed slightly. He has always had a bad sense of these masked ninjas. If he wanted to cause a big ruckus at this time, maybe he would have already kicked the root ninja out on the spot.


    In order to get rid of this Root Ninja as soon as possible, Naruto finally chose to go and see.


    Taking back the murderous aura, Naruto indifferently said: "You wait for me first."


    Naruto left a note for Hinata on the desktop and then followed the root Root Ninja away.


    ....


    After a while.


    Root ninja took Naruto and came to an open space not far from Hokage Residence.


    Soon after arriving, Naruto saw Shimura Danzo and a very familiar back. It''s impossible to mistake that back. --Of course, it is Hinata!


    His heart was beating hard all of a sudden.


    His breathing was also bing a little quicker.


    However, to avoid people discovering his rtionship with Hinata, he tried to suppress his emotions as much as possible so that he did not look abnormal.


    Root ninja: "Lord Danzo, I have brought Uzumaki Naruto."


    Shimura Danzo and Hinata turned around at the same time.


    Shimura Danzo smiled and greeted him: "Naruto, I''m so d you came out to meet me."


    Naruto: "Just say it. I have no time to chat with you here.


    Both Naruto and Hinata were very tacit understanding and did not show abnormalities.


    Hearing this answer, Shimura Danzo knew that the first ''cooperating'' method would definitely not work. Then only the second and third methods remain.


    However, if you want to implement these two methods, he first needs to cooperate with Hinata fully.


    This time, he took Hinata out and met with Naruto together to test the second method of "threat" and whether it has implemented probability.


    Shimura Danzo: "Very good! Quick people, quick words! Then let''s cut to the chase. I hope you can stand on my side and do things for me, even support me bing the Fifth-Hokage without reservation!"


    Naruto sneered: "Oh, why should I help you? It doesn''t matter to me who''s the Hokage. Just don''t bother me."


    "Oh? Really?" Shimura Danzo looked towards Naruto yfully. "That''s a pity. Hinata just joined Root. Without your support, Root is understaffed, and I can only send Hinata to the frontline to fight."


    The threat was obvious.


    Both Hinata and Naruto clearly felt the meaning of Shimura Danzo''s words.


    Shimura Danzo looked towards Hinata behind him: "Hinata, for Konoha, are you okay with that?"


    Hinata: "Lord Danzo, I have no opinion."


    Shimura Danzo: "Well, I''ll work hard for you after that. In this period of time, you will stay in the Root first, don''t leave for the time being. For your father, I will naturally send someone to notify him."


    Naruto, at this time, was already flushed with anger. He was not like Hinata, who had been pretending for several years. However, after hearing these words, he still acted as if nothing had happened.


    Of course, Shimura Danzo also noticed Naruto''s movements, but he just sneaked secretly and continued to tease: "Well, Naruto. Since you don''t want to support me, then I won''t force you. Today''s conversation ends..."


    Before Shimura Danzo finished speaking.


    Pu chi...


    A handful of kunai goes straight from behind to Shimura Danzo''s heart!

 Chapter 143: Dont be sad, live well

    Chapter 143: Don''t be sad, live well


    The instant that Kunai stabbed, Hinata''s tense emotions were finally relieved.


    She was breathing heavily while looking at the kunai in her own hands.


    ''It''s a sess! I did it!''


    That''s right!


    For this sneak attack, Hinata has been preparing for several years.


    Hinata has been acting in front of people all these years to wait for the perfect opportunity! Make a fatal blow to the guy who used her to threaten Naruto!


    The original target of this n would be Sarutobi Hiruzen.


    After all, it was Sarutobi Hiruzen who wanted to keep her beside him.


    And the reason why Hinata hasn''t taken any action, apart from being reluctant to give up her family and to train her sister, is that she can''t make up her mind whether to do it or not.


    After all, everything is just her guess.


    For Sarutobi Hiruzen, she had not yet taken action.


    At that time, she was still hesitating. She thought that after Sarutobi Hiruzen''s death, this n would also die out, so she didn''t need to think about it anymore.


    But she doesn''t want to. Some people want to keep Naruto by their side. And this time, in front of Naruto and her, they have acted unabashedly!


    This time, she finally stopped hesitating!


    She didn''t want to be a burden to Naruto, and she didn''t want to drag down Naruto.


    So, she has to deal with people who use her!


    p-


    Looking at Shimura Danzo covering his heart in front of her and kneeling down, the heart that had been hanging was finally put down.


    Hinata didn''t care about Shimura Danzo on the ground, and when she looked up towards Naruto again, she had regained that brilliant smile, as if telling Naruto, ''I will not be your burden'', ''Look? The people who threaten you have been solved by me''.


    Hinata opened her feet and rushed to hug Naruto.


    She also looked at Naruto''s expression, changing from anger to joy.


    ''But... weird.''


    ''Why is Naruto suddenly showing an expression of panic?''


    ''pu chi'' sounded.


    Hinata only felt a pain in her heart. She was stunned, looking at the sword passing through her heart.


    The sword was quickly drawn out.


    Hinata was finally unable to bear the injury, and arge amount of blood flowed from his mouth.


    "No, no, no! Hinata !" Naruto rushed towards her.


    Shimura Danzo immediately ordered: "Retreat!"


    "Xiu!" "Xiu!" "Xiu!" "Xiu!"


    As soon as the retreat sounded, dozens of silhouettes suddenly appeared in the jungle, all escorting Shimura Danzo to retreat together.


    Only Naruto came to Hinata and helped Hinata, who was about to fall.


    Hinata can''t understand what happened just now.


    ''What happened?''


    ''Didn''t I already kill Shimura Danzo?''


    ''Why is Shimura Danzo not dead yet?''


    Hinata, recovered in confusion, had found herself wrapped in Naruto and saw Naruto crying in tears.


    "No! No! No! Hinata, you can''t die, you''ll be fine! Kurama! Quickly help me! Quickly help me heal Hinata!"


    Without Naruto''s ''Izanagi'', he can only frantically throw Chakra of Kyuubi into Hinata''s body. But he heard Kyuubi say in his mind: "Useless, Naruto. Old man''s energy can only heal the wounds outside her, and you will only make her more painful."


    "No, no, no! You''re lying to me! Hinata will be fine! Hinata! I will take you to the treatment! I will take you to the treatment!"


    But as soon as he thought of getting up, Hinata clenched Naruto''s hand and shook her head.


    Naruto stopped, and looked at Hinata, and cried wildly: "What''s wrong, Hinata? There will be nothing wrong with you. Just bear it for a while, alright? I will take you for treatment now, okay?"


    Hinata smiled. She raised her blood-stained hand and gently touched Naruto''s cheek.


    Hinata: "Don''t move, let me take a good look at you..."


    Naruto suddenly nodded, and the tears were still flowing: "Why, why are you so stupid? Why did you go to Root? Wouldn''t it be fine if you didn''t go to Root?"


    Hinata smiled softly: "I wasn''t thinking... killing him, no one will threaten you again? Cough, cough, cough!" Hinata coughed up a lot of blood again.


    Naruto: "Stop talking. Let me take you back for treatment, okay?"


    Hinata shook her head: "Are there still 3 color balls?"


    "Yes, there is, there is!" Naruto quickly took out the three-color balls bought this morning from his pocket, pulled one of them out, and left the rest on the ground.


    He fed it to Hinata, and Hinata took a bite.


    Her mouth was full of blood, and even a tiny bit of balls could not be swallowed, but she still smiled and said, "It''s delicious..."


    Naruto: "I will buy it for you every day."


    Hinata: "Naruto... promise me..."


    At this time, Naruto had already felt that Hinata''s hand stroking his cheek was getting weaker. He quickly held Hinata''s hand and continued to stick it on his face. He nodded and said: "Well, anything. Anything you say, I promise you everything."


    Hinata: "Don''t be sad... don''t me yourself... live well..."


    ...The faint heartbeat stopped abruptly.


    She didn''t want Naruto to feel sad. So, until thest moment in her life, she was still smiling, seeming to walk very peacefully.


    "No! Hinata, don''t die! No! No! You can''t die! Didn''t you say that we''re leaving together? Didn''t you say that we''re going to see the world outside? Don''t die, Hinata, don''t leave me. Why? Why is this happening? Why does it be like this...?"


    Naruto hugged Hinata in his arms, holding tighter and tighter, crying heartbreakingly...


    Who knows how long it has been.


    Naruto kept holding Hinata''s corpse like this.


    Until the tears were dried up, he still muttered to himself there: "Hinata, you will not die... We said to leave together. We said to live a new life together..."


    ...


    As time goes by,


    Naruto also had to ept the fact that Hinata died. He hugged Hinata''s corpse and walked step by step toward Hyuga n''s Residence.


    Along the way, the ninja who was guarding Konoha secretly saw Naruto''s appearance and the corpse in Naruto''s arms. They were all terrified and reported the news back to their own forces.


    With a slow pace, Naruto finally came to the Hyuga n Residence.


    The two guards at the door just saw the scene before them, and they all showed incredulous looks.


    When they reacted, they immediately reported the news to Hyuuga Hiashi.


    Not much time.


    Hyuga Hiashi rushed out with a nervous expression.


    He saw Naruto.


    And then, he saw his daughter in Naruto''s arms.


    Hyuga Hiashi immediately rushed over and pushed Naruto away.


    "Hinata! Hinata!"


    After confirming that Hinata was no longer alive, Hyuga Hiashi suddenly turned his head and stared fiercely at Naruto, "Why?! Why is this happening?! What the hell happened?!"

 Chapter 144: Darkened Hurricane, Hidden Plot

    Chapter 144: Darkened Hurricane, Hidden Plot


    Naruto was about to start talking, but Hyuga Hiashi didn''t give Naruto this opportunity. He rushed forward and threw Naruto to the ground with a punch. The speed is not fast, but Naruto didn''t dodge it at all.


    He looked at Naruto who was covering his cheek, Hyuga Hiashi yelled out: "It''s you! It''s you! If it weren''t for you, Hinata wouldn''t die! Why did youe back?! Why are you still pestering Hinata?! If only you haven''te back and pester Hinata, Hinata wouldn''t be in trouble! She wouldn''t have been dead!"


    Hyuga Hiashi went back to hug Hinata''s corpse, and did not look at Naruto, shouting angrily: "Get out of here! We Hyuga n do not wee you! I don''t want to see you again in the future!"


    He was still holding Hinata and then, he told the guard at the door. As long as Naruto dares to step into the Residence, attack on the spot without reporting.


    Naruto couldn''t feel the pain on his cheeks.


    Looking at Hinata''s body stupidly slowly disappearing from his field of vision.


    The two guards came to discourage: "Although we know that the murderer of Eldest Young Lady is definitely not you, but please leave, don''t embarrass us."


    Naruto reacted. He stood up slowly and walked back.


    ...


    Walking, just like walking corpse,pletely a soulless body, murmured while walking: "The killer who killed Hinata... the murderer who killed Hinata..."


    While walking, Naruto''s expression slowly changed from panic to chastity.


    His fists were clenched.


    His eyes opened Mangekyo Sharingan subconsciously!


    "Shimura Danzo! It''s you! You killed Hinata! You are the killer of Hinata!"


    [Darkening degree]


    67%...


    70%...


    74%...


    78%...


    83%...


    With a loud roar, he dashed away in the direction he sensed!


    ...


    At the same time, time returned to the moment when Shimura Danzo had just retreated.


    Under the escort of Root Ninja, Shimura Danzo immediately came to Hokage Residence.


    Since the entire operation was in his n, the meeting ce was also set near the Hokage Residence, so he quickly arrived here and came to the Hokage room.


    Seeing himing, Tsunade, Shizune, and Jiraiya who were still busy, looked at him.


    Tsunade: "What are you doing here?"


    Shizune and Jiraiya both stared at the old fellow in front of her, and the expression was slightly bad.


    Shimura Danzo said with a slight smile: "What''s the matter? The old man can''te over to find you? Forget it, I won''t whistle around with you. I was just assassinated. It was rming but not dangerous, and I also killed her. Now I''m here report to you."


    Tsunade frowned, with a vague premonition. With her understanding of this old guy, how could hee to report this kind of thing to her?


    "Who assassinated you?"


    Shimura Danzo has a calm tone: "Hyuga Hinata."


    Tsunade and Shizune heard the name but nothing. After all, they don''t understand the meaning behind this name.


    But the expression of Jiraiya on the side changes a lot!


    After returning to Konoha for a while, how could he not understand the rtionship between Naruto, Hinata, and Sasuke? He once asked Sarutobi Hiruzen, why Naruto left the vige in the first ce. Sarutobi Hiruzen didn''t tell the truth about everything. But at least he gave a rough idea.


    Jiraiya learned the rtionship between the three people.


    Tsunade saw Jiraiya''s appearance, and the unpleasant feeling became stronger. Looking towards Jiraiya asked, "What''s wrong?"


    Jiraiya''splexion was very ugly. However, he reiterated the story of what Sarutobi Hiruzen had told him.


    After listening to Tsunade, her expression changed a lot!


    A sh appeared in front of Shimura Danzo.


    She grabbed his clothes and scolded: "OLD MAN! What do you mean?! Do you really think I dare not move you?!"


    Shimura Danzo ignored Tsunade''s rudeness and yed with the taste: "What''s wrong? I didn''t lie to you. Hyuga Hinata assassinated me, and I killed her instead. Is this also wrong? As a Hokage, do you still want to be right? Or do you want to hand me over to the demon fox to lower the anger of the demon fox?"


    Tsunade: "Do you think I won''t dare?"


    Shimura Danzo: "Oh, as a Hokage, you will be afraid of that demon fox? Is that the future Konoha, as long as the demon fox wants to kill, you will push anyone to hell? If this is the case, all the power of life and death is in the hands of the demon fox. Then you can hand me out, I don''t mind taking a step first. Anyway, Konoha will lose in your hands sooner orter."


    That''s right!


    This is Shimura Danzo''s Third Step n!


    The prerequisite for the second step of the n is that Hinata must fully cooperate before it can bepleted, otherwise Shimura Danzo will not be able to control Hinata all the time.


    After all, it is very difficult for a child of Hinata''s age to be brainwashed again. It is almost impossible to seed. And if in the middle, Hinata chooses to go on a hunger strike ormit suicide, etc., the n will also fail.


    The result of the probe just now was obvious.


    Hinata''s thoughts were more extreme than hunger strikes and suicide. She even wanted to personally murder him.


    In other words, over the years, the so-called personalities of this little girl in front of others have changed drastically, and the so-called rtionship with that demon fox has be worse and worse. This is all an illusion!


    It''s all about deceiving everyone.


    It can be seen that this child has already deliberately nned to assassinate the people who use her.


    If the loser of Hiruzen was not dead, it is estimated that the target of this child would be Hiruzen.


    And now that Hiruzen was dead, Danzo became the goal of this child.


    That being the case, Shimura Danzo certainly no longer needs to be polite to Hinata, taking advantage of this opportunity to implement the Third Step n on the spot! That is to push the demon fox''s position to the opposite of the vige, so that the vige has to stand on the same line with his intention!


    The method is also very simple, which is just like the current situation.


    Under the pretext of ''prevent ughter''.


    Showdown directly with Tsunade.


    As long as he has reason first, he is not afraid that Tsunade, who is Hokage, will not defend him, otherwise the vige will be finished like he said.


    The vige will panic.


    Fearing that the demon fox is murderous, and that the next target he wants to kill might be them.


    But the vige did nothing, and continued to indulge the demon fox.


    Of course, if the calction is wrong, then Shimura Danzo can leave the vige and build a new Konoha outside. As long as he is there, the spirit of Konoha will still be there!


    The facts are just like Shimura Danzo said and conjectured.


    No need to talk about Shimura Danzo.


    Tsunade, who has been in office for a while, also understands this truth.


    If it were in the past, maybe Naruto didn''t need to do it, but Tsunade herself couldn''t help but ughter the old guy in front of her.


    But she knew she couldn''t!


    Shimura Danzo is the elder of Konoha.


    If there is no good reason, even if you are Hokage, you can''t move them!


    Otherwise, it will chill everyone''s heart.


    -When people get old, the vige will abandon you?-


    After that, who else is willing to work for the vige?


    Tsunade, out of breath, threw Shimura Danzo to the ground, making a loud noise. Shimura Danzo stood up from the ground and shook the dust on his body, not caring.


    Still smiling and looking at the three people in front of him.


    Anyway, he''s not going to die.

 Chapter 145: One wave has not settled, another wave has risen

    Chapter 145: One wave has not settled, another wave has risen


    Tsunade fiercely red at Shimura Danzo and left a cruel remark: "I will liquidate with you afterwards!"


    Yes.


    For Tsunade, the most important thing now is not how to liquidate Shimura Danzo but how to appease Naruto and prevent Naruto from berserk again.


    You must know that the vige was destroyed by Uchiha Itachi not long ago, and many people were killed and injured. The vitality of the vige has not yet fully recovered.


    If Naruto goes berserk and destroys again at this time, Tsunade couldn''t even imagine how serious the consequences were.


    Konoha Vige was attacked by three people in two days. What would other Ninja Viges think of them?


    Will they see Konoha''s weakness this time, thus triggering a new war?


    What do customers think of Konoha? Will the trust in Konoha be greatly reduced, and will the mission not be delegated to Konoha in the future?


    Moreover, this is just outside the vige.


    What about inside the vige?


    The vige is destroyed from time to time, and the shadows on the vigers are not so easy to eliminate. How would anyone tell the vigers to please continue living in Konoha with peace of mind?


    Won''t they mor to leave Konoha?


    All of the above hidden dangers are things to be considered by the newly appointed Hokage, Tsunade. She didn''t care about it before, and she didn''t think so much, but when she really became Hokage, she realized it was not easy.


    Because of this, she would not let Naruto dispose of Shimura Danzo under the public ce with numerous people.


    Because this will also have a serious follow-up impact on the vige.


    Not long ago, Shimura Danzo, with the support of Two Great Elders, publicly killed Sarutobi Hiruzen, who ''harmed'' Konoha, eliminating a disaster for Konoha.


    If it were not for him, maybe Naruto at that time would have had a war with the vige.


    It can be said that this is another contribution to the vige and for everyone.


    Nowadays, Shimura Danzo killed Hinata only in reason and fair. What reason did Hinata use to dispose of Shimura Danzo?


    And just because of Naruto''s strength, whoever he wants to kill, Tsunade will let him?


    How can she be a Hokage?


    In the future, Konoha, will Naruto have all the final say?


    Damn it!


    If it weren''t for her identity, she wanted to tell Naruto directly, if you go assassinate Shimura Danzo, I''ll turn a blind eye.


    There is no time to think about it.


    Tsunade returned to her desk.


    Tsunade immediately summoned two Anbu ninjas.


    Anbu ninja: "Lord-Hokage."


    Tsunade instructed toward one of Anbu ninjas: "You, now take someone to evacuate the residents near here!"


    Then she said to another: "You, go to Uchiha Sasuke and bring him over to see me."


    After the two Anbu ninjas leave, Tsunade asked Jiraiya again: "If Uzumaki Naruto really breaks out, are you confident to stop him?"


    Jiraiya hesitated slightly: "I... will try my best."


    Although Jiraiya did not personally witness the battle between Uchiha Itachi and Naruto, he can tell through the ounts of other poptions.


    A Jinchuriki who can control the real body of Kyuubi.


    A Jinchuriki through Akatsuki Sealing Jutsu.


    A Jinchuriki with Mangekyo Sharingan.


    Truthfully, even he is not sure that he canpletely stabilize the current Naruto.


    Jiraiya''s expression was without confidence. Tsunade certainly saw it in her eyes. She could not bear to curse and mmed the desk. She then continued instructed: "Shizune! Immediately go tomand all the ninjas above Jonin in the vige!"


    Shizune: "Yes!"


    After Shizune leaves in a hurry.


    The first to arrive at the Hokage room was not Sasuke, but the two elders, Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu.


    Just arrived here.


    The two elders asked Tsunade.


    Mitokado Homura: "Tsunade, what the hell is going on? I heard that Hyuga Hinata is dead. Is this true?"


    Utatane Koharu: "Yes, Tsunade, you''re not joking, right? What''s going on?"


    Tsunade responded fiercely at this disgusting fellow who was confounded with Shimura Danzo: "You ask him yourself!"


    The two elders followed Tsunade''s gaze and looked towards Shimura Danzo.


    Shimura Danzo, in the right and self-confident said: "Hyuga Hinata assassinated me, and then I killed her."


    The two elders took a breath, walked to Shimura Danzo''s ce at random, and began tomunicate softly.


    Mitokado Homura: "Hey! What''s the matter?! Don''t you know the rtionship between Hinata and the demon fox?! Aren''t you afraid that the demon fox will break out again?!"


    Utatane Koharu: "Hmph, you didn''t exin it to us this time, don''t me us for clearing up your rtionship!"


    Shimura Danzo was disdainful after hearing this, and an idea emerged involuntarily, and the two losers were really old. Greedy of life and fear of death, hesitant to act.


    Shimura Danzo: "Tsunade is already weakening our power. If we continue this way, how can we still get the demon fox with the power of the three of us?! Instead of waiting here for the demon fox to avenge us, how about, we take the lead? Isn''t it good now? As long as we three people insist on standing on the same front, they cannot move us. With that demon fox''s character, he would definitely hate the vige together. When the timees, the vige will have to deal with the demon fox together with us. Even without power, they can only follow our will obediently!"


    After hearing the news, they silently nodded and then no longer spoke.


    Tsunade red at the three old fellows who were whispering, and they wanted to strangle them immediately. But at this moment, a new guest finally came to the Hokage room.


    Sasuke nced calmly at everyone in the room and then asked Tsunade: "Fifth-Kage, you are looking for me. What''s the matter?"


    Tsunade looked slightly apologetic and said, "Sasuke, in here, your rtionship with Naruto is the closest. I call you toe over, hoping that you can persuade Naruto so that he''s not too impulsive."


    Sasuke wondered: "To persuade Naruto? Why should I persuade Naruto? What happened?"


    Tsunade hesitated for a moment and then said, "Hyuga Hinata is dead..."


    Bang!


    Sasuke''s imposing-manner burst out!


    Even Mangekyo Sharingan opens involuntarily!


    "What the hell is going on?! Why did Hinata die?!"


    The atmosphere in the Hokage room suddenly became very dignified!


    They have overlooked one thing.


    They paid their full attention to Naruto, which caused them to ignore it and have a good rtionship with Hinata, not only Naruto but also Sasuke!


    Seeing Sasuke''s eyes, everyone in the room, his face gradually became difficult to look at.


    Damn it!


    It''s really a wave, a wave!


    Tsunade: "Sasuke, please calm down and listen to me first."


    Immediately, Tsunade told the cause of Hinata''s death in aprehensive manner and stated the problem. Hinata assassinated the vige high level first, and now she has been counter-killed, and we cannot me the victim.


    Sasuke looked coldly towards the initiator Shimura Danzo.


    Silence for a long time.


    No one knew what he was thinking.


    Who knows how long it has been.


    Sasuke''s Mangekyo Sharingan slowly retreated to Three-Tomoe Sharingan and then from Three-Tomoe Sharingan to ordinary ck eyes.


    Imposing-manner also dissipated.


    Everyone was relieved.


    But without waiting for them to slow down, another angry roar came from outside the Hokage Residence: "Shimura Danzo! Get out here!"

 Chapter 146: Naruto loses control and reveals the truth

    Chapter 146: Naruto loses control and reveals the truth


    The roar sounded


    The residents who were still being evacuated suddenly felt their heartbeat. All have quickened their pace and left this ce of right and wrong.


    All the Jonin who have been hiding all-around all shed cold sweat. Even if they have experienced variousrge and small battles, they couldn''t help but feel a little nervous. There was a crisis of extermination in the vige in the past three days.


    No one is better off.


    Those colleagues who were hit by Uchiha Itachi are still lying in the hospital today! How do you keep calm? If this continues, when will it end?


    Naruto certainly sensed them, but Naruto didn''t care about it.


    ''kill! Kill! Kill!''


    ''Must kill this murderer who killed Hinata!''


    ''Revenge for Hinata!''


    Tsunade and her group did not dare to let Naruto wait.


    Headed by Tsunade, many Anbu ninjas followed her and soon walked out of the Hokage Residence.


    At the instant of an instant, Naruto didn''t give face and scolded: "I''m not looking for you! Get Shimura Danzo over here! Otherwise, I would pull him out even if I have to smash the Hokage Residence today!"


    This is the case.


    Not only Tsunade.


    Even the ninja hiding around has be increasingly bad for Naruto''s senses.


    This kind of unscrupulous behavior, treating everyone as nothing, really makes people feel insecure about Naruto. In particr, Naruto''s strength is so powerful. He is simply a ticking bomb now.


    Jiraiya didn''t care about this. He just said as an elder, with concern: "Naruto, slow down. Calm down first..."


    But he didn''t wait for Jiraiya to finish. Naruto''s emotions became more excited.


    "Calm down? Hahahaha! Did you tell me to calm down? Hinata is dead now. It''s Hinata is dead--! How can you calm me down!"


    While shouting, Naruto''s expression became more and more fierce.


    The powerful and evil Chakra of Kyuubi kept pouring out. Seeing this, everyone could not help but hold their breath and did not dare to take a breath.


    This time it was Tsunade''s long-distance cry to persuade: "Naruto, Hinata''s death, I know you are ufortable, but you can''t solve the problem like this. I promise you that when I investigate the matter clearly, I will give you a satisfactory exnation!"


    "Exnation?! What else can be investigated?! It was Shimura Danzo who killed Hinata! This is what I saw! Don''t waste time with me! Step aside! I will kill him today!"


    At this moment, Shimura Danzo finally came out from the crowd: "Hyuga Hinata tried to assassinate me and was killed by me. What''s wrong with it? Do I have to resist and must be killed by her? Ah! Uzumaki Naruto, you are really a lot of face! You really have the final say on Konoha? Kill whoever you want to kill?"


    Just as expected, after hearing Shimura Danzo tell the cause and effect, the faces of everyone present became even more ugly. The unscrupulous Uzumaki Naruto has almost endangered their lives.


    The goal of this time, although not them, there is no guarantee who will be next time.


    There is a sense of precariousness.


    But the anger flooded his entire forehead. No matter what, his orange translucent chakra coat immediately condensed into a beast w, stretched out, and smashed the ce where Shimura Danzo was standing!


    Bang! Boom!


    A loud noise.


    A giant pit in the shape of a beast w was photographed on the ground.


    Shimura Danzo, who was still standing in the crowd, and the group of Anbu ninja who stood with him, dispersed immediately and escaped the wave of Naruto''s attacks.


    When Tsunade saw this, her face was white.


    Naruto even ignored her presence and attacked directly!


    He really doesn''t take her, the new Hokage, in his eyes!


    "Enough, Naruto! You''re in a bad mood, I can understand it! I won''t mind your rudeness this time! But if you go on fooling around, don''t me me for your hands!" Tsunade scolded angrily.


    "''Rude''? You said I was fooling?! Hahahaha! Very good! Then I will show you nonsense!"


    More evil Chakra gushed on the spot!


    The tail of Chakra''s coat also increased from one tail to two tails and three tails. Until the fourth tail was about to condense, there was suddenly a voice in the crowd to stop him.


    Sasuke calmly said: "Enough, Naruto. Stop it."


    "Sasuke?" Naruto froze immediately.


    Then his face became crazy again, even Sasuke said something, and ignored the past, pointing to Shimura Danzo and saying: "Sasuke! It''s him! It''s him! It''s him who killed Hinata. Come with me to kill him!"


    Originally thought that Sasuke heard himself saying that after the murderer was Shimura Danzo, he would be like him, eager to avenge Hinata.


    But Naruto didn''t expect that Sasuke not only was unexpectedly calm but also said his unexpected words: "Come on, Naruto, what''s the matter? When Fifth-Kage finds out the truth, she will naturally make a fair decision."


    Naruto, after hearing it, this time was dumbfounded.


    ''How could Sasuke be so calm?''


    ''The dead one is Hinata!''


    ''The Hinata who yed with us since childhood!''


    ''How can Sasuke be so calm?!''


    Subsequently, Naruto''s expression changed from panic to anger, and he was angry at Sasuke, who had be so indifferent and ruthless. Angry at Sasuke seems to have no reaction to Hinata''s death!


    Naruto shouted: "The truth?! Find out what the truth is?! The truth is that this old fellow has done all kinds of hurtful things but is still living to the present! I should have killed him long ago! Kill these old fellows! If I had killed him early in the morning, Hinata would not have died!"


    Sasuke: "No matter what he did, as long as there is definite evidence, I believe that the Fifth-Kage will give us justice."


    After hearing this, Narutoughed madly and burst into tears of sadness: "Hahahaha! Are you being serious?! Do you really think that what he did is just what he did?! You look at his arm, you look at his right eye! The bread in it is all the eyes of your Uchiha n''s eyes! You really thought it was an ordinary injury?!"


    Everyone present was as shocked as thunder from a clear sky!


    Until now, everyone thought that the injury suffered by Shimura Danzo was the injury he suffered from fighting for Konoha in his early years.


    But didn''t expect from Naruto''s mouth that they would learn such amazing news today!


    At this time, everyone''s eyes are all transferred from Naruto and Sasuke to Shimura Danzo, to his bandages that they had never seen him take off!

 Chapter 147: Domineering Sasuke, conquer the audience

    Chapter 147: Domineering Sasuke, conquer the audience


    Feeling the slightly unkind look of everyone.


    Shimura Danzo nced at everyone.


    Tsunade, Jiraiya and other core officials looked towards him with questioning eyes, as if holding him ountable on the spot. Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu, two old close friends, both intentionally and unintentionally kept a certain distance from him, and seemed to have to separate themselves from him.


    Even Sasuke, who was originally indifferent, now unabashedly released killing-intent to him, giving people a feeling like ''if he doesn''t give a statement today, don''t think about leaving so easily''.


    Shimura Danzo''s original arrogant appearance suddenly became ugly.


    His eyes finally fell on Naruto.


    Naruto looked at him with a mocking and ridiculous expression, as if preparing to look at his unlucky appearance.


    The scene in front of him not only did not make Shimura Danzo feel regretful, but made him firmer in his choice and his actions. It was correct!


    He didn''t understand that year, why Naruto suddenly hated him.


    The original reason is here!


    It turns out that Naruto already knew his secret!


    It''s no wonder that no matter how much he wins, there is no effect.


    Thinking of getting here.


    Shimura Danzo made a decision right now, and pulled off all the bandages on his body! The disgusting face, the disgusting arm, and the disgusting eyeballs that drilled on the arm, suddenly appeared in front of everyone!


    Everyone present took a breath!


    It turned out to be true!


    What Naruto said was true!


    It''s just that before waiting for their brains to make up the truth, Shimura Danzo first exined: "Naruto is right! The bandage is indeed covering Sharingan! But have you ever thought about it again who in this world would be willing to make himself looks like a monster! Everything in me is an order from Hiruzen! He wanted to destroy the Uchiha n that threatened his status, but he didn''t want the vige to lose the power of Uchiha n, so he let me do this cruel human experiment! For Konoha, I have to follow! In order to give everyone a safe life, I had to ept this inhuman experiment! The result bes what you see now!"


    This time, it wasn''t Naruto that was going crazy.


    Jiraiya took the lead and used: "Enough! Old fogey is dead. You will not let him go until now, and will you push all the sins to a dead person?!"


    Shimura Danzo said with a sneer: "That''s the fact! I don''t need to lie to you! Mitokado Homura Elder and Utatane Koharu can testify for me! Prove what I said is not false!"


    Shimura Danzo''s eyes turned to the two elders not far away.


    It''s embarrassing to see two elders.


    There was really no reaction for a while.


    Okay, you Shimura Danzo, without prior notice, came to add a new script. Damn it! We didn''t even know that your face under the bandage is so disgusting!


    Said to be the instructions of Sarutobi Hiruzen- the two elders would not believe it even if they were killed.


    After getting along well for several decades, they don''t know each other''s character yet?!


    No wonder Shimura Danzo at that time, just rushed to deal with the corpse of Uchiha n, the original reason is right here.


    It''s just that now three elders are on the same boat.


    The three''s interests are tied in a line.


    Really hit the duck on the shelf.


    The two elders had toe out to help testify.


    Mitokado Homura stood for his amazed expression and two awkward coughs, then stood up and exined cheekily: "Cough cough cough! It is true. At that time, Hiruzen did start a human experiment project to study First-Kage''s cells, so it gave birth to Yamato Wood-Style ninja. After Uchiha n was destroyed, Hiruzen was worried that Root''s strength was not enough, so he forced Danzo to ept this human experiment. In order to protect Konoha, we had to agree to this proposal."


    Another pot, without the slightest hesitation, flung onto Sarutobi Hiruzen''s back.


    The wit of Mitokado Homura, even Utatane Koharu, who was standing aside, had to be dumbfounded, looked towards the eyes of the old close friend beside him, there was a kind of ''you bull beer!'' It''s a feeling of admiration.


    Hearing Mitokado Homura''s remarks, everyone''s eyes certainly fell on Yamato.


    Because of the Yamato evidence, the people who didn''t believe in their three elders couldn''t help but start to waver.


    Utatane Koharu saw her and recovered her.


    Immediately added: "Yeah, hey~. Although we have strongly opposed this kind of experiment that vites humanity. But we''re helpless. Hiruzen is Hokage. The final decision is always on him, and we can only cooperate."


    When I saw these old fellows sang there without shame.


    The angriest is not Naruto. Instead, it was Sasuke who had been suppressing his emotions!


    Sharingan


    Sharingan on this bastard''s arm were all living beings before that!


    It''s all the lives of the n members!


    Damn it!


    If it weren''t for Naruto''s big brother, he wouldn''t havee back to Konoha or wait for his instructions or work for him, maybe Sasuke had already destroyed Konoha several times!


    That''s right.


    This is the main reason why Sasuke has been patient until now.


    Compared to revenge, he now pays more attention to resurrecting his family.


    Although he doesn''t know why Li Yaoxiang asked him toe back to Konoha. But in order to resurrect his family, Sasuke had to suppress his emotions and continue to live in this very disgusting vige.


    Only.


    There is a limit to patience.


    After seeing Shimura Danzo''s arm covered with the arms of the n members, Sasuke was unable to bear and there was an explosive impulse!


    Mangekyo Sharingan is automatically turned on when he is full of anger!


    Sasuke stared at Shimura Danzo, coldly said coldly: "I don''t care about the truth, but these Sharingan are not what you can have!"


    Everyone is holding their breath, and the atmosphere dares not breathe!


    Damn it!


    Another pair of Mangekyo Sharingan!


    Naruto''s pair of Mangekyo Sharingan are already choking.


    They don''t understand, whether they can resist it.


    Now add Sasuke?!


    How do you y?!


    Why not lie on the ground and wait for death?!


    Of course, Tsunade can see the expressions of everyone. If there is only Naruto, perhaps she can defend her dignity as Hokage. But with the addition of Sasuke, the situation is different.


    If they all retreat, it is estimated that the people present or the vigers who have been evacuated will not make irresponsible remarks after knowing the situation here, but will praise her for making a wise decision.


    Think of it here.


    Tsunade immediately made a hand gesture secretly.


    Signaled to everyone to slowly retreat.


    Let this group of dangerous guys solve it by themselves...

 Chapter 148: Turn for the better, the wind changes drastically

    Chapter 148: Turn for the better, the wind changes drastically


    Of course, Shimura Danzo was also watching everyone''s actions.


    Seeing that everyone was leaving him, hisplexion grew darker.


    He was not surprised that Tsunade would make such a choice.


    Not surprisingly, the two old close friends have been slowly retreating and have no ns to help him.


    Secretly spontaneously in his heart, Shimura Danzo made a decision now! He pulled out a sword, Shua, and he cut off his arm that had been transnted with Sharingan on the spot.


    That''s right!


    Now, he had no choice but to give it a try!


    He knew very well.


    Without the help of the vige, if he resisted, it would have been his final struggle at most.


    He certainly cannot escape the destiny killed by Sasuke and Naruto.


    Forget it! Naruto knows my secret!


    So he has to bet! Bet in that a glimmer of survival!


    Shimura Danzo clutched the wound on his arm, which seemed very painful, and said to Sasuke: "You are right, the vige should not treat your n like this. I should not keep the Sharingan of Uchiha n. I couldn''t make up my mind before. I''m sorry for you. I will return it to you now."


    Shimura Danzo''s cruelty to him also shocked everyone present. Unexpectedly, he gave such an exnation right now.


    It''s just that these "monkey ys" are extremely funny in front of Sasuke! He hates Konoha! What he wants to destroy is the whole Konoha! Even if Shimura Danzo cut off his limbs, Sasuke''s eyelids would not blink.


    Because he has no feelings for this group of people.


    If it weren''t for Li Yaoxiang.....


    Sasuke simply can''t bear it anymore.


    He can''t wait to destroy everyone in Konoha thousands of times!


    Sasuke stared at all this coldly, at the arm that dropped to the ground, at Shimura Danzo.


    Mangekyo Sharingan condenses andunches ''Amaterasu''!


    ck mes!


    The arm that fell on the ground was burned to ashes!


    Immediately after that, Sasuke''s eyes fell on Shimura Danzo again, coldly saying: "And your right eye."


    Shimura Danzo also not saying anything further, regardless of pain, regardless of injury, he pulled his right eye out on the spot, and then threw his right eye into the ck me that hadn''t extinguished.


    Danzo stared at the remaining eyeball slowly melts in the ck me and disappears.


    He then looked towards Sasuke again, waiting for his departure.


    Fortunately, after doing all this, Sasuke''s indifferent Mangekyo Sharingan finally retreated to the state of ordinary eye pupils. Seeing this situation, Shimura Danzo couldn''t help but breathe a sigh of relief.


    He won the bet!


    Sasuke won''t pursue it anymore.


    But what about Naruto?


    Feeling Sasuke''s killing-intent receded, Naruto felt anger.


    He quickly walked to Sasuke''s side, pushed Sasuke away, and scolded: "You''re all right with this?! You only care about Sharingan?! Hinata''s death; you don''t care at all?!"


    Sasuke was pushed back several steps by Naruto.


    But his expression was still so cold.


    No waves.


    He just looked at Naruto with no words.


    He doesn''t want to kill everyone present, but can he do it? He didn''t even understand Li Yaoxiang''s purpose in asking him toe back to Konoha. He was very afraid that Li Yaoxiang''s good deeds would be ruined, so he did not dare to act at will in everything here.


    Let Shimura Danzo cut off his arm and wipe out Sharingan of all the n members on the spot.


    This is already his limit.


    In order to resurrect his family, he dared not take any more deviant actions.


    Seeing Sasuke''s face, Naruto sighed of anger and turned around to walk in the direction of Shimura Danzo.


    Seeing this, Shimura Danzo immediately shouted, "Uzumaki Naruto, what are you doing?! Sasuke asked me to give up Sharingan for Uchiha n, I have nothing to do with it. But what are you qualified to do with me! I was assassinated by Hinata first, the fault is not mine! You don''t have the right to do anything to me without permission!"


    Fearing that he couldn''t stop Naruto, Shimura Danzo shouted again into the distance: "Tsunade! As Fifth-Hokage, you really want to watch Uzumaki Naruto unscrupulously confronts me, the elder of Konoha, in the vige like this?"


    This scream.


    Immediately awakened Tsunade who was still observing in the distance.


    But at this time, she was hesitant.


    She doesn''t know if she wants to stop it.


    After all, she already retreated, to make a move now... it seems that there''s no side you can please. Let the old fellow die in an ident by Naruto. Or maybe it''s better not?


    The two old close friends, Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu were also failures.


    Shimura Danzo had no ns to speak out to them for help.


    Never expected from these two losers.


    Seeing Naruto step by step walking towards him, Shimura Danzo became more eager.


    But at this moment, just when he was thinking about whether to try to turn around and run away, someone he never thought about, but made a noise for him. That man was just Uchiha Sasuke who seemed to have great hostility towards him!


    This made him nervous, and finally he could take a breath.


    Sasuke: "Naruto, stop."


    Naruto, who was already angry about Sasuke''s attitude, heard Sasuke stop him. But it was Sasuke, which made him even more annoyed!


    Naruto turned suddenly.


    When he rushed up, he grabbed Sasuke''s cor and asked angrily: "You don''t even want to avenge Hinata! You even want to stop me?!! What''s wrong with you?! What?! When I want revenge, you''ll take action against me?!"


    Sasuke''s indifferent expression finally changed.


    The look seemsplicated and hesitant.


    Naruto, who was waiting for his reply, wondered why Sasuke had this expression.


    Followed by.


    Sasuke gritted his teeth and said something that made everyone present feel dumbfounded!


    "Naruto, you can actually resurrect Hinata..."


    Not only was it shocked to the crowd around, even Naruto was scared and stupid on the spot after hearing this sentence. His eyes widened and he looked at Sasuke in a stunned manner, mistakenly thinking that he had heard it wrong.


    When he reacted, Naruto grabbed Sasuke''s cor and tightened it even more.


    His tone shivered: "You... you... you mean... really?"


    Sasuke nodded.


    Naruto seeing this, breathes deeply.


    The frequency of the heartbeat can''t help but rise.


    He didn''t think about it at all that perhaps Sasuke would deceive him in this matter. He said in a hurry: "Hurry, tell me! What to do to revive Hinata!"


    Seeing the look of Naruto.


    Sasuke was now difficult.


    The death of Hinata- Sasuke can be seen so indifferent, arge part of the reason is because he knows that Naruto''s brother can help people resurrect.


    Although he behaved very indifferently, but when he saw Naruto''s almost copsed appearance, he also felt ufortable.


    Ever since then,


    He couldn''t bear it, so he couldn''t help but speak out ''resurrection''.


    But after saying it, Sasuke regretted it again.


    Based on Naruto''s performance alone, it can be seen that his big brother has never revealed it to Naruto.


    In this case, how dare he divulge any enquiries from Naruto''s big brother.


    At this time, he did not know how to exin to Naruto...

 Chapter 149: The manipulator intervenes, Left and right development

    Chapter 149: The maniptor intervenes, Left and right development


    "What''s wrong?" Naruto asked Sasuke in a doubt.


    ''What''s wrong?''


    Hah!


    I also want to ask that!


    Why don''t you ask your own big brother?!


    Sasuke was really sullen. He couldn''t figure out why Naruto''s big brother wanted him to stop Naruto from killing Shimura Danzo at this time.


    But what he didn''t know was that Li Yaoxiang did this, in addition to being selfish and not wanting Shimura Danzo to die so easily, there is a more important reason, which is the next darkening n. Shimura Danzo is an important yer, so Shimura Danzo cannot die!


    No, to be exact: Shimura Danzo cannot die now!


    Sasuke did not answer Naruto and quickly talked in his mind: "Why? Why stop us? Why stop your younger brother? Don''t you know that this guy killed Hinata in front of him? You know what Hinata is to Naruto. Why let her die in vain?"


    Li Yaoxiang said with a sneer: "Oh, it''s really beautiful. You were so calm before, wasn''t it because you knew that I had the ability to be resurrected, so you look so indifferent about Hinata''s death? What happened? Seeing the eyes of your n members were used by this disgusting guy, and you can''t help it?"


    Li Yaoxiang''s sarcasm, made Sasuke dumbstruck and unable to reply.


    The facts are indeed as Li Yaoxiang said.


    Sasuke''s original anger in Hokage Residence calmed down so quickly because he thought of Naruto''s big brother and Li Yaoxiang''s ability to resurrect people.


    Seeing him don''t talk back.


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t n to waste time on him either, and went straight to the topic: "Tell Naruto that there is a Ninjutsu in this world who can revive Hinata."


    Sasuke: "Why don''t you tell him yourself?"


    As soon as this remark came out, the soul from Sasuke''s head to the shoulder was suddenly pulled out of the body by Li Yaoxiang!


    The masked Li Yaoxiang stared Sasuke up close: "Remember! I''ll let you do it, don''t ask me why! If you still have so many problems, I don''t mind letting you go down to reunite with Uchiha n now."


    Over time.


    As Sasuke strength grows.


    Sasuke felt that he could do it again.


    As a result, his respect for Li Yaoxiang has diminished.


    Because the pressure Li Yaoxiang put on him this time was far more serious than thest time he saw Li Yaoxiang!


    He didn''t expect in front of Li Yaoxiang, it was still not worth mentioning!


    What Sasuke didn''t know was that his feelings were actually correct, because today''s Li Yaoxiang not only possesses the ability of the ''Shinigami''.


    Since Naruto''s darkening level is 60%, the umted darkening points are long enough for him to exchange for the ''Rinnegan''! Not to mention that it is more than 80% now, his strength has already exceeded Sasuke by more than one rank.


    Sasuke, in his soul state, felt the pressure and couldn''t help swallowing, showing a look of horror. He nodded subconsciously.


    Li Yaoxiang then pushed his soul back into the flesh.


    Sasuke, who just recovered, was breathing heavily, and was cold and sweating.


    Seeing something wrong, Naruto asked again: "What''s wrong?"


    Sasuke''s face was pale, shaking one''s head, and said: "No... nothing."


    Naruto: "Then... why don''t you let me kill him?"


    After a series of vents, Naruto''s emotions calmed down a lot. Shimura Danzo was now in his eyes, no doubt was already dead. He was not in a hurry to start.


    When he was about to say something, Li Yaoxiang''s voice reminded again: "Don''t let Naruto know my rtionship with you. Of course, if you also tried to leak it, then you have to see if you can talk faster, or if I move faster..."


    But Sasuke was helpless.


    Whether it is because of Li Yaoxiang''s strength, or for resurrecting his family, Li Yaoxiang''s instructions are not something he can refuse.


    Sasuke had to change his mouth: "Can''t kill him yet. Killing him now; the vige will have a serious impact."


    Naruto''s original calm mood was also angered by Sasuke''s words again: "Vige? Now you tell me vige? I don''t care about the vige! He killed Hinata, I should have killed him!"


    Sasuke had long expected Naruto''s reaction.


    He pped Naruto''s shoulder and continued, "No, it doesn''t matter to you whether he is dead or not. I just want to tell you that the most important thing now is that you should find a way to resurrect Hinata!"


    Not only was Naruto shocked, but even the crowd around him. Tsunade in the crowd, was shocked by this remark, and their hearts was unable to bear!


    I have been a ninja for so many years.


    Have experienced so many life and death.


    Who else is present, that doesn''t want a certain people to be resurrected?


    As for Tsunade, it goes without saying that her first thought was the younger brother Nawaki, and then her lover Kato Dan.


    TL note: Dan Kato. Nawaki.


    Had Jiraiya not held her arm, maybe she would rush up, grabbed Sasuke''s cor, and asked how.


    After she recovered, she remembered her current identity and status.


    This calmed down her excitement.


    She gave instructions again so that anyone don''t act blindly without thinking.


    Of course, their little actions can''t be hidden from Naruto and Sasuke today. It''s just that neither of them cares too much about it, and their minds fall only on each other.


    Naruto mistakenly thought he was wrong, a little uncertain, and said with a trembling tone: "You... you... you mean... really?"


    Sasuke nodded.


    Naruto sees this, breathes deeply.


    The frequency of the heartbeat can''t help but rise.


    He didn''t think about it at all, and Sasuke would deceive himself in this matter, and said in a hurry: "Hurry up and tell me!"


    Seeing Naruto''s urgent expression now, Sasuke''s face wasplex, and he said, "I don''t know how to resurrect Hinata, but I know that there is a way to resurrect dead people in this world."


    Naruto, who was originally full of hope, felt as if he was depressed by the abyss.


    Jiraiya looked at the right moment and rushed to the side of the two to solve the problem: "Sasuke, don''t talk nonsense. Resurrecting people, this is a defying heaven changing fate. Even if it is really possible, you will definitely have to pay a serious price."


    Jiraiya, who was fooled by Sarutobi Hiruzen, also had a bad impression of the resurrection. Just like Orochimaru''s original use of ''Impure World Reincarnation'', but it was just a fake resurrection.


    Naruto woke up and shouted at Jiraiya: "I don''t care! I will resurrect Hinata no matter what price I pay!" Then he turned his head and quivered to Sasuke: "Really... really... can she be resurrected?"

 Chapter 150: Narutos oath to kill Danzo

    Chapter 150: Naruto''s oath to kill Danzo


    Sasuke nodded again.


    When Naruto saw this, tears came out of the bear to tears, wiped the tears, and said: "That''s good, that''s good, as long as she can be resurrected, then it''s OK. No matter what method, no matter what the cost is, I must revive Hinata, I will definitely revive Hinata."


    Naruto''s snot and tears.


    It is really distressing.


    When Jiraiya came back this time, he mainly wanted to get an apprentice. Naruto was also the goal he is looking for because of Minato, but also he firmly believes that Naruto will be the hero of the vige, so he sealed the Kyuubi on the baby Naruto, so he will unlock the Kyuubi Seal''s key entrusted to him this master.


    Unfortunately.


    What made him didn''t expect was that the periode he left, so many things happened in the vige.


    Naruto would suffer this treatment.


    Jiraiya patted Naruto''s shoulder: "Naruto, actually this world..."


    Jiraiya originally wanted to say, "In fact there is no such thing as resurrection in this world", but before he finished talking, Tsunade shed several times in a row, and appeared beside him, pinching the fat around his waist with one hand. Tsunade stared at him.


    Jiraiya suddenly distorted his facial features, so painful that even his toes stood upright involuntarily.


    It was so painful that he opened his eyes wide, closed his eyes, and turned his head, looking towards Tsunade puzzledly.


    In order not to continue to suffer, Jiraiya had to desperately nodded.


    Also at this time, Naruto just looked up: "What''s actually in this world?"


    Jiraiya breathes deeply, the facial expression changed instantly, endured the pain around the waist, smiled and said: "In fact there are nock of strange things in this world, I have traveled so many years, maybe I really know some people who knows method of resurrection."


    Naruto was overjoyed: "Really?"


    Naruto had just been overwhelmed with sadness.


    It can be said that when the soul is at its most empty, as long as there is ''good news'', he will almost always believe it firmly, treating all the news as thest straw and holding on tightly.


    It didn''t take much into consideration at all. Just like a person after a broken rtionship, it is easy to be taken advantage of by others.


    And the resurrection in Sasuke''s mouth is also this life-saving straw.


    As long as it is about the resurrection, Naruto will go after it without reason.


    Hedidn''t even think about what purpose Jiraiya had, or what pitfalls there were.


    "Of course! I am known as Toad Sage, but it is not a name for me! I knew a Great Toad Sage, lived for 1000 years, can predict the future, maybe he really knows resurrection."


    "Great Toad Sage? Great Toad Sage! Where is he? Where is he?! Take me to see him soon!" Naruto hurriedly.


    Jiraiya''s pretense mysteriously said: "Don''t worry... If you want to see the Great Toad Sage, you have to be my disciple. I also took your father there. How is it? Would you like to be my disciple?"


    Jiraiya was determined to ept Naruto as a disciple, and determined to teach Naruto for Minato.


    Unfortunately, his idea is destined to be impossible. There is more than 80% of darkening degree.


    However, this does not prevent Naruto from agreeing to be his disciple and be the Child of the Prophecy in the mouth of the Great Toad Sage, but it is not clear whether it is going towards the good or the bad.


    Naruto hurriedly said: "I will! I will! You will take me to see him soon!"


    Jiraiya: "Well,e with me."


    Seeing Naruto finallypromised, everyone on the scene could not help but breathe a sigh of relief.


    But when everyone thought that things would end there, Naruto followed Jiraiya''s pace, but suddenly stopped. This sudden move made everyone again hold their breath again, and the atmosphere dared not breathe.


    It really won''t end so easily.


    Naruto turned and said indifferently towards Sasuke: "You might not care about Hinata''s death, but I care. That old guy, I can''t let him go. Before resurrecting Hinata, I will definitely kill him first! When the timees, whether it''s you or vige, as long as they dare to stop me, they will be my enemies!" Naruto changed into a smiling face again and said to Jiraiya: "Teacher, let''s go."


    Seeing this, Jiraiya couldn''t help but sigh.


    But in the end, he chose to turn around and continue on the road, and secretly vowed to teach Naruto well!


    With Naruto''s silhouette gradually away.


    In addition, Sasuke seems to have no intention to do anything.


    Everyone was really relieved now.


    Tsunade, who is Hokage, also began to call people to clear up the mess, and arranged for people to appease the vigers.


    But just as Shimura Danzo was about to turn around, and as the people left, the frightening cold sound rang again! Sasuke sneered at the sneaky Shimura Danzo: "You think you can leave easily like this?"


    The actions of all the people on the scene could not help but stop all of a sudden.


    As if time became still.


    Shimura Danzo, who was yed with by the juniors again and again and again, finally couldn''t help being annoyed! His footsteps stopped, and immediately turned to Sasuke angrily shouted: "What else do you want?!" Then he turned his head to Tsunade and said angrily: "Tsunade! As Fifth-Hokage, do you really want to let these juniors fool around?"


    Then he looked around for a week, toward the surrounding ninja shouted: "As Konoha Ninjas, you really want to let go someone who attacked me, a Konoha elder, and ignored it?!"


    Tsunade''s face wasplex.


    This time she was really riding a tiger, and she couldn''t do it anymore.


    Tsunade persuaded to Sasuke: "Sasuke, why don''t you just leave it like this? Find out the truth on my behalf, I will definitely give you justice."


    Sasuke embraced his shoulders with both hands, said with a sneer: "Haha. Forget it? Forget how? Why are you happy now and want to leave with this disgusting thing?" Speaking of which, Sasuke''s words changed and stared fiercely at Shimura Danzo: "I already said, Uchiha n''s things are not what you can contaminate! If you don''t leave those things, I won''t leave you alone so easily!"


    Speaking of Uchiha n. Of course, it was Shimura Danzo''s arms and eyes.


    Everyone suddenly realized.


    At this time, even Tsunade became speechless. After all, this matter was unlike Hinata''s death. Even if she wanted to help, there was no excuse to help.

 Chapter 151: The Three Elders

    Chapter 151: The Three Elders


    Shimura Danzo was furious!


    He moved his eyes around and looked at the crowd.


    Everyone looked towards him dumbfounded, but no one came out to help!


    He knew. This matter can''t be good anymore.


    However, he still felt very unwilling in his heart! With no Sharingan valid currently...


    Anyway, when the corpses of the Uchiha n were converged, there were more than a dozen of them.


    He still has more inventory.


    But this arm with Senju Hashirama cells is different, let alone physical torture during the transnt process, the amount of thought and time spent over the years is the most painful thing for him!


    If he really wants him to give up the achievements over the years so easily, no matter how one say it, anyone would be unwilling!


    He didn''t give up, trying to justify: "Oh, didn''t you just stop Naruto from doing it to me? Don''t you fear that it will affect Konoha? Now that Naruto didn''t do it, and now you dare to do it? Not afraid of being bad impact for vige?"


    Shimura Danzo mistakenly thought that he had caught the loophole in Sasuke''s words.


    What he didn''t know was that what he said to Naruto just now was nothing but fart.


    It was only because Li Yaoxiang told him to stop it, so he took action to stop it.


    He didn''t take vige seriously at all.


    Of course, because of Li Yaoxiang, Sasuke is definitely not going to kill the old fellow who acts cocky in front of him, but this does not mean that Sasuke can do nothing about him!


    Sasuke teased: "Kill? I won''t kill you. But cutting off your 4 limbs shouldn''t be a big problem. Then you can continue to be a mascot in Konoha, right? Will you do it yourself, or should I do it for you? You can think about it. If I do it, then I can''t guarantee that my sword will be urate, and I might cut it several times more."


    The tone sounds yful.


    But Shimura Danzo can hear Sasuke''s viciousness.


    He knew very well in his heart that Sasuke''s remarks were definitely not a joke.


    Because he used to have this attitude when facing those imprisoned by him.


    He didn''t expect times changed. Now it is his turn to encounter such treatment.


    A nce at everyone once again.


    Still, no one stood up to speak for him.


    Shimura Danzo no longer hesitated!


    He gritted his teeth!


    Withdrawing a sword, he mmed into his arm!


    ''p''.


    The arm fell to the ground.


    Fresh blood poured out from the fracture.


    But for a moment, the fracture was closed strangely.


    Shimura Danzo stared at Sasuke fiercely and said, "So you are satisfied?! Can I go now?"


    While speaking, Shimura Danzo gasped.


    It was clear to anyone.


    Even with the recovery ability of Senju Hashirama cells, the injury to the entire arm can be broken, which is still very ufortable for him, and it is not recoverable in a quarter of an hour.


    Sasuke grinned.


    ''Mangekyo Sharingan Open!''


    ''Amaterasu!''


    Shimura Danzo''s disgusting broken arm that fell to the ground, suddenly ignited with ck mes! This prevents Shimura Danzo to take the broken arm back and sew it!


    ck mes ignited.


    And the scorching smell arrived to his nose.


    Shimura Danzo''s face became uglier.


    Looking at the broken arm little by little was burned to ashes, Shimura Danzo only felt the blood dripping from the heart, this time, all the efforts, have really been in vain.


    Shimura Danzo, who was bleeding, did not intend to talk nonsense with Sasuke.


    But as soon as he turned around, the annoying voice passed into his ears again.


    Sasuke''s taste: "What''s wrong? You''re going just like that?"


    Shimura Danzo turned around and stared at Sasuke: "What else do you want?!"


    Sasuke pointed to his right eye.


    What he wanted to express was obvious.


    It was Shimura Danzo''s right eye with Sharingan.


    The majesty of Shimura Danzo waspletely lost in front of all ninjas above Jonin Level. This time he didn''t talk nonsense anymore, not saying anything further, he just pulled out thest Sharingan on his body.


    Throw it onto the ck me that has not been extinguished.


    Finally, under the watch of everyone, he left angrily.


    Sasuke didn''t stop him this time.


    Looking at the back of his departure, Sasuke''s original expression soon returned to cold. Provoking Shimura Danzo as an enemy, did not make him feel too satisfied.


    In his heart, all the guys who participated in the ''Uchiha n Downfall'' event are damned!


    Letting the group of people in front of him walk around in front of him alive is making him suffer.


    The thought of living in the same vige as this group of people in the following days was sickening.


    However, in order to resurrect his family, no matter how ufortable he will persist.


    Shimura Danzo disappearedpletely in the field of view of everyone.


    Sasuke ignored everyone''s gaze, inserted his hands into his trouser pockets, and walked back to his residence, minding his own business. Even Tsunade, who is Hokage, felt very helpless.


    She secretlymented, Sarutobi Hiruzen-sensei, you really left a mess for me...


    ...


    After Shimura Danzo left.


    He did not return to Root base.


    Instead, he came to a room and met with Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu. It stands to reason that in the past, no one would disturb their gatherings, and no one would dare to bother.


    After they just sat down, there was a knock at the door.


    Without waiting for their response, the person directly opened the door, which is very rude.


    What made them even more irritated was that the person who came was not the confidant they arranged to guard outside, but an Anbu ninja they were not familiar with.


    Seeing this, the three elders could not help but frown. Their hearts were very dissatisfied.


    Mitokado Homura shouted: "Who are you? The guard outside the door? Who let you in?"


    The Anbu ninja said in disrespect: "Lord-Hokage has taken care of all your staff. This time Danzo''s Root did not go through Lord-Hokage''s will and acted without permission, almost causing a big disaster. So, Lord-Hokage needs to suspend all your positions and powers. We need to conduct an internal investigation on you."


    Utatane Koharu: "Nonsense! We are Hokage consultants, our duty is to supervise Hokage decisions, whether there is excessive use of power! Tsunade is a little baby! Why deprive us of power?! You really thought that when you became a Hokage, you can cover the sky with one hand?!"


    Anbu ninja''s tone was calm: "I''m sorry, I just came to deliver the message. The specific matters; I''m not quite clear. Also, Lord-Hokage said, in this period of time, it is best not to go around and don''t contact old subordinates, so as to not cause misunderstandings and conflicts.


    After Anbu ninja finished, he did not say goodbye either.


    He left there with a "Shoo".


    The three elders who left the gloomyplexion...

 Chapter 152: Neglected Person

    Chapter 152: Neglected Person


    Not only was he deprived of his power this time.


    Even the men and women under hismand were all supervised.


    Be aplete bachelormander.


    The situation is far worse than expected.


    Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu, who are nowhere to me, are angered by anger! Turning their heads, fiercely red at Shimura Danzo, pointing at him as a curse.


    Mitokado Homura: "Danzo! Look at what you did! What the hell kind of n was that?! Without any consultation with us in advance, you provoked the demon fox without permission. Is your head damaged by the door?"


    Utatane Koharu: "Are you happy now? Even the men who have followed for many years have been deprived by little baby Tsunade. How can you tell us what to do in the future?"


    In fact, the two elders are nothing more than an afterthought.


    If this time, the result is to develop towards the good, they certainly will not have anyints.


    But when things went bad, they certainly did not hesitate to put all their faults on Shimura Danzo. If I had known this kind of result earlier, maybe I would just abandon the rtionship with Shimura Danzo and would note out to testify with him.


    Shimura Danzo was calm.


    He sipped the tea while letting them me and scold.


    The scolding was so dry.


    Shimura Danzo just put down the teacup, and said in a in tone: "Are you done scolding? Is it my turn to speak?"


    The two elders looked dissatisfiedly at this old friend who had never regretted. Seeing his splendid appearance, they were even more annoyed in their hearts, but they did not intend to continue to denounce it.


    The elders finished the cup of tea on the table.


    Just look at this shameless old close friend, what is the exnation!


    Shimura Danzo nced at them contemptuously and continued: "You really think this situation is bad for us? You really thought that if I didn''t kill Hinata, the demon fox wouldn''t attack us? Are you too naive? Didn''t you see the reaction of the demon fox just now? Didn''t you see that demon fox''s attitude towards us? Even if Hinata is not dead today, the demon fox will deal with us sooner orter. With the influence on our hands, how can Konoha be enough to solve this hidden danger? Konoha will eventually only lose to little baby Tsunade! Under her leadership, Konoha will only have more hidden dangers and unstable factors will only increase! Instead of waiting until the future, instead of waiting the hidden dangers and unstable factors broke out at once and destroying Konoha, shouldn''t we solve these problems for Konoha now?"


    Mitokado Homura: "Hmph! The words are nice. Now that we have no subordinates, what else can we do?"


    Shimura Danzo believes: "There is nothing to do! As long as we do not make mistakes during this period of time, and we are not found by Tsunade, then she can''t deal with us! If the demon fox wanted to kill us, he would naturally be an enemy of Konoha. At that time, we don''t need to take action. For Konoha, Tsunade will naturally gather the power of the whole vige to deal with the demon fox! As for the past sins, we can unanimously shirk everything to Hiruzen, and Tsunade can''t do anything to us."


    Utatane Koharu and Mitokado Homura nced at each other.


    After listening to Shimura Danzo''s exnation, their inner anger subsided on the spot.


    But they do not want to admit-defeat, that they are still okay. They want to find fault, deliberately make things difficult.


    Utatane Koharu: "Hmph! That''s what you said. But these are all your calctions. If Tsunade, that little baby, really abandon us? What should we do? Are we sitting here waiting to die? We just watched Konoha lose in her hands?"


    Shimura Danzo is very calm: "Rest assured. Of course, the eggs won''t all be put in the same basket. You''ll find outter."


    The two elders suspiciously looked at Shimura Danzo.


    But they didn''t ask more.


    Just wait silently.


    After a while.


    An unexpected silhouette came in.


    It was Sai who came here after seeing the signal sent by Shimura Danzo!


    When the two elders saw Sai, they said in unison: "It''s you? You haven''t been taken care of by Tsunade?"


    As for Sai ''s identity, two elders know nothing. After all, they also sent people to contact Sasuke and Hinata, but they were eventually cut off by Sai. If they were not reconciled, they would certainly investigate.


    The reason why Sai is not being watched by Tsunade today is because of being on the surface. Sai has been detached from Root for many years. In addition, he has been following the rules in these years and is very low-key, so he sessfully walked out of Tsunade''s field of view.


    Saiughed at two elders.


    Then he turned his head towards Shimura Danzo: "Lord Danzo, do you have any instructions for calling me?"


    Shimura Danzo nodded: "Well, look for opportunities to go out of the vige as soon as possible, go to Hidden Sound Vige to find Orochimaru, and tell him, I will meet in the old ce and say I have something to find him."


    Sai with still his "official" smile, answered "yes", and left the room immediately.


    The two elders wasn''t surprised that Shimura Danzo kept in touch with the Missing-nin, Orochimaru. Instead, they became more curious about Shimura Danzo''s search for Orochimaru at such a sensitive moment.


    Mitokado Homura unable to bear asked: "What''s wrong with looking for Orochimaru, how can he help us?"


    Shimura Danzo did not answer this time.


    Justugh without saying a word.


    This look of undue beating made the other two elders feel angry.


    In the end, this small gathering broke up unhappily.


    The three elders who have no power went home.


    Fortunately, Tsunade was not so frantic enough to send someone to monitor them 24 hours a day, which was undoubtedly a blessing in misfortune for the elders.


    ...


    At the same time.


    An open space in Konoha Vige.


    It was a long distance from the scene of the incident. The reason why Ji Lai also brought Naruto to a ce so far and stopped, was all because he wanted to enlighten Naruto and induce Naruto in this long journey.


    Unfortunately, his mind is destined to be in vain.


    Every word he said, as long as it was not about the ''resurrection'', Naruto couldn''t even hear a word at all.


    Naruto was unable to bear, he asked Jiraiya if he had fooled him.


    Jiraiya willingly stopped this time and said, "Okay, here it is."


    Naruto: "Did you lie to me...?"


    Jiraiya: "Rest assured, of course I didn''t lie to you. At Mount Myboku, there is really a Great Toad Sage that has lived for 1000 years! However, if you want to go there, you must first sign a contract with Toad n and learn Summoning Jutsu."


    In fact, it is not impossible for Jiraiya to take Naruto directly.


    However, he wanted to take this opportunity to teach Naruto as much as possible during the time he was studying, so he deliberately dyed the time.


    Jiraiya spread the scroll on the ground.


    Jiraiya: "Print your hand seal and the contract isplete."

 Chapter 153: Different Encounter

    Chapter 153: Different Encounter


    Naruto lowered his head looked at the Namikaze Minato''s name with silent.


    This scene was a joy for Jiraiya.


    Reaction!


    A reaction!


    This proves that Naruto still cares about his father. Since Minato loves vige so much, as long as Minato''s Willpower inheritance is given to Naruto, there is still hope for him to correct Naruto.


    Unfortunately.


    Jiraiya''s idea is very good.


    It''s just that he guessed wrong Naruto''s inner thoughts.


    Seeing the name of Namikaze Minato appearing on the scroll, Naruto''s first reaction was not to miss him, but to me. me this ipetent father, leaving him with a bad childhood and giving him a bad life.


    If it weren''t for this ipetent father, who had ced the Kyuubi demon fox seal in his body, he won''t be targeted by people from an early age!


    People around him will also not be targeted!


    Why did you choose me?


    Why can''t you just choose yourself?


    I don''t want to be a hero! I just want to have a normal life!


    Seeing the name of father, Naruto involuntarily raised a nameless anger.


    But he quickly suppressed the anger.


    He didn''t even look at it anymore.


    It was just that, without saying anything, he wrote his name on it and pressed his handprint.


    The summoning contract is also officiallypleted.


    Putting the scroll back and handing it back to Jiraiya, Naruto said impatiently: "Is that fine? Can you teach me Summoning Jutsu now? How long will this Jutsu learn? How long will it take me to see what you say? That Great Toad Sage?"


    Jiraiya took the scroll and said slowly: "Not in a hurry, Naruto, to learn such things in a hurry and too anxious, sometimes not only will not seed, but will also have the opposite effect..."


    Jiraiya talked about a lot of life principles.


    Naruto, who was impatient, interrupted directly: "Enough, enough. Jiraiya-sensei, I''ming with you, I don''t want to listen to your preaching, I know what''s best for me. If you don''t want to teach me. I''ll think of another way."


    Seeing that Naruto was about to leave, there are still a lot of things and life stories that Jiraiya haven''t told. He has to swallow these words back and teach Summoning Jutsu to Naruto.


    After the exnation, Naruto wrote down the main points and imprints, and asked: "How long does it take Summoning Jutsu to fully grasp?"


    Hearing Naruto asking this question.


    Jiraiya immediately came to spirit!


    What!


    Naruto is willing to listen to his teaching!


    Jiraiya: "As for ordinary person, if you don''t have one and a half months, it''s impossible to learn, let alone master it. It''s just me, your teacher, a talented person took three..."


    Before waiting for Jiraiya to finish talking, just listen to ''BOOM! ''Sound.


    From the white mist, a small toad suddenly appeared in front of two people.


    Seeing this little toad, Naruto was slightly dissatisfied and asked: "Am I sessful?"


    Jiraiya swallowed his saliva, quickly changed his mouth and said: "Of course it is not sessful. How can summoning such a small toad be sessful?"


    Seeing two people seemed very dissatisfied with its appearance, the toad said unhappyly: "What''s wrong with little toad?! Little toad offends you?!"


    Jiraiya hearing this, lowered his head, embarrassed said with a smile: "Haha, it''s Gamakichi. Why did youe out?"


    Gamakichi held his hands on their shoulders proudly and said: "I''m so bored. I feel someone summoned me, so Ie out and see. What''s wrong? You don''t wee me, then I will tell my father when I go back."


    Naruto brows tightly frowns: "You guys continue to talk, I''ll practice there."


    Seeing that Naruto was going, Gamakichi leapt a few times and jumped on Naruto''s head: "Hello, don''t go! You are the new contractor? Is it you summon me out?"


    Naruto ignored Gamakichi and continued to perform Summoning Jutsu.


    BOOM! A cry.


    This time Gamatatsu was summoned out.


    It really dumbfounded Jiraiya.


    He originally wanted to say that he fully mastered it in 3 days.


    But Naruto has just learned this. Not only can he summon out a toad for the first time in summon, but now even toad loyalty has been summoned out. Fortunately, he hasn''t finished speaking, otherwise he will lose face.


    But what Jiraiya did not know is that the reason why Naruto has such achievements nowadays, this kind of innate talent is entirely taught by Li Yaoxiang.


    In this life, because of the appearance of Li Yaoxiang.


    Not only did he give full y to Naruto''s talent, but also raised Naruto''s talent by more than one level.


    After all, Li Yaoxiang taught Naruto to read and read literacy, Ninjutsu theory, Chakra Control, etc. from a young age. Naruto in this life is really more than little bit talented than Naruto in original work.


    It is only natural that we can get the results we have today.


    After two hours.


    There is no shortage of Chakra.


    With continuous practice, he finally summoned Gamabunta like a hill.


    Gamabunta carried a huge tobo pipe in his mouth, looking down on the tiny Jiraiya on the ground and said, "Jiraiya, why did you summon me this time?"


    Not waiting for Jiraiya to answer, two toad eyes, a nce at the top of the head: "Huh? Gamakichi? Why are you here?"


    Then he said in a bad tone: "Smelly Brat, who gave you the courage to stand on my top of the head? Don''t me me for being impolite if you don''te down now!"


    At this moment, Gamakichi said first: "No! No, father. Jiraiya didn''t summon you, but big brother Naruto summoned you! Big brother Naruto is amazing! After learning for just two hours, he summoned you, father!"


    Gamabunta used his low voice to question Fox Road: "Huh? Jiraiya, is this true?"


    Naruto ignored Gamabunta.


    Directly facing the ground, he yelled at Jiraiya: "Is this not sessful? Can I see the Great Toad Sage now?"


    Jiraiya was already shocked by Naruto''s innate talent.


    In these two hours.


    Naruto summoned a variety of toad.


    There are so many types that some of them are not even known to him as a contractor.


    And not once he failed.


    He didn''t know what to say.


    Hearing Naruto''s inquiry, he had nodded.


    Gamabunta was unhappy: "Smelly Brat! You look down on me, Gamabunta?! I ask you a question, do you disdain to answer?! Hmph! Want to see Great Toad Sage? Hehe, it depends on whether you have this qualification!"

 Chapter 154: Same result, opposite meaning

    Chapter 154: Same result, opposite meaning


    Gamabunta not waiting for Naruto to give a response, immediately jumped to the sky!


    Trying to lift off at high speed and fall at high speed to deter the little bastard on the top of the head not knowing the immensity of Heaven and Earth. To make him feel the strong wind pressure when rising and falling.


    To be an ordinary person, or Naruto in the original work, had been scared by the sense of being off the ground.


    But now Naruto was showing no waves.


    The sole of the foot is condensed with Chakra, adsorbed on the top of the head of Gamabunta, as stable as Mount Tai.


    TL note: famous mountain in China.


    No matter how big a move Gamabunta made, Naruto ignored it!


    Nothing else! Just for Hinata!


    Sasuke was right, and Naruto listened. It doesn''t matter to him whether he kills Danzo or not. The most important thing is to find a way to revive Hinata as soon as possible.


    Just like Sasuke does today.


    Even if he lives in Konoha, where enemies are everywhere, he has to endure it!


    Simrly, to resurrect family members.


    Although it sounds a little lingering, Naruto is still not willing to let go of any hope. As long as there is a glimmer of hope, Naruto will stick to it!


    At the moment, Naruto, because of the idea of resurrecting Hinata almost covered his entire brain, urgent emotions also filled the whole heart. There was no room for extra emotions such as fear, kindness and so on. So, no matter how difficult Gamabunta made it for Naruto, he will not have any feelings.


    Even if one is careless and falls from a height, at worst is a "death", isn''t it?


    But is he afraid of dying?


    No!


    He is not afraid!


    He was afraid that he would never see Hinata again...


    After Gamabunta jumped several times in a row, Naruto, who didn''t want to waste any more time, said coldly: "Have you jumped enough, can you tell me directly what is going on and are you willing to let me see Great Toad Sage?"


    Gamakichi''s simple-minded grabbed Naruto''s hair and shouted cheerfully: "Hahaha! Exciting! Exciting! Father, jump again! Jump again!"


    Gamabunta has been observing Naruto''s reaction. He already knew very well that this method could not deal with this kid above his head.


    He just wanted to test the level of the new contractor at this time, and give some shocks appropriately, so that the new contractor pays respect to Mount Myboku.


    Not only can''t he get the desired effect, instead, he was underestimated by this new contractor!


    Gamabunta who couldn''t keep up, angrily said: "Hmph! Don''t stand on my top of the head if you''re brave! Come down and fight with me! If you don''t beat me, don''t expect to see Great Toad Sage!"


    Naruto was not wordy.


    After hearing the provocative words of Gamabunta.


    He jumped down directly from Gamabunta''s top of the head.


    When he was about tond, Three-Tomoe Sharingan turns into Mangekyo Sharingan and opens!


    Rumble! There was a loud noise.


    Smokes...


    When the smoke dissipated, it was the blue-colored Susanoo of Second-Stage that appeared in front of Gamabunta! At the same time, this Second-Stage Susanoo is also the limit that Naruto can currently use.


    After all, his eye-power is not enough.


    It''s just that Susanoo of Second-Stage alone is already shocking enough for Gamabunta! He didn''t expect the new contractor to be a lunatic of Uchiha n!


    He first ignored the blue Susanoo who was half his height.


    He nced directly at Jiraiya and asked, "Hey! Jiraiya! How can you let the people of Uchiha sign a contract with Mount Myboku?! What are you thinking?"


    Not waiting for Jiraiya to answer.


    Naruto''s cold tone came into Gamabunta''s ears: "Do you want to fight?"


    Seeing Naruto''s supercilious appearance, Gamabunta was even more annoyed. "Smelly Brat, you really thought you could be arrogant in front of me by your strength? I tell you..."


    This time he didn''t wait for Gamabunta to finish.


    Naruto who doesn''t want to waste time.


    Beastization begins directly!


    Chakra coats, tails, flesh and blood, all growing at a rate visible to naked eyes!


    Until the end, the size became bigger and bigger, even surpassing Gamabunta, even the original blue Susanoo, also dposed into just armor and sword.


    Although the armor formed is not enough to cover the huge Kyuubi, but with the sword and protective gear, the Kyuubi in this form is enough to make Gamabunta looked silly.


    Gamabunta''s mouth opened slightly.


    Even that big tobo pipe fell to the ground.


    ''Kyuubi'', which was supposed to be evil and cruel, showed exceptional peace at this time. He looked down calmly at Gamabunta, who was shorter than him, and lightly said, "Do I still have to fight now?"


    Naruto decisively became like this to solve the immediate problem as soon as possible.


    He didn''t want to waste any more time on such meaningless things.


    It turns out, his n seeded. The effect is also very obvious.


    Just by the dull appearance that Gamabunta shows, he knows that this fight can''t go on. Next, let''s see how this matter ends, so that I can see the Great Toad Sage as soon as possible.


    Gamakichi was still standing on top Naruto''s head.


    "Wa ! Big brother Naruto, you are so cool!" While talking, Gamakichi jumped left and right very excitedly. He punched the air repeteadly. Staring at his father Gamabunta sharply, and said, "Quick! Fight! Big brother Naruto, beat him, beat him!"


    The dumbfounded Gamabunta finally reacted because of his son''s activity.


    He swallowed saliva.


    Not knowing to face this bullshit''s son.


    Not knowing to answer Naruto.


    In original work, Gamabunta was already struggling when he fought against One-Tail Shukaku.


    Not to mention Kyuubi?


    And still holding the Greatsword and wearing the armor.


    This is simply looking for death!


    At this moment, you can only use ''son-of-a-bitch'', to tell Gamabunta''s inner thoughts. At the same time, he can only me Jiraiya secretly: Who is he! Why didn''t you tell me first that this kid is not only a madman of Uchiha n, but also Jinchuriki!


    Just when Gamabunta did not know how to step down, ''Kyuubi'' said at this time: "Are you called Gamabunta? My name is Uzumaki Naruto. You are older than me, so I''ll call you boss. I''m sorry, I didn''t mean to lose your face. I''m really in a hurry to find Great Toad Sage. I am also spelled by circumstances, so if I''m so rude, I hope you can understand."

 Chapter 155: No debt, no obligation

    Chapter 155: No debt, no obligation


    The atmosphere at the scene became silent.


    Neither Jiraiya nor Gamabunta has responded from the shock. Until Gamakichi copsed and sat on the top of the head of ''Kyuubi'', howling: "Huh? Big brother Naruto, why don''t you fight? Hey ~..."


    From the dumbfounded state, the reacting Gamabunta used "cough" to cover up his embarrassment and said: "Cough! Cough! Yeah, let''s stop fighting."


    With that, Gamabunta said furiously to Jiraiya: "Jiraiya! If Naruto is in a hurry, why don''t you tell me first? Don''t waste time! I will go back now and tell Great Toad Sage about Naruto. Don''t dy any more. Bring Naruto over."


    BOOM! A cry.


    Huge white smoke rose.


    Gamabunta disappeared in front of everyone in the cover of white smoke.


    Naruto also slowly recovered from the Kyuubi state to his human form.


    Finally, he walked slowly towards Jiraiya.


    Looking at Jiraiya''splex expression, full of hesitant expressions, is far more mature than the original work.


    As if seeing through Jiraiya''s ideas, and directly said: "Jiraiya-sensei, I know you are here for my good. You want to guide me to the right path. But, I''m sorry, I''m afraid to disappoint you. Now I just want to find a way to revive Hinata. I won''t think about other things. If you don''t want to help me, please don''t disturb me, I will find a way to find Great Toad Sage on my own."


    In fact, as long as the contract is signed, Summoning Jutsu will still be avable no matter what.


    Naruto wants to go to Mount Myboku without using Jiraiya to guide.


    The summoned toads will sooner orter tell Naruto how to go to Mount Myboku.


    However, Jiraiya intentionally concealed the matter. Not that he wanted to make Naruto difficult, but that he did not want Naruto to go astray. Because he lied from the very beginning; he did not believe in a way to resurrect Hinata.


    Even if it is possible, it will certainly pay a heavy price.


    This is not the result he wants to see.


    If it wasn''t for Tsunade''s suggestion to him aboutforting Naruto first. It is impossible for him to give Naruto any hope in this regard.


    He will only try tofort Naruto and make him let Hinata go. It''s just that, contrary to expectations, human''s calction is inferior to the heaven''s calction. Jiraiya didn''t expect Naruto so quickly mastered Summoning Jutsu.


    As a result, he simply did not have enough time to enlighten Naruto.


    So far, Jiraiya has nothing to say.


    After hearing Naruto''s stubborn remarks, Jiraiya knew that his idea had failed. It is impossible to change Naruto''s mind.


    But he still asked with indulgence: "Naruto, if you see the Great Toad Sage and not get anything, what will you do?"


    Naruto: "I will get out of the vige to find other methods."


    Hearing Naruto would leave the vige, Jiraiya was anxious right now.


    How important is the identity of Naruto ''Jinchuriki'' to the vige, how could he not understand? This is definitely not a good thing for Tsunade who just took over Konoha.


    Jiraiya: "If you still can''t find it? How long will you be looking? Are you going to return to the vige?"


    Naruto knew what Jiraiya was nervous about and cared about.


    But he also had no ns to hide, honestly replied: "Then I''ll continue to look for it forever."


    Jiraiya cry out in surprise: "How can you do this? Don''t you know your importance of vige?"


    Naruto: "Jiraiya-sensei, I believe that my family, my n, have contributed enough to the vige. I don''t owe the vige. I have no obligation to protect them. I won''t betray my vige either."


    It has already been said so clearly.


    How would Jiraiya still doesn''t understand Naruto''s intentions? How can he not understand that Naruto has no attachments for the vige?


    However, he was still somewhat angry, and once he thought about how the vige treated Naruto over the years, his anger disappeared instantly.


    He could no longer me Naruto.


    He felt guilty for Naruto.


    Feeling guilty to Namikaze Minato.


    However, he did not give up, and finally asked a question, the most worried question in his heart: "If... the cost of resurrecting Hinata is to sacrifice the lives of other people, what will you do?"


    Naruto came to look at Jiraiya with indifferent eyes.


    No response is the best answer.


    Jiraiya sighed, and finally chose to go to Mount Myboku with Naruto.


    After a while.


    The two came to Mount Myboku sessfully.


    Under the guidance of toads, they also came to the Great Toad Sage sessfully.


    He looked towards the huge body of Great Toad Sage, likewise, Naruto didn''t think about anything else in his mind, he went straight: "Hello, my name is Uzumaki Naruto. Can you tell me how can I resurrect Hinata?"


    Great Toad Sage looks very old. He can''t even open his eyelids. A ne of ''oil'' beads hangs on his neck, and top of his head is a hat like a hat in college graduation.


    Instead of answering Naruto ''s question first, he asked Jiraiya on the side: "This... is your new student?"


    Jiraiya''s face was ugly, but still nodded.


    Great Toad Sage also nodded slowly, indicating ''so that''s how it is''.


    Immediately, his eyes shifted to Naruto and said in a very old tone: "I... there is no way to resurrect people..."


    Naruto''s expression suddenly copsed.


    But at this moment, the voice of Great Toad Sage sounded again: "But... I can see... in the future, you will meet again with the person you want to resurrect..."


    Naruto instantly rejoiced!


    Jiraiya told him that the prediction of Great Toad Sage is very urate! Since Great Toad Sage said that he will meet Hinata again in the future, wouldn''t it mean that he sessfully resurrected Hinata?!


    Even Jiraiya was shocked.


    He didn''t expect that there really is a way to resurrect in this world.


    At this time, instead of being more anxious than Naruto, he asked first: "Great Toad Sage, can you see how Naruto resurrected Hinata? What would be the price of the resurrection?"


    Naruto knew what Jiraiya was worried about.


    But he didn''t care so much.


    Because he also urgently wants to know this ''method''.


    It''s a pity that the response they got was just the movement of the shaking head of Great Toad Sage.


    Seeing this, Naruto was depressed for a moment, but soon recovered!


    There is a way!


    Since there is no way to revive Hinata here, he just has to find it himself!


    Hinata, wait for me!


    In any case, I will resurrect you!

 Chapter 156: Prophecy, Jiraiya’s decision

    Chapter 156: Prophecy, Jiraiya¡¯s decision


    After getting the desired answer, Naruto did not n to stay in Mount Myboku. He immediately resigned: "Great Toad Sage, thank you for telling me this news. Sorry, I am really anxious to find a way to revive Hinata, I don''t think I will stay longer..."


    Not waiting for Naruto to finish talking, the old voice of Great Toad Sage sounded again: "Uzumaki Naruto, right... you... can''t go yet..."


    "Why... why?" Naruto was stunned for a moment, and then he became nervous.


    He mistakenly thought that something bad was about to happen.


    After all, over the years, Konoha four elders actions have brought a lot of shadows to Naruto. A little bit of wind and grass moved. Naruto thought of being unable to bear in that direction, and raised his vignce subconsciously.


    His reaction.


    The toads present, and Jiraiya, of course, were also in sight.


    These toads do not know the entire process of development, and the current reaction will only feel strange. What happened to the new contractor in front of them? This is more then 10 years old child, why is he so wary?


    Before Great Toad Sage finished speaking, he already let the imagination run wild.


    The toads looked at Jiraiya aside intentionally or unintentionally.


    It seems to want to see some clues from Jiraiya.


    Jiraiya saw Naruto''s reaction, and naturally connected all of Naruto''s experiences over the years. Others don''t know what''s going on, but he understood.


    It is precisely because of this.


    Jiraiya only felt more guilty in his heart after seeing Naruto''s reaction. Even ming himself. me that he didn''t take good care of Minato''s son, causing him to suffer so much that any kids shouldn''t have to.


    Because of Jiraiya''s expression, only the word "guilt" was engraved on the forehead. Toads of course also saw some clues.


    Although it is impossible to be 100% sure, whether Naruto''s worry was caused by Jiraiya, but it certainly cannot be separated from a certain rtionship.


    A group of toads resumed the attitude of concerning theirselves.


    And the voice of Great Toad Sage didn''t let Naruto wait too long, and soon continued: "In the scene I saw... in the future, you need to use Senjutsu of Mount Myboku... You still need to learn Senjutsu first. Learned, then leave again..."


    "This..." Naruto hesitated when he heard this, "How long will it take to learn Senjutsu?"


    That''s right. Learn about Senjutsu and other things.


    No matter how you listen, it''s a good thing.


    To be stronger, Naruto certainly won''t refuse. After all, only when he bes stronger can he be more sure that he can protect the people around him.


    After confirming that Hinata is resurrected, he will not be killed again.


    It''s just that what he is worried about is time...


    If he can learn it in a short time, it doesn''t matter.


    But in case it takes too long... Then he couldn''t ept it.


    Moreover, letting him calm down for a long time to train instead of thinking about the resurrection of Hinata was also an impossible thing, which led Naruto to have to think carefully.


    This time he won''t wait for Great Toad Sage to answer.


    Fukasaku; when Jiraiya uses Senjutsu, the ''Great Grandpa toad'' that appears on Jiraiya''s shoulder directly reces the Great Toad Sage replied: "Short is 2-3 days, slow is about a year. Uzumaki Naruto, Great Toad Sage asked you to stay and study, there must be his reason. Perhaps Senjutsu will be one of the crucial links when you are looking for a way to resurrect in the future. Of course, if you are really unwilling to leave, we will not stop you."


    After hearing, Naruto still couldn''t believe Shensaku''s words 100%.


    He turned his attention subconsciously, again from Fukasaku, to the Great Toad Sage.


    Seeing Great Toad Sage gave him a certain ''nod''.


    Naruto agreed to the "training Senjutsu" thing.


    Fukasaku led Naruto to another ce to start learning Senjutsu.


    After Naruto leaves.


    Jiraiya expressed and panicked to the Great Toad Sage: "Great Toad Sage, will there be any changes in the future?"


    The reason why Jiraiya is so nervous is because of him.


    It was because that Great Toad Sage gave Jiraiya a prediction. Predict that Jiraiya''s disciple will bring major changes to world.


    However, it is not known whether this change will bring world annihtion or stability.


    In Jiraiya''s opinion.


    If the prediction is not false. Then he ys a very important role.


    Whether this ''disciple'' can be guided to the right way depends on whether his approach and teaching methods are correct.


    This is why Jiraiya would ept Nagato and the others as disciples. He fancied Nagato''s Rinnegan and felt that Nagato has the power to change the world in the future.


    So, he took Nagato, hoping to lead him to the right path and be the ''Child of the Prophecy'', bringing stability to the world.


    The same is true of epting Naruto as a disciple today.


    This is Minato''s trust.


    At the same time, he also saw the power and potential of Naruto.


    So, he insisted more on epting Naruto as a disciple.


    However, after epting Naruto as a disciple, and seeing Naruto''s current state, Jiraiya was a little worried that Naruto would be the ''Child of the Prophecy''.


    Or perhaps the ''Child of the Prophecy'' will bring destruction to the world.


    This made him nervous, fearing he had made the wrong decision and epted the wrong apprentice.


    Great Toad Sage certainly knew what Jiraiya was asking. He was very certain to shake his head, beckoning Jiraiya ''the future will not change''.


    In other words, the disciple of Jiraiya is still a candidate for world annihtion or stability.


    It''s really a bit difficult.


    With Nagato''s current situation- he does not understand whether it is good or bad.


    He hadn''t seen Nagato and them for a long time.


    However, after so many years of careful teaching, coupled with the judgment at the time of parting, Jiraiya estimates that Nagato is likely to develop in a better direction, and he should not need to worry.


    But Naruto...


    He was a little bit uncertain.


    For Naruto''s view, Jiraiya even tends to think badly.


    After all, Naruto''s ideas, Naruto''s actions and decisions, and his ideas, have a lot of discrepancies. This is not the ''disciple look'' he wants to teach.


    The Unsure Jiraiya asked again: "Can you see Naruto''s future and its impact on this world, is it good or bad?"


    Great Toad Sage once again shake one''s head, and said: "Jiraiya, the future is unpredictable. Which road will Naruto go to, the people around him; every decision will have a great impact on him, which is unpredictable."


    Shima, that is, the ''grandma toad'' asked at this time: "Jiraiya, what did that child experience? You... you, what did you do to him?"


    Jiraiya knew what Shima asked.


    There is no intention to hide it.


    Without omission and in detail, all of Naruto''s experiences over the years have been told to them.


    After hearing it, the atmosphere in the whole hall became quiet.


    Father is a hero.


    Not only did he not get the treatment he deserved.


    On the contrary, he suffered 100 kinds of bullying.


    Great Toad Sage and Shima didn''t know what to say.


    Silence for a long time.


    Shima started to talk to break the silence in the hall: "Jiraiya, if Naruto is really the one in destiny, and still has a very obvious sign that he is about to go to the world of destruction, then... what will you do?"


    This problem...


    Jiraiya was really stumped.


    What he was most worried about and least wanted to see was the picture that Shima said.


    Jiraiya''s mood now bes very tormented andplicated.


    Not knowing how long it took.


    In the end, he gritted his teeth and said firmly: "Then I will try my best to stop him! If I can''t stop him... then I will personally do it!"


    Great Toad Sage and Shima nced at each other silently.

 Chapter 157: Orochimaru meets Danzo

    Chapter 157: Orochimaru meets Danzo


    At the same time. A jungle that borders Konoha Vige and Hidden Viges.


    Although Shimura Danzo did not have a right hand, the sleeves fluttered with the wind, but the whole person was still in that majestic attire, without losing the style of the former Leader of Root.


    The reason why he appeared here today is also very simple.


    Earlier he ordered Sai to help him meet Orochimaru.


    Sai did not disappoint him.


    The mission will bepleted soon, and he will report back to him.


    Today, he came here ording to the time and ce of the appointment, waiting for the appearance of Orochimaru.


    It didn''t take long.


    In the very quiet jungle, the sound of ''snake'' was quickly heard from all directions, and it was obvious that Orochimaru was making a fuss. The impatient Shimura Danzo finally failed to bear cold said with a snort: "Orochimaru! Don''t pretend to be a ghost anymore! Can''te out yet?!"


    With Shimura Danzo''s voice falling.


    In the jungle, there was a sudden movement on the densely packed tall tree.


    The leaves are shaking.


    It was a giant snake that climbed down from one of the tall trees in a circle.


    The movement is slow and elegant.


    Eventually climbed to the opposite side of Shimura Danzo in a serpentine manner.


    The two sides kept a certain distance.


    The giant snake stands upright and maintains the same height as Shimura Danzo.


    The two eyes face each other.


    One second...


    Two seconds...


    Three seconds...


    Just when Shimura Danzo waited impatiently, trying to solve the giant snake in front of him, the giant snake suddenly opened its blood te, and Orochimaru''s ridicule came out in his mouth: "Lord Danzo, don''t be so anxious. What''s the matter? Are you in a hurry? Or... Fifth-Hokage limits your activity time that you need to go back and report?"


    Yes.


    What happened to Konoha?


    Almost all of it has been spread throughout Ninja World. How could Orochimaru not know?


    Of course, Uchiha Itachi attacked vige, Naruto was going to kill Sarutobi Hiruzen in public, Sarutobi Hiruzen was killed by Shimura Danzo, Shimura Danzo killed Hyuga Hinata, then Uzumaki Naruto went berserk, and Konoha 3 elders were taken by the new Hokage Tsunade. Orochimaru also received news about these ''major event pieces'' such as power and influence.


    However, the specific details cannot be understood.


    And he came here this time to see what other tricks Shimura Danzo could do.


    While talking, Orochimaru wet and sticky went out of the mouth of giant snake.


    Waiting for his feet tond.


    The giant snake stepped back as if it had intelligence.


    The whole body of Orochimaru bes strangely dry.


    Faced with this strange scene in front of him, Shimura Danzo seemed to be ustomed to it, and there was no surprised reaction, and he directly reprimanded: "Don''t say something unnecessary, I''m asking you toe out to talk about serious things!"


    Orochimaru licked the corner of his own mouth, and his tone was yful: "Oh? You want me to help you make another arm, right?"


    The sarcasm couldn''t be more obvious.


    But Shimura Danzo dismissed his disdain.


    This is the way the two of them always get along, and there is no way to get to the bottom of the matter.


    It''s enough if everyone''s heart is not.


    Shimura Danzo: "Hmph! With regard to my arms, I don''t need to trouble you. I have asked you toe out, mainly because I have a message to tell you."


    Even the loss of his arm and his right eye are not as important as what Shimura Danzo said.


    This time.


    It really raised Orochimaru''s curiosity.


    He didn''t tease Shimura Danzo anymore.


    Shimura Danzo: "Uzumaki Naruto has already created a huge hostility towards the vige!"


    Orochimaru: "Oh? What does this have to do with me?"


    In Orochimaru''s words, it seems to be careless, but his tone is involuntarily dignified.


    It''s a pity that his subtle changes can''t escape Shimura Danzo''s vicious eyes. Shimura Danzo is more convinced that his guess is correct!


    In Orochimaru''s heart, there was Konoha!


    In the same year, he once sent Orochimaru fake news about Uchiha Itachi. As a result, Orochimaru really went to attack Uchiha Itachi, causing him to be ejected from ''Akatsuki''.


    Later, he tried to abduct Uchiha Sasuke, saying that he wanted to take Sasuke''s body.


    Hehe...


    Others may believe it.


    But he worked with Orochimaru for many years, and he didn''t know how many Sharingan he got during the period. Why did Orochimaru only be interested in ''Sharingan''s body'' after learning about the incident of Uchiha Itachi''s betrayal?


    He wouldn''t believe the news that Orochimaru gave out so easily.


    And he met Orochimaru this time, just to take advantage of Orochimaru''s care for Konoha to deal with Naruto Uzumaki again!


    Shimura Danzo just looked towards Orochimaru for fun.


    As if telling Orochimaru, ''Pretend. You can continue to pretend; I watch you perform''.


    Realizing that Shimura Danzo saw his weak spot, Orochimaru was also not nervous. After the incident of Uchiha Itachi attacking the vige, Orochimaru knew that he had been cheated on you, so he would not believe the old fox''s gibberish so easily this time. He smiled and questioned: "In my opinion... Uzumaki Naruto is not hostile to Konoha, but hostile to you..."


    Shimura Danzo blushed and gasped: "He is hostile to me, but you really think he is not hostile to Konoha?"


    Orochimaru sneered, disdainful.


    Obviously not believing it.


    Seeing this, Shimura Danzo continued, "Uzumaki Naruto wants to kill Hiruzen in public, I believe you know this? But have you ever thought about why he would kill Hiruzen?"


    Paused for a moment. Let Orochimaru think for himself.


    Immediately afterwards, Shimura Danzo made another remark, which brought him to another topic: "Hiruzen told us that you didn''t kill him at the time because Konoha had other hidden dangers, didn''t you? Hiruzen thought that Uchiha Itachi was the hidden danger, so he set up a system to let Uchiha Itachie to die. But until the end, he found himself wrong. He found that Uzumaki Naruto was the real hidden danger! It was also because he took the lead against Uzumaki Naruto, so it was only afterwards that Uzumaki Naruto chased him in public. Now you still think that Uzumaki Naruto is just a threat to me?"


    Although Shimura Danzo doesn''t know the real reason why Uzumaki Naruto hunted down Sarutobi Hiruzen, it doesn''t prevent him from framing Orochimaru in a direction that is beneficial to him.


    Of course, this is also thanks to Sarutobi Hiruzen''s old close friends who discussed with them about the "hidden danger" in advance, so he was able to arrange the truth of the matter pretty close.


    Seeing Orochimaru''s dignified expression, Shimura Danzo thought he had seeded in scheming, and said arrogantly: "Do you want to take action? Whatever you want, I have told you the news anyway, think about it yourself."


    Shimura Danzo turned around and left.


    But what he didn''t know is that Orochimaru''s expression was so dignified, not because of this remark in his mouth!


    It is because the hidden danger that Orochimaru refers to in that year is a ''mysterious person'' who canmunicate with himself in his mind!


    It is a ''mysterious person'' who can control Kimimaro''s body!


    This mysterious person is the real hidden danger!


    Why did old fogey associate the hidden danger with Uzumaki Naruto before he died?


    Why did Shimura Danzo never mention this ''mysterious person''?


    What is the purpose of this ''mysterious person''?


    There are countless whys shing in my mind, causing Shimura Danzo to havepletely left this jungle, Orochimaru was still thinking and frowning...

 Chapter 158: Ten days later, someone else’s village

    Chapter 158: Ten dayster, someone else¡¯s vige


    Time flies. Years are like a shuttle.


    In a blink of an eye, ten... days... passed...


    Ten days have passed since the day when Naruto started training Senjutsu.


    And time came this night ten dayster.


    Land-of-Wind.


    On a beach near the sea.


    At the moment, there should be dozens of Sand Ninjas on the beach that should be calm and tranquil. They are fighting dozens of fighters wearing heavy armor, who are sturdy and have hammers in hand.


    It stands to reason.


    Like Suna Vige, the cultivation method that only seeks refinement and does not require quantity, their ninja is one-on-one fight, even if it is not defeated, it should not be afraid of any talents.


    But these carefully selected elites were helpless when facing this group of armored fighters.


    Some people even show expressions of fear!


    "Damned, what the hell are they?! Why can''t they die!"


    "What about Gaara?! Has Gaara not yete? We can''t keep the defensive line anymore!"


    That''s right.


    That''s the problem.


    It''s not that they lost to these armored fighters.


    But these armored warriors can''t be killed!


    Regardless of the point of the attack or the piercing of the heart, these armored warriors will continue to move towards Sand Ninjas without even a pause.


    And what makes Sand Ninja most helpless is that the physical strength of these armored Kinoe warriors seems to be inexhaustible.


    From the moment the battle began, until now, whether it is power or speed, it still maintains its peak state. The strength of each attack is still as strong as it was at the beginning.


    They are not so much like creatures.


    Rather, they are more like puppets being manipted.


    Unfortunately.


    What the truth is, it''s their turn to think more.


    Because they must stay on this defensive line until rescuees.


    Otherwise, once the enemy breaks through here, go straight into Land-of-Wind.


    For Land-of-Wind''s 100 surnames, the consequences are simply unimaginable!


    And just when this group of Sand Ninjas was about to stop, an orange and translucent Chakra suddenly appeared on the battlefield to join the battle situation!


    This translucent orange Chakra, either condensed into animal ws, or turned into several tails, rescued Sand Ninjas in danger and rescued one after another!


    The armor warrior was shot to the surface by this sudden energy.


    ''plop'' dropped into the sea.


    The only remaining armor warriors seemingly aware of the loss, also began to retreat back to the sea.


    The bewildered Sand Ninjas looked at the source of this energy one after another.


    When I saw the personing, the nk expression all turned into great joy!


    "Naruto, you are back!"


    "Hahaha! Naruto, you are back! Then very good!"


    That''s right!


    It was Naruto who helped the Sand Ninjas to escape the crisis after learning Senjutsu from Mount Myboku! Although Jiraiya was very stubborn to persuade Naruto to stay, in the end it was unsessful.


    And Naruto after leaving Mount Myboku; in his knowledge, Suna Vige is the most familiar. So, the first ce he thought of was Suna Vige.


    He nned to ask Gaara and the others here of ways to resurrect people.


    Not long after arriving, it happened to sense the Land-of-Wind border and someone was fighting.


    So, Naruto hurried to see what happened.


    As a result, when he discovered the situation here, he did not hesitate to help Sand Ninjas, no matter who was right or wrong.


    The reaction of Sand Ninjas made Naruto stunned for a moment, and the expression of bitter smile immediately appeared.


    Unexpectedly...


    Ah...


    Compared to his vige...


    The Sand Ninjas would act more weing him.


    Naruto could clearly feel that the group of Sand Ninjas who had not seen them in a few days were genuinely weing him instead of pretending to be.


    Each and every one stepped forward to Naruto like a senior, or patted him on the shoulder, or greeted him.


    "Hahaha! You''ve grown a lot again! This time I really thank you!"


    "You actually came, then don''t leave so quickly this time, let us entertain you!"


    It is different from original work.


    In this life, Suna Vige; because of Naruto, the life has been a lot better. After all, the original ''Konoha Crush n''; because of Naruto''s help, so they could reach an agreement with Konoha vige so smoothly.


    After that, they no longer have to worry about natural resources.


    All of this is due to Naruto.


    So, most people in Suna Vige are very grateful to Naruto.


    So, after seeing Naruto, there is such a sincere scene.


    After a while, without waiting for Naruto to respond, Gaara arrived at the scene at this time.


    He was also very happy to see Naruto''s appearance. But business matters, he just nodded to Naruto, and ordered: "Fire res."


    The Sand Ninja nodded on the side ''yes''.


    These Sand Ninjas took out a heavy machine resembling a cylinder from the scroll and sent several res towards the dark sky.


    When the res hit the sea, a huge steam ship suddenly caught everyone''s eyes!


    This does not matter.


    Even more frightening is that this steam ship fired dozens of shells at them on the beach without the slightest hesitation! Seeing this, Gaara cursed ''damn it!''.


    Even if arge wall of sand was cast, this wave of attack was blocked.


    Kankuro used Chakra Threads to move a group of Sand Ninjas to a safe ce.


    Followed by, a rumbling sound.


    The shells exploded into the sand wall and the dust was billowing.


    That''s right!


    This huge steamship is from the theater version of "Relics of Magic"! The owner of the steamboat is called Haido(Haido). He specializes in deceiving children, using special methods to extract the child''s vitality.


    TL note: Haido (, Haido) was a warlord searching for the Stone of Gelel. Haido, like his three minions, seemed to be based on a famous monster, in this case Dr. Jekyll and Mr. Hyde.


    Those immortal armored warriors are also made at the expense of the deceived children!


    And he came here just to find the Stone of Gelel, hoping to rely on the Stone of Gelel toplete his hegemony!


    Of course, if there is no butterfly effect of Li Yaoxiang. Perhaps they will follow normal development until the end.


    But how can there be so many ifs in this world?


    And just when Haido, a sorrowful man, stood in the control room and satisfactorily admired the formidable power bombed by the shells, his expression froze there in vain!


    Rubbed his eyes.


    He saw an incredible scene!


    Wait for the dust to disperse...


    On the beach...


    How could there be such a huge fox on the beach?!


    And more importantly, this giant fox has a big mouth and a huge amount of formidable power condensed in his mouth, it seems that it will beunched to his treasure steamship!


    This...


    Am I wrong?


    Haido''s thoughts remained on whether he was presbyopic until thest moment.


    In his field of view, he looked at the energy cluster and fired at him.


    Tailed Beast Ball is getting bigger and bigger in Haido''s field of view.


    Until it covered his entire field of view.


    This is where his thinking ends.


    Everyone on the beach only heard a deafening st, and then admired a dazzling rays of light. Until the end, the rays of light gradually became a mushroom cloud.


    Everyone was recovered from the shock, and cheers were everywhere.


    Gaara smiled and said to Naruto who had returned to the human form: "Go! Return to the vige first and then let''s talk!"


    Naruto returned to Suna Vige with a group of people under the stars holding the moon...

 Chapter 159: Reincarnation Jutsu

    Chapter 159: Reincarnation Jutsu


    Suna Vige


    Just arrived at the entrance of the vige, and there was already one of them, a Sand Ninja, who ran out of the team impatiently, moved towards the vige and shouted: "Hey! Come here! Come here! Come out and see everyone, who''s back?"


    The vigers who were still busy in their own way.


    All were attracted by the loud sound, and stopped their activities.


    They either have a stack of vegetable baskets on their heads, or they have some pottery in their hands, and so on. Originally calm and with a little curiosity, but because they saw the familiar yellow-haired boy among the team, they all became overjoyed!


    Isn''t this the Naruto who has lived in their vige for many years?


    Isn''t this the Naruto that helped Young Master Gaara return to normal?


    Isn''t this Naruto that saves everyone from starving?


    All the past, the bits and pieces of Naruto''s life in the vige came to mind one by one.


    They are happy for the arrival of Naruto from the bottom of their hearts!


    One after another couldn''t help but went up to Naruto.


    Talking or greetings.


    Or concern.


    "Hahaha, Naruto has grown up just like Young Master Gaara."


    "Sad ~ I haven''t seen youe back to visit us after so long."


    The sentiment is extremely turbulent.


    Even Sand Ninjas, who was originally standing in the team, was forced to squeeze to the edge.


    That is, Gaara is still standing next to Naruto. Seeing this situation, Gaara didn''t forget to teased to Naruto: "I can''t think of you as a ninja from Konoha anymore. Your poprity is even higher than me."


    Originally still in front of the vigers, Naruto maintained an awkward smile.


    After hearing Gaara''s ridicule, he stared Gaara fiercely.


    The eyes looked very ruthless. But in fact, his heart was warm.


    He was very touched by the enthusiastic performance of everyone.


    Thinking of his vige, Konoha... I don''t know what to say... Except for the scenes in the vige, he has his childhood memories, he really didn''t feel the ''going home'' feel.


    Instead, it is Suna Vige that gives itself a more homelike feel...


    Next.


    Finally, the vigers were coped with one after another.


    Naruto followed Gaara and came to the Kazekage building.


    Although Gaara hasn''t officially be Kazekage yet, but he has changed a lot in his life. Being Kazekage has basically be a certainty.


    No need to be like original work.


    It takes Baki to stand up for him to seed.


    Currently, Gaara is already used to working in the Kazekage building, so he brought Naruto here.


    As soon as he entered the Kazekage room, Gaara naturally walked and asked: "What is it? Not really as simple as just want to visit us?"


    Gaara turned around and sat on the Kazekage seat.


    Naruto also had no intention of turning around.


    He told Gaara directly his intention.


    After hearing this, Gaaraforted Naruto for a while, and then stated his own situation: "In my mind, there is no image of the resurrection technique. But it''s okay, Naruto. In Suna Vige, there may be someone better than me to answer your question. I will take you to see her now."


    After a while.


    Naruto was taken by Gaara to ake.


    And beside theke at this time, there were a man and a woman fishing there.


    Gaara took Naruto and came to the two old people. The guest said: "Honoured Grandmother Chiyo, grandfather Ebizo."


    That''s right.


    The person Gaara said was suitable for answering Naruto''s questions was the most experienced: Honoured Grandmother Chiyo and Ebizo in Suna Vige.


    Rather than fishing, it is better to call it napping.


    Gaara issued this im, which only awakened them in their sleep.


    The two opened their eyes in a panic.


    They were delighted to see the personing: "Hahaha! Naruto, why are you here? Are youing to visit us two elders?"


    Because her son was killed by Konoha Ninja. Therefore, Honoured Grandmother Chiyo has always been biased against Konoha Ninja.


    However, Naruto is an exception.


    Naruto helped Gaara out of the days of being tortured by One-Tails, and it''s not too much to say that he was the vige''s benefactor. As long as the interest dispute between vige and vige is set aside, Honoured Grandmother Chiyo is undoubtedly happy with Naruto.


    The two did not dy.


    Directly exin the intention.


    After hearing this, Honoured Grandmother Chiyo smiled kindly, and suddenly became dignified.


    Honoured Grandmother Chiyo said solemnly: "Naruto... the way to resurrect the dead, I do know..."


    Naruto overjoyed!


    A few steps forward, holding Honoured Grandmother Chiyo''s hands, stunned: "Really? Honoured Grandmother Chiyo, is it true? Do you really know how to resurrect the dead?!"


    Found it!


    Found it!


    At this moment, Naruto was extremely excited!


    He also didn''t expect, he found a way to resurrect so easily!


    It''s just that, no matter how happy Naruto is, Honoured Grandmother Chiyo suddenly sighs and shaking head: "Naruto, although I know your way to resurrect the dead... However, this method is not suitable for you."


    Naruto said nervously: "What... what... what? What''s wrong with this method?"


    Honoured Grandmother Chiyo said: "Listening to you, the person you want to be resurrected is dead for a period of time. But our Forbidden Jutsu in Suna Vige can only resurrect the dead who died just recently. And the cost of resurrecting the dead is still the life of the caster. Sorry, Naruto. Honoured Grandmother Chiyo can''t help you..."


    That''s right.


    The Forbidden Jutsu mentioned by Honoured Grandmother Chiyo is exactly ''Reincarnation Ninjutsu''s Art!''


    That is, in the original work, Gaara was pulled away from One-Tails and died, and Honoured Grandmother Chiyo resurrected using the Forbidden Jutsu.


    TL note: Reincarnation ninjutsu (Tensei Ninjutsu, literally meaning: Life Transfer Ninja Techniques" or "Reincarnation Ninja Techniques) are techniques that usually require or aplish the transfer of life force between people. These techniques are generally ssified as kinjutsu because the restoration of one life typically requires the sacrifice of the life of another, or that it vites thews of nature and morality.


    After hearing it, Naruto instantly became extremely depressed from the state of excitement!


    The greater the hope, the greater the disappointment.


    He originally thought that he could resurrect Hinata, but didn''t expect that it was empty joy. His mood was like being struck by thunder.


    See the dumbstruck look of Naruto, Gaara stepped forward to p Naruto''s shoulderfortably: "Don''t be discouraged, Naruto. Although this Forbidden Jutsu can''t revive Hinata, you can at least be sure that there is really a resurrection technique in this world. As long as you persist, there must be hope."


    Gaara''s remark instantly dispersed Naruto''s depression!


    Right!


    Gaara is right!


    At least to be sure, there is really a resurrection technique in this world.


    As long as there is hope, I will never give up!


    In his eyes, the energetic Naruto rose again, first thanked Gaara for hisforting words.


    Immediately, this turned his head and said sincerely to Honoured Grandmother Chiyo: "Honoured Grandmother Chiyo, can you teach me this Forbidden Jutsu?"


    Several people were suddenly nervous.


    Misunderstanding that Naruto is going to do something stupid.


    It''s just that Naruto quickly shook his head and gave them a "reassuring" smile, saying, "Rx, I won''t mess up. I just thought, if there is really no other way to resurrect in the future, then I can at least study this Forbidden Jutsu?"


    Several people looked at each other.


    They were still worried.


    But in the end, Naruto''s insistence was not met, and they taught Reincarnation Ninjutsu.

 Chapter 160: Snake meets, causing trouble to the Akatsuki

    Chapter 160: Snake meets, causing trouble to the Akatsuki


    After the matter is over.


    Naruto wanted to start tomorrow and continued to find a way to revive Hinata. However, everyone in Suna Vige said that he would not let Naruto leave easily.


    Without any choice, Naruto had to stay longer. ept the hospitality of Suna Vige.


    A few dayster.


    On the way of leaving.


    Gaara''s entire group sent Naruto to the edge of the vige.


    Gaara: "Where will you go next?"


    Naruto told truthfully: "I should go to other Hidden Viges to see if there is any news about Orochimaru."


    That''s right!


    Naruto''s next goal is Orochimaru!


    In the past few days of Suna Vige, although he was receiving the hospitality of Suna Vige, this does not mean that his thoughts will stop.


    Orochimaru was mentioned during the chat with Gaara.


    This happened to remind him of Orochimaru''s Ninjutsu of Summoning First-Kage and Second-Hokage.


    So, he started thinking about finding Orochimaru.


    Hearing Naruto say ''Orochimaru'', Gaara''s expression made it difficult to look. Even if his rtionship with Rasa is so bad, he still can''t forget that it''s Orochimaru who killed his father...


    It''s just that this ugly look is just a sh away.


    Gaara quickly regained the calmly said: "Good luck, be careful of everything, if you have any needs, remember toe back and ask me for help."


    Gaara grasped his fist and raised it to Naruto.


    Naruto smiled slightly: "Rx, if necessary, I will definitely ask you for help. Don''t think I am troublesome."


    Naruto also raised fist.


    The two fists touched.


    This friendship.


    They both kept them in mind.


    ...


    Two dayster.


    Oto Vige. A secret research room.


    At this time in the research room, Orochimaru is conducting his experiments and research as always, and Yakushi-Kabuto is beside him as an assistant.


    If we say that the former Orochimaru loves vige, even if he has be a Missing-nin, he must remove the enemy for the vige. In front of the teacher, Sarutobi Hiruzen, it proved his value, and prove that Sarutobi Hiruzen''s choice is wrong.


    Perhaps at that time, after hearing the words of Shimura Danzo, he would really find a way to deal with Naruto to remove this hidden danger for the vige!


    But... That was just him before.


    Now he...


    Since he knew the truth of Uchiha Itachi, after knowing that he was used by ''Konoha Elders'', and knowing why the four elders were so afraid of ''Impure World Reincarnation'', Konoha''s weight in his heart was already greatly discounted!


    Just like that in original work.


    When Sasuke resurrected him.


    When he knew the truth, Konoha has be dispensable in his mind.


    It doesn''t matter whether Sasuke wants to destroy Konoha or protect Konoha.


    Anyway, in this incident, he and Sasuke are both victims, and both are kept in the dark. And Sasuke is a proud disciple he carefully cultivated. It is enough for him to follow Sasuke''s will.


    Of course, there is another more important reason is that the so-called hidden danger in his mouth is the ''mysterious person''. So he has not fully understood the message of this ''mysterious person''.


    Orochimaru is no longer acting like he used to love the vige!


    It will not be easy to believe the nonsense of Shimura Danzo!


    As long as he is like this now, it is enough to concentrate on studying his ''Eternal Life Technique''!


    But while Orochimaru and Yakushi-Kabuto were both focusing on their research, the rumble sound suddenly came from outside the research room. After a moment, Tayuya, one of the four people of Sound Four, ran in.


    The whole body looks very different from the original work; riddled with scars.


    In original work, by this time, the Sound Four had be a few feet taller.


    The reason why they are not dead in this life depends on the appearance of Li Yaoxiang''s butterfly effect. Sasuke did not follow them and they would not be killed by Twelve-Youngest Strong(Naruto''s Generation).


    Orochimaru didn''t even look at Tayuya, and said coldly, "What''s wrong? Why is it so noisy outside?"


    Tayuya covered her wound and gasping for breath, said: "Lord Orochimaru, Uzumaki Naruto came to the vige... and he said he was looking for you. We refused to disclose your location, and the two sides fought. I am sorry! We are not the opponent of Uzumaki Naruto."


    Orochimaru still focused on the potions in his bottles: "Well, understood. Don''t stop him, you can just bring him in."


    Instead, Yakushi-Kabuto stopped his movements: "Lord Orochimaru, I heard... Uzumaki Naruto''s rtionship with Konoha is getting worse. You won''t be unable to put Konoha down, and n to get rid of Uzumaki for Konoha. Or... Do you want to take Uzumaki Naruto back to Konoha?"


    Until now, Yakushi-Kabuto is doubting Orochimaru''s feelings for Konoha.


    Because the so-called ''Konoha Crush n'' didn''t look like it really wanted to destroy Konoha. There were too many abnormalities.


    Orochimaru nced at Yakushi-Kabuto: "Your imagination is really rich."


    After a while, Naruto was brought to theboratory.


    Orochimaru stopped his movements.


    Naruto: "Orochimaru, I''m not here to trouble you..."


    Orochimaru interrupted Naruto''s words: "I know what you are here for. You want to know about resurrection, right?"


    Naruto was shocked.


    He didn''t understand how Orochimaru knows his intention.


    But still nodded.


    Orochimaru: "I''m sorry, I don''t have the resurrection method you want here. The one I performed in Konoha before was a Ninjutsu called ''Impure World Reincarnation''. It was just a brief resurrection of the dead. Can''tst long. Not a real resurrection."


    Hearing this, Naruto couldn''t help but feel lost again.


    However, Orochimaru did not let Naruto wait too long, and soon continued: "But... I know who can really bring the dead back to life."


    Naruto cry out in surprise: "Who is it?!"


    At this time, Orochimaru''s expression became yful: "And why... why should I tell you?"


    "What do you want?" Naruto''s expression narrowed, and fist clenched, seemingly ready to start.


    Orochimaru certainly captured his subtle movements.


    However, Orochimaru just nced at Naruto''s fist, and said softly, "I haven''t thought of what I want, so you can owe me a favor. I will tell you when I think of what I want."


    Naruto''s expression became a little hesitant.


    Orochimaru seems to see Naruto''s thoughts: "Rx, my request will be within your ability and will not vite your bottom line."


    Naruto''s brow furrowed, and then it stretched.


    Naruto: "Then say it."


    Orochimaru: "That man is the leader of Akatsuki. He has the eyes of legendary and Sage of Six-Paths. If he can''t even do it, I can''t think of anyone else who can really resurrect a dead person."


    "Then... how can I find him?"


    Orochimaru: "As far as I know, this organization is very interested in Tailed Beast. Maybe they don''t need you to find them, they wille to you. Of course, if you want to see them faster. Then you can first find the rest of Jinchuriki."


    That''s right! This is the purpose of Orochimaru!


    To bring trouble to others!


    He didn''t know if Nagato could resurrect people, but that didn''t prevent him from throwing Naruto''s burden to Nagato. Anyway, no matter who lives or dies in the end, he will not have any losses, and even earned Naruto a favor.


    Naruto was silent for a moment.


    Finally, a "Thank You" came out and then left.


    Orochimaru and Yakushi-Kabuto nced at each other and continued their research.

 Chapter 161: Nagato changed his plan, making Obito anxious

    Chapter 161: Nagato changed his n, making Obito anxious


    Akatsuki''s base.


    The skinny Nagato, sitting high in a high chair, is discussing with Konan the various trivial issues such as the development direction and progress of Ame Vige or Akatsuki as always.


    TL note: Nagato was a shinobi of Amegakure and descendant of the Uzumaki n. Forming Akatsuki alongside his friends (and fellow war orphans) Yahiko and Konan, Nagato dreamed of bringing peace to the violent shinobi world. However, following Yahiko''s death, Nagato adopted the alias of Pain (Pein) and, along with Konan, began leading a new Akatsuki  one that would force the world into peace using any means necessary.


    And it is at this time.


    Masked Obito, who ims to be Uchiha Madara, suddenly appeared here.


    Nagato indifferently said: "What are you doing here? Something happened?"


    Konan''s vignce was even more extreme.


    Although there is no doubt about the strength of Nagato, Konan knows that Nagato''s health is not good, so unless it is spelled by circumstances, she does not want Nagato to do it himself, lest his body will be weaker.


    TL note: Konan was a kunoichi from Amegakure and a founding member of the original Akatsuki. After Yahiko''s death, she was partnered with Nagato, who had since taken control of Akatsuki, and was the only member to call him by his name. After Nagato''s death, Konan defected from Akatsuki and became the de facto vige head of Amegakure.


    Of course, her worries were temporarily unnecessary.


    Because of the current Obito has no intention to start with Nagato at all.


    And even if it is a hands-on, Nagato with Rinnegan may not necessarily beat Obito.


    He came today, mainly to urge Nagato to implement the n to capture Tailed Beast. After all, Akatsuki has had a period of time and stopped his hand.


    Obito: "I''m here to ask you, when do you want to speed up the process of catching the tail beast? I see you, in this respect, it seems that you are not as active as before. What happened? Want to give up our original idea?"


    Nagato: "You are right, I am not so active in capturing Tailed Beast. But this does not mean that I gave up the original idea. This is because I changed my n."


    "What?!" Obito cry out in surprise, "Change n?! What n did you change? Why didn''t you discuss with me? Didn''t say that at first that we need to collect Tailed Beast and master the most powerful force in the world?! That it''s our ideal!"


    In original work, Nagato''s n has a total of 3 steps.


    The first step. Earn a lot of money.


    As long as they have a lot of money, then the Akatsuki can act conveniently.


    Second step. Causes a war in the countries. Let people really appreciate the pain caused by war. When people feel this pain, they will cherish this hard-won peace.


    Third step. Take control of the power of world''s strongest.


    Use this power to suppress the whole world and get his ideal peaceful world.


    Unlike Obito, Nagato collects Tailed Beasts in order to gain more power and facilitate the suppression of the whole world in the future. Obito''s n is to realize ''Infinite Tsukuyomi''.


    So, when Obito heard Nagato say he wanted to change his n, he became very nervous.


    Nagato said: "I''m not in a hurry to collect Tailed Beast. I''m more concerned about other thing now than collecting Tailed Beast; it''s Uzumaki Naruto''s Kyuubi Jinchuriki."


    He heard Nagato talking about Naruto.


    Obito''s face hidden under the mask also became difficult to look at.


    There is no other reason.


    Because Uzumaki Naruto, the strength of Kyuubi Jinchuriki, is really stronger than he expected!


    Not to mention that he can perfectly control the real body of Kyuubi.


    The problem is, Naruto even owns Mangekyo Sharingan? Doesn''t that make him lose his only advantage when facing Tailed Beast? If you want to capture Kyuubi, I''m afraid it''s even harder.


    Obito''s tone was low, said with clenched teeth: "Why?"


    Nagato: "Don''t you think... Uzumaki Naruto''s Kyuubi Jinchuriki''s strength is beyond imagination? Even me, I can''t be 100% sure I can capture him."


    Obito: "So what? Then shouldn''t we find a way to deal with him more?! He has now walked out of Konoha, this is our best chance to deal with him!"


    With the help of White Zetsu, Akatsuki will notck the information.


    So, Naruto''s whereabouts; they all know perfectly clear.


    Nagato shook his head, said indifferently: "No, I won''t deal with him for the time being. I also understand a little about Uzumaki Naruto through childhood''s experience. I think... if it is him, he would understand our philosophy. With his strength, he is also very suitable to be my heir. You don''t need to say more. I have asked Hidan and Kakuzu to invite him toe here and meet me. For other things, please wait until the meeting is over."


    That''s right! This is thetest n of Nagato!


    The emergence of Li Yaoxiang''s butterfly effect has led to Naruto in this life. In this timeline, he is too powerful. Because of Naruto''s strength, he changed Nagato''s thinking!


    What is Nagato''s ultimate goal?


    Isn''t it just to control the power of world''s strongest, use this power to shock the whole world and achieve world peace?


    Exactly!


    What Nagato likes is Naruto''s power!


    To tell the truth. Even if he ns to seed, all the Tailed Beasts collected, he would get the most powerful force in the world and achieve world peace, but... how about this?


    Take his current physical condition.


    How long can this so-called peacest?


    What should he do after he dies?


    How does he ensure that people will continue to insist on this peace?


    These hidden dangers, of course, Nagato couldn''t be clearer. However, before, he knew that there was no other way, and he could only continue to go on, hoping to see this scene of world peace in his lifetime at the very least.


    It can be described as one step, one step.


    But- the moment when Naruto showed his real strength, Nagato was finally shaken.


    The power of world''s strongest!


    Isn''t he the most powerful force in the world when he cooperates with Naruto?


    And, as long as Naruto epts his ideas, then Naruto must be his best heir! Because after his death, Naruto also has enough strength to maintain peace!


    This is why Nagato changed his mind!


    After Obito heard about it, he felt agitated.


    The face hidden under the mask.


    The body hidden under the red cloud ck robe.


    He wasn''t able to bear his body trembling!


    Damn it! This is not the result he wanted! What he wants is to have Rin''s world peace! Only ''Infinite Tsukuyomi'' can realize his ideas.


    Everything was going very smoothly.


    It was because this damned Uzumaki Naruto suddenly appeared, things became extremely tricky!


    For a while, he couldn''t think of a way to solve this problem.


    After all, judging from what he has observed so far, Nagato''s Willpower seems to be very firm. It is estimated that no matter how he persuades, it cannot change Nagato''s ideas.


    He can only leave first, and then go back to discuss with ck Zetsu.


    Obito''s deep eyes looked at Nagato for a while.


    In the end nothing was said.


    Turned around and left.


    After Obito leftpletely, Konan''s brows slightly wrinkled. She worriedly said: "Nagato... He, do you think there will be any problems? He seems to be particrly concerned about collecting Tailed Beast?"


    Obito''s response this time, let Konan saw some clues.


    People with the same idea wanting to win the idea of Uzumaki Naruto should be no big problem, but... How can this person who ims to be Uchiha Madara not understand this truth?


    This made Konan suspicious of Obito.


    Nagato said indifferently: "It''s okay, as long as I persuaded Uzumaki Naruto this time... then everything is a foregone conclusion. Under my cooperation with Uzumaki Naruto, no matter how he ys tricks, he can''t afford any big waves."


    The two continued to discuss the political issues of Akatsuki and Ame Vige.


    And in another distant ce, Kakuzu and Hidan finally found the trace of Naruto...

 Chapter 162: This eye... I seem to have seen it somewhere

    Chapter 162: This eye... I seem to have seen it somewhere


    On a desert in Land-of-Wind.


    After leaving Hidden Viges, Naruto''s first thought was toe back to Suna Vige. After all, Orochimaru said, Akatsuki seems to be very interested in Tailed Beast.


    In order to ensure that he can wait for the news from Akatsuki as soon as possible.


    Also, to ensure that Gaara will not be in trouble.


    So, Naruto finally chose toe back here. Of course, another reason is that he has no idea how to find Akatsuki


    Rather than blindly searching outside, it is better to let Suna Vige help him find out the news.


    Ever since then,


    Naruto was walking in the desert.


    Can walk.


    Naruto''s pace suddenly stopped.


    He turned his head in a certain direction, his eyes narrowed, and said indifferently, "The two have been following me for a long time? Don''t n toe out to meet? Continue to hide then don''t me me for being impolite."


    As early as the beginning, Naruto had sensed two chakras looming around him. At that time, he was not sure whether the two chakras were targeting him.


    So, he didn''t care too much.


    But now that he has alreadye to the desert.


    These two chakras were still within the range that he sensed. If they were not directed at him, no one would believe them! Therefore, the present scene appeared.


    Naruto simply here, showdown with the other side.


    When the two realized that Naruto discovered their location, there is no intention to hide anymore.


    Not much time.


    In the field of view of Naruto, the original desert, which was endless, suddenly appeared two silhouettes. From a distance, they were walking slowly towards him.


    As the distance gets closer.


    Naruto finally saw their clothes.


    Both of them wore ck robes.


    There were red clouds on the robe.


    It looks very cool.


    It''s just that this handsome outfit, matched with the two people in front, plus the dialogue between the two, is simply a discount!


    The two are Hidan and Kakuzu who were sent by Nagato to invite Naruto!


    The pace of two people, either slow nor hurried, looks veryfortable.


    Not at all nervous because of being discovered by Naruto.


    Even chatting while walking.


    Hidan stared at Naruto''s eyes and looked very excited: "Good seedlings! Good seedlings! So soon he found us, his strength is definitely good!"


    Kakuzu: "Hmph, if you can''t calm down, how could we be found? Stop wasting time! Hurry up and end this mission, don''t dy me to make money!"


    Hearing their conversation.


    Naruto just thought...


    They are lunatics.


    A dead love for money.


    Negative numbers properly divided!


    Naruto coldly said: "Who are you? Why are you following me?"


    Hidanughed: "Hehehe, of course, to invite you to enter the Akatsuki! Your aptitude is very good! I can be your senior!"


    Kakuzu red at Hidan, coldly snorted, and immediately said to Naruto: "Don''t listen to his nonsense. We are members of Akatsuki, and our leader wants to see you. So... please go with us."


    Hearing that it was Akatsuki, Naruto was shocked.


    There was a little excitement in his heart.


    Didn''t expect Akatsuki to find him so soon.


    It seems that the information given by Orochimaru still has several points of credibility.


    After calming down, Naruto''s cheerful nodded and said: "Yes, I happen to have something to see your leader. Take the lead, I will go back with you."


    This time, it was Hidan''s and Kakuzu''s turn.


    So easy?


    Is it fraudulent?


    Both of them nced at each other to see the doubts in the other side''s eyes.


    There is no need tomunicate.


    For the sake of safety, the two immortal people, of course, don''t mind disabling Naruto first, and then take him back! Doesn''t this also aplish the task?


    When looking towards Naruto again, Hidan''s lunatic look has be be eager to have a try.


    Withdrawing his bloody Three-ded Scythe simr to ''Shinigami scythe'', he said excitedly to Naruto: "But... before taking you back, we must first confirm that you are qualified to see our leader."


    Hidan rushed towards Naruto.


    With Immortal Body.


    There is nothing to be afraid of.


    The two really thought they were in control of the situation.


    What they didn''t know was that they attacked Naruto, but Naruto was not there!


    From the moment he got Mangekyo Sharingan, although Naruto didn''t know how to use the Dojutsu of these eyes, he always had a very strange feeling.


    He felt that he seemed to have the ability to change the thinking of others.


    He did not know whether this was an illusion or something.


    He wanted to find someone to test, but troubled that there is no suitable object.


    Of course, Naruto will not let this great opportunity go! And, if it is sessful, maybe he can learn about Akatsuki''s specific situation through these two fools!


    Of course, it doesn''t matter if he fails.


    When the timees, it''s not toote to teach them how to behave with their fists.


    Naruto grinned.


    There is no intention to dodge.


    In this way, he looked at Hidan rushed towards him!


    Seeing Naruto''s confident look, Hidan was even more smug.


    Huh! Okay! It''s best if you don''t hide!


    Obediently let me cut a small wound... I''m not being greedy, let me lick a little bit of your blood ~


    There is no doubt that ''Curse Enactment'' and ''Ninjutsu anti-injury'' are the Hindan''s next technical form to be implemented on Naruto! As long as he seeds, it can be said that Naruto is almost invincible.


    No matter how strong Naruto''s resilience is, Hidan just needs to cut off his head.


    Naruto''s body is still essential.


    Hidan rushed at the limit of speed, but he felt something was wrong.


    Huh? These eyes... Where have I seen it?


    Hidan''s mind was all attracted to Naruto''s Three-Tomoe Sharingan. Until three-tomoe slowly linked together, Hidan finally remembered where this eye was seen!


    Fuck!


    Isn''t that Uchiha Itachi''s eyes that can cast ''Tsukuyomi''?!


    Fuck, Fuck, Fuck Fuck!


    Emergency brake!


    The upper body that was originally leaning forward in order to speed up the impact suddenly became leaning backward! Both feet are constantly digging onto the sand.


    Brake! Quickly stop!


    Unfortunately...


    Everything is toote.


    me it on yourself. Whenever you rely on your Immortal Body, you rush forward desperately, seeming to feel like you are dead.


    As expected.


    Thest scene seen in Hidan''s eyes is when Naruto grinned at him, and then Mangekyo Sharingan turned slightly, and he fell into a panic on the spot...

 Chapter 163: If you wont do it, Ill do it

    Chapter 163: If you won''t do it, I''ll do it


    Hidan''s so-called panic, in his inner world, is like a long time that has gone through countless years, but in Naruto''s eyes, it is only a sh, and he quickly recovered his mind.


    Kakuzu was unaware of this.


    The picture in Kakuzu''s eyes, Hidan rushed up, and immediately seemed to be a very nervous, ''emergency brake'', and then there was no more.


    Seeing this is enough to make Kakuzu feel strange.


    After all, like Hidan''s current situation, Kakuzu saw it for the first time.


    How could they, with Immortal Body, withdraw?


    It''s just that Kakuzu didn''t expect that the strange scene that made him feel that it was just an appetizer, and the even more outrageous picture was still toe.


    This time, I really dumbfounded this old Kakuzu.


    After seeing Hidan ''emergency braking'', he suddenly turned his style.


    Put away his bloody Three-ded Scythe.


    Go forward.


    Just hooked up with Naruto.


    No mistakes! It''s just hooking up your shoulders!


    Immediately afterwards, Kakuzu heard Hidan excitedly turned to Naruto and said, "Nah, that''s enough! I''ll do things for you, and you will definitely join the Akatsuki in the future, right?"


    Hearing this sentence, Naruto knew that his experiment was sessful!


    His guess is right!


    His Mangekyo Sharingan really has the ability to change the thinking of others!


    Naruto; just based on his feelings, strengthened Hidan''s thinking that he wanted to Naruto to join Akatsuki to the extreme. As long as it works on Hidan and do things for him, he will definitely join the idea of Akatsuki.


    of course!


    There may be many ways to ''change your mind'' to control Hidan.


    However, Naruto felt faintly that changing Hidan to this ''thinking'' is now his upper limit for Mangekyo Sharingan''s ability.


    Of course, this so-called upper limit does not mean that the ability of Mangekyo Sharingan cannot change the more overbearing ''thinking''. It''s just that Naruto feels that this ''thinking'' now is the best way!


    One more point or one point less will not work.


    The effect will be greatly reduced.


    As for... Why is it based on feeling...


    The reason is also very simple.


    Because Naruto can feel that as long as he chooses the way he chooses to be more overbearing, just like Hidan will directly recognize him as the master, then there may be nothing in the short term.


    But as long as time went on, then Hidan might notice something wrong. Leading him to thete stage, he may deny his "master", even betrayal.


    What Naruto didn''t know is that his "feel" is indeed true!


    As mentioned before, Kotoamatsukami is not invincible.


    Its ability is only to change the thinking of the goal. Not to change the memory, character, or reduce the IQ of the goal.


    Because of this.


    If Naruto changed Hidan''s thinking to ''recognize me as your master''.


    Over time, Hidan will start to question.


    How can I recognize this guy as a master?


    Why don''t I have a memory of this guy in my mind?


    Then add Hidan''s original character, and it won''t take long for Hidan to of course notice that something is wrong, and eventuallypletely deny this thinking.


    But this is different.


    Naruto mainly changed Hidan''s thinking into ''Naruto is very important for Akatsuki, I must let Naruto join! As long as I work for Naruto, Naruto will definitely join Akatsuki in the future!''.


    This thinking is undoubtedly the best way!


    Hidan has always wanted to revive Akatsuki.


    Then he longed for Naruto, a strength strong guy, to join the Akatsuki. It was a normal thing, and there was nothing wrong with it.


    There is no reason to doubt himself.


    Then there is his character.


    If Hidan''s character is kind of impatient, he will give up as long as the time is long, then his loyalty to Naruto, of course, cannotst long.


    Obviously, Hidan may not be so persistent in patience.


    However, as long as it is rted to the rise and fall of Akatsuki, then he will easily give up so easily.


    The degree of desire, plus the importance attached to the Akatsuki.


    The two arebined. This formed an endless loop. Hidan can only work for Naruto non-stop.


    He won''t have a chance to wake up until this patience is polished. Of course, the chance of awakening can be said to be minimal, because during this period of time, as long as Naruto poured Hidan some poisonous chicken soup from time to time, maybe Hidan will always fall into this endless cycle and cannot get out.


    Therefore, changing Hidan to the current thinking is the biggest benefit to Naruto.


    ''Kotoamatsukami'' is not like system, there is no ''ability introduction'' to exin to Naruto.


    But this ''feeling'' is very urate.


    It can be said that this is the reason why the guys who opened Mangekyo Sharingan in the past have learned the ability of their eyes and the way they use it.


    Everything is based on feeling.


    As for... Why did Li Yaoxiang use ''Kotoamatsukami'' in the first ce to change the thinking of others in ''master'' way, the reason is also very simple.


    It is because he has the ability of ''one-time Kotoamatsukami'', he bought it from the system.


    Then of course he doesn''t have this so-called ''feel'' anymore.


    The exnation of system is notprehensive enough.


    He can only fumble slowly.


    After hearing Hidan''s question, Naruto was amused for no reason, but still said in a very cooperative way: "Must, definitely. Rest assured, I will join your Akatsuki in the future."


    After Hidan heard that, he was excitement!


    And patting the chest to ensure, "Rx, if you leave something to me to handle, I will definitely do it for you!"


    The two were satisfied.


    But Kakuzu was reluctant!


    He still felt that there must be something wrong! He didn''t want Naruto to run away on the way back, and then he had to waste some time to catch him.


    Doesn''t this dy him making money?!


    Some impatient Kakuzu suddenly yelled at the face, and did not mean to give face at all: "Enough! You idiot! Get out of the way! If you won''t do it, I''ll do it!"


    Hidan hearing this.


    Also angry!


    Hidan immediately stopped in front of Naruto, choked back: "Do it? What do you want to do?! I warn you, but he''s my future senior! If you dare to deal with him, I will fight with you!"


    Looking at this idiot in front of him, Kakuzu was irritated!


    Not waiting for what he said.


    At this time, Naruto stopped Hidan from behind. He smiled slightly at Kakuzu, and immediately turned Mangekyo Sharingan...


    After a while.


    In Kakuzu''s mind, there was an extra-firm thinking.


    As long as I work for Naruto, I will get an unprecedented great wealth in the future...

 Chapter 164: Classic partners, get off the hook

    Chapter 164: ssic partners, get off the hook


    After using Kotoamatsukami twice in a row, Naruto immediately felt weak.


    But this is not really ''weak''.


    Naruto knows very well that his physical condition is very good now. It''s just... he seems to feel the loss of his life force. And this loss should be the side effect of using this on Mangekyo Sharingan ability.


    He also discovered a limitation of his own eyes ability.


    That is, after using ''Kotoamatsukami'', in the short term, it is highly unlikely that he can use it anymore.


    Because the feeling of ''can change the thinking of others'' is gone.


    It can be used again a few yearster.


    But it doesn''t matter.


    If it wasn''t for confirming his guess, if not necessary, he didn''t want to rely too much on the power of these eyes. After all, he couldn''t close Sharingan. He could clearly feel that these eyes seemed to kill his life force all the time.


    Since putting on the pair of eyes, he has lost the feeling of ''strong vitality from the bloodline''.


    In other words.


    Opening Three-Tomoe Sharingan around the clock is to maintain a bnce with the powerful vitality of the Uzumaki n''s powerful life force.


    As long as he doesn''t use the ability, there won''t be any problems.


    After figuring out his physical condition, the kind of difort Naruto has been feeling these days has finally been a lot easier.


    And the good news doesn''t stop there.


    This time''s experiment also allowed him to harvest two ''freebor''.


    He can even use these two freebors to truly understand Akatsuki''s situation without letting the imagination run wild.


    Thinking of this, Naruto asked Hidan on the side: "Can you tell me about the situation of your organization''s leader?"


    Hearing Naruto asking about Nagato, Hidan mistakenly thought that Naruto had a dispute with Nagato. His brows could not help but lock up.


    As soon as he clenched the teeth, he made a decision now!


    "What''s wrong? Great Elder, do you have a grudge against the leader? No problem! I''ll help you kill him together!"


    Naruto looked towards this idiot a little speechlessly: "...You can still call me Naruto. I haven''t joined your Akatsuki, nor your Great Elder."


    Anyway.


    He asks a normal one, it should be more reliable.


    Naruto turned to Kakuzu and asked, "Can you let me know?"


    Kakuzu also put on a solemn expression.


    Naruto had to pay attention to this so-called Akatsuki leader.


    Don''t tell me..... This Akatsuki leader is really bottomless?


    When the two members talk about him, they all smell discolored?


    But while Naruto was still worried about Nagato, he heard Kakuzu also clenched his teeth and responded very hard: "You have to add money!"


    Naruto: "En?"


    Kakuzu: "If you want me to help you deal with the leader, you must add money!"


    Naruto:


    You have been thinking about emotions for so long, and your expression is so dignified, are you thinking about this problem?


    The corners of Naruto''s mouth twitched, and he forced a smile: "Don''t worry, don''t worry. After it''s done, the money will definitely be your share."


    Kakuzu hearing this.


    He breathes deeply, eyes shing!


    There is nothing to betray! If there is, it means that there is not enough money!


    Naruto: "Then... can you tell me now?"


    It was Kakuzu who told Naruto all of Akatsuki''s messages.


    Hidan added a few sentences from time to time.


    Afterbining the information disclosed by the two people, Naruto finally had a preliminary understanding of this so-called Akatsuki. But it is also very one-sided. He couldn''t fully believe what these two ''ssics'' said.


    Didn''t expect for Akatsuki leader to actually acted under the slogan ''world peace''.


    He doesn''t know whether it''s true or false.


    It seems that it is still necessary to meet with this Akatsuki leader before he can confirm again.


    Next.


    It''s a line of three people.


    Embarked on the journey to Akatsuki headquarters.


    ...


    two dayster.


    Hidan and Kakuzu took Naruto and brought Akatsuki''s base.


    They arrived to this Yahiko Puppet controlled by Nagato.


    Nagato waved his hand, signaling Hidan and Kakuzu to retreat.


    To his surprise, Hidan and Kakuzu did not follow his instructions, but still stood there motionless. Yahiko''s Puppet has no expression on the surface, but in fact, Nagato''s heart has already turned up the stormy sea!


    This is only a trip and two members have already betrayed him, no longer afraid of him.


    After being surprised, it transformed into excitement!


    Very well!


    He is very satisfied!


    The better Naruto''s ability is, the better it is for him.


    As long as he can persuade him, his philosophy is consistent with him, then after his death, he will be assured of this world to him. At least don''t worry too much about Naruto''s insufficient suppression of ''world peace''.


    Nagato heartily praised Naruto: "Yes! Being able to make my two subordinates rebel against me in such a short period of time, I am very satisfied with your ability!"


    Hidan stared fiercely at Nagato: "Don''t me me for not reminding you in advance! The three of us joined forces, don''t expect you will escape!" Hidan''s tone suddenly softened: "Well... of course..., if you promise me now that Naruto will join the Akatsuki, it is not impossible to consider, letting you go..."


    Kakuzu did not speak.


    Naruto also ignored Hidan this idiot.


    The reason why Naruto tantly exposed Hidan and Kakuzu.


    It was all because he wanted to give Nagato a p in the face, and only in this way would he be able to avoid being led by the nose in the subsequent exchanges.


    Since the dismissal has been given.


    Of course, there is no need for Kakuzu and Hidan to stay here again.


    Naruto: "You two go out first. I have something and I want to talk to your leader."


    Hidan cry out in surprise: "Great Elder! This doesn''t work!"


    Kakuzu also brows tightly frowns, he was afraid that Naruto would be in trouble.


    Naruto: "Rx, I will have no problem, you go out first."


    However, Naruto''s two ''ssic partners'' couldn''t help but leave.


    After two people leave.


    Nagato jokingly said: "I didn''t expect them to care about your safety."


    Naruto coldly said: "Don''t talk nonsense. You let them bring me, and now I''ve arrived. Go straight to the subject, what do you have to tell me?"


    Nagato: "This is not a good ce to talk. Do you have any guts to go with me to another ce? And then we sit down and talk. Of course, if you don''t have the guts, then this meeting will be dismissed. That would mean I have misunderstood your character, you can take those two people away, and I will not stop you. But next time we meet again, maybe I will stand in front of you as an enemy."

 Chapter 165: From the same clan, Nagatos test

    Chapter 165: From the same n, Nagato''s test


    Naruto also has a certain degree of confidence in his current strength.


    Even if the leader of Akatsuki is so strong, no matter how strong the strength is, and he had set a tricky trap, Naruto believes that even if he can''t fight back, he can run away.


    So, after hearing the provocative words of Nagato.


    Naruto''s eyes slightly narrowed and responded: "Then lead the way."


    Nagato, who is controlling Yahiko Puppet remotely, sees this situation and is more satisfied with Naruto''s attitude. He wanted to create a peaceful world by crushing power.


    That means that in the days toe, there will be ambitious schemers that will never be killed, re like a tiger watching his prey to you!


    If you are a little careless, you will be signed to eternal damnation.


    Without no guts, how can they face their challenges?


    How can you shoulder the important task of world peace?


    Naruto has strength, so the test of courage became the second question Nagato gave Naruto.


    Now that Naruto''s performance has sessfully passed the 2nd threshold set in his heart, Nagato does not n to dy time anymore, controlling Yahiko, a Puppet, and turns away.


    Naruto followed along.


    After a while.


    One person and one Puppet came to the Akatsuki base, a more secret ce.


    Very few people will find this ce.


    Very few people wille.


    There is a gate a few meters high.


    Nagato controlled Yahiko Puppet, came to the gate, stopped, and turned to look at Naruto.


    Naruto took a look at his surroundings, and finally looked at the door behind Nagato, jokingly said: "What''s the matter? We''re here, don''t you n to let me in?"


    Nagato: "Before I go in, I think I need to introduce myself to you again. I am from Ame Vige, the Akatsuki leader. At the same time, you can also call me Nagato since we have the samest name; Uzumaki Nagato is my full name."


    After hearing this introduction, Naruto expression changed slightly.


    This is the first time he has seen the same nsman in his life.


    The gaze looking at Nagato could not help but soften a lot.


    Naruto''s slightly changed expression, Nagato also sees it. How could he not understand Naruto''s feelings? Being able to meet again with the nsman of the same root with different branches in the long sea of people, saying that there is no feeling, it must be fake.


    Nagato continued: "What? What do you think of the destruction of our Uzumaki n? Or, what do you think of the variousrge and small wars over the years?"


    Naruto brows slightly wrinkle: "I feel very sorry for the destruction of my mother''s n. When this happened, I was not yet born. If you want me to look for the culprit for that matter of revenge, I''m sorry, I don''t have any intention to do so. As for war... It is their business to fight to death. As long as it doesn''t hinder me, I don''t want to manage these things."


    Nagato: "Hehe, do you think you can really be alone?"


    Naruto''s eyebrows were even tighter: "Just tell me directly, don''t scribble with me anymore."


    Nagato: "Now that you have conquered my two subordinates, I believe you have a certain understanding of our Akatsuki? I just want to tell you that our slogan is not for nothing. World peace is the original intention of creating Akatsuki, and it is also the ultimate goal that I want to achieve now!"


    Naruto said dissatisfiedly: "I have already said that I am not interested in these things."


    Nagato: "Oh? Really? Then you must be interested in the resurrection technique?"


    Long before the meeting, Nagato had already learned all kinds of information about Naruto through White Zetsu, including Naruto wanted to resurrect Hinata, including Naruto who had seen Orochimaru, all were perfectly clear.


    So Nagato is now trying to attract Naruto with the resurrection technique.


    And through this Jutsu, convince Naruto to agree with his own ideas!


    Naruto heard the word ''resurrection''.


    His heart can''t help getting tight.


    He was not interested in knowing why Nagato knew his things so well.


    He just wanted to know if Nagato could resurrect Hinata!


    Now that the other side knows what he cares about most, there is no need to cover up any more, Naruto firmly stared Nagato, waiting for Nagato to continue to speak.


    Nagato: "I do know how to resurrect."


    Naruto said with clenched teeth: "What are your requirements?"


    Nagato: "Before telling my request, let me talk about you first. If I help you resurrect Hyuga Hinata, what will you do in the future?"


    Speaking of Hinata.


    Speaking of the days toe.


    Naruto naturally remembered the scene that two people secretly imagined when they secretly met in Konoha.


    In his mind are the pictures of those two people yearning for life.


    Naruto subconscious replied: "I will take Hinata to a ce where no one knows us, start over and live a quiet life."


    "Yes, it''s a beautiful fantasy." Nagato first sighed, and then shouted, "But do you think that being born in this troubled world, there is really such a calm ce that will let you be alone?"


    Naruto''s brow tightly locked again!


    He didn''t understand what Nagato meant.


    His age, his knowledge, and his experience over the years are not enough to let him see through everything in this world.


    Naruto: "What do you mean?"


    Nagato: "Over the years, whether it is a Great Country or a small country, it has experienced variousrge and small wars. Themon folks suffered because of this, so it leads to the destruction of the family and the separation of families. The best example is you. So, do you really think that as long as you don''t cause trouble, trouble won''te to you? Wherever you are, as long as someone finds out that you own this strength, the local authority will either covet your strength or fear your strength. It will only be directed at you and the people you value most. In case something goes wrong, Hyuga Hinata will die because of you... again. When the timees what will you do? Are you looking for resurrection techniques all over the world? How can you be sure that after a person is resurrected once, they can be resurrected a second time?"


    After hearing it, Naruto was as if he was hit by Nagato, it knocked him awake!


    The spection that Nagato said; Narutomented from the bottom of his heart, that there is really a great possibility that it will happen. No matter how careful he is, he can''t guard against these people like thieves all the time.


    What if Hinata is really killed again?


    What should I do?


    After so many things, he is no longer the real Naruto in the original series. He will no longer pin the safety of himself or those around him on the thoughts of others.


    He will never hope that others will have good intentions and will not deal with him and those around him.


    Naruto''s expression, or movement, has changed significantly.


    His fist clenched.


    The facial expression was even more hideous.


    He vowed secretly that he would never let this happen again!


    Nagato have been focused on Naruto''s changes.


    The 3rd threshold set by Nagato passed again.


    Without waiting for Naruto''s answer this time, Nagato turned around and pushed open the heavy gate, saying, "Come in."

 Chapter 166: Harsh conditions, wont give up

    Chapter 166: Harsh conditions, won''t give up


    Thick doors a few meters high.


    ''rumble'' sounded.


    Slowly pushed away by Puppet Yahiko.


    When Naruto was recovered from his thoughts, Yahiko already stood in the distance and looked at him, waiting for a long time. Naruto walked into the door. Check everything around.


    The scene here is not much different from the scene outside.


    However, there are two more people in the door.


    A man and a woman.


    The man was sitting on a high chair, skinny as a wood, seemingly weak.


    The female stood beside the man, as if guarding the man.


    What surprised Naruto the most is that the so-called Akatsuki leader, ''Yahiko'' Puppet, is now standing behind the skinny guy.


    Looks like this scrawny guy, the head of the horse.


    A man and a woman Naruto saw were of course the main body of Nagato and Konan.


    Nagato brought Naruto here today because after Naruto passed the three thresholds set in his heart, Nagato already had the intention to confess everything to Naruto.


    After all, Naruto must rely on himself in order to resurrect Hinata, and with the lobbying just now, Nagato is not afraid that Naruto will not agree to his request.


    Naruto faced Nagato who was sitting high, hesitantly said: "You are..."


    Nagato said with a slight smile: "As you can see, this is my main body. How is it? Isn''t it ridiculous? The body has be like this, and it''s just trying to achieve world peace."


    Naruto was about to start talking-


    Nagato interrupted: "Perhaps you are very puzzled, even ridicules me, why do I have to manage so much, why I have to persevere... I can only say... You, who also belong to Uzumaki n, are much happier than me. You can never feel the cruelty of war, and never realize how precious ''peace'' is... You have not experienced war, you do not care about these, I do not me you. But I am different from you. When Land-of-Whirlpools was destroyed and Uzumaki n was destroyed, I was just a child. I watched one after another n members killed in front of me. I watched my parents sacrificed themselves to save me. In the end, I couldn''t bear to escape to Ame Vige, but I encountered war again..."


    Speaking of it.


    Nagato took a look at Konan, then Yahiko, and continued: "I, who have no family or no reason, met them there. We, who are also victims of war, can only survive by picking up garbage or stealing... Recalling that year... I can''t even imagine how us three children survived in that kind of evil environment! We have had enough of those days! We don''t want our descendant to suffer the same thing! So, we, at that time made a vow! We must create a peaceful paradise and create a ce free from war! Cough! cough! cough!"


    The more Nagato said, the more excited he became.


    He still couldn''t bear to cough a few times.


    Konan hurriedly wanted to support Nagato, but Nagato waved his hand to reject her good intentions.


    Nagato was going to continue!


    Followed by.


    Nagato began to tell about their changes.


    Yahiko''s death made him realize that in this corrupt world, it is simply impossible to realize their dreams! To realize their dreams, the only thing they can do is topletely change this already rotten world!


    Finished.


    Nagato was so excited that his face was flushed, and he said to Naruto with a trembling tone: "So, do you understand my feeling now? Understand why do I stick to it?!"


    Although very touching and also great.


    But Naruto couldn''t hear it.


    Right now he only wants to resurrect Hinata. As long as it wasn''t about Hinata, Naruto couldn''t focus on it.


    Naruto faithfully replied: "I''m sorry, since you already know the purpose of mying here, then you should know how important Hinata is to me. Apart from resurrecting Hinata, I have no mood to manage other things..."


    The atmosphere became awkward.


    Konan was about to start to talk and scold Naruto.


    But was stopped by Nagato: "It''s okay... I think it''s too as it should be by rights. I shouldn''t force you to agree with our ideas. Since you only care about how to resurrect Hyuga Hinata, then let''s talk about this matter."


    Just as expected.


    When Naruto heard this key word, he was 100% full of energy and was afraid that he would miss any of Nagato''s next words.


    Nagato resumed calmly said: "I do have the ability to help you resurrect Hyuga Hinata, but... before I resurrect her, you have to help me fulfill the desire for world peace."


    Naruto''s body shook, and expression became extremely dignified.


    Nagato''s request is not high, you say?


    Want world peace? Easier said than done.


    Moreover, who can guarantee that Nagato will resurrect Hinata after it is done?


    Naruto had to take these factors into consideration.


    Thinking for a long time.


    Naruto suddenly discovered a loophole in Nagato''s speech. Naruto expressed poorly at the moment and questioned: "Why do I believe what you say? Since you said you can resurrect the dead. Then why not resurrect Yahiko?"


    Nagato directly replied: "Do you really think that I don''t need to pay for resurrecting a person? Excessive use of my Eye Ability will only make me weaker. Resurrect him and I will die. And lost my strength. We can never achieve our dreams. Simrly, you can see my physical condition now. Help you resurrect Hyuga Hinata, I will die. Therefore, if you want me to help you, you have to help me realize the dream of world peace before I die."


    At this time, Naruto was really in trouble.


    The past experiences of Sarutobi Hiruzen, the hypocritical guy, gave Naruto the shadow that lingered, driving today''s Naruto to have to consider everything carefully.


    Here, there are still a lot of tricks that can''t be sorted out.


    For example, how to ensure that Nagato will not break his promise.


    For example, how can Nagato confirm that after his death, world will not be chaotic again? If Nagato even didn''t expect this, does it mean that he never thought of keeping his promise?


    Unfortunately...


    No matter howplicated the problem is.


    In front of Naruto, there is still only one choice.


    That is to agree to the request of Nagato!


    After all, no matter whether Nagatoplies, or breaks his promise, he has no choice. Hinata must be resurrected! Even if there is only one in ten thousand possibilities, he will not let go of any chance to resurrect Hinata!


    Naruto was cheerful.


    His brows stretched.


    "I can promise you, but how can you guarantee that Hinata will be resurrected afterwards?"

 Chapter 167: Two choices, choose one of two

    Chapter 167: Two choices, choose one of two


    Nagato seemed to have expected Naruto to ask this question.


    He seemed calm.


    After all, since the moment he wanted to invite Naruto, the Nine-Tails Jinchuriki, to join him, he had thought of all the solutions to ensure that he would not have any problems after his death.


    Nagato: "My goal is to hope for world peace. If you help me achieve this goal, but I have not helped you resurrect Hyuga Hinata, you can just destroy my goal."


    Naruto thought about it for a moment and questioned again: "You are so confident that when you die, the world will not be confused again?"


    Nagato: "This is my second requirement for you. After my death, you must use your own power to suppress everything for me. Maintain world peace. Of course, I can''t make sure. In fact, this is also helping you. Only if world is truly peaceful, then you can live the peaceful life you want with Hyuga Hinata."


    In fact, Naruto is already a little bit tempted.


    Because Nagato was very clear, Naruto felt Nagato was right.


    As long as there is still war in this world, there will definitely be ambitious schemers, the idea of ying Tailed Beast. When the timees, as Nine-Tails Jinchuriki, he will inevitably get into trouble.


    A little careless, perhaps it will affect Hinata again.


    This is not the result he wants to see.


    Therefore, in public or in private, either for Hinata or Nagato, he must also create a world he wants before Hinata is resurrected, and strive to maintain this world, let himself, let Hinata, live the peaceful life that they have longed for a long time.


    To make sure that Nagato is not just saying lip service.


    Naruto is still picking bones in the egg, questioning again: "Oh, after the resurrection of Hinata, and you are dead. How can you ensure that I will keep my promise? You are not afraid of me when the timees?"


    Nagato squinted and smiled, patted Konan''s arm: "If you break the contract, then Konan will only do one thing in her future life. She will kill Hyuga Hinata. Although Konan couldn''t help you. But you can''t guard Hinata Hyuga around the clock, can you?"


    Nagato spoke the threatening words calmly.


    After hearing this, Naruto was not only angry, but more excited!


    The more prepared Nagato is, the lower the probability that Nagato will deceive him! From the side, does this mean that Nagato can really revive Hinata?


    I''ve been running around for a long time. I finally saw hope!


    Naruto can no longer suppress his emotions.


    Not saying anything further, directly promised: "I can promise you. What do you want me to do?"


    Seeing Naruto impatiently promised.


    Also excited is Nagato himself!


    He is very confident that, together with Naruto''s power, he will soon be able to aplish the goal of world peace! Nagato''s excitement and even breathing became a little more rapid.


    Nagato: "Our 1st Step n is to make money! Make enough money to maintain future operating costs! But you don''t have to worry about this, the 1st Step n have beenpleted! Now what we want to implement is the 2nd Step n! Initiate a war between great powers! Only when everyone really feels the pain of war will they cherish the peace we bring in the future! I''m not afraid to tell you the truth, the previous us had been carrying out the n to recover the Tailed Beasts. The purpose is to let the great countries lose this power called Disaster Level! As long as the major countries and major Ninja viges still have this kind of disaster-level power in their hands. Then they will have scruples and dare notunch a truly all-out war, for fear that either side will jump the wall in a hurry and destroy everything desperately. Without this power, they will have no more scruples! But your appearance made me suspend the original n. As you can see, even if my dream is really sessful, my body won''tst long. That''s why I want you to inherit my will and protect this hard-won peace for me."


    Hearing the feeling of capturing Tailed Beasts, Naruto couldn''t help getting dark.


    What if Gaara is one of their targets?


    Naruto: "There are no other methods to cause war? Since you are so clear about my past, then you should know that Jinchuriki of Suna Vige is my friend. I won''t do anything with him. I won''t let you do anything with him."


    Nagato didn''t panic, and the issues that Naruto was worried about were already under Nagato''s consideration: "Yes. Five Great Countries, Five-Great Ninja Viges, can be said to be barely maintaining the bnce of this world. Because of this bnce, various problems have been extended over the years. They may be to consolidate their position. Or to weaken other great countries, etc. Caused by the continuous wars of various sizes; small, big. So, if you don''t want to me take any Tailed Beast and want to start a full-scale war, then we can justpletely break this bnce and destroy one of the Five-Great Ninja Viges! When the timees, in order to grab the lost territory and grab the benefits, the rest of the Four-Great Countries will naturally initiate a full-scale war! It is up to you to decide which n you want to implement, and I will fully cooperate with you."


    After listening to Nagato''smentary, Naruto''s heart is veryplicated.


    Topletely destroy a Ninja Vige, then... wouldn''t that mean to kill many people? If you want me to kill someone, you can. But you want me to carry out indiscriminate ughter of innocent people. Such a thing, Naruto still can''t do it.


    Naruto stood there.


    Thinking for a long time.


    Nagato did not interrupt him.


    In the end, in desperation, Naruto chose the first more benevolent n, namely capturing Tailed Beasts. However, he made a request to Nagato.


    In any moment or any condition, Gaara cannot be shot.


    Nagato thought about it again, and felt that missing a Tailed Beast should have little impact on their n, so he should bear it.


    In the end they were all happy.


    Two people reached an agreementpletely.


    Nagato will let Akatsuki''s members cooperate fully with Naruto''s actions.


    Naruto began his ''Capturing Tailed Beasts'' journey.


    ...


    At the same time.


    A secret base built underground.


    ''Rumble'' rang in the base.


    This is where Uchiha Madara passed away, and it is also the current residence of Obito. The reason why there is such a close bombing sound in the base is that Obito is attacking everything around it in a state seems crazy.


    Nagato suddenly changed his n.


    This makes Obito, who is eager to implement ''Infinite Tsukuyomi'', feel extremely angry. He is helpless about it.


    Because he understands, the current him simply is not the opponent of Nagato.


    Doesn''t work making Nagato change his mind.


    With Nagato''s Rinnegan, it''s impossible for him.


    This kind of aggrieved feeling makes him very upset.


    Everything was going very smoothly, why did it suddenly be like this?!

 Chapter 168: Obitos decision, three months later

    Chapter 168: Obito''s decision, three monthster


    Obito''s residence.


    After the bombing continued for a period of time, Obito was angered at ck Zetsu, who was silent for the gasping for breath, and said: "Damn it! Don''t you want to be resurrected?! Isn''t the n for ''Infinite Tsukuyomi'' proposed by you first?! Now that Nagato hastily changed the n, how can you still be so calm?! Why do I seem to care more about this n than you?! Are you going to give up?!"


    Until now.


    Obito thinks that ck Zetsu inherited Uchiha Madara''s will.


    That''s why he took ck Zetsu as his partner.


    However, what he didn''t know was that the few questions he arbitrarily raised because of venting, really happened to be in the ck Zetsu''s mind at the moment.


    It''s not that ck Zetsu doesn''t want to realize the ''Infinite Tsukuyomi'' n.


    It''s ck Zetsu''s own n that he was unsure about.


    1000 years ofyout.


    Continuously guiding Uchiha n and Senju n to continue the war is to make Awakening Rinnegan through the hatred brought by the war.


    Now it''s hard to wait.


    But there was an unexpected situation again.


    How could he expect that this generation of Asura and Indra reincarnation would grow so fast. They are all strong enough to stop him from implementing the Infinite Tsukuyomi n.


    He was worried that this n would be blocked by two people when he was at the door.


    It even reveals its identity.


    Then hisyout for the past 1000 years really be futile.


    So he didn''t dare to blog.


    Dare not to participate in this matter again.


    He would rather wait another 70-80 years, and wait for this generation of Asura and Indra reincarnation to diepletely before proceeding with his ''save mother'' n, rather than letting his ambition be exposed at this time.


    Otherwise, if something bad happens and his deeds were recorded in a historical way, it will be even more difficult when he wants to implement the Infinite Tsukuyomi n again. This world will be vignt against him from now on. If he wants to eliminate these historical traces, he can''t do it in 100-200 years.


    TL note: ck Zetsu (Kuro Zetsu) is the physical manifestation of Kaguya tsutsuki''s will. Having been created to secure its creator''s revival, it secretly instigated many events that shaped the shinobi world, during which it posed as Madara Uchiha''s manifested will, leading to it being partnered with White Zetsu to be half of the Akatsuki member known simply as Zetsu (Zetsu). When Madara was on the verge of death, he believed he had created ck Zetsu by imbuing his will into half of White Zetsu, and that theplete Zetsu was partially his clone. In reality, it was ck Zetsuing out of Madara''s body after hiding inside of his body during his death. Zetsuter apanied Obito Uchiha to Amegakure to locate Nagato, who had unknowingly been given Madara''s Rinnegan as a child, and watched as Obito introduced himself as Madara Uchiha.


    ck Zetsu said indifferently: "The development of things has been beyond my expectations. To ensure the sess of the n, I decided to lurch first. Of course, if you insist on action, I can let White Zetsu help you from the side. The only condition is that you cannot expose my existence."


    Uchiha Obito crazy said with a smile: "Hahahaha! What a Uchiha Madara, the old God of Ninja World you are! Aren''t you just afraid of them?! Well! If you don''t do it, let me do it! Since you don''t have the guts to take this risk, don''t expect me to resurrect you as agreed!"


    Finished.


    Obito left the base.


    He doesn''t want to stay with ck Zetsu, who is backing away.


    He is not like ck Zetsu. He has no infinite life, wait. Ninja World''s average lifespan, how old are they? He is almost 30 years old now. Wait a minute, doesn''t he change from middle-aged uncle to an old fogey?


    Even if the n is sessful, how can he face Nohara Rin?


    So in any case, Obito must n Infinite Tsukuyomi and continue!


    As for ck Zetsu...


    Hehe.


    Of course, he was happy to see it done.


    As long as he doesn''t have to reveal his identity and purpose, he was also happy to get such a crazy Obito and carry out the n alone. Anyway, if Obito fails, he will wait another 60-70 years.


    Wait for Naruto and Sasuke to die old.


    If Obito seeds?


    It couldn''t be better!


    He doesn''t mind when the timees and the fisherman catches both, just like in the original work, give Obito a pit and grab the head.


    ...


    Time flies.


    Years are like a shuttle.


    In a sh, 3 months passed.


    Prior to this, due to the butterfly effect of Li Yaoxiang, Nagato suspended the capture of Tailed Beasts n, so many of the original work, Tailed Beast or Jinchuriki, which should have been resolved, are still free.


    It''s a pity that the days when they can get away with it can only end here.


    After all, since the moment Naruto agreed to Nagato''s request 3 months ago, he embarked on his ''Tailed Beast'' journey. And now that the time hase three monthster, Naruto will certainly not be fruitless.


    He has sessfully captured Land-of-Water''s Jinchuriki of Hidden Mist Vige, Six-Tails Saiken; and Land-of-Earth''s Jinchuriki of Hidden Stone Vige, Four-Tails Son Goku.


    Naruto did not kill them.


    It''s just serious injury and handed them to Nagato.


    Nagato in this life, because he promised Naruto that he would let Naruto take full responsibility for this n, so Nagato also listened to Naruto''s opinion. He did not directly kill these Jinchuriki who had serious injury, but gave them a chance.


    As long as you abandon the secrets and join them, you can live.


    Unfortunately...


    These Jinchuriki unable to tell good from bad, can''t always agree with Nagato''s concept.


    Seeing this, Naruto is no longer benevolent.


    Let Nagato extract their within-the-body Tailed Beast, lest they wille out at a crunch moment in the future. Compared to Hinata, they are nothing!


    Since you are not willing to cooperate, then go to hell!


    I am benevolent! There is no obligation to stop your courting death!


    After the sessful capturing of Four-Tails and Six-Tails, Naruto left Akatsuki''s base and embarked on his ''Tailed Beast Capturing'' journey again. After that, Jinchuriki was captured and Tailed Beast was recovered. In Naruto''s heart, the matter seemed like a little thing like sesame and green beans.


    It''s just that during this period of time that Naruto embarked on a journey, what he didn''t know was that the little thing with sesame and green beans in his eyes had already exploded the entire pot of Ninja World!


    The Complete Body Nine-Tails appears frequently again and again, and even Five Great Countries has to treat Naruto with caution!


    Until now, Daimyo of Five Great Countries looks like giving tit for tat on the surface, but in fact they have amon goal, which is to weaken the Ninja World and consolidate the imperial power!


    This is why the variousrge and small wars have continued over the years.


    It''s not that we can''t coexist peacefully, but these Daimyos never even wanted peace!


    Based on their various decisions, it is not difficult to see their thoughts. Like Land-of-Wind, a small government policy has weakened the funding of Suna Vige. This forced Suna Vige to have feuds with Konoha.


    The Daimyos has the patience and support of the Twelve Guardian Ninjas.


    TL note: The Twelve Guardian Ninja (Shugonin Jnishi, English TV: Guardian Shinobi Twelve, literally meaning: Twelve Gentlemen Guardian Ninja) were the bodyguards of the Land of Fire''s daimy. Membership is indicated by the waistcloth they wear, marked with the kanji for "Fire" (Hi).


    But they impatiently wanted Konoha to disband the guards.


    For example, their technology research direction is often in the development of technology to deal with ninja, rather than research and development of Limin''s technology. This series of small actions, although it is just an unremarkable fuse, is precisely what caused Naruto World''s ongoing disputes.


    Really want peace.


    Can''t they do it?


    No!


    Yes, and it''s easy.


    As long as natural resources and material-rich Land-of-Fire open the door to convenience, opens the door to convenience and allows other countries to trade the required items at this central point, the entire Naruto World will no longer need to fight.


    Can they do this?


    Hehe.


    Will not.


    Ninja World is like a Greatsword around their neck, threatening their status and life all the time, so they will not let Ninja World develop peacefully.


    They are weak.


    The only thing that can be done is to continue to cause war and constantly weaken the power of Ninja World.


    The best way to meet their interests is to weaken the strength of Five-Great Ninja Viges while maintaining the strength of Five-Great Ninja Viges at a bnce point.


    The strength of any party is not suitable for being too strong or too weak.


    Otherwise, if you are a little careless and the war is too violent, it will affect their rich life.


    This is an unclear practice among Daimyos.


    However, it is now clear that Naruto''s approach has undoubtedlypletely broken this bnce, which is not the result they can ept, so Daimyos of Five Great Countries came to a secret meeting for this matter...

 Chapter 169: The strength of the true protagonist, the darkening value is too much

    Chapter 169: The strength of the true protagonist, the darkening value is too much


    Konoha Vige.


    Sasuke''s home.


    Sasuke sat on the chair expressionlessly, tapping on the table and asked, "Can you tell me, you always let me pick up these E-Rank and D-Rank missions, what does it mean? What does it have to do with resurrecting my family? If you just want to enjoy jokes and y with me, that''s okay. I can satisfy your bad taste. However, I hope that you will keep your promise afterwards and resurrect my family."


    Sasuke said this.


    It was all because after Naruto left Konoha, Li Yaoxiang asked him from time to time to pick up some missions in search of cats, dogs or dogs, or to pick up garbage and clean up the river.


    And Sasuke was indeed right.


    Li Yaoxiang is indeed ying with him.


    Because this is rted to Li Yaoxiang''sst step of darkening n, Li Yaoxiang had to do so and had to find ways to anger Sasuke.


    Of course, sometimes, it is not purely fooling around.


    During this period, Li Yaoxiang also asked Sasuke and Sai to solve several ''movie'' plots in advance.


    It''s like solving the trouble of Land-of-Demons in advance.


    It''s like solving the trouble of the empty country in advance.


    It''s like resolving the troubles of humiliation in advance and so on.


    This is the main reason why Li Yaoxiang kept Sasuke and Sai in Konoha. He didn''t understand the extent to which these little bosses in the movie version would grow after Naruto participated in these movie versions.


    Therefore, to avoid these little viins out of the game from messing up his n.


    Li Yaoxiang can only let them go to hell earlier.


    "Ha ~~" Li Yaoxiang''s tone was very arrogant, and he didn''t mean to answer Sasuke positively. He respondedzily in Sasuke''s mind, "You don''t want to do it, you don''t have to~ I didn''t force you."


    Sasuke still had that numb expression.


    After listening to Li Yaoxiang, Sasuke was silent for a period of time.


    I don''t know how long it has passed, so he said indifferently: "Okay, I will do it. You can tell me what you want. This time, what mission will you let me take?"


    "Erm... What mission?... The nearest river seems to have piled up a lot of garbage, so you have to clean it up again." The tone of this sentence alone.


    How could Sasuke fail to notice that Li Yaoxiang said this casually just to send him off?


    But Sasuke is still not crazy.


    He went silent for a long period of time.


    In the end said nothing.


    He got up and left the house, and walked directly to the task transfer point in the vige.


    Seeing Sasuke swallowing his anger, and under the gaze of everyone, he took on the task of cleaning the river, Li Yaoxiang knew that his goal was very close to the edge of sess.


    To let Sasuke, a powerful man with shadow-level strength, have to fight for the task of picking up rubbish with newly graduated novices, this is simply a humiliation to Sasuke''s naked...nakedness.


    With a top-level n, Uchiha n should have that sense of honor.


    Even if it is clear that he is not an opponent of Li Yaoxiang, does Sasuke really endure this breath so easily?


    Obviously, the answer is impossible!


    Sasuke does not seem to care on the surface, but in fact it is the opposite!


    He is not unresponsive.


    In fact, the anger in his heart has already endured to a limit. However, in order to resurrect his family, he tried his best to suppress his emotions.


    And he has been silent for a long period of time two times in a row just because he is trying to resist the anger in his heart, which is about to approach the edge of the outbreak!


    Although Sasuke does not want Li Yaoxiang to discover his emotional clues.


    But how could his little trick hide Li Yaoxiang''s eyes?


    Li Yaoxiang is even more satisfied with this.


    Sasuke is more repressed now, which means that when rainstormes, Sasuke will only be more violent!


    This is exactly what Li Yaoxiang wanted!


    Seeing his own goal has been achieved.


    Li Yaoxiang did not intend to stay here. If it weren''t for the final darkening n, he didn''t have such a bad taste to deliberately mock Sasuke and watch Sasuke pick up trash.


    Li Yaoxiang moved.


    The soul suddenly floated out of Sasuke''s body.


    Immediately ascending to high altitude, Li Yaoxiang flew back to his residence.


    In the process of flying, the cynical attitude that Sasuke was still ridiculing just now has long since disappeared, and what has changed is a worried expression on his face.


    The mind is focused on the system interface.


    [Host: Li Yaoxiang


    Darkening goal: Uzumaki Naruto


    Soul: 3240


    Darkening degree: 83%


    Darkening value: 331050


    Mall: Omitted ]


    Naruto with 83% darkening degree; Asura''s influence on him is actually minimal. If you say that at the beginning, most of the motivation for Li Yaoxiang in the process of darkening Naruto was that he felt worthless and angry for his younger brother, and wanted to help him get rid of his fate andpletely get rid of Asura''s mercy.


    So now he insists on darkening Naruto to 100% for himself.


    Before being transmigrated, his dream was to travel around the world, but he had no money and did not dare to hope, so he simply-minded to make a soaring wish for All Heavens Myriad Realms.


    And a transmigrator that yearns to travel around the world and soars to All Heavens Myriad Realms, how can he be reconciled to his journey, only staying in one world?


    So he persevered.


    He had never thought that he woulde to this step.


    But even if he fights from the very beginning, he has made some psychological preparations for the difficulty of the darkening Naruto mission.


    But he didn''t expect it''s really that difficult.


    Sasuke''s fake death and Hinata''s death were still not enough to make Naruto darkening to 100%, which made Li Yaoxiang''s mood sink.


    The data given by this darkening System, reward, all make him very dissatisfied!


    As early as the darkening level was more than 60%, Li Yaoxiang had already spent 400,000 darkening value to redeem a pair of Rinnegan. Perhaps it is because he always controls the thoughts of others, and that he is proficient in Flying Thunder God Jutsu.


    Therefore, in addition to the various capabilities of Rinnegan, he also awakened the abilities of Kotoamatsukami and Kamui, a pair Mangekyo Sharingan.


    At this point, his strength, in Naruto World, was finally ranked high.


    Then when the darkening degree was more than 80%, in order to keep his handsome appearance unchanged and lifespan no longer restricted, he spent 800,000 darkening value and exchanged for a Divine Tree''s fruit.


    The next step is to slowly wait for his body to start to change sharply.


    Although after absorbing this Divine Tree''s fruit, Li Yaoxiang couldn''t get all the Ninjutsu of Ninja World immediately like othermodities, and he needed to dig slowly and understand.


    But the characteristics of immortality alone are enough to make him proud of Naruto World.


    But herees the problem!


    He is almost invincible in Naruto World. The level of Naruto darkening shown on the system is only 83%. What does that mean?!


    With so many darkening values remaining, what does he intends to do?!

 Chapter 170: Persevere to the end, leave a footprint

    Chapter 170: Persevere to the end, leave a footprint


    What standard does the system use to give the degree of darkening?


    How to get 100% on darkening Naruto?


    Also, with so many darkening values remaining, what can they still be used for?


    Buying a ''one-time Kotoamatsukami'' is only 7000 darkening value, does it mean that at thete stage, if Li Yaoxiang is willing, he can even change the thinking of thousands of people andplete the task of darkening all together?


    In another world, is it possible to repeat the trick again? Everyone in the darkening ''goal'' can bepleted 100% in a short time?


    This wave of operation of the system is simply expressly showing that Li Yaoxiang is doing this, isn''t it?


    Without any effort, he canplete the mission, go to the next world, and fulfill his desire to soar All Heavens Myriad Realms.


    But the question is, if this is done, what will happen to the world after darkening? Everyone is darkened, I guess it''s not going to be any better?


    If the purpose of the system is like that...


    Hehe.


    That Li Yaoxiang the transmigrator yearning for traveling around the world is destined to disappoint the system!


    Li Yaoxiang wants to fly.


    Before being transmigrated, Li Yaoxiang was not less than student, and his friendsughed at his name. Because the word ''Xiang'' is considered to be broken by people in his hometown.


    But Li Yaoxiang never disliked his name.


    On the contrary, he is very satisfied with this ''xiang'' in his name.


    This is the name given to him by his parents.


    He hopes he will soar above the sky, free from shackles.


    At the same time, this is exactly what Li Yaoxiang most yearned for.


    So he thinks this "Xiang" is very fitting.


    Because of this, as a transmigrator who loves freedom and travel, he likes most people who like to travel, want to eat food all over the world, want to experience for local conditions and customs all over the world, and so on.


    And the most important thing is what every tourist wants most, of course, leaving their footprints all over the world! So there will be so many ''who had came here'', so many carved stones full of ''who love who'' and so on.


    If strength is not allowed, someone might want to leave their statue!


    And now Li Yaoxiang, since there is such an opportunity to soar All Heavens Myriad Realms, he is certainly satisfied to write a random ''Journey Here'' and forget it!


    It is also impossible to make these ces be a Purgatory World after he left!


    Therefore, he should bepletely reduced to being the system''s tool ording to the will of the system.


    SORRY


    This is impossible!


    Therefore, all he needs to do is toplete the goal to 100%, and before leaving, let the goal lead a happy and happy life, so that in every world, he really left his footprint!


    This will also be his ultimate goal of soaring All Heavens Myriad Realms!


    However, this goal sounds very simple.


    But it is very difficult to do.


    Just like Naruto today.


    Have experienced so many things, but there are still 17% that have not been darkened yet.


    Don''t look at just 17% and think it''s easy to get it.


    In the end, the 17%,pared with the 17% at the beginning is a difference between heaven and earth! You know, now Naruto''s soul value has 3two points.


    As mentioned before, the soul value also represents a person''s willpower.


    The normal person''s willpower will not exceed 10 points.


    But because of Asura, Naruto has a wonderful soul value''s limit of 40 points! It can be seen that if he wants to increase the final 17%, how difficult it is can be imagined.


    It''s definitely not like darkening at the beginning.


    This is one of the main reasons why Li Yaoxiang gradually reduced hismunication with Naruto. In addition to expressing as big brother that he was very disappointed with the younger brother Naruto and allowed Naruto to grow up quickly. It was because Li Yaoxiang understood that verbal ''mouth gun'' would be impossible to fool Naruto.


    As Naruto grows older.


    With the strengthening of Naruto''s willpower.


    As Naruto''s experience became more abundant.


    Naruto has begun to learn to think by himself, to learn to see everything by himself, rather than blindly obey Li Yaoxiang''s words ormands.


    This led to Li Yaoxiang''s effect of staying with Naruto bing minimal.


    Because of this, after Naruto experienced Sasuke''s fake death and Hinata''s death, and could not be darkened to 100%, Li Yaoxiang had to implement thest step he had nned for many years.


    Thinking about it.


    Li Yaoxiang had returned to his room unconsciously.


    Fortunately, during his Astral Projection, his flesh can be stored in the consciousness space, just like the crystal ball, which can be stored or taken out at will, so there is not much trouble for him.


    Fleshy body appeared in the room out of thin air, closing his eyes and standing upright.


    Even after absorbing the fruits of Divine Tree and Rinnegan, Li Yaoxiang''s appearance has not changed, just like when he was redeeming Uzumaki n Bloodline, his hair not at all became red.


    Because of this, not at all brought any trouble to Li Yaoxiang.


    Li Yaoxiang did not hesitate.


    The soul prates directly into the body.


    But he hadn''t stretched his hands and feet a few times.


    Takako knocked on the door outside, the housekeeper who helped Li Yaoxiang manage his business.


    knock!


    knock!


    knock!


    "Boss, a Daimyo hase to the restaurant, and he asked you to greet him." Takako said.


    "Well, understood," Li Yaoxiang said.


    After a while.


    Li Yaoxiang came to Daimyo''s box.


    As soon as the door of the box closed, Daimyo, who was originally invincible, immediately came to Li Yaoxiang and said respectfully: "Master."


    "Un." Li Yaoxiang nced at the box, "What about Uehara Yuri?"


    Urihara Yuri was the original Daimyo spokesperson.


    The Daimyo in front of him came into contact only through Uehara Yuri and also cast a one-time Kotoamatsukami on him. Over the years, Yuri Uehara and this Daimyo have also worked for Li Yaoxiang.


    Li Yaoxiang also learned through them that he was expecting it well.


    The Daimyo were really targeting ninja and deliberately caused war.


    As for...


    The reason why Li Yaoxiang wanted to check these things specifically is simple.


    The reason is the same as Li Yaoxiang did not want to use the "one-time Kotoamatsukami" to change the thinking of thousands of people ording to the will of the system!


    If he does this, then he is creating darkness and going to darkening goals.


    This is not what he wants.


    Digging out the original darkness of this world to darken the target, this is what he does!


    At the same time, he will stick to this practice!


    "Master, Yuri Uehara is suspicious of your status, so I will let someone solve Yuri directly." Daimyo said.

 Chapter 171: Five Kages Conference, United

    Chapter 171: Five Kages Conference, United


    Li Yaoxiang was not surprised by Daimyo''s statement.


    In fact, before this, he had found some clues from the words and deeds of Uehara. It is estimated that the ''one-time Kotoamatsukami'' method is too overbearing.


    Let a superior directly be one of his subordinates, leaving behind troubles.


    If there is no ident, the Daimyo in front of him, after a period of time, the probability will also follow the footsteps of Yuri.


    However, Li Yaoxiang not at all takes this matter seriously.


    Anyway, darkening has already developed to thest step, it does not matter whether Daimyo betrayed him or not.


    Therefore, for the death of Uehara Yuri, he was just un''ed and went straight to the theme and said, "Did youe this time for the result of the meeting?"


    The meeting that Li Yaoxiang said in his mouth was the secret meeting held by the Daimyos of Five Great Countries against Naruto.


    The Daimyo controlled by Li Yaoxiang will certainly not be absent from this meeting.


    Coming here is for reporting the result of the report meeting.


    Daimyo frivolous said: "Yes, master. Master, you really predicted things like God, the content of the meeting is exactly simr to what you guessed. Uzumaki Naruto broke the bnce of countries. Everyone was very dissatisfied with his actions, so this time we n to unite everyone and solve Uzumaki Naruto first."


    "Un." Li Yaoxiang nodded, "Then... I gave the suggestions for you to say at the meeting, what do they say?"


    Daimyo: "Master, everyone is full of praise for your suggestions. I too agreed! I believe that the letter of ''pressure'' we sent to Ninja Viges will be sent to each Great Ninja Viges soon. Manipting from the shadows..."


    This so-called ''pressure''.


    In fact, it is for countries Daimyo to put pressure on each Great Ninja Viges separately.


    Let Ninja Viges unite against Uzumaki Naruto.


    It''s better to be able to raise a conflict between the two. This can not only solve the trouble of Uzumaki Naruto, but also take advantage of the opportunity to weaken the strength of each Great Ninja Viges. Why not do it?


    Therefore, Daimyos quickly adopted this decision unanimously.


    Anyway, they just wrote a letter with a pen.


    Li Yaoxiang looked down at the fat Daimyo.


    Some emotions rose in his heart.


    This dark chess piece of Daimyo n had already been set a few years ago.


    Originally it was just a piece of chess that was randomly ced. He thought it would not be used that much. Thest step of the n is also the same as his darkening purpose.


    It''s just for guidance, digging into the original darkness of this world.


    This time, it can be said that all aspects are involved.


    All the bureaus that should be deployed have already been deployed.


    What to do next.


    Just wait.


    Wait for things to ferment slowly.


    After confirming that the n has been arranged, Li Yaoxiang and this fat puppet have nothing to talk about.


    Li Yaoxiang left the box first.


    Daimyo left after eating the meal.


    ...


    Time flies.


    Years are like a shuttle.


    After the secret meeting of countries Daimyo, the filmmakers of the Great Ninja Viges soon received a letter from the local Daimyo.


    The content is almost the same.


    Roughly speaking, they feel that Uzumaki Naruto''s unbridled destruction has caused people from all over the world to be rmed. Countries Daimyos have reached an agreement after discussion for everyone to temporarily unite to solve the trouble of Uzumaki Naruto and return people to live a peaceful life.


    The specific details will be discussed and arranged by each Great Ninja Vige.


    Urge Ninja Viges to resolve this matter as soon as possible without dy.


    After receiving the letter.


    In order to solve this matter, Five-Great Ninja Viges also had to join together and held a Five Kages conference. However, before the meeting started, there were already problems.


    That is Gaara, the newly appointed Kazekage, not at all attended the meeting.


    He just sent a messenger toe and inform everyone.


    Although he did not understand why Naruto frequently shot other viges, or vige Jinchuriki, but what he said from the messenger was that he was not willing to participate in this meeting against Naruto.


    The rest of the people were very dissatisfied with the disdainful attitude of Suna Vige.


    It even said that after this incident, Suna Vige should be condemned.


    But it can only be nothing serious.


    After all, Kazekage was not present.


    Whatever they say is of no avail.


    They would just vent their anger on a messenger.


    In the end, it can''t be done.


    This Five Kages conference has be a Four Kages conference.


    The first meeting.


    The content is wonderful.


    Everyone here, who can be seen in the film, which one is not a human spirit?


    Everyone seemed to have rehearsed, and they pointed at the Tsunade of Konoha.


    Tsuchikage Onoki: "Hokage, Jinchuriki Kyuubi, you Konoha did this trouble. You should take full responsibility, you Konoha! And, your Jinchuriki Kyuubi captured our Vige Four-Tails Jinchuriki! This matter, you must give us an exnation to Iwa(Hidden Stone) Vige! You must alsopensate Iwa Vige!


    Otherwise, don''t me Iwa Vige for the official deration of war to Konoha!"


    Mizukage Terumi Mei: "There is also our Kiri(Hidden Mist) Vige. Your Jinchuriki Kyuubi has captured our Six-Tails Jinchuriki, and it has caused severe injury to our vige. You Konoha must give us Kiri Vige a reasonablepensation."


    Raikage Ay: "In the final analysis, it is not the Konoha''s mismanagement that caused the trouble. Although the meaning of countries Daimyo is to unite us to deal with the matter of Jinchuriki Kyuubi, not for Konoha to personally be responsible for this. We will only assist you on the side."


    Onoki spoke the first sentence and the other two Kages have said their concerns.


    One after another.


    Naruto must be solved.


    Seriously?


    As a Vige Kage, how could they not know Naruto''s current strength?


    It''s really hard to fight him; it will cost a lot of manpower.


    So, the excuses of saying Jinchuriki was caught, vige being hurt, etc., are all fake! These are just one of their bargaining chips in the negotiation process.


    The ultimate goal is to never let their own vige''s ninjas be the cannon fodder against Jinchuriki Kyuubi this time.


    Just as expected.


    In the negotiation process that followed, of course, there was constant arguing.


    3 VS 1''s verbal dispute, can Tsunade even persists?


    Tsunade who gave in had no choice but to make a proposal, that is, let Konoha try tomunicate with Naruto, and let Naruto rein in the precipice, so that there will be no casualties? Let the other three Kages help convince Daimyo behind them.


    After hearing that, the three Kages of course don''t want to!


    What are they fools?


    Let the powerful Jinchuriki Kyuubi return to Konoha?


    How can this be?!


    Jinchuriki Kyuubi returns to Konoha won''t he be a part of Konoha family in the future?


    Even if Konoha promises morepensation, this is impossible.


    So three Kages resolutely rejected this proposal.


    Saying anything to solve Naruto, and Konoha must do it yourself!


    Otherwise, the 3 Great Ninja Viges will unite together, deal with Konoha first. You Konoha don''t even have the strength of the Jinchuriki, it just depends on how you resist.


    I have already mentioned this.


    The hot-tempered Tsunade, of course, had another quarrel.


    The meeting was so noisy that everyone was red.


    In the end, of course, it broke up.


    Be angry to be angry.


    Tsunade knew that the conclusion must be solved by Konoha.


    In desperation, Tsunade had to go back with this bad news and called Konoha''s high level to have another meeting...

 Chapter 172: Catch the opportunity, resurrect the salted fish

    Chapter 172: Catch the opportunity, resurrect the salted fish


    Konoha Vige.


    Hokage Residence.


    Inside Conference Hall.


    After returning to Konoha, Tsunade immediately summoned arge number of Jonins toe to discuss. When they originally received the letter from Daimyo, everyone already had a bad hunch.


    At that time, everyone just took a fluke attitude and looked at the matter.


    They hope things are not so bad as everyone imagines.


    But this beautiful fantasy waspletely broken after Tsunade told them the results of the meeting in person.


    Didn''t expect, things are far more rigorous than they thought!


    Even if Suna Vige exits, Naruto is familiar with the new Kazekage, and this is no secret. Everyone has some psychological preparation for this.


    But didn''t expect, the other 3 Great Ninja Viges even n to sit idly by?!


    They say they will do anything to help.


    If this is said, will anyone believe it?


    Everyone presents in the Conference Hall has a dark face.


    If we say that Naruto''s strength, in the minds of outsiders, including Daimyo, including the rest of the film, etc., are just hearsay, have not witnessed it with their own eyes, and they do not truly understand how terrifying Naruto''s strength is.


    But all of these people present could not be more clear about Naruto''s terrifying strength!


    And they have witnessed it more than once!


    He was only 7 years old when Naruto has his first berserk, and the strength of Complete Body Kyuubi hadn''t been fully exerted yet, but they still had a headache.


    Not to mention now?


    Now Naruto is not only mature in mind. Proficient in how to control Kyuubi. Rich in fight experience. Even Mangekyo Sharingan, which shouldn''t be there, has...


    When they learned that the result of the discussion was that Konoha had to be a pawn, how could they not worry? How not to worry? If they want to take down Naruto without any casualty, you don''t have to think about it.


    Now we can see whether there are more casualties or fewer casualties.


    In the end, who should be the ''cannon fodder''.


    Each Great n Leader has their own thoughts.


    The rest also have their own worries.


    I don''t know how long it took to calcte such a situation. Finally, one of them started to talk, breaking this dignified atmosphere: "Hokage, can''t we just ignore Daimyo or the other Ninja Viges''s views? Let''s try to persuade Naruto to return to Konoha. If Naruto returns, even if the other 3 Great Ninja Viges unite together, we would not be incapable of confrontation, are we not? Moreover, with the rtionship between Kazekage and Naruto, it might even convince Suna Vige to help us. When the timees, this so-called big battle that can''t be fought, it won''t be so sure by then, right?"


    The talking Jonin knew that the idea was a bit naive.


    Know that the probability of passing is not great.


    But he still chose to say it.


    Just as expected.


    Many people gave him an angry look.


    Then they were toozy to care about him.


    Because the answer is needless to say, everyone here knows that this method is not feasible. After all, their vige needs tomunicate with the outside world to survive.


    For missions. Or buy food. Or run a business, etc.


    If Konoha insist on treating everyone as the wind, even if there is no war, the final result will only provoke a group of forces to unite and refuse tomunicate or contact them anymore.


    When the timees, Konoha will also be difficult to survive.


    There was a quiet atmosphere in the Conference Hall again.


    But just when everyone still couldn''t make a decision, the noise outside the door suddenly broke the silence.


    "Lord Danzo, Elder Yan, Elder Koharu! Lord-Hokage is having a secret meeting with the rest, this... you can''t go in yet!" The sound of the guard outside the door sounded tense and hurried.


    Everyone only heard a "get away!", followed by a loud noise of "pa!"


    The door was kicked directly by Shimura Danzo.


    Tsunade said in disgust, "What are you doing here?"


    Shimura Danzo nced at everyone, cold said with a snort: "Hmph! Jonin meeting, as a consultant and Elder, how can I not participate! Tsunade, you as a Hokage are bing more and more impudent! Do you really think you can act wilfully when you are a Hokage? If us elders don''t show up, Konoha will copse because of you!"


    Tsunade doubtfully nced at everyone present.


    She did not disclose the news to the three elders.


    She wondered if there were people part of three elders in Conference Hall.


    What Tsunade doesn''t know is that it is the most loyal subordinate of Shimura Danzo, Sai! Needless to say, Sai was of course ordered by Li Yaoxiang to serve as the ear of Shimura Danzo in this period of time.


    Li Yaoxiang has long expected this.


    He knew that Shimura Danzo, the elders, would definitely be intolerant of loneliness and would definitelye out to make trouble, so Shimura Danzo was left with a dog''s life.


    And today is also the time for the chess piece of Shimura Danzo to give y to his residual heat.


    After speaking, Tsunade was not given a chance to speak.


    Shimura Danzo continued to yell at her: "Hmph! I told you a long time ago, that the demon fox is a hidden danger of Konoha, but you did not take it seriously! Now that it hase true, do you want to continue to protect the demon fox? Do you have to wait until Konoha is really ruined before you are happy?"


    Shimura Danzo stared again at the Jonin who just made the suggestion, and scolded: "This time, even if the demon fox was really persuaded toe back, what do you do? You think you''re lucky? Do you really think that the demon fox hates only me? You forgot how you and the others treated the demon fox? You really think that your way of forgetting favors and vite justice, will the demon fox forget it? Sooner orter he will deal with Konoha in turn! We don''t take advantage of it now, but we''ll just wait?!"


    Although he was angry at this Jonin, he actually scolded everyone present.


    Let them not have a fluke mentality.


    After everyone hearing this, they were speechless.


    Can''t find a reason to refute.


    It was almost time to see the fire, Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu nced at each other, and then stepped forward to say: "Tsunade, now we as Elders and consultant, deprive you of Hokage.


    Because of your choices, indulging the demon fox''s one mistake after another, resulting in the current situation bing unstoppable. As Hokage, you are no longer suitable for the future."


    A series of drama codes.


    It seems as if it has already been arranged.


    But it is true.


    As early as Sai told them what Naruto did in the outside world, they knew that their opportunity came. 3 elders have waited so long for this is the moment!


    This time they not only will be able to solve Naruto''s troubles.


    Even moreplete remake!


    But just as they thought their n would go smoothly to the end.


    Jiraiya, who had been silent, was finally unable to bear angry shouted: "Enough!"

 Chapter 173: The three elders are embarrassed, and the drum of war rang

    Chapter 173: The three elders are embarrassed, and the drum of war rang


    Shimura Danzo nced at Jiraiya and said immediately, "Jiraiya! You not only indulge the demon fox! You are also encouraging Tsunade to y around! You are also to me!"


    Jiraiya red fiercely at these elders: "Hmph! Do you really think everyone is an idiot?! Really think that everyone here doesn''t know what abacus you are doing?"


    Speaking of it.


    Jiraiya nced fiercely at everyone in the Conference Hall as well: "In the end, we still need someone to take the lead against Naruto?! Naruto would do anything wrong, then me me, the Teacher, for not teaching him well. All responsibilities are on me! It''s not about Tsunade! I caused the trouble, so I will solve it by myself!"


    From the moment Jiraiya received the news that Naruto attacked other viges and captured Jinchuriki, Jiraiya''s mood was very tangled.


    The prediction that Great Toad Sage told him kepting to mind.


    ''Your disciple will bring changes to world.''


    ''he may bring stability to world... or it may bring destruction to world.''


    These two prophecies have been lingering in his mind.


    It seemed to remind him that Naruto was the Child of the Prophecy who brought ''ruin'' to the world.


    So he was sad.


    It''s alsoplicated.


    This is the son of Minato...


    It''s also my own disciple...


    He really didn''t understand how to face Naruto.


    It''s time to stop indulging Naruto...


    In order to create a world peace, he should personally deal with Naruto...


    This idea has troubled Jiraiya for a while. During these days, Jiraiya has almost lost the frivolous look of the past. Every time he heard where Naruto appeared and who he attacked again, his mood became even heavier.


    Until this meeting started today, he has been in such a tangled state.


    The whole meeting he had been absent-minded.


    He hasn''t said anything.


    It wasn''t until the arrival of the elders and until these elders overbearing, did Jiraiya''s mind sh back to Mount Myboku, the old grandma toad, Shima, and asked him if Naruto was really the one in destiny and there is a very obvious sign that he is going to destroy world, then... ''what will you do?''


    He then remembered a promise he made when he clenched the teeth.


    ''Then I will try my best to stop him! If it can''t be stopped... then I''ll take care of him myself''


    Also because of this promise.


    Jiraiya finally confirmed his determination!


    And stand up against these elders with impure thoughts!


    After hearing Jiraiya venting a series of words, everyone in the room was rejoicing and dumbfounded. The most surprised was Tsunade.


    She knew very well what Jiraiya thought.


    She sees the changes in Jiraiya for the past few days.


    So no matter what the oue of this meeting was, she never thought of involving Jiraiya in this matter. What made her didn''t expect was that Jiraiya would stop the whole thing at this time.


    This is far more unexpected than the fact that Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu want to deprive her of Hokage status.


    She couldn''t imagine how much pain Jiraiya endured before she could make this tormented decision.


    She subconsciously cry out in surprise: "Jiraiya..."


    But before she finished speaking, Jiraiya waved his hand and interrupted her.


    Instructed Tsunade to stop persuading him.


    Now that the decision has been made, I do not intend to go back!


    This sudden scenepletely disrupted Shimura Danzo and the others'' ns. Jiraiya blocked all the responsibilities on her.


    The people present did not even know what to say.


    Jiraiya, who was in a very bad mood, said at this time that he was very disgusted: "We will discuss how to resolve the Naruto matter. We will not bother you. If there''s nothing else, you should leave first! The specific details are not suitable for too many people to know. So as not to be leaked out by ''certain people''."


    Although not named.


    But the meaning in the words is obvious.


    The faces of elders can be said to be lost again.


    But they knew that as long as Jiraiya was willing to be the first bird, the rest would not say anything. It''s meaningless for them to stay here.


    It will only be more embarrassing.


    In the end he coldly snorted, waving his sleeves.


    As he was about to leave, he heard the voice of little baby Tsunade. She yelled at the guard outside the door: "Remember! You must guard well from now on, but don''t let some idlerse in that easily!"


    The guard said nervously: "Yes... yes... yes!"


    After hearing the 3 elders, it is even more annoying!


    The pace of leaving couldn''t help but speed up a bit.


    The farce ends.


    The meeting continued.


    Now that Jiraiya has volunteered, everyone certainly doesn''t need topete against each other.


    The next step is to discuss specific details and ns on how to deal with Uzumaki Naruto.


    However, it was quickly mentioned that the most critical issue in this n is Uchiha Sasuke! As everyone knows, Sasuke''s rtionship with Naruto is too good to be better.


    If Sasuke knows that everyone is united to deal with Naruto...


    Thinking of this, a Susanoo Complete Body appeared involuntarily in everyone''s mind, plus the Kyuubi Complete Body wearing armor Kinoe, together destroying the Heavens and exterminating the Earth.


    Thinking about it makes one''s hair stand on end.


    Everyone has a decision now!


    That''s the thing, they must hide it from Sasuke!


    Even if they can''t hide it forever, at least they have to hide it until the end of the matter. When the timees, even if Sasuke is against them, at least, the vige does not have to face two terrifying existences at the same time, right?


    In the n, the most critical points have been discussed after one after another.


    The meeting finally ended sessfully in secret.


    ...


    Time flies.


    Years are like a shuttle.


    After the secret meeting of Konoha ended.


    There was an amazing news throughout the Ninja World.


    That was the drum of Fourth Shinobi World War, which was finally knocked. This time the battle was organized by Iwa Vige, Kiri Vige, and Kumo(Hidden Cloud) Vige to attack Konoha.


    Originally still carrying out his ''Tailed Beast Journey'', after hearing this news, he also had to use the exclusive ring organized by ''Akatsuki'' to see the projection back to the Akatsuki base and discuss with Nagato.


    Naruto: "Now that the war is already ready, do we still need to continue capturing Tailed Beasts?"


    Nagato: "Yes. These Ninja Viges, as long as they have Tailed Beast in their hands, they will only have some scruples and will notunch a full-scale war. Moreover, if they continue to control Tailed Beast, they will also affect our future management."


    Naruto: "Okay, then I''ll go ahead."

 Chapter 174: Jiraiyas Betrayal

    Chapter 174: Jiraiya''s Betrayal


    Land-of-Fire and Land-of-Lightning joint border. Somewhere in the jungle.


    Naruto sat in front of the fire and waited for the fish to finish, his eyes silently staring at the ''crackling'' me in front of him. It has been more than half a year since this boring life.


    Nowhere to bath.


    The food is nd and tasteless.


    Eat poorly and sleep well.


    Compared with the previous days, it is like the difference between heaven and earth.


    If there is a choice, Naruto will certainly not choose to live like now. Now, the only motivation for him to persevere is to imagine the days after Hinata was resurrected.


    Only, except for Hinata, there is another thing that bothers him.


    That is the news that Konoha was besieged by 3 Great Ninja Viges.


    Although he didn''t think much about the elders or the vigers, in the final analysis, the vige was where he grew up.


    It was full of his memories.


    There are memories of parents.


    There are memories with Sasuke.


    There are memories with Hinata.


    The most important thing is that there are also memories of him and the big brother. That small home has all the traces he has left with the big brother.


    Although he doesn''t understand why the big brother has less and less contact with him.


    Maybe he was angry with him. Perhaps there are other reasons.


    But he believes that no matter what the reason, his rtionship with the big brother will not change.


    Because of this, hearing this ce full of memories is now under siege, even if he tries to hide it, he still can''t hide the love in his heart.


    I don''t know if vige can resist the invasion of 3 Great Ninja Viges.


    I don''t know if I should help.


    He stared nkly at the fire in front of him, thinking about these things. Until the scent of the fish is cooked, tangy.


    He also recovered from a dull state.


    Hah~


    Another boring day.


    Don''t think about it if you don''t want to think about it.


    Anyway, things haven''t developed to the worst Heaven and Earth yet.


    Skillfully picking up the branch where the grilled fish was inserted, and bringing the grilled fish to his mouth, Naruto''s movement suddenly paused when he was about to bite it.


    Putting down the grilled fish subconsciously.


    Looked towards a direction not far away.


    A lot of people.


    He sensed many people.


    This group of people came, and they have a fighting intent?


    Not knowing what happened, he was ready to fight at any time. It wasn''t until the first person came out of the jungle that Naruto''s vignce let go.


    "Jiraiya-sensei? Why are you here? And, arge group with you, where are they going?" Naruto squinted.


    There are not many people that Naruto who have a little affection with.


    After all, in addition to being the Teacher of his Father and his Teacher, Jiraiya took him to meet the Great Toad Sage and let himself confirm that there is really a resurrection technique in this world, otherwise he really wouldn''t be able get out of grief so quickly.


    Jiraiya appeared in front of Naruto with a group of people.


    Seeing that Naruto was still vignt, he waved his hand and begged everyone to stop.


    He stepped forward to say hello to Naruto alone: "Iwa Vige, Kumo Vige, Kiri Vige, 3 Great Ninja Viges united to siege Konoha. The vige is now in a war. I want to lead them to various strongholds."


    After hearing this, Naruto suddenly realized.


    Where I am now is the junction of Land-of-Fire and Land-of-Lightning. My goal this time is Jinchuriki in Kumo Vige. It turns out that the war has already begun. No wonder Jiraiya-sensei will bring a group of ninjas through here.


    Hearing of the entire process of development, Naruto did not respond, nor did he know what to say, but just coldly ''um'', expressing his understanding.


    Seeing such indifference, Jiraiya felt even more distressed about Naruto who was besieged by the vige.


    His brow furrowed a little, and soon he opened his mouth again, still holding thest glimmer of hope for Naruto, and said unwillingly: "Vige is in a state of emergency now, and we need your strength very much. How about you fighting with us?"


    Naruto''s heart tightened.


    Did he ask him to make a choice?


    Looked at Jiraiya.


    Looked at the group of ninjas behind Jiraiya.


    Seeing that things haven''t reached the worst point yet, coupled with his own goal this time, Jinchuriki of Kumo Vige. From the side, is it helpful to everyone?


    Naruto made a decision now.


    He shook his head; refused: "No, I still have something to do..."


    But before Naruto finished speaking.


    Just listen to Jiraiya ''hah~'' sigh.


    Immediately, the picture is twirling.


    When Naruto''s field of view returned to normal, an incredible scene appeared before him! He saw ''himself'' standing with Jiraiya!


    That''s right!


    It is ''Mind Body Switch Jutsu''!


    And the caster is the most powerful in Yamanaka n, Yamanaka Inoichi!


    In original work, Ino Yamanaka used this Ninjutsu to control the golden horn with Kyuubi Chakra, and also controlled Obito with the assistance of Naruto!


    Ino Yamanaka already had this skill, not to mention Yamanaka Inoichi?


    Seeing such a situation, Naruto was shocked!


    However, even more surprised than him is Yamanaka Inoichi! Fortunately, Naruto, after obtaining Mangekyo Sharingan, used a lot of energy to break through.


    In a moment, hepletely broke through hisplete control, and was using ''Yamanaka Inoichi''s body'' to shouted angrily: "What are you trying to do?!"


    At the same time.


    Even Naruto''s own body has undergone extremely rapid changes.


    With both eyes not controlled by ''Yamanaka Inoichi'', Mangekyo Sharingan was opened.


    Within-the-body is rushing out a lot of violent Chakra!


    No one answered the Naruto who could not move.


    No one manages him.


    Yamanaka Inoichi mmed: "Quick! Get started!"


    It was the person of Nara n, a few shes, surrounded "Naruto", and used the shadow bondage technique at the same time! Naruto''s torserk''s body was imprisonedpletely.


    The night is long.


    Yamato, hidden in the crowd, used the ''Wood-Style  Smothering Binding Technique!''


    TL note: By transforming their arm into a tree, the user can then create multiple branches which will rapidly grow around the target, immobilising them. This technique is strong enough to restrain a giant squid.


    A thick thigh-like root was drilled in the jungle right now, binding Naruto''s body tightly. When encountering these tree roots, the violent Chakra is like encountering natural enemies.


    Almost everyone has done everything.


    They were just suppressing Naruto''s body!


    But even so, even if everyone tried their best, everyone still felt very strenuous! Cold sweat! They felt it could get out of control!


    Now, Jiraiya''s fatal blow!

 Chapter 175: What did I do wrong

    Chapter 175: What did I do wrong


    Yamanaka Inoichi, who''s controlling Naruto''s body, his expression looks very difficult, facing Jiraiya and said with clenched teeth: "Jiraiya, we are just supressing! If you don''t do it, everyone here will die today!"


    Behind him came Naruto''s roar: "Jiraiya-sensei, stop your hands! What are you trying to do?! Why are you doing this to me--!"


    Then all the others asked for it.


    "Lord-Jiraiya, let''s get started! We can''t hold on!"


    "Jiraiya, do you want to see Konoha destroyed?!"


    Jiraiya was standing at the center of everyone, and the voices in different directions were constantly echoed in his mind. There are Yamanaka Inoichi, others ninjas, and Naruto...


    In addition to Naruto''s voice, other people''s voice, he was not listening at all.


    Listening to Naruto until now, he still calls his name with "Teacher".


    Jiraiya felt even more guilty in his heart.


    The reason why this time the Four-Great Ninja Viges set up such a big game was to realize the scene before them. In order to bring a group of people close to Naruto without being suspected, they had to disguise it in the name of war.


    In order to let Naruto rx his guard, Jiraiya had to lead the team himself.


    In order to reduce the maximum loss, Konoha had to use this method...


    Listening to Naruto''s resentful inquiries, Jiraiya felt very ufortable. Originally, his idea was that even if he fought this old life, he must prevent Naruto from continuing to make mistakes.


    Even perish together, at all.


    But didn''t expect, in that meeting, the final result of the negotiation was this ending. Everyone has no confidence in their strength.


    In order to ensure that the n is foolproof, everyone has repeatedly discouraged themselves.


    For the sake of the big picture...


    In the end, I stillpromised...


    Seeing Jiraiya''s dy, Yamanaka Inoichi shouted again: "Jiraiya! Time is running out! We can only stick to it for another 3 seconds. If you don''t do it within 3 seconds, we will have no chance!"


    Following this cry.


    Jiraiya finally responded.


    He raised his right hand slowly.


    His right hand forms the shape of a hand knife.


    The heart is veryplicated.


    Consider for a long time.


    But in the end, he chose to act ording to the n. The arm mmed with a vigorous force, and then at a very fast speed, stab in the heart of ''Naruto''!


    When Yamanaka Inoichi saw it, suddenly his eyes lit up!


    At the crucial moment!


    When the knife and the heart are only a few millimeters away!


    He caught the right time and release ''Mind Body Switch Jutsu''!


    Instantly.


    The mind returns.


    Naruto, who was still struggling and wanted to break away from control, only listened to ''pu chi'', and then there was a lot of pain in his heart. Arge amount of blood flowed involuntarily through the esophagus, pouring out of the mouth.


    Naruto unable to bear the coughing.


    Jiraiya''s face was covered with blood drops.


    Naruto lowered his head and looked at the palm that passed through his chest in disbelief, then looked up at his so called teacher.


    He wants to resist.


    He does not want to die.


    He still has a lot to do.


    He will also resurrect Hinata.


    He also had to meet the big brother in person.


    But no matter how much he desires, he now only feels the loss of vitality and his body getting weaker. The strength left to him is only enough for him to reluctantly ask Jiraiya, "For... what"


    In front of him, Jiraiya''s cheeks had already shed tears.


    Jiraiya resisted the pain in her heart and said, "I''m sorry, Naruto. I''m sorry for you, sorry for your father, I can''t let you go wrong..."


    After listening to Jiraiya''s exnation, Naruto was puzzled.


    I''m wrong?


    Am I wrong?


    What am I doing wrong?


    I''m still worried about whether you guys can resist the enemy. I''m also worried about whether the vige will be invaded. I just want to help youter after this. Is this wrong?


    I just want to resurrect Hinata, am I wrong?


    Until the moment of death, Naruto didn''t understand what he had done wrong.


    Why do you treat me like this?


    Forget it.


    If you don''t want to, then I won''t.


    Anyway, everything is over.


    I don''t know if I can see Hinata after death.


    I don''t know if I die, will it even cause the big brother to die with me.


    I hope the big brother will be fine...


    Hehe.


    I don''t know if the big brother can see me. If the big brother sees me, will he be very disappointed?


    It must not be easy to have a brother like me...


    It''s just that if there is an afterlife, I still hope to be your younger brother.


    I hope you don''t dislike-


    Thoughts ended here.


    Naruto''s head also hung down.


    After 3 more confirmations, Naruto''s aura can no longer be sensed. The rest of everyone is rxed. The various Ninjutsu disyed on Naruto also slowly retreated.


    Shadow on the ground disconnected.


    The binds around Naruto strips and retreat back into the jungle.


    Without the support of shadow shackles, without the support of tree ties, Jiraiya prated Naruto''s palm, and suddenly felt extremely heavy.


    He reacted.


    Quickly drawing his palm.


    Regardless of the blood on Naruto, he quickly hug Naruto into his arms and prevent Naruto from falling down.


    I don''t know how long this posture has been kept.


    No one dared to talk to Jiraiya at this time.


    It was under themand of Yamanaka Inoichi, each and every one of Konoha Ninjas began to do the finishing work.


    Some rush back to Konoha to report the news.


    Or rush to the stronghold of the rest of Ninja Viges to report the situation.


    Quickly.


    The finishing work is over.


    Jiraiya still maintains the same posture.


    Naruto''s corpse, in his arms, has gradually be cold.


    The ninja did not dare to rm him, but one after another crossed the ce where he was and walked back in the direction of Konoha. Until the end, Yamanaka Inoichi was left alone with him.


    Yamanaka Inoichi then walked to Jiraiya and patted his shoulder: "Go back, it''s over."


    Jiraiya shook his head: "You go back first. After I buried Naruto, and then I''ll go back."


    Yamanaka Inoichi certainly understood Jiraiya''s mind. He knew that Jiraiya didn''t want anyone to destroy Naruto''s corpse to im the Mangekyo Sharingan nor did he want Naruto to be dead not peacefully.


    No longer discouraged, he sighed.


    Also crossed Jiraiya and left.


    After everyone leaves.


    Jiraiya found a ce and buried Naruto.


    After Jiraiya''s treatment, Naruto''s cemetery is no different from ordinary ground, and no weak spot can be seen. After doing all this, Jiraiya stood in front of Naruto''s grave and made his final confession.


    "Naruto, I''m sorry for being a teacher. I will take care Hinata''s younger sister and Hinata''s family. I hope you can forgive me..."


    Finished.


    Jiraiya left with a heavy heart...

 Chapter 176: Naruto Breaking Down

    Chapter 176: Naruto Breaking Down


    After Jiraiya leaves.


    In the mud where Naruto was buried.


    More than one foot deep.


    After death, Naruto only felt that the whole body was light and fluttering, and all the troubles in his life seemed to also go away. Without a body, he can''t control four limbs. It was dark around and nothing could be seen.


    Can''t feel the ebbing of time.


    Can''t think about tedious problems.


    His memory seems to be more and more blurred.


    All thoughts seem to stay in this brief moment, and the next second will forget thest second.


    This... is world of death?


    Then I... Will I forget Hinata, Sasuke, big brother, everything?


    No!


    I don''t want to forget them!


    This is the most precious memory in my life!


    I must remember all this!


    Naruto has done all he can to keep Hinata, Sasuke, and big brother in mind. Because of this, he quickly polished all the remaining memories.


    But even so.


    The feeling of fluttering still made his thoughts more and more blurred.


    Even how he knew Hinata.


    How he met Sasuke.


    It seems that he can''t remember it.


    Just when Naruto thought that he would lose himself, he suddenly turned around! Naruto overjoyed! His thoughts gradually became clear! His memory also recovered slowly!


    The senses that were originally lost.


    Suddenly he felt a warm current, slowly moisturizing him.


    It feels veryfortable to let myself recover all of this.


    Naruto doesn''t understand, what the hell is going on, but he has an illusion faintly, as long as this warmth continues, maybe he can have the chance of life again?


    Enjoying the influx of this warm current.


    Naruto''s senses have also begun to change dramatically.


    If you say that he didn''t feel anything at all before, as if it was like a cloud of air wandering in a dark space. But now, he really feels his body!


    Although he can''t move for a minute.


    But he did feel it!


    This lost and regained mood makes Naruto very excited!


    He desperately absorbed the warm current.


    He absorbed the warmth greedily.


    Correct!


    Come again!


    More!


    With the amount of warm current, the more it is absorbed.


    There was a glimmer of light in the originally dark picture.


    In the mist, Naruto seemed to see a vague silhouette, sitting on his knees in front of him. The silhouette of the master seems to have a familiar feeling.


    Moreover, Naruto also clearly felt that the warm current, it was from the silhouette of the palm, the light emitted slowly into his body.


    Gradually.


    Naruto began to vaguely see the silhouette.


    Brother... big brother?


    That''s right!


    The silhouette that Naruto saw was Li Yaoxiang!


    He didn''t understand whether this was reality or illusion, but he was very happy to see the big brother at this moment.


    It turned out to be the big brother. Did youe to see me?


    I''m sorry, big brother.


    Did I let you down again?


    Because of my negligence, I lost my life. I obviously felt their evil intent, but I naively thought that this evil intent was because they were going to fight.


    I''m sorry, big brother.


    You have been a mother and took care of me for so long. I haven''t paid you back yet and you left first. I hope that my departure will not cause you, big brother,...


    In Naruto''s heart, there are many things to tell Li Yaoxiang, but unfortunately, he has never been able to get a response from the big brother in front of him. The big brother''s smile at the moment is surprisingly gentle.


    It was terribly gentle.


    Naruto always feels that the expression of big brother is more like big brother saying goodbye to himself, more than saying goodbye to big brother.


    How could this be?


    Big brother


    Big brother?


    Why are not you talking?


    Can you answer me?


    The more so, Naruto felt more that it was strange.


    There seemed to be a kind of faint tingling sensation that was about to lose the most important thing in life.


    Naruto''s gaze slowly fell from Li Yaoxiang''s vague five senses to the light on his palm. The warm current never stopped. How is this feeling so familiar?


    No!


    Wrong!


    Wasn''t this that Chiyo said about Reincarnation Ninjutsu?!


    Big brother!


    Why are you using this Ninjutsu?!


    No! No! big brother! I don''t want you to resurrect me! Stop now! Stop now!


    As his memory recovered, Naruto remembered the Ninjutsu he had studied. He also remembered the price of this Ninjutsu is another life. If you say that the previous Naruto desperately absorbed this warm current.


    So now Naruto is desperately rejecting this warm current!


    No!


    No!


    He would rather die than big brother sacrificing himself.


    Big brother!


    Do you hear me?!


    Do you hear me?!


    please!


    I beg you!


    Stop now!


    Stop now!


    It''s a pity that no matter how much Naruto shouts in his heart, no matter how he rejects this warmth. But this warm current continued to flow into his body. His dead body is not under his control, greedily and crazily absorbing all this!


    If he can choose. He would thrash his body immediately, and he would stop the big brother from using this Ninjutsu.


    But in this world, is there so much if?


    No!


    He had no choice at all.


    He could only be forced to ept all this in front of him.


    Before, when he saw Li Yaoxiang, he was eager, but seeing this scene in front of him was a real, he would rather not see the big brother.


    Don''t see this scene now!


    Over time.


    Naruto''s control of the body has increased by little by little. He could begin to feel the dampness of the mud touching the skin through his body, and gradually felt the weakness of his body.


    But he couldn''t move.


    Can''t talk.


    But even so, his body seemed to have felt the sadness of its master, and involuntarily weeping a lot of tears. Tears slipped across the temple, then over the earlobe, and finally into the soil.


    How true is all this?


    What a despair.


    The warm current continues.


    It wasn''t until Naruto''s body finally recovered a little bit of strength and he regained control, he didn''t care about his weakness, and sat upright.


    Open your eyes!


    Shouted "No-!"


    Naruto gasped for breath.


    Checking everything around...


    At this time, he was sitting next to a dirt pit. There are still jungles around, but none of the ghost shadows.


    The pit beside him is enough to prove that he was dead and buried. And now his own situation is enough to prove that he was dug out and resurrected.


    Naruto''s first reaction was to shout in reality and forgot that he couldmunicate with Li Yaoxiang in his mind: "Big brother! Are you there? Big brother! Are you there?! don''t scare me!"


    Keep trying to contact big brother.


    But still no response.


    Until the end, Naruto couldn''t help but looked up towards the sky. The big face of big brother appeared in the sky, with a gentle smile, waved at him and said: "Naruto, big brother is going first. You must take good care of yourself in the future, you know? Fool."


    That''s it.


    The face dissipated.


    Naruto was no longer able to bear, crying violently, tearing his heart apart.


    The kind of copsed emotions; tears and tears. Even the birds and beasts around seemed to feel that a terrifying creature was about to be born here, and they did not dare to approach, and even flee here with their families...

 Chapter 177: A strong sense of anxiety

    Chapter 177: A strong sense of anxiety


    In the jungle.


    Naruto did not know how long he cried.


    He cried until his voice was hoarse.


    Even if he''s crying, no tear is falling.


    But he was still sitting there kneeling, motionless. The heart was much more painful than when Jiraiya pierced his heart. In his mind, the picture of the big brother is constantly emerging.


    From childhood to adulthood, he rolled his eyes.


    In other words, the big brother has always been by his side.


    Teaching him how to read.


    Take care of his daily diet.


    No matter how much he tosses around, big brother will never leave him.


    It can be said that in addition to treating Li Yaoxiang as his big brother, Naruto regards Li Yaoxiang as his own parent. He dared to be capricious again and again, just because he knew it''s impossible for big brother to abandon him.


    Even during these days, when there is littlemunication between the two, he still firmly believes in this idea.


    Isn''t that the case with family after all?


    Always get along, sometimes without a word.


    But when you are really in trouble, you will never abandon each other, it is always be a family.


    Now Naruto has lost the most important family member in his life, and is the only family member. He no longer knew what to do.


    Hinata is dead, he will do everything possible to resurrect Hinata.


    But big brother dead?


    What else can he do?


    He didn''t even know what the big brother was like. How would he resurrect him?


    In other words, if you lost it this time, you really lost it.


    The big brother will nevere back...


    He took it for granted when his brother was there. He never thought that he would lose his brother one day. After all, my brother exists in my mind, he is the most special, isn''t it?


    Naruto couldn''t ept it, the big brother really left him like this...


    He was reluctant to ept the fact in front of him.


    He deliberately avoided this idea.


    Gradually.


    His mind became nk.


    Naruto dared not think about anything anymore. Just continue to kneel there, motionless, as if the whole person was hollowed out, his eyes dull, no movement.


    ...


    At the same time.


    Konoha Vige. On the street.


    Sasuke aimless walked on the street, the mood is very bad. During these days, he was always called by Li Yaoxiang as if he was a monkey.


    For him, it was a great shame.


    Once upon a time, he was Konoha Vige''s the young master of the top n.


    Now the n is broken.


    But the arrogance that shouldn''t be there is still there.


    How could he not be angry?


    Want to vent, but there is nowhere else to make.


    Helpless, he had no choice but to hold this anger in his heart, unable to bear it.


    But it is absolutely impossible for him to have a good face.


    So he always looks like a stranger that you shouldn''t be get close.


    What makes him more annoyed recently is that he doesn''t know if it is an illusion. He always feels that everyone seems to be hiding something from him.


    This feeling is disgusting.


    He doesn''t like it.


    Moreover, what surprised him the most was that Konoha had been besieged by 3 Great Ninja Viges. Why did the people in the vige not let Sasuke help?


    Is there be any connection between these two?


    No one told him why.


    He also couldn''t afford to ask questions.


    He could only stay suspicious, watching the ninjas in the vige, leaving in groups.


    After a while. Came back in droves.


    Seeing ninjas aftering back, the feeling of being kept in the dark by everyone is even stronger! He clearly felt that these people who had just returned from the outside always avoided his eyes intentionally or unintentionally!


    This made him more convinced that this group of people really had something to hide from themselves!


    A feeling faintly rose in my heart.


    Something bad must have happened!


    Finally, he couldn''t bear it, he rushed forward, caught a guy who had just returned from the vige, grabbed his cor and interrogated him: "Say it! Are you hiding something from me!"


    He just wanted to swindle this ninja, but he''s not saying anything.


    The ninja hesitated right now, and his eyes didn''t dare to look at him: "I...I...I, I don''t understand anything. You should ask someone else."


    The ninja mmed hard and pushed Sasuke''s arm away.


    In a few shes, he left without looking back.


    Seeing this, Sasuke''s heart sank.


    The uneasiness his my heart grew stronger.


    He immediately grabbed another ninja who had just returned and questioned again!


    "Yes... Yes... I''m sorry, I really don''t understand..." The same hesitated, and the same dodgy eyes. One is like this, and the two are like this.


    Sasuke doesn''t know yet. Vige really has something to hide from him. Something bad happens?


    But when he just wanted to catch another person to cross-examine the situation, this group of people seemed to know his intention, and all of them disappeared in his field of view. His emotions gradually became unstable.


    Now rushed to the gate to the vige.


    I''m about to catch one, cross-examine clearly!


    Just as expected.


    When the group of ninjas who had just returned came to see Sasuke in a hurry, the first thought that raised in their minds was to escape.


    But Sasuke gave them this opportunity this time?


    Sasuke locks in a goal.


    Chased up.


    Using his knees, pinning his waist, and press the ninja to the ground!


    Sasuke was close to the ninja''s ear and said fiercely evilly: "Say! What the hell is going on?! Do you have anything to hide from me?! Don''t me me for being unkind to you now!"


    This ninja just asked for forgiveness.


    In front of two people, a pair of feet appeared.


    The eyes of the person are moving upwards along the soles of the feet.


    The personing is Jiraiya!


    The detained ninja, seeing Jiraiya, seemed to see a savior, cry out in surprise: "Lord-Jiraiya, please persuade him. Sa... Sa... Sasuke, I really don''t understand anything! You can ask Lord-Jiraiya directly!"


    With the emergence of Jiraiya, Sasuke''s efforts to withhold this ninja have also eased a lot.


    The ninja seized the opportunity, a palm press, freed from Sasuke, and then quickly left the scene.


    Sasuke didn''t chase.


    He stood up slowly, staring at Jiraiya like this.


    The Jiraiya with blood on his face.


    He felt that Jiraiya knew the answer and would also tell him the answer: "Can you tell me what the hell happened?"


    Seeing Sasuke, Jiraiya felt more ufortable in his heart.


    However, he had no intention of concealment. He knew that this matter would not be concealed for long. This matter would always be told to Sasuke by himself.


    It is best for him to say it personally.


    He also hoped that he could take the opportunity to unravel Sasuke, hoping that Sasuke will not go on a path of no return like Naruto did, and finally side with the vige.


    Jiraiya: "Naruto... he is dead..."

 Chapter 178: The last touch of warmth

    Chapter 178: Thest touch of warmth


    Sasuke was taken aback for a moment, feeling thunderous.


    There was a buzz in his head, and he couldn''t get back to his mind for a long time.


    He suspected that he had heard it wrong, he hesitantly said: "You... what did you say?"


    Jiraiya lowered his eyebrows when he saw this look of Sasuke, which was even more heavy in his heart, and said apologetically: "Sasuke, you have to take care of yourself. If Naruto is alive, he doesn''t want to see you look sad either."


    Sasuke''s legs were weak for a while, unable to bear took two steps back, forced a smile and said: "What are you talking about? Naruto''s strength is so powerful, how can he die? You... you... cracking a joke with me, right?"


    This time.


    It was Jiraiya''s turn to be silent.


    He didn''t know how to interpret it as well.


    Seeing Jiraiya''s self-exnatory appearance, Sasuke didn''t know that Naruto''s death was real? His mood changed into tension and excitement now!


    Disregarding Jiraiya''s identity.


    He rushed forward to grab Jiraiya''s blood-stained clothes and asked, "Tell me! What the hell is going on?! How could Naruto die?! Who killed him!"


    No matter how indifferent, Sasuke could not conceal his true emotions.


    His n is gone.


    His only big brother is dead.


    Some time ago, Hinata was involved again.


    Originally thinking that with Naruto trying to resurrect Hinata, he didn''t need to worry too much.


    But now even in this world, only one person worthy of his care seems to be dead.


    Why wouldn''t this make him nervous?


    Hearing Sasuke asking about the culprit, Jiraiya felt even more guilty, but he still exined: "Since this period of time, Naruto has continuously attacked other Great Ninja Viges, which has seriously endangered the lives of people..."


    Sasuke shook Jiraiya back and forth, interrupting: "Don''t tell me this! I don''t want to listen to this nonsense! I just want to know, who is the killer! Where is Naruto now?"


    Sasuke nced at the blood stains on Jiraiya''s clothes, and then recalled the look of Jiraiya from the beginning until now, and he had a conjecture in his heart now, shaking again vigorously: "Is it you! Did you kill Naruto!?"


    Jiraiya was stunned by Sasuke''s grim eyes.


    Consider, consider, consider...


    He subconsciously replied: "It is the proposal of the five nations Daimyo united together, and it was Five-Great Ninja Viges who worked together against Naruto."


    Faced with such a look of Sasuke, Jiraiya no longer has any extravagant hopes to persuade Sasuke to put down the butcher''s knife. So he did not dare to tell Sasuke the truth, fearing that Sasuke would vent all his resentment to Konoha.


    He hopes for Sasuke by hearing that the murderer is Five Great Countries and Five Great Ninja Viges he will not be an enemy of the whole world. Unfortunately, he still underestimated Naruto''s position in Sasuke''s mind.


    When Sasuke heard the reason, instead of constricting his emotions because of fear, he tightened his grip on Jiraiya''s clothes. "It''s really you! Really you! How could you do this?! How can you join forces with outsiders to deal with Naruto?!"


    That year he sold his own n.


    Now he sold Naruto again!


    Really!


    Sucks!


    This vige really sucks!


    Sasuke really hates this vige to the extreme!


    Seeing Jiraiya not speaking, still with that guilty look, Sasuke did not intend to continue to waste time on Jiraiya, and instead asked: "Tell me! Where is Naruto?! Didn''t you say Naruto is dead?! His corpse where is it?!"


    Yes.


    Even if he heard the news of Naruto''s death.


    Even knowing that Naruto has a very low chance of surviving.


    However, as long as Naruto''s corpse has not been seen personally, Sasuke is reluctant to believe the fact that Naruto is dead!


    Naruto''s strength is so strong, he couldn''t understand more.


    He didn''t believe that Naruto would die so silently.


    Seeing Sasuke so persistent.


    Jiraiya did not mean to deceive Sasuke this time.


    He truthfully told Sasuke Naruto''s burial site.


    Because he also needs Sasuke to leave the vige temporarily. Need to tell Tsunade about Sasuke''s attitude, need time to n, let the whole vige prepare together, at any time to wee Sasuke''s next anger.


    Just as expected.


    After hearing the specific location, Sasuke turned around and left.


    It''s just that when Sasuke parted, he left Jiraiya a cruel remark, "Don''t think what you say will I easily believe. When I find out the truth, all of you that participated in this, I will not let it go!"


    Finished.


    Sasuke leapt towards what Jiraiya pointed to.


    Jiraiya then deeply worried looks at his disappearing back.


    Immediately, he turned back to Hokage Residence and reported his concerns to Tsunade.


    After hearing this, Tsunade believed Jiraiya''s spection.


    Immediatelymands the whole vige. Strictly ordered the whole vige ninjas, ready to wee Sasuke''s return at any time.


    ...


    At the same time.


    Sasuke moved towards the burial ce of Naruto. At this time, he was very anxious and confused. He wanted to confirm the truth of Naruto''s death soon, but he was afraid to face the result.


    But even so.


    He still increased his speed to the extreme.


    The worries in his heart drove him not to have the slightest pause.


    Originally a long time long journey, it took only half an hour to reach his destination.


    Just arrived here, the first scene in his eyes letting his mood stretched taut!


    What did he see?


    He saw Naruto sitting there kneeling motionlessly!


    In this case, Naruto, Sasuke couldn''t tell if Naruto was alive or dead.


    He was very afraid of knowing. But he still swallowed his saliva, courageous, but slowly walked over to Naruto again, intending to find out if Naruto was still alive.


    5 meters...


    3 meters...


    2 meters...


    But just as Sasuke was approaching 1 meter mark, his footsteps suddenly stopped! Because he saw an incredible scene!


    Naruto lifts the head with dull eyes and shouted hoarsely: "Sasuke?"


    The originally tense emotions suddenly disappeared!


    What turns out is excitement and surprise!


    Sasuke threw himself up at the moment and couldn''t help but give Naruto a bear hug and said with a big smile: "Hahahaha! I know you won''t die so easily! I know you will be fine!"


    As he said, he patted Naruto on the shoulder.


    The corners of the eyes are even unable to bear the tears of joy.


    Sasuke never thought he cared so much about Naruto''s life and death.


    After this matter, he finally understood his inner thoughts.


    However, the emotion of excitement soon passed, and the change came from the doubt: "Oh, why are you sitting here on the knee motionless? They told me you''re dead, and I was really afraid that you would just die."


    Sasuke, who was over-excited, changed his normal situation and kept talking.


    What he didn''t know was that the moment Naruto saw him worrying about him besides feeling a warm heart, it was more like finding a catharsis that hurts in his heart.


    He didn''t listen to Sasuke''s words.


    At this moment, he just wanted to share his pain with Sasuke.


    With a look of hope and care, Naruto, with bursting lips, and a hoarse tone, he said to Sasuke in a blink of an eye: "Sasuke, my... my... big brother he died..."


    Sasuke hearing this froze.


    The excitement stopped suddenly.


    Sasuke mistakenly thought he had heard it wrong, and confirmed again: "You... what are you talking about?"


    Naruto said dryly: "I... my... big brother, sacrificed himself to save me... dead..."

 Chapter 179: Darken Again, Changed Mind

    Chapter 179: Darken Again, Changed Mind


    Sasuke was in a trance.


    Immediately afterwards, as if hearing the biggest joke in the world, he couldn''t help butugh: "Your big brother is dead? Hehe, don''t crack a joke. How is this possible? How can your big brother die? Naruto, you''re cracking a joke, right?"


    Naruto was puzzled.


    Sasuke''s response, he only felt strange.


    Why does it sound like Sasuke have known big brother long ago?


    Although things are awkward, the current Naruto can''t think about so manyplicated things. He just wanted to talk to Sasuke about the pain in his heart.


    Now that Sasuke has a certain understanding of the big brother.


    It couldn''t be better.


    Perhaps it was Sasuke who had noticed some clues when he was with Naruto before, maybe other reasons. Anyway, as long as he save himself the trouble of exining it, it doesn''t matter that much.


    Naruto''s voice was hoarse, and he cried, "No... no... it''s true. Big brother really died this time. He died to resurrect me. Sasuke, tell me, what should I do? Hinata is dead, I can resurrect Hinata. But the big brother is dead, how can I resurrect him? Do I really lose my big brother forever?"


    Naruto just wanted to pounce on Sasuke''s arms, hoping to get Sasuke''sfort and Sasuke''s care. But didn''t expect Sasuke to suddenly stagger and made him empty.


    He saw Sasuke stepped back and forth again and again.


    While constantly shaking his head, the mouth is constantly whispering ''impossible, impossible, your big brother is impossible to die''. The whole person looks like a lunatic who is about to get out of control.


    Hearing the news of Li Yaoxiang''s death.


    Sasuke''s expression is full of uneptable, full of unbelievable.


    This state was maintained for a moment.


    Sasuke suddenly shouted at Naruto: "impossible ! How could your big brother die ! You are lying to me! You are lying to me-!" He shouted.


    Sasuke continued to whisper ''impossible, impossible'' in his mouth, turned around and left.


    Never look at Naruto again.


    Sasuke''s changes directly stunned Naruto.


    He left in such a dazed look,pletely unaware what was going on. How did Sasuke suddenly be like this?


    However, the current Naruto can''t think about meddlesome feelings at all.


    He only felt that his heart was very painful and ufortable.


    Sasuke is gone.


    But this pain and difort can still not be vented...


    What should I do?


    What should I do to reduce this pain?


    At this moment, various pictures suddenly shed through Naruto''s mind.


    There are pictures of being bullied and imprisoned in his childhood. There is a disgusting picture of Sarutobi Hiruzen trying to kill him and want to wrong him. There is a picture of Shimura Danzo killing Hinata. Until the end, it was a picture of Jiraiya piercing his chest with tears.


    This scene is constantly reappearing in my mind.


    Every sh, Naruto''s heart became cold.


    84%...


    88%...


    92%...


    97%...


    As his thoughts became more indifferent, Naruto''s degree of darkening has also soared! The colder the ice, the faster the darkening will increase! It has been increased to 97%, and this can''t be stopped!


    At the same time.


    The stimtion on the brain caused Naruto''s eyes-power to soar!


    If the previous eyes-power was enough for Naruto to turn on Susanoo in Second-Stage, now his eyes-power is enough for him to turn on Third-Stage Susanoo Complete Body!


    It''s you!


    It''s all of you!


    If it were not for you, I would not feel so much pain!


    If it were not for you, the big brother would not die!


    Well!


    Since you like to bring me pain, and since my pain cannot be resolved, then from the moment on, let the entire world feel the pain together!


    Naruto stood up slowly.


    His physical strength is recovering little by little!


    Just standing firm, Naruto suddenly frowned, and he felt that familiar energy inside his body. In order to confirm his guess, Naruto shouted directly: "Kurama! Are you still there?"


    When Jinchuriki dies, the Chakra of Tailed Beast will also dissipate between Heaven and Earth.


    After a period of time, it has re-condensed.


    Just now, in a state of panic and confusion, Naruto did not have time to feel the new life he had regained.


    Now after calming down.


    Only then did he feel the abnormality within his body.


    But his question is destined to ask the wrong person, because Kyuubi also did not understand the situation: "This... the old man is also not very clear... It stands to reason that after you die, the old man will also dissipate well. But when you were resurrected, the old man''s consciousness slowly woke up."


    The reason why this happens, of course it is Li Yaoxiang''s masterpiece.


    Because Li Yaoxiang knew that in the next n, if there was no ident, Naruto would also encounter a big disaster. He estimated that with Mangekyo Sharingan alone, plus Uzumaki n''s Bloodline, the world should not be able to pass this catastrophe smoothly.


    Looking at the current situation.


    He has truly withdrawn from the scene.


    That''s why Li Yaoxiang spent the darkening points. In addition to the resurrection of Naruto, Kyuubi was sealed again. Because Naruto would definitely use the power of Kyuubi.


    Naruto didn''t think about it anymore.


    It can only be attributed to his omnipotent big brother.


    Thinking of the big brother, Naruto felt another pain in his heart again.


    He put his heart across and entered Chakra into the ring of ''Akatsuki''.


    Not much time.


    His projection appeared in Akatsuki''s base.


    When Nagato sensed the situation, he immediately contacted: "Naruto? What''s wrong? For you to quickly search me, is there something wrong?"


    Normally, Naruto will only contact Nagato after he catches Jinchuriki. ording to the day when Naruto left Akatsuki''s base, the calction began. Nagato felt that Naruto should not havepleted the mission so quickly, so he asked.


    As for... why does Nagato''s news be so backward.


    He has no way of knowing about Daimyo and Five-Great Ninja Viges of the five countries targeting Naruto. That is due to Obito''s ghost behind the scenes. Obito instructed White Zetsu to only report the situation on the surface and conceal the true facts.


    Hearing Nagato ask him, it reminded Naruto of what he had encountered not so long ago, and he felt deep in the heart at the moment, coldly said: "Problem? Hehe. No! I''m very good here!!"


    Nagato: "Then why..."


    Naruto: "Did you not tell me before that you want to cause an all-out war in Five Great Countries, and I have two choices? I changed my mind now. I don''t want to be so troublesome. Let''s just destroy one of Ninja Viges!"


    Naruto''s changes made Nagato a little unustomed.


    But in order to realize the dream...


    After a moment of silence, he chose to ignore it: "Yes, I will do my best to cooperate with you. Which Ninja Viges do you want to target?"


    Naruto in the projection grinned: "Konoha!"

 Chapter 180: Cant wait, a big enemy

    Chapter 180: Can''t wait, a big enemy


    After Naruto said thetest decision. The other members of Akatsuki quickly sensed the abnormal movement of the ring and entered Chakra into the ring one after another.


    One after another projection appears in front of a stone pir lighthouse.


    Hoshigaki Kisame.


    Sasori. renowned as Sasori of the Red Sand (Akasuna no Sasori), was an S-rank missing-nin from Sunagakure''s Puppet Brigade and a member of Akatsuki, where he was partnered with Orochimaru andter Deidara.


    Deidara.


    Kakuzu.


    Hidan.


    Obito.


    Zetsu.


    As soon as they appeared, all of them looked at him, and he looked at them, and there was no sound, just waiting for Nagato to take the initiative to say why they were called.


    Nagato: "From this moment, everyone halts the mission on hand. The n has changed. Our next goal is to destroy Konoha. How long will it take you to get there?"


    In the past. No matter what order Nagato gives.


    Even if they will eventually follow the instructions, which of the people present is not an unruly people? For the sake of face, in order to show that they are a subordinate of Nagato, everyone has cooperative rtionship. In the process of epting instructions, some verbal rebuttals are always inevitable.


    But this time, when Nagato said about thistest mission; destroying Konoha, surprisingly, no one objected!


    They even showed some excitement and impatient feeling.


    Sasori needless to say.


    His parents had been killed by Konoha''s Sakumo Hatake. Even in the past, no matter how to cover up his emotions, it would be terrible if someone really picked up the enmity that was buried deep in the heart.


    It must be out of control right now.


    Even Hiruko, a Puppet with a serious hunchback, has been making mechanical sounds kaka ka ka, trembling.


    It''s not that Puppet has a problem.


    But Sasori hidden in Puppet, already excited and forgot to hide his emotions.


    Excitement affects Hiruko''s external performance, but it is not known to others.


    Also excited is Hoshigaki Kisame.


    Since Hoshigaki Kisame learned that Uchiha Itachi was spy, and learned that his feelings were betrayed, he also became quite silent.


    But even so.


    He still sides with Uchiha Itachi from the bottom of his heart and respects Uchiha Itachi.


    He agreed with Uchiha Itachi''s behavior.


    Respect Uchiha Itachi.


    And more importantly, after learning the truth afterwards, and knowing his partner for many years, it turned out that after having such an unknown experience, what Konoha did to him was even more ufortable!


    He even feels sick!


    If there is no chance to avenge him, that''s whatever.


    But this time is the "Official Business" issued by the leader of Akatsuki, Nagato himself, which makes it difficult for him not to be excited!


    Since Konoha was destroyed and Konoha was retaliated against, Uchiha Itachi could not fulfill his wish at that time.


    Then all he has to do isplete it himself!


    Not to mention the other members.


    Either silly or idiot.


    Either an idiot or a lunatic.


    They can''t wait to implement such an exciting mission immediately!


    Let Konoha be their work of art, be their merit, andpletely disappear from this world!


    Sasori: "Half a day!"


    Hoshigaki Kisame: "One day!"


    Hidan: "It''s over! It''s over! I''m too far away from Konoha right now! At least 3 or 4 days away. Such a fun mission that I have to wait for a long time?! You won''t leave me behind, right? Great senior, you won''t me me, right?!"


    Kakuzu nced at Hidan and said nothing.


    Because his current position is with Hidan.


    But his eyes finally fell on Naruto, hoping that Naruto, the boss, would not deduct his money.


    Deidara: "Where are you? Let me take you! I am impatient too and want to show my artwork in Konoha! I don''t want to wait a minute!"


    Hidan was overjoyed. He knew that Deidara could fly.


    He told Deidara where he and Kakuzu are.


    Nagato: "How long will it take to arrive?"


    Deidara pondered for a moment and clenched the teeth: "Two days! I must arrive in two days!"


    Immediately, Nagato turned to Obito: "What about you?"


    Zetsu: "Anytime."


    Obito shrugged: "Me too."


    "Very well, then act together in two days. This time we will use Naruto as the main force. When the timees, you can follow Naruto''s arrangement and cooperate with him." Tone barely fell, everyone''s eyes, all concentrated On Naruto''s projection.


    Nagato continued: "Wait two more days before acting, is it okay?"


    Naruto nced at everyone, and the tone ice coldly said: "Yes."


    ...


    At the same time.


    After Jiraiya reported Sasuke''s situation to Tsunade.


    The people in the Konoha Vige started to act on their own.


    The medical department is ready.


    The logistics department is ready.


    Thebatants also took their ces.


    The vigers were once again evacuated to a safe area.


    Everyone is like a big enemy, but in fact, most people in the vige don''t know what''s going on, they can only follow the instructions.


    However, Konoha has faced the crisis of destroying viges again and again, which has made most ninjas, or vigers, gradually lose confidence in Konoha and feel tired. It can be said that people were rmed.


    Time passes by one minute.


    ording to Jiraiya''s calctions.


    Sasuke would be back at about this time.


    So he himself came to the gate of Konoha and waited.


    Tsunade sits in the rear.


    Just as expected.


    It''s about the same time as Jiraiya''s calction.


    A silhouette of Sasuke quickly appeared in the distance.


    Jiraiya gave a hand seal at the moment, indicating everyone hidden everywhere to raise vignce.


    He himself walked up head-on, and said in a soothing tone: "Sasuke, people can''t be resurrected from death, don''t be too sad."


    The reason for not shooting directly is because they cannot determine whether Sasuke really regards them as enemies. Without being spelled by circumstances, they still did not want to push Sasuke to the opposite.


    Sasuke ignored Jiraiya.


    Continue to move forward blindly.


    The expression was dull, and his mouth still murmured: "Impossible, impossible, it''s impossible he''s dead..."


    Seeing the state of Sasuke, Jiraiya''s heart is even more ufortable. He mistakenly thought that Sasuke epted Naruto''s death and could not bear the blow, so he has this look.


    However, for Konoha, Jiraiya chose to abandon these feelings of guilt for the time being.


    Continue to observe Sasuke''s every move.


    Seeing that Sasuke was about to enter the Konoha gate, from Jiraiya''s earphones hung around his ears rose an inquiry: "How? Lord-Jiraiya, do you want to do it directly?"


    Jiraiya right hand leaned on the headset and replied: "Don''t do it yet, look at the situation clearly before speaking."


    Sasuke suddenly recovered from a dull state at this time!


    Under everyone''s surprise, he suddenly rushed to a certain direction!

 Chapter 181: Showdown, no more acting

    Chapter 181: Showdown, no more acting


    "Report! Report! Uchiha Sasuke is still here! Do you want to do it? Do you want to do it?"


    "Report! Report! Uchiha Sasuke is almost approaching, do we need to do it?"


    "Report! Report..."


    As Sasuke continued to sprint.


    In Jiraiya''s earphones, there were also constant reports of ninjas. Jiraiya saw that the situation was far from good, caught up in the moment, and stared at Sasuke''s back.


    "Don''t act first! Everyone don''t act first! Stay where you are!" Jiraiya urgently ordered.


    If he really wants to do it, Sasuke would have already done it.


    Why sprint in the vige?


    So Jiraiya firmly believes that there are other reasons for Sasuke''s high probability to make this move. In addition, the vigers have already withdrawn here, so if he really wants to take action, and he''s not in a hurry.


    It was also because Jiraiya issued this instruction.


    Sasuke was unimpeded along the way.


    Everyone didn''t understand what was going on, or what Sasuke''s purpose was.


    And Sasuke rushed to a house in the panic of everyone.


    Sasuke kicked the door open with a kick and made a loud noise of ''pa!''.


    In front of him, Konoha three elders who was full of emotion and putting hot tea to their mouths.


    That''s right!


    Sasuke was sprinting in the same room where three elders used for gatherings. However, after entering the house, Sasuke did not look at the three elders.


    Instead, he walked to Sai without a sense of presence.


    Then he asked angrily: "Tell me! Thest time you contacted him, how long ago!"


    That''s right.


    Sasuke came this time because he didn''t give up.


    Want to reconfirm the life and death of Li Yaoxiang.


    Li Yaoxiang can''t be contacted by himself. Sai, who is also working for Li Yaoxiang, maybe he got contacted?


    Seeing Sasuke telling the secret between the two without any cover, Sai was also stunned for a moment, and there was a bad feeling in her heart.


    Sasuke urged: "Quick! Quickly answer me! How long ago?"


    Sai, who was urged to recover by Sasuke, didn''t need Sasuke to exin too much, and it soon became clear to him, who is the ''he'' in Sasuke''s mouth. He subconsciously replied: "3... 3 days ago..."


    After hearing this answer, Sasuke''s mood was once again thunderous.


    His legs were so soft that he stepped back and forth a few steps, and then he pulled his hair hard with his hands: "No, no, how could he die!"


    After a torn mood, Sasuke once again entered a state of panic.


    He murmured ''No, he cannot die'', just like walking corpse, walked in the direction outside the vige.


    At the same time.


    This time who was in a mood of thunder is not just Sasuke, but even Sai!


    Hearing Sasuke''s phrase "How could he die", coupled with Sasuke''s so excited reaction, Sai''s heart is now tight! If he couldn''t see what was going on, then he had lived for so many years in vain.


    He had worked hard for so many years. Isn''t it just to let Li Yaoxiang fulfill his promise and resurrect his brother one day?


    But now the news brought by Sasuke is that ''he'' is dead?!


    How can this be?!


    No!


    It should not be, how can he die!


    If he is dead, who will resurrect the big brother?!


    Doesn''t it mean that my efforts over the years have been in vain?!


    Sai also entered a state of panic.


    Shimura Danzo unable to bear, he angrily shouted: "Hmph! Sai! Do you have something to tell me?"


    Things have be so obvious.


    How many of these elders in the house can''t see the problem between Sasuke and Sai? Although I don''t know what the situation is, Shimura Danzo can at least confirm that the subordinate, Sai, has something to hide from him.


    As the Leader of Root, he is absolutely impossible to tolerate his subordinates to hide things from him!


    The current Sai, in his eyes, is already not qualified as a ninja.


    Seeing Sai froze there, Shimura Danzo simply shouted: "Someone get here! Take him down!"


    After a period of time of "supervision", Tsunade had to liberate their freedom. After all, they were only ''helping'' and did notmit any crimes.


    If you continue to supervise, you can''t justify it.


    Of course, these people fall on Tsunade''s hands, and Tsunade is not ineffective, and will definitely filter them again, let them repent and be saved, and return to Hokage''smand.


    Because of this.


    Now that there is really little left to follow the instructions of the three elders.


    Shimura Danzo is better, at least his way of education is different.


    Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu, that''s miserable.


    There are only three or two Root Ninjas left.


    But it wouldn''t be any better, because whether it was Uchiha Itachi or Naruto''s consecutive bursts, they both deliberately attacked the root ninjas.


    So there is not much left toe in handy.


    It''s just that when Shimura Danzo shouted thismand, the picture of ''Immediately appeared Root ninja, take Sai off'', not at all appeared.


    The atmosphere in the room has been quiet for a while.


    Extremely embarrassing.


    The sullen Shimura Danzo, who blushed, loudly shouted again: "Where did everyone go?! Take him down!"


    Xiu! Xiu!


    Two sounds.


    This time people appeared.


    It''s just that he stood beside Sai, with a look that looks like Sai''s.


    Sai was also shocked by Shimura Danzo''s second burst of shout, and he recovered from the panic. He is not like Sasuke. He has no great strength. His situation does not allow him to continue to be distracted.


    Now that Sasuke has revealed the secret.


    Then he doesn''t need to cover up anymore!


    Sai lifts the head, facing Shimura Danzo''s cold eyes, no longer the respectful expression of the past: "No more shouting. They won''t listen to your instructions."


    Shimura Danzo turned ck: "What the hell is going on?"


    Sai nced at the one-armed old man with disdain, ''hehe''. A simple disdain to answer his question.


    As stated before.


    Sai does not have enough power.


    He knows his strengths and weaknesses.


    Fearing that Li Yaoxiang will go back on his words, Sai has been trying to prove his worth over the years. Secretly in Root, he was recruiting troops.


    It can be said that as long as there is a hint of thought in my heart, I don''t want to be a killer machine without feelings, or forced by Shimura Danzo to kill his own rtives, and there is a hint of hatred against this old fellow, Sai will slowly gather it away.


    As for the loyal ones, they are united and solved in secret.


    It was during this period of time that Shimura Danzo had absolute trust in Sai and sent the others to death.


    So...


    On the surface, there are more peopleing back to help Shimura Danzo than Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu, but in fact, Shimura Danzo is a bachelormander with right hand sleeves floating and the field of view on the right is ck.


    Li Yaoxiang was also very happy toment on the ending of Shimura Danzo bing a lonely old man, so he did not stop Sai from continuing to prove his worth in front of him...

 Chapter 182: The happy hour is over, Naruto is here

    Chapter 182: The happy hour is over, Naruto is here


    At the same time.


    When Sasuke is in the process of leaving.


    Sitting in the rear, Tsunade, who was informed of the news, also arrived at Sasuke''s location with Jiraiya.


    Now that it has been determined that Sasuke will not retaliate against Konoha for Naruto''s affairs, it was great. Tsunade, who is Hokage, and Jiraiya, who is Konoha Jonin, all they have to do now is of course to try their best to retain Sasuke.


    After all, Sasuke''s strength is there.


    If Sasuke really left Konoha, that would be a huge loss for Konoha.


    Jiraiya: "Sasuke, what the hell happened? Who are you saying that ''impossible to die''?"


    Tsunade: "Sasuke, you''re also a part of Konoha, if you have any questions, let us know. If we can help, we will definitely help you."


    Sasuke in panic, subconsciously crossed them.


    They followed along again.


    All sorts of humbling words, like flies, hummed in Sasuke''s ears.


    Sasuke, who his thoughts were disturbed, instantly became hot!


    Mangekyo Sharingan open!


    Susanoo Second-Stage. Now!


    imposing-manner broke out suddenly.


    Tsunade and Jiraiya were forced to retreat with their feet.


    After forcing two people away for a long distance, Sasuke burst shouted at the two extremely impatiently: "Enough! You rubbish repeating Will of Fire over and over again! Have been dangling in front of me. Do you really think I won''t kill you guys--!"


    Everyone in the vige and Konoha has long made Sasuke sick and sickened.


    If it were not for the purpose of resurrecting his family, he would not return here simply.


    If it weren''t for ''him'' now, he wouldn''t even think about the issue of revenge, maybe he would have already taken a step ahead of Naruto and killed Konoha.


    I can''t bear it till now!


    "Don''te here and bother me! Otherwise, don''t me me for destroying you flies now!" After that, Sasuke withdrew Susanoo, closed Mangekyo Sharingan, and continued to walk outside the vige.


    This scene saw Tsunade and Jiraiya, looked at each other in nk dismay.


    Sasuke''s attitude towards vige and towards them is obvious.


    This has reached an irreparable point.


    They dared not go up and stop him again.


    So as not to cause bad results.


    It''s just that why Sasuke bes like this is the key point. This is what the two people care about most. Instantly, two people shed in one person''s mind at the same time, Sai!


    No need to talk more.


    Two people nced at each other.


    They leapt together in the direction of Sai.


    The two people arrived at the room where three elders met.


    The picture that came into view made both of them feel a little surprised. From the hundreds of people during their heyday to only a few dozen Root Ninjas left. Not only do they all gather outside the house, but they have also appeared to face Shimura Danzo and the others.


    After two people came to the scene.


    Everyone then turned their attention to them.


    Tsunade''s heart sank at the moment, his face ck, and he nced at everyone with a voice said solemnly: "What the hell happened? Why are you all gathered here!"


    The reticent Root Ninjas, including Sai, do not intend to respond.


    Shimura Danzo didn''t even know how to respond.


    The cultivation model that he has always been proud of now is a problem. The only Root ninja left behind turned out to betray him. He was so ipetent that he could only stare.


    How did he respond?


    Does hein to Tsunade that all his subordinates ran away and they were on the opposite side.


    Let Tsunade help teach these betrayers?


    Shimura Danzo asked himself that his skin was not thick to this level, so he didn''t mean toin to Tsunade.


    The old close friends on the side, Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu, also saw Shimura Danzo''s embarrassment this time, but it was not good to hit a person when he''s down.


    So there is no noise.


    Seeing that everyone didn''t take a Hokage in their eyes and didn''t answer her questions, Tsunade was even more annoyed and wanted to beat people.


    But because of her current status and decentness, she can''t mess up.


    In the end, she had to forcibly swallow the anger back into her belly.


    nced at everyone once again.


    Her eyes finally fell on this seemingly best-handed Sai: "Sai, what the hell is going on? Why is Sasuke eager to find you? What secrets are there between you and him? And why are you all gathered here?"


    This series of questions is also the doubt in Jiraiya''s heart.


    He stared at Sai too.


    It''s a pity that the response they got was that Sai put on an ''official'' smile and said, "Lord-Hokage, my rtionship with Sasuke... I''m sorry, I can''t tell you, nor do I know how to tell you. As for why we are gathered here..."


    Sai stuck out his tongue, revealing the curse-seal carved by Shimura Danzo.


    Then he said, "It is also impossible to tell you."


    Jiraiya hearing this angrily: "Asshole! How can you talk to Hokage like this?!"


    When faced with Five Great Countries and Five-Great Ninja Viges, the helplessness of persecution, the helplessness in front of Naruto, and the same helplessness in front of Sasuke will be justified.


    Unexpectedly, she was just asking a junior in the vige about the ins and outs of the matter, and she would be looked down upon, and even dismissed her.


    This time.


    Even Jiraiya, a good-tempered old man, was unable to bear to get angry, and wanted to fiercely teach Sai a severe lesson. However, before waiting for him to continue scolding, Tsunade waved her hand at this time to stop him.


    If she can''t ask the result.


    Tsunade swept towards the rest of the Root Ninja.


    The root ninjas knew what Tsunade''s eyes meant.


    Sai did not say, then Tsunade wanted the others to respond to her question.


    The idea is very good, but what made Tsunade didn''t expect is that her idea made her see a very chilling scene next!


    Root ninjas not saying anything further, just taking off the mask!


    They also showed their tongues carved with curse-seal!


    The meaning to be expressed is obvious.


    It is exactly simr to Sai.


    The same cannot be said!


    Seeing this situation, Tsunade and Jiraiya are suddenly angry!


    How could this be?!


    Are they not all ninjas of Konoha?


    What did they do wrong?


    Why should they be treated like this?!


    The anger instantly transferred to Shimura Danzo.


    Two people, four eyes, stared at Shimura Danzo.


    Feeling the eyes of two people, Shimura Danzo nced at them, coldly snorted: "This is something inside Root. I don''t have to tell you."


    Tsunade breathes deeply.


    I don''t know how to describe her mood at the moment.


    The mess that old fogey gave her is really rotten!


    There are so many problems in the vige!


    Everyone doesn''t take Vige Kage seriously?!


    Since it doesn''t work softly, it has to be hard!


    Thinking of this, Tsunade''s attitude and tone in the face of Sai suddenly became hard: "Sai, no matter what, you are all ninjas of Konoha. What do you mean by gathering now? Not even listening to my orders, are you going to betray vige?!"


    Sai squinted and smiled: "Lord-Hokage, you say this... It''s too much. As you can see, after so many years, since the vige has ignored us, no matter our life or death, we have to unite to save ourself together. Moreover, we are not disobedient to your orders. As long as it is not for us to die, we are still happy to ept it. Don''t even think about separating us. After all, we are also afraid of being broken by you one by one. Of course, if you have to continue the vige''s usual style of behavior and put these crimes such as betrayal of the vige on our heads, then in order to survive, we have to fight hard to resist and escape from the vige."


    Sai''s tone sounded respectful.


    But the meaning is very obvious.


    He just doesn''t trust the Hokage.


    Now these dozens of people have made it clear that they want to hold the group for warmth.


    And in the words, he did not forget to remind Tsunade that if she had to force them in this way, she as a Hokage was actually exactly simr to these disgusting elders.


    It suddenly gave Tsunade dumbstruck and unable to reply.


    Wanted to get angry.


    She wanted to directly beat this Sai in front of her eyes.


    But the current Konoha is at its crucial moment that people were rmed. Now everyone''s eyes are watching here, waiting for her to express her attitude.


    If her choice is to continue Sarutobi Hiruzen''s approach.


    It is estimated that Konoha which has finally recovered a little bit of popr support, might reallypletely scattered, and can no longer be united.


    Today''s situation really makes Tsunade difficult.


    I really want to go like this, then what is the majesty of her Hokage?


    How to manage the huge Konoha in the future?


    What can I do if I don''t leave?


    Are you standing here staring at me?


    Just when Tsunade didn''t know what to do, it was just right or intentional. At this time, the sound came from the earphones, giving Tsunade a step down: "Lord-Hokage, some vigers have started to be emotional. Should we continue to keep them here?"


    Tsunade probed the earphones, red fiercely at everyone present, and while turning around and leaving, she responded: "You can get them back. Just tell them that this is just an exercise, don''t rm everyone."


    Jiraiya nced at Sai and nced at the group of root ninjas.


    He shook his head and sigh.


    Also follow Tsunade''s footsteps to leave.


    The end of this farce is the indispensable Leader of Root Shimura Danzo, which haspletely be a bachelormander and aughingstock between Jonins.


    Even Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu, the two old close friends, couldn''t bear to look directly.


    In the next period of time.


    The entire Konoha is very busy.


    To appease the vigers.


    Also contacting Daimyo and the Great Ninja Viges.


    In just one day, after finishing these things, Konoha finally returned to the original daily state, and Tsunade only had time to face up to Sasuke, Sai, and Root again.


    She summoned several elders of Shimura Danzo and some high-level personnel toe to Hokage Residence and Conference Hall to discuss this series of problems carefully.


    In Conference Hall.


    Three elders just sat down.


    Tsunade looked towards Shimura Danzo with an angry look: "Some things, do you need to exin to everyone clearly?"


    Shimura Danzo unperturbed: "I have nothing to say."


    Tsunade shot the desktop: "Nothing to say?! You told me nothing to say?! Things have reached the present field, what else do you have to hide?!!! What else do you want to hide?! Which of your subordinates are you going to exin?!"


    Shimura Danzo: "The curse-seal is just to prevent them from leaking any information about me, there are no other restrictions at all."


    Tsunade asked: "Why do they betray you!"


    Shimura Danzo: "Oh, I also want to know that answer."


    Up to now, it is impossible for Shimura Danzo to admit that he has done the dirty things to the root ninja. Anyway, even if it is said, it won''t help the whole thing, so it is simply concealed it to the end.


    And Tsunade held this meeting mainly to understand the real reason why Sasuke left the vige, and to assess Sasuke''s harm to the vige, so she doesn''t intend to entangle too much on other issues.


    Go directly to the next topic.


    Tsunade: "What about the rtionship between Sasuke and Sai? Why is Sasuke like this? What is the secret between the two of them? Sai is your right-hand man, don''t tell me, you haven''t seen anything until now!"


    The current Shimura Danzo has a dangling two sleeves.


    But this does not mean that he has no probability to do anything.


    As early as everyone''s busy this period of time, three elders have already discussed good countermeasures.


    Let them save their faces.


    Regain poprity.


    Regain authority.


    Shimura Danzo made a direct statement in the best way for them!


    Big brother!


    That''s right!


    Their guess is that Naruto''s big brother!


    Only this mysterious big brother, after so many years, still leaves them clueless.


    It was for this reason that Sarutobi Hiruzen was determined to kill Naruto.


    After talking about these spections.


    The three of them are of course transformed, standing at the highest point of morality.


    Because they aimed at Naruto, killed Hinata, and let vige stand on the opposite of Naruto, really for Konoha''s sake!


    After everyone heard it, it caused a shiver.


    At this so-called mysterious person.


    Tsunade even said for everyone: "That is to say... until now, there is such a potential mysterious person who is threatening Konoha?"


    Seeing everyone worried.


    The three elders satisfied.


    You finally understand our pains, and finally know that we are thinking about Konoha, right?


    Mitokado Homura took a sip of hot tea and appeased with a smile: "Don''t worry about this. Until now, what we do is to help Konoha solve these potential hidden dangers, hoping to leave you the best of this generation Konoha."


    Utatane Koharu nodded is in line with: "Yeah. We have already discussed this matter carefully by the three of us. Obviously, has this potential threat been resolved? Otherwise, Sasuke will not keep whispering ''How can he die''. Combined with the time point to specte, this ''he'', the big probability is Naruto''s big brother. So... Do not worry! All hidden dangers have been solved by us! In the future Konoha, there will be no more problems! As long as we are unanimous to the outside world, Konoha will definitely be able to move towards a more glorious future!"


    The words of the two old consultants seemed to give everyone a shot.


    Everyone present couldn''t help letting go of their long tense emotions.


    Big relief.


    But before waiting for how long they rx, there was a bombardment outside of Hokage Residence!


    Bang!


    Boom!


    Boom!


    It was Anbu ninja, with a swift footstep, rushed into the Conference Hall: "Lady Tsunade, it''s not good! It''s not good! Attack... Attack... Someone has attacked!"


    Tsunade stood up and cry out in surprise: "Who is it? Is it Sasuke?!"


    The vige has only recently calmed down.


    Five-Great Ninja Viges are still in contact.


    If someone dared to attack Konoha, that person could only be Sasuke who had just left.


    Someone would dare to attack Konoha, and that person could only be Sasuke who had just left.


    So the first thing Tsunade thought of was Sasuke.


    Anbu ninja''s tone was very rmed: "No... no... not Sasuke! It''s Naruto, Uzumaki Naruto!"


    hiss--!


    Everyone took a breath!


    Everyone looked at each other, not knowing what the three elders were thinking.

 Chapter 183: Go to war! Meeting between the master and disciple

    Chapter 183: Go to war! Meeting between the master and disciple


    Bang!


    Boom!


    Boom!


    The sting sound continued.


    A huge flying bird is hovering over the Konoha Vige.


    The exploding y thrown down from the giant bird, bombing the entire Konoha chaos.


    Except for the sting sound.


    The cries for help echoed throughout the vige.


    The vigers fled in all over the ce, almost forming a situation where people collided with each other.


    Many buildings have been blown up and down.


    Fortunate ones, even if they escaped the bombardment of y, they couldn''t avoid the huge boulders and wall bricks that were blown up, and they were smashed into blood. The unfortunate ones were even bombed to death or smashed to death.


    The vige of Konoha, which was finally restored to peace, suddenly became a chaotic battlefield.


    And it was Deidara, Hidan, and Kakuzu who came to the feast from a distance to take part in the flying bird.


    Seeing such a wonderful picture on the ground, Hidan is the most excited one.


    He opened his voice and shouted: "Wa ha! Wow hahaha! It''s so cool! It''s so cool! Let''s fry it! Let''s fry more! Deidara, quick! Quick! Give me a few!"


    Seeing someone appreciate their work, Deidara''s vanity suddenly was satisfied a lot: "How is it? Do you think this is the most beautiful art in the world?"


    Kakuzu warned repeatedly: "You two, don''t forget the business."


    It was the moment when three people were most smug.


    Under emergency.


    The reaction Kakashi suddenly opened his less skilled Mangekyo Sharingan, used the remote Kamui, and eliminated one of the wings of the giant bird.


    At the same time blood tears came running from the eye.


    The giant bird also crashed into a building from the sky like a crash.


    A rumble sounded.


    A big hole was broken in the building wall.


    Smoke billowing.


    Can''t see the situation clearly.


    But when Kakashi rushed forward, either to check the situation or to resolve the opponent, a ck shadow suddenly shed in front of him. It was an ugly man with a lower face covered by fabric, a hunched body, and a spine with a barb mechanical tail like a Sasori tail.


    That''s right!


    The personing is Sasori!


    Sasori has hatred for Sakumo killing his father and mother!


    Now that Sakumo Hatake is dead, let his son pay this debt!


    Sasori: "Hatake Kakashi, right? Let me be your opponent. If someone does not pity your body and kills you, then I want to make you a Puppet..."


    Kakashi solemnly looks at this guy in front of him.


    Extinguished the idea of being able to pass quickly.


    Sasori gave him the feeling that he was not an easy opponent to deal with.


    At the same time.


    Although Kakashi could not go to the front to stop the dangerous character Deidara.


    But Sarutobi Asuma, Kurenai Yuhi and many other Jonin arrived at the building, surrounded the building, and prepared to stop Deidara from continuing to attack Konoha Vige indiscriminately.


    The smoke scattered.


    The silhouettes of Deidara, Hidan, and Kakuzu slowly appeared in front of everyone.


    None of the three people received much damage.


    Hidan is full of excitement and looks at the group of ninjas who surrounds him, licking his lips: "Your quality looks very good ~ Offering... for Lord Jashin, Lord Jashin must be very satisfied!"


    TL note: Jashin (literally meaning: wicked heart; evil god; evil design) is the god worshipped in Jashinism (Jashinky). Jashin''s symbol is an upside down triangle with a circle around it.


    Deidara patted the neck with one hand, gnashing one''s teeth said: "Who destroyed the best time for me to show art!"


    Kakuzu urged: "Don''t waste time, find your own opponent!"


    It was Hidan who licked his lips and locked Sarutobi Asuma: "Your blood feels good to me, how about let me have a bite?"


    Kakuzu locked in Kurenai Yuhi and several Jonin and did not speak.


    Deidara looks at the rest, he said: "Dare to interrupt me to show art, you all go to hell!"


    The battle is on the verge.


    Both sides rushed towards each other.


    On the other side, Might Guy was in the Safety Sector, put down the 4 children in his arms, winked and smiled, and said with apliment: "Be good here and don''t run around. Rest assured! It will be fine if we are here!"


    Several children were given a guarantee of confidence.


    Might Guy leapt towards the battle area.


    Only, he did not go far.


    Soon he was met Hoshigake Kisame''s Greatsword blocked his way.


    Might Guy not saying anything further.


    A Leaf Whirlwind kicked out.


    TL note: The user delivers a series of high and low kicks, each of which is fast enough that even the Sharingan can''t react to them.


    Hoshigaki Kisame raised Greatsword and blocked the blow, only making him taking few steps back.


    Might Guy poses with his move posture of that move: "Who are you? Why are you attacking Konoha?"


    Hoshigaki Kisame, who heard this sentence, was furious! This is not the first time he has hand-to-handbat with Might Guy, but Might Guy hasn''t remembered his name until now. This is a naked humiliation to him!


    Hoshigaki Kisame did not answer his question directly.


    Gnashing his teeth, he said: "Who am I... you will remember soon!"


    Soon, the entire Konoha has fallen into chaos.


    Escape.


    Fighting.


    More Medical-nin is constantly healing the injured civillians.


    In the most intense position of the battlefield, there was either arge patch of ck dust or a deafening explosion.


    Everyone who just came out of Hokage Residence saw Konoha in a mess, and all turned ck. Without waiting for Tsunade to speak, the n Leaders of Noble ns have already gone to their respective n and leaped away.


    Tsunade cursed secretly: "Damn it!"


    Soon it was ''boom! With a bang, white smoke rose in all directions, summoning a huge slug, Katsuyu.


    Katsuyu (Katsuyu) is a slug and the personal summon of the Fifth Hokage Tsunade, and her disciple Sakura Haruno. Katsuyu resides in the legendary Shikkotsu Forest.


    Immediately afterwards, this huge Katsuyu was scattered into countless small Katsuyus and went to battlefield for treatment and rescue.


    Then with grave expression, Jiraiya asked the ninja who just came to report: "What about Naruto? Where is Naruto?"


    Ninja: "At... at... at the gate..."


    After hearing it.


    Jiraiya and Tsunade nced at each other.


    The twomunicate with each other and they all understand the worries of the other side.


    Without further ado, Jiraiya took the lead to start to talk: "You can help deal with other enemies, let me go to meet Naruto in person."


    Tsunade reveals the look of hesitation.


    Obviously she was worried that Jiraiya can''t handle it.


    Jiraiya added: "Rx, I''m also Naruto''s master, it will be fine."


    Tsunade nodded, and her eyes revealed the meaning of e back alive", and then she leaped to another ce.


    Jiraiya walked slowly towards the gate of Konoha.


    The enemy has attacked until now.


    But he''s not even aware of any action by Naruto, Jiraiya knew that Naruto was waiting for him. So he did not rush to face Naruto and try to dy the time as much as possible, hoping that Tsunade will be able to conquer the remaining enemies as soon as possible and minimize the loss.


    But no matter howte he is.


    The distance between Hokage Residence and the gate of Konoha is always limited.


    He soon came not far from the gate.


    And met Naruto.


    Naruto did not die!


    But it didn''t matter. Naruto was not dead. It was not the most shocking picture for him. Anyway, after reported by his subordinates, he already had some psychological preparation.


    What shocked him most was that he didn''t just see Naruto''s disciple.


    He also saw the Yahiko who owns Rinnegan!


    At the gate of Konoha, it was Naruto and Yahiko who were waiting for Jiraiya for a long time...

 Chapter 184: Naruto vs Jiraiya

    Chapter 184: Naruto vs Jiraiya


    Jiraiya cry out in surprise: "Yahiko?! Why are you here?! How are you with Naruto? What about Nagato and Konan?"


    Seeing this scene in front of him.


    Jiraiya was frightened.


    In the beginning, he made a firm resolution and chose to kill Naruto by himself, which is partly because of the Great Toad Sage''s prophecy.


    His disciple will have the ability to change the world.


    Or bring world to destruction.


    Or bring world to peace.


    And Jiraiya, just because he observed Naruto''s behavior, has been faintly biased towards the path of destroying the world, so he hardened his heart and hands.


    But the question is, what about his other apprentice, Nagato?!


    Yahiko is here, does that mean that Nagato has also united with Naruto?


    He only has these two disciples as the ''Child of the Prophecy''.


    He really can''t imagine, if his two disciples are both on the path of destroying the world, what will the future of this world be?


    So he desperately wants to know the answer and wants to know everything.


    Unfortunately...


    He was doomed not to have this opportunity.


    Nagato did not intend to talk nonsense to him at all.


    Just responded with a sentence ''If you can live today, maybe I will tell you'', and then asked Naruto aside: "Do you need my help?"


    Naruto looks at Jiraiya, shaking his head: "No need. I''ll be enough to deal with him."


    Nagato controls Yahiko''s Puppet.


    A sh; he left the ce.


    Jiraiya gaze at Nagato leaving, shouting: "Yahiko !"


    He just wanted to chase.


    But he was quickly stopped by Naruto''s voice: "Jiraiya-sensei, do you still care about other people?"


    Jiraiya had a sturdy shape, turned his head to look at Naruto, and said solemnly and hurriedly: "Naruto, I know I''m sorry for you, maybe you will hate me very much. But Yahiko is more serious than you think. I must know the truth as soon as possible! Please. I will definitelye back to you afterwards to apologize with death."


    Jiya also has the determination to apologize with death.


    But the question is, if he really wants to know the truth, will he die willingly?


    No!


    Will not!


    In order not to let the two disciples continue to make mistakes, in order to maintain the peace of the world, he will only choose to do it again before he confessed his death!


    Like this, he goes back on his own word, hypocritical guy.


    Over the years, Naruto has no idea how many people like him he had encountered.


    How could Naruto still believe his gibberish?


    He will never forget that scene. The one who killed him personally was the one in front of him, who used his trust in him, tearing and piercing his heart was none other than Jiraiya-sensei!


    Naruto won''t eat his bullshit anymore.


    "What if I don''t let it?"


    Jiraiya was also taken aback on the spot. He didn''t expect that he had already said so clearly, and he promised to apologize with death, Naruto still didn''t n to stop.


    What followed was that he naturally revealed a trace of murderous aura.


    Naruto who feels this murderous aura, he felt funny, mocked in a yful tone: "What''s wrong? I won''t let you go, are you going to kill me again?"


    Jiraiya who was awakened by Naruto. Now it was a moment of surprise.


    Immediately, he appeared guilty and ufortable.


    If it were Naruto before, seeing Jiraiya''s expression, perhaps he would feel softened right now. But Naruto now feels very disgusted, and even a faint sense of anger in his heart slowly rising!


    It''s you who killed me!


    It''s you who is guilty!


    Is it possible that this is the usual method of you disgusting guys before killing?


    Want to shake the enemy''s mind?


    Seeing Jiraiya''s appearance, Naruto was disgusted to the extreme, and he didn''t want to talk to him again: "If you want to kill, just kill? It''s not the first time you killed me."


    The evil chakra in Naruto''s body has already crazily poured out of his body.


    The Chakra''s coat became more and more solid at a speed visible to the naked eye, and its tails grew rapidly one after another.


    Feeling the evil guilt of Jiraiya, the face that was originally guilty and self-ming, now disappeared and transformed into a firm expression: "I''m sorry, Naruto. After this matter, I will definitely be in front of your grave, and apologize with death!"


    Jiraiya talks while doing a hand seal!


    He wants to show his Sage Mode!


    However, his Sage Mode requires a longer preparation time before it can be sessful. So at the same time as the hand seal was over, he was the first to attack Naruto, intending to disrupt Naruto''s rhythm.


    ''Wild Lion''s Mane Technique!''


    TL note: This technique uses chakra to temporarily enhance the head''s metabolism and manipte the hair that grows longer as a result of it. There is also chakra flowing through the lengthened hair, making its hardnessparable to that of steel wire. By thickly bundling the hair, its strength is further increased, also increasing its destructive power. Its name maye from the fact that, as seen just before striking Pain, it takes the shape of what resembles a lion''s mouth.


    Xiu xiu xiu!


    A series of breaking wind sounded.


    Jiraiya''s sting white hair was all turned into spikes, spraying towards Naruto!


    Naruto figure is not moving.


    Chakra''s coat condensed into a huge beast w, blocking it in front of him, blocking all the spikes. Feeling this wave of unarmed attacks by Jiraiya, Narutoughed secretly: "Haha, Jiraiya-sensei did not disappoint himself. Still with that hypocrisy."


    There is a set of expressions on the face and a set of actions on the hands.


    Naruto, who was blocked by the animal''s ws, quickly felt a hot aura.


    His idea is correct.


    Jiraiya does not intend to be merciful.


    After a wave of spikes formed by hair.


    One after another is the powerful ''Fire Release: me Bullet!''.


    Jiraiya once had this move in the original work. With one blow, the giant bird Summoned Beast from Pain was directly eliminated! This shows how powerful its destructive power is.


    And since Jiraiya dared to use this move against Naruto''s main body, it proves that he is determined to kill Naruto again!


    Although this Fire Release: me Bullet is also blocked by the animal ws.


    But now Naruto, wouldn''t he truly feel the killing-intent emanating and the power of ninjutsu radiated by his good teacher?


    Because of this.


    Even if the surrounding aura is so hot, it still can''t warm the ice cold in Naruto''s heart.


    Naruto even secretlyughed at himself.


    Father, do you see it?


    How good your master is?


    When your son was a baby, he suffered 100 kinds of bullying. He ignored it and never came back to see your son. Even if he didn''t know, now he wants to kill your son, and it is not enough to kill me once....


    It seems that the father and son''s eyes are really not good.


    I also paid homage to such a wonderful master.


    Naruto didn''t hurry.


    When the hot aura and the smoke dissipated, the surrounding environment returned to calm.


    Blocking the huge beast ws of the Naruto field of view, it slowly shrinks back and merges into the Chakra coat.


    It is two pairs of toad eyes with horizontal eyeballs, looking directly at each other.


    Sage Mode Naruto vs Sage Mode Jiraiya!

 Chapter 185: You are not worthy

    Chapter 185: You are not worthy


    Fukasaku Sage: "Jiraiya, you haven''t called us out to fight in a long time? What''s wrong, who is the opponent this time? That you need to take seriously?"


    Shima Sage: "I can tell you, if you have nothing to disturb the olddy''s peace, I can''t spare you the olddy next time I see you."


    A man and a woman. Two old toads.


    As soon as he was summoned, he chattered on Jiraiya''s shoulder. This is also the strongest Sage Mode form of Jiraiya. With the help of Fukasaku Sage and Shima Sage, two old toads, he canst longer in Sage Mode.


    Unfortunately, ording to Jiraiya''s past habits and styles, he usually happily spoke to them in a casual manner before starting the war.


    But Jiraiya was not in a mood to chat with two old toads today.


    He gazed at the front with a very solemn expression, seriously said: "The enemy is in the front, look at yourself..."


    Fukasaku Sage and Shima Sage followed Jiraiya''s eyes. When he saw that the opponent was Naruto, their original expression suddenly became as ugly as if his mouth was stuffed into a big shit.


    Fukasaku Sage: "Jiraiya, aren''t you wrong? That''s Naruto..."


    Shima Sage: "Naruto is also a contractor of our Mount Myboku, this..."


    Jiraiya: "Don''t you forget the Great Toad Sage prophecy? Naruto is already on the path we don''t want to see most. Don''t you want to take this shot right now?"


    Fukasaku Sage hesitantly said: "Are you sure? Is there any misunderstanding?"


    Naruto this child.


    It was Fukasaku Sage who personally guided him to learn Senjutsu.


    Fukasaku feels that Naruto may be a bit paranoid about the resurrection of Hinata, but no matter how he looks, it doesn''t look like someone who will bring destruction to world. So he was very suspicious of Jiraiya''s conclusion.


    Unfortunately, it is impossible for him to know the cause and effect.


    Jiraiya did not have time to exin to him: "You can feel the surrounding situation yourself. He is now bringing people to destroy Konoha. Do you still think this is a misunderstanding?"


    Two old toads hearing this.


    The brows are suddenly locked tightly.


    They did sense the all situation around, as Jiraiya said.


    In this case, no longer hesitate. Fukasaku expression said firmly to Naruto: "Little Naruto, didn''t expect you wille to this path. Then I have no choice but to apologize to your old man."


    Jiraiya has already acted.


    ''Sage Art: Hair Needle Senbon!''


    TL note: When in Sage Mode, Jiraiya can use a senjutsu-enhanced version known as Sage Art: Hair Needle Senbon (Senp: Kebari Senbon, English TV: Sage Art: Kebari Senbon). At the same time that Jiraiya kneads chakra and fires the hair needles, Fukasaku and Shima activate Jiraiya''s hair roots, causing the hair to grow at an elerated rate thus making limitless rapid-fire possible. The sheer speed of this technique makes it the fastest attack with the widest range in Jiraiya''s arsenal. Jiraiya himself stating dodging this technique with speed alone is almost impossible and the only way to counter this technique is by blocking it.


    This Ninjutsu is considered an advanced version of the Wild Lion''s Mane Technique.


    The attack range isrger, and with the blessings of Fukasaku and Shima two Great Sage, the steel-like stiff hair can be continuously attacked.


    Of course, only with this monotonous attack, they never thought they could sessfully attack Naruto.


    And the truth is true.


    With a jump, Naruto escaped a wide range of hairline attacks.


    It''s just that they are waiting for this jump!


    As long as Naruto jumps into the air, there will be a moment of pause!


    This is the time they want to capture!


    Shima Sage shouted: "It''s now!"


    ''Sage Art: Goemon!''


    One person and two toads, locked in Naruto in midair.


    Wind-Style sprayed from Fukasaku''s mouth, Fire-Style sprayed from Shima''s mouth, and Jiraiya turned his Chakra into oil to match them, and the formidable power of this move Ninjutsu was enhanced to the extreme!


    Naruto in midair grinned.


    He has many ways to deal with this move.


    He can condense beast ws, beast ws grab nearby buildings, pull his body over, dodge this move.


    He can summon Susanoo, firmly resisted this move, etc.


    But with no difficulty, Naruto doesn''t need it!


    He chose the way to let Jiraiya eat bitter fruits!


    ''Sage Art. Wind Release: Great Breakthrough!''


    That''s right!


    He''s showing off Wind Release!


    Naruto of this life, during the years spent in Suna Vige, has mastered all kinds of Wind-Style! He uses Wind-Style to be better than ordinary people on more than one level.


    Now that Sage Art is integrated into Wind-Style, the formidable power is of course even stronger than before!


    Fire, wind, and oil are very powerful, right?


    But what if there is a strong storm oing in the direction of the spray?


    The result, of course, was that this huge ball of me was blown all around!


    Your Ninjutsu formidable power is very powerful, right?


    You really want to use this move to destroy me, right?


    Well!


    Then let yourself try your own masterpiece!


    Instantly.


    There were 4 storms.


    The huge me ball seems to be cut in half.


    In a blink of an eye, burn to ashes the surrounding buildings, leaving only a scorched earth. Seeing this, Jiraiya quickly stopped the ninjutsu. Unfortunately, it is toote.


    How ruthless he wanted to deal with Naruto''s heart.


    How ruthless this area of Konoha was destroyed by him.


    Angry, he looked at the surroundings, then stared fiercely at Naruto, and he could only hold back a sentence: "You...!"


    Then he can''t speak anymore.


    The me came from him.


    The cause was himself.


    What else can he say?


    Seeing this fake benevolence, tears, and piercing his own heart, Naruto couldn''t say anything.


    But...


    Ended here.


    It''s enough ying around.


    Naruto doesn''t want to waste any more time on such people.


    No matter what your position is, guarding the vige or guarding the world, but when you decide to sacrifice me, you are not worthy to be my teacher...


    and...


    You used my trust in you, and I lost my big brother permanently...


    As long as there are people involved in this matter...


    I will not let go!


    The happy mood has now converged. What turned out was a ruthless look: "Jiraiya, let''s end this between us."


    While talking, the speed of Naruto Tailed Beast Transformation is also changing at the speed that naked eye can see.


    First, Chakra''s coat bes solid, grows animal hair, grows bleeding meat, skeleton, etc.


    Upon seeing this, Jiraiya suddenly felt an overwhelming feeling when facing Naruto.


    Tailed Beast Transformation,


    Senjutsu,


    Another Mangekyo Sharingan...


    He suddenly stopped thinking of attacking and sighed: "Naruto, I''m sorry for you. If I''m dead, can you at least spare Konoha?"


    Naruto in beastification said with a sneer: "Oh, let go of Konoha? Do you really think that I attacked Konoha because of you...?"


    Jiraiya: "I know, I made you lose your big brother... But isn''t it enough to kill me? There are so many innocent people in Konoha, how can you..."


    Naruto was taken aback.


    Immediately he was furious, he spoke with clenched teeth: "Since you know that you are the one who caused me to lose the big brother! Then you should know that I will not let anyone go!"

 Chapter 186: The Hero returns, the battle

    Chapter 186: The Hero returns, the battle


    Fukasaku Sage: "Jiraiya! What big brother? How did you let Naruto lose his big brother? What the hell is going on? Are you hiding something from us?"


    Jiraiya sighed.


    He told the story briefly.


    Jiraiya: "Hah, that''s how it is. Naruto has caused a lot of harm to other great countries and Ninja Viges, so this time everyone will unite together to deal with Naruto. And we, Konoha, were forced to do so by them..."


    After hearing Fukasaku Sage, angry and even his toad''s face were flushed on the spot: "You! You! You! Did you make Naruto like this?!"


    Jiraiya was also speechless to refute.


    Shima Sage saw this, shaking her head sighed: "Hey ~, Jiraiya, even if you really want to deal with Naruto, you should not use this method..."


    Everyone knows the truth.


    In this way, Konoha can solve Naruto without any loss.


    If Naruto was not resurrected, their ideas were indeed very sessful.


    No one will me them.


    But since Naruto is not dead...


    Those who waited for them could only endure Naruto''s endless anger.


    While one person and two toads weremunicating.


    The size of Naruto Tailed Beast Transformation bes bigger and bigger. As the body grows, its body also illuminate the Konoha''s sunlight, blocking arge part!


    The ce where one person and two toads are located, and arge area of Konoha, are shrouded in a dark ce by his shadow.


    When one person and two toads turned their eyes back to Naruto again, Naruto had be a huge Kyuubi demon fox like a hill.


    Even if they raised their heads, they couldn''t see the whole picture of Kyuubi.


    An instant that Kyuubi Complete Body appears.


    Konoha goes up and down, regardless ofmoner or ninja.


    Everyone turned their eyes here!


    This is not the first time they have seen this silhouette.


    The first time they saw it up close was the night of ''Demon Fox Attack''. Many people died that night. That is, from that night, the Kyuubi demon fox has almost be the shadow of most people.


    When they saw it for the second time, it was the time when Naruto broke out in public. That time Kyuubi demon fox was also standing on the opposite side of Konoha. It''s just that that time was better, at least there were no casualties.


    The third time they saw it was the time Uchiha Itachi attacked the vige. Kyuubi demon fox was no longer the enemy of vige! He became the hero of the vige! He protected everyone!


    And this time is the 4th time. It also appeared at the moment when the enemy attacked the vige.


    Many people showed exhrating expressions.


    It''s him!


    It''s him!


    Our vige hero, Uzumaki Naruto is back!


    Come back to rescue us!


    "Wa wu wu wu " The cry of the child sounded, and the parentsforted. "Dear, don''t cry, look, look at that, look at the big fox. He is Uzumaki Naruto, the hero in the vige to protect us. Rest assured, with him, there will be nothing wrong."


    "Great! Great! Naruto is back! Naruto is back!"


    "Yes! Naruto will avenge us! Naruto will help us kill our enemies!"


    Instantly.


    There were cheers from the safety sector where the vigers were staying.


    Everyone as it should be by rights believes that no matter how they treated Naruto before, how much they did not save when Naruto was captured and imprisoned, Naruto shoulde to rescue them, and certainly came back to save them.


    Even some patients who were injured by severe heavy injury and lying on the ground for treatment, were unable to bear to sit upright despite the injury, just to take a look at their savior, Uzumaki Naruto, is he really back?


    Such a joyful scene.


    Seen by some insider ninja, it was ufortable like sitting on a needle.


    They were also reminded.


    Yeah...


    Once upon a time, Uzumaki Naruto was also a hero of Konoha...


    Once upon a time, Uzumaki Naruto was fighting for Konoha...


    But vige still chose to treat him like this...


    I he really helping Konoha when he came back this time?


    This group of insiders is ufortable, guilty, and worried, which is a sharp contrast to the group of vigers who are constantly cheering and the uninformed people who look full of energy.


    They do not know either...


    When the truth of the matter is made public, how will this group of people still cheer for Naruto...


    Do you still think that Naruto is helping Konoha?


    Is it possible?


    Hah


    However, the answer is no longer important.


    Because of the severebat situation, those who stayed in the Safety Sector and were able to fight had to all go to the front line for support.


    Next.


    Shadows one after another leap in the Safety Sector and head towards the battlefield.


    However, before they arrived at the battlefield, they were already blocked by two figures that appeared in front of them. The silhouettes are Puppet of Nagato Animal Path and Puppet of Asura Path!


    ...


    At the same time.


    Hidan, who is at war with Sarutobi Asuma, stands on a 6-pointed star design drawn by blood, full of excitement looks at Kyuubi in the distance: "Hehehe! Great senior looks very powerful !" Hidan turned his head again, looked towards Sarutobi Asuma, licked the blood of Sarutobi Asuma on the thumb, and said with a smirk: "It seems that I can''t be too shameful as the leader. ~, let''s end this boring battle as soon as possible."


    Sarutobi Asuma looked at Kyuubi not far away, frowning.


    Heart is full of worries.


    He was awakened by Hidan''s words. When he looked towards Hidan again, his expression became more dignified, and even the cigarette carried in the corner of his mouth spit out directly: "This is the intention!"


    ...


    On the other hand.


    Kakuzu, who was fighting not far away, nced at Kyuubi in the distance. His original heart was finally released. After all, there is no need to worry about the safety of his ''Boss''.


    He just looks at his opponent with a look of fury!


    Damn it!


    Kakuzu was killed two times!


    It seems that following these two idiots into the enemy camp is definitely not a wise choice. It''s also time to go all out, otherwise, it''s hard to say whether the war will end.


    Kakuzu''s body begun to show strange changes.


    Arge amount of ck threads came out of his body!


    It was Secret Jutsu that he stole from Taki(Hidden Waterfall) Vige!


    Earth Grudge Fear mode. Turn on!


    TL note: The Earth Grudge Fear is a secret kinjutsu of Takigakure which transforms the user''s body into something simr to that of a rag-doll, held together by hundreds of thick ck threads.


    Kurenai Yuhi, and other Jonins, were panting and vignt. The enemy in front of them is really weird. In order to kill him, severalpanions have been sacrificed.


    The result gave him two consecutive fatal injuries, both did not kill him.


    Now with the appearance of the Kyuubi Complete Body...


    They thought to solve the opponent in front of them as soon as possible, to help the others.


    But even if they did everything they could, they could not solve the opponent.


    There was a sense of despair that could not help but rise from the heart.


    And not far from Kakuzu, Deidara is fighting.


    At the moment, Deidara was besieged by Konoha Ninjas who came after one after another. Even if his y explosion, clone Self-destruction and other various Ninjutsu have already injured or killed many people...


    But where is this?


    This is Konoha.


    The Ninjas, who can fight, is said to be several thousand people.


    Nagato also sent two Puppets to stop Konoha Ninja''s rescue any more than this for this reason.


    It''s a pity that Deidara''s attack method and attack range are really annoying. So almost most of Konoha Ninja chose to rescue here, to solve the big trouble of Deidara first.


    It made him unable to cope with it, and it seemed very difficult situation.


    He also had no time to pay attention to the appearance of Kyuubi.


    Konoha Ninjas, who besieged him, saw the appearance of Kyuubi, and were even more anxious.


    Most people who cane to fight here are insiders.


    They are not naive enough to think that Naruto is here to help them.


    In a hurry.


    One of them shouted in front of Deidara: "Quick! Quickly try your best to solve him! We have to rush to rescue other ces!"


    Deidara hearing this who was besieged into a different situation looks angry!


    He angrily shouted at this shouting ninja: "What do you mean?! You still think about other people? You look down on me, look down on my art?! Hahahahaha! That''s good! Well! Since you look down on me, I will show you the real art!"


    Deidara yanked the clothes off.


    Exposing the mouth on the right chest...


    Then feed the self-exposed y into this mouth!


    That''s right!


    What Deidara wants to use is a certain Ninjutsu, which has a huge formidable power to perish together!


    CO! Exposed!


    TL note: The highest form of Deidara''s explosive y (his "Ultimate Art" (Kykyoku Geijutsu)), C0 is a suicide-bomb technique used as ast resort. Deidara reveals a mouth on his chest, which is stitched up. After undoing the stitches, Deidara feeds it arge ball of y. The mouth on his chest has a direct connection to his heart so arge amount of chakra is built up. It then kneads chakra directly from the meridians of the heart and keeps doing it without interruption until the moment of the explosion. His explosive chakra then manifests itself in his veins, flowing through his body. These "veins" then condense into a sphere that slowly cracks open and detonates, producing a unique explosion that covers a ten kilometre st radius.


    Although he seemed crazy, he knew very well in his heart that, judging from the current situation, he couldn''t wait for the rescue of his teammates, so he chose to use thest trick.


    Even if he is dead, he must use his remaining life to show hisst glory to the world!


    Show off his art!


    Deidara''s body began to cken and swell.


    The sense of crisis immediately shrouded in a radius of ten miles, on everyone''s heads!


    ...


    Another battlefield.


    No matter how you look at strength, Kakashi should not be the opponent of Sasori, but he just relies on various Ninjutsu restraints. He just focused on Sasori, who controls Third-Kazakage, regardless of the oue.


    Also, because he used a lot of Ninjutsu here.


    So Preta Path, which specializes in absorbing Ninjutsu, came here to help.


    Under the two-on-one situation, Kakashi immediately fell into a disadvantage.


    Chakra was about to run out, and this time Tsunade came to the rescue.


    As soon as Tsunade arrived, he threw the Third-Kazakage Puppet with a punch.


    Then return to a bnced state, two to two.


    Kakashi, whose strength was greatly damaged, was assisted by Tsunade''s main attack.


    ...


    Might Guy feels that the battle is getting worse.


    He didn''t n to use Eight-Inner Gates, this time, had to use it. Every time you use Eight-Inner Gates, there will be a lot of side effects, and the time he can fight will be greatly reduced.


    Therefore, he will not choose to use it until it is not spelled by circumstances.


    And now.


    It is precisely the situation spelled by circumstances!


    After giving another blow to ''Konoha Vajra Force Cyclone'' and kicking Hoshigaki Kisame back some distance, Might Guy said with a solemn expression: "You are very good! But I don''t have time to spend with you! Next, I need to go all out!"


    He didn''t wait for Hoshigaki Kisame to respond.


    Gate of Opening .open!


    Gate of Healing .open!


    Gate of Life .open!


    Gate of Pain .open!


    Followed by.


    Just when Hoshigaki Kisame wanted to respond to ''That would be better'', Might Guy in his eyes suddenly disappeared. Then came the powerful attack of all directions, constantly pping all over his body.


    He had no power to fight back.


    His body was weirdly stuck in the air and could not fall for a long time.


    Bleeding constantly in the corners of the mouth.


    Even the sensation of ''pain'' and the nerves of the brain haven''t had time tomunicate, he has already felt the aura of death.


    It was at the moment when he was about to endure.


    A shadowless force suddenly sted Might Guy and saved his life.


    The personing is Yahiko''s Puppets, Deva Path and the Human Path!


    Sensing that Might Guy has an unusual aura here, Nagato controls Yahiko, the Puppet, and the Human Path, andes here. Expressionless Yahiko coldly said: "You okay? Stand up and leave. Leave it to me here."


    Unwilling, lying on the ground, Hoshigaki Kisame barely propped up, bleeding from the corner of his mouth, saying, "I can still fight without your help."


    Hoshigaki Kisame was very annoyed.


    After this battle, it is estimated that this strong Might Guy will not remember his name again...


    Yahiko: "If you want to die, I won''t stop you. But if you interfere with my fight, I can''t guarantee my attack will kill you before killing the enemy."


    Hoshigaki Kisame felt tight.


    In the end, he chose to leave here, hoping to kill other Konoha Ninja to vent the anger.


    Might Guy looked at Hoshigaki Kisame''s back full of resentment, and then feel Yahiko''s bottomless strength.


    Might Guy no longer hesitated.


    There is no time for him to hesitate.


    Gate of Limit .open!


    Gate of View .open!


    Gate of Shock .open!


    When the Gate of View was opened, light green rays of light were already ignited on Might Guy. This is a phenomenon caused by the rapid evaporation of moisture within his body after the Gate of View is turned on.


    When the Gate of Shock is turned on, the green light on him bes blue. This is a phenomenon caused by evaporation of his within-the-body Chakra.


    This loss of water and Chakra is irreversible. Therefore, after the Eight-Inner Gates are opened to the Gate of Shock, he will be weak for a period of time, and it will take a long time to recover. It will cost a lot.


    And the result of this heavy price is undoubted power!


    Speed, attack power, all-round improvement!


    After Hoshigaki Kisame left, it was Yahiko''s turn to be beaten.


    Even if the two puppets had the same vision, and even if Yahiko uses Shinra Tensei, it still can''t stop Might Guy''s attack. The two puppets appeared in the same situation as Hoshigaki Kisame just now.


    His body was weirdly stuck in midair, and he was beaten for a long time and couldn''te down.


    This is another ce where everyone on the battlefield has to be distracted after the appearance of Kyuubi and after Deidara''s C0.


    ...


    Konoha Vige is on a cliff.


    Obito, Zetsu, and Konan are standing on the cliff, observing the entire battle.


    The eyes of three people seem to fall on battlefield, but in fact they are thoughtful.


    Konan: "Aren''t you going to help?"


    Obito: "With their strength, it''s enough to cope with it. I... it''s okay. If it''s necessary, it''s not toote for me to go support..."


    Silence for a moment.


    Obito: "What about you?"


    Konan: "My mission is to watch you."


    That''s right.


    This is the mission Nagato gave to Konan.


    Just in case Obito will destroy Naruto''s good things at crucial moment.


    Obito: "Oh... then whatever you want..."

 Chapter 187: Konoha does not represent the world

    Chapter 187: Konoha does not represent the world


    The scene returns to Naruto.


    Both Naruto and Jiraiya felt it the dangerous aura of Deidara''s C0/Self-destruction, and the powerful aura that Might Guy erupted suddenly burst out.


    Only.


    Their attention to the two is only fleeting, and they no longer pay attention.


    Because in front of them, there is still an opponent that has not been resolved.


    The two sides turned their attention and focused on each other again.


    Naruto not saying anything further.


    A huge animal w is about to hit the ground and Jiraiya as small as an antpared to the w!


    Seeing the huge beast ws, getting closer to his top of the head, Jiraiya sighed, and finally chose to resist! BOOM! A loud noise.


    ''Summoning Justu!''


    Gamabunta''s huge body suddenly appeared under the giant w.


    When he was summoned, he saw the oing giant w. Gamabunta who had no idea what was going on, reacted very quickly. He immediately pulled out the giant knife from his waist and blocked it on the top of his head.


    The collision between the beast w and the giant knife made a loud noise of "ng".


    Gamabunta was startled, some flustered and exasperated said: "You only call me under this situation, do you think I can live long?!"


    Feeling standing on the top of the head, Jiraiya, Fukasaku, and Shima Sage, Gamabunta continued: "Jiraiya, who is this opponent this time?"


    Not waiting for Jiraiya to respond.


    The animal ws blocking the Gamabunta field of view have slowly moved away.


    Oing is another powerful beating from the side!


    Gamabunta moved Greatsword and parried again.


    But this time he was shot to the midair by the distance of the beast ws.


    Because of this, he finally sees the face of opponent.


    Gamabunta: "..."


    First there was a speechless...


    What turned out was anger: "Jiraiya! Are you cracking a joke with me?! How could the opponent be Naruto? What''s going on between you both?"


    Toote to respond.


    Toote to think about it.


    Naruto had no intention of giving them gasp for breath!


    Seeing Naruto''s next attacking, Jiraiya no longer hesitated, resolutely said: "Let''s do our best to deal with the enemy first, Bunta, I will exin to you after the war!"


    Gamabunta had no choice.


    Naruto continued to attack him, forcing him to resist.


    Can only agree.


    Jiraiya: "Fukasaku and Shima Sage will use Sage Art: Goemon. Bunta, you will use Fire Release Toad Oil me Bullet!"


    Goemon Sage casts Wind Release helped by Fukasaku Sage.


    Shima Sage casts Fire-Style.


    Jiraiya casts spraying oil.


    Fire Release Toad Oil me Bullet is abination of Gamabunta spraying toad oil and Jiraiya''s Fire Release.


    However, this time is a bit different. Jiraiya intends to use the toad oil spewed by Toad Bunta as a substitute. Strengthen the offensive of the me.


    He believes that Kyuubi will suffer from this move, even if he will not die from this, he will definitely suffer a heavy injury at the very least!


    Then the next battle will be a bit better.


    There is nothing to hesitate.


    One person, one toad, inciting Chakra within-the-body, will perform this move joint attack.


    Things are developing as they expected.


    Gamabunta sprayed toad oil.


    Jiraiya squirted Fire Release.


    But when Ninjutsu of the two exhibited, it surprised everyone and everyone! They just exhibited Fire Release Toad Oil me Bullet, but they didn''t cooperate with Fukasaku and Shima Sage!


    Formidable power is greatly reduced!


    Before they could wonder why, a huge tail has already passed through their Fire Release, towards Gamabunta together with Jiraiya.


    Rumble loud noise!


    Gamabunta''s body that paused in midair was mmed to the ground.


    This huge force dragged him to a long distance.


    Arge section of buildings in Konoha were crushed by Gamabunta''s body.


    Even Konoha''s wall was knocked down by him.


    His body finally stopped.


    This is already the case with Gamabunta, not to mention Jiraiya who was shot with the tail of the beast together? Jiraiya was shot together with Gamabunta..


    Gamabunta''s injury was not that serious.


    Topare with his size, at most, it was like a huge wooden stick that smashed fiercely.


    But Jiraiya is different.


    To Jiraiya, this wave of attacks was as serious as a frontal blow when he took on a giant iron ball directly. The internal organs seemed to be scattered.


    A lot of blood spit out of the mouth.


    In the blood, there was even a little organ residue.


    Severely injured, he felt very strenuous even standing up.


    At this time, he and Gamabunta were very surprised.


    It wasn''t idental Naruto''s wave of attacks with injuries.


    It was idental why Fukasaku and Shima Sage did not cooperate with them.


    Jiraiya barely sat up straight, looks at the huge Kyuubi demon fox, walking slowly towards herself, while bleeding constantly in the mouth, barely squeezed out: "Why..."


    Why, of course, is to ask Fukasaku and Shima Sage on the shoulder.


    Fukasaku and Shima Sage seemed to be prepared for a long time, not at all affected by this attack.


    Unharmed.


    They also knew that Jiraiya was asking them for answers.


    At the same time, this answer to be confused Gamabunta.


    One person and one toad are very confused, why two Great Sage did not cooperate with them.


    They felt very unwilling to believe it. They believe that if two Great Sage cooperates with them, the result will bepletely different. The Ninjutsu disyed is of great formable power, absolutely impossible to let the tail of the beast easily pass through and attack them.


    Fukasaku Sage: "Naruto is also a contractor of our Mount Myboku, we will not help you deal with Naruto... And, this is also because you Konoha framed Naruto, so you got revenge from Naruto..."


    Jiraiya vomited with anger by Fukasaku Sage''s words again, said angrily: "Did you forget the prediction of Great Toad Sage?! Are you going to look at Naruto with your eyes open and let him bring the destruction the world in the future?!"


    Silence for a long time.


    Fukasaku Sage showed an expression of silence.


    Seeing Fukasaku Sage couldn''t bear to say it, Shima Sage sighed and said on his behalf: "Hey... Jiraiya... Konoha doesn''t mean the whole world..."


    Jiraiya hearing this, stunned on the spot!


    This sentence seems to give him a blow!


    Woke him up with a stick!


    Yeah...


    All along, I have subconsciously linked the world to Konoha...


    But can Konoha represent the entire world?


    Until now, it is the crime of destroying world without permission, which is ced on Naruto...


    But is this really the case?


    He kept saying to himself magnificently that he wanted to protect the world before he shot Naruto...


    But there is really no selfishness in my heart, or is it for Konoha?


    Can the world still be called "the world" without Konoha?


    A world without Konoha is not a world?


    The more he thought about it, the more ridiculous he felt.


    I didn''t expect to be a high-level Konoha, and after Konoha''s burden was on his shoulders, he eventually became the kind of person he hated the most...


    He didn''t expect after bing Konoha Jonin, Konoha''s burden was ced on his shoulders, and he eventually became the kind of person he hated the most...


    So what''s the difference between me and the old man?

 Chapter 188: Violent changes, the door to death opened!

    Chapter 188: Violent changes, the door to death opened!


    BOOM!


    BOOM!


    Two sounds.


    On Jiraiya''s shoulder, two white smoke appeared.


    Things have developed to such a field, and there is nothing to argue about. Fukasaku and Shima Sage are right. Konoha does not represent world. Since they don''t want to help, he exited Sage Mode...


    I have reached the limit...


    After exiting Sage Mode, Jiraiya''s entire body became old, and facial wrinkles became more visible.


    Naruto''s huge Kyuubi body walked slowly towards them in a catwalk. He nced at Gamabunta first, coldly said: "Today I will not kill you, as a return favor to Mount Myboku. From now on, Mount Myboku and I have no rtionship."


    Gamabunta, who was wronged, didn''t know what to say.


    When he was summoned, he didn''t understand what was happening. He was pped a few palms, and finally he was overshadowed by the toad from Mount Myboku.


    You are not going to help Jiraiya, are you saying that?


    Having said that, am I still going to m into it and insist that I feel ufortable in front of the Kyuubi?


    Showing the expression of sullen.


    Same BOOM sound.


    Arge cloud of white smoke appeared.


    Gamabunta also disappeared in everyone''s field of view.


    Naruto turned his attention to Jiraiya, who barely stood up. The two sides kept a certain distance, and they were not in a hurry.


    Jiraiya knew that Naruto gave him a chance.


    To give him a reason not to kill him or destroy Konoha.


    But what else is there to say?


    It''s his and others'' fault.


    It was Konoha who owed Naruto time and time again...


    Some questions thate to mind, what Konoha is the ce where you grew up, what Konoha is the ce your father has to protect, what Konoha carries your memories, etc.


    These reasons.


    Even he thought it was funny.


    Comparing his heart to Naruto''s heart./.


    If I stand in Naruto''s position...


    If Orochimaru was Sasuke, the family was murdered by the vige, so he became an orphan...


    If Tsunade was Hinata, and she was killed by the vige in front of me...


    If the old man used his trust in him to try kill me...


    If Naruto is not an orphan, there is only one family member in the world, but even then, this family member is also killed by the vige in the end...


    Then... can I still gritted my teeth, saying that I will not retaliate against Konoha...


    Think of it here.


    Jiraiya shook his head.


    Think about it all feel impossible.


    After considering it to the end, Jiraiya couldn''t find a good reason to make Naruto let Konoha out, and the sulking breath stuck in his chest made him spit out...


    The body rxed for a while.


    He gave up...


    Looking up towards Naruto, Jiraiya calmly said: "Your big brother... is he important to you?"


    When this sentence is spoken.


    The surrounding environment is still fighting.


    But both their hearts, at this moment, were extremely peaceful, as if they were in another space. These fighting sounds seemed like they didn''t exist to them both.


    Naruto maintains an elegant sitting posture, with 9 tails shrinking together, said indifferently: "Very important... more important than my life..."


    Jiraiya was taken aback.


    Yes...


    It turned out, I not only just hurt his heart...


    I also killed the most important person in his life...


    That I understand...


    Jiraiya said with relief: "Naruto, I''m sorry..."


    After talking, Jiraiya closed her eyes and waited for Naruto to give him a final blow.


    Naruto raised his huge beast ws, and it was about to be mmed.


    ...When Jiraiya''s life was over, a deafening explosion sound suddenly broke through the sky!


    The entire Konoha ground shook.


    The shaking was very strong.


    Even the beast w was so affected that it couldn''t fall down.


    That was thest glory of Deidara, ''C0 Self-destruction!''


    Of course, the reason why the damage of this ninjutsu was not affected on arge scale was because his effect was too obvious.


    Deidara from the very beginning always uses y to blow people.


    Every move is an explosion.


    Seeing Deidara''s size, it finally turned into this look. You don''t have to guess, everyone knows what Deidara wants to do.


    In order to protect Konoha.


    To protect everyone.


    Akimichi Choza, also known as the father of Akimichi Choji, led several members of Akimichi n, all of which used Super Multi-Size Jutsu, and turned into several giants, encircling Deidara to the regiment.


    The result, of course, was that they sessfully blocked this devastating attack for Konoha.


    Only.


    They also sacrificed for Konoha.


    But even so.


    Thest glory in Deidara''s life, the impact of ''C0. Self-destruction'', is more than that! This time the ground shook, the explosion killed and injured many Konoha ninjas, and it affected the entire battle situation!


    The first is the situation on the Kakuzu side.


    Kakuzu was aware of the danger of ''C0. Self-destruction'' and he chose to back down now.


    Although he was Kotoamatsukami''ed by Naruto, when he was really threatened by his life, he would not stay there stupidly for Naruto''s ''Boss'' money.


    So he started to retreat while fighting.


    In the end, at the cost of thest two hearts, he killed many Konoha Ninjas and sessfully escaped from the scene.


    Followed by Hidan.


    ''C0.Self-destruction'' also made him feel threatened.


    Although he has an Immortal Body, if he is really going to be blown up, he will still die, so when facing Sarutobi Asuma, he immediately cut his own throat, and killed Asuma, and then followed this Kakuzu to leave.


    After all, he needs Kakuzu''s ck thread to repair his throat.


    Next is Might Guy.


    After opening seven-gates, his original situation was very smooth.


    It can be said that he was pressing Yahiko and the Human Path to fight.


    During the battle, he saw Gamabunta and Jiraiya being mmed.


    Sensing Jiraiya Chakra''s weakening and that he lost to Naruto.


    Originally, he was thinking of going to the rescue.


    But when he nearly broke Yahiko and the Human Path, Hell Path appeared at this time. Hell Path summoned the King of Hell.


    The two fragmented Puppets were thrown in, and the result appeared again in front of Might Guy. They were intact.


    This result shocked Might Guy!


    Coupled with the explosion of ''C0.Self-destruction'' at this time, he sensed the chakra of hispanions and disappeared on battlefield one after another, which made him even more anxious.


    Can''t control that much.


    Now is the time of Konoha''s life and death.


    He decisively opened the final Gate of Death!


    The turbulent and terrifying energy, suddenly spread throughout the battlefield!


    This is one of the reasons why the ground is shaking.


    Feeling this unusual energy, Nagato suddenly drove the Six-Paths of Pain to Might Guy to confront him.


    Because of this.


    The battle situation in Kakashi loosened up.


    Preta Path leaves.


    Sasori''s more than 100 Puppets were hammered by Tsunade to there is not much left.


    At present, only the main body and a few puppets are left to fight.


    Finally, the ground stopped shaking at this time, and Tsunade, who felt Jiraiya''s weak breath, immediately left the scene, jumped to rescue Jiraiya, and removed Jiraiya from the animal w that was suspended in mid-air.


    However, what Tsunade didn''t know was that even without her rescue.


    Naruto also forgot to shoot this beast w, because Naruto''s mind at the moment has long been attracted all his attention to Might Guy who already has opened eight gates...

 Chapter 189: Pain was beaten, and the situation changed again

    Chapter 189: Pain was beaten, and the situation changed again


    Battlefields of Might Guy and Six-Paths of Pain.


    Might Guy after opening the Gate of Death, the whole body is now shining with the scarlet light. This is the sign that he started burning the blood within-the-body after he started the Gate of Death.


    After turning on the Gate of Death.


    After feeling that his life force is constantly being lost.


    Might Guy knew that there was not much time left.


    If you want to rescue Konoha, you mustpletely solve these 6 strange enemies before I die, as well as Uzumaki Naruto, who is not far away from Konoha.


    Although he doesn''t understand what the hell is Six-Paths of Pain.


    What is the ability? Why the first two were obviously killed by him, but they can be intact in a moment?


    It''s just that Might Guy can''t control that much now.


    With the time left, he was not allowed to think more.


    He can only burn youth.


    Just one word.


    Reckless!


    Once you regenerate, I will beat you up again.


    If you regenerate twice, I will kill you twice.


    I don''t believe you can regenerate without limit and without any number of times.


    Not saying anything further, just attacked.


    Of course, Nagato is not idle. In the battle just now, he has fully realized the amazing speed of Might Guy. This speed and power not only made him unable to see through, but also made him unable to let go.


    Even the silhouette of Might Guy can''t be captured.


    Let alone attack Might Guy.


    This is one of the main reasons why Might Guy just opened the Gate of Shock and could beat Deva Path and Human Path. In addition to theck of fighting strength in the Human Path, Might Guy can''t be touched and his soul can''t be extracted, and even the best way to resist, Shinra Tensei, requires a cooling time of 5 seconds.


    It''s time for them to fight at this level.


    5 seconds is enough to step aside the Might Guy after opening the Gate of Shock and kill the opponent hundreds of times.


    So Six-Paths of Pain just arrived here.


    The posture of battle has been set.


    Respectively, Asura Path, Deva Path, Preta Path, the main attack, came forward to fight the scary guy who braved the red light. Hell Path, Human Path, Animal Path, on the sidelines watching and assisting.


    Trying to capture the trace of Might Guy in this way and share the field of view to counterattack.


    However, the imagination is very beautiful.


    The reality is very cruel.


    After Might Guy started to attack.


    Nagato knew that his idea was wrong. When a person''s speed has surpassed the ordinary people''s cognition, even a few more pairs of eyes will not help.


    The picture in the eyes.


    It is still Deva Path, Asura Path, and Preta Path, in the battlefield... at the center, they are constantly beaten into the air.


    The situation is one-sided.


    He didn''t even see a shadow.


    This result surprised Nagato.


    He didn''t expect Konoha had such strength.


    But surprise and that''s it.


    The situation did not make him too nervous.


    Anyway, it was only Puppet who was beaten, causing damage to his main body not at all. And he also firmly believes that this strong individual must pay unimaginable price.


    Judging from the rate of loss of his life force, it is estimated to be at the expense of death.


    I believe it won''t take long.


    Without taking a shot, the other side will also breathe hisst.


    You don''t need to defeat him to prove yourself either.


    Just drag him to his death, and the victory will ultimately belong to him.


    After guessing the truth pretty close.


    Nagato performed a dying tactic.


    The main attack of Deva Path, Asura Path, Preta Path, was broken and disabled, it was summoned by Animal Path one after another Summoned Beast, dying Might Guy.


    Hell Path summoned the King of Hell again.


    Throw three tattered Puppets into the mouth of the king.


    After a while.


    3 brand new Puppets appeared again intact just to be beaten again.


    A series of things only happened in a sh. Whether it was Deva Path, Asura Path, Preta Path, 3 Puppets were beaten, or those Summoned Beast from summoned were killed in seconds, all of which were just what happened within a few seconds.


    This situation is repeated again and again.


    It took about ten seconds.


    After several reincarnations.


    Might Guy finally realized that something was wrong, could these Summoned Beast not be killed? There are still a few "people", can they really be resurrected indefinitely?


    Over time.


    As the number of attacks increases.


    Might Guy only felt the pain from his body, which became more intense.


    He knew that this was the pain caused by cracks in the bones and damage to the veins. This is the result of this powerful force after he can''t bear the open eight gates.


    The time left is less and less.


    Rash...


    It seemed that the enemy in front of him could not be solved.


    Otherwise, the enemy will not attack him without fear of death.


    Fortunately, in these reincarnations, he is not without gain.


    He noticed Hell Path in the distance.


    He noticed that those who had been beaten by him had to go to him if he wanted to regenerate.


    So, he changed his n this time.


    Target the Hell Path.


    Just as expected.


    When Six-Paths of Pain sensed the intention of Might Guy, at this time, all the styles were crazy, Summoned Beasts to attack Konohamoner, leaving Might Guy no chance to attack or encircle Hell Path.


    This series of operations.


    It almost took Might Guy several seconds.


    Might Guy not only felt the cracks in the bones, but also felt it could shatter any moment.


    Not to mention the veins.


    It''s already broken better.


    The pain of tearing from the body seemed to ring his bell, as if telling him that the time of death was getting closer and closer.


    Might Guy is in a chaotic battle.


    A nce at Kyuubi not far away.


    Another nce at Six-Paths of Pain.


    Very unwilling.


    He had a vague feeling that the time left for him was only enough for him to make a desperate bet and make a choice between the two.


    Why does he want to deal with Naruto?


    Why doesn''t he solve Pain''s Six Paths?


    Otherwise, if he is determined to deal with both sides at the same time, he may get a result that will not reach the shore.


    Might Guy gritted his teeth.


    Hesitated.


    But at his most confused moment, an ident happened.


    Summoned Beast, who was still desperately attacking Konohamoner or other ninjas, suddenly stopped all kinds of attacks and looked at all around with a nk face.


    The original Hell Path who was surrounded by the Six-Paths of Pain that had defensively escaped to themoners, all copsed, motionless, and there was no response.


    ...


    At the same time.


    Somewhere on Konoha''s wall.


    Konan, who has been watching the battle situation for a long time, was shocked when she saw the situation in the distance. Before waiting for her to react, ''Obito'' beside her suddenly gave out a weirdugh.


    "Hehe, hehe, Hahahaha!" Laughing to the end, it turned into a bellyugh.


    ''Obito'' ignored Konan. He minded his own business and said to the aside: "Hahahaha! No, I really can''t! I can''t disable to bear anymore! HaHahahaha!" Then he excitedly said: "What? Am I very simr? Am I acting very simr? Hahahahaha!"


    Followed by.


    This ''Obito'' slowly changed back to the main body, White Zetsu, under Konan''s shocked eyes!


    Obito in front of me is fake!


    While Nagato put all his concentration on Might Guy, the real Obito gave Nagato a sneak attack, which was a hit. Seeing this situation Konan, how does she still not know what happened?


    She mmed ''Damn it!''.


    She returned to Akatsuki base without turning her head.


    Hoping it will be toote.


    There are only two White Zetsu on the cliff where they tout and talk to each other.


    ck Zetsu did not participate in this incident at all...

 Chapter 190: Either I die or you die

    Chapter 190: Either I die or you die


    The picture returns to Naruto.


    The battle between Six-Paths of Pain and Might Guy only happened within tens of seconds.


    In tens of seconds, it''s not long or short.


    Except for those who are still fighting and have no time to distract, there is no way to pay full attention to the battle of Six-Paths of Pain and Might Guy. The rest of the people in Konoha are almost all affected by the fighting here were all attracted to them.


    They might be surprised that Might Guy''s strength is strong.


    Or surprised by the strange ability of Six-Paths of Pain.


    In the definition of expert, theypletely subvert their ideas.


    All were dumbfounded.


    Even Naruto in the Kyuubi Complete Body state is no exception.


    This strength.


    This speed.


    Naruto had to be shocked.


    He knew Might Guy. He had seen him before in Konoha.


    But he really didn''t expect, the strength of Might Guy turned out to be so powerful. Fortunately, he was not reckless and did note alone to take his revenge, otherwise the result would be sad.


    Only.


    Feeling emotional.


    While secretly rejoicing.


    Naruto did not forget that during the battle of Six-Paths of Pain and Might Guy, Sharingan was brought to the extreme, trying to bring the details of the battle to one after another.


    This observation.


    A few tens of seconds passed in a blink of an eye.


    The final result is, of course, Six-Paths of Pain controlled by Nagato. In a situation that no one thought of, it suddenly copsed, forming a situation where Might Guy no longer has an opponent.


    There was a bad feeling, suddenly came to Naruto''s heart.


    He couldn''t say for the time being, it was awkward to feel what was going on.


    Toote to think.


    Because soon.


    He felt an aura of death.


    That''s the sense of crisis brought by Might Guy''s eyes on him!


    Naruto suddenly shed the battle scene between Might Guy and Six-Paths of Pain! In a moment, he rejected the idea of escaping or hiding. Even though he was assisted by Sharingan in the process of watching the battle, he did capture a shadow of Might Guy during the battle.


    But he didn''t think his reaction, or speed, would be much better than Six-Paths of Pain.


    So escape is impossible.


    He can''t hide.


    The only thing he can do now is defense!


    Just thinking about the countermeasures, he has seen the Might Guy that emits red light disappearing in the field of view.


    Naruto pupils shrank.


    Decisively shrink Kyuubi'' body into a ball. Use 9 tails and your own body to make the package tight.


    But before he couldplete this series of defensive moves, he had already felt a huge force to m his body together.


    The chin first.


    Then two arms.


    Thenes the leg.


    Finally, there are 9 tails.


    All sted away after one after another.


    The offensive seemed to be orderly, but Naruto felt that the series of attacks seemed to happen at the same time.


    The feeling of being attacked is not so much as being attacked by Might Guy''s small arms and calves like ants, but rather struck by strikes of the same size.


    This is the "Evening Elephant" that Might Guy can only perform after he opened the Gate of Death, which gave Naruto the illusion.


    Evening Elephant is a powerful air cannon produced by beating the air through Might Guy.


    For every blow, the crack in Might Guy''s bone will be scored.


    Just now Might Guy used this move when ying Six-Paths of Pain.


    So, when Evening Elephant is applied to Naruto''s Kyuubi, Naruto seems to have suffered a lot of damage. In fact, the bacsh suffered by Might Guy is far more serious than Naruto''s injury.


    Might Guy understands this.


    Naruto is equally clear.


    He felt the massive loss of Might Guy''s life force, and he knew that Might Guy could maintain this state only not much time left.


    So Naruto is enduring it!


    He gritted his teeth and endured another attack this time!


    Might Guy''s bones shattered.


    Naruto''s Kyuubi real body was also beaten to pieces by Might Guy.


    Might Guy''s life force is losing a lot.


    Naruto''s Kyuubi was also beaten to the extreme, and many holes were punched out on his body. Large pieces of flesh and blood were directly exploded.


    Now it depends on who can''t hold on first.


    It''s just that during this period, what made Naruto most angry was not the pain that came from him, but the eyes of everyone up and down Konoha!


    Although he could not capture the silhouette of Might Guy.


    But while he was beaten, he could see the disgusting faces of these people!


    The group of people who were cheering for his arrival just now, keep on saying the group of people who called him a Konoha hero, but now in the eyes of each and everyone, they are just waiting for him to die!


    The more disgusting the face of this group of people, the more chilled Naruto''s heart felt.


    Do you all want to see me die?


    Well!


    If I don''t die, it''s you who died!


    Naruto''s angry eyes suddenly clenched the teeth!


    Everyone watching, suddenly surprised.


    Even though Naruto didn''t speak out, the very ruthless brought in his eyes made everyone present understand what he meant.


    This time.


    Everyone''s eyes are more desperate for Naruto to be killed.


    Some people even put their hands on their chests and put out a praying hand.


    Naruto narrowed his eyes back.


    Did not look at this group of people again.


    Closing his eyes, he silently felt his own injury, the speed at which the injury recovered, and the intensity of the attack on himself, so as to figure out who would win and lose in the end of this battle.


    As the time goes.


    As the injuries on both sides became more serious.


    Naruto''s huge Sharingan suddenly opened!


    Naruto overjoyed!


    He feels it!


    Feel the attack power of Might Guy is getting lighter gradually!


    And his injury is slowly recovering!


    However, before waiting for how long he was happy, Naruto was suddenly puzzled...


    How did the attack stop?


    Shouldn''t...


    Based on the strength of thest attack just now, shouldn''t the other side be exhausted at this time?


    Before Naruto wanted to understand what was going on, Might Guy''s silhouette finally made his debut during the fight just now. However, this is not good news for Naruto.


    He saw the scarlet light evaporating from Might Guy, and suddenly became very rich.


    The range of steam is getting wider and wider.


    Until the end, the rich red steam formed a dragon shape, and the surrounding space was faintly distorted by this powerful force.


    This is Might Guy''sst move to burn all life force, Night Guy!


    Aura of death rise in the mind again!


    And this aura of death is much stronger than before.


    Naruto knew that this time, if there''s no mistake, it''s thest blow that Might Guy gathered all his energy. It''s his decisivest blow.


    The battle only happened in the blink of an eye.


    Might Guy didn''t respond to Naruto, but already attacked Naruto with a violent offensive. Wherever he passed, there were continuous sting sounds. The surrounding space is broken, repaired, broken, and repaired like a mirror.


    The speed is too fast.


    Susanoo''s armor Kinoe, toote to form.


    Hide, can''t hide.


    There is only one way left!


    At the crucial moment, Naruto chose to restore the main body.


    Because of this, despite the fact that the original huge body continued to shrink, although it did notpletely avoid this Night Guy, at least he didn''t get hit directly.


    Final result:


    Uzumaki Naruto-survived.


    Might Guy-died!

 Chapter 191: Family

    Chapter 191: Family


    Might Guy used Night Guy. After prating Naruto''s abdomen, his whole body skeleton also shattered. The whole body is like burnt ck charcoal, steaming up and down.


    Tsunade immediately leap past, check the situation.


    But Might Guy''s injury, even she was startled, and it was impossible to start exining.


    She had never seen anyone hurt like this, and could still live.


    The skeleton is broken.


    The veins arepletely broken.


    It is a lot of blood loss.


    Tsunade''s spection was indeed true. Her thoughts were only Might Guy''s injury. After a moment of shock, Might Guy stopped breathing and showed no signs of life.


    As for Naruto who just ended the fight.


    Might Guy prated through the abdomen, Naruto''s body was still shrinking slowly.


    The damage caused by Might Guy to Kyuubi'' real body, not at all fell more or less on Naruto''s main body. Just like Killer B, even if Eight-Tails was cut, or he abandoned a tail, Killer B still has no injury.


    Of course, it''s not to say that Might Guy''s sacrifice is useless.


    Kyuubi was beaten by him in many ces.


    It is estimated that in a good period of time in the future, Naruto should be unable to use the power of Kyuubi.


    Moreover, the damage caused by Might Guy''sst blow was even more serious that extended to Naruto''s main body, resulting in Naruto''s appearance being not much better even if he changed back to the main body.


    Kyuubi: "Naruto, the old man''s injury is too heavy. After helping you repair the fatal injury, I will go to sleep for a period of time. The next battle can only rely on yourself."


    Naruto covered the wound in his abdomen.


    The wound is still dripping with blood.


    The palms were stained with scarlet blood.


    Exchanged in my mind: "No problem."


    Naruto had already felt a weak force, and he was slowly repairing his body.


    The speed of repair is much slower than ever.


    And Naruto''s current state, as long as people with a clear eye can see what is going on. Everyone agreed that Naruto would not be able to continue to use the power of Kyuubi in a short time.


    Don''t let slip an opportunity.


    There are a lot of Konoha Ninja now, attacking Naruto from all directions.


    Only.


    Not waiting for them to move forward.


    Just heard rumble.


    Followed by.


    Just a huge monster appeared in front of everyone.


    The attacking ninjas, stopped involuntarily, swallowed saliva, looked up towards the towering and majestic Cyan Colored Complete Body Susanoo.


    Face this blue god up close.


    All attackers are unable to bear whole body trembling.


    How could they forget the strength of this Susanoo?


    Didn''t you see Uchiha Itachi''s red war god a while ago, making a big mess in Konoha?


    They just want to die.


    There is endless regret in their hearts.


    Self doubt.


    If they didn''t want to cause Naruto to die in the end, wouldn''t Naruto summon this Susanoo? Is this crisis over?


    However, in this world, there is no Regret Medicine to eat.


    The strength of Susanoo did not disappoint them.


    Without waiting for their reaction, Naruto had already controlled Cyan Susanoo, and carrying his spiral sword, came a magnificent spin and swept the group of ninjas who wanted to kill him.


    Finally, he pped the wings two times.


    The tip-toe points to the ground and slowly falls back to the ground.


    Followed by.


    It''s a series of ''Bang! Boom!'' sounded.


    The group of shot ninjas, like meteors, crashed everywhere.


    Nothing to survive.


    Naruto nced at Susanoo''s forehead and finally chose to move to the ce where the most people gather, which is the Safety Sector.


    But as soon as he arrived.


    Tsunade had arrived here first, and Naruto stopped in front of him: "Naruto, enough! I know we have wronged you. But Konoha has been destroyed by you like this, don''t you n to stop?"


    Naruto sneered in his heart.


    Stop?


    Why should I?


    You can do it for the benefit of vige by fair means or foul.


    So why can''t I destroy you for the sake of resurrecting Hinata and revenge?


    These sarcasm questions, Naruto thought only in his heart.


    There is no such thought to argue with Tsunade.


    At the same time, he also used actions to inform Tsunade of his answer. He raised the spiral sword in his hand, and the spiral sword began to make a harsh spin.


    Death instantly shrouded everyone''s head.


    It is at this time.


    Sudden change.


    Each and everyone pupils white, ninja wearing Konoha headband on the forehead, rushed to the scene. And one after another blocked the vigers or the rest of ninja.


    When he saw this group of people.


    Naruto frowned.


    This group of people is the ninja of Hyuga n.


    At the same time, in this battlefield, the members of Hyuga n are all alien. Because of the enemy''s attacks, they will avoid them deliberately.


    The reason why this happens is, of course, thanks to Naruto.


    Before the action, Naruto had told all the members of Akatsuki that he must not do anything to the people of Hyuga n, otherwise he would not be able to give an exnation to the resurrected Hinata.


    Only.


    What made him didn''t expect is that Hyuga n now uses his kindness to check and bnce him.


    Hyuga Hiashi walked out of the crowd, faced him, looked towards him, and said coldly: "If you want to kill them, kill us together with them!"


    Naruto coldly said: "Why."


    Hyuga Hiashi: "Konoha is our home."


    Hyuga Hiashi''s intention is pure, just to protect his homnd.


    Guarding this home that they didn''t build easily.


    Silence for a long time.


    The atmosphere became a little quiet.


    Hyuga Hiashi went on to say, "Can''t you just look at me and let them go for Hinata''s sake?"


    Naruto: "I will definitely bring her back to life. You step aside. Anyone who participated in that incident, I will not let it go."


    Hyuga Hiashi took a deep breath and said angrily, "I was also at the scene when they were discussing that matter, and I didn''t speak out to stop them. Then you shouldn''t let me go!"


    The two sides have different positions.


    No matter how you say it, it doesn''t make sense.


    Naruto doesn''t n to exin anymore.


    He can''t kill Hyuga Hiashi.


    Naruto simply said: "You... can''t stop me from killing them..."


    This is the case.


    Hyuga Hiashi suddenly turned ck.


    He knew what Naruto meant.


    He also knew that Naruto was right.


    By doing this, they can only create some trouble for Naruto, preventing him from usingrge-scale attacks. But Naruto really wants to kill this group of people, but there are still many ways to do it.


    At this time, an unexpected voice appeared: "What about me? Can I make you give up on them?"

 Chapter 192: affection, exist in name only

    Chapter 192: affection, exist in name only


    As soon as this wordes out.


    Everyone''s attention is all looking in the direction of the sound.


    What is in sight is the silhouette unexpected by everyone.


    The personing is exactly Orochimaru!


    Everyone in Konoha Vige, when they see Orochimaru, reveals aplex expression. Once upon a time, Orochimaru of Konoha one of the Three Legendary Ninjas also made a lot of contributions to Konoha.


    But when Konoha Jonins said Orochimaru is Missing-nin, no one came out to question or help him.


    How heartbreaking is this for the person involved?


    How manyrge and small wars have I experienced for Konoha?


    But when I was in trouble, no one in the vige was on my side.


    The people living in this vige seem to be so selfish. No matter how much you have paid for Konoha in the past, no matter whether you are a hero or a bear, everyone will not pay any more attention as long as it does not concern your own interests.


    This...


    This is Konoha.


    A spoiled Konoha.


    But now the most ironic is. Now, at this crucial moment, they have nothing to rely on except this person they have forgotten, abandoned by them, and identified as Missing-nin by them.


    Even Hokage and Hyuga n Leader can''t persuade Naruto to close.


    What else can they do?


    They can only pray that this Missing-nin will seed, for them a glimmer of survival.


    can only say...


    It''s sad... and ridiculous.


    Naruto ignored what other people thought. He looked down at Orochimaru, coldly said: "Just you--? What? You want to fight me?"


    Orochimaru: "No no no, don''t get me wrong, I''m not going to do it with you. Do you remember the rtionship you owed me? I now hope to use this rtionship in exchange for their lives."


    Naruto frowned.


    Orochimaru''s so-called rtionship.


    Naruto remembers.


    It was the favor that he owed to Orochimaru when he told him the news of Akatsuki organization.


    But it is absolutely impossible for Naruto to let go of thest group of people in Konoha Vige in order to repay this little favor. After all, the meaning of killing these people is not as simple as it seems on the surface.


    He wanted to destroy Konoha in a real sense!


    If the previous Naruto wanted to destroy Konoha, want to make Five Great Countries out of bnce and cause a full-scale war, it was just to speed up the resurrection of Hinata, and to have a beautiful world after the resurrection of Hinata.


    But the currentNaruto.


    There is another reason for him to do so.


    That is to avenge the big brother.


    He knew very well that his enemy was not just Konoha.


    All participants in this matter are his enemies. Simply put, it is all the decision makers of Five Great Countries and Five-Great Ninja Viges.


    In order topletely wipe out this group of people.


    The easiest way is to cause a total war and let them fight each other.


    Then he secretly killed those survivors one after another.


    So, this time, whether it is to meet Nagato''s requirements, to resurrect Hinata, or for revenge, Naruto is impossible to let Konoha survive in this world.


    Naruto sneered said: "Hehe, Konoha''s Missing-nin Orochimaru, you will not be naive to think that you can let me pass everyone present just by your kindness."


    Orochimaru seems to have expected Naruto to refuse.


    "That rtionship is not enough, then..." Orochimaru licked the corner of his mouth and pointed to the distance. "What about that?"


    Naruto looked in the direction of Orochimaru.


    Seeing the picture in the distance, Naruto pupils shrank tightened his heart.


    Immediately, the original hard and cold heart could not help but soften a little.


    He saw a ruin in the distance.


    There is a house in the middle of the ruins.


    The house is full of giant snake corpse.


    Based on the signs in front of him, Naruto knew that Orochimaru had left this house intact in the battle just now, and let the giant snakes fight desperately.


    And this house is really Naruto''s residence in Konoha.


    The house is full of bits and pieces of him and big brother...


    Orochimaru got a lot of news from Shimura Danzo''s mouth, coupled with his own inquiries, he also spected from the rtionship between ''mysterious person'' and Naruto, so there was this move.


    Seeing Naruto''s mind was a little shaken, Orochimaru added to the opportunity: "I don''t understand why you have to kill this group of people. If you want revenge, are you looking for the wrong person? This group of people is not involved in the incidents that frame you. And if you want to destroy Konoha..." Orochimaru nced around and continued, "You have already done it, haven''t you? ording to the current situation, Konoha Vige can be said to be in name only. The remaining strength is simply not enough to support Land-of-Fire. Not enough to constitute as a Ninja Vige. Must you kill this group of people?"


    Finished.


    Orochimaru shut up.


    Silently waiting for Naruto''s consideration and reply.


    He said truthfully.


    Naruto was indeed shaken.


    If Orochimaru just wanted to let Naruto let the rest of the people''s lives just because some favors, it is absolutely impossible. In addition, Orochimaru''stest move to help him keep his "home" intact, this really touched Naruto''s heart.


    Looking at the surroundings.


    It is indeed as Orochimaru said.


    Today''s ''Konoha'' is in name only.


    Except for his own house, almost all other buildings have been destroyed.


    Many Konoha''s ninjas died.


    Commoner also died arge number.


    If you really want to continue living as a Five-Great Ninja Viges, you will only show jokes to others.


    If you want to continue to protect Land-of-Fire, it is basically impossible.


    In other words, if you really want to make a careful calction, Naruto''s purpose is barely achieved. Konoha does not have strength to guard the Land-of-Fire site, then Five Great Countries willpletely lose its bnce.


    Looks at that intact house.


    Recalling the bits and pieces in the house.


    Naruto''s mind gradually softened.


    But just when he wanted to soften his tone and say his conditions for ''letting people go'', he just happened to sense an interesting scene, and his heart suddenly became full of fun.


    Cyan Susanoo then spread her wings and lifted off from the ground.


    This unprepared scene shocked everyone at the scene.


    Mistakenly thought that Naruto was trying to do something to them.


    Only.


    After this.


    After seeing Cyan Susanoo lifted off, not at all wanted to attack and flew directly to another ce. Everyone was relieved.


    Even Orochimaru, which seemed calm all the times, was not excluded.


    He wiped a cold sweat.


    He secretly hid the palm behind him, ready to hand seal at any time.


    Right when nothing happened.


    He maintained his elegant posture.


    ...


    At the same time.


    After Cyan Susanoo lifted off.


    Not at all far away.


    He just came to a jungle not far from Konoha.


    There was a group of people rushing in the jungle, but when Cyan Susanoo arrived and a strong wind blew, the group of people was scared and stood there.


    Some people even fainted directly.


    Followed by.


    It was Naruto''s seemingly kind and yful tone that came into everyone''s ears: "Three elders... so anxious, where are you going?"

 Chapter 193: The embarrassing three elders, sacrifice yourself

    Chapter 193: The embarrassing three elders, sacrifice yourself


    In the distance the jungle rumble rang.


    Cyan Susanoo waved a spiral sword, either sweeping or stab straight.


    Huge trees scattered everywhere.


    Need not guess.


    Everyone also knows that Cyan Susanoo is fighting with people.


    No one in the Safety Sector dares to run away.


    They also knew they could not escape.


    So no one did anything stupid.


    Quickly.


    The fight is over.


    The Cyan Susanoo flew back, pped wings a few times, put away the flying momentum, tip-toending gracefully.


    There was a bunch of shadows thrown to the ground from the originally clenched fist of the Cyan Susanoo.


    A loud noise of "peng!"


    So much smoke.


    No one knows what is going on.


    They don''t know who Naruto is fighting.


    Who will appear in that ce at this moment?


    They can''t see clearly what Cyan Susanoos left behind.


    It wasn''t until the dust dispersed that everyone saw the picture in front of him. It was a group of people whose whole body was covered with dust and injured in many ces and seemed to be in a different situation.


    The crowd.


    Everyone even see the three familiar silhouettes.


    Konoha three elders!


    It''s just that the three elders of Konoha at this time, their appearance is actually no different from the group of people who were dumped, and they are even more embarrassed.


    Disheveled hair.


    The clothes are ragged.


    Bleeding from the corners of the mouth.


    If it weren''t for Shimura Danzo with that unique missing arm and one eye, maybe for a moment, everyone really couldn''t recognize the three people in front of them, the former aloof and remote, the distinguished Konoha elders.


    Also because they saw three people.


    They recognized who the group of people was with them.


    They are all n members of three elders.


    Not waiting for everyone to figure out what was going on. Some people who were dumped and just woke up from dizziness immediately knelt down in front of Cyan Susanoo, and begged for mercy.


    "Please, let us go ~" said, this person just kowtowed at Cyan Susanoo.


    "Yes, yes, we don''t know what they did, it''s none of our business." This person pointed to Konoha three elders who were barely standing.


    With that said, someone else knelt down and moved their knees and said to the crowd: "I beg you, please spare us. It is not that we are going to abandon Konoha. It is they three who want us to escape together!"


    Everyone begging for mercy is very emotional.


    They knew the old grudges of Naruto and Konoha three elders


    They don''t want to die.


    So they had to do everything possible to beg for mercy.


    Seeing such a situation, the people present still don''t know what is going on? It is no wonder that on the battlefield, I did not see this on weekdays, and kept saying it. Everything is done for the sake of Konoha''s three elders, fighting with blood.


    It turned out that others saw that the situation was not good, and they had already abandoned Konoha with their family.


    Some people who were old and respectful to Konoha elders couldn''t help but show their disappointed eyes.


    Some people who look at them are not pleasing to the eye, even more express the expression of extreme disgust.


    On the ground, the wonderful expressions of each and everyone, Naruto are in sight.


    This scene makes him look so dark.


    It is these three elders!


    It is these three elders!


    If it wasn''t for these three Konoha decision makers, they would not have had such a fate! If it weren''t for them, there wouldn''t be so many tragedies in the vige!


    They keep on saying that it is for Konoha.


    Hehe.


    Can the decision be made really just for Konoha?


    Does not include the interests of yourself and your own n?


    With Shimura Danzo''s Sharingan alone, Naruto would never believe them.


    Think of it here.


    Naruto''s yful heart is stronger.


    He looked down on the 3 elders with disheveled hair: "In the past, did you like to sacrifice the lives of a few people, saying that it was to protect everyone and protect Konoha? How about this. I will follow your approach now. As long as the three of you kneel andmit suicide in front of me, then I will stop today and I won''t be entangled. How is it?"


    This is the case.


    Many people present showed their hopes!


    The n members, even more so!


    Some family members with a strong will to survive even said in a hasty tone: "Great Grandpa, grandma, please agree, please agree. Do you want to look at all of us to be buried together?"


    Three elders who had already turned ck already.


    It has be uglier now.


    Shimura Danzo, who is unwilling to give up, said very coldly: "Humph! If we kill ourselves, we can really save everyone''s life, then of course we will not refuse!" Shimura Danzo nced at the crowd around him, scolding: "But you really think that after we die, he will really keep his promise and let you go?! He is just making fun of us! If you are willing to resist with me now, there may be odds of sess! He has gone through so many battles, and he certainly can''t hold on for long! As long as we pass this level, victory still belongs to us!"


    Shimura Danzo''s voice echoed throughout the Safety Sector.


    Everyone on the scene only treated him as a monkey y.


    There was no response at all.


    The atmosphere was quiet.


    Only Shimura Danzo''s voice echoed.


    Seeing this picture, Naruto couldn''t helpughing: "Hahahahaha! Lord Danzo~ Lord Danzo... It seems that your standards of behavior are not very consistent~ Keep on saying that sacrificing a few people is only for Konoha, just to protect everyone. But howe you three don''t want to sacrifice your own life~?"


    Seeing no one wants to respond to them.


    Plus, Naruto''s constant sarcasm.


    Seeing that there is no escape probability, Shimura Danzo does not n to perform anymore.


    Broken jar!


    He simply vented all the grievances he had suffered during this period of time, and swept towards the surrounding crowd angrily: "Humph! What kind of eyes do you have? me us for not wanting to sacrifice? Open your eyes and see! Is this still Konoha now?! Konoha has already been destroyed by you! Had it not been for you repeatedly and again against our decision, would Konoha be like this?! If I became Hokage, would Konoha be like this?! This is the result of you! Since Konoha has been defeated by you, why should we sacrifice our lives?! Really thought we wanted to escape? We left with the n member, we just wanted to rebuild Konoha! Konoha would only be better without you! Only I can make Konoha rebuild its glory!"


    Finished.


    Not only did no one respond to Shimura Danzo this time, but there were also people who were amused by his remarks.


    You are the one who imprisoned Naruto!


    It''s you who killed Hinata!


    The me you created is now all on our backs?!

 Chapter 194: Susanoos hatred, three elders die

    Chapter 194: Susanoo''s hatred, three elders die


    Everyone dared not to speak in front of Naruto.


    All stared fiercely at these three elders.


    And this is what Naruto wants to see!


    As Naruto''s thoughts became more and more mature, in fact, he wanted to understand many things. The source of all this is these rash old fellows!


    So Naruto didn''t want to let them die so easily and brought them here.


    Just to let everyone see their true colors.


    Look at their ugly side.


    The result is obvious.


    The disgusting performance of the three elders did not disappoint him. They did a good show for Naruto, letting Naruto''s resentment buried in his heart for many years was relieved.


    But...


    The show was finished.


    It''s time to send them on the road...


    At this time, Utatane Koharu realized that they could not reverse the situation, sighed, and gave up struggling: "Naruto, I know, we are sorry for you, if you want to kill, just kill us. Can... Can you at least spare our n for the sake of your father?"


    Mitokado Homura echoed: "Yes, Naruto. I beg you. please, just let them go."


    Naruto couldn''t help being angrier!


    Hehe.


    Now you will beg for mercy and ask to spare your n?


    Then why didn''t you ever let go of other people''s nsmen in the first ce?!


    Senju n has so many lives, why didn''t you let them go!


    Uzumaki n has so many lives, why didn''t you spare them!


    Uchiha n has so many lives, howe you didn''t let them go?!


    Now you still have the face to ask others to let go of your n?


    Haha!


    Really a big joke!


    Naruto, who was annoyed and disgusted, withdrew the thought of pping them to death, and said angrily, "Want me to let your n members go? You can!" Naruto pointed to the group of three elders, and then to the survivors of Konoha, and continued: "Either they die, or you three die. Only one of the two sides can survive, you can decide it yourself."


    Half barely fell.


    Everyone present felt tight.


    It is clear.


    Naruto didn''t intend to let the three old people live.


    How could the scarred three elders who were riddled with sins be the opponents of all the survivors present?


    The rest know this.


    The three elders certainly know this.


    Utatane Koharu and Mitokado Homura changed their faces now.


    While pointing at Naruto''s scolding, he tried to stop other people with words.


    "Naruto, you are so cruel, do you want to kill them all?!"


    "Demon fox! You must die!"


    "Everyone, don''t listen to this demon fox! He just wants us to kill each other and weaken our power! As long as we join forces, we can definitely destroy him!"


    The two elders and their n members werepletely nervous and scared.


    They may curse Naruto.


    Or lobby people around.


    Even those who just knelt and begged for mercy just changed their faces.


    It''s a pity that no matter how they lobby, they are just futile. Isn''t it just Naruto who resents what the three elders have done over the years?


    Some people resented three elders even more than Naruto.


    It''s just that they are different from Naruto.


    They have their own family.


    Have their own n.


    There are too many things to consider.


    Therefore, for Konoha, for n, and for family, even though they already had a lot of resentment in their hearts, they still didn''t do any deviant behavior.


    But today is different.


    All these worries are gone.


    Naruto even gave them a hands-on name!


    The dignified atmospherested for a while.


    The first charge ahead is Hyuga Hiashi.


    The death of younger brother...


    Hinata''s death...


    It has already made him deeply resentful!


    It doesn''t matter whether Naruto will keep his promise, let''s clear up the resentment in my heart for many years! In the first ce, he used all his strength against Shimura Danzo with Eight Trigrams Sixty-Four Palms.


    The second person who rushed out of the crowd was Kakashi who was riddled with scars.


    Regardless of the injury.


    He is going to seek justice for his father today!


    The third one is Tsunade which everyone didn''t expect.


    The demise of n.


    Nawaki''s death.


    Dan Kato''s death.


    Really think she doesn''t care?


    Hehe.


    If it weren''t for Konoha, she would have been one step ahead of the others and destroyed this group of garbage thousands of times!


    And with this three taking the lead.


    Followed by.


    It is one after another to rush out, to resolve their years of resentment or hatred. Among these people, there are many tragedies that are buried in the heart.


    And today, they are going to liquidate all these to these elders!


    Next.


    The sound of fighting, the cursing of each other, one after another.


    However, this situation soon ended.


    As the time goes.


    As the three old family members fell one by one.


    The stubborn elders finally gave up the struggle.


    The three old men stood side by side with their hair disheveled and covered in blood. Shimura Danzo, who was still breathing, stared viciously at the crowd around him, and mocked: "Stupid, you stupid bastards. We are just going one step ahead... That demon fox won''t let you go... "


    Not waiting for him to finish.


    ''Shua!'' Sound.


    Hyuga Hiashi, Kakashi, Tsunade, shot at the same time.


    The heads of the three old men flew up at the same time.


    So far...


    Shimura Danzo-Die.


    Utatane Koharu-die.


    Mitokado Homura-die.


    After the corpse of three people copsed, everyone''s eyes fell back on Naruto who had been watching the drama, waiting for him to give a clear answer.


    No one thought naively, Naruto would really let them go so easily.


    Seeing no confrontation between the two sides.


    Orochimaru, who has also been watching the drama, came out to y a round at this time and said to Naruto: "Naruto, as you can see. Actually, all of us are victims. You are not the only ones persecuted by them. Now all the people who should be killed are also killed. Can this matter be forgotten now?"


    Silence for a long time.


    Naruto, who was in Susanoo''s forehead, nced at everyone who''s gasping for breath and riddled with scars, and then at Orochimaru, and finally swung a big hand.


    The spiral sword was aimed at Hokage Rock, and then it was thrown at the stone statue of Sarutobi Hiruzen.


    A rumble sounded.


    Susanoo turned around and turned his back to everyone coldly said: "From this moment on, I don''t want to hear Konoha in this world anymore. Don''t ever let me know that you''re iming yourself as a Ninja Vige!"


    Finished.


    Susanoo pped his wings.


    A short leap came.


    He came to his home which is in perfect condition.


    Take back Susanoo and walk in.


    One of the civilians present was stunned at first, and then hugged and cried bitterly. They have survived, they have survived, and finally they are all right, they don''t have to die...

 Chapter 195: Calm analysis, Orochimarus proposal

    Chapter 195: Calm analysis, Orochimaru''s proposal


    Inside the house.


    Naruto looked at everything in the house, and his heart was very touched.


    He walked slowly in this small room.


    Palm touched the furniture in the house.


    Naruto was shocked when he touched the low table ced in the living room, with a crack at the corner of the low table. This crack was caused by him when he was a child.


    Every time I stupidly bumped into this crack, my brother couldn''t helpughing at him stupid.


    After being scolded, he alwaysughed heartlessly.


    If only...


    Big brother, do you understand?


    Many times, I hit it on my own fault.


    I like to hear yourughter.


    I like to hear you care about whether I''m hurt or not after you scolded me for being an idiot.


    Looking at this crack, Naruto''s gaze softened involuntarily, subconscious said: "Big brother, remember this copse? Big brother?"


    There was silence in my mind.


    Naruto recovered, breathes deeply.


    Yeah...


    Big brother is no longer...


    In order to save me, he hadpletely left...


    Naruto walked slowly to the window again, looking at the ruins outside the window, and was filled with emotion.


    Konoha...


    Finally destroyed...


    But he was not as happy as he imagined...


    Compared to destroying Konoha, he hopes that this series of things never happened. He hoped that the big brother did not leave him. He hoped that Hinata was not dead. He hopes to return to Sasuke''s n without being destroyed, and they lived happily together.


    I don''t know how long I have been watching this boring scenery outside the window.


    Until the sun goes down.


    Naruto looked back.


    At this time in his mind shed the scene where Six-Paths of Pain copsed.


    The n is only halfway through. He doesn''t think Nagato will betray him at this time.


    Suspicious, he immediately entered Chakra into Akatsuki''s exclusive ring.


    To his surprise, the ring failed.


    A bad hunch rose again.


    Naruto did not dare to dy.


    He left the house immediately and went to Akatsuki''s base to find out.


    A few hourster.


    He kept on going, and soon arrived at Akatsuki base.


    Came to the gate where Yahiko brought him.


    Push the door open.


    Two corpses came into view.


    Naruto leapt in a few steps.


    "Nagato! Nagato!"


    Shaking a few times Nagato''s corpse and found no response.


    He put his finger under Konan''s nose and check your nose, and it''s the same.


    Naruto''s breathing became rapid.


    However, after so many winds and waves, Naruto is not as easy to lose control or copse as before. He tried to calm down his emotions.


    Start to look at this matter rationally.


    Nagato''s death, not at all makes him too sad.


    He was worried, what about Hinata?


    Reach Nagato''s eyelids.


    Really!


    As he expected.


    Rinnegan was taken away!


    It seems that the murderer came from the eyes of Nagato. If there were no idents, the moment Puppet copsed was the time when Nagato was killed.


    The murderer took advantage of Nagato''s focus on the battle of Konoha, so the sneak attack seeded.


    Anyone who can understand Nagato''s movements and the battle situation so well...


    Naruto nced down at side Konan.


    If it''s not Konan, it''s Akatsuki''s internal member!


    Next.


    Naruto searched the entire Akatsuki base, but still found nothing.


    After so long, he didn''t see any Akatsuki memberse back here.


    Things are strange.


    It can only be said that the murderer must have nned it long ago.


    Why the killer killed Nagato, Naruto is not interested in knowing. He just wanted to know the whereabouts of Rinnegan is and whether there are any other ways to revive Hinata in this world.


    The only clue now.


    It is the surviving Akatsuki member.


    He has to find them before he can learn more.


    Think of it here.


    Naruto did not intend to stay.


    For the sake of being in the same n, Naruto buried Nagato and Konan''s corpse.


    Went back to the road when he was walking.


    Compared to staying in the wilderness, he is more willing to return to his former ''home''.


    A few hourster.


    Naruto returned to ''Konoha'' again.


    The morning sun has just risen.


    The survivors of Konoha, after leaving Naruto, walked back and were all startled. Seeing Naruto doesn''t mean anything, everyone is rxed.


    Then continue their ''work''.


    Or build a temporary residence.


    Or on the rubble, the intact scroll, property, etc.


    It''s just that Naruto ignored them.


    But if you really want to live in the same ce as a monster, everyone is still worried.


    In the end, a personal choice was rmended to negotiate with Naruto.


    Not much time.


    Naruto hasn''t sat down yet, a and the house has already weed this elected guest. Of course, although he wasn''t elected by people, he woulde to Naruto sooner orter.


    He opened the door.


    "It''s you? What are you doing here?" Naruto turned and walked back to the living room.


    Orochimaru followed each minding their own business, and sat across from Naruto: "Nothing, I just want to ask you, Naruto... what do you n to do next?"


    Naruto nced at Orochimaru, said with a sneer: "Oh, what''s wrong? They don''t want me to stay here?"


    "Naruto-kun, youughed, but it''s just that how dare they have the courage to stay with you. It''s just..." Orochimaru looked at the ruins outside the window and continued, "You see it too. It bes like this here. If everyone If you want to stay and live here, it is not an overstatement to say that you have to rebuild from scratch... It''s not that they are afraid of hard work. It''s just that they are worried that if they choose to continue living here, they are afraid that you will have opinions. After all, you said..."


    Naruto: "Rx, as long as you don''t rebuild Konoha, or use Ninja Vige to im yourself, it doesn''t matter to me what you want to do."


    Although Nagato is dead.


    But Naruto still does not change the previous decision.


    After all, this is rted to his revenge for the big brother.


    He wants to cause an all-out war and kill all the decision-makers.


    Of course, world peace is no longer what he cares about.


    After getting the desired answer, Orochimaru not at all left, but remained silent for a moment, and continued to say: "I''m taking the liberty to ask... Are you interested in making a deal with me?"


    Naruto: "What deal?"


    Orochimaru: "Here, rebuild a paradise with everyone. A paradise that can be self-sufficient, can survive without relying on Land-of-Fire, and is not affected by war. As a condition, you have the final say here. How you want everyone to run this ce is also up to you. Everyone will obey your call, including me. Of course, if you don''t want to manage things, you can. Naturally someone will do it for you."

 Chapter 196: Take what you need

    Chapter 196: Take what you need


    Naruto eyes slightly narrowed.


    What paradise?


    If you don''t want to manage things, someone will do it for you?


    To put it bluntly, doesn''t he want Naruto to be the leader, help protect this so-called paradise, and borrow his name to deter the younger generation?


    That paradise is not a paradise.


    Naruto was dismissive.


    After all, those people are still the same group of people.


    Is it expected that everyone will forget the hatred that he has destroyed Konoha?


    Ok.


    Even if this group of survivors is really so forgetful, it is really so easy to ignore them? But after counting on the establishment of a paradise, will everyone be grateful to you?


    Didn''t First-Kage build Konoha?


    Doesn''t First-Kage''s wife''s n contribute much to Konoha?


    See how much the heirs took care of their descendants, didn''t they?


    Third-Kage old man, and the remaining three elders, are a bloody lesson!


    After experiencing many meddlesome feelings, Naruto is not so stupid that he can''t even see through it.


    However, the condition that Orochimaru said... it really made Naruto have to think about it. You know, he still has a lot of things to do next.


    Looking for Akatsuki member.


    Find the whereabouts of Rinnegan.


    Find a way to revive Hinata.


    Raise the speed of the five-nation war and so on.


    This series of things, if only rely on himself alone...


    Then it takes time that will nevere toplete?


    He didn''t have the patience to wait so long.


    Therefore, even without this proposal from Orochimaru, it is time for him to set up an influence and recruit people to call him. And now there is a ready-made delivery to your door...


    Think for a moment.


    Naruto said: "...Yes, but I have the conditions."


    Orochimaru said: "Please say."


    Naruto said: "I don''t care how your reconstruction progresses, I now want you to arrange a group of people to be driven by me. Listen carefully, it is driven by me. If you don''t do well... Then I will punish this group of people outside!"


    Orochimaru didn''t take Naruto''s threat seriously, he said happily: "That''s very good. I''m going out to tell them this good news. As for what you said... Please be assured that no such thing will happen."


    Finished.


    Orochimaru left the house.


    And told everyone that he made the decision without permission.


    Everyone who just heard the news was shocked and angry again.


    How can there be such a ridiculous thing in the world?


    Naruto has just destroyed our homnd, and now you not only want us to forget the hatred, but also want us to obey him?! However, the shock and anger of the masses soon passed.


    With their weak strength, they can only be forced to ept all this.


    But after epting it, it surprised everyone that sometimes, things...


    Really so ridiculous!


    Forced to ept this fact.


    Instead, everyone feels more at ease and active.


    After all, now everyone belongs to Naruto, then Naruto shouldn''t have revenge on them again, right?


    After epting this destiny, Orochimaru quickly arranged a group of people to follow Naruto''s instructions. Naruto, as it should be by rights, called them to find or search for the news they wanted to know.


    He himself continued to stay in this ''new home'', silently waiting for news.


    ...


    At the same time.


    Somewhere in the jungle.


    Kakuzu''s whole body goes up and down, a lot of ck lines are drilled, without the slightest hesitation kills a ninja in front of him, and pulls out his heart. Hidan hurriedly hugged his cracked neck in the back and said, "Hello! Isn''t it alright? This is already the fourth person. How long do you want me to wait before you are willing to help me sew it up?"


    Complete Ninjutsu.


    After sessfully recovering this heart, he will return to its peak state.


    Kakuzu just nced at Hidan behind him.


    He did it on purpose.


    Indulge Hidan on purpose.


    It was revenge to Hidan for involving him in danger.


    It''s just that I don''t know if I was retaliating against Hidan or myself. Along the way, this funny bit annoyed him a lot and became noisy. For the sake of the root of evil, the revenge action should stop here.


    Turn around.


    Step forward.


    Did not give Hidan a good face.


    Stitching hastily.


    He even tried to tie a knot in his throat.


    Unfortunately, it is useless.


    Hidan can still talk, even because something is stuck in the throat, which is ufortable. He has alwaysined that he is not good at technology and talks non-stop. Eventually Kakuzu had to help him re-stitch.


    And just after thest thread was stitched, Obito suddenly appeared not far away from two people.


    The same mask.


    It is also showing a Sharingan.


    However, now hidden under the mask is a Rinnegan.


    The original Sharingan on the transnt was exactly simr to the original work. When ying against Konan, Izanagi was consumed. After killing Konan, he transnted this Rinnegan.


    The reason why he does not transnt two is because he thinks Kamui still has a great use for him.


    Moreover, he does not feel that much stronger than Nagato after he has transnted two Rinnegan. Not much better than Nagato means that it is still not easy for him to recover the Kyuubi.


    So he chose topare the speed with Naruto.


    He had to take Naruto one step faster and put the influence of Akatsuki under the door.


    First recover the remaining Tailed Beast, and finallybine all the strengths to deal with Naruto to make sure nothing goes wrong.


    Obito: "How are you? You two are all right?"


    Kakuzu: "It''s you? Why are you here? Why didn''t I see you join the war? You''re not afraid of death right? You''re shrinking back?"


    Hidan said angrily: "Hah! How dare you appear in front of us?! Watch me clean you up!"


    Hidan raised the scythe and chopped forward.


    The scythe passed through Obito.


    Obito was unharmed and stepped back a few distances: "Don''t be in a hurry. I''m here to tell you some news."


    Hidan: "Is there anything else to say! You are so afraid..."


    Mangekyo Sharingan open!


    See this familiar eye pupil.


    Hidan forcibly squeezed the words back into his stomach and changed his mouth: "Afraid... Afraid... I''m afraid you won''t say it! What do you have to say, just say it!"


    Obito: "Unfortunately, the leader died in the battle just now, and Akatsuki will be in charge of me from today. Your position remains the same. Our policy is the same as before, that is, to recover Tailed Beasts."


    Nagato''s death did not make the two people sad.


    They just didn''t expect that such a powerful leader would die.


    After being surprised, he sneered.


    Kakuzu: "Oh, why should Akatsuki be taken over by you? Why should we listen to you?"


    The two people of proud and arrogant, of course, cannot be subdued.


    But when the brand new Six-Paths of Pain came out of the jungle and taught them a lesson, the two lost their temper. However, they can''t beat it.


    But both of them chose to follow Naruto.


    As long as Obito can convince Naruto, they will naturally follow.


    Obito, at this time, mentioned Kotoamatsukami''s vulnerability.


    For example, has Naruto promised them when to pay or to teach?


    Hidan is an idiot and can''t hear it.


    How can Kakuzu, who has lived for nearly 100 years, not hear the strangeness?


    How can you not know, this is just a trick?


    Hidan saw that they were clear and logical, also pretended, and nodded desperately and said, "Well, yes, yes, I have long felt that there is a problem!"


    In the end, those who blindly followed Naruto turned into haters of Naruto.


    In addition, Obito promised to find opportunities to help them get revenge, pay on the spot, and teach on the spot, and the two people rationally and clearly structured to obey the new leader Obito.


    After that, Obito also found Hoshigaki Kisame through White Zetsu in a simr way, and let it return to normal.


    Then there is Sasori that was ignored and was not destroyed by the Konoha ninja, thus he revived Sasori.


    Sasori did not hesitate, not saying anything further, he agreed to Obito''s request, and his goal was only one, that is Kakashi.


    That''s it.


    Akatsuki reorganized without Naruto''s knowledge and became active again...

 Chapter 197: Half a month later, the sad Daimyo

    Chapter 197: Half a monthter, the sad Daimyo


    Time flies.


    Years are like a shuttle.


    In a sh, half a month passed.


    In this half a month.


    The group of people who survived Konoha has always lived a self-sufficient life.


    The ninjas either help hunting or fishing to solve everyone''s food problems. After the Konoha Vige was destroyed, even the caravan that provided them with food did note again.


    Moreover, even if it came, most of the property in Konoha was destroyed.


    These properties are not enough to keep them for long.


    In desperation, they had to live in this primitive way.


    And this so-called new paradise, which is rational and clearly structured, seems to be disconnected from the outside world, and has be a real ''hiddennd of peace and prosperity''.


    At the beginning, the ninjas were really not used to it.


    The problem is.


    Naruto stiptes that they cannot live by the lifestyle of Ninja Viges.


    That means that they cannot increase the ie of the vige by epting the mission as before, thereby improving the life of this new home.


    The ninjas with no mission avable.


    That was really dumbfounding for them.


    That concept had long been ingrained. For a while, this group of ninjas really can''t think of a way. What else could they do with their ninjutsu and their good skills.


    If there is no ident.


    In a good period of time in the future.


    Before finding a new livelihood.


    In this new home, it is estimated that they can only live in this kind of primitive life.


    Ninjas have found...


    Huh?


    This life...


    Seems good?


    Take off the Konoha headband, and discard the ninja coat.


    No more worrying about the mission.


    No more worrying about Land-of-Fire.


    No more worrying about the safety of life.


    The heavy burden on their shoulders suddenly felt a lot lighter. The smiles on the faces of the ninjas are also increasing day by day. Getting along with civilians has also be more harmonious.


    This is a change that everyone never expected.


    Seeing this situation.


    The essence of this new home, Manager Orochimaru, and Tsunade, who was already discouraged, couldn''t help but look at each other, and both showed a long-lost sincere smile from their hearts.


    A thought arose in the hearts of the two at the same time.


    The ninjas...


    Perhaps...


    Don''t have to live so tiredly?


    ...


    In the event of the destruction of Konoha, in addition to the great changes in Konoha itself, the most affected is the Daimyo of Land-of-Fire.


    In the past.


    In order to consolidate their power, this group of Daimyo always tries to weaken Ninja Viges.


    Now it''s done.


    This group of rice barrels seeded.


    The entire Konoha is gone.


    However, in the split second after hearing this news, Daimyo of this group of Land-of-Fire not only was not happy, but each and every one was terrified and pale.


    They are a bit selfish and a little bit shameful...


    But does this mean they are stupid?


    Without the protection of Konoha, they thought with their farts, and knew what the consequences would be next.


    Based on their strength and influence alone.


    How could it be possible to keep the big fat meat of the Land-of-Fire?


    The big names who responded. All can''t sit still now. They sent people to Konoha to greet the cold and ask them when they n to rebuild Konoha?


    Don''t worry about supplies, there are supplies, there are natural resources.


    In short, they just provide a full offer.


    It''s a pity that the response received from Konoha''s survivors rejected all of their ''good intentions''.


    For Daimyo of Land-of-Fire, this news is simply thunder from a clear sky.


    Bad news.


    They all stumbled.


    After that, of course it''s bad news one after another.


    The reaction of Daimyo in the remaining four countries ispletely different from them. The original intention of everyone was to weaken Ninja World and Five-Great Ninja Viges together, but they didn''t want toe to a twist.


    Land-of-Fire such a big piece of fat is in front of them...


    Wouldn''t it be a sin to not eat?


    So, the Daimyo once again yed their tacit understanding.


    identally, a messenger was sent to their respective Ninja Viges to lobby Ninja Viges to help them swallow the Land-of-Fire. As long as you swallow the Land-of-Fire, then the problem of natural resources and treatment in the future is easy to say!


    Unfortunately.


    The Four-Great Ninja Viges did not meet the expectations of Daimyo.


    The original intention of Four-Great Ninja Viges is actually to live a stable life, to let each viger live a prosperous life, and to make the vige prosperous.


    In the old days, why did they weaken the strength of the rest of Ninja Viges?


    Isn''t it just for fear that the rest of the Ninja Viges will be too strong, and there will be a dominance of one family, and when theypete for their own interests in the future, they will lose a lot of ninjas?


    The problem is, since Konoha is gone.


    In addition to posing no threat to them, the tasks that should have been entrusted to Konoha in the past will soon be entrusted to them.


    Of course, they don''t have this idea to help Daimyos divide Land-of-Fire.


    Moreover, the most important reason is that the mysterious organization Akatsuki was able to destroy the entire Konoha overnight.


    This matter really made them have to guard.


    Coupled with the Akatsuki rebuilt by Obito, he became active again and started to work on Jinchuriki Recovery again.


    Each Great Ninja Viges has no intention to embezzle Land-of-Fire at this time.


    Of course.


    Although there is no intention of embezzling Land-of-Fire.


    However, the benefits should be taken.


    Shouldn''t Akatsuki''s activity is in a period of turmoil now? Of course, you have to charge a protection fee from these Land-of-Fire Daimyo.


    Because of this.


    In this half a month.


    Each Daimyo of Land-of-Fire has received a lot of requests from therge and small Ninja Viges or other countries Daimyo for natural resources.


    This made the group of Land-of-Fire Daimyo who were used to a prosperous life simply forced to make each and every one scream.


    They miss the days when Konoha was strong.


    If they knew this earlier... they wouldn''t drag Konoha down, they wouldn''t kill them and would stop doing those little tricks...


    Countless ''knew earlier'', while constantly remorseful in their hearts, they can only give their wealth and their hands to other people.


    The tragic life begins when Konoha is gone.


    ...


    At the same time.


    In this half a month, Akatsuki is the reason why Four-Great Ninja Viges cannot dare to act blindly without thinking. Because in this short half a month, they did get remarkable results in capturing Tailed Beasts.


    Except for One-Tails Gaara, Eight-Tails Killer B, and Kyuubi Naruto, the rest of Tailed Beast has all been recovered.


    And a group of Akatsuki members are already impatient and want to go back to ''Konoha''!


    On this day, it is also the moment when they gather to discuss what to do next...

 Chapter 198: The long awaited final battle

    Chapter 198: The long awaited final battle


    Akatsuki''s new base.


    The new base is deep in the ground after Uchiha Madara died that year.


    And at this moment in this dark base.


    The Demonic Statue of the Outer Path is like an instation, and it has be the background board of this base. Obito turned his back to the Demonic Statue of the Outer Path and was waiting for members of Akatsuki to bring their spoils of war back to here.


    Not much time.


    Sasori, Hoshigaki Kisame, Hidan, Kakuzu, and Six-Paths of Pain arrived here one after another.


    And carrying on their shoulders are several unconscious Jinchuriki and threw them in front of Obito.


    Bang, bang!


    This capturing Tailed Beasts program.


    They were acting separately.


    So in such a short period of time, they can get such a rich harvest.


    It was because they shot at the same time, and each of the Great Ninja Viges werepletely unprepared, so they were so easy to capture.


    Only.


    Even if their n is very sessful.


    But there are still members dissatisfied.


    Sasori is the most impatient among the few remaining. This time against Konoha, he lost Third-Kazekage Puppet and lost nearly 100 Puppets. Not only did he not gain anything, but he would eventually have to pretend to be dead to recover his life.


    This made him hate Konoha and Kakashi more.


    I wish I could avenge them immediately.


    Sasori in child form is very impatient and said: "The people you want have already been brought back. When will we do it to Konoha again?"


    Obito nced at Sasori, said indifferently: "Not in a hurry. I will wait until I get this thing done. Go back to your ce and prepare."


    Sasori coldly snorted.


    He walked towards his position.


    Hidan was looking forward with excitement to what was about to happen.


    Followed by.


    Obito''s "Phantom Dragons Nine Consuming Seals" under the shocking eyes of everyone.


    TL note: The Sealing Technique: Phantom Dragons Nine Consuming Seals is a technique that was used by Pain and the other members of Akatsuki to forcibly seal a tailed beast or to extract a still-living jinchriki''s tailed beast chakra into the Demonic Statue of the Outer Path. The technique took three full days toplete if nine of the Akatsuki members were present.


    The main function of this Ninjutsu is to extract the Tailed Beast of Jinchuriki within-the-body and seal it into the Demonic Statue of the Outer Path. Toplete this process as soon as possible, Obito must rely on more people.


    So now the only remaining each and every Akatsuki member stood in their prepared position to provide power and speed for this Jutsu.


    A few hourster.


    The seal is finallyplete.


    Tailed Beast was sessfully stripped from Jinchuriki.


    A few Jinchuriki no longer was alive.


    Everyone presents looked a little tired.


    However, in order to speed up the progress of the n, they are also fighting this time.


    Once again, the topic returned to the hands of Konoha.


    This time, it was Hoshigaki Kisame''s turn with the strongest physical strength. He asked, "There are only three Tailed Beasts left. What are your ns?"


    Obito: "During the time you came back, I have already received news that the Four Great Ninja Viges seem to want to unite to attack us. The Four Great Shadows should get together in the near future to discuss relevant details. By then, either One-Tails Jinchuriki or Eight-Tails Jinchuriki will appear there. And this Four Shadows Conference is also the best time for us to take action against Kyuubi."


    As long as the attention of Four-Great Ninja Viges is attracted by this meeting, they are afraid that someone will rescue Konoha at this time. This is why Obito did not choose to start with Gaara first.


    He knew the rtionship between Gaara and Naruto.


    Avoid two people rescue each other, so he leave them to the end.


    After speaking of the specific n.


    A group of Akatsuki members did not continue to struggle.


    Very cold, they each found a ce to rest.


    What they have to do next is to wait for the start of this meeting.


    ...


    At the same time.


    In this half a month, the same thing has been achieved, not only Akatsuki, but also Naruto.


    Akatsuki''s actions are so big, the group of ninjas who work for Naruto, of course, receive news. After hearing the news, Naruto immediately set out to find these Akatsuki members based on the news.


    Unfortunately.


    Every Akatsuki member seems to have opened their eyes.


    Wherever Naruto went, they hid.


    Often, they left even after Naruto has just arrived.


    Of course, the reason why this happens is of course due to White Zetsu.


    Even though Naruto could sense the presence of White Zetsu during the journey and he killed a lot of White Zetsu, but he still couldn''t stop White Zetsu frommunicating the message.


    Obito intentionally told everyone to avoid Naruto, but he just didn''t want to confront Naruto so quickly.


    At the same time, this is one of the reasons why Akatsuki members will feel ufortable.


    Proud and arrogant, how can they bear this way of escape like a ghost?


    Naruto, who noticed something strange, was no longer entangled.


    Since they are hiding from him, they are afraid of him.


    Then he simply went back to Konoha and told someone to speak for him.


    However, before this matter was ordered, he had already learned about the Four Shadows Conference from Orochimaru. There were even people who came over and invited them to participate.


    Naruto hearing this, secretly happy.


    He faintly recognized Akatsuki''s motives.


    Akatsuki''s goal is him.


    And Naruto''s target is Akatsuki.


    Rather than chasing them all over the sky, it would be more convenient to create an opportunity for them toe to him.


    In addition, Kyuubi has recoveredpletely, and his strength has been restored to the peak state.


    There is nothing to hesitate.


    He decisively refused to participate in the Four Shadows Conference.


    Inside the house.


    Orochimaru: "Are you really not going to go? Akatsuki''s next target is likely to be you alone."


    Naruto said with a sneer: "What''s wrong? Regretting letting me be the leader, now want to repent?"


    Naruto doesn''t mind this group of people repenting.


    Nor do they count on how faithful they are.


    But since they used his name to survive, don''t even think about backing down now.


    Otherwise, Naruto would not mind cleaning up the group of traitors before ying Akatsuki.


    Orochimaru: "No no no, since you want to choose battlefield here, then of course I will do my best to cooperate with you. But, thosemoners..."


    With Naruto''s cold eyes alone, Orochimaru saw Naruto''s ideas in general.


    But he didn''t take it seriously.


    Because he not at all thought to betray Naruto.


    This new home made him feel very new.


    He also wanted to see what the new home would eventually look like under Naruto''s wings, so he still chose to follow Naruto''s footsteps.


    Just like he was in original work and finally followed Sasuke''s footsteps.


    Naruto: "Leave them here, or evacuate them, you are free to do whatever. I will not take care of these things."


    As long as Naruto does not forcemoner to stay.


    This is enough for Orochimaru.


    He left here with satisfaction.


    Next, the whole new home began to act in a hurry.


    Themoners were sent to safe ces one after another.


    In addition to leaving a few ninjas to protect them.


    The rest returned to stay here.


    All parties are waiting for the start of this Four Shadows Conference...

 Chapter 199: The disappearing Sasuke, fate dictates

    Chapter 199: The disappearing Sasuke, fate dictates


    At the same time.


    When the whole world is looking forward to the arrival of the Four Shadows Conference.


    Somewhere in the jungle.


    The long-lost Sasuke is in this jungle.


    In this period of time after leaving Konoha, Sasuke has been living in this jungle. Thirsty to drink, hungry to eat, sleepy to sleep, just like walking corpse,pletely do not understand what he is doing, it is all up to the body to make decisions.


    This kind of drowsy day didn''t stop until he woke up from the panic.


    However, after sobering, he showed no signs of improvement.


    Instead, he was worse than he was when walking corpse.


    He started a hunger strike.


    He became desperate.


    His n, his family, and all died, leaving him alone. In the past few years, why did he submit to humiliation and bow down, just to resurrect his family?


    Now even the hope of resurrection is gone.


    What does it mean to live in this world?


    Sasuke in despair has been lying on the dirt.


    Even if you are thirsty, your lips burst.


    Even if hungry and dizzy, still motionless.


    What shed in my mind was all the good memories of getting along with my family in the past.


    Thinking of thest, it was facing the sky, facing the face of Li Yaoxiang''s faintly discernible, and smiling bitterly.


    Ah...


    Since you''re leaving...


    Why do you give me hope?


    Why give me hope that I can resurrect my family?


    I justy down without eating or drinking, and I didn''t know how long Iy. Until one time, he saw a phenomenon in nature. He saw an earthworm, drilled out of the soil, and was instantly pecked away by a bird.


    But after the bird flew away.


    The half-body of the earthworm, not at all died.


    It survived.


    At that time, Sasuke had only one idea in his heart: life is really tenacious.


    And when the thought shed through his mind, Sasuke''s originally desperate eyes widened instantly! Sitting up straight! In his hoarse voice, he kept mumbling:


    "Impossible ..."


    "Absolutely impossible ..."


    "How could you die so easily ..."


    An insect''s life force can still be so tenacious. Naruto''s big brother feels so powerful, how could he die so easily?


    This is impossible!


    You must not be dead!


    From that moment on, Sasuke was excited from despair, and he firmly believed that Li Yaoxiang was not dead. He cheered up and drew a 6-man star design on the dirt, then sat on his knees, silently waiting for Li Yaoxiang to contact him.


    He waits.


    An hour has passed...


    Two hours have passed ...


    By the third hour, Sasuke, who had not eaten for a long time, wasatose again.


    When he woke up again, the originally clear sky had be a silent night. He didn''t understand how long he had passed out, how many hours was it? Still a few days?


    Li Yaoxiang still didn''t contact him.


    He began tofort himself.


    "No, he can''t possibly die."


    "He probably didn''t notice the pattern I drew, so he didn''te."


    "Wait, wait until he notices the pattern I drew, then he will definitelye to contact me!"


    "Yes! I must wait well!"


    With a new decision.


    Sasuke is no longer decadent.


    He wants to keep in good condition and wait for Li Yaoxiang to contact him.


    After that, Sasuke''s condition really improved a lot.


    Eat when you eat, drink when you drink, and sleep when you sleep.


    But after such a period of time, as Sasuke waited longer and longer, he saw Li Yaoxiang still not contacting him, and Sasuke''s patience was gradually worn away.


    He had already painted six-pointed star patterns all around him.


    Or on the dirt.


    Or on the tree bark.


    Or on the leaves.


    Some have mud paintings, some have kunai carvings, and even some are smeared with blood.


    But even so, he still did not get a response from Li Yaoxiang! Not even once! And the time came to the day after half a month.


    He sat on a half-giant tree that copsed on the dirt.


    The whole body looks very sloppy up and down. Without the handsome hairstyle of the past, only disheveled hair. Without the cleanliness and neatness of the past, the clothes were covered with mud, regardless of it.


    The cheeks and skin are also no longer white, only greasy and dirt.


    The whole person looks dark.


    To put it bluntly, it is fully integrated into this piece of nature.


    It''s not good to say, that''s one savage and one tramp.


    It''s just that his eyes not at all are as decadent as a tramp, like a savage, but instead have endless grief and resentment! Both eyes are covered with bloodshot eyes!


    What you see ...


    I know what you see ...


    But since you saw it, then ...


    Why didn''t youe to me!


    Over the years, you have asked me to pick up trash, and I will pick up trash. If you ask me to find cats and dogs, I will go find cats and dogs. I dare not resist at all if you follow your words.


    You now say disappear, and disappear.


    What does this mean!


    Are you ying with me, are you joking?!


    At this moment, Sasuke still firmly believed that Li Yaoxiang was not dead. No, or rather, he did not want to believe that Li Yaoxiang was dead. Only if he firmly believes that Li Yaoxiang is not dead, then he has the meaning of living.


    Only because of this idea.


    He was yed with Li Yaoxiang''s anger for several years. At this moment, he finally broke outpletely.


    He even wondered whether Li Yaoxiang, from the very beginning, had never thought of helping his family resurrect.


    He hates!


    He hates Li Yaoxiang!


    Hate Naruto!


    Very good, are you missing?


    Are you noting to contact me?


    Then I will kill your younger brother, which you value most! I don''t think you can hide it!


    With a new decision in mind, Sasuke suddenly stood up and Mangekyo Sharingan opened! Amaterasu was like a raging fire in his heart, and instantly burned everything around it thoroughly!


    Immediately.


    Sasuke left without looking back.


    A few dayster.


    Sasuke, who wants to get started with Naruto, explored a series of recent events.


    After learning that Naruto became the new leader of ''Konoha'', Sasuke knew that he was alone, definitely not Naruto''s opponent.


    So, under the incredible gaze of Akatsuki members.


    He found Akatsuki''s base.


    And broke in alone.


    Not long after thepletion of the Phantom Dragons Nine Consuming Seals, a group of Akatsuki members whose bodies were still exhausted had to be vignt. Obito''s expression hidden under the mask is equally ugly.


    But he still waved his hand, signaling everyone don''t be impatient, pretending to calm down and saying: "Uchiha Sasuke, I know you. Youe here to find us, is something wrong?"


    Sasuke: "I want to join you."


    Obito''s corner of the mouth twitches: "What do you mean..."


    Sasuke: "Kyuubi; I will deal with it."

 Chapter 200: Everyone, lets go

    Chapter 200: Everyone, let''s go


    Land-of-Fire.


    In the nearest town to Konoha.


    At this time, in a hotel in the town.


    There are dozens of former root ninjas in the hotel, including Sai. It''s just that after leaving Root, they don''t wear masks anymore, and now they all show their true colors.


    When Naruto was attacking Konoha, these dozens of people did not help against the enemy.


    Instead, he chose to leave the vige.


    After all, most of them are not natives of Konoha Vige. Most are orphans outside the vige, brought back to Konoha by Root for training.


    Aftering to Konoha, he received this treatment at Root again.


    The feelings for Konoha are really minimal, and it''s hard to want a sense of belonging.


    Therefore, with the exception of a few who have n in Konoha and will stay in Konoha, the others followed Sai, left Konoha, and came here.


    It''s just that days haven''t passed long before.


    Sai made a news that was difficult for everyone to ept.


    Then Sai wants to disband this group.


    "Sai, with the strength of our group, isn''t it easy to live a nourishing life? Besides, everyone is an orphan, with no rtives and no reason in this world. If we really want to disband, where do you want us to go?"


    Talk about the Root ninja.


    In fact, everyone''s voice was also present.


    In this life, because of Sai, everyone did not abandon their feelings and became Shimura Danzo''s mission machine. For those who have no family and no reason, and have lost the family of ''Konoha'', apart from this feeling, there is nothing worthy of their attention.


    Sai said with a smile: "Where you want to go, go wherever you want. It''s rare to be freed from Konoha, don''t you want to find the life you want? Go after your dreams and goals. From now on, everyone is free. If you want to see all parts of the world, just take a look around the world. If you want to get married and have children, and form a family, go to get married and have children. What''s wrong? Do we have to fight together? To live a life desperately for mission?"


    Sai''s proposal really moved many people present. When they were in Root, they didn''t think about it, nor did they dare to think about it. But now that you are out of Root, there are more things you want to try.


    Some people don''t like to kill.


    Some people likes food.


    Some people like entertainment and so on.


    Sai''s words gave them the idea that they haven''t think before.


    Discussions erupted in an instant.


    Seeing this situation, how can you still not know what you and others really want?


    So no one objected to Sai''s proposal.


    But someone asked: "Sai, what about you? Where do you n to go after the dissolution? What do you want to do? We are going to open a restaurant, you want to be with us?"


    Sai smiled shaking one''s head: "Me? Forget it, I still have things to do."


    This is the case.


    The sound of discussion stopped suddenly.


    Immediately afterwards, one of them said very dignifiedly to Sai: "What''s the matter? Are you experiencing any problems? If you are really going to encounter a problem, don''t think about it alone. But don''t forget, we are not only a group, but also brothers and family. If something goes wrong, we will help you solve it!"


    Sai looks-at this group of people.


    I feel a lot in my heart.


    If I were really dead that time... the feelings of the big brother and the brothers in front of me should be the most precious thing in my life.


    The brothers in front of me don''t want to abandon me...


    But why did he want to involve them?


    His situation can be said to be more tragic than Sasuke.


    Sasuke also has a hexagram pattern to contact Li Yaoxiang.


    But what about him?


    He has nothing.


    Over the years, we have to wait, wait, and wait again. Neverined, or urged Li Yaoxiang to resurrect his big brother. So when he knew that Li Yaoxiang was probably ''dead'', the blow to him was actually not lower than that of Sasuke.


    It''s just that his emotions are better hidden than Sasuke.


    So the idea of assassinating Naruto, he had the idea much earlier than Sasuke.


    He doesn''t care whether Li Yaoxiang is really dead or fake.


    If he really died, then he would kill Naruto and repay Li Yaoxiang''s resentment for ying with him for many years.


    Faking death, it couldn''t be better.


    Must force Li Yaoxiang to stand up and give me an exnation!


    However, it is not clear how dangerous it is to assassinate Naruto.


    Although he was 100% sure, even if he said it himself, these brothers would not hesitate to do it with him, but it took a long time to help everyone get out of Root. He really didn''t want to let everyone fall into in this quagmire.


    With this kind of mission of nine deaths and still alive, is he willing to let this group of brothers die?


    No!


    He was unwilling.


    Sai lightly said with a smile: "Rx, small things, I can solve it myself. You don''t have to worry."


    This group of brothers repeatedly questioned Sai again and again, and seeing that he was normal, everyone continued to discuss the new dream. However, what everyone doesn''t know is that at this moment, Sai is also waiting for the Four Shadows Conference.


    ...


    Time flies.


    Years are like a shuttle.


    In a blink of an eye, the time hase to the day of the Four Shadows Conference.


    Whether it is Land-of-Wind, Gaara, Tsuchikage Onoki, Raikage Ai, or Mizukage Terumi Mei, who just became Kazekage, they have already set off and headed to the conference venue, Land-of-Iron.


    On the way, Gaara, who passed Konoha, made a special turn and came here, looking for Naruto.


    The one who invited Naruto to the Four Shadows Conference was the messenger sent by Gaara.


    Now it is his second time to invite Naruto, because he also knows that this time, if Naruto does not go, the situation of Naruto will be very dangerous.


    Gaara: "How is it? I am so sincere ande to invite you personally, don''t you want to give face?"


    Seeing his best friend, Naruto rarely smiles for a long time: "I understand your kindness. But it''s not that you don''t know my purpose. The key to resurrecting Hinata is always in their hands. I don''t want to drag on anymore."


    Seeing he cannot be persuaded.


    Gaara is no longer entangled.


    The two people chatted for a while.


    Later, Gaara set off again.


    After Gaara''s team left, Orochimaru came to Naruto''s house.


    Naruto: "Are you ready?"


    Orochimaru licked the corner of his mouth: "It''s time to prepare, it''s all ready. It''s just... I''m a little curious, do you really have no resistance against this Ninjutsu?"


    Naruto sneered: "Oh, do you think I''m those hypocritical elders? If you don''t sacrifice yourself, you sacrifice your own people? Of course, if you want to sacrifice yourself, I don''t mind, just do it."


    Ninjutsu in Orochimaru''s mouth is, of course, Impure World Reincarnation.


    No crazy researcher like Orochimaru is more excited than someone who agrees with his research.


    He came here this time to reconfirm Naruto''s intentions.


    This result certainly made Orochimaru very satisfied.


    Now everything is ready, just waiting for the enemy to arrive.


    ...


    Akatsuki base.


    Obito, Six-Paths of Pain, Sasori, Hoshigaki Kisame, Hidan, Kakuzu, now all dressed in neat ''clothes'', stand in their respective positions, motionless, closed their eyes and recuperate.


    On the surface it looks nothing strange.


    But in fact, the imposing-manner of everyone begin to stir has already spread throughout the base.


    Not much time.


    White Zetsu, who is also wearing Akatsuki costume, drilled out of the ground.


    The repressed atmosphere at the scene was immediately broken.


    White Zetsu: "Hehe, let''s go! Let''s all go!"


    Everyone suddenly both eyes opened, and at the other nce at each other, all grinned.


    Hidan said excitedly: "What are you waiting for?"


    Obito: "Let''s go!"

 Chapter 201: Small tricks, the war begins

    Chapter 201: Small tricks, the war begins


    Konoha Vige.


    After thest war.


    Today''s Konoha Vige, when you look at it, there is really only ruin. Some of the original jungle and trees in the vige werepletely destroyed. Fortunately, the buildings that were not destroyed are now scattered.


    Even the high wall surrounding the vige almost copsed by more than half.


    If you look at Konoha from a high-altitude perspective.


    You will see a very strange picture.


    The big Konoha, Naruto''s residence, is empty. In order to facilitate watering, washing, hunting, etc., the survivors can only build temporary shelters in areas near the jungle to facilitate the vigers ''ess.


    In the past, you can also see some vigers, or children, walking in the ruins, ying and the noisy scenes, has long disappeared.


    And the existence of vigers disappeared.


    The ninjas have regained their silence.


    It makes the entire Konoha Vige, like a ghost town, silent.


    However, this strange atmosphere was suddenly broken on the third day after Gaara left. The people who had been sent out to investigate in all directions suddenly came back with arge group of people.


    And still came back with double the number of people.


    The three of them went out as a team, and now they have all be twins.


    This scene makes everyone nervous.


    They can''t tell who is real and who is fake.


    Not daring to do anything casually, afraid of hurting theirpanions.


    At the same time, everyone knows very well that the enemy is here!


    And this scene in front of him is also the "meeting gift" given by the enemy, White Zetsu clone! Unlike ordinary clones, White Zetsu''s clone can absorb other people''s Chakra, and then change into the same Chakra.


    So most people can''t tell the truth from the fake.


    Experiencing the ''Might Guy'' incident, Obito didn''t intend to act recklessly this time.


    So first sent White Zetsu to investigate the truth.


    This also caused the scene here.


    The empty field is now full of people.


    Orochimaru arrived, seeing this scene in front of him, his brows could not help but locked, a pair of pairs, they all looked exactly the same, even he couldn''t figure it out.


    Do I ask them to solve each other one-on-one?


    This is the case, no matter the victory or defeat, this battle can be regarded as over before it has begun.


    Orochimaru was not too nervous.


    He also wanted to see how Naruto would cope with this situation, so he just stayed for a while, and turned back to Naruto''s house and asked Naruto.


    Naruto: "What''s wrong? The other side ising?"


    Orochimaru licked the corner of his mouth, his expression could not conceal the excitement in his heart: "Yes. But the situation is a bit different from what we imagined. You shoulde out and take a look."


    Naruto gave an interesting oh sound.


    A little curious.


    Now that the enemy is here, why haven''t I heard anything?


    Follow Orochimaru and walk out.


    Come to the square.


    In front of this scene, not only did Naruto not be surprised, but rather funny. White Zetsu''s clone can hide others, but apparently, he can hide himself?


    But what makes it funny for Naruto is not for this reason.


    It''s Akatsuki''s new leader, who does all the tricks of hiding and hiding.


    He didn''t expect Nagato actually met such an end by this type of person.


    He came slowly to the crowd and locked in some goals, teased: "It seems that Akatsuki has a new leader, isn''t it? He''s been hiding from me, now ying such a trick? What happened? It''s not because ofck of strength, is it? So you can only use these little tricks, right?"


    Even if it has been said so tantly.


    White Zetsu still held on to the end.


    Pretend to be a nk look there.


    But Naruto did not intend to entangle with them, nor wait for everyone to respond.


    He shed, and rushed in front of one of the pair of ''twin'', the palm of his hand directly brought one of them through. This scene scared the Konoha Ninjas into a panic, fearing that Naruto was nning to ughter at will, regardless of their lives.


    but.


    quickly.


    Fright bes a surprise.


    Because thepanion pierced by Naruto quickly returned to his original appearance, showing an unwilling expression: "You... how do you know me? ~Why? Why choose me? Not the other one?"


    After the death of the first White Zetsu.


    The remaining White Zetsu not at all appeared in the original form.


    Instead, one of disguised White Zetsu came forward to inquire Naruto, intending to sowing dissension: "Uzumaki Naruto, although you are now our leader, I still want to understand first that you really have a way to distinguish the enemy... Or do you carelessly kill our lives-"


    Naruto rushed in front of White Zetsu again, and came out of his heart.


    He also changed back to its original appearance and fell to the ground to die.


    The rest of White Zetsu started to get nervous.


    One of them jumped out and nced around all around and said, "Are you going to let him mess up?! Although he found 2 enemies right, who knows if he messed up? Do everyone here want him kill all of us...?!"


    Not finished yet.


    It was ''pu chi'' again.


    Chest was passed through. Death!


    Don''t wait for this group of White Zetsu to speak.


    Naruto disappeared with a bang. Everyone saw a shadow swimming in the crowd. When Naruto appeared again in front of everyone, dozens of White Zetsu changed back to the same state and fell to the ground to die.


    Seeing everyone in this situation, they were relieved.


    Not fortunately the death of the enemy.


    It is fortunate that the new leader they followed, did not randomly kill, did not take their lives, and did not treat them as things. Such a "new home" is enough for them.


    This is worth their life and guard.


    Did not speak.


    But everyone''s grateful eyes have already exined everything.


    However, this long-lost warm atmosphere soon ended. When all White Zetsu clones died an instant, fighting sounds suddenly came from all directions.


    While the fighting sounded.


    Obito, Six-Paths of Pain, Sasori, Hoshigaki Kisame, Hidan, arrived at the scene sessively from all directions. The location where all of them stood seemed to surround the entire Konoha.


    Finally saw Naruto!


    The most intense reaction is Hidan.


    Until now, Hidan hasn''t figured out the situation.


    After I have endured until now, I can finally see his Great Elder and ask the situation clearly: "Great Elder! They say you are lying to me, is this true? You said, as long as I do things for you, you will enter our Jashinists, but you tell me, what exactly are you going to do, and how long will you do it"


    Naruto ignored this joke.


    He noticed six Puppets of Six-Paths of Pain.


    He nced around.


    Eventually, his eyes fell on Obito, and only he who wore a mask could hide Rinnegan, who had taken it away from Nagato.

 Chapter 202: Their own cards, great chaos

    Chapter 202: Their own cards, great chaos


    Naruto: "Akatsuki''s new leader is you? Was the pair of eyes of Nagato taken away by you?"


    Obito nodded: "It''s me."


    Naruto: "What''s the matter? You have been hiding from me before. You dare to show up in front of me this time. Do you think you can deal with me with the help of your group?"


    Obitoughs shaking his head: "Of course not only these people."


    This is the case.


    Behind each Akatsuki member, arge amount of White Zetsu suddenly came out of the mud.


    The surrounding scene was suddenly noisy.


    "Hahahahaha! Finally no need to hide!"


    "What should I do? What should I do? I''m so excited ~"


    "Step aside! Step aside! Don''t squeeze, don''t squeeze!"


    Obito said angryly: "How? Is this enough?"


    This scene, the grand scene, made all Konoha Ninja''s faces extremely ugly, and morale almost fell.


    Naruto is very strong, yes.


    The problem is, Naruto is even stronger.


    Faced with such a lineup, if this battle continues, even if the final victory, how many people can still be alive?


    Only... The worried expressions of the Konoha ninjas did not appear on Tsunade''s face.


    At this time, Tsunade''s face looked extremelyplicated and hesitant. The appearance of arge number of White Zetsu, not at all worried her, she cares about another thing.


    Orochimaru certainly sees the change in her expression.


    This makes Orochimaru''s emotions even more exciting.


    Faced with such a severe situation, he still did not forget to walk to Tsunade and lick the corner of his mouth: "How is it? Now you still insist against my n? Either the enemy dies or our people dies. Between the two, which one do you choose?"


    Tsunade nced at Orochimaru.


    Coldly snorted.


    Did not speak.


    In other words, she is speechless.


    Even if Konoha Ninja doesn''t understand it, how could she, one of the managers, not know Orochimaru''s n? Originally, she disagreed with the n.


    After all, this requires not only living people as sacrifices.


    More to y with the souls of the dead.


    She is not so open minded, which is not eptable to her.


    But now that she sees this scene in front of her, after seeing the huge number of enemies, how can she have any reason to object? Her heart is not as hard as it can be, like the old men of Sarutobi Hiruzen, vicious and merciless.


    She would rather watch Konoha''s ninjas die on the battlefield one by one than use this trump card.


    It is because they are afraid that if the Summoned First-Kage or Second-Kage came back, they will be... well...


    Otherwise, with the hearts and minds of these old guys, how could they not have the heart to take a living person as a sacrifice?


    Seeing Tsunade''s reaction, seeing that Tsunade had to agree with his own research and philosophy, Orochimaru''s vanity, he immediately gained full satisfaction.


    Slightly smile.


    No longer ridicule Tsunade.


    Hand seal directly, shoot thend!


    ''Impure World Reincarnation!''


    Followed by.


    It''s a series of ''bang! boom! boom! boom!'' sounded.


    Nearly 1000 coffins were drilled out of the mud.


    The coffin lid copsed.


    One after another expressionless survivors all came out of the coffin.


    There are familiar people and strangers.


    Orochimaru in this life, not at all died like in original work. Therefore, there is no window period, and the research has not fallen.


    However, due to the premature timeline, his research on Impure World Reincarnation is still inferior to Yakushi Kabuto during the Fourth World War. His ability to control was not as good as that of Yakushi Kabuto at that time, he must erase the consciousness of Impure World Reincarnation before he couldpletely control them.


    Avoid any mistakes.


    Orochimaru did not dare to let them regain consciousness.


    After all, no one knows, if they will know if Konoha is gone, will they do anything excessive or not.


    Quickly.


    Ninjutsupleted.


    The coffin that copsed on the ground merged into the mud.


    Then there are nearly 10000 White Zetsu, confronting nearly 1000 Impure World Reincarnation.


    Obito, who was just arrogant just now, was instantly in a deep mood.


    Feeling heavy.


    This time it''s Naruto''s turn to tease: "Your preparations don''t seem to be sufficient yet? What? Are you nning to escape? It''s okay, I can understand. After all, this is your style~ Anyway, until now, you''re still hiding, aren''t you?"


    At the same time.


    Whether it is the appearance of arge number of White Zetsu.


    Or the emergence of nearly 1000 Impure World Reincarnation.


    None of them rmed Hidan. From beginning to end, it was continuously noisy in the distance. Has been ming Naruto.


    Seeing that Naruto didn''t care for him at all, Hidan asked more and more annoyed. With his immortality, he doesn''t care that much.


    Speaking of scythe rushed towards Naruto.


    Also because of his rush, the war officially started!


    The confused White Zetsu follow Hidan and rush up.


    Nearly 1000 Impure World Reincarnation people, although their consciousness has not yet reacted, what is going on, but their bodies are facing the enemy uncontrobly.


    The situation at the scene is obvious.


    Impure World Reincarnation is on their own side.


    Seeing the Konoha Ninjas.


    They who responded also followed this group of Impure World Reincarnation and greeted the enemy.


    Instantly.


    All kinds of Ninjutsu dance around the battlefield.


    The scene was shocking enough.


    And Tsunade, who originally did not support Orochimaru''s use of the Impure World Reincarnation Ninjutsu, at this time, she said no, but her body was very sincere. She doesn''t want to see someone sacrificed again, she has started to cooperate with Impure World Reincarnation''s tactics, shuttled through the battlefield, and kept telling everyone not to rush too far.


    If there is danger, let Impure World Reincarnation stop it.


    Telling them to assist from the rear.


    The battle between the two sides soon became fierce.


    White Zetsu wins by quantity.


    Impure World Reincarnation wins with quality.


    A group of Akatsuki members knew that these Impure World Reincarnation would not die, so they locked in Konoha Ninja to start.


    Konoha Ninjas retreated while fighting.


    At this moment, Six-Paths of Pain also began to take action. After passing by, the group of Impure World Reincarnation almost defeated. As long as the Impure World Reincarnation touched by the Human Path, they will be stripped of their soul, and then sealed into the mouth of the King of Hell by Hell Path.


    Impure World Reincarnation is eliminated by such one after another.


    And all of this.


    It only happened in a sh.


    Now that the war has started, Naruto doesn''t n to dy it anymore.


    "Isn''t there anyone? It seems that my opponent is you." Saying that, Naruto turned on Sage Mode at the same time as the rapid Tailed Beast Transformation!


    A powerful coercion, suddenly flooded the entire battlefield.


    "Don''t worry, your opponent is not me." Obito with Deva Path ability said with a smile. "Here, he''s here."


    While talking.


    The little fighting sounds covered by battlefield around Konoha suddenly ended!


    Naruto followed Obito''s eyes.


    It was a scene that made him unbelievable!


    Not far away, a huge purple warrior appeared in vain in the clear sky! He saw the purple warrior spread his wings and pulled out the de, and imposing-manner rushed towards him sharply...

 Chapter 203: Asura, Indra, fate

    Chapter 203: Asura, Indra, fate


    Mangekyo Sharingan.


    Naruto originally never nned to use it.


    But when he saw this menacing purple Complete Body Susanoo, he couldn''t control that much anymore. He didn''t even bother with Obito.


    Now Mangekyo Sharingan is opened, and the Complete Body Susanoo in the same summoned Cyan color.


    Instantly.


    On the top of the head of several 10000 people, a huge monster suddenly appeared. The Cyan Complete Body Susanoo came in a dazzling spin. While spinning, he spread his wings and greeted the Purple Susanoo.


    Followed by.


    It''s Ow! loud noise.


    The spiral sword of Cyan Susanoo, collided fiercely with the Purple Susanoo''s sword. The formidable power is sorge that the surrounding air is shaken like a huge wave.


    Just the aftermath has already sent all the trees within a radius of twenty miles into the air.


    Two Susanoos flying in midair.


    Weapons block in front of them.


    The two sides stared at each other at close range.


    Naruto and Sasuke inside the Susanoo''s forehead stared fiercely at the other side.


    Naruto was not only puzzled, but also very annoyed!


    Akatsuki''s new leader will soon use some means to deal with him, and what helper he will find. He has deduced countless times and thought of countless probabilities.


    These means that the helpers may be Great Ninja Vige.


    It can be Five Great Countries.


    It may even be the entire ''Konoha'' who betrayed him again.


    Naruto will not be surprised if this happens. He won''t even frown.


    But Naruto only never thought that the person who helped Obito to deal with him would be Sasuke!


    Why!


    Why did the person who finally appeared in front of him and helped others deal with him was one of the most worthy of his attention in this world?!


    [Darkening level: 98%]


    Naruto said angrily: "Why! Why is it you! Why should you help them against me!"


    Naruto unleashed the ''spin'' of his spiral sword.


    The shrill voice, suddenly resounded through Heaven and Earth.


    Purple Susanoo''s Great sword was suddenly shaken away.


    Sasuke was startled by this power first.


    However, this force not only did not give Sasuke any shocking effect, but instead made Sasuke look even more hideous after a while of shock: "''Why''? You asked me this?! It''s your big brother!"


    Sasuke doesn''t understand that Naruto is really stupid or faking it.


    Not knowing how much Naruto knows Li Yaoxiang''s things.


    He only thought about:


    Resist?


    Do you still have the face to resist? !


    What your brothers did, don''t you have any idea?!


    Now in front of me pretending to be aggrieved, innocent, and indignant, what does that mean? ! Does this mean that I''m not being thorough enough?!


    Still want to see my joke now?


    Well!


    I''ll kill you!


    Let me see if you are so hard-mouthed before you die!


    Just see if your big brother will hide forever!


    While talking.


    Purple Susanoo followed the intensity and direction of the shock.


    A big roundabout came in the air.


    Turning around is a full-strength swing of word.


    The power of this move is also not much worse than that of Naruto just now, or even worse.


    Very heavy.


    Cyan Susanoo needs to hold the hilt in both hands to withstand this move.


    But even if this move is too heavy, it is not as heavy as Naruto''s mood at the moment.


    Big brother...


    Sasuke mentioned the big brother again...


    Hearing Sasuke talking about the big brother, Naruto couldn''t help but sh the picture of ''Sasuke panicking away when he learned that his big brother was dead''. Naruto instantly extinguished his anger, brows tightly frowns, and asked ghostly pale, "What do you mean?"


    After being blocked by Naruto.


    Sasuke not at all ns to stop the attack.


    Waving the great sword.


    Against Naruto is a m.


    Seeing Naruto''s expression and reaction, Sasuke didn''t seem to be a fake, and at the same time he attacked, he said frantically: "Hahaha! It seems thatpared to me, your younger brother is no better! Do you not understand what it means? Well! I will tell you now that your big brother until now is cheating you! ying you like a monkey, do you believe it or not?!"


    Naruto hearing this, the moment is furious.


    Naruto can see that Sasuke has been hit hard, so he look like this. But even if it is hit harder, this does not mean that Sasuke can use this to crack a joke!


    He can tolerate Sasuke offending him.


    Tolerate Sasuke humiliating him.


    Can never tolerate Sasuke to nonsense talk about his dead rtives.


    "Damn! Do you really think I dare not touch you?!" Naruto, who was originally holding the spiral sword to parry, also started to fight back because of Sasuke''s insult to Li Yaoxiang.


    Two Susanoo.


    In the midair, they attack and block.


    Two people''s emotions are getting higher and higher.


    The offensive is getting stronger.


    Avable over time.


    Naruto often just takes the attitude of teaching Sasuke, and has a fair share of starting. Sasuke, with the idea of killing Naruto, beckoned to death.


    Cyan Susanoo finally fell to the losing end.


    Naruto''s pupils also bleed two lines of blood and tears due to excessive use of eyes-power.


    The field of view gradually bes blurred.


    Sasuke saw it. With no mercy, and there was no meaning of convergence in his words, taunted: "Hahahaha! Look? Look? We''ve been fighting for so long, but we haven''t seen hime out to help you. You idiot! You treat him as a big brother, he is just ying tricks on you! Hahahaha!"


    Naruto has never exerted his full strength. In fact, he also has a careful thought in his heart, and wants to find out the true and false meaning in Sasuke''s words. But the battle situation has already reached such a field, and the "big brother" as Sasuke said has not appeared.


    Naruto would rather believe that the big brother is really dead.


    Reluctant to believe Sasuke''s nonsense talk!


    After having this idea.


    Sasuke provokes this feeling again and again, and finally seeds to really anger Naruto. The anger towards Sasuke gradually became killing-intent.


    Cyan Susanoo is an animal.


    Sasuke was backed out with all his strength.


    Naruto yelled angrily: "Enough!"


    Immediately, its size grew rapidly.


    For a moment.


    It bes the Kyuubi with Susanoo Complete Body.


    The legs fell from the sky in the sky.


    Rumble!


    Followed by.


    The original Cyan Susanoo became a pair of Cyan color armor Kinoe covering the real body of Kyuubi.


    Standing Kyuubi, holding a spiral sword, pointed to the purple warrior in the sky and said: "My big brother is dead! If you dare to talk nonsense, then I will kill you!"


    Sasuke startled.


    This form of ''Kyuubi'' saw Sasuke panicking.


    This...


    Is this Naruto''s strongest state?


    Finally spare no effort?


    That would be best...


    Then I don''t need to worry anymore...

 Chapter 204: All Gathered

    Chapter 204: All Gathered


    Naruto didn''t give up...


    Sasuke understands.


    Naruto didn''t do his best...


    Sasuke also knows.


    Perhaps in the depths of Sasuke''s heart, he still remembers the old sentiment... so, in the fight just now, although Sasuke is attacking Naruto''s key points in every move, he also did not do his best.


    Naruto values him.


    Why doesn''t he value Naruto?


    Even if he wants to kill Naruto, he also hopes to kill Naruto with all his strength.


    Constantly angering Naruto with words to make him go out like this.


    Seeing Naruto finally spare no effort, Sasuke''s inner knot was finally relieved, instead of his previous madness.


    Sasuke became calm like water, "I knew you would not believe it. It would be useless to say more. Since he refused toe out, I had to kill you and force him out."


    While talking.


    The greatsword in his left hand that pointed directly at Naruto not only ignited ayer of ck mes. Even the great sword in his right hand made a ck me out of thin air.


    ck inmmation came out.


    The surrounding air suddenly became hot.


    This is Sasuke''s strongest state!


    This is also one of Sasuke''s capabilities for Mangekyo Sharingan, ''Kagutsuchi!''


    As long as they are covered with thisyer of ck inmmation, their formidable power has increased by at least one level! In other words, in the next battle, I''m afraid it will be more intense and more dangerous than just now!


    One high and one low.


    Two people looked directly at the other side.


    Silently.


    With the eyes of the other side alone, everyone knows that this battle is inevitable.


    Neither side can give in.


    On the ground, an unremarkable small tree was burned to the end by the hot temperature, and the two rushed towards the other side without the slightest hesitation.


    A new round of battle has officially started.


    Naruto leaped.


    Sasuke swooped down.


    ''Oh!'' A loud noise.


    A picture of a confrontation in mid-air is formed...


    ...


    At the same time.


    In the battlefield of Konoha Vige.


    Naruto summoned the Cyan Susanoo, and after leaving, Obito with Deva Path ability, not at all immediately started, but observed the battle between Naruto and Sasuke.


    It wasn''t until the two of them showed their ''ultimate state'' and nned to fight seriously that Obito took his eyes back.


    With Sasuke suddenly joined.


    Obito has to treat it with caution.


    He did not understand whether Sasuke was sincere or faking.


    He wondered if Sasuke would betray him temporarily.


    That''s why he gave Sasuke so many difficult orders.


    Let Sasuke kill Konoha Ninjas on the outside to show his sincerity.


    Let Sasuke lead Naruto away and fight in the distance, so that he can first resolve Naruto ''helper''. Only in this way, regardless of whether Sasuke betray him, he can still solve everyone in front of him before the two rush back.


    When the timees, it is much easier to gather everyone''s strength against Naruto.


    Now that the preliminary n has been reached.


    Then he has to end the battle here as soon as possible.


    Think of it here.


    Obito, the main body, rushed up and joined the battle.


    Because of the addition of Obito, the Konoha side, which was a bit unstable in the first ce, has now be one-sided. Impure World Reincarnation were stripped of their souls and fell one by one. Or the damage is too great. The state cannot be restored in a short time.


    With the reduction of these "shields" one after another, the Konoha Ninja side finally began to have casualties. Even if Tsunade has summoned Katsuyu to treat friends on the battlefield, the number of deaths and injuries is still unavoidable, soaring rapidly.


    The situation on the field.


    The more Tsunade looks, the more anxious it is.


    Seeing that the tide is gone.


    As soon as she clenched the teeth, she seemed to have made a decision, thrashed several White Zetsu in the battlefield, and carried them to Orochimaru, throwing them to the ground.


    After Orochimaru sees her, there is no need for Tsunade to exin.


    Seems to know Tsunade''s idea.


    Teased yfully: "What''s wrong? Didn''t you insist against it before? And... are you not afraid of counter-effects?"


    Tsunade ignored Orochimaru''s sarcasm and was instructed: "Hurry up! I don''t want to see someone die! Summon them out, I will exin the situation to them!"


    ''Them'' in Tsunade''s mouth.


    Of course, those are those who knew that Konoha was destroyed and did not understand what fierce acts they would do.


    When Orochimaru saw this, it was an excitement.


    This group of people is the real power of Impure World Reincarnation!


    Only the summoned group can be regarded as the best effect of Impure World Reincarnation! At the same time, this incident is enough to prove that his choice was correct.


    If old fogey is not so hypocritical.


    With this Ninjutsu alone, Konoha need not be afraid of anyone.


    No longer hesitate.


    Hand seal again.


    ''Impure World Reincarnation!''


    boom! boom! boom! Three sounds.


    Three coffins were drilled from the ground.


    The coffin te copsed.


    Three Impure World Reincarnation with nk faces came out from inside.


    "Where is this? There is war again?" Senju Hashirama looked all around, and finally looked at Orochimaru. "Junior, you summoned us again?"


    "Junior, do you really think I can''t deal with you?" Senju Tobirama stared at Orochimaru with a bad face, and then fist clenched, "It seems that you have made a mistake this time, and I will not give you another chance to control me."


    "Huh? I''m not dead yet?" Might Guy looked nk and looked all around. "Isn''t the war over yet? Didn''t I seed in killing Naruto?"


    Orochimaru was stared at by First-Kage and Second-Kage, sweating and sweating.


    However, this is not the time to read Orochimaru jokes.


    So Tsunade quickly stood up: "Hey, here! You guys look at me!"


    Senju Hashirama: "You are..."


    Senju Tobirama: "..."


    Might Guy: "Lady Tsunade, are you okay? That is really good! What is the situation now? What happened to Konoha?"


    Senju Hashirama was startled: "Tsunade? Are you the little Tsunade?"


    Senju Tobirama: "What?! You said this is Konoha?!"


    Tsunade has no intention of answering by each and everyone.


    The current situation will be exined clearly.


    Exined, Konoha is gone, yes.


    But that''s only in name.


    Today''s Konoha lives in another way. Everyone is already working hard to rebuild their homes.


    At the same time, some causes and consequences are also exined in a light-hearted manner.


    Senju Hashiramamented, but did not doubt his granddaughter.


    But how can Senju Tobirama be so fooled, he coldly snorted: "Hmph! First, solve this group of guys who invaded Konoha, and then settle ounts with you!"


    Might Guy said brightly in his eyes: "Sure enough! Even death can''t erase my youth!"


    Followed by.


    Xi xi xi three sounds.


    Three people all go to find their own opponents.

 Chapter 205: turn the tide of the battle

    Chapter 205: turn the tide of the battle


    On the battlefield.


    The emergence of Impure World Reincarnation.


    Let Hoshigaki Kisame, who originally had the mentality of a mass murder,e to vent his anger.


    It was really frustrating.


    Isn''t his specialty, absorbing the enemy''s chakra and draining the enemy''s chakra? But facing this group of Impure World Reincarnation with unlimited Chakra...


    He sucked and sucked, and he felt something was wrong.


    Suck a fart!


    Can''t suck it at all!


    Okay, if you can''t finish it, then you won''t. Known as Tailless Beast, he can still stand out from the crowd with his strong body.


    But ying, he noticed something wrong again.


    Fuck!


    Can''t kill at all!


    There is no sense of the kind of delighting to kill the enemy.


    In the end, he simply didn''t care about this group of Impure World Reincarnation. Hard rush, but also rush forward to deal with those living Konoha ninjas. Dealing with this group of living people is the only pleasure.


    The Konoha Ninjas who can see his intentions.


    How could he seed so easily?


    Fighting and retreating.


    From time to time, they still throw some kunai to challenge him.


    Hit by kunai, which is painless and itchy, Hoshigaki Kisame is called angrily.


    Unbearable.


    Hand seal on the spot!


    ''Exploding Water Colliding Wave''


    A lot of water sprayed from his mouth like a torrent.


    For a moment.


    A semi-circr water area was formed. The water area covers arge area, covering almost two0% of the battlefield. Arge number of White Zetsu, Impure World Reincarnation, Konoha Ninja, etc., all fell into this water.


    Everyone''s actions have be extremely slow.


    But this so-called slowness is also limited to other people.


    For Hoshigaki Kisame, in this water, it is like a fish back in water.


    The moment the waters are formed, he has already integrated great sword and shark muscle into his body, forming a half-mermaid shape. Whether it is strength or speed, it can be improved in an all-round way.


    Because of this.


    In this water, Konoha Ninjas suddenly suffered a lot of casualties.


    The blood gradually stained the water.


    The Konoha Ninja trapped in the water is like amb to be ughtered, and his life is constantly harvested by him.


    It stands to reason.


    With the existence of such a water domineer, the Konoha side, no one should be stupid enough to walk into this water and die in vain. But there was such a guy with a mushroom head and strong features, and his head broke in.


    Hoshigaki Kisame was funny for no reason.


    With a joking mentality, he wants to see which guy who is over his own strength dares to enter the field here.


    But when he saw someoneing.


    His yful face immediately turned pale with fright. After being surprised, he became gnashing one''s teeth: "Might Guy?! How could it be you? Aren''t you dead?"


    All is meant to be.


    The personing is Might Guy.


    Based on his feelings, he felt that there were a lot of old friends who were familiar with him, so he without the slightest hesitation, the first ce to choose rescue is here.


    Can''t speak in the water.


    But it does not prevent Might Guy from blinking and smiling, blowing bubbles, and answering Hoshigaki Kisame''s question gu lu gu lu: "I am dead, but Power of Youth everywhere! In other words, what is your name?"


    Hoshigaki Kisame hearing this, angered!


    Again!


    This bastard, he didn''t remember his name when he died!


    He gave up attacking Konoha Ninja, and today he must use his strongest form to make this guy with big eyebrows and big eyes remember him well!


    Might Guy didn''t hesitate when he saw it.


    Gate of Opening .open!


    Gate of Healing .open!


    Gate of Life .open!


    Gate of Pain .open!


    Gate of Limit .open!


    Gate of View .open!


    But when he opened the Gate of View, he found that his epidermis began to peel off, and then healed again. Seeing this, his thick eyebrows could not help but frowned.


    This is the regeneration ability of Impure World Reincarnation.


    This he understands.


    Tsunade exined to him just now.


    But he didn''t care about it.


    But this body can withstand his strongest state...


    Seeing that the repair speed is much faster than the level of physical injury.


    Might Guy one step further opened the Gate of Shock.


    When the Seventh Gate and Gate of Shock are turned on, the repair speed and the speed of his body destruction have reached a bnce. This is already the case without fighting.


    Wouldn''t the speed of destruction in battle be more serious?


    Without any choice.


    Might Guy had to give up opening the Gate of Death.


    He didn''t want to, before he showed his Power of Youth, he was in a state of endless destruction and restoration.


    However, it is enough to enable seven-gates!


    Ready.


    Might Guy expression.


    Also greeted Hoshigaki Kisame.


    Immediately afterwards, it was two people in the waters that set off a war.


    It must be said that Impure World Reincarnation could not have yed the original strength of the original owner, plus the battle venue was in the water, so Hoshigaki Kisame, the strongest state, was not opened by Guy after opening seven-gates. One move to defeat.


    Although it is still at the losing end, at least it is not so difficult.


    That''s it.


    Hoshigaki Kisame, who had not been high-spirited and vigorous for a long time, was once again in a bitter battle.


    ...


    At the same time.


    It is not just Hoshigaki Kisame who is in a bitter fight.


    Since Senju Hashirama, Senju Tobirama, Might Guy, and the three people joined this war, the entire battle situation has changed dramatically.


    The huge battlefield.


    In addition to the waters of Hoshigaki Kisame, a lot of tree trunks, roots, etc. also appeared in other ces. These tree trunks and roots either bind the enemy or contain the enemy.


    The result.


    Not only White Zetsu suffered a lot of casualties in a moment.


    Even Sasori, who yed against Kakashi, Hidan who hacked through battlefield, or Kakuzu, who killed very well, were severely hindered.


    It has all changed from an advantage to a disadvantage.


    It all went from high-spirited and vigorous to bing ugly.


    ...


    As for the nemesis of Impure World Reincarnation, Six-Paths of Pain.


    It''s no better.


    The Summoned Beast summoned by Animal Path was screwed up by a huge treeman who came out of nowhere and was thrown as a weapon, mmed and beaten.


    Six-Paths of Pain main body is even more constrained by ae and go without a shadow silhouette.


    This is exactly what Senju Hashirama exhibited ''Wood Human Jutsu!'', The giant treeman summoned. And the creator of Flying Thunder God Jutsu, Senju Tobirama, after observing the ability of Six-Paths of Pain, engraving Flying Thunder God Jutsu technique form on them, caused this result.


    ...


    With Deva Path ability, just after joining the battle situation, and he had killed Obito very easily. Early on through the field of view of Six-Paths of Pain, after understanding the new trend of battle situation, his face could not help but copse.


    Originally thought that as long as Sasuke opened Naruto, he could easily solve the enemy here.


    But did not want to, thus this sudden situation appeared.


    It''s just that it makes him more speechless than that.


    Because a familiar face suddenly appeared in front of him, First-Hokage!


    First-Hokage, which was most admired in the past, is now staring at him to the extreme: "Is it you who brought them to destroy Konoha?"


    Obito: "..."

 Chapter 206: the end of the war

    Chapter 206: the end of the war


    With the joining of Senju Hashirama, Senju Tobirama and Might Guy.


    With the number of White Zetsu reduced.


    With the Impure World Reincarnation after heavy injury, recover, and rejoin the battle.


    Various factors are mixed together, and the trade-offs are different.


    The situation in Konoha''s battlefield has gradually be more brilliant. They noticed that the Akatsuki members who were in a bad situation no longer kept their hands and tried their best to use their own housekeeping skills.


    The battle on the field ushered in a new round of outbreaks.


    Various great moves more and more emerge.


    However, no matter how fierce the battle here is, it is still less than a hundred miles away. When Naruto and Sasuke fought, the movement was huge!


    Their fought shook the mountain.


    There were heaven falls and earth rends.


    The whole Land-of-Fire even felt scared witless because of the battle between these two people.


    The battle of two people made them feel the ground shaking.


    The battle of two people made them hear the deafening st.


    The battle of two people allows them to see the fierce light from the horizon from time to time.


    All of this is the impact of Naruto and Sasuke''s full battle!


    However, because both sides did not retain strength, the consumption of both sides is veryrge.


    Sasuke physical strength is consumed too much, the whole person looks gasping for breath, very different situation.


    Naruto consumes too much eyes-power. Even when he turned into a fox, his eyes left two lines of blood and tears, and his vision became more blurred.


    The battles of two battlefields are continuing.


    It didn''t mean to stop at all.


    And over time.


    Whether it is Konoha''s battlefield or the battle between Sasuke and Naruto, it hase to an end.


    Might Guy with seven-gates enabled can suppress Hoshigaki Kisame.


    Don''t forget that the strength of Impure World Reincarnation is not as good as it was before, and it will be affected by the strength of the sacrifice. With this trade-off, Might Guy can defeat but cannot kill Hoshigaki Kisame in his current strongest state.


    Seeing Konoha Ninja in the water prison, he can''t hold on anymore.


    In desperation, Might Guy had to choose to open thest gate, Gate of Death!


    After opening the Gate of Death, his epidermis has been shed continuously.


    The speed of repair is not as fast as his body copses.


    He only had one chance to hit.


    Because of this blow, he finally solved Hoshigaki Kisamepletely.


    In Hoshigaki Kisame''s abdomen, arge hole prated.


    Hoshigaki Kisame, who has not yet died, and Might Guy, whose body is in a continuous cycle of copse and repair, made the final exchange.


    At this time, Might Guy truly recognized this opponent.


    Seriously said to Hoshigaki Kisame: "I remember you, Hoshigaki Kisame."


    After hearing this, Hoshigaki Kisame passed away with a smile.


    The water broke.


    Konoha Ninja was saved and rejoined battlefield.


    Final result:


    Might Guy can''t fight anymore.


    Hoshigaki Kisame died.


    The situation of Sasori, Hidan, and Kakuzu is also very bad.


    The five-to-five battle between Sasori and Kakashi''s originally had some advantages, after all, outnumbered, with White Zetsu''s helper. However, as the number of White Zetsu decreased, without the help of White Zetsu and the interference of Wood-Style, Sasori eventually lost to Kakashi.


    Kakashi observed the body with Raikiri.


    He broke up his Puppet body.


    Kakashi, who had experience once, did not leave easily this time.


    Found the core of Sasori andpletely destroyed it.


    Final result:


    Kakashi-minor injuries, Chakra there is not much left, unable to fight anymore


    Sasori-die


    The moment Kakuzu saw the appearance of Wood-Style, there was a desire to escape. But at the beginning, he was too happy to kill. In the battlefield... who can escape if he wants to escape?


    The hearts are lost one by one.


    When there was only one heart left, those Konoha Ninja who had been killed by his red eyes began to deliberately target him and besieged him.


    Final result:


    Konoha Ninja-heavy casualties


    Kakuzu-die


    Hidan is even more tragic.


    Without anyrge-scale tricks, he could not y much role in this war.


    He has an Immortal Body.


    Impure World Reincarnation also has Immortal Body.


    He didn''t want to bleed, he waspletely speechless.


    Final result:


    Impure World Reincarnation-What are you doing???


    Hidan-cut into segments, trying to use his mouth to scold the opponent


    Six-Paths of Pain has solved many Impure World Reincarnation. Even if they are destroyed, they can stille out of the mouth of the King of Hell intact.


    This was once.


    Two times like this.


    The smart Senju Tobirama can''t see the clue?


    The next step is of course to target Hell Path first, and then start with the rest of Puppet.


    Final result:


    Senju Tobirama-continue to rescue other people


    Six-Paths of Pain-broken


    As for the big boss Obito. In front of Senju Hashirama, how can he is Uchiha Madara? Without saying anything, he just started without exining the reason.


    It''s a pity, even if he did everything he could.


    All the styles he knows are used almost all over again.


    He even thought about killing Orochimaru, the initiator.


    But all of this was resolved by one after another by Senju Hashirama who has rich fighting experience.


    Knowing this person in front of him, trying to destroy his ''Konoha'', Senju Hashirama didn''t mean to keep his hand.


    Directly exhibited Sage Art. Wood-Style. Thousand Senju jutsu, and cracked all great moves of Obito.


    Final result:


    Senju Hashirama-tescue other people


    Obito-use Kamui to escape with serious injuries.


    The battlefield of Naruto and Sasuke also came to an end.


    After Naruto used the spiral sword to block Sasuke''s two ck me great swords, his cyan color armor Kinoe and the spiral sword also disappeared. He over-used his eyes-power, and reached the limit of Mangekyo Sharingan.


    Sasuke''s situation is not much better.


    The sword just now is also hisst sword.


    After this de attacked, the purple Susanoo also disappeared.


    This is the result of theck of physical strength.


    After falling back to the ground, Sasuke was so tired that hey directly on the ground, gasping for breath and unable to move anymore.


    Unable to sense the Purple Susanoo, Kyuubi''rge body slowly shrank.


    Finally changed back to main body.


    After returning to the main body of Naruto, the field of view is dark. In addition to not seeing the picture with his eyes, his physical strength is far superior to Sasuke. Not even tired. Even if he can''t see the picture in front of him. But he could still sense Sasuke''s direction by induction.


    He''s gasping for breath.


    Slowly pull out a handful of kunai from the waist bag.


    Then either slow nor hurried walked over towards Sasuke.


    With the distance of two people, they are getting closer.


    The two can hear the breathing of the other side, understood other side is very close to each other.


    Sasuke lying on the ground, worried about the kunai in Naruto''s hand, then nced at Naruto''s eyes, and first started to talk and said: "hu, hah, hah, hah, eyes can''t work?"

 Chapter 207: can no longer escape

    Chapter 207: can no longer escape


    Naruto panted likewise: "Well, I can''t see..."


    Sasuke''s gaze turned to the sky, no longer speaking, silently waiting for Naruto.


    It didn''t take long.


    Just listen to ''dingding'' and then ''popping''. Kunai was first released and dropped to the ground. Then Naruto spread to the ground beside Sasuke.


    The two is breathing heavily and looks towards the front.


    In the silent night.


    Only two people breathing heavily.


    Sasuke struggled: "Aren''t you going to kill me?"


    Naruto: "Not kill..."


    Sasuke looked at Naruto aside: "Aren''t you afraid that I will kill you?"


    Naruto grabbed the kunai on the ground by induction and ced kunai on Sasuke''s hand: "Here. Do it."


    Sasuke nced at kunai in his hand.


    Looked at Naruto again.


    While the two were breathing heavily, both were unable to bear and gave a few chuckles.


    Finally, look back at the night sky.


    Sasuke didn''t ask Naruto why he didn''t kill him. He only knew that even if he defeated him, he wouldn''t be able to kill Naruto.


    Everything I did today was just to force Li Yaoxiang out. Since the matter has developed to such a field, Li Yaoxiang is also reluctant toe out, does it make sense to kill Naruto?


    and...


    In this world, there is only one person left, beside himself...


    If I kill him, then besides me... Who else is left?


    Simrly, Naruto does not kill Sasuke for this reason. Have you ever been emotionally vulnerable since you grew up ying together? Is it really because Sasuke insulted his brother that he was going to kill him? Is it possible?


    For other people, maybe.


    But for Sasuke, Naruto really can''t do it...


    Based on thisughter alone and the feeling in my heart, the two people knew that the other side would not kill each other, so theyy next to the other side with confidence.


    I don''t know how long it has been.


    Two people didn''t breathe heavily.


    The breath calmed down.


    Naruto: "Hey..."


    Sasuke: "En?"


    Naruto: "Are you saying... is it true?"


    Sasuke gave Naruto a subconscious look. Even if he is blind, Naruto still dare not face Sasuke. Sasuke can feel Naruto''s mood at the moment and is very nervous, so that''s why.


    Although Naruto didn''t make it clear, Sasuke was very clear.


    Naruto asked about Li Yaoxiang.


    Silence for a moment.


    Sasuke sees Revolving Heaven empty: "It was a lie."


    Naruto unbelievably faced Sasuke: "Wha--?!"


    Sasuke continued: "I said that your big brother treats you as an idiot; it''s a lie. I don''t know how your brothers feel. But I don''t believe your brother would die so easily."


    Next.


    Sasuke began to talk about him and Li Yaoxiang.


    When was the first meeting?


    What Li Yaoxiang asked him to do.


    Commanded him what he did.


    These include ''as long as you help Li Yaoxiang, Li Yaoxiang will help him get revenge'', ''fake death in front of Naruto, hide to recuperate and hurt'', and thest ones to look for cats, dogs and cats, simr to his mission, saying that he will ressurect his family.


    It was all simple.


    Naruto''s mood is more stretched taut as he listens.


    At the end of hearing, Naruto couldn''t help bitterlyughed, stretched taut''s mood, and therefore rxed.


    Very meddlesome love...


    In fact, Naruto does not understand.


    But he did not want to understand.


    Why does Sasuke know his big brother, how does Sasuke know his big brother, what kind of existence is big brother, why can he not only resurrect Naruto, but also dig Naruto out of the ground, etc.


    Didn''t Naruto discover this series of problems?


    No.


    Naruto discovered it all.


    It''s just that these problems are all deliberately avoided by him. He doesn''t want to think about it, nor is he willing to think about it, because he is afraid, the more he thinks, the more answers he wille up with about the big brother''s disadvantage.


    But things have developed this far.


    Things are so serious that even Sasuke, a close friend, has to help the enemy to deal with him...


    Is it his turn to escape these problems?


    Can these things still happen?


    Obviously, just can''t...


    After a bitter smile, there was another silence.


    Sasuke did not continue to speak, and did not urge Naruto. He knew that Naruto needed some time to digest the news. Because he can see, Naruto takes his big brother very seriously.


    I don''t know how long it has been.


    Naruto seemed to finally let go of his burden and began to really think about the whole thing. Connect the clues of everything together and analyze them rationally.


    He thought about it for a while.


    Naruto found a doubt.


    These things can prove that his big brother is not simple, maybe he has another purpose.


    But why does Sasuke insist that his brother is not dead yet?


    You know, he ran around for a period of time. In order to resurrect the two resurrection techniques that Hinata learned, it was at the cost of the life of the caster that he could resurrect the dead.


    I really died once.


    And the big brother did indeed resurrect him.


    So why does Sasuke say that big brother is not dead yet?


    Naruto asked: "Why do you believe my big brother is not dead yet?"


    Having said that, Naruto still has doubts, and Sasuke is not surprised. After all, Naruto epts that his big brother is a ''bad guy'' in a short time, and Sasuke knows that it is impossible.


    He said his thoughts without hesitation.


    After a while.


    Naruto said: "You mean... my big brother can not only extract your soul, but also give you the feeling that he is very powerful. Even if you are now, you''re not my big brother''s opponent?"


    Naruto repeated Sasuke''s words with surprise.


    Hearing Sasuke''s firm tone "uh".


    In Naruto''s mood, suddenly bes bothplicated and happy.


    Sasuke''s strength, wouldn''t he know?


    Didn''t they just fight?


    Even I spared no effort to defeat Sasuke. If Sasuke is right, the strength of the big brother is really a bit scary.


    It is unbelievable that a person with such a powerful strength can die so easily.


    At the moment, Naruto''s expression is veryplicated.


    He hopes that all spections are wrong.


    But I hope the big brother is still alive.


    After a while.


    Naruto: "Then what do you n to do next? Since you firmly believe that my big brother is not dead yet, how do you think you can find him?"


    Sasuke shrugged: "Originally I was thinking, as long as you die, he wille out. Didn''t expect we have already been beaten like this, he has not responded. Can only think of other methods. Combining all our information, there will always be clues, right?"


    It is at this time.


    Just when Naruto just wanted to respond with a nod.


    A killing intent suddenly rushed out of the jungle from a distance...

 Chapter 208: The third person, darkened 99%

    Chapter 208: The third person, darkened 99%


    A silhouette came out of the jungle.


    Silhouette sitting on a lion painted by ink, there are also two ink lions beside the lion, a series of three ink lions, led by the ink lion sitting on the silhouette, rushed towards Naruto.


    That''s right!


    The personing is exactly Sai!


    Weakling, he is a weakling. Weakling does not mean that he cannot defeat expert. If you want to defeat expert, you have to move afterwards and be more cautious.


    Sai, who is weakling, knows this very well.


    He knows how great Naruto strength is.


    So as weakling, he can only just wait.


    Wait for the start of the Four Shadows Conference.


    Waiting for Akatsuki''s attack.


    Waiting for an opportunity to kill Naruto.


    Originally, when the war started, he was going to sneak into the battlefield, looking for opportunities to get close to Naruto and kill Naruto. But when he found out that Sasuke wasing, and that Sasuke had the same idea as himself, he, who had always been steady, couldn''t help but secretly rejoiced.


    As long as Sasuke is willing to shoot, that''s the best.


    With Sasuke''s shot, maybe he can force Li Yaoxiang toe out without Sai''s own shot.


    He lurked again.


    The whole process of fighting Sasuke and Naruto is one after another. However, the strength of two people is too strong, and the affected area is toorge. If the strength is low, he can only stay in the distance to observe.


    And the situation that followed is indeed developing in a positive direction.


    He saw two huge ''monsters'', which became more and more intense.


    It''s not like cheating.


    This made him even more excited.


    The more intense the battle, the greater its probability.


    Unfortunately.


    The picture of the battle disappeared until the two huge monsters disappeared.


    The distance is really too far.


    Anxious, he immediately got on the ink lion and rushed over in the direction of the disappearance of ''monster''. He didn''t dare to ride the ink bird, he was afraid of being discovered.


    Quickly.


    He came to the edge of the jungle.


    He saw two people lying on the ground.


    He now converged aura and stayed in the jungle to watch the changes.


    Avable over time.


    Too far away, although he can''t hear any sound, he can see that there is still movement in both people. This made him irritated.


    Happily, he noticed Naruto''s eyes and saw Naruto''s tiredness. Is this both sides suffer?


    Angrily, Naruto was already lying so close, Sasuke didn''t choose to do it!


    Sure enough?


    With the rtionship between the two, Sasuke really can''t be ruthless to do it?


    But it does not matter.


    It is best if both sides suffer.


    Since you can''t move, then I''ll do it again!


    Unlike Sasuke, Sai and Naruto have no feelings. As long as there is a chance, he will start without hesitation. Even if Li Yaoxiang couldn''t be forced out, he will have to take revenge for ying tricks!


    After making a decision in my heart.


    Sai now summon two more ink lions.


    Rushed out together!


    So far away, there is another ruin around. Hidden, impossible hidden. So Sai simply rushed past without concealing his hostility.


    If even Naruto after the war, he would have to look ahead and not dare to deal with it.


    Then he doesn''t want to retaliate.


    And Sai rushed over with killing intention.


    Sasuke and Naruto, of course, impossible can''t detect the movement in the distance.


    Sasuke nced at a distance, and when he saw that the person was an instant of Sai, he immediately understood Sai''s idea. This is the same as the original intention, who wanted to kill Naruto and force Li Yaoxiang out.


    Sasuke was shocked.


    In a hurry, his first thought was to get up and stop Sai.


    But he realized that his body was too tired.


    Not even getting up quickly.


    He knew that Sai would not be soft.


    He also know that Naruto is blind now.


    The situation is very dangerous.


    Sasuke quickly turned to look towards Naruto, and said in a hurry: "Naruto. Quick..."


    Unfortunately, it is toote. The distance between the jungle and them lies neither too far nor too close. But how fast is ninja''s speed under full sprint?


    Sakai rode the ink lion, and in a sh, he had already arrived not far from the two.


    Naruto in Sasuke''s eyes was still lying there, but he hadn''t got up yet.


    But soon.


    Sasuke discovered that his worries were unnecessary.


    Because Naruto instantly evoked the Chakra coat and entered Sage Mode.


    He saw Chakra''s coat condensed into animal ws. As soon as the ws elongated and became bigger, p shot three ink lions together with Sai. Unexpectedly, Sai formed a straight line and flew out.


    The three ink lions were broken up and turned into ink in the air.


    Sai''s body collided with the ground, rolled over several times in a row, and dragged the ground for a distance, which stopped the figure.


    One move.


    In just one move, Sai was defeated.


    Sasuke looked at this scene somewhat astonished.


    He knew he was chaotic when he cared.


    He remembered that the person without physical strength was himself, not Naruto.


    But how can Naruto know Sai''s direction so urately and hit Sai?


    What Sasuke does not know is that Naruto, who is Kyuubi Jinchuriki, has be more and more proficient with his age and the proficiency in using Kyuubi Chakra.


    With the assistance of Kyuubi.


    Even if you are blind, it will not affect Naruto''s capture of the enemy''s position.


    Naruto couldn''t see Sasuke astonished eyes.


    He helplessly secretly sighed.


    Thinking of ''someone is going to murder myself again, I don''t know who this time'', at the same time, he put his hands on the ground, stood up slowly, and made a gesture of going forward to give the enemy a good time.


    Naruto can keep Sasuke''s hand.


    But this does not mean that Naruto will keep his hands on other people.


    Want to kill me.


    Then there must be the consciousness of being counter-killed.


    Killed things.


    Sai, who fell to the ground, was severely injured and could not move for a short time. He could only have red eyes, staring at Naruto who was walking towards him.


    Clenched the teeth and thought: Is it over...


    But just as Naruto was about to arrive in front of Sai, Sasuke reluctantly stood up and shouted to Naruto: "Don''t kill him..."


    Naruto''s ears moved slightly.


    The pace of progress stopped.


    Slightly tilted, waiting for Sasuke to speak.


    Sasuke: "He was like me. He had been working for your big brother all these years. The reason why he tried to kill you is also to force your big brother to show up. Let him go. Let him live and he may provide us with more clues to find your big brother."


    This is the case.


    Naruto and Sai are very surprised.


    Sai didn''t expect Sasuke has already told Naruto about Li Yaoxiang.


    Naruto didn''t expect. It turned out that it was not just Sasuke who worked for the big brother. Does this mean that the credibility in Sasuke''s words is even higher?


    In my heart, I always tried to justify the big brother.


    Constantly thinking about how to overturn Sasuke''s guess, isn''t it a joke?


    [Darkening level: 99%...]

 Chapter 209: The first generation, the second generation, meet

    Chapter 209: The first generation, the second generation, meet


    Li Yaoxiang is the only family member of Naruto''s life.


    The rtionship between the two is too deep.


    So even though Sasuke has said clearly, even though various details can prove Li Yaoxiang''s strangeness, Naruto still chooses to ''self-deceive and deceive others'', subconsciously forcing him to hold a ''semi-confidence'' attitude.


    The appearance of Sai.


    Also made him think about this matter, and felt that the credibility of this matter had to be higher.


    He stood there like a panic.


    He didn''t recover until Sasuke came to him and pped him on the shoulder.


    Sasuke: "Naruto? Are you okay?"


    "En? I... I''m okay." Naruto startled, immediately like a deted rubber ball, asked Sai on the ground, "Tell me, what the hell is going on..."


    Sai was still somewhat resentful.


    See two people.


    Also dumbfounded.


    He didn''t expect Sasuke thought that he was working with Naruto to find out the ''mysterious person''?


    This...


    Is it possible?


    Sai did not answer Naruto''s question, and subconsciously asked Sasuke: "How can you be sure that the man is not dead yet?"


    Unlike Sasuke.


    Sai is even more sad.


    He just heard Li Yaoxiang''s voice in his mind.


    Li Yaoxiang has not extracted his soul.


    Not even see Li Yaoxiang''s face.


    Since the persons involved, all three have arrived, and Sasuke has no intention of concealment, and he will directly inform Sai of what he just told Naruto.


    Sai also informed his situation to two people.


    This made Naruto feel even more heavy.


    Regardless of time, ce, and reason, there was no w, and it really made him unable to find a loophole to prove that they were lying. After that, Naruto and Sasuke described Li Yaoxiang''s appearance to identify each other.


    Result: characteristics described by them are really the same.


    If you use one word to describe it simply, he is handsome!


    Must have two words, he is very handsome!


    This made them more certain that the Li Yaoxiang that Sasuke saw was indeed not a fake.


    It''s the same person as Naruto''s big brother.


    However, this discovery did not surprise them the most. What surprised them most was that Sai raised a question they had never paid attention to.


    That is...


    What they saw Li Yaoxiang.


    So many years have passed without any change in appearance?


    There is no sign of aging?


    This makes the three people present a little more confident that Li Yaoxiang is still alive. After all, how could the ordinary person be not old? Since he is not an ordinary person, Li Yaoxiang will certainly not die so easily.


    After exchanging messages.


    After exchanging clues.


    Next is the most important environment, how to find a Li Yaoxiang that feels so unreal?


    But the topic is here.


    He was stopped by Naruto.


    Sasuke: "What''s wrong?"


    Sai also looks at Naruto.


    Naruto: "I''m not in a hurry to look for the big brother. Don''t forget that we are still at war. Since Akatsuki came to the door this time, it is impossible for me to let them leave."


    Both Sasuke and Sai knew that Akatsuki had to collect Tailed Beast and had to deal with Naruto.


    I don''t know.


    It turns out that Naruto also has to deal with Akatsuki.


    After some inquiries, they learned that the key to resurrecting Hinata lies in the pair of eyes of the leader Akatsuki. After hearing the news, Sasuke was surprised and guilty.


    He didn''t expect himself indirectly hindered Naruto''s resurrection of Hinata.


    He exined truthfully.


    If he knew this matter was so important to the resurrection of Hinata, maybe he would not choose to interfere with Naruto at this time. After all, Hinata is also one of his friends from childhood till grown up.


    He also hoped that Hinata would be resurrected.


    At Sai, who has been professionally trained at Root, the analysis of the incident is far more careful than the two. He instantly raised another question that Sasuke had to take seriously.


    That is...


    Since that pair of eyes can resurrect Hinata.


    Does that mean that their family members can also be resurrected?


    It doesn''t matter if Li Yaoxiang is not found.


    Two people didn''t expect, Sai would identally hit the wrong and said that Rinnegan can revive the ability of arge number of people. However, those who did not understand Rinnegan quickly rejected this im.


    After all, it sounds too universally shocking.


    If Li Yaoxiang, whose strength is strong and strange, can resurrect arge number of people, they still feel more credible. But if we say that with only one pair of eyes, we can resurrect the dead indefinitely, which really makes them unbelievable.


    In addition, Naruto said that the resurrection is a statement that needs to pay the price of death.


    Two peoplepletely dispelled the unrealistic thoughts in their hearts.


    I think it is more reliable to find Li Yaoxiang.


    After all, even if that pair of eyes can really resurrect so many people, where can there be so many lives to sacrifice? Who would be willing to sacrifice and then resurrect other people?


    After a decision, three people went back to Konoha together.


    Although they really want to find Li Yaoxiang as soon as possible, but this does not prevent Sasuke and Sai, first go to understand the information about this Rinnegan.


    After all, this is also a backward path, isn''t it?


    If you can''t find Li Yaoxiang, maybe you can really do more research on this Rinnegan.


    Under the rapid speed of three people, three people quickly returned to Konoha.


    Just arrived.


    Naruto''splexion immediately became somber.


    Although the battle is not over, there are still arge number of White Zetsu that have not been killed. But most importantly, Obito''s aura is not on the battlefield.


    He can''t sense it!


    Naruto not saying anything further.


    A few shes came to Orochimaru.


    Sasuke and Sai followed closely, and the same two babbles appeared in front of Orochimaru.


    The sudden appearance of the three of them, and Naruto''s current state (blind), only made Orochimaru stunned for a moment. He, who is experienced, did not show any surprises.


    Orochimaru responded quickly: "This battle is a victory. All members of Akatsuki have been killed..."


    But Naruto didn''t care about this, and interrupted directly: "What about the leader of Akatsuki?"


    Orochimaru paused.


    Immediately told: "He escaped."


    Not waiting for what Naruto said.


    Two people appeared in front of them.


    Senju Hashirama, Senju Tobirama!


    Sensing that there is a new and powerful Chakra, appear here, First-Kage Second-Kage also rushed over. However, seeing that Orochimaru did not escape or do anything, the two did not mean to do it directly.


    Senju Tobirama: "Who are you?"


    Senju Hashirama did not speak.


    But after learning that Konoha was destroyed, his face was not very good.


    He also looked at the people in front of him solemnly.


    In his own territory, being interrogated by others like this, coupled with Obito''s escape, Naruto also didn''t give them a good look: "Heh, who are you?"


    The atmosphere on the spot became instantly with swords drawn and bows bent.


    Extraordinarily dignified.


    Then everyone stared at Orochimaru, waiting for Orochimaru to reply to them...

 Chapter 210: Silly, nothing to say

    Chapter 210: Silly, nothing to say


    Orochimaru was stared at by several people and broke into a cold sweat.


    The palm of the hand is habitually hidden behind him, secretly forming a seal.


    However, he is preparing to make seals this time, not a hand seal for escape. Instead, the hand seal to lift the Impure World Reincarnation. As long as First-Kage and Second-Kage return to their homnd, will the trouble be solved?


    Things are going well.


    His hand seal seeded.


    No one interrupted him.


    But he was dumbfounded by the sessful hand seal.


    The Impure World Reincarnation of First-Kage and Second-Kage, not only did not disappear, Senju Tobirama sneakily looked at him: "What''s wrong, Junior? Really thought we would be so easily controlled by you?"


    It''s over.


    Obviously, First-Kage and Second-Kage broke his Impure World Reincarnation.


    These two ghosts dare not leave now.


    "This is Naruto, Uzumaki Naruto. It is also the new leader of our home." Orochimaru brace oneself, first exined to First-Kage and Second-Kage, and then turned his head to exin to Naruto several people, "These two are First-Hokage and Second-Hokage, you look at Hokage Rock, it should be understood."


    Naruto cannot see Hokage Rock.


    He can''t remember the appearance of Hokage Rock.


    But Sasuke cooperated with him and told him the answer.


    Senju Hashirama and Senju Tobirama heard the word "Uzumaki", and their face instantly improved a lot. They looked towards several people and no longer looked hostile.


    Senju Hashirama: "It turned out to be Mito''s n descendant! Hahahaha, I''m sorry, I apologize for your attitude just now. Thank you, thank you for helping us protect this homnd in the most difficult time of Konoha. Konoha and Uzumaki n formed an alliance, and it was the right decision!"


    Tsunade avoids the heaviest and narrates.


    So that two people do not understand the real situation.


    Naruto brows slightly wrinkle.


    He didn''t feel much about these two people in front of him.


    There is no hate, no respect.


    Anyway, now he is toozy to exin so much to these two people.


    Orochimaru also wanted this beautiful misunderstanding, and it just continued. But the beautiful fantasy of Orochimaru was soon broken by reality.


    With the decreasing number of White Zetsu.


    Some White Zetsu even fled.


    Konoha Ninja doesn''t need to chase all the enemies.


    They can save lives instead.


    Or clean up the battlefield.


    At this time, a Konoha Ninja who cleaned the battlefield, holding Hidan''s hands, feet, and head, came to a few people and nned to ask Orochimaru, themander, how to deal with this strange guy.


    The sound arrives before the person arrives.


    Hidan''s swearing voice has already entered everyone''s ears.


    When he saw Naruto''s an instant, his expression suddenly became excited.


    "Great Elder! Great Elder! Is it you? Is it you? Hurry, tell them to let me go! Great Elder, take a look here!"


    The originally harmonious atmosphere, again because of Hidan''s y, became dignified again. Senju Tobirama was the first to start to talk and asked: "Great Elder? How did Uzumaki n''s people get involved with those who attacked Konoha? Shouldn''t you exin it?"


    Tsunade, who noticed that the atmosphere was not right here, hurried back at this time.


    Seeing the situation, she soon knew who had messed up the situation.


    She has nothing to say.


    She kicked the still-noisy head with one kick. The head cut through the air and flew to the sky. Hidan''s head just had time to leave the words "Great Elder-----" echoed in the air.


    After kicking off the troublemakers, Tsunade was directly blocked between the two batches of people.


    Senju Tobirama: "Tsunade, what the hell is going on? Do you still have something to hide from us?"


    Not waiting for Tsunade to answer.


    Naruto doesn''t want to stay here anymore.


    He didn''t want to take care of the trivial problem of ''new home''.


    He said to Sasuke and Sai on the side, "Let''s go", and he wanted to leave.


    Senju Tobirama is a sh, blocking their way: "No one will leave until it is clear! Thest time I was awakened by Orochimaru, Konoha was still there. How long has this been? Was awakened again, Konoha is gone."


    Whether it is Senju Hashirama, or Senju Tobirama, in fact, they are very annoyed, and they put their lives down for Konoha.


    How can they be willing to work hard for half a lifetime, and say that if it is gone, it is gone?


    So they both take this matter very seriously.


    If conditions permit, they don''t mind solving some troubles for ''New Konoha'' in the time left.


    Naruto coldly said: "I don''t want to know about your business, and I don''t want to care about i! Either you give me step aside now, or all of you go to hell!"


    Senju Tobirama embraced his shoulders with both hands and yed with the taste: "Oh, old man would like to see if your junior strength is as strong as your tone..."


    Speaking of it.


    Both imposing-manners broke out.


    Naruto opened the Senjutsu mode + Chakra outerwear.


    Sasuke opened Mangekyo Sharingan.


    Senju Tobirama, who did not take Naruto and Sasuke as child taking seriously, had to be cautious. The crowds around were even more frightened by these horrible imposing-manners.


    Everyone dares not move.


    The atmosphere dares not breathe.


    It wasn''t until the 3rd share of the imposing-manner that was inferior to the second party exploded, the pressure felt on everyone, which relieved a lot. The master of the third imposing-manner is, of course, Senju Hashirama.


    He shed, and came to Senju Tobirama, shouting: "Enough, Tobirama! I will handle this matter! Don''t interrupt anymore!"


    Senju Tobirama: "But..."


    Senju Hashirama: "No buts!"


    Senju Tobirama suddenly have no choice but to suffer in silence, having unspeakable bitter suffering.


    Senju Hashirama said with aplicated expression: "You are Jinchuriki of Kyuubi, you are Uzumaki n, you should guard Konoha. What happened? Why did you say what you just said? Why are you hostile to Konoha?"


    Naruto sneered: "What, ''why''? Could it be, your granddaughter, the Fifth-Hokage is not over here? Why don''t you ask her, what the hell did they do?"


    Hearing this sentence.


    Tsunade, Senju Hashirama and the others, their faces became very ugly.


    Without any choice.


    Tsunade had no choice but to talk about the entire process of development.


    Tell the situation before Konoha has not been destroyed.


    Narrated Naruto''s experience.


    Tell about the final decision that Naruto made, etc.


    Hearing Tsunade briefly describe his past experience. Naruto has lost the feeling of anger that used to be. Without thinking about revenge, the emotions are very calm.


    Because now he has more important things waiting for him to do.


    Naruto: "What? Are you nning to stop me from leaving?"


    Senju Hashirama and Senju Tobirama were both left speechless when asked.


    Immediately, he watched Naruto, Sasuke and the others, and left.


    Is it...


    Was it like this?


    Has Konoha be so unbearable?


    When they founded Konoha, they just wanted to help each other, want a peaceful life, don''t want to see children on battlefield again, so they should protect the younger generation?


    But how did it be ''the sacrifice of a small number of people to maintain this peace''?


    If this is the case, does the vige created in those years still have significance?


    Didn''t expect, after he died, so many things would happen.


    Senju n is gone...


    Uzumaki n is gone...


    Uchiha n is gone...


    And these are not caused by this Uzumaki younger generation, so what qualifications do we have to me him...


    Senju Tobirama came to Senju Hashirama: "It''s all my fault. I didn''t expect my death to have such a big impact on Sarutobi."


    Senju Tobirama thought that his apprentice would not be so bad.


    They were only affected by the Hidden Cloud Vige, Golden/Silver Horn, so they changed their temperaments and changed their attitudes.


    Once upon a time.


    The two children, Sarutobi Hizan and Shimura Danzo, also talked on the roof about how to govern the vige.


    How to make vigers live better. All these, he sees in his eyes.


    Senju Hashirama still looks at Naruto and the others in the direction of their departure: "It''s not your fault. Maybe I didn''t take care of Tailed Beast back then..."


    Finished.


    Two people automatically lifted Impure World Reincarnation.


    The body turned into fragments, slowly drifting upward.


    Until the end, dissipated between Heaven and Earth.


    As for Naruto, of course they don''t know the idea of First-Kage and Second-Kage. Even if he knows, he won''t have any ideas. Because of their minds, they are now all on the way to find Obito...

 Chapter 211: Obitos obsession, Naruto arrives

    Chapter 211: Obito''s obsession, Naruto arrives


    Akatsuki base.


    It is also the background board of the Demonic Statue of the Outer Path.


    Obito, who suffered a heavy injury, was still stained with blood and did not heal himself. Just sit on the throne, close eyes and recuperate, motionless.


    After a period of time.


    He suddenly started to talk and said, "What are you doing here?"


    A pool of ck liquid appeared on the yellow silt.


    This ck liquid gets bigger and bigger.


    Until the end, condensed into a human form.


    Condensed into ck Zetsu.


    ck Zetsu: "Didn''t your n fail? Then should your pair of eyes be returned to their original owner?"


    Yes.


    ck Zetsu does not want to participate in this project anymore.


    He intends to kill Naruto and Sasuke.


    But this does not mean that he does not want to recycle Rinnegan. After all, after nning for so many years, it was only Uchiha Madara Awakening who had Rinnegan. I really have to wait for the next person who can Awaken Rinnegan, and who knows when until that timees.


    He originally nned not to show up.


    He nned to directly control Obito to surrender Rinnegan with spiritual fusion and spiritual possession.


    But Obito in this life was too vignt against him. As a result, he couldn''t seed as easily as original work.


    Obito sneered: "Oh, who said my n failed? My n hasn''t failed! And, even if it fails, I won''t return these eyes to you!"


    ck Zetsu tried to persuade: "Why do you need this? Now Kyuubi Jinchuriki is not something you can deal with. Then you might as well entrust your hope to me? I will lurch and find a time to start this project again. Don''t you want to create a world with you and Rin? Rest assured, I promise you. You will be there in that world..."


    ck Zetsu said painstakingly.


    Unfortunately, Obito does not buy it.


    Obito looked down at ck Zetsu from a condescending position: "I don''t want to hear your voice anymore. You better disappear for me now. Otherwise, don''t me me for doing it to you."


    ck Zetsu looked ugly.


    Clenched teeth.


    Finally chose to leave here.


    After all, when Obito is so vignt, he really has no choice.


    He is not an opponent of Obito.


    Had to lurk down first, and then do the calction.


    As for Obito, after he couldn''t sense ck Zetsu, he closed his eyes and regained his mind again, motionless. It looks like waiting for something to happen, or waiting for someone...


    Time little by little past.


    Obito has always maintained this posture.


    Until three visitors came from the base.


    Then he opened his eyes.


    The expression hidden under the mask was very excited.


    When three visitors appeared in front of him, Obito''s breathing became more rapid: "You''re finally here!"


    That''s right.


    The peopleing are Naruto, Sasuke, and Sai.


    And the people like Obito are them!


    This result made several people feel a little surprised. They didn''t expect Obito not only did not escape, but stayed in this base to wait for their arrival anyway.


    Naruto said curiously: "Oh? You didn''t run away? Since you know I wille to you, then you should know what I want, is it?"


    Obito: "I know what you want. I can also help you realize that wish. But before that, are you not curious, why would I capture Tailed Beasts?"


    Naruto expression moved.


    It is rted to one''s own vital interests and the life safety of friend Gaara.


    Naruto is indeed a bit curious about the purpose of Obito.


    He did not speak.


    He knows that Obito will tell them automatically next.


    Obito: "For world peace!"


    Then, of course, Obito continued to talk about his idea of the ''Tsukuyomi'' n. He said it in excited way and seems usible.


    But.


    Naruto, Sasuke, Sai three people, but the more they listen, the more they are speechless.


    What you call ''World Peace'' is to let everyone live in a dream?


    Obito didn''t pay attention to the expressions of several people, and said more and more: "How is it? It''s not necessary topletely strip Tailed Beast from you or Gaara. As long as you are willing to voluntarily cut a part of Tailed Beast Chakra to me, then ept Eight-Tails. We canplete this n together! When the timees. Whether it''s you, you, or me, or the whole world. You can get the best world in your dreams! This world will get real peace!"


    Finished.


    Obito finally set his sights on several people.


    Looking forward to them agree with his ideas.


    Wait for them to give him a positive answer.


    However, what he waited for was a full-strength blow from Naruto that caught him off guard!


    Boom! A loud noise.


    To put it into perspective, Obito was already kicked by Naruto even before he had time to disy his ''Kamui''. The throne smashed into pieces, and Obito smashed the Demonic Statue of the Outer Path before falling back to the ground.


    The previous injury.


    Plus Naruto''s hit now.


    Obito directly vomited a big mouthful of blood.


    He covered his chest... clenched the teeth and said, "What do you mean?"


    Naruto sneered: "Oh, ''what do you mean''? I''m not interested in listening to your nonsense talk. I''m not interested in dreaming with you. You just have to tell me where those eyes are. Either die or talk!"


    Obito hysterically shouted: "Why! I said so clearly, you still don''t understand my philosophy? Do you still not understand! Such a world, even if you resurrected Hinata, what''s the point? As long as the war continues, sooner orter she will face the same death! Only true World peace can realize our dreams. In that world, not only Hinata, but also your parents, your friends, or Uchiha n are all there! This is the world you want, isn''t it?! Why do you still refuse me!"


    Obito is telling Naruto at the same time he is telling himself.


    The more people he killed, the more he was obsessed with the Tsukuyomi n, because he kept telling himself, ''It''s okay, as long as the n is sessful, then all of them will be alive again''.


    But his obsession, not at all ushered in Naruto''s approval.


    Naruto: "I have a promise with Hinata. I''m not damn interested in your dream. Moreover, the world is not peaceful, what does it matter to me? As long as Hinata is resurrected, I will naturally keep her safe. How is it? Are you satisfied with this answer? Can you tell me where the eyes are now?"


    Obito was shocked.


    Then the whole person became decadent and said silly with a smile: "Yeah... World peace, none of your business...? Not everyone will worry about this world like me... Rin... It seems that my n cannot be realized... I will never see you again..."

 Chapter 212: Obito died, surprised at the new clues

    Chapter 212: Obito died, surprised at the new clues


    After smirking.


    Justugh.


    Obito knew that he was finished.


    It''s over.


    He is not Naruto''s opponent, he cannot recycle Kyuubi. After a big defeat, he knew that his only hope in his life was to convince Naruto and to convince Naruto toplete the Tsukuyomi n with him.


    He felt that his idea was correct.


    He felt that Naruto should be able to understand him.


    So before him, not at all despair.


    So he waited for Akatsuki base to wait for Naruto to arrive.


    It''s a pity that the beautiful illusions werepletely shattered from the moment Naruto rejected him. He knew he would never realize the ''Tsukuyomi Project'' in his life.


    What about Rin?


    What about Master and my parents?


    What about nsman?


    Does it mean that he really killed them with his own hands?


    Won''t he really lose them forever?


    Put hope on ck Zetsu?


    Hehe, a person who is backing away, expecting him to keep his promise?


    Obito never even thought about it.


    "Hahahahahaha! That''s right! World is not peaceful, none of your business? What does it have to do with you?" Obito''sughter gradually became haggard, "Hahahahaha! Then whether you can resurrect your family, what does it have to do with me!"


    Said.


    Obito has an extra eyeball in his hand, and one will crush it!


    Upon seeing this, Sasuke rushed past and mmed his right foot hard.


    Obito''s arm was stepped on by him.


    Unfortunately.


    Still a stepte.


    The arm that has been stepped on is automatically separated by 5 fingers.


    But Rinnegan in his palm was broken.


    Sasuke looked ugly.


    Obito not at all screamed because his arm was stepped on, but heughed abnormally: "Hahahahaha !"


    Naruto, who sensed Sasuke''s movement, asked, "What''s wrong?"


    Sasuke: "He crushed one of the eyes."


    Naruto: "Is there another one?"


    Half barely fell.


    Sasuke was shocked.


    Yes, there is one more!


    He can use this pair of Eye Ability, which means that this eye has been transnted by him!


    Sasuke nced at Obito''s mask.


    He soon had an answer in my heart.


    Reach out and grab.


    It''s just that his palm strangely ''crossed'' Obito''s head.


    This is exactly what Obito has done with Kamui.


    Obito lying half on the ground became an illusory shadow.


    Laughter is still there.


    Sasuke looked-at this illusory shadow, took off his mask, and pulled out the only Rinnegan left in front of himself. When illusory shadow returned to the entity, Rinnegan was already clenched in Obito''s other hand.


    There was another crackling noise.


    Anpther Rinnegan is broken.


    Sasuke still has no time to get this Rinnegan back.


    "Hahahahaha! Since you don''t care about world and peace, since I can''t realize the ideal world, don''t even think about resurrecting your family! Hahahaha!"


    Hear this rampantugh.


    Needless to say.


    Naruto also knew that another Rinnegan was also destroyed by Obito.


    Obito does this, in addition to having the mentality of ''You don''t make me good, then you don''t get to feel good either'', but also has the mentality of letting Naruto experience how he feels.


    Want to see Naruto angry.


    Seeing Naruto''s mad expression.


    Unfortunately.


    There was no other voice on the scene except he wasughing loudly. He doesn''t see three people in front of me anymore. Even Sasuke''s ugly look was just a sh away.


    This made him like a fool, the more heughed the more embarrassing he felt.


    He was angry and shouted at Naruto: "What''s wrong? Rinnegan is gone! Your hope of resurrecting Hyuga Hinata is gone! Aren''t you nervous?! Not angry?! Hyuga Hinata is still in your heart, simply does not matter!"


    "Is it called Rinnegan?" Naruto looking thoughtful, and then calmly replied, "If it''s gone, it''s gone. I haven''t expected you to resurrect Hinata willingly for me. And, you really think, in this world... Are you really the only one who can resurrect people? Is there really only one way to resurrect?"


    Naruto said this to Obito.


    At the same time, it is also for Sasuke and Sai.


    Let them not me themselves or feel guilty for the matter of ''not getting Rinnegan''.


    After hearing this, Obito, the whole person was shocked.


    Sasuke and Sai are nce at each other, and they smiled.


    Obviously, Naruto thought too much.


    Sasuke and Sai have the same ideas as Naruto. For them, Rinnegan is just a backhand. It''s gone, it''s gone. Instead of counting on Rinnegan, everyone is more willing to put their hopes on Naruto''s big brother.


    They are more willing to believe that Li Yaoxiang can resurrect everyone they want to resurrect.


    So...


    Since Rinnegan is gone.


    Instead of staying here, it is better to look for Li Yaoxiang''s clues as soon as possible.


    Naruto said quietly: "Kill him."


    Sasuke didn''t hesitate and started directly.


    One hit, pierced through the throat.


    Obito didn''t mean to dodge. Since he decided to stay here, waiting for Naruto''s arrival, he has held the mentality of seeing death as home. If he can''t realize Tsukuyomi n, unable to meet Rin, then it makes no sense to live.


    So in an instant where his throat was prated, he was not shocked or angry.


    Only unwilling.


    He was unwilling. He wanted Naruto to feel his pain before he died.


    Obito died, not at all excited three people who were used to seeing life and death.


    Naruto: "Come on, let''s go back first."


    After Said and Sasuke nodded, they agreed.


    Three people once again embarked on the journey back to Konoha.


    And in this section of the road.


    Three people talked about many ways and clues, how to find out, or know, where is Naruto''s big brother, or whether he still lives in this world.


    Chatting and chatting.


    They talked about Konoha 4 elders.


    Why does Konoha 4 insist that Naruto is a hidden danger?


    Why did he just target him and kill him?


    Before Naruto was imprisoned, the topic of ''big brother'' caused a storm. They predict that Konoha 4 elders probability will investigate the message about ''big brother''.


    In other words...


    Perhaps in Konoha, many people will know some clues about ''big brother''.


    After drawing this conclusion.


    They elerated their pace now and went back to Konoha.


    Quickly.


    Three people returned to Konoha.


    At the moment, Konoha, the original battlefield, has already been cleaned up. The vigers were also transferred back here one after another. But three people don''t care about this, they found Orochimaru immediately.


    Tell Orochimaru that they want to ask about the big brother.


    Let Orochimaru summon everyone.


    But Orochimaru''s hearing was terrible.


    Orochimaru can''t guess, the ''mysterious person'' at that time was Naruto''s big brother?


    So, Orochimaru informed the three people in front of him of the situation that year. He also said that Li Yaoxiang had threatened him and prevented him from moving Sasuke.


    Three people after hearing.


    Surprise and surprise.


    Instead of getting angry because Orochimaru once tried to kidnap Sasuke, he concentrated all his concentration on Li Yaoxiang! They didn''t expect Naruto''s ''big brother'' didn''t just contact them.


    That''s much easier!


    Just question everyone in Konoha.


    You can definitely get more clues!

 Chapter 213: Really. The protagonist appears

    Chapter 213: Really. The protagonist appears


    After this.


    The ninjas of Konoha were summoned, and they all asked again.


    This big move scared everyone, mistakenly thinking that Naruto was going to take revenge and settle ounts after the fall. It turned out that it was all right, and everyone was relieved.


    Answer honestly, and then go back to their respective positions to do things.


    Everyone is rxed.


    But Naruto''s faces were not so pretty.


    Because they didn''t get any useful clues at all. It may be that Konoha, who has gone through two wars in a row, too many people have died, and those who are familiar with the matter may be dead.


    The faces of three people are not pretty.


    Orochimaru is anxious.


    Anxious, he remembered that Konoha still had a group of people who were not called. That is the group of others who are now in a state of rehabilitation after being injured in this war.


    He quickly informed the three about the discovery.


    Immediately after.


    They came to the ward for recuperation.


    Order someone to help them ask one by one.


    Not much time.


    One of them hurriedly returned to several people and told them good news. The person in one of the wards did know some news about Li Yaoxiang, and that person was the Chief-In-Charge sent by Sarutobi Hiruzen to investigate the matter of ''big brother''.


    Several people not saying anything further.


    Go directly to this ward.


    As soon as he entered the ward, Sasuke was frowned: "Is it you?"


    Kakashi, who was originally looking-at ''Icha Icha Paradise'' while lying on the hospital bed, was suddenly shocked by the few people who rushed in. He put down ''Icha Icha Paradise'' with anxiety and smiled nodded at Sasuke.


    Yes.


    It was Kakashi who was sent by Sarutobi Hiruzen to investigate the ''big brother'' Chief-In-Charge.


    No need to say Sasuke.


    With induction alone, Naruto can sense who the master in the room is.


    No nonsense.


    Go straight.


    Naruto: "You were sent by Sarutobi Hiruzen to investigate about my big brother, did you find any results?"


    Kakashi nodded: "It''s a bit of an eyebrow. But after you left the vige, we have given up the survey. Until now, we don''t understand the results of the survey, it is probably inurate though."


    Naruto: "It''s okay, just say it, we will analyze it ourselves."


    Kakashi: "At the beginning, we can say that we are clueless, and we don''t know where to start investigating a ''big brother'' that has never appeared. Without a solution, we have to find out the clues from you. At that time, the most suspicious thing for you was that you were young and never learned cooking, but were proficient in cooking anyway."


    Hearing it here.


    Sasuke and Naruto both expressed amazement.


    Naruto knew that the direction of Kakashi''s investigation was correct, as was the guess in Sasuke''s mind.


    Seeing this, Kakashi realized they didn''t know about this. Then he continued: "Do you remember the food you cooked in those days?"


    Speaking of food.


    Recall food.


    Naruto couldn''t help but feel warm inside, his mouth unable to bear upturned, and then nodded.


    He will never forget it in his lifetime.


    Everyone certainly doesn''t know what Naruto has in mind.


    And Kakashi said again: "We found that the food you cooked was very simr to the food and style cooked by a restaurant in Konoha. We suspect that the restaurant may have clues about your big brother. Later I learned that the owner of that restaurant left Konoha when you were three years old."


    Speaking of it.


    I don''t know how.


    Several people vaguely felt that this clue was very important to them.


    Sasuke was even more nervous in expression, and interrupted to "unable to bear": "Then you found the owner of that restaurant, where did he go?"


    Kakashi shaking one''s head: "Our investigation stopped here."


    Just when the expressions of several people were about to show disappointment, Kakashi added at this time: "However, when we finally found the results, the person who escorted him left the restaurant..."


    Kakashi looked towards Sasuke: "It''s your big brother, Uchiha Itachi."


    Sasuke after hearing it.


    Complicated expression.


    Finally, they left the ward.


    Returned to the Main Affairs Hall of the temporary residence.


    There are clues.


    But everyone is dead, what can they do?


    When three people were at a loss, Orochimaru licked his lips at this time, unable to conceal his inner excitement and said: "Maybe... My Ninjutsu can help you?"


    My original decision, the Impure World Reincarnation that I insisted on researching, was useful again.


    For Orochimaru, there is nothing more worthy of him than this.


    The three hearing this, know what Orochimaru was saying.


    In order to find more clues about Li Yaoxiang, three people agreed to this practice without the slightest hesitation.


    He instructed someone to bring White Zetsu after he was captured.


    However, when Orochimaru was about to hand seal, Sasuke stopped him. It is said that White Zetsu is limited in number. It is better to directly Impure World Reincarnation Konoha elders than Impure World Reincarnation Uchiha Itachi.


    Konoha elders always knows more information than Uchiha Itachi.


    And they can ask Konoha four elders why they insisted on killing Naruto.


    Sasuke said so.


    But in fact, he did not know how to face this big brother.


    So he deliberately found an excuse to quit.


    Several people saw the embarrassment andplexity of Sasuke, but they did not object. After all, what Sasuke said was also true, so he did it ording to his proposal.


    Orochimaru didn''t hesitate.


    Hand seal.


    ''Impure World Reincarnation!''


    The first summon is Sarutobi Hiruzen.


    White Zetsu, who learned that he was going to be used as a sacrifice, screamed there. But after shouting for a while, the atmosphere in the conference hall suddenly became awkward.


    Nothing happened.


    White Zetsu is also shocked: eh? I''m not dead?


    Orochimaru not giving up.


    Tried it again and again.


    Shimura Danzo, Utatane Koharu, Mitokado Homura.


    All failed.


    Seeing Orochimaru failing frequently and eating deted, White Zetsu was unable to bear andughed heartily, and he was taunted excitedly: "Hahahahaha! Give it up! You can''t use me as a sacrifice. I am different!"


    No one bothered about White Zetsu.


    They looked towards Orochimaru, waiting for him to give an answer.


    It can be seen that it is just Orochimaru''s face ugly and shake one''s head.


    He didn''t even understand why he failed.


    Naruto said indifferently: "Then try summon Uchiha Itachi."


    Sasuke did not object this time.


    Orochimaru again hand-snapped the ground.


    ''Impure World Reincarnation!''


    White Zetsu, which was originally arrogant and arrogant, instantlyplexion greatly changed. Laughing, it became participation: "Ah-! No-! No-! You cannot treat me like this!"


    After a while.


    His appearance changed quickly.


    Until the end, it became Uchiha Itachi.


    Orochimaru took the lead in starting to talk, exining the current situation for Uchiha Itachi with a nk face. Uchiha Itachi was absent-minded about the destruction of Konoha and what was missing.


    After he learned the general situation, his eyes were always on Sasuke.


    His memory remains in the final battle with Naruto.


    Uzumaki Naruto did not deceive him.


    Sasuke was still alive.


    Moreover, he also epted his bequest and opened the eternal Mangekyo Sharingan.


    This made him feel very relieved.


    Sasuke coldly snorted.


    Skimmed his face.


    Not look at him.


    In the following time, both of them were dumb people, and they went straight to this topic without saying anything in front of them. Uchiha Itachi fully entrusted what he knew.


    Details about the restaurant owner.


    What happened during the period.


    And where theyst parted.


    This makes the three people present more excited. Let them be more certain that this so-called restaurant owner may be the person they want to find!


    Because ording to the client described by Uchiha Itachi.


    It is very simr to Li Yaoxiang in the image of him and the others!


    Handsome!


    Very handsome!


    After getting the desired answer, they did not set off immediately. Naruto made an excuse and said that he had experienced a series of things, and no one had taken a break.


    Tired.


    Let''s rest for one night.


    In fact, Naruto knew Sasuke''s heart knot.


    Want to leave a space and time, let Sasuke and his big brother have a good chat in the remaining time, unlock Sasuke''s heart knot since a long time.


    This night.


    Orochimaru understood.


    Impure World Reincarnation of Uchiha Itachi has not been lifted.


    On a quiet night, Sasuke, who was thin-skinned, took advantage of the absence of people and finally couldn''t help but go to ask the truth of the year.


    Ask Uchiha Itachi why he made that choice.


    The two had a long chat.


    The next morning.


    The Impure World Reincarnation of Uchiha Itachi is automatically lifted, the wish is reached, and the soul rises to heaven.


    Although Sasuke didn''t forgive Uchiha Itachi, he no longer hated Uchiha Itachi. Even Naruto sensed Sasuke''s mood, no longer stretched taut as usual.


    The previous Sasuke may only want to resurrect his family.


    Never thought about resurrecting the big brother.


    So now Sasuke may change this idea.


    With the rtionship between two people, Naruto certainly does not have so many scruples, he asked casually: "What do you think of your big brother now?" If you can really resurrect your family, will you choose to resurrect him?"


    Naruto saw through him and found his brotherly love.


    Sasuke''s old face turned red, and he said, "No... I don''t understand? Take a step, take a look... when the timees."


    Then don''t forget to tease back: "What about you? If you see your brother, what would you do?"


    Speaking of big brother.


    Naruto''s originally sunny mood could not help but be heavy.


    As he continued to dig and verify.


    Although it is not yet possible to determine whether the big brother is still alive, it can at least prove that the big brother himself has a lot of doubts. Have a fleshy body but don''te to Naruto.


    Can Astral Projection.


    Can strip away the souls of others.


    Whenever I think of these doubts, Naruto''s mood bes very bad.


    Because whether Li Yaoxiang is dead or not, it is enough to prove that he lied to Naruto.


    My only family member, until now, has something to hide from me and deceive me.


    This made Naruto''s heart very ufortable.


    He hopes all this is an illusion...


    Hope all their spections are wrong...


    Seeing Naruto''s face looking wrong, Sasuke quickly changed his mouth and said, "Forget it. Don''t say it if you don''t want to."


    But Naruto suddenly clenched the teeth and said cruelly: "No! If I really see him, I beat him fiercely first! I don''t think we can kill him though!"


    Yes.


    If Li Yaoxiang really appeared.


    Kill, it is impossible to kill Li Yaoxiang.


    After all, they need Li Yaoxiang to resurrect their rtives and friends.


    Beating Li Yaoxiang first was the only way Naruto thought of to get revenge on his brother.


    Got this response.


    Not only Naruto, but also Sasuke and Sai became excited.


    Seriously, after being toyed with by Li Yaoxiang for so long, it must be false to say that he is not angry.


    If there really was a chance for them to beat up this damn guy, and the leader would be younger brother Naruto, the two of them would be eager to beat Li Yaoxiang''s handsome face into a pig''s head for three days and three nights!


    This is worthy of the resentment umted in their hearts over the years!


    Sasuke''s eyes are locked in the distance, as if he has a picture of Li Yaoxiang being beaten up by their three people.


    Same said with clenched teeth: "Okay! I will help you beat him to death!"


    Sai, an official smiley face, also couldn''t help saying with clenched teeth: "Will you not count me?"


    Naruto nodded: "Rx, you will definitely be indispensable."


    That''s it.


    Along the way, three people kept talking about how to beat Li Yaoxiang before being rxed, to spend this long journey.


    Chatting and chatting.


    Unconsciously, three people came to the town where Li Yaoxiang had just arrived and started their search.


    ...


    Time flies.


    Years are like a shuttle.


    In a sh, half a month passed.


    During this half a month, three people searched almost the entire town several times, but no trace of Li Yaoxiang was found. Perhaps it is too long apart, nearly ten years have passed, and people cannot remember it so clearly. Maybe it''s because everyone didn''t really think about it. Perhaps it is because the way of inquiry is too gentle.


    So the following three people changed a way of asking.


    Threats and bribes.


    The results are suddenly different!


    Uchiha Itachi, Uchiha Shisui, and Li Yaoxiang three people, in the hotel they stayed in that year, only got an impression of Li Yaoxiang in desperation.


    ''Check in with two Lord-Ninjas.''


    ''Lord-Ninjas stayed for a while before leaving.''


    ''After Lord-Ninjas left, there was only one person left, and he hurriedly checked out and left in the evening.''


    These special circumstances are the main reasons why the hotel boss still has an impression on this matter even after ten years.


    After getting new clues.


    Three people painted scoops ording to gourd.


    He found the store that rented the carriage that year.


    For a while, threats and bribes.


    Also because the car rental was rushed out at night, so the people in this store were still impressed. In the end, three people arrived at Li Yaoxiang''sst foothold, the more prosperous town in Land-of-Fire, ording to the store''s description.


    They came here.


    They soon had new clues.


    ''food!''


    There are very famous chain restaurants here.


    The food in the restaurant is very simr to ''then''!


    The owner of these restaurant chains all point directly at the same person.


    Based on the clues, three people found the restaurant''s ''headquarters'' and the Chief-In-Charge here.


    In the dead of night, broke into Takako''s office.


    As the Chief-in-Charge of manypanies, Takako did not panic: "You are looking for the Boss in our store? Sorry, the Boss in our store is erratic, and I don''t know where he is now."


    Sasuke: "Your Boss is called Li Yaoxiang?"


    Through Uchiha Itachi''s story, they learned that the person who left Konoha was Li Yaoxiang.


    Takako nodded: "Well, yes."


    Three people hearing this, they can''t help but feel excited.


    But after the excitement, there is indifference.


    Sai: "Either tell us where he is! Or die!"


    Takako can see through several people''s eyes to confirm that they are not cracking a joke. She had nothing on the surface, but she was actually shocked to sweat.


    The problem is.


    Many years ago, after Li Yaoxiangpletely let his business go to her, he imed that he wanted to travel around the world.


    It has not appeared for a long time.


    She does not know where Li Yaoxiang is.


    What should she say?


    Sasuke, whose patience has almost been polished, said improperly: "Since your mouth is hard to say, die!"


    Speaking, he slowly walked up with kunai.


    But at this moment, three people suddenly heard ''Hey ~'' in their minds!


    That''s right!


    It''s the mind!


    The sound came from the mind instead of the ears.


    Sasuke and Sai nce at each other, Naruto also felt their two emotions change. This makes three people more certain that they have heard it right!


    Xiu! Xiu! Xiu!


    Three people suddenly appeared outside the restaurant.


    Just as expected.


    Through coercion and induction, they saw a ck spot in the sky...

 Chapter 214: 100% Darkening

    Chapter 214: 100% Darkening


    ck spot in the sky.


    Of course, it''s Li Yaoxiang no doubt.


    After eating the fruits of Divine Tree, although he has not yet unearthed many abilities, his strength is definitely a peak in this world.


    There is no change on the surface.


    But he can already fly in the sky by fleshy body alone.


    Looking down at the three people on the ground who were full of anger.


    Yes.


    Until this moment.


    Everything is under his control.


    It was all nned by him behind the scenes.


    Why did you leave a weak spot when cooking food?


    Why should you approach Daimyo and understand the dynamics of Daimyo?


    Why should the situation be directed to the whole world to target Naruto.


    Why when Naruto was killed by Jiraiya, instead of shooting, he chose to resurrect Naruto.


    Why did Naruto need to be dug out of the mud when he was resurrected, leaving a weak spot.


    Why did he leave Sasuke and Sai, deliberately giving them hope, but ying with them and annoying them?


    All of this is not because Li Yaoxiang has any bad taste.


    It was because "when he disappears one day", Sasuke and Sai will be angrier, and then go to Naruto.


    Thereby trying to expose his existence.


    So as to achieve the effect of darkening.


    This is also the main reason why Li Yaoxiang will leave the power of Kyuubi to Naruto when Naruto is resurrected. Because he knows that without Kyuubi, Naruto has a high chance of not being an opponent of Sasuke because of Mangekyo Sharingan''s ability.


    At the same time, this is why three people in the process of searching for Li Yaoxiang, Li Yaoxiangpletely never took action to interfere with them.


    He was slowly monitoring their progress.


    It was within his n.


    So three people found him so smoothly.


    Only...


    All of this was nned by Li Yaoxiang behind the scenes. But when he buried this dark chess piece back then, it was only just in case.


    Originally, he never thought that he woulde this far.


    Originally, he never thought of using his rtionship with Naruto to achieve the effect of darkening.


    Originally, he was thinking that Sasuke''s fake death and Hinata''s death were enough to darken Naruto to 100%, and then he came out as a savior to resurrect everyone and give Naruto a perfect ending.


    But helplessly.


    After all, reality is not perfect in imagination.


    Hinata''s death only allowed Naruto darkening to more than 80%. Things have developed into this field. Is Li Yaoxiang willing to give up, is he willing?


    No!


    He won''t give up.


    If we say that before this, Li Yaoxiang darkening Naruto is to let Narutopletely get rid of the influence of Asura.


    Then after this, he insisted on going with the n.


    Implement the final step of the n.


    It is for myself.


    Because he knows very well that as Naruto''s only rtive in the world, the big brother who is also a mother, all he can do is apany Naruto to grow up.


    There wille a day where Naruto will get married.


    Will have children.


    There will be your own family.


    When the timees, what should he do?


    Some people may say that he can abandon the darkening mission, get married and have children in Naruto World, and stay in Naruto World to grow old. It is a rare opportunity to let him soar in All Heavens Myriad Realms. Will he be willing to stay in Naruto World forever?


    No!


    He is not willing!


    So he chose to start thest step n.


    And just when the n was about to seed, he apparently could appear in front of Naruto ahead of time and get 1% of thest darkening in advance, but he did not do it for a long time.


    Only because of two words.


    ''Unwilling''.


    Naruto treats him like a loved one, but is he the same?


    Since he was a baby, he has been taking care of Naruto with a lot of shit and urine, watching Naruto grow up, how can he be so heartless that he has no feelings for Naruto?


    He doesn''t understand if the system will force him to leave this world immediately after 100% darkening. So he nned to thest step, but he hesitated.


    He didn''t want to show up so quickly.


    I don''t want to separate from Naruto so quickly.


    It''s just that the ugly woman must finally see her husband.


    Things always have to be faced.


    So he chose not to stop or interfere. In this way, Naruto and the others are allowed to find themselves ording to the clues left by themselves, and let things go naturally.


    Just as expected.


    When Sasuke and Sai saw him, Naruto sensed his moment.


    There will be movement in the system interface.


    [Host: Li Yaoxiang


    darkening goal: Uzumaki Naruto


    Soul: 3840


    darkening degree: 100%


    darkening value: 1831050


    Mall: Omitted]


    100%...


    After all, it is 100%...


    But Li Yaoxiang not at all a little bit excited.


    Just nced at him and stopped paying attention.


    Naruto below, gnashing one''s teeth asked: "Is it him?"


    Sasuke is also said with clenched teeth: "It''s him!"


    Naruto: "What are you waiting for?! Beat him together!"


    Sai quickly rolls out the scroll and draws three ink birds.


    Three people took the ink bird and rushed towards Li Yaoxiang in the sky.


    Instantly.


    On this silent night.


    Above this bustling town.


    Then it continuously sounded various sting sounds that pierced the air.


    Intimidating the residents of the whole town, they couldn''t help but got up from their sleep and went out to see what happened. It''s a pity that with naked eyes, except for hearing the sting sound, can''t see any battle situation at all.


    Under the circumstances of rapid movement of Li Yaoxiang and the others.


    Residents at most can only see a bright light from the side of the sky from time to time, surrounding the faintly discernible shadow in the middle, constantly switching positions.


    This is exactly what Sasuke, Naruto, and Sai used Ninjutsu to siege Li Yaoxiang.


    The three in the battle, knowing the aftermath of their battle, may wipe out the entire town.


    So at the beginning, the three at Sasuke not at all used their full strength.


    As time went on.


    As they are farther away from the town.


    The strength and speed of the three''s shots are getting stronger.


    Till the end.


    The three came to the top of a jungle, and everyone used their utmost effort without hesitation.


    It''s a pity that no matter how Sasuke, Naruto and Sai three people try their best to attack, Li Yaoxiang is always calmly dodging.


    Three people even try their best.


    It couldn''t touch Li Yaoxiang''s cold hair at all.


    I don''t know how long I yed.


    Hit the end.


    Three people are gasping for breath.


    Three people stopped the offensive, and the flying inkbirds flew side by side.


    The three stared at Li Yaoxiang, who didn''t even catch a breath before them, and when theysaw his nd and cold, they didn''t take their attack as a handsome look at all, the three became more resentful and unwilling.


    Are you still hiding?


    After ying with us for so long, are you still hiding?


    Didn''t even let us meet?


    Think of it here.


    Sasuke, Naruto, and Sai are all very talented in tacit understanding, bringing out their most powerful power.


    ''Sage Mode!''


    ''Kyuubi real body!''


    ''Complete Body Susanoo!''


    ''Super God Imitating Drawing!''


    For a moment.


    A purple Susanoo, a Kyuubi Complete Body, and the two Divine Thunder God giants, rumbled and fell on the jungle.


    The surrounding trees were destroyed a lot.


    Li Yaoxiang floats in the sky.


    Calmly looked at these huge monsters that appeared in front of them.


    There''s no movement.


    But the earth in front of him quickly raised another three huge monsters.


    These are two ''Wood-Style. The Giant''s Technique!'', and a Complete Body Susanoo formed by the white me!


    Around the white me, light blue mes are burning.


    The whole body seems to be engraved with light blue lines.


    It looks dazzling.


    With the appearance of three brand new ''monsters'' and the imposing-manner is no worse than Naruto''s, even stronger than Naruto''s!


    This scene appears.


    This made Naruto''s face even more ugly.


    Really!


    The strength of the scoundrel in front of him is as strong as they imagined.


    No!


    It is far more powerful than imagined!


    But even so, even if you know yourself and the others are not likely to be the opponent of the bastard in front of you, the anger at Li Yaoxiang has already filled the whole heart, and the three people who are approaching the edge of the outbreak, there is no point of shrinking.


    All clenched the teeth.


    Take the lead and start ying directly.


    Sai''s gods confronts a wooden giant.


    Naruto''s Kyuubi real body facing a wooden giant.


    Sasuke''s Purple Susanoo is against Li Yaoxiang''s White Susanoo.


    Soon after the opening, three people immediately fell into the losing end.


    The two giants'' heads are smaller, now both gods have raised their hands high, respectively resisting the pressure of the wooden giant''s left and right palms.


    Kyuubi''s real size is almost the same as that of the wooden giant, but Wood-Style is the nemesis of Tailed Beast. Attacks often fall on the wooden giant. It can be said that the injury is not the wooden giant, but himself.


    Those seemingly serious injuries, the wooden giant can repair in a moment.


    As if nothing happened.


    Still in peak condition.


    On the contrary, Kyuubi real body itself is that every time you touch an instant of the wooden giant, it will be pinned by the characteristics of Wood-Style and actively extract arge amount of his Chakra.


    This makes Kyuubi more and more powerless.


    More and more tired.


    As for Sasuke''s Susanoo, the biggest difference between his Susanoo and Li''s Susanoo is the weapon in their hand. The great sword of Purple Susanoo, like a purple great sword, was ignited with ck me and burned in a slow fire.


    The great sword of Li Yaoxiang''s Susanoo is just like the fierce fire from the welding torch.


    Tapered.


    Great sword of white fire.


    Judging only from the outside, the judgement is high.


    However, the gap between the strengths of the two sides is not only because of the stronger formidable power of Li Yaoxiang''s great sword, but also because of its characteristics! The ck me sword with the blessing of ''Kagutsuchi'', and when attacked against it, it can be tenaciously blocked.


    But when it attacks the ck me sword, it can pass through the ck me sword, and the attack directly falls on Sasuke''s Susanoo.


    This is the most powerful part of Li Yaoxiang''s great sword.


    Attack can be broken!


    Defensive!


    In addition, the power, speed, and flexibility of Li Yaoxiang''s Susanoo are better than Sasuke''s Susanoo, which makes Sasuke''s Susanoo more vulnerable.


    The state of Naruto, Sasuke, and Sai three people, therefore, became more and more tired.


    Three people struggled to face their respective opponent, but also faced with anger and face towards the sky, the face of the calm bastard!


    The angry Kyuubi was real, tolerating difort, kicked a wooden giant, said with clenched teeth: "Sasuke!"


    Seems to understand Naruto''s thoughts.


    No need for Naruto to say more.


    Sasuke also clenched the teeth, struggling as hard as possible, and sword cracked Li Yaoxiang''s Susanoo.


    Two people gasping for breath, facing Li Yaoxiang with an angry face.


    Li Yaoxiang is not in a hurry.


    Just look at what they intend to do.


    If you want to continue fighting, or stop fighting, let them be happy.


    However, Naruto and Sasuke, who didn''t even touch Li Yaoxiang''s half-sharp hairs, would be so reconciled, how could they give up so easily?


    Just rest for a moment.


    During the break, the two did notmunicate.


    It blended together with tacit understanding.


    Susanoo quickly dposes, forming aplete set of armor Kinoe, covered with Kyuubi whole body.


    Kyuubi changed from animal form to human form.


    It''s still the face of a fox.


    9 tails.


    Wearing a purple me armor Kinoe.


    Carry a purple great sword.


    Standing in human form, appeared in front of Li Yaoxiang.


    This is exactly the strongest form of theirbined force!


    Strength is much better than Purple Susanoo, or Naruto''s previous ''Kyuubi + Cyan me Armor Kinoe'', which is several levels stronger! After all, Naruto''s eyes-power is limited, and inbat, it will be more or less affected by Sharingan''s bacsh, so it can''t y all strengths.


    And because Sasuke is fused with Naruto, he saves a lot of physical strength and can focus on ying eyes-power, so thebination of two people will only be the strongest mode in this form.


    Combined power.


    Instantly added a lot of confidence to two people.


    Let them have an illusion.


    Misunderstanding that this time, they can finally beat the bullshit in the sky, ashamed.


    But just as they were about to start, and under their shocking eyes, Li Yaoxiang''s Susanoo and the wooden giant, also moved...


    Two huge monsters, also merged together.


    It''s just that it wasn''t Li Yaoxiang''s Susanoo who turned into armor Kinoe, covering the wood.


    Instead, the wooden giantpletely integrated into the within-the-body of Li Yaoxiang''s Susanoo.


    Formed an unprecedented new form!


    The wooden giant became the blood of Li Yaoxiang''s Susanoo and became the flesh of Li Yaoxiang''s Susanoo.


    Filled with the body of Li Yaoxiang''s Susanoo, including his wings.


    It looks very weird.


    A flesh made of wood, but it is not seen to be burned to ashes by Li Yaoxiang''s Susanoo. The body shape of the two after the fusion, it has be evenrger.


    It raised the two heads.


    It looks like a 200-meter giant facing a skinny boy of about 1.7 meters, which is indescribably funny.


    Face the giant with two heads in front of him.


    They even had the heart to scold the mother.


    Can''t you put some water?


    Have to do that?


    Can''t we let us punch you to vent your hatred?


    I can''t do it with one punch, so how about a touch?


    At least feel better, right?


    The more you think.


    They became angrier.


    It doesn''t matter that much, let''s just do it!


    I don''t know how long I yed.


    The process of fighting is like ying a house.


    Li Yaoxiang''s Susanoo easily blocked all of their''s attacks.


    They couldn''t even hurt Li Yaoxiang.


    Sai on the side looked dumbfounded and forgot to take action. The wooden giant and the two gods are just standing by and watching.


    Hit the end.


    Everyone finally lifted the form.


    Fall back to the ground.


    The three of them were very embarrassed, facing Li Yaoxiang, who waspletely intact and didn''t even need to catch his breath.


    The look is veryplicated.


    But because of the struggle, the anger in the hearts of three people has notpletely subsided, but at least they were not as angry as it was at the beginning.


    Naruto said to Sasuke and Sai at this time: "...Can you leave first and let me talk to him alone?"


    Sasuke and Sai did not reply.


    But very wisely stay away from this area.


    After a while.


    In this quiet area, only Li Yaoxiang and Naruto are left, coexisting alone...

 Chapter 215: Brothers face each other frankly, Hinata is resurrected

    Chapter 215: Brothers face each other frankly, Hinata is resurrected


    Before meeting, it seems that there are thousands of words to talk.


    After meeting, there is no way to exit.


    Two people stayed alone in this area, staying silent for a long time.


    I don''t know how long it has been.


    Naruto finally started to talk and said: "You have nothing to say to me?"


    Li Yaoxiang pondered for a moment, and without turning around, he went straight to the point: "Now you... should be able to sense the existence of another soul in your body, right?"


    Naruto frowned.


    Just like that in original work.


    Either he or Sasuke has indeed sensed the weird Chakra within-the-body.


    The strange soul was sensed.


    But he did not know what this was, nor did Li Yaoxiang mention this matter at this time.


    "That chakra and soul in your body is Asura''s soul. It''s..." Li Yaoxiang briefly introduced it, and then stated the key point, "Since your birth, this soul has been affecting your character. Arge part of what I did was to help you get rid of his influence..."


    This time.


    Naruto''s brow furrowed tighter.


    He didn''t think it would be the answer.


    But this answer alone cannot satisfy him.


    Naruto: "What is your purpose, what are your ns, can''t you just tell me about it? You have to hide it from me?"


    In Naruto''s heart, Li Yaoxiang upies the most important position.


    It can be said that regardless of Li Yaoxiang''s request is, including his life, Naruto will not refuse.


    And so far.


    The only thing he couldn''t stand was, why did Li Yaoxiang hide from him for so long?


    If you have any ns, why can''t you tell me yourself?


    Is it really impossible to gain my trust?


    What he was most angry about was why his brother didn''t trust him.


    This is what he cares about most.


    If he only didn''t say it. As soon as he said it, Li Yaoxiang became angry on the spot, even though it had been so many years. But every time I''m trying my best to warn Naruto, what I often get is a sentence that Naruto has no reason for:


    ''No, big brother.'' ''It''s all right, big brother.'' ''Everyone is definitely not that bad.'' ''It must be that I didn''t work hard enough, so I didn''t get everyone''s approval.''


    Li Yaoxiang will be unable to bear headache and anger.


    It''s like trying to persuade your teammates during the dire situation, "Don''t go, you will be ambushed like before", but the teammates insisted on going over just for a few loot, and it didn''t matter if they died.


    Not hanging on the, but deliberately sending people''s heads.


    That kind of heartbreak, the feeling of exhaustion.


    I just wished to pull this teammate out of theputer and fiercely beat him up.


    Li Yaoxiang felt that he could hold back for so many years without controlling Naruto''s body and letting him beat himself. It was already very self-cultivated and had a very high endurance.


    Hearing Naruto saying this, he was upset.


    He immediately retorted: "Tell you? Didn''t I tell you? Can you actually hear me? How many times have I told you? How long have I been nagging you? You wouldn''t believe me? Even if you believe it, will you even listen? Even if you listen, will you do it? Do you still think that if I am at first, I will confess to you and tell you that, with your stupid character, was there any help?!"


    Naruto was sprayed with a fart by Li Yaoxiang.


    Frozen on the spot.


    Aren''t you doing something wrong now?


    Shouldn''t you be the one to lower your posture?


    How did it be my fault?


    Moreover, why do you call me stupid again?


    The recovered Naruto just wanted to refute it, but when he came to his mouth, he couldn''t say it again. Because he remembered his past...


    It''s pretty silly.


    Leave him speechless.


    He could not refute.


    It is estimated that as my brother said, even if I knew these things in advance, I would have naively turned on the selffort mode at that time.


    Recalling in childhood, those naive words I said.


    Naruto suddenly got goosebumps all over his body. Now he can''t imagine how naive and stupid he was to say these disgusting words?


    Naruto looked back a little bit.


    Feeling ashamed for who I was back then.


    Ashamed of who I was back then.


    Stupidity, he has to recognize it even if he doesn''t want to.


    After all, even he himself can''t stand himself.


    But knowing that I know, this does not mean that Li Yaoxiang should hide for so long. Sometimes family members are like this, so domineering, so unreasonable.


    I just want to be angry.


    I just want to be reconciled.


    Naruto, who couldn''t refute, even seemed to becking in tone of speech. He insisted on finding a suspicious point in it, and retorted it back: "After that? After Hinata''s death, I can clearly feel that the influence of the soul on me is very small. Why did you note out to see me after so many things happened? Why did you hide the truth from me after resurrecting me?"


    Naruto stumbled on the point of the problem.


    This made Li Yaoxiang, who was still angry on his head, stunned again.


    For a while, he was speechless.


    Seeing that Li Yaoxiang was speechless, Naruto mistakenly thought that he had "checkmate" and was secretly proud.


    But he never expected that Li Yaoxiang would tell him about the ''system'' next.


    What is darkening.


    What a transmigrator.


    What system mall, etc.


    For Naruto, these things are a fantasy story, and he kept getting confused when he heard them.


    And just when Naruto was about to be confused by Li Yaoxiang, he caught an important point in Li Yaoxiang''s words. Compared to this focus, what other transmigrator, darkening, mall, this is not important.


    Naruto unable to bear interrupted Li Yaoxiang on the spot.


    "so-"


    "You mean... you''re going to leave this world?"


    Li Yaoxiang, who was originally talking about some rise, was interrupted by Naruto.


    Also froze for a moment.


    Seeing that Naruto was so nervous about leaving him, Li Yaoxiang couldn''t help but feel warm. He was very sure that the younger brother in front of him was just like him.


    Looked at the new ''24 hours'' countdown that appeared on the system interface.


    Li Yaoxiang eventuallyplied ''um''.


    Naruto''s face suddenly became pale and dry.


    This "um" sounds so heavy for Naruto.


    Upon seeing this, Li Yaoxiang quickly added: "One year... I can stay in this world for one year."


    Over the years, the system has notmunicated with Li Yaoxiang.


    But with all the rewards and hints of the system, Li Yaoxiang can clearly feel that the system is very eager for its host and can do nothing, making an all-out effort to sell its life for ''it''.


    Otherwise, there will be no ''24-hour'' countdown, urging him to go to the next world and continue to darken the next target.


    Otherwise, there would not be such an expensive option as "you can stay for an extra year, but you need to consume 1000 ckening points every day". Isn''t that just to make him difficult to stay any longer?


    Heh.


    In response, Li Yaoxiang''s first reaction was snorting disdainfully.


    The system yed a good abacus.


    If Li Yaoxiang leave because of this, it would be even better. The system can directly take Li Yaoxiang, the host, to the next world, without wasting time, and start to darken the next target.


    If Li Yaoxiang chooses to stay, it can also consume arge amount of Li Yaoxiang''s darkening value. As long as the darkening value is not enough, Li Yaoxiang, the host, can only earn more darkening value?


    It can be said that it stands at the invincible position.


    The problem is.


    Does Li Yaoxiang care about this?


    Nope!


    Li Yaoxiang doesn''t care at all!


    Compared to the darkening value, Li Yaoxiang cares more about his rtionship with Naruto. So even though it costs a lot of darkening value, Li Yaoxiang chose to extend his stay in this world without the slightest hesitation.


    In this year, he wants to make up for the days when the two brothers never really lived together.


    He, who had an ugly look at first, breathed a sigh of relief and eased a little.


    And after listening to his brother''s exnation, Naruto''s knot was finally untied. He finally knew why his brother did this. But he didn''t me his brother in the slightest.


    As long as the big brother is alive.


    As long as there is one year left.


    This is enough.


    It doesn''t matter what other reasons cause the mess.


    Because he is Naruto Uzumaki''s brother who would sacrifice his life for his brother. He even vowed to himself that he must cherish the next year and not waste a minute or a second.


    That''s it.


    The two people continued to talk about the old with simple-minded and chatted for a while.


    Naruto remembered this awkwardly, there were people waiting for them.


    Naruto: "Big brother, let''s talkter. Sasuke and Sai are all in a hurry now. Let''s go meet them first."


    Naruto turned around and walk towards Sasuke and Sai.


    But at this moment, Li Yaoxiang pulled him by his shoulder, preventing him from moving forward: "Don''t worry first."


    Naruto was puzzled: "En?"


    Don''t wait for him to react.


    Naruto only felt the big brother''s warm and thick palm, and suddenly covered his eyes.


    Naruto never thought of rebelling.


    I just felt a little curious.


    However, this curiosity soon turned into a surprise!


    As a wave of heat passed from the palm of the big brother, his heavy eyelids gradually felt. The eyeballs slowly regained their vitality.


    He cannot to bear to control the eyeball to move up, down, left and right.


    Feeling that the palms were pulling away, Li Yaoxiang also heard a soft voice in his ear: "Would you like to try opening your eyes now?"


    Naruto subconscious responded.


    Slowly eyes opened leather.


    From the slits of the eyelids, we saw the faint light.


    Then I saw the color.


    Then the field of view bes clearer.


    Knowing that in the end, the field of view waspletely restored.


    The picture in front of you is clearly in sight.


    Standing in front of him, it was the big brother who apanied his growth in the space of consciousness!


    Only after restoring the field of view.


    Seeing that the big brother is standing in front of him, he can feel how real this is, not dreaming. Naruto''s wishes over the years have finally been realized! I can really get along with the big brother in reality.


    Naruto breathes deeply, did not say anything thank you for waiting.


    With both eyes alone, you can see Naruto''s gratitude at the moment.


    Seeing Naruto''s excited appearance, Li Yaoxiang couldn''t help but jokingly said, "What''s wrong? Are you moved?"


    Said.


    Li Yaoxiang hand sweeps.


    A white light suddenly appeared in front of two people.


    After the white light disappears.


    A seemingly peaceful sleeping beauty, Hyuga Hinata, appeared on the ground.


    Naruto was startled: "This...!"


    Don''t wait for him to be recovered.


    Hinata who was sleeping peacefully, and his brow suddenly touched slightly.


    Followed by.


    It was under his incredible eyes that he slowly opened his eyes and slowly sat upright.


    Hinata, who had just been resurrected, was still in a state of confusion.


    Her memory is still a moment before death.


    She looked all around nkly.


    Aren''t you dead?


    How are you here?


    Before she could react, what the hell was going on.


    Naruto had already rushed forward and hugged her in his arms.


    Hinata was shocked.


    Sensing Naruto''s temperature and Naruto''s breath, the original nervousness eased. Red lips smiled sweetly. Leaning slightly on Naruto''s shoulder.


    Until now.


    Although she still doesn''t understand what happened.


    But as long as Naruto is there, that''s enough.


    She can safely give her everything to Naruto.


    As for Naruto...


    The emergence of Li Yaoxiang, with his family''s dependence, seems to make him an instant child who will never grow up. Lost and recovered, he now has tears and nostrils all over his face.


    Even Hinata''s clothes were soaked with a lot of tears.


    Don''t want to lose face.


    Don''t want Hinata tough.


    That''s why he kept holding Hinata up to hide his shameful side.


    I don''t know how long I held her.


    It wasn''t until Li Yaoxiang ''coughed'' a few times that Naruto realized that there were still people next to him, so he willingly wiped the nose and tears from his face and released Hinata.


    His nose twitched twice: "Hinata, you''re fine."


    Hinata gave a ''huh'' sound and was very touched that Naruto was so nervous. But she saw it wisely without saying anything, and did not embarrass Naruto. Open the topic and ask: "Where is this? Why am I here?"


    Followed by.


    It was Naruto who talked endlessly about a series of events after Hinata''s death.


    Hearing that, Hinata was moved.


    Fear again.


    Self-me.


    I was moved because Naruto did so meddlesome in order to resurrect me.


    I was afraid because Naruto almost died.


    Self-me because didn''t expect she will still be involved in Naruto after her death.


    After listening.


    Hinata came to Li Yaoxiang very politely: "Thank you."


    Li Yaoxiangughed heartily: "Hahahahaha! It''s all a family, thank you! From now on, you''ll be with Naruto, just call me brother."


    This is the case.


    Hinata was blushed at the spot.


    Seeing that, the hand that hugged Hinata''s arm was tighter again.


    But when they were about to look for Sasuke and Sai, Naruto wondered at this moment: "big brother, why do my eyes seem to be different from the previous ones?"

 Chapter 216: Preserve precious memories

    Chapter 216: Preserve precious memories


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t care said with a smile: "Of course it''s different. The eyes I restored to you are Rinnegan."


    Yes.


    Naruto''s eyes were specially exchanged for Naruto by Li Yaoxiang at a cost of 400,000 Darkening Points.


    Resurrecting Hinata did not cost much darkening value.


    What he exchanged from the system was the exact same body Hinata had before her death.


    The price is not too expensive, only 30,000.


    As for the soul of Hinata, Li Yaoxiang had already collected it in advance, and kept her in a lethargic state. So as long as the original soul is injected into this new body, the resurrection effect can be achieved.


    It''s just that Li Yaoxiang doesn''t care about the performance.


    Listening to Naruto''s ears was shocking.


    Rinnegan he knew.


    Isn''t that Nagato''s eyes?


    A pair of eyes so powerful.


    A pair of eyes that can resurrect the dead.


    Would it be so easy to give away?


    Although he can''t understand the various bottles and jars of ''mysterious power'' (system), he firmly believes that the big brother gave him his pair of eyes, which must have paid a great price.


    This made him worried.


    I''m afraid that big brother has paid some unimaginable price in order to give his pair of eyes.


    Naruto''s worries and wanting to let Li Yaoxiang take back Rinnegan; have all been apparently written on his face. Will Li Yaoxiang let it be?


    He said with a smile: "You are so weak, what should I do if someone bullies you and my sister-inw after I leave? Of course, you must strengthen your strength! Don''t even think about pushing it away, if you give it, I won''t take it."


    Naruto was taken aback.


    Then there was a lot of warmth, pouring out from the heart.


    He did not know that Li Yaoxiang said true or false.


    But he knew that big brother was worried about his future safety issues. He knew that no matter what he said, big brother would not take back these eyes.


    So he gave up.


    I am d to ept the big brother''s gift.


    Did not speak.


    But his eyes were already filled with gratitude.


    Hinata can''t understand what the the two are talking about, but he can understand the two words of sister-inw. She was blushing again, bowing her head and not speaking, secretly pleased in her heart.


    That''s it.


    They went on.


    Quickly.


    They appeared in the sight of Sasuke and Sai.


    When Sasuke and Sai saw the scene in front of them, they were both shocked and surprised.


    Resurrected!


    Hinata is back to life!


    Naruto''s big brother can really bring people back to life! And it looks nothing at all! It looks so easy! What resurrection requires a huge price, and even life, these signs did not appear on Naruto''s brother!


    Does this mean that their family are really expected to be resurrected?!


    The two became a little short of breath with excitement.


    A few arrow steps ran in front of several people.


    Only then did the difference of Naruto be discovered.


    Sasuke asked in surprise: "Your eyes are all right?"


    Naruto nodded smiled, ''um''.


    The two breathes deeply.


    The eyes are restored when they say they are restored.


    Hinata said that resurrection means resurrection.


    Originally, Sasuke was a little worried about whether there would be a limit to the number of Li Yaoxiang resurrected. Whether you can''t resurrect too many people yourself. But when he saw the scene in front of him, he no longer had these thoughts.


    Li Yaoxiang''s extremely rxed performance.


    Let Sasuke and Sai confirm Li Yaoxiang''s ability out of the ordinary, and be more convinced that Li Yaoxiang has the ability to fulfill his original promise.


    The two looked at Li Yaoxiang eagerly.


    I wish Li Yaoxiang would help them resurrect his family immediately.


    But when you are excited, you are afraid.


    Their eyes were blinded by anger before, so they chose to deal with Li Yaoxiang to vent their anger. Although Li Yaoxiang didn''t touch a single hair, will Li Yaoxiang feel resentment for this and go back on it...


    Hard to say.


    This made them start to worry.


    Very regretful.


    Tension.


    See Li Yaoxiang without any movement, nor speak.


    The two immediately issued a nce for help, looked towards Naruto.


    Seeing the expressions of the two, Naruto certainly knew their thoughts, and couldn''t help but feel amused. How could the big brother be such a stingy person?


    The two feel a little too nervous.


    But the eager eyes of the two made him feel a little unbearable.


    I had to help start to talk: "big brother, have you ever promised them to help them resurrect their family members? Does resurrecting people need to pay a great price? If not... Why don''t you revive them?"


    Followed by.


    There was a "no hurry..." came from Li Yaoxiang''s mouth either slow nor hurried.


    He was not anxious, but anxious to Sasuke and Sai.


    What''s the matter?


    Are we in a hurry?


    Both of them widened their eyes and looked at Li Yaoxiang, afraid that Li Yaoxiang would regret it.


    Seeing what they thought of Li Yaoxiang, they did not mean to y with them, and continued: "Since everyone is already here, I will take you to a ce."


    Said.


    An invisible force brought up a few people.


    Slowly lift a few people into the sky.


    Then a group of five people flew in one direction.


    Not much time.


    A few people came to a desertnd.


    This desertnd is different from the usual yellow sand.


    There are many ruined buildings in this ce, like a ruin in the desert.


    That''s right.


    The ce where Li Yaoxiang brought them is the ancient Roran in the movie version, which is where Ryumyaku is located! The reason for bringing them here is simple.


    The Rymyaku is an ancient source of chakra that flows deep under Rran, and can grant infinite power to those who harness it. The Source of the Rymyaku is a ce in Rran where the power of Rymyaku (English TV: Ley Line, literally meaning: Dragon Veins) is located.


    Some things happen, and they happen.


    There will be a trace that will never be erased.


    Moreover, the tragedy has never happened. Isn''t their life and their feelings for their families more perfect?


    Does this make more sense to them?


    Moreover, the tragedy has never happened. Isn''t their life and feelings for their families more perfect?


    As for whether changing the history of Konoha will have any adverse effect on the rest of the countries or the Great Ninja Viges... this is not something he should care about.


    The reason why Li Yaoxiang resurrected Hinata first is also very simple.


    If Hinata in this life, without these years of experience, without these years of memory, is she still the Hinata that Naruto has known in his life?


    So, except for a few people present.


    Let them keep their memories.


    Retain this precious love between them.


    Forget the rest.


    Just let them be confused ghosts and live happily.


    This is also the main reason why Li Yaoxiang asked Sasuke to solve so many movie''s big bads, but did not let him solve Anrokuzan/Mukade.


    In addition to worrying about the intact ancient Roran, it will affect his darkening n.


    It is for this ultimate purpose.


    They whonded from the sky looked at all around nkly.


    Li Yaoxiang said to himself: "Follow me."


    The trust of the big brother and the desire to resurrect his family made them subconsciously obey Li Yaoxiang''s instructions and follow suit.


    Followed by.


    It was the ce where they followed Li Yaoxiang to Ryumyaku.


    Watching Li Yaoxiang open Ryumyaku.


    Ryumyaku shed a dazzling light and swallowed Li Yaoxiang in a moment.


    The dazzling light, just appeared an instant.


    Out of natural reaction.


    Originally, Sasuke and Sai wanted to avoid this light.


    It can be seen that whether it is Li Yaoxiang, Naruto or Hinata, let the light devour themselves, and the two finally clenched the teeth, but they automatically greeted this strange light.


    When the light disappears.


    They appeared in a pavilion simr to a grave.


    At the same time, this is also where at first appears when Naruto returns to the past.


    However, what is different from Naruto is that as soon as they appeared, there were a few terrified voices in their ears: "You... you... who are you? Why are you here?!"


    Look around.


    It was a few guards in armor pointing at them with the butts of their guns.


    Li Yaoxiang could not help being frowned.


    Shouldn''t...


    It stands to reason that when they appeared here, there was no guard...


    How can the guards appear now?


    Before the guards questioned again, they copsed to the ground for no reason.


    Naruto: "This is..."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Let''s get out of here first."


    Speaking, not waiting for everyone to agree.


    An invisible force lifted everyone up again and followed Li Yaoxiang to the top of the pavilion. The top has five circr ss windows that resemble windows.


    Li Yaoxiang broke the ss.


    They took everyone away from the ancient Roran.


    When theynded again, it was already a deserted desert.


    "Big brother, where is this? Why do we suddenly appear here?"


    "Yes, you brought us here, what does it have to do with resurrecting our family?"


    Followed by.


    It was Li Yaoxiang who exined Ryumyaku to them and exined the matter of ''going back to the past''.


    They were so shocked that they could hardly speak.


    Seeing that there were no reactions from them, Li Yaoxiang teased: "What''s the matter? Don''t you want to resurrect your family? I will take you back to the past and let you personally stop the tragedy. This still needs me to help you resurrect?"


    The air is still so quiet.


    After digesting Li Yaoxiang''s series of shocking messages.


    They were unable to bear and took a breath.


    Then there is the excitement, all at a nce.


    Ccorrect!


    A few people present, who didn''t have so few regrets?


    Wouldn''t it be better if they could stop the tragedy before it happened, rather than helping Li Yaoxiang resurrect their families? Thinking of this, all present, including Hinata, were unable to bear breathing for a few minutes.


    Like the trend of impatient wanting to act immediately.


    However, just as the excitement of a few people reached its peak, Li Yaoxiang drank cold water again: "Don''t be too happy first... The current situation is a bit different from what I imagined. I don''t understand which era we are back in. Let''s check the situation first and decide."

 Chapter 217: No peace after death

    Chapter 217: No peace after death


    After a while.


    They flew in the sky soon came to Konoha.


    Found a lonely Konoha ninja.


    Li Yaoxiang without the slightest hesitation, a Genjutsu was thrown up.


    From the mouth of this ninja, it is now the 37th year of Konoha.


    That is, soon after the Second Shinobi World War ends.


    Li Yaoxiang was only surprised for a moment, and then the corner of his mouth was unable to bear slightly upturned.


    Konoha 37 years ...


    Shortly after the end of Second Shinobi World War ...


    hehe, this is interesting ...


    After unlocking Genjutsu for this ninja, and staying silently away from this ce, it was followed by a few people to exin their next n.


    ...


    A few hourster.


    Konoha ushered in a quiet night.


    Due to the end of the Second Shinobi World War, there are still many post-war issues to be dealt with, so even at night, the conference hall of the Hokage Residence is still lit with lights.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen, Shimura Danzo, Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu are still discussing variousrge and small things.


    It''s just that when Sarutobi Hiruzen rises.


    He suddenly snapped, sitting, crawling up on the table.


    The rest of them eximed again and again.


    "Hiruzen?"


    "Hiruzen!"


    "What happened to you?!"


    It doesn''t matter how they react. They have the same situation. They pped and crawled on the table. An Anbu ninja heard the exmation, opened the door nervously, and broke in.


    "Lord-Hokage, do you have ... are you?"


    Halfway through.


    This Anbu ninja was dumbfounded.


    The scene that came into view was nothing in the Conference Hall.


    He couldn''t sense any abnormality.


    Konoha four is always staring at him with 8 eyes.


    It seemed that he was not embarrassed.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen: "What''s wrong?"


    Anbu ninja smiled: "Nevermind. Maybe I heard it wrong."


    After Konoha Ninja apologized and left.


    Li Yaoxiang''s silhouette suddenly appeared in the Conference Hall. ''Sarutobi Hiruzen'' even said to him: "big brother, is your n really okay?"


    That''s right.


    Now the four people in the Conference Hall are not the original Konoha four elders.


    They are all changed from Naruto, Hinata, Sasuke, Sai, using Transformation Jutsu.


    As for the Konoha four elders just now, their souls have long been stripped, destroyed, and disappeared by Li Yaoxiang. The body was also burned to the end,pletely disappeared from this world.


    And Li Yaoxiang''s n is also very simple.


    It is the "Transformation Jutsu + Shadow Clone Jutsu" by Naruto, Sasuke, Sai, Hinata, etc. From now on, they will rece Konoha four to take charge of Konoha.


    Change the destiny of Konoha.


    Change everyone''s destiny.


    As for ... Will they be discovered? Li Yaoxiang was not too worried. Not to mention their current strength, it is not easy to be discovered. Even if they are found to be shadow clones, it is not so easy for the other party to confirm how many people are fake, right?


    After all, there is no provision to say Hokage, so you must show yourself.


    After all, who didn''t expect, someone could solve Konoha four elders and silently, and pretend to be extremely daring?


    Moreover, Li Yaoxiang is not without hands.


    He motioned to Naruto and said: "Rx, there is my ''Limbo. Boundary'' here-looks-at, there will be no problems. Even if something special happens, my Limbo: Border Jail can be dealt with in time. You can rest assured with Shadow Clones here, and then go back with me. Or would you like to stay here for more than 10 years? You will not go back until 10 yearster. How old would you be?"


    Yes.


    TL/N: Using his Rinnegan, Madara Uchiha projects a shadow of himself into Limbo (Rinbo, literally meaning: Wheel Grave).


    Li Yaoxiang''s starting hand is Six-Paths Madara''s unique skill, Limbo: Border Jail. Limbo: Border Jail is somewhat simr to Shadow Clone, but it is more powerful than Shadow Clone.


    Limbo: Border Jail is a shadow.


    At the same time, this shadow has all the capabilities of the main body.


    Every shadow can perform Complete Body Susanoo.


    At the peak period, Madara can disy 4 Limbo: Border Jail. After eating the Divine Tree fruit and getting evolution, Li Yaoxiang, which is more powerful than Six-Paths Madara, can disy 6 Limbo: Border Jail.


    Li Yaoxiang''s n is to leave 4 Limbo: Border Jail in this era, guarding the Shadow Clone of several people, and ensuring that their main body is transmigrated back, through this Shadow Clone, you can get aplete memory.


    After all, Li Yaoxiang can only stay in Naruto World for only one year.


    This is also the only way he can solve the problem.


    After confirmation.


    They cast Shadow Clone at the same time.


    Shadow Clone performed Transformation Jutsu.


    ''Konoha four elders'' sat back in their seats.


    But just as they were about to leave, Li Yaoxiang suddenly remembered something. He waved his hand. Several old bodies appeared in front of him.


    "I am not dead?"


    "How can I be here?"


    "What the hell do you want?"


    The soul of the body within-the-body is a Konoha four elders of the original era.


    Orochimaru''s Impure World Reincarnation, the reason why he can''t summon them, is because after their death, Li Yaoxiang has already devoured their souls.


    Until now, bring them here.


    They were given an aged body that could not be extracted from Chakra.


    Naruto wondered: "big brother, this ..."


    After exining the identity of several people to Naruto, Li Yaoxiang yed with the taste: "These old fellows didn''t think they were wrong until the moment they died. Don''t you think that it''s a very interesting thing for them to witness the different Konoha and let them realize that they are just Konoha''s sinners?"


    Speaking of it.


    Naruto, Hinata, Sasuke, and Sai, all showed very interested looks.


    How many people were present, who had not been oppressed by the elders?


    Didn''t you say that you just do everything for Konoha?


    Well!


    Let you be restless after death, let you witness the different Konoha with your own eyes, and see when the timees what else do you have to say!


    Finally, let their souls disappeared in endless remorse.


    As for saying, they may not be able to torture, looking for short-sightedness?


    Hehe.


    There is Li Yaoxiang''s Limbo: Border Jail guarding here ...


    It''s hard for them to die!


    Seeing no objection.


    Before leaving, Li Yaoxiang said to Shimura Danzo, which was transformed from Sai Shadow Clone, and said, "Lord Danzo, you should know how to deal with them?"


    ''Shimura Danzo'' is expressionlessly nodded: "Well, Root has its own way of cultivating ninja, and I will entertain them well."


    After exining thest thing.


    That night, Li Yaoxiang took their main body and left Konoha.


    What to do next.


    It is to open Ryumyaku.


    Go back to the original era.


    Lift Shadow Clone and usher in the changes and results brought about by this journey...

 Chapter 218: Different Konoha

    Chapter 218: Different Konoha


    Open Ryumyaku.


    A white light shed.


    They returned to their original times.


    Ancient Roran is still a ruin in the desert. The reason why the movie version of Big Boss, Anrokuzan, did not influence the development of history without Naruto''s transmigrated return is probably because even without the existence of Naruto, Namikaze Minato can solve this problem perfectly.


    However, whether this guess is urate or not is not what Li Yaoxiang is concerned about now.


    The few people present were excited, nervous and worried.


    They can''t wait to go back to Konoha and see what''s new.


    Li Yaoxiang, who saw their thoughts, did not intend to dy time. The invisible power immediately lifted several people, cut through the sky, and flew back directly in the direction of Konoha.


    He was also very curious.


    What kind of new changes will appear in the changed Konoha.


    quickly.


    As Konoha got closer, it got closer.


    Although the person did not arrive.


    Looking at it from a high altitude, they could faintly see the new outline of Konoha.


    The scene that caught the eye, let a few people present, including Li Yaoxiang, could not help but be surprised! Today''s Konoha is no longer the small home that was just rebuilt shortly after it was destroyed by Akatsuki.


    But it is far more prosperous than Konoha before they were destroyed.


    The buildings in the wall are more dense.


    They did not fly directly into the vige from in the sky.


    Instead, they chose tond on the Konoha main gate and walk in from the main gate.


    The guards at the gate just saw a few people, including Li Yaoxiang. Not only did they not be surprised, but they seemed to be very familiar with their identities. They rushed to Naruto and said: "Why are you here? Here? Lady Kushina has found you a long time! She is still looking for you like a madman. If you don''t go back, it is estimated that the entire Konoha will be turned over by her! Not even Lord-Hokage!"


    Naruto froze for a moment, subconsciously holding out a sentence: "Mo...m?"


    Followed by.


    Before they could react, a whole new memory flowed into their minds.


    This memory is not the memory obtained by unlocking the shadow clone.


    It''s their main body, and the original ''main body'', that new experience, memory, fuse together memory. 5 people couldn''t help closing their eyes.


    Slowly feel this memory.


    Slowly digest this memory.


    I don''t know how long it has been.


    When the guard''s anxious urging sound came again in his ear, they slowly opened their eyes.


    Several people looked at each other.


    Through their eyes, they can see that the other party has lost the dazed, nervous, and uneasy emotions just now. Looked towards each other''s eyes, they have be more intimate and soft.


    As if they were familiar rtives and friends.


    No, not as if.


    Now they are really familiar with each other!


    Because in this new memory, they have known each other since childhood. y, practice, go to school, do tasks and so on together since childhood.


    The reason for this is, of course, that the ''Four Elders of Konoha'' contributed to the mes.


    And Li Yaoxiang''s rtionship with several people is also the same.


    A few little guys often went to Li Yaoxiang''s shop to help.


    Naruto and Li Yaoxiang in this memory have truly be brothers in name. Under the rmendation of the "Four Elders of Konoha", Li Yaoxiang in this memory also taught Naruto to read and write, and also apanied Naruto''s growth.


    Different from the original experience, the two have more happy days as brothers.


    Several people present.


    They all got a result they couldn''t be more satisfied with.


    Uchiha Itachi, Uchiha Shisui, and even the entire Uchiha n, are not dead.


    The letter is not dead.


    Hyuga Hizashi is not dead.


    Namikaze Minato and Uzumaki Kushina also did not die.


    It''s just that Uzumaki Kushina''s explosive sound came from afar before they waited for a long time with emotion: "Uzumaki Naruto--!"


    Before the person arrives, the sound arrives first.


    Uzumaki Kushinapletely ignoring the gazes of others, and strode angrily.


    have to say.


    The Naruto in this memory is more active and naughty than original work. This character can''t be changed. Often making Uzumaki Kushina angry, so it leads to Uzumaki Kushina nowadays, made by her naughty son.


    In the face of her son, her temper became hotter.


    Rest in the old days.


    The Naruto in the memory, when encountering such a situation, would have run away long ago.


    But now Naruto does not.


    His eyes were full of excitement.


    Not only did he not run away, but instead of waiting for Uzumaki Kushina toe close, without waiting for Uzumaki Kushina to speak, he plunged into mother''s arms and held her tightly.


    Uzumaki Kushina, who originally wanted to lose her temper, was instantly frustrated by the anger in her heart.


    She was taken aback by Naruto''s sudden move.


    However, even though normally, no matter how fierce it is to treat her son, she actually just wants to teach her son well. If you really don''t have Naruto in your heart, you won''t be angry with Naruto at will.


    So when she was dumbfounded.


    Seeing Naruto fell on her arms, she still couldn''t help but reveal a kind of doting.


    But doting is doting.


    She hadn''t forgotten that this son had sly n.


    So she immediately put her face on the face, pretending to be hard said: "Hey, hey, what''s the matter? Don''t think that acting like a spoiled child can make it all right! Didn''t I tell you long ago, I cooked new dishes so you have to go home early for dinner? I haven''t seen you since afternoon. Are you taking my words as a breeze?"


    Speaking of it.


    In Uzumaki Kushina''s vision, only then did other people appear.


    There is also no stranger attitude. She familiarly called Naruto of several people: "Oh, Xiang, Hinata, Sasuke, Sai, you remember toe together tonight. I even cooked your share." Immediately, she looked towards Naruto in her arms and yelled, "Hug? You''re still hugging? How old are you? Aren''t you afraid of being seen as a joke? Why don''t you go back with me!"


    No matter how Uzumaki Kushina reprimanded Naruto.


    At this time, there are only two words in Naruto''s heart, enjoy.


    Enjoy this real maternal love.


    Once upon a time, how eager he was to be like other children, to have a parent who disciplined him. And now, he finally got it.


    Feel the full love from mother.


    Naruto was willing to let go of his hands.


    Said the words that most children are hard to say to their parents: "Mom, I love you."


    Embarrassed was Uzumaki Kushina, no matter how she doesn''t care about other people''s eyes, Naruto''s "I love you" made her face blushed. She doesn''t understand Naruto, what a child he is today.


    But she still warmed her heart in the end, rubbed Naruto''s hair, and gave Naruto a sincere response: "Silly child, I love you too."


    A sentence ''I love you too''.


    Naruto''s already moist eyes finally shed tears.


    Naruto quickly wiped his tears with his sleeve: "The wind is really strong today. The sand has blown into my eyes."


    Then he said seriously to Uzumaki Kushina: "Mom, you go back first. I still have something to talk to my brother and the others. I''lle back after a while. Don''t worry, no matter how many new dishes you cook, mom, I will definitely help you eat it up today!"


    Naruto''s abnormal attitude.


    Uzumaki Kushina is no longer angry.


    Instead, she nodded happily.


    I feel that my son may finally grow up and no longer be naughty.


    After repeatedly telling Li Yaoxiang and the others that they muste over for dinner tonight, Uzumaki Kushina left here. Naruto went back to this small group of big brother, Hinata and the others.


    As soon as he approached, Sasukeughed at him: "What? Is there still sand in the eyes? Do you need me to blow it for you?"


    Naruto fiercely red at Sasuke, then then mocked dissatisfiedly: "Don''t worry about it, if your Sakura sees it, won''t she be jealous?"


    This time.


    Sasuke''s turn blushed.


    Before changing history, his rtionship with Haruno Sakura was quite good. It was only because of the "revenge" and "resurrection of the family", so he did not think about the development of one step further.


    But didn''t expect changed history, but Haruno Sakura directly became his girlfriend.


    And still very close kind.


    This made him a straight man of steel, and some did not know how to deal with it.


    At this time, Sai went straight to the topic and asked Li Yaoxiang: "What should we do now?"


    Nor needs Sai to be too clear.


    Of course, a few people at the meeting understood that the question asked at Sai was about Shadow Clone.


    This issue really makes them have to be treated with caution.


    After all, the four elders of Konoha today are considered to be of high authority.


    Removing the shadow clones rashly is definitely not a wise choice.


    Li Yaoxiang: "I have asked Limbo: Border Jail to inform them that we are back. Now they are gathering at the Conference Hall and we will be together."


    After a while.


    The four elders of Konoha, who were transformed into Konoha four elders, all gathered in the Conference Hall.


    First, the surrounding ninjas was opened.


    And then there''s BOOM! , BOOM! , BOOM! , BOOM! , four groups of white smoke rose continuously, and they all released from their shadow clones.


    A lot of memory suddenly poured into their respective minds.


    ...


    The first is the various major events that urred in Konoha Vige.


    After they took over Konoha, the first thing was to obey Li Yaoxiang''s instructions and take Limbo: Border Jail to solve Uchiha Madara and ck Zetsu together, so that the two of them canpletely disappear.


    aftere back.


    The first problem Konoha ushered in was the Hatake Sakumo incident.


    The prestige of Hatake Sakumo is too high, and the Sarutobi Hiruzen, which Naruto transformed into, has reached a certain age, and it is time to hand over the bat.


    If you don''t give in, Konoha will gradually be split into two factions because of therge number of supporters Hatake Sakumo has. This was indeed a very unstable factor for Konoha at that time.


    At that time, the four elders of Konoha, even in the prison at the root, received the same treatment as Naruto when he was imprisoned, and still very hard-heartedly waited to watch the jokes of Naruto!


    After all, they feel right from the beginning to the end.


    Everything they do is for Konoha.


    The decision they make is the most correct choice.


    He even ridiculed Naruto because if he didn''t rely on strength and wanted to solve the problem, he would eventually be able to make the same choices as them and suppress Hatake Sakumo''s prestige.


    Ridiculing them for being ignorant, do you really think that managing the vige is so easy?


    From start to finish, they stood firm.


    They think their decisions were correct.


    Otherwise, Konoha is waiting to be split and waiting for more serious contradictions! Just like the golden horn in the Hidden Cloud Vige, maybe there will be an act of killing the Hokage.


    However, their arrogant arrogance was quickly pped in the face.


    Naruto and the others knew that if they were crushed with strength, these old fellows would definitely be unconvinced.


    So they didn''t do this, and they didn''t even n to rely on strength to solve everything in the future. I just wanted to see if, as these old guys said, I had to sacrifice so many people in exchange for Konoha''s peace.


    As a result, they have no experience in managing viges, yes.


    This is their weakness.


    But at least they won''t be suspicious of anyone in the vige.


    This is their advantage.


    They chose to give proper trust.


    Use the simplest and most direct method.


    Talked to Hatake Sakumo about this issue in person. Naruto told Hatake Sakumo in person that because of him in the vige, he was about to face the problem of division. At the same time, he told Hatake Sakumo in person that he had no intention of handing the baton to him.


    The results of it?


    Who is Hatake Sakumo? In the original story, Hatake Sakumo is a person who knew that the most trusted Sarutobi Hizan and others framed him, and he chose tomit suicide in order to prevent Konoha from having internal conflicts.


    How could such a person turn his face?


    The opposite of.


    Not only did he not turn his face.


    Instead, he was very grateful to Naruto at the time, that is, Shadow Clone Sarutobi Hiruzen, who can confess to him and trust him. After that, for Konoha''s tranquility, he took the initiative to stand up and gave up the power as an Anbu leader. He imed that he needed more time for his son, so he wanted to abdicate.


    Some stubborn extremists want to incite him to seize the throne.


    He punished them with no trace of politeness to kill the chickens to warn the monkey in front of everyone.


    Since then, no one dared to mention this matter.


    Since the person involved are not interested in the Hokage position, they are not easy to say anything.


    After learning the result, Konoha four was old and became speechless on the spot.


    Obviously, they have the heart of a viin and the belly of a gentleman.


    But they knew that this matter was misunderstood by themselves and others, but they werepletely unaware and had no intention of admitting their mistakes. After all, asionally one or two things are overlooked, and it''s not a big deal.


    Evenughed Naruto and the others naively.


    This time was only good luck, Naruto was blinded by several blind cat. If that bet is right, it will be nothing. But what if you bet wrong? If the bet was wrong, wouldn''t Konoha suffer serious losses?


    As a ruler, how can I put Konoha''s safety in the mind of others?


    In the end, this matter, no one can persuade anyone.


    After all, everyone''s ideas are different, and it can only be seen in hindsight.


    If you seed this time, you might fail next time.


    Only Sarutobi Hiruzen was more silent than the other three elders. After hearing the news, he was very upset. Now in this result, the one who was beaten the most in the face was undoubtedly him.


    After all, among the four people present, it was only him who had the best rtionship with Hatake Sakumo.


    Hatake Sakumo is a subordinate who has followed him for many years.


    Obviously, as long as it is simple and honest, the problem can be solved easily.


    But he didn''t remember his old feelings, didn''t believe this subordinate, and directly abandoned the subordinate who had worked hard for him for many years.


    In order to make his heart feel better, he can onlyfort himself. He can''t take Konoha to take risks. He does this as a helpless action.


    That''s it.


    After the Hatake Sakumo incident.


    Next is the siege of Land-of-Whirlpools (Uzumaki) ...

 Chapter 219: chain reaction

    Chapter 219: chain reaction


    Land-of-Whirlpools, or Uzumaki n, is considered by most influences as a nail in the eyes, and it is necessary to destroy ''he''. The main reasons are as follows.


    1) Their Bloodline, their n member, serves as the best candidate of Jinchuriki.


    In the Great Ninja Viges at the time, including Hidden Sand Vige, Hidden Cloud Vige, etc., there was a lot of turmoil in Tailed Beast, so they had to hit their heads on Uzumaki n.


    2) They have a powerful Sealing Jutsu that makes the major influences extremely fearful and headache.


    Sealing Jutsu; in the whole Ninja World, it can be said that Uzumaki n is the best. The rest of Ninja Viges said they control Tailed Beast, but in front of Uzumaki n, those Tailed Beasts be a joke.


    So they had to either destroy or seize Sealing Jutsu of Uzumaki n.


    3) Time, ce, and harmony.


    At that time, Uzumaki n sent a lot of troops to support Konoha during the Second Shinobi World War period. After the Second Shinobi World War is over, they are in the weakest period. If you attack them during this period, you may get the maximum return without paying much.


    Plus Konoha''s ambiguous attitude ...


    It really doesn''t work, it''s not justified, and it''s bad for my vige.


    For various reasons.


    Large and small influences are either coveting their Bloodline, coveting their Sealing Jutsu, or wanting to weaken Konoha strength, destroy his allies, etc.


    Even if they were given another chance, they would still make the same choice and besiege Land-of-Whirlpools.


    Divide interests.


    And the four elders of Konoha who were originally in this period, "for Konoha", of course, even if they bear the infamy, they have to choose to be worldly-wise and y safe.


    Very distressed.


    Very ufortable.


    Very helplessly looks-at this allied country that has been handed down for generations, besieged and annihted.


    Until the end, the huge Uzumaki n, so many members of the n, they were not rescued. I''m really sorry, that is because Konoha just experienced Second Shinobi World War and his strength is too worn out, so he can''t help.


    This ... is also a helpless action.


    I hope the dead Uzumaki n can understand their hardships.


    This is also the reason Konoha four elders gave the world a very nice reason.


    Until now.


    Until this moment, they were imprisoned in Root''s prison, and they still insisted on this statement.


    They are right. Their decision was right. Everything they do is for Konoha.


    Otherwise, if they dare to act rashly.


    Maybe the major influence siege, it is not Land-of-Whirlpools, but their Konoha.


    If Konoha was under siege again, Konoha, who has just experienced Second Shinobi World War, this time might not be able to withstand the siege of major influences.


    Konoha four elders logical thinking is very reasonable.


    The reason is very strong and very nice.


    can...


    I bother!


    How could Naruto who took over Konoha let this tragedy, this ungrateful thing happen again?


    They acted decisively and chose to rescue them.


    Because of this, he was once again ridiculed by the four elders of Konoha.


    Said that if they did not use their own strength, they would not be able to solve this problem at all. By doing so, they will only drag Konoha into the abyss.


    Let Konoha never turn around.


    What can be the result?


    Hehe.


    The result, of course, was the old face of Konoha''s four elders, who was beaten again and again! This so-called rescue, for Konoha, the price paid is almost negligible.


    Because the moment Konoha decided to rescue.


    The news came out.


    Soon, some young people can be calmed down.


    How dare Small Ninja Viges bother with Konoha? Even if they really dared to participate in the war, they would not be able to do his best.


    The rest of the Great Country and the rest of the Great Ninja Vige chose to continue their offense. But if Konoha really did her best to protect the Uzumaki n, how could it be impossible?


    Even if the entire Land-of-Whirlpools cannot be guaranteed, at least Uzumaki n can be guaranteed?


    Facts have proved that this guess is correct.


    In the case of major influence siege, Konoha is really difficult to keep the entire Land-of-Whirlpools.


    But they sessfully saved Uzumaki n.


    Since then, Uzumaki n haspletely joined Konoha.


    The reason why such outstanding results can be obtained is that we have to talk about ''Hatake Sakumo is not dead'', which is a chain effect. Because of the previous decision, Hatake Sakumo did notmit suicide in this life.


    As a result, the powerful and frightening Konoha White Fang did not die.


    Loyal to the vige, even after to abdicate, he chose to participate in this rescue battle.


    In the case of Konoha''s earnest rescue, the other Great Ninja Viges had to kill or fight the either of the fish dies or the splits, and they had to measure how much manpower they had to lose before they could leave this group of people.


    Moreover, in original work, the major influence without the slightest hesitation, unscrupulous shot.


    Maybe it has something to do with Konoha''s White Fang''s death!


    Therefore, for various reasons, the rescue operation of Konoha this time finally went very smoothly and was very sessful.


    After this.


    With the addition of Uzumaki n.


    The rtionship between the two sides is closer.


    Melted together thoroughly.


    Compared with before, Konoha''s strength does not decrease but increases.


    The four elders of Konoha looked away again and were pped in the face again. However, they did not admit defeat this time. After all, it was too early for Konoha to say whether the participation of the Uzumaki n was good or bad for Konoha.


    Konoha is powerful.


    But because Konoha is too strong, it ushered in the fear of surrounding influence.


    Weing the major influence together, intending to deal with Konoha.


    That is to say, under the leadership of Sarutobi Hiruzen and the others, they seeded in preventing Konoha from being targeted by the major influences. Under the leadership of Naruto, Konoha is rtively strong, but ushered in the joint influence of major influences.


    Is it good or bad.


    Different opinions.


    Different ideas, no one can convince anyone.


    The four elders of Konoha still refused to admit defeat.


    And again threatened that if they did not use their own strength, Konoha would not be able to pass the next level.


    ...


    The third major event next is Third Shinobi World War.


    Things have developed here, and the historical trajectory has produced tremendous changes.


    In original work, there are several main reasons why Third Shinobi World War appears. Each Great Country, or each Great Ninja Vige, because to recuperate for many years, started this war for their own interests such as territory and natural resources.


    However, the reason why this time opened Third Shinobi World War is not for these reasons.


    It''s because Konoha in this life is so powerful.


    It is so powerful that the surrounding Great Countries and Ninja Viges are terrified.


    Deeply afraid that Konoha will continue to develop, over time, their vige can no longer bepared with Konoha, and eventually can only be a subsidiary of Konoha.


    Therefore, avoid this situation.


    At this time, in any case, 4 Great Ninja Viges must join forces to fiercely weaken Konoha, and fiercely cut off a piece of fat from Konoha and Land-of-Fire!


    After hearing the news, the happiest ones are that the four elders of Konoha in the prison.


    Because it proves that their predictions are correct!


    Konoha really became a target!


    This also proves from the side that they "worked hard and made great efforts" and "exhausted their minds", and "weakened" Konoha''s strength to a state of bnce with the surrounding forces, so that they would not be targeted for this choice.


    Their decision was correct.


    Unfortunately...


    The happy days are very fast.


    They were beaten again.


    And they really underestimated how bad they were for Konoha.


    This time Third Shinobi World War.


    Once again, there was a chain effect.


    First of all, Hatake Sakumo''s death is still a great help in this war.


    Secondly, in original work, Jiraiya cultivated Nagato, Yahiko and Konan during this period, or in Hidden Rain Vige. Or looking for his answers.


    In short, it''s not because theye back to join the war. But Nagato in this life is already in Konoha.


    Uchiha Madara and ck Zetsu were resolved in advance.


    Without the discovery of ''Rinnegan'', how can Jiraiya stay in Hidden Rain Vige for so long?


    Therefore, Jiraiya in this life not only participated in the previous rescue battle, but even the Third Shinobi World War of this time, did not miss it, and became a big help.


    Then, it was the ''scientist'' Orochimaru.


    In original work.


    At this time, Orochimaru had not yet betrayed.


    But who knows what the reason is, whether it is deposited in his research, or the endless war of this kind of Ninja World. In short, he did not participate in the war.


    However, in this life, his fate was also changed.


    Because Naruto, the Sarutobi Hiruzen, is very tolerant of him.


    He is very supportive of his research.


    There is only one requirement for him, that is, he is incapable of doing research with Konoha people.


    Orochimaru is certainly very happy with the support and trust from his ''Teacher''. So it led him to participate in this Third Shinobi World War for the sake of more ''materials''.


    Although Impure World Reincarnation has not been sessfully developed, it is still a great help.


    Finally, it is Uzumaki n.


    The chain effect of Uzumaki n can be said to be the key to controlling the battle situation.


    The enemy has Tailed Beasts too, but with Uzumaki n''s help, which is no different from not having Tailed Beast.


    Because on the battlefield, as long as the opponent dares to use the tailed beast, it will bepletely suppressed by the people of the Uzumaki n, and there is even a risk of being captured, so the enemy does not dare to use the force of the human column at will, for fear that the enemy will not be defeated, but instead strengthens Konoha''sbat power.


    Conversely, Konoha?


    With the help of Uzumaki n, Konoha not only solved the problem of Jinchuriki very easily.


    In this Third Shinobi World War, the role of Tailed Beast is fully exerted.


    This makes Nine-Tails unique in this Third Shinobi World War.


    So since then.


    Under the circumstances of tradeoffs.


    In addition, Namikaze Minato of this period also began to show its edge and won the title of Yellow sh.


    The extremely strong Konoha is really no problem having 1V4.


    Even if the opponent cannot bepletely eliminated, it will at least stabilize the situation and stand at the invincible position!


    The rest of Ninja Vige saw attack for a long time without any sess.


    In the end, the Third Shinobi World War was dered over.


    After this battle, Konoha was finally recognized as the ''most powerful Ninja Vige''.


    It is good and bad.


    The good thing is the morale of Konoha, which has be stronger than ever, and the influence don''t dare provoke Konoha. The bad thing is that the rest of Four-Great Ninja Vige has formed an alliance, iparably fighting against the huge monster Konoha.


    Even if Third Shinobi World War is over.


    The two sides still have conflicts or collisions from time to time.


    Even at the moment Li Yaoxiang and the others transmigrated back, this is still true.


    After the third Shinobi World War.


    Namikaze Minato became the Fourth-Hokage rationally and clearly structured.


    Orochimaru plunged into the research world, and there was not much opinion on it.


    All major event pieces are over.


    ...


    After talking about major event, let''s talk about the various small events of Shadow Clone.


    First, it is Sai.


    After Sai reced Shimura Danzo and became the Leader of Root, the first thing, of course, was to solve those old fellows. Sai threw them into the iron prison, and let the four old fellows feel the taste of what Naruto felt when he was imprisoned.


    And he governs his body with his own way!


    The technique of tongue evil roots was cast on these old fellows.


    So that these old fellows, no matter what the situation, can not disclose their little news.


    Solved Konoha four elders.


    The thing that Sai is most concerned about is of course the big brother.


    To avoid the butterfly effect, he believed in his brother, unable to know each other, unable to be brothers, and had a deep rtionship, so at the beginning, Sai did not reform the roots.


    Even though his subordinates captured his childhood, he still did not give special care.


    Until the rtionship between the two waspletely established.


    Sai then changed Root''s style.


    The first thing is to remove therge amount of missions on the big brother''s Sai, and tell ''he'' or the ninja of the whole root. Pay attention to your body and you must go to the hospital regrly for examination.


    The second thing is to change the rules of Root.


    Root ninja will not be treated as a group of mission machines without emotion.


    Those brothers who were born and died with him did not have to kill their rtives or friends.


    Because of this.


    Originally orphans of war, the root ninjas who were rescued by the root has a more sense of belonging to Konoha.


    Naturally seeing the protection of Konoha as their own life.


    The effect is not worse than the original Root.


    For Sai to the ''Shimura Danzo'', he is even more respectful and loyal from the bottom of his heart.


    Because of this.


    In this life Shin, his "illness" was discovered in advance and was controlled, so there was no mortal danger.


    Sai finally fulfilled his wish, "resurrection" big brother.


    ...


    Secondly, it is Sasuke.


    Sasuke''s Shadow Clone, changed into, is Mitokado Homura.


    After taking over Konoha, the first thing he did was contact the vige''s targeting and suppression of the Uchiha family. Sensing that the attitude of the vige has improved, the members of the Uchiha n did not have too much resentment towards the vige as in the original book.


    Even the dissatisfaction left when he was suppressed in the past has subsided a lot.


    After the rtionship between the two sides has improved.


    ''Konoha four elders'' asked Uchiha Fugaku (Sasuke''s father) toe out and be honest.


    Inform Uchiha Fugaku of their concerns about Uchiha n.


    Including the problems that character bes extreme after starting Sharingan, including the monopoly of power, the problem of controlling the entire guard will attract people, etc ...

 Chapter 220: Make up for regrets

    Chapter 220: Make up for regrets


    After the two sides frankly opposed each other.


    Uchiha Fugaku is not only wary of ''Konoha four elders'' in front of him, he is not vignt or hostile.


    Instead, I am grateful for the trust that ''Konoha four elders'' has for him and Uchiha n.


    After all, Uchiha Fugaku in the original work, if it was not forced by the n members, or if it was overbearing by the original Konoha four, he would simply not choose to mutiny.


    Now that Konoha four elders talk to him frankly about these problems.


    It proves that Konoha four always wants to help Uchiha n solve this problem, and help them ease the rtionship between Uchiha n and vige.


    So Uchiha Fugaku chose cooperation andpromise.


    Discuss the countermeasures of the solution together.


    Not long after this incident, Uchiha Fugaku immediately brought amazing news to the n members. That is since then, the Konoha Guard is no longer in charge by Uchiha n.


    Cancelled all nsman''s duties in the Konoha Guard.


    After hearing this news, a group of Uchiha nsman expressed emotions.


    Directlye to the door, want to ask a clear reasons.


    There seems to be a tendency not to give up.


    But this time, Uchiha Fugaku brought them good news again.


    That is their Uchiha n, from now on, will be treated just like other n. Everyone has a chance to join Anbu, a chance to be a high level, a chance to be a decision maker, and even a chance to be Hokage.


    Speak with strength and experience.


    The nsman whose spitting anger froze on the spot.


    Then there is excitement and excitement.


    As Uchiha n, they have their own arrogance. They are confident that as long as thepetition is fair, they will not lose to other families!


    At first, they were still in doubt.


    Over time.


    As more and more Uchiha members be cadres.


    This doubt disappeared.


    They no longer have grievances against the vige.


    Motivated.


    I hope that their Uchiha n can also cultivate a Hokage one day.


    Of course, what they didn''t know was that Uchiha Fugaku also had an additional responsibility while getting this opportunity. That is, you must always pay attention to your nsman.


    Just in case someone falls on the extreme side, he had to deal with these problems himself.


    Must not cause trouble to the vige.


    After this.


    Uchiha n has no so-called betrayal.


    Uchiha Shisui does not need to do double-sided spy.


    Uchiha Itachi doesn''t have to make difficult choices.


    And Sasuke in this life, therefore also got a happy family.


    ...


    Again, it is Hinata.


    Hinata''s Shadow Clone, changed into Utatane Koharu.


    After taking over Konoha, she didn''t actually have much movement. Because there is only one regret in her heart, that is his Uncle, Hyuga Hizashi.


    Originally, she was thinking of strangling this threat in the cradle.


    Don''t give the ninja of Hidden Cloud Vige a step into Konoha.


    However, in order to once again humiliate Konoha four in the iron prison, Naruto, Sasuke and the others decided to create opportunities to let history repeat itself.


    It was also Hyuga Hiashi who killed Cloud Ninja who wanted to abduct Hinata, and Hidden Cloud Vige also threatened Konoha, who was facing the enemy, and threatened them to hand over the murderer, otherwise they would go straight to war.


    The result is, of course, because of a series of chain effects.


    Konoha in this life is very strong.


    They were confident and asked to go back, ''If you want to fight, just fight! We Konoha will apany you to the end!''


    This ending made the four elders of Konoha in the iron prison speechless. Because of their choice, because of their decision. The infighting over and over again weakened Konoha''s strength. So at that time, they did not have the confidence to call out the string Hidden Cloud Vige.


    Make Konoha need to make such a humiliating decision.


    All of this was caused by them.


    And Hinata made up for her regret.


    Hyuga n has be more attentive.


    The entire Konoha is unanimous to the outside world, bing stronger than ever before.


    ...


    Again, it is Naruto.


    Naruto''s regret is the Uzumaki family, his parents, and his older brother. That''s all he has to deal with. In addition to choosing to rescue the Uzumaki family, after that, he must also match the feelings of Namikaze Minato and Uzumaki Kushina.


    Make sure you can be born smoothly.


    In order to ensure that he will not be suspicious when hees back, he tried to get Namikaze Minato to agree to Uzumaki Kushina within-the-body of the Nine-Tails, divided into two, half of which is in the within-the-body of the "baby Naruto".


    In order to continue his rtionship with the big brother, he must try to make the big brother have a reason to take care of him, and eventually, with the consent of his parents, be the real younger brother in the name.


    In order to continue his rtionship with Hinata and Sasuke, he must also find ways to meet them in advance.


    right.


    There is also an additional Sai.


    Of course, all of this was sessfullypleted by Sarutobi Hiruzen, who abused his private rights.


    Otherwise, there will be no current results.


    As for your own "eyes", don''t worry.


    After all, the Rinnegan presented to him by the big brother looks no different from ordinary eyes.


    ...


    Finally, it is Li Yaoxiang.


    The year Naruto was born was the year Li Yaoxiang transmigrated to Konoha.


    There really is such a famous person with background and surname in Konoha out of thin air. But the ''Li Yaoxiang'' who had just transmigrated was nervous and dazed.


    who am I?


    where am I?


    What am I going to do?


    You told me that this is Naruto World?


    Why didn''t Naruto''s parents die?


    Why didn''t Hatake Sakumo die?


    Why am I still seeing Nagato and Karin here?


    Li Yaoxiang: (   )


    This uneasy emotion was not relieved until Limbo: Border Jail exhibited a Shadow Clone to visit in person. Immediately afterwards, there was a look on his face.


    Just enjoy this?


    Missionpleted?


    So, in the following days, with the guardian of Limbo: Border Jail, ''Li Yaoxiang'' lived here with peace of mind and became Naruto''s ''nanny''.


    Take Naruto everywhere.


    Finally, it is possible to enjoy this trip to Naruto World with a travel mentality.


    ...


    After everyone''s memories are fused.


    Also finally understood a series of things that have happened over the years.


    Followed by.


    They cast Shadow Clone again, transforming Shadow Clone into Konoha four elders.


    After all, Konoha four can''t disappear rashly. They must continue to pretend.


    Naruto: "big brother, what shall we do next?"


    Almost all ns and countermeasures were proposed by Li Yaoxiang, so just after Naruto''s words fell, the other three also looked at Li Yaoxiang, following Li Yaoxiang''s lead.


    Li Yaoxiang smiled deeply: "Let''s go and see our old friends first."

 Chapter 221: Deserved retribution

    Chapter 221: Deserved retribution


    Root.


    The huge Root, all the iron prisons used to imprison prisoners, now has only 4 ''luxury suites'' left, which are used to entertain ''guests'' for a long time.


    The rest of the iron prisons, except for the real criminals, or spies, have been vacant for a long time after Sai changed the style of Root.


    And guests of these 4 luxury suites.


    Of course, the real Konoha four elders.


    Li Yaoxiang''s ''old friend'' is what they say.


    A squeak.


    The iron doors of 4 luxury suites were opened.


    However, even if the iron gate was opened, no one came out of the iron prison or escaped. Because over the years, they have tried numerous ways to get rid of this treatment.


    Can often be futile.


    Li Yaoxiang has Shinigami ability.


    Limbo: Border Jail also has Shinigami ability.


    So they cannot evenmit suicide. This is a luxury expectation.


    Coupled with these years, Konoha has be stronger and stronger, and they all see it in their eyes.


    Reality fiercely pped their faces again and again.


    It turns out that Konoha would only be better without them.


    Over time, four elders also gave up struggling.


    The whole person has be decadent. A few old like salted fish, lying motionless there, there is no one intact above and below the whole body, all emit a disgusting smell.


    quickly.


    It was like someone carrying a chicken, throwing the other three salted fish into the same iron prison.


    In this regard, they were not surprised.


    Whenever this happens, it means that Li Yaoxiang and the others areing to see them.


    They were thrown together like Arhats.


    After a while.


    When Li Yaoxiang and the others appeared, the four old men who looked like salted fish, suddenly expressed condensedly.


    Theing person is no longer ''Konoha four elders''. In other words, Li Yaoxiang''s main body has returned! He came to see them this time!


    Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu hurriedly kneeled to Li Yaoxiang and the others, but were quickly blocked by an invisible force.


    They were not surprised.


    Can''t control so much.


    Just kowtowed for mercy.


    "I beg you! I beg you! Kill me! Kill me!"


    "Let me die! Let me die!"


    "I''m wrong, I''m wrong, I shouldn''t have treated you like that."


    While speaking, he kowtowed and fanned his palm.


    More than ten years.


    For more than ten years, they have lived in an iron jail and lived an unbearable life, coupled with Konoha''s prosperity, which has kept them frustrated and tortured physically and mentally.


    Now when they see the arrival of Li Yaoxiang and the others'' main body, they seem to see a life-saving straw, and they just want to be able to give them a relief and be able to free them.


    But Li Yaoxiang and the others have no mercy on them.


    When they make cruel and ruthless decisions, have they ever thought of pity others?


    No!


    When they destroyed other people''s n, did they ever think about taking it back?


    No!


    Countless families are destroyed because of them, and countless tragedies happened because of them.


    This is the retribution they deserve!


    Li Yaoxiang and the others just skimmed the old eyes and ignored them. Then looked towards the rest of the 2 old men who were kneeling on the ground. Shimura Danzo stared fiercely at them, while Sarutobi Hiruzen had aplicated expression and looked straight.


    Li Yaoxiang looked down at them, indifferently said: "What else do you have to say?"


    In addition to the begging of Mitokado Homura and Utatane Koharu.


    Shimura Danzo and Sarutobi Hiruzen are speechless.


    Konoha''s changes, they all see it with their eyes.


    Although it has be the target of public criticism, Konoha has always been more than capable of coping with the chain effects of the previous series. Now that the bodies of Li Yaoxiang and the others are back, let alone the result, they can already imagine the fiasco of the Four Great Ninja Viges.


    Shimura Danzo, who refused to admit defeat, was unwilling and gritted his teeth: "Humph! Konoha won, that''s right! But how do you know that Konoha won''t win under my control?!"


    Up to this moment, Shimura Danzo could not deny the decision of Li Yaoxiang and the others, which was wrong.


    But in the same way, Li Yaoxiang could not prove that his way was wrong!


    After all, Li Yaoxiang and the others did not give him a chance to verify it, right?


    Li Yaoxiang did not respond, he looked towards Sarutobi Hiruzen: "What about you? What else do you have to say?"


    Silence for a long time.


    Sarutobi Hiruzen is stillplicated expression, and finally just suffocated a sentence: "I''m sorry ..."


    Ah.


    They sneered in their hearts.


    Kill the whole family, just say sorry and forget it?


    Do not n to waste time with them again.


    I don''t n to talk nonsense to them again.


    An invisible force that mmed the four aged bodies into the wall and shattered them. The souls of the four elders werepletely annihted by Li Yaoxiang between heaven and earth.


    From then on, these four people no longer exist in this world.


    ...


    Solve these 4 disgusting guys.


    The next step is of course to experience a new life for oneself!


    They left Root without incident and came to Naruto''s house.


    After a while...


    "Yaoxiang, your family has a restaurant. Give me some advice. Isn''t it good? How? Is it delicious? Ah, Hinata, you are so thin, eat more, eat more. Sasuke, don''t be so reserved with autie, there''s still a lot in the kitchen! Sai,ee, auntie can help you add soup. Naruto, you promised that your mother would finish it! Don''t deny it!"


    Gaze at the dining table, that table seems to be smoking skull smoke dishes, everyone here, blushed with shame. Everyone is unimaginable, how does Naruto''s mother cook such a dish.


    Li Yaoxiang politely gave somements.


    Hinata took a few bites and shoved the tableware very shyly: Aunt, I''m full.


    Sasuke, who is not good atmunicating, finally finished a bowl, but his bowl was filled again.


    Even Sai''s official smiling face couldn''t help twitching a few times when he looked at the ''purple, bubbling soup'' in front of him.


    Naruto was full of joy after eating bowl after bowl.


    It made everyone in the room wonder if they were eating the same table of food.


    that''s it.


    A group of people at the peak Ninja World were defeated by Uzumaki Kushina''s cooking. After this meal, both the seemingly delicious Naruto and other people took 3 days and 3 nights to recover.


    On the morning of the fourth day, Naruto proposed to Li Yaoxiang to take a trip that he could just leave.


    As stated before.


    With only one year left, Naruto must cherish every minute and every second he spends with his brother. His dream hase true, but what about his brother''s?


    Isn''t big brother''s dream to travel around the world?


    Memory is just memory.


    The real him has never gotten along well with his brother, has he?

 Chapter 222: Naruto. End

    Chapter 222: Naruto. End


    So in the only time left, Naruto decided to go out with his big brother to see this world. Anyway, Konoha has his father, Shadow Clones, and Limbo: Border Jail guarding. There shouldn''t be any major problems.


    With Li Yaoxiang''s escort and Li Yaoxiang''s care, Uzumaki Kushina was also very relieved that Naruto went out with Li Yaoxiang without obstruction.


    It''s just that everyone who learned the news refused.


    They are also going!


    As a result, it was originally a tour where the two brothers said they would leave, but it became a CP tour group.


    Sasuke, who is more cheerful, even hugged Sakura tightly in front of Naruto, showing off, as if telling Naruto: How? Brother finally no longer needs to be a light bulb!


    Naruto is certainly not to be outdone.


    He kissed Hinata''s cheek, causing Hinata to blush.


    Seeing this, Sakura lowered his head and waited for Sasuke toe up on her cheek. Sasuke was indifferent, making Sakura angry.


    Nothing on the surface.


    But the picture in my mind is banging on Sasuke''s cor: you idiot! You idiot! You idiot!


    After the arrival of Naruto, Hinata, Sasuke and Sakura.


    Next is Sai and his big brother.


    Li Yaoxiang is a separate one.


    But just as his younger brother was about to set off, Itachi Uchiha, wanted to follow him. Hearing that his friend Uchiha Itachi was going to travel, Shisui Uchiha was also interested on the spot.


    The end result was that Uchiha Itachi and Uchiha Izumi got together.


    He decided to make Izumi his first victim. He snuck into her home, knocked out her mother, and, upon being found by Izumi, used Tsukuyomi on her. In the span of a second, Izumi lived through seventy years of an illusionary life: she bes a chnin; Itachi proposes to her; she retires as a ninja; she and Itachi marry; Izumi gives birth; they raise their children; the children be adults; she grows old with Itachi; Izumi bes ill; Itachi takes care of her; she is on her deathbed. When the illusion ended, Izumi copsed and used her final moment of consciousness to thank Itachi. She then died, the death she experienced within the illusion tricking her body into expiring as well.


    Uchiha Shisui joined forces with Li Yaoxiang.


    A group of ten people formally set off and began their journey.


    ...


    Time flies.


    Years are like a shuttle.


    In a blink of an eye, almost a year has passed.


    This journey can be said to be very satisfying. Naruto can finally apany Li Yaoxiang to fulfill a small wish of Li Yaoxiang and travel most of Naruto World.


    On this journey, nothing thrilling happened.


    The only thing that is gratifying is that in the third month shortly after the start of the journey.


    Weed the good news of Hinata and Haruno Sakura.


    It is said that the 2 have been pregnant for 2 months at the same time.


    As a result, from the CP tour group, it turned into their honeymoon journey.


    Very tide came a tourist marriage.


    For smooth production, a group of ten people also ended the journey ahead of time and returned to Konoha.


    Then, on the spot, the parents of Hyuga Hiashi, Uzumaki Kushina, Uchiha Fugaku, etc. were shocked, both angry and surprised.


    It even taught the "man" a good meal.


    The woman told them to pay attention to various matters.


    In the end, of course, the Uzumaki Boruto and Uchiha Sarada were born!


    And the time came to thest day of the "one-year time limit".


    Inside a photo studio.


    The photographer was facing the customer directly in front of them, shouting, "Come on, the boss, a little bit to the left. Thedy, a little bit to the right."


    "This gentleman, please also hold the baby higher. Let him face the camera."


    "Yes, yes! That''s it!"


    "Say cheese!"


    With a click, the photographer pressed the camera button. A photo of Li Yaoxiang holding the Uzumaki Boruto who was just over the moon, and Naruto and Hinata standing on the left and right sides of Li Yaoxiang, was perfectly captured by the photographer.


    Just when they wanted to take a few more photos, a group of unexpected guests broke in.


    One of them, seemingly ''angry'',ined to Naruto: "Well, you Naruto, why didn''t you call us for family photos?"


    It is Sasuke, Sakura, Sai, Shin, Uchiha Itachi, Uchiha Izumi, and Uchiha Shisui who are holding Uchiha Sarada.


    have nothing to say.


    In the end, the photographer helped them take another picture, with Li Yaoxiang holding the baby in both hands, Naruto and Hinata were standing on the left side of Li Yaoxiang, Sasuke and Sakura were standing on the right side of Li Yaoxiang, and Sai and Shin were standing next to Naruto and his wife. Uchiha Itachi and Uchiha Izumi are the photos standing next to the couple.


    "Click".


    Video recording ends.


    That night.


    Li Yaoxiang and Naruto stood on the cliff of Hokage Rock, far away gaze at the entire brightly lit Konoha.


    Seeing that the time to leave ising, Li Yaoxiang is unable to bear to tell Naruto again: "Remember, after I leave, you must be careful Otsutsuki n. Be careful of Isshiki, Kinshiki, Momoshiki, Toneri. Be careful of Urashiki... "


    Li Yaoxiang talked a lot.


    Since this time, Li Yaoxiang has been nagging Naruto about Otsutsuki n.


    But speaking, Naruto suddenly interrupted: "Since it is so dangerous ... you can''t stay for a while, help me solve them and don''t leave?"


    Li Yaoxiang was shocked.


    Looked at the countdown of the distance ''time limit'' there is not much left.


    Looking ahead again, he didn''t speak.


    He could hear that Naruto was not worried about those dangers, but was reluctant to leave him.


    What to do and what to say, he has already said it ...


    There is no banquet in the world.


    One day, he will still leave this world. Rather than long pain, it is better to have short pain? And he already has an iparable desire and expectation for a new journey and a new world.


    Even if there is no system restriction, it is time for him to leave.


    Seeing that Li Yaoxiang did not reply.


    Naruto knew that he could no longer keep the big brother.


    The two stood there quietly, letting the cold wind blow through.


    Until the countdown, only thest few seconds remain.


    5...


    4...


    3...


    Li Yaoxiang turned to look towards Naruto: "I''m leaving. Don''t forget what you promised me."


    Naruto''s heart tightened, and then he nodded heavily.


    2...


    1...


    Followed by.


    Li Yaoxiang slowly disappeared into his eyes.


    Naruto just stared silently at the open space where Li Yaoxiang was standing before he disappeared.


    I don''t know how long I watched it.


    His deep eyes finally shifted from the open space to the direction of Hokage Residence. The indifferent eyes and expressions that had disappeared for a long time reappeared!


    There is only one thing in his mind: it''s time to act ...


    ...


    Shortly after Li Yaoxiang left.


    Konoha heard a shocking news.


    That''s Fourth-Hokage, Namikaze Minato to abdicate! Hokage of Fifth-Kage is his son, Uzumaki Naruto! The reason for this result is, of course, Naruto, along with Sasuke, Hinata, Sai, and Shadow Clone''s Konoha four veterans and others, put pressure on his father.


    Naruto did this.


    It is because his father is still too kind.


    Orochimaru''s Impure World Reincarnation has been sessfully developed.


    But his father has always opposed Orochimaru''s use of this Ninjutsu. As a result, Konoha''s hostile rtionship with the remaining Four-Great Ninja Vige has been stalemate there, and it has been unable to resolve it.


    There is no time left.


    Naruto didn''t forget that his brother told him that there was still a threat from the Otsutsuki n in this world.


    For the safety of his family, for the future happy life, he had no choice.


    He must solve Ninja World''s problemspletely before Otsutsuki n arrives!


    I can''t keep my dad any longer.


    So, there is this reform.


    It can be said that the younger generation is all on Naruto''s side, including Uchiha Itachi and Uchiha Shisui. In desperation, Namikaze Minato had no choice but to abdicate and go back to take care of his grandson.


    When this news spread throughout Ninja World.


    The Great Ninja Viges was originally happy.


    Even taking pleasure in other people''s misfortune, taunting Namikaze Minato''s brain was caught by the door, and would even pass on to such a young man with a milky smell? hahahahaha! Konoha is waiting to fail this time!


    But not how long they were happy.


    A shocking news came from the frontline.


    The front lines of the three Great Ninja Viges were uprooted overnight.


    That''s right.


    The three Great Ninja Viges.


    Hidden Sand Vige has Gaara, so in terms of treating Hidden Sand Vige, Naruto chose to use politics in dealing with Sand Hidden Vige.


    Taught Gaara Sealing Jutsu, intending to be a friend with Gaara again.


    However, this did not affect the war drum of the Fourth Ninja World War, which was officially sounded by Konoha.


    Namikaze Minato, who was still struggling a little in his heart, did not intend to participate in this battle. But Naruto found him and told him a very simple truth: Do you want to watch Konoha''s ninjas die? Or the enemy dead?


    And told him that Ninja World can''t fight each other anymore, must be unified!


    In the not-too-distant future, there will be greater crises waiting for them to face.


    In the end, coupled with Uzumaki Kushina''s constant blowing of the pillow, Namikaze Minato finally forgiven Naruto and decided to assist Naruto with all his strength to achieve the goal of unifying Ninja World.


    Senju Hashirama and Senju Tobirama who were summoned came to know the current situation.


    Even if you know that Senju n has withered.


    But they still chose to fight for Konoha and this new era.


    Since then, with so many powerful helpers, Fourth Shinobi World War soon ended.


    The Ninja world is unified.


    No longer calling itself a ninja vige, but unifiedly called the ninja alliance, the original leader of the five Great Ninja Viges has also be a cadre member of the ninja alliance.


    After this, all ninja influence must obey the deployment of ninja alliance.


    Of course, Naruto has not forgotten that there are countries Daimyo who have been doing small actions in the back.


    He took advantage of this to weaken Daimyo''s power.


    Be obedient to me and it will be right for you to be worshipped.


    As for people''s livelihood, let ninja alliance manage it.


    Facing the ninja alliance, Daimyo were unable to resist, and finally had topromise.


    After this.


    Every boss of Otsutsuki n is dumbfounded.


    As soon as they arrived, the entire ninja alliance had been waiting for them for a long time, and was invited to drink tea. Since then, after being restricted for a long time, Orochimaru, who had no enemies as his material, finally found his new material, the aliens.


    ...


    After a few years.


    In the leader room of ninja alliance.


    There are 2 photos on the desktop of the chief room. It was a family portrait that took pictures with Li Yaoxiang. As a leader, Naruto, unlike original work, has been busy correcting documents, but in the leader room, apanied by Uzumaki Boruto chasing and ying.


    This is what he promised Li Yaoxiang.


    It is also something he keeps in mind.


    ''Remember to take good care of yourself and your family, and don''t ignore this hard-won family because of official business.''


    Naruto has always kept this promise.


    As for business?


    Of course, let the lower level people do it!


    Isn''t there the other four big shadow clones, and Shikamaru with a high IQ?


    World peace? My shit.


    In the chief''s room, there is a happy atmosphere of father and son. At this moment, the door was opened with a ''click'', and what caught my eye was Nara Shikamaru, who was already full of anger, seeing Naruto so rxed andfortable, and became even more angry: "I''m quittting! Second-Kage, I tell you, I must ask for leave today no matter what!"


    The reason is called Naruto Second-Kage.


    It is because the first generation leader of ninja alliance is Li Yaoxiang.


    This is the result of the unanimous decision of the younger generation, including Naruto.


    Only then did Naruto stop chasing, came to Nara Shikamaru, patted him on the shoulder andforted: "Shikamaru, can''t do it without you. If you ask for leave, what will the thousands of thousands of people do? How about this. I promise you that I will find someone to help you share your worries as soon as possible, how about that? Come on, let''s not talk about these unhappy things, why did youe to me?"


    Nara Shikamaru was still dissatisfied with his expression, but he said reluctantly: "Sasuke came to you. He said he found the new footprint of Otsutsuki n and asked you to go and talk to him."


    Naruto''s expression was sullen.


    nodded, indicating Nara Shikamaru to help him take care of Boruto.


    After a while.


    Nara Shikamaru came to the table, picked up Boruto, and carefully warned repeatedly: "Remember, don''t learn from your father being sozy in the future, you know?"


    Boruto is heavily nodded, pointing at the photo on the desktop: "En! I will be as powerful as my uncle!"


    Finger pointing, Li Yaoxiang is awesome.


    Nara Shikamaru looked in the direction of her finger and smiledfortably, nodded: "If you want to be as strong as First-Kage, then you have to train hard, don''t worry about ying with father, you know?"


    ...


    After a few years.


    Li Yaoxiang, the leader of the first generation of ninja alliance, is still the topic of leisure time for children.


    From time to time, Boruto will steal photos from father''s chief room and show them to students, saying that he was hugged by Li Yaoxiang when he was a child.


    Of course, what he stole was just the one that hugged himself.


    As a result, Uchiha Sarada, who was indifferent to her eyes, also not to be outdone, and also stole another photo to prove to everyone that the leader of First-Kage had also embraced her.


    There is even a mushroom head, wearing green tight clothes and strong features, who ran to Rock Lee andined: "Father, didn''t you tell me that we have the same surname as the first-generation leader Li Yaoxiang? Why do others call Metal Lee, and not Lee Metal?"


    To motivate his son, Rock Lee told a good lie. Tell his son that his surname is Li and his name is Rock. It has something to do with Li Yaoxiang.


    Rock Lee blinked and praised, revealing his white and bright teeth: "Child, we don''t know our surname better than they do? Since others don''t believe you, you have to work harder to prove yourself, you know?"


    Metal Lee''s nodded, together with father, looked at the Power of Youth in the distance: "En! I will definitely redouble my efforts! I will never lose the face of First-Kage!"


    that''s it.


    Li Yaoxiangpleted the traveller''s goal.


    In the world of Naruto is deeply engraved with a "visited here".


    He left his legend, his footprints.


    But these are the aftermath.


    Now he is already in the new world, starting another new journey...

 Chapter 223: Naruto is reborn, innocent smile

    Chapter 223: Naruto is reborn, innocent smile


    Time flies.


    Years are like a shuttle.


    In a sh, 70 years have passed.


    In the courtyard of a courtyard house.


    Naruto, who is in his 80s, is sitting on a rocking chair, and the great-grandsons in front of him, chasing and ying in front of him. While ying, they suddenly remembered their parents'' orders toe over to apany their great-grandfather.


    Not for fun.


    So, a group of little children surrounded Naruto again, ask all sorts of questions.


    "Great Grandfather, Great Grandfather. You hold this picture every day, what''s so good about it?"


    "Yes, Great Grandfather. Who is the person in the picture?"


    Naruto picked up the photo and pointed to the baby in the photo: "This is your grandfather, Boruto."


    Pointed at himself: "This is you Great Grandfather, me."


    Pointed to Li Yaoxiang: "This is the big brother of Great Grandfather."


    Finally pointed to Hinata: "This is your Great Grandmother."


    When ites to Great Grandmother, the faces of the little children suddenly changed, showing aggrieved faces, and they apologized to Naruto: "Sorry, Great Grandfather ..."


    Naruto said with a smile: "It''s okay, Great Grandfather is okay, you continue to y. Seeing you have fun, Great Grandfather will also be happy."


    A few little kids let out an "oh", but they were heartless again, and they started joking around.


    Naruto looked at the scene in front of him with relief.


    He knew that the parents of the little children had asked these little children to apany him because Hinata had passed away a while ago, and they were afraid that he would be sad.


    But Naruto has told them countless times.


    Say I''m okay.


    They just don''t believe it.


    Worrying about this, worrying about that, I''m afraid I won''t think about it.


    But he didn''t know that, instead of being sad, he was very pleased that he could apany Hinata until thest moment of his life. Watching Hinata leave with a smile, no hardship, and peaceful departure.


    After all, both of them are quite old, and they are already mentally prepared for something like this.


    Hinata is able to take a step ahead of herself, which is undoubtedly the best result.


    Otherwise, Naruto will be more uneasy, leaving Hinata alone.


    I''m afraid she will be sad and lonely.


    So, what is unsatisfactory about being able to grow old together with Hinata, to form a happy family, and to live peacefully for a lifetime?


    The descendants no longer have to be in war, what''s not to be satisfied with?


    If you have to say dissatisfaction, you have to say regret ...


    Think of it here.


    Naruto lifted the photo in his hand and looked at Li Yaoxiang in the photo.


    It should be that I can''t share this joy with you ...


    The breeze crossed.


    Naruto''s eyelids were getting heavier and heavier, and he couldn''t open them even if he wanted to, until finally, he closed his eyespletely and fell asleep.


    ...


    Konoha 51 years.


    Naruto''s house.


    Naruto, who had closed his eyes and had no consciousness, suddenly recovered his senses.


    Feel the moisture on the cheeks.


    This made him suddenly suspicious.


    Is it rain?


    No, no.


    Didn''t I fall asleep in the rocking chair? Why even the posture has be prone?


    Before he could figure out what was going on, the sound of ''annoying people'' sounded in his mind at this time.


    "Naruto!"


    "Naruto!"


    "Are you listening to me?"


    Naruto suddenly felt extremely angry!


    At his old age...


    I finally get a good night''s sleep, you didn''t even let me sleep well?!


    Lying on his stomach, he suddenly opened his eyes, wanting to see which guy with short eyes was arguing with him.


    At first nce, I saw the floor.


    look up.


    At the second nce, I saw a familiar and unfamiliar environment.


    Again, the voice in my head is still nagging.


    "Hello, Naruto! Are you listening to me? Why are you crying and not replying to me?"


    Naruto responded incredulously in his head: "Brother ... big brother?"


    "If not me, who else? How many times have you been told? You really think that as long as you keep smiling, people will think you won''t hurt them? Will they agree with you and be friends with you?"


    Naruto looked confused.


    Looking at everything around.


    Looking at his small body.


    This...


    Is it the rebirth that big brother said?


    In the year of the CP tour group, Li Yaoxiang did not tell a few stories about the reincarnator, so Naruto also knew a little about the rebirth.


    It''s just that he absolutely didn''t expect that this matter of rebirth will happen to himself.


    Dont tell me.....


    Did the big brother use that ''mysterious power'' (system) to give me a chance to be born again?


    Thinking for a while.


    Naruto couldn''t think of it.


    Simply do not want to.


    Emotions gradually changed from shock to surprise.


    Reborn yourself ... reborn again ... does it mean that you can make up for the regret of a lifetime?


    He for for a lifetime, because of Li Yaoxiang, can be said to have a very perfect life. In his perfect life, the only regret is that he cannot share this joy with Li Yaoxiang.


    But it''s different now.


    Since God has given him such a chance to be reborn ...


    Thinking of this, Naruto couldn''t help but show a treacherous smile: Brother, don''t even think about leaving for the rest of your life. Feel free to stay with me!


    The more you think, the more excited you are.


    The more excited you are, the more you must suppress your emotions.


    He couldn''t let the big brother discover his anomaly.


    He still remembered Li Yaoxiang''s nagging voice, but Naruto waspletely absorbed, but he was focused on analyzing the probability of the ''remaining big brother''.


    First, he remembered the word ''darkening''.


    He probably knows what darkening means.


    He remembers what the big brother said.


    If the big brother wants to leave this world, he must darken Naruto to 100%, then ''mysterious power'' will take him away. In other words, in any case, you must not allow the big brother to meet this condition of leaving!


    Secondly, it is the big brother''s dream.


    He remembers the big brother''s dream of swimming in different worlds.


    If the big brother has never given up on this dream, it means that the big brother will always try to darkening him. With a little carelessness, the two brothers might turn against each other.


    In other words, during this period, in addition to not allowing the big brother to meet the conditions for leaving.


    I must let the big brother give up this dream.


    Let big brother stay here willingly.


    Only in this way, until the end, the two brothers can get along with each other in harmony.


    And the only way to make big brother willing to stay is to ... help big brother find the target! Because he remembered that he once asked the big brother, why not get married and have children?


    Big brother''s answer is, ''With a lover, with a child, I am afraid I will not be willing to leave''!


    The analysis isplete.


    Naruto took a deep breath, wiped the tears on his face, and smiled innocently: "No, brother. It must be that I didn''t work hard enough, so they didn''t agree with me. As long as I work harder, one day they will understand me..."

 Chapter 224: old urchin Naruto

    Chapter 224: old urchin Naruto


    This is the case.


    Suddenly there was a constant voice in my mind, suddenly quietly.


    Far away, Li Yaoxiang, who is cooking food for customers, has a confused face.


    Right?


    Shouldn''t it?


    What happened? What went wrong?


    ording to his calctions, after nning so long, Naruto should increase the degree of darkening in this attack. Why doesn''t the system respond at all?


    Li Yaoxiang thoughts move, open the system interface now, and want to see what went wrong.


    [host: Li Yaoxiang


    darkening target: Uzumaki Naruto


    Target Soul: 40/40


    darkening degree: 0%


    darkening value: 0


    Mall: slightly]


    puff--!


    Li Yaoxiang has a feeling of wanting to vomit blood.


    What''s going on?!


    Naruto''s soul value has changed from 5/40 to 40/40?! The higher the soul value, the stronger the Willpower of that person is, and the harder it is to darken. Are you ying me?!


    40, how can this possible?!


    What happened?


    What went wrong?


    This is a small blow, why has the will be so firm?


    No!


    Can''t go on like this anymore.


    You must get fiercer medicine.


    Whatever happened to Naruto''s soul, and whether he couldplete this 100% darkening mission. It is imperative to get the first batch of darkening points anyway, otherwise, there is really no guarantee for one''s life in this world.


    "Boss! Boss!"


    "En? Ha?"


    "Burnt, the food is burnt."


    "Oh oh, sorry, sorry, just thinking about something, somewhat absent-minded, I''ll cook another one for you."


    ...


    The picture returns to Naruto.


    During the time when Li Yaoxiang doubted his life, Naruto had already cleaned his entire body.


    Tears are gone.


    The clothes are clean.


    The whole person became Spirit, Soul and Qi, refreshed.


    He even spontaneously started cleaning the room automatically.


    In this scene, Li Yaoxiang looked strange, and the corners of his mouth twitched. But he couldn''t control that much anymore, and the horse ran dead.


    "Naruto, seeing you can regain your enthusiasm so quickly, the big brother is also very pleased. This proves that you really grew up."


    Naruto swept the floor and responded in his mind: "Well, big brother. I will take good care of myself in the future and I won''t make you worry about me anymore."


    With a young body.


    He can also reminisce about the various bits and pieces of getting along with your brother.


    This made Naruto, whose mental age was already 70s and 80s, feel very happy.


    What he didn''t know was that Li Yaoxiang in the space of consciousness looked like hell. What''s going on? Naruto, who has always been lively and naughty, how can he be so clever and sensible.


    "Cough! Cough!" Coughing awkwardly, Li Yaoxiang continued, "Since you have grown up, it''s time to tell you something."


    Ok?


    Naruto stopped sweeping.


    Secretly guessed, what bad idea is this big brother ying?


    Li Yaoxiang: "Aren''t you always curious about why everyone treats you as a monster and doesn''t want to be your friend?"


    Naruto''s heart suddenly appeared with two expressions.


    First this: (0)


    Then this: ()


    ''p!'' Sound.


    The broom fell to the ground.


    In reality, Naruto is stunned, even the broom is not stable, and the tone of his mind is anxiously said: "big brother ... you ... you know why? Tell me, please tell me soon!"


    See Li Yaoxiang.


    Secretly nodded.


    Very satisfied with Naruto''s performance.


    Li Yaoxiang: "That''s because you are really a demon fox, and there is really a demon fox seal in your body."


    "No ... impossible ... how could I be a demon fox?"


    "Big brother, have you made a mistake?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "What''s wrong? Don''t believe it? If so, rx, I''ll take you to a ce."


    After a while.


    In the seal space of Nine-Tails, ''rumble'' made a loud noise.


    The huge ws pped on the cage.


    Naruto was scared to sit on the dark liquid pool.


    Just like before, Li Yaoxiang didn''t show his real body, just talked to Naruto in his mind: "How is it? Now you know why everyone calls you a demon fox?"


    "No... no..."


    "How could this be?"


    "How could I be a demon fox?"


    Nine-Tails: "Boy, howe you are here?"


    "I ... I ... I don''t know, I suddenly appeared here ..."


    Nine-Tails: "Boy, don''t you really want to make friends? Come here and help the old man tear off the seal in front of the cage! As long as you tear off this seal, the old man will be your friend!"


    At the same time.


    Li Yaoxiang also tempted: "Go, tear."


    Naruto: "No ... no ... big brother, can I not tear it? Is he the monster fox that everyone said? If I tear it, will this big foxe out of the cage and hurt everyone??"


    Li Yaoxiang: "It''s okay, believe me, he has no way toe out and hurt everyone."


    Naruto: "No ... or no more ..."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Go tear it."


    Naruto: "No."


    "Go tear it."


    "No."


    Li Yaoxiang:


    Li Yaoxiang in the consciousness space couldn''t help but take a deep breath. I used to watch Naruto, how cute it is. Why is it that when I look at Naruto now, I have an inexplicable impulse in my heart, wanting to p the little brat in front of me with a palm.


    What happened?


    How can things go wrong so often?


    If Naruto didn''t tear it up, does he have to forcibly tear it up?


    Naruto: "Brother ... big brother, can you let me think about it again? I dare not approach that big cage. When I get used to it, I wille back and tear it up, okay?"


    Li Yaoxiang held his breath.


    Resist the grief in your heart.


    In the end, he let out a sigh of relief and said helplessly: "Okay. Then I will bring you over tomorrow. Naruto, remember, you have grown up, and you have to face some things bravely, you know?"


    Naruto: "Un."


    After a while.


    Naruto''s field of view is back in reality again.


    I don''t know if it is because I have been working hard for a few years, I haven''t got any results, or I feel tired frequently. In the next time, Li Yaoxiang did not talk to Naruto again.


    Even the actual store is closed early today.


    Naruto wondered, why did the big brother feel so urgent?


    Can''t we wait a few days longer?


    Thinking about it.


    Naruto suddenly realized.


    He just remembered that during this period, not only him but even his big brother had no strength. Moreover, he vaguely remembered that the big brother at this time would soon run into trouble.


    If he cannot darken me, he cannot enhance his own strength.


    How did the big brother survive this crisis?


    It seems that you can''t just pretend to be naive ...


    I must still be properly darkened, at least to allow the big brother to have the ability to protect himself in this world.


    It''s just that... the Kurama thing is okay.


    The Kurama was still useful to him.


    You can only start in other ways.

 Chapter 225: Join CCG

    Chapter 225: Join CCG


    5...


    4...


    3...


    2...


    1...


    Naruto gradually disappeared in his field of view.


    Li Yaoxiang''s field of view became dark.


    When he regained his vision again, he was already in a taxi. The speed of the car is about 50 or so, and the scenery outside the window is a high-rise building with no end in sight, and it is quickly switching like a walking light.


    taxi...


    High-rise building ...


    Modern city?


    Li Yaoxiang said without hesitation, first open the system interface to see who is talking about the darkening goal this time.


    [Host: Li Yaoxiang


    Darkening Target: Kaneki Ken


    Soul: 1/20


    Darkening degree: 0%


    Darkening value: 1,053,050


    Mall: Omitted]


    Kaneki Ken ... Kaneki Ken ... Isn''t Kaneki Ken the protagonist in Tokyo Ghoul''s Anime?


    If you remember correctly, follow the plot, Kaneki Ken will automatically darken sooner orter.


    Can I just lie down and win?


    It is exactly simr to that in Naruto World. If Li Yaoxiang did not use Astral Projection, he could do two things at the same time and feel everything around Kaneki Ken.


    It is a pity that Kaneki Ken was in a hospital at this time.


    Ken was just born not long ago. Li Yaoxiang couldn''t get much information from it.


    It can only be judged from the identity and memory given by the system. Thinking of this, a brand-new memory has poured into his mind.


    Still, his real name is Li Yaoxiang.


    Today is the first day of work.


    In an ordinarypany, be an ordinary civilian. Because he waste to go out, he took a taxi to get to work.


    And with the integration of memory.


    His guess was correct.


    This is indeed Tokyo Ghoul World.


    After all, this kind of thing is not a secret in this world.


    TV news and programs are often broadcast.


    They may also remind people in which area a murder urs, and let everyone be cautious when going out. Or on the show, bright earth is discussing the species and analyzing the species.


    Now that world is confirmed, then the problem ising ...


    Li Yaoxiang''s original intention was to soar all Heavens Myriad Realms, to experience life, customs, food, etc. in different worlds. In order to achieve his goal, he must cken the target.


    However, darkening belongs to darkening.


    He also has his own bottom line and principles.


    It will not wantonly fabricate darkness, but will dig out the original darkness of the world and go to the darkening goal.


    But Tokyo Ghoul is kind of this world, without him digging, it is already dark enough. Otherwise, Kaneki Ken''s protagonist will not be darkened automatically.


    Does that mean ...


    He doesn''t need to do anything, just lie and win until the end of the plot?


    After thinking about it, Li Yaoxiang quickly rejected the idea.


    When watching this Anime, Li Yaoxiang always had a regret, that is ...


    Abuse!


    It is too abused!


    It can be said that from the beginning of the plot, it has been abused until the end.


    Since you have the opportunity toe here, why not let yourself be refreshed? Moreover, if you have to wait until the end of the plot, and wait for Kaneki to automatically turn ck, don''t you have to stay in this world for a few more years?


    Isn''t that too boring?


    So, anyway, Li Yaoxiang decided.


    He doesn''t lie down and win.


    He wants to enter the game.


    He wants to change Kaneki Ken''s destiny and make himself happy.


    He wants to darken Kaneki Ken in advance and let himself leave this world in advance!


    After a decision was made, a series of darkening ns immediately appeared in Li Yaoxiang''s mind. It''s just that all these ns are just words.


    After all, Kaneki Ken is still just a baby.


    He can''t do anything.


    The most important thing at the moment is, of course, a good wave in this world!


    In the early stage of Naruto World, there was no strength, Naruto was targeted again and again, trembling with fear all the time, even if it was unable to wave.


    In this world, even without using the power of Hokage, with only the darkening value of more than 1 million, he can almost be an invincible existence.


    However, if you want to wave in this world without causing too much movement, so as not to affect the darkening of Kaneki Ken, you must have an identity that can freely enter and exit any area and any country.


    After all, in this world, ordinary people cannot enter or leave some areas at will.


    Think of it here.


    Li Yaoxiang said to the driver in the front seat: "Driver, I don''t want to go to XX Street. Please take me to CCG branch."


    That''s right.


    Li Yaoxiang thought of joining CCG, which is the Commission of Counter Ghoul.


    The Commission of Counter Ghoul [sic] (Gru Taisaku Kyoku, literally "Ghoul Countermeasures Bureau"), usually abbreviated as C C G (Shshj), was a federal agency in the Tokyo Ghoul series that serves as a criminal investigative body in cases connected to ghouls.


    In addition to wanting to experience the fun of a ghoul Investigator, it is also necessary to obtain the identity of a ghoul Investigator so that he can enter and leave any area at will.


    "driver?"


    "driver?"


    "Don''t go this way again."


    "Did you not hear me? I don''t want to go to XX Street, please take me to the nearest CCG branch."


    The driver ignored Li Yaoxiang.


    The car elerates.


    Then they turned into an alley.


    The car brakes to a stop.


    With a dark tone, the driver slowly turned his head to the back seat: "hehehe ... am I found out? How did you find out?"


    When Li Yaoxiang saw the driver''s eyes, it was the eye of dark and pupils scarlet.


    Li Yaoxiang:


    Not waiting for Li Yaoxiang to speak.


    The driver''s waist suddenly protruded like a tentacle-like man, forming a sharp drop shape and attacking Li Yaoxiang.


    ''ng!'' A loud noise.


    After a while.


    The driver begged for mercy in the alley.


    "Please, please let me go."


    "It''s my fault! I shouldn''t attack you. Please let me go!"


    The driver at this time, the whole body was imprisoned by an invisible force, unable to move even a little bit, including Kagune at his waist, as well. This is the result of several Limbo: Border Jail controlling him.


    Before this, the driver could be said to have suffered as much as 100 tortures.


    Also because of his selfless dedication.


    Li Yaoxiang got a good harvest.


    First of all, what is certain is that even without the use of quinque, the weapon made by Kagune, Li Yaoxiang still has countless ways to seriously injure or kill the ghouls.


    TL note: A quinque (kuinke) is a weapon manufactured from a ghoul''s kakuhou used by CCG ghoul investigators. Invented by Adam Gehner and Yoshiu Washuu, the quinque emits electrical signals that stimte the kakuhou to release and control it. They can be made into some type of melee or ranged weapon, but most retain a few characteristics from the original kagune. In contrast to kagune, quinque cannot change shape nor store or absorb Rc cells other than what was harvested from the ghoul it was made from.


    Just like Kamishiro Rize in original work, she was also crushed to death by steel tes.


    As long as the power he exerts exceeds the load range of all kinds, it can.


    Secondly, that is life safety.


    After eating the fruits of Divine Tree, his body is strengthening all the time. Although it has not yet reached the Otsutsuki Kaguya kind, he was continuously attacked by Naruto, Sasuke, and Sakura, and he was still unscathed.


    But at least this kind of thing in front of him really cannot break his defense.


    That is to say, if not necessary, he does not need to buy this world''s Kagune to enhance his strength.


    Although it''s just a random wave.


    The experiment is over.


    Li Yaoxiang dumped an Amaterasu at will.


    After a while, the driver was burned to the end.


    Li Yaoxiang walked out of the alley, took another taxi, and went to the CCG branch to apply ...

 Chapter 226: Four Years Later

    Chapter 226: Four Years Later


    Time flies.


    Years are like a shuttle.


    In a sh, 4 years have passed.


    Four years ago, Li Yaoxiang sessfully applied, joined CCG, and obtained the identity of a ghoul investigator. The ghoul investigators are divided into 4 ranks.


    They are 3rd-level ghoul investigators, 2nd-level ghoul investigators, 1st-level ghoul investigators, first-ss ghoul investigators, quasi-special ghoul investigators, special-level ghoul investigators.


    From bottom to top, the first three are called inferior ghoul investigators, and thetter three are called superior ghoul investigators.


    And very honored.


    On this day four yearster, Li Yaoxiang is still a third-ss ghoul investigator.


    TL note: Rank 3 Investigator (sant ssakan): Bureau investigators begin their career at this rank. Ghoul investigators who begin their career at this rank are "special cases," made investigators without formal training at the Training Academy. /wiki/Ghoul_investigator#Rank (on more about the rank if you''re curious)


    His position is as specific as a man always likes an 18-year-old girl.


    Unwavering.


    Not because Li Yaoxiang joined midway, not as good as those who were taken back by CCG from an early age, or brain-washed, or cultivated, orphan for short.


    It''s because Li Yaoxiang''s work attitude over the past four years has always been passable.


    Every afternoon at 3 pm, he always drinks afternoon tea.


    At 7 o''clock in the evening, work will bepleted on time.


    It is impossible overtime.


    asionally taking a nap.


    He even takes sick leave from time to time and travels abroad.


    If it weren''t for CCG''sck of manpower... If it weren''t for Li Yaoxiang''s regr live catch every month, or the killing of one or two of them to make a mission, he might have been dismissed by CCG.


    Of course, don''t look at Li Yaoxiang, he only cares about the waves.


    He also did not fall on the matter.


    With a darkening experience, the simple Li Yaoxiang is very clear that the best way to guide Kaneki Ken to the ''right path'' is undoubtedly to start from a young age.


    So during these four years, in addition to going around and realizing his dreams, since Kaneki Ken is sensible, he has apanied Kaneki Ken from time to time to y and chat, trying to establish a rtionship and establish trust with him.


    Try to influence Kaneki Ken''s character.


    Unfortunately, the effect was very good at the beginning.


    At least when choosing toys, Kaneki Ken chooses toy knives.


    At home, he would y around with those knives.


    But Kaneki Ken is not Naruto after all, and this era is not an era of war. Kaneki Ken has parents, and the medical degree of this era has a different development direction.


    When the night is quiet.


    Whenever they see their child, ying andughing at the air there, Kaneki Ken''s parents will be terrified, have one''s hair stand on end.


    Asked who Kaneki Ken was talking to, Kaneki Ken said frankly that someone was indeed talking to him, ying with him, and often told him the bedtime story.


    They asked what kind of story, Li Yaoxiang mentioned about the pleasures and hatreds, and the annihtion of people and families at every turn.


    Ken can only babble, kill this, kill that.


    Now, shouldn''t it frighten the couple?


    The two couples said nothing, and immediately took Kaneki Ken to see a psychiatrist.


    It is a pity that the evaluation and report given by the psychologist prove that Kaneki Ken is all normal.


    The two couples is rxed.


    However, after that, they will only spend more time on Kaneki Ken. And instructed Kaneki Ken to stop talking to ''stranger''.


    If you see anything strange in the future, just ignore him.


    Compared to Li Yaoxiang, Kaneki Ken of confused and ignorant, of course, is more willing to obey his parents.


    Li Yaoxiang is also very cooperative and temporarily no longer interferes with Kaneki Ken, because he knows that it is not yet time.


    Because of this, Kaneki Ken''s personality is still seriously affected by his parents. Afterwards, after seeing Kaneki Ken was much more normal and stopped talking to himself, the two couples felt relieved.


    It''s just that they don''t know.


    Since ying Kaneki Ken chose the toy knife, everything is actually different.


    Kaneki Ken''s interest changed and became a child who likes to y some bloody games that male children should y. In fact, it means that Li Yaoxiang''s initial n has been sessful, and he sessfully nted a darkening seed in Kaneki Ken''s heart.


    Just wait until the time is right.


    This seed will sprout naturally, grow, and eventually be vigorous.


    And the day after 4 years is also the beginning of the germination of this seed.


    Because Kaneki Ken''s father died a while ago like original work. Kaneki Ken once mentioned in the original work that he didn''t know how father died, and what happened at that time.


    For father''s death, he only remembered ''a very terrifying thing happened''.


    Even when he grew up, this thing gave him a vague sense of fear.


    There is no mention of ''what is terrifying'' in the original work.


    But when transmigrated here, Li Yaoxiang who sees the whole process in his eyes, sees it very clearly. Kaneki Ken''s father was killed in front of Kaneki Ken.


    Fortunately, the investigator arrived in time, and Kaneki Ken was saved.


    But also because of death in front of Kaneki Ken.


    This incident hit him too much.


    So his brain seemed to choose indirect amnesia in order to ''protect himself''. After that, he could not remember the situation at that time, only remembering the death of father, which made him feel very frightened.


    Li Yaoxiang watched the fourth season before being transmigrated.


    He did not understand why the author did not mention this matter again.


    However, Li Yaoxiang did not intend to guess the author''s thoughts.


    After all, now he no longer looks at Anime.


    For him, it is a real world.


    Although Li Yaoxiang judged by the facts in front of him, he didn''t need to pay too much attention. Since the original work person did not use this to ''abuse'' Kaneki Ken, it is up to him to do it himself.


    Just remind Kaneki Ken of this ''good'' memory at the right time. I believe there will be unexpected effects.


    So Kaneki Ken''s father''s death, Li Yaoxiang not at all prevents or interferes.


    Because he knew that this was the beginning of Kaneki Ken''s tragic destiny, and also the beginning of the darkening n. What Li Yaoxiang has to do now is to make Kaneki Ken''s miserable destiny even more miserable.


    Since then.


    2nd day after the funeral.


    Li Yaoxiang, who had been lurking for a while, had contacted Kaneki Ken again.


    This made Kaneki Ken, who was originally waving his toy knife at home, also had to dumbfounded for a moment.


    "Howe you''re back?"


    "Don''t look for me again, okay?"


    "Mother said to stop talking to you!"


    Kaneki Ken''s home is not very big. Of course, his mother noticed his sudden self-talk, and scared her to the core on the spot...


    I thought my son''s ''illness'' had beenpletely recovered.


    But I don''t want it to happen again at this time.


    This made her feel nervous and worried again.


    The husband has just left.


    The son can''t be more...


    Deeply worried, she had to take Kaneki Ken to seek a famous doctor again.


    If the famous doctor doesn''t work, then go to the temple.


    In short, all kinds of strange methods have been tried. But in the end, the voice in Kaneki Ken''s mind couldn''t be ''expelled''...

 Chapter 227: plan to start

    Chapter 227: n to start


    The problem cannot be solved.


    Looking for famous doctors, temples, and spent the money again.


    What else can I do?


    Of course, I started to work hard to make money.


    And what Li Yaoxiang wants is just like that!


    As long as Kaneki Ken''s mother goes out to work, Li Yaoxiang can take advantage of it and look for opportunities to reintegrate into Kaneki Ken''s life.


    At the beginning, Kaneki Ken who was obedient still resistedmunicating with Li Yaoxiang.


    But over time.


    With Li Yaoxiang unwilling to give up.


    Kaneki Ken eventually got used to Li Yaoxiang''s existence.


    From the beginning of not responding and ignoring, it gradually turned into an answer or two. Until the end, it finally changed back to normalmunication. However, in order not to worry his mother, Kaneki Ken learned not to be surprised.


    He learned to pretend to be calm andmunicate with Li Yaoxiang in his mind.


    Of course, just relying on normalmunication and the current situation alone, it is impossible to Kaneki Ken.


    To darken Kaneki Ken, you have to wait.


    Wait for an opportunity.


    And this opportunity is the death of Kaneki Ken''s mother.


    Li Yaoxiang remembered that in the original work, Kaneki Ken''s mother died from overwork. The reason for the overwork and death is, after all, the problem is with Kaneki Ken''s aunt.


    Aunt Kaneki Ken''s husband lost his job because of debt.


    However, even if they know that Kaneki Ken''s family environment is not very good, they still ask for money from Kaneki Ken''s mother.


    Kaneki Ken''s mother is a person who doesn''t refuse people very much.


    In order to meet the requirements of her elder sister, Kaneki Ken''s mother had to work a few more jobs.


    Temporary workers during the day.


    Work as a cleaner at night.


    In her spare time, she does sideline work at home.


    The time that apanied Kaneki Ken became very few.


    In the end, she died from overwork.


    But Kaneki Ken in original work didn''t me this matter on his aunt at all. Even in the days toe, his aunt didn''t like him very much, and he finally let it go.


    I really saw the fire!


    Li Yaoxiang wants topletely change this result!


    Oh no.


    It was this opportunity to guide Kaneki Ken on the right path.


    ...


    Time flies.


    Years are like a shuttle.


    Happy time, passing very fast.


    In a blink of an eye, 2 years have passed.


    In these 2 years, even though Kaneki Ken''s mother had to work every day, she had less time to apany Kaneki Ken, but Kaneki Ken was apanied by the book left by father and apanied by Li Yaoxiang.


    It can be started six months ago.


    Since his aunt came to the door.


    Everything has changed.


    The burden on mother''s shoulders became heavier.


    In order to meet the needs of her aunt, she started a life of 3 jobs a day.


    Because of this, his mother changed from ''every day will spend a lot of time to apany Kaneki Ken'', bing ''every day can only spare time to apany Kaneki Ken''.


    gradually.


    Every time what Kaneki Ken can see is the back of his mother''s work.


    Upon seeing this, Li Yaoxiang, knowing that he was waiting for a long time, finally came.


    Taking advantage of Kaneki Ken''s looked at his mother''s back again, Li Yaoxiang said in his mind: "Is this really good?"


    Kaneki Ken: "What do you mean?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "I mean, your mother only cares about her work and doesn''t care about you, is this really okay?"


    Kaneki Ken: "This is no way. Mother wants to make money to support the family, I am a good child, I want to measure mother."


    This is a sentence that Kaneki Ken''s mother oftenforts Kaneki Ken.


    He answered Li Yaoxiang with the same sentence.


    Li Yaoxiang: "But half a year ago, even if she worked to make money, your mother still has a lot of time to apany you, don''t you? You don''t want to go back to your old days?"


    Kaneki Ken: "..."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Just tell me if you want to ... go tell you mother and tell her to stop worrying about your aunt. Don''t take so many jobs and leave you more time."


    Kaneki Ken: "..."


    Kaneki Ken didn''t reply, but still holding a book, she walked silently to her mother.


    Sensing the arrival of his son, Kaneki Ken''s mother said tenderly with a smile: "Ken, what''s wrong? Is there another Chinese character that you can''t understand and want to ask your mother?"


    This is indeed Kaneki Ken''s original idea.


    Only with this excuse can mother be able to apany herself more.


    Kaneki Ken holding the book in his hands, shaking ones head said: "No, no. Mom, why do you work so hard, can''t you stop giving money to your aunt?"


    Mother ruffled Kaneki Ken''s hair: "Ken, good. Aunt''s home is very poor. She is mom''s elder sister, I can''t not help her."


    Kaneki Ken: "But ... Mom, I want you not to work for so long, I want you to stay with me more."


    Kaneki Ken in the original work would not ask like this, nor would he say so.


    But in his life, because of the influence of Li Yaoxiang, because of the darkening seed that Li Yaoxiang nted in his heart, after all, he still triggered his own selfishness.


    mother: "Instead of hurting others, it is better to be a hurt person. Ken, you want to be a gentle person, right? Only in this way will you get happiness more easily."


    This sentence.


    Kaneki Ken doesn''t know how many times he has heard from mother.


    This is also the sentence that affects him the most.


    It can be said that the reason why Kaneki Ken in original work has such a character is because of his mother''s influence. As for now ... the same is true.


    Li Yaoxiang can''tpare with his mother for the time being.


    In order not to disappoint mother, or not to worry about mother, Kaneki Ken nodded heavily, and he said, "Uh".


    Ding dong!


    Ding dong!


    At this moment, someone rang the doorbell at home.


    Mother stood up and walked quickly to the door.


    Theing person is awesome Kaneki Ken''s aunt.


    mother: "Ah, you''re here? Come in and sit down."


    Auntie: "No. Have you got the sry? The child is going to pay the tuition fee. In any case, you must help me."


    Mother hesitated: "Uh..."


    Aunt: "What''s wrong? We two sisters, are you not going to help me?"


    mother: "No, no. As you know, Ken in my family is ill. I want to save money and take him to have a look again, otherwise I will not be at ease. You ... can you see if you ..."


    Kaneki Ken''s mother said the "disease" is Li Yaoxiang.


    Obviously, Aunt Kaneki Ken also knew about this.


    Auntie: "How much money have you spent on Ken''s disease? Are you still not giving up? He seems to be fine, right? Don''t worry so much. Also, the freezer at home was broken and had to be reced. I''m really in a hurry to spend the money, please help me again."


    Mother stopped talking and finally replied: "Then ... that''s okay."


    Kaneki Ken''s mother gave her elder sister the sry she had just received from the room. Her elder sister got the money, and soon left, not staying too much ...

 Chapter 228: Are you okay

    Chapter 228: Are you okay


    During the whole process ofmunication between mother and aunt, Kaneki Ken carried his toy knife and stood not far away, all looking in his eyes.


    Li Yaoxiang took the opportunity to confuse: "Didn''t you hear it."


    Kaneki Ken: "What did I hear?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Your aunt''s family doesn''t sound like it''s in a pinch. It''s just that the freezer is broken, so you need to rece it with a new one. If you don''t have money, can''t you save some money? Do you have to use the freezer? It seems that your aunt''s freezer is more important than you ~ "


    Kaneki Ken: "..."


    Li Yaoxiang: "In order to make money for your aunt, your mother can only sacrifice your time with you. This ... is really the result you want? You don''t n to persuade your mother anymore?"


    Kaneki Ken: "Instead of hurting others, it is better to be an injured person. This is how a gentle person be happy. Mother is a gentle person, and I want to be a gentle person."


    "Oh, really? It turns out that Kaneki Ken wanted to be a gentle child ... That''s no problem, as long as you don''t regret it."


    Kaneki Ken couldn''t hear the meaning in Li Yaoxiang''s words.


    Only looked at haggard mother, hurriedly walked back to the room from the door to get the money, then hurriedly walked to the door, and handed the money to the aunt.


    Finally, she smiled tiredly at Kaneki Ken and returned to the house to do her side job.


    ...


    Time flies.


    Years are like a shuttle.


    In a sh, a year passed.


    During this year, Aunt Kaneki Ken came to Kaneki Ken''s house very punctually every month to get money.


    Kaneki Ken sees his aunt once a month.


    Only once.


    Kaneki''s mother, on the other hand, continued to get up at six o''clock in the morning. After preparing breakfast for Kaneki, she went out to work. At 1:00 pm, she will bring Ken Kaneki''s lunch, and do a side business at home by the way.


    At 8-9 pm in the evening, after finishing dinner for Kaneki Ken, she will go out to work as a cleaner.


    She won''te back until 1-2 midnight.


    Only sleep less than 4 hours a day.


    It can be said that while Kaneki Ken was still awake, she went out to work. Kaneki Ken woke up, and she came back to work her side job, to apanied and looked after Kaneki Ken. In the evening, taking advantage of Kaneki Ken''s sleep, she went out to work.


    She thought that as long as she was awake at this period of time at Kaneki Ken and staying at home, she apany Ken.


    But is this really the case?


    No, no.


    Deep down in Kaneki''s heart, he was actually very eager for his mother to take time out to spend more time with him.


    The most anticipated thing every day is the moment when mother returns home.


    Even in order to see mother more often, he sometimes intentionally adjusts the time at 6 am, 9-10 pm, and 1-2 midnight, either waking up or sleepingte.


    But because of that sentence.


    ''Instead of hurting others, it is better to be an injured person''


    ''Gentle people, just be happy like this''


    He wants to be a gentle person.


    He never mentioned the matter of ''don''t give aunt money'' again.


    At the same time, he is also afraid of mother''s hard work, so he dare not disturb mother. Only asionally when it is really impossible to bear, will he find excuses for mother to teach Chinese characters and to apany him.


    So unconsciously, he also developed the habit of reading.


    Because those books are left by father.


    When reading those books, he would inexplicably feel that father was apanying him.


    This kind of day, until a yearter, is the year he went to primary school.


    Life has finally changed.


    He met a friend in original work, Hideyoshi Nagachika.


    With thepany of Hideyoshi Nagachika, he added a lot of colors to his entire life, no longer as lonely as before.


    In this way, in the next 2 years, Kaneki Ken''s life has been revolving around mother, Li Yaoxiang, books, and Hideyoshi Nagachika.


    Such a day.


    Until one day after 2 years.


    He came home from school and saw mother falling asleep on the table.


    He knew that mother was tired, so he didn''t want to wake up mother. Afraid of his mother''s cold, he put a quilt over her shoulder.


    Even in the evening, when mother forgot to cook dinner, he was not willing to wake up mother.


    Very sensible, he just went out and buy some food.


    But by the time mother was supposed to be out to work, mother was still motionless.


    Then he walked up to his mother and shook his shoulders: "mother, mother?"


    Yes.


    His mother was dead.


    Finally she couldn''t bear it and died from overwork.


    In the original work, Kaneki Ken''s mother died when Kaneki Ken was 10 years old. The emergence of Li Yaoxiang caused his mother to die one year earlier. Because the savings in their home run out in advance.


    His mother had to start herbor life in advance.


    After a few hours ...


    Di-du!


    Di-du!


    Di-du!


    The ambnce came to Kaneki Ken''s house and confirmed his mother''s death.


    9-year-old Kaneki Ken only knows how to call an ambnce.


    I don''t understand anything else.


    He just looked-at a group of strangers in a silly way, went in and out at home, covered his mother with a white cloth, and carried away his mother.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Did you see that?"


    Kaneki Ken: "..."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Have you heard the diagnosis of the medical staff?"


    Kaneki Ken: "..."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Your mother died from overwork. Just because your aunt has been taking money from your mother for the past few years, your mother has to work three times, so your mother would die from overwork. If you persuade your mother more, let her not give your aunt money, let her rest more, maybe she will not die. Rather than hurting others, it is better to be injured. Gentle people, as long as this is happy. You mother did it. But... Oh, gentle Ken, are you happy now?"


    Kaneki Ken: "..."


    At this moment, an ambnce worker approached Kaneki Ken: "Child, don''t be too sad. Are there other people in your family? Should I call you and let theme over to see you?"


    Kaneki Ken subconsciously replied: "Auntie."


    After a while.


    The aunt did arrive.


    She saw Kaneki Ken''s an instant, which was to quickly step forward and hug Kaneki Ken into her arms: "Poor child, don''t worry, you still have an aunt."


    After hearing this sentence, Kaneki Ken finally couldn''t help crying.


    After this, a series of follow-up matters for the funeral were also handled by the aunt.


    On the day of the funeral, the relevant section came and said that it was asking about custody.


    The aunt said softly to Kaneki Ken: "I used to cause trouble to your family, at least let aunt do her part."


    Then she said to the government official: "Ken will be brought up by my family. My family is also the only child, so if someonees to apany you, he will be very happy."


    Kaneki Ken said without hesitation, agreed.


    And just when my aunt talked to the government ... and signed relevant materials, Li Yaoxiang''s voice sounded in Kaneki Ken''s mind again ...

 Chapter 229: The poor home shows its true colors

    Chapter 229: The poor home shows its true colors


    Li Yaoxiang: "Do you really think so?"


    Seeing mother''s body, Kaneki Ken still crying, subconsciously said: "What do you mean?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Do you really think your aunt said she wanted to take care of you to fulfill her duty?"


    Kaneki Ken couldn''t understand why Li Yaoxiang said so.


    I don''t know how to answer.


    This


    Isn''t she supposed to?


    mother was so gentle, aunt was the older sister.


    She should be as gentle as mother, right?


    Li Yaoxiang did not n to guess the dumb mystery with him. At this time, he did not bury hatred in Kaneki Ken''s heart, and he waited longer: "Aren''t you curious? Didn''t your aunt say all the time before, that she has no money at home?" Why is there money now for funerals for your mother?"


    Kaneki Ken still does not understand.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Because what she is using is your mother''s money. This is the money your mother has left for you. Only when you are taken away can your aunt use the money legally."


    Li Yaoxiang did not exin to Kaneki Ken whatplicated issues such as insurance and housing.


    Just briefly talk about the main points.


    ''Aunt did it for money.''


    Li Yaoxiang did not lie to Kaneki Ken, which was not mentioned in the original work, but the fact that Li Yaoxiang saw was indeed true.


    This time, Kaneki Ken understood.


    But he kept silent.


    Li Yaoxiang: "What''s wrong? Don''t believe it?"


    Yes.


    Kaneki Ken chose not to believe.


    Or, he does not want to believe.


    A 9-year-old child doesn''t really have much idea about money. Compared to money, Kaneki Ken at this time paid more attention to rtives. Aunt is his only rtive.


    He did not want to think of the problem asplicated.


    I just hope that there is a "familiar" person who can take care of him.


    In the days toe, I can continue to live with my loved ones.


    Li Yaoxiang saw Kaneki Ken''s thoughts.


    There is no intention to argue with him.


    Speaking of which, it is enough.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Just watch..."


    ...


    Shortly after.


    Kaneki Ken, who originally lived in the shelter, was finally taken to live with her aunt''s house.


    Just arrived at an instant, Kaneki Ken did not think too much.


    Full of anticipation and excitement for this new home.


    But Li Yaoxiang reminded at this time: "Huh? Doesn''t your aunt often tell your mother that their family is in a pinch? Doesn''t look like?"


    Just got out of the car, Kaneki Ken was full of excitement.


    Suddenly froze.


    He was short, lifts the head, looked towards the two and a half-storey house ...


    This home is onlyrger than the home where Kaneki Ken originally lived. Kaneki Ken''s home is simr to an apartment with several floors and no elevator.


    The aunt ''s house is a two-and-a-half-storey row house with a wall. In addition to the house, there is extra space for flowers and grass.


    The aunt smiled back and said, "Ken, why are you stunned? Come in with your aunt."


    After a moment of panic, then he quickly hurried forward.


    Enter the house.


    Auntie Jinmuyan carried the luggage and passed the living room: "This is your uncle, call him uncle."


    Kaneki Ken: "Uncle."


    After the study: "This is your cousin, Yuuichi. Yuuichi, stop ying! Come and see your cousin!"


    In the study, the voice of ''beep beep, biubiubiu'' came. This is the sound of Kaneki Ken''s cousin, Yuuichi ying a game console. The cousin did not look back, eagerly said: "Wait! Wait! I will see youter!"


    Yuuichi Asaoka


    My aunt apologized: "He is like this, he always just cares about ying, I hope you don''t mind, Ken."


    Kaneki Ken made a "huh" sound, shake one''s head.


    Then he followed his aunt.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Oh, your aunt''s home is really pinch. Your cousin still has a game console to y, which is useless even for you. I don''t know if it was with the money your mother left you, Or is it that their family wasn''t very poor in the first ce?"


    Kaneki Ken didn''t think too much.


    His face couldn''t help but sink.


    He said nothing.


    The low-level head silently followed his aunt and left.


    Going up two consecutive stairs, and finally came to the small room with only half a floor. Like this kind of house, the roof is extremely low. Adults can almost touch the roof without raising their hands.


    This was originally a utility room.


    Now it has been tidied up and cleaned up and used as Kaneki Ken''s room, which does not seem too shabby.


    After all, for children like Kaneki Ken who are required to be adopted, relevant institutions usually send people to observe a period of time. If the child has a bad life, the relevant institution has the right to recover the child''s custody.


    Only after a certain period of observation will the adoption process be consideredplete.


    Therefore, during this period of time, my aunt treated Kaneki Ken very well.


    So as to avoid what Kaneki Ken said to the outside world.


    But all of this, Kaneki Ken did not know.


    After entering the room, the aunt smiled softly at Kaneki Ken: "Ken, this will be your room in the future. This will be your home in the future. Please tell your aunt if you need anything."


    Hearing these words of concern.


    Kaneki Ken''s original heavy mood was suddenly much better.


    There was a lot of nods again, and cleverly yelled.


    After the aunt leaves...


    Li Yaoxiang: "What''s the matter? Do you think it doesn''t matter if your aunt uses the money your mother left you? As long as your aunt treats you well?"


    Kaneki Ken did not speak.


    But Li Yaoxiang did express his thoughts.


    Li Yaoxiang: "If I told you that everything in front of you was just an illusion created by your aunt, would you believe it?"


    At this time, Kaneki Ken finally refuted Li Yaoxiang: "No, mother is so gentle, and aunt must be as gentle as mother!"


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t speak anymore.


    Kaneki Ken was relieved.


    That night, Kaneki Ken was summoned by her aunt, and the whole family happily ate a dinner together.


    In a good period of time after that, Kaneki Ken had a happy life with a ''home''.


    Until once.


    Kaneki Ken''s test scores were good. After being praised by her aunt, in order to fully integrate into the family, in order to get the aunt''s praise again, Kaneki Ken chose to study harder.


    As a result, when the next grade came out, he scored perfect in every subject, but got apletely different response from his aunt.


    Holding the paper, the aunt muttered to herself: "Hmph, just like the younger sister, so smart?" Immediately, she said badly: "Why? Are you mocking my family and Yuichi?"


    This is why the aunt hates the younger sister.


    She thinks that Kaneki Ken''s mother has learned all her ''love'' from her parents since she was young, so she feels that Kaneki Ken''s mother owes her. It is a matter of course for Ken''s mother to help her and give her money.


    Because of Kaneki Ken''s achievements, his aunt remembered bad memories again.


    After this.


    The aunt''s family never gave Kaneki Ken a good face.


    Even the dishes for dinner have be more and more shabby.


    Until the end, they didn''t want to eat on the same table, just gave him some money and let Ken solve it outside by himself.


    Looking at the money in his hand, Kaneki Ken was silent.


    Li Yaoxiang, who disappeared for a long time, appears again ...

 Chapter 230: Blackened seeds, breaking out of their shells

    Chapter 230: ckened seeds, breaking out of their shells


    Li Yaoxiang: "How? You should believe it now?"


    Kaneki Ken: "Believe in what?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "The money is already here. Of course, your aunt and your family will never need to act in front of you anymore."


    Kaneki Ken: "..."


    Li Yaoxiang: "What''s the matter? Your mother was killed by your aunt and your aunt''s family. Even after your mother died, your aunt didn''t regret it and still treated you like this. You''re not angry at all? You don''t want revenge at all?"


    Kaneki Ken did not reply.


    Take the money and go to the street, ready to solve today''s dinner.


    And just as Kaneki Ken passed an electrical appliance store, the ss of the electrical appliance store was filled with all kinds of TV sets just reporting a piece of news.


    "Hello everyone, I am your news anchor XXXX. The next news I report for you is that at 7-9 pm yesterday evening, another family in the XX district was victimized. The modus operandi is the same as that of the previous murders. There is no sign of breaking the door, it looks like it was done by an acquaintance. However, some experts believe that maybe this is just an illusion created by the ghouls. Because ording to the clues revealed by the neighbors of these families, they all have one thing inmon. That is the habit of putting the keys of the home somewhere at the door. Perhaps it was that they discovered their habit and took the key and broke into the house. So this station here calls on residents of District XX. If you have the above habits, please make sure to change them as soon as possible so as not to be the next target of the ghoul."


    News anchors speak quickly.


    Almost Kaneki Ken started walking on one side of the store, but had not yet reached the other side of the store. This news had already been broadcast to the end.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Did you hear that? It''s a ghoul, and it''s a ghoul thatmitted the crime. It just so happens that you live in this area, Ken! What if you can use this kind of ghoul to avenge your mother, then that would be great wouldn''t it? If your aunt''s family was killed by ghouls, I believe everyone would not suspect you, right?"


    Hear this remark by Li Yaoxiang.


    Kaneki Ken stopped subconsciously.


    Startled listening to this news report, looked at the picture on the TV screen.


    After a while.


    Kaneki Ken left here without incident.


    He didn''t answer.


    But regardless of Li Yaoxiang''s disregard, he still pretended to analyze and bewitched in Kaneki Ken''s mind, asking: "Since the crime has not yet been caught, it means that this ghoul cannot be hidden among the neighbors of this group of victims. Otherwise, the ghoul investigators could not have missed it. Like this kind of small habit, everyone usually will not circte randomly. In addition to the neighbors who meet each other, they will know that the victim''s family has this habit, who else will be able to discover this habit of the victim''s family? Correct! Correct! This person must have an identity that will not be suspicious even if he passes through the area of the victim''s house every day! Otherwise, he could easily discover this little habit of the victim''s family! Postman? The newspaper? Milk delivery? Or are these several victim sites the only way for this ghoul to go to and from get off work?"


    Kaneki Ken did not respond.


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t say it again, it was already obvious enough. Kaneki Ken seemed indifferent. But Li Yaoxiang knew that in fact, Kaneki Ken had already remembered them in his mind.


    His performance can conceal others, nor can he conceal the Li Yaoxiang he grew up from birth to the present.


    In the following process of buying food, it is enough to prove that Li Yaoxiang''s guess is correct.


    "Young man! Young man! You haven''t given money yet!"


    Boss gasping for breath caught up with Kaneki Ken.


    Kaneki Ken repeatedly bowed and apologized: "I''m sorry, I''m sorry."


    After a while.


    "Hey! Hello--! Young man, you haven''t got any change yet!"


    On the surface, they don''t care, but the whole person is absent-minded, and he bes indifferent.


    In a good period of time afterwards, the small details of Kaneki Ken''s life made some changes.


    He started to pay attention to ''that news'' intentionally or unintentionally.


    Pay attention to the ces where they were killed.


    Sometimes they even "detour", deliberately passing these crime sites on the way to school or home. The final conclusion is that it is impossible to link the routes of these crime sites together.


    In other words, people who work or leave work are excluded.


    Then the rest can only be those who send newspapers, milk, postman, etc.


    Only these people will take such a strange route and will not be doubted.


    With this discovery, Kaneki Ken was very surprised. He didn''t expect, the original kind of horrible kind is so close to his life. It may even be anyone around you.


    However, this frightening fact, not at all troubled him for too long.


    After that, he also passed those routes intentionally or unintentionally, and finally locked in several goals.


    He does not know whether these goals will be among them.


    He only knows that these goals, in addition to often appearing on that ''fixed route'', sometimes pass by his aunt''s home from time to time.


    Kaneki Ken''s series of small movements, Li Yaoxiang all see in his eyes.


    However, during the entire investigation, Li Yaoxiang did not see through it.


    There is no meaning to ridicule Kaneki Ken.


    Now that the results of the investigation are in ce, everything is ready, but Kaneki Ken was only recovered at this time, what is he doing? What is he doing?


    Yes.


    Kaneki Ken did this series of things unconsciously.


    During the investigation, I didn''t think about revenge, it was like satisfying my curiosity. But this so-called ''satisfying curiosity'' is an idea of deceiving himself.


    It''s just that he didn''t notice it.


    Li Yaoxiang knew that at this time someone had toe out to push Kaneki Ken. Only by pushing Kaneki Ken, let him pass the threshold in his heart.


    Only the ckened seeds buried in his heart can bepletely broken out and sprouted vigorously.


    And this person is undoubtedly him.


    Li Yaoxiang: "What ... are you still hesitating?"


    At this moment, Kaneki Ken was standing at the door of his house, motionless.


    In the distance, there is one of the ''target characters'' who is about to pass by him. Ken Kaneki knew that the ''target person'' was about to pass through this. But he didn''t know why he was here at this time and ce, motionless.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Your beautiful life has been destroyed by others. People who destroy your beautiful life live happier and morefortable than you every day. They don''t even know any regrets, and they mock you andugh at you behind their backs. And this ''person'' is in this house. You are not angry and do not want revenge?"


    Kaneki Ken bowed his head and said nothing.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Don''t think about it that much. Tell yourself that you just made some unintentional actions, which makes people mistakenly think that you took the key from a certain ce the door. It''s... all ''idents''. Do it, if you don''t do it, that person will leave..."


    Speaking of it.


    ''Bell'' twice. This is the bell of the target person''s bicycle. Judging by the ringtone, it is enough to draw the result that the target person is not far from him.


    And just when the target character is about to ride a bicycle, passing by the aunt''s house.


    Kaneki Ken suddenly bent down, took out ''something'' from the carpet that seemed to be at the door, and got up to open the door. Out of the corner of Kaneki Ken''s eyes, he looked at the target person.


    Seeing the target character also noticed his movements...


    With a click, the sound of shell breaking sounded.


    From this moment, the ckened seeds began to grow seedlings. The seedling looks small, but it has tenacious vitality...


    ckening degree:


    1%...


    6%...


    12%...


    18%...

 Chapter 231: Behind the scenes manipulation

    Chapter 231: Behind the scenes maniption


    In the next good period of time.


    Kaneki Ken has been frequently wandering between ''going home'' and ''going out''.


    And even if he went home, he soon went out again.


    It can be said that most of the time, he would stay outside.


    There are two main purposes for this.


    1) He doesn''t know if the ghoul targets certain humans or where the ghoul is precisely. The only thing he can do is at a fixed time, when these target characters are about to pass by his aunt''s house, he just happens to show them a scene of himself taking out a key under the carpet to open the door.


    2) He already has an extra key for his aunt''s house. Every time he went out, he put the key under the carpet. Staying outside for a long time is just to wait for a hands-on opportunity.


    If he goes home, he will take back the key, so that the ghouls will not even deal with him when he is at home.


    Days like thissted for quite a while.


    The aunt didn''t wait to see him, regardless of whether he went home or went out often.


    So there is no doubt.


    But the problem is, it''s been so long, why haven''t the ghouls started? Is his guess wrong? Among these people, there are no ghouls at all?


    At this time Kaneki Ken, he was sitting in the park. The semi-circr, hollow, with four exits for children to get in and out of the children''s facilities, holding his chin, thinking about his spection, was it wrong?


    It was not easy to make a firm resolution, and passed the threshold in my heart.


    But there was no result. Although there was nothing on the surface, he was still very anxious.


    Li Yaoxiang: "What''s wrong? Disappointed? Why didn''t the ghoul do it?"


    Kaneki Ken startled, and then calmed down again: "I don''t know what you are talking about ..."


    Kaneki Ken is like that.


    He''s a guy who is good at deceiving himself.


    Deceive yourself, even to the extent that you even believe yourself to be true.


    Li Yaoxiang understands his character and hasn''t been entangled in this question: "Rx, haven''t you checked the information of the ghoul before? The ghoul doesn''t need to eat that often. One meal can keep them alive for a long time. It was not long before thest case. Maybe it''s not time for them to eat? Hang on. If you persevere, you will definitely get results. Maybe your every move in this period of time is already in their eyes. Maybe your aunt''s family already is their next goal."


    Li Yaoxiang said this, in fact, it was not aimless.


    As early as Kaneki Ken was investigating this matter, as a ghoul investigator, he also took the initiative to apply to be responsible for the case. As a result of the investigation, the ghoul thatmitted the crime was indeed one of the targets of Kaneki Ken''s attention.


    The reason why the ghoul hasn''t acted until now, in addition to the time they haven''t eaten, there is another reason to worry about the problem of the ghoul investigator.


    Li Yaoxiang was waiting for the wind to calm down, and then acted again.


    In CCG, the notoriouslyzy Li Yaoxiang asked for the initiative, of course, not just for the sake of mitment''. There are 2 main reasons:


    1) He was just worried that if the case was picked up by other investigators, the culprit might be caught in advance.


    Wouldn''t it tten the newly sprouting darkening seed?


    2) Afterwards, he had to put the finishing touches on Kaneki Ken.


    Otherwise, these small actions of Kaneki Ken may be seen by other ghoul investigators.


    So he asked his boss for the first time, swearing that he would solve the case, and refused to send someone to apany him.


    This case urred in the settlement.


    It made the residents panicked. The outside world is very important.


    Originally, the boss was not optimistic about Li Yaoxiang and wanted to refuse. But Li Yaoxiang stated a fact at this time: "I''mzy, but that doesn''t mean I''m weak. Have you ever seen me fail or get injured in my mission over the years?"


    This sentence was awkward for the boss.


    Coupled with other people on hand, there are also a lot of tasks to deal with.


    The boss had no choice but to agree.


    In the end, it leads to the present result.


    Li Yaoxiang was responsible for the case in its entirety, and tried to dy it as long as possible. Of course, during this period, families who had the opportunity to be this kind of target were all strangled in the cradle by Li Yaoxiang in advance.


    Send someone to visit these families and tell them not to leave the key outside the door, otherwise they will be arrested for ''assistance inmitting crimes''.


    Those families who didn''t take it seriously had to put away their contempt to avoid getting intowsuits.


    In the end, it led to only the aunt''s house.


    Everything is ready.


    I just owe the ghouls to let go of their guard and start.


    After listening to Li Yaoxiang''s analysis andforting words, Kaneki Ken, who was about to give up, regained his energy. The words "I don''t know what you are talking about" are still on the lips, but the actions are very sincere.


    In the next period of time.


    Kaneki Ken is still doing the same thing constantly.


    After going out, he would stroll away for a long time.


    I don''t know how long itsts.


    Until one day.


    When he was sitting in the children''s facility in the park, reading with great interest, a chubby aunt, panting suddenly, ran towards Kaneki Ken: "Ken, you''re here! Come back with me! Your family has an ident!"


    The fat aunt is the neighbor of his aunt''s house.


    Kaneki Ken at this age has no cell phone.


    So when the police asked. The fat aunt could only contact Kaneki Ken in this way.


    Kaneki Ken startled after hearing the news.


    The book rolled to the ground with a few thuds.


    In the end, he even forgot to pick up, and ran back with the fat aunt.


    After returning home.


    At this time, the outside of my aunt''s house was already full of spectating people.


    Even the police ... the fat aunt pulled a few warning tapes that blocked the scene.


    Fat aunt took Kaneki Ken''s little hand and shouted ''step aside! Step aside! Give me space!'', And finally squeezed in. Then she said to one of the police officers: "Officer... Officer! Officer... Officer! Here, here. I brought Ken back. He is the only survivor of the Asaoka family!"


    The Asaoka family is the surname of her aunt''s husband.


    Fat aunt made this remark.


    The crowd around looked towards Kaneki Ken here.


    Lots of gossip.


    Either pity or ridicule.


    If you don''t know Kaneki Ken, you will pity the child Kaneki Ken and his dead family.


    Those who knew Kaneki Ken mocked Kaneki Ken. Not only did he kill his parents, but even his aunt''s family also died.


    Kaneki Ken''s performance seemed to be full of uneasiness.


    The police officer who saw this was very dissatisfied. Immediately, he instructed several subordinates to drive away those mocking people, and then walked up to Kaneki Ken: "You are Kaneki Ken? Do you know what happened here?"

 Chapter 232: Kaneki Ken meets the protagonist for the first time

    Chapter 232: Kaneki Ken meets the protagonist for the first time


    Kaneki Ken''s face was pale and his tone was tense: "I...I...I don''t know."


    The officer crouched down andforted the back of Kaneki Ken: "Next I will tell you bad news. You must be mentally prepared."


    Kaneki Ken swallowed saliva, nod.


    Followed by.


    In the process of the police officer talking about ''what happened at my aunt''s house'', Kaneki Ken was even unable to bear tears. But no one knows whether the tears are sad, excited, or scared.


    Squatting police officer, patted Kaneki Ken''s shoulders: "Don''t be too sad, ignore other people''s ims. Believe that if your family knows that you''ve escaped this disaster and live happily, they will be happy."


    Finished.


    The police officer stood up.


    But just when he turned around and wanted to deal with the follow-up matters, he suddenly thought of something, turned his head again and asked Kaneki Ken again: "Oh, yes. Your family also has the habit of putting the door key outside the door?"


    Pop, pop, pop, pop! Kaneki Ken''s heartbeat elerated.


    The emotions were instantly tense to the extreme.


    But he is still somewhat rigid and nod.


    Officer secretly sighed ''surely so'', not at all suspicious of a child.


    After the officer turned and left.


    Li Yaoxiang''s voice sounded in Kaneki Ken''s mind: "What''s wrong? Very worried? Worried that you''ll be exposed?"


    Kaneki Ken tried to calm down his emotions and responded in his mind: "I don''t know what you are talking about."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Rx. They never thought that a child would n to kill his aunt and his family. How does it feel to avenge? Are you excited? Are you excited?"


    Kaneki Ken: "Stop talking! I don''t know what you are talking about!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "You don''t have to be so nervous. You don''t need to be guilty. Your aunt''s family''s death was well deserved. If she hadn''t stubbornly asked your mother for money, your mother wouldn''t have died. Also, do you really think your uncle and your cousin are innocent? They also have a share of your mother''s money. They also did not treat you like a family. If your aunt is a murderer, then they are aplices!"


    Kaneki Ken: "Don''t say it again! Don''t say it!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Keep an eye on it, this is because it''s your first time killing someone, so you have this ufortable feeling in your heart. Overall, you performed very well this time. Although there are still some ws, I believe you will perform better next time. That kind of murderous difort will gradually feel normal."


    Kaneki Ken emotion excitedly said: "Shut up! You shut up! I didn''t kill them!"


    Darkening degree:


    19%...


    21%...


    23%...


    26%...


    This sentence is not in my mind.


    It was Kaneki Ken who was excited by Li Yaoxiang and couldn''t bear to shout out. The atmosphere at the scene was suddenly silenced by Kaneki Ken''s cry.


    Everyone''s eyes were all focused on Kaneki Ken.


    The policeman who hasn''t left far yet. This officer frowned and turned his head towards Kaneki Ken.


    Immediately afterwards, whispers rang in the crowd.


    "Did you hear that? The child said that his family was killed by him. Sure enough! He knew he did it."


    "Che, probably the blow was too heavy?"


    "No, in my opinion, maybe this family member was really killed by him ..."


    The voice of the crowd whispering was buzzing in Kaneki Ken''s mind like a fly. He knew he was wrong. He looked towards the eyes of the people around him, as if to see everyoneughing at him and using him.


    Hallucinations urred in his mind.


    "It''s you! It''s you! It''s you who killed your aunt''s family!"


    "Yes! Do you think what you do, no one will know ?!"


    "Your mother was killed by you too! Without you, your mother would not have work so hard, wouldn''t it? The most damned is you! Why don''t you go to hell!"


    Kaneki Ken couldn''t bear the eyes of the surrounding people.


    Tears hurled directly.


    Mumbling: "No ... not like this ... things are not what you said ..."


    Then suddenly rushed into the room, trying to rush back into his room to hide.


    "Hey! Boy! You can''t ..." The police officer stopped Kaneki Ken, and Kaneki Ken actually stopped.


    But at this moment, azy voice came out of the room: "Let him pass ..."


    The owner of sound is Li Yaoxiang''s main body.


    At this time, Li Yaoxiang was wearing a neat suit, and he opened the freezer at the murder scene casually, picked up a can of Red Bull, and opened it to drink.


    While speaking, Li Yaoxiang didn''t even nce at Kaneki Ken.


    Although he is a third-ss ghoul investigator and he is considered to be the bottom of the existence in CCG, but any kind of ghoul investigator, in front of these ordinary police officers, the status is rtively respected, and as long as it is about the case, no matter what kind of police officer you are, you must fully cooperate with CCG and let CCG in charge, even if Li Yaoxiang is only a third-ss ghoul investigator.


    The officer hearing this, the blocked arm was slowly put down.


    But Kaneki Ken was really stunned there.


    Because he felt Li Yaoxiang''s voice, he was very familiar!


    But in the process of being stunned, the discussion of the people outside came into my ears again. This made Ken Kaneki, who was still in a panic, immediately awakened.


    After the surprise, he couldn''t control so much and rushed upstairs.


    The honest police officer went to Li Yaoxiang, who was drinking Red Bull, and was dissatisfied: "This is the scene of the murder. Aren''t you afraid that evidences will be lost by the child? Maybe there are some clues that we haven''t found in this matter. Are you going to let him go?"


    gu lu, gu lu, gu lu, ha--!


    Li Yaoxiang drank the Red Bull in one breath, spits out one mouthful of impure air, and slowly answered the police officer. He walked to the table to pick up a piece of information, and lightly threw it in front of the police officer.


    "The crime scene is just the living room and the entire first floor. What does this have to do with him going upstairs? The information is here. Take a look for yourself."


    The police officer opened the folder.


    Inside is the information of Kaneki Ken.


    ording to the information, Kaneki Ken had a record of seeing the psychiatrist many times. Psychologist''s report: in childhood often speaks to himself. Although growing up, this situation bes less, but asionally it will happen.


    After reading the report.


    The upright police officer was speechless on the spot.


    Although he doesn''t agree with the handling method of this ghoul investigator. But he knew that he had indeed wrongly med Li Yaoxiang.


    It turned out that Li Yaoxiang had done his homework before him, so he didn''t pay too much attention to the child''s mad words. Not embarassed, but in the follow-up matters, the police officer became more cooperative with Li Yaoxiang...

 Chapter 233: Courage to face, no longer hide

    Chapter 233: Courage to face, no longer hide


    Ghoul investigator.


    First floor.


    After the evidence was collected, ah no, it was a pretentious evidence search, Li Yaoxiang ordered people to clean up the corpses at the scene, evacuate the crowd, and so on.


    The police officer looked at his heartless appearance, and was really annoyed, he couldn''t help reminding: "I know I shouldn''t interfere with your CCG affairs, but I have to remind you that this is already the fourth case. If you can''t solve this problem, I''m afraid that even your CCG can''t resist the pressure of the people."


    Li Yaoxiang raised the suitcase on the desk with Quinque, waved his hand: "Rx, I already have clues. This ghoul will nevermit the fifth case."


    Speaking, he went outside.


    At this time, Kaneki Ken, holding the handle in the stairwell, silently looked at Li Yaoxiang''s back.


    Police: Officer tightly frowns, also looked at Li Yaoxiang''s back.


    It''s just that the police officer noticed someone in the stairwell and looked back.


    Kaneki Ken met with the officer''s eyes, was startled, and ran back upstairs with a ''pat, pat''.


    ...


    In the room.


    Immediately after returning to the house, Kaneki Ken hurriedly closed the door, pressing his back against the door, panting.


    Li Yaoxiang: "What''s wrong? You care about that person?"


    When the police officer and others were dealing with the corpse, Kaneki Ken returned to the room, and his emotions had gradually eased. And when he calmed down, the thing he cared about most was the sound of Li Yaoxiang.


    This voice grew up with him.


    He couldn''t be more familiar.


    Therefore, even though he didn''t want to face outsiders anymore, Kaneki Ken still resisted the difort, walked to the stairs, and secretly looked at Li Yaoxiang''s main body.


    Kaneki Ken spoke inside his own mind, "Are you... him?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Are you talking about that ghoul investigator?"


    Kaneki Ken: "..."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Don''t think about it. When I was talking to you, wasn''t he also doing his own thing? How could I be him?"


    Kaneki Ken''s breath slowly eased.


    Li Yaoxiang: "What''s wrong? Worried I know your many secrets and want to kill me too?"


    Kaneki Ken scolded angrily: "Don''t talk nonsense! I never thought about that!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Don''t be nervous. If you have this idea, I will be very relieved. At least you are finally willing to confess to me, isn''t it? Through childhood, only I have been with you. If you don''t say it, no one will know at all. Actually, you don''t need to be so careful about me. Of course, if you want to deceive yourself and make your heart feel better, this is understandable... After all, the first murder... It really takes some time to get used to ..."


    When he heard Li Yaoxiang say that he was murdering again, Kaneki Ken''s emotions became agitated again: "I killed people, so what?! Didn''t you say it too? Their family''s death deserved it! I''m not wrong at all! If she didn''t take the money from my mother, she wouldn''t die! I wouldn''t lose my original home! It''s all their fault!"


    Getting Kaneki Ken this response.


    Even Li Yaoxiang main body walking on the street couldn''t help but show a treacherous smile.


    What he wants is that reaction!


    The previous Li Yaoxiang repeatedly pointed at Kaneki Ken to kill people again and again, in order to let Kaneki Ken truly face what he had done.


    Let Kaneki Ken stop deceiving himself.


    Only in the face of everything he has done, can he ept that he has killed people.


    That ''this Kaneki Ken'', will bepletely unable to look back.


    Completely fell into the bottomless pit.


    After all, people ... will get used to it? Now that he has already epted that he has killed people, he will gradually be more resistant to the feeling.


    Maybe in the near future, there will be a second or even a third time.


    Moreover, it can undoubtedly make Kaneki Ken truly honest with himself, which is undoubtedly the best result. It will be much easier to confuse him in the future.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Don''t be nervous ... I didn''t say you''re wrong? What you did before, I see it in your eyes. If you are really guilty, am I also not guilty? After all, I didn''t stop you from beginning to end, and even helped analyze it. If you really want to say that you killed someone, why don''t you say we killed them together? So, the two of us are in the same boat. You''re not good, and I won''t be good. I am you, you are me. As long as we work together more closely in the future, regardless of you and me, I believe that no matter how great the difficulties are, we can solve them together. This time is regarded as rming but not dangerous. At your current age, you can still get through. But next time, maybe not so lucky. I hope you can understand this truth."


    Kaneki Ken did not refute ''I don''t understand what you are talking about'' this time.


    There is no denying the statement that there will be next time.


    Li Yaoxiang continued: "Now I will ask you again. Revenge, how are you feeling?"


    Kaneki Ken did not answer.


    But that delicate smile betrayed his true thoughts.


    At the same time, it also means that he agrees with Li Yaoxiang''s statement.


    From then on, only when facing Li Yaoxiang, will he no longer hide his true thoughts in the depths of his heart.


    ...


    At the same time.


    In the evening 2nd day after the case.


    In XX district, XX post office.


    Li Yaoxiang wanted to take a postman away under the watchful eyes of the public. Some brave passers-by wanted toe forward to stop them, but Li Yaoxiang immediately showed his identification: "CCG is doing business, and the idle people will leave immediately! Otherwise, you will be treated as ghouls'' aplices and dealt with!"


    The crowd that had already surrounded Li Yaoxiang was almost like a startled bird, and the birds and beasts scattered. Looking towards the postman''s gaze, he couldn''t help bing afraid.


    Li Yaoxiang twisted the postman into an alley.


    Li Yaoxiang threw it to the ground.


    The postman looked terrified. He fell back to the ground and said nervously, "In... in... Inspector-sama, you ... you ... are there any misunderstandings between us?" What do you want to ask, just ask? How dare I not cooperate with you? Why did you bring me here?"


    After a while. In the alley, there were all kinds of ferocious and murderous words.


    Soon, the originally ferocious and murderous voice turned into a nervous, frightened, and helpless begging for mercy.


    "I beg you, Ghoul investigator-sama, I will never dare again. Please, please let me go. Yes! That''s right! I still have value. If I can help you attract more ghouls, then you will be able to make more contributions. Please let me go!"


    With the sound of begging for mercy.


    Li Yaoxiang''s telephone also rang.


    Ring! Ring!

 Chapter 234: You know too much

    Chapter 234: You know too much


    Li Yaoxiang held Quinque in his left hand and took out his mobile phone from his pocket with his right hand.


    "Hello?"


    Haven''t waited for him to react.


    The sound from the mobile phone is as loud as when the speaker is turned on.


    Shocked Li Yaoxiang had to remove the phone from his ear.


    "Third-ss investigator, Li Yaoxiang! Didn''t you swear to me that you would definitely deal with that ghoul? Why is another family killed now?! How do you ask me to exin to the outside world!"


    It was Li Yaoxiang''s immediate supervisor.


    It''s just that Li Yaoxiang chose to ignore the series of words that the boss angered next.


    Hold the right hand of the phone as long as you can.


    It wasn''t until the rage sounded that it was over, he handed the phone back to his ear.


    "Hey? Hey? Third-ss ghoul investigator, Li Yaoxiang! Did you listen to me?"


    Li Yaoxiang saidzily, "I''m here, I''ve heard it, I''ve heard it all."


    Li Yaoxiang''s tone and attitude really made the boss on the other end of the phone very angry. He thought that his saliva was almost dry, so Li Yaoxiang should reflect on himself and make some achievements, right?


    But as soon as he heard his tone, the boss knew that Li Yaoxiang didn''t say his words at all.


    This made him feel very sullen.


    Full of anger, nowhere to vent.


    Straight to give him angry gnash the teeth.


    "Good! Then what do you say now?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Don''t be nervous. Hasn''t the culprit been found? He is right in front of me now."


    "I tell you, this time, don''t expect to find some excuses at will, you can fool the past! I give you three days to deal with that kind of ghoul! Otherwise, I will... -Wait, wait, what did you just say?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "I said, that ghoul is now in front of me. Forget it, it''s up to you to talk to him yourself ..."


    With that said, Li Yaoxiang had handed the phone to the ear of the postman who could not move even a little bit.


    At this time, the postman''s eyes have already be white.


    At the spine is a protruding Kagune several meters long.


    No matter his appearance, shape, or posture, he is a ghoul who kills without blinking and has a ferocious nature. But now, in front of Li Yaoxiang, how could he still have the appearance of a ghoul?


    The whole person looks as if he has be a disadvantagedmunity that is being bullied.


    His face was full of fear and unease.


    If you put away that Kagune, maybe someone would really be deceived by the scene in front of them! Mistakenly thought that Li Yaoxiang was the viinous big boss.


    In the final analysis, it is because of his amazing terror-stricken Kagune, but now it was like a decoration, unable to exert the power that ''it'' should have.


    And this postman is also the initiator of the annihtion case of the aunt''s house.


    The reason why hemitted crimes in the same area so brazenly was because he himself had dealt with many kinds of investigators. Ask himself even if he is defeated, with his physical advantage, it is still no problem to escape.


    But in front of Li Yaoxiang, this idea turned into an extravagant hope.


    Because he has never met a ghoul investigator like Li Yaoxiang with strange ability. This sense of helplessness and powerlessness has never appeared since he learned how to use his Kagune.


    The strength of the ghoul investigator in front of him made him dare not have thest luck.


    There is no longer any idea of resistance.


    No, it should be said that even if he wanted to resist, he could not do it.


    The only thing that can be done is to think of what he is doing now, praying to Li Yaoxiang to show mercy and let him go.


    Of course, what he will always know is that the seemingly weird ability in his eyes is actually just a little Ninjutsu performed by Li Yaoxiang''s Limbo: Border Jail, the shadow binding technique.


    If let him know, Li Yaoxiang actually has more ways to brew him. Maybe, he is so powerful, he has begun to doubt his life.


    Doubt who is the predator.


    The postman didn''t think so much. He just heard the loud sound like the speaker was turned on. So he could guess from the phone is the boss of the strange investigator.


    He also ignores the dignity that a predator deserves.


    He immediately pointed to the phone and begged for mercy: "Sir ... Sir, I did it! I did everything! I did it, and I did all those cases!"


    The boss on the other side of the phone.


    At this time, he was confused.


    Li Yaoxiang iszy, but working together for many years, he knows that Li Yaoxiang will not use this thing to deceive him. So ... his subordinate has indeed suppressed the crimes ofmitting crimes?


    No, no.


    It was not this matter that made him ignorant.


    Li Yaoxiang has the ability to resolve this case, he is not surprised.


    To his surprise, how did Li Yaoxiang do it? In this period of time when I talked to Li Yaoxiang myself, how could it not be possible to escape or fight back? Why would you stay there and ask for mercy?


    Just recovered, and want to ask about the situation. But he only heard from the phone...


    beep--.


    beep--.


    beep--.


    beep--.


    Li Yaoxiang ended the call directly.


    The boss was stunned for a while, and then he failed to bear and threw the phone to the ground. With a click, the phone fell apart, and the boss corner of the mouth twitches, his face hurt.


    Li Yaoxiang of course does not know the picture on the other end of the phone.


    But even if he knows, he won''t care.


    Anyway, he does not expect to be promoted and sry increase. Compared with the attitude of his boss, he focused more on his own ability and whether he would be exposed prematurely.


    He didn''t want to cause trouble.


    Do not want to affect thefortable life now.


    So he ended the conversation decisively.


    Li Yaoxiang put away his mobile phone with a leisurely look.


    This normal scene, in the eyes of the postman, was terrifying. He knew that it was time for judgement, and whether he could survive, was only in the sight of the ghoul investigator in front of him.


    Willpower is extremely strong, without the slightest hesitation, admits: "You ... you ... you ... can''t kill me. I know that you CCG have a project to study ghouls! I know that your investigators can choose not to kill non-resisting ghouls! I know you CCG have ghoul shelters! I want to join this shelter! I voluntarily participate in your research n!"


    Yes.


    This murderer didn''t blink an eye, and the ghouls of several families were wiped out. In order to survive, even as an experiment, it is also reluctant to consider it.


    Li Yaoxiang pierced his ear with the tail finger of his right hand.


    Bounced.


    He didn''t look directly at the postman.


    Answered the question: "How much is one plus one?"


    Postman: "Huh?"


    The calm tone suddenly became a little impatient: "I am asking you, how much is one plus one?"


    Postman: "2...2...2?"


    Li Yaoxiang sighed helplessly: "Hey ~ you know too much ..."


    The postman really knew too much, and none of the living creatures who had seen Li Yaoxiang''s abilities were still alive.


    Quinque waved.


    The postman''s head fell.


    This is Li Yaoxiang''s consistent way of fighting over the past few years. First, a shadow shackles technique, and then Quinque waved with ease, without pressure.


    asionally, there is a little bit of fun, and joking about these kinds of things, it is regarded as adding some seasonings during work, making life not so boring.


    A call was made and someone came to deal with corpse.


    Looked at the time on the watch, it was not toote or too early, the time was just right.


    Off work.


    Another night of fun.


    Immediately, Li Yaoxiang left...

 Chapter 235: status, results

    Chapter 235: status, results


    After the event.


    This time''s "extinguish sect case", it can be said that it interfered with Kaneki Ken''s life for a period of time, causing him to fail to go to school and live his peaceful life in this period of time.


    On the second morning after Li Yaoxiang''s main body left, there were already staff from relevant agencies who came to the door again and said the same thing: "Son, do you have any other family members? Would you like me to help you contact them?"


    Thest time Kaneki Ken answered, it was his aunt.


    And this time, Kaneki can only shake his head.


    Gone...


    I have no family in this world...


    The personnel of relevant institutions and Kaneki Ken can be regarded as ''old acquaintances''.


    After all, this is not the first time the two parties have met.


    Didn''t expect to meet again in this way.


    Relevant agency staff looked at child Kaneki Ken is also very helpless. In the end, I had to take Kaneki Ken to a temporary shelter to see if anyone wanted to adopt Kaneki Ken.


    During this period, there were really a few families who expressed their desire to adopt Kaneki Ken.


    However, Li Yaoxiang was instigated in Kaneki Ken''s mind, which led to Kaneki Ken rejecting them one after another.


    ''What do you think ... why do you make people look at you?''


    ''Do you think you look cute? Cause they have to adopt you?''


    ''Or they don''t believe you?''


    ''Don''t have any illusions about these Lords, they adopted you only for the inheritance of your mother and your aunt''s family.''


    ''If you don''t want to experience the problems of your aunt''s house again, I advise you to dispel the idea of being adopted. Not every time is so good that there will be ghouls to help you solve the problem...''


    Yes.


    After the death of his aunt''s family, Kaneki Ken became the only heir to the estate.


    Although Li Yaoxiang could not confirm whether these people who wanted to adopt Kaneki Ken were genuine or hypocritical, this did not prevent Li Yaoxiang from pouring dirty water on them.


    After all, after being adopted by a new family, there are too many variables.


    No one knows whether this so-called new home will move away.


    Moving away, will Kaneki Ken in this life not be able to be a ghoul by chance. If he can''t be a ghoul and can''t touch the true dark side of this ghoul world, should Li Yaoxiang treat Kaneki Ken as an ordinary person to cken him?


    How to darken?


    How many green hats will he try on?


    It also


    Forget it, I don''t know how to say it.


    In short, in any case, Li Yaoxiang would not let such a thing happen under his own eyes.


    So care.


    Eventually, this scene appeared.


    Under Li Yaoxiang''s repeated encouragement and repeated reminders.


    darkening degree:


    27%...


    Kaneki Ken really felt sick about her aunt''s family and did not want to encounter the same situation again. Therefore, he resolutely rejected the good intentions of the personnel of the relevant agencies.


    There is no longer any illusion about those who want to adopt him.


    He imed that he no longer wanted to be adopted.


    He wants to live by himself.


    It''s a pity that his idea also doesn''t work.


    After all, thew does not allow the personnel of the relevant institutions to allow such a minor child to live alone, even if Kaneki Ken has the inheritance of her aunt''s home, it is inevitable.


    With little persuasion, Kaneki Ken eventually had to move from the temporary shelter to the nearby orphanage.


    There is no need to worry about living expenses or the cost of going to school in the future.


    Before he turned 18, the head of the orphanage was responsible for helping him collect everything.


    This result was not only satisfactory to Li Yaoxiang, but also to Kaneki Ken. Because Kaneki Ken doesn''t want to adapt to a whole new life.


    As for the question about the case, there is the Li Yaoxiang''s main body ghoul investigator who personally does a series of sweeping work for Kaneki Ken. The unremarkable child Kaneki Ken certainly did not arouse suspicion from others.


    Kaneki Ken can finally resume his peaceful life.


    And the time hase to the day before school resumes.


    By the creek.


    Kaneki Ken sat on the grass, holding his knees, calmly looked at the sunset in front of him.


    The sun goes down, as if to signify that everything is over.


    He finally no longer has to worry.


    The days of school can finally resume.


    At this moment, a shout came from afar: "Kaneki Ken!"


    A child of simr age to Kaneki Ken rushed over from a distance and jumped to Kaneki Ken''s back, making Kaneki Ken unable to bear, staggering with him.


    The personing is Hideyoshi Nagachika.


    Hideyoshi Nagachika: "After disappearing for so long, and without telling me, I finally found you here again!"


    When ites to ''again'', even Hideyoshi Nagachika himself was stunned for a moment.


    Yes, it is ''again''.


    This is the second time Kaneki Ken has disappeared in the life of Hideyoshi Nagachika for a period of time, and it is also the second time that Hideyoshi Nagachika found Kaneki Ken by the river in this way.


    For the first time, it was at Kaneki Ken''s mother who had just died.


    The second time, this time, is when the aunt''s family just died.


    Obviously, Hideyoshi Nagachika also understood Aunt Kaneki Ken''s family.


    That''s why I was looking for Kaneki Ken everywhere.


    Eventually, I came to the creek, a ce where Kaneki Ken likes to read books.


    Kaneki Kenughed: "I''m fine, you don''t have to care."


    Followed by, Hideyoshi Nagachika''s h h h h h h h h h h h about school, try to divert Kaneki Ken''s attention. Kaneki Ken on the surface sometimesughed and sometimes nods, very catering to Hideyoshi Nagachika.


    In fact, the focus is onmunication with Li Yaoxiang.


    Li Yaoxiang: "It seems he cares about you ..."


    Kaneki Ken: "Well, Hide is the only friend I have made in my life."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Oh? If it''s this friend knows your secret? Knows that you killed someone? Will you kill him too?"


    Kaneki Ken''s tone was calm: "No. He is my only friend. And, even if this really happened, wouldn''t you try to solve the problem with me?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "I hope so ... But if I really encounter this situation, I still feel that it is safer to kill him. Remaining such a potential threat is always uneasy."


    Kaneki Ken: "Forget it. Hide is only one person who will not change my mind. Because he is my friend."


    This is what Li Yaoxiang has achieved today.


    After going through the "frank and rtive"st time, in front of Li Yaoxiang, Kaneki Ken will no longer hide his true thoughts. And the way ofmunication between the two has turned into a ''discussion''.


    No matter what Li Yaoxiang said, Kaneki Ken would not be angry.


    They will express their own opinions first, and finally discuss together to reach a consensus result.


    So far, darkening''s preliminary n has finally been reached.


    The next darkening, if there is no ident, is the moment when Kaneki Ken is transformed from human to genus. However, until then, Li Yaoxiang will continue to influence Kaneki Ken''s mind and Kaneki Ken''s character in Kaneki Ken''s mind.


    Darkening little by little.


    He really wanted to see what would change after his improved Kaneki Ken became a ghoul.


    It''s exciting to think about...

 Chapter 236: Different Kaneki Ken, the plot begins

    Chapter 236: Different Kaneki Ken, the plot begins


    Time flies.


    Years are like a shuttle.


    In a blink of an eye, Kaneki Ken had already started college.


    In these years, whether it is Kaneki Ken, or Li Yaoxiang''s main body, their lives have undergone subtle changes.


    First, Kaneki Ken.


    He is over 18 years old and has already moved out of orphanage, living alone.


    And after Li Yaoxiang these years, after constantly ''baptizing'' for him in his mind, Kaneki Ken''s whole person looks very different from him in the original work.


    The most obvious is the temperament.


    Kaneki Ken is no longer that cowardly, found in manner.


    Although there is no change in clothing, and he still follows the gentle route, whether a person has self-confidence or not makes a big difference.


    Kaneki Ken has be more confident than he was in original work.


    With Li Yaoxiang''s talk through the microphone, you don''t have to keep everything in your heart and let out your imagination, and also be much more cheerful. Because of this, Kaneki Ken often gets different effects from the original work in terms of dealing with people.


    He made many new friends.


    Of course, the only thing he regarded as a confidante was always Hideyoshi Nagachika.


    Secondly, Li Yaoxiang''s main body.


    For others, it is good news.


    But for Li Yaoxiang, it was bad news.


    Because he got promoted.


    Sometimes, being too good is also an annoyance.


    The promotion; no matter how much he tried to, he couldn''t hide it.


    Over the years, he has still been sozy andzy in his work, but when his qualifications and achievements are reached, he still has to be promoted when he should be promoted.


    After all, the guy who joined at the same time Li Yaoxiang joined was either dead or disabled.


    If he is not promoted, no one can be promoted.


    CCG still needs these old birds to help bring newbies.


    So, Li Yaoxiang, who is famous for being zy'' in CCG, rose again and again when others were envious, jealous, and hate, and finally became a top-ranking investigator.


    Of course, Li Yaoxiang will not give in.


    When you should bezy, you still have to bezy.


    At most, one or two cases will be broken in a month.


    As for the matter of ''bringing newbies up'', Li Yaoxiang still went his own way. He habitually splits his subordinates away and solves the case by himself. Even his boss can''t do anything about it. In the end, he had to let him continue to be a loner.


    In terms of appearance, there is no need to worry.


    As long as he uses Transformation Jutsu to make himself mature and older, outsiders will not see any weak spots.


    Finally, it is the rtionship between Li Yaoxiang and Kaneki Ken.


    Because of the emergence of Li Yaoxiang and the death of the aunt''s family, the original trajectory of Kaneki Ken''s life was changed. After all, some butterfly effects were produced.


    Over the years, Kaneki Ken has been there more than once, and it is close to the ghoul.


    To prevent Kaneki Ken from bing the target of the ghouls in advance, he had to reveal his strength in order to save him. Li Yaoxiang also took the lead in exposing his ability to "recognize ghouls".


    This ability to identify ghouls was bought by spending some ckening points shortly after Li Yaoxiang became a ghoul investigator.


    And this ability can also help Kaneki Ken to escape the potential crisis again and again in these years.


    By the way, for the next darkening,id a small foreshadowing.


    This is all the major changes over the years.


    Li Yaoxiang waited so long, and finally waited for the beginning of the original work plot.


    On this day, Kaneki Ken finally asked his friend Hideyoshi Nagachika and wanted to take him to an antique coffee shop to see the so-called ''cute girl''.


    no doubt.


    This so-called cute girl is, of course, the major character in the original work.


    Kaneki Ken was able to be a ghoul through her Kagune.


    And this antique coffee shop is also a gathering ce in the 20th district, which is operated by a kind of kind.


    Kaneki Ken hase to this coffee shop more than once to see the girl, but before that, Li Yaoxiang, who has the ability to recognize ghouls, never warned him.


    Just let him, a teenager who has been single for more than ten years, flooded with hormones.


    On a street in a busy downtown area.


    Kaneki Ken holds a book created by Sen Takatsuki and stands on the sidewalk, waiting for his friend Hideyoshi Nagachika to arrive. Today, his eyes have be much sharper.


    TL note: Eto Yoshimura (Yoshimura Eto) is the founding leader of Aogiri Tree, having formed the organization in the decade between her original rampage and the beginning of the series. she is the One-Eyed Owl (Sekigan no Fukur), the half-human and half-ghoul daughter of Yoshimura and Ukina. Her human identity is Sen Takatsuki (Takatsuki Sen), a best-selling horror novelist mentioned throughout the series. Eto tried to be an author, showing her manuscript to Shunji Shiono. Though initially rejected, she was finally epted and adopted the pseudonym "Sen Takatsuki," beginning her career as a novelist, at the same time nning for her next move. Her first work, titled Dear Kafka, would go on to be a best-seller and help establish a strong following as an author. She published five other works before publishing The ck Goat''s Egg  the novel that served as the catalyst for Kaneki''s attraction to Rize.


    On the surface, it is no longer the object of bullying.


    Not much time.


    With an earphone hanging around his neck, Hideyoshi Nagachika, who seems to be walking at the forefront of the trend, appeared in the field of view of Kaneki Ken.


    Kaneki Ken hand sweeps, shouting: "Hide--! Here!"


    If he was the original work, he would never make such a move under the public ce with numerous people.


    He will care about the eyes of others.


    But now everything is different.


    He cares more about himself than others'' eyes.


    I care about whether I live happily, and live freely.


    Hideyoshi Nagachika trot to Kaneki Ken: "So on time? For the girl, you can be so diligent? Are you still the Kaneki Ken I know? It seems that the girl you mentioned is really too damn cute to be true. Then I have to take a closer look. See which girl is actually able to snatch you from me."


    Kaneki Ken shuddered: "Hide, please die. A person as good as me will not look at you. Also, don''t talk nonsense, even if there is no girl, why would I work so hard?"


    Hideyoshi Nagachika hooked Kaneki Ken''s neck: "Good for you, Ken, you bitch!"


    Not much time.


    The twoughing andughing on the sidewalk soon came to the antique coffee shop.


    Open the store door.


    Ring!


    Ring!


    The bell hanging above the door was struck.


    Followed by.


    Just a warm ''wee'' came into the ears of 2 people.


    I found a seat by the window and sat down at a location where I could enjoy the view outside the window.


    Different from original work, just sitting down this time, Hideyoshi Nagachika has already nced around impatiently, wanting to see which girl has taken away his Kaneki Ken.


    Hideyoshi Nagachika: "Which one? Huh? Is it her? Is that her?"


    Kaneki Ken quickly pressed Hideyoshi Nagachika''s hand pointing at Kirishima Touka, lowering his voice: "Hush! Don''t point! Not her!"


    Hideyoshi Nagachika: "That''s not her? She is also very cute."


    Followed by Hideyoshi Nagachika teasing Kirishima Touka and asking her name.


    Then there were two people who were all hung on the wall by the TV, and the reported homicides attracted the past.


    "Huh? It''s very close to here." Hideyoshi Nagachika was slightly surprised, and then turned around and asked, "Right, Ken. I have a question. I always want to ask you, are you able to distinguish between the two? I only recently discovered that several of the people you said to stay away from have been arrested by CCG."


    This is the case.


    Everyone in the shop paused.


    The mind, or the corner of the eye, are all subconsciously transferred to the two of them...

 Chapter 237: The deer rammed, the ditch was lit

    Chapter 237: The deer rammed, the ditch was lit


    The manager who is wiping the coffee cup, Yoshimura.


    Kirishima Touka who orders the menu for customers.


    Cashier at the counter.


    Even the customers in the store.


    All of them focused their attention on the conversation between two people.


    Kaneki Ken didn''t notice the abnormal atmosphere at the scene, took a sip of coffee, said indifferently: "That was just coincidence. It was just that they gave me a feeling that they were not a good person, so I told you to stay away from them. Well? It turns out that my feeling is right? As for the identifying ghouls; stop cracking a joke. If I had this ability, wouldn''t I have joined CCG long ago and put on an altar to be worshipped? Would I still stay here and drink coffee with you?"


    Kaneki Ken nowadays, when he speaks of lies, his face is not red.


    The highest state of lying is to make this lie even your own believing it true.


    Obviously, Kaneki Ken has arrived at this point.


    But what he didn''t know was that his words were heard in the ears of everyone in the coffee shop, could have killed him instead. There seemed to be a string of mocking words floating in the air.


    ''Little brother, don''t you feel that everyone in this store is not a good person?"


    After listening to everyone''s answer by Kaneki Ken, this put down the vignce in their hearts and restored the actions they should have, and restored the things they should have done.


    At this moment, the doorbell was knocked again.


    Ring!


    Ring!


    The person who came in this time is a protagonist today, Rize Kamishiro.


    Kaneki Ken, who was still very natural, was suddenly sentenced.


    Hideyoshi Nagachika extended the hand and shook it twice in front of Kaneki Ken: "Ken? Ken? What''s wrong with you? What are you looking at so fascinated?"


    Hideyoshi Nagachika followed Kaneki Ken''s gaze and looked back: "Is that her? That girl you said is very cute."


    Kaneki Ken withdrew his gaze and stopped Hideyoshi Nagachika: "Hush! Stop watching! Yes, it''s her. How? My eyes are good, right?"


    "Hey ~ Ken don''t be delusional. How could such a girl like you?"


    "Forget it, I will go first. This quiet ce is still not suitable for me."


    After talking, Hideyoshi left the money on the table and left the coffee shop alone.


    The situation after that is exactly simr to original work.


    Even if Kaneki Ken changes in his life, he is still a novice in the face of women. It will inevitably appear young and shy.


    But there is no such scene in original work.


    Li Yaoxiang looked perfectly clear.


    It was Rize Kamishiro who personally came to talk to Kaneki Ken. Otherwise, for a novice, simply impossible has the courage to get to know the girl and directly invite the girl out.


    He was approached by a girl, and she was also a beauty.


    To say that you are not excited would be a lie.


    So now Kaneki Ken, like original work, is so excited that he immediately dials a phone to give his friend Hideyoshi Nagachika the good news. Excited, even Hideyoshi Nagachika expressed doubts about how such a good thing happened to him, and Kaneki Ken had nothing to do with it.


    Forgetting that he was in such a dangerous world... A world of ghouls that feed on humans that look no different from humans.


    ...


    Time hase to the weekend.


    This is the day when Rize Kamishiro and Kaneki Ken dated.


    While Kaneki Ken carefully dressed his appearance, Li Yaoxiang''s voice rang in his mind: "Don''t you think it''s strange?"


    Kaneki Ken: "Strange? What strange?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Hide is right. How could such a lovely girl ask you out? Shouldn''t there be too many boys who want to ask her out for entertainment? How could she just look at you?"


    Kaneki Ken froze for a moment, didn''t care too much, and continued to look in the mirror: "You don''t understand this. You haven''t read Takasaki Sen''s book, it''s impossible to understand the excitement of those of us who are fans of the same book encountering bosom friends." However, Kaneki Ken immediately reacted again: "What''s wrong? You feel she has a problem?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "No, it''s nothing. I just want to remind you that my sensing may not be 100% urate. Maybe there''s a fish that slip through the?"


    Kaneki Ken: "Isn''t that too unfounded? If you want to get along with everyone, you have to wonder if they''re a ghoul or not, isn''t it too tiring to live? Even if you can''t sense it, I would have recognized her."


    Talk and talk.


    Kaneki Ken was already dressed up and went out with a heart.


    The dating site is still a bookstore.


    A dating ce that will be vomited by countless boys.


    After quitting the bookstore.


    The two of them went to a restaurant to eat together.


    Rize Kamishiro ordered 3 sandwiches.


    Without a few bites, she went to the bathroom.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Did you see it?"


    Kaneki Ken: "What do you see?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Didn''t you study the habit of ghouls before? If they eat human food, it''s like they''re eating rancid things. This Young Lady Rize won''t eat it after a few bites, don''t you think it''s suspicious?"


    Kaneki Ken stared nkly at the te of sandwiches in front of him with only one bite, and remained silent.


    After checkout.


    It came to the link to send Rize Kamishiro''s home.


    Throughout the dating process, the ultimate Big Boss, has always been hidden in the dark and observed in his eyes. And Li Yaoxiang, the spectator, also observes in the eyes together with the movement of the Kichimura Washuu.


    TL note: Kichimura Washuu (Wash Kichimura) was the primary antagonist of the Tokyo Ghoul series and the former Bureau Director of the CCG. He was involved in numerous organizations and responsible for several major events of the series. He was originally Souta Washuu-Furuta (Wash-Furuta Sta), the illegitimate son of former CCG Chairman Tsuneyoshi Washuu and an agent of V raised in the Sunlit Garden. While working as a Rank 1 Ghoul Investigator, he used the alias of Nimura Furuta (Furuta Nimura). He orchestrated the steel beam incident that gravely injured Rize Kamishiro and incidentally saved Ken Kaneki. Heavily injured, they were transported to Kanou General Hospital, where Rize''s kakuhou was transnted into Kaneki''s body.


    The Kichimura Washuu is a person with extremely strong desire.


    Seeing his childhood sweetheart, the person he likes, since he is so close to a strange boy, even if this strange boy is just a meal to Rize Kamishiro, Kichimura Washuu can''t bear it.


    So, things are here.


    No matter how big the change, Kaneki Ken is no different from looking for shit.


    Even if there is no rebar incident, it is estimated that there will still be other idents that happened to the two of them.


    While walking.


    Kaneki Ken finally sent Rize Kamishiro to a fork in the road.


    Rize Kamishiro will also guide Kaneki Ken to the darker path. If in the ordinary world, ordinary boys, there is such a beautiful woman to bring them to this kind of ce, it will not be very pleasant?


    It is often easy to be fascinated, looking forward to the arrival of welfare, and stupidly walked in.


    However, Kaneki Ken in this life, after many reminders of Li Yaoxiang, when he saw this dark road, he finally had a trace of sobriety, endured the impulse in his heart, and refused the Rize Kamishiro.


    "I''m sorry, it''s alreadyte. I''ll only take you here. I''m going back in a hurry."


    Rize Kamishiro was close to Kaneki Ken: "Why? Didn''t you say you live by yourself? I have no one at home today, can''t you stay with me for a while?"


    This made Kaneki Ken feel even more wrong.


    Just wanted to refuse.


    But Rize Kamishiro did not do it softly this time, but hard.


    Pull Kaneki Ken directly into the alley.


    Just wanted to call for help, he was covered by a powerful force. This forcees from the jade hand of Rize Kamishiro. Ordinary girl, how can there be such a great power?


    At this time, Kaneki Ken, how could he not know that Rize Kamishiro is a ghoul?


    But everything is toote.


    While the Rize Kamishiro was pulling him and covering his mouth, she even said in his ear: "Ken ~, you know how ufortable the feeling of a good food dangling in front of you for a whole day, right? You shouldn''t have the heart to go home hungry?"

 Chapter 238: special prey

    Chapter 238: special prey


    While speaking, Rize Kamishiro licked ... licked Kaneki Ken''s cheek, expecting Kaneki Ken to show a horrified expression. It was her usual pleasure before eating.


    She enjoys the fear she brings to her prey.


    Enjoying the frightened escape of the prey in front of her.


    However, the bystanders of the Kichimura Washuu, including Rize Kamishiro, were surprised that Kaneki Ken, a seemingly gentle guy, was not timid. Instead, he used his knee to m Rize Kamishiro''s belly While Rize Kamishiro was stunned, he gave her a full punch on the cheek.


    It''s a bit daunting to fight Rize Kamishiro.


    It is a pity that ordinary person is ordinary person after all.


    Even though Kaneki Ken of this life chose to resist and struggle, his power never failed to cause any harm to Rize Kamishiro, let alone let her loose.


    In response to the Rize Kamishiro, her cheeks were beaten to the slight side, and she slowly exuded from the consternation with an excited smile, and then slowly turned her head back.


    Widening her terrifying eyes, staring excitedly at Kaneki Ken: "Ken, didn''t expect ~ You made me surprised. Ken, your familiar eyes ... have you ever killed someone?"


    Kaneki Ken''s stern eyes are still firmly stared by God.


    Rize Kamishiro covered his mouth, making him unable to answer.


    He did not give up.


    Use your legs to swipe back and forth to kick Rize Kamishiro.


    His hands kept beating the jade hand that Rize Kamishiro covered his mouth.


    No effect.


    Rize Kamishiro twisted Kaneki Ken in this way and came to the alley near the railroad tracks. The noisy sound caused by the passing of the electric train makes Kaneki Ken here even if it breaks his throat.


    Rize Kamishiro threw Kaneki Ken to the ground.


    "To reward you for surprising me..."


    "Run away ~"


    "I give you a chance to escape."


    "I count to 3, and I will start chasing you when I count to 3."


    "Ken, please cherish this opportunity ~ Let me feel how much fun you can bring me."


    Kaneki Ken clenched the teeth.


    not saying anything further, turn around and run.


    But just after turning around to run, one of Rize''s Kagune had prated his thigh from behind.


    Kaneki Ken was not surprised.


    Or angry that Rize Kamishiro deceived him.


    In this life, he has never believed in other people''s nonsense so easily, let alone the ghoul who wants to make fun of him now?


    He resisted the pain and clenched his teeth.


    In an instant that Kagune pulled out from his thigh, he tried his best to escape!


    He is not willing! Not willing to die like this!


    Life is only getting better, how can he die like this?! What is ''it''s better to be hurt by others than to hurt others'', go to hell!


    The current Kaneki Ken is extremely eager to have such a person who can arrive in time to rescue him from the crisis.


    If he can escape the disaster in front of him, he swears that he will not be careless in the future!


    Damn it!


    While getting up and running away, Kaneki Ken did not forget to ask the countermeasure in his mind: "Do you have any way?!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "What? Is there any way? You are an ordinary person, how can you be a ghoul''s opponent? Forget it. Anyway, this ghoul is quite beautiful. It would be a good thing to die in her hands."


    Kaneki Ken: "Damn it! What use are you saying these obscene words now?! Aren''t you one with me? Isn''t it that I''m dead, you''ll also die? Can''t you help me find a way?!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "''Kay~, run forward."


    Kaneki Ken: "Run forward?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Yes, as long as you continue to run forward, you still have a chance to live."


    Kaneki Ken did not understand why Li Yaoxiang was so determined.


    But now he has no choice but to let go.


    Before running a few steps, Li Yaoxiang suddenly shouted, "Jump to the right!"


    Kaneki Ken froze for a moment, but he didn''t dare to hesitate.


    With all his strength, he lunged to the right, and a forward roll came.


    And at the instant when Kaneki Ken just flew to the right, the original position gave a loud sound of ''ng!''. That was the sound of Kagune hitting the ground.


    Obviously, this attack was aimed at Kaneki Ken''s other leg.


    Originally, Rize Kamishiro wanted to see Kaneki Ken''s two injured legs and struggling to escape, but he didn''t expect Kaneki Ken to escape her attack without turning back, which made her even more interested.


    "Hehe, hahahaha, Ken, you are so interesting! Your performance makes me a little reluctant to kill you. But I''m still hungry, what should I do?"


    "Run away, keep running ~"


    "Maybe if you struggle a little longer, maybe I''ll change my mind?"


    While speaking, Rize Kamishiro actually just walked slowly.


    And Kaneki Ken''s so-called escape is actually just limping.


    Looking at it makes people feel hopeless.


    But Kaneki Ken still doesn''t want to give up.


    With Li Yaoxiang''s help just now, he sessfully escaped a blow, which made him feel that there was still hope, and he didn''t want to die. In this way, the two chased and escaped at a very slow speed.


    In order to test whether Kaneki Ken''s dodge just now was a fluke, Rize Kamishiro raised a strong sense of jokes.


    Four dark red Kagunes rushed to Kaneki Ken without haste.


    Wave after wave.


    Kaneki Ken did not disappoint her. With the help of Li Yaoxiang, they were all dodged by Kaneki Ken.


    In the process, there is no time to even look back.


    However, as the blood in the thighs flowed more and more, his movements gradually became sluggish, and it became more and more difficult to dodge.


    From jumping and tumbling, it turned into a head-on to the ground.


    He fell to the ground from the front and turned to tumbling on the ground.


    Until the end, Kaneki Ken really had no strength to stand up.


    Rize Kamishiro wished to see Kaneki Ken crawling and running away.


    However, this kind of differential situation, Kaneki Ken, can no longer raise the interest of Rize Kamishiro. She walked slowly not far behind Kaneki Ken, and regretted: "It''s a pity ... Compared to other prey, you are indeed special. But your limit is only that... This is not fun ~ "


    Kaneki Keny on the ground.


    He had lost too much blood and could no longer move.


    With his side against the ground, his eyelids looked very heavy. The scene seen in the field of view is just the legs of Rize Kamishiro walking towards him.


    "Is it the end...?"


    "Didn''t you say that as long as I continue to escape, I will have a chance to live?"


    "Forget it, it doesn''t matter anymore ..."


    "Damned ghoul ... if I don''t die this time, I will definitely kill you ..."


    An instant when Kaneki Ken''s eyelids closed.


    ''Cang ng!'' A loud noise.


    Reinforcement, like original work, fell from a height and directly caused a heavy injury to the Rize Kamishiro.


    This position is not where the original work Kaneki Ken fell. But this does not prevent the old many cases from moving the rebar here and repeating the picture in the original work plot.


    Then, just like the original work, Kaneki Ken was taken to the hospital.


    Even though it was only a heavy injury to his thigh, Professor Kanou still used the excuse of damage to internal organs to transnt the organs of Rize Kamishiro to his body, allowing Kaneki Ken to start his new life ...


    TL: Akihiro Kanou (Kan Akihiro), often referred to as Professor Kanou (Kan-kyju), was a physician responsible for Ken Kaneki''s transformation into an artificial one-eyed ghoul, using him as a prototype for his ghoulification surgery.

 Chapter 239: question

    Chapter 239: question


    In the operating room.


    Di, Di, Di


    The instrument constantly sounded Kaneki Ken''s faint heartbeat.


    And Kaneki Ken, who has a strong sense of survival, seemed to hear the doctors'' conversation in the operating room.


    "Continue the blood transfusion, don''t stop!"


    "The wound on the leg is sewn, but there is internal bleeding in the abdomen ..."


    "No, no, the organ is damaged, he must get a transnt ..."


    "Doctor Kanou, but this ... this does not meet the regtions ..."


    "No way, as a doctor, I can''t let anyone die. I will be responsible for all this!"


    "Organ damage ... transnt?" Kaneki Ken in the mist, after listening to these conversations, roughly knew he was being rescued. But he quickly passed outpletely.


    Just remember, thest thought beforea was: wait... wait, don''t I just have an open wound on my leg, you cut my kidney?


    I don''t know if It''s because of being stunned or if the anesthetic is too effective.


    When Kaneki Ken regained consciousness again, he only felt that he was lying on afortable bed.


    Although he can''t wake up yet, his consciousness can alreadymunicate with Li Yaoxiang in his mind.


    Kaneki Ken: "I''m not dead?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Well, not dead."


    Kaneki Ken: "Is the organ reced?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Well, it''s new."


    Kaneki Ken: "..."


    I don''t know how long it has passed, and seeing that I still haven''t had the "strength" to wake up, Kaneki Ken naturally remembered the things before thea.


    He remembered the question that he was toote to think about.


    Kaneki Ken: "How do you know that if I keep running forward, I can live?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "I know more than you think."


    "..." After a moment of silence, Kaneki Ken continued to question, "If I''m dead, it doesn''t matter to you?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "You are me, I am you. I can''t survive if you die. Kaneki Ken, do you want to question yourself?"


    Kaneki Ken: "Don''te with me again! Even if I can live, it is so important to you, how many things are you hiding from me?! Can I still trust you?!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "What''s the matter? I am fascinated by beauty, and now I n to me me for the responsibility?"


    Kaneki Ken: "Beauty? Kamishiro... ghoul, damn ghoul!"


    Aftermunicating here, the indignant Kaneki Ken suddenly opened his eyes, and with the thoughts in his mind, he shouted: "Damn ghoul!"


    Before he could see what was happening around him, Dr. Kanou''s voice was heard in his ear: "Woke up? It seems that you have a bad dream."


    Kaneki Ken was somewhat stunned.


    After seeing Professor Kanou in front of him, he slowly sat up straight and looked at everything around him.


    Kaneki Ken: "I...is this in the hospital?"


    Dr. Kanou nodded: "Un."


    Kaneki Ken: "Doctor, I am in a misty state, and I heard my organs were damaged and needed to be transnted?"


    Dr. Kanou surprisedly said: "Oh? Didn''t expect you at the time, you''re still conscious. But this matter, even if you didn''t ask, I nned to tell you. It''s true."


    Kaneki Ken said nervously: "Didn''t I just hurt my thigh? Why would I need a transnt organ?"


    Dr. Kanou shook his head: "That''s just a wound on your surface. Some injuries may not be noticeable to you at the time. But when you were admitted to the hospital, the abdomen did have internal bleeding. If you haven''t gotten the transnt organ in time, you might have been in mortal danger."


    Kaneki Ken''s expression of unbelief was written on his face.


    But Dr. Kanou didn''t care at all.


    Impatiently wanted to record the current status of this experimental product, Kaneki Ken, after the operation.


    "How are you feeling?"


    "Okay."


    "Do you feel any difort?"


    "No."


    One question and one answer.


    It ended soon.


    The nurse also brought in the food for Kaneki Ken shortly after Dr. Kanou left.


    It is exactly simr to original work.


    Looking at the food in front of him, Kaneki Ken took a sip, only to feel very sick, and thenpletely lost his appetite. But he just woke up, and he mistakenly thought that he had just finished the operation, so he felt this way.


    He did not associate himself with bing a ghoul.


    Pushed away the food.


    Want to continue talking to Li Yaoxiang on the topic just now.


    But no matter how he shouted in his mind, he couldn''t get a response from Li Yaoxiang.


    This made him angry and anxious, but helpless.


    Simply fell asleep.


    In the next few days, Kaneki Ken still could not eat any food.


    At this time, he was finally nervous.


    He asked Dr. Kanou, but he only told him that after the operation, it was normal to not have appetite. Then there is no more.


    Hungry for a few days.


    In addition to having a bad appetite, there were no other adverse reactions.


    Kaneki Ken finally chose to be discharged.


    Went to the supermarket and bought a lot of his favorite food on weekdays.


    Go home.


    After trying the pile of food, he realized the seriousness of the problem. He didn''t believe in evil, so he choked up indiscriminately, but in the end he couldn''t bear the nausea that came from his throat, and he all vomited back.


    The whole room was left with only the vomiting sound he made on the sink.


    "Damn it!"


    "How could this be?!"


    Li Yaoxiang, who disappeared for several days in a row, finally appeared again: "You have guessed the answer, haven''t you?"


    Yes.


    He doesn''t need to see the habits introduced on TV shows like original work, so he realizes his problem. In this life, he had already researched the information on ghouls at the time of the ''aunt''s annihtion incident''.


    So he knew very well what it meant.


    It''s just that he is a good human being, and for a while, he can''t ept that he will be a kind.


    Kaneki Ken showed a greasy face, gnashing one''s teeth said: "You finally appeared? Where did the past few days you went?"


    Li Yaoxiang''s taste: "Of course I''m waiting for you to discover your status quo ~"


    Kaneki Ken was furious.


    Sweep all the food down to the ground.


    "Did you know long ago?!"


    "Why did not you tell me?!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Did you see your reaction now? If I tell you directly, you''d have such a perfect performance, you want to be reported to you on the spot? Do you want CCG toe to your door?"


    Kaneki Ken refuted speechlessly.


    But even if Li Yaoxiang made sense, he still could not extinguish his anger at the moment.


    Because in his heart, faintly has a guess.


    Kaneki Ken: "Kamishiro... That ghoul?! Did you know she was a ghoul!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Oh? Your IQ is finally back? I thought you were so fascinated that you shouldn''t wake up so quickly?"


    darkening degree:


    28%...


    29%...


    30%...

 Chapter 240: full of killing intent

    Chapter 240: full of killing intent


    "You knew she was a ghoul, why didn''t you tell me!"


    "Why?!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Little Ken ~ Little Ken ~ Actually, after years of thinking and analysis, I think that as an ordinary person, it is impossible for you to survive in this world with ghouls. If it were not for me to remind you, you simply cannot live today. But the problem is, you can''t always rely on me, can you? Don''t I need to rest? Worrying all day long, worrying that you will be eaten, do you know how tired I am? So, for your sake and for my sake, I thought clearly. Rather than worrying about which day you will be eaten, why not I let you be part of them? Then you have the ability to protect yourself, don''t you? Then you went from prey to predator, didn''t you? Well? Is my idea perfect? Now I feel much easier! You must think so, right?"


    Kaneki Ken scolded: "Perfect- fuck you! So many people die, why don''t you die--?!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Ken-- ~ You can''t me me? Didn''t I give you a chance? I''ve hinted to you more than once, but you are so fascinated by your Miss Rize that you can''t find out. me it- me yourself for being careless."


    Li Yaoxiang''s remarks made Kaneki Ken recall what happened before.


    Recalling Li Yaoxiang''s reminder to him three times and four times.


    He was angry, but he couldn''t refute it.


    The only thing he can do is to make a terrible roar.


    Fists, legs, or beat the wall, or kick the stove, trying to vent the anger that was about to overflow inside. In an instant, all kinds of noises came from Kaneki Ken''s house.


    The sound of ss breaking.


    The mad roar of the male.


    Percussion sounds, collision sounds, etc.


    Fearing the neighbors nearby, they did not dare to make a noise, and quickly locked all the entrances in the house, fearing that he would cause trouble.


    Kaneki Ken continued to destroy the items at home until almost all the messes in the kitchen were smashed by him. Then he made a sound like a beast roar: "Uh ~~~~! You''re a demon, you''re basically a demon! I should not believe you! I should not believe you!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Little Ken ~ Little Ken, if you say that, I will be very sad!"


    "I might be a demon to others, but how could I be your demon?"


    "I have been helping you all the time!"


    Kaneki Ken roared again: "Go to hell! Your so-called help is to make me ..."


    Roaring here, Kaneki Ken seemed to realize something, and instead of saying the words, he said in his mind: "Just turn me into a ghoul?! How will you let me live in the future?! You let me eat shit?! I tell you, don''t think about it! Even if I die, I can easily eat shit!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "What does it matter? If you don''t eat it shit, you can eat just ghouls or Kagune."


    Kaneki Ken gasped for a moment.


    What became the most uneptable thing for him was actually this "eating" problem. Otherwise, you can make your physical fitness stronger and get abilities. It is estimated that not many people in the world will refuse.


    Kaneki Ken: "Eat a Kagune?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Yeah, just eat Kagune. The reason why ghouls need to eat human is because they want to steal RC cells from the human body. Simply eating RC cells may not taste good, but at least you can continue to survive, right?"


    TL note: Rc (Red Children) cells (Rc saib) are certain cells that exist only in the story of Tokyo Ghoul. The origin of the namees from how each individual cell looks like a curled up fetus. They exist in both humans and ghouls. They flow like blood but can be as solid as teeth, and could be called "liquid muscles". Typically, a ghoul stocks Rc cells by eating people. Within the body, the Rc cells are concentrated and stored in a kakuhou. The kagune is formed by Rc cells that have been released from a kakuhou and have pierced through the skin.


    Hearing there is another solution.


    Kaneki Ken''s mood gradually calmed down.


    After calming down a bit, Kaneki Ken said again: "What kind of existence are you? Why can you conspire with outsiders to harm me together?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "no no no ... Little Ken, have you misunderstood something? How can I conspire with outsiders to harm you? The reason you got into the situation you are now is because I told you ''don''t stop''. From the moment you fell in love with Miss Rize, you were destined to have the fate you have today. I think the result of this destiny may be a good choice for both of us. So, I chose not toe forward to stop. Isn''t it good now? After you be a ghoul, you be stronger, then is your life safer, isn''t it more secure? So that I can live with more confidence."


    Kaneki Ken frowned: "What do you mean?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Hey, hasn''t your IQe back yet? Must I have to make it so clear? Simply put, you are being used as an experiment. For me, I just know that some people are conducting this experiment, and some people are silently paying attention to everything around miss Rize. Know that they have put you on the list of experiments, there''s no stopping at all. So many days have passed since the operation, have you not noticed the abnormality in the incident? Why are you only injured in the thigh, but in the end, you were transnted with ghoul organs. Why at the most critical moment, there happens to be a steel bar falling down, causing a serious injury to Miss Rize. Why has it been so long since it was clear that the extent of the damage to the ce was obviously caused by only ghouls, yet no investigator came to ask you about the situation at the time? Obviously, did all of this make it clear that someone was manipting behind the scenes and put things down? Otherwise, you just got an organ transnt from a ghoul, how is it possible that no one will interrogate you or monitor you?"


    Kaneki Ken breathes deeply.


    The anger in my heart slowly rose again.


    Kaneki Ken said sullenly: "Do you know who framed me?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Of course! Those who can do the above points are undoubtedly people in the CCG. And they must have a certain status before they canpletely suppress the whole thing."


    Kaneki Ken: "Tell me who it is!"


    darkening degree:


    31%...


    32%...


    33%...


    Li Yaoxiang: "Yo-! Little Ken, I''m also very excited to feel that you have such boiling killing intent-! But...let''s forget it. Now you are not the opponent of that person. Fhapor your sake and my life''s sake, it is impossible for me to tell you who the other person is. Lest you get a brain drain, you are going to die in vain."


    Kaneki Ken: "Hmph! Anyway, the doctor must have been one of the culprits. If I go to kill him, I wouldn''t have killed the wrong person, right?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "That''s true. But ... there are also people guarding around the doctor. Before you have fully mastered Kagune, I advise you to dispel the urge to retaliate."


    Kaneki Ken endured the anger in his heart.


    Silence for a long time.


    In the end, only one sentence came out: "What should I do to be stronger?"

 Chapter 241: practice, meet peers

    Chapter 241: practice, meet peers


    "Be stronger? No no no, that''s too far away from you. Compared to be stronger, you still have to solve your current hunger problem first. Didn''t you realize? Just now, the desire to be swallowed by RC cells has seriously affected your mood, which is why you lose control so easily. If you don''t eat, maybe you will mess up on the street."


    Kaneki Ken pupils shrank.


    He nced at the messy kitchen.


    Recalling the state just now, it is exactly as Li Yaoxiang said.


    From birth to the present, even if I have experienced the death of my parents, even if I have experienced the incident of the "aunt''s house", I have never had this level of runaway.


    It felt like some invisible power magnified his desire to infinity.


    Drive him without freedom to act independently.


    This is not the most terrifying yet. The most terrifying thing is that the feeling of hunger, apparently still within its own tolerance range, has not reached the limit level, this situation has already appeared.


    He couldn''t imagine what a terrifying monster would he be if he didn''t eat for a long time.


    Kaneki Ken: "Then what should I do now? Where can I find a ghoul? Where can I find a son?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "After you be a ghoul, you will naturally be more sensitive to the induction of RC cells. The RC cells of the ghouls are often many times more than the ordinary person, and you can naturally tell."


    Kaneki Ken: "Don''t say I became a ghoul! I did not be a ghoul!"


    Li Yaoxiang doesn''t care: "OK, OK, just be happy. Just you. Just before you go out, I suggest that you master your Kagune first, so as not to encounter any other kind. Even if you sneak attack, you won''t be able to beat him."


    After hearing it.


    Kaneki Ken did not respond.


    Start trying to pull that power inside himself.


    Before the surgery, as a human, he only felt that everything in his body was so normal.


    But after the operation, he always felt that there seemed to be a kind of power in his waist, as if he could summon this power at any time as long as he wanted to.


    He tried doing something around his waist, but nothing changed.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Kakugan ... Before you can use Kagune, you must first open kakugan."


    TL note: A kakugan (red eye) denotes a ghoul''s eye where the iris turns red, and the sclera ck with red veins across the eye and into the skin around the eye. The ghoul can enter this state by their own will, but this state is also entered when the ghoul bes excited, gets extremely hungry, or when they use their kagune. A kakugan is an influence of activated Rc cells.


    Kaneki Ken didn''t understand why Li Yaoxiang knew so much.


    But he was toozy to manage, toozy to ask.


    Anyway, from now on, he simply depends on Li Yaoxiang.


    With Li Yaoxiang''s reminder, Kaneki Ken tried to open the eyes.


    No teaching is required.


    He focused his spirit and strength on his eyes. Immediately afterwards, his left eye began to change at a rate visible to naked eyes. White''s eyeballs turned pale ck from inside to outside.


    Pupils, also from inside to outside, be scarlet.


    ''Kakugan open!''


    After Kakugan opened, Kaneki Ken only felt that the whole person became a lot more excited.


    There seems to be an omnipotent illusion.


    Sudden animal power at the waist!


    Kagune, who belongs to Kaneki Ken, did not disappoint him this time.


    Three scarlet scales suddenly protruded from the waist.


    Prating his clothes, like spider legs protruding from his waist, appeared in front of Kaneki Ken.


    Kaneki Ken: "This is my Kagune?"


    TL note: A rinkaku kagune (rinkaku, "scale-red") has an appearance simr to scaled tentacles and is released at the back around the waist. A rinkaku wielder has powerful regenerative abilities and some could even survive the most critical of damage. Its peculiar appearance and structure yields superior striking power and they excel in brute strength. Some rinkaku users are able to manipte the shape of their kagune, such as changing its usual tentacle form into swords or ws.


    Li Yaoxiang: "You don''t have enough RC cells, so you can only show three at the moment. If you absorb enough RC cells, you can summon four of them as powerful as miss Rize''s, and even surpass her."


    Kagune''s form is changed ording to the imagination of the host.


    Kagune''s control method is also based on the imagination of the host to move.


    That is to say, during the battle, your reaction must keep up with your eyesight and thought, otherwise, it will be a mess when you attack.


    Kaneki Ken was most impressed by Kagune, who was Rize Kamishiro''s.


    Therefore, Kagune he summoned came naturally to change in that respect.


    When Kagune first appeared, Kaneki Ken was really not used to it.


    Over time.


    As Kaneki Ken continued to practice and try, and this was not fighting, it was just to move Kagune skillfully. It can be said that it is very easy for every ghoul, including ghoul children, to move Kagune by thinking.


    So even a novice such as Kaneki Ken, he soon became familiar with the tricks of moving Kagune.


    No longer as messy as it was at the beginning.


    Various coordination and actions are carried out in an orderly manner.


    But in terms of strength, it is not so easy to master.


    He practiced for nearly two hours, and only then did he sessfully use the three scales to pick up the ss shards on the ground. Before this, it was either too much force, or too light and the mping was unstable.


    Kaneki Ken: "Well? This should be okay, right?"


    A strong sense of hunger made Kaneki Ken anxious.


    Li Yaoxiang: "It''s barely passing. But before you go out, I still have to remind you again. If you can sneak attack, then sneak attack. Don''t get too cocky. In terms of manipting Kagune,pared to other ghouls, you are just a novice, not even a child. Don''t let the RC cells control your emotions."


    Kaneki Ken: "Rx, my condition is very good now. I''ve been hungry for so long, and I can''t wait to taste these damn ghouls."


    After a while.


    Kaneki Ken changed his neat clothes and went out to wander.


    He looks exactly simr to him before surgery.


    His eyes are still so sharp and confident.


    Of course, in the past, he unknowingly exuded this kind of temperament. Now he is pretending to be calm. Because every passerby walking on the street now is iparable temptation.


    He could smell a strong scent from everyone.


    If it weren''t for his impulse to suppress his heart, he might have done something unimaginable long ago.


    Kaneki Ken: "Hurry up! How can I find the ghouls?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Just rely on the fragrance to find what you need. The ce with the strongest fragrance must be haunted by ghouls."


    The next Kaneki Ken inhaled forcefully every three to five steps.


    Try to find the target based on the strong aromaing from the nasal cavity.


    Kaneki Ken didn''t understand where he was going.


    He didn''t realize that there were fewer and fewer people nearby.


    Until the end, he came to an alley.


    The aromaing from this alley is the strongest.


    He walked in without the slightest hesitation.


    Just as expected!


    When he passed a corner, what caught his eye was a ghoul that was eating! The arrival of Kaneki Ken made this ghoul was also taken aback.


    This kind of life is like a mouse crossing the street in the human world.


    You must be cautious when doing anything.


    So when the ghoul was eating, suddenly such a person broke into his field, and it must be false to say that he is not nervous.


    It''s just that when he saw Kaneki Ken''s left eye, the tense emotions suddenly subsided a lot.


    He rxed: "Are you hungry too? I''ll share you some."

 Chapter 242: Yall be damned

    Chapter 242: Y''all be damned


    The one that is eating is called Kazuo Yoshida.


    He handed part of the ''food'' to Kaneki Ken, but he didn''t know that in Kaneki Ken''s eyes, ''he'' was the real food. However, the first time he encountered this situation, Kaneki Ken was inevitably a little nervous and a little ufortable.


    But that strong desire to eat quickly vanished all his nervousness and difort.


    Kaneki Ken took over the ''food'' and responded politely: "Thank you, that is really good, I really don''t know how to thank you."


    Immediately afterwards, Kaneki Ken pretended to be in the same position as Kazuo Yoshida.


    Sit on the ground on his knees and n to eat on the spot.


    Seeing this, Kazuo Yoshida lowered his vignce slightly and turned his head to continue the meal.


    But when Kazuo Yoshida just turned his head, Kaneki Ken''s rinkakus of the three scarlet had silently protruded and stretched from his waist, forming an arc.


    And the three sharp tips are aligned with Kazuo Yoshida''s back.


    puci!


    Kazuo Yoshida, who was eating, the pupils suddenly widened.


    There was intense pain in the chest.


    He stared down staringly at the three rinkakusing out of his chest.


    Then he turned away incredulously looking towards Kaneki Ken on the side.


    That look seemed to be asking Kaneki Ken, why? Why are you killing me? Didn''t I give you the food? Why do you still have to deal with me?


    The vitality of ghouls is very tenacious.


    Even if Kazuo Yoshida suffered such severe injury, he did not immediately fall, and even highlighted his Kagune, wanting to fight back.


    Unfortunately, Kaneki Ken did not give him this opportunity at all.


    With one blow, the three rinkakus puncture back and forth in a veryyered manner.


    Kazuo Yoshida wanted to ask for mercy, and wanted to ask why.


    But there is no way.


    Arge amount of blood flowed back in therynx, making him speechless.


    mming.


    Kazuo Yoshida fell on his food.


    Until the moment of death, he had doubts and shock in his eyes, and he couldn''t rest his eyes.


    Kaneki Ken''s heartbeat jumped very fast.


    This is his first real murder.


    No, or rather, kill a creature simr to humans.


    But even so, Kaneki Ken was still unable to adapt. After all, apart from the different ''food needs'', they also have a human appearance.


    They have human emotions.


    They can also reproduce.


    It can be said that it is not much different from human beings.


    So after the incident, Kaneki Ken never dared to look directly at the masterpiece beside him.


    But the strong feeling of hunger made him have to face the facts before him as soon as possible.


    He tried to adjust his breath.


    When his breathing returned to normal, he slowly stood up and wanted to harvest this spoils of war.


    It''s just that when he straightened his body, Nishio Nishiki''s voice came from his ear: "It''s really like shit. Other people kindly give you food. It''s fine if you don''t appreciate it, but to even kill him? A ghoul like you is no different to a beast to me."


    Kaneki Ken''s Kagune, was erect, and the whole person was vignt.


    Back and forth.


    The three rinkakus are in a fighting stance.


    "Who are you! Are you a ghoul?!"


    Ordinary person sees the situation in the alley, impossible will be so calm.


    Therefore, Kaneki Ken immediately considered Nishio Nishiki''s identity in this regard.


    "One-eyed?" Nishio Nishiki frowned slightly, then let go, "Forget it. Anyway, even if you don''t kill him, I would have killed him. Wanting to find food in other people''s areas, this breaks the rules, even if you''re caught, you can''t me them okay?"


    He didn''t answer the question.


    There is no intention to take each other in the eyes.


    Nishio Nishiki: "What''s the matter? Looking at your posture, want to do a fight with me here? If you insist on looking for death, I don''t mind sending you a ride."


    Say, a blue green tail suddenly stretched out from Nishio Nishiki''s tail vertebra.


    Just like a dazzling giant snake, wrapped around Nishio Nishiki from bottom to top.


    The tail end stayed next to Nishio Nishiki''s head.


    Kaneki Ken stared at Nishio Nishiki.


    Nishio Nishiki has a yful face and seems to have absolute confidence in his strength.


    The atmosphere in the alley was dignified.


    It''s just that Kaneki Ken quickly changed his voice, not only put away Kagune, but also changed his expression from hostility to kindness: "Sorry, I didn''t know that this site already has an owner. I thought he wasing to grab me. It''s because of the territory thing, that''s why I did it to him."


    Although Kaneki Ken doesn''t understand what this so-called ''territory'' is all about, it doesn''t prevent him from guessing the real situation from Nishio Nishiki''s only words and phrases to be pretty close.


    Nishio Nishiki also recovered Kagune.


    It doesn''t matter what it looks like.


    Followed by.


    Kaneki Ken took a few steps forward, walked to the corpse, and said politely: "I''ll take back my loot, you shouldn''t have any opinion on that, right?"


    "Oh, things like shit like this are rare only for beasts like you." Said, Nishio Nishiki turned and left, "Remember, don''t let me see you in this area in the future, or there won''t be next time. So nice to talk about..."


    Before he could finish talking, Kaneki Ken immediately showed off his Kagunes and aimed at Nishio Nishiki tounch the offensive.


    But the response and experience of Nishio Nishiki is obviously much stronger than that of Kazuo Yoshida.


    He was not attacked to the point like Kazuo Yoshida.


    When he noticed something was wrong, he immediately moved his body, which made Kaneki Ken''s sneak attack only to cut off arge piece of meat on the edge of his abdomen, and he would not lose the ability to resist.


    He jumped and retreated several times in a row, while keeping a distance from Kaneki Ken, he re-disyed his tail, covering his wound, gnashing one''s teeth said: "Damn it! Do you want death-?!"


    At this time, it was Kaneki Ken''s turn to y.


    Courting death?


    no no no.


    You ghouls are a bunch of damn trash!


    If it weren''t for you, I wouldn''t be like this at all!


    Since you don''t make me feel better, don''t think about it!


    And ah --- does this food matter too much? Since there is a chance to reserve more, then of course it is possible to miss this opportunity.


    Kaneki Ken did not answer the meaning of Nishio Nishiki.


    In his eyes now, ghouls only have the same function as food for him.


    It would be better if you can solve the food problem for a long time at once.


    Not saying anything further, Kaneki Ken was driving three rinkakus, and went straight to Nishio Nishiki.


    Suddenly there was a fierce collision in the alley.


    During the dodging process of Nishio Nishiki, 3 rinkakus pierced the walls of the building or paved stones that smashed into the ground, smashing the surrounding walls or the ground into potholes.


    It stands to reason that Wei He has a certain advantage in the face of Li He.


    TL note: a rinkaku kagune can deliver severe strikes against the slow koukaku, breaking their kagune and breaching their defenses.


    But the problem is that Kagune of Kaneki Ken used today is Kagune of Rize Kamishiro.


    And Kagune of Rize Kamishiro, in terms of quality or strength, is much stronger than the ordinary rinkaku. In addition, Nishio Nishiki was injured just by making a mistake, and his actions became a bit sluggish.


    Therefore, under some contest, Nishio Nishiki quickly fell into a disadvantage ...

 Chapter 243: different encounters

    Chapter 243: different encounters


    Nishio Nishiki at the losing end dodges and scolds: "You madman! You have made such a big move, you are not afraid to provoke the ghoul investigator?! If a ghoul investigator is provoked, you and I will not be better off!"


    Nishio Nishiki actually wanted to escape.


    But Kaneki Ken''s continuous attacks and obstructions, coupled with his abdomen injury now, made him not dare to leave this alley so rashly.


    Otherwise, if it is discovered or reported by the public, it will definitely lead to the investigation of the ''White Pigeon''. When the timees, even if he can escape the disaster in front of him, there will be a lot of trouble in the future.


    Because of this, it is best for him to negotiate with Kaneki Ken at this time.


    If you can''t negotiate...


    Then ... when the timees again!


    And Kaneki Ken also recovered from the crazy state after hearing the words of Nishio Nishiki. It''s just that he nced at Nishio Nishiki ''s bleeding wounds, and he dispelled his scruples. He persuaded: "Then please cooperate with me, and die quickly. If you die, there will be no more movement, right? You are dead, wouldn''t I just leave in time?"


    This sentence made Nishio Nishiki feel very angry.


    Originally thought that the mad woman of Rize Kamishiro was gone, he could live peacefully again, but didn''t expect this came a new lunatic.


    See the negotiations fail.


    Nishio Nishikiichi also had the idea of running away.


    As for the consequences...


    Nothing is more important than living!


    But Nishio Nishiki didn''t want to run away. Once he wanted to run away, he was caught in a gap by Kaneki, and once again attacked at his vital points.


    Blood is drained faster.


    This time is fine.


    Hepletely lost the chance to escape.


    The next battle is now.


    There was a mistake, and soon there was the second and third.


    Until the end, he was hit by Kaneki Ken''s strong whip like a whip, and the whole person flew directly back, hit the wall, fell to the ground, and could no longer stand up.


    Kaneki Ken came to him gasping for breath.


    There is no trace of pity for the kind.


    Today, all he desires is food!


    A lot of food!


    As long as he has food, he can continue to live the normal life he wants without being discovered.


    The three rinkakus are like hooks, appearing behind Kaneki Ken, aiming at Nishio Nishiki, and the situation is to give Nishio Nishiki a delight.


    3 rinkakus without the slightest hesitation to fall.


    But just as the three rinkakus were about to attack Nishio Nishiki, a great force suddenly came from the left side, kicking Kaneki Ken and Kagune to the distance.


    Smash into a pile of debris.


    It made Kaneki Ken so embarrassed. Got some skin injuries.


    However, with the rinkakus, it is the most resilient among many Kagunes. Therefore, the damage to Kaneki Ken''s surface was quickly repaired.


    He crawled out of the clutter angrily, trying to see who was attacking him.


    When he saw someoneing, he was dumbfounded on the spot.


    Then coldly said: "It''s you--? So you are the same?"


    Theing person is Kirishima Touka.


    In fact, when Kaneki Ken was walking on the street, Kirishima Touka had already noticed Kaneki Ken. She was curious why Kaneki Ken didn''t die, so she followed from the beginning.


    Seeing the pictures in the alley, she didn''t intend to meddle originally.


    But Nishio Nishiki and her are old acquaintances after all.


    She didn''t expect Kaneki Ken to kill Kazuo Yoshida was not enough, even Nishio Nishiki was going to kill. She couldn''t bear it, and eventually came out to stop it.


    Kirishima Touka''s expression is a bitplicated: "Why do you be like this?"


    Kaneki Ken: "Oh, why did it be like this? It''s no thanks to you, ghouls! What''s wrong? You want to help him too? I didn''t expect you ghouls to help each other."


    Kaneki Ken''s words angered Kirishima Touka on the spot.


    This sentence sounds as if they are mocking them as a kind of creature without emotion.


    As if to mock them as wild beasts.


    Kirishima Touka didn''t even hit Kagune.


    In Kaneki Ken''s field of vision, he saw Kirishima Touka, and she suddenly appeared in front of him. Without waiting for Kaneki Ken to react, Kirishima Toukaunched a series of attacks on Kaneki Ken without trace of politeness.


    The speed is so fast that Kaneki Ken, the novice, has no time to react.


    Kirishima Touka during this period was much stronger than Kaneki Ken or Nishio Nishiki.


    Kaneki Ken had no chance to fight back.


    At the end of the fight, Kaneki Ken was so weak that even Kagune couldn''t get excited. Kirishima Touka stopped the offensive. He grabbed Kaneki Ken''s cor and mmed Kaneki Ken against the wall. "Could it be that us ghouls should be killed by your humans when we were born, and should be hunted down by your humans?!"


    At this time, Kaneki Ken had already been beaten by Kirishima Touka.


    Tired.


    But hearing this remark from Kirishima Touka did not prevent him from showing disdainful eyes to Kirishima Touka.


    As if telling Kirishima Touka, yes!


    You are damned!


    You feed on humans, do you want humans to treat you kindly?


    Kirishima Touka understood the meaning in Kaneki''s eyes, grabbed Kaneki''s cor, raised it a little higher, and scolded: "Have you really learned about ghouls?! Not all ghouls are as you imagined! There are also a group of longings that long for peace, and have no intention of hurting humanity! They have never killed humans!"


    Huh!


    Kirishima Touka threw Kaneki Ken to the ground.


    Looking down at Kaneki Ken from a condescending position: "Although I don''t understand why you became like this, it''s okay now. Now you are no longer human, then you can feel our experience! Let you experience for yourself how cruel you humans are!"


    Said.


    Kirishima Touka turned to leave here.


    But just a few steps away, she left another sentence: "You n to eat Kagune, right? Although I don''t understand why you have this idea, it doesn''t matter what you want as far as I''m concerned. But if I find you doing something to my friends... Next time I will kill you without the slightest hesitation."


    Finished-speaking, Kirishima Touka left this alleypletely.


    During the two-person battle, Nishio Nishiki also left the alley with injuries.


    Both of them knew that it was best not to stay at a crime scene like this, where there was a lot of movement, lest humans find out that they were ghouls.


    Although Kaneki Ken is still a novice in the ghoul industry.


    But he also knew the truth.


    He was relieved, and chose to walk back to the two corpses.


    First of all, he picked up a part of Kagune to eat.


    It''s also very hard to eat.


    But at least it''s not as disgusting as ordinary human''s food, at least it can be swallowed.


    After the hunger sensation was resolved, his sanity finally returned to his normal state ...

 Chapter 244: visit senior

    Chapter 244: visit senior


    Kaneki Ken finally returned to normal, and subconsciously looked at everything around him.


    At this time, the alley still has its original appearance.


    There are potholes and gravel everywhere.


    It may not be long before someone wille to check.


    He looked at the two corpses in front of him.


    This is the second time he has actually seen a bloody corpse. No, third time.


    The first time, when the father was killed by the ghoul, he forgot this memory.


    The second time was what happened in his aunt''s house.


    The third time, this time he was in close contact.


    After fighting for so long, the difort when facing corpse has finally adapted a lot. Although I felt a little disgusting, but at least not like when I first started; I didn''t dare to face it directly.


    He found several bags and boxes and ''packed and taken away'' the remaining Kagune.


    During the whole process of ''packing'' or going home, he hadn''t exchanged even one sentence with Li Yaoxiang, and my mood seems very heavy.


    Along the way, he wasn''t found or suspected.


    He returned home smoothly.


    But when he closed the door, a few bags with princes dropped to the ground with a thud, he no longer could bear kneeling on the ground, and burst into tears.


    "Why? Why am I like this?"


    Yes.


    What happened today is simply not what he originally intended.


    In order for ''food'', he could be crazy to that point.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Little Ken, why are you sad? Isn''t it good now? You have the ability to protect yourself, and you don''t have to worry about someone trying to murder you in the future. I can also rx."


    Kaneki Ken cried a little hysterically: "But, this is not the life I want--?"


    Yes.


    Kaneki Ken in this life, his original life is better than the original work, after all, the problem of the aunt''s family has been solved in the early years. In addition to the confidante Hideyoshi Nagachika, he also made many new friends.


    So after bing a ghoul, the blow to him is far greater than in original work.


    Everything that was hard toe by was destroyed again.


    After crying for a while, Kaneki Ken''s mood gradually calmed down.


    Kaneki Ken: "Then ... Was that girl saying true?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Are you saying Kirishima Touka? That''s of course! They''re not much different from human beings. They also have human feelings and also have rtives and friends. The only difference, I believe you should have realized it? Feeding on human beings; they have to. The feeling of not being able to eat other foods, the temptation, and the kind of runaway after extreme hunger should be clear to you now. So, you don''t have to think too much. You only need to eat once a month, don''t starve yourself for too long, then you can still live your own life, and in the end, maybe you can still make some kind of friends! And... If you hadn''t be a ghoul, you can''t live in such a chaotic world without my help, can you?"


    Kaneki Ken froze.


    He recalled images of various ghouls approaching him.


    Indeed, as Li Yaoxiang said, if there was no reminder from Li Yaoxiang at the beginning, perhaps he would have died a long time ago.


    But he quickly shakes his head.


    Because even in a dangerous situation, he doesn''t want to be a ghoul?


    But the problem is that, even if he doesn''t want to, he has be this kind of thing, and it has be a fact ...


    What else can he do?


    Thinking of this, Kaneki Ken is even more eager to know what Kirishima Touka said, whether it is true: "Where do they all live?"


    Li Yaoxiang grinned: "Anteiku."


    Kaneki Ken''s pupils tightened, then ... never again.


    Feeling calm.


    Kaneki Ken started to clean up the mess at home.


    Finally, cut the "Kagune" into pieces, put them into boxes one by one, and put them in the refrigerator.


    After doing all this, he received a close friend message on his phone:


    ''Ken, remember not to skip sses tomorrow. Don''t leave after school, remember to apany me to visit a senpai!''


    Kaneki Ken with a heavy face finally saw a long-lost smile after seeing this message.


    On a mobile phone, the thumb quickly hit a few words on the screen: ''OKAY!''


    ...


    The next day.


    After school.


    Hideyoshi Nagachika screamed at Kaneki Ken from a distance, hugged Kaneki Ken, then pushed him away, and hurriedly asked him: "You bastard, you disappeared again! ying missing, did you take care of my feelings? Do you know if little bunny is too lonely, it will die!"


    Talk a lot.


    Although annoying.


    But Kaneki Ken enjoys the process that some people care about.


    He just felt warm inside.


    Then he made up various reasons, and promised that there would be no next time, Hideyoshi Nagachika only let him go, no longer haunt him.


    Kaneki Ken: "Right, who is the senpai you said? Who is it? What happened? How do I need to visit him?"


    Hideyoshi Nagachika: "He is senpai of the Department of Pharmacy, named Nishio Nishiki. I have to get some materials from him, but he didn''te to ss today. I contacted him, he said that the materials are in his house, let me go Just take it."


    Kaneki Ken: "Is this..."


    Hideyoshi Nagachika: "Oh, that''s right. This senpai talks a bit mean, when the timees don''t mind it. Let''s go after we get the information."


    After a while.


    Hideyoshi Nagachika brought Kaneki Ken to Nishio Nishiki''s apartment ording to the address given by Nishio Nishiki.


    knock!


    knock!


    knock!


    Hideyoshi Nagachika: "Excuse me! Is it the home of Nishio senpai?"


    ''Squeak...''


    The door was opened.


    What caught my eye was a lovely girl. Hideyoshi Nagachika recognized this girl, who was also a second-year senior named Nishino Kimi.


    Kimi Nishino (Nishino Kimi) is a former assistant for Akihiro Kanou who aids in his ghoulification experiments, the previous human lover of Nishiki Nishio and a medical student at Kamii University. Although she is aware of his ghoul nature, she remained loyal to him and kept his secret. After the Owl Suppression Operation, he left her in order to keep her safe.


    "Huh? Nishino senpai? How could it be you?"


    "Why are you at the home of Nishio senpai? Do you and Nishio senpai ..."


    Nishino Kimi didn''t seem a little nervous, but she still pretended to be calm: "Nishio is sick, I came to take care of him specially. You are Junior Brother Hideyoshi? Please ... please ...e in ..."


    Nishino Kimi did not hit the door and stood to the side.


    "Sorry to interrupt!"


    "Huh? Nishino senpai, what about the wound on your shoulder? It looks serious, doesn''t it matter?"


    Nishino Kimi did not flinch, and said nervously: "No ... it doesn''t matter, it has already been dealt with. I believe it will recover soon."


    Hideyoshi Nagachika disregarded and walked into the room.


    Kaneki Ken nced at Nishino Kimi. He smelled a delicious scent from Nishino Kimi''s shoulder.


    Seeing Nishino is not ufortable.


    It didn''t take long to hear Hideyoshi Nagachika ''s exmation: "Nishio senpai, your face looks too bad? Why not go to the hospital for a check?"

 Chapter 245: The others turns

    Chapter 245: The other''s turns


    Hear the sound.


    Kaneki Ken also walked in, not at all, taking advantage of the fragrance that came from Nishino Kimi''s shoulder. After all, Kaneki Ken in a hungry state is quite different from Kaneki Ken in a hungry state.


    Kaneki Ken in original work is because it is hungry for a long time, so it is easy to get out of control.


    Today''s Kaneki Ken, of course, will not be stumped by these small temptations.


    You don''t even need to wear an eye mask.


    In this way, Kaneki Ken walked in with his usual heart. But when he saw the so-called senpai in the close friend''s mouth, it turned out that he had been injured by him before, whether it was him, or Nishio Nishiki lying half on the quilt.


    Immediately a splendid scene appeared.


    In original work, when Kaneki Ken saw an instant from Nishio Nishiki in university, the first reaction was panic. He was terrified that there was a living ghoul in his university, and he was so close to Hideyoshi Nagachika.


    At that time, Nishio Nishiki even frightened Ken Kaneki with a yful look, frightened Kaneki Ken in the original work to the extreme.


    But Kaneki Ken in this life is different.


    Times change.


    Who will God forgive?


    Frightened, it was Nishio Nishiki instead.


    After all, Nishio Nishiki heard the conversation between Kirishima Touka and Kaneki Ken before running away. He was wondering why Kaneki Ken would rather make such a big movement, take such a big risk, and kill him.


    He thought Kaneki Ken was a lunatic.


    In order topete with him for territory.


    But I don''t think so, it turns out that this seemingly harmless guy actually treats him as a gourmet?


    Didn''t this scare him to tremble, hurry to run away?


    He absolutely didn''t expect.


    I have already fled home.


    How can there be such a good thing in the world?


    This guy who wanted to eat him appeared in front of himself like this?


    Why doesn''t it make him scared?


    How not to feel despair?


    Nishio Nishiki''splexion is even paler now than before.


    Even his dry lips shuddered uncontrobly. In my mind, I have already made up my own brains that in the eyes of Kaneki Ken, it seems to be a delicious meal, lying on the ground obediently, waiting for Kaneki Ken to enjoy slowly.


    On the contrary, Kaneki Ken?


    Not only is the timid, cowardly, and scared in original work gone.


    After the recovery came, he felt an inexplicable anger in his heart.


    Combining Nishino Kimi''s wound, and Nishio Nishiki called Hideyoshi Nagachika toe up and get the information, isn''t it obvious that this seriously injured ghoul is ying on his friend''s mind?


    At this time, Kaneki Ken was even fortunate that he had be a ghoul.


    Get this kind of power.


    Otherwise, judging by the close rtionship between the close friend Hideyoshi Nagachika and this kind of ghoul, isn''t the close friend be the target of this ghoul sooner orter?


    Will Hide be killed sooner orter?


    2 people and 4 eyes.


    Hideyoshi Nagachika broke the awkward atmosphere at this time: "Nishio senpai, this is the best friend I told you, Kaneki Ken. Ken, he is the Nishio senpai I mean."


    Kaneki Ken suppresses the anger in his heart, and the skin smiles and the meat does not smile: "Please also take care of me a lot, Ni-shi-o senpai."


    This sentence is normal in everyone''s ears.


    But it entered Nishio Nishiki''s ears, it results in a different taste.


    Frightened that he couldn''t help swallowed saliva.


    He faltered and said: "Yes ... Yes ... I''m sorry, I''m not feeling well today, I can''t entertain you. The materials are ready, let Kimi give you."


    The implication is to chase them away.


    But Hideyoshi Nagachika said very uninterestingly: "no no no, how can I trouble Kimi senpai? Just take me there, and I''ll get it myself."


    With that, he turned his head to the side and said: "Ken, you apany Nishio Nishiki senpai first, I will go back as soon as I go."


    Hideyoshi Nagachika didn''t give Nishio Nishiki the opportunity to refuse, just walk away from each minding their own business.


    Nishino Kimi didn''t know Kaneki Ken''s identity, and felt that it would be possible to stay close to Hideyoshi and let his lover get along with an ''ordinary person'' alone.


    After all, their original n was actually like Kaneki Ken''s guess.


    Hideyoshi Nagachika as food.


    After there were only 2 people left in the room, Kaneki Ken yed: "Miss wound, should it be your masterpiece? Didn''t expect ... did you have a real feeling for human beings? Not willing to eat her? Or do you have her under your grasp, so you can force her to do these things for you?"


    Nishio Nishiki said with clenched teeth: "What the hell do you want...?"


    Kaneki Ken sneered: "Oh, haven''t you heard? I am Hide''s best friend. You want to eat my best friend, I wonder what do you think I should do?"


    Nishio Nishiki was disdainful.


    Kaneki Ken didn''t believe that he had no real rtionship with Nishino Kimi.


    He also did not believe that Kaneki Ken and Hideyoshi Nagachika had a real rtionship.


    He believed that Kaneki Ken was just treating Hideyoshi Nagachika as food preparation.


    But now that the fish is on the cutting board, there is nothing to debate. He hesitated for a moment, then lowered his posture and said, "What do you want? Juste at me. She is innocent, I hope you don''t hurt her and let her go."


    Kaneki Ken: "Innocent? She nned with you to murder Hide, is this also called innocent?"


    Kaneki Ken''s idea is actually very simple.


    If all the people who endangered Hide were solved, it would be over.


    After all, if you want to kill someone, then you must have the consciousness of being killed, right?


    Are you only allowed to kill others, but not others allowed to kill you?


    Everyone understands this truth. But Kaneki Ken is so ruthless and cruel in Nishio Nishiki''s eyes, and his face is ck to the extreme.


    Chat here.


    Hideyoshi Nagachika happened toe back at this time: "Huh? What are you talking about so much? Didn''t expect Ken, do you get along well with senpai? Nishio senpai, the information has been taken, then we will not disturb you to rest. Visit you again next time."


    Also entering the room, there is Nishino Kimi.


    But she was a little stunned, why her boyfriend did not eat Kaneki Ken.


    But this confusion quickly turned into an embarrassing smile, and just sent Kaneki Ken and Hideyoshi Nagachika to leave the house.


    After the two leave.


    Nishino Kimi did not return to the house with a little nervousness.


    But she didn''t wait for him to start to talk and asked why Nishio Nishiki didn''t do it, but was directly interrupted by Nishio Nishiki: "Quick! Quickly help me leave here!"


    Nishino Kimi: "This..."


    Nishio Nishiki: "Don''t ask, leave before you talk!"


    Nishino Kimi: "Where are we going?"


    After a moment of hesitation, Nishio Nishikidao said: "...Anteiku!"


    After a while.


    Both didn''t even pack their luggage. Nishino Kimi limped to Nishio Nishiki and rushed to the Anteiku. When there was still some distance from the Anteiku, Nishio Nishiki pushed away Nishino Kimi and drove her away.


    After all, Anteiku are all ghouls.


    The most feared thing is that their identities are discovered by human beings.


    Fear of affecting their real life.


    Originally, Nishino Kimi was unwilling to be separated from Nishio Nishiki, but Nishio Nishiki finally used the means of coercion, and Nishino Kimi had to leave reluctantly.


    After Nishino Kimi did notpletely disappear in his field of view.


    Nishio Nishiki then took the body of the differential situation, put down his face, and went into the Anteiku for help.

 Chapter 246: Understanding each other

    Chapter 246: Understanding each other


    The scene returns to Kaneki Ken.


    In other words, after he and Hideyoshi Nagachika were separated, they immediately returned to Nishio Nishiki''s residence.


    It is a pity that it is still a stepte.


    When he broke into the house, there was no one in the house.


    Search to no avail.


    He had to leave and return home.


    As soon as he entered the house, Li Yaoxiang''s voice sounded in my mind: "What''s the matter? Did you feel disappointed if you didn''t kill that ghoul?"


    Kaneki Ken: "Why should I be disappointed?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Oh? Don''t you care about his life or death?"


    Kaneki Ken: "I only care about the safety of Hide''s life. Whether he died or not, it has nothing to do with me. As long as he disappears in Hide''s life and no longer approaches Hide, as far as I''m concerned, it is enough. Of course, if I find that he dares to appear in this area, he won''t be so lucky next time."


    Kaneki Ken, who is "full," is indeed quite sensible.


    Did not be a bloodthirsty demon.


    Li Yaoxiang was not surprised by this.


    But how could his secret mastermind make things so easy to end?


    Where did Nishio Nishiki escape, of course, it is impossible to escape his discernment.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Then ... when are you going to see the situation in Anteiku?"


    Kaneki Ken: "..."


    When ites to Anteiku, Kaneki Ken''s heart is still veryplicated. Not long ago, he was still a human who would do anything. Unexpectedly, as a human being, he would actually want to learn about ghouls and integrate into the life circle of this ghoul.


    How ironic it sounds.


    But he had to go to understand, after all, he is now one of the circles.


    It is necessary for him to know what the real situation is, and in the future, what should he do ...


    ...


    A few dayster.


    Consider for a long time.


    On this day, Kaneki Ken finally made a firm resolution and went to Anteiku, wanting to understand the truth of the matter.


    Ring! Ring!


    The Anteiku doorbell was ringing.


    As soon as he entered the door, Kaneki Ken saw a scene that surprised him.


    Because he saw that Nishio Nishiki was wearing a waiter''s costume, as if everything was fine, even the wounds on his body were gone, serving the guests in the store.


    Seeing his Nishio Nishiki was also stunned.


    But waiting for Kaneki Ken, as the manager of the Anteiku, Yoshimura has already walked to Kaneki Ken, blocking the field of view of Kaneki Ken: "Are you called Kaneki Ken, right? You may be confused, but pleasee up with me. Well, I''ll let you know everything you want to know."


    Kaneki Ken looked at the eyes of the shop staff and customers all around, and finally chose topromise.


    This is not the case even if it is trying to make it difficult.


    He followed Yoshimura to the second floor of the Anteiku shop.


    During this period, he couldn''t help showing his unsightly eyes to Nishio Nishiki.


    Nishio Nishiki shook his head and smiled bitterly.


    Arrived to the Anteiku 2nd floor.


    In a reception room.


    Not long after sitting down, the door was opened again.


    What came to my mind was that, as soon as ss was over, Kirishima Touka came to work as Anteiku.


    Both were stunned.


    Immediately, Kirishima Touka looked towards Kaneki Ken with a disgusted look: "It''s you--? Why are you here?"


    Kaneki Ken did not respond.


    But Yoshimura made a round for Kaneki Ken.


    Yoshimura: "Touka, please go downstairs and make a cup of coffee for Ken. Let me have a good talk with Ken here."


    Kirishima Touka: "Mr. Yoshimura, but he ..."


    Yoshimura shake one''s head, instructing her to stop talking.


    Kirishima Touka nced at Kaneki Ken, then swallowed his anger back into his stomach and walked downstairs obediently.


    Yoshimura turned his head and looked towards Kaneki Ken with a smile: "You came here this time, wouldn''t it be for Nishio Nishiki?"


    Kaneki Ken faithfully shaking his head.


    Yoshimura: "What is your purpose? After learning that Touka is working here, would you like to know what she said is true?"


    Kaneki Ken brows slightly wrinkle.


    He felt a little ufortable when the ghoul in front of him saw through his mind.


    But he still nodded.


    Yoshimura: "Actually Touka is right. We are different from human beings, in fact we are no different, we have human emotions, and not all of us are as murderous as you think. In this world, there are many other ghouls that long for peaceful coexistence with humanity. And this shop I founded is just a gathering ce for people who long for peaceful coexistence with human beings."


    Hear this remark.


    Kaneki Ken subconsciously revealed a sneered disdain.


    Craving for peaceful coexistence?


    Really long for peaceful coexistence, Rize Kamishiro ... How can that ghoul of attack me?


    As if seeing Kaneki Ken''s thoughts, Yoshimura directly replied: "Of course, there are some exceptions. Although we can''t stop them, we can let them get more contact with the peaceful life here, maybe it can affect their ideas?"


    Kaneki Ken sneered: "Peaceful coexistence? Isn''t the ghouls only able to feed on humans? Since they can only feed on humans, how can peaceful coexistence be possible?"


    Yoshimura: "Every day, there are many human beings who die naturally andmit suicide. The ghouls do not need to eat often. As long as we recover these corpses, it is enough to maintain our daily life. It is not necessary to kill humans. The gathering ce I created has been dealing with these things. As long as it is a species, we are happy to provide them with food and help. This can at least reduce the number of times they go out to hunt humans, right?"


    Listened to it.


    Kaneki Ken was silent this time.


    No longer showing disdain.


    The truth is exactly what the store manager said. If the store manager''s words are true, the ghouls can survive without harming humans.


    There is indeed hope for peaceful coexistence with humanity.


    Thinking about it.


    The door was knocked.


    Kirishima Touka pushed the door and walked in, handing a cup of coffee to Kaneki Ken coldly.


    The reason why Kaneki Ken''s impression is so bad is because in Kaneki Ken''s words, he treats the species as monsters that only eat humans.


    This is something she cannot tolerate.


    So she is still angry.


    Kaneki Ken ignored her.


    Brows tightly frowns and looked at the coffee.


    His first thought was whether there was something in the coffee that he didn''t want to touch.


    Yoshimura said with a slight smile: "Rx, this is just ordinary coffee. Try it."


    Kaneki Ken took the cup and tasted it with a little hesitation.


    Then there was a surprised expression.


    Since the surgery, I haven''t experienced such a normal taste for a long time.


    Without waiting for him to ask questions, Yoshimura directly puzzled him: "Coffee is also the only kind of taste we can taste exactly the same as you humans."

 Chapter 247: Change position, the protagonist destroys

    Chapter 247: Change position, the protagonist destroys


    Kaneki Ken felt the sweet and bitter taste from his tongue and the strong coffee smell from his throat, which inevitably touched him. And his touched expression was also in the eyes of Yoshimura.


    Yoshimura said: "On the basis of the words of a few of us, maybe you will still be suspicious. Seeing is believing. If you really want to know the truth, it is better to work here and integrate into our lives. When the timees, maybe you will have a different view of us."


    Kirishima Touka cries out in surprise: "Mr. Yoshimura ...!"


    Obviously, she was very reluctant to work with Kaneki Ken, a man who looked down on other ghouls.


    But Yoshimura shook his head at her.


    She had no choice but to hold back the words into her belly.


    Coldly snorted and left the reception room directly.


    Yoshimura: "That child Touka, is not usually like this. After you have been with each other for a long time and understand each other, you should be able to resolve the misunderstanding between the two of you. My suggestion to you, you may wish to go back and think about it. As for Nishio Nishiki thing... He didn''t know that he is your best friend, so he thought about your best friend unreasonably. Now that he knows that it is your best friend, of course he won''t do anything with him. Forget your business. I will restrain him well and will not let him mess up again."


    Although Kaneki Ken didn''t respond and only tightly frowns. But apparently, he agreed to the request of Yoshimura, and he cancelled off with Nishio Nishiki''s grievances.


    After all, he wants one step further to understand what kind of life he has, so he has to be integrated here, and he can''t be upset with ''Anteiku''.


    After seeing this, Yoshimura was very good, so he stood up and left the room and went downstairs to continue to visit the store.


    Before leaving, don''t forget to remind: "Yes, this cup of coffee, even if I asked you. You can drink slowly, and leave after you finish. If you think about it and have a decision, you cane back and find me at any time. My door here is always open for you." He paused. Continue to say: "Also, I don''t know why you have the idea of eating Kagune, but I advise you, this action can be avoided. I don''t know if eating Kagune has any side effects on your body. But if you start unscrupulously with the ghouls, when the timees, whether it is a human or a kind, you may no longer have your ce. You will be everyone''s target."


    Finished-speaking.


    Yoshimura left the reception room.


    Kaneki Ken was thinking about the problem just now, and slowly savoring the cup of long-lost delicious coffee.


    After drinking, Kaneki Ken went downstairs on his own.


    The action of going downstairs rmed some people in the store.


    Yoshimura nodded and smiled at him.


    Nishio Nishiki did not even look at him.


    Kirishima Touka red fiercely at him.


    All of this was seen by Kaneki Ken. Without much thought, he stayed here for a while and left.


    ...


    A few dayster.


    Kaneki Ken pondered again and again, and finally decided to work in Anteiku shop.


    In the following days, what Kaneki Ken saw in the Anteiku is indeed just like what Yoshimura and Kirishima Touka said. There are many ghouls here, all of which rely on picking up corpses to live.


    Will not kill people at will.


    In addition to their different foods, they really live a life simr to humans.


    Will go to work, sses, etc.


    Have their own family.


    After seeing this, Kaneki Ken''s views on the ghouls have changed a bit unconsciously.


    No longer as prejudiced as before.


    Because of Kaneki Ken''s changes, Kirishima Touka''s attitude towards him has gradually changed a lot, and the rtionship between the two parties is much better.


    Until one day, Anteiku came to a mother and daughter.


    The mother is called Fueguchi Ryoko.


    The daughter is called Fueguchi Hinami.


    Ryouko Fueguchi (Fueguchi Ryko) was the wife of Asaki Fueguchi and the mother of Hinami Fueguchi who was known as suspect Number 73 in CCG''s files. She was killed by First ss Ghoul Investigator Kureo Mado.


    Hinami Fueguchi (Fueguchi Hinami) is a ghoul whose parents, Asaki and Ryouko Fueguchi, were killed by ghoul investigators. After the event she began to share strong pseudo-sibling rtionships with both Ken Kaneki and Touka Kirishima.


    Kaneki Ken''s attitude towards the ghoul waspletely changed.


    This was his first close encounter with a ghoul child. It waspletely different from what he imagined. Ghoul children are no different from human children.


    They are also so naive and brilliant.


    Has a pure innocence.


    Moreover, Fueguchi''s humble encounter caused Kaneki Ken''spassion.


    Because it is a ghoul, not only can it not go to school like a normal human being, but reading and literacy has be a problem. Even if you want to live a normal life, you need to hide and avoid the ghoul investigators.


    Hearing the experience of the two mother and daughter, this made Kaneki Ken feel unpleasant.


    Notpletely sympathetic to them.


    Kaneki Ken even thought of himself.


    I was made into a ghoul, and I didn''t want to be a ghoul, do I have to live such a life of hiding in the future?


    Should my children be treated like this?


    Why?


    Why am I suffering?


    And those culprits are on the loose, and no one cares?


    Even Kaneki Ken himself didn''t know that he felt ufortably with Fueguchi Hinami in his unconsciously, even he didn''t realize that he had gradually taken a stand on this world.


    He even volunteered to teach Fueguchi to learn literacy in his free time.


    This makes the little child happy.


    Because of Kaneki Ken''s move.


    Since then, the Anteiku shop has finally regarded Kaneki Ken as ''part of them''.


    Kirishima Touka is no longer like the original work, he is reluctant to take Kaneki Ken to make a ''one-eyed mask'', but is very happy to be a guide for Kaneki Ken.


    The rtionship between the two has once again sublimated and be more trusting in each other.


    She will even begin to teach Kaneki Ken some fighting skills.


    Kaneki Ken''s life can be described as far more exciting and fulfilling than when he was still human.


    In this way, this time of no worries and carefree has passed for a while.


    Kaneki Ken''s activities are exactly simr to usual. Go to university in the morning and go to Anteiku shop to work after ss. When there are no guests, teach Fueguchi to learn literacy and go home as usual after work.


    It''s just that when he went home, opened the refrigerator, and nned to eat Kagune to fill his hunger. ...


    Open the box and look at it.


    Only then did Kagune, who was stored, find that there is not much left.


    He gaze at the box that was about to bottom, and remained silent for a long time.


    Finally, as soon as the teeth were clenched, the box was closed and the box was put back into the refrigerator.


    And as soon as he finished this action, Li Yaoxiang''s voice sounded in his mind: "What''s wrong? The rtionship with the ghoul has be better. Aren''t you going to eat Kagune? Afraid to continue to deal with other kinds of other ghouls? And that it will destroy the hard-earned love of Anteiku?"


    Kaneki Ken: "Yes and what? Isn''t it still possible to drink coffee to suppress that hunger? And, with only the remaining Kagune, if I eat slowly, I can maintain a period of time, isn''t it?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Oh? It seems that my little Ken really attaches great importance to this kind of feelings with these groups of people-~ But ... Little Ken, little Ken, since you forgot, do you need me to remind you, how the hell did your father die?"

 Chapter 248: Ken Kanekis decision

    Chapter 248: Ken Kaneki''s decision


    Kaneki Ken brows tightly frowns: "What do you mean?"


    Speaking of his father''s death, Kaneki Ken somehow has a sense of inexplicable fear. He couldn''t remember how father died, but he knew that a very terrifying thing happened.


    A thing that made him afraid to remember.


    Li Yaoxiang: "The cause of your father''s death... You subconsciously chose to forget this thing, but I can see perfectly clear--"


    Kaneki Ken swallowed saliva.


    Not questioning.


    Because he knows that Li Yaoxiang will reveal the answer soon.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Seeing that you are getting along so well with others now, I still have to remind you so that you won''t regret it when you restore your memory in the future.


    You...


    Your father was killed by the ghoul.


    And he was killed in front of you.


    He died to save you.


    If it weren''t for the ghoul investigator to arrive in time, you might not be able to live now."


    Plop!


    plop !


    The heartbeat sounded through my mind.


    Immediately afterwards, the memories were like rivers, and the split second all poured into Kaneki Ken''s mind.


    He remembered the picture at the time.


    I remembered the scene of father pushing me away and letting me run away.


    I remembered everything.


    It is precisely because of the death of father that my happy family would gradually change.


    I killed my father myself!


    If it wasn''t for running around by myself, we wouldn''t have encountered a ghoul.


    Father would not be killed by ghouls to save me.


    It turns out that everything is because of myself!


    Recalling everything at the beginning, whether Kaneki Ken was an adult, or was shocked by this memory, his face became unconsciously pale.


    Li Yaoxiang: "So... the ghouls killed your father. Can you really just ignore that fact and continue to live a harmonious life with the ghouls?"


    It came to an end.


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t speak anymore.


    Kaneki Ken did not respond.


    At this time, Kaneki Ken left only a nk in his mind.


    Even if he was asked to respond, he did not know what to respond to.


    Next, just like walking corpse, return to house and fall asleep.


    Early the next morning.


    Kaneki Ken got up normally.


    He did not copse by recalling the truth of that scene. After all, he''s grown so big, and his minds have matured, and since those are all old things, he won''t lose control or cry because of this.


    At most, the mood is affected and bes worse.


    More guilt and a series of negative emotions.


    And what made him feel the mostplicated was that he didn''t know how to face the ghouls now.


    How to face the people of Anteiku.


    In the next few days, he chose to escape reality.


    Did not go to school.


    Did not go to work in the Anteiku shop.


    I was lying at home and reading, and was still in my own world.


    It was not until the evening of the fourth day that he spent four days before reading the works of Takatsuki Sen.


    He was relieved after reading it.


    The burden on my shoulder seems to have lightened a lot.


    After turning off the phone for several days, I was finally willing to turn it on at this time.


    Not long after the phone was turned on, there was a series of beeps.


    The screen shows nearly 100 missed calls.


    And a dozen or so 20 unread messages.


    Open it and take a look.


    There are close friends.


    Kirshima Touka.


    There is also the little Fueguchi Hinami.


    ''Damn Ken! Are you missing again?! I can tell you, if you don''t answer the phone tomorrow, there will be no information, but I will bring the police ... to check on you!''


    ''Kaneki, what happened to you? Everyone is worried about you. Are youing Anteiku tomorrow?''


    ''Big brother Kaneki Ken, I miss you. Come back soon!''


    One after another read the information.


    Kaneki Ken felt only full of warmth in his heart.


    He was lying on the bed reading information, and he couldn''t help smiling.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Have you thought about it?"


    Hearing Li Yaoxiang''s voice, his smiling face suddenly became serious. Although Li Yaoxiang did not rify the question, Kaneki Ken knew what Li Yaoxiang asked.


    This is to ask him in the future, in what way and attitude to face the ghouls.


    Thinking about it for a moment, Kaneki Ken replied: "I want to go back to Anteiku before making a decision."


    Early the next morning.


    Kaneki Ken normally attends sses.


    Afterpiling a number of reasons, I finally got rid of the rambunctious close friend, Hideyoshi Nagachika, and dispelled his idea of calling the police.


    After school, he came to the Anteiku coffee shop as usual.


    Ring!


    Ring!


    When he saw that the person was Kaneki Ken, Kirishima Touka stepped forward and lightly knocked on Kaneki Ken''s forehead: "Where did you go for the past few days go? Leaving all the work to me, it''s killing me!"


    Kaneki Ken''s expression seemed unnatural.


    I don''t know what to answer.


    I don''t know how to react.


    However, the subsequent performance of Kirishima Touka made Kaneki Ken''s tense mood relieved a lot.


    Kirishima Touka squinted, showing a sweet smile, saying "juste back", and then turned around and returned to her post to work, without any intention of asking any further.


    Looked at the back of her departure.


    Kaneki Ken only felt a rise in the mind.


    However, Kirishima Touka next performance soon awakened Kaneki Ken, who was daydreaming. Kirishima Touka paused, staring at Kaneki Ken from the corner of her eyes: "Don''t change clothes to work? Do you want me to do everything for you? Do you want me to help you with your sry?"


    Kaneki Ken was at a loss and wanted to go to the locker room to change clothes for work.


    But without taking a few steps, he was stopped by Yoshimura: "No hurry. Go upstairs to see the young ones first. The past few days that little girl missed you a little. Know that you are back, she must be happy."


    Kaneki Ken looked at Yoshimura meritorious deeds.


    He sorrily looked at Kirishima Touka.


    Perceiving Kaneki Ken''s gaze, Kirishima Touka turned her back to Kaneki Ken and dared not look directly at it: "Go ahead. I don''t want to beined by Hina that I won''t let her big brother Kaneki Ken see her."


    Kaneki Ken didn''t notice the abnormality of Kirishima Touka.


    Turn around and rush upstairs.


    While going upstairs, he did not forget to apologize again and again, saying that he woulde downstairs to help soon.


    After a while.


    Kaneki Ken came to the reception room where Fueguchi Hinami was staying.


    In a hurry, he even forgot to knock on the door.


    Open the door and take a look.


    This made the Fueguchi Hinami who was still reading a book stunned.


    Immediately, she rushed forward in surprise and poured into Kaneki Ken''s arms.


    "Big brother Ken! You are finally back! You haven''te in the past few days, but I''m about to die!"


    Kaneki Ken was taken aback by Fueguchi Hinami''s actions.


    He looked down towards that lovely and sincere face, and he who reacted from dumbfounded couldn''t help but showed a gentle smile and dialed the beautiful hair of the mouth of the flute: "Well, I''m sorry. I shouldn''t have missed the appointments."


    The time is ripe.


    Li Yaoxiang''s voice sounded again in Kaneki Ken''s mind: "Have you decided?"


    Kaneki Ken no longer hesitated this time and replied very firmly: "Well, there is a decision..."

 Chapter 249: Are you cruel enough

    Chapter 249: Are you cruel enough


    Li Yaoxiang: "So, what do you n to do in the future?"


    Kaneki Ken: "n? There is nothing to n. What to do, just what to do. Those who killed my father are those murderous, unruly ghouls. My enemies will also be them. Everyone in Anteiku is different from those group of scum. Why should I change my attitude towards Touka and Hinami for those scumbags? Those who should repent, suffer, and suffer should be those scumbags. Not me. What do you think?"


    darkening degree:


    34%...


    35%...


    Li Yaoxiang: "I think? Em ... I agree with your idea. I also appreciate your determination. But ... is your determination firm enough?"


    Kaneki Ken: "Oh? You have no confidence in me?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Of course not. I''m just worried ... you don''t know enough about this path you choose."


    Kaneki Ken: "What do you mean?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "It''s very simple. Humans and ghouls, on which side are you standing?"


    A short sentence directly pointed out the problem.


    Kaneki Ken instantly understood what Li Yaoxiang said.


    Simply put, that is, since he decided to maintain his current life and get along with the entire Anteiku group, it means that they will one day meet the CCG and the human side.


    When the timees, what should he do?


    Helped the Anteiku and repel CCG, or helped CCG persuade the Anteiku party?


    If you help CCG, it means that his rtionship with the Anteiku party will be broken.


    If you help Anteiku, it means that he is about to be an enemy of humanity and is wanted by CCG.


    For Kaneki Ken, this question cannot be described as not sharp.


    However, he replied with a smile in his tone: "Why should I make a choice?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Oh? It seems that this question is already within your consideration?"


    Kaneki Ken gave a yell and admitted Li Yaoxiang''s statement, and immediately continued: "I am a human being. At the same time, now I am also a ghoul. Even if I stand on the human side, there is no guarantee that they will not arrest me as a ghoul. Same with the other side. Even if I stand on the other side, I cannot guarantee that they will not be hostile to me. These two are not the results I want. Nor should it be the result I deserve. The fault is not mine. The fault is this world. Those who messed up this world. Why do they need me to pay for their fault? Need me to suffer? My life should not be hidden. My life should not be hunted down. I also don''t want my future children to suffer. They should be the ones who should be damned, who should disappear, who should hide, who should be hunted down! It''s the people who make this world a mess! That being the case, why don''t I build a world that is centered on me and suitable for my survival?"


    darkening degree:


    36%...


    37%...


    38%...


    In Kaneki Ken''s mind, suddenly, Li Yaoxiang''s apuse sounded.


    Pa!


    Pa!


    Pa!


    Pa!


    "You have a good idea. This is also the best practice for our interests. It''s just that, do you have the ability to fulfill this ambition?"


    Kaneki Ken still had a smile in his tone: "Isn''t there still you? Aren''t you and me one body? You''ll help me, right?"


    The reason why Kaneki Ken dare to think so, came up with such a ridiculous idea.


    All because of his confidence in Li Yaoxiang.


    After so many years, more or less, he still noticed some clues.


    It''s like why Li Yaoxiang knew so many secrets he didn''t know, such as falling bars incidents, such as surgery, etc. Since Li Yaoxiang has a way to know the truth of these things, does that mean that Li Yaoxiang also has a way to learn more unknown secrets?


    It''s like Li Yaoxiang''s ability to identify ghouls.


    Since Li Yaoxiang has the ability to distinguish between ghouls, does that mean he has other special abilities?


    There was a moment of silence in my mind.


    Then came theughter of Li Yaoxiang: "Hahahahaha! Little Ken, it seems that you haven''t been white in the past few days--? The brain is a lot smarter. I will certainly help you. I can indeed help you. It''s just ... are you determined enough? Are you cruel enough? In order to achieve your goal, can you ruin your heart? My Little Kaneki Ken ~ "


    Kaneki Ken tastes: "If you don''t try, how can you know that it won''t work?"


    darkening degree:


    39%...


    43%...


    45%...


    Li Yaoxiang: "Well, the first thing you need to do is eat!"


    Kaneki Ken: "Eat?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Yes, if you want to change the world, you have to be strong enough! So strong that no one can do anything to you! If the ghouls want to be stronger, they cannot do without RC cells.


    Aside from humans.


    Then you can only be stronger by eating a Kagune.


    Strong enough topete with the chess yers in this world.


    So you have to eat non-stop and eat more Kagune! Eating more Kagune means that there will be many dead ghouls due to you. Eating more Kagune means everyone in the Anteiku shop may reject you. How is it? Can you do it, Kaneki Ken?"


    Kaneki Ken was silent for a moment.


    When he responded again, he already had a firm tone, said with a smile: "Why not?"


    The twomunicated here.


    In the real Kaneki Ken, the cry of Hinami came to his ears.


    "Big brother Kaneki? Big brother Kaneki?"


    "What''s wrong with you? Why didn''t you answer me?"


    Kaneki grinned for a moment, then squatted down, dialed Fueguchi Hinami''s hair, and said, "Hinami is a good girl. Hinami, there is work downstairs that needs my help. I can''t apany you for the time being. Circle the words you don''t know first, and I''ll teach you when I have time, okay?"


    Fueguchi Hinami nodded heavily: "Okay-- ~"


    Kaneki Ken didn''t leave immediately, and continued: "By the way, Hinami. If one day, big brother Kaneki killed many bad guys, would you be angry with big brother?"


    Regarding the matter of murder, Fueguchi Hinami still resisted.


    Obviously, she doesn''t like it very much.


    Just like in the original work, even in the face of the real enemy ghoul investigators, the enemy who killed her parents, couldn''t bear to kill her when she was young.


    TL note: Asaki was killed sometime before June 10th, approximately 4 months prior to the Steel Beam Incident. Afterwards, Kureo Mado used Asaki''s kagune to create the quinque, "Fueguchi One." In the anime, he was a doctor and made Yakumo Oomori (Yamori) his diagonal pliers, after seeing a patient, Yamori broke into his clinic and demanded he makes a copy of the diagonal pliers he broke while Hinami and Ryouko Fueguchi hid. After finishing his work on Yamori''s diagonal pliers, the violent ghoul attacked him, sending him flying through the wall with a severe injury and right into the hands of Mado and Koutarou Amon. After Yamori escaped the investigators, Asaki attempted to fight them but was finished off by Mado.


    But in the face of Kaneki Ken''s sincere eyes, Hinami finally shook her head, timidly said: "No."


    Immediately, Fueguchi Hinami really remembered the appearance of the "bad guy" she saw at home. She said nervously: "The bad guys are terrifying. You must be careful, Big brother Kaneki ..."


    Seeing the appearance of Fueguchi Hinami.


    Kaneki Ken had a guess right now, and guessing that Fueguchi Hinami must have had a bad experience. This makes Kaneki Ken firmer in his beliefs.


    At the same time, he also believes that the people in the Anteiku, or Kirishima Touka, will certainly understand him...


    darkening degree:


    47%...


    48%...

 Chapter 250: Who is the prey

    Chapter 250: Who is the prey


    "Okay, big brother will be careful."


    After talking, Kaneki Ken changed to his work clothes, and then went downstairs.


    Everyone in the Anteiku has noticed Kaneki Ken, but they have nothing to do with it. It seems that Kaneki Ken "never missed work", they treated Kaneki Ken normally, very knowledgeable, and didn''t mean to ask questions.


    As soon as he came to the bar, Yoshimura said with a smile: "Come down so quickly? Why don''t you spend more time with Hina?"


    Kaneki Ken apologized: "No, I''ll finish my work before I talk."


    At this time, the doorbell rings.


    Ring!


    Ring!


    Kaneki Ken subconscious said: "Wee!"


    What came into sight was a guy with a short purple hair in a mboyant suit.


    Kirishima Touka''s first reaction when he saw this guy was to show a disgusted expression: "Tsukiyama? What are you doing here?"


    Tsukiyama Shuu: "Long time no see, Kirishima-san. You''re still as cold as ever~, but that''s what makes you so attractive."


    Kirishima Touka: "Drop dead--!"


    Kirishima Touka chose to ignore Tsukiyama.


    Continue to do your own work.


    At this time, Tsukiyama Shuu discovered Kaneki Ken, a neer in Anteiku.


    He walked over to Kaneki Ken and circled him interestingly, surveying Kaneki Ken all over again: "Hey, are you new? What''s your name?"


    In original work, Kaneki Ken was shocked by Tsukiyama Shuu''s move.


    But Kaneki Ken in this life, how could there be such an unbearable performance?


    He was just out of the corner of his eye.


    Holding back the guy who circled around him. "Kaneki Ken..."


    Tsukiyama Shuu was close to Kaneki Ken''s neck: "What a wonderful fragrance ..."


    The corner of Kaneki Ken''s mouth slightly raised: "Your scent is also nice..."


    Tsukiyama Shuu froze on the spot.


    Every time he does this, as long as the person meets him for the first time and is looked around by him in such a circle, they would usually not used to it, and even shows nervous performance.


    But the neer not only did not panic, but even choked him back.


    It really made Tsukiyama Shuu very interested.


    He cannot to bear said with a big smile: "Hahahahaha! Kaneki, I''ll remember you. You are really interesting!"


    "Hey, you disgusting guy, don''t disturb our work. Go back quickly!" Kirishima Touka said.


    "Hey, you really don''t understand the style." Tsukiyama Shuu first teased Kirishima Touka, and then patted Kaneki Ken''s shoulder. "I''lle to you for coffee next time."


    Kaneki Ken squinted and smiled, "Anytime."


    Tsukiyama Shuu turned and left.


    Still reminiscent of the scent from Kaneki Ken.


    Kaneki Ken has already asked in his mind: "Do you have any information about this guy? Who is he? Looking at Touka''s reaction, this guy named Tsukiyama, shouldn''t be the same group as us, right?"


    Now that I have negotiated with Li Yaoxiang.


    Kaneki Ken is no longer obscure.


    Try to maximize the "function" of Li Yaoxiang.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Gourmet- you should have heard it?"


    Kaneki Ken: "Oh? Is it this guy? Even if this guy is killed, it should be fine, right?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Of course it''s okay, but ... you are not his opponent now! And, it''s boring to just kill him like that. Don''t you want to see what they call a food club? A ghoul who will join that kind of club, I believe there is also your goal, Kagune, right? With his traction, you don''t need to worry about the little Kaneki Ken without food."


    Heeded the advice of Li Yaoxiang.


    Kaneki Ken couldn''t help but get excited.


    I was still worried about where to find food, but I didn''t expect these food to be delivered to my door.


    Kaneki Ken: "Isn''t there you? That guy is really that strong? Even with your assistance, I am not his opponent?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "no no no, little Ken. I won''t help you deal with anyone. If I help you, won''t everything return to its original point? What is the difference with the past? Do you still need me to protect you all the time? You want to be-stronger, you want to change destiny, everything still depends on you, I will only assist you from the side."


    Kaneki Ken: "Then...how to be stronger, how to defeat that guy, you must have a way? Is it really just eating? The ''food'' at home is almost exhausted. There is no suitable target to start with."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Of course! After youe home from work, I will give you another surprise."


    In reality, Kaneki Ken heard Kirishima Touka''s voice in his ear.


    "Kaneki? Kaneki?"


    "Ah?" Kaneki Ken woke up.


    "What are you thinking about so engrossed in? The table is about to be erased, and you are still wiping it."


    "No... no."


    "I can tell you, that person was a troublesome guy just now, you must be careful about him."


    "Oh... definitely."


    ...


    Another side.


    In the CCG branch of District 20.


    Two uninvited guests came today.


    Both of them were sent by the headquarters to investigate the incident of ''Daughter''.


    One is the first ss investigator, Mado Kureo.


    One is the first-ss search officer, Amon Koutarou.


    It stands to reason that their arrival should not affect anyone in the 20th district, CCG branch, as long as they report to the loser in the branch.


    After all, they only want toplete the mission and find out the ''Daughter''.


    It''s just that Amon Koutarou, an upright guy, can''t see Li Yaoxiang''s work attitude.


    Everyone makes an all-out effort for the purpose of ''expelling'' the ghouls.


    But Li Yaoxiang, this guy, took a nap in the office tantly.


    He was so upset that he walked directly to Li Yaoxiang.


    Knocked on Li Yaoxiang''s desk.


    knock! knock! knock!


    Li Yaoxiang, who was awakened, nced at Amon Koutarou and scratched his eyes, thoughtlessly: "What''s wrong?"


    Amon Koutarou: "You are the first ss investigator, Li Yaoxiang?"


    "Oh? Am I that famous? You know me?"


    Amon Koutarou: "Oh, in the whole CCG, the most famouszy person, how could I not know you? It''s really well-known to meet."


    "Nice to meet you. So you woke me up just to meet me?"


    Li Yaoxiang pretended to squint at the CCG license of Amon Koutarou: "Rank 1 investigator Amon Koutarou. Is this your attitude to speak to your superior?"


    Amon Koutarou was too angry: "You...!"


    At this time, Mado Kureo, came over to y the rounds: "Sorry, youngster is prone to anger, I didn''t take good care of him, sorry."


    Amon Koutarou was about to say something, but was interrupted by Mado Kureo: "I''m only interested in killing ghouls. If you want to continue to waste time on such boring things, then I have no choice but to act on my own."


    Finished.


    Mado Kureo turned around and left.


    Amon Koutarou quickly followed.


    But before he left, he still reluctantly left a sentence to Li Yaoxiang: "CCG is not a ce for people like you. An irresponsible guy like you will only kill morerades."


    gaze at back of the two leaving.


    Li Yaoxiang did not take their words seriously.


    At this time, he only thought of one thing in his heart.


    ''After waiting for so long, it''s finally here.''


    The appearance of these two means that Kaneki Ken''s darkening is about to catch up with the process ...

 Chapter 251: Awareness space meeting

    Chapter 251: Awareness space meeting


    That night.


    After Kaneki Ken returned home, hey on the bed in ordance with Li Yaoxiang''s instructions and closed his eyes to rx.


    just as expected.


    He just closed his eyes.


    He felt a whirlwind.


    Immediately afterwards, the field of view suddenly appeared in a white space.


    Or, it is a room.


    The room was empty and there was only one door.


    Not waiting for him to be recovered from shock, his attention was immediately attracted to only one color in the room, it was a ''person'' who looked exactly the same as him.


    And this ''person'' is, of course, Li Yaoxiang who looks like Kaneki Ken after using Transformation Jutsu.


    Kaneki Ken: "This..."


    Li Yaoxiang smiled: "It''s the first time we met, pleased to work with you."


    Kaneki Ken was speechless in surprise. Even though he looked at Li Yaoxiang no matter how high, he eventually miscalcted the strangeness of Li Yaoxiang''s ability.


    Moreover, he never thought about what Li Yaoxiang looked like, but he really looked exactly the same as himself.


    Li Yaoxiang: "What''s wrong? Surprised? Didn''t I say that? I am you, you are me. And here is our consciousness space."


    Kaneki Ken: "..."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Nothing to ask?"


    Kaneki Ken: "If you ask, you won''t say it, will you?"


    "Smart-!" Li Yaoxiang likes Kaneki Ken, "Go straight to the topic. If you want to be stronger, in addition to capturing RC cells and enhancing your own Kagune, I can also train your fighting skills here."


    Kaneki Ken: "Fighting skills? Isn''t Mr. Yomo already training my fighting skills? Isn''t that enough?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "I''m not going to be sloppy with you either. Do you remember the enemy who framed you and designed to turn you into a ghoul? Don''t you still want revenge?"


    Speaking of this ''enemy'', Kaneki Ken''s expression immediately stunned: "Don''t you say ... his strength is so strong, and I am not his opponent now? Moreover, even the guardian around the doctor, I may not be able to deal with it right?"


    Li Yaoxiang nods: "It is true. But, do you know how powerful your enemy is?"


    Kaneki Ken stared at Li Yaoxiang without speaking.


    Li Yaoxiang: "I can only tell you that your so-called Mr. Yomo is not his enemy at all. And if you want to change the world and make the world center on you, you must also face this opponent in the end. Because your opponent is plotting some ulterior motives. If his n is sessful, your future life, the situation you will face, may be even more severe than it is now. I can tell you with certainty that you would never want to see that result."


    For fear of Kaneki Ken''s despair.


    Li Yaoxiang originally wanted to say that even if you add up all the people in the Anteiku store is not the opponent of that person, but think about it, forget it, lest Kaneki Ken lose hope and be a salted fish.


    just as expected, after hearing this remark.


    Kaneki Ken pupils tightened.


    The expression is very solemn.


    After considering for a long time, Kaneki Ken said with clenched teeth: "In other words, I have to face this opponent no matter what, right?"


    Li Yaoxiang nodded.


    Kaneki Ken: "Training here, you make sure that I can surpass him? Can we achieve our goal?"


    Li Yaoxiang is nodding again.


    Kaneki Ken grinned: "What are you waiting for?"


    ...


    A few dayster.


    In the past few days, Kaneki Ken was pulled into the consciousness space by Li Yaoxiang almost every night to train fighting skills.


    It stands to reason that for people with no foundation, such as Kaneki Ken, it is definitely more difficult to learn fighting skills from this age.


    But with Li Yaoxiang''s expert sparring partner and pointing, plus Kaneki Ken in the consciousness space, although he feels the same pain and fatigue, but at least he will not be really injured.


    You can make full use of every minute and every second to train.


    that''s it.


    After nearly 10 hours of training in the past few days in the consciousness space.


    Kaneki Ken finally got excellent results.


    First, he sessfully mastered Naruto World''s Hyuga n''s ''8 Trigram Sixty-Four Palms''.


    Of course, only its shape, but not its meaning.


    He can''t point acupuncture points, and there is no Chakra in this world.


    So training is rtively simple.


    He only needs to remember Eight-Trigrams Palm''s moves, and then be proficient, and try to strengthen the attack speed and strength when fighting against the enemy. As long as this is achieved, the overall strength of Kaneki Ken must have made a leap forward.


    After all, the physical fitness is there.


    It is impossible to underestimate this set of 8-gram Sixty-Four Palms by its own power.


    At least when facing the ''ghoul martial artist'' of Matasaka Kamishiro, as long as Kaneki Ken is proficient in this set of Eight-Trigrams Palm, Li Yaoxiang feels that when the timees, it will definitely not be as different as in the original work. Powerlessly beaten down by him Matasaka Kamishiro.


    Secondly, Kagune''s application skills.


    Under the strict requirements of Li Yaoxiang.


    Kaneki Ken is not only in the consciousness space, but also needs to be skilled in the application of Kagune.


    Even in reality, at home, he doesn''t miss any moment of being able to use Kagune.


    As small as turning the lights on and off.


    Without exception, Kagune must be used.


    After several days of uninterrupted training, Kaneki Ken''s proficiency in manipting Kagune is as easy as manipting his hands and feet.


    The time hase to this day, which is the moment to verify the training results of Kaneki Ken.


    In the space of consciousness.


    Li Yaoxiang held a timer, recording the speed of Kaneki Ken''s ''Sixty-Four Eight Trigrams''.


    Eight palms!


    Sixteen palms!


    Thirty-two palms!


    Sixty-four palms!


    After the fight, Kaneki Ken wiped the sweat from his forehead and asked, "How? How much time?"


    Li Yaoxiang stopped the timer.


    32 seconds are disyed on the timer.


    It is a pity that this result is far from the standard required by Li Yaoxiang.


    Of course, the disappointment of Li Yaoxiang and the appearance of shaking ones head, of course, Kaneki Ken also saw it. There was no need for Li Yaoxiang to give the answer, he knew that he still fell short of the standard.


    Kaneki Ken gasped and said suspiciously: "You asked for sixty-four ps in 10 seconds, and an average of six ps in 1 second. Is this really possible?"


    Li Yaoxiang angrily threw the timer to Kaneki Ken.


    Instructed him to help record.


    Followed by.


    Li Yaoxiang was under Kaneki Ken''s incredible gaze, finished the sixty-four palms in 5 seconds.


    An average of twelve to thirteen palms per second.


    Seeing Kaneki Ken called a dumbfounded.


    Li Yaoxiang walked in front of Kaneki Ken without breathing and regained the timer: "After finishing Sixty-Four Palms in ten seconds, this is just my basic requirement for you. Next, you must also integrate Kagune''s attacking methods into this boxing technique. Fill the loopholes in this method. Even a more varied attack style!"

 Chapter 252: Fast progress, my friend

    Chapter 252: Fast progress, my friend


    Heard Li Yaoxiang this remark.


    There is only one ''O'' shape left in Kaneki Ken''s mouth.


    He seems to have imagined how terrible the strength is when he reaches the level that Li Yaoxiang said. Not to mention, based on the current self, basic is is directly killed.


    Li Yaoxiang: "What''s wrong? This level shocked you? Thought it was enough?"


    Kaneki Ken returned to his senses: "This...isn''t enough to achieve the level you said?"


    Li Yaoxiang shook his head: "In addition to improving your fighting skills, the most important purpose of practicing this set of sixty-four hexagrams is to improve your body''s instinctive response. As long as you are proficient in every move and style of the Eight Diagrams Sixty-Four Palms, when someone attacks you, you will naturally use the skills inside to make various responses. Or parry. Or avoid. For abat rookie like you, it''s just one part ofying the foundations. But don''t forget, in addition to the ghouls, your future opponents will also have CCGs on the human side. They will gather the power of all mankind to develop various technologies and weapons to deal with you. Just doing what I''ve said is simply not powerful enough for you to change the world. So after that, you have to learn to use weapons to counter them. Only bybining Taijutsu, Kagune, and weapons together, integrating them, and exerting them to the extreme, can you truly control your own destiny and change the world."


    Hear it here.


    Kaneki Ken had no idea what to say.


    He once thought that changing the world is definitely not that simple.


    But didn''t expect is far more difficult than he thought.


    After listening to Li Yaoxiang''s words, he couldn''t help raising a hint of retreat. It''s just, for a moment, that he quickly put aside this hint of retreat.


    After all, since the moment he was transformed into a ghoul, it means that he has fallen into this vortex, and it is not his turn to retreat.


    Moreover, he can''t believe that he can''t do what others can do!


    Think of it here.


    Kaneki Ken was full of enthusiasm again: "Then continue!"


    ...


    time flies.


    In a sh, a few days passed.


    In the past few days, Kaneki Ken has made significant progress almost every day. Eight Trigram Sixty-Four Palms, also from the original 32 seconds toplete a set of boxing, gradually shortened to 30 seconds, 25 seconds, 21 seconds.


    And this so-called three palms in 1 second is more than simply finishing a whole set of punches.


    During this period, Kagune participated in the attack.


    Although Kagune''s attack trajectory still has no rules, Li Yaoxiang believes that as long as Kaneki Ken practices the Eight Diagrams Sixty-Four Palms into his body, let the body memorize every move and every style of the palm technique and make it his own instinct.


    When the timees, he can create more minds to control Kagune.


    Instead of attacking at will or nning, attacking at instinctual level.


    Time hase to this day.


    This day is Kaneki Ken''s day off in the Anteiku shop.


    He went to ss at Kamii University as always.


    after ss.


    Kaneki Ken walked alone on the campus and was preparing to go home to step up training. However, he was thinking about the training content, and he did not notice that there was a personing towards him at this time.


    "Kaneki Ken? Kaneki Ken?"


    Kaneki Ken woke up and saw who wasing: "Tsukiyama-san?"


    Tsukiyama Shuu said with a smile: "Why do you think so deeply? You didn''t even notice that I came to you? I''m not that non-existent, right?"


    Kaneki Ken: "Hehe, I''m sorry. I was just thinking about things, so I didn''t notice you. Tsukiyama-san, why did youe to Kamii University?"


    Tsukiyama: "If I say ... I''m here for you, do you believe it?"


    Kaneki Ken froze.


    Not as panicked as in the original.


    After all, in his view, Tsukiyama Shuu is now rted to his "food" source!


    He also doesn''t mind having more exchanges with Tsukiyama Shuu.


    The two went to a coffee shop together.


    There was one sentence after another, which started to chat.


    Talk about the book about Takatsuki Sen.


    Talk about Rize Kamishiro, etc.


    Kaneki Ken unexpectedly discovered that he seemed to have a good chat with this so-called Gourmet? His views on Tsukiyama Shuu have even gradually changed.


    Kaneki Ken didn''t get hurt like in original work.


    However, in the face of the fragrance from Kaneki Ken, Tsukiyama still could not hold it, avoiding being discovered by Kaneki Ken, he still found an excuse to wash his hands and rest.


    Kaneki Ken thenmunicated with Li Yaoxiang at this time: "This Tsukiyama Shuu ... is really the ghoul Gourmet guy? How can we get along this well? Even though we''re very different?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "What''s wrong, can''t bear to start?"


    Kaneki Ken: "It''s not ... but, now I am half footed into the ghoul circle, and I will get to know more ghouls sooner orter. If it is not necessary, I don''t have to kill all the ghouls, right?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "That is true, let''s see the situation and then talk about it."


    Exchange here.


    Tsukiyama Shuu also happened toe back at this time.


    the two continued to chat on various topics.


    Until the end, Tsukiyama Shuu finally went straight to the theme, saying that he invited Kaneki Ken to visit the food club.


    In original work, Kaneki Ken was to exchange information about Rize Kamishiro with Itori, so he epted themission to investigate the food club''s clear address.


    TL note: Itori (Itori) is an old friend of Yomo and Uta. She can be found in Helter Skelter bar, where she shares information in the underworld.


    Kaneki Ken in this life did not ept themission.


    But in order to find the goal to start, of course, he will not refuse Tsukiyama''s invitation this time.


    the two hit it off.


    Tsukiyama Shuu soon took Kaneki Ken to the food club.


    That is a European-style building.


    It looks noble and elegant.


    Kaneki Ken is like original work. When he first came to this building, he was separated from Tsukiyama Shuu, and he was taken by a servant in a suit to a single room for washing.


    A series of exchanges, coupled with today''s high-level hospitality, has made Kaneki Ken''s views on Tsukiyama Shuu have changed even more.


    During washing.


    Kaneki Ken, who was washing his hair, once again told Li Yaoxiang his opinion.


    Kaneki Ken: "Tsukiyama ... seems to treat me as a true friend? Or ... don''t do it here again. After the banquet is over, I will find another opportunity to find those who have been singled out to start."


    Kaneki Ken didn''t want to start here.


    It is because he has a good opinion of the current Tsukiyama habit.


    They both like Takatsuki Sen''s books, they have the same hobby, and they can chat good.


    So he did not want to destroy this rtionship.


    Li Yaoxiang did not remind him at all.


    What is needed is the effect of Kaneki Ken being blindfolded and deceived.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Whatever, as long as you are happy."

 Chapter 253: A stain in life

    Chapter 253: A stain in life


    A servant''s voice came from outside the bathroom: "Kaneki-sama, how are you doing? We have prepared the clothes and meals."


    Kaneki Ken: "Okay, thank you."


    Rinse isplete.


    Seeing the clothes that the servant prepared for him, it was a noble and elegant suit, which made Kaneki Ken more interested in Tsukiyama Shuu.


    As for meals...


    Kaneki Ken dare not eat indiscriminately in other people''s ces.


    It''s not that he couldn''t believe in Tsukiyama.


    It''s that he doesn''t want to eat what he shouldn''t eat.


    After changing clothes, Kaneki Ken came to a small living room.


    A masked person wearing a maid costume pushed a cart to Kaneki Ken: "Kaneki-sama, this is the coffee prepared by Master for you."


    "Okay thank you."


    "Wait ... wait, what about Tsukiyama-san?"


    Maid handed over the coffee, turned around and walked away.


    Came to such a high-level ce.


    Kaneki Ken, who has never been exposed to this kind of scene, will inevitably be a little nervous.


    He said without hesitation.


    Picking up the coffee on the table, he wanted to suppress it with surprise.


    It''s just that before waiting for him to drink coffee into his mouth, the coffee cup is just an instant one inch away from his lips, but Li Yaoxiang interrupted him at this time: "I advise you not to drink it."


    Kaneki has a face.


    Confused: "What''s wrong? Is there something wrong with this coffee?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "It seems that you really got in touch with this Tsukiyama Shuu? You came to such an unfamiliar ce, and it was a ce where a group of inhuman fellows gathered together. You are not even wary at all? Do you really trust that Tsukiyama Shuu that much?"


    Kaneki Ken looked at the cup of coffee in front of him.


    He hesitated.


    However, before waiting for his response, the lights in the small hall suddenly dimmed.


    Then there was a fierce shaking.


    The whole small hall was slowly rising in the shaking.


    Before Kaneki Ken realized what was going on, the illuminationmps of several stage ys were shining on Kaneki Ken at the same time, and the sound of someone speaking into the microphone was heard in his ear.


    "You have been waiting forever!"


    "This is the main course today!"


    "Today''s main course is quite special, it is the legendary variety! And this variety is also very vignt, not at all drinking the coffee we carefully brewed for him. It''s just that it doesn''t matter. Like this special situation, our organizers are not unpredictable. Everything is under the control of our organizers. Although you can rest assured to watch!"


    Next, all kinds of noisy sounds came from my ears.


    "Hey? I don''t like to eat it."


    "Yeah, what kind of vor does it have?"


    "In other words, why did the organizer choose this time? This is a big loss."


    The master of ceremonies pointed at the microphone and asked everyone: "don''t be impatient, please don''t be impatient. The main dish this time was carefully selected by Mr. MM and provided for everyone. Now let''s have --, Mrs. MM! "


    The music sounded.


    Masked Tsukiyama Shuu, holding two partners around, appeared on the third floor terrace, holding his two partners left and right.


    At this time, Kaneki Ken finally saw the surrounding scene clearly.


    Tsukiyama: "Gentlemen anddies, the kind of rough meat should not be worth a taste. Those of you who have unique views on food should also know. What I like is his unique smell ..."


    A series of speeches.


    Everyone seems to treat the scene as a food reality show.


    Kaneki Ken was dumbfounded on the spot.


    Now, how can he still not know what is going on?


    For Tsukiyama''s falsehood, first gain his trust, and then deceive him. Kaneki Ken was not too sad. After all, he and Tsukiyama Shuu didn''t know each other for a long time, and their feelings were not very deep. Even if he was really cheated, he would be depressed for a few days at most, and he wouldn''t care too much.


    What really made Kaneki Ken feel ufortable was his ridiculous behavior and naive thoughts.


    Say ''don''t do it at the banquet, and after the banquet is over, look for an opportunity to attack the person who is singled out.''


    It''s ridiculous!


    No one else thinks of themselves as the same thing, but they are still passionate and think about others?


    This memory, this naive idea, can be a big stain in Kaneki Ken''s life! He could have imagined that in the days toe, as long as he recalled this matter today, he would definitely feel ashamed.


    Kaneki Ken in the panic did not hear clearly what Tsukiyama Shuu, or the ''spectator'' all around, was talking about.


    When he recovered, he only heard cheers.


    Then the master of ceremonies shouted: "Now we have our scrapper-!"


    Bang!


    Long!


    Long!


    The delicate iron gate on the same floor as Kaneki Ken was opened.


    Inside the iron gate came a giant, who looked like a monster. Kaneki Ken''s 1.7 meter body, standing in front of this giant, can only reach his abdomen.


    Also because of the emergence of this giant.


    Kaneki Ken was finally fully awake this time.


    He lowered his head and gave a slightugh.


    "Hehe..."


    Followed by.


    Covering his face, heughed in the sky: "Hahahaha-!"


    Everyone was shocked by thisughter, and faintly had a bad hunch.


    The giant who murmured ''saw, saw, saw, and saw you to death'', even stopped the pace of the advance, half tilted his head, wondering: "Huh-? Mama asked me to saw you off. What are youughing at?"


    "Hahahaha-!"


    "..."


    Theughter stopped abruptly.


    Kaneki Ken ignored everyone''s response.


    Ignore everyone''s gaze.


    The voice is not loud, but everyone can hear perfectly clear what he is murmuring.


    "Okay--, okay-- ~"


    "I was still worried, where should I go to find food ..."


    "Didn''t expect has been treated as food first before it''s started ..."


    "So you guys want to eat me..."


    "Since you want to eat me, then you must be prepared to be eaten too, right?"


    darkening degree:


    49%...


    52%...


    55%...


    58%...


    Speaking of it.


    Kaneki Ken suddenly clutched his face. In the cracks of his fingers, suddenly revealed the fierce eyes!


    It is the four rinkaku, protruding from his waist, ''shua ~ shua ~ shua ~!'' Several times in a row, before the fat giant reacts, he has been divided into several pieces.


    He didn''t know what happened until he died.


    The fat giant couldn''t even catch the four scales, and died directly.


    Quiet!


    The scene was silent!


    Everyone was shocked by the scene in front of him, unable to speak, or even believe it.


    Although the scrapper''s IQ is not good.


    But his strength is obvious to all.


    They absolutely didn''t expect, a strong scrapper would be so vulnerable in front of this ghoul. Wouldn''t it be the same result if they faced this ghoul by themselves?

 Chapter 254: results of training

    Chapter 254: results of training


    When everyone was in shock and hadn''t recovered, Kaneki walked slowly to the palm of the fat giant, bent over and picked up the saw, andmunicated in his mind, "Sorry, I embarrassed myself."


    Li Yaoxiang: "It''s alright, if you don''t go through something, you won''t grow wiser. People... always have to experience some things before they can grow uppletely."


    "You don''t have tofort me anymore."


    "Rx, like this, I assure you that it will happen again in the future."


    "Well? The weapon you mentioned, is this saw okay?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "This saw really meets the requirements. It is a weapon made by Kagune, which can hurt the body of a ghoul. But it is too big. It is inconvenient for you to bring it in and out. The best option is the CCG weapon. Can be shrunk into a suitcase for easy ess."


    "Then... do you have a way to seed?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Don''t worry weapons, it won''t be toote until you''ve dealt with the trouble here. You''re so slow, you''re not afraid that they''ll all run away?"


    Kaneki Ken: "Let''s run away... Anyway, there is so much food, and I can''t finish it, right? I can''t put that much in the refrigerator at home. Besides, I believe that everyone here, after the incident, you have a way to find them, right? The taste is already unptable enough. If you have to eat "expired" food, it is too hard for yourself, right?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Yes, please as you please."


    Exchange here.


    In reality, Kaneki Ken heard everyone''s exmation in his ear.


    "It''s over, it''s over, the scrapper is dead, this time the main course is out of control, run away--! Run away quickly--!"


    "Don''t push me, don''t push me!"


    "I have money! I have money! Let me leave first, I will give you money!"


    MC: "don''t be impatient, don''t be impatient! Our food club already has a series of solutions to this situation, don''t be nervous, don''t worry!"


    The crowd stopped crowding.


    Stopped.


    But even with the appeasement of the ceremonies, these cherish life upper ss people are still not at ease, only to turn their heads to see the situation, and their bodies were still in the direction of the exit.


    As long as there is something wrong, they will definitely continue to escape without the slightest hesitation.


    From the iron gate where the fat giant came out, four people came out again.


    All four people are head mask-wearing.


    Wearing a suit.


    If there is no ident, this is the staff member in the food club.


    The master of ceremonies was introduced to everyone at this time: "These four are all rated as B-Rank by CCG. ording to the data, our main course this time, its strength is only C-Rank, or even D-Rank. That''s it. He was able to kill the disintegrator of C-Rank, which really surprised our organizers. But it does not matter. With the coboration of these 4 people, everyone can enjoy today''s food as long as they wait a moment!"


    See the appearance of these four.


    The tense emotions of everyone were eased.


    Everyone seems to be no stranger to the four in the field.


    Very confident in them too.


    They turned around and returned to their original positions, waiting to watch a good show.


    Not trembling.


    The four ''warriors'' who just arrived at the scene immediately highlighted their Kagune. The four people have ukaku, koukaku, rinkaku, bikaku.


    As everyone knows, Kagune and Kagune can restrain each other.


    As a group of VIPs, of course, impossible would not know this truth.


    Therefore, with the practice of these four people, even if the organizer really miscalcted the strength of Kaneki Ken, not D-Rank or C-Rank, but strength B-Rank, everyone believes that as long as these 4 kinds of Kagune cooperates with each other, and Kaneki Ken, who is also B-Rank, will surely be defeated.


    "It turned out to be these four? Then you can really wait and eat with peace of mind."


    "Dare to make us embarrassed, kill him, kill him quickly!"


    "No, you should torture him slowly, don''t let him die so fast!"


    The disgusting expressions of the VIPs now seem to be no longer the same group as the group of people who fled for their lives in a panic.


    As much viciousness as there is.


    After seeing this, Kaneki Ken changed his mind now.


    Give you time to run away, but you don''t run, might as well stay here for me.


    You can''t finish it if you don''t finish it.


    After looking at the ugly faces of this group of people, Kaneki Ken only felt that in this world, there should be no shortage of such scums in this world to let him kill and be the nutrients for growth.


    It''s toote, it''s too soon.


    Four people spread out directly in front of them.


    They stood in the East, South, West and North directions of Kaneki Ken respectively.


    The first to bear the brunt is the ghoul with Koukaku, who rushed towards Kaneki Ken and prepared to fight Kaneki Ken in closebat.


    Ukake also fired countless attacks at Kaneki Ken.


    Thest two used Rinkaku and Bikaku to attack behind Kaneki Ken.


    Instantly, the fierce offensive all swept towards Kaneki Ken.


    And Kaneki Ken''s efforts since this period of time have finally achieved results. To deal with multiple A-Rank, or a single S-Rank, the current strength of Kaneki Ken may not be enough.


    But after a series of trainings, he has obviously improved his speed and strength, but he is more than enough to deal with these four B-rank ghouls.


    It is no longer the embarrassing andrge-scale fleeing action that he did when he first encountered Rize Kamishiro.


    Instead, he calmly responds to all this in front of him.


    He used his kagune to resist all attacks.


    Two Kagune resist the scales of the same two Kagune.


    Thest one is against the Bikaku.


    He himself took the initiative to greet the ghoul with Koukaku. The Koukaku''s kind of boxing and kicking, was so slow in front of Kaneki Ken.


    Every wave of attack was almost avoided by Kaneki Ken.


    Kaneki Ken''s left hand uses the palm method, and the right hand uses a saw to block the attack or cut the opponent''s body.


    Just split second, the ghoul with Koukaku is already in a weak position.


    The remaining three opponents are helpless to Kaneki Ken''s main body.


    In front of this scene, the group of guys who were still sneering and sarcastic suddenly became dumbfounded and heartbroken.


    Over time, with more and more wounds on Koukaku''s body, Kaneki Ken caught a weak spot. Shua! The saw shed across the neck, head flies up, and the headless body copsed.


    The Koukaku  dead!


    There is a gap in the body, Kaneki Ken does not intend to waste any more time, nor does he intend to give the other three a chance.


    The remaining resisted, and the main body rushed towards the next opponent.


    With the addition of taijutsu, the battle situation soon became one-sided.


    Continuous ''shua ~ shua ~ shua ~!'' 3 sounds.


    Three heads flew in session.


    Ukaku-dead!


    Rinkaku-dead!


    Bikaku-dead!

 Chapter 255: Evil begets evil, the hour has come

    Chapter 255: Evil begets evil, the hour hase


    The fighting process seems fancy and cumbersome.


    But all in fact, it just happened in a sh, so that the audience at the scene did not have time to react, and the battle was over.


    When four headless bodies copsed on the ground one after another, and blood oozed the ground, everyone realized that the battle was over ...


    For them, the extremely powerful B-Rank... just disappeared?


    How long have they been out before and after?


    Is there even 3 minutes?


    In less than 3 minutes, 4 B-level ghouls who cooperated seamlessly, just disappeared?


    Gradually, the crowd began to make a dry voice: "A...A...A... He is A-Rank...He is A-Rank!"


    This sound ''A-Rank''.


    Also sessfully awakened everyone.


    In fact, everyone on the scene does not have much concept of the so-called A-Rank and S-Rank. It is actually impossible for an ordinary A-level to kill four B-levels in such a short period of time.


    If you have to divide it by rank.


    The current Kaneki Ken can be said to be A-Rank Peak, or it just can''t be too much to just reach S-Rank strength.


    The reason is that the gap with original work is so big.


    In addition to training with Li Yaoxiang, there is a more important point is that Kaneki Ken in this life, he''s not at all hungry.


    Since he became a ghoul, he has been feeding on Kagune.


    So his three rinkaku quickly recovered to four.


    Its own strength has also increased rapidly.


    Fortunately, this group of scum are fools. Misunderstood that Kaneki Ken is nothing but ordinary A-Rank. If they knew that Kaneki Ken''s strength was actually infinitely close to S-Rank, some people might have been frightened and their legs were softened.


    But anyway.


    Whether it is B-Rank, A-Rank, or S-Rank, it is no longer important to them.


    Because at any rank, it is not an existence that these ''pampered'' ''aristocratic'' ghouls canpete with.


    The only thing they can do is wail like ghosts and howl like wolves.


    Escape desperately.


    "Run away! Hurry!"


    "He is A-Rank ! He is A-Rank !"


    "Run away! Run away!"


    The scene of crowding and pushing is reproduced again.


    But on the second floor, there is only one door, and it can only be opened by pulling it back. When the crowd is swarming forward, how can the person in front be able to open the door?


    Even if someone kept shouting ''Don''t squeeze! Stop squeezing! If it goes on like this, the door won''t open at all! '', but in a hurry, how really can control?


    Fearing they can''t escape, can''t they just desperately squeeze forward?


    What''s more life-threatening is that the group of people on the outermost side look back while squeezing forward.


    As a result, it didn''t matter if they didn''t look at it, they were scared to death on the spot by a few years.


    They saw ''today''s main course'', like a long-legged spider with only 4 legs.


    Every step of the spider''s legs makes a ''rumble'' sound.


    That was Kagune piercing the floor tiles and walls, fixing the sound made by the figure.


    Kaneki Ken''s main body is raised to in midair.


    Using the ''4 Kagune'' to walk.


    Apanied by ''rumble sounds'' one after another.


    Seeing that the ''main course'' was about to reach the second floor, the people who were on the periphery and seeing the situation clearly were frightened and their faces were white, and the more prosperous were even scared to cry and scared witless.


    "I''ming!"


    "He''s here! Hurry up ahead! Let me leave!"


    The ''rumble sound'' sounded close at hand.


    The two Kagune at the front of Kaneki Ken finally prated the moving brick on the second floor.


    Immediately afterwards, Kaneki Ken''s body rose slowly.


    First, his dark hair was exposed.


    Then there were the bloodshot eyes.


    Thest is the evil smile.


    As if telling the group of people in front of me, ''I''m here''.


    The frightened people even turned their hearts across, highlighting their Kagune on the spot and taking the lead to block the one in front of one after another. As a result, before Kaneki arrived, they had already killed and injured arge group of people.


    And as the pressure on the rear decreases. The power of crowding is not so great anymore. The group of people at the forefront finally opened a gap in the door.


    The person closest to the gap immediately squeezed out when he saw it, and wanted to be the first lucky one to escape.


    But when the people in the back saw the door finally opened, how could they still sit still? Still trying to squeeze out? This abruptly pinched the first ''lucky one'' at the door.


    Also because of this ''lucky'' stuck, the door is no longer so tightly closed.


    Those who want to open the door and escape next will be much easier.


    However, the joy of opening the door soon turned into despair.


    Because at this time Kaneki Ken had already reached not far behind them.


    Kaneki Ken saw this scene in front of him, and did not raisepassion for this group of scumbags. After all, this group of people not only nned to kill him, but also wanted him to bring them thest sideshow before dying.


    Fortunately, I have strength to save myself?


    Fortunately, I didn''t drink that cup of coffee?


    Otherwise, wouldn''t it be impossible to die today?


    Still a very shameful method of death.


    Kaneki Ken step by step forward.


    The four Kagune continually swept and continually harvested everyone''s life.


    The huge venue, son it became corpses everywhere across the field.


    Before and after, from the appearance of four B-Ranks, until the moment when Kaneki Ken killed thest person in the door, it was actually less than 4 minutes.


    But these five minutes are extremely long for those scumbags that regard human life as a mustard.


    They never thought that they, who were born noble, would one day be the "food" of others.


    It was not until the moment of death that they truly realized that the food they "watched" and the mood before death turned out to be like this.


    After thest person in the door fell.


    Kaneki Ken''s thoughts suddenly became essible.


    Only, this is not enough!


    He saw several fish that escaped the escaped.


    Kaneki Ken walked out of the hall and was about to catch up with a fish that escaped the, but a scream came suddenly in front of him.


    Look around.


    It turned out to be the few fish that slipped through the and were ambushed and killed by the people in front.


    The person who ambushed them was the culprit of this tragedy, Tsukiyama.


    After seeing Tsukiyama Shuu kill several people who wanted to escape, he walked towards Kaneki Ken very gracefully.


    Walked to Kaneki Ken.


    He conducted a noble gift to Kaneki.


    Kaneki Ken expressionless: "What do you mean?"


    Tsukiyama: "I sincerely apologize to you for my previous behavior. I hope you can forgive me. For the sake of atonement, I am willing to stay by your side and wait for your orders."

 Chapter 256: choose, harvest

    Chapter 256: choose, harvest


    Kaneki Ken did not speak.


    Tsukiyama Shuu has always maintained his posture of nobility.


    Completely expose his head back under Kaneki Ken''s eyelids. If Kaneki Ken wanted to take his life at this time, basically is no easy thing.


    But Kaneki Ken did not do so.


    He stared at Tsukiyama Shuu''s head for a long time.


    At the same time, Kaneki also asked in his mind: "What do you think? What do you think ... is he doing tricks?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "The fact that he can get the nickname Gourmet shows that he has an absolute obsession with food. What will convince him is only food. And you, is in mind, is an excellent food that can make him willingly bow his head."


    Kaneki Ken: "Take me as a gourmet? Why should he obey me? Why not kill me directly?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "People like him, their mentality has already been distorted. You can''t usemon sense to judge his behavior and motivation. If you want to find a reason, that is the strength you showed before, has made him unable to confirm whether he can beat you. But he can''t give up his delicious food. That''s why he will try his best to approach you. When you are strong, he will not eat you. But when you are weak, he will attack you without the slightest hesitation."


    Kaneki Ken: "Since that''s the case... Then, just kill him?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "It depends on how you choose. But before you start, I have to remind you. You want to change this world into a world centered on you, which is definitely not something you can do alone. You need your own influence. You need manpower. It''s like, now, that there are enough Kagune in the venue. Even if you eat, you can''t finish it all. But how are you going to get away? This batch of Kagune is finished, how can you find the next batch of targets? Even if there is me to help you find your goal, do you have to do it yourself every time you eat it? Each time you start, the greater the probability of your true identity being exposed. If you could drive the influence behind him, it would be different. It''s easier to do anything. You don''t even need to worry about food anymore, someone will do it for you automatically. So, if you''re confident that you can control this beast that can counterattack you at any time, and ept his acknowledgement allegiance... it is undoubtedly the best choice for you at this stage. If you are not confident... Then kill him."


    After listening to Li Yaoxiang''s analysis.


    In reality, the corner of Kaneki Ken''s mouth, while staring slightly at the back of Tsukiyama''s head, was slightly raised. He coldly said, "Help me collect all of the Kagune and Kakuhou here. Also, I''ll go back to find a car."


    Tsukiyama Shuu said gracefully: "Yes."


    At this time, "click" sound.


    The sound of the crushed stone stepped on behind the column.


    Kaneki Ken and Tsukiyama Shuu both looked at the cylinder.


    Madam A who realized she had exposed her own whereabouts, then stood up trembling with fear at this time: "MM ... Mr. MM, I ... I ... I didn''t see anything. It''s because of the many times we have cooperated. Come on, just let me go."


    Kaneki Ken frowned.


    Is it a fish that escaped the again?


    Too many ghouls, covering her taste?


    Kaneki Ken: "That monster-like ghoul just now was provided by this woman for you?"


    Tsukiyama Shuu: "Yes."


    Kaneki Ken: "Howe there is such a kind?"


    Without waiting for Tsukiyama to answer, Li Yaoxiang said in Kaneki Ken''s mind: "Fate... Hah! Fate! This person is working with Dr. Kanou. And the so-called disintegrators are actually humans just like you. It''s just that the experiment failed, and that''s why he turned into such a human-like and monster-like appearance."


    Hearing the news about Dr. Kanou.


    Kaneki Ken was inexplicably angry.


    gnashing one''s teeth said: "That is to say ... if my surgery fails, I will also look like him?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Yes."


    Kaneki Ken: "You said that my strength is not enough. Is strength enough now? Can I kill this doctor?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Unfortunately, it''s not enough. Someone in CCG has teamed up with Dr. Kanou. The people sent to protect him all have the existence of top strength. Now you are not their opponent."


    Kaneki Ken: "What strength do I need before I can deal with them?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "At least S-Rank or more."


    "..." After a moment of silence, Kaneki Ken said, "Then I can kill this woman now?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "If you want to vent your anger, you can. Although it has little effect on Dr. Kanou, this woman''s death can at least cause him a little trouble."


    In original work, this Madam A is the key character of Kaneki Ken''s search for Dr. Kanou.


    But now with Li Yaoxiang''s help, of course there is no need for this woman''s help.


    Hear it here.


    Kaneki Ken highlights Kagune.


    Not saying anything further, just a sweep.


    Madam A-die!


    The process was so fast that Tsukiyama had not answered Kaneki Ken''s question, and Madam A had already died in front of him. As if seeing Tsukiyama Shuu''s surprise, Kaneki Ken threw a sentence directly: "Needless to say, I already know."


    This makes Tsukiyama even more surprised.


    He feels that Kaneki Ken is even more mysterious.


    Without saying anything, Kaneki Ken already understood?


    Kaneki Ken did not intend to solve the problem for Tsukiyama this time, and instructed coldly: "I will go wash first, and you will arrange the vehicle and wait at the door."


    Not waiting for Tsukiyama to respond.


    Kaneki Ken had already turned and left.


    Left stunned Tsukiyama Shuu.


    Tsukiyama Shuu looked at the back of Kaneki Ken leaving with a face full of shock.


    After the back disappearedpletely in the field of view, he was so excited that the whole person shivered.


    He sniffed the remaining fragrance of Kaneki Ken, his eyes covered with bloodshot eyes, muttered to himself: "Treasure! Treasure-ah! I must get you! I must get you! I can no longer taste other things! Someonee here!"


    A maid in a suit came out in the dark: "Master, what do you ask?"


    "Prepare for the best vehicle and take Kaneki-sama back!"


    Maid: "Yes!"


    "Also, clean up the site, collect Kagune and Kakukou, and send them all to Kaneki-sama!"


    Maid: "Yes!"


    Commanded the servant.


    Tsukiyama Shuu followed walked over in the direction of Kaneki Ken''s departure.


    Hope to smell more of the aroma left on Kaneki Ken.


    Kaneki Ken didn''t know what happened here. However, even if he understood, he would not care too much. As Li Yaoxiang said, to change this world, he must have his own influence.


    Tsukiyama Shuu''s influence is undoubtedly the best stepping stone for him.


    Both sides take what they need.


    He doesn''t need to care about the purpose behind Tsukiyama Shuu, he only needs someone to do things for him.


    Finished.


    After changing his clothes.


    Kaneki Ken took the car and left as if nothing was wrong.


    During his return, he thought to himself that this trip was not in vain. Not only did he harvest arge amount of food, but a group of subordinates. In the next period of time, he wouldn''t be troubled by these trivial matters.


    You can feel at ease in training and be stronger quickly...

 Chapter 257: weapon, nature

    Chapter 257: weapon, nature


    After the incident of the food club (Ghoul Restaurant), in the next few days, in addition to the normal sses and work, Kaneki Ken had never stopped the training given to him by Li Yaoxiang.


    have to say.


    In the absence ofck of food, the strength of Kaneki Ken can be described as rapid progress.


    Whether it is speed, strength, resistance tobat, regeneration ability, etc. In short, there is aprehensive improvement in all aspects of physical fitness.


    Because of this, he finally managed toplete the Eight Trigram Sixty-Four Palms in just 8 seconds.


    6 palms per second!


    In addition to the more exquisite and skilled boxing skills, his own Kagune have changed a lot.


    It stands to reason that Rinkaku''s defensive ability is the most vulnerable among the four categories. After all, the scale''s power lies in its powerful regeneration ability. In order to facilitate regeneration, thebination ability is often low.


    However, because Kaneki Ken ate Kagune without restraint and increased the RC cells within-the-body, the quality of his 4 rinkaku also improved a lot.


    If we say that Kaneki Ken''s previous scales had only the hardness of B-Rank Kinoe.


    Then his scales now have the hardness of A-Rank Kinoe.


    The appearance has also be thicker.


    Sharper.


    Although it has not yet reached the level of ''centipede form'' in original work, every scale has grown some tentacles, and its attack power has be more powerful.


    These days.


    As always, he trains in the consciousness space.


    The training items are, in addition to finishing the Eight Trigram Sixty-Four Palms within 10 seconds, it is also necessary tobine Kagune''s attack.


    It''s like he hit a palm, and when the palm shrinks back, Kagune will make up a blow at this time.


    Try to achieve the effect of the top, middle and bottom, three-way attack.


    Of course, nowadays, he still can''t do this at all, and sometimes even gets hurt by his own Kagune, but with practice, the number of injuries is increasing.


    Nowadays, he can at least be able to attack the upper hand with a palm, and Kagune attacks the middle and lower.


    When the palm attacked the middle and bottom, Kagune attacked the upper te.


    It''s gettingte.


    Kaneki simply yed another set of Eight Trigram Sixty-Four Palms, and then ended today''s training.


    Eight palms!


    Sixteen palms!


    Thirty-two palms!


    Sixty-four palms!


    Cooperating with Kagune''s attack, he finished the whole set of boxing techniques in just 10 seconds.


    Finished the work.


    Kaneki Ken showed a gasp for breath and asked Li Yaoxiang, who looks exactly the same as him, and asked, "I''ve almost met your requirements now? What about weapons?" Should it be resolved?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "You have two choices. One, join CCG and let them tailor one for you. 2, ..."


    Not waiting for Li Yaoxiang to finish.


    Kaneki Ken interrupted: "Join CCG? Won''t you worry about being discovered?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Rx, you are a human being, and the door that CCG detects is not able to detect you. Or, as long as it is a ''half-ghoul'', CCG''s current technology cannot distinguish you."


    "Half ghoul?"


    "Yes, in addition to the half-ghouls like you who are thought to be transformed, there are also half-ghouls born from thebination of humans and ghouls. Some are one-eyed like you. Some have no Kagune, but have the physique of a ghoul."


    This really taught Kaneki Ken.


    He didn''t expect that there will still be humans who are willing to live with these ghouls and give birth to the next generation.


    Li Yaoxiang ignored him and continued: "Joining the CCG is good or bad. The advantage is that this world is always a world dominated by humans. If you want to achieve your goals, of course, you cannot rely on force to suppress humans. I believe you don''t want to either. So you can join CCG and win the trust of the human side. When you want to aplish your goal, it will be much easier, at least the resistance will not be so loud. The disadvantage is that when you join CCG, it means that you will get along with them for a long time. Then your exposed probability will be infinitely improved. A little carelessness can be the result to eternal damnation."


    This decision is not unimportant for Kaneki Ken.


    After all, this can seriously affect his future life.


    For a while, he really couldn''t make a decision.


    "Then ... what about the second?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "The second option is to find the ability to create Quinque."


    "Do you know where this person is?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "This choice will not be too easy. After all, kind of thing is now in great trouble. He has already been entangled by the ghoul investigator. You choose the second option, which means you have to rescue him as soon as possible. To save him, it means that you will meet CCG in advance. If you match up with CCG in advance, you''ll be recognized and whether you will be able to join the CCG in the future, to gain the trust of the human side in this way, it is really hard to say."


    Consider for a long time.


    Although Kaneki Ken couldn''t make a decision yet.


    But that didn''t stop him from asking more information about this ghoul.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Speaking of which, it still has something to do with you. He happens to be Hinami''s father. I advise you to make a decision as soon as possible. After all, the second option does not have much time for you to consider. It is estimated that he will be killed by some ghoul investigators soon."


    TL note: In the anime, Asaki was still alive and working at his clinic where Yakumo Oomori came and asked him to make him news diagonal pliers since he lost his previous one due to Rize Kamishiro. In the manga, Asaki was killed prior to the Steel Beam Incident and was only left behind with a mask which was shown to be in Ryouko Fueguchi''s possession. Also, yes, I noticed that the author made a mistake where in previous chapters, it is already implied that his father is already killed. Or it might be my trantion mistake. But, if I remember correctly, Kaneki''s interaction with Hinami had already implied that she witnessed her father''s death. Eh, who cares? Enjoy.


    This is the case.


    Kaneki Ken tightened the pupils on the spot.


    He didn''t care that Hinami''s father would actually make him Quinque.


    What he cares about is that Hinami''s father has been entangled by the investigator? Moreover, even the mysterious existence of Li Yaoxiang said that Hinami''s father would not survive?


    What about Hinami?


    He can ignore the life or death of others.


    But when ites to the people he cares about, and even their family members, it is impossible for Kaneki Ken to ignore it!


    This is the nature of Kaneki Ken.


    He doesn''t care about the first choice, the second choice. He made a decision right now, that is to save the father no matter what.


    Kaneki Ken was anxious.


    He quickly asked about the relevant information of Hinami''s father.


    Seeing that he was about to leave the space of consciousness, Li Yaoxiang shouted to stop him at this time: "If you really want to save him, then I advise you to discuss it with Hinami first, and take out her message to her father as well. Lest there be any idents during the rescue. You should know that between ghouls and ghouls, the vignce is still very high. Moreover, you don''t know that Hinami has a very bad impression of the term "bad guy". You can imagine what happened to her. Also,pared with normal people, her father''s vignce towards other people or other kinds of things must be higher than that of a normal people."


    Kaneki Ken agreed with Li Yaoxiang''s statement.


    Nodded heavily.


    Leaving the consciousness space.


    Immediately got up and went to the Anteiku shop, not even going to college ...

 Chapter 258: help each other, cover up

    Chapter 258: help each other, cover up


    In the morning.


    In the Anteiku shop.


    Ring!


    Ring!


    As soon as he entered, Yoshimura slightly surprisedly said: "Kaneki? Why is it so early today? Don''t you need to go to university?"


    Kaneki Ken casually perfunctory: "Well, I have something to ask to Hinami, and I took a leave from the professor at the university."


    Said.


    Just rushed upstairs.


    In a hurry, he forgot to knock on the door.


    As soon as the door opened, he happened to meet Hinami who was eating ''breakfast'', and Hinami was startled and screamed. Out of natural reaction, Kaneki Ken immediately closed the door.


    Although it has be a good period of time.


    But he, who has been a human being for more than ten years, is still not used to this kind of picture.


    Consider for a moment.


    Important things matter.


    He can''t control that much now.


    He chose to open the door again and walked in.


    Eyes deliberately avoided those bodies, and then sat down in front of Hinami, seriously said: "Hinami, I have a very important thing that I want to ask you, can you tell me honestly?"


    Fueguchi Hinami was really scared and not yet recovered.


    yiyiyaya, I don''t know what response to give.


    Kaneki Ken didn''t wait for her to calm down, and continued: "Will your father make weapons that can hurt ghouls? Can you tell me about your father?"


    Hinami expression looked stunned.


    She didn''t expect Kaneki Ken to ask about her father.


    It''s not that she couldn''t believe Kaneki Ken.


    But her mother once told her to never reveal her father''s news to anyone, which caused her to not know whether to say it or not for a while.


    Didn''t wait for the young to wake up from panic.


    At this time, another voice was heard at the door: "Kaneki... Do you know my husband? Do you have something to ask, maybe you can ask me directly?"


    The person who came was Ryoko Fueguchi who rushed over after hearing Hinami scream.


    Compared to Hina, Ryoko Fueguchi knew how to deal with the situation today.


    There is also a period of time for staying here.


    She still believes in Kaneki Ken''s character.


    Fueguchi Ryoko had already sat next to Hyun-shi, holding her in her arms.


    Instructed her not to be nervous and let her mother handle it.


    Kaneki Ken who saw it was rxed.


    It would be better if Ryouko could understand him, and he would save a lot of time.


    "This is the case. During this period of time, I was always looking for someone who would make Quinque. The person was found, but I didn''t expect that person turned out to be your husband. But this is not the most important thing. The most important thing, I received the news that your husband is now entangled in ''White Doves'', so before things have reached an irreparable point, I must get your husband back as soon as possible. But I''m afraid that my words will be unfounded, and I''m worried that your husband will not believe me. That''s why I want to learn more about your husband from you. You see ... Is there anything between you, as soon as I say it, your husband will trust me right away?"


    Kaneki Ken finished what he wanted to say in one breath.


    The so-called ''white doves'' is actually another name for the ghoul investigator.


    In the circle of ghouls, almost everyone knows about this nickname.


    Just as expected, when Rikoko Fueguchi heard her husband being entangled with ''White doves'', her soft face suddenly turned pale, and care was chaotic, and the whole person was very nervous.


    Rikoko Fueguchi: "You ... you ... are you telling the truth? My husband is really entangled by a white dove? Then...then...what should I do? Kaneki, are you going to save my husband? Will you really save my husband?"


    Kaneki Ken wanted to appease her and make her less nervous, but he was cut off.


    Yoshimura''s voice came from behind: "No, Kaneki, you can''t save him. You cannot have a rtionship with the white doves."


    Yoshimura also came up to check the situation because of Hinami''s screams.


    Kaneki Ken turned his head towards Yoshimura, and waited for him to speak.


    Yoshimura: "The 20th district is a safe area that I managed to manage with great difficulty. If you rashly get involved with white doves, it may put many people in danger. Therefore, not only can you not go to Kaneki, but the mother and daughter must also leave here as soon as possible. I believe that the ghoul investigators will track them down soon, and they wille here."


    It''s like original work.


    When Yoshimura learned that Fueguchi Ryoko and Hinami were being pursued by CCG, his first decision was to suggest that the mother and daughter should leave the Anteiku as soon as possible, so as not to involve other people who want stability.


    Afterwards, it was because Kirishima Touka said: ''The original intention of creating Anteiku is not to let everyone watch over and help each other?'' He then agreed to participate in the "White Doves" incident.


    However, now that Kirishima Touka is not there, Kaneki Ken said these words: "Didn''t you tell me that your original intention of creating Anteiku is for everyone to help each other? Why is Hina and their family in trouble now but you choose to abandon them? If someone gets into trouble in the future, do we want to abandon them one after another? If this is the case, is there still a need for Anteiku to exist?"


    Yoshimura was silent.


    Kaneki Ken was the first to say: "Hinami''s father, I must save him. If you are worried that we will affect other people, I will take them out of here afterwards."


    Another silence.


    Yoshimura then said: "...Kaneki ... Can I ask you a question? Why ... why are you looking for someone who can make Quinque? What is your purpose? How did you know Hinami''s father is being chased?"


    Kaneki Ken: "I naturally have my way. As for the purpose ... I just want to live better."


    Done.


    Don''t care about what Yoshimura''s concern.


    Kaneki Ken directly asked the mother and daughter.


    For the safety of her husband, Rikoko Fueguchi soon informed Kaneki Ken of the secrets that only their family knew. I believe that her husband will trust Kaneki Ken as the helper they have found after hearing these secrets.


    After reaching the goal, so as not to miss the opportunity, Kaneki Ken immediately set off.


    Just as Jin Muyan was about to leave, Yoshimura, who had been standing in silence, said at this moment: "Do you need help?"


    Kaneki Ken: "No need."


    After that, Kaneki Ken hurriedly left the underground building.


    When he left the Anteiku, everyone saw that it was Tsukiyama who came to pick him up.


    The timely appearance of Tsukiyama was precisely what Kaneki Ken did intentionally.


    He wants Tsukiyama Shuu to be his cover.


    As long as others saw him with Tsukiyama Shuu, with the help of Tsukiyama Shuu''s influence, like Yoshimura''s previous series of problems, they will naturally be solved.


    No one would doubt where he got the news again.


    Let them figure it out for themselves.

 Chapter 259: one minute, twenty seconds

    Chapter 259: one minute, twenty seconds


    Somewhere on the open space where scrap cars are ced.


    There is an iron house on the open ground.


    This Teppanyaki house is the original residence of Ryoko Fueguchi''s family, her husband, and Fueguchi''s family of three. Knowing that he was in trouble, he sent away the mother and daughter.


    After the matter was over, and after safety, he nned to pick up the two mothers and daughters back.


    And this day is also the day when things are about to end.


    This so-called trouble is actually entrusted by Yakumo Oomori, nicknamed ''Jason'' and ''Yamori'', to help him rebuild a ''pliers'' that can hurt ghouls.


    The pliers are built.


    Yamori also came here on schedule and demanded weapons from him.


    Yamori tried pliers.


    ''Chuck!'' sounds.


    "This feels good ... you are really good at doing this kind of work ..." Immediately, the words changed, and his face was hideous, "This way you can make that woman..."


    Fueguchi Asaki(Hina''s father) hesitantly said: "You... in the future... can you note again..."


    The next situation is exactly simr to the original work.


    Mado Kureo and Amon Koutarou who came to the 20th district have already ambushed in the vicinity.


    Yamori mistakenly thought that Fueguchi had betrayed him and cooperated with human beings, so he directly injured him seriously, flew him out of the house with a blow, and even the metal house broke a big hole.


    Then Yamori very arrogant said to the two ghoul investigators: I have two minutes to y with you.


    In these two minutes.


    Yamori one against two.


    Both hands to handbat after several rounds.


    The end result was that Yamori was unscathed and he retreated.


    Quinque of Mado Kureo was destroyed.


    Amon Koutarou suffered some injuries.


    After Yamori left, the sight of the two investigators, of course, fell on Fueguchi Asaki. Fortunately, the flute that had serious injury picked up the ''Family Portrait'' drawn by Hinami on the ground.


    In order to see Hinami again, he decided to fight hard.


    Highlighted his bikaku.


    It is a pity that his strength is simply not worth mentioning in front of Mado Kureo and Amon Koutarou. Even if Mado Kureo used the broken Quinque to deal with him, it was enough and to spare, not to mention that Amon Koutarou was passing by.


    It''s just that when Mado Kureo was about to give Fueguchi a fatal blow.


    The gear of destiny has finally changed because of the butterfly effect of Li Yaoxiang.


    Just listen to ''ng!'' A loud noise.


    The broken Quinque, who was attacking the face of Fueguchi Asaki, was blocked by a thick, scarlet, scaly Rinkaku with two rows of tentacles.


    Mado Kureo and Amon Koutarou, who noticed the change, quickly distanced themselves.


    Followed by.


    What came into view were Kaneki Ken wearing a one-eyed face mask, and Tsukiyama Shuu wearing a meniscus mask.


    "S-Rank in the 20th district, Gourmet?" Mado Kureo first looked towards Tsukiyama Shuu, showing an interesting and excited smile, then looked towards Kaneki Ken strangely, "Who are you?"


    Kaneki Ken: "Who I am, you don''t need to know. I''m keeping this person. Those who don''t want to increase casualties, leave now."


    Mado Kureo muttered to himself.


    "Aiya-- ~"


    "The situation is not good ~"


    "An S-Rank ghoul, an unknown ghoul, my Quinque is broken again."


    "Amon..."


    Amon Koutarou: "Yes."


    "CCG''s code, will you back down when you meet a ghoul?"


    Amon Koutarou: "No!"


    "Very good! Do you have the confidence to help me block the S-ss ghoul for one minute? After one minute, when I finish this one-eyed man, I will help you."


    Amon Koutarou: "Yes!"


    Said.


    Amon Koutarou carried his heavy Quinque and rushed towards Tsukiyama Shuu.


    Mado Kureo, carrying his rotten Quinque, rushed to Kaneki Ken.


    Based on the hatred of the ghouls, Mado Kureo''s attacks can be said to be fatal. Every attack is aimed at Kaneki Ken, and he has no intention of leaving his hand.


    But these attacks are too slow for the current Kaneki Ken.


    Both of his hands are put into the trouser pockets.


    Just using the body''s swing and moving a few steps, he withdrew all attacks from Mado Kureo with no difficulty.


    Even during the dodge period, there was still a leisurely conversation with Mado Kureo.


    Kaneki Ken: "Can I ask you a question?"


    The expression of Mado Kureo gradually grew serous from the original excitement and sorrow.


    Kaneki Ken: "As far as I know, the family of Fueguchi did not take the initiative to hurt humans. Why are you trying to kill him?"


    Mado Kureo, replied subconsciously: "Not just him, you all are damned!"


    The wife of Mado Kureo was killed by Takatsuki Sen.


    After his wife died, he hated the ghouls very much and went mad to kill them all.


    Regardless of whether this ghoul is good or bad, big or small, in short, there is nothing wrong with it.


    After hearing the answer of Mado Kureo, Kaneki Ken''s heart gradually became cold.


    So this is CCG? That is to say, no matter how they protect human beings, as long as they are ghouls, do they have to kill them?


    He saw CCG''s attitude towards ghouls.


    This makes Kaneki Ken more determined to change the world.


    If it weren''t for your improper CCG management, if you hadn''t joined forces with the outside world, I wouldn''t have be a ghoul at all. Since it was your fault that caused me to be a ghoul, why should I suffer?


    It''s you, not me, that should change!


    Kaneki Ken pulled his hands out of his trouser pockets.


    A dodge.


    One step.


    When Mado Kureo''s eyes fell on Kaneki Ken again, it was Kaneki Ken who had already put on the gesture style of ''Eight Trigram Sixty-Four Palms''.


    He didn''t take Kaneki Ken''s ''gesture style'' in his eyes.


    Quinque raised high, still falling down with all his strength.


    But this time he didn''t wait for him to drop the attack to Kaneki Ken''s original position, he only felt a huge pain in the whole body.


    The field of view is spinning around.


    Eight palms!


    Sixteen palms!


    Thirty-two palms!


    Sixty-four palms!


    In 10 seconds, just 10 seconds, Kaneki Ken yed a whole set of palm techniques, and then ''rumble! ''A loud noise. The whole Mado Kureo was shot and flew out.


    He fell on an abandoned car.


    The entire door was dented.


    20 seconds!


    The entire battle process did not reach even 20 seconds, Kaneki Ken and even Kagune were not used, and Mado Kureo had beenpletely defeated.


    This result not only made Mado Kureo, who was vomiting blood, unexpectedly. Even Amon Koutarou, and Tsukiyama Shuu, who is also in battle, didn''t expect a top-notch investigator to stand in front of Kaneki Ken, but it wouldst for less than 20 seconds.


    Amon Koutarou stopped the fight.


    Rushed over to see the true hurt of Mado Kureo.


    "Senior! Senior!"


    "Cough cough cough!" Mado Kureo, coughed up a mouthful of blood again, and was raised by Amon Koutarou, waved his hand, and said, "I''m fine", and then said to Kaneki Ken, "With your strength, you shouldn''t be anonymous, why is there no information about you in CCG?"

 Chapter 260: Unexpected

    Chapter 260: Unexpected


    Kaneki Ken did not answer the question of Mado Kureo.


    Looking down at Fueguchi Asaki said, "Can you still move? If you can move, leave with me. I wasmissioned by your wife, Ryoko Fueguchi, and your daughter Fueguchi, to rescue you."


    "Ryoko...Hina..."


    Hearing the names of his wife and daughter, who was extremely wounded, fortunately, did not know where the power came from, and managed to sit up again.


    "Do you know my wife and daughter? Are they okay now?"


    Even if you have no choice but to know that you want to survive, you must follow Kaneki Ken to leave. But he must know whether his wife daughter is still safe.


    If this person is a liar.


    If the wife daughter had already suffered unexpectedly.


    Then he has no meaning to live.


    If his wife daughter was killed by this person in front of him, then even if he had fought his life, he would have to find a way to perish with Kaneki Ken, even if he was reduced to a tool of ''Yamori''.


    This is why Li Yaoxiang suggested that Kaneki Ken should first ask Fueguchi Hinami or Ryoko to know the situation first, so as not to cause misunderstanding when the timees is not good.


    Kaneki Ken saw his worries and first told the "secrets" that his family only knew about, and then reassured him: "Rx, your wife daughter is now safe, and now waiting for you to reunite with them. Don''t die here. Otherwise, I can''t exin to them."


    Hearing the "secret", Fueguchi was only rxed.


    Barely supporting his body, he stood up again.


    Before leaving, Kaneki Kenchao said to the two investigators: "I advise you two to dispel the idea of chasing, otherwise, I can''t guarantee that the residents in this neighborhood will suffer casualties because of you."


    A group of three people left.


    The unsightly Amon Koutarou just wanted to catch up, but Mado Kureo, extended the hand and stopped him.


    The figure of Amon Koutarou paused and turned his head to ask, "Senior, do you just let them leave?! They''re ghouls!"


    Toote to answer.


    Mado Kureo spit out a mouthful of blood again with the sound of ''pu!''.


    The whole person couldn''t even stand, and one-knee directly on the ground.


    "Senior! Senior!" Amon Koutarou quickly helped him up.


    Mado Kureo waved his hand, and said weakly: "Don''t chase, we are not their opponent ..."


    Finished-speaking, then passed out directly.


    "Senior! Senior!"


    A few hourster.


    The abandoned yard was blocked by relevant departments.


    Mado Kureo was already taken to the hospital.


    After some treatment, the result is that the injury is far less simple than it seems on the surface. The internal organs have been injured by a lot of shocks and need to be hospitalized for observation.


    Mado Kureo, wants to be reinstated.


    After all, he is just a human, not a ghoul.


    This kind of injury is very troublesome for a human to want to recoverpletely. Even if it ispletely recovered, it is estimated that he can no longer fight on the frontline.


    In other words, this battle.


    Just 20 seconds.


    Kaneki Ken directly cut off his hope of avenging his wife.


    This blow was not a big deal for him.


    After hearing the news, he was like crazy, wanting to mess things up to vent, but as soon as he moved, he touched the wound after the operation, and the result was once again sent to the operating room.


    After seeing this, Amon Koutarou had a deeper hatred for Kaneki Ken, the culprit.


    He did not stay in the hospital.


    Back at the CCG branch in District 20, and immediately use the right to check the camera shots around the abandoned site, intending to find out where Kaneki Ken and the others are going.


    It''s a pity that the scene is gone when it reaches a key ce.


    Obviously, the camera lens has been destroyed by Tsukiyama''s servant in advance.


    And did a series of finishing work.


    Amon Koutarou wants to use simple methods to find out where Kaneki Ken and the others are in a short period of time, which is estimated to be impossible.


    He knew the truth very well.


    It''s just that the truth is clear, but he still feels very angry at his powerlessness.


    After watching the video, he scolded: damn it!


    Then he walked angrily to the Chief-In-Charge''s room, which is Li Yaoxiang''s current boss.


    Without even knocking on the door, he pushed the door straight in and walked in.


    He reported the situation at the time to the Chief-In-Charge of the branch office, and strongly requested the Chief-In-Charge of the branch office to apply for support from the headquarters. It is necessary to send someone to expel these ghouls in the 20th district.


    Chief-In-Charge expression is very calm.


    Nor did he me his rudeness.


    Nodding to himself, he muttered to himself: "Well, um, that''s the case. Being able to easily defeat Mado, strengthparable with S-Rank, and even beyond. Well ... this newly emerged ghoul is indeed not simple. The strength must be above S-Rank."


    Amen Gangtaro was very angry at the casual appearance Chief-In-Charge.


    He mmed the table with his palms and panting with rage said: "Excuse me, are you listening to me? Mado Kureo was seriously injured by this ghoul! And you are still leaving in front of us. You don''t apply to the headquarters for support. Are you just letting them run away in the 20th district?!"


    Chief-In-Charge: "Don''t worry, the information you gave, I will instruct someone to enter it into the databaseter. Soon, the entire CCG will have his data. As long as it is the right time, the headquarters will naturally arrange manpower to deal with him."


    Amon Koutarou breathes deeply, just wanted to refute.


    However, it was interrupted by the branch Chief-In-Charge: "The headquarters may have a major operation soon. The matter is prioritized. After the operation ispleted, the headquarters will naturally send people to expel the various ghouls in various regions. You don''t have to worry about this matter. Prepare for the next action."


    Seeing Amon Koutarou still looks resentful.


    Fearing that he woulde unauthorized, the Chief-In-Charge of the sub-office immediately had a n.


    "Oh, by the way, don''t leave yet."


    With that said, he pressed a button on the desk phone.


    As the button was pressed, the phone on the desk of Li Yaoxiang rang at the office outside the door, waking up Li Yaoxiang who was still sleeping.


    In the mist, Li Yaoxiang answered the phone: "What? After work?"


    "After work, your ass! It''s only half past six! There''s still half an hour! Come in my office now!"


    Li Yaoxiang looked at the clock and it was indeed half an hour before leaving work.


    Stretching azy waist, he slowly walked into the Chief-In-Charge room of the branch office, ignoring Amon Koutarou who was standing there like a wooden pile: "What''s wrong? Don''t be a temporary mission... I get off work in time, and I don''t work overtime."


    The Chief-In-Charge of the branch is not good said: "Rx, not a temporary mission. By the way, maybe you already know each other, but I still introduce it to you formally. This is the rank 1 ghoul investigator, Amon Koutarou. This is the first ss investigator, Li Yaoxiang. Amon Koutarou''s team leader had an ident, and he will follow you in the future, you should get familiar with him. "


    Li Yaoxiang:  ( lll)

 Chapter 261: Admission, belief

    Chapter 261: Admission, belief


    The branch Chief-In-Charge knows that Amon Koutarou is an orphan that has been devastated by the ghouls, and hates the ghouls very much. In the face of these kinds of problems, he often seem a bit irritable and impulsive.


    Now that there is a problem with Mado Kureo, let alone his situation.


    There is a high probability that his head will get hot and do something that should not be done.


    Lest he destroys the good things of CCG, when CCG focused on dealing with ''Aogiri Tree'', it ushered in the participation of other influences.


    So he thought of letting thezy Li Yaoxiang bring along the overly active Amon Koutarou, hoping they could influence each other and reconcile.


    Let Li Yaoxiang be diligent.


    Let Amon Koutarouze a little.


    Chief-In-Charge is very satisfied with this decision.


    Simply perfect match!


    While speaking, he even couldn''t help being nod.


    However, as soon as his voice just fell.


    He was greeted by Li Yaoxiang and Amon Koutarou at the same time: "I refuse!"


    The two looked at each other and looked back at the Chief-In-Charge of the branch, and they all said their reasons for refusal.


    Amon Koutarou: "Director, anyone can be my team leader, but only Li Yaoxiang, the first ss investigator, can''t do it! I don''t agree with his way of doing things. I don''t think I''m suitable for staying in his team."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Boss, it''s not like you don''t know my situation, how can I take someone with me? I even bought a ne ticket to Australia next month! And you asked me to take such a person who is not old, don''t me me for not reminding you in advance, if you really want him to stay in my team, it will definitely affect my progress inpleting the task! I can''t guarantee that I canplete the mission every month on time."


    Amon Koutarou did not agree with Li Yaoxiang''s way of doing things as he said.


    Of course, it sounds better, it''s just the way of doing things.


    It''s not good to hear, it is Li Yaoxiang''s work attitude.


    Simrly, Li Yaoxiang was also reluctant to involve too much with Amon Koutarou. After all, Amon Koutarou will definitely be involved with Ken Kaneki, and he doesn''t want to get involved.


    In order not to involve too much, he must not participate in the darkening n even for the main body.


    And it is true that he is going to travel to Australia.


    This happens to stagger CCG''s attack on ''Aogiri Tree''.


    The branch Chief-In-Charge immediately pretended to be said: "What Boss? Call me Director! The first ss investigator, Li Yaoxiang, you have to remember your identity. You are a CCG ghoul investigator. And I am not your Boss. It is the people, not me, who pay you the sry. As a superior ghoul investigator, you have an obligation to train an excellent ghoul investigator for the people. Don''t expect to go to Australia. This period of time, can''t ask for leave! I will notify customs in advance and you are strictly prohibited from leaving the country during this time. You don''t have to worry about air tickets, I will help you apply for subsidies. As for ... every month''s mission ... I allow you to reduce one or two cases. You can help me take a good lead with Amon, and take him to familiarize with the environment of the 20th district."


    Branch Bureau Chief-In-Charge is shame... shameless for power for personal gain!


    Nope, wait. It is for the public image!


    Li Yaoxiang did not expect that this boss that could not be soft, be hard. Doesn''t this force him to even join part of the darkening n?


    Before him, there are only 2 options.


    1) Resign and quit.


    Judging from the current rate of progress, it will take at least a few years for Kaneki Ken to darkening to 100%. Originally, Li Yaoxiang nned to end his journey in this world with the mentality of watching a movie while traveling.


    But if he quits and loses his status as a ghoul investigator, doesn''t it mean that he can''t go to many ces.


    Wouldn''t he have to wait a few years in vain?


    2) Simply enter the game to the end.


    If you really want to even participate in the darkening n, then simply speed up the darkening progress, leave this world immediately, and continue to go to other worlds to gain insights and open your eyes.


    Li Yaoxiang''s brows were almost wrinkled to the point of killing a fly.


    Analyze the pros and cons of things.


    The so-called pros and cons are actually the wishes of his heart.


    How happy, how sad.


    Thinking for a long time...


    Li Yaoxiang''s brow finally loosened slowly.


    Forget it, anyway, I have been in this world for more than ten years, and I have almost finished where I should go. Then enter the gamepletely, and by the way, before leaving, leave my own legend in this world.


    The room still sounded with the voice of Amon Koutarou persuading Chief-In-Charge to take back his words.


    At this time, Li Yaoxiang changed his abnormality and said, "Well, rank 1 ghoul investigator, Amon Koutarou, pleased to make your acquaintance."


    The sound in the room stopped suddenly.


    Branch Bureau Chief-In-Charge and Amon Koutarou, both looked surprised towards Li Yaoxiang.


    After all, Li Yaoxiang reputation is famous.


    They never thought that Li Yaoxiang would agree to this matter so easily.


    But the surprise expression of the Chief-In-Charge in the branch office quickly turned into a smile, encouraging: "Very good, Li, to cultivate more excellent ghoul investigators for the people. I believe you two will get along very harmoniously."


    The responded Amon Koutarou quickly refused, refuted, and prevented.


    Want to do the final struggle.


    At this time, Li Yaoxiang pped him on the shoulder and pointed to the clock hanging on the wall: "It''s off work. If you have anything to talk, I''ll talk about it tomorrow."


    Amon Koutarou was dumb.


    Just staring at Li Yaoxiang''s back from work on time, he slowly disappeared into the field of view.


    ...


    On the other hand.


    In the Anteiku shop.


    After leaving the abandoned field, Kaneki Ken and his party three people separated by a few alleys. Without anyone''s awareness, they got on the vehicle prepared by Tsukiyama Shuu and they brought Asaki with heavy injury to the Anteiku shop.


    At this time, Fueguchi was already lying on a bed.


    Fueguchi Ryoko and Fueguchi Hinami were with him, enjoying the warm time when the family of 3 finally reunited.


    The issue of injury should not cause everyone to worry too much.


    After all, he''s a ghoul...


    As long as the nutrition is sufficient, he will recover soon.


    What happened was also known from the mouth of Fueguchi Asaki. Not only the three family members of Fueguchi''s family are grateful to Kaneki, but even the whole Anteiku shop also felt very appreciative of Kaneki Ken''s behavior, and even warmed their hearts.


    If we say that before, because of Fueguchi Hinami, they have regarded Kaneki Ken as their own and as a member of the ghouls.


    At this time, Kaneki Ken was regarded as a family member.


    Kirishima Touka was so impressed by Kaneki Ken.


    didn''t expect Kaneki Ken, who looked gentle, would have such a domineering side.


    Of course, at this time, Kaneki Ken had not noticed the change in everyone''s attitude towards him.


    After freeing the humble father, he was only thinking about the problem of bing stronger and weapons.


    After all, from the attitude of Mado Kureo and Amon Koutarou, in fact, he can see the views of most people and most humans on the seed.


    He didn''t want to be a public enemy of all mankind.


    He did not want to live in hiding in the future.


    So now he is eager to change all this...


    darkening degree:


    59%...


    61%...


    63%...

 Chapter 262: Partner Join

    Chapter 262: Partner Join


    In the room.


    Kaneki Ken came to a family of three.


    The lying Fueguchi, he wanted to sit up at the moment, but he was still unable to recover from his injury. Kaneki Ken was the first to appease: "Don''t be nervous, I just came to see how you are."


    Fueguchi didn''t force it anymore, andy down and said, "Thank you, I don''t know how to thank you except to say thank you ..."


    Ryoko got up and bowed to Kaneki Ken to thank him.


    Hinami hugged into Kaneki Ken''s arms and thanked Kaneki Ken for saving father.


    After chatting a little bit, Fueguchi Asaki continued: "Please rest assured that when I am better injured, I will leave here with Ryoko and Hina, I will not trouble you anymore.


    Kaneki Ken shaking one''s head: "Actually, you don''t have to be like this. Maybe your wife hasn''t told you, but in fact, I am looking for you, and I need something to help you ..."


    Fueguchi said with a smile: "I can help you if I can help you."


    Kaneki Ken: "I want you to help me make Quinque? A Quinque, that is exactly the same as CCG, can you do it?"


    Fueguchi Asaki was startled and said, "This...", and immediately began to hesitate.


    Kaneki Ken: "After this incident, CCG will definitely start to hunt down your family of three. Since I saved you, I naturally won''t let you fall into danger again. Even if Anteiku do not wee you, I will find another stable ce for you. Even if CCG traces you, I will stop them. But my current strength alone won''t guarantee you how long. I need more power, and I need you to help me build Quinque and enhance my strength. As long as my strength is strong enough, I can ensure that you continue to live a stable life. Well, I also want such a stable life. I don''t want to live a life of hiding, so... Can you help me?"


    Asaki: "This..."


    Kaneki Ken: "Don''t think about yourself, but also think about your wife and daughter. Do you still want to take them to live in hiding?"


    Fueguchi Asaki looked at his wife and then at the daughter.


    Expression isplex.


    Consider for a long time.


    Just out of the pit of the ''Yamori'' and climbed out, didn''t expect to fall into another pit immediately.


    But after thinking about it, Kaneki is his savior, and his daughter, Hinami, have also received a lot of attention from Kaneki Ken during this period of time. In addition, Kaneki Ken''s character is not as unstable as the "Yamori", which will hurt his wife daughter at any time. Atst, Fueguchi Asaki finally let out a sigh of relief and said, "...We will discuss it. I''ll tell youter."


    Kaneki Ken smiled.


    The two sides formally reached an agreement.


    The entire Anteiku shop, in addition to a young family, also knew that Yoshimura wanted Kaneki Ken to want Fueguchi to build Quinque for Kaneki Ken.


    But he did not choose to persuade this time.


    Just silently paying attention to all this in front of them, not knowing what he was thinking in his mind.


    After that, there was no intention to ask Fueguchi family to leave the Anteiku shop.


    However, Kaneki Ken finally chose to take Fuguchi''s family away from the Anteiku, let Tsukiyama Shuu take their family to a safe ce, let them rest at ease, but also let Fueguchi Asaki feel at ease while he built Quinque.


    You don''t have to worry about money and materials, all are paid by Tsukiyama.


    Kaneki Ken can be silent again in the process of training and be-stronger.


    It''s just that the departure of the family of three finally attracted Kirishima Touka''s investigation.


    She was worried that the family would be tracked by CCG, so she insisted on continuing the questioning.


    In the situation where he is sloppy...


    Kaneki Ken finally had to inform her of his purpose, and the result was of course, Kirishima Touka asked again.


    Kirishima Touka pushed Kaneki Ken to the corner and grabbed Kaneki Ken''s cor: "Do you want the young father to build Quinque for you?! Why?! Why do you need Quinque?! Making these weapons, do you know what''s the risk? It will definitely attract CCG''s attention! That will definitely affect our present life and even expose our identity! Why? Tell me why! Kaneki Ken!"


    Kirishima Touka pays the most attention to her existing life and rtionship with human beings. If someone in the Anteiku hadn''t been in danger, she really didn''t want anyone to break this hard-earned life.


    Kaneki Ken grabbed the wrist of Touka of Kirishima which grabbed his cor, and slowly lowered it.


    Kirishima Touka reacted.


    It turns out that Kaneki Ken''s power has be so great?


    Even when she tried her best, she couldn''t break free from his shackles.


    Kaneki Ken: "If I don''t build Quinque, CCG won''t pay attention to us? Even if there is no incident with the Hinami''s family, as long as we are ghouls, we will inevitably meet CCG one day. Hiding is impossible. This should be very clear to you, isn''t it?"


    Kirishima Touka''s eyes widened and was dumbstruck and unable to reply by Kaneki Ken.


    Kaneki Ken: "You are thinking, how long can afortable day like thisst long, right?"


    Kaneki Ken did say what Kirishima Touka wanted.


    Her mind was seen through, which made her inevitably somewhat guilty.


    Don''t know what to say.


    Kaneki Ken: "You want to keep hiding ... but I don''t want to. I was originally a human being, and I should have lived a free life. Why should I suffer because of the faults of others?"


    Kirishima Touka lost her face and said, "You ... you ... are you so dissatisfied with your life now?"


    Kaneki Ken: "No, I am very satisfied. I am very happy to meet you. Even if I were given another chance to choose, I would still meet Rize-san, let them change me into a ghoul, and then get to know you."


    Kirishima Touka: "Then you..."


    Kaneki Ken: "But this doesn''t mean that I am willing to give up the human life I should have, it does not mean that I am willing to give up the ''freedom'' I should have."


    Kirishima Touka: "You ... you ... what do you want to do?"


    Kaneki Ken: "I want to change this world. I don''t want to give up on both sides. I want to let the ghouls and human beings live in peace. I want them to ept me from the bottom of their hearts, or to ept our existence."


    Hearing Kaneki Ken''s brave words.


    Kirishima Touka froze her breath.


    The atmosphere dare not breathe one.


    Kirishima Touka: "This...this...can this really be done?"


    Kaneki Ken slowly released her wrist and squinted with a smile: "If you don''t try it, how do you know that it won''t work? Even if it fails, at least I have to try to fight for it. If you fail but lucky enough to survive, you can go anonymous and live a new life. No matter how bad it is, it''s not much different from the current situation, right?"


    Kaneki Ken nned to leave the Anteiku shop and go home to continue training.


    Before he leftpletely, Kirishima Touka''s voice came: "Can I join?"


    Kaneki Ken figure pauses.


    The tone said with a smile: "Of course."


    Immediately, the figure slowly disappeared in the field of view of Touka of Kirishima ...

 Chapter 263: suitcase, sword

    Chapter 263: suitcase, sword


    Time flies.


    Years are like a shuttle.


    In a sh, half a month passed.


    During this half a month, in addition to taking sses and going to work in an Anteiku shop, Kaneki Ken is still silent in the process of training and bing stronger. The difference from before is that now Kaneki Ken has a sparring partner like Kirishima Touka.


    After a while, Nishio Nishiki, who noticed the abnormality and asked the truth about Nishino. Although he didn''t understand where his girlfriend Nishino disappeared in the end, but for one day, when he meet Nishino again, the two can have a wonderful rtionship in the future, Nishio Nishiki will soon join this group.


    Everyone will start their training career after work in the Anteiku shop.


    From time to time, Kaneki Ken will ask Kirishima Touka, Nishio Nishiki, Tsukiyama Shuu, three people to attack him at the same time, in order to increase the actualbat experience.


    As actualbat experience umtes, it gets richer.


    Kaneki Ken''s strength has be more rapid as it progresses.


    Today, he can not only meet the requirements mentioned by Li Yaoxiang, but also perfectlybine the attacks of ''Kagune'' and ''Eight Trigram Sixty-Four Palms'' in one-on-one.


    Every time he closed his palms, Kagune would make up for a blow.


    There are no loopholes in the upper, middle and lower three ways.


    Even when attacked from multiple directions, he can handle it with ease.


    At the beginning, facing three people who also had progress, and at the same time, he would inevitably suffer some injuries during the siege, so Tsukiyama Shuu became more and more energetic and harder.


    Every time after ying, he will volunteer to clean the battlefield.


    But to this day, in the face of the simultaneous attacks of three people, he has already practiced the Eight Trigram Sixty-Four Palms in the bones, and he is no longer injured.


    Often when three people fully attack his main body, his body will instinctively avoid the series of seemingly fancy and seemingly fierce attacks.


    And his mind can focus on Kagune''s parry or counterattack.


    Therefore, there is the result that one will not be injured.


    Even though Tsukiyama Shuu, Kirishima Touka, and Nishio Nishiki three people have made great progress, and the reason why Kaneki Ken''s progress can still be far away from them, in the final analysis, of course, it is due to Li Yaoxiang''s golden finger.


    The guy with Li Yaoxiang''s strength disparity gives a small gap to Kaneki Ken every night.


    It''s really hard to make progress slowly.


    And time hase to this day.


    As usual, several people came to work in the Anteiku shop after school.


    It didn''t take long.


    ''Ring! Ring'' at the door.


    Tsukiyama, wearing a bright suit, carried a suitcase and appeared in everyone''s eyes.


    Seeing the suitcase in Tsukiyama Shuu''s hand, Kaneki Ken, Kirishima Touka, and Nishio Nishiki are all expressions of happiness, while Yoshimura is looking thoughtful.


    Followed by.


    After asking the store manager for a ''little break'' for a while, the three of them excitedly went upstairs and came to the reception room to witness the miracle moment.


    Tsukiyama Shuu carried the suitcase in his hand.


    Of course, it is the result of Fueguchi Asaki since half a month.


    Although he will build Quinque.


    But asking him to build a Quinque like CCG, which can shrink freely, is inevitably difficult in the absence of manpower and material resources.


    Fortunately, his innate talent is not low.


    In just half a month, he developed a semifinished product.


    Compared with CCG''s Quinque, this Quinque created by Fueguchi has no fingerprint recognition technology and anyone can use it.


    There is no CCG, which can retain the effect of thepleteness of Kagune.


    Not to be able to mass-produce quickly.


    It only serves to facilitate portability.


    The building materials are only Kaneki Ken''s Kagune, not Kakuhou of other ghouls.


    So after changing from a suitcase to a weapon, it also has only one fixed form.


    Even so, being able to achieve this effect with such ack of natural resources is enough to make Kaneki Ken and the others feel very excited.


    In the reception room.


    Kaneki Ken took the suitcase.


    Press the ''Open'' button.


    The suitcase turned from a boxy box into a sword in an instant. The de is covered with scales and two rows of tentacles.


    Very simr to Kaneki Ken''s Kagune.


    But there is no thickness.


    Except for its peculiar appearance, it is no different from the ordinary long sword.


    Kaneki Ken looks up at this long-awaited result with satisfaction, and asks in his mind: "How? Is it okay?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "It''s not bad. With the weapon in hand, the ghoul investigator will no longer have any advantage in front of you."


    After several people took turns to appreciate it, they went downstairs to work.


    It wasn''t until the end of work that impatient came to their stronghold to try the formidable power of this weapon.


    At the same time.


    looks-at The back of several people who were excited and left together.


    Yomo Renji, who came to the Anteiku, undeniably asked Yoshimura next to him: "You will let them continue like this?"


    These past few days.


    In fact, Yoshimura and Yomo Renji actually saw the behavior of Kaneki Ken and the others.


    Just see but didn''t say.


    Yoshimura: "Even if I want to stop them, do you think they will listen?"


    Yomo Renji: "Then you will watch them go to die?"


    "Hah~" Yoshimura sighed, hands behind his back, and returned to the shop, "Save their lives if necessary ..."


    The content of the conversation between Yomo Renji and Yoshimura, Kaneki Ken didn''t know, and it was impossible to know. After all, Li Yaoxiang didn''t tell him what he meant.


    And that night.


    Kaneki Ken began to learn the skills of using weapons from Li Yaoxiang.


    To avoid being spotted on Kaneki Ken''s sword art during the fight, Li Yaoxiang did not choose to buy Arima''s sword art and teach it to Kaneki Ken.


    Instead, he bought the "Konoha''s White Fang Hatake Sakumo''s word art" on his body before handing it to Kaneki Ken.


    ...


    Time flies.


    Time flies.


    In a sh, another week passed.


    During this week, Li Yaoxiang will use ''Tsukuyomi'' for Kaneki Ken almost every night. y against Kaneki Ken in Tsukuyomi World.


    Kaneki Ken didn''t understand that it was Genjutsu.


    Misunderstanding that he''s in the consciousness space.


    The reason why Li Yaoxiang did that is because, in a way, Kaneki Ken in original work was able to quickly be-stronger because he experienced the ''1000-7'' incident with ''Yamori''.


    With a strong resilience, he is not afraid of pain.


    So fighting is crazy.


    Injury for injury.


    In Tsukuyomi World, Li Yaoxiang is to train Kaneki Ken to forget the pain during the battle, so that he will not be affected by the pain.


    Even let him experience the feeling of death.


    Only in this way, when Kaneki Ken meets other enemies, will he be fearless.


    Time came this day a weekter.


    Kaneki Ken''s swordsmanship has finally been learned.


    The strength has once again made a leap forward.


    But shortly after he went to work with Kirishima Touka, just as the store manager went out, a few unexpected guests came.


    The leader is a tall, fierce guy.


    Behind them are guys wearing gas masks.

 Chapter 264: Banjou

    Chapter 264: Banjou


    The guy who looks strong, tall, and sturdy is exactly Banjou Kazuichi.


    And several guys wearing gas masks behind him are his followers.


    After entering the Anteiku shop, he subconsciously ignored Kaneki Ken and Kirishima Touka who looked like ''part-timers'', scanned the shop for a week, but couldn''t see a decent person in charge, so he asked Kaneki: "Where''s the store manager?"


    Seeing that Kaneki Ken was slow, and hasn''t answered yet, he wanted to grab his Kaneki Ken and asked him where the manager.


    But the hand he stretched out was easily escaped by Kaneki Ken.


    Banjou Kazuichi was about to get angry when he rushed towards Kaneki Ken again, but was stopped by Kirishima Touka''s anger and shouted: "Hey hey, you didn''t even order a cup of coffee, what do you want to do here?"


    Banjou Kazuichi count one after another stunned: "Is that so ... then I''ll have a cup of coffee."


    After a while.


    Coffee is here.


    Banjou Kazuichi sat at the same table face-to-face with Kaneki Ken and Kirishima Touka, and exined his intention: "That''s it. Rize-san once said that she liked this coffee shop very much, so we came here to find her."


    It is exactly simr to original work.


    This seemingly strong and sturdy Banjou Kazuichi number one is actually a kind-hearted and low-strength guy.


    The 6th district that he was in charge of was now invaded by the Aogiri Tree.


    In order to rescue the only remainingpanions, he also agreed to join the Aogiri Tree to help them do things.


    Banjou Kazuichi sniffed twice, suddenly pped the table, stood up, and asked Kaneki Ken: "Wait! Howe you the same scent as Rize-san? Is Rize-san your girlfriend?!"


    With that said, he wanted to directly beat Kaneki Ken.


    Hit him with a punch.


    The fist past through.


    ''Oh!'' A loud noise.


    He was unsteady on his own feet, slipped and hit the ground, and passed out in aa.


    After 1 hour...


    Banjou Kazuichi number one finally woke up.


    He also learned that he had misunderstood Kaneki Ken.


    "I''m sorry, I shouldn''t be so impulsive." He immediately knelt and apologized, then sincerely asked Kaneki Ken, "Please, if there is an opportunity to see Rize-san again, please, you must tell her to run away!"


    He told the entire process of development to Kaneki Ken.


    Said the news about the Aogiri Tree hunt for Rize Kamishiro, the Aogiri Tree and so on.


    In the process of speaking, Kaneki Ken asked the relevant details in his mind: "What the hell is this Aogiri Tree?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "It''s simr to what you think. It''s a group of unwilling members who don''t want to live in hiding. However, their ideas are more extreme than you, and they want to suppress everything with military force."


    Hearing this organization hasmon goals.


    Kaneki Ken was touched in his heart.


    asked subconsciously.


    "Military force suppressing everything... Is this...is it really possible to seed?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Of course it''s impossible. After all, this world is dominated by humans. Even if the ghouls really win by force, the problem is that if the ghouls want to survive, they cannot exterminate humans. If humans cannot be exterminated, humans will surely n to resist. So even if it seeds, it won''tst long. Just the same as the status quo of the ghouls. The same reason again. Although the number of ghouls is not as good as humans, it is not a small number. Humans want topletely exterminate the ghouls, but they will naturally usher in a counterattack from the ghouls. Even if they were sessfully extinct by humans, they didn''t even know where the roots of the ghouls are. After the ghouls be extinct, it is impossible to estimate whether new ghouls will be born. So, the way humans are doing today is equally impossible."


    Kaneki Ken: "So, the only way to achieve my goal is to live peacefully with human beings?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Yes."


    [Darkening degree]


    64%...


    65%...


    Speaking of which, Kaneki Ken strengthened his faith.


    Kaneki Ken: "You''ve always told me before that if I want to achieve I goals, I must first be stronger. After I be stronger, I will be eligible to participate in all this and achieve my goals. Then... Can your approach really seed? Can human beings coexist peacefully with other ghouls?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Of course!"


    Kaneki Ken: "What way?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "CCG, or the attitude of most human beings towards ghouls, you''ve seen itst time right? After nearly a hundred years of fighting and killing each other, under the condition of umting hatred, the rtionship between humans and ghouls has grown over time. That rtionship, so to speak, have be a vicious circle. To the point of no mediation. If you want to coexist peacefully, in addition to details, you must slowly let human beings feel harmless, so that they can''t feel the human hostility, but also create amon enemy! An enemy so powerful that the two sides have to cooperate to contend!"


    Kaneki Ken: "The enemy?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Yes. As your strength bes stronger, you will naturallye into contact with it. When that timees, you don''t need me to tell you what to do."


    Now that Li Yaoxiang has said so.


    Kaneki Ken knew that Li Yaoxiang would not disclose it again.


    He simply pulled off the topic and said: "Then ... why is this Aogiri Tree looking for the Rize-san, you should be able to tell me?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "This has something to do with the life of Rize Kamishiro... The RC cells in her body, her Kagune, are different. This is rted to the nning of several different influences. So someone will target her and create an "ident" to deal with her. So someone wants to find her. And you who inherited the RC cells of Rize Kamishiro, as you be stronger, you will also be forced into this vortex."


    Hearing that Kamishiro Rize''s Kagune and RC cells are different.


    Kaneki Ken instantly thought of himself.


    "I also inherited her Kagune. Is this Aogiri Tree organization taking me as a target?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Yep."


    After muttered for a moment, Kaneki Ken questioned: "What you said about ''making enemies'' has a lot to do with this matter?"


    Speaking of it.


    Not waiting for Li Yaoxiang to answer.


    Just listen to ''Ooooooooooooo!'' A loud noise.


    The floor-to-ceiling ss of the Anteiku shop was suddenly smashed by a ck shadow, and then added a foot, kicking Banjou Kazuichi number one by one, and smashing it into several followers.


    Theer is the younger brother of Kirishima Touka.


    Kirishima Ayato.


    As soon as Kirishima Ayato arrived, he said these two sentences arrogantly,pletely ignoring the existence of Kaneki Ken and Kirishima Touka.


    "What are you doing here, Banjou Kazuichi? Do you want to be beaten to vomit blood again?"


    Kirishima Touka took the lead to greet him.


    Kirishima Ayato: "Long time no see, idiot."


    Kirishima Touka: "Where the hell have you been lying about, you bastard!"

 Chapter 265: smells quite delicious

    Chapter 265: smells quite delicious


    Kirishima Ayato: "Of course I went out to study in society. But I am different from you who advocate peace."


    Kirishima Touka: "You, a child, don''t talk big!"


    Kirishima Ayato: "You''re the child, aren''t you? Recognize the reality, idiot."


    The siblings quarreled halfway through.


    Another ''Ring! Ring!''.


    The door of the Anteiku shop was pushed open.


    Herees a guy dressed in a white suit, taller and more robust than Banjou Kazuichi, and a guy with heavy makeup who looks sissy.


    When he saw the two, both the Banjou Kazuichi and the face of Kirishima Ayato became difficult to look at.


    Theing person is Yakumo Oomori, Yamori.


    And shemale, Nico.


    As soon as the two came in, they had the same attitude as Kirishima Ayato, and they did not take Kaneki Ken at all. As if their arrival meant that everything has been doomed.


    Kaneki Ken can only let them ughter.


    If it is Kaneki Ken in original work, it is indeed as if they as it should be by rights.


    Kaneki Ken can only let them ughter.


    But Kaneki Ken in this life has been carefully ''built'' by Li Yaoxiang, how can they do what they want? However, before confirming the intention of several people, Kaneki Ken did not intend to attack.


    Standing silently in this way.


    Looking at their aloof and arrogant looks.


    Yamori ignored everyone and directly talked to Kirishima Ayato: "Is it all right, Ayato? Can I disturb?"


    The tone seems polite, but the behavior is not polite at all.


    Shemale Nico is even more proactive in turning the ''OPEN'' sign in front of the Anteiku shop into ''CLOSED'', and then closing the shop door.


    But this polite tone is obviously not suitable for them.


    So they soon showed their true colors.


    Yamori, with a yful attitude, asked Kirishima Ayato if it was all right.


    Shemale Nico mocks Kirishima Touka, saying that both sisters are so beautiful, so enviable, showing a disgusting look, and sucking finger.


    Compared to Kirishima Ayato, these two people are much harder to see.


    Banjou Kazuichi is very clear about this.


    Even though he has been kicked to the ground by Kirishima Ayato, he hastily spoke for Kaneki Ken and the others, hoping that these two people would not harm Kaneki Ken and the others.


    It is a pity that Banjou Kazuichi''s kindness is destined to be impossible.


    Because before he finished speaking, Yamori kicked a chair directly onto the face of Banjou Kazuichi.


    It was the appearance of Kaneki and Touka taking a few steps forward.


    The nose sucked in a few times.


    After apparently sniffing the smell of Kaneki Ken, he still has to put on a look of ''evil man'' and say in a somber tone: "It smells so bad-- ~, I hate the most disgusting smell ~"


    While speaking, he deliberately brought his fiend face close to Kaneki Ken.


    Come to a close look at each other.


    Only boxers will make this move when they provoke their opponent.


    There is only one reason why they do this.


    It is to make the opponent afraid of himself and himself. Simrly, Yamori''s favorite thing is to see the prey afraid of him, the fear of him, and the appearance of shivering to him.


    In the original work, Kaneki Ken was indeed scared by his actions and forced back to the bar. The whole person not knowing what to do.


    But now Kaneki Ken has not taken a step back!


    Just go straight back to gaze at Yamori.


    This performance really surprised Yamori. Kaneki Ken''s expression didn''t change, and he was the first to show a surprised look.


    On the imposing-manner it was clear that they lost.


    Originally wanted to scare Kaneki Ken.


    The result was shocked by Kaneki Ken''s reaction.


    He reacted, only feeling dull on his face. The expression gradually became ugly. At the same time, he became more interested in the prey of Kaneki Ken.


    This is not the reaction that weak people can show.


    Only those who have enough confidence in their strength can dare to look at him like this.


    This made him even more eager to conquer Kaneki Ken.


    The more tenacious Kaneki Ken performed, the more excited he would be.


    Yamori straightened again.


    His hands were also pulled out of his trouser pockets, to ask a question, when already knew the answer and said: "Now, Nico, will this guy do?"


    And shemale Nico was also attracted by Kaneki Ken''s move. It doesn''t matter what''s in the original work. Instead, he pinches his legs and twists and kneads, very excited: "It''s him! Take him away quickly!"


    It stands to reason that hearing the phrase ''Take Kaneki Ken'' away, knowing Kirishima Touka''s character, she would have already taken the lead.


    In the original work, she did.


    It''s just that Kirishima Touka of this life is very aware of Kaneki Ken''s strength.


    Nico, Ayato plus the disgusting Yamori, or the three people together are not the opponent of Kaneki Ken. Why should she worry about Kaneki Ken? So she just stood there, silently watching all this.


    Just as expected.


    Of course shemale Nico gave a positive answer.


    Yamori, who suppressed his desire to the extreme, finally took the lead in working with Kaneki Ken under intolerable circumstances. His fist, as big as a y pot, punched Kaneki Ken''s cheek with a punch.


    But he didn''t feel like he was hitting the target.


    The picture that came into view was Kaneki Ken''s cheek, just less than a centimeter from his fist.


    In other words, his seemingly mighty punch is not worth mentioning to Kaneki Ken.


    Otherwise, he will not dodge the fist in this disdainful way.


    However, the facts are exactly as Yamori thought.


    Kaneki Ken did not take his fist into consideration.


    After avoiding this fist, Kaneki even expressionless provocatively said: "Did anyone tell you that you smell quite delicious?"


    Yamori''s eyes widened, and it was incredibly gaze at this scene.


    He instinctively pulled back the fist.


    Opened the distance from Kaneki Ken.


    It was not the shock that Kaneki Ken avoided the punch.


    After all, judging from Kaneki Ken''s performance just now, he already had some guesses. He never thought that with this fist alone, Kaneki Ken could be cleaned.


    What shocked him was that he could really feel that what was said in Kaneki Ken''s mouth was not cracking a joke.


    Kaneki Ken has indeed regarded him as his prey.


    Just like he treated his prey.


    He felt very familiar with this feeling.


    You won''t feel mistaken!


    Since I was reborn, I don''t know how long I haven''t felt this way.


    He never imagined that a ghoul, who was rated as S+ strength by CCG, would be a prey in the eyes of others the first time they meet.


    How ridiculous is this?


    Yamori nced around.


    Kaneki Ken''s attitude, coupled with the sight of him being forced back at the scene, made him feel very humiliated.


    After the humiliation, there is endless anger!

 Chapter 266: Half-kakuja

    Chapter 266: Half-kakuja


    The extremely angry Yamori, unable to bear, gave a beast roar.


    Followed by.


    It''s when veins are exposed and fist clenches.


    2 scorpions protrude from the back.


    Immediately, he rushed towards Kaneki Ken directly.


    Andunched a series of attacks.


    Or throw a punch.


    Or swept and thrusted with Kagune.


    It''s a pity that the series of seemingly fierce offensives of Yamori is like ying in front of Kaneki Ken. To avoid smashing things in the shop, Kaneki Ken didn''t even hide.


    All the attacks were resolved by Kaneki Ken in a way of unloading force.


    Every punch was gently pushed by Kaneki Ken, which eased his offensive easily and ensured that fist would not fall on the furniture.


    Kagune was also given one after another parry by Kaneki Ken''s four rinkaku.


    Fighting sounds constantly echoed in the store.


    But this sound of fierce fighting soundspletely inconsistent with the scene.


    The picture in the Anteiku shop is very strange.


    It stands to reason that such unscrupulous attacks like Yamori should have smashed up small Anteiku shops.


    Everyone on the scene, in addition to seeing the fast as lightning attack, kept shing in front of them, but the surrounding tableware, tables, chairs, bar counters, etc., were so strange that even one was not smashed.


    This scene in front of them simply made everyone present dumbfounded.


    Of course they are not naive enough to think that this is the result of the Yamori holding back.


    With the temperament of Yamori, how could it possibly pity the items in the Anteiku?


    They had predicted that Kaneki Ken would be able to contend with Yamori, and they had also predicted that Kaneki would be unscathed under the situation that Yamori''s chasing and attacking.


    Although these results will surprise them, they are still within their tolerance.


    But the scene in front of them has far exceeded their ability to withstand! They absolutely didn''t expect that while Kaneki Ken was fighting Yamori, he still had the power to save the items in the store from being destroyed!


    Does this mean that the attack of Yamori, for Kaneki Ken, is simply child''s y?


    Outsiders can notice this.


    The fighting Yamori, even if they didn''t notice it at first.


    Noticed it now.


    However, unlike other people, he was not shocked because of Kaneki Ken''s strength, but felt extremely humiliated!


    He felt that Kaneki Ken was despising himself!


    Otherwise, why would he be distracted by other things when he was at war with himself?


    If it is said that Kaneki Ken is worried about the safety of Kirishima Touka, and distractedly pays attention to Kirishima Touka, that''s all. But Kaneki Ken distracted attention, turned out to be those insignificant items.


    Isn''t this just humiliating yourself naked..naked..naked?!


    Kaneki Ken''s behavior.


    Finally seeded and angered Yamoripletely.


    He doesn''t n to keep his hand anymore.


    No matter what mission is not mission.


    At this time, he had only one idea, which was to kill Kaneki Ken!


    Without killing Kaneki Ken, I can''t solve the evil in my heart!


    The extremely angry Yamori not only didn''t mean to stop attacking, but also kept elerating the attacking speed and attacking power. Behind him is a brand new kagune!


    The appearance of the new kagune began to spread to him while Yamori continued to attack.


    Trying to wrap his cheeks and arms.


    Trying to transform into the form of a half-kakuja.


    TL note: A Kakuja (red one, kakuja) is a kind of ghoul with a transformed kagune that ds the ghoul''s body. Though it is rare, it can ur through repeated cannibalism. When a ward has a higher ghoul to human ratio, cannibalism is moremon due to turf wars and limited food supply. Sometimes, the transformation is iplete, and such individuals are called half-kakujas (han kakuja).


    And as the shape of the half-kakuja bes closer to perfection, the strength of Yamori also bes more and more powerful immediately!


    Yamori''s strength changes.


    Ken Kaneki, who was fighting with him, deeply felt it.


    The original face of calm also became serious.


    This strength...


    Can''t hold back!


    Without the slightest hesitation, a sh.


    Appeared close to Yamori.


    The gesture style of ''Eight Trigram Sixty-Four Palms'' is disyed.


    There are no moments of pause.


    Parry for so long, this is Kaneki Ken''s first attack on Yamori.


    Eight palms!


    Sixteen palms!


    Thirty-two palms!


    Sixty-four palms!


    Simultaneously striking Sixty-Four Palms within 10 seconds, the four rinkaku attacks never stopped. The fast movement and the intensive attack made Yamori simply unable to respond.


    His muscr, tall body seemed to be fixed in midair by Kaneki Ken, and then Kaneki Ken kept beating and piercing.


    After the attack.


    A lot of bloodshot in midair.


    Yamori broke the ss directly and was smashed out.


    The whole process of the attack is like flowing water and fast as lightning.


    As a result, everyone present didn''t realize what happened, so they just listened to ''Ah! a loud noise, while they looked in the direction Yamori flew upside down.


    Then click.


    The blood in the sky falls.


    In the end, he stunned and turned his eyes to the creator, Kaneki Ken.


    Everyone can''t describe their mood at the moment.


    I don''t even know what I saw.


    The average attack of 6 palms and 6 stabs per second is not at all what their eyesight can capture. They only saw that Kaneki Kenpleted a very perfect set of moves.


    Yamori was hit in midair.


    After the fight, Yamori flew out.


    Then... there is no more.


    Kaneki Ken didn''t even catch his breath.


    However, everyone''s shock and sluggishness were quickly brought back to their minds by a loudugh outside the store: "Hahahahahaha! Interesting! Really interesting!"


    With the sound ofughter.


    Yamori, whose upper body was wrapped by Kagune, stepped on the ss shard and walked back.


    The wound on his body was repaired at the speed of naked eye.


    Yamori said with a smile: "didn''t expect--, didn''t expect--. Didn''t expect here will encounter such an interesting opponent. Unfortunately, your attack can''t threaten me at all. This time it was my turn to attack... You...


    Are you ready?"


    After sessfully transforming into a half-kakuja, Yamori has unparalleled confidence.


    Kaneki Ken ignored these.


    Asked in his mind: "What''s the matter with him? My attack didn''t work for him?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "He is in the form of a half-kakuja. He''s like you; he also eats other Kagune, so he''s powerful like this. And he has three kakuhou. Resilience is very strong. An ordinary attack cannot beat him. If you want to beat him, unless you inflict more damage on him than he can repair. Otherwise, you can only start with his Kakuhou.


    Kaneki Ken: "Start with Kakuhou?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Yes. As long as you don''t have a Kakuhou(the organ), you can''t survive."


    Kaneki Ken in reality heard from his ear: "Kaneki!"


    Kaneki Ken looked around.


    He saw Kirishima Touka throwing a suitcase at him.


    It turned out that while everyone was watching the battle of two people, Kirishima Touka had already taken the lead and went to the lounge to take out his suitcase. Now it just happens toe in handy...

 Chapter 267: nice guy delivered to your door

    Chapter 267: nice guy delivered to your door


    Take the suitcase.


    Kaneki Ken first expressed his thanks to Kirishima Touka.


    Immediately, he turned his attention back to Yamori.


    Finally, in full view, opened the ''switch'' of the suitcase.


    J Just hear a ''choke'' sound.


    In a moment, the suitcase became a long sword.


    In front of this scene, several Aogiri Tree guys, including the shemale Nico, were shown startled. Even Yamori burned in anger, unable to bear asked: "Quinque? Why do you have Quinque?"


    The sword is down.


    Kaneki Ken dragged the long sword, step by step walked over towards Yamori.


    "You''ll die anyway, you don''t need to know so much."


    Yamori hearing this, grinning: "Dead?"


    His double fists wrapped in Kagune touched his chest, and they also greeted Kaneki Ken.


    A mere handful of Quinque.


    Yamori was just surprised but didn''t take it seriously.


    After all, he didn''t deal with ''white doves''.


    The white doves are holding the flowery Quinque in their hands, but it still cannot help them. The fact that Quinque, which can be shrunk into a suitcase, fell into his hands, made him feel a little novel.


    He has absolute self-confidence in the shape of his half-kakuja.


    He firmly believed that even if Kaneki Ken had Quinque, he could not kill himwith a single blow. As long as you can''t kill me with one blow, then with my regeneration ability, I have nothing to fear!


    The distance between the two sides.


    Getting closer.


    Soon it was within the scope of their respective attacks.


    Yamori not saying anything further, the punch is about to smash the head of Kaneki Ken, the strength of the fist is strong, as if there is a trend of punching Kaneki Ken''s head as a watermelon like a punch!


    Shua!


    The fist crossed the air.


    Hit the target!


    No, not right.


    Rather than hitting the target, it''s better to pass through the target.


    Yamori''s fist passed directly through Kaneki Ken''s head.


    But this head soon disappeared.


    This is nothing more than an afterimage left in the field of view of Yamori by Kaneki Ken while moving fast.


    Before he could react, he only felt the pain of the whole body.


    Numerous wounds appeared on the whole body.


    If you look at it from a spectator''s point of view, you can see Kaneki Ken attacking every part of Yamori''s body with various tricky angles in a short split second, with palms, Kagune, and Quinque.


    The Quinque holding in his hand rotated 360 degrees from time to time, switching the position of holding the sword, sometimes holding the sword in his forehand, and sometimes reverse-gripping the sword.


    It is very different from the way a ghoul investigator uses Quinque.


    Not so much as Kenjutsu.


    It is better to say that this is more like a ninja ying a slightly longer kunai, attacking his enemies.


    And this is also the sword art of ''Konoha''s White Fang''.


    Konoha''s White Fang''s knife can only be regarded as a rtively short de.


    It is much shorter than the normal Samurai knife.


    So in his sword art, he will often use various ninja attack skills, like reverse-gripping a knife.


    The current Kaneki Ken, although his sword art has not been fully developed, but with Taijutsu and Kagune, it is more than enough to deal with Yamori in its full form with the upper body technique and Kagune.


    Yamori was directly attacked by Kaneki Ken''s fancy flowers, which made him dizzy.


    Kaneki Ken''s attack could not be captured at all.


    It''s hard to get parry.


    But the more this is, the easier it is to provoke the anger of Yamori.


    Since he couldn''t catch it, he would not care.


    The arm wrapped by Kagune suddenly became bigger!


    He also swept away everything around him!


    This blow down.


    If he was sessfully dropped by him, even if Kaneki Ken avoided it, the whole building would probably be swept down by him. At the same time, this is exactly what Yamori wants to see at the moment.


    Missed Kaneki Ken.


    He couldn''t vent his anger.


    If he couldn''t vent his anger, then he would simply destroy and kill everything in the field of view!


    The huge Kagune arm raised high.


    Immediately afterwards, there was a crack of air.


    None of the angles and postures of Yamori''s body at this time proved that his blow had swept through.


    It''s just that not at all the picture of the copse of the whole building in imagination.


    Not much has changed.


    The coffee shop, is still the same coffee shop.


    The people, is still the same group of people.


    The only change was that the people in front of him looked at him a lot differently.


    It doesn''t matter how he reacts.


    Just hear a ''click''.


    Just feel the arm light.


    Then there was the extreme pain in the arm, near the shoulder!


    Finally, there is a lot of blood flowing out.


    Yamori''s crazy angrily roared: "Ah--! My hand! My hand!"


    It turned out that his arm had been cut by Kaneki Ken''s Quinque before he swung it down. However, because he was cut too hard, he felt pain when his huge arm hit the ground with a snap, and he began to bleed.


    After cutting off the arm of Yamori, Ken Kaneki also scrapped the Quinque in his hand.


    After all, the quality of Yamori''s half-kakuja is the hardness of S-Rank Koukaku.


    This Quinque, which uses Kaneki Ken Kagune as raw material, has only the hardness of A-Rank Koukaku.


    Without the blessing of ''Konoha''s White Fang'' sword art, it is estimated that even if he can cut off the arm of Yamori, it would be so neat and easy.


    Kaneki Ken ignored Yamori''s yelled shout.


    He looked at the rift in the sword and muttered to himself: "I was troubled. Where should I go to find an excellent Quinque material? Didn''t expect you to send it to my door. You''re really kind... "


    With that said, Kaneki Ken had reached behind Yamori covering the wound and rolling.


    "Your Kagune looks very powerful."


    "Absorbed, for me, it should be of great benefit."


    "It doesn''t take so many materials to build Quinque."


    "You are such a nice person, don''t you mind fulfilling me?"


    Hearing this remark by Kaneki Ken and Yamori, who was in pain to death, remembered Kaneki Ken''s reaction at the beginning, which was the performance of seeing him as his prey!


    He quickly asked for mercy: "No no no, please, please let me go! Don''t kill me! I won''t trouble you again in the future!"


    Just like that in original work.


    After losing, Yamori, regardless of face, asked Kaneki Ken for mercy. Kaneki Ken asked him how much 1000-7 was.


    It''s just that Kaneki Ken in this life, not at all, has experienced that kind of desperate experience. He didn''t understand the meaning of 1000-7.


    So there is no way to take revenge on Yamori.


    Kaneki Ken ignored Yamori''s begging.


    The body has already been mounted, and Yamori''s back has begun to be broken open to dig out his Kakuhou.


    Yamori''s begging still sounded in the coffee shop.


    But everyone in the coffee shop, no one dared to move.


    Especially the original arrogant Kirishima Ayato, but now he has a dry mouth and a cracked lips, which makes him dumbfounded ...

 Chapter 268: Eliminate hidden dangers

    Chapter 268: Eliminate hidden dangers


    "Please!"


    "Please forgive me!"


    "Nico, save me! Save me!"


    "Ayato, save me! Save me--!"


    Yamori''s begging for mercy and cry for help resounded in the Anteiku shop. But no matter how he shouted, he could not get help from hispanions. Banjou Kazuichi and his few followers, dumbfounded.


    Kirishima Ayato is also dumbfounded.


    They didn''t expect strength the powerful Yamori would be solved so easily.


    Didn''t expect Kaneki, a gentle-looking guy, to have such a powerful strength.


    On the scene, only one of the most promising and most likely shemale Nico, Yamori, not only did not mean to go forward to save him, but also squeezed there, looking very excited.


    He kept muttering in his mouth: "So envious ~ so envious ~, why is it not me?"


    Shemale Nico wanted to be ridden by Kaneki Ken, not Yamori, but him instead.


    Of course, this is not because he wanted to save Yamori.


    He himself only talks to Yamori, so he will participate in the activities of the Aogiri Tree.


    And the ce where the two can talk the most is that one is a sadist and the other is a masochist.


    So nowadays, he is just thinking about it, hoping that Kaneki Ken is abusing him, and hepletely ignores the "talkable" friend of Yamori.


    Kaneki Ken ignored the eyes of the people around him.


    Just ate a Kakuhou directly.


    "No! Don''t do this!"


    "I''m dying! I''m dying!"


    Yamori''s cry for help is getting weaker.


    It was not until the end that Kaneki Ken had eaten one Kakuhou and dig out the other two Kakuhou, and Yamori''s cry for help disappearedpletely in the Anteiku shop.


    Yamori ended with tears of hatred.


    Yakumo Oomori, nicknamed Yamori, Jason, S-Rank ghoul- DIE!


    lYamori lying on the ground.


    The excavated Kakuhou and Kagune.


    Kaneki Ken froze on the spot, and asked in his mind: "What''s going on? How could I do such a thing?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "It''s normal. The ghouls that kill each other and eat each other is called a cannibal ghoul. Cannibalism is the only shortcut to improve the strength. After a long period of time, the cannibal ghouls will mutate and gradually begin to evolve towards the ''Kakuja''. The person you just knocked down, his change is in the form of a semi-kakuja. But if things go on like this, the ghoul will easily be insane. This is the cost of quickly gaining strength. Ever since you became a ghoul, you have been feeding Kagune. It will be normal for such abnormal behavior to ur."


    Kaneki Ken was not angry.


    He believes that Li Yaoxiang will definitely have a solution if he does not stop him.


    Tone calmly said: "Do you have a solution?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Of course!"


    After a while...


    Kaneki Ken only felt a cold wave in his mind.


    The whole person''s thoughts became clearer.


    There is no doubt that this is the result of Li Yaoxiang using the darkening value to solve the hidden danger of mental disorders for him.


    Instantly.


    Kaneki Ken thought a lot.


    Since there is such a convenient way to enhance strength, and the ability to solve hidden dangers, does that mean he can quickly create a batch of experts to work for him?


    Kaneki Ken: "Then you..."


    Li Yaoxiang saw through Kaneki Ken''s thoughts and immediately dispelled Kaneki Ken''s thoughts.


    "Don''t think about it."


    "My ability can only be exerted on you."


    "The rest of you can''t achieve this effect."


    "If you expect to improve your strength in this way, you''d better be mentally prepared, they may be crazy at any time."


    Kaneki Ken stopped talking for a while.


    Stop talking.


    The mind returns to reality.


    Seeing the scene in front of me again, the irritability and restlessness just now disappeared.


    Wipe the corner of the mouth.


    Smear the stain on Yamori''s suit.


    Immediately nced at everyone at the scene.


    After seeing the dumbfounded everyone, and seeing the shemale Nico who was full of eagerness, his eyes finally fell on Kirishima Touka''s younger brother, Kirishima Ayato.


    Kaneki Ken pointed at the shemale Nico: "What''s the matter with him?"


    Kirishima Ayato was awakened.


    No arrogance at first.


    swallowed saliva, subconsciously replied: "He ... is not an organized person, but has a better rtionship with Yamori."


    Kaneki Ken not saying anything further.


    Highlighting a rinkaku, swept directly past.


    However, the attack that should have cut off Shemale Nico''s waist was only half cut, and she was forcibly blocked by shemale Nico''s seemingly ''weak'' hands.


    She even saw the shemale Nico intoxicated.


    "Cool ~"


    "It''s so cool ~"


    "Can youe a little more ~"


    While speaking, the wound that Nico Shemale had been cut by Kaneki Ken was already healed quickly. The speed of healing, even Yamori can''tpare with him.


    What everyone does not know is that this seemingly thin guy.


    It turned out to be another kind of SS-Rank in original work.


    It stands to reason that it is impossible for SS-level ghouls to escape the casual blow of Kaneki Ken, but the problem is that the shemale Nico didn''t even think about hiding.


    It''s just to stop the deadly damage of ''cutting off the waist''.


    Just like he was in original work, even if he knew that Yamori would prate his abdomen, he never thought of dodge. Except that he enjoys this kind of ''abuse ...'', he relies on his own resilience and healing ability.


    Kaneki Ken asked quietly: "Since you''re not from Aogiri Tree, what are your ns now? Still want to take me back?"


    Shemale Nico answered the question: "People really want to take you back, but they just won''t take you back to my house, won''t it ~"


    "..."


    "Don''t bother me! Otherwise I''ll kill you directly!"


    Kaneki Ken withdrew Kagune.


    Shemale Nico also looks reluctant.


    Kaneki Ken ignored him, turned to look towards Kirishima Ayato: "What about you? Still thinking about taking me back?"


    Kirishima''s face is stunned.


    What happened today is too unimaginable for him.


    Isn''t the olddy(Touka) advocating peace?


    Advocating peace, how can there be a guy who doesn''t seem to be peaceful?


    Advocating peace, how can even Quinque be created?


    Is this what you call peace?


    Are you sure you are not cracking a joke with me?


    For a while, he really didn''t know how to answer.


    He joined the Aogiri Tree. In addition to hating humans, he wanted to use the name of the Aogiri Tree to deal with human beings justly. His most important purpose is to be stronger and protect his sister.


    Although he didn''t recognize it.


    But the heart never forgets the agreement with father, ''protect elder sister''.


    Upon seeing Kirishima Touka, he quickly came out to round the field and said: "It''s not suitable to stay here for a long time. Let''s leave here first. There''s too much noise. There''ll be white dovesing here to investigate."

 Chapter 269: mad, wait and see

    Chapter 269: mad, wait and see


    Not much time.


    Kirishima Touka, Kirishima Ayato, Banjou Kazuichi and Banjou Kazuichi''s followers. The entire group has already followed Kaneki Ken to the secret base of their small group.


    This secret base is also the ce where Kaneki Ken and the others usually train and spar.


    As for the shemale Nico, he was abandoned on the way.


    Of course, the reason why they can get rid of shemale Nico so easily is because shemale Nico is actually nothing serious.


    Even if he really wanted him to follow Kaneki Ken all the time, he still didn''t can''t.


    After all, although he said that his head was a bit abnormal, even if it was not normal, he did not forget that he was a member of the ''clown'' organization and had his own mission.


    So, on the way, he yed with Kaneki Ken and the others a little bit, and he didn''t bother anymore.


    And Kaneki Ken also didn''t want to make any more movements, so he didn''t shoot again.


    Now, one by one, they were very arrogant when they came, but now they are obediently staying in the same room.


    You look into my eyes, I look into your eyes.


    I don''t know how long it has been.


    Kirishima Ayato finally became unable to bear and took the lead to start to talk: "Sister! Can you tell me what happened to your Anteiku? Didn''t you advocate peace and want to live in peace with human beings? How can even Quinque of the white doves be built now? Aren''t you exaggerating more than when I was outside? Do you know how dangerous this is?!"


    It''s mad.


    The reason why he went out to fight alone was partly to create a stable environment for his elder sister. As long as the Aogiri Tree organization has attracted most of CCG''s attention, won''t 20th ward safe here?


    He pretended not to care about Touka, wasn''t it just to avoid someone using her to threaten him?


    Everything is in vain now.


    The elder sister has created weapons here. If CCG finds them, won''t they focus on ''taking care'' of them?


    Where is there a stable day?


    Kirishima Touka is also not a pushover, her tone rushed: "You''re a child, don''t talk big there! I haven''t even asked you where you have been during all this time? Join this Aogiri Tree, what do you want to do?!"


    The siblings neither giving way to the other.


    Banjou Kazuichi at this time, very ufortable and said: "Hey ~ you two siblings, don''t be so stubborn, obviously you both are concerned about each other..."


    The two stared at Banjou Kazuichi at the same time.


    ""Shut up!""


    This time, Kaneki Ken''s turn came out to round the field: "Okay, okay, you two, stop quarrelling! Ayato, since you''re Touka''s younger brother, then I will treat you as my own. We will tell you frankly about our affairster. Now can you tell me what is going on with this Aogiri Tree? Why are they looking for Kamishiro Rize? Why do you want to catch me?"


    Kirishima Ayato: "Who even are you?"


    Kirishima Ayato was still stubborn.


    Even after that, he was still stubborn, pretending to be unwilling to tell the ins and outs of the matter. Of course, the so-called ins and outs are only the purpose and information on the surface of the Aogiri Tree.


    He didn''t reject ''protect sister''.


    He didn''t touch the real core part.


    Just follow the instructions.


    I don''t understand why the ''leader'' should be aimed at Kamishiro Rize, or people who have the smell of Kamishiro Rize.


    Kaneki Ken was not disappointed.


    With the help of Li Yaoxiang, he firmly believed that sooner orter he would know the truth about everything.


    "Fine. What are you nning for now? Do you n to go back to Aogiri Tree, or stay and help us?"


    Kirishima Ayato expression gloomy said: "You haven''t told me, what is your purpose?"


    Kaneki Ken: "The purpose of me and your sister has never changed. I still want to live in peace with human beings. It is just another way to implement our goals.


    Kirishima Ayato was sneaked: "Oh, get along peacefully? Is it possible?"


    Kaneki Ken: "Nothing is impossible."


    Kirishima Ayato: "So what are your ns?"


    Kaneki Ken: "The first n is of course to be stronger. As long as we be strong enough, the human side will face us. We are only qualified to negotiate. So, I found someone to build Quinque. As long as Quinque is in hand, humanity has no advantage against us."


    Hearing this sentence.


    ''With Quinque in hand, human beings have no advantage in front of them.''


    Kirishima Ayato was up all over.


    However, he did not envisage the aspect of ''peaceful coexistence''.


    What he wanted was to kill humans!


    Kill the humans!


    As long as the humans are killed, they dare not target the ghouls again, do they?


    Kaneki Ken sarcastically said: "Kill? Can you aplish anything with that?"


    This sentence is like a blow to the head, knocking Kirishima Ayato on the spot.


    In fact, he doesn''t understand the truth that ''human beings can''t be killed''. However, before that, there was no other better way. He couldn''t bear it anymore.


    Why should ghouls be hunted down forever?


    Why do ghouls live in hidings.


    The only thing he can do is to kill human beings, which is also good for this bad breath.


    Consider for a moment.


    Kirishima''s tone finally softened.


    "There is no other n than to be stronger? Do nothing at this stage?"


    Banjou Kazuichi at this time, again without any AC number, said again: "Yes! Yes! Can you go back and rescue mypanion?"


    All eyes are on him.


    It''s embarrassing to watch.


    But in order to save the life of hispanions, he eventually clenched the teeth.


    Knelt down on his knees and said, "Please!"


    The few behind him saw the followers and also knelt on their knees, "Please!"


    The atmosphere at the scene was silent for a moment.


    Immediately, Kirishima Ayato looked towards Kaneki Ken disdainfully, taunted: "You won''t listen to him, to save someone?"


    Kaneki Ken sneered: "Save people? No no no, even if I don''t save people, I will still go to Aogiri Tree. Are they aiming at me and catching me? Since they broke my peaceful life. Then I''ll be embarrassed if I don''t give them a return gift."


    Kirishima Ayato: "I admit that your strength is good. But you, or the people here, want to fight against the Aogiri Tree. Are you too high on yourself?"


    Kaneki Ken shakes his head. Disagree with Kirishima''s statement.


    Compared to the ''human side'', the Aogiri Tree is significantly easier to deal with.


    Now that the enemies havee to the door unscrupulously, breaking their peaceful life and breaking their private development n, if they have no courage to retaliate back, what are they talking about to change the world?


    Even if it is really impossible to kick the Aogiri Tree.


    At least to weaken them, bite a piece of meat from them, let them know that they are not a pushover, let them squeeze.


    Lest theye to provoke and disturb his group again.


    Kaneki Ken didn''t exin so much to Kirishima Ayato, but responded simply and directly: "I don''t mind removing all the roadblocks that hinder my implementation. Include this organization that is stronger in your mind. You just have to tell me, are you leading the way or not? It doesn''t matter if you don''t, I naturally have a way to find where they are. I just hope, when the timees, don''t interfere."


    Kirishima Ayato was all happily ''Oh''.


    In the end, he chose to personally lead Kaneki Ken and the others to the base.


    He also wanted to see where Kaneki Ken was so confident that he dared to walk right into a trap against the entire Aogiri Tree. If when the timees Kaneki Ken had the advantage, he wouldn''t mind helping Kaneki Ken at thest moment to solve the Aogiri Tree together.


    But if Kaneki Ken is at a disadvantage...


    Then don''t me him for shooting at Kaneki Ken, take Kaneki Ken for credit, save his elder sister ...

 Chapter 270: protagonist action

    Chapter 270: protagonist action


    At the same time.


    The picture returns to Li Yaoxiang to be the 2nd day of Amon Koutarou.


    Originally, Amon Koutarou nned to go to CCG to ''check in'', and then went out to investigate the information about the ''one-eye mask'', so that he would avenge Mado Kureo.


    Didn''t expect, just arrived at CCG.


    An unexpected picture appeared in his field of view.


    Li Yaoxiang, in the entire CCG is known as theziest person. Not only did he arrive at CCG before him, but he also arrived earlier. After all, Li Yaoxiang crossed his feet on the table with his feet crossed, sipping coffee and looking at morning newspaper.


    The scene in front of me is enough to prove that Li Yaoxiang has reached more than one quarter of an hour early.


    Li Yaoxiang put down the report, said with a slight smile: "You''re here?"


    Amon Koutarou doubted: "Why are you so early?"


    Li Yaoxiang took the coffee cup and went to the lounge to wash it, while replied: "Is it early? You think I am early because you don''t know me well enough. Although I am azy person, as long as you check my past records, you can know that I have never beente for work or leaving early. Of course, there is no overtime."


    Don''t wait for Amon Koutarou to react.


    Li Yaoxiang washed the coffee cup.


    Wipe the water from his hands.


    Minding his own business and said: "Why don''t you check in soon? After you check in, just follow me."


    Amon Koutarou brows tightly knit: "Where to go?"


    "Of course, to patrol and solve the case?" Li Yaoxiang as it should be by rights said.


    Seeing that Li Yaoxiang was about to finish all the trivial things, he was about to leave with Quinque, and Amon Koutarou finally couldn''t help but said, "I think...you should just follow the way you used to do things. You don''t have to worry, I won''t report it, and I don''t need you to worry. I think it will be faster if we act separately."


    Li Yaoxiang''s way of leading people, Amon Koutarou had heard it a little bit after workingst night.


    So he was relieved. He was already thinking about acting alone.


    But didn''t expect this Li Yaoxiang did not y ording to the routine.


    It turned out to be abnormal and wanted to follow him in action?


    Li Yaoxiang teased: "Are you trying to say ... it would be more efficient to act alone, right?"


    Seeing his mind broken.


    Amon Koutarou suddenly embarrassed.


    But there is no denial.


    "I don''t care what you think. In short, starting today, I am your supervisor, and you have to listen to me. Otherwise, I''ll write as bad as it is on your performance evaluation report. Will it affect your promotion... that''s none of my business."


    Amon Koutarou was furious: "You!"


    When he first became a ghoul investigator, he did not obey the orders Mado Kureo, but Mado Kureo did not have that thing to threaten him. He didn''t expect Li Yaoxiang to be so despicable.


    Amon Koutarou: "Whatever you like! I won''t act with you anyway!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "I know what you''re thinking. You''re only thinking about killing the ghouls. As long as you can expel the ghouls, you don''t care if you can get promoted, right?"


    Li Yaoxiang saw through his mind again.


    This time Amon Koutarou didn''t make sense.


    Check in by yourself.


    Finished card.


    Just when he wanted to go directly, Li Yaoxiang added at this time: "If I write in your report, ''Your behavior seriously affects the safety of your partner''s life'', you think ... the headquarters will not consider dismissing you? If you are fired, you without Quinque... Do you think you can still kill ghouls?"


    Amon Koutarou stopped, staring at Li Yaoxiang fiercely, ''You!'', was so angry that he was speechless.


    Li Yaoxiang carried Quinque and walked to his side, patted him by the shoulder and said, "Dear me, stop fighting. If you dy any longer, it will be time for dinner soon. If you haven''t done anything all morning, you''ll be the only one to ask."


    Li Yaoxiang no longer took care of things, just left.


    Going into the elevator, turning around and pressing the ''first floor'', he didn''t even forget to wave a big smile to Amon Koutarou with a big smile, saying ''bye''.


    The cheaper the expression, the cheaper it is.


    Seeing that the elevator doors are about to close.


    In the end, it failed.


    A suitcase in which the elevator door was inserted from the outside was stuck between the doors.


    Immediately, the elevator door reopened.


    In sight, it was Amon Koutarou who walked in with his dark face on the bottom of the pot.


    Staring at Li Yaoxiang all the time.


    Silently.


    The elevator is descending.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Can you not look at me like this? I am not interested in men."


    Amon Koutarou: "Where are you going to take me?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Won''t you understand if you follow me? You are a big man, are you afraid that I will sell you?"


    After a while...


    In a curry shop.


    The chef in front of them quickly handed two hot curry rice to Li Yaoxiang and Amon Koutarou across a bar, and greeted them with a smile: "Please take your time."


    The chef seems to have a normal expression.


    But in the tone, there was obviously tension.


    Li Yaoxiang looked like nothing, broke the wooden spoon and wooden fork together: "Thanks for the meal! Come on, eat it! The curry here is the most famous!"


    Amon Koutarou said with a ck face: "I don''t eat curry!"


    Li Yaoxiang chewed and said, "It''s a pity ... Since you don''t eat curry, I''m going to eat it myself."


    Just finished.


    The chef who seemed to be very friendly at first broke out immediately!


    Highlighting his Kagune, he wanted to attack the two.


    Oh! A loud noise.


    The bar between the two parties was directly smashed by the chef.


    Li Yaoxiang took the curry rice and jumped a stepter, escaped the blow and continued to eat.


    Amon Koutarou jumped to the right and dodged, while pressing the switch of the suitcase. The suitcase instantly turned into a stick-shaped weapon, facing the chef in front of him, and came directly to the head.


    Smash it to death on the spot.


    He simply killed the chef. Amon Koutarou did not feel happy because hepleted the mission and expelled another. His face was still so ck.


    The local police officer quickly arrived at the scene with their prior notice to help them deal with the follow-up matters.


    Li Yaoxiang happened to finish the curry rice at this time and burp.


    Amon Koutarou finally couldn''t suppress the anger in his heart, and asked, "Can''t you handle the ghoul with this strength alone? Why do you have to follow me? Also, the threat of one-eyed mask is obviously much more threatening than this one. Why don''t you deal with the one-eyed mask first, instead of this ce first?"

 Chapter 271: threatening, shaken

    Chapter 271: threatening, shaken


    With a very exaggerated expression of surprise, Li Yaoxiang looked towards Amon Koutarou: "The one-eyed mask is more threatening in your eyes than this chef?"


    With that said, Li Yaoxiang deliberately nced at Amon Koutarou''s ''third eye''.


    Amon Koutarou was not in the mood to crack a joke with Li Yaoxiang, and went straight to the road: "This ghoul can''t even take a single blow from me, and his strength is obviously much weaker! Even if you let other people in the bureau deal with this ghoul, it would be an easy task! On the other hand, what about the one-eyed one? He is a person who can be easily defeated even by Mado! You just let a strength strong ghoul, active in the 20th district, do you know how serious the consequences are?"


    "This chef''s strength is right as you said. Even if other colleaguese to cope with him, it''s more than enough. But..." Li Yaoxiang first nominate to agree with Amon Koutarou''s statement, and immediately retorted, "I don''t think his threat is definitely worse than the one-eye mask."


    Amon Koutarou just wanted to say something, but he rebutted it, but Li Yaoxiang waved his hand and interrupted.


    "Don''t worry, listen to me first. After I finish talking, you don''t think it''s right, it''s not toote to rebut me."


    Li Yaoxiang stared directly at Amon Koutarou.


    Seeing Amon Koutarou forcibly suffocating his words back into his stomach.


    Li Yaoxiang slowly said: "First of all, I have to correct you first. The cases I took over were all dyed in the bureau for a long time, and they were unsessful cases. So, what you said, let the colleagues in the bureau deal with this chef, simply does not hold. Because they could not find the murderer. Perhaps you can say that after finding the murderer, the case is directly transferred to them? Then we take the lead in dealing with the problem of the one-eye mask? If you have this idea, then I can only say ... You are not suitable to be a ghoul investigator. Referring the case to other people; can you guarantee that in the process of transferring, the chef ghoul will notmit the crime again? Where do you put the lives of the people?"


    Speaking of it.


    Li Yaoxiang paused.


    Waiting for Amon Koutarou to refute.


    Amon Koutarou was said to be dumbstruck and unable to reply.


    And after listening to this speech, the look on his face was no longer ''in the right and self-confident''.


    Li Yaoxiang stared at him again for a saw him not speaking. This time he was satisfied and nod while teaching and he continued: "Second, I don''t understand how Mado Kureo has been teaching you to be a ghoul investigator all these years. But I have my own set of opinions. Threat, to me, is not judged by strength. One is that in a short period of time, the chef has alreadymitted many cases and has many lives on his hand. One is that CCG has never had any information about him, and no one has witnessed the one-eyed ghoulmitted a crime. I don''t think the one-eyed ghoul''s strength means that he is more threatening than the chef ghoul. After all, normal civilians don''t understand who has the highest strength and who has the lowest strength. For them, it''s the same. When they encounter them, it''s all dead ends. So the threat to them is more, but the strength is low, the chef who oftenmits crimes."


    Amon Koutarou was speechless again.


    His imposing-manner is obviously much weaker than before.


    But Li Yaoxiang didn''t mean to stop: "Again, it''s the one-eyed one you are most concerned about. The same reason, since he didn''tmit a crime, why should I go to deal with him first?"


    Amon Koutarou finally found a reason to refute, and said with awe-inspiring: "But he hurt first ss Mado! The first ss Mado is no longer able to go to the frontline because of him!"


    Li Yaoxiang said with a smile: "You said it again. He just wounded Mado, but didn''t kill him, right?"


    "..." Amon Koutarou was at a loss for words again, but he just found a reason this time, "Not being discovered, doesn''t mean that this one-eyed ghoul did notmit a crime! It is impossible for ghouls not to kill people!"


    "Is it? Then wait until he''s discovered."


    Amon Koutarou still wanted to say something, but Li Yaoxiang stopped him at this time: "Time is up, it''s time to get off work. If there is anything else, I''ll talk about it tomorrow."


    With that said, Li Yaoxiang turned directly and left.


    Once again, this "sense of justice" bursts out of Amon Koutarou, who cannot afford to be angry.


    And in the next few days.


    There is still no news of one-eye maskmitting the crime.


    Amon Koutarou, who was at the losing end in the debate, had to follow Li Yaoxiang to investigate those more urgent cases. Of course, this is also because of Li Yaoxiang''s rhetoric, which made him start to shake up his ideas and attitudes.


    Otherwise, with his temperament, impossible gave up so easily.


    A few dayster.


    In CCG in Area 20, a message was received.


    That''s the coffee shop named "Anteiku" on XX Street.


    Chief-In-Charge inquired in public who was going to investigate this matter.


    Li Yaoxiang volunteered to take over the case.


    The other people in the bureau were not surprised, after all, Li Yaoxiang''s "weirdness", they have been used to it for years, and they will not ask anything.


    It was quite unexpected that Amon Koutarou.


    He doesn''t understand why Li Yaoxiang is suddenly so active.


    On the way to the Anteiku shop, Amon Koutarou finally disabled to bear and asked, "Why are you so interested in this matter?"


    Li Yaoxiang nced at him.


    Did not answer him.


    Continue to follow his path.


    Seeing the Amon Koutarou, no longer asked.


    Anyway, he will be able to arrive at the scer, and he must be able to see the clues.


    Not much time.


    The two came to the scene.


    At the moment, the Anteiku shop was already blocked by the police and is taking a statement for the shop manager of Yoshimura.


    Police officer: "Where were you when the incident happened? What about the people in the shop?"


    Yoshimura: "They happened to be on leave today. I temporarily closed because of some things. When I came back, I already saw the mess here. Before I could call the police, your police have arrived at the scene."


    The call to the police was made by a nearby resident. After all, the movement of Yamori flying out of the store was too big, and it was difficult for them to notice it.


    After Yoshimura came back, he first "cleaned up" the inside and outside of the Anteiku shop, including the corpse of Yamori, and then fooled it with these words.


    After a while.


    The police officer took the confession of Yoshimura and nearby residents and came to Li Yaoxiang and Amon Koutarou and handed them to them.


    Amon Koutarou looked very carefully.


    Li Yaoxiang looked at it a few times at random, and then "signed" the confession, saying that there was no problem.


    No need to block Anteiku shops.


    Anteiku shops can be opened as usual.


    He even snatched the ''confession'' from Amon Koutarou and returned it to the police officer.


    Amon Koutarou wanted to stop the police officer from leaving.


    The police officer saw his reaction and subconsciously paused.


    However, Li Yaoxiang was quickly waved his hand to signal to the police that the officer could leave without having to care Amon Koutarou.


    Looking at the back of the police officer leaving, Amon Koutarou said with a gloomy face, "What do you mean?"

 Chapter 272: Show your edge

    Chapter 272: Show your edge


    Li Yaoxiang: "It doesn''t mean anything. This is obviously a kind of disagreement between the two parties. It happened here, and then the two sides looked at the other side and were struggling. Finally, during the fight, the coffee shop was smashed. There''s nothing to investigate. This case is over."


    Amon Koutarou said somberly: "Do you think I''ll believe that?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Believe or not, believe it anyway."


    With that said, Li Yaoxiang will turn around and leave.


    Angrily, Amon Koutarou grabbed Li Yaoxiang''s shoulder and tried to pull Li Yaoxiang''s figure back. But didn''t expect that he himself was pulled a few steps by Li Yaoxiang''s shoulder.


    He has enough confidence in his strength. Otherwise, heavy weapons will no longer be avable.


    But he didn''t expect that this seeminglyzy boss had more power than him, which really surprised him. Although he didn''t really exert his full strength, thiszy boss just ordinarily walked, right?


    However, his thought of let the imagination run wild was quickly interrupted by Li Yaoxiang who stopped actively.


    Li Yaoxiang asked sideways: "What''s wrong? Is there something else?"


    Amon Koutarou recovered.


    That dumbfounded face turned into gloomy again.


    "If you don''t give me an exnation today, don''t try to fool me easily!"


    Li Yaoxiang turned around and said with interest: "Oh? What do you want?"


    Seeing that Li Yaoxiang is still pretending to be crazy and selling silly things, Amon Koutarou simply opened up and said: "This coffee shop is obviously not as simple as it seems on the surface. Why do they choose to fight here? Is it really a coincidence? Why won''t you even investigate and end it hastily! Do you want to hide something!"


    Li Yaoxiang nods apuded: "Your feeling is right. This coffee shop does have problems."


    Amon Koutarou''s pupils tightened and finally understood Li Yaoxiang''s willingness to volunteer to take the case. It turned out to be a cover for this problematic coffee shop?


    In other words...


    Not only is there something wrong with this coffee shop, but there are even ghouls living here.


    But in front of him, his immediate superior, regardless of CCG''s rules, chose to hide all this?


    Breathe deeply, with gloomyplexion, he said: "If you don''t give me a suitable reason, don''t me me for stabbing this thing ..."


    "Why... Same reasoning. They didn''tmit anything, why should I take the initiative to disrupt their lives?"


    Hearing the word ''they'', Amon Koutarou was even more shocked.


    Originally just guessing, this coffee shop may be like that chef, there are some ghouls working here. But didn''t expect Li Yaoxiang actually said ''they''?


    Doesn''t that mean there are more than one ghoul here.


    It may even be a stronghold?!


    Isn''t it even more important to report to the head office, and let the head office send someone topletely expel this stronghold?


    Seeing his thoughts of Li Yaoxiang, he directly interrupted his thoughts: "Do you know why these 20 districts are far calmer and more stable than other districts over the years?"


    Amon Koutarou shed a sneaker across his face.


    It seems to be saying, ''You don''t want to tell me, just because of this stronghold, right?''


    Li Yaoxiang did not disappoint him, and he dare to say so: "It is because of this coffee shop."


    "Hahahahaha!" Amon Koutarouughed regardless of the eyes of the crowd around him.


    Of course, this is just broke out intoughter caused by anger.


    It''s a fakeugh!


    Li Yaoxiang''s answer made him extremely angry.


    In the middle of the year, it was not known how many investigators were injured, or became disabled, or died during the expulsion process. Their sacrifice is to bring real peace to Tokyo.


    But now Li Yaoxiang, who is said to bring stability to the 20th district, is the ghoul itself?


    Obliterating CCG''s credit is not enough.


    Going to praise the ghouls?


    Amon Koutarou now feels that this boss is really getting more and more outrageous.


    He feels that Li Yaoxiang''s concept seems to be seriously inconsistent with CCG''s concept.


    He also seriously doubt that this boss knows how many parents of children who have been hurt by ghouls, resulting in broken families and orphans?


    Afterughing, it''s ''chuck!'' sound.


    Pressed the switch of the suitcase.


    Portable Quinque said to Li Yaoxiang: "First ss Li Yaoxiang, every sentence you say next, you''d better take it seriously. Otherwise, I will record all the contents of today and report directly to the headquarters!"


    Everyone was attracted by this sudden scene.


    Including police officers on duty in the vicinity.


    Including people who are spectating.


    Also includes the manager Yoshimura.


    Li Yaoxiang''s smiling eyes suddenly radiated a sharp imposing-manner, ncing at the surrounding crowd, and the surrounding crowd shocked.


    The police have avoided their eyes and continued to do their thing.


    The spectating crowd was taken aback, either leaving directly, or not daring to look directly.


    Although the store manager Yoshimura "pretends to be a spectator" and avoids his eyes, his mind still pays attention to this direction intentionally or unintentionally.


    Everyone''s reaction, Li Yaoxiang looked at it all.


    But he did not make one step further measures and turned his attention back to Amon Koutarou.


    There was no change in tone.


    "Rank 1 Amon... You opened Quinque to me, what does that mean? Are you going to take action against me, the ghoul investigator? Then can I treat you as a traitor and behead you on the spot?"


    While speaking, Li Yaoxiang took a few steps forward slowly.


    Holding Amon Koutarou''s weapon with his bare hands.


    See someone trying to touch his weapon. Out of natural reaction, Amon Koutarou wanted to move away. What surprised him was that no matter how he moved up and down, left and right, and moved a lot, he couldn''t move Quinque in his hand.


    He had previously been surprised by Li Yaoxiang''s power.


    It''s just that neither side tried their best and he didn''t think much.


    But this time it was really tough.


    But he didn''t think that the gap between the two sides would be so big.


    I have already exerted my full strength, even the strength of moving weapons can''t do it?


    You must know that in the entire CCG, although he dare not say that he is the most powerful, he is at least among the top three existences. Otherwise, the headquarters will not tailor a heavy weapon for him.


    However, in this whole CCG, in front of a notoriouslyzy person, how could his strength be so unbearable?


    Doesn''t it mean that the attitude of ''I think I''m excellent'' in front of Li Yaoxiang has always been a joke?


    Not as good as people.


    Strength difficult to say.


    The speed of solving the case ... is not necessarilyparable.


    Then why do I feel good about myself in front of Li Yaoxiang, and feel a sense of superiority?


    No, no.


    At least one more thing, he can be sure that he is better than Li Yaoxiang!


    That is to say, he is definitely correct than Li Yaoxiang!

 Chapter 273: way of solving the problem

    Chapter 273: way of solving the problem


    Amon Koutarou pressed the ''switch button'' on the handle.


    Take Quinque back.


    It turned into an extraordinary suitcase.


    No morepeting with Li Yaoxiang.


    I couldn''t match it...


    Not sure about strength...


    The ability to work is hard to say...


    It would be better to fight against the "idea".


    Anyway, my ideas are very simr to most people in CCG and CCG''s rules, even more extreme. It couldn''t be that everyone in CCG is wrong, only this Li Yaoxiang is right?


    In thepetition of strength, after losingpletely, Amon Koutarou showed that he was not as strong as when he "used" Quinque just now.


    After all, he was with Li Yaoxiang during this period of time, and he really saw Li Yaoxiang''s ability to handle affairs.


    Although Li Yaoxiang seems to bezy, his ability to solve cases is not bad.


    Otherwise, in the copywriting records, Li Yaoxiang would not have failed cases.


    The case was dyed for a while in the bureau, as long as it was handed to Li Yaoxiang, it would definitely be broken.


    "It''s still the same. If you don''t exin today''s affairs clearly, I will truthfully tell the headquarters what you did." Amon Koutarou replied cheeky.


    Don''t take the things just now seriously.


    Li Yaoxiang did not care about him.


    The imposing-manner was retracted.


    It turned back to a harmonious and friendly look: "Do you know how long this coffee shop has been open?"


    Amon Koutarou did not answer.


    do not know either.


    Li Yaoxiang continued: "It has been almost 10 years. The stability of the 20th district also began from that period. I have worked in CCG for more than 10 years, and I witnessed the whole process of the 20th district from chaos to stability. Among them, the arrival of this coffee shop has contributed greatly."


    This sentence heard Amen Gangtaro''s heart tightened.


    The coffee shop has been open for almost 10 years.


    District 20 has been stable for almost 10 years.


    Are there really so many coincidences in the world?


    But...


    This is absolutely impossible!


    There are ghoul strongholds in the 20th district, which means that more ghouls will gather. Doesn''t that mean they only need more food? How could District 20 be stable because of the increase in ghouls?


    Li Yaoxiang: "I know what you are thinking. You''re thinking, this is impossible, right?"


    Amon Koutarou: "..."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Understandable. This thing is not just you, many people would feel impossible. But the fact is before you, and ''it'' has indeed happened. When I found this stronghold, they had already developed to a certain scale. The reason why they didn''t do it was because I found something strange. Howe there are so many ghouls in the 20th district, but it has be stable?"


    Amon Koutarou: "How did they do it?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "That''s because they didn''t have any hands on ''alive'' humans. There are people in their hospital who can get unimed corpse from them. asionally, you will get some corpse of ''suicides''. In the entire 20 districts, an average of over 100 people dies naturally each month. As long as they get 1/10 of it, it is enough to maintain the operation of the stronghold."


    Amon Koutarou was silent again.


    didn''t expect turned out to be this method, in exchange for the stability of the 20th district.


    Li Yaoxiang: "I''m curious how long they can maintain this way of life. But I didn''t expect it to be nearly 10 years. And the 20th district has gradually be more stable. It''s ridiculous, right? Human beings have fought with each other for nearly 100 years. 100 years ago, mankind had established a ghoul countermeasure institute to fight against the ghouls. But after so many years of struggle, neither the human side nor the other side have reached a satisfactory result. Some are just endless sacrifices and hatred. But I never thought that on this day a hundred yearster, in this way, the stability of both parties would happen."


    Amon Koutarou: "You mean ... In this period of time you observed, they didn''t harm humanity even once?"


    Li Yaoxiang shook his head: "Yes, they did."


    Amon Koutarou hearing this angrily: "You still say ...!"


    "The dead ones that is."


    Amon Koutarou: "..."


    Since the ghouls that mutted humans are already dead.


    Amon Koutarou has nothing to say.


    But thinking about it, he suddenly changed expression.


    It doesn''t feel right again.


    This kind of stronghold, actually has the ability and channel to obtain unimed corpse from the hospital? Doesn''t it mean that there are lurking ghouls in the hospital, or the existence of human traitors?


    No!


    This problem is too serious!


    Amon Koutarou even thought that this so-called ''natural death'' would be an illusion fabricated by this ghoul lurking in the hospital.


    In any case, this matter must also be reported!


    Someone has to be watching over it all the time.


    Otherwise, the consequences will be unimaginable.


    Li Yaoxiang saw the change in his expression.


    Seeing his thoughts.


    Directly interrupted: "If you want to break the stability of the 20th district, let the people of the 20th district return to the day of fear, and let the 20th district appear more orphans, then you can report this matter."


    Amon Koutarou wanted to report the idea, and immediately paused.


    He hates it.


    He thinks that this kind of stable life brought by the ghouls is too unimaginable.


    But this does not mean that he can ignore the lives of the people and children.


    I don''t know how long it has passed, but Amon Koutarou subconsciously uttered a sentence: "Is it really possible for humans to live peacefully with each other?"


    This sentence, he is not asking Li Yaoxiang.


    He is asking himself.


    The first thought in his heart is negative.


    As long as the ghoul still feeds on human beings, then human beings can easily get along with the ghouls, even for a day.


    Li Yaoxiang: "It may not work before. But now... not necessarily."


    This is the case.


    A dumbfounded Amon Koutarou, suddenly turned his mind back to Li Yaoxiang, staring closely at Li Yaoxiang, and stepped forward, holding Li Yaoxiang''s shoulders, hoping that Li Yaoxiang could tell him the answer.


    The whole face is full of ''Tell me! Tell me quickly! Quick!''


    Li Yaoxiang used great force to push Amon Koutarou''s hands away.


    Let Amon Koutarou dete once more in strength.


    This continued: "Since human beings can use technology to create Quinque to fight against the ghouls. Why can''t they use technology to create food that ghouls can eat? But don''t forget, ghouls can also drink coffee. As long as humans are willing to work hard in this regard, the problem of eating is solved. Won''t all the problems be solved? Even if there are some ghouls unwilling topromise, they still have to feed on people. Then when the timees, they are no different from homicide criminals. We can also focus our firepower on this group of uwful ghouls. Things have be much easier. If we''re thinking that we must kill all ghouls, we are also forcing them to resist, fighting for nearly 100 years, and we can''t get results and the problem cannot be solved."

 Chapter 274: Amons change

    Chapter 274: Amon''s change


    Right!


    If the feeding problem of ghouls is solved, wouldn''t the natural hostile rtionship between humans and ghouls cease to exist?


    Amon Koutarou: "Since you have this idea, and firmly believe that this idea can work, why don''t you report this matter? As long as the General Administration approves your n, can''t you realize the idea of peaceful coexistence?"


    Li Yaoxiang sneered: "Do you really think things are so simple to solve?"


    Amon Koutarou was enraged and anxious by Li Yaoxiang.


    Isn''t this what you just said?!


    Now it is said that it is not so easy to solve, what do you mean?!


    Li Yaoxiang: "It has been decades since the scientific and technological civilization of mankind was rapidly rising. Such a simple solution, do you think... With the wisdom of human beings, why haven''t they thought of it for decades?"


    Amon Koutarou was silent.


    Li Yaoxiang continued: "It''s not that humans can''t think of it, but that they don''t even want to think about it at all. They only want to expel the ghoul and kill them. They didn''t even think about helping to solve the problem at all. The ghouls kill the humans, and the humans kill the ghouls. The grudges umted from generation to generation cannot be resolved so easily. Hatred blinds human eyes. Hatred blinds the heart of mankind. Just like you, until now, don''t you all hate them? Hate them for destroying the happy families of countless children, hate them for turning children into orphans. So do you think that if I report this matter, will the General Administration take the probability of the action of annihtion or will it be more probable that they will develop a variety of foods?"


    Finished.


    Li Yaoxiang seems to be leaving when he turns around.


    But Amon Koutarou stopped him again.


    "Do you want this situation to continue? You n to just sit back and do nothing?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "The manpower is limited. You don''t think that with my ability alone, I can let the world''s human beings let go of their hatred of ghouls and change their views on ghouls?"


    Amon Koutarou was silent again.


    Li Yaoxiang stepped forward and patted his shoulder,forted: "Don''t think too much. Being able to maintain the stability of the 20th district, as far as I''m concerned, is already satisfying."


    Amon Koutarou: "You told me everything, you''re not afraid that I would really report this incident and destroy the status quo in District 20?


    Li Yaoxiang: "Rx, you won''t have a chance."


    Finished, Li Yaoxiang really turned around and left this time, ignoring Amon Koutarou.


    Amon Koutarou felt his heart tighten on the spot after hearing hisst words.


    He knew that Li Yaoxiang was threatening him.


    If he dared to report the ''truth'', then before he reported it, Li Yaoxiang, his boss, would really dare to kill him as a traitor.


    He also finally understood why Li Yaoxiang, who has always been awkward, suddenly showed his strength in front of him, crushing his most proud strength.


    Doesn''t it prove that he has the ability to kill him?


    Amon Koutarou did not care too much about Li Yaoxiang''s threat.


    If the matter is reported, for the people of District 20, the advantages outweigh the disadvantages, even if he risks his life, he will report it without hesitation for the sake of the people and children of District 20.


    It doesn''t matter if he threatens or not.


    From this incident, what he saw was not Li Yaoxiang''s threat, but Li Yaoxiang''s determination to maintain the stability of the 20th district.


    In order to maintain this stability...


    Don''t hesitate to kill all the roadblockers...


    Thinking about it.


    Amon Koutarou looked at Li Yaoxiang''s back view gradually became tall and noble. His views on Li Yaoxiang also began to change.


    But he quickly put aside all unrealistic thoughts.


    For this purpose, the most important thing is to verify Li Yaoxiang''s rhetoric, true or false.


    Check whether the stronghold of this ghoul, as Li Yaoxiang said, does not harm humanity.


    Check to see who is cooperating with this stronghold in the hospital, who is it, and is there any greasiness.


    If after verification, it is proved that everything that first ss Li Yaoxiang said is true ...


    And this is also the only way to resolve the contradiction between humans and the ghouls for thest 100 years ...


    that...


    Didn''t Li Yaoxiang say that the manpower is limited? Couldn''t the whole world be changed by his ability alone? Then take the lead and help Li Yaoxiang to achieve this goal!


    Think of it here.


    Amon Koutarou looked at the time on his watch.


    Take out your phone.


    Send a message to Li Yaoxiang:


    ''First ss Li Yaoxiang, at 7 o''clock, it''s almost time for work, I won''t leave with you, I still have things to do, see you tomorrow.''


    Although the information is written.


    However, the action of Amon Koutarou rushed back to CCG.


    He is eager to look up the information and eager to find out the truth.


    In the following days, he was indeed busy with this matter. As long as he has free time, he will find ways to observe and verify.


    It''s a pity that the world didn''t wait for him to find out the results.


    He had received a message from the General Administration.


    The content is to summon all the investigators of the rank 2 and above to go to the General Bureau for a meeting.


    Said there was a special operation.


    After the meeting, so as not to leak the wind, we will start that kind soon.


    Although the head office did not exin what this action was, butbined with the information previously disclosed by the branch director, this time it is undoubtedly to deal with a ghoul organization called Aogiri Tree.


    Although there are some regrets, there is a new mission before the truth is found.


    But Amon Koutarou finally chose without the slightest hesitation, temporarily abandoning the urge to ''find the truth'', and went to the head office with Li Yaoxiang for a meeting.


    After all...


    Although he doesn''t understand whether the Anteiku shop has murdered mankind.


    But he can be sure that this kind of organization called Aogiri Tree is definitely a group of evil ghouls!


    Rather than spending time on a ''stronghold'' that is not harmful to humans at such an important moment, it is better to take the lead in solving a longsting organization that has always caused great harm to humans.


    This is what he learned from Li Yaoxiang.


    Resting in the past, with his hatred of the ghoul, the attitude of can''t ept the ghoul in his eyes is impossible so easy to let the ghoul be free in front of himself.


    Perhaps before going to the head office, he might go alone to kick the coffee shop. This kind of stronghold might also be.


    But the current him.


    The way of doing things was unknowingly influenced by Li Yaoxiang.


    Learned to let go of your obsession.


    Before making a choice, not so persistent.


    This change, even he did not notice.


    And this is exactly what Li Yaoxiang wants to see...

 Chapter 275: return, arrive

    Chapter 275: return, arrive


    At the same time.


    The scene returns to Kaneki Ken.


    Kaneki Ken and the others first took a day off at the secret base.


    In the early morning of the next day, this followed the so-called stronghold of Kirishima Ayato to the Aogiri Tree. The stronghold is an abandoned building that resembles a school and is several stories high.


    In original work, this stronghold itself was originally just a bait thrown by the high level of the Aogiri Tree.


    Used to attract most of the power of CCG.


    Then, before the CCG arrives, let the members leavepletely, leaving CCG empty.


    Their real purpose is to go to the detention center in the 23rd district to rescue.


    It is a pity that the n is well.


    But they were disrupted by Nagachika Hideyoshi.


    Nagachika Hideyoshi, the seemingly carefree guy, is actually a smart and careful person.


    Even though Kaneki Ken c had the intention to hide it from him, he still sensed something was wrong with just a little change in Kaneki Ken''s body. So he started to find ways to understand everything about the ghoul, and even deliberately infiltrated CCG.


    Want to help Kaneki Ken solve the trouble.


    In this matter, he also seeded in finding out the position of a stronghold with his clever head, and contributed it to CCG, which was appreciated.


    As a result, the Aogiri Tree had to leave a group of people to fight against CCG in order to dy the time so that their purpose could proceed smoothly.


    And this life.


    Although Nishio Nishiki beating Kaneki Ken never happened.


    Although Kaneki Ken does not have many changes.


    But Nagachika Hideyoshi still sensed something wrong with that little change.


    Let this incident go back to its original trajectory.


    Kaneki Ken and the others were not arrested by Yamori like original work, so they had to hurry, so they dyed for a long time. This happened to miss the period when Kaneki Ken was ''battered'' by Yamori in the original work.


    It also happened to catch up with the CCG blockade avenue, and took the lead into this stronghold.


    That is to say, while the entire group of Kaneki Ken is moving towards the abandoned building, it is actually not much left from the time when the CCG force is about to arrive.


    Of course, all of this, Kaneki Ken and the others have no idea.


    I don''t know yet. Yoshimura and Yomo Renji have actually arrived in the nearby forest, preparing to save the entire group of Anteiku if necessary.


    "After walking for so long, how long will it be until we arrive? Are you kidding us?" Kaneki Ken carrying a suitcase in his hand asked to Kirishima Ayato.


    Kirishima Ayato said contemptuously: "Che, if you weren''t slow, we would have arrived long ago. Not to mention, I thought it''s gonna be you and my sister!"


    Kaneki Ken did not answer the question of Kirishima Ayato.


    He is slow, and naturally has his reasons.


    Now, it is impossible for him topletely believe them because of the one-sided words of Kirishima Ayato and Banjou Kazuichi.


    So on the way toe, he dyed the time and ordered Tsukiyama Shuu to mobilize the influence of Tsukiyama''s family to investigate the stronghold and the 6th area mentioned in Banjou Kazuichi.


    After confirming that it was correct, this continued to hurry.


    This procrastination has been dragged to the present, before they arrived here.


    Kirishima Touka stared fiercely at this nonsense younger brother. Immediately, she exined to the side: "Don''t pay attention to him, he can''t say good things with his dog mouth."


    Kaneki Ken: "It''s okay, I''m not in a hurry anyway. It''s pretty good now. Living in a bustling city, it''s really fun to go out for a wild tour asionally."


    Kaneki Ken''s purpose ofing this time is really not too urgent.


    He just wanted to wink at ''Aogiri Tree'' and tell them not to provoke him again.


    You don''t have to rush to aplish this goal.


    Anyway, Yamori has just vited his life. It is estimated that even the news of Yamori''s death has not beenmunicated back. Even if he really wants to continue to trouble him, it will not be in the short term.


    Of course, it should not be too long. He didn''t want to cause his friend Nagachika Hideyoshi to be caught by someone with his heart, and put his friend in danger.


    Kaneki Ken wasn''t in a hurry, but Banjou Kazuichi number one behind him, and the Banjou Kazuichi and the few followers behind him, were really anxious.


    Looking at Kaneki Ken and the others with such a graceful and leisurely appearance, he really can''t wait to take Kaneki Ken''s hand and let him walk a few steps faster!


    Unfortunately, his strength is not as good as theirs.


    Now he''s a person who are asking for help.


    He still has the score in his heart.


    So he simply urged Kaneki Ken and the others in another way of expression.


    "The two of you should stop arguing." Banjou Kazuichi first persuaded the two of them, and then forced a smile on his face, smiled at Kaneki, "Kaneki, there is an abandoned building in front. The abandoned building is the stronghold of the Aogiri Tree. I''ve been here before and there can be nothing wrong. Take a few more quick steps, and you will soon see."


    Kaneki Ken nced at him.


    Of course he understands Banjou Kazuichi''s thoughts.


    If in the original work, Kaneki Ken heard Banjou Kazuichi''s request, he would definitely ignore his own safety and hurried to the stronghold to save people.


    Although Kaneki Ken still has the idea of saving people, he will at least put his life in the first ce.


    Now that he had learned from Tsukiyama Shuukou, the news is correct ...


    Then he didn''t mind elerating the speed, or he couldplete this Banjou Kazuichi, which looks vicious, but actually honest.


    Kaneki Ken stayed calm and collected to elerate the pace.


    Seeing Banjou Kazuichi and the others were overjoyed.


    And while following Kaneki Ken to speed up his pace, he patted his heart and promised: "Kaneki, as long as you rescue all your friends, then I will promise you, I will definitely follow your lead in the future! You guys say it too!"


    "We are too!" Several followers also responded.


    Kaneki Ken saw their sincerity and felt their sincerity. Sometimes ... that kind of thought is really simpler than humans.


    Perhaps it is that they are more kind-hearted, and they are eager to survive and have no social experience, so the mind is not soplicated ...


    Kaneki Ken thought of Li Yaoxiang telling him that if he wants to aplish his final goal, he must establish his influence, and he will no longer show a cold face, said with a slight smile: "Then speed up the pace, lest we arrive before we arrive. Before, yourpanions are killed early."


    This is also the most worrying thing.


    Finally, there is hope for the rescue of partners.


    He didn''t want to make any mistakes.


    Banjou Kazuichi, including several followers hearing this, excited, one after another ''yes!'', Immediately continue to hurry.


    Soon, the entire group has seen the outline of the abandoned building.


    But without waiting for them to approach, they have already encountered a member of Aogiri Tree on the outside who was suspected to be standing guard and guarding them.

 Chapter 276: righteous, ruthless

    Chapter 276: righteous, ruthless


    When the Aogiri Tree member saw a group of people approaching in his direction, immediately became alert. When he saw that Kirishima was also in the crowd, he was rxed and greeted him happily.


    "Ayato-sama, why are you back now?"


    "What about Yamori-sama? Didn''t Yamori-sama follow you back? "Don''t you know that during the time you and Yamori-sama were away, the brothers were dying of anxiety."


    Kirishima Ayato is frowned: "What''s wrong? Has something happened?"


    Using this stronghold as a bait to attract CCG ''s attention, Kirishima Ayato knows it. But he went out for a few days, but he didn''t know thetest trends.


    Aogiri Tree member: "We just received the news, CCG found our stronghold ahead of time, and now we have arranged arge number of people to rush over to prepare to encircle us. The leader gave orders, let us dy them as much as possible. If Ayato-sama, you still haven''te back, how can we even keep it alone?"


    Kaneki Ken asked Kirishima Ayato: "What''s the matter?"


    Kaneki Ken was thinking ofing to give Aogiri Tree a blow, but he never thought that he would face CCG so soon.


    Kirishima Ayato: "This is just a temporary stronghold for us. We originally nned to retreat before CCG arrived. It should be that something went wrong and was discovered by CCG in advance."


    Silence for a moment.


    Kirishima Ayato continued: "You retreat with this idiot, I don''t want to involve you in this matter. I believe you don''t want to fight CCG so soon?"


    While speaking, Kirishima Ayato nced at the suitcase in Kaneki Ken''s hand.


    The meaning is obvious.


    He saw Kaneki Ken''s ambition.


    It also shows that Kaneki Ken and the others should not be ready, otherwise there will not be only one ''suitcase''.


    Make sure that Kaneki Ken will not want to face CCG now.


    Kirishima Touka grabbed his cor: "Brat! What are you stupid?! Don''t think that you can get rid of me like this, and be happy outside! I will never let you leave this time! If you don''t go, I won''t go either!"


    In original work, Kirishima Touka actually wished to bind his younger brother to the Anteiku, so that he would not be allowed to leave. Unfortunately, her strength did not allow that.


    But this life is different.


    In this life, she has been training with Kaneki Ken for a long time, and her strength has improved by leaps and bounds.


    Have the confidence to say this in front of the younger brother Kirishima Ayato.


    Kaneki Ken nced at Kirishima Touka, and immediately looked towards Kirishima Ayato: "You don''t have to worry about us. We''re just not yet mentally prepared, and now we have to face CCG. But this doesn''t mean that we can''t match their strength. Not to mention... Due to your rtionship with Touka, it''s impossible to leave you and leave here. If you want to go, let''s go together."


    The picture in front of me showed the Aogiri Tree member to startled.


    He didn''t understand the origin of these people in front of him. How dare he talk to Ayato-sama?


    However, when he heard that Kirishima had intentionally made people retreat, he subconsciously interjected and said quickly: "Ayato-sama, even if they want to retreat, it''s toote. CCG has blocked all the roads around If they retreat rashly, they will only be broken one by one."


    Kirishima Ayato, who had wanted to me Kaneki Ken and his sister''s idiot.


    After hearing the reports from his subordinates, he didn''t know what to say.


    "Then... go back to stronghold first, let''s see and talk..."


    Just before leaving, the Aogiri member added at this time: "Yes, Ayato-sama, Yamori-sama? Didn''t Yamori-samae back with you? Only Ayato-sama came back... Will we be able resist..."


    Halfway through.


    The screams of the Aogiri member rang out in the jungle.


    That was the result of Kirishima Ayato directly acting on him.


    Upon seeing this, Kirishima Touka was surprised, and immediately wanted to question: "Ayato! You...!"


    "He heard something that he shouldn''t listen to. The best way is to let him disappear into this world directly." Kirishima Ayato first nced at her old sister contemptuously, and then immediately set her eyes on Kaneki Ken. "Can''t bear it...? "If you have kindness in your heart, then I advise you to give up your unrealistic n as soon as possible. Don''t drag my older sister into the water. I don''t think a person with a benevolent heart can aplish such a n that sounds like a fantasy."


    Kaneki Kenughed and did not respond.


    Without looking at the corpse on the ground, he went on.


    Seeing this, the others hesitated for a moment, then followed.


    After a while.


    Kirishima Ayato came to the prison with the entire group.


    The Banjou Kazuichi partners were all released.


    "Boss! You are finally here! Boss! I knew you would not abandon us!"


    "Yes! We have always believed in you, I believe you wille back to save us!"


    In the detention room, there are men and women, big and small.


    All of them said gratitude to Banjou Kazuichi.


    At first sight, everyone is fine.


    After hugging them and moving to tears, they immediately scolded them: "Don''t call me boss again! Your boss is him!"


    Banjou Kazuichi pointed to Kaneki Ken.


    "It''s all thanks to Kaneki-sama, you''re saved this time!"


    "Thank you, just thank Kaneki-sama!"


    Then a group of men, women and children came to Kaneki to express their gratitude.


    After finally getting rid of them and letting a group of people confidently reminisce about their old times, Kirishima Ayato took the right moment and came to Kaneki Ken and asked, "What do you n to do next? You n to take the lead on the members of Aogiri Tree or what?"


    After some understanding.


    Kaneki Ken learned that most of the members of the Aogiri Tree were a group of ghouls who hated humans.


    Therefore, they tend to never be soft-hearted when they attack humans.


    Kaneki Ken did not mean to be soft on them.


    only...


    He shake one''s head said: "Isn''t that... CCG''s troops are about to arrive here? Should there be a group of cannon fodders to resist the frontline troops of CCG? If I kill them now, do you want my people to stop them?"


    Kaneki Ken said this remark, not only did Kirishima Ayato feel cold, but gave him a nce at Kaneki Ken.


    In his heart, only those who are ruthless enough are qualified to ''do great things''.


    Otherwise, would it be a waste of time to apany him to go crazy with his elder sister?


    I just don''t understand. When Kaneki Ken confronts human beings who are also stubborn and have a deep hatred for the ghouls, can he treat them with the same attitude...


    It didn''t take long.


    Kirishima Ayato left the prison with the entire group.


    And invited Kaneki Ken to discuss how to counter the CCG invasion.


    Of course, the countermeasures are already there.


    Aogiri Tree member does not eat dry rice either.


    They came just to understand the situation and see if there were any loopholes that needed to be filled.


    After understanding the generalbat n, the entire group heard members of the Aogiri Tree rushing into their Conference Hall and reported: "Not good! Not good! Ayato-sama! CCG''s troops have already arrive!"

 Chapter 277: The war begins, disobeying orders

    Chapter 277: The war begins, disobeying orders


    At the same time.


    Outside the abandoned building.


    "Biu ~~~~~~~"


    "BOOM!"


    A sh bomb fired into the dark night in the sky.


    When the shbangs burst into dazzling light, the battle between the two sides was imminent.


    "Bang bang bang bang bang bang bang!"


    "Bang bang bang bang bang bang bang!"


    Whether in the direction of the abandoned building or outside the abandoned building, countless gunshots suddenly erupted.


    CCG''s front-line troops, lined up in formation, defended with shields in their hands, and at the same time continued to use machine guns to fire at the ghouls in the abandoned building.


    Aogiri''s head member, wearing night vision goggles and sights, used the Kagune to resist the bullets, and also used a machine gun to counter the CCG side.


    In the case of equivalent weapons, the CCG side with poorer physical fitness does not have any advantage.


    In a surveince car.


    Marude Itsuki, the special ghoul investigator, that is, CCG, Chief-in-Charge of this operation. Seeing this, he even changed his face. Unable to bear asked: "Why doesn''t CCG have an advantage in shooting?"


    The power behind him: "The enemy uses Kagune as shield."


    Marude: "Huh? Are the ghouls originally mercenaries?"


    A loud noise of ''pa!''.


    Marude kicked open the door of the surveince car: "Hateful! What a joke?!"


    Immediately, he walked to the frontline troops and seized a machine gun: "Give me the gun!"


    m! m! m!


    With urate marksmanship, several shots in a row directly killed several ghouls in the abandoned building, and then said hideously: "Boys, hurry up and kill that insidious blocking team for me!"


    He pushed the gun back to the frontline personnel aside, ignoring their shocked and admiring eyes, he turned and left.


    At this time, there were two familiar engine sounds not far away.


    This engine sound also sessfully attracted the attention of Marude.


    "Hey? Is that?"


    Assistant: "Yes, that''s Mr. Marude''s motorcycle."


    "Huh?" Marude''s face was twisted. "Hey! Wait for me! What are you trying to do while riding my motorcycle?!"


    They heard that Suzuya''s childish and careless voice: "Let''s borrow it ~"


    "No! Wait for me!"


    Suzuya doesn''t care about Marude.


    Riding the motorcycle, he rushed straight up.


    During the sprint, there is also a stimting, fun, innocentughter: "Hahahahaha ~~~~"


    Watching Suzuya riding his beloved motorcycle...


    The speed of the motorcycle.


    The direction of the motorcycle.


    The bad hunch in Marude''s heart grew stronger.


    The face inadvertently bes more and more distorted.


    The tone is unable to bear trembling.


    "wait wait wait..."


    "Hey Hey hey..."


    Unfortunately, everything is toote.


    Sure enough, the next picture was just as he expected. Suzuya Juuzou rode towards the stairs, using the slope of the stairs, together with the motorcycle, rushed into the air, and then Suzuya Juuzou used the motorcycle as a stepping stone in mid-air, and took advantage of the leap.


    Suzuya made a leap into the abandoned building.


    Instantly solve the entire floor of the blocking team.


    Motorcycle ''BOOM!'' a loud noise, glorious sacrifice.


    Marude on the other hand, left the tears of a famous man for his beloved motorcycle, endured the grief in his heart, and said with a hysterical tone: "Attack~~~~~!"


    Next, there is a group of troops.


    Imposing-manner rushed high into the abandoned building.


    "Dash--!"


    "Dash--!"


    Marude, who copsed and knelt on the ground, was left.


    When all the pioneer troops rushed in, behind Marude, there were only two footsteps.


    di da.


    di da.


    With tears in his mouth, Marude took two snorts, nced at the person who came, and said with a heartless heart: "First ss Li Yaoxiang, First ss Amon, you haven''t go in to deal with the enemy, you still stay here?"


    Li Yaoxiang yawned, andzily said: "Everyone rushed in. We rushed in now, and it doesn''t matter much? It''s better to stay here and see where we need help. It''s not toote for us to support?"


    Marude wiped away tears.


    Stand up and turn around seriously said: "First ss Li Yaoxiang, I am the Commander here. I hope you can follow my instructions. Now I still invite you to return to the post you are in charge of. If support is needed, I will naturally notify you."


    Li Yaoxiang shrugged, and "Hazard ~" with a careless sound.


    He took Amon Koutarou to leave the scene.


    However, he did not return to the designated position.


    Instead, he went to other directions.


    Behind him, Amon Koutarou was frowned and said, "Li Yaoxiang, sir, this direction... not our position..."


    The emergence of Li Yaoxiang still has a butterfly effect. I don''t know if Li Yaoxiang was notoriouslyzy and gave a feeling of unreliability, so he was not at all assigned to an important position by Marude.


    It was just assigned to guard some unimportant positions to prevent a fish that escaped the from escaping.


    For Li Yaoxiang, this was not the result he wanted.


    In his view, the purpose of his trip, in addition to showing some strength and gaining everyone''s eyeballs, is to let Amon Koutarou meet Kaneki Ken here.


    Otherwise, he would not have performed such a big Dragon Phoenix in front of Amon Koutarou.


    Since God is not beautiful.


    Then it is up to you to fight for it.


    Li Yaoxiang thoughtlessly said: "The position assigned to us by Special ss Marude- I believe you have also known? What is the chance of an enemy appearing there, would you not know? Even without us staying there, it is estimated that there will be no major problems."


    Amon Koutarou agrees with Li Yaoxiang.


    It is also very unwilling to have no effect in this big operation.


    There was no more persuasion: "Then we..."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Don''t you want to deal with the ghouls? We are of course going to the ce where the ghouls are most likely to appear. With one more person, you can do more. With our help, the colleagues inside who are facing the ghouls, perhaps a fewer people will die. What happened? Are you worried about backing the pan, or afraid of dying? If you are afraid, then go back to that position and stay behind. It''s enough for me to help the rest of my colleagues by myself."


    Finished speaking.


    Li Yaoxiang continued to move forward, minding his own business.


    Amon Koutarou without the slightest hesitation caught up. Worry about or to be afraid of dying is none of his worries. Being able to help his colleagues and letting his colleagues die less than is his greatest motivation.


    After catching up with Li Yaoxiang.


    He and Li Yaoxiang nce at each other, both smiled heartily and did not speak.


    While the two walked side by side and continued to move forward, Amon Koutarou''s view of Li Yaoxiang also changed upside down.


    From this moment on, Li Yaoxiang was not only a boss who would kill and nder his colleagues in order to protect people''s lives, but also a boss who would not hesitate to disobey orders in order to protect the lives of his colleagues...

 Chapter 278: Undoubtedly, domineering

    Chapter 278: Undoubtedly, domineering


    In an abandoned building.


    Li Yaoxiang led Amon Koutarou to walk in either slow nor hurried.


    Quickly.


    They met the first people.


    The first group of people included CCG''s frontline troops and Aogiri Trees. The two sides are fighting fiercely. The scene was very confusing, either with machine gun fire, or with Kagune and Quinque against the enemy, and there was a constant noise.


    "The third unit is calling! The third unit is calling!"


    "Support is needed here! Support is needed here!"


    "Please send support immediately! We can''t hold on here!"


    "Kill them! Kill this group of over-the-top guys!"


    "Hahahahahaha!"


    The other side is killing with excitement.


    The CCG side was at a disadvantage, and there was a faint trend of being destroyed by the group, forcing them to ask for help from the headquarters. It''s a pity that Marutesai on the other end of the walkie-talkie came with a message that made them desperate: "The third unit...you hold on for a while! The other units have also encountered enemies, and when they solve their opponents, they wille and support you!"


    From the tone of Marude, you can hear this is just a word offort.


    Nor did they mean to retreat.


    They dare not retreat without authorization.


    After all, no one knows whether there will be another ambush on the way to retreat. Could the person in ambush be a more powerful ghoul? That being the case, instead of being annihted by a group of people in a confused situation, it would be better to fight hard with the group of ghouls in front of you, and there may be a chance of winning.


    It was when the gang members were determined to let go.


    They finally noticed that Li Yaoxiang and Amon Koutarou walked towards them.


    The leader was overjoyed: "Superior Li Yaoxiang! Superior Amon! Howe you''re here? Is the headquarters sending you to support us?"


    Not waiting for Li Yaoxiang to reply.


    The voice of Marude has already been heard from the inte: "Wait... wait, what? First ss Li Yaoxiang? How could First ss Li Yaoxiang be with you! Pass him the inte! First ss Li Yaoxiang! I told you, don''t leave me without permission..."


    Before Marude finished speaking, Li Yaoxiang snatched the walkie-talkie, threw it on the ground, and trampled it with one foot.


    ''p!'' Sound.


    The walkie-talkie is broken.


    The leader of the third unit was stunned: "This..."


    At this time, it was Li Yaoxiang ''s earphones, and the voice of Marude came out: "Superior Li Yaoxiang! I warn you..."


    Not waiting for Marude to finish speaking.


    Li Yaoxiang pulled out the headphones and crushed them directly.


    The entire world suddenly became quiet.


    Leader of Unit 3: "First ss Li Yaoxiang... This is..."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Don''t worry about him, I will be responsible for anything that happens. The top priority is to solve the enemy in front of you first, otherwise, your subordinates won''t be able tost long."


    The leader of Unit 3 was sober, bent over to Li Yaoxiang, and bowed at 90 degrees: "Oh! Yes! Li Yaoxiang is fine, then please!"


    ''Choke!'' Sound.


    Li Yaoxiang hit Quinque who belonged to him.


    It was a sword-shaped Quinque that was so ordinary.


    Judging from the appearance, at most it belongs to Quinque between C-B Rank. Since the day Li Yaoxiang joined and got the first Quinque, he has never reced.


    Until now, this low-quality Quinque is used.


    This is also the first time Li Yaoxiang showed this Quinque in front of Amon Koutarou.


    Seeing this instant of Quinque, Amon Koutarou frowned slightly.


    He thought that the information disyed in CCG was just not updated for too long. He didn''t expect my boss, a Senior Ghoul Investigator, and actually continued to use this level of Quinque.


    Amon Koutarou subconscious asked: "Need help?"


    Holding Quinque, Li Yaoxiang who continued to move forward, responded while shaking ones head: "No need, time is running out, let me solve it."


    This time.


    Amon Koutarou''s brow furrowed thicker.


    What do you mean by...?


    Time is running short, won''t you let me help?


    Suspect me for dying time?


    Amon Koutarou was furious! The dissatisfaction, suddenly... suddenly... suddenly extinguished...


    The picture in front of him quickly made him unable to generate any anger, and he did not even have the qualifications to be dissatisfied. He saw Li Yaoxiang walking and waving Quinque in his hand.


    Quinque''s ability is nothing special, just stretched and sometimes like a whip.


    It cannot be more than ordinary.


    Many Kagune and Quinque have this ability.


    What made him feel dumb and let him turn off the mes was not how powerful this Quinque was, but Li Yaoxiang''s speed of waving Quinque, which was simply unreasonably fast.


    His naked eye couldn''t catch Li Yaoxiang''s waving speed at all.


    The only picture that can be seen is the dozen or so types of joint attacks on the opposite side.


    "Ah~~!"


    "Ah~~!"


    A strange hole appeared in the enemy.


    One after another.


    The opponent that the entire third unit could not solve was solved by Li Yaoxiang after being divided.


    This scene not only made Amon Koutarou see a spit. Even the survivors of the third unit were all dumbfounded. Could it be... this is the strength of a Senior Investigator?


    Is the gap really difficult?


    Fortunately, Amon Koutarou did not know what they thought.


    Otherwise, Amon Koutarou might not be able to bear knocking a stick of Quinque, or knocking them to wake them up and let them stop dreaming.


    This is also called the strength of a Senior Ghoul Investigator?!


    It is not that he has never seen the strength of a Senior Ghoul Investigator.


    Isn''t Mado Kureo also the same rank ghoul investigator?


    But how can the superior strength of Mado bepared with the strength shown by Li Yaoxiang''s superior now? Amon Koutarou asked himself that even if he lost to Mado, he still would not be too far behind.


    First ss Li Yaoxiang is different.


    If he is allowed to y against Li Yaoxiang, he would end up not far from the ghouls on the other side...


    and...


    Judging from Li Yaoxiang''s current attitude, this is still a performance that he has not given his all, let alone what the result will be after he has given all his strength.


    In a real match, he would have died.


    Everyone who did not wait for the scene was recovered from the shock, and the voice of Li Yaoxiang came from their ears: "What are you still doing? You haven''t packed the scene yet?"


    Before the leader of the third unit issued an order, some members of the team subconsciously obeyed Li Yaoxiang''s orders, repeatedly answered "yes", and then began to clean up the scene.


    The leader of the 3rd corps who responded to it had a look on his face: "First ss Li Yaoxiang... this..."


    Li Yaoxiang: "I know what you''re thinking. You don''t have to worry about Marude''s shit. If he dares to pursue it, you can throw the burden to me. Your role in staying here is not much. Rather than sacrifice in vain, it''s better to clean up the scene and leave as soon as possible, so as not to be picked up by the ghouls and increase their force."


    Li Yaoxiang is undoubtedly domineering.


    The leader of the third unit was so frightened that he hurriedly saluted and said, "Yes! ''.


    Immediately, he began to instruct the rest of the hesitant team members to act ording to Li Yaoxiang''s instructions.


    Li Yaoxiang looked towards Amon Koutarou: "You, keep going with me."


    Amon Koutarou: "Yes...Yes...Yes!"

 Chapter 279: one-eyed owl

    Chapter 279: one-eyed owl


    If the former Amon Koutarou had doubts about Li Yaoxiang''s strength, then now he really has no doubts about it.


    After the battle just now, although Li Yaoxiang''s strength could not be seen, where exactly was his limit. But at least he can be sure that no matter where Li Yaoxiang''s limit is, Li Yaoxiang is no longer an opponent he can match.


    A strong strong boss.


    A boss who loves the people.


    A boss who cherishes his colleagues.


    What is there to question about being able to follow this boss? Any otherints? So in the following journey, Amon Koutarou didn''t even creak.


    Just follow Li Yaoxiang''s pace.


    He was not asked where he was going.


    Did not ask why he went there.


    Just follow Li Yaoxiang and you''re right.


    Along the way, as long as they encounter ghouls, they will be resolved by Li Yaoxiang with contempt. After gaining gratitude from the CCG survivors, the two will continue to move forward expressionlessly.


    And the direction they were walking was exactly towards the roof of the abandoned building.


    ...


    At the same time.


    At the roof.


    Before Li Yaoxiang and Amon Koutarou had arrived here, Kuroiwa Iwao, Shinohara Yukinori, two special investigators, Hirako Take - a Senior Investigator Investigator, and their subordinates had already reached the roof first.


    As soon as he arrived, Shinohara Yukinori moved towards the headset and talked to Marude at the other end of the headset: "This is Shinohara, and we have reached the roof."


    Look around for a week.


    Shinohara Yukinori continued: "Aogiri Tree''s guys are not here. It feels... seems a bit strange..."


    Don''t wait for them to finish the conversation.


    Li Yaoxiang took Amon Koutarou up from another staircase.


    Heard everybody, and noticed them.


    Shinohara Yukinori: "First ss Li Yaoxiang, Amon, how did youe here?"


    Hearing the word ''Li Yaoxiang'', Shinohara Yukinori''s earphones, came again the voice of Marude: "Wait, what? Li Yaoxiang is there with you?! This damned guy!"


    Along the way, Li Yaoxiang could trample or crush many walkie-talkies and headphones.


    He has no chance to speak.


    Really annoyed him as amander.


    But the survivors came back to report, but they were grateful and thanked Li Yaoxiang for saving them, which made him helpless and angerless.


    Not waiting for Li Yaoxiang and Amon to answer.


    Not far from them, came an unexpected guest again.


    When meeting theing person, Yukio Shinohara and Kuroiwa Iwao couldn''t help but get upset.


    Marude, who noticed the wrong atmosphere, did not take the time to teach Li Yaoxiang, and immediately asked, "What''s wrong?"


    Shinohara Yukinori said somberly: "Marude... it''s that guy... the one-eyed owl..."


    This is the case.


    The atmosphere at the scene suddenly became silent.


    At the other end of the headset, Marude was silent for a moment, and then a very serious voice came out: "Shinohara... Only leave those outstanding people who are as dead as they are... If none of you can fight him. Unreasonable waste of life; can''t even dy time... Fight him with the least number of people, this is the order I gave you. Also, Li Yaoxiang, that idiot, destroyed themunicator, and he could not hear the order I gave. You help me tell him that I am not cracking a joke with him this time. Be sure to let him leave here with Amon."


    At the same time Marude gave the order.


    Yoshimura, who had put on his one-eyed mask and his proprietary costume, also said: "Ten years ago... Isn''t it the youngster who took my arms... You seem to be ahead of the crowd... At that time, I should give up your usual hands... Just like your boss... Special Officer Shinohara."


    Shinohara Yukinori did not respond to Yoshimura.


    I just stared directly at the other side, and then said: "Iwao."


    Did not say anymore.


    But many years of cooperation.


    Although he didn''t say anything, Kuroiwa Iwao was already understood, Shinohara Yukinori called his name at this time, just asking him if he was ready to die?


    Kuroiwa Iwao gave a heavy tone of "Uh".


    Seeing that hispanion was ready to go to death, Shinohara Yukinori no longer hesitated.


    Immediately instructed: "Hirako, you stay!"


    Hirako Take: "Yes!"


    Shinohara Yukinori: "The rest of the staff, all go to destroy Ao Bronze! First ss Li Yaoxiang! You also take Amon!"


    The voice just fell.


    The rest of everyone had already started to act, and they had withdrawn the roof.


    It''s just that not only did Li Yaoxiang not move, but even Amon Koutarou didn''t follow their instructions at all.


    Shinohara Yukinori shouted again: "First ss Li Yaoxiang!"


    If Amon Koutarou in the original work, at this time, he had already known the immensity of Heaven and Earth. Angrily roared: I also want to stay and fight!


    But he in this life, not at all.


    Since Li Yaoxiang did not leave, he did not leave.


    Since Li Yaoxiang did not give orders, nor did he follow Shinohara''s instructions.


    In this way, standing silently beside Li Yaoxiang seems to have a tendency to look forward to Li Yaoxiang.


    Li Yaoxiang said indifferently: "Special ss Shinohara, you don''t have to worry about us. I will naturally take care of myself and the safety of my subordinates."


    Shinohara Yukinori shouted again: "Senior Investigator Li Yaoxiang! This is themander''s order! This time the opponent is different from the opponents you have encountered in the past! You are the outstanding talents that we cannot lose! Go! Leave here with Amon!"


    Li Yaoxiang and Amon Koutarou are still indifferent.


    Seeing this, Shinohara Yukinori no longer advised.


    Had to remind: "Then you don''t hold back"


    Immediately, they stopped talking to the two of them.


    He said to himself, said: "Hirako, I''m sorry"


    Hirako stepped a few steps forward and stood side by side with the two: "It''s okay, I understand. So... how about Arata?"


    The so-called Arata is Quinque, which is made from raw materials. Its area covers the upper body, which can enhance the use of great strength and protection.


    Shinohara expressionlessly, while responding to ''already equipped'', he pressed the switch on the neck together with Kuroiwa Iwao.


    In the blink of an eye, this set of Quinque was like Kinoe, protruding from the cervical spine like muscles, wrapping their upper body.


    Then from the appearance of ''muscle'', it became a set of Kinoe.


    Ado.


    In the process of Arata''s transformation, they also opened the suitcase at the same time.


    The suitcases became their own weapons.


    The battle mode is activated in the blink of an eye.


    Immediately, Li Yaoxiang and Amon Koutarou, who had no action, were no longer taken care of. The three people of Shinohara Yukinori, Kuroiwa Iwao, and Hirako Take took their weapons and rushed towards the "one-eyed owl" of SSS-Rank, Yoshimura!

 Chapter 280: obey orders

    Chapter 280: obey orders


    ng! ng!


    Not far away, the sound of the collision between Kagune and Quinque continued. During the collision, it is not because of the sparks sparkling. After Shinohara Yuki, Kuroiwa Iwao, Hirako immediately entangled with Yoshimura, the SSS-Rank, one-eyed owl.


    The three people were attacking around Yoshimura in different directions.


    Amon Koutarou, who was watching, frowned.


    It''s not that Yoshimura is not good at all, but... there is still a big difference from his imagined SSS-Rank strength.


    Shinohara Yukinori, Kuroiwa Iwao, Hirako Take, 2 Special ss Investigators, a First ss Investigator, also not weak, but... How can I always feel that the strength they show is far from what the boss Li Yaoxiang can do that even shocked him?


    At least...he was barely able to capture the movements of the four in front of him when they were fighting.


    just as expected.


    His doubts are correct.


    If SSS-Rank is the only one, it really only has the strength at this level in front of you. Then... in the face of a perfect joint attack of two special ss and a senior ss, there is a high probability that they will soon fall.


    that''s the truth.


    Under the joint attack of the three, the one-eyed owl was quickly attacked by Hirako Take.


    Next, it was time to verify his ideas.


    SSS-Rank, it really is not that simple.


    The one-eyed owl''s injuries not only recovered quickly, but after that, two kagunes were highlighted again. And this is the one-eyed owl, this SSS-Rank is the strongest state today.


    After Yoshimura exhibited the strongest state, Shinohara Yukinori''s side immediately fell into the losing end.


    Three people were blown away by Yoshimura to a distance in a moment.


    Hirako Take didn''t have ''Arata'' in his body, suffered a lot of injuries, and his strength fell sharply.


    Reluctantly, Shinohara and Kuroiwa Iwao had no choice but to activate the full function of Arata and rushed up again.


    At this time, Amon Koutarou really saw the SSS-Rank and the real strength of the special investigator! Their movements, like First ss Li Yaoxiang, could not be caught with naked eyes.


    It''s a pity that after opening the full function of Arata, the two special investigators, strength is strong.


    But as long as they are discerning people, they can see that their situation is not good.


    Arata bacshed them bit by bit.


    Even if the attack of Yoshimura did not fall on them, their bodies already shed a lot of blood on their own, exuding a rich bloody smell.


    Seeing that the situation was far from good, Amon Koutarou, finally unable to bear asked: "Won''t you help me?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Not in a hurry. This is just the consequence of their use of Arata. They will be fine."


    Amon Koutarou is very puzzled.


    I don''t understand why Li Yaoxiang is so sure that the two special investigators will be fine? Even if you canpete now, as the two special investigators are bacshed more and more seriously, then they will gradually be weaker?


    Seeing his doubts, Li Yaoxiang neither slow nor hurried exined: "You know he is a one-eyed owl and SSS-Rank. Then do you know what other nickname is this one-eyed owl?"


    This problem is really troubling to Amon Koutarou.


    With his current identity, strength, and status, he really hasn''t carefully studied the data of the one-eyed owl.


    Li Yaoxiang: "He also has a nickname... ''Non-Killing Owl''."


    Amon Koutarou: "Non-killing owl?"


    Li Yaoxiang nods: "Yes! y against him and might get injured. But none of the ghoul investigators ever died in his hands."


    Amon Koutarou suddenly fell silent.


    He did not understand the significance of this one-eyed owl.


    Why wouldn''t he kill any ghoul investigator?


    Li Yaoxiang: "Remember what I told you before?"


    Amon Koutarou''s eyes fell on Li Yaoxiang again.


    While paying attention to the battle, Li Yaoxiang continued to respond: "Not all ghouls are murderous, and not all ghouls regard humans as enemies. And this one-eyed owl is also the representative of those who want to live in peace with humans. one."


    Amon Koutarou''s gaze returned to battlefield.


    Sure enough, what he saw...


    Most of the injuries on the two special investigators were caused by themselves.


    Only a small part was hurt by the one-eyed owl.


    Even if it is injured by a one-eyed owl, it is not a fatal wound.


    It can be seen that this one-eyed owl is indeed keeping hands everywhere.


    Shinohara''s Arata finally had the first problem, and the bacsh situation became more and more serious, so that he could no longer bear the pain of bacsh and could not continue the fight.


    Kuroiwa Iwao gave up the game.


    Rushed to his side: "Shinohara!"


    Seeing this, Amon Koutarou was nervous again. It doesn''t matter what ''kill or not kill the owl'' anymore. If this situation continues, even if you don''t kill the owl, Shinohara and others are estimated to be bacshed to death by their own Arata.


    He anxiously asked Li Yaoxiang for help: "Senior Investigator Li Yaoxiang!"


    Li Yaoxiang waved his hand.


    Instructed: "Next, let me do it here. You go to Southwest and search again, I feel there should be a fish that escaped the."


    Amon Koutarou: "But but!"


    Li Yaoxiang waved his hand and begged Amon Koutarou to leave: "Don''t be so. Do you think that with your current strength, you can participate in the battle here? Your presence here will only hold me back and prevent me from doing my best."


    Amon Koutarou hesitated again.


    Unwilling for a while.


    He did not want to abandon his teammates, he wanted to fight side by side with his teammates, but he had to admit that Li Yaoxiang said that the fact is that with his current strength, he simply does not have enough ability to participate in this level of battle.


    If you want to stay, it will only be a burden for your teammates.


    Li Yaoxiang: "What''s wrong? Not going yet? Is this trying to disobey my order? Or do you have no confidence in my strength?"


    Amon Koutarou expression is veryplicated, and ultimately can only be very unwillinglyplied ''Yes, Sir!'', And immediately ran towards Southwest as Li Yaoxiang said.


    Li Yaoxiang and Amon Koutarou here.


    Shinohara Yukinori and Kuroiwa Iwao also noticed.


    Even though he has suffered a serious injury and endured abnormal pain, Shinohara Yukinori is still unable to bear and cursed: This damned Smelly Brat. You don''t listen to Special Investigator''s order, but Senior Investigator Li Yaoxiang''s order you agree so quickly...?


    As for the character of Amon Koutarou, they are still clear.


    So they couldn''t help but feel a little surprised that Amon Koutarou obeyed Li Yaoxiang''s order so easily.


    However, under such anxious situation, they are toote to think so much.


    Seeing that Li Yaoxiang walked towards him and the others, they still advised: "Senior Investigator Li Yaoxiang, don''t worry about us. You will leave with Hirako. One-eyed owl is not an opponent you can deal with... "

 Chapter 281: Undefeated Myth, Temptation

    Chapter 281: Undefeated Myth, Temptation


    Li Yaoxiang opened the suitcase.


    The suitcase became a Kagune long sword.


    Li Yaoxiang did not respond to the words of Shinohara Yukinori and Kuroiwa Iwao in words. Li Yaoxiang''s Quinque, with two ''swishes'' and crossed them.


    The ''X''-type attack fell on Shinohara Yukinori and Kuroiwa Iwao.


    The 2 sets of Arata on their bodies were devoured to death, and they were cut open with a bang.


    Both Shinohara Yukinori and Kuroiwa Iwao were surprised. Arata, who couldn''t get rid of them with all their might, was cut off so easily?


    His eyes fell on Li Yaoxiang''s hand, Quinque.


    And


    It was easily cut by a low-level Quinque?


    You know, this pair of equipment is not an ordinary Quinque, but Arata, and it is also SS-Rank. And Li Yaoxiang has this Quinque...


    No matter how you look at it, at most it''s C-B Rank...?


    A C-B Rank Quinque, so easily cut SS-Rank Arata?


    Two people looked at each other in surprise.


    How did this happen?


    Both of them couldn''t help but have the same thought. The only possibility to be able to do this is that the superior Li Yaoxiang in front of him has broken through the shackles of quality with his swordsmanship.


    It was like the battle ten years ago.


    A seemingly inconspicuous second-ss investigator, holding two quinques of decent quality, but cut off the arms of the SSS-level ghoul, and cut off the Non-Killing Owl''s Kagunes.


    Now it has be the highest battle strength of CCG.


    Known as the "undefeated ghoul investigator".


    At the same time, there is also a Special ss Investigator known as "White Reaper", Arima Kishou!


    Everyone saw the shadow of Arima Kishou from Li Yaoxiang. Combined with the previous conditions, the two can''t help but guess... Perhaps this is why the unruly and stubborn Amon Koutarou is so easily convinced...


    Li Yaoxiang ignored the shocked eyes of the two.


    To issue orders without authorization: "Senior ss Hirako, please take the Special ss Shinohara and Kuroiwa back to the gathering ce for first aid. Hand it over here."


    Hirako Take: "This"


    Hirako doesn''t know whether to obey Li Yaoxiang''s orders.


    It''s just that Shinohara shouted quickly: "Hirako!"


    Immediately, he said to Li Yaoxiang with apology: "First ss Li Yaoxiang, then I''ll leave it to you here."


    The imposing-manner, self-confidence and the attitude of Amon Koutarou showed him by Li Yaoxiang gave Shinohara Yukinori and Kuroiwa Iwao a sudden thought.


    perhaps...


    All of them underestimated this Li Yaoxiang, who is famous for beingzy at CCG, and waited...


    All decided to give it a try!


    If the guess is wrong, it is a pity, but since the opponent is a ''Non-Killing Owl'', then at least Li Yaoxiang has a chance of surviving the first ss, isn''t it?


    If the guess is correct


    Then you must not bury First ss Li Yaoxiang talent! Perhaps in the not-too-distant future, CCG will have a brand new undefeated myth.


    If this is the case, it is really the biggest gain of this operation!


    With themand of Shinohara Yukinori, Hirako Take, together with Kuroiwa Iwao, helped Shinohara Yukinori and left the roof.


    After the whole area, only Yoshimura and Li Yaoxiang were left.


    Yoshimura then said, "It seems... you have great confidence in your strength..."


    Yoshimura recognized Li Yaoxiang.


    He recognized Li Yaoxiang and Amon Koutarou as the two investigators who were investigating antique shops and disputes urred at the scene. It is a pity that Yoshimura could not hear the conversation between the two at the time.


    There is no way of knowing what the two ghoul investigators are arguing about.


    But he can be sure that, normally, the ghoul investigator is impossible and does not even investigate, so it is so easy to break through the ''Yamori Incident''.


    There must be something tricky about it.


    And this tricky, maybe rted to the dispute between the two at the time.


    Since God gave him such a great opportunity, then he would simply probe the ghoul investigator today. See if he can spot any clues.


    Li Yaoxiang shrugged while walking towards Yoshimura: "How can I know if I haven''t tried it yet?"


    Yoshimura not saying anything further.


    Yoshimura''s Ukaku suddenlyunched at Li Yaoxiang.


    ng! ng! ng! ng! ng!


    Li Yaoxiang''s arm, like a shadow, kept waving in the air. Every piece of Ukaku collided with Quinque, and sparks would be rubbed. All the attacks were blocked by Li Yaoxiang''s lightning-fast sword swing.


    Quickly.


    Until the distance between the two was less than one meter apart.


    Li Yaoxiang stopped.


    2 meters high Yoshimura.


    1.85 meters Li Yaoxiang.


    So one high and one low, looking at each other calmly.


    Li Yaoxiang shed with a single sword. The battle is imminent. The two sides began to fight. At the beginning, Yoshimura only used Kagune covered his arms to fight Li Yaoxiang.


    Slowly, even the two Kagunes on his back joined the battle situation.


    Li Yaoxiang, from the beginning to the end, only used the right hand of the low-quality Quinque to fight.


    Yoshimura slowly elerates the speed of attack and gradually strengthens the power of attack. But even so, Shinohara Yukinori, Kuroiwa Iwao, Hirako Hirako, three people spare no effort, could notpete against the offensive, but they were all resisted by Li Yaoxiang casually.


    I don''t know how many rounds were engaged.


    Just listen to ''ng!'' a loud noise.


    Li Yaoxiang''s low-quality Quinque finally couldn''t stand the long-term violent collision, broke apart, and flew to the ground not far away, making a crisp sound.


    Yoshimura stopped the offensive and did not continue to attack.


    Yoshimura: "Why don''t you fight back?"


    Yes.


    Yoshimura was aware of it.


    In the battle just now, Li Yaoxiang only parry, simply did not mean to fight back, otherwise, Li Yaoxiang''s Quinque would not break so quickly.


    Li Yaoxiang said with a slight smile: "You don''t have killing intent to me, do you?"


    The atmosphere became silent.


    Silence for a long time.


    Yoshimura: "I like human beings-"


    Li Yaoxiang: "I don''t hate ghouls like you either."


    Yoshimura meritorious, the face hidden under the mask was shocked on the spot. He never thought that Li Yaoxiang would give such an answer. You don''t have killing intent for SSS-Rank, nor even have hostility?


    I don''t know how long I haven''t met that except my wife, and a human who can treat ghouls calmly...


    After the panic, there was a burst ofughter.


    "Hahahahaha!"


    He suddenly felt that the ghoul investigator in front of him was really interesting.


    Perhaps... The hasty end of the ''Yamori Incident'' is really not as simple as he thought.


    Soon, theughter came to an abrupt end, and Yoshimura said with great interest: "How is it? Your Quinque is broken, do we still have to fight?"

 Chapter 282: Showdown, actually

    Chapter 282: Showdown, actually


    Li Yaoxiang did not answer directly.


    He nced at Ukaku who stabbed into the cement floor.


    He stooped down and picked up 2 pieces of Ukaku, holding it in his hand like kunai, with a tone of taste: "You can try again."


    Yoshimura did not refuse.


    The way Li Yaoxiang held his weapon made him feel strange.


    But he still chose to meet Li Yaoxiang''s requirements.


    This time it was his turn to attack Li Yaoxiang first.


    ng! ng! ng! ng!


    A series of fighting sounds again.


    The more Yoshimura fought, the more shocked he is.


    He thought that the inspector in front of him would lose a lot of strength without a handy weapon. But he didn''t think that the inspector in front of him, with two short pieces of Ukaku, could stillpete with his series of violent attacks.


    And this time it''s not just parry.


    In addition to blocking, it is mixed with counterattacks.


    As a result of his attack, Kagune appeared several cut wounds. Although these wounds will heal soon, Li Yaoxiang''s strength really surprised him.


    For a person as strong as possible, impossible will be unknown.


    How could a person with such a strength be able to live together in harmony with himself in the 20th district without finding anything?


    How could the ''Yamori Incident'' be gone in a hurry?


    I don''t know how long I yed.


    Yoshimura actively stopped the attack.


    Li Yaoxiang did not mean to chase: "Not fighting?"


    Yoshimura''s arms wrapped in Kagune slowly recovered, and Kagune retracted into Kakuhou. His imposing-manner suddenly became weaker.


    Immediately shaking ones head said with a bitter smile: "No more, you didn''t use your full strength at all."


    "Yeah."


    He can feel that Li Yaoxiang still retains his spare power in the face of his full attack.


    Li Yaoxiang stacked the two pieces of Ukaku together and tossed them to the ground indifferently. He did not reject Yoshimura''s ims, which made Yoshimura surer that he was right about Li Yaoxiang''s strength.


    Yoshimura: "Do you already know my identity?"


    Li Yaoxiang nods: "Maybe..."


    Yoshimura: "What is your purpose?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "There is no purpose, I just want to live a life of ease and stability."


    This is the case.


    Yoshimura is impossible to bear breathes deeply.


    Originally, he was still holding on to luck, perhaps the investigator in front of him was just guessing, not necessarily correct. But if it was just a guess, how could he possibly answer the question he asked?


    If he does not know his identity, how could he answer this answer?


    In other words, the investigator in front of him not only knew his identity, but also knew what they had done over the years.


    He thought that he was doing it very secretly and perfectly, but he didn''t expect everything to be observed under the eyes of the person in front of him, which really made him not shocked...


    After a while.


    Yoshimura recovered from shock.


    He took off his mask.


    Seeing that Li Yaoxiang was not surprised at all, he knew his guess was correct.


    He simply spread it out and said: "After what happened today, it is destined to not be too stable in the days toe. Then... what are your ns next?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "There is no n, as long as your business does not affect my life, it does not affect the 20th district."


    The atmosphere fell silent again.


    Li Yaoxiang''s answer makes Yoshimura not very satisfied, but very real.


    Yoshimura: "Have you ever thought about changing this world to make the entire world as stable as the 20th district?"


    Li Yaoxiang said with a smile: "Why do you ask me this question?"


    Yoshimura: "Because you are the only human being I can meet and can tolerate. If you have this idea, even if I sacrifice my life, I am willing to assist you to aplish this goal.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Oh? If I say... I don''t have this idea?"


    Yoshimura was at a loss for words.


    Without this idea, what is there to talk about?


    Don''t you just go your own way?


    However, it is precisely because of Li Yaoxiang''s true, false, and false attitude that Yoshimura is more convinced that Li Yaoxiang is not acting to deceive him.


    After half a ring.


    Li Yaoxiang changed his words again: "I am just a high-ranking investigator now. You don''t think that just relying on my authority can change everything, right?"


    Yoshimura''s lost eyes were overjoyed on the spot!


    A good idea!


    As long as you have this idea, other issues can be discussed and resolved slowly.


    ...


    At the same time.


    Time to return to Amon Koutarou just said goodbye to Li Yaoxiang and the others soon.


    He was filled with resentment and unwillingness.


    But he still ran all the way to the southwest direction that Li Yaoxiang pointed. After all, before that, he followed Li Yaoxiang''s footsteps. Although it was not very useful, he did witness that Li Yaoxiang saved the lives of many of his colleagues.


    This made him more convinced of Li Yaoxiang''s instructions.


    just as expected.


    Before he could get far, he saw a group of people not far away, moving towards the other direction.


    When he could clearly see who the leader of that group was, his pupils squeezed suddenly, unable to bear burst on the spot: "One-eyed mask! Is that you?!"


    Kaneki Ken, who was on his way, looked back.


    Seeing that they are acquaintances, they said to the Kirishima Touka entire group on the side: "You go first, I will go back when I go."


    Kirishima Touka takes a step forward and wants to stop: "But...!"


    Kaneki Ken patted beside Kirishima Touka''s fragrant shoulder: "Rx, I wille over to meet you soon."


    With that said, Kaneki Ken walked over in the direction of Amon Koutarou.


    Seeing the older sister who wants to stay and help, Kirishima Ayato taunted: "Come on, idiot. Didn''t understand the meaning of Kaneki? Staying here will only hinder him."


    Kirishima Touka fiercely red at the younger brother fiercely.


    Her eyes returned to Kaneki Ken''s back again.


    Very unwilling.


    But it was helpless.


    She knew that Kaneki Ken didn''t mean it, but it was undeniable that what the younger brother said was also reasonable. With her current strength, one on one fight may be okay.


    But if she really wants to meet CCG''s troops, then she will probably be Kaneki Ken''s burden.


    Consider for a moment.


    To avoid Kaneki Ken distracting him, Kirishima Touka eventually clenched the teeth, but chose to turn around and lead the others to leave the scene together.


    Amon Koutarou did not prevent Kirishima Touka entire group from leaving.


    At this time, his eyes were firmly stared Kaneki Ken, and the suitcase in his hand.


    This suitcase gave him a bad hunch.


    It wasn''t until Kaneki Ken came not far from him that he was fiercely disgusted and said with a somber tone: "You are also a person of Aogiri Tree? What do you hold in your hand..."

 Chapter 283: double bewitched

    Chapter 283: double bewitched


    In the heart of Amon Koutarou, he did not think that Kaneki Ken was a person of Aogiri Tree.


    If he is a person from Ao Tongshu, when he met Yamori with Mado Kureo before, the two people in the same organization would not be one who was seriously injured and the other who wanted to save Fueguchi.


    The question is, if he is not a member of Aogiri Tree, how could Kaneki Ken appear here?


    What is the purpose of Kaneki Ken here?


    Cooperate with Aogiri Tree?


    Join hands?


    Currently, what he cares most about is that besides whether Kaneki Ken has any connection with Aogiri Tree, it is Kaneki Ken''s suitcase.


    You must know that the ghouls will produce Quinque, and it is not impossible.


    Just like in this battle today, you can see the Aogiri Tree holding Quinque shields, or Quinque weapons and so on.


    Can really make Quinque into a suitcase like CCG, but never seen it. There is no other kind of organization, dare to be so unbridled, bright and earthly to create the ''Quinque suitcase''.


    After all, although this is also a weapon, the meaning ispletely different.


    You haven''t built weapons in such a formal way. The CCG side, or the human side, may still be able to regard the ghouls as within control.


    But if you have built a regr weapon.


    What is your heart?


    Want to start a total war?


    What kind of physical fitness is more powerful, is it enough to have a hero in your body? It is also necessary to walk around in the prosperous urban area with unbridled, swaying hands and arms, which makes the human side still able to sit still?


    The seriousness of this problem is far beyond the control of Amon Koutarou.


    If Kaneki Ken had this suitcase on his hand, it was really like what he had guessed...


    Anyway, he has to catch Kaneki Ken anyway!


    Cross-examine various rted information.


    Even if it is really impossible to capture it, even if it is desperate, at least the news must be reported, so that the human side can know that the ghouls may have been plotting a series of major actions.


    Let the human side prepare for a full-scale war!


    "If I said that I am not a member of Aogiri Tree, do you believe it?" Kaneki Ken walked and said, "As for... this suitcase... wouldn''t it be understood if you see it with your own eyes?"


    click!


    The suitcase turned into a long sword on the spot.


    The original Quinque had already broken when he yed against the Yamori.


    Now, this handle is the second Quinque created immediately after the first Quinque was produced by Fueguchi, so that Kaneki Ken has a spare weapon.


    Amon Koutarou pupils tighten!


    He also shot out his stick-shaped weapon.


    Moved towards Kaneki Ken scolded: "How did you get this Quinque? Why did you build this weapon?! Are you nning to start a full-scale war with humans?!"


    "Why?" Kaneki Ken sneered, "You are only allowed to develop more advanced weapons to hunt me down, and I''m not allowed to create weapons to protect myself? Your life is life, but mine is not life? Should I just sit and wait to die?"


    Finished speaking.


    At the same time, Kaneki Ken protruded four scales with countless tentacles. At the same time, he also rushed up.


    not saying anything further.


    Directlyunched a series of onughts against Amon Koutarou.


    Kaneki Ken today is much stronger than thest time he hand to handbat with the Mado Kureo.


    Even though Amon Koutarou had improved during this period of time, he was still far from Kaneki Ken''s opponent.


    Kaneki Ken''s 4 scales + sword art offensive force is so fierce that he can only clenched his teeth when he attacked Amon Koutarou. He can''t even fight back while parrying and retreating.


    Quickly.


    Kaneki Ken showed that when there is a weapon of the same quality as humans, what is the real difference?


    That is no power to fight back.


    Physical fitness is not as good as the other side.


    There is no ability to heal quickly.


    While parrying other side weapons, it is also necessary to pay attention to attacking your Kagunes in different directions.


    This is precisely the situation facing Amon Koutarou.


    As time passed, Amon Koutarou had more and more wounds. And as more and more blood is lost, his physical strength, speed, and strength will naturally drop at a rapid rate.


    This makes him already in a weaker situation, bing a more difficult situation.


    I don''t know how long has passed.


    Just listen to ''ng! ng!'' 2 sounds crisp.


    His Quinque, divided into two, was knocked out of his palm by Kaneki Ken. He was even more forced to fall to the ground by Kaneki Ken''s offensive.


    The long sword pointed directly at his neck.


    He half lying on the ground, breathing heavily, red at Kaneki Ken.


    The two sides stared at each other for a while.


    Kaneki Ken recovered Quinque. Quinque turned into a suitcase.


    Kaneki Ken carrying a suitcase, turned around and left.


    Amon Koutarou stopped him: "Wait!"


    Kaneki Ken stopped.


    Amon Koutarou: "Why didn''t you kill me?"


    Originally, Kaneki Ken didn''t want to take care of him, but Li Yaoxiang was confusing in his mind at this time: "If you want to achieve your goal, you will inevitably need the recognition and support of the human side. This person may also be a bridge between you and the human side."


    Kaneki Ken then turned around and stared again at Amon Koutarou who was half lying on the ground: "Why should I kill you?"


    Amon Koutarou did not speak.


    Previously, he might have thought that ghouls were ''evil''.


    It is believed that ghouls are inhuman creatures, otherwise, they would not have the heart to kill so many lives, destroy so many families, and cause young children to lose their parents since childhood.


    But now he is under the influence of Li Yaoxiang.


    The view on ghouls has long been shaken.


    He really wanted to know the reason why Kaneki Ken, who is a ghoul, would keep his hands with the Mado Kureo and him.


    Kaneki Ken: "Whether you believe it or not, I only have one purpose from beginning to end, which is to protect myself. You haven''t given us a chance at all. You forced us to resist."


    Amon Koutarou was silent again.


    He also heard these remarks from Li Yaoxiang.


    Didn''t expect in this world, there are really some people who don''t want to hurt humans, want to live with humans in peace, and not as few as two...


    Wasn''t the ''Non-Killing Owl'' just one of the most obvious representatives?


    Kaneki Ken saw Amon Koutarou not speaking.


    It is estimated that he could not ept these remarks for a while.


    So Kaneki Ken did not n to stay any longer.


    If you really have a chance, then try to win over next time.


    Just when Kaneki Ken turned around again and wanted to leave, the silent andplicated expression of Amon Koutarou finally couldn''t help but shouted again, ''Wait!'', and immediately said: Immediately said: "Humans... can we really live peacefully with ghouls?"

 Chapter 284: Pain you dont know

    Chapter 284: Pain you don''t know


    Amon Koutarou''s doubts made Kaneki Ken see hope from him.


    At this time, Kaneki Ken was not in a hurry.


    He didn''t mind putting more thoughts to chat with the ghoul investigator in front of him.


    Kaneki Ken: "If the human side can solve the problem of food, why not?"


    Amon Koutarou started in his heart.


    This remark?


    Li Yaoxiang has also told him this statement. He didn''t expect this kind of ghoul in front of him, and he will have the same idea as Li Yaoxiang


    The problem is


    If human beings really developed different kinds of food.


    Are you really willing topromise and be willing to be controlled by humanws?


    As if he saw his doubts, Kaneki Ken responded directly without asking him: "You don''t think all the ghouls in this world are really willing to feed on people?"


    Amon Koutarou has ''isn''t it?'' face.


    Kaneki Ken coldly said: "That''s because they have no choice at all!"


    Amon Koutarou looked nk.


    Kaneki Ken: "What''s wrong? Don''t believe it?"


    Amon Koutarou didn''t say he didn''t believe it, but his expression didn''t seem to believe at all.


    Kaneki Ken: "If I tell you... I was originally a human, would you believe it?"


    This is the case.


    Amon Koutarou''s face instantly changed from dazed to shocked! His eyes were full of incredible, staring at Kaneki Ken.


    He wants Kaneki Ken to give him an exnation.


    Kaneki Ken crouched down.


    He looked at him at close range and yed with the taste: "What''s wrong? It feels ridiculous? My reaction at the beginning is exactly the same as yours now. I also feel very dumb. I never thought that one day I would, from a human to a ghoul. Do you know how painful it is for a human who has previously enjoyed various foods to be suddenly deprived of the power to enjoy various foods? Do you know how ufortable it is for a human being who used to live a free life to suddenly be life-threatening all the time? Isn''t it also reported on TV? For ghouls, human food is like a pile of rancid garbage. I can tell you very clearly that this is true. Do you know, after bing a ghoul, how much of this garbage I swallowed in front of my former friends in order not to be discovered by you white pigeons who kill to thest one? If we can choose, do you think I don''t want to continue eating human food? If given a choice, do you think other ghouls don''t want to eat the kind of food that humans eat with gusto? As for the reason... "


    With the loss of blood.


    Amon Koutarou''s face grew paler.


    But at this time, his mind was extremely clear.


    He understood what Kaneki Ken said.


    Also agree with Kaneki Ken''s statement.


    It''s just that what he cares most about now is not ''can the problem of ghouls be solved by developing food'', but for no reason, how could Kaneki Ken change from a human to a ghoul?


    He did not suspect that Kaneki Ken was lying to him.


    I don''t think Kaneki Ken lied to him at such a time.


    Amon Koutarou said one by one: "Who made you a ghoul?"


    Kaneki Ken stared at him for a while.


    Feel the difference of Amon Koutarou.


    Also put away the fun heart.


    Kaneki Ken stood up again: "Who turned me into a ghoul, I have some suspects. But I will not tell you. I do not want you to find out my true identity. But I can be sure that this matter is definitely inseparable from your CCG."


    Amon Koutarou was shocked and immediately said with clenched teeth: "impossible!"


    Kaneki Ken sneered: "Oh, as everyone knows, CCG is a section where humans specialize in researching and dealing with ghouls. Besides CCG has enough natural resources and manpower, who has the ability to do this? If we say that CCG has nothing to do with this matter. Ask yourself, can you believe?"


    Amon Koutarou started to talk and wanted to refute.


    But found it impossible to refute.


    Coming over for a while, he expressedplicatedly: "What is their purpose? Why do they want to turn human beings into a ghoul?"


    Amon Koutarou subconsciously concluded that Kaneki Ken did not voluntarily participate in this project.


    Otherwise, Kaneki Ken would not say such a thing.


    Kaneki Ken: "I also want to know this question. But it''s toote to say anything. Even if it makes me understood the reason, it cannot change the fact that I have be a ghoul. Return to the real story. Didn''t you ask me whether the ghouls can live in peace with humans? Before I became a ghoul, before I really understood the ghoul, I was just an ordinary human. I think the same as most humans. Why should we coexist peacefully with each other? Wouldn''t it be better to kill all those ghouls? What kind of rtionship does it matter if I die? But when I became a ghoul, I really realized the feeling... That kind of difort when hungry, simply cannot be described in words. Being in that state for a long time can really make a person runaway and make a person copse. If you lose control, you will be controlled by your appetite. Maybe you will go out and kill people for a while. Then I will only die faster. Therefore, in order to live, no matter how unwilling, I have to eat. Normally, I can only live in fear every day, deeply afraid of being discovered and chased by you."


    Amon Koutarou slightly wrinkle: "Then you"


    Kaneki Ken nced at him, and continued, "I don''t feed on humans, even corpses. In addition to the fact that coffee can suppress that hunger, Kagune is the only way to solve the hunger. Although the taste is still difficult to swallow, but at least it can be fruitful. In order to survive. In order not to reveal his identity. I can only change from an ordinary person to a ghoul that must go out to hunt..."


    Kaneki Ken felt Amon Koutarou''s self-me, apology, and pity.


    Without taking care of him, he continued: "During this period, I met some ghouls. They are actually no different from humans. They have rtives and friends as well. Same feelings as humans. The same people they value... At the same time, like me, they are a group of people who do not want to feed on humans and hope to live in peace with humans. I can tell you very clearly that if humans are really willing to give them a chance to choose, then they will definitely choose topromise and choose to cooperate."


    Amon Koutarou''s stunned watching Kaneki Ken.


    I don''t know what I am thinking.


    Kaneki Ken''s message to him today really made him feel too unimaginable.


    So that he did not know what response to give.


    The two sides stared at each other for a while.


    Kaneki Ken continued: "So... you ask me if humans and ghouls can live in peace...I can only tell you..."

 Chapter 285: A new generation of undefeated

    Chapter 285: A new generation of undefeated


    Marude Itsuki happily said: "Amon, you''re fine!"


    Seeing Marude waiting so nervously, Amon Koutarou was a little caught off guard. He just wanted to start to talk about the report about the development of a suitcase Quinque, but was interrupted by Marude.


    "What''s the situation with you? Senior Investigator Li Yaoxiang? Isn''t Li Yaoxiang with you?"


    Amon Koutarou opened his mouth halfway, and swallowed back the forcibly what was originally intended.


    Marude is anxious: "Talk to me."


    After considering 3 times, Amon Koutarou still didn''t say the content of the conversation with Kaneki Ken: "I didn''t stay with Li Yaoxiang. When we evacuated, we didn''t see him either."


    Marude murmured secretly: "Damn it! How could this be?! Li Yaoxiang, Li Yaoxiang, you must not die. If you die, I will be happy!"


    Realized that he had lost his temper.


    The responding Marude quickly instructed: "Come on, you will take Amon to heal soon."


    "Yes!"


    Immediately, the two people supported Amon Koutarou and left the scene.


    Marude continued to firmly stared at the exit of the abandoned building.


    Quickly.


    As the time goes.


    The vibration in the whole area bes more intense.


    Seeing that the abandoned building had a tendency to copse, Marude Itsuki clenched the teeth and had to order all the staff to go back to a safe distance again.


    just as expected.


    It didn''t take long for all CCG members to step back.


    ''rumble!'' a loud noise.


    The abandoned building copsed in front of everyone''s eyes, making the scene soot.


    Seeing the scene in front of me, I was worried about Marudete and so on, and the whole person fell to his knees in an instant. He murmured in his mouth: "It''s finished... it''s finished... First ss Li Yaoxiang, I killed you... If it wasn''t for my impropermand, if you didn''t go to rescue, you wouldn''t have died..."


    At the same time as Marude murmured.


    Various noisy sounds also sounded around.


    "Huh? What about First ss Li Yaoxiang? Did any of you see First ss Li Yaoxiang?"


    "No, I didn''t see him."


    "Neither have I seen."


    "Li Yaoxiang won''t be to save us, it''s toote to withdraw..."


    Many people at the scene were CCGmembers rescued by Li Yaoxiang on the way to the roof. If it weren''t for Li Yaoxiang who arrived in time and rescued them from the sharp edge of the knife, they would alsoe out alive.


    After thinking about waiting withdraw, they must thank Li Yaoxiang in person.


    They looked around and couldn''t see Li Yaoxiang.


    This made everyone feel involuntarily a bad hunch.


    Seeing this situation, the Chief Kuroiwa Iwao and Shinohara Koto, who are undergoing treatment, couldn''t help but nce at each other, and immediately shaking the heads and sighed.


    "Am I guessing wrong?" Shinohara Yukinori was guilty, "Hey ~ I shouldn''t let him stay alone... We old fellows die, so we die. But he still has great future..."


    Kuroiwa Iwao didn''t exin this Old Partner.


    Because he also agreed with Old Partner''s statement.


    They shouldn''t be too greedy, and they shouldn''t let Li Yaoxiang, who is in his prime of life, take risks in order to give CCG an undefeated myth.


    Even if Li Yaoxiang does not have Arima Kishou''s strength.


    His current performance alone is enough to lead the new generation of CCG to continue to move forward...


    If he could use his own life in exchange for Li Yaoxiang''s life... then he would rather sacrifice himself, rather than let Li Yaoxiang go to hell.


    Losing Li Yaoxiang is definitely a huge loss for CCG.


    The atmosphere at the scene was silent.


    No one is talking.


    Everyone''s face is extremely heavy.


    And just when everyone fell into a sad mood, the smoke and dust caused by the copse of the abandoned building began to slowly disperse. Vaguely, a figure can be seen walking slowly out of the smoke.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Huh? What''s wrong with everyone? What happened? Why is everyone''s expression so heavy?"


    At the beginning, everyone still silent in sadness didn''t care much.


    But when Li Yaoxiang''s voice passed into everyone''s ears.


    Everyone, whose face was heavy, turned into joy on the spot.


    "First ss Li Yaoxiang?"


    "First ss Li Yaoxiang!"


    With the call of the first person, everyone''s attention also gradually gathered here.


    Immediately after, a group of people swarmed towards Li Yaoxiang regardless of their injuries.


    "First ss Li Yaoxiang, very good! It turns out you are fine!"


    "Fortunately, you''re okay, or else, how could you tell us to feel good about it?"


    "First ss Li Yaoxiang, thank you, thank you for saving us. If it were not for you, I would have been separated from my family this time."


    Everyone you say a word.


    Li Yaoxiang was overwhelmed.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Stop and stop! Okay, okay! Everyone doesn''t have to be like this. Everyone who is a CCG, everyone is serving the people, these all are what I should do."


    At this time, Kuroiwa Iwao and Shinohara Yukinori also squeezed into the crowd from the periphery.


    Everyone sees theing people as 2 special ss, step aside a road one after another.


    Two people limped and walked to Li Yaoxiang, and they all expressed their admiring eyes: "You''re okay!"


    At the same time.


    The ugly-looking Marude Itsuki also squeezed out of the crowd: "Get out, get out, get out! You stinky boys, get out of the way for me!"


    It was hard to squeeze Marude in front of Li Yaoxiang.


    Fiercely stared at Li Yaoxiang for a while.


    A good atmosphere, made him embarrassed.


    Just when Shinohara Yukinori wanted to make a round for Li Yaoxiang start to talk, Marude Itsuki''s ugly face suddenly turned into a smile, patted Li Yaoxiang''s shoulder, to encourage: "You did good! Thanks to you this time!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "It''s okay, it should be."


    Marude: "What about the one-eyed owl? You are not injured when you fought against the one-eyed owl?"


    Li Yaoxiang first shook his head, indicating that he was not injured, and immediately said with a look of pity: "Let him run away. My Quinque broke. Fortunately, before he left, he left his 2 Ukaku, I can build a new Quinque. Otherwise, this battle is really a heavy loss."


    While talking.


    Li Yaoxiang right hand dragged the two Kagune Ukaku, including the Kakuhou, to the side.


    boom!


    Everyone can see this clearly. It turns out what Li Yaoxiang was dragging is the one-eyed owl, SSS-Rank''s intact Kagune arm + Kakuhou.


    Everyone present couldn''t help but stunned.


    Immediately, they took a breath.


    They looked at Kagune''s arm incredulously.


    Looked at Li Yaoxiang again.


    It seems to be wondering whether the picture in front of me is dreaming.


    Many people can''t help but associate Li Yaoxiang with Arima Kishou, the highest battle strength of CCG, because of the pictures in front of him.


    From this moment, no one will remember thezy ghoul investigator who is famous in the whole CCG.


    They will only remember the undefeated myth of the new generation, Li Yaoxiang.

 Chapter 286: enter the field of vision of bigwigs

    Chapter 286: enter the field of vision of bigwigs


    It was not easy to confirm that the picture in front was the truth.


    Followed by.


    It is all kinds of shocking, unbelievable, surprised, and admiring words thate one after another. People either took a good look at Li Yaoxiang''s spoils of war, or everyone talking at once asked about the situation at that time.


    Even in the distance, the ambnce crew who was helping Amon Koutarou bandaging the wound stopped his hands and feet involuntarily, and waspletely attracted by the scene there.


    When he reacted, this was a little embarrassing, and he repeatedly apologized to Amon Koutarou.


    "Ah, yes... yes... sorry."


    Amon Koutarou: "It''s okay, you don''t have to take seriously."


    Paramedics continued to bandage the wound.


    Amon Koutarou turned his attention to Li Yaoxiang in the distance and watched it silently. Compared with other people''s reactions, Amon Koutarou is much calmer.


    After all, whether he is a special investigator such as the one-eyed owl SSS-Rank, Kuroiwa Iwao and Shinohara Yukinori, or the boss of Li Yaoxiang, the strength of the three, he has seen it.


    He was not surprised that Li Yaoxiang, his boss, could beat SSS-Rank.


    However, because of the pictures in front of him and Li Yaoxiang''s previous performances, this made him more convinced of Li Yaoxiang''s ability.


    At this time, he was full of various remarks by Kaneki Ken and Li Yaoxiang.


    Since the "One Eye Mask" wants to coexist peacefully with human beings, Li Yaoxiang also supports the peaceful coexistence with human beings. Is there a probability of cooperation between the two parties?


    If we cooperate, can we greatly reduce unnecessary sacrifices?


    Amon Koutarou''s mood is veryplicated.


    He hopes that both parties will have a perfect ending, but he is worried that if things are not reported, it will cause the situation to be more serious and unstoppable.


    Think again and again.


    He finally decided to report the matter to Li Yaoxiang.


    It is up to Li Yaoxiang to decide whether to report to the head office.


    After all, after observing this period of time, he thought from the bottom of his heart that Li Yaoxiang truly served the people, and felt that Li Yaoxiang''s dedication to the life of colleagues was no less than him.


    That being the case.


    Everyone agrees.


    Plus Li Yaoxiang''s ability.


    Then... it''s better to let Li Yaoxiang decide whether to report to the head office. After all,pared with himself, Amon Koutarou thinks that Li Yaoxiang will definitely have a better opinion after learning about the "one-eye mask problem".


    Think about this.


    Amon Koutarou''s mood rxed a lot.


    Quickly.


    The wound is bandaged.


    Amon Koutarou didn''t immediately set off to find Li Yaoxiang and discussed with Li Yaoxiang. Instead, he waited until the big army started withdrawing the scene, and the crowd stopped revolving around Li Yaoxiang. He came to Li Yaoxiang and said seriously, "Li Yaoxiang, can I talk to you alone?"


    Not even Amon Koutarou himself found out.


    Today, when he is facing Li Yaoxiang, subconscious uses honorific words.


    Li Yaoxiang did not refuse.


    Followed by.


    Two people came to a more secluded ce.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Speak, what is it?"


    Amon Koutarou said again and again: "Senior Investigator Li Yaoxiang, there are some things, I don''t know if I should say...


    Li Yaoxiang: "Then don''t say it."


    "Cough cough cough!" Amon Koutarou coughed awkwardly.


    Immediately, regardless of the actual situation, all the questions rted to Kaneki Ken were mentioned in one brain.


    "First ss Li Yaoxiang, what do you think of this matter? What do you think the one-eye mask said, true or false? Is he really human? Is CCG really doing this kind of research? Also, shall we report on the fact that they created a brand new Quinque thing?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Nothing is impossible. The General Administration has been conducting various researches on these ghouls, which is something everyone knows. Perhaps it is to make full use of the capabilities of these ghouls to enhance the strength of the ghoul investigators... It is not surprising that there will be such experiments. I don''t think he needs to lie to you."


    Amon Koutarou''s fist clenched.


    Very angry.


    But he also knows that this is not what he or Li Yaoxiang can do today.


    He didn''t mean to vent in front of Li Yaoxiang.


    Amon Koutarou: "Then what he said? Do you think it is feasible?"


    Li Yaoxiang nodded and said: "If there''s such amon enemy with human beings, it is indeed the most convenient way to resolve the hatred of both parties."


    Amon Koutarou: "Then we"


    Li Yaoxiang said with a smile: "What''s the matter? You told me this, just want to know if there is any cooperation between us?"


    Amon Koutarou was embarrassed for a while.


    Hesitated slightly.


    In the end it is still nod.


    Li Yaoxiang patted his shoulder: "Don''t think about it so much. The conditions are met. When it''s time to cooperate, we will naturally cooperate. As for now, it is enough for us to do our part. You should kill. What we should catch, we still have to catch it."


    Amon Koutarou: "Then about the new Quinque"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Since he doesn''t mean to harm human beings, and you expect his n to seed, let''s help him hide this matter for the time being, and what difficulty is there? Anyway, things are not as serious as you think. If Quinque really wants to poprize on the other side, when the timees, naturally we have corresponding countermeasures. Don''t think of humans as too fragile."


    Amon Koutarou stopped for a while.


    I didn''t expect it to be such aplicated issue for me. In front of Li Yaoxiang, it was such an understatement.


    However, anyway.


    He decided.


    From now on, he must pay close attention to the various trends of this matter, and must stop the situation in time before it gets out of control again.


    Li Yaoxiang again patted Amon Koutarou on the shoulder, showing encouragement.


    Then he turned and left and got on thest truck that was about to leave.


    Seeing that, Amon Koutarou also quickly followed along.


    ...


    At the same time.


    During the time when CCG and others were evacuating, Kaneki Ken was also on his way to join Kirishima Touka and the others.


    It''s just that they didn''t wait for him to arrive at the meeting ce.


    He first encountered an unexpected guest.


    The man is short.


    The whole body is like a mummy up and down, wrapped in bandages.


    This person is Takatsuki Sen who appears as "Eto" of the Aogiri tree. In addition to being a daughter of Yoshimura, Yoshimura Eto is also the current leader of Aogiri Tree.


    Have multiple identities.


    In original work, after Kaneki Ken showed strength, he sessfully aroused her interest, so she invited Kaneki Ken to join Aogiri Tree.


    And now it is exactly simr to original work.


    Kaneki Ken, after showing a strong strength, began to enter the field of vision of bigwigs from all walks of life.


    No longer a dispensable abandoned child.

 Chapter 287: target

    Chapter 287: target


    "La~ La~ La~ La~~~~"


    Yoshimura Eto hummed a little song, shaking his legs, sitting on a wall not far from Kaneki Ken.


    Kaneki Ken, who was already rxed, was suddenly vignt. Even the thumb has been put on the ''switch'' of the suitcase, ready to adapt.


    In front of him, this person could be so close to him without him being aware, which made him have to be treated with caution.


    Kaneki Ken looked solemn: "Who are you?"


    Yoshimura Eto: "I am a member of the Aogiri Tree. You can call me Eto."


    Kaneki Ken said seriously: "So... you are here to catch me?"


    Yoshimura Eto: "Nana ~ I''m here to invite you to join the Aogiri Tree ~"


    Kaneki Ken sneered: "Oh, do you think this is possible? I have a different idea from you. It is impossible for me to join the Aogiri Tree. If this is the purpose of youring here, then you can leave now."


    For the deeds of Aogiri Tree.


    Kaneki Ken also got a rough idea from Kirishima''s mouth.


    After hearing this, Yoshimura Eto became interested on the spot.


    Leaping down from the wall, he continued to approach Kaneki Ken.


    Completely ignoring Kaneki Ken''s appearance with swords drawn and bows bent: "Oh? Then you talk about it, what is the difference between your philosophy and the Aogiri tree?"


    "Stop it! If you don''t stop, don''t me me for being rude to you!" Yoshimura Eto gave Kaneki Ken a very dangerous feeling. Since he was trained by Li Yaoxiang.


    It has been a long time since he felt the danger.


    He didn''t dare to let Yoshimura Eto approach him rashly.


    Yoshimura Eto shrugged.


    Indifferently jumped up to the wall and sat down.


    While shaking her legs, she waited expectantly for Kaneki Ken''s reply.


    Kaneki Ken: "You know Aogiri tree yourself! No matter what my belief is, I will never hunt and kill humans like you."


    Yoshimura Eto froze.


    He thenughed from covering his mouth and turning into a big belly.


    "Hehe hehe..."


    "Hahahahahaha--"


    "It seems that you still consider yourself a human?"


    "Imagine that humanity will ept you again?"


    Kaneki Kenplexion sank, said with clenched teeth: "What the hell do you know..."


    Yoshimura Eto stopped theughter and wiped tears from the corners of his eyes: "I know more than you think. How is it? Are you interested in joining the Aogiri Tree? As long as you join the Aogiri Tree, I''ll tell you everything you want to know."


    Kaneki Ken was silent for a moment.


    Consider again and again.


    In the end, he chose to reject the temptation of Yoshimura Eto.


    After all, in his life, he owns the ''golden finger'', Li Yaoxiang. Even without Yoshimura Eto''s notification, he did not believe that he could not find out the truth.


    "Then forget it. You should leave, I won''t join you."


    The voice just fell.


    Yoshimura Eto instantly disappeared in the field of view of Kaneki Ken.


    She appeared behind Kaneki Ken.


    She just wanted to take a picture of Kaneki Ken''s shoulder, scare Kaneki Ken, and make fun of him.


    She didn''t think that although Kaneki Ken''s naked eye can''t catch the action of Yoshimura Eto, Kaneki Ken who has been exercising for a long time in martial arts can instantly respond instinctively to his body.


    Before Yoshimura Eto''s palm fell.


    Kaneki Ken took the lead away from the original ce.


    Escaped this ''shoot'' of Yoshimura Eto.


    ''Click!'' A crunch.


    When facing Yoshimura Eto again, Kaneki Ken had pulled away for a long distance, pressed the switch, the suitcase turned into Quinque, and looked at her coldly.


    Seeing Yoshimura Eto was slightly surprised.


    She didn''t expect Kaneki Ken has made such great progress in a short time after bing a ghoul.


    This made him more interested in Kaneki Ken.


    After all, she and Arima Kishou are actually a group.


    These two generations of "imperfect" one-eyed kings have only one purpose from beginning to end, that is, which was to find the strongest ghoul who could defeat Arima Kishou and change the world.


    It is clear.


    The potential shown by Kaneki Ken has sessfully attracted the interest of Yoshimura Eto.


    There is a tendency to want to directly target Kaneki Ken for training.


    "Don''t be so nervous ~"


    "I''m just kidding you."


    "It seems that you have a deep misunderstanding about Aogiri Tree ~"


    Kaneki Ken: "I have nothing to say to you. Please leave and disappear in my sight."


    Kaneki Ken did not dare to leave at will, worrying that he would really start a war, fearing that she would be involved in Kirishima Touka.


    Don''t dare to do it at will.


    He is not sure whether he is the opponent of the person in front of him.


    Yoshimura Eto ignored him and continued minding her own business and said, "The purpose of the Aogiri Tree is to lead the ghoul and create a world suitable for the survival of the ghoul. What you said different is actually wrong. You want to reintegrate into human life and let humans ept you again. But is this not a world suitable for survival? So what you disagree with is just the way the organization works. But This so-called way of doing things is not irreversible, is it? In this world, the strong are respected after all, as long as your strength can be recognized by everyone in the organization... We don''t mind taking you as the new leader. When the timees, the organization''s way of doing things is not up to you? And,pared to you now, nning from scratch... Is there any way to get more convenient than getting the help of the entire organization? This will only make it easier to achieve your ideals?"


    Kaneki Ken kept silent.


    I don''t know how long it took, he just sighed: "Why do you insist on me joining the Aogiri Tree? What is the benefit for you?"


    Yoshimura Eto said with a smile: "Benefits? The benefits are of course one more person and one more opportunity. If you have the means and the ability to enable everyone to achieve their goals faster, it is not just me, I believe anyone in the organization all will be very happy to see this scene."


    Thinking for a long time.


    Kaneki Ken felt that what Yoshimura Eto said was reasonable.


    After experiencing this incident, he did feel the power of CCG.


    It is indeed not a problem that the individual force can solve.


    His current influence alone are indeed not enough to counter the entire CCG, nor the Aogiri tree.


    Kaneki Ken: "I can join you... but I have one condition..."


    Yoshimura Eto squinted and smiled.


    "You can''t force me to do anything I don''t want to do, otherwise, no matter how difficult it is, I will never join you."


    Yoshimura Eto was slightly surprised.


    Immediately y the taste: "Don''t worry about joining the organization. It''s better that you tell me first, what n do you have? Maybe... After listening to your n and I think your n is feasible, and you can overthrow the entire organization. Maybe, it''s possible?"

 Chapter 288: Awareness, confession

    Chapter 288: Awareness, confession


    Kaneki Ken taunted: "Why haven''t you told me the n of Aogiri Tree? Why are you looking for Rize-san? Why did you try to catch me?"


    Yoshimura Eto responded very simply: "The Aogiri tree n is very simple? As you can see, it is to use military force to suppress humanity and overthrow the entire world. We haven''t quite achieved our goals yet, but at least in the areas we control, ghouls don''t need to live furtively anymore, do they? This is another way of implementing our ideals. Of course, we can only realize our ideals to a small extent at present. As for... Why are you looking for you and the Kamishiro Rize... Of course it has something to do with the life of Kamishiro Rize, and the thing that caused you to be a kind of ghoul. After you tell me your n, it will not be toote for us to talk about it..."


    Hear about this matter of turning into a ghoul.


    Kaneki Ken''s face was difficult to look again.


    Although today, he has gradually epted the identity of "nature", but facing the reality, epting the identity of the origin, does not mean that he can ept others as an experiment.


    Vengeance must be avenged.


    To him, this was like a thorn in his heart.


    Not unplugged, not happy.


    He asked in his mind: "What is the strength of this person? You often say that my current strength is not enough to revenge. If I reach the strength of this person in front of me, am I eligible for revenge?"


    Li Yaoxiang agrees: "It''s almost the same. Now yourbat skills are actually no worse than the person in front of you. But she has too many RC cells than you. This will lead to your speed, strength, endurance, and the quality of Kagune are all inferior to her. There is still a gap with her."


    There is a clear answer.


    Kaneki Ken no longer asked.


    Instead, his thoughts returned to reality and faced Yoshimura Eto''s problem.


    "My n, first of all, must be strong enough. Strong enough to be eligible topete with CCG. Then it is to create a powerful enemy with my own hands. An enemy so powerful that humans and ghouls have to cooperate to resist."


    Kaneki Ken is simple and straightforward.


    There is no meaning of turning around.


    Yoshimura Eto was surprised after hearing this.


    Unexpectedly, this human boy in front of him seems to be gentle, but the n he has conceived is even crazier than her, the two generations of "One-Eyed King", and Arima Kishou.


    Really want to create such an enemy.


    In the days toe, how many people are going to die?


    However, because of Kaneki Ken''s crazy and very ruthless, Yoshimura Eto is more satisfied with Kaneki Ken''s ''king'' candidate. She froze for a moment, then teased with a smile: "Aren''t you unwilling to kill humans? Really such a powerful enemy will appear... There will be more sacrificed lives? Are you patient enough?"


    Just a few words.


    In a short time, Yoshimura Eto had a general understanding of the n.


    If you want to use this n to create a world that is suitable for survival, it is not impossible...


    But if you want to seed, it means that this so-called ''enemy'' must exist for a long time. Otherwise, the enemy is resolved too quickly. Humans have not been ustomed to living with other ghouls, and have not learned a lesson. Won''t the situation that was finally created back to its original shape?


    Humans are fickle


    As an author, she lives in the human world, but she knows this very well.


    So there was also an interest. She wanted to probe Kaneki Ken to see if he had the consciousness.


    Kaneki Ken said with a smile: "Of course, so I don''t even need me to ''protect'' them with the ghoul and the human side? As for those who do not want topromise... or the ghoul, they die. Anyway, I''ve tried my best to do it, right? They don''t want to ept ''protection'', so they can''t me me?"


    [Darkening level:]


    66%


    68%


    70%


    Yoshimura Eto was shocked again.


    Then she couldn''t helpughing.


    Interesting, it is so interesting!


    Kaneki Ken''s performance, the more she looked, the more pleasing and satisfied! Without this potential and this determination, what is the qualification to be a "king" and lead the ghoul together to change this world?


    Yoshimura Eto burst into tears withughter, and said, "Hehe hehe, hahahahahaha-~ then you have to join us even more. Because the next action of our Aogiri Tree, more or less, follow your n."


    Two silhouettes appeared again not far away.


    They are Tatara and Noro.


    Tatara said expressionlessly: "He doesn''t want to join, then kill him, why would he talk so much nonsense? Don''t forget that we have something to do."


    Noro was standing there as always, motionless, not speaking.


    Yoshimura Eto jokingly said: "Don''t say that ~ Tatara. Don''t you think that there will be another voice in the organization, will things be more interesting? And, Kaneki''s n does not conflict with us, does it? If we really want to seed, it is also a good thing for us."


    Tatara: "Really? I don''t think that the group of investigators is necessary. Using force to suppress humans can also achieve the same effect. Why is it so troublesome?"


    Compared with other people, Tatara undoubtedly hates the ghoul investigators more.


    After all, his big brother was besieged by dozens of ghoul investigators.


    He still broods over this matter to this day.


    In the face of the ghoul investigator, never keep his hand.


    Kaneki Ken just rxed and was alert again. He stared deadly at the three people. Tatara and Noro also gave him a very dangerous feeling.


    He felt that the RC cells in the two bodies were also more and more active than his own.


    He didn''t understand whether this was what made him feel threatened.


    But he can be sure.


    That''s what Li Yaoxiang said is true!


    Li Yaoxiang was right to let him act carefully.


    Can''t underestimate the world.


    Unexpectedly, just a ghoul organization has appeared one after another that can threaten his existence. What''s more, there are more forces in this world that haven''t surfaced yet?


    Seeing Kaneki Ken''s dignified look, Yoshimura Eto once again jokingly said: "Hehe, Kaneki, don''t worry about him. You just treat him as if he is cracking a joke. Closer to home. Our next action happens to have a little connection with your n. Don''t you wonder why we are looking for Kamishiro Rize, or someone with the same smell as Kamishiro Rize? Akihiro Kanou, this name, I believe you haven''t forgot? That''s because we found that Akihiro Kanou was using the RC cells of Kamishiro Rize, trying to transform arge number of humans into ghouls. Whatever the purpose of Akihiro Kanou. But we feel that the experiments he is doing may be able to elerate the realization of our ideals, so we need to find him. And don''t you also want to create a powerful enemy? Maybe this Akihiro Kanou... can also help you realize your n?"

 Chapter 289: see who has the last laugh

    Chapter 289: see who has thestugh


    Hear the words of Akihiro Kanou.


    Kaneki Ken''s face turned ck again: "What do you mean?"


    Yoshimura Eto: "There is a legend in the world of ghouls. ording to legend, the RC cells of a certain n are different. As long as the members of the n engulf arge number of RC cells of the same type, then one has a chance to summon the legendary dragon."


    Kaneki Ken: "summon a dragon?"


    Yoshimura Eto nod: "Well, whether it is a summon... or other methods, there is no way to study it. But if you study carefully, you can find that there has indeed been a devastating disaster in the history of mankind. And this disaster happens to be rted to the dragon."


    Kaneki Ken: "You mean... if I want to build a powerful enemy, maybe I can start from this aspect? But what does this have to do with Akihiro Kanou, why do you think he can help me?"


    Yoshimura Eto said with a smile: "It''s very simple ~ because Kamishiro Rize is the member of the n!"


    This is the case.


    No need to say Yoshimura Eto.


    Kaneki Ken suddenly thought of various pictures and various probabilities.


    What is the purpose behind Akihiro Kanou?


    Was it just right for them to murder Kamishiro Rize, or was it premeditated? Did she run away from her bloodline? Had she listened to this legend and wanted to summon the legendary dragon?


    Have I been included as a target of engulfment?


    Thinking about it, he couldn''t help but ask in his head: "You told me that so-called vortex... is this thing?"


    Li Yaoxiang once told him that he has fallen into a vortex since he became a ghoul. Some things are inevitable. However, Li Yaoxiang at the time did not tell him the truth. He was worried that he was too weak and knew the truth too early, but he would fall into despair, so he let him dig slowly.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Yes."


    Kaneki Ken: "Then you suggested that I create a powerful enemy, is this so-called "dragon"?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Yes."


    Kaneki Ken: "Damn it! What the hell is going on? What is the so-called "dragon"? Are they serving the same purpose as me? Am I the victim here?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "As long as arge number of simr RC cells are engulfed, the phagocytosis will eventually turn into an unconscious monster. A monster that isrger than a tall building. The so-called ''dragon'' is just a beautification of its name. Before, you were indeed treated as a victim. But... After showing strength, you may change their minds. From a victim to a devourer."


    Kaneki Ken''s tone endless anger: "In other words, has my fate been regarded as a private property by them? The n isunched, and I only have two fates, whether to die or be a monster?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "It''s a pity, but this is indeed the case. After all, to create this dragon, an excellent container is an essential part. Your potential and your value will naturallye into their eyes."


    Kaneki Ken was sneaked: "Oh, so you let this happen to me? As long as I be an indelible monster, you can live in this world forever?"


    Kaneki Ken after Darkening.


    Thinking things tooplicated.


    Naturally, he thinks about crafty plots and machinations.


    Li Yaoxiang''s voice sounded sad: "Hey, where did you think of that? How can I hurt you? Of course, it is undeniable that your suggestion is a good thing for me. But from what point do you see the idea that I''m harmful to you? I let you be stronger, isn''t it just to get rid of this destiny? Who said it must be you to be a monster? As long as the strength is strong enough, the chess piece may not be able to jump out of the frame and be a chess yer, right? When the timees, it will be up to you and the mastermind behind the scenes, who has the upper hand in chess, isn''t it? Of course-! If you can''t bear to see someone sacrifice, you can''t bear to see someone be a monster, and you n to sacrifice yourself to help others, then you have the right to think I''m talking nonsense. I don''t mind being the ''eternal existence'' you said in your mouth."


    Kaneki Ken snereed.


    Did not speak again.


    Oh, will he not bear it?


    He now wants to kill these secret masterminds!


    How can a human who is ustomed to freedom suffer from being so framed and so designed? If you turn me into a ghoul, you still need to treat me as a victim and nurture me into monster nutrients?


    If someone is able to face this matter calmly, then he is not a mortal, but a saint.


    [Darkening level:]


    71%


    72%


    In reality, Kaneki Ken''s expression changed from doubt to resentment, and then from resentment to very ruthless.


    There is a decision in mind now! Instead of waiting for others to turn yourself into a monster, it''s better to do it first! Then... let''s see who can have thestugh!


    His expression, Yoshimura Eto and Tatara also looked in his eyes.


    They didn''t mean to rush.


    So silently waiting for Kaneki Ken''s reply.


    I don''t know how long after that, Kaneki Ken finally moved, and his eyes no longer hesitated: "I agree to join you."


    Tatara: "Slow down. Join you say? Since you don''t n to cooperate with our actions, what use do you have for the organization?"


    Kaneki Ken''s cold eyes looked towards Tatara.


    The people in front of him did make him feel threatened, but that didn''t mean he couldn''tpete at all. Some things, you have to fight to know. He is confident that even if he loses, it is no problem to return the whole body.


    As long as you act ruthless enough.


    The other side also needs to weigh, and it''s not worth the effort to deal with the people around you.


    After all, who doesn''t have a few people around?


    Even if there is no one around you, then I will kill all the members of Aogiri Tree, you will not be wrong with me? I don''t believe you can be by their side for 24 hours.


    Kaneki Ken: "Just tell me your actions. If I am willing, I will naturally cooperate with you. If I am not willing, no one can force me."


    The two looked at each other coldly.


    neither giving way to the other.


    Tatara: "Do you really think that no one can get you?"


    Kaneki Ken: "You can try"


    The two sides were at each other''s throats.


    Blood energy began to permeate behind him, and there was a faint trend of condensing Kagune.


    Yoshimura Eto, who saw this, jumped out at this moment, grinning, and calmly made a rounder: "Hahahaha~ That''s great~ Kaneki, it would be great if you could join us! Next we are going to attack CCG''s ghoul jail. We are to release all the jailed ghouls. To rescue someone you will also be interested in."


    Kaneki Ken: "Oh? Who is it?"


    Yoshimura Eto: "Father of Kamishiro Rize, Kamishiro Matasaka."

 Chapter 290: Hard-mouthed and soft-hearted

    Chapter 290: Hard-mouthed and soft-hearted


    Kaneki Ken: "Kamishiro Matasaka?"


    Yoshimura Eto: "Yes, through Kamishiro Matasaka, maybe we can get more information about Kamishiro Rize, or Dr. Kanou. After all, he is more sensitive to the smell of Kamishiro Rize, and he should be able to find some traces."


    Finally have the opportunity to participate in this game.


    Kaneki Ken did not dy, and readily agreed: "OK, then let''s go. But before I leave with you, I need to go talk to my partners."


    Yoshimura Eto: "Yes, I''ll wait for you at the gathering ce."


    Finished speaking.


    Kaneki Ken continued in the direction of Kirishima Touka and the others.


    Yoshimura Eto, Tatara, and Noro watched silently Kaneki Ken''s leaving.


    After the silhouette of Kaneki Kenpletely disappeared in the field of view, Tatara coldly said: "Why are you determined to let him join us? Do you want to change the n?"


    Yoshimura Eto: "No no no, isn''t the original intention of our organization to gather the power of all the ghouls? Although he does not agree with our n, as long as he is in the organization, at least he will not cause trouble, right?"


    Tatara: "Trouble? He dare to make trouble, just kill him directly, why bother? I can tell you, I will not agree with his n. The ghoul investigators couldn''t possibly cooperate with ghouls. Even cooperation is only temporary. When things are over, they will go back on their word. I don''t want to ruin the great situation we have now created because of his fantasy. If it reallyes to a critical moment, even if youe forward to stop it, I will kill him."


    Yoshimura Eto didn''t care: "Oh ~, no problem. Being able to be easily killed by you, it also proves that he is far as I''m concerned and has no value. Find Dr. Kanou and train the brand-new Kaneki Ken. That''s it."


    ...


    At the same time.


    The gathering ce of Kirishima Touka and the others.


    "What?!"


    "You want to join Aogiri Tree? What the hell is going on?"


    The biggest reaction is Banjou Kazuichi.


    He managed to break free from Aogiri tree. Didn''t expect Kaneki Ken, the new boss, a gorgeous turn, which brought him such a shocking news.


    It felt like Kaneki Ken finally pulled him up from the cliff.


    He suddenly remembered that there was something to do. Push him back and let him stay for a while.


    Very speechless.


    Kaneki Ken: "Things are not asplicated as you think, and the situation will not be as you did before. I have negotiated with them. They will not force us to do what we are not willing to do."


    Banjou Kazuichi: "But... but..."


    Banjou Kazuichi wanted to refute, but didn''t understand what to say.


    After all, the oath of allegiance back then was made willingly by him and his followers.


    Does he have to take it back?


    How can this be!


    If you really regret it, how will your brothers see you in the future? It is impossible to go back and regret, he is not such a person.


    Since there is no remorse.


    If he can''t persuade him, then he can only follow this new boss, all the way to the end.


    Whether it is good or bad, depends on the arrangement of heaven.


    He also stopped discouraging and kept silent.


    Touka who was on the side, looked at Kaneki Ken with aplicated expression from beginning to end. She didn''t know what he was thinking and did not discourage him, but she could only know by her own facial expression that she too didn''t agree with Kaneki Ken to join Aogiri.


    Seeing Kirishima Ayato, said to Kaneki Ken coldly: "You,e with me!"


    Kaneki Ken did not refuse.


    Two people walked into the distance.


    Seeing that the distance was almost there, Kirishima Ayato suddenly grabbed Kaneki Ken''s cor: "What did you tell me?! Didn''t you keep saying that you want humans and ghouls to live in peace? Now you turn around and join Aogiri? What does this mean? Are you ready to give up your n? I betray the organization to support you, you just y me?! I warn you, please don''t involve my sister, otherwise I will never end with you!"


    Kaneki Ken pressed down Kirishima''s hand.


    Kirishima Ayato is less powerful than Kaneki Ken.


    Grabbing the hand on his cor, he was pressed back by forcibly.


    There was nothing imposing-manner on the spot.


    Kaneki Ken: "When did I say I would give up the n? I joined them only to use their power to elerate the progress of my n. It''s really time toe to the crucial moment, if they dare to stop, I will still kill them! As for your sister Rest assured, I did not intend to involve her in this matter. Your strength is not enough. The next n is too dangerous for you. You don''t have to worry about the organization going to trouble you or your sister. For my face, they shouldn''t have pursued your behavior this time. I really want to investigate, then I will join you back and forth together, rest assured."


    Kirishima Ayato once again grabbed Kaneki Ken''s cor: "What do you mean? I''m not strong enough? You really thought that you defeated Yamori then you''re invincible in the whole world? I tell you, Yamori as far as I''m concerned, just stronger ants! I can beat him as well! Don''t be too arrogant!"


    ''boom!'' a loud noise.


    Kaneki Ken kicked to Kirishima''s abdomen.


    Kirishima Ayato flew out like a shrimp.


    After falling to the ground, he covered his stomach and even spit out jaundice.


    "Cough! Cough! Cough! Cough!"


    Kaneki Ken walked in front of him: "I think for your sister''s sake, I have tolerated you again and again. Don''t piss me off. You can''t even stand me. How can you get involved? To die? It doesn''t matter if you die, I just don''t want Touka to be sad because of you."


    At this time, Kirishima Touka came over and said: "What are you two talking about? Can''t you have a good chat? Why do you have to move your hands? You naughty brat!"


    Kirishima Ayato stares fiercely fiercely at Kirishima Touka.


    Said nothing.


    Get up directly, turn around and leave.


    Kirishima Touka wanted to stay with him, but the brother and sister were all proud people, they couldn''t say anything. So in the end she could only watch her brother leave here.


    She turned her head towards Kaneki Ken: "What''s the matter with you two?"


    Kaneki Ken: "It''s nothing. I told him not to go back to Aogiri Tree. He was not convinced. So I gave him a foot to let him understand the reality."


    Kirishima Touka was silent.


    The expression looked a bit lost.


    Kaneki Ken continued: "Don''t take part in the next n. You take Mr. Banjou and the others back to the base and help me protect the base. That''s our home, if something really happens, at least Is there a way out?"


    Kirishima Touka understands the meaning of Kaneki Ken.


    Knowing that Kaneki Ken is worried about her safety.


    Although she didn''t want to, she nodded to bear it.


    She didn''t want to be Kaneki Ken''s burden.


    In the next time, she can only exercise well and strengthen her strength. She hopes to help at the crucial moment.


    After making a decision, the next thing is Kirishima Touka leading Banjou Kazuichi entire group and going back to the base. Kaneki Ken went to meet Eto and the others, and began to implement their n to invade the ''ghoul detention center''...

 Chapter 291: Special Class Promotion

    Chapter 291: Special ss Promotion


    Kaneki Ken following Yoshimura Eto and the others in the process of preparing to attack the ''ghoul detention center''.


    At the same time.


    CCG has also made new changes here.


    Because Li Yaoxiang had an outstanding performance in the previous action, Kuroiwa Iwao, Shinohara Yukinori, Marude praised him, and highly rmended him, so he jumped 2 levels and was promoted to Special ss Investigator.


    Amon Koutarou was promoted to the First ss Investigator, still under the direct control of Li Yaoxiang, and at the same time, as the original work, became the leader of Mado Akira and Takizawa Seidou.


    It was the day when CCG ended the Aogiri Tree crusade and opened the first Special ss Investigator meeting. It is also the day when Li Yaoxiang went to the General Administration for the first time to participate in this meeting.


    Before the meeting officially started.


    Everyone chatted in the conference room with the topic of Li Yaoxiang being a new puter.


    "Hahahaha, Special ss Li Yaoxiang, how about it? Just upgraded to Special ss, are you still used to it?"


    "Hey, BOY ~ you are Li Yaoxiang? I have heard of your deeds and you surprised me."


    "Hahaha! Don''t be too enthusiastic, be careful to scare people away."


    Li Yaoxiang entertained them one sentence at a time.


    Chatting and chatting.


    They talked about Arima Kishou.


    "Eh, yes. Arima? Waiting for Arima? Again? He''s too arrogant, right? He takes up a bit of his own strength and doesn''t take everyone seriously?"


    In original work, Arima Kishou will not at all participate in this meeting.


    However, now there have been changes.


    As soon as this person finished talking about the right and wrong of Arima Kishou, the door of Conference Hall was opened with a click. Theer is the supercilious Arima Kishou who he said in his mouth.


    Arima will appear expressionlessly in everyone''s field of view.


    The atmosphere at the scene was suddenly awkward.


    He looked around the scene for a week.


    His eyes finally fell on Li Yaoxiang.


    Walk up to Li Yaoxiang.


    He extended his palm and said, "Hello, my name is Arima Kishou. You are Li Yaoxiang, correct? I have heard of your deeds. I hope that after the meeting, you can stay andmunicate with me."


    Everyone''s reaction was stunned.


    Then there were murmurs.


    Everyone knows very well that this Arima Kishou will always be proud and never take the initiative to talk to others. Today, it''s really hell. Didn''t expect he will make an exception and be interested in Li Yaoxiang.


    Everyone does not know why.


    Li Yaoxiang guessed a 2 roughly.


    Yoshimura and him are both in V organization. Everyone is still more or less in touch. Perhaps I heard from Yoshimura''s remarks about ''get along peacefully with humanity'', so there was no such person in this meeting in the original work, but you suddenly appeared here and wanted to probe Li Yaoxiang.


    V (V) or Vasuki (Vasukei) was a secret organization that operates in the shadows and fulfills an agenda of maintaining a "bnce" of the human and ghoul societies. Their efforts to maintain this ostensible "equilibrium" have been failing because of the ghoul terrorist organization, Aogiri Tree, and its leader, the One-Eyed Owl. The cabal is aiming to eliminate this faction because of the danger to its policy.


    Compared to other people.


    Li Yaoxiang''s reaction was rtively calm.


    He politely extended the hand, shook hands with Arima Kishou and replied: "No problem, please advise me."


    Finished.


    Arima Kishou returned to his seat and sat quietly.


    Also because of his arrival, the atmosphere in the Conference Hall was not as kind and lively as it was just now.


    No one knows what to say.


    Quickly.


    The door sounded again.


    Click.


    Chief-In-Charge of this meeting, CCG''s general director, Washuu Tsuneyoshi have finally arrived here.


    Everyone stood up and gave him a salute.


    He nods the salute, beckoning everyone to sit down.


    Immediately, this special meeting officially began.


    The discussions were all about the Aogiri tree and the one-eyed owl. He stated that CCG''s next goal is to destroy the Aogiri tree and the one-eyed owl with all their strength, and imed that the one-eyed owl is the leader of the Aogiri tree.


    However, either Arima Kishou or Li Yaoxiang knew that it was just an excuse for them and the Washuu family to eliminate the hostile influence and kill Yoshimura, an obstacle.


    So he always made excuses to point the finger at the 20th Ward.


    Washuu Tsuneyoshi: "Li Yaoxiang, wait, you have worked in 20th Ward for many years. You are most familiar with 20th Ward. Have you found anything suspicious?"


    Li Yaoxiang smiled shaking ones head: "20th Ward is rtively stablepared to other regions. As long as there is a ghoul crime, it will be cleared quickly. Even the ''big ghoul'' that was active in the 20th Ward a while ago has not appeared again. A very calm ce there. If the leader of the Aogiri Tree is in 20th Ward, and 20th Ward is still so stable, isn''t that too ridiculous? Wouldn''t it be the 20th Ward that peaceful because of the presence of ''him'', so it''s safe?"


    Arima Kishou stares at Li Yaoxiang.


    Washuu Tsuneyoshi was silent for a moment, and continued: "There are signs that the matter has a certain connection with the 20th Ward, which is still a bit of a concern. So, go back and investigate yourself to see if there is any problem."


    Li Yaoxiang nods: "Yes, no problem."


    Soon, the meeting ended.


    Washuu Tsuneyoshi left here directly.


    Arima Kishou came to Li Yaoxiang again: "Li Yaoxiang, wait, do you have time? Can you go to a ce with me to sit down and have a good chat? I have something to ask you."


    Li Yaoxiang agreed: "I need to tell Amon what to do. Tell me the location, and I wille and find youter."


    Arima tell the location and turn around to leave.


    Li Yaoxiang found Amon Koutarou.


    However, before waiting for his speech, Amon Koutarou appeared anxious, and first asked: "Special ss Li Yaoxiang, I heard that some people in the General Administration are beginning to doubt the 20th Ward, will this be a problem?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Oh? Your''re very well informed?"


    Amon Koutarou shaking ones head smiled bitterly and said why he had heard the news.


    It turned out that before the opening of the special meeting, a high level came to ask him for relevant information.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Did you say nothing?"


    Amon Koutarou: "No, I didn''t say anything about the coffee shop. But if the General Administration has to investigate, will there be problems in the 20th?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Rx, the person in charge of the investigation is me. Even if there is a problem, it will not appear so quickly."


    Amon Koutarou: "But... but if someone finds you intending to hide, then you..."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Things are not as simple as you think. You don''t have to deal with this matter. Compared to this matter, I have something else to entrust you to do for me."


    Amon Koutarou: "What?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "I need you to go to the ''ghoul detention center''. I know your rtionship with the priest. I need you to ask me questions about the V organization."


    Amon Koutarou: ""


    Li Yaoxiang: "What''s the matter, still resentful of the events of the year?"


    Amon Koutarou denies: "No, no. This V organization is..."


    Li Yaoxiang: "It''s just guesses. It''s hard to say right now. The specific situation will be discussedter when you ask for the news."


    Donato Porpora (Donto Porupora) was a Russian ghoul and a former prisoner who had special treatment, in the 23rd ward''s ghoul detention center, Cochlea, before being freed during the Third Cochlea Raid. In the past, he ran a Catholic orphanage and preyed upon the children under his care, earning the nickname Priest (Shinpu). And during that time, he was Koutarou Amon''s foster father.

 Chapter 292: The confrontation of the highest power

    Chapter 292: The confrontation of the highest power


    Of course, Li Yaoxiang''s purpose is not as simple as it appears on the surface.


    Everything he does today is to elerate the Darkening progress of Kaneki Ken, and to do his best to leave behind his own legend before leaving this world, so that he can truly "visited here"


    In original work.


    The reason why Kaneki Ken was able to fulfill his wish finally led the ghoul to live side by side with humanity. It can be said that bing Sasaki Haise in CCG is an indispensable experience.


    If it weren''t for his close rtionship with his colleagues in CCG, everyone would really understand that the original ghouls were not all cruel and ruthless, and things would not have gone so smoothly in theter stage.


    Those investigators who have always hated ghouls are not shaken.


    But what Li Yaoxiang is doing now is to help Kaneki to study the process of bing a ghoul investigator, and to personally achieve the effect like in original work.


    V organization is just an excuse for him. Encouraging Amon Koutarou to meet Kaneki Ken again is the picture he wants to see.


    After a while.


    Following the instructions of Li Yaoxiang, Amon Koutarou led Mado Akira to the ghoul detention center.


    Li Yaoxiang turned to the ce he had agreed with Arima.


    That is a training room in CCG.


    Four iron walls.


    The room was empty, and was usually used by ghoul investigators to exercise Quinque''s skills.


    As soon as I entered the training room, he saw that Arima Kishou carrying two suitcases and waiting here for a long time. He tossed one of the suitcases to Li Yaoxiang and said, "This is Arata you ordered. I''ve brought it for you."


    Li Yaoxiang took the suitcase: "Thank you."


    But Arima Kishou already opened his SSS-Rank Arata, charged directly at Li Yaoxiang, and shed him in the head.


    A loud noise of ''ng!''


    Li Yaoxiang blocked the blow with a suitcase.


    The two sides looked at each other at close range.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Mr. Arima, what does this mean?"


    Arima Kishou: "Every sign indicates that there is a problem in the 20th Ward. How could you not find anything after staying in the 20th Ward for so long? Not long ago, without anyone witnessing, you also brought back the one-eyed owl''s Ukaku, I suspect that you have a certain connection with the ghouls, perhaps cooperating with each other."


    Push the suitcase hard.


    Put Arima Kishou out for a good distance.


    Press the suitcase switch.


    Also hit SSS-Rank Arata.


    Arata on both sides is made of Yoshimura''s Kakuhou.


    Li Yaoxiang The appearance of Arata is exactly the same as that of Arima Kishou.


    Li Yaoxiang: "It''s okay if you bring back the Ukaku of the one-eyed owl but I brought back the Ukaku of the one-eyed owl, suddenly there''s a problem? And then you jump into conclusion that I''m cooperating with ''him''?"


    Arima Kishou rush forward again: "It depends on whether you have this strength to grab the Ukaku of the one-eyed owl."


    While talking.


    Arima Kishou rush forward again.


    The two sides are fighting together.


    ng!


    ng!


    ng!


    ng!


    The fighting sound of two people was heard in the training room.


    spark shes.


    Arima Kishou attack while still expressionless.


    Li Yaoxiang smiled, calmly parrying the attack of Arima Kishou.


    I don''t know how long it took, the two sides pulled back a long distance.


    Arima Kishould coldly said: "You are strong"


    Li Yaoxiang doesn''t care: "It''s so-so."


    Arima Kishou: "Human beings don''t have such speed and power."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Oh? The implication is that you''re not human?"


    Arima Kishou: ""


    Silence for a moment.


    Arima Kishou take the lead in putting away Arata, calmly said: "What is your purpose?"


    Li Yaoxiang also put away Arata: "Purpose? I don''t know what you''re talking about."


    Seeing Li Yaoxiang''s life and death refused to admit, Arima Kishou eventually not able to bear out of the weak spot: "I know what you said to the one-eyed owl on the roof..."


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t panic: "Then what?"


    Arima Kishou: "Aren''t you surprised?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "There is nothing surprising. As long as you pay attention, you can see some clues from the actions and ns of CCG over the years. It''s just that people who didn''t expect mixed in CCG...."


    Arima Kishouang''s numb face finally changed.


    He frowned: "Are you also a ghoul?"


    Li Yaoxiang shaking his head: "I think... there are some things that you''re mistaken. I am a real human being."


    Arima Kishou: "Impossible. Without relying on external forces, human impossible has your strength."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Just treat me as having a supernatural power."


    Arima Kishou: ""


    It was silent again for a while.


    Arima Kishou: "You don''t reject the ghoul?"


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t answer, he didn''t attack Arima Kishou again, it was the best statement.


    Arima Kishou: "What n do you have? If possible, I will try my best to assist you."


    Li Yaoxiang: "What about you? What was your original n?"


    Li Yaoxiang knew that he was a consultant.


    He does not intend to expose the ability of the "prophet".


    Now that it has been spread out, Arima Kishou no longer turn around and talk directly about his purpose. But not at all revealed his cooperation with Yoshimura Eto and secretly kept a hand.


    Arima Kishou: "I don''t have a Kagune, no Kakugan (ghoul''s eyes), only a physique that belongs to that belongs to the ghouls. People like me often don''t live to be 30 years old. So I hope that before I die, I can nurture the ghouls. A new generation of a king, leading the ghouls to change the world together. But... Your presence shook me."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Oh? You trust me that way? Are you not afraid that I will go back on my word after your death?"


    Arima Kishou: "You have this strength, and you can tolerate that stronghold in the 20th Ward for so many years without doing anything. I believe you really do not reject ghouls. Besides, I don''t have much time left. Until now, there have not been any candidates that I am satisfied with. I can only pin myst hope on you."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Although I don''t reject the ghoul, it doesn''t mean that I can tolerate ghouls harming human beings. Before I can determine your motives, the cooperation should be discussedter. But... What you mean by "king" I have a candidate; I think he is quite suitable. He also has the idea of coexisting peacefully with mankind. And... he also proposed a good n to my subordinate, Amon. If you really want to help me, maybe you can start with him."


    Arima Kishou: "Who?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "His name is Kaneki Ken, a human being who has been transformed into a ghoul."

 Chapter 293: evolve, arrive

    Chapter 293: evolve, arrive


    This attitude.


    This expression.


    Obviously, he knew Kaneki Ken, but he was still under observation during this period, and Kaneki Ken had not actually passed the to probe of Yoshimura Eto, so he did not discuss with him.


    After a while.


    The eyeball returned to the center again.


    Looking directly at Li Yaoxiang, he didn''t speak.


    He knew that it was useless to say more now. Before he fully proved his determination, he knew that Li Yaoxiang would not trust him 100%.


    Not going to talk about it anymore.


    Turn around and leave.


    Before leaving, only one sentence was left: "I hope you can trust me next time we meet again."


    ...


    At the same time.


    On the way to the Aogiri Tree entire group to the ghoul detention center.


    In an alley not far from them while they stopped to rest.


    "You... you... you... what do you want?! You want food, I''ll give her to you. We''re both ghouls, and this human has nothing to do with you, right? I was close to her for a long time before I decided to do it. You don''t know her at all! Can you let me go?"


    Kaneki Ken expressionlessly watching this kind of begging for mercy.


    The two handsome men like centipede had already prated the thighs of this kind, and nailed him fiercely to the ground.


    In original work, Kaneki Ken finally changed into this thinking after he devoured Yamori''s Kakuhou and Kagune.


    In this life, Kaneki Ken had gnawed at Yamori''s Kakuhou and Kagune, but even before that, he had already eaten a lot of Kagune, and on the way to the ghoul detention center, he hunted a lot.


    So it''s ahead of time.


    There is even a faint trend of moving from a half-hearted person to an over the top person.


    There is no personal reason for him.


    Just because he knew he was not strong enough.


    If you want to be stronger, you need to constantly increase your within-the-body RC cells.


    Kaneki Ken''s tone of ice coldly said: "Take out your Kagune."


    Hello: "No... no... no. I won''t resist, just let me go."


    Kaneki Ken: "I said... take out your Kagune! Otherwise I will kill you now!"


    [Darkening level:]


    73%


    74%


    He was so scared that he was unable to bear swallowed saliva, and eventually he obediently and slowly take out his Kagune. Kagune''s movements were even trembling,pletely meaningless to attack.


    It''s not that he didn''t want to resist.


    As early as when Kaneki Ken arrived at the scene, he already wanted to kill Kaneki Ken for ''disturbing his meal''. It''s just that he was subdued by Kaneki in a sh, and even Kagune was beaten back.


    So now he had extinguished the idea of rebellion and beg for mercy.


    ''Shua!'' Sound.


    Kaneki Ken ignored his begging.


    The Kagune suddenly scratched his neck.


    Head flies up.


    Kaneki Ken walked to the deceased female.


    The female deceased''s expression remained in disbelief. It can be seen that the moment before the female deceased died, she still couldn''t believe that the familiar person in front of her was a ghoul.


    The encounter is simr to that of Kaneki Ken.


    Kaneki Ken sighed with emotion.


    If it weren''t for my luck, I guess I would have died like this at the time...


    He extended the hand and slowly closed the eyes of the female deceased.


    Then he turned back to the front of the ghoul and gnawed his Kagune and Kakuhou on the spot.


    In the process of biting, the two Kagune at his waist slowly began to shape transformation towards centipede.


    After a while.


    Kaneki Ken returned to the location of the Aogiri tree entire group.


    Yoshimura Eto, Tatara and the others all knew what Kaneki Ken was for. Nor do they mean to stop him. After all, they themselves are ghouls.


    For them, hunting is normal.


    only...


    They have no opinion and don''t care.


    But Kaneki Ken is not.


    Because when he came back, he saw a person who shouldn''t be here.


    Kaneki Kenplexion sank said: "Why are you here?"


    Kirishima Ayato: "You''re too lenient, aren''t you? Where do I go, why should you worry about it?"


    "La ~~~~" Yoshimura Eto hummed the song again, the tone sounded sincere and said, "You never worked with Ayato before, right, Kaneki? Now Ayato cane back, that is really good. You I have a chance to work with him again. Are you upset?"


    Kaneki Ken nced at Kirishima Ayato.


    It will no longer matter.


    Since even he himself does not cherish his life.


    Then there is nothing to dissuade.


    I have tried to save him enough. I have a clear conscience, I did this for Kirishima Touka.


    ...


    At the same time.


    As the Aogiri Tree entire group was about to arrive at the ghoul detention center, the team of Amon Koutarou arrived here first. After all, Aogiri Tree couldn''t kill them all the way at full speed.


    They must hide their identity and pass one after another.


    Otherwise, CCG will be rmed.


    The bait they set up was in vain.


    Amon Koutarou''s team is different.


    They took the car and took the right path, so they arrived at the ghoul detention center faster.


    In the detention room.


    Amon Koutarou first stopped Mado Akira and Takizawa Seidou.


    Then he walked into the detention room alone, across a ss, and began to ask his adoptive father, Donato Porpora.


    Amon Koutarou said with a ck face: "Do you know any information about V organization?"


    Donato Porpora: "Oh? Where did you hear the name of this organization?"


    Amon Koutarou: "You just need to answer me, know, or don''t know!"


    Donato Porpora smiled strangely: "I know..."


    In the original work, Donato Porpora once intentionally reminded Amon Koutarou about the V organization, and told Amon Koutarou ''it is better to look for Alice than to pursue the white rabbit''.


    Meaning, not to hunt down the ghoul.


    Should go look for the shady side of CCG.


    At that time, Amon Koutarou did not understand the meaning of this sentence.


    It''s just that Donato Porpora in his life, since Amon Koutarou asked about V organization, he wouldn''t mind revealing a happy message.


    Donato Porpora: "That''s a group of... maniptive humans."


    Amon Koutarou brows tightly frowns: "What do you mean?"


    Donato Porpora: "Literally."


    Next.


    No matter how much Amon Koutarou asked, Donato Porpora also answered the question. Seeing the urgent appearance of Amon Koutarou seemed to be his greatest pleasure.


    Ended this dialogue.


    Amon Koutarou uglyly left the switch room and merged with Mado Akira and Takizawa Seidou.


    When Mado Akira just wanted to start to talk for details, the deafening rm of the shelter suddenly sounded...

 Chapter 294: Value boost, Amons anger

    Chapter 294: Value boost, Amon''s anger


    When the rm sounds, it means that Aogiri Tree has invaded the shelter.


    Their actions are exactly simr to the original work.


    Everyone has a part that everyone is responsible for.


    Tatara fought against the director and special officer of the ghoul detention center, and the director was instantly killed.


    Kirishima Ayato is ying against Shinohara.


    The team of Amon Koutarou fights against the dross of Aogiri Tree.


    And Kaneki Ken came to the cell of Kamishiro Matasaka.


    The heavy iron door of the cell was opened.


    The first sentence of Kamishiro Matasaka said to Kaneki Ken: "Why do you have Rize''s smell?"


    Not waiting for Kaneki Ken to answer.


    He directly gave Kaneki Ken a roundabout kick.


    In original work, Kaneki Ken is not at all an opponent of Kamishiro Matasaka. Unprepared, Kaneki Ken was knocked back far away with one blow.


    But Kaneki Ken in this life, which one did he want to abuse?


    Li Yaoxiang asked Kaneki Ken to practice the ''Sixty-Four Palms of Eight Trigrams'' to the core, just to exercise Kaneki Ken''s instinctive response. At this moment, it has fully demonstrated the efforts made since this period of time.


    Kamishiro Matasaka, the pre-emptive one-shot kick, not only did not hit Kaneki Ken.


    Instead, Kaneki Ken downyed it and avoided it.


    Kaneki Ken simply avoided the blow by leaning back.


    Kamishiro Matasaka couldn''t achieve a single blow, and didn''t mean to stop. A series of actions such as round kick, side kick, horizontal kick, back kick, straight punch, and so on, suddenlyunched towards Kaneki Ken.


    But the next scene really made Kamishiro Matasaka have to be shocked.


    Even if he has tried his best.


    But still can''t hurt Kaneki Ken.


    Kaneki Ken turned sideways, backed away, or moved back and forth, evading all his attacks. He felt that Kaneki Ken was slightly faster than him.


    But even so, this is not the reason why Kaneki Ken can escape all his attacks.


    Faster than him.


    There are many in this world who are stronger than him.


    But under the circumstances that the speed and strength of the two sides are notrge, there are really few who can escape all his attacks.


    The only reason to be able to escape all his attacks is


    Kamishiro Matasaka stopped the attack: "You can also do martial arts?"


    Kaneki Ken: "Are you Kamishiro''s foster father?"


    None of the questions were answered.


    Kamishiro Matasaka no longer intends to talk nonsense with Kaneki Ken. At this time, he was full of thoughts to avenge his daughter. This time he does not intend to retain strength. Matasaka exhibited his Bikaku and tried his best to attack Kaneki Ken.


    But he didn''t show up.


    As soon as he yed the Kagune, the strength gap between the two was obviously too much.


    You should know that Kamishiro Matasaka has always focused on his martial arts training, and Kagune is just a tool he uses to assist. On the contrary, Kaneki Ken?


    Kaneki Ken received a series of training from Li Yaoxiang.


    His Kagune can attack together with the ''Sixty-Four Palms Eight Trigrams''.


    When Kaneki Ken also exhibited his four centipede-like Kagunes, the situation quickly fell over.


    Regardless of how the Kamishiro Matasaka fists, legs, and tails attacked, they were all blocked by Kaneki Ken''s four centipede Kagunes, and they fought back.


    Kaneki Ken didn''t even need to show the ''Sixty-Four Palms Eight Trigrams'', Kamishiro Matasaka was already overwhelmed by 4 centipede Kagunes.


    Eventually ''bang!'' a loud noise.


    Kamishiro Matasaka was blown out by Kaneki Ken''s heavy blow.


    The whole person hit the iron wall of the shelter.


    Even the iron wall was smashed.


    Kaneki Ken ignored Kamishiro Matasaka and asked directly in his mind: "Without him, can you find where Akihiro Kanou is?"


    Originally, Kaneki Ken did not intend to ask Li Yaoxiang.


    Just follow Li Yaoxiang''s instructions and slowly dig the truth.


    But the attitude of Kamishiro Matasaka really annoyed him.


    Isn''t he the victim here?


    As a father, there is nothing wrong with avenging the daughter. It''s different to look at this matter from Kaneki Ken''s standpoint.


    When your daughter kills, you don''t care.


    Now that your daughter has been murdered, you want revenge, and that''s okay?


    Just like the kind of plot where the rich second generation bullies the poor family, when the rich second generation gets what they deserve, their parents also me the victim''s family and take revenge on the victim.


    It was disgusting.


    Before you shot, did you ever think of the possiblity that I am one of her aplices?


    Could these tragedies have happened if you hadn''t been indulging her all the time?


    Li Yaoxiang is of course not a big deal, and no matter whether Kamishiro Matasaka is dead or not, after all, this Kamishiro Matasaka''s darkening to Kaneki Ken is of little help. Even this matter may allow Yoshimura Eto to look at Kaneki Ken again and speed things up. The progress is uncertain, and he simply responded: "Yes."


    Kaneki Ken in reality.


    I''m going to go forward, intending to get to know Kamishiro Matasaka directly.


    Let Kamishiro Matasaka as his nutrient.


    But just when he was about to start.


    A silhouette jumped from the sky.


    Separated between Kamishiro Matasaka and Kaneki Ken.


    The personing is Yoshimura Eto.


    Yoshimura Eto: "Nana, you two don''t be impulsive ~~ Kaneki, you forgot our purpose? Kamishiro, do you want to see your daughter Rize back?"


    I thought that the daughter had been killed by Kaneki.


    Helping the daughter to avenge his revenge, a desperate Kamishiro Matasaka.


    Yoshimura Eto''s sentence awakened his hope again: "What do you mean?"


    Yoshimura Eto: "Your daughter is not dead. In this world, there are more than one person like Kaneki."


    The seemingly inexhaustible Kamishiro Matasaka stood up again.


    My heart is filled with endless anger.


    In a moment he thought about the general situation.


    This is someone using the daughter''s Kakuhou for experiments


    At this time, Kaneki Ken behind him said: "Even without him, I can find them."


    Yoshimura Eto slightly surprised: "oh?"


    See Kaneki Ken so confident.


    Kaneki in Yoshimura Eto''s mind is indeed a little higher, but this value has not yet stabilized.


    In all matters, Yoshimura Eto will really look at Kaneki Ken only if Kaneki Ken really finds the ce of Akihiro Kanou one step faster than Kamishiro Matasaka.


    So, for the sake of stability, Yoshimura Eto finally did not let Kaneki Ken do it.


    If there''s still something else to do here, wait until then to find Akihiro Kanou.


    Immediately, the two acted separately again.


    Yoshimura Eto took Akihiro Kanou to leave here first.


    Kaneki Ken went to support other people.


    ...


    At the same time, after solving a lot of dross, Amon Koutarou entire group came to the monitoring room at this time, and he saw the existence of Kaneki Ken''s one-eye mask from the monitoring screen.


    Suddenly, there was endless anger in his heart.


    Didn''t you say that you want to live in peace with humans?!


    So what do you mean by being here now?

 Chapter 295: Misunderstanding solved

    Chapter 295: Misunderstanding solved


    In the monitoring room.


    Amon Koutarou, Mado Akira, and Takizawa Seidou, although the three of them were facing the surveince screen at the same time, neither Masaki Akatsuki and Takizawa Seidou didn''t find Amon Koutarou ''s mind at this time.


    That''s what the Kaneki Ken showed.


    After a while.


    His tone indifferently said: "You two act together to support other people."


    Takizawa said: "I''m going alone with her?! Amen, wait, what about you?"


    Mado Akira ignored Takizawa''s attitude and calmly looked towards Amon Koutarou. Obviously, she also wanted to know this answer.


    Amon Koutarou''s eyes are still firmly stared at the scene where Kaneki Ken is located, facing away from two people: "I still have things to do. After the things are done, I will naturally join you."


    Mado Akira followed his gaze.


    looked towards the monitor where Kaneki Ken was located.


    looking thoughtful.


    In the end, the two did not mean to disobey the order and set off to support other colleagues.


    ...


    at the same time.


    Kaneki Ken said that he didn''t care much about the life and death of Kirishima. But when ites to critical moments, under the circumstances within your ability, you still have to take care of it.


    So the direction he is now heading is precisely the area where Kirishima Ayato is responsible.


    It''s just that he didn''t wait for him to see Kirishima Ayato.


    Amon Koutarou appeared right in front of him, blocking his way.


    Kaneki Ken brows slightly wrinkle: "It''s you? Why are you here?"


    Kaneki Ken feltplicated for Amon Koutarou.


    It was Li Yaoxiang who told him that this person might be a bridge between him and humans, so he would try tomunicate with him before.


    But didn''t expect, it didn''t take long before this person appeared again in front of himself.


    And just because of the menacing appearance, simply does not seem toe tomunicate with him.


    Kaneki Ken: "Do you want to stop me? You really think I will keep my hand on you every time?"


    At this time, Amon Koutarou already had 2 stick-shaped Quinque in his hand. Originally thinking that Kaneki Ken was different from other kinds, so he let go of the hatred of ''Kaneki Ken heavy injury to Mado''.


    But didn''t expect Kaneki Ken said it nicely, but his action would be another matter.


    Didn''t you say that you are not a person of Aogiri Tree?


    Didn''t you say that you want to live in peace with humans?


    If you really want to coexist peacefully with human beings, why do you want to appear here again now, attacking ghoul detention center and hurting so many innocent people!


    He was already very angry, and now he heard Kaneki Ken''s remarks about this remark, and it was even more intolerable.


    Speaking of Quinque, moved towards Kaneki Ken and rushed past.


    And gnashing one''s teeth said: "If you don''t keep your hands  it would be better!"


    After a while.


    ''Boom!'' a loud noise.


    Amon Koutarou was beaten and scarred.


    Even Quinque was smashed.


    He really is not the opponent of Kaneki Ken.


    But he did not regret it.


    He was powerless and said: "Kill me, I shouldn''t believe that the ghouls would want to live peacefully with humans, even if you were originally human "


    Kaneki Ken brows slightly wrinkle: "What do you mean?"


    Amon Koutarou sneered: "''What do you mean''? Didn''t you mean to coexist peacefully with human beings? Now here again, attacking here, killing so many innocent people. It should be me asking what you mean. Oh, I also concealed your message specifically, and did not report to you the creation of Quinque. Otherwise  can you still stand here unharmed now? I shouldn''t have believed you. Otherwise, there wouldn''t have been so many sacrifices now!"


    Kaneki Ken hearing this couldn''t help but feel soft.


    There is no more killing-intent for Amon Koutarou.


    He didn''t expect the ghoul investigator, and really took his affairs in his heart, specifically concealing the ''weapon'' thing for him. He originally thought it was a bit strange, why CCG didn''t want to want him, and why they didn''te to trouble him.


    This is the reason.


    Kaneki Ken''s original cold attitude could not help but soften a lot.


    He extends the hand and wants to lift Amon Koutarou.


    Amon Koutarou pped his palm and then stared at Kaneki Ken, not at all appreciating.


    Kaneki Ken then exined with a smile: "Some things, I think  you misunderstood."


    Amon Koutarou: "What do you mean?"


    Kaneki Ken: "I joined Aogiri Tree only after Imunicated with you. I attacked here with Aogiri Tree. But if you rewind the video and watch it, I haven''t killed any humans by myself. The ones who met me were just injured and unconscious. Moreover, I tell you that it is true to want to coexist peacefully with human beings. Remember when I told you, I want to build a powerful enemy? It is because I have found the clue that I joined the Aogiri Tree to act together."


    Amon Koutarou was taken aback.


    He didn''t expect things to be like this.


    He never thought that Kaneki Ken was lying to him.


    He is already in such a state of embarrassment. Does Kaneki Ken killing him ends all one''s troubles? Why do you have to spend your time to deceive him?


    Amon Koutarou subconsciously asked: "What way? How did you create this ''enemy''?"


    "ording to that stupid legend, when the ghouls of a certain family eat each other..." Kaneki Ken first told Amon Koutarou about the legend of the "dragon", and then continued, "Remember when I told you that I was framed and transformed into a ghoul. Akihiro Kanou, I don''t know if you have heard of this name. He once worked as a ghoul investigator in CCG. I can''t find out what''s inside of your CCG. I don''t know how many people are involved in this matter. But what is certain is that this Akihiro Kanou is the man who transformed human beings into ghouls. And now the information I get is that this Akihiro Kanou is suspected of using this ''special n'' bloodline to transform arge number of ghouls. So I have to find him. Here, there are ghouls who have clues about him, that''s why I appear here."


    Amon Koutarou swallowed saliva.


    Unbelievably listening to everything like a fantasy story.


    He also knows the legend of ''Dragon''.


    But he just regarded it as a "legend".


    Akihiro Kanou, he also has some impressions, but did not pay attention to this person.


    The amount of information brought to him by Kaneki Ken today is toorge. For a while, he really didn''t know how to digest these things.


    Kaneki Ken reached out again.


    Amon Koutarou did not refuse this time.


    Put your palm on Kaneki Ken''s palm and let Kaneki Ken pull herself.


    Kaneki Ken: "I''m sorry, I thought you wanted to block my n, so the shot was a little too heavy." Seeing that he did not respond, Kaneki Ken continued: "You should avoid me for now. There are people stronger than me in the Aogiri tree. They will not keep their hands on you."


    Kaneki Ken is about to leave and continue in the direction of Kirishima Ayato.


    But at this time, the original dull looking Amon Koutarou suddenly started to talk and said, "Can I join?"


    Kaneki Ken thought he heard it wrong, and couldn''t help but ask, "What?"


    Amon Koutarou: "Can I join your n?"

 Chapter 296: new member join

    Chapter 296: new member join


    Kaneki Ken pondered for a while, and then said: "I have to say that your thoughts make me feel very relieved. At least you let me know that in this world, there are still humans who can understand me. But... I have to be careful of you I hope you can understand."


    Amon Koutarou knew the meaning of Kaneki Ken''s words.


    This is to guard against the possibility that Amon is an "undercover".


    He understood why Kaneki Ken had this idea, and he didn''t mean to me.


    Amon Koutarou: "How can I contact you? Didn''t you say that you can''t check CCG''s internal information? What information do you want to know, I can help you investigate."


    Giving phone numbers is impossible.


    As long as someone with a heart investigates this number, it is easy to find out the true identity of Kaneki Ken.


    Thinking for a long time.


    Kaneki Ken said: "Well, you give me your contact information. I will contact you once a period of time. If you really want to help me, then you can help me investigate this technology that transforms humans. Who is the one who proposes and who is responsible? What is the purpose behind them and what is the next n. I think... There is a big problem inside your CCG. Be careful yourself."


    Through Li Yaoxiang, Kaneki Ken learned that the secret mastermind of the whole thing does have the idea of ''summoning dragon''. Also knows that there are participants in this program in the CCG.


    However, this does not prevent Kaneki Ken from guiding Amon Koutarou to learn more truth.


    As long as he knew more truth, he believed that Amon Koutarou would be more willing to help him.


    Of course, if Amon Koutarou really investigates the enemy''s next n, it would be better, so that he would have time to deal with it.


    Kaneki Ken was given contact information.


    Two people parted ways.


    After all, whether it is the human side, or the other side, seeing them walking together will not be a good thing for them.


    Kaneki Ken chose to continue to the direction of Kirishima Ayato.


    Amon Koutarou told Kaneki Ken that there is a monitoring room here, and he must go back to the monitoring room to eliminate the video here, so as not to be caught.


    Everyone acted separately.


    ...


    At the same time.


    From the beginning of the battle between Kaneki Ken and Amon Koutarou, until the end of the battle, it became the period of time formunication. Mado Akira has not left the monitoring room.


    Her eyes, from beginning to end, are fixed on the screen where two people appear.


    It turned out that she seemed to obey the order of Amon Koutarou, but in fact, after Amon Koutarou left, she returned to the monitoring room.


    The screen of the monitor has changed from two peoplemunicating to two going their separate ways.


    But Akira''s gaze has never left.


    Thinking for a long time.


    She finally sat down calmly.


    ''Click, click,'' use the keyboard to perform various operations in the monitoring room.


    When she pressed thest button, the screen of each and everyone in the monitoring room turned suddenly into a snowke, and the data were cleared thoroughly.


    A click.


    The door was opened.


    Amon Koutarou came back here just now.


    The picture that came into view was exactly the moment when the picture of each and everyone in the monitoring room turned into snowkes, and Takizawa Seidou lying unconscious on the ground.


    He couldn''t help but hack his face: "What''s the matter? What are you doing, what''s wrong with Takizawa?"


    Mado Akira nced at theatose Takizawa Seidou: "I knocked him out."


    Not waiting for the question and me from Amon Koutarou.


    Mado Akira added: "I have seen all the pictures just now. The information and data here have all been deleted and destroyed by me."


    Amon Koutarou just wanted to say something, forcibly holding back into his stomach.


    I don''t know what to say.


    He knows the meaning in Akira''s words.


    Knowing Mado Akira This is the whole process of seeing himmunicate with Kaneki Ken.


    Even if the monitoring screen here does not have a radio function, it can be seen that some tricks are just based on the scene of the two people talking calmly. Coupled with the fact that Akira really knocked out Takizawa, and helped him destroy the evidence, Amon Koutarou really didn''t know how to face Akira.


    The heart is veryplicated.


    In his heart, Mado Kureo, her father, suffered from heavy injury, and more or less because he protected him.


    He felt he had an obligation to help his senior by taking care of his daughter.


    So he did not want to involve Mado Akira in this matter.


    Mado Akira quietly looks at Amon Koutarou does not speak.


    Wait for him to give an exnation.


    Seeing that he was speechless, Mado Akira first started to talk: "I don''t have a little bit of hatred for the one-eye mask. On the contrary, I am still grateful to him."


    Amon Koutarou looked puzzled.


    Mado Akira: "If father continues to act like this, he will be sooner orter die. The one-eye mask didn''t kill him, it was just a serious injury. I think this is a good thing. At least that saved his life. So, you don''t have to feel sorry with the matter of my father in front of me."


    Amon Koutarou didn''t expect Mado Akira would have this idea.


    But he agreed with this idea.


    Otherwise, the first time he reallymunicated with Kaneki Ken, he would not be so easilypromised.


    However, even so, he is still speechless.


    If there is risk, it''s better to just take it by yourself.


    He did not want to put the lives of his colleagues and subordinates in danger.


    After a long silence, Amon Koutarou said with clenched teeth: "Do you believe me?"


    Mado Akira did not answer.


    Amon Koutarou: "If you believe me, don''t bother about this matter. In short, I won''t do anything that endangers human beings."


    Mado Akira still didn''t speak, and the atmosphere was awkward.


    After a moment, Mado Akira said: "This matter, even if you don''t tell me, I will investigate it myself."


    Amon Koutarou groaned.


    He knew that Mado Akira said that he could do it, and he could not persuade him.


    This situation is even worse. A bad one will not only cause bad things, it will even increase the chance of exposure, which will only make Mado Akira''s situation more dangerous.


    The heart is veryplicated.


    Struggling for a long time.


    Amon Koutarou eventually vomited one mouthful of impure air, as if he had made up his mind.


    Immediately after that, he no longer hesitated.


    Roughly speaking the whole sequence of events with Akira.


    Amon Koutarou: "... That''s the way it is. Even if you don''t agree with this n, I hope you don''t rush to stop it. At least give us a chance to try and give the world a chance to change."


    Silence for a moment.


    Mado Akira said, "What do you n to do next?"


    Amon Koutarou shaking one''s head: "Since you have already understood this matter, then let''s go back and report this matter to Special ss Li Yaoxiang. I believe he will have better countermeasures."


    Mado Akira nced at Takizawa Seidou on the ground.


    Amon Koutarou met now, shaking one''s head, and said: "One more person knows, it''s more dangerous. I don''t want him to fall into this vortex."


    The two are talking quite openly here.


    But they don''t know that Takizawa Seidou has already awakened, and even he heard such an amazing conversation. At this time, he almost wanted to die.


    Why did God make him wake up so early?


    Can''t he be unconscious for a while?


    He is afraid of death ~~


    He really didn''t want to participate in these things.


    He even had the faint idea of quitting his job. After all, he never imagined that there were ghouls undercover in CCG. Doesn''t that mean that anyone around him might be a spy?


    Now it''s the only thing he can do.


    Just continue to pretend to be dizzy.


    As long as you pass this level, think of a way to go back.


    It''s just that when he thought his pretending is sessful, Mado Akira kicked his thigh: "Don''t pretend, get up."


    Takizawa Seidou: ""

 Chapter 297: Stance, distorted idea

    Chapter 297: Stance, distorted idea


    At the same time.


    The picture returns to Kaneki Ken.


    When he first arrived at the ce where Kirishima Ayato was located, what he saw was already that Kirishima Ayato was defeated by Yuki Shinohara, and he was very reluctant. Even if he tried hisst effort, he can only hit Yuki Shinohara''s armor/Arata.


    The reason why Kirishima Ayato will be like this, in the final analysis, is because of the Arata on Shinohara.


    This set of armor was created by Kirishima Arata, that is, Kirishima Ayato and Kirishima Touka''s father. Ayato recognize it at a nce and guessed that his father was not dead yet.


    TL note: His whereabouts were established through traces left behind by his kakuja. What followed was a life or death battle with the CCG until he was eventually secured. Thereafter, he was subjected to the harvesting of his kakuhou, which is being used as the CCG''s exoskeleton armor quinque, respectively named "Arata."


    It turns out that father has been imprisoned by human beings for research and weapons ''supplies'' for so many years.


    That was why Ayato would have such an abnormal behavior.


    Seeing Kaneki Ken.


    Not saying anything further.


    Suddenly protruding from the waist.


    At the same time, Shinohara Yukinori and Kirishima Ayato both rushed over.


    ''Boom!'' a loud noise.


    Although Shinohara Yukinori blocked the blow with Quinque in his hand.


    But his body was also repelled for a long distance before stopping.


    Kaneki Ken came to Kirishima Ayato.


    Raise Kirishima Ayato.


    But what he didn''t expect is that Ayato at this time has some tears in his eyes, muttering to himself: "Dad that is dad''s..."


    Kaneki Ken nced at the armor of Shinohara.


    Within a moment, he understood what was going on.


    New things about Kirishima... he had learned about him before from Touka telling him, but didn''t expect it would be such a result.


    Really!


    CCG really didn''t have any respect for life!


    They never thought about how cruel it was for a life to do everything they did. They even think that it is normal to treat ghouls in this way.


    Otherwise, how could it be possible to treat Kamishiro Rize as a donor and transform more ghouls?


    How could Kirishima Touka''s father be used as a donor to create more weapons?


    Just use your brain to think a little.


    He knew that that kind of encounter was definitely ufortable.


    If one day, if they really messed up and were caught by CCG, would they treat them like this again?


    No!


    Not ''whether''.


    Will definitely!


    Otherwise, how would they directly transform Kaneki into a ghoul?


    Kaneki Ken suddenly furiously.


    Whether it was for himself, for Kirishima Touka''s father, or for the other party, he lost his calm attitude and rushed over towards Shinohara Yukinori.


    There is absolutely no intention to keep your hand.


    Against Shinohara is a series of fierce offensives.


    Fortunately at the beginning, Yuki Shinohara can cope with the speed and power provided by Quinque in his hand and Arata on his body.


    It can get faster and faster with the speed of Kaneki Ken.


    The strength is growing.


    Shinohara Yukinori gradually starts losing.


    In the end, a weak spot was identally flowed out and was hit by Kaneki Ken''s heavy injury, and then he frequently lost each interaction. Kaneki Ken''s attacknded all over his body one after another.


    But this is not over yet.


    Even if the situation seems to have been on the verge of copse.


    But Kaneki Ken still didn''t mean to stop.


    Taking advantage of a gap, one of the centipedes Kakuja rolled up Yuki Shinohara''s right leg and pulled his entire person up to in midair, and then smashed back and forth in two directions towards the ground.


    boom!


    boom!


    boom!


    boom!


    The scene continued to sound fierce collision sound.


    Like this kind of attack that was dropped and hit on the ground, Yuki Shinohara did not know how many times he suffered. The set of Aratas on him began to appear cracking.


    Kaneki Ken didn''t stop.


    Continue to hit the ground hard.


    It wasn''t until Shinohara Yukinori''s whole person could move to a little bit that Kaneki Ken stopped.


    After taking back the 4 centipedes Kakuja from the waist, he came to Shinohara Yukinori and coldly said: "Isn''t that ghoul still alive? It''s okay if you kill them, why should you treat them like this?"


    Yuki Shinohara is feeble.


    Speechless.


    He quietly looks at Kaneki Ken.


    Humans kill ghouls.


    What ghouls don''t kill humans?


    For him, this is the most normal thing.


    Almost every CCG member of the frontline will prepare a suicide note, leaving theirst words. Now that even the suicide note is ready, how could they have not expected the consequences when they lost the battle.


    At this time, he did not understand why Kaneki Ken said this.


    But he was already mentally prepared for death.


    It''s just that when he thought his life was over, he didn''t want to. Kaneki Ken would say like this: "I don''t kill. I hope you don''t do that kind of disgusting behavior when dealing with the ghoul in the future. They have the same family as you. Also have feelings."


    Shinohara Yukinori looked nkly towards his Kaneki Ken.


    They?


    Are you not a ghoul?


    Hiss  ~


    Arge number of vents were opened.


    A lot of CRC gas was sprayed inside.


    CRC gas can suppress the RC cells of the within-the-body, so that apart from the inability to mobilize within-the-body, even the recovery ability also disappears. It can be said that it is a nemesis of the ghouls.


    But the diffuse speed of the gas was too slow after all. The speed of ghouls is too amazing.


    So this kind of weapon usually only used to expel ghouls rather than attack.


    Long before the attack on the ghoul detention center, Kaneki Ken had learned through the mouth of Yoshimura Eto and the others that he had learned about the various side cases of the ghoul detention center.


    This CRC gas is certainly within the scope of their discussions.


    Seeing this, Kaneki Ken knew that as long as CCG released such gas, it meant that it was time for them to retreat.


    Before leaving, he nced at Yuki Shinohara.


    It will no longer matter.


    He did not dare to reveal the rtionship between Kirishima Arata and Kirishima Ayato and Kirishima Touka. He was afraid that these investigators would use this matter to make more fuss, or threaten, or other crafty plots and machinations and so on.


    Walk to Kirishima Ayato and lift Kirishima Ayato.


    Kirishima Ayato did not refuse, let Kaneki Ken help him to leave here.


    It''s just that while Kaneki Ken supported him and quickly withdrawing, Kirishima Ayato suddenly said: "Don''t tell my sister what happened today. I don''t want to worry her..."


    Kaneki Ken knew that the "things" Kirishima Ayato said was mainly his father''s problem.


    Kaneki Ken: "Do you need my help?"


    Kirishima Ayato shaking his head, his eyes firm and said: "No, I''ll solve it on my own."


    After seeing this, Kaneki Ken was no longer entangled.


    The centipede Kagune pierced into the iron wall one after another as a supporting point to leap up.


    Eventually jumped over the high iron wall of the ghoul detention center and seeded to withdraw with Kirishima Ayato

 Chapter 298: Purpose behind

    Chapter 298: Purpose behind


    After the rescue of Kamishiro Matasaka and the liberation of arge group of ghouls, the Aogiri Tree set out to find the trace of Akihiro Kanou.


    Mainly divided into 2 teams.


    A team is led by Tatara, following the pace of the Kamishiro Matasaka, looking for Akihiro Kanou.


    One is led by Kaneki Ken.


    Yoshimura Eto intends to probe what Kaneki Ken said before, in the end true or false, if Kaneki Ken really have a way to find Akihiro Kanou, so let Kaneki Ken lead a team to y freely.


    And she herself silently followed, paying attention to all this.


    ...


    As for Li Yaoxiang


    In addition to Kaneki Ken, he has been paying attention to the progress of things, that is, fish in troubled waters in 20th Ward.


    Washuu Tsuneyoshi assigned his mission, dragging it over and over again.


    It''s not that there is no exception.


    In original work, in fact, after the battle conclusion of the Cochlea, it will not be long before the battle against the Anteiku to start.


    But in this life, it was precisely because of the special ghoul investigator Li Yaoxiang who helped cover up and ventte the news, so this battle was slow to move.


    However, it is estimated that it will not be dyed for long.


    After all, the news of Yoshimura''s merits and demerits was actually controlled by CCG''s "Washuu n" were long understood.


    As long as they want to kill Yoshimura, they will find an excuse to do it.


    It depends on how long their patience was consumed by Li Yaoxiang.


    And Yoshimura has a good opportunity to leave.


    However, he was afraid that once he left, he would be implicated too much and affected many innocent people.


    But Li Yaoxiang told him not to worry.


    Don''t make decisions so quickly.


    If he survived, he may be more helpful to future ns.


    It''s time to leave, when the timees, they will see each other again.


    ...


    And while Li Yaoxiang was in the 20th Ward, continuing fish in troubled waters, the team of Amon Koutarou, who also handled the post-war follow-up matters, came back from the ghoul detention center.


    At this time, three people lined up.


    Then stood in front of Li Yaoxiang.


    Amon Koutarou reports on what happened in the ghoul detention center and the news that Akira and Takizawa Seidou are understood.


    Amon Koutarou: "That''s the way it is. Special ss Li Yaoxiang, do you think the message given by the one-eye mask, believable? Also, SS-Rank ghoul Donato Propra said that the V organization is this group who control both humans and ghouls?"


    After listening.


    Li Yaoxiang nced at Mado Akira and Takizawa Masao respectively.


    Mado Akira looks very calm.


    Takizawa Seidou was very disturbed. He seemed to want to say something but couldn''t say it.


    Li Yaoxiang said and said: "The one-eye mask and what the priest are fine. And I suspect that the culprit they spoke is the same group of people."


    This is the case.


    Not only Amon Koutarou and Takizawa Seidou were shocked.


    Even the seemingly calm Mado Akira couldn''t help but tighten the pupils.


    The news brought to them by Li Yaoxiang was really shocking and unimaginable.


    The one-eyed mask said that there was a problem within CCG and someone behind the scenes was controlling this ''renovation n''.


    Donato Porpora spoke about the V organization.


    Li Yaoxiang is even more exaggerated, not only agreeing with what the two said, but also judging what the two said, turned out to be the same group of people? The meaning of this sentence is basically saying that CCG is being manipted?


    What Donato Porpora said, those ''human beings'' being manipted?


    But this


    is it possible?


    Possible!


    They simply did not want to ept this statement.


    Li Yaoxiang saw their thoughts and continued: "This thing is really unbelievable. But unfortunately, it is. This is our country, until now, all of which are yed by ghoul''s influence."


    Amon Koutarou said in a hurry: "Li Yaoxiang, wait, this is easy! We have so many technologies for CCG in CCG. If these ghoul responding technologies are really mixed in CCG, how could it not be discovered?!"


    "Are you talking about detection doors?" Li Yaoxiang nced at Amon Koutarou, then shaking his head, and said: "I secretly let trusted professionals to check, and the result is that all the equipment in the 20th Ward almost all have been moved. I believe that this is also the case in other regions and even the General Administration. And what can be achieved without being discovered is only inheritance for the past 100 years. From the ghoul countermeasure institute to the current CCG, they are also controlled by the ''Washuu family'' in their hands."


    hiss-!


    Takizawa Seidou cannot to bear and took a breath.


    Inner secretly thought: finished, finished, didn''t expect CCG is really dragon''s pool and tiger''s den. This time it''s really a hell, until now, myself and the others have been following the instructions of all sorts?


    Amon Koutarou: "This is impossible! How can the Washuu family be ghouls? Quinque was invented by them. If they are ghouls, why should they disclose this technology?"


    Not waiting for Li Yaoxiang to answer.


    Instead, Akira took the lead to help Li Yaoxiang answer this question.


    Mado Akira: "There are many kinds of probabilities. Through the ''sharing food'', we can see that there is no such unity as imagined. The release of the bait called ''Quinque'' not only allows humans to trust them more, but also saves their own strength, and allows humans to help them deal with hostile influences. They took advantage of us."


    Li Yaoxiang nods: "Yes, this is the truth."


    Amon Koutarou''s face was very ugly.


    It turns out that they are desperately working, so the sacrifices of so many people are just reduced to tools in the hands of others to help eradicate the opponent?


    Amon Koutarou: "If things are really like what you said... then why are they transforming human beings into ghouls?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "It''s very simple. As the times change, the minds of decision makers will also change. In the past, they might only use humans to eradicate opponent. But now it is clear that in our country, they are already a big family. No longer satisfied with the status quo. They want to assimte with humans."


    Mado Akira: "Assimte with humans?"


    Li Yaoxiang suggests: "As the number of transformed humans into ghouls increase, is it necessary to divide who the ghouls or humans are? And, Amon, remember what I told you about developing the concept of food for ghouls. A while ago, I went to the CCG chief ghoul investigator. It turns out that this concept is already underway. This is estimated that the food is able to serve themter when they are done. We''re unable to tell who is human and who is the ghoul, plus if the ghouls no longer feed on humans, when the timees, maybe their n can be sessful."

 Chapter 299: Three results, the only choice

    Chapter 299: Three results, the only choice


    Takizawa Seidou finally failed to bear to interrupt Li Yaoxiang''s words. He raised his hand and said he wanted to speak. Smilingly said: "Hehe, hehe, sorry. Excuse me. I don''t know Can I withdraw from your n? I don''t think I am suitable to stay here again. I asked myself that I might not have the ability... If somehow I disrupt your n, it will be bad... "


    Li Yaoxiang calmly at Takizawa Seidou, shaking his head, and said: "Useless if you want to leave now, it''s toote. Even if we''re willing to let you go, they won''t let go of any possibility to people who know the inside story. As soon as the n starts, maybe they won''t find out. But you hurriedly resigned, which will only let them focus on you. They will try their best to clear us. So... If you stay with us, it might be safer."


    Takizawa''s mind thunder from a clear sky for a while.


    Countless ''finished, finished'' came to mind.


    Never again to listen to anything.


    It was Akira who was the first to calm down her emotions: "So what should we do next?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "In the next development, things will only go to 3 results. First, the Washuu n project seeds. ''Human transformation technology'' leads to the whole world. Arge number of humans have been transformed into other ghouls, which are assimted with humans, eventually reaching peaceful coexistence. Of course, this is just wishful thinking with Washuu n. If it failed? They''ll just do it in another country. One is not good, maybe our country will be a ''heirloom country'' and be the focus of the whole world, which will cause other countries to be targeted. Moreover, even if other countries have really adopted this n, who would dare to ensure that those humans who have been transformed into ghouls will end up biased towards original ghouls? Despite the development of ''Eatable Foods'', what should they do if they don''t want to ept them? When the timees, humanity has no say. Will humans be reduced to captive food? So, this result is too risky for us humans, and we must not let them seed."


    Amon Koutarou said dryly, "What about the second?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "The second result is that we gathered the power of all the investigators in the CCG to work together to remove the group of tumors hidden in the CCG. Then maintain the status quo, continue to fight against the ghouls, expel the ghouls. However, the feasibility of this approach is too difficult, way too difficult. Washuu n has been at CCG''s root for so many years, and it''s very difficult to let the rest of us believe in us. If we''re a little careless, we might bite them and let everyone fight against us instead."


    Takizawa is still in a daze.


    Amon Koutarou and Mado Akira stared at Li Yaoxiang, waiting for Li Yaoxiang to speak.


    After a pause, let them digest the message, Li Yaoxiang continued: "The third result is to sessfully create a ''dragon''. Using the power of the dragon, the humans and the ghouls have to be forced to put down their hatred and cooperate fully. As long as there are people on both sides to guide us to this situation, it should not be difficult to realize the ideal of peaceful coexistence between mankind and other ghouls. Of course, this n would be noticed by the Washuu. They will definitely try their best to stop it. They have worked hard for so many years before they have their current status, and they can integrate into the human society and get afortable life. For them, in such a good situation, they''ll be caught off guard."


    Mado Akira: "The first result, we can''t let them achieve it. The second result, difficult to implement. That is to say, can we only choose the third result?"


    Li Yaoxiang nods.


    Amon Koutarou: "So what should we do?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Isn''t Washuu n using human power to deal with the ghouls and the humans? Isn''t it simple? Then we also use the power of the ghouls to deal with them. After my investigation, and Washuu''s bloodline, it is exactly the bloodline that can create a dragon. We must take the lead in attacking Washuu n before they notice any clue, and use them as nutrients for the ''Dragon''. Only in this way will the human side reduce a lot of unnecessary sacrifices."


    Mado Akira: "But are they really willing to cooperate with us? You know, the n of Washuu n not a bad thing for them."


    At this time, Takizawa''s dull-eyed finally sobered: "Yes! Can''t we let them kill each other and then kill them after that?"


    Li Yaoxiang nced at Takizawa Seidou, and said, "They could frame us instead, so you don''t have to think about it. Once they noticed something wrong in advance, they will unite against us. That would be a loss. Nor is it a consequence we can bear."


    After hearing it.


    Takizawa''s entire road seemed decadent again.


    Pause for a moment.


    Li Yaoxiang turned his attention to Mado Akira: "So before they reach a consensus, we should join those who intend to cooperate with us, intend to resist or break away from and Washuu n as soon as possible. I''m not afraid to tell you that the ''Non-Killing Owl'' that I encountered in the Aogiri Tree raidst time already has some verbal agreements with me. Theplete Ukaku that I seized at the time were his sincerity. If necessary, I can call him to help us. Also, Amon, did you catch up with the one-eyed mask? You can also try to start with him. Isn''t he going to ''make a dragon''? Then we will cooperate with him and sed his n."


    After listening to Li Yaoxiang''s series of words.


    Amon Koutarou''s face looked a bit ugly, but he should still say: "Well, I will try to talk to him."


    Li Yaoxiang: "While discussing this issue with him, you may wish to ask him about the "dragon" container, what does he think?"


    Amon Koutarou: "Dragon''s... container?"


    Li Yaoxiang nods: "It is said that dragons eat arge number of RC cells of the same ghouls, and then eventually into Kakuja. ording tomon sense, the host''s body musn''t be weak. Otherwise, before being turned into a dragon, they would have already exploded. So, if you want to n to seed, you mustn''t have a weak one and volunteer to be this container. You ask him what he thinks. If he wants to be this container Then you give him a promise, that I will find a way to save him afterwards."


    Amon Koutarou frowned, silent, and did not answer.


    Today''s events make the three people present feel very heavy.


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t mean to continue to force them, they had to give them some time to digest the message.

 Chapter 300: surgery, see you in the old place

    Chapter 300: surgery, see you in the old ce


    After the discussion.


    Li Yaoxiang asked everyone to go back to rest first, don''t think about it.


    In the next few days, Mado Akira and Amon Koutarou have already started to investigate the rted matters mentioned by Li Yaoxiang. The result was really discovered by them, the fact coincided with what Li Yaoxiang said.


    What kind of research institute has really developed a "reconstructive surgery".


    Moreover, it has also received strong support from the General Administration.


    The General Administration has justunched a new policy. As long as some people are willing to participate in this program, even if these participants will not work afterwards, CCG willpensate them arge sum of money in addition to at first, in the future and every month, they willpensate them with fixed subsidies until they are old.


    The first batch of targets is the volunteers.


    There are even a lot of internal members who are poor in family, and after getting this news, they also want to try.


    In the original work, Takizawa Seidou, Amon Koutarou, and the others who appeared in Seasons 3 and 4 of Anime cannot bear the temptation, so they voluntarily participated in this n.


    After confirming the news, Amon Koutarou and Mado Akira became very heavy.


    After that, Li Yaoxiang''s statement is no longer questioned.


    Make a firm resolution, wholeheartedly cooperate with Li Yaoxiang.


    ...


    At the same time.


    In the process of investigating the inside of CCG, Amon Koutarou and Mado Akira.


    Kaneki Ken also sessfully led his team through Li Yaoxiang''s narration. His team first arrived at the underground base of Akihiro Kanou.


    And found Akihiro Kanou.


    This result made Yoshimura Eto extremely excited.


    Praise Kaneki Ken.


    Ask Kaneki Ken how to do it.


    Kaneki Ken of course threw this pot rationally and clearly structured onto Washuu n.


    It is imed that Washuu n found the news for him.


    Although Yoshimura Eto didn''t trust Kaneki Ken''s statement, she didn''t care too much. After all, after nning with Arima for more than ten years, the most worthy of her attention is him as the candidate of ''king''.


    And obviously.


    After passing the probe, Kaneki Ken has been identified as the target by her.


    It is estimated that Arima Kishou would discuss the next ''cultivation n'' soon.


    As for Akihiro Kanou


    Just like the original work, as soon as they met, Yoshimura Eto sent an invitation to Akihiro Kanou, inviting him to join the Aogiri tree, and transformed more ghouls. Don''t worry about the "material", everything solved by Aogiri Tree.


    Akihiro Kanou quickly agreed.


    There is no hesitation.


    It''s just that the most important thing that Akihiro Kanou cares about is Kaneki Ken.


    He was curious, why was Kaneki Ken still so calm after seeing him?


    This shouldn''t be


    Judging from his observation of Kaneki Ken during this period of time, Kaneki Ken could be indifferent.


    Before the withdraw base, he went to Kaneki Ken and asked: "Don''t you hate me?"


    Kaneki Ken said with a smile: "Why do I need to hate you? Since things are a foregone conclusion, are you always going to have to live that day? And, I don''t think my life is worse than before. At least I don''t have to worry about being killed."


    Kaneki Ken said easily. In fact, in his heart, he wishes that a sword would go through his heart for fiddling with his life.


    But he knows very well that now he still needs Akihiro Kanou to copy more ''RC cells'' of Kamishiro Rize for him to prepare for the cultivation of dragons.


    Otherwise...


    Even if Yoshimura Eto wants to save Akihiro Kanou, it is not so easy.


    He didn''t believe that Yoshimura Eto could keep an ordinary person like Akihiro Kanou in front of him.


    After hearing it.


    Akihiro Kanou gave Kaneki Ken an interesting look.


    He knew that Kaneki Ken was not speaking right.


    But he didn''t mean to ask again.


    Anyway, today, he doesn''t care much about life and death.


    that''s it.


    Because Kaneki Ken didn''t mean any action on Akihiro Kanou along the way, Yoshimura Eto''s vignce was rxed a lot. Sometimes she will leave the team and let them get along together.


    And she herself went to contact Arima Kishou to discuss matters rted to ''Wang''.


    It''s just that this atmosphere of harmonious coexistence.


    Until Kaneki Ken escorted Akihiro Kanou, he started a single thought.


    An idea to contact Amon Koutarou.


    "Hey?"


    "It''s me."


    The phrase "it''s me" and this familiar voice instantly reminded Amon Koutarou of Kaneki Ken.


    Amon Koutarou excitedly said: "Is it? Where are you now?"


    "What''s wrong? So nervous, did you find any news over there?"


    Amon Koutarou: "Well, it''s correct as you said before. Also, I just heard the good news. As long as someone voluntarily epts the operation of ''transnt ghoul force'', the General Administration will give arge amount ofpensation. I believe you will be very interested in this project. The specific situation will be discussedter. See you in the old ce."


    Toot, Toot, Toot, Toot.


    Finished.


    Amon Koutarou covered the phone directly.


    Hearing this, Kaneki Ken startled.


    Unable to bear asked in his mind: "Do you hear what he said? What''s going on?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Didn''t you tell him before that there is a problem inside CCG? He is afraid that he has discovered the truth, and he is worried that someone inside is monitoring his mobile phone. Moreover, the good news what he said doesn''t trigger anything in you?"


    transnt power


    surgery...


    Kaneki Ken for a moment thought of this operation that transformed human beings into ghouls.


    In other words


    CCG has mastered this technology and has begun to implement it?


    Think of it here.


    Kaneki Ken looked up and looked towards Akihiro Kanou not far away.


    After a while.


    When Akihiro Kanou was resting alone, Kaneki Ken appeared silently behind him.


    Being aware of the abnormality, Akihiro Kanou looked back at Kaneki Ken and did not show a fearful attitude. He said with a smile: "What''s wrong? Finally, unable to bear?"


    Kaneki Ken was surprised. But soon he recovered his own somber face.


    Akihiro Kanou ignored him, each minding their own business said: "I am curious, why did you not do it before, but now you want to do it? Did you hear some news?"


    Kaneki Ken did not conceal: "Are there people that do better than you, in terms of transforming humans to ghouls?"


    "Oh? Are you talking about that CCG''s head ghoul researcher, Chigyou Kouitsu, right?" Akihiro Kanou was surprised, and then agreed, "It''s true. Chigyou Kouitsu really has innate talent in this regard. His sess rate is a lot taller than mine."


    Kaneki Ken''s pupils miniature.


    didn''t expect things turned out to be true.


    Then he started to feel more at ease

 Chapter 301: choice, union

    Chapter 301: choice, union


    Kaneki Ken: "What else do you have to say?"


    "Me?" Akihiro Kanou looked up at the sky, emotionally said, "There is nothing to say, his achievement can be regarded as fulfilling most of my ideals."


    Kaneki Ken probed: "Your ideal?"


    Akihiro Kanou knows what it means to be probed by Kaneki Ken.


    But he didn''t care.


    With a smile, looked towards Kaneki Ken, minding his own business said: "This world is bound by a twisted ''bird cage'', I want to destroy this ''bird cage'', and only ''one-eyed ghoul'' can be ''a ray of sunlight through the haze''."


    Finished.


    Kanou pulled out a gun from his pocket and muttered to himself: "If humans would use RC cells as medical research, not weapons... Maybe at the time, you wouldn''t have died..."


    The "you" in Akihiro Kanou''s mouth is not Kaneki Ken.


    It is when he visited and talked to the tomb of his mother in the original work before he died.


    Seeing Akihiro Kanou reaching in his pocket and pulled out the pistol. Kaneki Ken was a bit disdainful at first. But when Kaneki Ken saw Akihiro Kanou pointing his pistol at his temple, his mood became more solemn.


    Kaneki Ken: "What do you want to do? Do you really think you have the ability tomit suicide in front of me?"


    Akihiro Kanou pressed the hammer of the pistol and said, "If I were to give you a choice and lose a leg, you will have to walk on a prosthetic limb or undergo surgery in the future... How would you choose then?"


    This is the case.


    Kaneki Ken''s mood stretched taut at once.


    He recalled the original picture.


    Isn''t Akihiro Kanou implying his original wound? He remembered that his thigh was prated by Kagune. There is indeed a probability of being amputated...


    Don''t tell me..


    Is this the real purpose of Akihiro Kanou?


    Want to use the research for cures?


    While Kaneki Ken was still thinking about the meaning of Akihiro Kanou''s words, he heard the voice of Akihiro Kanou again: "You are my most sessful transformation. I hope you can change this twisted world."


    Immediately.


    Bang!


    Akihiro Kanou pulled the trigger.


    He copsed on the pool of blood.


    "What happened?"


    "Kaneki-sama, what happened?"


    The members of the Aogiri Tree who were rushed by the news were taken aback by the picture in front of them.


    But Kaneki Ken ignored them.


    Silently looks at Akihiro Kanou''s corpse, still thinking about the problems left by Akihiro Kanou in the end.


    Amputation... undergoing surgery... how would you choose at the time?


    If your family, friends, and people who value you most and you''re lying on your bed while living hanging by a thread, will you look at them and greet death, or will you undergo the transformation surgery and survive?


    Think again


    Kaneki Ken felt that this problem


    No answer.


    Even if he was given a chance to make a new choice in front of the amputation and receiving surgery, he would not dare to be 100% sure of himself at the time.


    Since there is no answer, then no longer think about it.


    As long as you change this damned world.


    There wille a day where humans will put the direction of research on medicine and cures.


    When the timees, people will naturally know what choice they should make.


    "Kaneki-sama, how could this be?!"


    "How could Dr. Kanou kill himself?"


    "If the leader knows, would the leader me him?"


    Obviously, ording to the situation at the scene, Akihiro Kanou was shot through his head and died. If Kaneki Ken wants to kill Akihiro Kanou, he wouldn''t need to do it so unnecessarily.


    Therefore, a group of Aogiri members now judge Akihiro Kanou as suicide.


    And Kaneki Ken never meant to answer their questions.


    Patted on the shoulder of the first person, instructed: "I still have things to do, you continue to escort Dr. Kanou''s equipment back to the base."


    Finished.


    Kaneki Ken turned around and left.


    A group of dumbfounded ghouls was left behind.


    ...


    After leaving from the death scene of Akihiro Kanou.


    Kaneki Ken unrelenting all the way to the ''old ce''. This so-called old ce is, of course, the stronghold in the Aogiri Tree raid.


    During his journey, Kaneki Ken also kept in touch with Amon Koutarou to confirm the matter.


    So as not to miss the opportunity to meet.


    Quickly.


    After a few days of hurrying.


    Kaneki Ken finally arrived here.


    And he has seen Amon Koutarou who has been waiting in the stronghold for a long time. After confirming that this is not a trap, Kaneki Ken went to meet Amon Koutarou.


    Kaneki Ken: "You''re so anxious to meet me, what did you find?"


    After a while.


    Kaneki Ken: "...You mean... a section of humanity that has been in control of a n for nearly 100 years?"


    Amon Koutarou did not conceal anything.


    Washuu n, a ghoul n, as the mastermind was revealed.


    Even Kaneki Ken in this life had already experienced many winds and waves, and was shocked by the news. He never imagined that such a ridiculous thing would happen in reality.


    The whole CCG is actually controlled by a n?


    Isn''t this ridiculous?


    The reality is cruel and it is regrettable that Amon Koutarou nodded to continue: "Yes, and we guess that their current n is to transform more human beings into ghouls and try to assimte humans. The consequences of this matter are really too serious. If a little careless"


    Immediately afterwards, Amon Koutarou talked about Li Yaoxiang''s remarks about the "heirloom country" and the prediction after the n failed.


    Kaneki Ken''s expression became more and more serious.


    But he still captured a key point in Amon Koutarou''s words.


    Kaneki Ken: "We?"


    Amon Koutarou paused, and then confessed: "Yes, more than one person knows this n now. My boss and my team also understood this n. In addition, we have tried to contact some trusted people and let them solve this problem together we have already discussed. Everyone agrees with your n and is willing to cooperate with you. But... There is a condition."


    Kaneki Ken: "What conditions?"


    Amon Koutarou: "There can be no more human beings to fall victim to this project. Since we want the summon dragon, we must absorb enough ''nutrients'', then our requirement is to directly kick Washuu n in their nest. Instead of human beings, we make them the nutrients for the dragon. Our two parties work together to deal with them."

 Chapter 302: Three major events, the container

    Chapter 302: Three major events, the container


    Kaneki Ken thought of the word to catch everything in one.


    He had to guard against the awful possibility, and when both sides suffer, they would be wiped out in one fell swoop.


    After thinking for a long time, Kaneki Ken replied: "If you want to cooperate, you can. But you have to be the first to deal with Washuu n. If I don''t see you, I won''t let my people do it."


    Amon Koutarou knows what Kaneki Ken is worried about. After a moment of hesitation, he responded: "This matter is not what I can do alone. I need to go back and discuss with them before I can give you the answer."


    Hearing this sentence.


    Kaneki Ken couldn''t help but sink.


    Regardless of whether Amon Koutarou has the idea ''to catch everything in one'', but one thing is for sure, Amon does have the idea of letting Kaneki''s people be cannon fodder.


    Otherwise, the fairer n will not be discussed in advance beforeing.


    [Darkening level:]


    75%


    78%


    Followed by.


    Amon Koutarou showed a lingering look again.


    Kaneki Ken looked in his eyes without urging.


    After hesitating for a while, Amon Koutarou finally said: "There is still a problem. Since your original n was to create a dragon. Then... Have you ever thought about how to solve the dragon container?"


    The problem in this regard.


    Kaneki Ken had thought about it.


    However, he did not have a suitable candidate.


    When he just wanted to start to talk, Amon Koutarou added a little nervously: "My boss said, if you voluntarily be this "dragon", then he can guarantee that he will try his best to save you after the event. The strength of my boss is very strong. Speaking of which, it will definitely be done. You... may wish to consider this suggestion."


    Kaneki Ken after hearing this, his heart sank again.


    The darkened face showed up unabashedly.


    These people are really uneasy


    It doesn''t matter if you want to push him out as a cannon fodder. Now that he is willing to be a monster? Verbal assurance that you will save him afterwards?


    Hehe, if you say it, will anyone believe it?


    Since this group of people is as selfish as the code of conduct, there is no need to be polite to them.


    Kaneki Ken: "You don''t have to persuade anymore. Think of the container solution yourself. You speak of good cooperation, yet you''re not paying anything, do you think that''s possible?"


    Amon Koutarou looked solemn and retorted: "We will do our best to cooperate with you."


    Kaneki Ken couldn''t help but sneered.


    A good cooperation, it''s really nice.


    Isn''t that the kind of goal they were about to deal with?


    If you want others to help solve the cancer in CCG, is it not something you should do to actively cooperate with others?


    Kaneki Ken said with a smile: "Even without your cooperation, as long as I let Washuu n transform arge number of human beings into ghouls, can I end up getting enough nutrients to cultivate a dragon? Doing this will not only save my energy. My people don''t have to make unnecessary sacrifices. Moreover, if the container is not yours, can you really be at ease? Not afraid that I will temporarily change the n and cooperate with Washuu n? If you haven''t even considered this point and are unwilling to pay any price, then I need to wonder if you really have the sincerity to cooperate..."


    [Darkening level:]


    79%


    81%


    See Kaneki Ken means nopromise.


    Amon Koutarou finally had to clenched the teeth and said: "I need to go back and discuss with the others. I will reply to you as soon as possible. Do you have any contact information that can let me contact you on my own initiative?"


    Kaneki Ken did not promise to give him new contact information.


    Just promised, will increase the number of contacts with him.


    The exchange is over.


    The two leave separately and returns to their home base.


    And in the process of their return.


    Three major event incidents also urred.


    The first thing was the team that was abandoned by Kaneki Ken. They were attacked. They robbed Kamishiro Rize along with the equipment that holds her.


    Needless to say, the culript who grabbed the absent-minded Rize is, of course, main viin of the series: Kichimura Washuu.


    When Kaneki Ken and Amon Koutarou were informed of the news, Rize had already been transferred to CCG as a supply for the "transformation surgery".


    The second thing is rted to Li Yaoxiang''s main body.


    Li Yaoxiang took the initiative to contact Arima Kishou, and actively told Arima Kishou about the ''Dragon'' n. But he didn''t tell Arima that their goal was the Washuu family.


    Therefore, Arima Kishou easily agree with this n, and is willing to fully assist this n.


    That''s why the equipment along with Kamishiro Rize is so easily mixed into CCG. If there is no secret help from Arima Kishou, it would not have been so easy to get past the predicament just by relying on the existing power of Kichimura Washuu.


    After all, the legend of ''dragon'' is clear to the Washuu n.


    They are impossible to guard against the ident of the dragon.


    So they certainly can''t tolerate someone copying their n''s bloodline inrge quantities.


    Otherwise, in original work, Kichimura Washuu does not need to unite with the ''clown'' to kill all the n before starting this ''dragon'' n. Firstly, he himself did not want to be a dragon. Second, in the future, he could not guide Kaneki Ken of original work to actively devour Washuu n.


    The third major event is the meeting between Arima Kishou and Yoshimura Eto.


    Arima Kishou tell Yoshimura Eto about the ''Dragon'' n.


    Yoshimura Eto tells Arima to take Kaneki Ken.


    After the exchange.


    Both parties agreed that there was not much time left for them.


    No longer hesitate.


    Kaneki Ken directly targeted their training goals.


    Be sure to rush Kaneki Ken into the most powerful ''one-eyed king'' before the appearance of ''Dragon''.


    Otherwise, after the lifespan of Arima Kishou reaches the limit, no one really has the ability to speak on behalf of the other party.


    When the timees, even if the n is sessful and the dragon summoned.


    The final result of the ghoul may only be eaten to death by humans and has no right to speak.


    So, the two nned a training n for Kaneki Ken.


    Be sure to improve Kaneki Ken''s strength as soon as possible in the short term.


    ...


    A few dayster.


    Amon Koutarou returned to CCG.


    Li Yaoxiang was informed of the content of his conversation with Kaneki Ken and the conditions proposed by Kaneki Ken.


    Li Yaoxiang almost agreed after one after another.


    Only the "container" matter, everyone cannot think of a good solution.


    Until the fifth day of Amon Koutarou''s return, he finally had thetest solution. Li Yaoxiang, Amon Koutarou, Mado Akira, and Takizawa Masahiro came to the ghoul research institute together on this day.


    Before entering the gate of the institute.


    Li Yaoxiang patted Amon Koutarou said by the shoulder: "Is it decided? You... now it''s toote to regret."


    Amon Koutarou shaking his head, his eyes firmly said: "Since no one is willing, let me be this volunteer. Compared to me, I think you have the ability to rescue me afterwards."


    Followed by.


    Several people watched Amon Koutarou finally walked into the operating room.

 Chapter 303: One-Eyed King

    Chapter 303: One-Eyed King


    After the operation ispleted.


    After one day and one night, Amon Koutarou finally woke up from the bed.


    The first thing he saw was Li Yaoxiang, Mado Akira, Takizawa Seidou, Kuroiwa Iwao, and Shinohara Yukinori, who was also wearing medical clothes, around his bed.


    Chigyou Kouitsu is also among them.


    Chigyou Kouitsu first start to talk: "How do you feel?"


    Amon Koutarou: "Fine. Just a little hungry..."


    Ground travel Chigyou Kouitsu: "Apart from being hungry, are there any other feelings?"


    Amon Koutarou felt a little, then shake his head.


    Chigyou Kouitsu: "It would be best if you didn''t feel it. This means that the operation was very sessful. Otherwise, you won''t feel the pain of the wound. It is estimated that the wound you operated on has now beenpletely recovered. You don''t have to worry about food. Our surgery will only control your within-the-body RC cells before 500-1000. As long as this amount is not exceeded, then you can eat normally. Let''s get used to it first. Later, I will tell the nurse to bring your favorite food."


    Finished.


    Proceed to Chigyou Kouitsu toward everyone nodded in the room, then left the room.


    What seemed most anxious was Shinohara Yukinori, who was also wearing a medical suit. Since thest time he was wounded by Kaneki Ken in the ghoul detention center, he is still recovering from injuries until now.


    Immediately after Chigyou Kouitsu left, he immediately asked: "Amon, how does it feel? Is there any difort? If it is not possible, then don''t force it. Let me, this old guy, go to the surgery."


    Shinohara Yukinori and Kuroiwa Iwao in the room, including Marude Itsuki who was not in the room, were also invited by Li Yaoxiang and the others to join the project.


    Originally these words were spoken from Amon Koutarou''s mouth, they both didn''t believe it.


    After all, no one can think of it, CCG will be controlled by a n.


    But when Li Yaoxiang also appeared in front of them, they had nothing more to say.


    Amon Koutarou may be young and arrogant, making a wrong judgment.


    But Li Yaoxiang''s ability and strength give them a feeling of not impudent everywhere.


    So, they epted Li Yaoxiang and the others'' statement and participated in the n.


    Li Yaoxiang was also happy to see this scene, so he had no ns to stop it.


    The reason why Marude Itsuki didn''t visit Amon Koutarou today is because they didn''t want to be too eye-catching to avoid arousing suspicion from Washuu n.


    Amon Koutarou shook his head, seemingly powerless said with a smile: "Shinohara-senpai, to be a dragon''s container, one needs a strong body. What do you do if you fail? What if our best efforts bes a waste?"


    Shinohara Yukinori just wanted to start to talk to rebut.


    But he remembered that he was still in his hospital clothes and had nothing to say.


    This is also the final decision made by everyone after weighing the pros and cons.


    So the 3 guys who wanted to die, then let the youngster of Amon Koutarou do this operation.


    Amon Koutarou shifted the topic and said: "Now the problem of the container has been solved. When can we start acting?"


    This is the case.


    The atmosphere at the scene was immediately dignified.


    Not only Mado Akira, Takizawa Masao, but also Kuroiwa Iwao and Shinohara Yukinori, all of them, then immediately turned their attention to Li Yaoxiang.


    Obviously, in this team.


    They have been led by Li Yaoxiang.


    Everything follows Li Yaoxiang''smand.


    Shinohara Yukinori and Kuroiwa Iwao then looked towards Li Yaoxiang together.


    Li Yaoxiang expression calmly said: "During youra, the one-eye mask contacted you once. We answered the phone and also told him your current status. After you recover, meet him again and we can start to discuss the relevant matters."


    Shinohara Yukinori: "Special ss Li Yaoxiang, are you sure? Is this a misunderstanding of this matter?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Even if I''m not sure, the n must be implemented. We have no way out. As for misunderstandings... When we get started, we will naturally know if we have misunderstood. If the guess is wrong, then we can unite and squash. For us, the loss is not great. Perhaps this is not fair to Washuu n. If they want to pursue it afterwards, I will bear all the responsibilities alone."


    Finished.


    The ward was still quiet.


    Everyone''s mood is a bit heavy, don''t know what to say.


    ...


    At the same time.


    In a certain stronghold of Aogiri Tree.


    After learning that Amon Koutarou voluntarily became a dragon''s container, Kaneki Ken''s doubts about whether Li Yaoxiang and the others really wanted to cooperate.


    Kaneki Ken, who knew that his strength and power were not enough topete with Li Yaoxiang and others.


    Choose to inform Yoshimura Eto of the final n.


    After learning about the n, Yoshimura Eto was so excited that the whole person trembles. She chose to help Kaneki Ken and the others, concealing any news about this n from Arima Kishou.


    After all, even her, it is unclear whether Arima Kishou will eventually be with the Washuu family or be with the ghoul side.


    Followed by.


    Yoshimura Eto wanted to mobilize the entire Aogiri tree to cooperate with Kaneki Ken, but of course it is impossible to hide from Tatara.


    Tatara is as they guessed, impossible to ept this n.


    Therefore, Tatara chose to work on Kaneki Ken directly in this stronghold.


    However, just when he had just be a ''Complete Body Kagune'', Yoshimura Eto also turned her Complete Body Kagune at the same time, cutting off Tatara from the back.


    The sudden scene not only made Tatara unbelievable, but even Kaneki Ken was surprised.


    The body was broken into two pieces of Tatara, but not dead yet.


    His eyes were full of doubts and unwillingness, firmly stared Yoshimura Eto.


    Kaneki Ken''s equally stunned looks at Yoshimura Etna''s gesture like a monster: "You..."


    Yoshimura Eto ignored the startled eyes of the two, and the huge head slowly turned away to show his true body. The madness of the expression, along with the tone of the speech, is also the same: "Hahahaha! As you can see, I am the rumored ''one-eyed king''. I am very interested in your n. But you are not strong enough! Eat! Eat him! If you don''t eat him, I will kill you, including everyone around you!"


    Kaneki Ken originally nned to withdraw from here. After hearing the threat from Yoshimura Eto, he stopped again. Expression grave looks at this monster in front of him.


    The head of the "One-eyed King" that melted, gradually froze.


    A rough voice said: "What''s the matter? You can''t bear it? If you can''t bear it, then you are not qualified to lead all the ghouls to change this world."


    Kaneki Ken narrowed his eyes.


    Soon walked over towards Tatara.


    After a while.


    Tatara''s screams resounded in this stronghold.


    [Darkening level:]


    84%


    86%

 Chapter 304: tit for tat, public identity

    Chapter 304: tit for tat, public identity


    A few dayster.


    The entire group came to the ''old ce'' again.


    This time it was not just Kaneki Ken and Amon Koutarou who met alone.


    Even Yoshimura Eto and Li Yaoxiang''s main body also appeared here.


    Seeing Li Yaoxiang''s an instant, Kaneki Ken''s expression was obviously somewhat abnormal. Li Yaoxiang did not forget to tease: "What''s wrong? You... know me?"


    It was still the familiar voice.


    Kaneki Ken can''t forget the ghoul investigator in front of him.


    This was the ghoul investigator who investigated his aunt''s case.


    Even though Li Yaoxiang now uses ''Transformation Jutsu'' and bes older, Kaneki Ken still recognizes him, and the situation at that time is vivid.


    Kaneki Ken: "No, no. You seem to be familiar to me, a bit simr. That''s why I''m panicking."


    Yoshimura Eto (whole body bandage): "La La La La ~ If it is meaningless, don''t have to say more, go straight to the topic."


    Amon Koutarou: "She is..."


    "She is one of the participants in this n." After that, Kaneki Ken looked towards Li Yaoxiang.


    Amon Koutarou was equally replied: "He is my boss. He''s also the leader of this operation."


    Followed by.


    Four people began to discuss matters rted to the action.


    But in fact, the whole process is almost Li Yaoxiang and Yoshimura Eto in giving tit for tat.


    Yoshimura Eto: "La La La La ~ Your Excellency thinks too much, right? You want us to do it first? That''s impossible. Who knows if you set a trap for us to step on?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Then, we will take the lead on the outer members. In this case, the Washuu can only be touched by you first. After all, so far, we are only guessing. We aren''t 100% sure whether they are a ghoul family."


    Yoshimura Eto: "Oh? If they''re not a ghoul family, will you turn against us?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "If not, the action will be cancelled naturally. When the n of the "dragon" is really found, it''s not toote to still act together."


    Yoshimura Eto: "Really? If so, then we might as well work directly with the n? Anyway, the result is also good for us, right?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Then either the fish dies or the splits will be fine. I will use my influence to use the full power of CCG to take the lead in destroying you. As for future problems, it will be countedter. I believe that mankind will always find a solution."


    The remarks on both sides are bing more and more bitter.


    The atmosphere at the scene also became more and more dignified.


    Until the end, it was Amon Koutarou and Kaneki Ken who came out to smooth the game, which ended the tit-for-tat between Li Yaoxiang and Yoshimura Eto.


    Amon Koutarou: "Okay, okay. Don''t argue about this matter anymore. We took the lead in dealing with the outer members, didn''t we also express our sincerity for cooperation? I hope you can understand our situation."


    Since Amon Koutarou voluntarily became a container.


    In fact, Kaneki Ken no longer doubted his sincerity.


    So he helped start to talk and said: "It is up to us to deal with it, no problem. But the checkpoints along the way, and the process of approaching our own..."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Don''t worry, we will be there for you along the way. They won''t find out about your arrival. You just do it."


    Yoshimura Eto: "It''s better not to let me know that you are ying tricks, otherwise, after sessfully withdrawing, I will instruct my people to kill and kill in the busy city."


    The battle n was finalized, and the two sides broke up.


    ...


    After leaving the ''old ce''.


    On the way back, Yoshimura Eto separated from Kaneki Ken for a while.


    The news that the writer Takatsuki Sen is a ghoul came from the outside world.


    Later, Yoshimura Eto didn''t even bother to tie up the bandage, so she went back to Kaneki Ken unscrupulously.


    Kaneki Ken: "You are..."


    Yoshimura Eto: "It''s me--~ what''s wrong? The writer you''ve always liked turned out to be a ghoul, and she''s still the one-eyed owl who controls the entire Aogiri tree. You can''t ept this?"


    Kaneki Ken did not answer: "Why do you want to do this?"


    Yoshimura Eto: "My purpose is the same as yours, to change the status quo of the ghoul. Isn''t it good now? People finally feel clearly that the ghoul is also living the same life as them. This will greatly change the human perception of the ghouls. There will also be a lot of help for your future ns."


    Kaneki Ken: "Since you want to change the human''s view of the ghoul, why do you still lead the Aogiri tree and act in the outside world?"


    Yoshimura Eto: "If you want to be a hero, then there should be someone as the wicked person? When everyone is afraid of the one-eyed owl, hates the one-eyed owl, and can''t do anything about the one-eyed owl. Come out and solve the dream demon of the Aogiri tree for everyone. Wouldn''t the future n be smoother? Moreover, I put all the hatred of humanity together at once. Wouldn''t it be easier for you to solve itter?"


    Kaneki Ken didn''t speak again.


    He didn''t expect the leader of Aogiri tree to still have thisyer of purpose behind...


    A few dayster.


    Two people returned to downtown.


    Kaneki Ken proposed to separate for a while. He wanted to go back to his base and say goodbye to his friends.


    Yoshimura Eto took the initiative to ask: "Can I go back to your base with you?"


    Kaneki Ken originally did not want to agree.


    But after thinking about it, this stronghold was actually exposed to Yoshimura Eto early in the morning, so he didn''t refuse it. Yoshimura Eto did just visit, and did not make any special moves.


    Even after chatting for a while, and signing a name for the young fan Fueguchi Hinami.


    She took the initiative to leave here.


    Leave space for Kaneki Ken to get along with hispanions.


    It''s just that when Kaneki Ken and the others talked about rted ns, suddenly rumbling loud noise came.


    Yoshimura Eto, with her "one-eyed owl" shell, hit the ceiling and broke into the base of Kaneki Ken and the others.


    Kaneki Ken was terrified and angry, and just when he wanted to question ''One-eyed Owl'' had slowly had slowly melted away, Yoshimura Eto slipped out from the inside full of scars.


    The anger is gone.


    What transformed into is full of doubts.


    Kaneki Ken stepped forward and helped Yoshimura Eto: "What''s going on?"


    Yoshimura Eto was dying: "Let your people escape from here. And... and... Washuu family, here. There is no time, eat my Kagune, and increase your strength..."


    All the people present were all there.


    Then follow the instructions of Kaneki Ken and immediately withdraw here.


    Kaneki Ken stayed behind and devoured the body of the one-eyed owl, Yoshimura Eto...

 Chapter 305: The highest combat power, games

    Chapter 305: The highestbat power, games


    Kaneki Ken took the initiative to condense it while swallowing it. The four centipede-like Kagune slowly spread out.


    The whole body is gradually wrapped up and down by the newly-grown Kagune, forming aplete set of armor. There is a tendency to develop towards the "Complete Body".


    Even the original centipede shape has some changes.


    Be more solid.


    The tentacles be straight, longer, and sharper.


    During this period, the man who mentioned n cultivation in the mouth of Yoshimura Eto didn''t appear.


    It wasn''t until the shell of ''One-eyed Owl'' was about to be swallowed up, that there was one more person behind Kaneki Ken.


    Theing person is the Arima Kishou.


    And all of this, including Yoshimura Eto''s previous public identity, including today''s serious injury, and the emergence of Arima Kishou, are all a major drama led by Yoshimura Eto and Arima.


    In order to elerate the improvement of Kaneki Ken''s strength.


    Arima Kishou looked at the environment around him and said deliberately: "Did the others retreat first? Then I''ll solve you first, then go chase them."


    In original work, Kaneki Ken lost his memory and stayed in CCG for a long time, so Arima Kishou have time to cultivate Kaneki Ken. But the timeline of this life has beenpletely disrupted by Li Yaoxiang.


    Seeing that the n was about to start, they knew they didn''t have much time.


    So this time they have made up their minds. In any case, they must make Kaneki Ken the most powerful ''king'' before the n starts.


    If Kaneki Ken cannot defeat Arima Kishou, then all Kaneki Ken''spanions will be captured.


    Stimte Kaneki Ken.


    Until Kaneki Ken defeated Arima Kishou.


    After hearing the sound, Kaneki Ken stopped the swallowing motion in his hand, stood up, and turned his back to Arima Kishou.


    Arima Kishou''s calm face seemed puzzled.


    He did not understand why Yoshimura Eto wanted to involve himself with Washuu n.


    But in the end, he chose to act ording to n.


    Arima Kishou: "I''m just a ghoul investigator who''s tasked with expelling ghouls."


    Kaneki Ken from his pocket.


    Pull out the mask.


    Put on the mask.


    Then he turned around and looked directly at Arima Kishou.


    Did not speak.


    ''Click!'' A crunch.


    Arima turned the suitcase in his hand into a SSS-Rank Arata built by Yoshimura''s Ukaku. Beforeing, he had heard from the mouth of Yoshimura Eto that Kaneki Ken''sbat skills were very good.


    So there is no intention of keeping hands.


    When Arata was released an instant, Arima Kishou immediately rushed to the other side.


    Fierce fighting together.


    It is a pity that the two titles of "Undefeated Myth" and "White Shinigami" have been rumored for so long, but they are not worthy of fame.


    At this time, Kaneki Ken did not evolve into the final form.


    He has not yet adapted to the newly acquired speed and strength.


    Of course, it is impossible to defeat the highestbat power in the early and middle stages of the ghoul world so easily, Arima Kishou.


    Even Kaneki Ken in this life has the "Sixty-Four Palms Eight Trigram" taught by Li Yaoxiang, as well as "Konoha''s White Fang sword art", so that Kaneki Ken can put a lot of pressure on Arima Kishou through these two fighting skills.


    However, after Arima was familiar with Kaneki Ken''s routines, he finally defeated Kaneki Ken with his years of fighting experience and superiority in weapons.


    Knocked Kaneki unconscious.


    After the battle.


    Yoshimura Eto, who was dying, stood up casually.


    The shell of ''One-eyed Owl'' was engulfed, and her within-the-body''s RC cells were greatly reduced, which was a great loss of strength, but this was not enough to make her die.


    Just like original work.


    Even though she also designed Kaneki Ken to devour her ''Kakuja'', she didn''t die.


    Yoshimura Eto: "How? Strength is good?"


    Arima nominated with Yoshimura Eto''s statement.


    Arima Kishou: "It''s really good, but it''s not enough. He''s not the man''s opponent..."


    Yoshimura Eto: "That man... I have seen him too. I don''t feel anything special, he is as powerful as you said?"


    The ''man'' they talked about is of course Li Yaoxiang.


    They want to let the two parties be qualified to contend with the human chamber and upy the right to speak.


    In the mind of Arima, the strength cannot be worse than Li Yaoxiang at least.


    Of course, this is also because he does not know the real strength of Li Yaoxiang, otherwise he will not have such a naive thought.


    Arima Kishou nod and will not discuss this topic: "What about his partners? Haven''t you lost their traces?"


    Yoshimura Eto: "Rx, my people are already following, you should go now."


    ...


    A few hourster.


    When Kaneki Ken woke up again, the picture that came into view was already the Kirishima Touka entire group, including Yoshimura Eto, all of them were detained in a cage and transferred to another safe base. Arima was less injured. This is an embarrassment.


    Arima Kishou will sit leisurely not far from Kaneki Ken, drinking coffee and reading novels.


    Arima Kishou: "Awake?"


    Kaneki Ken was not restrained.


    He nced at the situation of Kirishima Touka''s entire group and said angrily: "What the hell do you want?! Why didn''t you kill me directly?!"


    Arima Kishou close the half-read novel, looked towards Kaneki Ken, expression calmly said: "I haven''t met an opponent like you in a long time. I feel that you now haven''t reached the limit and I hope to fight with you again to improve myself."


    "Kaneki, leave us alone! You run away!"


    "Avenge us tenfold and a hundredfold in the future!"


    The shout of Kirishima Touka''s entire group came from the cage.


    Kaneki Ken had an inexhaustible anger in his heart.


    This is being teased as a toy.


    He looked at Arima Kishou, and at Kirishima Touka entire group.


    Arima Kishou: "Don''t look at them, they have already been injected with suppressant fluid by me, and they will not be able to use Kagune for a short time, nor able to use restore regeneration ability. If you run away, I will kill them all. If you can''t beat me, I will also kill them all. I wasted so much time, let''s fight directly.


    After a while.


    ''boom!''


    Kaneki Ken, who had just woken up, was beaten by Arima Kishou and flew out, vomiting blood.


    Arima Kishou will frowned and said: "Your strength hasn''t grown much? If your strength is still progressing so slowly, I''m sorry. I don''t have so much time to spend with you."


    Kaneki Ken wiped the corners of his mouth with clenched teeth: "I''m going out to hunt for food to replenish my consumption."


    Arima Kishou: "But my patience is limited. If you don''te back within three hours, I will kill them all on the spot, then go after you and end this game."

 Chapter 306: The Birth of the Black Reaper

    Chapter 306: The Birth of the ck Reaper


    After leaving this new stronghold.


    Kaneki Ken''s face was gloomy, and he gritted his teeth in his mind: "How many ghouls are there nearby, and where are they? There is a way to find them all here, right?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Yes."


    Kaneki Ken: "Then, start with the closest one!"


    After a while.


    In an alley.


    A ghoul copsed on the pool of blood.


    Kaneki Ken solved him, and after eating his Kagune, he immediately calmed down a lot. In fact, he can let go of this ghoul, but it is enough to feed on this ghoul''s Kagune.


    This is not going to kill that ghoul.


    Think about it.


    This is not the 20th district.


    There is no support station like Anteiku coffee shop.


    I devoured this ghoul''s Kagune myself, this ghoul of want to restore the state, won''t he also want to ''supplement nutrition''? To avoid having too many people sacrifice, Kaneki Ken and solved this problem.


    Feeling the strength of his within-the-body, after a little enhancement, he said, "You have a way to extend my exercise time?"


    The so-called ''extended time''.


    In fact, it was the state that Li Yaoxiang pulled Kaneki Ken into Tsukuyomi World.


    Even though Kaneki Ken didn''t understand what Genjutsu is or Tsukuyomi, he still clearly felt some differences when he entered Tsukuyomi many times.


    For example, if you exercise 5-600 times in the past, it is dawn and you need to wake up.


    After entering Tsukuyomi, exercise a gradual 1000 times, and the time is also very sufficient.


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t intend to conceal it, but right should be his special ability. Anyway, even if Kaneki Ken is really going to explore this consciousness space, there is no reason to explore it.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Yes."


    With Li Yaoxiang''s positive answer.


    In the next time.


    Kaneki Ken has been spent in hunting and exercise.


    Every 3 hours, Kaneki will go back once.


    After losing the battle, he went on hunting and exercising.


    After 2 days


    Tsukuyomi World.


    Eight palms!


    Sixteen palms!


    Thirty-two palms!


    Sixty-four palms!


    Cooperating with Kagune''s attack, Kaneki Ken sessfully caught up with the speed Li Yaoxiang demonstrated to him. 5 seconds, just 5 seconds toplete a set of 64.


    Twelve palms per second on average.


    The reason why the progress will be so fast is also closely rted to the rapid growth of his within-the-body RC cells.


    At this time, Kagune is no longer in centipede form.


    Instead, it is more like his final form in original work, "Angel Form".


    His Kagune is a bit like a cross with one handle after another, and a bit like a giant sword with one handle after another.


    After ying a whole set of palm techniques, using Transformation Jutsu, Li Yaoxiang who looked like Kaneki Ken, stood at a short distance at this time and said, "It''s almost 3 hours. Go back."


    The words are heard.


    But Kaneki Ken never meant to put Kagune away.


    He expressed his expression and rushed towards Li Yaoxiang.


    Immediately afterwards, it was ''Sixty-Four Palms Eight Trigrams'' plus Kagune, whounched an all-out attack against Li Yaoxiang.


    After a while.


    A series of palms are finished.


    But Li Yaoxiang was still standing there intact.


    Kaneki Ken said solemnly: "How strong are you truly are? In this world, are there stronger people than you?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Is there anyone stronger than me, I don''t know. But here is my exclusive space, no one can beat me here. Don''t think too much. But don''t me me for not reminding you that time is running out of time"


    Kaneki Ken looks directly at this Li Yaoxiang who looks exactly the same as himself.


    Did not speak.


    Kagune slowly retracted.


    ...


    After a while.


    stronghold.


    Arima will still keep the calm appearance, drinking coffee and reading novels.


    After reading thest line, he closed the novel.


    He looked at the time on my watch.


    Frowning slightly.


    Three hours have passed  but Kaneki Ken has not returned.


    He nced at the cage holding the Kirishima Touka entire group. Perceiving the Kirishima Touka entire group of his eyes, even if he didn''t speak, he probably guessed what was going on.


    Banjou Kazuichi first shouted.


    "Has time passed? Oh, kill me! Kaneki will note back! At his speed of progress, he''ll soon be able to avenge us and kill you!"


    Arima was still silent for a moment.


    No hands-on.


    Open the book again and continue to drink tea to read.


    At this time, Kaneki Ken''s voice finally sounded in his ear: "Why didn''t you do it? Didn''t you say that after 3 hours, you would kill them?"


    Yes.


    In fact, Kaneki Ken has long been hidden in the vicinity, silently paying attention to everything here.


    What happened in the past few days is really abnormal.


    He was forced to have doubts about it.


    Before ending this game, he wanted to probe.


    Just as expected.


    The result of to probe is as he guessed, and Arima Kishou simply does not mean to do it.


    Arima will put down the book, stand up, start Arata, and walk towards Kaneki Ken, while expressionlessly said: "You''re back? Come back, let''s start."


    Kaneki Ken made no move.


    Combining the anomalies before Yoshimura Eto, Kaneki Ken actually had some spections in his heart.


    "You won''t say? It doesn''t matter if you don''t say it. I will let you participants know that my destiny is not something that you can do whatever you want."


    Finished-speaking, Kaneki Ken nced at Yoshimura Eto in the cage.


    Yoshimura Eto froze for a moment, then smiled cheekly at Kaneki Ken.


    Followed by.


    While looking back at General Arima, it changed into his strongest form now.


    Looking at that imposing-manner some magnificent ''Cross'' ''Big Sword'' Kakuja, Arima Kishou will disable to bear and praised: "The speed of your progress makes me feel very surprised."


    The current situation of 2 people haspletely changed from what it was.


    The previous Arima Kishou is like a ruler. Waiting for the challenger Kaneki Ken to challenge him.


    But now, Arima Kishou has instead turned into a challenger and took the initiative to charge at Kaneki Ken.


    In these 2 days, Kaneki Ken''s progress, he also has a look. He has already felt that this will be hisst battle. just as expected, after fighting for a while.


    This time it was Arima Kishou''s turn to present the scene where Kaneki Ken was defeated by him.


    He was knocked out by Kaneki Ken and flew out.


    Even SSS-Rank Arata was broken in half by Ken Kaneki on the spot.


    Spit up a lot of blood.


    From beginning to end, there is no expression.


    Just watched Kaneki Ken walk towards him step by step.


    Just when Kaneki Ken''s ''Cross'' Kagune improved and wanted to pierce Arima Kishou''s head, and ended his life, Yoshimura Eto''s voice sounded at this time: "Don''t kill him!"

 Chapter 307: Plans have changed, act in advance

    Chapter 307: ns have changed, act in advance


    Kaneki Ken said with a bad face: "What''s the matter? Until now, you still want to protect him? Do you think it is possible?"


    Kaneki Ken did not dismantle the partnership between two people.


    This means nothing to him.


    If it were not to see that Yoshimura Eto sacrificed herself, maybe he would not even let Yoshimura Eto go. These self-righteous ghouls all want to manipte his fate.


    He felt like a string puppet being teased.


    Even if the two of them are in front of them, the cooperation is to change the status quo of the ghouls, but this is not a result that Kaneki Ken can tolerate. It''s their business that they want to change. Even if everyone has the same goal, it does not mean that they can impose everything on him!


    Things have reached such a point.


    Whether it is Yoshimura Eto or Arima Kishou, in fact, he does not care about his life and death.


    Yoshimura Eto stopped Kaneki Ken, not because she wanted to keep Arima Kishou alive.


    Yoshimura Eto: "The n is about to start. He is a high level in CCG and one of the most important characters of Washuu n. If you kill him now, it will definitely cause chaos. This is not good for the next action."


    Kaneki Ken thought for a moment.


    Kagune was retracted.


    coldly said: "Even if you don''t kill him, it''s impossible to let him go back. He''s disappeared for a while and haven''t contacted the outside world; wouldn''t the result be the same?"


    Yoshimura Eto: "Not the same, he keep in touch with the outside world."


    Kaneki Ken nced at Arima Kishou: "Will he cooperate?"


    Yoshimura Eto: "He will definitely cooperate!"


    Silence for a moment.


    Stop talking.


    Kaneki Ken walked to the position where Arima Kishou was sitting, picked up the key, and rescued everyone in the cage. After everyone was rescued, it was one after another, they thanked Kaneki Ken one by one.


    Thank you Kaneki Ken for not abandoning them.


    Banjou Kazuichi''s expression excited: "Boss! I know you will not leave us behind!"


    The couple Fueguchi, Ryoko and Koichi gave a bow to Kaneki Ken: "Thank you."


    Shiguchi Hiroshi rushed up and gave Kaneki Ken a hug: "Kaneki big brother, thank you!"


    Kirishima Ayato stared at Kaneki Ken, coldly snorted, and turned his head away without speaking.


    After thanking everyone one after another, in Kaneki Ken''s eyes, there was only Kirishima Touka''s expression standing there in aplicated way. For a moment, she didn''t know what to say.


    Without waiting for her to speak, Kaneki Ken hugged her in his arms and appeased: "Don''t worry, things will end soon."


    Kirishima Touka was shocked.


    It seems a bit stiff.


    After hearing this sentence, she felt soft and leaned on Kaneki Ken''s shoulder with confidence: "I was waiting for you..."


    After a while.


    Kaneki Ken let go of Kirishima Touka and turned to look towards Yoshimura Eto: "It''s toote, I don''t want to destroy our n because of ''him''. I want to start the n in advance, how long it will take before we can convene everyone?"


    The ''he'' in Kaneki Ken''s mouth is Arima Kishou.


    Yoshimura Eto: "5 days. The fastest is 5 days, our people can rush to the destination."


    Think for a while.


    Kaneki Ken threw the "pressing fluid" remaining on the table to Yoshimura Eto, saying: "Since you say he will definitely cooperate, I will leave it to you. Help him inject the ''suppressing fluid'', and you will stay here to guard him. In terms of operations, it is enough for me tomand."


    Yoshimura Eto paid so much for this n.


    Kaneki Ken believes that she really wants this n to seed.


    Not worry that Yoshimura Eto betrayed him.


    So simply handed over Arima Kishou to her.


    Even if there was an ident, at least the one who died would not be his.


    After receiving the ''suppressing fluid'', Yoshimura Eto did not speak. Following Kaneki Ken''s meaning, he went to help Arima to inject the ''suppressing fluid'' and locked him in the cage.


    During the injection, Arima Kishou couldn''t help but ask, "...Are you hiding something from me?"


    Yoshimura Eto: "You only need to know that our ultimate goal is the same."


    Seeing that the cage was locked, Kaneki Ken took out his phone and dialed Amon Koutarou.


    Amon Koutarou: "Hello?"


    Kaneki Ken: "The n has changed, something unexpected happened and the n needs to be started in advance."


    "" Amon Koutarou, "Yes, when are you ready?"


    Kaneki Ken: "5 days. After 5 days, my people will rush to the arranged ce."


    Amon Koutarou: "Okay, then 5 days."


    Toot, Toot, Toot, Toot.


    The call is finished.


    Kaneki Ken and Kirishima Touka entire group moved to a new base.


    Even if there is really no situation with Arima Kishou, but this is the ce where Arima prepared, after all, Kaneki Ken was still worried about leaving Kirishima Touka entire group here.


    ...


    5 dayster.


    The n is officiallyunched.


    Ghoul side.


    The members of the Aogiri Tree all rushed to the base of Washuu n from all regions. The unimpeded passage along the way is due to the secret operations of Li Yaoxiang and the others.


    In the new base.


    After saying goodbye to Kirishima Touka''s entire group, Kaneki Ken also boarded the truck and set off towards Washuu n Base.


    However, on the way to the n base, the truck stopped.


    Kirishima Ayato led a group of Aogiri tree members and chose to act separately from Kaneki Ken here.


    Just before getting off, Kaneki Ken stopped Kirishima Ayato: "Be careful"


    At such a moment, the Kirishima Ayato, which has always been indifferent, no longer pretends to be arrogant: "Rx, you have attracted the attention of most people, I won''t have anything to do there."


    Kirishima Ayato just turned around and got off and left.


    His goal is the ghoul research institute.


    He wants to save his father, Kirishima.


    This is a n that Kaneki and others did not tell to the human side. If the human side really turns back in the end, then at least their actions this time are not for nothing.


    Watching the back view of Kirishima''s departure, Kaneki Ken shouted, "Drive!"


    Immediately, he slowly put on his mask.


    ...


    And at the same time each side has its own actions.


    CCG has also undergone tremendous changes here.


    All the battle strengths of CCG are now gathered in the 20th Ward. The reason why such a situation urs is that we have to talk about it 5 days ago.


    After learning that Kaneki Ken should start the n ahead of time.


    Li Yaoxiang sold Yoshimura the same day.


    Of course, the buyer here is just for Washuu n. In fact, this is a n that Li Yaoxiang and Yoshimura negotiated in advance.


    The purpose is to attract most of the battle strength of CCG.


    So that Kaneki Ken can get there more easily.


    Facts have proved that their n is very sessful. Otherwise, the current within 100 miles of Anteiku coffee shop would not have been very quiet...

 Chapter 308: The brain circuit of a lunatic, the end of the king

    Chapter 308: The brain circuit of a lunatic, the end of the king


    When everyone is in their ce and carrying out the tasks they are responsible for, the scene returns to Arima Kishou and Yoshimura Eto.


    Arima, who was imprisoned in a cage and injected with a suppressant fluid, suffered from the same injuries as five days ago, and has not been repaired at all.


    But these are not the same thing for his time is limited person.


    He moved towards Yoshimura Eto coldly outside the cage said: "Now their n has beenunched? Even if I want to change something, I can''t catch up. Shouldn''t you tell me the answer?"


    These 5 days.


    Arima Kishou just cooperate with them exactly as Yoshimura Eto said and made his disappearance reasonable.


    Yoshimura Eto: "In CCG, there are already many people who know and Washuu family."


    Arima Kishou became gloomy with the original calm expression: ""


    Yoshimura Eto ignored him and continued: "Didn''t we say before that our n was to summon the dragon and use the power of dragon to resolve the grievances between humans and ghouls? The human side has agreed. But they have a condition that the nutrients of the dragon must be reced by Washuu." Yoshimura Eto nced at Arima Kishou: "Don''t look at me like this too. Isn''t this the result we want to see in the past ten years? You should be very clear in your heart that as long as the Washuu still exists, they will not be able to make this n a sess. It was hard to wait for a suitable king. It is precisely at this time that human beings are willing to stand with us. Are you willing to give up other ghouls in order to be with the Washuu family?


    From beginning to end, Arima Kishou not respond.


    Even if he wanted to stop it, it was toote.


    He was toote to stop it.


    Followed by.


    The atmosphere at the scene returned to a quiet atmosphere.


    Two people no longer speak.


    But when two people werepletely absorbed in their minds, and they were still thinking, the base suddenly sounded an echo that sounded very annoying: "Yoyo, see what I found? Look at what I found."


    In the shadow of the base, a silhouette appeared.


    Kichimura Washuu is walking casually in the direction of two people.


    In the original work, the final big boss, Kichimura Washuu, is really strange, he has both the necessary IQ and intelligence to strategize everything, otherwise all the influence in original work will not be under his palm.


    And he in this life.


    In fact, even without the help of Arima Kishou, he is confident that he can secretly rece the "Kamishiro Matasaka" with the "surgical offerings" in ghoul research institute.


    It''s also because of Arima Kishou''s acting unnecessarily.


    It caused things to go too smoothly, so he noticed the clue.


    Start to pay attention to everything around.


    This is why he gradually discovered everyone''s purpose from the traces.


    But he didn''t mean to stop them at all, because even without Kaneki Ken and the others'' n, he had originally nned to unite with the clowns, and kill Washuu n.


    Even without Kaneki Ken''s n, he also ns to create a dragon.


    Now that someone has made him realize this n, why not do it?


    Yoshimura Eto looked at him with a gloomy face: "Why are you here?"


    Being a lunatic, Yoshimura Eto actually controls the information of Kichimura Washuu. It''s not that no one found out what Kichimura Washuu was doing in the dark.


    Yoshimura Eto was also one of the people who noticed the clue.


    However, before this, Kichimura Washuu never showed his true strength, out of confidence in his strength, at that time, Yoshimura Eto, simply did not take Kichimura Washuu seriously.


    Just treat Kichimura Washuu as a clown.


    However...


    It is different now.


    Arima Kishou is injured and injected with suppressant.


    The RC cells of within-her-body have been greatly reduced, and her strength has dropped greatly. She is not sure whether she herself is the opponent of the clown in front of her.


    She is not afraid of death.


    What she worried about was that the appearance of this clown would destroy the whole n, causing Kaneki Ken and the others to fall short.


    Kichimura Washuu: "''Why am I here''? Hahahaha, ''why am I here''? It should be me asking you, why are you, the second generation ''king'' here? You have been working secretly for so many years. It''s your fault for quietly implementing such an interesting n and not letting them y."


    Yoshimura Eto did not reply.


    Directly transform her Kagune.


    Want to kill this person on the spot.


    It''s a pity that now she, within-the-body''s RC cells, is only enough to make her into a state of half-Kagune. Kichimura Washuu didn''t even have to y Kagune, but with his own fighting skills plus a Quinque, within a few rounds, Yoshimura Eto was beaten.


    Oh! There was a loud noise.


    Yoshimura Eto hit the cage all over and vomited blood in the end.


    Yoshimura Eto: "What the hell... do you want?"


    Kichimura Washuu threw away the weapon in his hand very contemptuously, took out a handkerchief from his pocket gracefully, wiped his hands, shrugged and said, "It''s okay. Since you don''t let me participate, I will take the initiative to participate~. Now, of course, the more chaotic the more interesting! I am also worried that you will ruin this fun ~~. So... Please go to hell."


    Kichimura Washuu finally showed off his Kagune. There is no need for him to transform into the strongest Complete Body. Only with Kagune that he has shown now has already made Yoshimura Eto and Arima feel his strength!


    Shua! Sky-splitting sound.


    Wait for Yoshimura Eto and Arima to respond.


    Kagune had already crossed the necks of both of them at the same time.


    Finally, he even cut off the cage.


    So far


    Yoshimura Eto-die!


    Arima Kishou-die!


    ...


    At the same time.


    What happened in the base.


    Of course Kaneki Ken will know.


    At this time, he was sitting on the truck. When the truck reached a certain location, it stopped. All members of the Aogiri Tree got off the bus and got on another car.


    And the driver of the other car was Amon Koutarou who had been waiting here for a long time.


    Different from the mission of Li Yaoxiang and the others.


    His mission is to devour and Washuu n''s Kagune, bing a dragon''s container.


    So he had to act with Ken Kaneki and others.


    After seeing Amon Koutarou, Kaneki Ken didn''t know what to say. The person in front of him really made him feel admired.


    In order to change this distorted world, he was actually willing to sacrifice to this point.


    After a moment of consideration, Kaneki Ken will no longer hold back and sincerely said: "I want to promise that I will definitely find a way to rescue you after this is done."


    Amon Koutarou: "Thank you. However, I also believe that my boss will not let me down." Two people nced at each other, and Amon Koutarou reminded: "Let your people put on our uniforms immediately. With your outfit, it''d be impossible to pass and Washuu n territory."


    Aogiri tree members in the car, including Kaneki Ken started to put on CCG clothes that Amon Koutarou had already prepared.

 Chapter 309: My Instinct is The Evidence

    Chapter 309: My Instinct is The Evidence


    At the same time.


    When everyone is carrying out their ns in an orderly manner, in the 20th Ward, the CCG party that has already been prepared, but still no movement.


    The boss behind the scene, Washuu Yoshitoki, walked to Li Yaoxiang''s side and couldn''t help asking: "Isn''t everything ready? Why not order an attack? Something''s wrong?"


    Li Yaoxiang at this time was sitting in the surveince car.


    Drinking tea while staring at the monitor on the car.


    Standing beside him were some special investigators such as Kuroiwa Iwao, Marude Itsuki, and Shinohara Yukinori who insisted on being discharged. It''s just that when they saw Washuu Yoshitoki in the car, they took the initiative to retreat to the side to show their respect.


    Li Yaoxiang turned his back to Washuu Yoshitoki, and did not even turn his head, acting very perfunctory: "The time is not ripe, wait a minute."


    The expression of Washuu Yoshitoki gradually became a little impatient.


    Since the start of the action of "encircling and suppressing one-eyed owl", he always felt something was wrong, but he couldn''t tell what was wrong. The whole person always felt ill-at-ease.


    Today, Li Yaoxiang responds to him with such a perfunctory attitude, which makes him feel even more unusual.


    He nced at Kuroiwa Iwao, Shinohara Yukinori, Marude Itsuki, coldly said: "Do you think so too?"


    They nced at each other, then bowed their heads slightly and said, "Yes, Director."


    Washuu Yoshitoki''s eyes slightly narrowed, no longer entangled, turned and left the box.


    After leaving the box, he came alone to a more secluded ce, took out his mobile phone, and tried to call Arima Kishou. The result is...


    ''The number you dialed is temporarily unavable, please try againter.''


    ''Beep, beep, beep, beep.''


    This time.


    Between his brows, he wrinkled tighter.


    Throughout the CCG, to say who he trusts the most, it must be Arima no doubt.


    After all, Arima Kishou will not only cultivate them carefully with Washuu n, but also, every time they are assigned to Arima Kishou, they will never let them down.


    can...


    Such a loyal subordinate who has performed well and who has always been ountable has now lost contact...


    This made him feel even more heartbroken.


    Think for a moment.


    He put away his phone and walked back to thepartment.


    Ignoring the two officers who were guarding the car, he pulled the car door directly and walked in.


    And instructed: "Special Officer Li Yaoxiang, wait, I have reason to suspect that you have an undisclosed connection with the ghouls. Before the truth of the matter has been investigated, I will temporarily revoke all your current positions. From now on, the scene will be under my solemand. Special Officer Kuroiwa, Special Officer Shinohara, Special Officer Marude. The next action, you only need to act in ordance with my instructions. Immediately let all the troops take their positions and prepare to attack at any time."


    Kuroiwa Iwao, Shinohara Yukinori, Marude Itsuki; the three people, you look at me, I look at you, they have no action, even Li Yaoxiang didn''t take his words seriously and continue to drink tea while watching the monitor screen.


    Seeing this, Washuu Yoshitoki''s heart is now sinking.


    Seeing winds and waves, he has never been surprised, and he has to be anxious, showing some lost self-control: "Okay! It''s you who rebels!"


    Finished speaking.


    He went straight out of the carriage.


    The crowd moved around towards shouted: "From now on, the scene will be directly under mymand! Where are the captains of the various troops? Come and report to me now!"


    The atmosphere was silent.


    The nearby officials... did not care about Washuu Yoshitoki.


    Even the frontline troops, when they heard such shouts from the rear, not knowing what to do.


    At this time, Li Yaoxiang took the lead and walked out of the carriage along with the three people Kuroiwa Iwao, Shinohara Yukinori, and Marude Itsuki. Li Yaoxiang also opened an umbre, covering the sun that was too violent today.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Don''t waste your saliva. It''s all our people here, they can''t possibly obey yourmand."


    Washuu Yoshitoki''s expression gloomed: "What do you mean? Are you nning to unite and rebel?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Rebellion? No no no, we are just expelling the ghouls. Isn''t it normal for humans to expel the ghoul? Isn''t it the same thing that you and the CCG led by Washuu n have been doing this all these years?"


    Washuu Yoshitoki: "So... the object you are expelling today is me? I am a direct member of the Washuu n. You even suspected that I am a ghoul, don''t you think this is a very ridiculous thing, Li Yaoxiang?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "It would be absurd if you are the only one in the entire Washuu family who is a ghoul. Whatever what Washuu n is, you guys also founded CCG, it''s impossible to distinguish who''s a ghoul and who''s not. But... If... The whole and Washuu n are all ghouls... It''s no surprise then that you''re a ghoul."


    Half barely fell.


    The atmosphere at the scene immediately became very dignified.


    The officials around me actually didn''t understand the ns of Li Yaoxiang and others. They were just repeatedly told by their trusted superiors before the action. After the action started, no matter what happened on the scene, don''t obey their order.


    The people who can work for CCG in the frontline, who is not well-trained?


    So they didn''t ask too much at all, just felt a little strange, why today''s actions always feel mysterious and secretive?


    But no matter how much they thought about it, they could never have imagined such a twisted and bizarre oue.


    The scene is not only just Yoshitoki, but the entire n.


    After hearing Li Yaoxiang''s remark, they all separated from these people a good distance, forming a circle of encirclement. If you look down from a high altitude, you can see that almost every unit has two people from the Washuu family.


    Now they are all surrounded separately.


    Everyone is unable to bear and looks towards them vigntly.


    Seeing this and Washuu Yoshitoki''s face bes even more ugly.


    He said with a heavy tone: "Li Yaoxiang, wait, you said that we Washuu n are ghouls, do you have evidence? If there is no evidence, then if you kill us the Washuu n, do you know how serious the consequences of this matter will be?"


    Li Yaoxiang held an umbre, shaking his head, and said: "No. My instinct tells me that you are the ghoul."


    Washuu Yoshitoki became a little bit angry: "When did CCG start to make judgments without evidence! Kuroiwa, Shinohara, Marude, you want to apany him to go crazy? Have you thought about the consequences?"


    The named three people have a guilty look on their faces.


    But still no start to talk.


    Li Yaoxiang held the umbre with his left hand at this time, right hand pulled out the gun from his pocket and said, "You don''t need to worry about that, director. If afterwards it turns out that my instincts are wrong, I will of course bear the consequences."


    Washuu Yoshitoki: "You will bear-?! You can afford-"


    Li Yaoxiang pulled the trigger.


    Bullets hit and Washuu Yoshitoki forehead.


    And Washuu Yoshitoki fell in response.


    The forehead slowly exuded blood

 Chapter 310: All hands-on

    Chapter 310: All hands-on


    After the gunshots, there was only silence.


    Whether it''s Kuroiwa Iwao, Shinohara Yukinori, Marude Itsuki, and other officials in the vicinity, or the group of CCG members that surrounds the Washuu n, they can''t help but concentrate their minds on the ground, Washuu Yoshitoki.


    I don''t know how long it has been.


    Seeing the director Yoshitoki still no response.


    Everyone''s heart could not help but a terrifying thought.


    Li Yaoxiang''s intuition... could it be a wrong guess?


    At this time, even the Kuroiwa Iwao, Shinohara Yukinori, Marude Itsuki standing beside Li Yaoxiang asked to be unable to bear: "Li Yaoxiang, wait, did we... really misunderstand?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Misunderstanding? Have you ever seen that when a human head is hit by a bullet, there''s barely any bloode out?"


    The sound is not big.


    But everyone present heard perfectly clear.


    Everyone could not help but shift the focus to the blood.


    Just as expected.


    The situation is just like what Li Yaoxiang said, the bullet wounded Washuu Yoshitoki yes, the blood flowing out of bright red is correct, but the blood was only the hair strands that had been soaked, and it only flowed a little to the ground.


    This simply does not look like a picture that appears when a human is hit in the head.


    If it''s not human, does that mean...


    Everyone''s thoughts just thought of this, and Yoshitoki lying on the ground, finally could not be loaded. Originally he was thinking that when someone went to inspect his corpse, he would kill one before talking.


    But he wasn''t able to because Li Yaoxiang saw the clue.


    "Kuroiwa, Shinohara, Marude, we have worked together for so many years, you are so disappointing to me..."


    With the sound of Washuu Yoshitoki, he was motionless, and he lying on the ground slowly also straightened his body.


    Immediately, he disyed his Kagune directly, attacked with two sides on the left and right, andunched an attack on the line of four people in front of him. The leading target is Li Yaoxiang. The first person he wanted to kill was the culprit who destroyed their and the Washuu n''s century-long efforts!


    At this time, Li Yaoxiang left his umbre and the right hand did not have Quinque.


    Everything came too fast.


    In front of this scene, almost everyone was so anxious to death.


    Just when everyone thought that the biggest hero this time was really attacked by Yoshitoki just like this, they just listened to ''ng! ng!'' Two loud bangs.


    Then they saw two people, Shinohara Yukinori and Kuroiwa Iwao, standing on the left and right sides of Li Yaoxiang.


    They released their Arata and blocked this attack for Li Yaoxiang.


    At the same time as Washuu Yoshitokiunched an offensive, the surrounded Washuu n member saw the situation was not good, and also made trouble in time.


    CCG members who failed to respond, or were still concerned about the situation here, were immediately seeded by their sneak attack.


    Instantly.


    The head was rolling, and the screams were one after another.


    The scene became chaotic.


    "What-!"


    "It''s ghoul! They''re really ghouls!"


    Marude Itsuki quickly shouted loudly: "Do it! Eeveryone, do it together! Don''t talk about life or death!"


    Washuu Yoshitoki only slowly stood up at this time, calmly said: "Do you really want to kill us all? If we really do our best, at least half of everyone here today will die."


    Things have reached such a point.


    Washuu Yoshitoki knows that it is useless to say anything.


    After all, they have been operating with Washuu n for so many years, and even if they are really taken apart, there is no way out. Can''t control human beings, they are still the biggest influence of the other side.


    Li Yaoxiang put away the umbre and threw it to the rear.


    The umbre knocked on the door handle of the carriage and hung there.


    "Did you look too high on yourself? Half of the people will die? Really thought we were really unprepared?"


    Half barely fell.


    The CCG, which was still in a weak position, immediately reversed. A few powerful and powerful Quinque ghoul investigators rushed out of the crowd, greeting the members of the Washuu family who were wanton ughtering.


    Even Mado Akira and Takizawa Seidou are among them.


    Quickly.


    The ghouls began to lose their match and were killed.


    Originally a bit arrogant Washuu Yoshitoki, couldn''t help but lose the arrogance just now: "What if you kill the people here, including me? You won''t worry that we and Washuu n will take revenge on you humans on arge scale? We and Washuu n have been hidden in your human society for so many years, and the influence you manage is something you can never imagine-"


    Li Yaoxiang: "You mean V organization? Don''t worry. Since we made a firm resolution to deal with you and Washuu n, your forces behind the scenes have long been under our surveince. As long as we confirm the news here, everyone will attack all your influence at the same time. It will not give you the opportunity to retaliate against humanity."


    While talking, Li Yaoxiang grabbed their two weapons from Kuroiwa Iwao and Shinohara Yukinori.


    Originally, the two of them did not intend to let Li Yaoxiang take risks.


    They figured that the 2 old fellows go all out. After all, Washuu Yoshitoki can rise above others in the Washuu n, sitting in the position of CCG director, they believe his strength will not be worse.


    Let them take the lead to probe the strength of the other side, which is better than letting Li Yaoxiang, the leader character of new generation, on the human side, take risks.


    But their strength arepletely iparable with Li Yaoxiang.


    The weapon in his hand was just forcibly taken by Li Yaoxiang.


    Li Yaoxiang ignored their shocked eyes.


    After snatching the weapon, we moved towards and repaired it over time.


    As for Washuu Yoshitoki, when he heard an instant sent by Li Yaoxiang from the "V Organization", he knew it was over. He thought the hidden influence was really well understood.


    He did not know whether the strength prepared by Li Yaoxiang was enough to destroy them.


    But at least what is certain is that this time, even if some can survive, they will only be hurt. Afterwards, maybe they will be attacked by those who once suppressed them to one after another.


    Washuu Yoshitoki is even more hostile to Li Yaoxiang.


    Can''t wait to chop Li Yaoxiang into pieces on the spot.


    Seeing Li Yaoxiang''s nonchnt attitude at this time, Yoshitoki were not angered by Li Yaoxiang''s contemptuous attitude, but were extremely happy about it.


    After being able to sit in the position of director for so many years, how could it be possible for these trivial matters to affect his emotions and judgments?


    Underestimate well.


    The more you underestimate, the better!


    With such human and material resources, he did not choose to order everyone to siege him together, and that was the biggest mistake Li Yaoxiang made this time!


    No matter how strong human strength is.


    After all, their speed is too fast.


    Since Li Yaoxiang came to the door by himself, he had no choice but tough.


    Even if he really lost, he was confident, as long as he was not under siege, he would be able to escape from here.

 Chapter 311: Catching up on a drama tv show

    Chapter 311: Catching up on a drama tv show


    Not long-winded.


    Washuu Yoshitoki drove his man again, andunched a fierce offensive towards Li Yaoxiang who was walking by.


    As Li Yaoxiang moved forward, he was getting closer.


    And the face of Yoshitoki is more dignified.


    At a long distance, Li Yaoxiang can calmly deal with his full offensive even if he can. But as the distance between the two sides gets closer, the other side should feel the pressure.


    After all, if the distance between the two sides is getting closer.


    That means that the range of Kagune''s attack and retraction will definitely be greatly reduced.


    This leads to his attack speed, frequency and strength, which will definitely be closer, faster and stronger as the distance gets closer.


    But these theories seem like they don''t exist in front of this human being.


    From beginning to end, he maintained a calm attitude.


    No, not calm.


    Facing each enemy calmly, it is not that he has not met such an existence. This is the case with his most trusted subordinate, Arima Kishou. That loyal subordinate has always maintained that kind of calm attitude.


    Compared with the calmness of Arima Kishou, Li Yaoxiang in front of him gives him a feeling...


    More like... boring!


    Faced with your spare no effort offensive, you feel bored?


    How can this be!


    The first reaction of Washuu Yoshitoki is that Li Yaoxiang must be pretending to be calm.


    He wants to use this to break through my heart.


    Let yourself have a mentality of being invincible to him, and finally give up the idea of resistance and surrender instead.


    Correct!


    That''s right!


    It must be so!


    After all, even if the most outstanding younger generation that has been cultivated, Kichimura Washuu, in thest few decades, Arima Kishou dare not hold back so much when facing him.


    Mere Li Yaoxiang.


    A mere human.


    Even if he''s really stronger than Arima, it''s impossible to surpass that much.


    This is an inherent gap in race, which cannot be bridged by hard work.


    The person in front of me is definitely under a lot of pressure.


    The emotions of Washuu Yoshitoki finally calmed down a lot. Originally, Li Yaoxiang''s performance was frightened by the disordered and in a mess offensive, and it gradually became a lot more orderly.


    Confidence surged a lot on the spot.


    But when he wanted to take the opportunity to ridicule Li Yaoxiang''s childishness and even deliberately use this to shake his form, he let him see an incredible scene.


    The scene made himpletely desperate and had to face this cruel reality picture in front of him.


    Li Yaoxiang actually yawns...


    Faced with his uninterrupted, all directions offensive, Li Yaoxiang actually yawned...


    Moreover, it''s okay to yawn.


    Even closed his eyes and let out tears from sleepiness?


    You can parry all my offensive without looking?


    Is this still acting?


    How could this be acting? Can acting be so superb?


    Although the reality is cruel, the pictures in front of him actually make Washuu Yoshitoki have to ept the reality, epting that Li Yaoxiang is indeed much stronger than him, and is an existence he cannotpete with.


    After having a definite answer, Washuu Yoshitoki not saying anything further and turned away.


    Escape as hard as you can.


    "Ha ~~~" Li Yaoxiang noticed his lost self-control just after yawning, subconsciously said, "Sorry, I was catching up with this dramast night, and some-"


    The words have not been finished yet.


    Li Yaoxiang felt strange.


    Huh?


    Why did you stop the attack?


    Open your eyes and take a look.


    Only then did I find that the original Yoshitoki had fled 5 miles away.


    He held his mouth back, somewhat disdainful, raised his weapon, and hurled hard in the direction of the escape Yoshitoki.


    Quinque with the shape of greatsword instantly formed a straight line and broke away.


    ''xiu!''


    ''Bang!''


    Quinque''s de first prated and repaired the abdomen of Yoshitoki from the back, and then the sword-handle was stuck on his back. Together with the body of Yoshitoki, he broke through several pairs of walls and finally nailed him 50 miles away on a wall.


    Nothing happens.


    This scene in a sh is a dumbfounded look at everyone present.


    The strength originally shown by Li Yaoxiang, easily blocking the offensive that they seemed difficult to resist, had already shocked them enough.


    But didn''t expect finally had such an exaggerated blow.


    If he is not human, then what is he?


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t pay attention to everyone''s eyes, and he saw the enemies in the position were almost clear. He also contacted Amon Koutarou''s entire group who had arrived in the Washuu n''s territory through the headset: "Hello, yes, you ''re right. We''ve solved it on our side. Go ahead on your side."


    "Beep, beep, beep, beep."


    Finished.


    Without giving time to Amon Koutarou to digest, he closed the contact directly.


    Then he turned back to Kuroiwa Iwao, Shinohara Yukinori, and Marude Itsuki who were still in panic.


    He patted Marude Itsuki''s shoulder and said: "The follow-up work will be left to you to deal with. Instruct the troops in each division directly. Since there''s nothing wrong here, I''ll leave. I''m going to go in and have a coffee with the boss."


    Three people watched Li Yaoxiang leave nkly.


    Finally walked into the Anteiku coffee shop.


    ...


    Another side.


    In the truck.


    After receiving the call from Li Yaoxiang, the emotion of Amon Koutarou became heavy on the spot.


    Seeing the clues, Kaneki Ken asked, "What''s wrong? What happened?"


    Amon Koutarou was awakened: "Ah? No... It''s okay. My boss has confirmed the news. Washuu n is really made up of ghouls, let''s start to act here too."


    Even though he had already prepared himself, Amon Koutarou still didn''t want to hear this answer.


    Kaneki Kenforted: "Isn''t this result expected long ago? Don''t think too much. If you really think about human beings, you should solve this group of culprits that caused numerous tragedies in this world as soon as possible."


    Amon Koutarou: "I''m fine, let''s go."


    Amon Koutarou twisted the key and turned on the engine.


    The CCG car originally parked on the roadside continued to move towards the first level of the Washuu n territory.


    This is a private territory.


    At the checkpoint, they were quickly stopped.


    The person who guards the level is just a normal human being, a member of CCG. Therefore, Amon Koutarou''s entire group has no intention of starting here.


    This is why they need CCG clothing and identity to cover up.


    It is to avoid unnecessary harm.


    Under the window of Amon Koutarou bridge, handed the ID to this ''security guard'': "I''m a Senior Investigator, Amon Koutarou. There are important things to meet with XXXX."


    The security guard looked at Kaneki Ken in the carriage.


    He looks refined in manner.


    Also wearing a CCG uniform.


    Kaneki Ken did not forget to nod and smile at him.


    The testimony is true. Out of self-confidence in Washuu n, he firmly believes that no one dared toe here to make trouble, plus that there are people with CCG from time to time who are called in here from time to time.


    The documents were returned to Amon Koutarou.


    Just waved his hand and signaled to his colleagues to let them in.

 Chapter 312: You are the focus of the plan

    Chapter 312: You are the focus of the n


    The same picture is constantly being staged.


    Kaneki Ken entire group, after passing throughyers of levels, finally came to the core of Washuu n. Different from the previous general security. Here even the caretaker is the core member of Washuu n.


    Impossible to let Kaneki Ken entire group pass as easily.


    Just arrived.


    He was stopped by a few buddies in suits.


    The questions asked are sharper and more careful than those of ordinary security guards.


    "Who do you want to see?"


    "Are there any appointments?"


    "Why do so many people enter together?"


    "Open the back, let''s check it."


    Speaking of inspecting the backpartment, Kaneki Ken and Amon Koutarou looked at each other as unable to bear. Aogiri Tree members were not too worried. After all, they all put on CCG uniforms and could not be distinguished.


    But the weapons in the trunk...


    With so many weapons, it is strange to enter other people''s territory without thinking about the doubt on the other side!


    The same thought arose in their hearts.


    Maybe we are going to do it directly here...


    Both sides gave the other side a wink, implying that the other side was ready to do it at any time.


    Amon Koutarou, as if nothing happened, opened the door and got out of the car.


    Seems to open the rearpartment for the suit guard.


    The door of the rearpartment, although it is an automatic door, can be opened directly from the driver''s seat. However, in such a detection situation, the driver usually leads the detection personnel to open the carriage in person, so as to avoid idents or misunderstandings.


    Upon seeing this, Kaneki Ken also opened the door.


    He wants to follow closely from behind.


    In case you really want to do something, at least there is someone to help.


    But as soon as he opened the door of the car, he was stopped by another suit to drink the figure: "Hey, hey, what do you want to do? It''s enough for the driver alone. You don''t need to get out of the car."


    Seeing other side guards so rigorous.


    Amon Koutarou began to figure out whether to start now.


    It was at this moment that the suit that looked closely at Amon Koutarou, the inte on his hand suddenly sounded: "It''s out of the situation! It''s out of the situation! There is someone in Gate C! Come and support!"


    "Some people are also assaulting in Gate D. Come and support!"


    The suit for hearing this is not good for inwardly shouted.


    Several entrances and exits were raided.


    At this time, there are suspicious objects appearing at this entrance, how could there be such a coincidence in this world? They had a bad hunch in their heart.


    Subconsciously lifts the head and looked towards Amon Koutarou.


    But as soon as the head was raised, the field of view was wrong. He saw the world spinning for a while, and then thest scene that appeared in his eyes was seeing his headless body and Amon Koutarou who exhibited Kagune.


    At the same time, Kaneki Ken exhibited his own "cross" kagune, directly broke the windshield of the truck, and sneak attacked another guard.


    A hit is sessful.


    The two suit guards were toote to respond, and they both fell to the ground.


    The walkie-talkie in hand still echoed the call of colleagues: "Hello? Hello?"


    Amon Koutarou did not dy, and immediately returned to the car, driving and said: "It seems that the people in other ces have also attacked, let''s go in! The other people''s hands mentioned here are of course the other members of the Aogiri Tree.


    They all came from different areas.


    Attack here from different areas.


    Finished.


    Amon Koutarou directly drove the truck, smashed the iron rod blocking the vehicle, and rushed forward all the way.


    The core ce of Washuu n is almost like a mountain where the rich live.


    It takes more than ten minutes to drive to reach the mansion.


    Seeing a truck rushing in.


    There are already some "artificial intelligence" machine guns that are constantly firing at the truck.


    The Aogiri members and Kaneki Ken in the truck are now exhibiting their Kagunes to stop this series of attacks.


    Before reaching the mansion, the truck has almost be 1000 and 100 holes.


    Even the tires were shot down to a tattered piece of rubber.


    The four tire bells kept rubbing sparks, and was forcibly driven by Amon Koutarou.


    A scorching smell of cars came from the surrounding air.


    Kaneki Ken looked towards Amon Koutarou: "Can''t force it anymore, let the others get off the car first, so as not to wait for the car to have an ident and be dealt with by others with concentrated firepower."


    Amon Koutarou: "Yes, let them get off first! Let''s see if we can go directly to the mansion."


    Amon Koutarou pressed the switch in the rearpartment.


    Thepartment door just opened.


    Arge number of Aogiri tree members, immediately scattered and rushed off.


    The person rushing in front blocked most of the attack with Kagune.


    The people in the back, then all the portable Quinque, are going to destroy all the artificial intelligence machine guns along the way.


    During this period, the truck driven by Amon Koutarou did not slow down at all. Just keep pushing forward. The gestational age has almost been bumped by this speed.


    The two people who were still riding in the car could only feel the severe shaking of the truck except for the constant ''boom'' in their ears.


    Not much time.


    They finally saw the outline of the mansion.


    The truck still didn''t mean to stop.


    They intend to rush directly into the mansion.


    Seeing that they were about to arrive, Kaneki Ken warned repeatedly again: "Remember, you are the key to this n. Protect yourself. Let me deal with the enemy. Even if the main character escapes this time, you cannot go after him without authorization."


    Amon Koutarou originally wanted to reject Kaneki Ken''s proposal.


    Stand by, this is not in line with his character.


    Think about it for a second.


    The facts are exactly as Kaneki Ken said.


    Building the ''Dragon'' is the main purpose of their action.


    He is the container, he can''t do anything.


    Otherwise, we can only sacrifice others to rece...


    He gritted his teeth, nodded, and agreed.


    Bang!


    Boom!


    A loud noise.


    The truck first rushed through a three-storydder with violent shaking. Then the air broke through the door of the mansion. In the end, the truck has not yetnded. Kaneki Ken has already exhibited his "cross" Kagunes in all directions.


    st this car body.


    Focused everyone in the mansion on him.


    Amon Koutarou fell to the ground together with the only scrap of iron left in the truck, and was dragged several meters away by the force of the impact, hiding inside and watching the change.


    Kaneki Ken was in midair, and he had scanned the surrounding area.


    The hall of this mansion is very empty.


    There are no floors.


    There are only 8 stone pirs side by side.


    There are more than a dozen suits on the edge of the gate. There is also a main hall door directly in front, and rushed over a dozen suits.


    Kaneki Ken not saying anything further, in in the sky directly came a magnificent spin, driving his kagune to sweep back and forth against the group of suit ghouls...

 Chapter 313: Core Members

    Chapter 313: Core Members


    Kaneki Ken''s current strength can be said to be the pinnacle of the world.


    In original work, Kaneki Ken has already been able to defeat one of the highest battle strengths, Arima, before he has be an "angel form". And after he turned into an angel form, there was only Washuu Kichimura, the ultimate Big Boss'' "Complete Body form", who couldpete with him one or two times.


    Not to mention, after Li Yaoxiang has worked out a period of time in his life.


    None of the ghoul from the present Washuu family were his opponents.


    After rushing into the mansion, he appeared in the field of vision, and the Washuu n ghoul in a suit was wiped out by him almost in a moment. The body, together with Kagune, waszily cut off by his hard, sharp, and high-quality ''cross'' Kagune.


    Even if some ghouls have too much vitality, they are not dead yet.


    But in a short period of time, there is no fighting back.


    ''bang! bang!'' 2 sounds.


    The ''cross'' kagune pierced into the ground and supported him slowly afternding in midair before he took it back.


    He walked up to the still dumbfounded Amon Koutarou and said, "Here it is for you. You can follow up slowly, and I will clear all the enemies in front of you. To avoid them escaping, I will go first. "


    Finished speaking, Kaneki Ken passed the Amon Koutarou and entered the main hall door.


    Amon Koutarou looked at everything around him inconceivably, and it hasn''t been recovered for a long time. In this hall, there are more than 30 other ghouls. Was it solved by Kaneki Ken in split second?


    He vaguely remembered thest time he had a hand to handbat with Kaneki Ken.


    Kaneki Ken is not so strong.


    There were even some concerns in my heart, worrying whether Li Yaoxiang''s strength couldpete with Kaneki Ken.


    After the event, will this affect the human right to speak?


    After Kaneki Kenpletely disappeared from his field of view, he was awakened by the sparse howling around him.


    Take a look at these cut off ghouls.


    He looked at the man who was cut down on the ground.


    He knows what Kaneki Ken said, what does it mean to hand him over here


    He wants him to devour these nutrients right now


    At this time, dense screams were heard again in the main hall door. These screams just reminded Amon Koutarou that time is not and the others, Kaneki Ken is already moving quickly.


    Clenched the teeth.


    He no longer thinks so much.


    Hold back the sense of vition.


    Give thest blow to the yet-to-be-dead, and then begin to devour their Kagune and Kakuhou.


    Followed by.


    The same picture is in this mansion of Washuu n.


    Kaneki Ken killed batches of ghouls in front.


    Amon Koutarou followed closely, devouring them to one after another in the rear.


    At the beginning, Amon Koutarou''s engulfing speed was still too slow. But in a short period of time, more and more RC cells are absorbed. His emotions gradually became excited.


    Devouring getting faster and faster.


    It''s getting crazy.


    Kaneki Ken, who opened the road ahead, didn''t know about it.


    He just kills.


    If you want to summon the dragon, you must have enough nutrients.


    Without sacrificing the ghouls here, you have to sacrifice other people to ''operate''. In order toplete the n, he had no choice but to sacrifice the ghouls here.


    quickly.


    Killing killing.


    He crossed a courtyard.


    Came to a bedroom.


    The architectural style of this bedroom looks out of ce with this mansion. It''s a day  the kind of n style in ancient times. The entrance is a Japanese style paper door. The ground is tatami.


    There is not much space.


    There seemed to be no defensive means in the bedroom, only an old fogey with long hair and long beard sitting straight up there.


    Without the name of the old man Self-destruction, Kaneki Ken recognized the identity of the old man in front of him. It was the chairman of CCG, Washuu Tsuneyoshi. There have been too many news reports of Washuu Tsuneyoshi.


    Kaneki Ken is thinking hard.


    Washuu Tsuneyoshi''s closed eyes slowly opened slowly: "You''re here?"


    Kaneki Ken: "You''re not going to run away?"


    Washuu Tsuneyoshi: "Is it necessary to escape when I''m at this age? Being able to be broken here by you will prove that us, Washuu n are finished. Whether or not we can escape means nothing to me."


    Kaneki Ken has no good impression of this old man.


    If it weren''t for this kind of n to get into the game, this country would not be so messed up.


    Kaneki Ken sneered: "Then why don''t you just kill yourself? Don''t have the courage?"


    Washuu Tsuneyoshi: "No, I''m just a little curious who actually betrayed the n, I hope you can tell me the answer before death."


    Kaneki Ken expression solemnly said: "What do you mean?"


    Washuu Tsuneyoshi: "Oh? It seems you don''t even know. It turned out that you''re just a self-righteous tool."


    Half barely fell.


    The kind hidden in the dark, like getting any hint, suddenly rushed in from all directions. They either directly broke through the paper door, or pushed open the tatami, rushed out of the ground, or fell through the roof.


    At the same time, they attacked Kaneki.


    However, this seemingly dangerous lurks on every side picture, not at all makes Kaneki Ken nervous.


    What cares most about him is what he said just now.


    His eyelids didn''t blink.


    In a moment, it has be an "angel form", and drove the two "connected crosses" to instantly change the attack from all directions.


    Then under the incredible eyes of Washuu Tsuneyoshi, all ambushes were solved together in a short time.


    The entire bedroom became messy and tattered.


    The hot sun exposed.


    Kaneki Ken did not give Washuu Tsuneyoshi any chance at all.


    He used the most cutting-edge part of the "Cross" Kagune to nail Washuu Tsuneyoshi to the ground, and then walked slowly to ask: "Can you make it clear now, what did you mean by that remark?"


    See things not to be vited.


    Washuu Tsuneyoshi also looked away.


    The unbelievable gaze turned into sarcasm: "Do you really think that we Washuu n who have been in business for so many years and able to be so easily broken by you? Without the cooperation of the internal core members, you could nevere to me."


    Kaneki Ken brows slightly wrinkle.


    Mumbled to himself


    Core member?


    Just then, Amon Koutarou, who was engulfing all the way in the rear, finally arrived here.


    At this time, his eyes had already turned into grim and bloody eyes. The corners of the mouth, chin, and even the whole body are covered with blood.


    Breathing is short.


    Expression looks very excited.


    His Kagune''s appearance has be somewhat grotesquely shaped, and it''s still wriggling. Just like a self-conscious living creature.


    Kaneki Ken: "Are you all right?"

 Chapter 314: Dragon

    Chapter 314: Dragon


    Amon Koutarou was so excited that his tongue became a little dry, and he made a hoarse voice different from usual: "Very good! I''m better than ever!"


    The situation of Amon Koutarou is far more serious than Kaneki Ken thought.


    He was toote to think, and pulled out the kagune to Washuu Tsuneyoshi''s abdomen.


    Kagune rose to midair, and then fiercely stabbed.


    Through the head of Washuu Tsuneyoshi, he directly understands his life.


    "The enemy has been cleared by me. Don''t make yourself too tight. We have time. Your current emotions seem very unstable. I suggest you take a break first and don''t swallow it." While talking, Kaneki Ken was wary looking at the squirming Kagune on Amon Koutarou''s body, he dare not act blindly without thinking.


    Amon Koutarou stared at his mutated arms, said with a smile: "Resting? Why should I rest? I''m in good condition now! No rest!"


    Right hand stretched out.


    The arm wrapped by Kagune suddenly stretched and becamerger.


    Finally, arge mouth was formed, and the dead who copsed on the ground were swallowed.


    After doing all of this, he even unted: "Look? It''s too easy for me to devour them! Don''t dy any more and finish our n now!"


    Kaneki Ken stared closely at Amon Koutarou.


    Looking at Amon Koutarou ignore him, his two arms turned into two big mouths, devouring the corpses on the ground one by one, and asked in his mind: "This is the side effect of cannibalizing? Without your help, would I have be like him?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Yes."


    Kaneki Ken: "Is there any problem if he is allowed to go on like this?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Yes. Even if you be a dragon, you still need powerful willpower to greatly stop the subsequent killings. Otherwise, perhaps the dragon he transformed into will really be a terrifying monster that kills wildly."


    Kaneki Ken felt tight.


    2 pupils shrink tightly.


    "Amon! Stop it! Enough!"


    Originally very excited, Amon Koutarou, when he heard Kaneki Ken wanted to stop him, the expression suddenly became terrible: "Do you want to stop me? Why do you want to stop me?! Is everything you told me before was deception?! Damn it! I won''t let you destroy this n!"


    "Roar!"


    A gruff beast roared.


    The kagune who squirmed on Amon, suddenly grew six kagunes with mouths, and attacked Kaneki Ken.


    Kaneki Ken did not treat him politely.


    All six Kagunes were cut off by him.


    After being disconnected, the six princes are like fresh fish after leaving the water, bouncing wildly on the ground.


    Amon Koutarou felt a burst of pain: "You traitor! I will kill you! I will kill you!"


    This time, the whole person rushed towards Kaneki Ken.


    Kagune wrapped in him, like muscles, became stronger and stronger.


    When he rushed in front of Kaneki Ken, he had already turned into a giant 3 meters high and 1 foot wide. He raised his fist, which was bigger than Kaneki Ken, and was about to smash it down at Kaneki Ken.


    rumble loudly.


    The ground was smashed into a huge pit by Amon Koutarou.


    After Kaneki Ken escaped the blow, he took the opportunity to drive Kagune to cut every ''muscle'' on Amon Koutarou. The speed is so fast that Amon Koutarou, who became a giant, can''t help but stand still.


    There are outsiders watching the scene.


    You can see that the giant Amon Koutarou, like a lunatic, is wrestling with the air.


    A pair of huge arms kept waving towards the air all around.


    Then there is the Kagune on his body, which is cut off from time to time and bounces around.


    It wasn''t until his body was cut to its original size that the emotion of Amon Koutarou calmed down. He gasped, his eyes filled with fear: "What''s wrong with me? What happened?"


    Kaneki Ken didn''t attack again: "You ate too many Kagunes in a short time. The RC cells in your body have grown significantly, causing your emotions to be out of control."


    Amon Koutarou''s face was pale: "...What should I do? I''m not suitable as a container?"


    Kaneki Ken: "It''s not unsuitable, you have to control your emotions. If you don''t stop yourself, maybe after you turn into a dragon, you will be a monster that can only kill, I''m afraid there will be more sacrifices."


    Amon Koutarou tried his best to suppress his emotions, and finally spit out deeply said: "Thank you, what should I do now? Can I continue to devour?"


    Kaneki Ken nods: "Okay, I''ll watch you from the side, if you''re unstable again, I''ll stop you in time."


    Followed by.


    Kaneki Ken was guarded by Amon Koutarou.


    Looking at Amon Koutarou swallowed Kagune one after another back.


    Looking at him slowly changed from a human form to a state surrounded by Kagune.


    This time even Amon Koutarou himself could clearly see the disgusting kagunes wriggling around him. Although he felt that he could control these kagunes, those ''squirms'' were not something he could stop.


    These RC cells are really like living creatures.


    Returning to this state again, this time Amon Koutarou disappeared just now, he stopped devouring, expression calmly said: "Can I ask you one thing?"


    Silence for a moment.


    Kaneki Ken nodded and said: "Say it"


    Amon Koutarou: "If I really be a monster who can only ughter  I hope you can kill me directly. Don''t let everyone sacrifice more lives to save me."


    Kaneki Ken nodded.


    Amon Koutarou smiled slightly, and continued to pick up the surrounding Kagune to devour.


    quickly.


    The battle in the entire base hase to an end.


    They sessfully dealt with all the Washuu family members in the base.


    One after another Aogiri tree members arrived here.


    Amon Koutarou is almost finished.


    Kaneki Ken told his subordinates to bring him new Kagunes for Amon to devour.


    As the time goes.


    When the whole Washuu n was almost swallowed by Amon Koutarou, Amon Koutarou''s body quickly expanded uncontrobly.


    He couldn''t move anymore.


    Finally, he could only face Kaneki Ken, barely squeezed out: "Escape"


    Kaneki Ken pupils tightened.


    Even now he feels a terrifying power.


    Kaneki Ken reacted extremely fast, and immediately shouted to all around: "Retreat! Everyone, run away from here!"


    Immediately afterwards, all the surviving members of the Aogiri tree fled the scene with terrified eyes. It''s a pity that even though they had run away with all their strength, some people still couldn''t escape and were swallowed up by the rapidly expanding Kagune.


    It wasn''t until everyone escaped to a distance of nearly a thousand meters that everyone could see the full picture of the monster at this moment...

 Chapter 315: Fulfill or betray

    Chapter 315: Fulfill or betray


    It was a huge monster like a centipede.


    Almost every body has a huge eye.


    In original work, after Kaneki Ken became this monster, the monster was like a snake, climbing on a tall building.


    The monster that Amon Koutarou turned into had no tall buildings nearby, so he could only roll on the ground.


    The picture everyone can see is like a ''roshan'' covered with eyes.


    Many people were shocked by the picture in front of them, so speechless.


    When the monster stopped growing, the surrounding area stopped shaking.


    Immediately, the monster was like a deep sleep, closing all eyes.


    Some daring people couldn''t help but want to touch the body of the monster, but the monster suddenly opened its ''eyes'', then stretched out a big mouth, swallowed the offender, and finally closed his eyes again, go back to sleep.


    This scene scared everyone on the spot and backed away, not daring to get closer to the monster.


    Calm down a little bit.


    Everyone then turned their attention to their leader, Kaneki Ken.


    One after another moves to the ce where Kaneki Ken is located.


    "Kaneki-sama, what shall we do next?"


    Looking at this monster, Kaneki Ken''s face is a bit ugly, and even today he can''t be 100 points 100 sure whether he has enough ability to solve this trouble.


    At this time.


    Arge number of police sirens have been heard at the entrance of Washuu n Base.


    Followed by.


    They soon saw that arge number of CCG cars arrived here. Almost surrounded the dozens of survivors of Kaneki Ken.


    Just got off the bus.


    Everyone was surprised by the sight.


    Then there is the dignified and ugly face.


    The first, that is, the Special ss Investigator who did not participate in the operation, noticed the entire group of Kaneki Ken wearing CCG uniforms, and asked: "Is there anyone who can tell me what is going on here? Who are you? Which unit are you from? Why haven''t I seen you before?"


    Being questioned like this.


    Aogiri tree entire group, including Kaneki Ken, also has grave expression. They don''t know how to answer it.


    At this time.


    One of the CCG members suddenly stood up and pointed at one of the Aogiri Trees and shouted: "I know him! He is not a CCG person at all! He is a B-Rank in Ward 17! I once had a hand to handbat, andter escaped him! My partner was killed by him!"


    This is the case.


    The atmosphere at the scene became particrly solemn on the spot.


    The leader''s attitude also changed from cross-examination to bad, staring at the seemingly other leader of Kaneki Ken: "Who the hell are you? Why are there so many ghouls mixed into your team? If you don''t give me a reasonable exnation, don''t me me for ordering them to take you down first."


    The Aogiri tree side, including Kaneki Ken, is still silent.


    I don''t know what to say.


    Because of their suspicious attitude, even without the order of the chief officer named, the CCG members subconsciously surrounded Kaneki Ken and the others.


    Faintly, there is a tendency to do it directly.


    At this time.


    There was also a rapid horn sounds in the distance.


    As soon as the Mercedes-Benz arrived here, the CCG exclusive car braked suddenly.


    The sudden scene attracted everyone''s attention.


    So that both sides with swords drawn and bows bent temporarily extinguished the idea of wanting to do it.


    As soon as Mercedes-Benz arrived here, the CCG exclusive car braked urgently.


    Open the door.


    It was the three Special ss Investigators who came here from the 20th Ward, Kuroiwa Iwao, Shinohara Yukinori, and Marude Itsuki.


    After getting off the car, they did not look at the crowd around them, three people lift the head, staring directly at the giant centipede monster in front of them.


    Then couldn''t help but blurt out.


    "This is the dragon?"


    "Damn! Is Li Yaoxiang sure he can solve this monster?"


    At this moment, the three of them finally understood what is an enemy that is "powerful enough that humans and other parties have to cooperate".


    From the words of three people, they heard that three people seemed to understand this matter. Before questioning Kaneki Ken and the others, the Special ss Investigator asked: "Kuroiwa, Shinohara, Marude, you know what''s going on? Also, the person wearing our uniform over there seems to be not a member of CCG. Do you know who they are?"


    Three people first nced at this colleague.


    Looked towards the direction he pointed.


    His eyes finally fell on Kaneki Ken.


    Although they have not met, they all know that this person in front of him should be the ghoul that cooperates with Li Yaoxiang. However, even if it is known, three people did not immediately rify this matter for Kaneki Ken and the others.


    Expression is a bitplicated.


    I don''t know what I am thinking.


    As if seeing Kaneki Ken through their minds, at this time said with a sneer: "What''s the matter? Are you nning to break the promise? Want to kill us in one fell swoop?"


    Three people are all there.


    Kaneki Ken did express their thoughts.


    As the two strongest influences in Tokyo, the Washuu n went out. Most of the surviving members of the Aogiri Tree are now besieged here. It is really a rare opportunity.


    This is simply testing their concentration


    Don''t wait for them to make a decision.


    At this time, the cell phones of the Special ss Investigators present all rang at the same time.


    Take out your phone and turn it on.


    They all received the same message.


    The content is ''Ghoul Research Center and Ghoul Detention Center are being invaded and released arge number of imprisoned ghouls. CCG members suffered heavy casualties.''


    After seeing this news.


    Marude Itsuki immediately turned red.


    Before figuring out the truth, he yelled at Kaneki Ken and said, "Is it a good thing you did?! Do you send people to invade while we are carrying out the n?"


    The first thought Marude Itsuki received the message was that Kaneki Ken was fooling them.


    After all, the only known influence today is that only Aogiri has this ability to do this.


    It''s hard not to doubt.


    Kaneki Ken groaned.


    He vaguely felt that this matter seemed not as simple as expected. It always feels like there is a third influence, fish in troubled waters between their two influences.


    He didn''t mean to be angry because of Marude Itsuki''s attitude.


    After all, the n has reached such a point that he does not want to fall short.


    Kaneki Ken: "I did send people to the Invasion Academy. It''s just that you have imprisoned our people and conducted some inhuman experiments on him. But I didn''t make them ughter or send people to invade the ghoul detention. You''d better investigate the truth, and then ask me again."


    Hearing this remark from Kaneki Ken.


    Some CCG members, who were already hateful, finally couldn''t bear this breath and choked back


    "Lies! We conduct inhuman experiments?! How can we conduct inhuman experiments? You guys, don''t mess with us!"

 Chapter 316: The protagonist arrives

    Chapter 316: The protagonist arrives


    Even if he didn''t want to fall short, Kaneki Ken didn''t want to swallow his anger.


    He shouted toward all around: "You haven''t conducted inhuman experiments?! Have you asked your superiors yourself?!" Looked towards Kuroiwa Iwao and Shinohara Yukinori said: "Where did your Quinquee from, you don''t need me to exin it do I? You are full of benevolence and morals, but do inhuman things, what qualifications do you have to use us?"


    Several Special ss Investigators were all stunned by Kaneki Ken for a while.


    Others don''t know.


    But the higher-ups must have known.


    It''s just that when they used these ''copied'' weapons, they never thought about the victim''s feelings. Of course, they did not think they were wrong.


    They don''t care about Kaneki Ken''s usations.


    Only concerned about what Kaneki Ken said, true or false.


    Marude Itsuki immediately called a phone number and asked for details.


    The news came out just as Kaneki Ken said.


    Most of the research institutes only suffered serious injury, and few died on the spot. The situation on the other side of the detention center is much more serious. Almost half of the people died in the entire detention center.


    Marude Itsuki turned his phone with an ugly face for a while.


    Another Special ss Investigator came to him at this time and asked, "How? What is the situation? What happened? Can you find someone to tell me?"


    Several people nced at each other.


    Immediately, Marude Itsuki said: "We will talk about advanced cars and tell everyone not to act blindly without thinking."


    The Special ss Investigator who arrived first drank to all around, ordered everyone not to act blindly without thinking, and then followed Marude Itsuki several people into the car.


    In the carriage.


    The Special ss Investigator said impatiently to the rest of them: "Now can you tell me what happened?"


    Several people looked at each other.


    Knowing that this matter cannot be concealed.


    In the end, Shinohara Yukinori, who was still injured, sighed and said, "Let me talk "


    Immediately, he began to exin the whole sequence of events for the Special ss Investigator.


    "What?! And the Washuu n are made up of ghouls?! How can this be?!"


    Marude Itsuki: "This is indeed the case. Several of us witnessed Yoshitoki in front of us. If you don''t believe it, you can check his corpse afterwards.


    "Director"


    Marude Itsuki: "Is this the time now? You''re still calling him director? Do you want the whole world to see us a joke? He was a ghoul!


    "What should I do with the group of ghouls outside? Are we just gonna pass such a good opportunity? If we solve them, we are not far from our long-standing goal of expelling all ghouls from Tokyo."


    Marude Itsuki: "Expel them? How to expel them? Are you sure that we have the ability to clean up the monsters outside after a big fight with them? And, so far, which influence has attacked the detention center, we still don''t know yet. How can there be time to face the enemy on all sides?"


    "What should we do? Do you really want us to cooperate with this group of outsiders? Even if I agree, do you think other people can agree?"


    Several people looked at each other in nk dismay, and their faces were ugly.


    After a while.


    After some discussion, it was concluded that everyone must feel the power of the enemy and can only throw all the pots at Washuu n.


    With a conclusion.


    Several people walked out of the carriage.


    To this group of CCG members who are still hostile to Kaneki Ken and the others, said: "Although it is regrettable, I have to tell you a cruel reality. Until now, our CCGs are actually controlled by a n. And this ghoul n is the Washuu n. The terrifying monster in front of you is also thest trump card used by Washuu n to deal with us humans. "


    Half barely fell.


    The present CCG members suddenly exploded.


    There were noises everywhere.


    They couldn''t think of these Special ss Investigators who they respect would say such ridiculous things.


    They have been desperate for so many years, so many brothers and family members have died, but they are just doing things for the ghouls?


    People who can''t ept this fact gradually be dissatisfied, emotional, and even have a tendency to gather trouble.


    In front of this scene, Kaneki Ken looked ck. What was said before the cooperation was a pleasant one, but what happened afterwards? If it is sincere, why do you need to enter the car to discuss again?


    Shouldn''t everythinge to an end before action?


    Sure enough, it seems that the group of people in front of them is still in disbelief.


    Even if you agree today, maybe you will go back and regret it in the future.


    You still have to watch yourself a little more...


    At the same time, his perception of this group of people was a lot worse.


    [Darkening level:]


    87%


    88%


    Just as this group of troublemakers was about to get out of control, the mobile phones of several Special ss Investigators rang again.


    The message they received this time was that another ghoul was causingrge-scale trouble outside. Someone recognized the troubled ghouls, it was the priest who had just escaped from the detention center and the clown organization under hismand.


    Seeing that the situation was a bit serious, they no longer focused their attention on Kaneki Ken and the others. Instead, they instructed the CCG members present to support the localities in batches immediately.


    But some people not only did not execute the order immediately.


    Instead, he yelled at several special officials.


    "What about this group of ghouls? Does this group of ghouls need to be resolved?"


    "Mr. Marude, wait, we have sacrificed so many hands and feet over the years, do you want us to watch this group of ghouls leave safely in front of us?"


    Someone spearheaded things.


    Some people who were still hesitant couldn''t help but stop.


    When several special officials were helpless, their savior finally arrived.


    A loud engine sounded in the distance.


    Looking around, they saw Akira sitting in the driver''s seat expressionlessly, carrying Li Yaoxiang in their direction quickly. Everyone watched the arrival of the car.


    And as we approached the crowd, a big flick came.


    The car was parked on the edge of the crowd.


    At this time, Mado Akira''s mood is far from the calm she seems on the surface. She ignored everyone''s gaze, not saying anything further, she got off the bus directly, and came to the rear to open the door for Li Yaoxiang.


    Then stared closely at Li Yaoxiang, motionless.


    Her intention is simple.


    She hoped that Li Yaoxiang could rescue Amon Koutarou immediately.


    Li Yaoxiang did notpromise. She kept staring at Li Yaoxiang without leaving.


    Just now in the Anteiku shop, Li Yaoxiang couldn''t stand her eyes, so he finally got on this kidnapper''s car.


    Li Yaoxiang got off the bus and looked towards Mado Akira somewhat helplessly: "What are you doing so anxiously? He will be fine in a short time. If we really want to be in such a hurry, even if I arrive, I can''t help him, right?"


    Mado Akira did not answer.


    She''s still staring at Li Yaoxiang.


    Li Yaoxiang scorned in his heart: arrogant and pampered tsundere.

 Chapter 317: Come to an end

    Chapter 317: Come to an end


    When Li Yaoxiang was reprimanding Akira, the other Special ss Investigators seemed to see the savior. They all lit up and walked quickly to Li Yaoxiang.


    Did not speak.


    Also closely staring at Li Yaoxiang, waiting for Li Yaoxiang to make a final decision. After all, this n was ultimately suggested by Li Yaoxiang.


    Li Yaoxiang nced at them: "How are you guys?"


    "The emotions of other people are about to get out of control. After they know that we want to let go of those ghouls, they are all unwilling topromise..."


    The four talked a lot at once.


    Li Yaoxiang nced at them contemptuously: "You are Special ss Investigators but can''t control them? Don''t make excuses for yourself, if you really have the determination to keep your promises, I don''t believe that with your abilities you can''t solve the current situation."


    Several people were blushed by Li Yaoxiang.


    But there is no rebuttal.


    After all, the situation today is different from the original work. In original work, Kaneki Ken is leading arge number of ghouls, and he has enough strength to be qualified to negotiate things with CCG on the table.


    But now they are injured.


    And besieged here by arge group of CCG members.


    Such a great opportunity really made these Special ss Investigators have to raise the idea of breaking promises.


    Of course, Li Yaoxiang doesn''t care what they think. The reason why he did note immediately was to make the scene as it is today.


    In order to make the rtionship between the two sides deteriorate again.


    After all, this is conducive to the darkening of Kaneki Ken''sst step.


    However, because of some changes afterwards, he found that someone was already targeting Kaneki Ken and nning a big y. He judged that this drama was enough to darken Kaneki Ken to 100%.


    So it is easy topromise.


    Came here with Mado Akira.


    Li Yaoxiang no longer wasted time with them, walked directly to Kaneki Ken, and put his hand on Kaneki Ken''s shoulder, moved towards everyone and shouted, "He is called Kaneki Ken. He was originally like you all. He was a human. But because of Washuu n''s n, he was transformed into a ghoul. It is precisely because of his help and cooperation that this time we were able to eliminate therge cancer hidden in CCG that is the Washuu n so easily. Moreover, before the cooperation, I have also given a promise. After the event, we will work with them to maintain the stability of the entire Tokyo. So now you have to figure out, who is your real enemy? Was it the group of outsiders who were killing innocents indiscriminately, or the one standing in front of you who were willing to cooperate with us and cooperate with our partners?"


    Li Yaoxiang''s prestige is no doubt in CCG.


    Most of his deeds and strengths have long been heard.


    Out of trust in Li Yaoxiang, many people seemed to find the backbone of their heart after Li Yaoxiang appeared.


    The swaying thoughts immediately became stable. When Li Yaoxiang finished this remark, they were determined to stand on the same line as Li Yaoxiang, and their eyes became firm.


    It''s just that there are still some diehards who are extremely hateful to ghouls, unwilling topromise, and still zing the mes there.


    "Even if we cooperate, we can only cooperate with him alone."


    "How can humans cooperate with ghouls?"


    "You mean that we want to get along with these guys who wants to eat us all the time?"


    "Cooperate with the ghouls? How can we be worthy of the brothers and sisters and family members who have sacrificed in the past? How can we exin to their rtives and friends?"


    There were noises.


    Affecting the Aogiri tree side, some people have unstable thoughts.


    They also didn''t expect their leader was originally a human being.


    Worried that Kaneki Ken will eventually favor humanity.


    Li Yaoxiang stared at the stubborn elements each and everyone unwilling topromise: "Don''t forget what your real purpose of joining CCG was to protect humanity! Serve the people! If you only focus on revenge, please put down your weapons immediately! The weapons provided by CCG are not tools for you to take revenge! Now there are more powerful enemies in front of you, and you don''t care?! Is this your attitude?!"


    Many people felt guilty after being told by Li Yaoxiang.


    But there were still a few people who showed dissatisfaction.


    Li Yaoxiang looked at them and pointed at the ''Dragon'': "You think you''re right? You think I''m wrong? Or do you think that even if we don''t cooperate, we can solve the monster in front of us with our ability alone? If you really think so, then show it to me!"


    Isn''t this just asking someone to die?


    Seeing that Yukio Shinohara, Marude Itsuki, and Kuroiwa Iwao eximed at the same time: "Li-"


    They were stopped by Li Yaoxiang waved his hand.


    Li Yaoxiang''s gaze still firmly stared the unwilling ghoul investigator.


    The ghoul investigators refused to admit his mistakes.


    In the end, as soon as he clenched the teeth, he still prepared Quinque and walked towards the ''dragon'', and he must attack the ''dragon''. But the result is not what everyone expected. His movement rmed the ''Dragon''.


    The Dragon suddenly opened his eyes and swallowed the man in one bite.


    It made people on the CCG side look shocked and sad.


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t mean to give up, looking at some people who had just shown up, and continued: "You see? You want to die, I won''t stop! But please don''t carry others to die with you! If by now, you still think that even if you don''t cooperate, you can solve the monster in front of you, and solve the cruel and innocent ghouls. Then go ahead! I won''t stop you!"


    Now, even the few remaining CCG members are unwilling, also lowered their heads and stopped talking.


    Seeing that it finally worked as a deterrent, Li Yaoxiang said softly: "The research institute has developed food that ghouls can eat. Although the finished product is not ideal, but I believe that as long as we continue to work hard, we will soon have a perfect result. So, you don''t need to worry!"


    This sentence is not only to relieve the worries of the human side.


    It is also to appease the emotions of Aogiri tree.


    Just as expected.


    After everyone in the room heard the news, everyone''s face finally eased a lot.


    Seeing everyone, there was no objection, Li Yaoxiang also ordered most people to be dispersed and sent to support them everywhere. Kaneki Ken also issued the same order to the Aogiri Tree side.


    Cooperate with CCG to solve the clown organization that is doing things outside, so as to ease the rtionship between the two parties.


    Seeing things alwayse to the end of a phase, Kaneki Ken no longer stays.


    Before leaving, it was impossible to bear to take out his mobile phone, and wanted to make a call to Kirishima Touka entire group to report safety.


    Can make several consecutive calls, but still unable to reach Kirishima Touka, including the mobile phones of Banjou group.

 Chapter 318: An Indispensable Part

    Chapter 318: An Indispensable Part


    "Beep-, beep-, beep-, beep-..."


    "The number you dialed is temporarily unavable, please try againter..."


    "Beep-, beep-, beep-, beep-..."


    "The number you dialed is temporarily unavable, please try againter..."


    Several numbers were dialed in a row.


    Including Kirishima Touka, Banjou Kazuichi, Nishio Nishiki, etc., until the end even Kirishima Ayato''s number, Kaneki Ken also tried to dial, but none could be connected.


    This result made Kaneki Ken feel a bad feeling in his heart.


    He hurriedly said goodbye to Li Yaoxiang: "I still have things to deal with, let''s get in touchter..."


    Then he left Washuu n base without looking back.


    Li Yaoxiang silently Looking at the back of his departure without speaking.


    He knows that Kaneki Ken''s departure is the time when he officially bid farewell to this world. Some things need to be dealt with before he leaves.


    nced at the tsundere sister beside him.


    Mado Akira head shorter than him, stood there with a facial expression from beginning to end, staring at him with motionless, very obvious intentions, and did not speak.


    Li Yaoxiang is not a ruthless person after all.


    He also doesn''t mind fulfilling his promise before leaving.


    The same does not speak.


    Directly facing the monster formed by Amon Koutarou, walked over.


    All CCG members saluted him for the respect they passed.


    "Special ss Li Yaoxiang!"


    "Special ss Li Yaoxiang!"


    In fact, Li Yaoxiang has be a sessor in the position of CCG director or chairman. I think Li Yaoxiang, the sessor of new generation''s chairman, will lead them to a stable future. So when everyone sees him, more or less a sense of awe will arise.


    Li Yaoxiang nodded one by one in return.


    Seeing this scene in front of her, Mado Akira suddenly stopped, hesitantly said: "Special ss Li Yaoxiang"


    Li Yaoxiang stopped at the same pace and turned his head to her: "What''s wrong? Don''t want to save Amon? Why are you stunned?"


    The real household Akira expressionplexly said: "If you rescue Amon, it will cause you to have mortal danger, then don''t save it. I believe Amon does not want to see you sacrifice yourself to save him. And..."


    Speaking of it.


    Mado Akira nced around the crowd and continued, "Compared to Amon, everyone needs you more..."


    Li Yaoxiang dumbfounded for a moment, then unable to bearughed wildly.


    "Hahahahahahaha! Didn''t expect... didn''t expect ah Have I be an indispensable part in this? I didn''t know that. How many people will really miss me when they find me disappear I wonder?


    Faced with this suddenugh of Li Yaoxiang, the crowd around them all looked strange. Mado Akira, couldn''t help but raise a bit of worry: "Special ss Li Yaoxiang..."


    Li Yaoxiang stopped theughter and stopped her.


    "I''ll be fine. Go back. Don''t worry, it''s not a big problem for me to rescue Amon."


    Finished speaking.


    The two continued to walk forward one after the other.


    They didn''t stop until they came to the dragon.


    Li Yaoxiang: "You step back first."


    Mado Akira: "But"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Don''t be here, you will only hinder me here."


    Even if Mado Akira was unwilling, she finally had to choose topromise.


    After she retreated to a distance.


    Li Yaoxiang exhibited the ability of ''Byakugan''. The various abilities exchanged from the system will not change Li Yaoxiang''s appearance, so he is more worried than others will find it inappropriate.


    After Byakugan opened.


    The status of centipede monster within-the-body is suddenly seen at a nce.


    He can clearly see the position of Amon Koutarou, which is hidden in the center of the innermost.


    It seems that this monster, subconsciously, also has the intention to protect the home body of Amon Koutarou.


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t hesitate, he directly disyed his SSS-Rank Quinque and stepped towards the center point.


    Perhaps it was a sense of extreme crisis, and before Li Yaoxiang forward, all the eyes of the monster suddenly opened wide at the same time!


    All pupils firmly stared this Li Yaoxiang who made it feel a huge threat.


    quickly.


    When Li Yaoxiang was less than 5 meters away, monster was unable to bear to take the lead, various tentacles were derived from his body, and heunched an offensive towards Li Yaoxiang at the same time.


    This scene makes everyone feel terrified.


    The crowds guarding all around eximed: "Special ss Li Yaoxiang!"


    Immediately, there was an urge to support Li Yaoxiang.


    However, without waiting for their action, Li Yaoxiang had already cut off countless tentacles, and stopped while moving forward: "Don''te! I can handle it myself!"


    It doesn''t matter whether the people around are willing or not.


    Li Yaoxiang has already entered this big meat mountain alone.


    The tentacles that were cut off by Li Yaoxiang just now are like insects. They crawled around Roshan while creeping, and finally merged together again. The entrance just opened by Li Yaoxiang also merged and closed.


    Everything returns to peace.


    As if nothing had happened.


    Monster''s eyes closed again.


    calm and tranquil.


    1 seconds


    2 seconds


    3 seconds


    4 seconds


    5 seconds


    Everyone was dumbfounded by this scene. In just 5 seconds, for everyone present, it was extremely slow. All are holding their breath, motionless, the stare entrance that Li Yaoxiang just walked into.


    Wait for the 6th and 7th seconds.


    Seeing Roshan still no movement.


    A single thought rises in everyone''s heart, it''s over...


    Li Yaoxiang, their spiritual leader, their backbone, whoever loses, can''t lose Li Yaoxiang at this time.


    Without Li Yaoxiang, this means that in the future, how can they have the confidence to negotiate with him?


    Associating with the seriousness of the problem and the consequences of the problem, some people couldn''t help but copsed, their legs were weak, and they knelt on the ground.


    Mado Akira is filled with endless regrets.


    If it was not for her to persecute Li Yaoxiang, then Li Yaoxiang would not...


    Wanting this ce, she was also unable to bear the guilt in her heart. When she exhibited her Quinque, she would rush towards Roshan. She vowed secretly that she must rescue Li Yaoxiang anyway!


    Even at the expense of one''s own life!


    And just halfway through her, all the eyes on the monster''s body suddenly opened and stretched out.


    Then there was a wave of shaking.


    They saw the whole Roshan trembling.


    Till the end.


    A big round meat ball suddenly came out from the position where Li Yaoxiang had just entered, as if someone had kicked it out.


    The meatball fell to the ground ''Bang!''


    Everyone''s gaze shifted from the meat ball to the hole... the cave.


    What came into view was Li Yaoxiang who came out of the monster''s body in the way of a princess carrying Amon Koutarou...

 Chapter 319: Perfect End, Tragedy Begins

    Chapter 319: Perfect End, Tragedy Begins


    Everyone''s worries instantly turned into joy.


    "Special ss Li Yaoxiang!"


    "Special ss Li Yaoxiang!"


    Some people even ignored their own security and wanted to rush to meet Li Yaoxiang.


    It''s just that Li Yaoxiang stopped all of them in time: "Don''te!"


    With a sigh, everyone stopped and everyone dared not follow.


    The original huge mountain of meat has also be "strange" and clever. In the process of Li Yaoxiang holding Amon Koutarou forward, there was no intention to attack at all.


    After Li Yaoxiang pulled away from itpletely.


    The ball of meat kicked by Li Yaoxiang just now, it was like escape, and rolled back to the Roshan, and sealed the hole again.


    This scene looks strange in everyone''s eyes, not at all.


    After all, everyone present was not familiar with the monster in front of him.


    Even if monsters make strange behaviors, it is normal for them.


    They would never have thought that such a powerful and seemingly invincible monster turned out to be so well-behaved in front of Li Yaoxiang because of the survival instinct after being beaten by Li Yaoxiang.


    He walked to Mado Akira and scolded the crowd around him: "Why are you still stunned! You''re not gonna hurry up and carry the stretcher over to lift Amon for treatment?"


    The medical staff guarding the in the vicinity reacted.


    Quickly came to detect the situation for Amon Koutarou.


    At the same time.


    There were also a few CCG members, who came to Li Yaoxiang tremblingly, zhi zhi did not say: "Li... Yaoxiang... Special ss Li Yaoxiang, since you can save First ss Amon, other people..."


    Li Yaoxiang knows what they mean.


    They care about their colleagues who have been devoured by monsters.


    Of course, Li Yaoxiang couldn''t tell them the truth that Amon Koutarou was this monster, so he was able to stay safe in the monster''s body.


    Must insist that the monster is a trump card with Washuu n against humans.


    Otherwise, if the truth really spreads out, the impact on the future will be too great.


    Not many people sacrificed, that''s okay, others won''t say anything.


    In case, after he left, Kaneki Ken and the others really couldn''t solve this monster, and the outside world spread the news that the monster was created by them...


    When the timees, the consequences really dare not imagine.


    Kaneki Ken, Amon Koutarou and the others will be imperceptible.


    Li Yaoxiang: "They are already dead. In the monster''s body, I only found the surviving Amon."


    "This..."


    "This..."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Don''t do this anymore. Go back to the post you are responsible for. The enemies have not been resolved, how can we have time to cherish? Since the moment they wear the CCG uniform, they have been prepared to sacrifice themselves. What we can do now is to fulfill their unfulfilled wishes who have sacrificed heroically! Create a Tokyo where tragedy never happens again!"


    A few trembling CCG members paid their respects.


    They saluted Li Yaoxiang one after another,plied "Yes!", And immediately returned to their posts to stay behind.


    Followed by.


    Li Yaoxiang turned his attention back to the Amon Koutarou who was being healed.


    He asked the medical staff: "How is the situation?"


    After another 3 tests, the medical staff responded: "He''s okay, Senior Amon''s is just a little too weak, I believe it won''t be long before he can recover."


    Akira, who was slightly nervous, was relieved.


    And Amon Koutarou just happened to wake up at this time, he looked all around: "What''s going on here? Where is this?"


    He just woke up, his thoughts had not recovered.


    For a while, the situation has not been clearly understood.


    Mado Akira restored her expressionless appearance again, and specifically stated: "You were devoured by the monster, Li Yaoxiang rescued you."


    Li Yaoxiang yed with the taste: "Yeah, I saved you. After all, I promised you that I would not let anything happen to you, didn''t I? But a certain someone was afraid that I would go back on it, so she kept urging me."


    While talking.


    Li Yaoxiang deliberately or unintentionally turned to Mado Akira on his side.


    The meaning to be expressed can''t be more obvious.


    He is openly teasing the love birds in front of him.


    Over time, Amon Koutarou gradually recovered his thoughts. After hearing the dialogues of several people, I generally understood the current situation.


    He looked towards Mado Akira, and smiled and thanked him.


    Seeing Akira really ufortable.


    Even her ice expression can''t help being a little embarrassed.


    Immediately, Amon Koutarou looked towards Li Yaoxiang: "I knew that if that person were you, I would never be let down."


    Li Yaoxiang said with a smile: "Stop talking. Take a rest."


    Amon Koutarou: "Thank you."


    ...


    At the same time that the incident of the rescue of Amon Koutarou came to a perfect end, another picture appeared in the base where Arima was held.


    Arima Kishou and Yoshimura Eto''s corpse still copsed there, and no one packed it up.


    But their 2 heads were yed by Washuu Kichimura like football.


    In addition, there were more people on the scene besides the old 2 more.


    At this time, Kirishima Touka, Kirishima Ayato, Banjou Kazuichi, and the Fueguchi family were all tied up and piled together.


    It stands to reason that these ordinary ropes have no effect on the ghouls.


    But today, they have no part of their bodies intact.


    As long as the injury has a tendency to be repaired, it will be separated by Washuu Kichimura to make them serious injury again, so he will catch them in one breath but not let them die.


    Now the only thing Washuu Kichimura has to wait for is the arrival of Kaneki Ken.


    He looked forward to it. If Kaneki Ken saw this scene in front of him, what interesting expression would appear?


    The more you think about it, the more excited you are.


    There is no meaning of being bored because of waiting for a long time.


    y next.


    He identally kicked Arima''s head onto Kirishima Touka''s head.


    It awakened Touka, who was still in aa.


    Washuu Kichimura Rao was interested and said: "Yo! You wake up again? Willpower is really good!"


    "Huh." Kirishima Touka nced at him feebly, coldly snorted, and then a yuck, a mouthful of blood sprayed directly on the face of Washuu Kichimura, "Kaneki will not let you go... "


    Washuu Kichimura is still the smiling face weing people, seemingly careless, took out the handkerchief from his pocket and touched the blood on his face: "That would be great ~ I also hope he won''t let me go."


    bang.


    Washuu Kichimura has a blessed smile on his face, and pped Kirishima Touka, knocking out Kirishima Touka again...

 Chapter 320: On the eve of the darkening, I found it

    Chapter 320: On the eve of the darkening, I found it


    At the same time.


    The picture returns to Kaneki Ken.


    After bidding farewell to Li Yaoxiang entire group at the Washuu n base, he unrelentingly rushed towards the new nest he had transferred for Kirishima Touka and his party.


    After arriving at the scene.


    The scene in front of him almost made him copse.


    Sure enough.


    The bad premonition in his heart really came true.


    The new base is a mess.


    There are scattered items everywhere.


    The furniture was destroyed.


    There are many traces of battles everywhere.


    Blood stains can be seen everywhere.


    "No, no."


    "How could this happen? How could something happen?"


    He looked at all around inconceivably.


    Muttered to himself.


    It can be said that there is a nk in the head, simply cannot maintain reason, analyze the situation in front of him.


    At this time, he was panicked and anxious, not knowing what to do, I don''t know whether Kirishima Touka is still alive, and who would attack them?


    Is it for me, or is there another reason?


    After panicking for a while.


    On the ground, a rag doll stained with blood sessfully diverted his attention.


    He walked subconsciously to the rag doll and picked it up.


    He recognized this doll.


    This is the most beloved Ragdoll from Fueguchi. It was given to Fueguchi by Kaneki. Fueguchi often will be inseparable from this ragdoll.


    He stared nkly at the rag doll.


    Look at the blood on the doll.


    Finally, he looked at the remnants of Kagune around, and Kirishima Touka''s Ukaku was also included.


    Gradually, his whole body began to be unable to bear trembling.


    The empty eyes gradually regained vigour, and finally became more and more cruel.


    rumble loudly.


    With endless anger, he fully exerted his form of "Complete Body".


    The connected ''cross'' Kagunes, with a violent trend, smashed the entire base at the moment of disy, causing the base to bepletely exposed to the sun.


    This huge movement immediately attracted the attention of nearby residents.


    When they saw through the window and saw the pictures of the huge Kagune appearing vividly in the air, they all closed the curtains immediately, shivering with fright, and didn''t dare to take another look.


    Kaneki Ken at this time, regardless of the eyes of the crowd around.


    Facing the sky is a roar of skyward.


    "Damn it!"


    "Who is it!"


    "Who did this?!"


    [Darkening level:]


    89%


    91%


    After venting his anger a little, he suddenly asked in his mind: "Aren''t you omniscient?! Who caught them?! Why didn''t you tell me?! Why are you not answering?!"


    On the way to here.


    In fact, Kaneki Ken didn''t ask Li Yaoxiang for help.


    But no matter how he contacted, he never got a response.


    This is one of the reasons why he became so annoyed.


    After venting on things around for a while, I still get no response. In desperation, he had to take out his mobile phone and dialed Li Yaoxiang''s main body.


    "Hello?"


    "I''m asking you, did your CCG send someone to attack my people?!"


    "No."


    "Then why all of my people are missing now?! Except for your CCG, my only enemy is only Washuu n! If it is not you, it must be the surviving member of Washuu n! Didn''t you take care of the remaining ones?! Then tell me, what is going on now?! I warn you, if my people are hurt, then even if I pay the price of my life, I''ll bury you CCG with me!" "Beep-, beep-, beep-, beep-..."


    After that, Kaneki Ken directly covered the phone.


    Did not give Li Yaoxiang a chance to respond.


    [Darkening level:]


    92%


    93%


    ...


    Needless to say so obviously.


    He believes that after listening to what he said just now, as long as Li Yaoxiang was a little bit more sensible, he would definitely send someone to find the whereabouts of Kirishima Touka and his group.


    But it was a scene in his imagination.


    In Li Yaoxiang''s location, another scene appeared.


    Kaneki Ken''s frantic roar just now, even if the speaker is not turned on, as long as those who stay by Li Yaoxiang''s side can hear the anger contained in the owner of the voice.


    Akira, who is not far away, asks: "What''s the matter? Is something wrong?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "No, don''t worry about it."


    Then, such an important thing for Kaneki Ken was just discharged by Li Yaoxiang casually.


    ...


    The picture returned to Kaneki Ken again.


    After turning off the phone, he thought that Li Yaoxiang would send someone to help him track down. And he himself did not mean to be idle.


    Immediately ordered that the CCG party should support the Aogiri member of the clown organization, and returned to find the whereabouts of the Kirishima Touka entire group.


    At the same time, Kaneki also started to act.


    Strongly asked about the situation of the surrounding residents, and then went to each and everyone Kirishima Touka and the others may appear.


    Finally, he found the Anteiku coffee shop.


    Found the manager Yoshimura.


    "You mean..."


    "Touka, Fueguchi, and their entire group have all been missing? Didn''t the other side leave any clue?"


    Kaneki Ken nodded.


    Yoshimura: "Have you contacted CCG and asked them to help?"


    Kaneki Ken: "Yes, they should have sent someone to track down."


    Yoshimura: "Well, I''m temporarily out of business here. I''ll go to help find their whereabouts together."


    Therefore, the influence of Anteikus has also joined the ranks of tracking the whereabouts of Kirishima Touka''s entire group.


    During the investigation, Yoshimura identally asked about the original leader of Aogiri Tree.


    Kaneki Ken told everything truthfully.


    Since Yoshimura asked about it, Kaneki Ken didn''t mind turning around and went there to find out.


    Quickly.


    The two came to this base.


    When they approached the base, they had already noticed that it was inappropriate.


    Because the neighborhood is a bit too weird.


    The two''s mood can''t help but be heavy.


    Just as expected.


    A bad hunch was finally realized.


    Without waiting for them to step into the base, they already heard the apuse of Washuu Kichimura and his yful words.


    "pa!pa!pa!pa!"


    "Kaneki Ken, Kaneki Ken, are you finally here? Did you know, you let me wait for you so long~~ Didn''t expect you also brought the cleaning people, which is really exciting and unexpected."


    With that said, a head was kicked out of the base.


    Finally fell to Yoshimura''s feet.

 Chapter 321: People who need reasons to act are garbage

    Chapter 321: People who need reasons to act are garbage


    "Well? Your daughter''s head, I still kept it intact?"


    The head of Yoshimura Eto... how can it still have its original appearance?


    Even so, Yoshimura still recognized it.


    The owner of this head is his daughter.


    He knelt down on the ground, picked up the daughter''s head with his hands trembling, hugged her in his arms, and then weeped with tears as unable to bear. He murmured from time to time: "I''m sorry, I''m sorry"


    This scene saw Kaneki Ken shocked and frightened.


    He didn''t expect the leader of Aogiri Tree turned out to be the manager''s daughter.


    But the surprise was just a sh away, and he stopped paying attention. Because he had only one problem in his mind at this time, Yoshimura Eto died. Even the head is so ruined.


    What about Kirishima Touka?


    Kirishima Touka and the others are still safe?


    All kinds of pictures of fear had already appeared in his mind. He didn''t want to see these pictures, but he finally got the courage and the whole body trembled forward.


    Continue in the direction of the voice.


    Gradually.


    After turning a corner.


    He finally saw the face of the owner of the voice.


    A man in a suit with a look of anticipation on his face.


    But Kaneki Ken''s attention was quickly attracted to the scene behind the man. He saw the Kirishima Touka entire group. He saw Fueguchi''s family.


    He saw people he was familiar with, and now all of them are in a very different situation.


    The wound on their body is horrible to see.


    All tied up with rope.


    And there were 2 masked men in the same suit, guarding them.


    Seeing this scene, Kaneki Ken first sighed in relief.


    At least things have not reached the worst point.


    At least no one he knew was dead.


    There is still room for salvation.


    Soon, the rxed mood turned into anger. He stared at Washuu Kichimura, angrily roared: "Who the hell are you?! Why do you want to do this? How can you let them go!"


    Kaneki Ken wanted to solve everyone immediately.


    But he did not dare to act blindly without thinking.


    Because he is not sure whether he can quickly solve all the opponent in front of him. If you cannot solve all the opponent at the same time, then Kirishima Touka entire group is in danger, so Kaneki Ken dare not fight.


    Washuu Kichimura ignored Kaneki Ken''s anger, a very deserves a beating thinking look: "Who am I? Em... You just treat me as Washuu n."


    Kaneki Ken''s heart tightened: "So you came to me for revenge? Then just aim at me! Let them go!"


    "Revenge?" And Kichimura seemed to have heard the funniest joke in the world, so he couldn''t helpughing, then shrugged and said indifferently, "No, no, no, a family like the Washuu n will be destroyed when it is destroyed. I don''t care at all~"


    Kaneki Ken narrowed his eyes: "Why do you still aim at me?"


    "Why? Hahahahaha! Why? People who need reason to act are trash. I do whatever I want. If you have to tell me a reason Erm To see that you won''t like it. Kaneki Ken, oh Kaneki Ken, do you know that your smooth journey has made me feel very depressed? Since you became a ghoul, you have never been frustrated, you have got more partners. Happy, smile, those really annoyed me ~ this is not the picture I want to see."


    Kaneki Ken sinks inwardly, said with clenched teeth: "Who the hell are you?"


    Washuu Kichimura with nod and said.


    "Well, um. Yes, you don''t know who I am, that should be correct. After all, you were human at that time, and simply couldn''t detect the rope that tied the steel bar. I was the one who cut it."


    This is the case.


    Kaneki Ken immediately guessed the identity of Washuu Kichimura.


    Li Yaoxiang once said to him that someone in CCG cooperated with the action of Akihiro Kanou, so this matter would only suppress the media so quickly.


    Not waiting for Kaneki Ken to speak.


    Washuu Kichimura continued: "You actually have so many intimate contacts with my Rize, which makes me look very ufortable~ originally I wanted to give you some small punishment, watching you live in pain. But now it does not match my original intention ~"


    Just finished.


    Yoshimura has already passed Kaneki Ken, and rushed towards Kichimura.


    With tears on his face, he desperatelyunched an attack on Washuu Kichimura.


    Washuu Kichimura has not done anything with Yoshimura.


    Begging for mercy and running away.


    The action of running away looks like ayman, there is now at all. Make Washuu Kichimura look like an ordinary person who can''t fight without any strength.


    "Ah~~~ Help~~ I beg you to spare me! Kaneki, please save me ~ don''t you want me to let go of them? As long as you save me, I will let them go."


    When Washuu Kichimura was doing things like escaping for his life, the two ghouls who were guarding Kirishima Touka and his party had already spontaneously disyed their Kagune, and watched Kaneki Ken''s movements.


    It seems that as long as Kaneki Ken has any action, they will kill the entire group of Kirishima Touka without the slightest hesitation.


    Kaneki Ken originally wanted to take the opportunity to rescue the Kirishima Touka entire group.


    But when he saw this scene, he immediately dismissed the idea.


    His eyes returned to Yoshimura and Washuu Kichimura.


    He did not despise Washuu Kichimura because he was desperate to escape. In his eyes, the manager''s strength is not weak. But up to now, he still can''t hurt Washuu Kichimura, which makes Kaneki Ken have to take it seriously.


    Just as expected.


    After Yoshimura pursued and killed him for a while.


    Seeing that Washuu Kichimura had a misstep and fell to the ground.


    Seeing that Washuu Kichimura''s fatal blow was about to fall on Kichimura.


    Only the sound of ng.


    Washuu Kichimura first exhibited his Kagune, and took the blow.


    His attitude has changed a lot. No longer is a cowardly, want to escape performance. Instead, he turned a blind eye to the enemy, Yoshimura, and said calmly and disappointedly to Kaneki Ken: "Hey ~ Ken-kun, you make me feel very sad ~ Why didn''t you try to save me?"


    Said.


    His kagune "swoosh" quickly swept across Yoshimura''s waist.


    Followed by.


    Yoshimura, who hasn''t reacted yet, has beenpletely separated from his lower body and fell to the ground.


    "Manager!" Kaneki Ken eximed.


    Kaneki Ken subconscious rushed towards Yoshimura.


    While holding up Yoshimura, he exhibited Kagune and went all out in the direction of Washuu Kichimura.


    A loud bang.


    There was a huge pit immediately at the location where Washuu Kichimura was.


    It''s a pity that this blow was evaded by Washuu Kichimura and returned to the Kirishima Touka entire group...

 Chapter 322: white-haired Kaneki

    Chapter 322: white-haired Kaneki


    Kaneki Ken raised the upper body of Yoshimura, and felt a pain in his heart: "Manager..."


    Yoshimura is no longer the solemn appearance of the past.


    At this time, he had dishevelled hair, had a lot of blood oozing from the corner of his mouth.


    But even so, he still exerted his strength, raised his right hand, caught Kaneki Ken''s cor, and conveyed thest words in a lip way: "Help me kill him... "


    He is old and has lost his Kakuhou. He can no longer bear such severe injury.


    Finally, after expressing his wishes, Yoshimurapletely broke aura.


    "Manager" Kaneki Ken saw that even his voice became somewhat hoarse.


    It''s just that this scene is very exhrating in the eyes of Washuu Kichimura: "Hahahahaha! That''s right! That''s it! This is the expression! You should be like this! This way I will be morefortable watching it. But... Not enough! Your expression is not painful enough! Let the paine more violently!"


    As he said, Washuu Kichimura lifted one of them from the group of Kirishima Touka, and immediately sh.


    "No-!" Kaneki Ken expression became more excited.


    He recognizes this guy who was killed.


    That is one of Banjou''s number one followers.


    "Hahahaha! Yes! That''s it! This is the look I want to see."


    As he said, Washuu Kichimura took another person out of the crowd, this time the person he pulled out was Fueguchi.


    "Stop it!! What the hell do you want me to do to let them go!" Kaneki Ken hysterically stopped Kichimura.


    "How about? Of course, I want the game to be more fun? Seeing you adapt to your life so quickly, do you know how sick it makes me feel?" While speaking, Washuu Kichimura has no mercy.


    A man from the back slowly prated the heart of the mouth of the mouth.


    The fierce pain, the forcibly painful flute mouth woke up from aa. The first scene she opened her eyes was when she saw Kaneki Ken who seemed to be crazy.


    She coughed up some blood.


    In the end, there was only one sentence: "Big brother... Kaneki"


    Then there was no more interest.


    "Hina Kill you! I''m going to kill you!"


    Kaneki Ken can''t manage that much. At this moment, he finally understood. The person in front of him is basically a lunatic. Does not y cards ording tomon sense.


    He hysterically shouted and rushed towards Washuu Kichimura while changing into a "Complete Body".


    The speed is very fast.


    As soon as the two guards were toote to respond, they had been nailed to the far wall by Kaneki Ken, making thempletely unable to move.


    But Washuu Kichimura was not so easily solved by him.


    Feel the powerful strength of Kaneki Ken.


    Washuu Kichimura no longer hold back.


    Also changed to ''Complete Body Kagune''.


    While evading Kaneki Ken''s blow, he did not forget to drive Kagune to wave and cut into the crowd. The familiar people such as Nishio Nishiki, Fueguchi Ryoko, Kirishima Ayato, etc., were all chopped off by Washuu Kichimura in this waves of attacks.


    All killed.


    "No-!"


    Rushing to the ce where Washuu Kichimura originally stood, Kaneki Ken not at all continued to pursue.


    Instead, he copsed and knelt in front of the corpse pile, crying out loud.


    Then he stared nkly at the pile of corpses in front of him.


    Looking at the familiar figures who had just talked to him alive not long ago, now they are all lying on the pool of blood, and there is no response.


    "No no no, why is this happening? A lie. This must be a lie, you won''t die, you won''t die like this."


    Kaneki Ken knelt in front of the pile of corpses and muttered to himself like a fool.


    After a while.


    He seemed to find something, and frantically opened the corpse, seemingly looking for something extremely important to him.


    Looking for it, there is a yful sound of Washuu Kichimura: "What''s wrong? Are you looking for her?"


    Turning his head suddenly.


    Just as expected, the ''person'' he is looking for is now in the hands of Washuu Kichimura.


    "Touka-!"


    "Let her go! Let her go!!!"


    Since the moment Kaneki Ken became a ghoul, Washuu Kichimura paid attention to everything about Kaneki Ken from time to time. So he is very aware of the importance of Kirishima Touka to Kaneki Ken.


    To make this scene more exciting.


    So when he dodged just now, he chose to take it away with Kirishima Touka.


    Kirishima Touka at this time was referred to in midair by him as a way of ''pulling hair''.


    Due to the intense shaking, Kirishima Touka woke up.


    Kirishima Touka slowly opened her eyes. She saw Kaneki Ken with bloodshot eyes and state seems crazy. She first said: "Kaneki..."


    Then tears were unable to bear wildly.


    She noticed the corpse on the pool of blood behind Kaneki Ken.


    She saw the familiar faces of each and everyone.


    The voice choked: "How could this be? How could this be?"


    Seeing Kirishima Touka alive, Kaneki Ken lost the imposing-manner just now. With a cry, he knelt and begged: "Please, let her... I beg you, can you let her go?"


    Kichimura, whose whole body was wrapped in Hezi, showed a bright smile and said in a rough voice, "Let her go? Okay."


    Immediately, ''Shua!'' sound.


    Kagune crossed Kirishima Touka''s neck.


    Kirishima Touka headed on a spot on the spot.


    Washuu Kichimura also followed the loose hand, and let Kirishima Touka''s head roll down on his body.


    "As you wish, let go."


    "Touka !" Kaneki Ken made an arrow and rushed over to pick up Kirishima Touka''s head. Then like crazy, he keeps trying to link her head to her body.


    "No, no, you will be fine. You won''t die so easily. Wake up, please wake up, OK?"


    However, no matter how he tried, the head of Kirishima Touka and her body still showed no signs of linking.


    Washuu Kichimura at the moment Kaneki Ken rushed over, had already shed to another ce, very excited to admire the beauty of this scene in front of him.


    Appreciating the painful and copsed appearance of Kaneki Ken.


    Appreciating Kaneki Ken crying until his tears were dry and his voice was hoarse.


    And then he didn''t forget to tease: "It''s perfect! This is the ending you should have--! Tragic, more attractive--~"


    So silently holding the head of Kirishima Touka.


    Like a statue, kneel down there, motionless.


    Slowly, his ck hair began to be white from the root of the hair at the speed visible by naked eyes. And along with the white hair, extending from the root to the tail, the degree of darkening disyed on the system interface has also soared...


    94%


    96%


    98%


    100%

 Chapter 323: What is 1000-7

    Chapter 323: What is 1000-7


    Slowly.


    On the base, only Washuu Kichimura''s excitedughter remained.


    The white-haired Kaneki Ken can no longer make any sound.


    He cautiously and solemnly put down Kirishima Touka''s head and her body together, and then slowly stood upright, lowered his head and said to Washuu Kichimura, "Is it really so funny?"


    Washuu Kichimura who became a ''Complete Body Kagune'', now his appearance is actually exactly simr to a humanoid monster.


    After hearing Kaneki Ken''s question.


    He was stunned first.


    Then the mouth of the cracked opened cheek opened again andughed wildly: "Of course! Of course it is funny! This is really funny! Did you know that I originally nned to destroy Washuu n Yes, and like your n, I want to create the ''dragon''. That dragon container is actually you! Didn''t expect ~ I don''t need to do anything, you just helped me with everything. This makes me feel bored. Do you understand? It''s much more interesting now! Hahahahaha!"


    If it was Kaneki Ken before, he would be surprised and emotionally affected when he heard these messages revealed by Washuu Kichimura.


    But now Kaneki Ken, after hearing these messages, has no response.


    Still looking down.


    White bangs covered his eyes.


    Mumbling from his mouth: "That make things more interesting..."


    "What?" Washuu Kichimura, who wasughing wildly, could not hear clearly Kaneki Ken was whispering something, ask to him to disable to bear.


    But he is tone barely fell.


    Kaneki Ken figure shed, and the whole person disappeared in front of him.


    He knew right now that Kaneki Ken was about to attack him. Instead of panic, he smiled with excitement. Kaneki Ken is very strong, yes. Otherwise, he will not need to be a "Complete Body" to deal with him.


    But this does not mean that he is currently cannotpete with it.


    He firmly believes that no matter how strong Kaneki Ken is, the strength difference will not be too big.


    After all, the human body has limits.


    An ordinary human or genus, within-the-body can store RC cells, at most only between 500-8000.


    The existence like them may have broken through the limit and exceeded 8000.


    But impossible to surpass that much.


    Really has to go beyond too much, even if they don''t be a "dragon", it may be a monster controlled by RC cells. Just like Yoshimura Eto in original work, was beaten into a monster after death.


    This point, Washuu Kichimura is very clear.


    That is to say, the Kagunes, physical fitness, speed, and strength are at most the existence of the same rank, perhaps beyond the other side.


    He firmly believes that even if he is not invincible, it will be too much difference.


    So when he knew that Kaneki Ken was about to attack him, immediately raised a sense of teasing. For his 30-year-old life, nothing is more important than fun.


    He is going to perform his best show again.


    Crazy escape, begging for mercy, and teasing opponent.


    "save"


    But when he was about to shout "save", the word "me" hadn''t had time to speak, a force of gravity hit his cheeks heavily.


    Even the teeth in the mouth copsed better.


    Next.


    The whole person was directly smashed and flew out by this fist.


    It directly hit the ground and flew several times in a row, forming cracks one by one, and finally wiped the ground and passed a long distance before it stopped.


    This fist does not cause fatal damage to him who now has a huge increase in defensive power.


    Dizziness to a certain extent is definitely indispensable.


    He stood up with some shaking.


    At this time, his chin was obviously beaten out of position and crooked.


    But with the power of regeneration ability, the injuries caused by this fist quickly recovered at the speed visible to naked eyes, including his sharp teeth.


    However, he was just standing still.


    And he felt a strong wind again, passing by his side.


    Obviously, Kaneki Ken had already chased him, and without saying a word.


    This time Kaneki Ken never gave him the opportunity to fly out of his attack range.


    "Sixty-Four Palms" is yed to the extreme by Kaneki Ken.


    After ying Sixty-Four Palms.


    Repeat again.


    Uninterrupted.


    Washuu Kichimura, a humanoid monster, is like being nailed in midair by Kaneki Ken.


    Washuu Kichimura wanted to drive Kagune to fight back.


    But as long as he has a small movement, he will soon be cut by Kaneki Ken''s "cross", and there is no room for defense.


    Kaneki Ken got annoyed the more he fought.


    The more he fought, the more guilty he became.


    If I hadn''t had so many scruples before, and I would have done my best... Would it be possible to save at least a few people''s lives instead of getting them killed?


    However, in this world there is not such thing as ''if''.


    He was toote to want to regret it.


    Currently, all he has is full of hatred.


    He hates the damned guy in front of him.


    He hates himself, why he hesitated.


    He hates Li Yaoxiang and the others, why was there a fish that escaped the.


    He hates the whole world.


    Killing Washuu Kichimura directly will not solve the hatred in his heart. Punching his fists to the flesh, he pped Kichimura with one palm after another, which was able to relieve the pain in his heart a little.


    yed for a while.


    Washuu Kichimura has been transformed from the form of "Complete Body" to the human form,


    He stopped, and grabbed Washuu Kichimura.


    The sound of a fierce beast tearing: "Is it fun?"


    As he said, Kaneki Ken used a hand knife to cut Washuu Kichimura''s arm.


    Another sentence: "Is it fun?!"


    Wait for Washuu Kichimura to respond.


    Another hand knife, he split the other arm.


    The pain was so painful that Kichimura''s eyes were round and he couldn''t make a sound at all.


    Then legs.


    "I ask you, is it fun?! Answer me!"


    This is not enough.


    This is far from relieving Kaneki Ken''s hatred of Washuu Kichimura.


    He picked up the Kagune cut from Washuu Kichimura, and stuffed it directly into Washuu Kichimura''s mouth, forcing him to swallow it.


    Time and time again.


    Let Washuu Kichimura''s hands and feet grow back quickly.


    Then the same scene takes ce again.


    Just seeing that Washuu Kichimura is about to faint from him, Kaneki would waken him up by various means.


    "Don''t faint! Don''t faint me!"


    "I ask you, is it fun now?"


    "What is 1000 minus 7? Answer me! Answer me!"


    On the surrounding air, only Kaneki Ken''s dreadful tears were left. Even the residents nearby, no one dared toe out to look around, or to do much business, all locked the door, hoping not to bring disaster to innocent people...

 Chapter 324: Not a single one will be spared

    Chapter 324: Not a single one will be spared


    At the beginning, you can still hear Kichimura Washuu howling.


    However, as he was tortured more and more times, he was almost so painful that he was numb and could no longer make any sound. It''s just that Washuu Kichimura is indeed an out-and-out lunatic. Even with such treatment, he still has a smile on his face.


    A sneezing smile.


    It seems to be mocking Kaneki Ken, even if you are abused me thousands of times? The dead will never be reborn. From now on, Kaneki Ken is destined to only live in pain.


    Whoever is the winner in the end is a matter of opinion.


    Anyway, seeing you look so painful is a big pleasure in life for him.


    Seeing his smile, Kaneki Ken finally subsided a little bit of pain, and it became worse again. He pulled Washuu Kichimura''s hair and said face-to-face to Washuu Kichimura: "What''s so funny? What''s so funny?! What are youughing at?"


    But still that smile, plus disdainful eyes.


    It''s like telling Kaneki Ken, no matter how much you abuse me, the pain in me is not as painful as yours.


    This makes Kaneki Ken, who is almost crazy, even more insane.


    He put down the head of Washuu Kichimura, and indiscriminately destroyed everything around him, so as to vent his inner emotions, and kept muttering in his mouth: "I won''t let you die so easily, I won''t let you die so easily!"


    Move back and forth in ce.


    Continuously thinking, what is the only way to allow this damned guy to get the retribution he deserves? Make him feel worse than death?


    Thinking about it.


    He finally thought of a key point.


    He instantly lost his madness as a whole.


    A lot of calm.


    Adjust your breathing, walk back to the dying Washuu Kichimura, pull Washuu Kichimura''s hair again, and face up close and say, "You seem to care about Rize-san? Rize-san shouldn''t be dead yet, right? If I guessed right, it was you who stole Rize-san from me, right?"


    Yes.


    Kaneki Ken thought of the key of Kamishiro Rize.


    He remembered the old inadvertent sentence of Washuu Kichimura, ''My Rize''.


    Because I walked closer to Kamishiro Rize, why did Washuu Kichimura not want to see myself better?


    Just as expected, when the words "Rize-san" appeared in Kaneki Ken''s mouth.


    Washuu Kichimura converged on the spot and smiled.


    Reluctantly made a small voice: "What do you want to do to her?"


    Kaneki Ken grinned: "What? Y Don''t you like seeing other people''s pain? It just so happens that I''m very interested in your pain. Rest assured, since you care so much about Rize-san, I will definitely let her be alive. I will help you take good care of her."


    "Don''t touch her! If you dare to touch her, I won''t let you go if I''m a ghost!" At the same time as saying this, Washuu Kichimura was struggling with thest trace of strength.


    However, when Kagune is about to prate Kaneki Ken''s temple, he can no longer move forward.


    Kaneki Ken at this time, as well as holding Kichimura''s Kagune with his bare hands, made it impossible for him to retreat.


    Kaneki Ken is even more satisfied when he sees the tense attitude of Washuu Kichimura: "I''m relieved to see you so nervous about Rize-san."


    Finished speaking.


    Kaneki Ken struck the hand sword, directly piercing the heart of Washuu Kichimura.


    Looking at Washuu Kichimura left with unwilling expression.


    Kaneki Ken''s inner pain was finally relieved a lot.


    But when everything is over, his mind returns to a nk.


    Looked at the environment of all around


    It''s gone, everything is gone.


    He was left alone and widowed...


    He no longer lost the madness and the sense of relief when he saw Washuu Kichimura unwilling to die. After standing in panic for a while, he took out his mobile phone and contacted the staff of Aogiri Tree.


    Tell them that they no longer need to track down Kirishima Touka and the others.


    Let them alle here.


    Then it''s like walking corpse, walk back to the corpse of Kirishima Touka entire group, and just sit there kneeling stupid. Once he sat down, he did it for hours.


    Until the first Aogiri Tree member arrived, and saw the scene in front of him, cry out in surprise: "Kaneki-sama! This..."


    Kaneki Ken did not say much, directly instructed: "I''m going to hold a funeral for them and let someone help me arrange everything. Clean this ce up. Don''t ask anything."


    Aogiri Tree member did not dare to neglect, quicklyplied ''Yes!''.


    Even if you make a call, you start to arrange everything about the funeral.


    It''s fast.


    One person after another came over to clean up the scene.


    The CCG at this time has already been exhausted by the clown organization, and it is not enough to send it here to check. Therefore, before CCG arrived, the site had already taken the lead and was cleaned up by the people of Aogiri Tree.


    Kaneki Ken witnessed everyone''s corpse with his own eyes, and after they were properly arranged, he felt a little more at ease.


    However, when he watched the truck carrying the bodies of the people slowly disappearing from his field of vision, he left a sentence: "Don''t worry... I won''t let go whoever killed you. I will let them pay the price and bury them with you..."


    Finished speaking.


    Kaneki Ken turned around and left.


    Departure to Washuu n base again.


    ...


    After a few hours.


    Kaneki Ken returned Washuu n base again.


    Along the way, he behaved very calmly and did not do anything at will.


    The CCG members who controls the each and everyone level also recognizes that Kaneki Ken is the ''hey'' who has a cooperative rtionship with them, so they can easily let him pass.


    It''s fast.


    He arrived at the base.


    The base at this time has beenpletely surrounded by CCG.


    Almost every distance, someone will be patrolling or guarding.


    When most people see Kaneki Ken, there is a sense of pity that can''t help but sh in their eyes. They knew that Kaneki Ken was transformed into a ghoul.


    Although they didn''t say anything, they still sympathized with Kaneki Ken''s experience.


    So along the way, few people who would want to stop Kaneki Ken, but let him pass here unimpeded.


    Until Kaneki Ken entered the tighter range of guards, this was because someone was on duty to block and said: "Sorry, the front has been listed as a national important ce. If you don''t have a pass, we can''t let you in."


    Kaneki Ken: "I want to see your Chief-In-Charge, Li Yaoxiang, etc. Please pass the word."

 Chapter 325: Kill

    Chapter 325: Kill


    Kaneki Ken has just finished speaking.


    Mado Akira just passed by here. She saw Kaneki Ken, she recognized Kaneki Ken. She asked the caretaker: "What''s the matter?"


    The caretaker first saluted, and immediately said respectfully: "Senior Investigator Mado, he said he wants to see Special ss Li Yaoxiang, let us help pass the word."


    After the incident of Washuu n.


    The real user Akira was promoted to the First ss Ghoul Investigator.


    After listening to the guard''s statement, Akira looked at Kaneki Ken and said, "Come with me, I''ll take him to see Special ss Li Yaoxiang and wait."


    Tight then.


    Mado Akira led Kaneki Ken to Li Yaoxiang''s tent.


    Kaneki Ken to have an ulterior motive cannot be fully noticed.


    After a while.


    Come to the tent.


    Open the gap between the tents: "Special ss Li Yaoxiang, the leader of Aogiri came here and said he wanted to see you."


    Li Yaoxiang waved his hand.


    "Understood. Let hime in. You can go."


    The tent is built on a grass. At this moment, there is a square table, a chair, and a bed frame simr to that in a hospital. These things are allid out on the grass.


    Li Yaoxiang sat in a chair, drinking hot coffee.


    Amon Koutarou was sitting back against the bedside that had been lifted up.


    Kaneki Ken just came in.


    He was stunned for a moment.


    He didn''t expect to see Amon Koutarou here. He never thought of going to Amon Koutarou. After all, Amon Koutarou, in his opinion, really thinks about human beings.


    Even if he wants to retaliate, he will only retaliate against the chief nner of this operation, Li Yaoxiang, and those who failed.


    After seeing Kaneki Ken who just came in, Amon Koutarou said very politely, "Kaneki? Why are you here? Is there something that needs to be discussed with us?"


    Kaneki Ken did not wear a mask when dressed as a CCG members.


    So his identity has long been recognized by everyone.


    Kaneki Ken looked at Amon Koutarou and Li Yaoxiang again. The original panic performance again became gloomy again: "Something happened. I have to ask some questions. Li Yaoxiang, I hope you can give me a satisfactory answer."


    Amon Koutarou felt the insufficiency in Kaneki Ken''s tone.


    He looked towards Li Yaoxiang with some worry.


    But Li Yaoxiang was so indifferent from beginning to end, tasted the cup of coffee in his hand gracefully.


    "Ask, don''t hide anything."


    Kaneki Ken: "Didn''t you promise me back then that all the members of the Washuu would be handled by your CCG? Why are there still fish that slip through the?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "The enemy is too cunning. Some enemies have seen through our ns, and while we were in action, they invaded the ghoul detention center and released arge number of imprisoned ghouls. I also regret this matter, but I can only apologize to you on behalf of my subordinates."


    Hearing Li Yaoxiang admit his fault this time so lightly.


    Kaneki Ken is even more angry.


    He didn''t feel Li Yaoxiang''s regret at all.


    Kaneki Ken shouted suddenly: "Apology? You want to pass this thing with an apology?! You want me to forget it just because the enemy is too cunning?! What should I do with my dead partner?! I''ll kill all your rtives and friends, then apologize to you again, is that okay?!"


    An angry roar.


    On the spot, the surrounding crowd was disturbed.


    At this time, Kaneki Ken, no matter how much, did not take his life and death as one thing. He just wanted to retaliate, take revenge against these guys who regard his partner''s life as a mustard!


    If it were not for their negligence, Touka, Hinami, and everyone would not die!


    He will get an ideal result.


    The anger rises.


    The RC cells of Kaneki Ken within-the-body be more active and rolling.


    But when he was about to release his strength for a long time on this road, he suddenly lost his eyes and passed out.


    Mado Akira, together with a few CCG members, opened the gap between the tents.


    The tone is quick: "Special ss Li Yaoxiang"


    You can see this scene in front of your eyes, and you just have to swallow it back into your stomach and change your mouth: Special ss Li Yaoxiang, he is... "


    Li Yaoxiang said to them with a smile: "He was too excited, so he lost consciousness. It''s okay, you can go back to your post. Just leave it to me.


    After hearing the words, the few people were at a loss for words.


    In their hearts, Kaneki Ken has been regarded as having a strength beyond SSS-Rank, is he so easy to faint?


    Even Amon Koutarou, who was half lying on the hospital bed, looked strangely towards Li Yaoxiang.


    ...


    At the same time


    In the space of consciousness.


    An instant that Kaneki Ken just wanted to explode has been pulled into the space of consciousness by Li Yaoxiang, causing Kaneki Ken to fall into aatose state directly.


    Kaneki Ken, who just woke up in the consciousness space, was in a state of confusion. He didn''t understand why he came here suddenly.


    He can see the surrounding environment clearly.


    Here is the room in his conscious space.


    Kaneki Ken roared hysterically around him: "Didn''t you disappear?! Were you afraid to respond to me?! When I need you, you''re not there! When I don''t need you, you pull me in at this critical moment?! What do you want?! Your damned tortoise! Dare to pull me in, but dare not toe out and face me?!


    When Kaneki Ken had just noticed a problem, and immediately looked towards Li Yaoxiang ghost for help. But in the whole process of searching and rescue, he never got a response from Li Yaoxiang ghost.


    He firmly believes that Li Yaoxiang ghost must have known where Kirishima Touka''s entire group was captured.


    If Li Yaoxiang ghost can inform him earlier, perhaps Kirishima Touka''s entire group will not die.


    So this version of Li Yaoxiang in the consciousness space is also a part of his revenge target.


    A click is made.


    The door of the consciousness space is opened.


    Li Yaoxiang, who looks exactly the same as Kaneki Ken, appeared in Kaneki Ken''s eyes. Li Yaoxiang picking his ears and showed a sad expression: "Can you be even noisier? My eardrums are about to be shattered by you."


    Kaneki Ken not saying anything further.


    He rushed directly.


    Li Yaoxiang''s cor was grabbed by Kaneki''s hands and he said angrily: "You still have the face to show up in front of me?! I wanted to take action against them, but you pulled me in. What does this mean?! Are you afraid that I will make a big noise in someone''s camp and will be killed by others, even if you die together?! I tell you! Even if you can stop me this time, it won''t stop me next time!"

 Chapter 326: Tokyo Ghoul End

    Chapter 326: Tokyo Ghoul End


    Li Yaoxiang let Kaneki hold him.


    Just looked at Kaneki Ken quietly.


    Until Kaneki Ken had vented all his words, he said: "Finished?"


    This understatement of ''finished'' just made Kaneki Ken angry. The anger that he had just vented seemed to have been poured into a ball of cotton, and he waspletely helpless.


    Li Yaoxiang in front of him didn''t feel any guilt at all.


    He raised his fist and was about to hit Li Yaoxiang in the face.


    But was easily blocked by Li Yaoxiang, and then said, "When you''re done,e with me. I''ll take you to see some things. After seeing it, it''s not toote for you to decide whether to hit me or not."


    It doesn''t matter whether Kaneki Ken is willing or not.


    Li Yaoxiang just patted it lightly, but Kaneki Ken grabbed Li Yaoxiang''s hand with all his strength, and was easily subdued by Li Yaoxiang.


    Kaneki Ken burst into mes on the spot.


    Completely ignores the fact that he is not Li Yaoxiang''s opponent.


    Wanted to pounce on Li Yaoxiang''s back desperately.


    But just after taking the first step, the environment around him has undergone a major change, bing a more spacious ce, no longer in the familiar room just now.


    This is Li Yaoxiang''s consciousness space.


    The space of his consciousness is far wider than that of Ken Kaneki.


    Kaneki Ken''s consciousness space is two bedrooms and one living room.


    And Li Yaoxiang''s consciousness space is a mansion. A Western-style mansion with a party hall and dozens of rooms. This has something to do with Li Yaoxiang''s strength. As Li Yaoxiang''s strength became stronger, his consciousness space also naturally expanded.


    Kaneki Ken just panicked for a moment.


    came back to his senses and wanted to catch up with Li Yaoxiang.


    But even though he sprinted with all his strength, he still couldn''t catch up with Li Yaoxiang who was just walking slowly in front of him.


    He saw Li Yaoxiang push open a door and walked in.


    He managed to catch up this time.


    Li Yaoxiang stepped into this hall with his front feet, and his hind feet followed closely behind.


    But when he wanted to get angry at Li Yaoxiang, but the scene in front of him made him dumbfounded. He saw an incredible scene. Everyone who had been thinking about him was all in this hall.


    He saw Kirishima Touka with nervous expression and anxiety.


    He saw Fueguchi Family.


    He saw Kirishima Ayato.


    He saw the manager Yoshimura, Yoshimura Eto, etc.


    Even Arima Kishou is here.


    There is a nk in his head, he wonders if he is dreaming? If this is really a dream, then he hopes he never wakes up!


    Kaneki Ken reacted to it.


    There are already two women, one big and one small rushed towards him.


    Hinami flung directly into Kaneki Ken''s arms: "Big brother Kaneki!"


    Kaneki Ken stared nkly at the young girl who threw himself into his arms, feeling the sense of reality.


    Then he raised his head stupidly, looking at Kirishima Touka with an excited face and tears in his eyes.


    After Fueguchi Houshi left Kaneki Ken''s arms, Kirishima Touka couldn''t hold back her longing and rushed forward, holding Kaneki Ken tightly.


    Feeling the temperature from Kirishima Touka, the familiar smell, and the moist feeling prated by the tears on the shoulder... Kaneki Ken''s tears can no longer be hold back. He couldn''t help crying anymore.


    It''s true


    This is true


    It''s not a dream


    Touka, all of them haven''t left me...


    Li Yaoxiang: "Enough is enough. Show of love has their own assion, OK? So many people are looking at you, aren''t you too embarrassed to continue? Well, now you still want to beat me?"


    A scene that should have been heart-warming and touching.


    That was forcibly interrupted by this ignorant guy Li Yaoxiang.


    Kirishima Touka quickly released Kaneki Ken and stood on his side, embarrassed and bowed her head, but the jade hand refused to leave Kaneki Ken''s hand, fearing that as soon as she let go, Kaneki would disappear from her eyes again.


    Kaneki Ken, like a big child, wiped his tears and asked Li Yaoxiang: "What''s going on?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Don''t worry about what happened. You just need to know that I can resurrect them. Also, you have to think clearly, do you want them to live as humans or as ghouls in the future?"


    Ken Kaneki Startled: "You... you... you mean... you can not only resurrect them, but also turn them all into humans?"


    At this time, Fueguchi Hinami was pulling Kaneki Ken, pointing to Li Yaoxiang who looks exactly the same as Kaneki Ken: "Yeah, yeah, this big brother Kaneki keeps telling us he is not you, and that he can let us continue to live as ghouls or live as humans. It''s just that you need to make a decision, big brother Kaneki."


    Kaneki Ken still had that surprised look, he looked down at Hinami, unable to bear swallowed saliva, and then look back at Li Yaoxiang, wanting Li Yaoxiang to give him a positive answer again.


    Li Yaoxiang was nodding angrily.


    Kaneki Ken at this time has not so much thought to doubt whether Li Yaoxiang said true or false in the end, as long as he is sure that Touka and the entire group of young people are not fake.


    Kaneki Ken: "Can... Can you let them choose freely?"


    Li Yaoxiang nodded, agreeing: "What about you? Are you going to continue to be a ghoul, or be a human?"


    Kaneki Ken: "You... you have a way to change me back to human being?!"


    Li Yaoxiang nodded again.


    This time, he doesn''t know what to say.


    After thinking for a moment, Kaneki Ken said, "Can you give me some time to discuss it with everyone?"


    Li Yaoxiang agreed to Kaneki Ken''s request.


    After a while.


    Everyone finally has a final decision.


    Kaneki Ken decided to continue to survive as a ghoul. He needs his current strength, to protect everyone, to solve the current problems, to change this distorted world, so that everyone will have a stable life in the future.


    Yoshimura also decided to live as a ghoul.


    He said that he is already very old, it is better to use his own strength to protect everyone in the remaining time.


    As for other people, including Yoshimura Eto and Arima Kishou, they all decided to live their new lives as human beings.


    After a decision.


    Li Yaoxiang drove everyone out of his consciousness space.


    ...


    The picture returns to the tent.


    Kaneki Ken just woke up, both eyes suddenly opened, and he sat upright quickly. At the same time, the voice of Amon Koutarou came from his ear: "Kaneki, have we misunderstood? Do you have something to talk about?"


    Amon Koutarou is still lying on the hospital bed.


    Li Yaoxiang is still drinking coffee.


    It seems that time is not too long.


    Kaneki Ken did not take Amon Koutarou.


    At this time, how can he care about revenge or not? The most important thing is whether the picture I saw in the ''dream'' just now is true or false!


    "Ring ring! Ring ring!"


    The ringtone of the phone rings.


    Kaneki Ken looks like he was about to lose his head out of fear.


    He forgot where he put my phone.


    After groping for a while, he found the phone and answered the phone: "Hello..."


    After saying "hello", I said nothing.


    Tears were already flowing wildly.


    On the other end of the phone was the voice of Kirishima Touka. Kirishima Touka told him that they were all in the Anteiku shop now, and asked him to go back quickly to reunite.


    Li Yaoxiang said with a smile: "Is there something wrong?"


    Kaneki Ken quickly wiped away her tears: "No, it''s okay. I still have things to do."


    Turn around and leave.


    Amon Koutarou who left a confused face.


    Amon Koutarou strangely Looking at Kaneki Ken''s back, staring nkly at Li Yaoxiang: "Special ss Li Yaoxiang..."


    Li Yaoxiangughed loudly andughed extremely Hearty.


    "Hahahahaha! What''s the matter, we''ll talk about it tomorrow. The time is just right, and I should get off work."


    Put down the coffee cup, pointed to the watch, and left the tent happily.


    This is the normal ''getting off work on time'', but it was thest meeting between Amon Koutarou and Li Yaoxiang.


    The same scene also happened to Kaneki Ken. After leaving the tent, Kaneki Ken hurried back to reunite with Kirishima Touka''s entire group. But this does not prevent him from thanking Li Yaoxiang in his mind.


    He did not get a response.


    He mistakenly thought that Li Yaoxiang had to y missing for a while.


    However, the previous meeting in the consciousness space was also thest time they met.


    ...


    Several yearster.


    Because of the rtionship of ''dragon'', the ghouls and humans in Tokyo have finally resolved their hatred. Chigyou Kouitsu also sessfully developed a variety of finished products that can be eaten for ghouls.


    From now on.


    The whole Tokyo has finally been truly stabilized.


    CCG is no longer CCG.


    Renamed TSC (Tokyo Security Committee).


    After reaching their goals, Kaneki Ken and Amon Koutarou, both under TSC, have reasonably resolved the crisis of ''Dragon''. After the battle, the two stood side by side, looking at the messy battlefield in front of them.


    At this time, Amon Koutarou took out the photos he had taken with Li Yaoxiang from his pocket.


    Silence in my heart: "Are you seeing this? Your original n, we havepleted it. Thanks to you, the people of Tokyo can finally live a stable life."


    Kaneki Ken nced at the photo in the hand of Amon Koutarou.


    Looking at Li Yaoxiang in the photo, he also spoke into his mind: "Is that you... If he is really you... why did you leave without saying goodbye?"


    From the day when the Li Yaoxiang in his mind and the real Li Yaoxiang disappeared at the same time, Kaneki had doubts about their identities.


    After all, both of their voices are exactly the same.


    The voice that has apanied him for nearly 20 years, and he will never admit that it''s a mistake no matter what.


    At this time, the mobile phones of the two people ring at the same time.


    After the call, both of them smiled at each other.


    At this time their respective wives, Kirishima Touka and Mado Akira, urged them to go back to dinner.


    The other side''s son and daughter kept moring to hear father''s voice on the phone, obviously in the same space.


    Kaneki Ken: "Go back, otherwise you will be scolded again."


    Amon Koutarou put away the photo: "Okay."


    Kaneki Ken: "By the way, after going back this time, can you print one more photo for me?"


    Amon Koutarou: "oh?"


    Kaneki Ken: "It''s nothing, I have always thought that Li Yaoxiang is special and very simr to my family. Maybe he is my long-lost family member. I also want to let Ichika know that she has such an excellent uncle."


    That''s it.


    A few years after Li Yaoxiang left.


    Kaneki Ken finally leads his ideal life and has a perfect family.


    And Li Yaoxiang also seeded in this world, leaving an indelible footprint.


    The history book of TSC will always record the contribution made by Li Yaoxiang.


    And Li Yaoxiang will always be missed by Kaneki Ken and Amon Koutarou entire group.


    But what they don''t know is that Li Yaoxiang, whom they have worried about in recent years, has already embarked on a brand-new journey in another world at this moment...

 Chapter 327: New recruit Li Yaoxiang

    Chapter 327: New recruit Li Yaoxiang


    The sound of seagulls came to the ears.


    The air smells of seawater.


    With a mop in his left hand, he stood on the drifting deck. Looking at the surrounding environment, Li Yaoxiang was shocked to find that he was now on a small warship that was sailing.


    It''s fast.


    The identity information given by the system came to his mind.


    No father and no mother.


    Ran into a bad luck a while ago and met a Marine Admiral and rmended him to join the Marine.


    Now it has be a recruit just after joining the marine.


    Because of being too straightforward in dealing with people and not being flexible, he offended many colleagues and arranged to do all kinds of chores. There was no shift system at all.


    The captain in charge of this small warship didn''t care anymore. Instead, he was very happy to see him be theughingstock of this warship. He was humiliated and bullied by everyone.


    After all, a stubborn and out-of-this-world guy like Li Yaoxiang''s predecessor might have a big trouble in a few moments, harming the entire ship.


    It would be great to let Li Yaoxiang retreat from difficulties.


    At least when the Admiral asked about Li Yaoxiang''s situation, he had another reason to fool around, saying that Li Yaoxiang could not endure hardship and chose to quit. Even if the Admiral really do investigate, they are well-founded and stand up to verification.


    Before this new identity, Li Yaoxiang did not care how he was bullied.


    After all, the person being bullied is not him.


    But what he cared about was the familiar nouns.


    Marine, Admirals, Captains, World Government...


    With these familiar terms, Li Yaoxiang has vaguely guessed what kind of world he came to this time.


    Open the system interface and take a look.


    [Host: Li Yaoxiang


    Darkening target: Monkey D. Luffy


    Target soul: 1/30


    Darkening degree: 0%


    Darkening value: 3507834


    Mall: omitted]


    Just as expected.


    His guess is correct.


    I really transmigrated to One Piece World.


    After confirming that his ce is One Piece World, Li Yaoxiang''s first reaction was excitement.


    Compared with the Japanese-style ancient World of Hokage, and the modern city world like the other, One Piece World is obviously much more interesting for him who loves traveling and sightseeing.


    Here there are mermaids he has never seen.


    There are inds flying in the sky.


    In short, there are all kinds of whimsical things, everything here, it can be said to be a must-see ce for travelers.


    As for


    The darkening target turned out to be Monkey D. Luffy, a guy with a Hell Level difficulty...


    Why cares!


    Let''s talk first.


    Anyway, Luffy is still just a newborn baby, and he can''t do anything.


    The thought of being able to walk in such a whimsical world, Li Yaoxiang became more and more excited, and even began to n his journey in his mind.


    The first ce, should I go there?


    Is it better to go there?


    Just when Li Yaoxiang thought a little, he heard an unpleasant noise from his ear, interrupting his thoughts.


    "Captain, Captain, do you see?"


    "Li Yaoxiang, he''s cking again."


    "He obviously doesn''t care about you, captain."


    Li Yaoxiang''s eyebrows were twisted up at the moment, and he turned his head to see which unfamiliar guy actually dared to disturb him in arranging his schedule.


    Turn around and take a look.


    What caught your eye was a in sailor wearing a sleeveless sailor suit and a guy wearing a marine uniform who looked a little bit squeamish.


    From the memory given by the system, look for the information of these two people.


    An answer will be avable soon.


    Ordinary seamen are just one of the many colleagues who see themselves as unsightly.


    Favorite is to shoot ttery.


    He knew that the ship''s captain wanted to drive himself out of their troops.


    So keep an eye on Li Yaoxiang, as long as Li Yaoxiang makes a slight mistake, he will immediately go to examine.


    As for that sly-eyed guy, he is the person in charge of this patrol boat.


    It was also the captain who wanted to drive away Li Yaoxiang.


    the name speaks for itself.


    It looks very simr to a mouse, with six beards on the face simr to mice.


    Commonly known as Captain Nezumi (Mouse).


    Li Yaoxiang recognized this strange looking guy. If there were no idents, he should be the captain who took the bribe with the "Arlong Pirates" in the future.


    The reason why Nami''s experience was so bad.


    It can be said that all thanks to this mouse captain.


    This Captain Nezumi is the person who patrols the Sea Territory of the Arlong Pirates. If it were not for him to ept the bribe, he had shielded the Arlong Pirates for so many years.


    Arlong Pirates are doing things without being so unscrupulous.


    The residents of that Sea Territory will not be so miserable.


    Nami''s new life is not easy to get, and it will not be so bad.


    Li Yaoxiang looked at this guy with great interest.


    The identity given to you by didn''t expect system happens to be working under this guy''smand.


    Captain Nezumi across from him was in a very good mood when he heard the dog lege to give a small report. Finally got the opportunity to punish this Li Yaoxiang.


    But just when he was thinking about how to punish Li Yaoxiang, a guy who didn''t fit in, he found that Li Yaoxiang was looking at his face with a curious look, which was really unbearable.


    The good mood was all destroyed by Li Yaoxiang''s rude gaze.


    The appearance is a thorn in his heart.


    Forget about outsiders or superiors, now even a new recruit like you dares to look at him so recklessly?


    How can he swallow this breath?


    He decided that this time, Li Yaoxiang must be punished properly.


    Even if you can''t kill him directly, at least beat him seriously and lie on the bed for months!


    "Rookie Li Yaoxiang! Are you tired of being alive? Dare to bezy on the ship I control, are you not putting the captain in your eye? Someonee here! Help me catch this recruit! If he dares to resist, just... just... crippling his legs! I''m going to let him know what military...w is today!"


    tone barely fell.


    The henchman standing beside him quicklyplied.


    Randomly, he showed a vicious look, stared at Li Yaoxiang badly, and rushed towards Li Yaoxiang.


    Those bastards who regretted that they were one step behind and didn''t have time to make a small report, this time the reaction was not slow. Their expressions were exactly the same, and they were equally vicious. They could not wait to step on Li Yaoxiang''s corpse and rush towards Li Yaoxiang.


    In an instant.


    With Li Yaoxiang as the central point.


    At the same time, six henchmen rushed towards Li Yaoxiang in a surrounding manner.


    During the sprint, everyone looks at me and I look at you.


    The ideas in my heart coincide with tacit understanding.


    The captain has already hinted that it is very obvious, isn''t it?


    Regardless of whether Li Yaoxiang resisted or not.


    Anyway, the y must be done enough so that even if Li Yaoxiang didn''t resist, he still looked like he was resisting them. And they can only reluctantly, and logically crippled Li Yaoxiang''s legs...

 Chapter 328: I cant hear you, say it again

    Chapter 328: I can''t hear you, say it again


    He was standing on the side of Captain Nezumi.


    Under the same perspective, how could Li Yaoxiang not be found to be a taboo against Captain Nezumi?


    So he had already prepared to sprint past and arrest Li Yaoxiang.


    Now also as he wished, the first rushed to Li Yaoxiang.


    While he was still distressed, how could he induce Li Yaoxiang to attack himself or touch himself, but Li Yaoxiang stretched out a ''hand-waving'' gesture very cooperatively.


    This named henchman is a big joy.


    Although he doesn''t understand why Li Yaoxiang suddenly made such a ''waving'' action, it seemed like he wanted them to step back, but that didn''t prevent him from actively putting his face on the back of Li Yaoxiang''s hand?


    As long as he took the initiative to put his face on it, and then showed his acting skills, Li Yaoxiang''s hand waved gently and knocked him to the ground, wouldn''t he justifiably nder Li Yaoxiang and resist?


    It seems that the goddess of fate is also looking after him.


    Sometimes, when you are alone, you can''t stop it.


    In addition to his position as the captain, can he still be out of the palm of your hand?


    "Chi chi chi chi."


    Nezumiughed so treacherous in his heart, but with a look of ''unbelievable'' on the surface, he greeted Li Yaoxiang with the back of his hand.


    The other 5 henchmen who saw it, also scolded ''shameless!'' But, in my heart, it was an envy, jealousy, and hate to rush forward to rece the first named henchman to greet Li Yaoxiang''s blow.


    Glory and wealth are in front of them, and it is not their turn to be in a hurry.


    I really want to lose this opportunity, so I have to work harder when I start to p Li Yaoxiang''s legster, I hope Captain Nezumi can see it in his eyes, remember it in his heart, and don''t forget their credit.


    Seeing that the back of the hand and the cheek of the leading henchmen were getting closer and closer, the other 5 henchmen knew that it was toote to ''grab the credit'', so they had no choice but to give up their hearts, change the style of the painting, and be ready to rush to attack Li Yaoxiang at any time.


    Even if you can''t eat meat, you should at least drink soup, right?


    But just when everyone thought the picture was about to be staged ording to the script in their mind...


    Mutation protruded.


    Imagine howling at close range, not at all appeared in the ear.


    Into everyone''s ears, but a hysterical scream: "Ah !"


    The screams drifted away.


    It sounded like a person beside him was shot and flew out, and the distance was not too far.


    Everyone on the battleship doesn''t know what happened.


    But they were all attracted by the scream.


    Look in the direction where the sound disappeared.


    They saw a small ck spot on the horizon, and the little ck spot looked familiar, like the one they were familiar with.


    They saw the little ck dot flying to a good distance.


    A sea beast suddenly jumped out of the ocean and swallowed the little ck spot directly.


    Then there is no more.


    The five henchmen forgot to continue to pounce forward.


    The other members of the battleship also forgot who they are, where they are, and where they are.


    In addition to the sound of waves, there was no other sound.


    After a while.


    Everyone''s gaze shifted from afar to the battleship.


    How can there be a silhouette of the henchman on the battleship at this time? At this time, how can they not think of the little ck dots just now, exactly what they are familiar with headed henchman?


    Everyone''s gaze changed from dull to slowly frightened.


    Unbelievably looked towards Li Yaoxiang''s ''waving hand'' that has not been recovered.


    Invariably swallowed saliva.


    Dare not to make a little sound or move.


    I don''t know how long it has been.


    The henchman who rushed the fastest just now, the one closest to Li Yaoxiang, finally could not bear the pressure, and was so frightened that his legs became soft and fell to the ground, his fingers trembling and pointing at Li Yaoxiang said: "You... you... you... you dare... "


    Wait for him to finish talking.


    Li Yaoxiang took the initiative to help him take the conversation, said with a slight smile: "Resist, right?"


    Having said that, a ''golden right leg'' came directly.


    One kick kicked a henchman who fell to the ground and flew out, disappearing into the sky.


    The first reaction came from Captain Nezumi.


    He immediately turned into a hippie smile, and wanted to sell well with Li Yaoxiang.


    But Li Yaoxiang didn''t even give him a chance to speak, so he directly exhibited the ''Chakra beast ws'', which stretched out and became bigger, and directly shot the Captain Nezumi with a palm.


    One Piece World is not like the Tokyo Ghoul World.


    The ability here is all kinds of strange things.


    Li Yaoxiang does not worry about the strangeness of his ability, which will cause the turmoil of One Piece World.


    There are not so many scruples.


    There is no need to cover up his ability.


    That''s it.


    The first henchman was ''swinged'' and flew.


    The second henchman was kicked off.


    In order to save life, the third henchman subconsciously threatened: "You... you... you... you killed the Captain Nezumi, the Marine will not let you go!"


    ''pa!'' A loud noise.


    Another chakra was shot by Chakra beast ws.


    Li Yaoxiang pulled out his ear and looked towards the fourth henchman casually: "I just didn''t hear clearly, who said he killed Captain Nezumi?"


    Seeing that the threat didn''t work, the fourth jerk immediately used the navy''s specialty, ''Da Yi!''.


    "We are representing marine justice! We serve the people! Don''t kill innocents anymore!"


    The same scene is staged again.


    Another shot was taken.


    Li Yaoxiang disdainfully nced at, the fourth henchman who was shot and flew, and turned his head towards towards the fifth henchman, said well: "I didn''t hear clearly, who killed Captain Nezumi?"


    The fifth henchman is clever.


    He immediately saluted Li Yaoxiang: "Report! Captain Nezumi was killed by a pirate!"


    Li Yaoxiang was satisfied with the nomination, looked towards sixth henchman: "What about you??"


    The sixth henchman did not dare to be negligent and saluted: "Report! I also saw it! Captain Nezumi was killed by a pirate!"


    "Well, great." Li Yaoxiang nods again.


    Then there was a loud ''pa!''


    The two were shot and flew together.


    Li Yaoxiang turned his head, nced at the rest of the battleship, and said, "Everyone heard what they said? Captain Nezumi was killed by a pirate. If someone asks, don''t let me teach you. How should you answer this?"


    Instantly.


    Everyone on the battleship saluted at the same time, responding in unison: "Yes! Captain Nezumi was killed by a pirate!"


    Li Yaoxiang was satisfied with the nod.


    Instantly pointed to the lump on the ground, and ordered: "I''ll go back to the cabin to rest first, and when Ie out, I don''t want to see any dirty things on my battleship."


    Finished speaking.


    Li Yaoxiang went to the cabin.


    Everyone on the battleship was scared to clear the scene quickly.


    It''s not enough to be clear.


    Every ce on the boat must be cleaned, I''m afraid that Li Yaoxiang will settle the ounts if they didn''t...

 Chapter 329: Purchasing New Abilities

    Chapter 329: Purchasing New Abilities


    After showing how strong his strength is.


    Li Yaoxiang''s identity and status came on the spot with a 180 degree change.


    Although he is not the Chief-In-Charge of this patrol warship in name, or a naval captain, the members of the ship have an attitude towards him that is better than that of the captain.


    Li Yaoxiang just walked into the cabin.


    Someone rushed forward spontaneously and took the lead in cleaning the room that originally belonged to Captain Nezumi; items Colonel Mouse used before, bed sheets, pillows, etc.


    All will be reced with new ones.


    I hope to save some good influence in front of Li Yaoxiang, the new ''chief leader''.


    As for the previous leader?


    Of course, if you die, you die.


    The rtionship bound by interests will eventually be lost because of interests.


    Being able to work under themand of Captain Nezumi, of course, is not much better. They all know this very well, so now they are courteous in front of Li Yaoxiang, and no one looks down on anyone.


    This phenomenon is normal for them.


    And Li Yaoxiang didn''t anger them because of all the scathing deeds they had done under Captain Nezumi.


    Angry for him?


    That''s not worth it.


    Like him, there are other cancer tumors in the marine.


    Li Yaoxiang is not a messenger of justice.


    Really angry for him?


    Then how long will you stay angry?


    So when Li Yaoxiang arrived before and after the door and saw the brand-new room, he didn''t put on a bad face or stingy his praise, patted the eye-catching crew member and said, "You are very good! I''m optimistic about you, keep working hard!"


    Then snapped.


    Close the door and stop talking.


    Although there is no actual reward, the praise has been very useful to the eye-catching crew member. If Li Yaoxiang, the new leader, really wants to settle ounts, thinking about his performance today, he will at least let him go, right?


    This makes him so excited.


    The whole person feels a lot better.


    The surrounding air is breathtaking and fresh.


    The next step is of course to show it off.


    After the group heard the news, each and everyone thumped their feet and secretly hated themselves for a slow step. But for them, it might not be a piece of good news, at least it can be determined that Li Yaoxiang, the new leader, is not ufortable as Nezumi.


    Next.


    In addition to continuing to clean, the crowd is thinking hard, how to make the tteryfortable, intimate, and perfect in the next days.


    That''s it.


    After Captain Nezumi died, the patrol boat ran and danced.


    The patrol will continue on the original designated route.


    Everything goes back to where it started.


    ...


    At the same time.


    In the cabin, in the room.


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t know that he had inadvertently praised him, and that he would have made such a big change in the crew.


    Of course, even if he knew, he didn''t really care.


    After all, at this time, he has paid full attention to how to spend the darkening value.


    When leaving Naruto World, he brought a darkening value of more than 1 million.


    After going to the ghoul world, there is nothing worth spending on it. In addition to some trivial consumptions such as ''Sixty-Four Palms Mastery'', ''Konoha''s White Fang sword art Mastery'', etc., the most spent in the ghoul world is the resurrection fee at thete stage.


    A total of nearly 500,000 darkening values were spent.


    There are currently more than 3.5 million left.


    More than 3.5 million darkening values, sounds like a lot.


    But in One Piece World, it really seems to be insufficient.


    After all, there are too many strange abilities in the One Piece world, all of which Li Yaoxiang is very eager to get. These abilities can still y a lot of roles for him today.


    And there is still no kind of ''side effects''.


    After all, what he purchased from the system mall is only ''ability''.


    Not the whole devil fruit.


    So he doesn''t need to worry about the problem of ability superposition, and sea water and seastones will not be effective for him.


    And these capabilities include


    1) Haki.


    If you want to gain a foothold in One Piece World, Haki is definitely the top priority.


    This not only enhances his current physique, but also makes it easier for him to face the ability of natural fruit. Moreover, Li Yaoxiang believes that this ''Haki'' is very practical for him even after he transmigrated to other worlds.


    2) Natural fruits.


    Li Yaoxiang''s physical fitness today, although also not weak, is only rtive to the present.


    No one can guarantee where next world he will go to, and whether he will be directly hammered.


    So, having the ability to switch the body into a natural element anytime, anywhere, Li Yaoxiang feels that it is still necessary to purchase it.


    3) Door-Door Fruit.


    For a traveler like him who likes to go everywhere, the door fruit is a must.


    Experience the feeling of sailing, and experience it for a month or two, that''s enough. If he''s going to go everywhere and spend months in the ocean, it would be better to call it a hell.


    Of course, it is not impossible to fly.


    But isn''t it not as convenient as the door fruit?


    Think about going


    It''s so much too much ''ability'' that he wants to buy.


    3.5 million darkening value, it seems that it is not enough.


    After thinking about it for a while.


    Li Yaoxiang finally decided to redeem some of the capabilities he desperately needed.


    Observation Haki mastery = 400,000


    Armament Haki mastery = 400,000


    Conqueror''s Haki mastery = 400,000


    Door Door Fruit Ability Mastery = 400,000


    Time Time Fruit Ability Mastery = 400,000


    Thunder Fruit Ability Mastery = 400,000


    Haki, door fruit, needless to say. Their roles in Li Yaoxiang has been introduced before. As for why the time fruit ability, and thunder fruit ability was purchased among the many logia(natural) fruit abilities...


    The reason is also very simple.


    First talk about the ability of time fruit.


    This is a fruit that can transmigrated the future but cannot travel through the past.


    In the original work of One Piece, Momonusuke''s mother, Kozuki Toki is the owner of this fruit ability.


    Li Yaoxiang wants to explore every world, and his darkening goal starts with the baby. How much time is wasted? It''s too long to stay in the same world for more than ten years, right?


    With the ability of this time fruit, it will undoubtedly be a great help for his future journey.


    Then there is the thunder fruit ability.


    In Li Yaoxiang''s view, in exchange for this ability, in addition to obtaining the ability of body elementalization, it is also possible to use ''it'' as a ''power''.


    After all, the thunder can also be said to be electricity.


    Although Naruto World also has a lot of Ninjutsu of Lightning Attribute, it is convenient to have no thunder fruit.


    Maybe one day in the future, Li Yaoxiang travels to a certain world and needs to use ''electricity'' to activate certain things, and then this ability can be very useful.


    After careful consideration.


    Li Yaoxiang now spends 2.4 million darkening values in exchange for the above modities''.


    There are only more than 1.1 million darkening values left, so save them first, just in case.


    After doing all this.


    Li Yaoxiang activated the ability of the door fruit and started his sightseeing tour in the world of One Piece...

 Chapter 330: Holy shit, youre so stupid

    Chapter 330: Holy shit, you''re so stupid


    The years are like a shuttle.


    In a blink of an eye, three years have passed.


    In the past three years, almost every ce in One Piece world has been visited by Li Yaoxiang. When he was satisfied with the itinerary he had arranged, he had to face a cruel fact.


    Oops


    The darkening target is Luffy


    Luffy, a guy with a rubber band in his head, can really darken?


    He really still has a chance to leave this world?


    The wavese back, like waking up from a dream.


    That feeling is urgent and bad.


    It''s like starting school tomorrow, only to find that the summer homework has not been touched.


    This time it''s really Holy Sh*t.


    The darkened target disyed on the system interface, Li Yaoxiang was stunned for a while.


    In the end, he can only helplessly sigh.


    Now, no matter how much you think about it, it won''t help you. You have to face things and try. You can''t just give up treatment without even trying, right?


    Li Yaoxiang asked himself that no salted fish has reached this point.


    Fortunately, he did not do nothing during the three years he spent outside.


    At least he will pull Luffy into the space of consciousness from time to time, teasing Luffy when he was a baby, which inadvertently leads to the rtionship between Luffy and him, which can be regarded as having a certain foundation.


    Now that he has decided to take action for his ''ckening cause'', the first thing to do, of course, is to first confirm whether Luffy is really or is loved by his grandfather Garp''s Iron Fist too much.


    3 years old.


    Children of this age, as long as they are normal, should begin to understand some truth. Not to mention the rtively precocious One Piece world?


    Don''t look at Nico Robin when she was at the age of eight.


    Ace began hunting at the age of 10.


    Sabo was running away from home when he was 10, didn''t he go to sea as a pirate?


    The early maturity of Momonosuke is even more obvious.


    Therefore, whether Luffy is really stupid or was beaten stupid, Li Yaoxiang thinks that some clues can be seen now, and there should be no misjudgment results.


    Moreover, even if there are some deviations, it won''t be able to control that much.


    After all, if Li Yaoxiang determines that Luffy was stupid by Garp, then he can at least stop all this early. So that the darkening road in the future can be better.


    Miss so far.


    Li Yaoxiang no longer hesitated.


    That night, while Luffy was asleep, he directly pulled him into the space of consciousness.


    ...


    In the space of consciousness.


    "Luffy. Luffy."


    Luffy, who was asleep, heard a familiar voice calling him and blinked at the moment. Blinking his big eyes, he sat up excitedly.


    When I saw that Li Yaoxiang was really not far from his side, those big eyes suddenly became shiny.


    Then quickly stood up and rushed to Li Yaoxiang.


    Luffy:  ()


    Luffy: "It''s you! Big Brother! You''re finally looking for me! How? How? Did you bring anything today? Delicious for me?"


    At the beginning, Li Yaoxiang was really just idle and wanted to make Luffy y, so he didn''t use Transformation Jutsu to hide his identity.


    When Luffy got used to his appearance, he was toozy to change it.


    Moreover, he knew Luffy was greedy.


    So almost every time hees in, he will bring food from all over to lure Luffy.


    This led Luffy to see Li Yaoxiang''s an instant, and the first thing was to think of eating.


    Li Yaoxiang grinned helplessly.


    Luffy''s hair was dialed.


    A chicken leg was made out of thin air, and handed to Luffy.


    Luffy didn''t think much and couldn''t see the Big Brother in front of him.


    Take the chicken leg and start to bite, eating with keen interest pleasure.


    Li Yaoxiang squatted down, maintaining a height almost equal to Luffy''s, and asked, "Luffy, you always eat whatever I give you, aren''t you afraid that the food I give you is poisonous?"


    (    `)?


    Luffy looks like "mud is talking about rice".


    Luffy: "What is poison?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Poison is something that will die if you eat it."


    ( o) Oh, so that''s how it is.


    Luffy is still chewing and chewing, while nodding that he understands.


    Looking at Luffy''s attitude, Li Yaoxiang had a slightly bad hunch, and immediately clenched the teeth. He said, "Luffy, I''m not lying to you, in fact, this chicken leg is poisonous, and I specially used it to poison you!"


    () Luffy still eats with keen interest pleasure.


    It''s even licking bones.


    Li Yaoxiang: " ( lll)"


    In this situation, a sh of lightning shed.


    For Li Yaoxiang, it is simply thunder from a clear sky.


    Holy Sh*t!


    He''s really stupid


    Luffypletely ignored the poison, pulled Li Yaoxiang''s sleeve: "Big Brother, is there any more?"


    Li Yaoxiang was stunned. Looks-at Luffy, subconsciously took out another chicken leg, handed him, numbly said: "Poisonous, poison to death you."


    Luffy said he was understood.


    Poisonous, right?


    Then continue to chew.


    Li Yaoxiang''s hand sweeps ended the exchange and returned Luffy''s consciousness to reality.


    And he himself is focused on the main body.


    Lying on the bed, he stared nkly at the ceiling.


    He watched it all night.


    Until the next morning, hepletely digested the fact that Luffy was really stupid.


    After epting this fact, he seemed to be awakened and straightened up.


    "No!"


    "Can''t be negative like this anymore!"


    "Naruto is so hard to darken, and all of them are darkened by me, Luffy It must be possible!"


    "I must be able to leave this world sessfully! "


    Next.


    The thoughts in my mind started to run fast. All the plots he is familiar with in One Piece world are recalled. There are only a few of the most important points in Luffy''s life.


    The rest of the time, it was almost smooth sailing, and there were no major setbacks.


    In the final analysis


    It''s all because of his identity, and his backing is strong enough.


    Grandfather is a Navy Vice Admiral who canpete with One Piece Roger, Monkey D. Garp.


    Father is the leader of the revolutionary who can challenge the World Government, Monkey D. Dragon.


    This led to the real ruler of the world government, the leader of the Tianlong people who even the Five Old Stars would bow down to when they saw him, Im, when he heard about the Monkey D. family, he became afraid and did not dare to do anything to Luffy.


    Since that is the case


    Since Luffy''s original experience, he can''te into contact with too much darkness...


    Then take the initiative to lead Luffy to meet the dark side of this world!


    Li Yaoxiang closed both eyes at the moment.


    Thinking in my head.


    Various ns andyouts are calcted quickly in my mind.


    After an hour.


    Li Yaoxiang suddenly opened his eyes.


    One year!


    One yearter, the best time to start darkening Luffy!


    And before that, I can''t idle myself. I must start toy out for the future darkening n in this year

 Chapter 331: One year later, the plan begins

    Chapter 331: One yearter, the n begins


    Time is in a hurry.


    The years are like a shuttle.


    In a blink of an eye, one year has passed.


    A medium-sized naval battleship.


    Li Yaoxiang was wearing a cape with the word "justice" engraved on it, standing on the deck, looking at a pirate ship in the distance, feeling the sea breeze and listening to the waves.


    At this moment, Dory, who was very clever at the time, was the first to think of cleaning the room for him, Dory''s voice: "Rear Admiral, congrattions Rear Admiral, you have been promoted from Captain to Rear Admiral in just one year. In my opinion, this Rear Admiral cloak is tailor-made for you. Only if you put on this cloak, can you truly disy its imposing manner. Exert the majesty that the Navy should have. The word justice on cloak is more appropriate for you. It just made me ashamed of being inferior. Rear Admiral, my respect for you is like a torrent of water  "


    "Red g" X Drake (read as "Diez Drake") is the captain of the Marine Secret Special Unit SWORD. In order to go undercover as a pirate, he publicly defected from his position as rear admiral. Drake is the son of the Marine-turned-pirate Diez Barrels, and was affiliated with the Barrels pirates until he defected to the Marines. As a young adult, he was called Dory.


    Li Yaoxiang nced at the side of his body for more blessings: "Enough, you''ve been following me for several years, still can''t get rid of the habit of ttering?"


    Dory smiled, bent over, and respectfully said: "The Rear Admiral is joking, I''m only telling the truth, why would I be ttering?"


    During the conversation between the two, the battleship and the pirate ship had less than 50 meters away.


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t intend to talk about the topic of ''ttering'' and continued to argue with Dory. He looked back at the pirate ship again and said, "These pirates, I''ll leave them to you to deal with them, is there any problem?"


    When ites to business.


    Dory suddenly respected, no more frivolous.


    Instinctively said: "No problem, Rear Admiral! Leave it to us!"


    tone barely fell.


    Behind the two stood the neat line of troops and responded in unison: "Leave it to us, Rear Admiral!"


    Li Yaoxiang''s eyes are still on the pirate ship, which was twice asrge as its own battleship, listened to the pirates on the pirate ship, and all kinds of vicious words of screaming, provocation, and sarcasm, holding his hands on his chest, calmly said: "What are you waiting for? Haven''t started yet?"


    "Yes!"


    All the marines, including Dory, answered in unison ''Yes!''.


    In an instant, they ''stepped on the air'', one after another, they crossed Li Yaoxiang and leaped towards the pirate ship opposite.


    Yes.


    It''s just stepping on the air.


    The marines uses the "Moonwalk" in the Rokushiki.


    This is also one of the achievements that Li Yaoxiang has worked hard for this year. To implement his darkening n, strength, prestige, identity, and status are indispensable.


    So as early as a year ago, he began to cultivate his own team.


    It cost 600,000 darkening points, exchanged for ''Rokushiki'', and then taught every member of the ship.


    The original group of henchmen, under the influence of Li Yaoxiang, have all been reformed to be a navy that truly maintains ''justice''.


    This process of change is not too difficult.


    After all, like them, they have no backers and have been in the navy for many years.


    Who didn''t hold a sense of mission when they first joined the Navy?


    Only when they came into contact with the cruel reality and the boss like the ''Captain Nezumi'' did they have to bow their heads to life. Eventually it evolved into the look of the henchmen in the beginning.


    How about a year ago?


    A year ago, Li Yaoxiang not only did not pursue their past mistakes.


    He was more willing to teach them set of housekeeping skills than the ''Rokushiki''


    How could they, the surviving clever ghosts, not know what to choose?


    So during this year, Li Yaoxiang did not have to urge him.


    This group of henchmen who gave up their dreams for life in the past, each and everyone seized the opportunity and worked hard to death. Today, a yearter, there have been such achievements.


    But


    This is not enough for Li Yaoxiang.


    In the first three years of his journey, because he was obsessed with sightseeing and traveling, and in order not to let others disturb his stable life, every captain sent by the headquarters would be killed by ''pirates''.


    Then he imed to have solved the pirates.


    Finally, it was rational and clearly structured, from recruits to majors.


    Changed from Captain to Commodore to Rear Admiral.


    Until he became the ruler of this battleship, no need to be controlled by others. He no longer cares.


    That''s a waste of three years.


    Because of this, in the fourth year when he decided to startyout and action, he would catch up. Continuously killing many pirates. It was only a yearter that he was promoted to a Rear Admiral.


    And the team that followed him at the beginning has also risen one by one.


    The promotion and the sry increase.


    But Li Yaoxiang is very clear, this is just the beginning.


    What he wants to achieve is far from satisfying him by the rank of Rear Admiral. After that, there was the voice of Vice Admiral, Admiral, and even finally a ce in the Navy!


    Only in this way can he achieve the effect he wants.


    It''s just that the process is not in a hurry.


    The navy of this period did notck powerful men.


    If you want to get promoted, it is not just strength. In the case of unwillingness to cause turmoil in One Piece world, he can only aplish his goal by continuously umting military exploits and experience.


    This process may take 3 or 4 years.


    It may take 7 or 8 years.


    In short, it can''t bepleted in a short time.


    However, Li Yaoxiang is not in a hurry, because Luffy is only 4 years old now.


    He has time.


    Moreover, who said that in the process of his promotion, he could not darken Luffy at the same time?


    If it is said that he worked hard to be promoted to the Navy Admiral, which wasid out for the darkening of thete stage, then the day he had been waiting for a year ago was the ''seed'' he had prepared for the early ckening.


    A year has passed now.


    The time is ripe.


    Looking that the situation has been controlled by a group of subordinates, Li Yaoxiang nced at thest nce, and he no longer took care of it. While turning around and returning to the cabin to rest, he secretly muttered in his heart, "It''s also time to start acting..."


    ...


    At the same time.


    A country, a certain ind.


    The warship of Garp is now anchored on the shore of the ind.


    Garp personally led the way and walked somewhere on the ind.


    They are moving towards the jungle at the center of the ind.


    Luffyined and muttered along the way.


    "Grandpa, I said it, can you go next time?! Today Big Brother promised me to take me to another ce!"


    Garp stopped, turned, and walked angrily toward Luffy, giving him a ''Iron Fist of Love''.


    ''Boom'' a light sound.


    Luffy top of the head has a ''tall building''.


    The pain caused him to shed tears.


    But he didn''t act coquettishly or cry, just touched the pain on the top of the rubbed his head, clenched his teeth, and stared at Garp with annoyance

 Chapter 332: Goodbye, see you next time

    Chapter 332: Goodbye, see you next time


    "Smelly Brat! Keep using big brother as an excuse! I have told you how many times, in this world there is no Big Brother what you said! If you want to be an expert, you can''t bezy! I can tell you, this time you won''t be in the jungle for just a week, don''t expect me to pick you up!"


    Garp''s intention is to train Luffy into a great navy.


    So he has been training Luffy in a spartan way. From time to time, Luffy is thrown into the jungle and left to fend for itself.


    This is not the first time Luffy is here.


    Before, he used earthworms, snakes, insects, etc. in the jungle to solve food problems.


    Garp until now, don''t think there is anything wrong with this. However, when Luffy mentioned ''Big Brother'', Garp subconsciously thought that Luffy wanted to bezy and made excuses to deceive him.


    After all, he has taken care of Luffy for several years.


    If there is a character like a big brother, how could he not be discovered by him?


    So all along, he thought that there was no big brother in this world. All of this is just that children are ignorant and babbling nonsense.


    He gave an iron fist of love.


    After scolding, it wasn''t enough. Garp also dragged Luffy''s face to the jungle.


    The pain made Luffy croak and beat Garp''s palm continuously.


    Not long.


    One old and one young man soon came to the edge of the jungle.


    Garp only loosened Luffy''s cheeks.


    At this time, Luffy''s cheeks were already swollen into arge piece, he cautious and solemn stroked his cheeks, fiercely Stared at Garp.


    Garp ignored him and said seriously: "Go in and I will pick you up in a week."


    "Hmph! Just go!"


    After saying that, Luffy walked towards the jungle angrily. Before entering the jungle, he didn''t forget to turn around and grimaced at Garp.


    Garp seems to be anxious and wants to catch up.


    Luffyughed heartily and ran away.


    However, after a few steps, Garp stopped. Even if Luffy''s silhouette hadpletely disappeared in his field of view, he didn''t mean to leave.


    Instead, several consecutive jumps came to a towering tree.


    From high in the sky, watching Luffy''s every move.


    This is not the first time Garp has had such behavior. This is true even for the previous few times. On the surface, it was said that he woulde back to meet Luffy in a few days, but in fact he never left.


    After all, Luffy is just a child a few years old.


    How could he really let Luffy fend for himself in the jungle?


    Moreover, to make up for the love for grandson in my heart.


    During this period, Luffy eats earthworms and snakes.


    Insist on apany Luffy enduring ,hardships.


    This way his heart will be a little better.


    In case Luffy really encounters an unsolvable danger, he will definitely rescue him immediately, and he will never be as severe as he said.


    ...


    After half an hour.


    Luffy at this time has already forgotten all the unhappy things.


    The state of mind has been fully integrated into this jungle.


    He held a branch with great interest.


    Squatting in front of a mud.


    Poke, poke, poke at the dirt.


    Until the mud appeared ''creeping'', he was even more overjoyed with expression, his eyes were fast, and the palm of his hand stretched into the mud and mmed.


    When his palm was retracted from the dirt, there was a fat andrge earthworm in his palm.


    About 5 inches long and half inches wide.


    He doesn''t think about it.


    Lifting your head and opening your mouth, "Ah~~~~~" swallowed the whole earthworm in one bite.


    Just when he just wanted to find new food, Li Yaoxiang''s voice sounded in his mind: "Luffy."


    Huh?


    Luffy expression overjoyed.


    "Big Brother! You finally came to me!" Luffy responded quickly in his mind, then turned toin, "I told grandpa ~ You said you would take me to eat something delicious today, but he just wouldn''t believe it! He insisted on bringing me here. Sorry Big Brother. I can''t go out with you."


    Li Yaoxiang: "It''s okay, even here, I can take you away."


    Finished speaking.


    In front of Luffy, a circr air door suddenly appeared.


    In fact, Li Yaoxiang has many ways to take Luffy away without disturbing Garp. For example, he can directly extract Luffy''s soul, and then purchase a brand new body for him in the system.


    The main body allows him to be unconscious.


    But this is not what Li Yaoxiang wants.


    In addition to taking Luffy to a ce heid out this time, he also wanted to take the opportunity to rm Garp to make Garp nervous and make Garp crazy.


    Just as expected.


    Garp, who was watching Luffy''s every move, discovered that Luffy had a door in front of him.


    His expression changed dramatically!


    Not saying anything further, no matter what, he rushed in the direction of Luffy and set off a lot of dust. All the obstacles in front of him were smashed by him.


    Rushing all the way.


    During the sprint, he did not forget to angrily roared towards the direction of Luffy: "Luffy ! Do not go in !"


    Luffy was really shocked by the big movement of Garp here.


    But in Luffy''s dictionary, where is the word ''danger''?


    In his eyes, there are only ''interesting'' or ''boring'', ''delicious'' or ''not tasty''.


    He didn''t even think so much at all.


    A cool door appeared in the air, how could he not be interested?


    He turned his gaze at grandfather''s anxious face, showing a bright smile, his shiny eyes, stepping into the door, waving at Garp, and expressing ''Bye ~~~ see you next time''.


    Luffy walked in.


    Garp immediately speeded up.


    Want to follow Luffy into the door.


    But when he was about to arrive, the door closed in time and disappeared.


    leave him empty.


    He directly hit a big tree that was not far away.


    The big tree was suddenly broken.


    Garp turned around quickly and ignored it.


    How can there be traces of doors in the field of view?


    He cursed ''damn!'', mming the ground violently. The soil beside him was suddenly smashed into a deep hole by him. The whole ind was even more faintly swaying by his beating.


    After this.


    Garp''s battleship stayed on this ind for a month.


    All the manpower on the battleship was sent by him to search the entire ind.


    But even though the whole ind has been flipped and flipped by him, he still hasn''t found anything, there is no news of Luffy from the outside world, and no one has contacted him to threaten him or something.


    This made him even more anxious.


    But in any case, he will not give up.


    He secretly swore that he would definitely find Luffy and find the damn guy who led Luffy!

 Chapter 333: When the plan is in progress

    Chapter 333: When the n is in progress


    At the same time.


    The picture returns to the moment the air door disappears.


    As soon as the air door on the ind disappeared, somewhere below the ocean floor ten thousand li away, at the same time, an air door appeared out of thin air.


    The air door opens.


    Luffy came out from inside.


    At this time, Li Yaoxiang, already wearing ''Naruto world''s Shinigami''s mask'', stood beside him.


    But Luffypletely ignored Li Yaoxiang''s existence.


    I also ignored why Li Yaoxiang had to wear a mask today.


    Ignore why Li Yaoxiang is an entity.


    He has been attracted by the peculiar environment around him.


    The ce where the two of them are now is an ind. Most of the buildings on the inds are made ofmon materials such as shells and corals.


    Although this ind is deep under the sea, it is wrapped by a huge doubleyer, semi-circr bubble membrane.


    So after Luffy appeared here, he could still breathe and move freely.


    Luffy couldn''t wait to rush out as soon as his front feetnded. He couldn''t hold back the excitement in his heart and wanted to go sightseeing everywhere.


    But it didn''t take a few steps, and his cor was already raised by Li Yaoxiang.


    In truth, there is no way to reason with Luffy.


    Even if he said it, Luffy would not listen.


    So Li Yaoxiang saved the saliva of calling Luffy ''don''t run around'' and just lifted Luffy directly.


    Luffy still keeps his eyes shining and his legs constantly running in midair.


    Because of the sudden appearance of the two, coupled with the movement caused by Luffy, this sessfully attracted the attention of the royal guards patrolling the ind.


    This patrol guard was startled by the presence of the two.


    Even if the imposing-manner is fierce, he rushes towards the two and raises the barrel of the gun, aiming at the two.


    "Who are you?! Why do they suddenly appear on our Fish-Man Ind!"


    Yes.


    The ce where Li Yaoxiang led Luffy came to Fish-Man Ind.


    As I said before, it is impossible to reason with Luffy. If it wasn''t at a critical moment, or that matter was very important to Luffy, as long as you dared to reason in front of Luffy, Luffy would dare to fall asleep in front of you on the spot.


    So the darkening politics adopted by Li Yaoxiang in the early stage is not like the world in which induces the darkness hidden in the depths of Kaneki Ken''s heart.


    Treat Luffy simple and rough.


    Let Luffy experience everything.


    The effect of the first step is to let Luffy understand the evil of pirates before Luffy meets Shanks. Then, through Shanks'' hand, let him understand the goodness of pirates. Again, let him experience the evil of pirates.


    The cyclees back to the start.


    Strikes the worldview of Luffy constantly.


    The same goes for the marine''s evil and goodness.


    Only in this way, when the "tragedy" reallyes, the darkening effect will be more perfect.


    It was like, ''Okay, I believe you pirates are good, and the pirates killed my rtives and friends. When I believed that pirates were bad and hated pirates, you told me that pirates saved my family.''


    No matter how stupid Luffy is, as long as his worldview is constantly strikes in this way, it is estimated that there will still be some effects.


    Of course, the prerequisite is that the person who was ''killed'' or ''saved'' must be familiar with Luffy.


    Otherwise, the effect is not so good.


    That''s why in the One Piece world, apparently there are so many ces where Luffy can learn about the ''evil'' of the pirates, but Li Yaoxiang chose Fish-Man Ind.


    Because in Fish-Man Ind, it happens to have the conditions that Li Yaoxiang wants.


    In addition to letting Luffy understand the evil of the pirates, it also allows Luffy to get acquainted with important bonds.


    When these bonds are destroyed one after another


    That would be nice.


    Li Yaoxiang carried Luffy and said calmly: "Don''t be nervous, I''m not here to make trouble. I have something to see your Queen Otohime."


    "Hmph! Queen Otohime, is the one you want to see?! I can warn you, you broke into our Fish-Man Ind without being checked, and ording to the rules of our Fishman Ind, if you dare to resist, we have the right to kill you on the spot! You better give us obediently surrender now, otherwise... Don''t me us for being rude to you!"


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t take much care of the patrol guards in front of him.


    While they were scorning Li Yaoxiang, Li Yaoxiang had used the mastery of Observation Haki to contact Queen Otohime: "Queen Otohime, I am here."


    Queen Otohime is a rare person who is born with an Observation Haki.


    She can listen to the voice of others.


    So when Li Yaoxiang summoned her with her haki, she immediately felt it.


    And starting from the Imperial Pce, she led a team of escorts in the direction of Li Yaoxiang.


    Not long.


    Queen Otohime led her bodyguard and arrived here quickly.


    The picture that catches my eyes is a big jump to her on the spot.


    The patrolling guards had already begun to besiege Li Yaoxiang.


    And Li Yaoxiang controlled his strength and used ''Shinra Tensei'' to keep them retreating without hurting them.


    Queen Otohime, who has seen it, has rushed over from a distance, and yelled: "Stop it! You guys will stop me now!"


    Hearing Queen Otohime''s cry, the patrol guard immediately stopped.


    Sincerely salute: "Queen Otohime!"


    Queen Otohime gasping for breath, finally arrived here.


    Seeing that Li Yaoxiang was not injured, she breathed a sigh of relief, rested for a while, and said politely: "I''m sorry, I didn''t know you were here, so... please don''t me them."


    A group of patrolling guards were shocked when they saw their queen begging for them.


    "Queen!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "It''s okay, they are just performing their duties."


    Seeing that Li Yaoxiang is not being investigated, Queen Otohime pretended to be angry at the patrolling guards on the side: "Why don''t you quickly apologize to Mr. Li?! How can our Fish-Man Ind be so rude to our benefactor? A while ago, it was because of Mr. Li, so our people can escape from the traffickers. Are you paying kindness with enmity now?"


    The patrol guards suddenly realized.


    They have not seen Li Yaoxiang, but have heard about it.


    A while ago, many residents of Fish-Man Ind were caught by traffickers when they went out to work.


    Fortunately, they met a human help, so everyone was able to escape.


    And this man is of course Li Yaoxiang.


    The patrol guard''s attitude immediately changed, and he paid respect and apologized to Li Yaoxiang.


    Li Yaoxiang waved his hand and said nothing.


    He did this for the next thing.


    At this time, Queen Otohime said very eloquently: "Mr. Li, we previously wanted to repay your kindness on behalf of Fish-Man Ind, but you rejected it, saying that you will ask for it after you think about it. Since you''re here now..."

 Chapter 334: New family

    Chapter 334: New family


    Li Yaoxiang nodded.


    Admits the meaning of Queen Otohime''s words.


    "I have something to do and I need to leave for a while. I hope that during this period of time when I''m not here, you can help me take good care of this child."


    Finished speaking.


    Li Yaoxiang raised Luffy in his hand slightly.


    Luffy at this time no longer keeps running.


    But her eyes are still shiny, staring motionlessly at Queen Otohime.


    Staring at Queen Otohime''s fishtail.


    Queen Otohime has the nickname of "Incarnation of Love", not at all mind Luffy''s rude look, she smiled and asked: "This child is..."


    Li Yaoxiang: "It''s my nephew, you just need to help me take good care of him before Ie back."


    Obviously.


    Li Yaoxiang does not want to continue this topic.


    Queen Otohime, who sees it, no longer asks much.


    Queen Otohime: "Rx, you are the benefactor of our Fish-Man Ind. Since your request is for us to take care of him for you, then I will treat him as my child. It happens that my daughter is only 3 years old this year, and she can just be hispanion."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Well, then please."


    Finished speaking.


    Li Yaoxiang put down Luffy.


    With a thought, an air door appeared behind him.


    He turned and left.


    Luffy did not pay attention to the conversation between several people from beginning to end.


    Never mind that Li Yaoxiang left.


    His eyes were still shining at Queen Otohime.


    Queen Otohime stepped forward and picked up Luffy: "Good boy, can you tell me, what is your name?"


    Luffy: "My name is Luffy! Aunt, why are your legs different from mine?"


    "Bold!" The guard beside him immediately scolded Luffy when he called Queen Otohime Aunt.


    But it was quickly suppressed by Queen Otohime.


    Queen Otohime hugged Luffy kindly and said, "Aunt is a mermaid, and you are a human being. Of course our legs are different. Luffy, right? How old are you? How about your father and mother?"


    Luffy: "Oh, I''m 4 years old today. I don''t have a father or mother. By the way, Aunt, does mermaid need to shit?"


    "You " The guards on the side heard the problems of Luffy and were directly anxious.


    Want to teach Luffy, a nonsense and rude human child, a hard lesson.


    But Queen Otohime is different.


    Hearing Luffy saying that he didn''t have a father mother.


    Sympathy rose on the spot, and maternal love flooded.


    She red at the angry guard, motioned him not to care about children, then looked at Luffy with tender eyes and said, "Since you don''t have parents, Luffy, then you''ll treat Aunt as a mother in the future. Auntie will love you as much as her own children."


    The bodyguards called a turn pale with fright.


    Queen Otohime, but the queen of their Ryugu Pce (Dragon Imperial Pce), is responsible to the people for every move.


    How can you regard him as the next son so casually?


    Not to mention that the son is still a human?


    The guards now expressed anxiety and wanted to dissuade Queen Otohime, but Queen Otohime did not listen to them. It makes sense that she does not understand. But her character is like this, otherwise she will not be called ''Incarnation of Love''.


    Of course, part of the reason is because she wants to repay Li Yaoxiang''s kindness.


    Part of the reason is that she wants her children to get along with humans.


    Let them feel for themselves that human beings, merfolk and fish-men can really coexist peacefully.


    While all the guards were discouraging him, Luffy remained in a stunned state.


    He is four years old this year.


    A little silly.


    It seems to care nothing.


    But this does not mean that he does not understand the meaning of ''father mother''.


    It does not mean that he really has no curiosity about ''father mother''.


    After being stunned for a long time, he didn''t think too much. He just followed the most direct wishes in his heart. He immediately narrowed his eyes and said with a bright smile, "Okay!"


    This sentence, "Okay," made the guards feel desperate enough.


    But in any case, they can''t change Queen Otohime''s mind at the moment.


    Only looking forward to returning to the pce, the king can persuade Queen Otohime more and let Queen Otohime take her life back.


    ...


    After a while.


    In the pce of the Ryugu Pce.


    Minister of the Left catfish merman, and Minister of the Right seahorse merman are in the pce. They kept telling King Neptune that they must stop the fact that Queen Otohime had decided to ept Luffy as her godson.


    Neptune was so loud that it was a headache.


    Neptune helped shaking the heads, and helplessly peeked at the Queen Otohime on the side. Seeing that Queen Otohime didn''t take care of the left and Minister of the Rights in the hall at all, and each minding their own business continued to y with Luffy, it was even more speechless.


    Neptune during this period didn''t really care much about the concept of ''merfolk and human beings coexisting peacefully''.


    He loves Queen Otohime deeply, so he will let Queen Otohime make trouble.


    In original work, it wasn''t until Queen Otohime died that he made a firm resolution to inherit Queen Otohime''s will and became the biggest supporter of the policy of ''the peaceful coexistence of merfolk and human beings''.


    He was so annoyed by the catfish mermaid and the seahorse merman, that he said: "Otohime, what they said is not unreasonable. It''s better..."


    Otohime raised her face and insisted: "No! I have promised Mr. Li, must help him take care of Luffy. Mr. Li is the benefactor of our Fish-Man Ind, how can we be speechless?!"


    Neptune has no choice but to spread his hand: "But... but... it''s not necessary to take care of him as a son? Minister of the Left and Minister of the Right are right, you ept a human as a son, the impact on our Kingdom of Ryugu Pce is really too great."


    People in front of Luffy repeatedly tried to discourage Luffy from being her godson.


    Gradually.


    Queen Otohime also raised the mentality of protecting the child.


    "I don''t care! Luffy is so cute, and likes to get along with me so much, and does not discriminate against mermaid n. I have epted him as my godson!"


    "As for the trouble, please think of a way to solve this problem together."


    Finished speaking.


    Queen Otohime took Luffy''s little hand, stuffed a piece of ''chicken leg'' into Luffy''s mouth, and said softly: "Luffy, let''s go, let''s leave them alone. Mom will take you to meet your brothers and sisters and introduce them to you recognize. They will know you''re their brother and will be very happy."


    Luffy didn''t care that much.


    Delicious food.


    Someone loving him.


    This was the kind of treatment he had never received from his grandfather.


    Just eating chicken legs in this way, nod ignorantly, and left the hall with Otohime in a daze.


    Leave the heart broken Neptune, and the two ministers on the left and right...

 Chapter 335: The promise of brother and sister

    Chapter 335: The promise of brother and sister


    On the pce.


    Gaze at the back of Queen Otohime and Luffy''s departure.


    Neptune and the two ministers on the left and right are really no match for the queen.


    Also had to continue to discuss the solution to the problem.


    The final result of the discussion among the three people is to treat the two things separately. Queen Otohime epting Luffy as her son should be handled as Otohime''s ''private decision''.


    That is to say, although Luffy is the god son of Queen Otohime.


    But Luffy has nothing to do with the Imperial Family.


    There is no treatment that belongs to the Imperial Family Prince.


    When the people of Fish-Man Ind see Luffy, they don''t need to salute or honor him and so on.


    Although there are still some loopholes in this n, for example, Luffy is not treated as a prince, but who would really treat the godson of Princess Otohime as an ordinary human being?


    But there is no better solution.


    People discuss again and again, thinking of only onepromise solution, this is the way.


    The rest, I only hope that the people of Fish-Man Ind will know that this matter will not cause disturbance...


    ...


    At the same time.


    After leaving the pce, Queen Otohime and Luffy quickly came to the bedroom where the merfolk princesses and princes stayed.


    In the bedroom at this time, there are a total of four merfolk.


    First Prince, Fukaboshi.


    Second Prince, Ryuboshi.


    Third Prince, Manboshi.


    And the "Princess Mermaid", Shiraboshi, youngest children and only princess.


    First Prince is arge shark/sharkfish merman. Compared with Second Prince and Third Prince, his appearance looks closest to humans.


    Second Prince is a king octopus/oarfish merman, which looks a bit thin and long.


    Third Prince is a moon fish/opah merman, figure is fat, and looks pretty pleasing.


    The mermaid princess is a huge porcupine/smelt-whiting mermaid. Her beauty is needless to say, the whole One Piece world isparable to it. It''s just, she''s a little too big.


    Even today, she is 3 years old, but her size is no less than that of First Prince which is arge shark merman.


    The three princes all love their younger sister very much.


    Now the three princes are constantly surrounding Shirahoshi, teasing her to y, coaxing her to be happy, and Shirahoshi constantlyughing.


    At this time, Queen Otohime floated over from a distance with a small hand dragging Luffy.


    That''s right, just floating.


    Ordinary mermaid, if you want to move in a vacuum, you need to apply ayer of ''floating bubble film'' around the waist.


    As Princess Family of Imperial Family, including three princes and princesses, all of them have a sash of their own, which looks simr to the kind that hangs on the ''fairy in ancient times''.


    These ribbons can help them move in the real sky.


    Luffy walked over with Queen Otohime in this way.


    Luffy has kept his eyes shining throughout the entire walking process.


    There is no other reason. Everything about Fish-Man Ind is really new to him. Not to mention the surrounding architectural style, even the appearance of these princes and the volume of the Shirahoshi are enough to make him interested for a while.


    You don''t want to be excited.


    Shortly after arriving.


    The three princes and Shirahoshi noticed the arrival of their mother.


    Suddenly showing joyful colors, shouted in unison: "Mother!"


    Seeing Luffy, who walks on two legs and has a slightly different appearance from a fish-man, is most curious about the mermaid princess Shirahoshi, who has never seen the world.


    She passed several big brothers directly.


    Swim to Luffy.


    Looked around Luffy for severalps and looked up and down: "Who is he? Why is he so strange?"


    The three-year-old big Shirahoshi N is no longer an ignorant child.


    She can gradually get along with outsiders.


    That''s why, one year ago, Li Yaoxiang said, ''a yearter is the best time to act''.


    He is waiting for the growth of Shirahoshi.


    That''s the only way. When Luffy came here, Shiraoshi became easier to be Luffy''s bond and save more time. After all, no one knows if there will be more idents if Luffy is thrown to Fish-Man Ind a year in advance.


    So, if you go early, it''s better to go just right.


    Shirahoshi is looking at Luffy.


    Luffy is also looking at this huge guy.


    Seeing that both sides are very interested in the other side, Queen Otohime is also very pleased in her heart. She said gently: "As mother always told you, he is one of the human being onnd. He is also the godson that mother just epted. You are brothers and sisters, you must love each other, you know?"


    Finished.


    Queen Otohime turned towards the side of Luffy warned repeatedly: "Luffy, you are one year older than Shirahoshi, and you will be Shirahoshi''s big brother in the future. Remember to love your younger sister, okay, Luffy?"


    Luffy was shocked.


    Looking towards Shirahoshi again, the expression has shown different colors.


    Younger sister?


    This is my younger sister?


    He still obeyed the most direct wishes in his heart, without thinking, he smiled brightly: "Okay!"


    After listening to the conversation between the two, Shirahoshiman I was excited to wander around in midair directly: "It''s great! It''s great! I have another big brother! I have another big brother ~~"


    The reactions of Fukaboshi, Ryuboshi, and Manboshi are not as exaggerated as Shirahoshi.


    But they have no objection to Luffy.


    After all, Queen Otohime has instilled the concept of "merfolk and human coexistence" since childhood. Plus, it was the mother''s decision, and sister Shirahoshi was so happy about it, so of course they wouldn''t object.


    That''s it.


    The next is a warm time for the family.


    Shirahoshi is very longing for world onnd, and she keeps asking Luffy about things onnd.


    "Luffy big brother, what is the sun onnd? Is it really as big and round as the mother said?"


    "Luffy big brother, is the moon really so beautiful? Are the stars really so beautiful?"


    "Oh, yes! And there are birds! Are the birds cute?"


    Although Luffy didn''t even understand where these random questionse from.


    But he can answer these simple questions.


    After asking and answering for a long time, no matter how stupid Luffy is, it was impossible to not notice Shirahoshi''s yearning for thend world. He subconsciously smiled and said, "You likend very much? Then I will take you up one day."


    The words came out.


    Except for Luffy, the other five people present were all stunned.


    Luffy''s inadvertent sentence actually said to their hearts.


    It is also proves from the side that it is not fruitless for Otohime to hold on to the belief for so long.


    Humans can really live peacefully with mermaids.


    Fukaboshi, Ryuboshi, Manboshi, Queen Otohime, these merfolk who understand the truth, feel the sincerity in Luffy''s words, all smile at each other and warm their hearts.


    I was moved by Luffy''s sincerity.


    After the Shirahoshi was dumbfounded for a while, I didn''t think so much.


    Squinting eyes said with a slight smile: "Okay! Then we ''re going to deal with it! You can''t lie to me by ticking your fingers." Shirahoshi stretched out her finger tails the size of Luffy''s fist.


    Luffy hasn''t eaten rubber fruits during this period.


    Unlike original work, he can''t stretch the tail of his fingers to curl up Shirahoshi''s fingers.


    He had to hold the tail of Shirahoshi''s finger, to make this promise...

 Chapter 336: Dont let mother get hurt again

    Chapter 336: Don''t let mother get hurt again


    Next.


    The family chatted for a while.


    Luffy has a lot of questions being asked and he doesn''t know what they''re talking about or how to answer.


    Until they talked about Luffy''s most authoritative answer.


    Shirahoshi: "Luffy big brother, what about the food onnd? Is the food onnd good? I heard from my mother that the food onnd is delicious!"


    Shirahoshi reveals a longing expression.


    Luffy, when ites to food, he can''t help but spit out.


    Luffy: "It''s delicious! Of course it''s delicious! There is a kind of wriggling meat onnd, it''s very delicious!"


    Excitingly describing it with hands and feet.


    He wants to express the delicacies in this way.


    First, the two index fingers were straight and separated for a long distance, about five inches long: "It''s probably this long..." Then the index finger and the thumb drew a distance of half an inch: "It''s so thick! This meat is delicious! It''s fat, beautiful and juicy!"


    After that, Luffy still reminisced about how he felt at that time.


    But Fukaboshi, Ryuboshi, Manboshi and Mermaid Princess Shirahoshi are disgusted, can''t help but meet each other.


    Wriggling meat?


    So disgusting?


    The hearts of several people are full of doubts. You can see Luffy''s aftertaste on his face, and he can''t help swallowing his saliva, wanting to taste it...


    The most peculiar reaction is that of Queen Otohime.


    She has the most chances of contact withnd.


    How could it be impossible to guess the food that Luffy said was earthworms?


    This made her feel pity for Luffy.


    Poor child...


    No father mother...


    Even earthworms are considered a delicacy...


    Her nose was sore, she couldn''t help rushing forward to hug Luffy tightly, tears streaming down her face. Queen Otohime is such a sentimental and crying person.


    At the same time, she is also a very weak physique.


    With this excited hug, the joint of the arms identally dislocated.


    The pain caused her to shed tears again.


    The sound of the dislocation of the joint "click" also just rmed the three princes and Shirahoshi.


    One by one nervously stepped forward and said, "Mother!"


    First Prince Fukaboshi reacted the fastest, and immediately rushed out of the hall and called the imperial physician toe.


    Luffy, a confused face, still has no idea what is going on.


    Princess Yoshihime endured the pain andforted Second Prince, Third Prince, and the crying Shirahoshi, saying: "It''s okay, don''t be nervous, your mother is okay. It''s just that the joints are dislocated. It''s not that it never happened before."


    Luffy looked towards her arms and said softly," What do you want to eat in the future, just tell mom, mom will let someone cook for you."


    Luffy didn''t know what to say.


    It hasn''t been reflected yet.


    He just nodded ignorantly, ''hmm''.


    Next.


    Looking nkly at the look-at ''Mermaid Imperial Physician'' into the great hall, she helped away Queen Otohime with several medical staff.


    Originally, the three princes, including Shirahoshi, wanted to follow the situation, but they were blocked by Queen Otohime before she left: "Don''t follow me. Stay here and follow Luffy. Have a good chat and get along with each other. This kind of minor injury will be fine after the mother goes back to rest for one night."


    So.


    A group of five people silently look at the back of Queen Otohime and slowly disappears into the great hall.


    Looking at Luffy''s nk face, First Prince, who just happened to be on his side, said: "The mother''s body is very weak. As her sons, we must try not to let mother be injured in the future."


    Finished speaking.


    His eyes continued to face the direction of Queen Otohime''s departure.


    Luffy looked up subconsciously looking towards First Prince, the ''new big brother'', and looking towards the direction of Queen Otohime''s departure.


    Looking thoughtful.


    What he understood was very simple.


    ''Mom is weak.


    ''Protect mom.''


    In an instant, Luffy was nodding as if he had suddenly realized.


    Next.


    Seeing that the atmosphere is a little stiff, Fukaboshi, who is the big brother, chose to break this dull atmosphere first, and obey the mother''s will. Sister brother should get along well with Luffy.


    pped his palms and heated up the atmosphere: "Come on! Let''s continue the topic just now. With the imperial doctor here, the mother''s injury will be fine. Luffy, what exactly is the meat you just said? Is it really that delicious?"


    Soon.


    Return to the harmonious atmosphere just now.


    This situation continued until after dinner, and they officially ended this gathering.


    Eat dinner.


    Everyone is tired.


    The youngest Shirahoshi and Luffy couldn''t control their drowsiness and fell asleep directly on the great hall.


    Luffy''s sleep is a bit ugly.


    He didn''t care about that much, and heid down whatever.


    There is saliva in the corners of the mouth, and the nostril is apanied by the rhythm of snoring, and it even forms a "drop-shaped" foam that grows fromrge to small.


    Shirahoshi lying on its side has a rtively sweet sleep.


    But she fell asleep and was still unable to bear letting go Luffy like a doll and holding him gently in her arms.


    Luffy was not awakened by her either.


    Seeing that the two of them were sleeping so sweetly, the three princes looked at each other and smiled, and had no intention of waking them up. Tonight, let them sleep here together.


    ...


    Early the next morning.


    Shirahoshi and Luffy are still awake.


    Queen Otohime was thinking about taking the road to fly out today, and take a good tour of their Fish-Man Ind, but just after she finished dressing, and just about to step out of the great hall, she was given by the two Minister Stopped in time.


    Catfish merman: "Queen, think twice ~"


    Seahorse merman: "Queen, think twice ~"


    The voices of the two are crying.


    There seems to be a tendency that if Queen Otohime does not listen to the advice, they will hit the stone pir and die death ends all one''s troubles.


    The Minister of the Right and Left assume a posture simr to kneeling.


    Queen Otohime moved to the left and they stopped to the left.


    Queen Otohime moved to the right and they stopped to the right.


    Queen Otohime was so annoyed, and finally couldn''t stand the two ministers, stopped and shouted, "What the hell do you want? I have already promised you that I won''t give Luffy the title of a prince. I can''t even take my son to sightsee Fish-Man Ind now?! Such a small request, do you want to stop it?"


    Catfish merman: "Queen think twice-~ You and Luffy appear together frequently, and the rtionship is still so close, doesn''t it make it clear that everyone knows the problem? The people of Fish-Man Ind may not be able to adapt so quickly. ~"


    Seahorse merman: "Yeah Queen ~ wait for everyone to adapt to the existence of Young Master Luffy, it will not be toote for us to disclose the rtionship between Queen and Luffy, isn''t it? Please think again~"


    Queen Otohime wants to cross them.


    But the two ministers continue to block.


    The two sides continued for a while, and Queen Otohime, who couldn''t bear it, onlypromised: "Okay, even if I don''t go, someone should lead the way and fly out for a walk? Otherwise, how will everyone adapt to his existence?"


    See Queen Otohime willing topromise.


    The Minister is pleased.


    At the moment, "stand up" and smile, hehe said: "Queen, don''t worry, we have already prepared a candidate for Lord Luffy."


    A whale shark man with light blue skin and guard armor came over from not far away...

 Chapter 337: Idiot Mermaid

    Chapter 337: Idiot Mermaid


    The person who came here is the captain of the Sun/Fish-Man Pirates, one of the "Seven Warlords of the Sea" in the future, Jinbe.


    However, at this time, he is still one of the elite captains in Ryugu Pce City.


    The person who came here is the captain of the Murloc Pirates, one of the "Seven Warlords of the Sea" in the future, Jinbe.


    However, at this time, he is still one of the elite Captains in Ryugu Pce City.


    "Knight of the Sea" Jinbe is the helmsman of the Straw Hat Pirates. He is the tenth member of the crew and the ninth to join, doing so during the Wano Country Arc. Jinbe is a whale shark fish-man and a powerful master of Fish-Man Karate. His dream is to fulfill his former captain Fisher Tiger''s dying wish of coexistence and equality between humans and fish-men. He was a member of the Sun Pirates, eventually bing its second captain after the death of their original captain, Tiger. He eventually became one of the Seven Warlords of the Sea, though he resigned during the Summit War of Marineford. Prior to and amidst said war, Jinbe befriended Monkey D. Luffy, and two yearster allied with him and his crew to prevent the New Fish-Man Pirates'' coup d''tat against the Ryugu Kingdom''s Neptune Royal Family.


    Being always responsible.


    After seeing the candidate, Queen Otohime''s face eased a lot.


    Queen Otohime: "It turns out that it is Jinbe, then Luffy will please you."


    A momentter.


    The entire group came to the great hall where Luffy and Shirahoshi spent the night.


    Shirahoshi and Luffy are still asleep.


    When Jinbe saw Luffy held in his arms by Shirahoshi, his subconscious eyebrows twisted. He listened to what the ministers said that it was true that Queen Otohime epted a son. But he didn''t expect that this son would be a human being.


    However, his expression of ''frowned'' soon disappeared.


    In this period, he had no favorable impression with human beings.


    He still disagrees with the policy of ''peaceful coexistence with human beings'' implemented by Queen Otohime.


    Since it is an order from the ''boss'', then he is right to act ording to the order, and there is no need to worry about it so much.


    Jinbe''s thoughts were unknown to the few people present.


    Queen Otohime''s attention has long been attracted by these two lovely children.


    At this time, Luffy, in a deep sleep, has not forgotten to stretch the Shirahoshi from time to time, so that Shirahoshi should not be so close to himself. Shirahoshi is that the stronger Luffy is, the tighter she will be.


    Queen Otohime walked to the two of them and said softly: "Shirahoshi, Luffy, you should wake up."


    Shake a few times.


    Calling again.


    Luffy is like a dead pig. This soft way can''t wake him up.


    Shirahoshi is much better.


    After Queen Otohime sessively ''calling'' and ''shaking'', after a few times, her eyes slowly opened in a daze, blinking a few times. Take a look at her surroundings.


    Look at Luffy sleeping in her arms again.


    Then burst into tears on the spot.


    She found that her body was already covered with Luffy''s saliva and snot, and she felt sick.


    Luffy, who slept like a pig, was finally awakened because of the cry of noisy people.


    He poked his eyes.


    I don''t know what''s going on.


    Did you have breakfast already?


    Queen Otohimeforted Shirahoshi for a while and helped her clean her nose and saliva. Shirahoshi slowly calmed her emotions and stopped crying.


    Then went straight to the topic.


    "Luffy, today this Captain Jinbe, he will take you to Fish-Man Ind for sightseeing. After you wash up, go with him after you have eaten."


    After hearing this, Shirahoshi started to make a big noise again.


    Life and death will follow Luffy to go out and y together.


    If you don''t give up, you won''t stop.


    This time, even the left and right ministers have no choice but to bear it. After all, Shirahoshi was in contact with Luffy alone, at least not as conspicuously as Queen Otohime.


    Others can also think of them as children who like to get together and y together.


    After everything is arranged properly.


    After Luffy and Shirahoshi have eaten the meal and finished washing.


    A ''giant girl'' and a little boy followed Jinbe to various ces on Fish-Man Ind.


    Along the way.


    Jinbe didn''t speak much, and executed his mission very seriously.


    He walked alone in front of him to clear the way, and he looked like he was born ferocious, and strangers were not allowed to enter. Even the people of Fish-Man Ind were curious about why a human child would get along with their mermaid princess, and the rtionship was still so close, so they didn''t dare to ask.


    This is also the benefit of choosing the Minister Jinbe.


    It seems to scare the dead.


    Luffy and the Shirahoshi following him, running around like wild children.


    Touch it here, touch it there.


    Jinbe walked slowly.


    They ran around in the back in a ''snake-like'' way, having fun, and Shirahoshi''sughter never stopped.


    That''s it.


    They walked all the way from Ryugu Pce City.


    Walking through Gironde za, I met Queen Otohime who was promoting ''mermaids and humans'' peaceful coexistence "for the people. They chatted for a while and did not behave too closely with Luffy.


    Then went to Mermaid Bay.


    Meeting countless mermaids, singing and chatting here.


    Thene to Fish-Man''s Meeting Hall, Marine Shopping Mall, Waterwheel Town, etc. one after another.


    It wasn''t until they came to Coral Hill and met a kissing gourami mermaid who looked very embarrassed, which stopped their sightseeing.


    Jinbe''s serious face, dissatisfied: "Camie? Why are you looking like this? Huh! Was swallowed by a sea king again, or caught by a mermaid dealer?"


    Camie is a kissing gourami mermaid that first appeared in Hatchan''s Sea-Floor Stroll cover story. She first appeared in the main series after being spat out of arge sea boar that was saved by Hatchan, along with her starfish pet and master, Pappag. While dreaming of bing a designer, she worked on Hatchan''s Takoyaki 8 when she first met the Straw Hat Pirates. After the timeskip, she is a waitress at the Mermaid Cafe on Fish-Man Ind.


    Yes.


    The mermaid they happened to meet was the idiot, Camie.


    Camie of this period looks very young.


    But it does not prevent her from exerting her confused spirit to the extreme.


    I don''t understand whether she knows that Jinbe is hard-hearted and soft-hearted, or she is so confused that she simply ignores Jinbe''s ferocious appearance. In short,pared with the people of Fish-Man Ind, Camie has a much more friendly attitude towards Jinbe.


    At this time, her whole body is wet.


    It was covered with seaweed and even mixed with some minced meat.


    She walked and shook her head. After hearing Jinbe''s scolding, she opened the seaweed covering her cheeks to see who was calling her. When she saw that the personing was Jinbe, she was overjoyed and immediately embarrassed: "hehe, hehe, it turned out to be the big brother Jinbe. It''s not that they swallowed. ''They'' are just ying with me. See I''m alright again?"


    See the disappointing of Camie.


    He wanted to continue to preach to Camie on the spot.


    While waiting for him to start to talk, Camie looked curiously at Shirahoshi and Luffy behind him, and asked: "Huh? Isn''t this a princess? How could a princess be with a human child?"


    Jinbe was questioned for a while.


    The ministers on the left and right urged him to stop revealing the real situation so quickly. For a while, he really didn''t know how to answer Camie.


    While Jinbe was still on the verge of speaking.


    Exactly at this time, the hurried footsteps of several Ryugu Pce soldiers were heard not far away.


    Attracted the attention of several people.


    Several Ryugu Pce soldiers rushed to the front of the ne, breathless, breathless and speechless.


    Jinbe frowned and said: "What''s wrong?"


    "hu, ha, hu, ha, even... even... Captain Jinbe! Arlong is making trouble on Fish-Man District! Brothers can''t hold him back, so hurry up and take a look!"


    Jinbe was furious when he heard the words, and couldn''t help but yelled: "This damn garbage!"


    Look at the Ryugu Pce soldiers with anxious faces.


    Looking at Luffy and Shirahoshi again, he looked ugly.


    For a while, he really doesn''t know what to do...

 Chapter 338: Fortune Teller

    Chapter 338: Fortune Teller


    Seeing that Jinbe is in a dilemma, Camie said very eloquently: "Jinbe big brother, are you afraid that no one will take care of the princess and this person child? It''s okay! Leave it to me! Brother Jinbe just go and deal with the fishermen street, it''s fine for me take care of the two children. I''m here, shouldn''t you rest assured?


    Jinbe: " "


    Jinbe doesn''t understand Camie''s confident.


    But the anxious appearance of the two subordinates made him very embarrassed.


    After hesitating for a moment, he finally had to grit his teeth and told Camie with a dignified expression: "You can help me take them to a nearby restaurant for dinner. Remember! Don''t run around casually, wait for me toe back! Understood?!"


    Camie pushed away the seaweed on her body, looked confident, nodded heavily, and said ''understood''.


    The two Ryugu Pce soldiers who saw him urged on the side: "Captain, let''s go, if you don''t go, it''d be toote!"


    He even wanted to leave directly, but he couldn''t rest assured.


    Before leaving, he cautioned again: "Did you just ask me who this child is? He''s the child of the man that saved you from the merman dealer and other fish-men. So, this is the child entrusted to us by your benefactor. You have to take care of him. Also! The princess too! You musn''t have any failure!"


    Hearing it was a child of ''benefactor''.


    Camie is more energetic.


    Guarantee that there will be absolutely no problems!


    After knowing Luffy''s identity, Camie looked towards Luffy''s gaze also changed a lot, swore secretly in her heart that she must take good care of Luffy in return for "Li Yaoxiang''s kindness".


    That''s it.


    After the two from the Ryugu Pce were taken away from here by the way.


    Camie tried to make herself more affectionate to Luffy as soon as possible. Both parties introduced themselves.


    Didn''t wait for Camie to react.


    Luffy picked up a seaweed directly from Camie and stuffed it into his mouth to chew.


    Camie was in a panic.


    "Ah!"


    "don''t, don''t, don''t, don''t eat!"


    "Spit it out!"


    Someone pulled the food out of his mouth. This person very dissatisfied Luffy.


    He ttened his mouth and stared at Camie with injustice.


    It''s even more chaotic to stare at Camie.


    It''s over!


    It''s over!


    Benefactor''s child is dissatisfied, isn''t she unable to repay the benefactor''s kindness?


    She was in a confused mood, so she had to be quick witted in an emergency: "Ah, yes, Luffy. Are you hungry, are you? I just know that there is a coffee shop nearby. How about I treat you two to all you can eat?"


    Hearing it.


    Luffy smiles again with joy.


    Next.


    The entire group moves toward the coffee shop that Camie said.


    Not long.


    The entire group came to the mermaid cafe.


    Shortly after entering the cafe.


    The Luffy entire group saw a giant shortfin mako shark mermaid.


    Luffy was unable to bear dumbfounded, ''wow'', and subconsciously asked Shirahoshi: "younger sister, will you grow up, will you be as big as her?"


    Shirahoshi looked towards the shortfin mako shark mermaid in front of her face, tilting her head unsurely: "It should be..."


    At this time, Camie hurriedly picked up Luffy from behind, covered Luffy''s mouth, and apologized repeatedly to the mako shark mermaid in front of him: "Hehe, haha, right... I''m sorry, Miss Sharley, the child is talking nonsense, I hope you don''t me."


    yes.


    This shortfin mako shark mermaid is Sharley.


    Her usual personality is more calm and dignified, but once angry, she will be very terrifying.


    In original work, Luffy asked her face to face, the question of whether ''how mermaids excrete'', which made her angry on the spot, and even Luffy was scared to refute her.


    So when Camie sees Luffy in front of Sharley so unscrupulously and discusses the issue of Sharley''s ''body'' shape, she was terrified on the spot.


    However.


    The imaginary image of Sharley''s rage appears not at all.


    Holding the tobo pipe, she nced at Shirahoshi and said, "Princess? Why is there no guard around the princess? Howe youe to my shop?"


    Mermaid Princess Shirahoshi.


    For Sharley, Luffy is less important.


    After all, Sharley once predicted the birth date of Shirahoshi to Pirate King Roger. She is also very aware of the ability of Shirahoshi.


    Maybe she doesn''t want to cause Shirahoshi''s mood swings.


    That''s why she didn''t get angry this time and didn''t care about Luffy.


    Camie did not conceal.


    Without omission and in detail, tell Sharley what happened.


    After Sharley listened, couldn''t help but sneered: "Oh, Jinbe''s heart is so big, he can trust the princess to you?"


    Camie drums on the spot she lifted her cheeks and asked, "Sharley big sister, what do you mean!"


    Sharley snereed: "It doesn''t mean anything. Didn''t you bring them here to eat? Then hurry and order food, don''te and disturb me."


    After 30 minutes


    Camie''s eyes were rounded, staring dumbly at the nonstop Luffy in front of him.


    How can she not understand how Luffy, who is so small, can hold so much food?


    She regretted saying "please eat" to Luffy.


    Camie''s shocked look, Luffy didn''t see, even if he saw it, he wouldn''t take seriously. After Luffy licked thest te of cake on the table with satisfaction, he said boldly: "One more te!"


    ''Bang!'' A cry.


    Camie''s head hit the table directly.


    She slowly raised her head, revealing a slightly bruised forehead: "Lu... Lu... Luffy, haven''t you eaten enough?"


    Luffy''s patted belly satisfies: "It''s ok, 70% full. It''s okay to have a few more tes."


    After a while.


    Oing is not the ''cake'' ordered by Luffy.


    Instead, it''s the owner of Sharley.


    Even with the tobo pipe, it can''t hide the convulsions in the corner of her mouth at this time.


    There is no other reason.


    All the food in the coffee shop was eaten up by Luffy, and all of them rmed her Boss toe in person.


    She was unable to bear and asked: "Camie... Are you sure... You have enough to pay?"


    Looking at Luffy eating, forgetting that you don''t have enough money to pay?


    Seeing Camie''s reaction, Sharley knew the situation now: "It''s okay, you will work and pay the debt in my shop for the next few months." This proposal.


    Thunder from a clear sky came down to her.


    While working here for a few months, wouldn''t her designer''s dream be dyed again?


    "Sharley big sister~~~~~~" Camie immediately took the coquettish offensive.


    It''s a pity.


    The appeal is invalid.


    The final result is still that Camie has to stay and work to pay off the debt. Only, not today. After all, Camie still has ''mission'' on his body today.


    And when Camie emptied all the money and paid off part of her debts, and wanted to leave, Shirahoshi pulled Camie away, saying, "Yeah, didn''t you say that her divination is urate? I want divination, I want divination!"

 Chapter 339: A Different Prophecy

    Chapter 339: A Different Prophecy


    Sharley''s eyes narrowed slightly.


    A burst of imposing-manner burst out of her, pointing straight at Camie.


    Camie was scared to sweat on the spot.


    You can only shrink there awkwardly and keepughing.


    However, in the imagination, the image of Sharley''s rage still does not appear. She nced at Shirahoshi and found an excuse at random: "Princess, you are a part of the Imperial Family. We, the civilian, can''t just spy on the future of the Imperial Family."


    In order to prevent Mermaid Princess Shirahoshi from having intense mood swings.


    Sharley chose to be patient.


    But she is still unwilling topromise on this matter of divination. As early as many years ago, she decided to stop divination because she would see bad pictures every time she does it.


    For so many years, she doesn''t n to make an exception today.


    After hearing this, Princess Shirahoshi is resolute.


    She pointedly pointed at Luffy and said, "You can''t help me with divination, what about Luffy big brother? Can you help Luffy big brother with divination? I want to see divination! I want to look at divination! I want to look at divination!"


    Luffy''s eyes shine.


    It sounds interesting.


    He also coaxed along with Shirahoshi.


    "Fortune-telling! Divination, divination, I want divination!"


    Seeing this, Sharley was directly anxious.


    Breathe deeply.


    Fiercely stared at Camie, the initiator.


    Camie had the heart that wanted to die. It can be seen that Luffy was so eager to divination, and remembered that she had just sworn not long ago and must reciprocate ''Li Yaoxiang''s kindness''. Choose to ignore Sharley''s anger and join Shirahoshi and Luffy''s camp.


    Start pretending to be pitiful, coquettish, please: "Sister Sharley ~~ Please, please ~~ Luffy is a child entrusted to us by the benefactor of this Fish-Man Ind, you can help make an exception ~~ I''m begging you, please, please ~"


    Shirahoshi and Luffy follow suit.


    Pushing Sharley''s sleeves one after another, he kept swinging.


    "Please, please ~~ Sharley Aunt ~"


    "Please, please ~~ Sister Sharley ~~"


    At the same time as "Please", Shirahoshi and Luffy have a great time, please hehe haha over here and there.


    Sharley stared at Camie again with an ugly face. Camie saw that Sharley was not angry, and felt conscious of the drama, and quickly hurriedly said, "Will you not have two more months? If you help Luffy divination, then I will work for Sharley big sister free for two more months? Please yeah ~"


    Sharley looked at Shirahoshi.


    She knew this princess of child temperament, and she would definitely not give up.


    Then nced at Camie, gloomyplexion said: "One year, work for free for one year."


    Camie groaned, but looked at it with great interest Luffy did not want to sweep her heart, and as soon as she clenched the teeth, she was nodding. Compared to the life-saving grace of benefactor, one year is nothing.


    Soon.


    A group of three people followed Sharley''s giant mermaid to her divination ball.


    Sharley does not n to dy time anymore.


    He immediately touched her hands on both sides of the divination ball and started divination for Luffy.


    I hope that the divination ends earlier, and she will walk back the entire group away.


    Luffy, Shirahoshi, including Camie stared at the translucent divination ball with great interest. They do not see any picture of the divination ball, but this does not prevent them from expecting the results toe.


    That''s it.


    Three mermaids, one Luffy, all intently, firmly stared at the divination ball in front of them.


    After a while.


    Sharley, who was originally sitting on the sofa, leaned forward, suddenly stood upright!


    A sudden scene directly frightened Luffy, Shirahoshi, and Camie back some distance. Immediately again, the expression of excitement appeared in the face.


    Camie: "Sister Sharley, have the divination arrived? What did you see? What did you see?"


    Shirahoshi: "Yes, yeah! Sharley Aunt, in the end saw it What? Tell us quickly?"


    Luffy: "Hahaha, what do you see? What do you see?" Looked towards Luffy, who was shorter than her arm. She saw a picturepletely different from the original work.


    In original work.


    The picture she saw was that the Fish-man Ind was destroyed.


    Luffy stood in front of the destroyed Fish-man Ind.


    So at that time, she misunderstood that Luffy was the culprit in destroying the Fish-man Ind, leading Neptune to order the pursuit of the entire group of straw hat pirates. After all, her predictions are always 100% urate. Even the King Neptune has to pay attention.


    But now, what she sees is that a human youngster, who looks like Luffy, leads every fish-men or merfolk from the depths of the seabed to the surface.


    Among them are the three princes of the royal family, Shirahoshi who''s grown up, and even her brothers.


    Everyone is holding a weapon, looking either ferocious or excited.


    If it is said that Luffy moved to thend together with everyone from Fish-Man Ind, it is okay at least for Fish-Man Ind.


    The problem is that everyone''s expression and dress are not as simple as ''migrating'' up?


    It''s not so much about emigrating, it''s more like Luffy led everyone in Fish-Man Ind rushing to thend to go to war. Sharley believes that this is a disaster for Fish-Man Ind.


    She knows how human strength is onnd.


    This is far from being able topete with the strength of the Fishman Ind n alone.


    No!


    This matter must be reported to the Ryugu Pce as soon as possible!


    Let the Ryugu Pce be prepared!


    Camie constantly shakes Sharley''s big hand: "Sharley big sister, what the hell do you see? Hurry up? You''re about to give us death."


    Shirahoshi and Luffy, happily cooperating: "Yeah, yeah! Hurry! Hurry!"


    Sharley hesitated for a moment and said, "Your name is Luffy, right? I see that you will lead Fish-Man Ind tond in the future. Whether the result is good or bad, I don''t know."


    Camie was shocked: "Sharley big sister, what you said truthful?


    Whether it is a mermaid or a mermaid, they all yearn for life on the ground.


    Longing for blue sky and white clouds, longing for the warmth of the sun.


    Camie also knows that Sharley''s predictions have never made mistakes, so after hearing this answer, she would not be shocked.


    Shirahoshi was stunned.


    She just took Luffy''s hands and cheered in circles: "Great! Great! Luffy big brother really didn''t lie to me! He will definitely take me tond in the future! Great!"


    Luffy was called a to be confused, and he didn''t understand what they were talking about.


    But this does not prevent him from being silent in the joy of younger sister Shirahoshi together.


    He also ka kaughing with her.


    In an instant, the mermaid cafe was filled withughter from the two of them...

 Chapter 340: If you want to kill him, kill me first

    Chapter 340: If you want to kill him, kill me first


    However, theughter in the Mermaid coffee shop is limited to the two children, Shirahoshi and Luffy.


    Camie is still waiting for a positive answer from Sharley.


    For a moment of silence, Sharley did not interrupt the interest of Shirahoshi and Luffy. She first turned her head to look at Kemi, ''nodding'' to give Kemi a positive answer, and then said cautiously: "This matter, you remember, don''t make it public. Many things are still uncertain, so don''t talk about it."


    After learning of Sharley''s affirmative answer.


    Camie is impossible to bear breathes deeply, the expression is called an excitement to the extreme.


    Nodded again and again.


    Indicating that it will not be publicized!


    Although Sharley is a bit worried about Camie, she can''t manage that much now. She must report this to Ryugu Pce as soon as possible.


    She immediately issued an eviction order: "Hurry up and take them away, I still have things to do, and I will close the store early today."


    Willing or not, Sharley quickly drove them out of the store.


    Close the door, and then ''float'' in the direction of WATER ROAD.


    WATER ROAD is made by the bubble craftsman on Fish-man Ind, which has extrarge transparent tubes filled with sea water, which can be borrowed by fish-men, mermaids, and seabed creatures Transparent tubes travel between different regions.


    This is also the only way for her to reach the Ryugu Pce as soon as possible.


    After Sharley left.


    Outside the Mermaid Coffee Shop.


    Only Shirahoshi, Luffy, and Camie are still intoxicated with joy. Camie, the ''big child'', is integrated into the joy of two children.


    Apany them hand in hand and go around in circles.


    After wandering around for a while, Shirahoshi suddenly stopped and looked around Camie asked: "Where are we going next?"


    Camie at this time has already been blinded by the good news just now.


    Shepletely ignores what Jinbe told her before.


    In her heart, she just thought: It''s over...the money is gone, where can I take the princess and the benefactor''s child?


    Slightly embarrassed, she quickly pulled off the topic and said: "Oh, today, where the big brother Jinbe originally wanted to take you?"


    Shirahoshi: "Mother let him take Luffy big brother to visit the whole Fish-Man Ind. I''m following Luffy big brother."


    Camie suddenly realized that she woke up like a dream.


    Right hand clenched fist, shot left palm, seemingly thought of a brilliant solution: "Where did he take you? Where else have you never been?"


    Shirahoshi breaks her finger and one after another points out where they have been.


    In an instant, Camie patted heartily and said: "That''s good! Let me take you to the remaining ces!"


    Camie felt relieved.


    Presumably, after the big brother came back, he would be very happy to know that she hadpleted the mission for him.


    Next.


    One big and one small; two children, followed Camie, a confused ghost, humming a little song, and headed to the next sightseeing spot.


    ...


    At the same time.


    Ryugu Pce City.


    Great hall.


    Sharley: "This is how it is. The prophecy has told you how to deal with it, it is up to you to decide."


    Sharley proudly stated the story of what happened and the picture of the prophecy, and then said goodbye and left.


    After she leaves the great hallpletely.


    The catfish merman and the seahorse merman can no longer maintain the solemn appearance just now.


    "Your Majesty ~ Queen ~ No way! We can''t let the prophecy be fulfilled!"


    "Yes, Your Majesty, human influence onnd, but not us Fish-Man Ind can contend, and we must not let the destruction of Fish-Man Ind in our hands!"


    "Queen, I suggest returning the human child as soon as possible, and we can''t let the princes and princess have deep friendship with him!"


    "I second! Queen, for the sake of all the people of Fish-Man Ind, please also think about it ~ You can''t let all the people apany that human child to die!"


    The ministers on the left and right each spit a ''human child''.


    Queen Otohime was angry on the spot, aroused her heart to protect the calf, and red at the two men fiercely.


    The ministers on the left and right then changed their words and said that it was ''Luffy'', and then looked towards Neptune with a pleading look, hoping that Neptune could persuade Otohime to ept their opinions.


    Neptune''s face shows awkward look.


    But he still turned his head and said, "Otohime... this..."


    Queen Otohime interrupted: "You don''t need to say it anymore! Luffy is my child, I naturally teach him well and let him know the concept of ''the peaceful coexistence of mermaids and humans''! It will definitely not let him go astray! Moreover, Sharley said that all she saw was Luffy leading our Fish-Man Ind towards the sea, but she did not see that they were going to war. Who can guarantee that Luffy will not help us fulfill the long-term dream of Fishman Ind? And, have you forgotten? Sharley''s fortune-telling prediction never made a mistake. If we want to avoid it, can we really escape it? Rather than reject Luffy from the door now, why not let Luffy take the right path from now on?"


    Queen Otohime argues with the courage of one''s convictions.


    The ministers are speechless for a while.


    But they still don''t give up. Unable to bear made a "cut throat" hand seal and said: "Queen, in addition to returning it back, we can also..."


    What to express; the meaning is obvious.


    Kill Luffy now.


    Surely a series of things will not happen in the future?


    After seeing this, Queen Otohime became angry and mmed the armrest.


    ''Crack!'' Sound.


    The joint is dislocated again.


    The tears soared in pain.


    Neptune: "Otohime!"


    Ministers around: "Your Majesty!"


    Queen Otohime kept tears and continued to scold: "Enough I don''t need you to worry about it! Don''t mention it again! Luffy is not only entrusted to our child by Mr. Li, but also my son! I will never allow you to do unfavorable things to him! If you want to kill Luffy, then kill me first!"


    Finished speaking.


    Queen Otohime clutched the dislocated joint, endured the pain, and left the great hall directly after getting up.


    Leaving Neptune and the ministers of the left and right, who were all faceless and helpless.


    ...


    At the same time.


    The picture came to Fish-Man District.


    When Jinbe arrived here, he decisively gave the Ryugu Pce soldiers a bad breath and fiercely taught Arlong a meal. Only when he decided to arrest Arlong and nned to imprison Arlong, the cunning Arlong slipped away.


    Arlong quickly escaped from Fish-Man District.


    Ryugu Pce soldiers keep chasing behind.


    Just when Arlong was about to escape from Fishman Street, in the alley on the side of the street, a big white shark-man boy wearing a duck-billed hat appeared and waved at him: "Elder Brother Arlong, here! Brother Arlong, here!"

 Chapter 341: The Other Side of Fishman Island

    Chapter 341: The Other Side of Fishman Ind


    This great white shark boy is the future captain of the New Arlong Pirates, Hody Jones. At the same time, he was also the real initiator of killing Princess Otohime and destroying Fishman Ind in the original novel.


    Sharley''s fortune-telling scene in the original book is actually just that Luffy just arrived to the rescue.


    And Hody Jones in this period was just a teenager.


    He has lived in Fishman Street since he was a child, listening to the "deeds of glory" of Arlong and the "brutality" of human beings.


    So he hates humans and also worships Arlong very much.


    Even at the risk of ''offending the soldiers of the Ryugu Pce'', he will help Arlong.


    Arlong, who was still running fast, nced at Hody Jones. He recognized this young man, and often when he talked about ''how abominable human beings are and how cruel fish-men are'', this young man would be present and show admiration.


    Hesitated for a moment, Arlong chose to run towards Hody Jones.


    Hody Jones, who saw this, was very happy: "Big Brother Arlong! You hide behind this alley! I''ll help you divert them away."


    Arlong nced at the pursuers behind.


    The footsteps of the chasing soldiers are getting closer.


    Finally gritted his teeth, he chose to believe Hody Jones and hid in the alley.


    After a while.


    The pursuers of Ryugu Castle, including Jinbei, really came to this street.


    Hody Jones took the initiative to stand in a prominent ce.


    The soldiers ofRyugu Pce City asked subconsciously: "Boy, have you ever seen an Arlong pass by here?"


    Hody Jones nodded, pointed to the distance and affirmed: "I saw him running out of Fishman Street."


    "Very good!"


    "Thank you!"


    "Go! Let''s keep chasing!"


    Although Jinbei did not stop his subordinates from continuing to chase, he slowed down and looked at Hody Jones for a while before he was about to pass Hody Jones.


    Frightened, Hody Jones'' whole body stiff.


    But in the end, he chose to follow his subordinates to leave Fishman Street and chased after Arlong.


    After seeing the backs of the chasing soldierspletely disappearing from sight, Hody Jones was relieved, and then turned around happily to announce the good news: "Big Brother Arlong! Brother Arlong! They are all gone, you cane out. It''s gone!"


    Arlong hiding behind a barrel of ''wine barrels''.


    This is how he came out.


    Looking at the direction in which Ryugu Pce chasing soldiers were leaving, he spat out a mouthful of blood and mocked, "Humph! Those idiots still trying to catch me?"


    Immediately, he looked down at Hody Jones again.


    Arlong: "Boy, I know you. Your name is Jones, right? If you help me today, you won''t be afraid of being targeted by Ryugu Pce Castle in the future?"


    Hody Jones shook his head and said excitedly: "Not afraid! Brother Arlong, it''s my honor to be able to help you! Brother Arlong, can I be your right hand? Next time you go to deal with human beings, can you bring me with you? I''ll go with you! I''m going to follow you to fight against those abominable humans!"


    Arlong was taken aback.


    Then covered his eyes andughed.


    "Hahahahaha!" Afterughing for a while, he said, "Boy, if you want to follow me to fight, you are not qualified. Moreover, our Fishman Ind is not weak enough to need teenagers to fight for us."


    Say it.


    Arlong left gracefully.


    However, before parting, he turned his back on Hody Jones and left a sentence: "Boy, if you want to follow me, then try to be stronger! Only the real strong are qualified to be Arlong''s partner!"


    The back of Arlong at this time.


    In the eyes of Hody Jones, it is infinitely magnified.


    He looked excited.


    secretly swore: Don''t worry, Big Brother Arlong! I will definitely work hard to be stronger and I will not let you down!


    At the same time.


    On a certain street in Fishman Ind.


    Camie, Shirahoshi, and Luffy hummed a song and jumped forward.


    While walking.


    Camie paused: "By the way, princess, where are we going?"


    Shirahoshi clenched her fingers, and she counted the ce names one by one, and immediately showed a bright smile: "And Fishman Street!"


    Camie: "Okay! Then let''s go to Fishman Street now!"


    "Yeah!"


    Camie continued to lead Shiraoshi and Luffy towards Fishman Street in a confused way,pletely ignoring that Fishman Street was the most chaotic and dangerous ce in the entire Fishman Ind.


    After a while.


    A few happy people came to Fishman Street.


    But when they saw the condition of Fishman Street, they no longer had the mentality of sightseeing.


    They saw drunken men staggering along the street.


    Fish-men children with tattered clothes living on the streets.


    It''s apletely different scene from the rest of Fishman Ind.


    Seeing such a picture, Luffy was better, and he didn''t feel anything wrong, but Camie and Shirahoshi by his side were already sticking together and hugging each other tightly.


    "Sister Camie, this...this...what''s going on here? Why is it so different from other ces?" It was Shirahoshi who spoke.


    She often heard people say that Fishman Street is very chaotic.


    It is not the ce where their royal family should go.


    But she never thought that there would be such a dpidated ce in Fishman Ind.


    Camie held Shirahoshi tightly and said tremblingly: "Many residents here have been persecuted by humans. Many of them lost their families when they were young, and then came to live here. Princess, Luffy, you must wait. Follow me closely, don''t just run around, you know?"


    Shirahoshi nodded again and again.


    Luffy didn''t care.


    Instead, he walked towards fishman child living on the street and smiled without thinking, "Are you hungry? I have a chicken leg here, do you want to eat it?"


    Having said that, Luffy took out a chicken leg from his trousers pocket, which he didn''t know when to hide, and handed it to fishman child who seemed to be thin and shivering with hunger.


    The listless fishman child who had bowed his head and moved forward also stopped because Luffy blocked his way.


    He raised his head slowly.


    First saw the chicken leg that Luffy handed over.


    Continue to look up.


    saw Luffy''s whole person.


    He suddenly fell to the ground in horror, pointed at Luffy tremblingly: "Human...Human...Human! Why are there humans here?!"


    After the panic.


    As if he remembered something.


    He rolled and crawled to the front of Luffy, kept kowtowing to Luffy and said, "I beg you, I beg you humans to let go of my parents, okay? I beg you!"


    During the kneeling and begging, the chicken leg was identally swept to the ground by fishman child.


    He is very hungry.


    Compared to eating, he is more nervous about the safety of his parents.


    His parents disappeared the other day.


    Everyone knows that as long as someone on Fishman Ind goes missing for no reason, it must be abducted by humans.


    That''s why he was so nervous when he saw Luffy, a human, suddenly appear in front of him.

 Chapter 342: Guarding Sister, Arlong Arrives

    Chapter 342: Guarding Sister, Arlong Arrives


    Luffy looked confused.


    I don''t know what''s going on.


    I don''t know why Arlong child in front of me wanted to kneel and beg him to let his parents go.


    Don''t I just see that you are "hungry", so I kindly gave you my treasured chicken legs?


    Why are you suddenly like this?


    It was also because the child was being too noisy here, which attracted the attention of the nearby residents and began to gather here slowly. Gradually, there is a tendency to surround Luffy and his group in a circle.


    The first person to react was the drunken fishman who was full of alcohol and staggered while walking.


    He was drunk.


    The vision is a little blurry.


    He shook his head violently twice.


    To wake himself up.


    When Luffy''s figure slowly changed from blurred to clear in his field of vision, the resentment that had umted in his heart for a long time came to his heart on the spot.


    His wife and children were killed by humans!


    How can there be humans in the Fishmen Street!


    ''Ouch!'' a sound.


    The wine bottle was directly smashed to the ground by him.


    He pointed at Luffy and roared: "Humans! How can there be humans in Fishman Street!"


    He raised his hands and flew towards the road aggressively.


    Luffy didn''t have much reaction to all the things in front of him, he just stood there dumbfounded. When the drunk fishman was about toe to Luffy, Luffy still looked at him nkly, indifferent.


    Camie with the prompt response.


    She quickly released Shirahoshi''s embrace, rushed forward, stopped in front of Luffy, and said boldly, "You...you...you...what do you want...what?!"


    Drunken fish-men swelled with alcohol.


    Hupped.


    He wiped the corner of his mouth and said with a bad face: "What do I want?! Human beings are our recognized enemies! What do you want me to do?!"


    The drunken fishman still has a tendency to continue to go forward to deal with Luffy regardless of it.


    Camie nervously said: "You...you...you...you don''te here! I can tell you, this child is a guest of Ryugu Pce! Don''t mess around!"


    Speaking of which.


    The drunk fishman was stunned for a moment.


    Hearing that he was a distinguished guest from Ryugu Pce City, his forehead was a little awake, and he couldn''t react for a while.


    It was around the spectating crowd here, and they started to boo.


    "Ryugu Pce?"


    "Why does Ryugu Castle treat humans as guests?"


    "Is it true that Queen Otohime doesn''t take the wishes of our fish-men to heart? Do you want to insist on being in thepany of humans?"


    The residents of Fish-Man Street are undoubtedly the group of Fishman people who hate humans the most in the entire Fish-Man Ind. Many of them have seen with their own eyes the persecution of theirpanions or their families, so they hate human beings very much.


    Queen Otohime wanted to implement the policy of ''the peaceful coexistence of merfolk and human beings''. The biggest obstacle also came from Fishman Ind.


    This is also why when they see Luffy, a human being, appearing here so unscrupulously, they will appear so turbulent.


    Shirahoshi, who has been silently watching all this from behind.


    This is the first time she has encountered such a situation.


    She couldn''t help crying anymore.


    Then people turned their attention to her, a mermaid with a slightlyrger size.


    "Princess?"


    "Why did the princesse to us?"


    "The princess came with the child? It''s hard to tell the truth about what this mermaid said? Is this human child really a guest of Ryugu Castle?"


    At first, he was a little skeptical, suspecting that Camie used the reputation of Ryugu Castle to scare off the drunken fish-men. After seeing the existence of Shirahoshi, he could no longer deceive himself.


    And the fierce reaction of this group of melon eaters could not shake Luffy''s emotions at all.


    But when he heard Shirahoshi''s cry.


    Luffy naturally showed a frown.


    Who bullied my sister?


    Who made her cry?


    Luffy didn''t know how to express his feelings. He ignored Camie and the drunk fishman in front of him, walked directly to Shirahoshi, frowned and said, "Why are you crying? Who bullied you?"


    Shirahoshi, who should have burst into tears, paused.


    Seeing Luffying.


    She went forward and hugged Luffy tightly, crying and saying, "Brother Luffy, they are so scary, shall we go back to the Ryugu Pce now?"


    Shirahoshi was so frightened that she hugged very hard.


    But this foolish Luffy doesn''t know what fort'' is.


    He had only one thought in his mind.


    Since my sister said to go home, let''s go home.


    He also didn''t know that this was an action he made to ''protect his sister''.


    He has long epted the Kapu Spartan exercise mode, and his strength is much stronger than that of ordinary children. He forcibly propped up Shirahoshi''s embrace and walked out of Shirahoshi''s embrace.


    He stared nkly at Shirahoshi.


    Forgot to cry.


    Luffy didn''t care about the crowd who were still booing around.


    He walked directly behind Camie, poked Camie''s fish tail and said, "Let''s go home. My sister doesn''t like it here."


    Camie looked at Luffy stiffly, not knowing how to answer for a while.


    On the contrary, the drunk fishman was the first to say: "Go home? Do you think we will let you leave so easily?!"


    Having said that, the drunken fishman went forward.


    Camie kept Luffy behind him like a hen guarding a chick.


    At this moment, in the crowd of people on the periphery, a domineering and unquestionable voice suddenly came: "Get out of the way! Get out of the way! What are you all gathering here for?!"


    The owner of the voice has a pair of big hands, and pushed away the crowd in front of him.


    A sturdy fishman.


    In front of him, anyone seemed so powerless.


    Quickly.


    He came to the encirclement.


    When most people saw him, they couldn''t hold back their excitement and shouted, "Elder Dragon!"


    "Big Brother Arlong!"


    "Big Brother Arlong, it turns out that you are here, this is great!"


    Yes.


    It was Arlong who came here after leaving Hody Jones.


    Ever since Jinbe became the guard of Ryugu Castle, Arlong has be one of the leaders of Fishmen Street. He is a man who takes his partners very seriously. From time to time, some siblings will gather and rush tond together to rescue the captured partners.


    That''s why he can be respected and worshipped by so many people in Fishman Street.


    His arrival was like a group of fish-men without a leader who had found their backbone.


    All things, just leave it to him.


    Everyone, just do what you are told.


    The drunken fishman, who was sober up a lot, was full of joy when he saw Arlong. He knew that Arlong hated humans the most. What to do with this human child, it would be better to leave it to Arlong to decide.


    He walked quickly to Arlong, pointed to Luffy behind Camie and said, "Big Brother Arlong! It''s him, it''s this human who broke into our fishman street!"

 Chapter 343: Tenacious, frank

    Chapter 343: Tenacious, frank


    "Huh?!" Hearing the words, Arlong, with his shark eyes, long saw-like nose, and sharp shark teeth, looked down at the short Luffy from above. "Human? Why are humans here?"


    Luffy looked straight at Arlong.


    He was not deterred by the fierce aura of Arlong.


    However, the drunk fishman did not forget to fan the mes: "Big Brother Arlong, this mermaid said that this human child is an honored guest of Ryugu Pce City. It could be that Queen Otohime didn''t give up and wanted everyone to live peacefully with human beings. Big Brother Arlong, why don''t we just kill this human, so that Queen Otohime''s heart will die?"


    Arlong finally looked straight at Luffy and his party.


    His physique was so sturdy and huge in front of Luffy and his party.


    Camie, a grown-up mermaid, has the size of Arlong''s waist.


    Not to mention Shirahoshi, a mermaid princess who is a little younger than Camie, only three years old.


    Both were so frightened by Arlong''s aura that they didn''t dare to move.


    Arlong was not swayed by the drunken fishman words. He didn''t respond to the drunken fishman, and shifted his gaze from Luffy to Camie: "Why is the princess here? It''s really just like everyone said, Queen Otohime doesn''t care about our opinions, she will try to make humans as bridges ofmunication?"


    While talking, Arlong is approaching Camie step by step.


    Forcing Camie, who was standing in front of Luffy, had no choice but to retreat again and again.


    Together with Luffy, they retreated to Shirahoshi''s side, and the three of them were forced to huddle together.


    And Luffy was caught in the middle of Camie and Shirahoshi.


    The two girls were so nervous that they almost caught him out of breath.


    Camie was stunned by the aura of Arlong.


    The whole person looks stupid and forgot to answer Arlong''s question.


    Instead, it was Shirahoshi. She was too frightened and couldn''t help crying again: "Brother Luffy, I want to go back to the Ryugu Pce, I want to go back to the Ryugu Pce~ Brother Luffy, will you take me back to the Ryugu Pce?"


    It''s better not to say this.


    Say it out.


    Arlong''s face, which was already somewhat unkind, got angry on the spot, and pped Camie.


    Skipped Luffy.


    He directly grabbed Shirahoshi''s neck and grabbed Shirahoshi: "What do you call this human? You are the princess of our Ryugu Kingdom, and you actually call this human brother?!"


    Princess Shirahoshi was pinched into the air, looking very ufortable.


    Her tender palms clenched Arlong''s wrist.


    Hope to break free.


    But at only three years old, her strength is too small after all.


    All this was in vain before Arlong.


    "Let her go! You bastard, let her go!" Seeing this, Luffy rushed forward subconsciously and kept beating Arlong. He didn''t think about his own safety at all.


    His height was only the knee of Arlong.


    He could only beat Arlong''s calf with all his might.


    Although his strength is a little bigger than Shirahoshi''s, but in the eyes of Arlong, he still feels that he is not strong enough to tickle him.


    However, even if it did not cause any harm to himself.


    But Luffy''s flipping action also seeded in arousing the disgust of Arlong.


    Fishmen are a lowly race like you? You touch me casually?


    Without saying a word.


    He kicked Luffy mercilessly with his right foot.


    He doesn''t care about the honored guests or not.


    Even the princess Shirahoshi, he didn''t take it seriously.


    Not to mention the human being Luffy?


    With this kick, he didn''t even think about Luffy''s life or death.


    ''boom!''


    With this blow, Arlong felt a solid kick to Luffy.


    It is conceivable that the scene where Luffy was kicked and flew out did not appear as expected.


    Instead, he felt a little pain in his calf.


    He looked down.


    After being hit by him, Luffy still clenched his calf with brute force. At this time, Luffy had blood oozing from the corner of his mouth. Obviously it was the injury caused by the kick he just kicked.


    This kind of injury is for a four-year-old human child.


    It is not unremarkable.


    But Luffy didn''t think so much.


    There is only one thought in his mind...


    Protect my sister!


    "Let go of her! You bastard, let go of my sister!" Luffy said inartictely.


    Arlong grinned.


    He really loosened Shirahoshi''s neck and let Shirahoshi fall to the ground.


    In fact, even if Luffy didn''t say anything, he wouldn''t hurt Shirahoshi. After all, Shirahoshi was also the princess of their Ryugu Kingdom and a member of his race, so at most he would have taught her a lesson or two.


    But Luffy is different.


    Since Luffy is so stubborn, he doesn''t mind ''ying'' with Luffy.


    He bent over, pulled up Luffy''s back cor, and pulled him up.


    He didn''t stop until he pulled Luffy to a level with him.


    Luffy red at Arlong.


    The first reaction was to spray Arlong''s face together with the ''calf skin'' that he had just bitten off, and the blood from his mouth. Nopromise at all.


    Arlong was sprayed so that his eyes were closed.


    When his eyes slowly opened again, his shark eyes, not only did not have the slightest anger, but looked at the human child in front of him with great excitement.


    "You are bold."


    "Are you really not afraid of death?"


    Luffy still had the same hatred for him.


    The expression of Arlong gradually became hideous: "Very good! Since you are not afraid of death, then I will y with you!"


    Say it.


    His huge mouth bites towards Luffy''s waist.


    He was about to bite off Luffy at any moment.


    Shirahoshi, who saw this, was even more terrified. She cried even more hysterically: "Don''t! Don''t kill brother! Don''t--!"


    In an instant.


    The whole fishman ind was shaken.


    The field of vision passes through the doubleyered ''bubble film'' that covers the Fishman Ind, and you can see that there are countless sea kings of veryrge size, and there is a faint trend of beginning to gather here.


    This time.


    It is not only a group of fishmen in the fishmen street.


    Even the countless citizens of the entire Fishman Ind were shocked by this spectacr scene, and they forgot to move and escape.


    Confused Camie.


    She did not notice these sights.


    She saw that Luffy was about to die from Arlong bite.


    She hurriedly said: "You can''t kill him! He is the hope to lead us to thend from Fishman Ind! This is what Sister Sharley saw for him in divination!"


    This sentence sessfully attracted the attention of everyone on Fishman Ind.


    If these remarks came from the mouth of Princess Otohime, maybe no one would believe it. But if... these remarks are the result of Sharley''s divination for Luffy...


    Then it is no longer their turn to choose whether to believe or not.


    After all, Sharley''s divination is famous throughout Fishman Ind.


    No one will doubt the results of her divination...

 Chapter 344: You wait for me

    Chapter 344: You wait for me


    Arlong''s upper and lower jaws, which were about to bite, stopped.


    He pulled Luffy out of his mouth.


    Luffy''s waist suddenly sprayed a lot of blood, showing a pained look, and the pain made him grit his teeth and cover the wound. But Arlong didn''t worry that much at all, stared at Camie and asked, "What you said is true? Did she really predict such a result?"


    Arlong did not call Sharley his sister just because.


    They are brother and sister.


    But they are half-sibling, and the rtionship is not very good, and there is no contact.


    Seeing Luffy''s injury, Camie became even more nervous. He didn''t dare to neglect, and replied directly: "Really! It''s all true! Sister Sharley said that when she saw Luffy growing up, she would lead Fish-men. The people of the ind are marching towards thend together! Including the three princes, including Princess Shirohashi! Even you are one of them!"


    Camie took a breath and said everything she wanted to say.


    After, she felt relieved.


    Just waiting for the results toe.


    But what she didn''t know was that her series of words shocked everyone present. It can be said that none of the inhabitants of Fishman Ind do not yearn for life onnd.


    Otherwise, they wouldn''t risk being kidnapped, and they would have to go tond for a trip.


    In the depths of the sea, it is safe and secure, isn''t it good to keep growing here?


    Anyway, they spread terryfying rumors, so they can restrain those young people, and no one dares to break into Fishman Ind to make trouble.


    So it can be seen from their behavior that nearly half of the people on Fishman Ind think that they are neither willing to give up going to thend nor believe in the kindness of human beings.


    After all, Queen Otohime has been working hard for so long, and I haven''t seen any changes in those humans, right?


    So the concept engraved in their minds is that the only thing they can do is to resist!


    Resist!


    But this deeply ingrained idea was really shaken after they heard Camie''s remarks.


    Even the fierce Arlong, who hates humans, is no exception.


    Just listening to Camie say that this is the prophecy of his sister Sharley, he can no longer suppress the frequency of his heart beating constantly.


    He couldn''t help taking a deep breath when he heard that the three princes and Princess Shirahoshi were also leading the human child towards thend.


    Because he knew that being able tomand the three princes and Princess Shirahoshi meant that the whole fishman ind at that time would really be dispatched.


    When he heard that he was a part of it, it made him feel even more incredible.


    What kind of character Arlong is, is there anyone who knows better than him?


    How could he willingly bow down to a human being?


    And still such a young child.


    Is it the mermaid Camie in front of me who is deceiving him in order to save this human... or is the prediction really true? Or...what did this stinking child really do to gain his approval in the future?


    Thought of this.


    Arlong subconsciously cast a nce at Luffy.


    Luffy''s condition is still so painful.


    A thought naturally bred in his mind: Bah, the lowly race is really weak. Will Arlong sumb to you in the future? Hehe, funny!


    Gradually.


    The look of Arlong changed from shock to doubt.


    He changed from questioning to contempt.


    In the end, it changed from contempt to yfulness and excitement.


    He had given up thinking about killing Luffy.


    He would like to see how this stinky human being can change himself. Of course, if he finds out that Camie has deceived him, then in order to wash away his shame today, even if he chases him to Ryugu Pce, he will definitely kill Luffy! Including the mermaid Camie!


    A decision has been made.


    Arlong directly threw the blood-stained Luffy onto Shirahoshi.


    He didn''t take into ount whether Luffy''s injury would be life-threatening.


    In his heart, if Luffy can''t even pass this level, then there is no need to expect Sharley''s ridiculous prophecy toe true.


    Shirahoshi stopped crying.


    She caught Luffy very nervously: "Brother Luffy! Brother Luffy!"


    Camie hurriedly came to Luffy''s side and covered the wound for Luffy.


    Seeing that Camie and Shirahoshi were about to leave with Luffy in their arms, the drunken fishman was reluctant. His family is dead. Even if he gave him a hope of going tond, so what? Can I get my lost family back?


    The drunk fishman ran to the side of Arlong and discouraged: "Elder Brother Arlong, are we really going to let them go? Obviously, the mermaid told this lie in order to save the life of this human being! How could human beings help us go to thend of Fishman Ind?! Big Brother Arlong, this is a rare opportunity! As long as this human being is killed, Queen Otohime will no longer be able to separate us and carry out a policy that is impossible to achieve at all!"


    Arlong stared at the drunk fishman unkindly: "What should I do, do I need you to teach me?!"


    Immediately.


    ''boom!'' a loud bang.


    The drunken fishman was pped by Arlong and flew out.


    The surrounding spectators did not dare to stop them, and no one went to help.


    At this time, due to the huge movement around, the bodyguards of the royal family, including the great prince Fukaboshi, also came here. He was in the distance, and when he saw the situation here, he began to shout angrily: "Stop--! What are you trying to do?! Fishman Street is trying to rebel!"


    while roaring.


    Fukaboshi also rushed to Shiraoshi''s side at a very fast speed.


    Seeing that the person who came was his brother, Shirahoshi''s panic was relieved a lot: "Brother, brother, Brother Luffy, he..."


    Fukaboshi touched the top of Shirahoshi''s head andforted: "It''s okay, there is a big brother here, it will be fine, don''t worry."


    Shirahoshi nodded in grievance.


    She stopped crying.


    Fukaboshi looked at the huge sea kings outside the bubble stopped moving forward, he was relieved, and immediately ordered: "Come on! Bring Luffy back, let the imperial doctor heal!"


    Quickly.


    A medical staff rushed to the scene.


    They wanted to carry Luffy away.


    But Arlong said to Luffy at this time: "Kid, remember, you''d better stay in the Ryugu Pce forever and don''te out. Otherwise... you let me meet you once, and I''ll hit you again!"


    Luffy was not knocked unconscious due to serious injuries.


    He endured the pain and gritted his teeth: "I''m not afraid of you! I will definitely defeat you! You wait for me!"


    Fukaboshi: "Enough! You dare to threaten Luffy in front of me, Arlong! You don''t take our royal family seriously?!"


    Arlong sneered.


    No answer.


    But his attitude says it all.


    He really doesn''t care about the royal family.


    He was certain that the indecisive king and the benevolent princess would not do anything to him, at most he would be imprisoned for a period of time.


    He gave the eldest prince onest look provocatively, turned around, and swaggered away.


    Although the eldest prince is dissatisfied, Luffy''s life is still the most important thing, so he takes Luffy and Shirahoshi directly and leaves here.


    As for Arlong...


    He can only tell Jinbe to continue to arrest him...

 Chapter 345: Six months later

    Chapter 345: Six monthster


    In a blink of an eye, half a year has passed.


    Outside the Ryugu Pce.


    Luffyughed, ran, and turned around with a grimace: "Hahahaha! Can''t catch up with me? I don''t want to go to ss! L~"


    Chasing Luffy are the two ministers left and right, the catfish merman and the seahorse merman.


    Ever since Otohime was determined to save Luffy and was unwilling to return Luffy to Li Yaoxiang immediately, the ministers on the left and right put out the idea of killing Luffy.


    Don''t kill!


    But they never gave up the idea of cooperating with Queen Otohime to educate Luffy.


    Be sure to let Luffy try his best not to lead the people of Fishman Ind to the dead end in the prophecy.


    Therefore, in the past six months, their most important task is to urge Luffy to follow Otohime to learn etiquette, righteousness, integrity, and hope that Luffy can learn a little bit of Otohime, and not topete with others.


    As for Luffy...


    It was fine at first.


    Following Sister Shirahoshi and the children from Fishman Ind to the godmother, Queen Otohime, for ss, it was quite new and interesting to him.


    But it''s only been a few days.


    He was overactive and couldn''t sit still.


    In ss, he was either sleeping or eating, so he couldn''t listen to the great principles of life taught by Queen Otohime. Just like when Li Yaoxiang was talking to him about business.


    This kind of character is something that even Queen Otohime can''t change.


    Over time.


    Also has this scene.


    Skipping sses has be amonce in Luffy''s daily life.


    Also, because he has been running around in the fish-man ind for a long time, he has developed a good leg technique.


    The left and right ministerspletely chased after Luffy.


    Short and agile, Luffy, who was scurrying around in the alleys or crowds of Fishman Ind, was no longer what they were chasing today.


    Seeing Luffy''s whereabouts, he once againpletely disappeared from the sight of others.


    The ministers on the left and right looked at each other helplessly.


    In the end, they could only turn around, and drifted back in the direction of Ryugu Castle in a loss.


    At the same time.


    On a street in Coral Hill.


    After sessfully escaping from the left and right ministers, Luffy ran and came here naturally, and walked down the street with familiarity.


    "Haha! Luffy, are you skipping ss again?"


    "Come on, Luffy, this is the meat I just bought from thend, have a taste!"


    "Luffy Luffy,e ande, this is the cooking method I just learned from thend, how about you taste it?"


    Luffy walks the streets like a big celebrity.


    Every other distance, the owner of the store, or the pedestrians on the road greeted him, or gave him a warm hospitality.


    Since Luffy''s injury healed, he has been wandering around a lot.


    Queen Otohime couldn''t control it if she wanted to.


    This caused the residents of Fishman Ind to gradually get used to his existence.


    Used to Luffy blending into everyone''s life.


    Luffy walked and ate, and finally came to the Mermaid Cafe.


    ''Ring!''


    The door was opened.


    The doorbell rang.


    "Hello, Sister Sharley!" Luffy greeted Sharley, then walked to the dining table on his own, and climbed onto the chair very skillfully.


    Madam Sharley with a pipe, seeing Luffy''s spontaneity and treating her cafe as her own home, the corners of her mouth twitched.


    Sharley: "Why are you here?"


    Luffy: "Have some snacks!"


    Sharley: "Are you rich?"


    Luffy subconsciously ignored this question, and kept saying, "Cake, cake, I want cake. Cake, cake, I want cake."


    Three ck lines appeared on Madam Sharley''s forehead.


    At this time, Camie, who was cleaning, came down from the second floor.


    Seeing Luffy''s figure, she said happily: "Luffy, you''re here!"


    Luffy still had such a bright smile: "Hello, Sister Camie! Cake, I want to eat cake!"


    Camie leaned the broom against the wall, wiped the apron on her body with both hands, and said with a smile, "Okay, no problem! I''ll bring it to you right away."


    Madam Sharley looked at Camie speechlessly.


    She finally couldn''t help but say: "Camie, are you sure you want to let him go on like this? If you let him continue to eat, maybe you won''t want to pay off your debts for the rest of your life."


    Camie knew that Madam Sharley didn''t like Luffy.


    She hurriedly stepped forward and said coquettishly: "Don''t be like this~ Sister Sharley. Luffy''s parent is my benefactor, how can I not repay him? How much Luffy eats, he will take priority!"


    Madam Sharley snorted coldly: "I just kindly remind you that since you don''t want to appreciate it, I won''t mind your own business. Remember, if you don''t pay off your debts, don''t expect me to let you leave!"


    Camie was overjoyed when he saw this, and repeatedly replied ''Yes!''.


    She immediately ran into the kitchen happily, brought out arge te of cakes for Luffy, and let Luffy eat as much as he wanted.


    Looking at the idiots, one big and one small, Madam Sharley took a deep breath of her pipe.


    She slowly exhaled round smoke.


    She will not say more.


    She looks harsh on the surface.


    But the reason why Luffy was able to eat here openly was not the result of her letting it go?


    She did not like Luffy, a rude child, but in fact, like most of the people of Fishman Ind, she was very much looking forward to the day when the "prophecy" came.


    Anyway.


    Since the prophecy cannot be changed, let Luffy stand in the Fishman Ind camppletely.


    This is also the main reason why Luffy was able to get along so well on Fishman Ind in just half a year.


    After all, many people regard Luffy as the hope for the future of Fishman Ind.


    Treat Luffy as one of his own, that''s what it should be.


    After a while.


    The dining table was a mess.


    All the food was swept away by Luffy.


    Luffy patted his bulging belly and said with satisfaction: "Thank you for your hospitality! Sister Camie, thank you! I''lle back next time!"


    Say it.


    Luffy had a small belly, jumped off the chair, and left the Mermaid Cafe satisfied.


    ''Ring!''


    The door opens and then closes.


    Camie nced at the record on the table, feeling a lot of pressure.


    It''s over.


    This time, I don''t know how long it will take to pay off the debt.


    She nced carefully at Madam Sharley to see if there was any possibility of bargaining.


    As a result, Madam Sharley cast a nce at her, snorted coldly, and ignored her.


    It seems that bargaining is impossible.


    Camie no longer had a fluke mentality, the whole person became dejected, cleaned the table, and continued to work.


    At the same time.


    After leaving the Mermaid Cafe, Luffy can be considered to havepleted more than half of his daily itinerary. In the past six months, as long as he sessfully skipped sses, he almost repeated the same itinerary.


    First, he walked around the Fishman Ind to eat and eat.


    Satisfied, he went to the Mermaid Cafe for dessert.


    Finally, before returning to Ryugu Castle, he wille to thest ce in his itinerary, Fishman Street...

 Chapter 346: I challenge you

    Chapter 346: I challenge you


    Fish-Man Street.


    On a certain street.


    Arlong was sought after by the younger brothers and residents of Fishman Street to tell about various heroic deeds about ''teaching human beings''. There are many residents and children in Fishman Street who grew up under the shroud of this atmosphere, which led to the umtion of hatred for human beings.


    Arlong at this time stepped on a wine barrel with one foot.


    To the surrounding onlookers, he told thest time he taught humans the process.


    A lot of apuse from the onlookers.


    "It''s good!"


    "Big Brother Arlong! That''s how you should deal with those hateful humans!"


    "Yes! Do you really think we fish-men are easy to bully?"


    While everyone''s emotions were extremely high due to Arlong''s infection, Hody Jones showed disgust in the crowd.


    It''s not that he doesn''t worship Arlong.


    In terms of his admiration for Arlong, he is definitely no worse than anyone on the scene.


    But because of his excessive worship, even now someone interrupts Arlong to continue telling the story of punishing humans, which has aroused his dissatisfaction.


    He felt that this group of people was depriving him of the time to listen to Arlong''s heroic stories.


    What he wants to hear is the heroic deeds of Arlong, not the ttering nonsense of this group of people!


    Of course, the dissatisfaction of such a fishman boy did not attract everyone''s attention. Even if they paid attention, they probably wouldn''t take it to heart. After all, no matter what, Hody Jones is still just an unimportant little person. That''s it.


    A group of fish-men continued to roar around Arlong.


    Arlong also felt very useful to the pursuit of this group of younger brothers, and said nonsense: "Hahahaha! Very good! Since everyone is so courageous! Next time I will take you to thend and take those ignorant human beings. Give them a lesson! Let them know that the fishman ind and our fishmen are bloody! Not as cowardly and deceiving as those mermaids!"


    As soon as the words came out.


    The scene immediately burst into cheers.


    Everyone apuded.


    Each of them couldn''t help showing a look of anticipation. Even Hody Jones, who was originally dissatisfied, became excited because of Arlong''s promise. He could not wait to follow his Arlong brother to fight onnd.


    But just as Fish-men were making a fuss, Luffy shouted with all his strength from outside the crowd: "Arlong! I challenge you!"


    The scene suddenly became silent.


    When everyone recognized Luffy''s voice, there was a burst ofughter.


    "Hahahahaha! Luffy, you''re here? Do you want to challenge Big Brother Arlong?"


    "Hahahaha! Good job, Luffy! I''ll bet against people, you will definitelye over to challenge Big Brother Arlong today! You sure didn''t disappoint me!"


    A group of people before Luffy and after Luffypletely lost their hatred for Luffy.


    In the final analysis, it was because of the prophecy that came out of Camie''s mouth.


    Although everyone in Fishman Street still hates humans very much, this does not prevent them from changing their views on Luffy because of this prophecy.


    Everyone is very smart to make way for Luffy.


    Luffy walked into the crowd with such a rage.


    During the walk, there were many fish-men either fiddling with Luffy''s hair or teasing Luffy a few times.


    Luffy turned a blind eye to them all.


    He still looks ''very fierce''.


    In the end, he walked through the crowd, pointed at Arlong that was many times taller than him and said, "What''s wrong? You didn''te out to fight, are you afraid of me?!"


    As for Arlong...


    The moment he heard Luffy''s voice, he couldn''t help but feel happy.


    When he saw Luffy, this little guy, walking through the crowd, pointing at him and talking nonsense, he couldn''t help but burst intoughter. Luffy''s naive character has brought him a lot of fun in the past six months.


    "Hahahahaha!" After a hearty burst ofughter, Arlong immediately turned into a ferocious look, "You dare toe here so quickly and die, forget how you were taught by me a few days ago?"


    In the past six months, Luffy has challenged Arlong countless times.


    Although Arlong didn''t n to kill Luffy, but every time he challenged, he would not let Luffy hold back.


    Luffy won''t stop until he''s half dead.


    Luffy took off his shirt and threw it far away.


    The scars left by Arlong''s mouth still remain on his body.


    Luffy said with a firm expression: "That was a few days ago! Today''s me, I''m not the same as a few days ago!"


    Say it.


    Luffy charged directly towards Arlong.


    He came to Arlong, put on a good posture, and shouted: "32 Brick Fist! Ha!"


    ''smack'' sounded softly.


    In the middle of the palm of the hand that Arlong deliberately stretched out to block it.


    Arlong held Luffy''s fist, slowly moved away, and immediately said with a mocking look: "Yo? It was only 28 a few days ago, and today it''s 32. It''s progressing pretty fast~"


    Since half a year ago, after Luffy was defeated by Arlong.


    He wanted to be stronger.


    Knowing Luffy''s heart, Queen Otohime rmended him to the fishman karate master, Hack, who is still working in Ryugu Castle. That is, in the original book, the fishman karate master Luffy met in the bullfighting arenapetition.


    The so-called 32 bricks represent the number of bricks that Luffy can prate with his current punch.


    Arlong karate usually uses the number of bricks to judge the strength of this move.


    For a four-year-old human child, being able to break 32 bricks at this age is already quite remarkable. It''s a pity that the power of 32 bricks is still not worth mentioning for a fishman with a particrly powerful system like Arlong.


    Seeing Luffy''s angry look after being teased by himself, Arlong felt even more happy: "Since you have already shot at me, then... should you be prepared to be punished by me?"


    Luffy''s body trembled.


    He knew what Arlong meant.


    It seems that he is going to beat him up again.


    But Luffy only trembled, he didn''t mean to be afraid at all, and he continued to attack Arlong''s palm without giving up.


    "32 Brick Fist!"


    "32 Brick Fist!"


    "32 Brick Fist!"


    "32 Brick Fist!"


    The scene in front of him turned Fish-men upside down. They were all so amused by Luffy''s funny scene that he couldn''t helpughing so hard that tears appear.


    "Hahahaha! Can''t, I can''t man!"


    "Luffy, are you trying to make meugh to death!"


    Feeling such a happy atmosphere around, even Arlong was amused by Luffy''s actions for a while.


    And just when he was about to end this farce, there was a panicked shout from a distance: "Big Brother Arlong! It''s not good, it''s not good! Brother Arlong!"

 Chapter 347: A Genuine Part of the Group

    Chapter 347: A Genuine Part of the Group


    Luffy didn''t care about other people''s eyes, and still kept his ''32 Brick Fist'' there.


    And at this time, Fish-men who had just shouted outside the crowd finally squeezed into the encirclement.


    Arlong let Luffy beat his palm, frowning slightly: "What''s wrong?"


    Arlong who just broke in, bent over and put his palms on his knees, panting and said: "Hu... hu... hu... Ar... Arlong, another pirate group took our fish-men. The people of the ind have been captured! They are already on their way to the auction venue!"


    Heard that someone was doing something to their people on Fishman Ind again.


    All Fish-men present were gnashing their teeth on the spot.


    And when everyone heard that the other party was already on their way to the poption auction venue, everyone''s expressions instantly became extremely solemn and anxious!


    Everyone is very clear in their hearts, the reason why they are able to defeat humans frequently and save their partners only relies on the advantages of water conservancy.


    If the battlefield is switched tond, then this advantage is really gone.


    The pirates who cane here, or the human traffickers who stay here for a long time, how can they not have any strength? If there is no advantage in water conservancy, they are not the opponents of this group of people at all.


    So when they heard that the enemy ships were sailing towards the location of the poption auction venue, everyone''s faces became so anxious.


    Because everyone knows that as long as the other party is docked...


    Then they will never have a chance to do it again.


    "Big Brother Arlong!"


    "Big Brother Arlong!"


    Everyone looked anxious and looked at Arlong, hoping that Arlong could give him an idea.


    Arlong nced around, and he had nothing to hesitate, and said in a stern tone: "Then what are you waiting for? Why don''t you follow me to teach those group of humans who have no idea what they''ve done?!"


    As soon as the words came out.


    On the spot, many people signed up enthusiastically, wanting to respond to the call of Arlong to fight this time.


    And just when Arlong was about to lead his mates to leave the Fishman Street, Luffy stopped him at this moment: "Wait! Take me there, and I will also teach those abominable pirates with you!"


    Actually, Luffy had already stopped beating Arlong''s palm when Arlong reported.


    He was also paying attention to the news brought by Arlong who reported the news.


    Pirate, he knows those word.


    He has been with Garp for a long time, and it is impossible for him not to have contact with pirates.


    He knew Garp was a marine.


    The marine catches pirates.


    Pirates are bad guys.


    But originally, the knowledge of pirates in his mind was limited to this. Even if Garp or the crew of the marine battleship had clearly told him that pirates were bad people, he still had no idea about pirates.


    He also has no prejudice.


    What is the bad guy?


    What is the bad thing?


    What does have to do with him?


    However, since he came to Fishman Ind, this indifferent attitude has gradually changed.


    In the past six months of living on Fishman Ind, he has heard a lot of news that the people of Fishman Ind were abducted by pirates.


    Even if he didn''t understand what abduction is at first.


    Apanied by the familiar faces, the faces that invited him to dinner, and the faces that showed kindness to him, mysteriously disappeared one after another, no matter how stupid he was, it was impossible not to notice something was wrong.


    When he gradually understood what was going on, this caused his view on pirates to be more and more disgusting.


    If it weren''t for the hardship, maybe he would have rushed up and wanted to fight with those so-called pirates.


    It is rare for him to meet such an opportunity now.


    He can go up and teach those pirates a lesson.


    Of course he didn''t want to miss it.


    After hearing Luffy''s cry, Arlong subconsciously stopped.


    He looked at Luffy.


    He showed aplicated look.


    This is the first time he has shown this look in front of Luffy.


    In his opinion, no matter how harmless Luffy seems to humans and animals, and how he has no prejudice against the people of Fishman Ind, it cannot change the fact that Luffy is human.


    So deep down in his heart, he still couldn''t ept Luffy.


    He''s also unwilling to believe that he will acknowledge Luffy in the future.


    But this kind of prejudiced concept, at this moment, Arlong has to admit that his views on Luffy have really been shaken.


    He could feel Luffy''s sincerity.


    He could feel that Luffy was not acting.


    Luffy really wants to save those fish-man ind friends.


    And because he confirmed this, he gradually softened towards Luffy''splicated look, and he naturally showed a smile to Luffy: "Boy, look at your strength, even if you go up, you''ll just be a burden. You wait here for our good news. "


    Tak!


    Luffy trotted to Arlong.


    hugged Arlong''s calf and didn''t let go.


    "I don''t care! I just want to go! If you don''t take me, I won''t let go!"


    Arlong was taken aback.


    He didn''t expect Luffy to be so stubborn.


    When he nned to use strong means to throw Luffy away, he found that the younger brothers around him were looking at him with pleading eyes. Although he didn''t say it, he understood what the younger brothers meant.


    This is to let Luffy join the battle.


    Wants to make Luffy truly one of them.


    Arlong nced around and saw that everyone was like this.


    He also made a new decision in his heart.


    He lowered his head and yed with Luffy: "Boy, it''s no joke to go up this time, and none of us will take care of your life and death. You really won''t regret it?"


    Luffy didn''t answer


    He still looks ''very fierce'', holding Arlong''s calf tightly.


    Arlong gave a sincere smile from the bottom of his heart: "Okay! Then I''ll take you up! Boy, if you die, don''t me me!"


    "Take care of my sister."


    "Um?"


    "If I''m dead, help me take care of my sister."


    As soon as these words came out, not only Arlong, but also the rest of the peoplepletely let go of their vignce against Luffy.


    They never thought that at such a moment, Luffy cared about the princess of their fishman ind.


    Since this is the case, what is there to doubt?


    Arlong smiled even brighter now: "Very good! Let''s go then!"


    The dust has settled.


    Fish-Man Street suddenly burst into high-spirited cheers.


    Seeing that Arlong was about to lead a group of people away, this time, Hody Jones finally couldn''t sit still: "Big Brother Arlong! I''m going too!"


    Arlong paused and cast a nce at Hody Jones: "You just stay. In case anything happens to our group, our fish-men leader needs to be passed down to a young generation as outstanding as you."


    Arlong stopped talking to Hody Jones.


    He turned around and led the crowd away directly...

 Chapter 348: The Evil Rabbit Pirates

    Chapter 348: The Evil Rabbit Pirates


    On the sea.


    A pirate ship is sailing in it.


    The pirate g hung on the gpole of the pirate ship is the pirate g of the Evil Rabbit Pirates.


    The head of the Evil Rabbit Pirates,monly known as Rabbit Boss.


    He is a devil fruit power user who has eaten the rabbit fruit, and has the ability to be a beast (Zoan Fruit Ability User). After the animalization, not only the strength and speed of the whole body will be greatly improved.


    Even the jumping power will be improved to an amazing level.


    With this outstanding ability, he led his pirate group to this sea area and became a big pirate with a reward of 45 million Berry.


    At this time, he was wearing sunsses, with his feet up, half lying on a reclining chair basking in the sun, while holding a piece of hay in his hand, picking teeth for his conspicuous rabbit teeth.


    He looks very rxed andfortable.


    At this moment, a crew member walked towards him quickly from the cabin.


    He looks very excited.


    "Boss Rabbit! Boss Rabbit! Get rich! Get rich! This time we get rich! A total of 16, I just counted them, this time we captured a full 16 mermaids! I heard that the price of the mermaid at the auction is not low! After this vote, we can be cool for a long time this time! It''s all thanks to your leadership, Boss Rabbit!"


    Yes, the Evil Rabbit Pirates, it is also Arlong who rushed to the fisherman street to report, the pirate group that captured many of their fish-men ind.


    Hearing his subordinates report the earnings this time, it was as if someone was constantly praising him in his ear.


    This kind of ttery is very useful to the rabbit boss.


    He was dark in his heart, but on the surface he showed an expression of indifference: "Okay, okay, these mermaids are like gold bars that can swim away. Since these gold bars dare to wave in front of me, then of course I need to wee them in. How''s it going? Keeping them in there is no problem, right?"


    Crew: "It''s alright! Boss Rabbit, don''t worry! I''ve already bound them tightly! Every mermaid has a rag in their mouth. Even if they want to make trouble, they can''t make trouble!"


    The two looked at each other.


    They showed a treacherous smile.


    And at this moment, another person hurried out of the cabin.


    "Boss Rabbit! Boss Rabbit!"


    "Not good! Not good!"


    "The bottom of our boat is starting to flood! It seems that someone is destroying the bottom of our boat!"


    Boss Rabbit was furious and stood up angrily.


    What?!


    What kind of thing that doesn''t know how to live or die dares to provoke him?


    Soon, without waiting for Boss Rabbit to make corresponding countermeasures, their pirate ship was not only attacked on the bottom of the ship this time. Even the originally calm sea suddenly fired water arrows one after another, attacking their hulls.


    It elerated the speed of the sinking of the pirate ship.


    Boss Rabbit: "Damn it! Who is it?! If you dare to provoke me, you don''t dare to stand up dignifiedly?!"


    The boss rabbit who saw such a situation was also anxious.


    As we all know, the most feared thing for devil fruit people is sea water.


    If the ship really sank, wouldn''t he be ughtered?


    And this is exactly where the arrogance of Arlong lies.


    It stands to reason that his strength is not enough to run rampant in this sea area, but every time he confronts the enemy, he relies on the advantages of this kind of fishman to defeat the iing enemies one by one.


    As long as he is in this sea, the devil fruit person is a joke to him.


    As for those intruders who are not devil fruit user, but have the ability to reach this sea area, he also does not need to worry. Even if he loses, he can easily escape by relying on swimming.


    Arlong ignored the mor of Rabbit Boss.


    If you want to survive in this sea area, you must be cautious.


    After all, the strength of those who cane here cannot be underestimated.


    Arlong is not an idiot, and this is not the East Blue. He will not underestimate the enemy in this sea area.


    Quickly.


    As more and more holes were pierced by water arrows, the ship sank faster and faster.


    Seeing that the situation is not good.


    Boss Rabbit hurriedly ran into the cabin, caught one of the mermaids out, grabbed the mermaid''s neck and threatened: "I see! It''s you! It must be you! You are here to save your partner, right?! Stop your men! If you don''t stop, I''ll kill all the fish on the boat!"


    It''s here and now.


    Boss Rabbit can''t guess who did it to him?


    He just came to this sea area not long ago.


    He didn''t meet any enemies here either.


    The one who can stay in the sea for so long and has hatred against him if it is not the partner of this group of mermaids, then who else is there?


    Sure enough.


    After finished saying this, all the younger brothers brought by Arlong, including himself, also stopped the offensive and surfaced their heads one by one.


    Luffy, whose head is covered with ''bubble film'', is also among them.


    Everyone looked at this boss rabbit viciously.


    Rabbit boss is overjoyed to see this!


    He made the right bet!


    "I warn you! You pull my boat to the shore right now! Or I''ll kill them!" While Boss Rabbit was talking.


    The more than ten mermaids that were bound have been pushed out of the cabin one by one.


    Among the dozen or so people who were bound, there were not only mermaids.


    There are also bloody fish-men.


    At this time, a fishman finally broke free from the rag stuck in his mouth, and he shouted at Arlong: "Elder Arlong! Leave us alone! Kill them all! Humans must know that the people of our Fishman Ind are not easy to bully!"


    The weaker mermaid, after hearing this.


    They, who seemed a little scared at first, couldn''t help being infected by the brotherhood.


    All showed pleading eyes and looked at Arlong. They agree with their proposal.


    Boss Rabbit was so annoyed that he walked directly to the meddling fish-men, and with all his strength, he pped some fish-men, and then looked at Arlong fiercely and said, "As long as you dare to mess around. Come, then I will kill them all immediately! You can see that, I am a devil fruit person, maybe you can kill all my crew, but you may not be able to kill me."


    But just when everyone was focusing on Boss Rabbit, no one noticed that Luffy, the little guy, had already climbed onto the boat, and without waiting for Arlong to respond, he took the lead in attacking one of the crew members.


    "32 Brick Fist!"


    The attacked crew member let out a scream.


    The leg bones were directly dislocated by Luffy''s beating.


    Because of his scream, he instantly woke up everyone present.


    Arlong cursed inwardly, ''Damn it!'', and immediately ordered: "Do it!"

 Chapter 349: Shark·ON·DARTS

    Chapter 349: Shark¡¤ON¡¤DARTS


    "Do it!"


    With this order, the subordinates who followed Arlong dived their heads back into the sea one after another, and then a series of attacks even more violent than before, shot at the pirate ship.


    After following Arlong for so long, everyone has a certain tacit understanding in their hearts.


    Everyone is very clear in their hearts that the only thing they can do now is to sink the pirate ship as soon as possible, save one by one, andpete with time.


    Seeing this, the Boss Rabbit cursed inwardly, ''Damn!''.


    Immediately, his legs, which had been transformed into rabbits, suddenly squatted down and exerted force!


    Boom! of a loud bang.


    The deck was stepped into a huge pit by him.


    And he used this strength to leap towards the shore.


    He didn''t know whether he could reach the shore directly with this full-strength jump, but at this moment, he had no choice. If you don''t run again, when the ship sinks, you don''t have to run anymore.


    As for what I said before, kill all the fish on the boat...


    He was just talking.


    If can deter Arlong and his party, it would be even better.


    He can''t be deterred, so there''s no other way.


    He didn''t want to be buried with this group of mermaids.


    What if he kills them but there''s no time to escape?


    Isn''t it a very wrongful death?


    What are you kidding?


    His life is very precious!


    Those mermaids are willing to die with him, but he still doesn''t want to!


    Seeing that Rabbit Boss jumped and ran away without saying a word, Arlong gritted his teeth and said, "You guys get on the boat to save them! I''ll go after him!"


    After saying that, Arlong dived into the sea and started chasing in the direction where the Boss Rabbit leaped with all his strength.


    No Boss Rabbit.


    The pirates on this pirate ship are only a group of pirates that are slightly stronger than ordinary people. They were not the opponents of Fish-men at all, and they were quickly dealt with by a group of fish-men who washed up on the boat.


    As for Arlong...


    He and Rabbit Boss are all sprinting towards the shore with all their strength.


    One sprints in the air.


    One sprints in the sea.


    Arlong did not dive into the depths, but only marched on the surface of the sea.


    Boss Rabbit, who was sprinting in the air, just looked down, and he could clearly see that the dorsal fin of Arlong''s stamina was floating on the sea at an extremely fast speed, chasing him.


    He can''t shake him off.


    Feeling his own speed started to slow down in the air.


    Boss Rabbit''s heart also became more and more anxious.


    Leaping in mid-air, he just saw the outline of the pier, and couldn''t wait to shout at the pier: "Hey! Here! Look here! Come and pick me up! There are fishmen trying to kill me! Whover saves me, I''ll give them 10 million Berrys!"


    Boss Rabbit''s cry for help was not only heard by the people on the shore.


    Even Arlong at the bottom of the sea heard it.


    Arlong is very clear in his heart that as long as someonees to pick up this Rabbit Boss, then he really can''t solve Rabbit Boss.


    And that''s not the worst.


    The worst thing is that if Boss Rabbit escapes this disaster, then he can be 100% sure that Boss Rabbit will definitely take revenge on Fish-men afterward.


    When the timees, I don''t know how manypanions will suffer.


    It is simply endless trouble.


    Missing this.


    Arlong was savage in his heart and dived to the bottom of the sea.


    It wasn''t until a certain depth that he made a turn around, attacking Rabbit Boss with all his strength, and disying his self-created move, Shark Darts!


    In an instant.


    Arlong suddenly rushed out from the calm sea and rushed towards the Boss Rabbit in the sky!


    He knew very well that, judging from his current strength, as long as he left the water, he would not be able to be a match for the zoan-type fruit person. This is also the main reason why he did not use this trick in the process of chasing before.


    But things have developed to such a point that it is toote to think about it.


    He had to do everything in his power to slow Boss Rabbit.


    Be sure to catch the humans on the shore to rescue Mr. Rabbit, and let Mr. Rabbit fall into the sea first.


    As long as Boss Rabbit falls into the sea first, he will be sure to take Boss Rabbit away and retreat in front of all the humans!


    What happened next was just as Arlong had guessed.


    After left the water, he really was no match for Boss Rabbit.


    Even if you use the ''SharkONDARTS'' to sprint to Boss Rabbit, the speed of this sprint is still within the range that Boss Rabbit can handle.


    Even Boss Rabbit still has enough energy to try to use Arlong''s body to make the second jump.


    Of course, Arlong is not a fool.


    It is impossible to let the rabbit boss easily seed.


    When Arlong attacked the Rabbit Boss, the attitude he showed was that he had no intention of defending at all.


    There is a notion of, ''Even if you get hit by the boss rabbit, you still have to hug the boss rabbit tightly''.


    Boss Rabbit in mid-air, of course, also felt the determination of Arlong.


    Therefore, in the following situation, Arlong uses SharkONDARTS again and again, and the rabbit boss can only dodge again and again, missing many opportunities for ''second jump''.


    Until he realized that he was about to fall and was about to fight Arlong to the death, it was toote.


    Because Arlong no longer uses SharkONDARTS.


    He did not use other moves.


    He just followed the speed of Rabbit Boss quietly, waiting for Rabbit Boss to fallpletely.


    ''Puff''.


    Water sshes everywhere.


    Boss Rabbit, who was flying in mid-air, finally lost his strength and fell into the sea.


    The moment he touched the sea water, he began to feel the weakness of his whole body. Even if the sea water can''t bring him back to his original form, he is still in the form of a beast, but the devil fruit person can''t bear the natural enemy of sea water after all.


    Arlong, who saw this, rushed over immediately.


    Before the rescue arrives, quickly take away the rabbit boss.


    Not long.


    Arlong dragged the weak and feeble body of Boss Rabbit and quickly returned to the sea area where everyone gathered before.


    In that sea area, there is no trace of the pirate ship.


    There was only a broken board floating on the sea, and a group of fish-men who were worried.


    In addition to worrying about being escaped by Boss Rabbit this time, everyone is more worried that something will happen to Arlong. After all, that direction is already infinitely close to the territory of humans, and no one knows whether Arlong can escape.


    "Look, everyone! It''s Big Brother Arlong! Big Brother Arlong is back!"


    "Big Brother Arlong!"


    "Big Brother Arlong!"


    The worried look disappeared instantly.


    Seeing their big brother Arlong, dragging the rabbit back with a victorious attitude, everyone could not hide their excitement and swarmed towards Arlong.


    They surrounded Arlong.


    In the past, whenever Arlong encountered such a situation, he wouldugh heartily from the heart, because he led hispanions to win a beautiful battle and rescued many of his fellow nsmen.


    But he didn''t do that today, he nced at everyone with a stern expression.


    Everyone was seen by him and stopped chasing after him, not daring to speak.


    Immediately, he passed everyone, dragged the weak and weak Rabbit Boss, and came to Luffy who was left behind...

 Chapter 350: Return of the Avengers

    Chapter 350: Return of the Avengers


    Arlong grabbed the back of the rabbit''s neck and pushed the rabbit to Luffy.


    This is thest test that Arlong gives Luffy.


    Boss Rabbit is the enemy, but at the same time he is also a human. If Luffy can kill Rabbit Boss for the sake of Fish-men, it means that Luffy truly treats them as his own.


    And his Arlong also secretly promised that he would never treat Luffy as an outsider from now on.


    "Kill him. Kill him to prove yourself. Didn''t you mor toe out with me? Then this time the enemy will be solved by you."


    As soon as these words came out, the rest of Fish-men present froze for a while.


    They guessed what Arlong was thinking.


    They knew what Arlong was doing.


    But...


    Let a child who is only four years old do it, this is too...


    Everyone showed that they couldn''t bear it, but because this was the decision of Arlong, no one came out to discourage it.


    However, just when everyone, including Arlong, thought that Luffy would be in trouble, but they didn''t want to. When the face of the rabbit boss was just in front of Luffy, Luffy looked angry on the spot and gave ''32 Brick Fist!'' to him.


    And it was still blow after blow, with no intention of stopping at all.


    ''32 Brick Fist!''


    ''32 Brick Fist!''


    ''32 Brick Fist!''


    The two rabbit teeth fell off when the Boss Rabbit was hit, and he continued to fight.


    Arlong was a little stunned.


    He didn''t expect Luffy, who was only four years old, to be so cruel.


    But what everyone present didn''t know was that Luffy didn''t have so many thoughts in his heart at all, and he didn''t know the meaning of Arlong''s words. When he saw the face of Boss Rabbit, he only wanted to help those disappeared people get revenge.


    He only thought in his heart that it was you nasty pirates who caused everyone to disappear.


    That''s it.


    After fighting for a while, Arlong reacted, pulling back the dying boss Rabbit and reaching out to block Luffy. Even so, Luffy still wanted to break through Arlong''s block and rushed forward to beat the rabbit boss.


    He looks extra hot.


    But in the end, he couldn''t break free from Arlong''s block.


    Arlong ignored Luffy''s anger.


    He was very satisfied with Luffy''s performance.


    "Forget it, you are still young, so let me handle it."


    Since Luffy is recognized as his own, Arlong will certainly not ruin Luffy''s growth.


    So this kind of bloody thing should be done when he grows up.


    After saying that, Arlong grabbed the hand of Boss Rabbit, and with a ''click'', he broke Boss Rabbit''s neck, and immediately threw Boss Rabbit into the ocean in the distance.


    So far, the Rabbit Pirates arepletely wiped out.


    Arlong once again showed the joy of victory.


    The people who saw this also cheered.


    All subconsciously gathered towards Luffy, and then the crowd threw Luffy one after another.


    They wee Luffy to fully integrate into this big family.


    Luffy doesn''t know what''s going on.


    But being thrown and picked up like this is fun, so let everyone continue.


    In this way, this expedition ended with Luffy''sughter.


    After returned to Fishman Ind, the crew once again celebrated this victory.


    Using the wealth scavenged in the Evil Rabbit Pirate Ship, a carnival party was held in the fishermen street. Everyone had meat to eat and wine to drink.


    Luffy also attended the celebration.


    In the past, when everyone met Luffy, they would more or less tease Luffy with a hint of flirting.


    But this time, Luffy was hanging on his shoulders with everyone and had aplete carnival together.


    Orpete and dance with people.


    Orpete with people to drink, of course, he drinks juice.


    Orpete with people to eat meat.


    In short, everyone stopped treating Luffy as an outsider.


    However, when everyone was silent in this happy atmosphere, Hody Jones, who was standing not far away and watching everything, was an exception.


    He looked at Arlong who apanied Luffy to drink together, and muttered to himself: "It is impossible for humans to coexist peacefully with fish-men. Just wait, big brother Arlong. The illusions shown by human beings are just confusing, and one day you will wake up..."


    No one spotted Hody Jones muttering in the corner.


    They didn''t care about him either.


    And Hody Jones'' hatred for human beings continues to grow without everyone knowing...


    Time flies.


    In a blink of an eye, another half year has passed.


    In the past six months, Luffy lived a veryfortable life on Fishman Ind. It can be said that wherever he goes, he is a weed presence.


    Eat and eat.


    To y and have fun.


    Also because of Luffy''s rtionship.


    The n of "Peaceful Coexistence of Mermaids and Humans", which was originally supported by half of the people and opposed by half of the people, has be nearly 70% of the residents of Fish-Man Ind agree with this n.


    The remaining 30% are radicals who have a prejudice against human beings.


    After all, in the past six months, human beings have never stopped offending fish-men. So they identify Luffy with all humans.


    But this progress is enough to make Queen Otohime very excited.


    This gave her hope.


    Actions are also more motivated.


    However, the good times didn''tst long. On this day, half a yearter, Fishman Ind returned to such attitude with humanspletely disrupted Queen Otohime''s n.


    And this fishman is Fisher Tiger who just escaped from World Nobles.


    Fisher Tiger was also the former leader of Fishman Street. Everyone in Fishman Street, including Arlong and Jinbe, respected him very much and called him the Tiger boss.


    Moreover, he was also a guest of Ryugu Castle.


    It can be said that it has a pivotal position in the entire Fishman Ind.


    And the former hot-blooded and sunny Tiger boss returned to Fishman Ind this time with full of hatred.


    For three years, he was enved by the World Nobles for three full years!


    This experience made him never fall in love with humans again. This is also what he said from the bottom of his heart before his death in the original book. He would rather die of blood loss than ept human help.


    It can be said that the reason why the entire fish-man ind will sharply deepen the hatred of human beings in the future, as well as the great changes in the temperament of Arlong and others, are all caused by his fuse.


    And the purpose of his return this time was to inform the royal family of Fishman Ind that even if he offended humans, he would rescue the ves who were imprisoned by Fishman people.


    Yes, that''s right.


    It is a notification, not asking permission.


    In order not to harm Fishman Ind, he decided that he would act alone.


    He will send his bare hands to the Holy Land Mary Geoise to save everyone!

 Chapter 351: I will definitely come back

    Chapter 351: I will definitelye back


    Ryugu Pce Castle.


    On the main hall.


    Fisher Tiger told King Neptune and Queen Otohime about his n toe back this time. His determination to carry out this n can be heard from his tone alone.


    And he even thought about the aftermath for Neptune.


    Let him act alone, so as not to involve the entire Fishman Ind.


    Neptune and the ministers left and right all looked very ugly.


    But they also knew very well that in the current situation, no matter how discouraged they were, they could not dissuade Fisher Tiger. Unless through tough means.


    But this is impossible.


    If you really want to do this, you don''t have to wait for the World Nobles to retaliate, their Fishman ind will be in chaos.


    After all, Fisher Tiger''s prestige in Fishman Ind is too high.


    It can be said that it is no exaggeration to be the leader of the civilian ss of Fishman Ind.


    As for Queen Otohime...


    Queen Otohime only felt very bitter.


    She is born with a sense of domineering and can listen to the true side of others'' hearts.


    At this time, she could clearly hear the anger contained in Fisher Tiger''s heart.


    Apart from pity, she really didn''t know what else she could do for Fisher Tiger.


    What everyone is thinking, Fisher Tiger doesn''t know, and doesn''t want to know. At this moment, his eyes were only full of anger: "That''s it. Your Majesty, My Queen, whether you like it or not, I must rescue everyone this time! Wait for me and the fishermen street. After the brothers reminisce, I will set off tomorrow. I hope you will not stop me then."


    Neptune and Queen Otohime looked at each other, not knowing what to say.


    And right now.


    Somewhere on the main hall, an air door suddenly appeared out of thin air.


    The air door opens.


    Li Yaoxiang, wearing the mask of death, walked out of the air door.


    In an instant, everyone''s concentration was concentrated on Li Yaoxiang.


    Fisher Tiger frowned, with dissatisfaction in his tone: "Human? How did you appear here?"


    Seeing that the atmosphere was not right, Queen Otohime quickly came out to receive Li Yaoxiang, standing between the two of them to smooth things out: "Mr. Li, why didn''t you notify me first when you wereing? It''s also so that we can use up the friendship of thendlords in Ryugu Pce City." After saying that, she turned her head to look at Fisher Tiger and exined: "Mr. Li helped us save many people from the hands of human traffickers before. He is the great benefactor of our Fishman Ind."


    Fisher Tiger''s original dissatisfaction gradually became moreplicated.


    He hates human beings and cannot ept human beings.


    But he couldn''t put this hatred on a human who was kind to Fishman Ind.


    After hesitating for a moment, Fisher Tiger put down his face and apologized to Li Yaoxiang: "I''m sorry, my tone was too heavy just now."


    Li Yaoxiang: "It''s okay, I didn''t take it to heart."


    Seeing that the atmosphere had eased, Queen Otohime quickly changed the subject and said, "By the way, Mr. Li, you are here this time..."


    Li Yaoxiang: "I''m going to take Luffy away."


    Yes.


    The purpose of Li Yaoxiang''s visit this time is to lead Luffy away, so as to stagger the dispute between Fisher Tiger and the World Nobles. After all, Li Yaoxiang''s previous purpose, in addition to wanting Luffy to get acquainted with the "bonds", was to make Luffy realize the "evil" of pirates.


    Now, Luffy is somewhat aware of the ''evil'' of pirates.


    The true colors of the marine and World Nobles are not the best time to expose them to Luffy.


    This ckening effect on Luffy is somewhat less.


    Queen Otohime was startled for a moment, then forced a smile and said: "Hehe, Mr. Li, to tell you the truth, I have already epted Luffy as my godson. Our people on Fishman Ind also like him very much. If you don''t have much time to apany Luffy... Why don''t Luffy live with us on Fishman Ind?" Li Yaoxiang was about to speak, but Queen Otohime hurriedly said, "Please rest assured, I will definitely treat Luffy as my own son."


    Pause for a moment.


    Li Yaoxiang: "No need, Luffy has been here for a year, and it''s time to leave."


    Seeing Li Yaoxiang so insistent.


    Queen Otohime didn''t know what to say.


    Immediately, Queen Otohime led Li Yaoxiang to Luffy''s residence.


    Fisher Tiger also said goodbye to everyone, and then went to Fishman Street to get together with his brother whom he hadn''t seen for a few years.


    After a while.


    Luffy''s residence.


    Luffy slept like a dead pig, with saliva at the corners of his mouth, and his nose was attached to a drop-shaped nose. Shirahoshi was beside Luffy, shaking Luffy''s body vigorously: "Brother Luffy, get up~ Get up~ Go y with me~ You promised me yesterday that you want to y with me-- ~"


    Luffy remained unresponsive.


    At this time, Queen Otohime and Li Yaoxiang also came here.


    Shirahoshi sat up straight.


    She put on a well-behaved look.


    "Queen Mother!"


    She then tilted her head again, looking at Li Yaoxiang with doubtful eyes.


    At this time, Shirahoshi''s body is already close to the size of Arlong, and Queen Otohime came to her side, only to her arm: "Shirahoshi, this is Luffy''s uncle. This time he came here to take Luffy."


    Shirahoshi was startled.


    Luffy also woke up from his sleep instantly, he looked straight at Li Yaoxiang: "Big brother?"


    Li Yaoxiang nodded: "Yeah, it''s time to leave."


    Shirahoshi, the giant baby, instantly made a choked sound, and her eyes were full of tears, and it seemed that she would slip down at any time.


    Luffy changed his usual heartless appearance.


    He looked at Shirahoshi.


    He looked at Queen Otohime again.


    Then looked at Li Yaoxiang and said, "Can I not leave?"


    Li Yaoxiang did not answer.


    Luffy knew that Li Yaoxiang would not agree.


    Luffy: "Then... can I leaveter? I promised her that I will go out with her today..."


    Luffy pointed at the mermaid princess beside him.


    Li Yaoxiang was silent for a moment, then nodded.


    Immediately, in the next few hours, Luffy took Shirahoshi for thest time to eat, drink and y on Fishman Ind. All the people of Fishman Ind weed Luffy very much.


    He also went to the Mermaid Cafe and had thest dessert.


    He also came to Fishman Street to say goodbye to Arlong and others.


    Until the end, he returned to Ryugu Pce City, looked at Shirahoshi, who was too tired, and slowly fell asleep. Then he walked to Li Yaoxiang''s side and followed Li Yaoxiang out of Ryugu Pce City.


    Before parting.


    Princess Shirahoshi chased after crying: "Brother Luffy! Will youe back?"


    Along with Shirahoshi, there was Queen Otohime and her party, including the three princes.


    Luffy looked back at everyone.


    He looked up at Li Yaoxiang and asked, "Do I still have a chance toe back?"


    Li Yaoxiang nced at Luffy and nodded.


    Luffy returned to his bright smile again, and shouted to Shirahoshi in the distance: "Don''t worry! I will definitelye back!"


    The two turned around and stepped into the air door...

 Chapter 352: Garp after being touched the bottom line

    Chapter 352: Garp after being touched the bottom line


    At the same time.


    Time goes back to eleven months ago.


    The scene returns to Garp.


    After searching for Luffy''s trail on the ind to no avail, Garp led his warship to the nearest marine base, intending to find more information about that door strange ability.


    A weekter, Garp came to the nearest marine base.


    Knowing that the legendary Vice Admiral Garp ising soon, as the general manager of this base, the Captain of the Marine, of course, led a group of men to greet the legendary character Garp.


    Garp just got off the boat.


    The marine captain greeted him with a smile on his face.


    "Wee! Wee! Wee to Vice Admiral Garp!"


    There is only one road at the pier.


    Captain greeted Garp, and naturally blocked Garp''s way.


    Before the marine captain approached, Garp roared angrily: "Go away!"


    He abruptly screamed at the marine captain who stood aside.


    The atmosphere at the scene, also because of Garp''s roar, changed from the original joy and anticipation to wee the marine hero to extremely fearful and nervous.


    He followed Garp''s subordinates off the ship, but also did not dare to make a sound, and let the atmosphere of the scene continue.


    When Garp was about to pass the marine captain, he just stopped for a moment and ordered: "Go! Let someone take me to yourmand room! Also, bring me the Devil Fruit data book! But don''t tell me you don''t have one?!"


    The Admiral reacted immediately.


    "There is, there is! I''ll get it to you in person. Someone! Take Vice Admiral Garp to themand room!"


    The marine who heard the words in front did not dare to neglect, and hurriedly took Garp to themand room of this base.


    After a while.


    in themand room.


    No matter how nervous the marine captain was, he still found the Devil Fruit data book as quickly as possible, brought it here, forced a smile and said, "Hehe, Ka... Ka... Vice Admiral Garp, the information book you want is here..."


    Garp took the data book.


    "Go out and don''t let anyone disturb me."


    "Yes, yes!"


    The only sound left in themand room was the sound of turning pages.


    Garp continued to read page after page, trying to find a simr ability that match.


    After an hour...


    Boom!


    Boom!


    A deafening explosion resounded throughout the base.


    Looking around, themand room has been smashed through a big hole by Garp, and even the roof doesn''t know where the smashed flying, forming an open-air state.


    Everyone, including Garp''s own subordinates, couldn''t help swallowing and stared straight at Garp.


    Garp nced coldly at the crowd below.


    He said coldly: "Go! Go to Judicial Ind!"


    "Yes!"


    Two monthster.


    Under the condition of full speed and no obstruction, the warship belonging to Garp arrived at Judicial Ind in just two months.


    The outeryer of Judiciary Ind is surrounded by a circle of iron fences.


    Garp made no detours.


    There is no need to detour.


    His marine battleship drove directly towards the main entrance of Judicial Ind.


    However, even though Garp is in the marine, Judiciary Ind is not something he wants to break into.


    Before Garp''s battleship reached the main entrance of Judicial Ind, the guards in the distance had already done two things at the same time.


    One is to report to the top of the Judiciary Ind as shown in the entry.


    The second is to turn on the broadcaster and stop Garp''s battleship and move on.


    "Please pay attention to the battleship ahead! Please pay attention to the battleship ahead! You have reached the control area of Judiciary Ind! Please stop your battleship immediately and ept the interrogation! Please stop your battleship immediately and ept the interrogation!"


    Garp''s battleship not only did not stop, but instead aimed all the muzzles of the battleship at the main gate of Judicial Ind.


    He himself stood on the bow and shouted: "I''m Vice Admiral Monkey D. Garp! I count to three! If you haven''t opened the door after three, then don''t me me for bombarding you!"


    It jumped all the guards at the gate on the spot.


    The person here is the legendary marine hero Monkey D Garp.


    Don''t say they didn''t get an order, even if there was an order, they wouldn''t dare to rashly take action against this legendary character.


    For a moment, the guards at all the gates seemed a little at a loss.


    "Three--!"


    "Two--!"


    At the critical moment, the person in charge of Judicial Ind finally issued an order to the guard gate through the phone bug to let them release Garp.


    The people who got the order.


    He hurriedly shouted around: "Open the door! Open the door!"


    He was afraid that hispanions would not be able to hear him, and he was also afraid that Garp would not be able to hear him.


    Dak.


    The door was slowly opened.


    Garp''s battleship continued to advance.


    Quickly.


    The battleship is moored at the dock.


    Garp led a group of men to the central area of Judiciary Ind.


    He is also the highest person in charge of Judiciary Ind who came out to greet Garp.


    "Marine hero Monkey D Garp, I have long admired..."


    Before he could finish speaking, Garp interrupted directly: "Don''t talk nonsense with me! Ask your CP9 team toe out and meet me!"


    "Monkey D Garp, I remember you have made a lot of contributions to the world government, so I called you Vice Admiral Garp, you don''t think that the power of your Vice Admiral is really above me?"


    Facing Garp''s repeated offenses, the person in charge of Judicial Ind also felt a little dissatisfied.


    Garp still didn''t mean to be polite to him, just red at him fiercely, and said in a gloomy tone: "Am I forcing you to do something for me?"


    In just a sentence.


    Let the person in charge of Judiciary Ind put all the grievances away.


    He could sense that Garp wasn''t joking.


    This is a legendary figure who can rival Pirate King Roger.


    He lost all face, and finally did nothing.


    As soon as he gritted his teeth, he ordered his subordinates behind him with a very ugly face: "Go! Go and call all the members of CP9 toe here! I want to see what things they have done, even if Vice Admiral Garp ignores the rules, he will just break into the Judiciary Ind anyway!"


    This sentence was said to all the subordinates present, in order to save face.


    He is also intimidated by Garp.


    The meaning of the words is that if CP9 is found to be at fault afterwards, he will definitely pursue this matter.


    But Garp still didn''t even look at the self-righteous head of Justice Ind.


    At this time, Garp was full of anger.


    This fire has been suppressed in his heart for two months.


    Since he found the ability of the door fruit from the Devil Fruit data book, he has Blueno who is CP9, the first thought he thinks is that CP9 is under the order of the world government to take Luffy away.


    The purpose of is to use Luffy to deal with his son, the leader of the Revolutionary Army, Monkey D Dragon.


    Otherwise, a mere CP9, even if they were given 10,000 courage, would not dare to attack Luffy so recklessly in front of him.

 Chapter 353: Game Rules

    Chapter 353: Game Rules


    After a while.


    Rob Li, that is, in the original book, the CP9 captain who ate the cat cat fruit, able to transform into a leopard man, led a group of CP9 members to the center of the square.


    Spandam in this period has not yet be CP9 leader.


    They have not yet received the task of going undercover in the Water 7.


    After they came to the square, they ignored Garp.


    Walked up to the person in charge of Judicial Ind and waited for the order.


    The person in charge of Judicial Ind: "You just arrived here, Rob Li?! What did you do to make our marine hero Vice Admiral Garp so angry that he broke through Judicial Ind?!"


    The tone of sounded like he was reprimanding the group of CP9.


    Is actually insinuating Garp.


    CP9 and his party were still calm.


    As the leader, Rob Li turned his attention to Garp. He walked slowly in front of Garp, looked at him with one tall and one short, put his hands in his trouser pockets, and said calmly: "Vice Admiral Garp? I don''t know that you, as a marine, wouldn''t care about your sea area ande here. What''s wrong with our Judicial Ind...?"


    Boom!


    Boom!


    A loud bang.


    Garp shot too fast.


    Even if Rob Li was proficient in the six-style paper painting of the Marine, he couldn''t dodge Garp''s sudden blow. He was directly thrown away by Garp''s domineering arm, and at the same time his body flew upside down, he prated the wall and smashed into a building in the distance.


    Garp side stepped came to Blueno, grabbed his cor and asked, "You are the owner of the door fruit ability?! Show me your ability! Quick!"


    Garp''s sudden move broke the deadlock directly.


    He made the two sides, who were still peaceful, instantly be tense.


    The members of Judiciary Ind, confronted with the sailors brought by Garp with their guns raised.


    The members of CP9, except Blueno, immediately stepped back and kept a certain distance from Garp. Those who can be beasts will be beasts, all stand in their respective positions, and surround Garp and Blueno.


    The person in charge of Judicial Ind''s face was extremely dark.


    Garp said that he would do it if he did it, which was really disrespectful to him.


    "Vice Admiral Garp, Judiciary Ind is an organization affiliated with the World Government, is it a bit too much for you to take action directly against our people..." The person in charge of Judicial Ind contained anger in his tone.


    Garp: "I don''t want to say it a second time! Show me!"


    Taking into ount Garp''s strength, the person in charge of Judicial Ind finally chose to endure this sigh, and said to Blueno with gritted teeth: "Blueno, since Vice Admiral Garp is so interested in your ability, then you can show it. Let him see..."


    Blueno at this time.


    Afraid of being attacked by Garp, he had already disyed the ''Iron Nugget'' in the Sixth Form of the Marine, letting Garp hold him motionless.


    After hearing the order of the person in charge of Judicial Ind, he raised his right hand and opened a circr air door in vacuum.


    It is exactly the same as the air door.


    Garp''s pupils constricted when he saw it.


    Without saying a word, he twisted Blueno and mmed it hard on the ground.


    A solid floor that is directly smashed.


    "It''s you! Speak! Where did you take Luffy?!"


    The person in charge of Judiciary Ind has also reached a point where he can''t bear it anymore. He shouted angrily at Garp: "Enough! Monkey D Garp! You have challenged the majesty of our Judiciary Ind again and again, you really think that we can help you?! Release Blueno! Otherwise, everyone in our Judiciary Ind will regard you, including your sailors, as an enemy!"


    At this time, Rob Li, who was flung far away, also stood up again from the waste rock pile.


    The beast transformed into a leopard man, and he walked back unhurriedly.


    "Vice Admiral Garp, is there some misunderstanding between us? We don''t even know who this Luffy you are talking about..."


    Garp nced around and said viciously: "Stop giving me sloppy eyes! If you dare to do something to my grandson, don''t you dare admit it?!"


    Hearing the word grandson.


    The person in charge of Judicial Ind instantly guessed Luffy''s identity, and finally understood why Garp was angry.


    The game between high-level executives can also be said to be a game.


    If you want to end the game, you must abide by the rules of the game.


    If the family chooses to end, but is caught by the enemy, there is nothing to say, after all, this is within the rules of the game. But if you really attack other people''s rtives for no reason, it will break the rules and touch everyone''s bottom line.


    After all, in this world, who doesn''t have one or two people who they value most?


    Today you do something to my family, and tomorrow I do it to your family, so, it''s quiet obvious how it all ends. Didn''t they all be lonely in the end?


    This is also the reason why in the original book, Im the leader of the World Nobles, after learning about Luffy, even if Luffy was not very strong at the time, he did not dare to directly target Luffy.


    After all, Luffy at that time was just a little pirate.


    He has yet to join the fight at the top.


    To target Luffy is undoubtedly breaking the rules.


    The person in charge of Judicial Ind, who originally wanted to order a counterattack, also became hesitant: "Vice Admiral Garp, is this really a misunderstanding? There is no reason for the World Government to do something to your family, and it is impossible to do so. If we do something to your family, you should be able to understand why."


    Vice Admiral Garp nced at the person in charge of Judiciary Ind and snorted coldly: "It''s already happened, it''s useless to say more now! You''d better let Luffy go immediately! Otherwise, I''ll kill you first, go and ask the World Nobles for an exnation!"


    That''s why Garp came to Justice Ind first, looking for Blueno.


    The reason why is not directly responsible for the Five Elders.


    The Five Elders are a council of the highest-ranking Celestial Dragons[1] that make up the head of state for the World Government. They essentially hold the greatest authority over the entirety of the world; the only exception being the mysterious sovereign Im whom they answer to.


    After all, if Luffy was kidnapped, it was really the attention of the Five Elders, then they must have their own purpose, and it is impossible to liberate Luffy so easily.


    Garp''s only hope is that Luffy is still in the hands of Blueno and the others.


    Then he still has a glimmer of hope to rescue Luffy ahead of time.


    Blueno, who was a little dizzy after hearing the conversation between the two sides, did not dare to neglect, and quickly expressed his innocence: "Vi... Vice Admiral Garp, I really don''t know what you are talking about, I have not eceived any order from above to do something to your grandson."


    Garp squinted his eyes slightly, and looked carefully at Blueno''s expression.


    He wants to infer whether Blueno is lying.


    The person in charge of Judicial Ind helped at this time and said: "Vice Admiral Garp, maybe this is really just a misunderstanding, please allow me to contact Five Elders to understand the situation first."

 Chapter 354: The situation is getting more and more tense

    Chapter 354: The situation is getting more and more tense


    Garp did not prevent the head of Judicial Ind from contacting the Five Elders.


    He also wanted to see what the Five Elders could say to him.


    After a while.


    Judicial Ind has finished contacting one of the Five Elders through the phone bug.


    As soon as the phone bug was closed, Garp asked, "How? What did those old guys say?!"


    The person in charge of Judiciary Ind felt tight.


    Although his position is only higher than that of Vice Admiral Garp, he would not dare to call the Five Elders an old guy in front of the public so recklessly.


    "Cough! They need some time to understand the situation. After all, the Five Elders don''t gather together all the time."


    It means very simple.


    The person in charge of Judicial Ind only managed to contact one of the Five Elders.


    The Five Elders he contacted didn''t tell anyone to do something to Luffy, but he couldn''t guarantee whether the other four did it without authorization, so he had to contact the other four to know the truth of the matter.


    Garp snorted coldly and stopped talking.


    He also has no intention of letting go of Blueno.


    The scene still maintained a deadlock of confrontation.


    Not long after.


    The phone bug rang again.


    After answering the phone, the person in charge of Judicial Ind frowned slightly.


    Immediately, he instructed one of his subordinates to hand the phone bug to Garp.


    Garp answered the phone and said in a dissatisfied tone: "It''s you?"


    Sengoku: "It''s me, I already know about you."


    Garp said disdainfully: "Oh, why are you contacting me? Don''t those old guys have no face to face me?"


    Sengoku: "Garp, calm down first. I know your mood very well. Things are not what you imagined, they..."


    Garp roared: "Calm down?! How do you tell me to calm down?! Now that you understand my current situation, it should be clear! Some bottom lines cannot be touched!"


    Sengoku on the other end of the phone was silenced by Garp.


    Before contacting Garp, the Five Elders had actually contacted him in advance and assured Sengoku that they did not order Luffy to do it.


    However, no matter how stupid and loyal Sengoku were, even he himself could not fully believe this statement.


    But it was his duty to stabilize the situation, and Garp was hisrade-in-arms for many years, so he had toe forward tofort him.


    Sengoku: "They have assured me that they absolutely did not order people to do something to your grandson..."


    Garp: "Humph! Believe it when they say it?! I saw Luffy being kidnapped in front of me! And the devil fruit ability who kidnapped and flew, is now pressed to the ground by me. I won''t believe it! You don''t mean to tell me that there are two identical Devil Fruits in this world, and are eaten by different people, right?!"


    In the world of One Piece, all Devil Fruits are unique.


    The same fruit will not appear in the same period.


    Unless the person with the ability dies, the Devil Fruit he once ate will reappear.


    This is a fact recognized by all.


    Sengoku was once again speechless by Garp''s remarks.


    After a moment of silence, Sengoku continued: "I understand what you mean, but there are so many types of devil fruits and strange abilities that we have not fully grasped them so far, and it is impossible to guarantee that there will not be a fruit in this world that can replicate the abilities of other fruits, and... Your previous location was in the East Blue area. You came to Judicial Ind from the East Blue. It is estimated that your grandson has been missing for at least two months, right? If the Five Elders really ordered people to kidnap and take hostage of your grandson, then they must have a purpose, so why haven''t they reported any actions against you or your son until now? Since they didn''t target you, what purpose did they kidnap your grandson for?"


    Sengoku hit the point of the matter.


    At the same time, this is where Garp''s doubts lie.


    It''s not that Garp doesn''t understand these truths. During the two months he came to Judicial Ind, Garp paid a lot of attention to the movements of the outside world, and he did not receive any news that the Five Elders had any actions.


    But the question is, no matter how unreasonable it is, does it really happen?


    The ability to abduct Luffy is indeed the ability of the door fruit?


    This is an undeniable fact.


    Garp: "What do you mean by saying this now? Who knows what purpose they will have? Right now, I only want Luffy! Either you let them hand over Luffy back immediately, or prepare to bear my wrath!"


    "..." After a moment of silence on the phone, Sengoku said, "Don''t be impulsive, wait for me for a while. I''ll contact youter."


    The phone bug hangs up.


    Sengoku contacted Five Elders and others again.


    And the Five Elders and others have repeatedly assured that neither they nor their subordinates have sent anyone to attack Luffy, and this matter must have nothing to do with them.


    After receiving this guarantee, Sengoku contacted Garp again.


    "They''ve confirmed it again and again, it''s not their people. Don''t be impulsive. Even if you mess around, it won''t help this matter. Well, I''ll just give you a long vacation. Go back to the East Blue to continue looking for your grandson''s whereabouts. And on my side, I also promise you that I will send all my hands to find your grandson for you. You give me some time and I will definitely be able to give you a satisfactory answer. If I find out that they are really behind the scenes, then I will give my life to you, and I will definitely help you get justice!"


    In fact, this is already the most ideal result for Garp.


    The most important thing for him is always Luffy''s life safety, not to cause trouble.


    With this promise of Sengoku, it is a worthwhile trip.


    Silence for a moment.


    He just hung up the phone.


    Then stared at Blueno''s expression for a while.


    Seeing that he still didn''t notice any clues, he mmed Blueno to the ground, then turned around andmanded his subordinates domineeringly: "Go back to the East Blue!"


    "Yes!"


    Two monthster.


    Garp returned to the East Blue and continued to search for Luffy''s whereabouts.


    The matter of Luffy''s disappearance was also passed on to the ears of Monkey D Dragon because it was too much trouble.


    After this, the revolutionary forces will appear from time to time to create some chaos within the territory of the World Government, frequently challenging the majesty of the World Government.


    The situation between the two sides has also be more and more tense.


    A few monthster.


    Holy Land Mary Geoise.


    Leader of World Nobles, in Im''s pce.


    Ping!


    Pong!


    Im on the throne, swept all the food beside him to the ground, and scolded angrily: "Damn it! The Monkey D family! They don''t care about the World Government and us World Nobles at all!"

 Chapter 355: Candidates, return

    Chapter 355: Candidates, return


    The Five Elders knelt down on one knee on the main hall.


    No one dared to speak up, and didn''t know what to say.


    "Trash! It''s all trash!"


    "After raising you for so many years, is there no good way to deal with them?"


    One of the Five Elders said: "Lord Im, whether it is a [pacifist] or other ns, it is currently in progress. If we choose to fight at this time, then our previous efforts will be in vain. And there will be huge losses."


    The World Government has the ability topletely wipe out the rebels and the Monkey D family.


    Also because of their strong strength, even if the rebels gathered so many like-minded strong men, they could not rece them for a long time.


    That is the reason why he didn''t have a hard heart andpletely erased everything.


    It''s not that they have good intentions.


    But because the World Government have long regarded the whole world as their property.


    Hastily started a war with the rebels, as if fighting a thief in his own home. The broken furniture and the lost finances would be his own losses.


    So they are always looking for the lowest loss solution.


    "Damn!"


    "If the n doesn''t work, will they be allowed to be arrogant in front of us one day? If this can make us conquer the world, where''s the pride in that?! This is the answer you gave me?!"


    In the end, for various reasons, he insisted that he was wronged.


    "Sir, please be patient. We are already looking for talented and potential candidates to cultivate. As long as the candidates we look for grow up, perhaps without waiting for the results of various ns, we can give that group of rebels a hard blow. Even without solving the Monkey D family in advance."


    "The candidate? What candidate?"


    One of the Five Elders stood up, bent forward, handed the documents to Im very respectfully, then stepped back and continued to kneel on one knee on the main hall.


    Imm looked at the poster and asked, "Who is this person?"


    "This is the best person we have selected from within the World Government, or within the marine."


    Among the five posters, the first four posters are all people who conquered the world, but the owner of thest poster is wearing a marine uniform. Listening to the report of the Five Elders and looking at the marine on the poster, Im''s face showed a trace of disdain and disgust.


    "Is there no other people in the World Government that can''t even make up these five talented guys? What''s going on with this marine? Why did you choose him?"


    "My lord, the marine on the poster is the most outstanding young man of this generation. Not only does he have excellent leadership skills, but he also has good strength himself. In just a few years, he has grown from an ordinary marine and promoted to rear admiral. During this period, he trained many talents for the marine and arrested many pirates. And, most importantly...he never fails!"


    Having said this, even Im, who has never been fond of the marine, had to nce at the face on the poster: "What''s his name?"


    The Five Elders said in unison, "Rear Admiral Li Yaoxiang!"


    At the same time.


    Time goes back to shortly after Luffy left from Fishman Ind.


    East Blue.


    A certain warship floating in the ocean.


    Garp stood on the bow, looking out at the horizon where the sky and the ocean joined together.


    One year...


    Luffy has been missing for a whole year...


    After returning from Judicial Ind, he searched in the East Blue for half a year, but there was no news about Luffy, and there was no useful news from the marine.


    His son Monkey D Dragon also learned this news and began to order the Revolutionary Army all over the world, frequently causing all kinds of troubles to the World Government.


    The situation in the entire One Piece world has be more and more tense.


    A war might start any moment.


    Even he, who was in the marine, began to feel heavy pressure.


    It made him feel moreplicated.


    On one side is justice and colleagues.


    On one side is the son.


    He didn''t know what to choose.


    I thought that as long as he was still alive, he would never see this scene happen, and he could act as a bridge between the two to prevent the further deterioration of the conflict between the two sides.


    But he didn''t to admit that everything would be changed because of Luffy''s disappearance.


    Now even he is powerless to stop it.


    At this moment, a rough palm patted his shoulder.


    The guy here is Garp''s old buddy.


    He is also the co-captain of this ship.


    "Old man, don''t think so much. Don''t take all the responsibilities on yourself. Don''t forget that you have a group of brothers behind you who will always support you."


    Garp turned his head and patted the palm on his shoulder.


    He signaled ''understood, thank you for yourfort, brother''.


    But just when the two were full of love and were about to stage a big scene where brothers were like siblings, there was a slight tremor on the deck of the battleship.


    In the corners of their eyes, a small unknown object appeared.


    Luffy, as if nothing had happened, passed directly by the two old guys who were in love with each other.


    Go to the side of the boat.


    He took a deep breath, opened his big hands, receiving the sea breeze gently brushing his face and said, "Ha~ I''m finally back!"


    The tworades turned their heads to one another, stunned for 5 seconds before Garp reacted.


    As soon as he reacted, Garp immediately rushed to Luffy and gave Luffy an iron fist of love directly.


    The pain caused Luffy to burst into tears.


    He touched his head and said, "Ouch! Old guy! Why did you hit me?!"


    "Why did I hit you?! You don''t know what you did?!"


    Garp wanted to give Luffy a few more iron fists, but was hooked on his shoulders by his friends from behind, stopping him from his actions: "Okay, don''t fight! It''s good that he''s back safely!"


    Garp suddenly exerted his strength, shook off his friend, and gave him a vicious look.


    He was so frightened that Bogard immediately raised his hand and surrendered, no more trouble.


    Garp walked up to Luffy fiercely and lifted Luffy up high: "Speak! Where have you been?!"


    Luffy snorted coldly and turned his head.


    He folded his arms around his chest, but did not answer.


    "Okay! You won''t say it?! Today I''m going to show you how good the old man is! It seems that I have been too kind to you in the past..."


    The friend rushed up again: "No no no no, Garp, calm down first, let me try, let me try, okay?"


    Garp turned his head and stared at his friend.


    Bogard smiled and said softly: "Let me, let me try."


    Garp put down Luffy and moved a few steps.


    Bogard squatted down, stroked Luffy''s head that was just beaten, and said gently, "Little Luffy, can you tell this old man, where have you been during this time?"

 Chapter 356: I hate pirates the most

    Chapter 356: I hate pirates the most


    Luffy, this forgetful guy, quickly forgot about Garp beating him, and said with a hearty smile: "I went to a ce with a lot of fish!"


    The two old guys looked at each other.


    A ce with lots of fishes?


    In the entire One Piece world, almost 80% of the area is ocean.


    Deputy Captain Bogard smiled: "Hehe, Luffy, can you exin a little more clearly? Where are this ce with a lot of fish?"


    Luffy frowned, gritted his teeth, and looked thoughtful.


    Immediately, he pped his palms and said with joy, "There are a lot of delicious cakes there!"


    The two elders were speechless again.


    Next, the two elders continued to ask questions in turn.


    But Luffy''s answer is either food or big fish. Hearing that, they were confused, no matter how hard they tried, they still couldn''t get useful information from Luffy.


    The two old men had no choice but to give up.


    But now Garp can be sure that the so-called ''big brother'' that Luffy used to talk about in the past is a real existence.


    No matter whether that ''big brother'' is or is not a person from the World Government, this is something he cannot tolerate.


    He would never allow anyone to hit his grandson!


    The exchange came to the end, seeing that it was getting dark, Garp crouched down and said cautiously: "Luffy, remember! Don''t have any contact with that big brother in the future, do you know?"


    Luffy squinted and smiled: "No!"


    "You you you...!"


    Because of you, a world war is about to start!


    You still dare to tell me no?!


    Garp was so angry that Luffy couldn''t even speak.


    Bogard appeared behind him again and hooked his shoulder: "Don''t, don''t, don''t get angry~ Luffy is still young, and there are many things he doesn''t understand. I believe that after a while, he will slowly understand your painstaking efforts..."


    Garp shook his shoulders and broke free.


    Regardless, he came to Luffy again and said angrily: "Okay! Don''t you? From today, you will stay by my side for 24 hours, and I will see how that bastard is still bewitching you under my nose!"


    "Lat~" Luffy made a face directly at Garp, thenughed loudly, turned around and ran into the cabin.


    Garp just wanted to catch up, and gave Luffy an iron fist of love.


    But he didn''t want to, just at this moment, a panicked sailor with a mobile phone ran out of the cabin: "Vice Admiral Garp! Vice Admiral Garp! Urgent...! Urgent...! Urgent..."


    Garp stopped and said dissatisfiedly: "Why are you panicking? What''s the matter, adjust your breathing first!"


    The sea soldier adjusted his breathing a little, and quickly handed over the phone bug and said, "The boss..."


    Garp took the phone bug.


    "Hey, what''s the matter?"


    "I heard... your grandson is back?"


    "So what?"


    "Congrattions. But... Since your grandson is all right, I hope you can cancel the vacation ande back to the headquarters immediately."


    "Why? You know, it''s impossible for me to leave him alone before I find out who kidnapped my grandson!"


    "Garp, I can understand how you feel now, but...whether that person is from the World Government or not, if he wanted to hurt your grandson, he would have taken him hostage. Your grandson wouldn''t havee back safely. Since they didn''t hurt your grandson, that at least that proves that your grandson is safe now, doesn''t it?"


    "Humph! So what? This is not a reason for me to leave him!"


    "..." Sengoku was silent for a moment, then continued, "The Holy Land was attacked."


    As soon as the words came out.


    Garp''s heart seemed to stop beating for a moment.


    The Holy Land Mary Geoise was attacked?


    How can that be?


    There is the base camp of the World Nobles, and there are many strong people there, not to mention that the marine headquarters is set up in Marineford, not far from the Holy Land Mary Geoise.


    How could someone dare to risk the world to attack the Holy Land?


    Garp didn''t speak. The old friend Sengoku, who had worked with him for many years, immediately knew what Garp was thinking, and said directly: "It''s a fishman who has been enved by for three years, Fisher Tiger. He attacked the Holy Land and released all the enved servants. Now all the World Nobles have been mad with anger. In order to save the face of the World Government, the Five Elders also issued a death order, no matter what the cost, that fishman must be resolved as soon as possible, it doesn''t matter if he lives or dies."


    Garp: "..."


    Sengoku: "Old partner, the world needs you, the marine needs you, and I only trust you. Only you can reduce unnecessary sacrifices in this conflict."


    Garp: "..."


    Sengoku: "Come back..."


    One monthter.


    In order not to let the situation continue to deteriorate, Garp finally chose topromise, to rush back to Grand Line and help the marine arrest Fisher Tiger.


    However, before that, he sent Luffy to the Windmill Vige just like the original.


    He delivered him to the vige chief of Windmill Vige.


    Garp stood by the pier, and cautiously said goodbye to p, the vige chief of Windmill Vige: "Vige Chief, Luffy will ask you."


    p, who was wearing a yellow shirt with ''love'' all over his shirt, waved his hand and said indifferently, "Don''t worry, Luffy was born in our Windmill Vige, and he is also a part of our vige, Makino and I will definitely help you take good care of Luffy."


    Makino is the proprietress of the bar in Windmill Vige.


    After hearing the sound, she also promised: "Yes, we will definitely help you take good care of Luffy."


    With the verbal promises of the two, Garp let go of his heart and breathed a sigh of relief.


    He immediately warned Luffy viciously again: "Remember! Don''t contact that ''big brother'' again, otherwise, I''ll show you when Ie back!"


    Responding to Garp, it was still a grimace: "Lep~Lep~Lep~Lep~"


    Boom!


    An iron fist of love knocked down directly.


    The pain made Luffy burst into tears.


    The farewell style of grandfather and grandson is still so popr.


    Garp left the Windmill Vige and headed for Grand Line.


    Luffy is temporarily managed by p and Makino, living in this peaceful vige.


    Time flies, time flies.


    In the blink of an eye, another 5 months passed.


    Luffy is now five and a half years old.


    Windmill Vige weed a very imposing pirate ship on this day. It ispletely iparable to those pirate ships that the vigers have seen in the past.


    After the news of spread, it immediately alerted the whole Windmill Vige.


    They tremblingly came to the pier to meet the pirate ship, hoping that the pirates would not be too mad for their attitude.


    Quickly.


    The pirate ship docked.


    They dropped the anchor and fixed it on the pier.


    A group of people got off the pirate ship.


    The leader, wore a long ck cape, a half-buttoned white shirt, brown cropped trousers, flip-flops, and a straw hat on top of his head.


    A group of people came not far from the vigers.


    The leader moved his straw hat slightly, revealing his scarred face, and smiled: "You can call me Shanks, the captain of the Red-haired Pirates. We are here just to record the pointer. As soon as the Log Pose is finished recording; we will leave immediately. Oh, and you don''t have to be so restrained."


    Shanks'' politeness made many vigers heave a sigh of relief.


    It seems that these pirates are not as vicious as they imagined.


    But just when everyone thought that the contact between the two sides would end sessfully, Luffy said with great disdain: "Bah, I hate pirates the most!"


    Vigers:


    Red Hair Pirates:

 Chapter 357: The time is right, the protagonist arrives

    Chapter 357: The time is right, the protagonist arrives


    When I think of pirates, I think of those nasty guys who often catch mermaids.


    Coupled with the fact that Grandpa Garp often nags about pirates in his ear, now Luffy, it can be said that he doesn''t like pirates from the bottom of his heart.


    See Luffy attracting everyone''s attention.


    Makino, who was standing behind him, quickly picked him up and covered his mouth, embarrassed and nervous.


    Shanks was stunned for a moment, then resumed his smile and walked towards Luffy.


    The vige chief, p, rushed over to stand in the middle and exined: "Hehe, misunderstanding! Misunderstanding! It''s all misunderstanding! Children are ignorant, you don''t have to listen..."


    The words are not finished yet.


    Tear Rapp was pulled away by one of the pirates.


    Shanks came to Luffy and said to Makino in his arms, "Can you tell me why you hate pirates?"


    "Mum! Mum! Mum! Mum!" Luffy broke free from Makino''s hand covering his mouth and took a few breaths, "I just hate pirates!"


    After saying that, he looked towards Lucky Roux not far away.


    He is the fat man in the Red Hair Pirates who often carries a piece of meat in his hand.


    Looking at it, Luffy even drooled.


    The content of the mouth ispletely inconsistent with the expression.


    Shanks obviously noticed this too, he looked at Luffy interestingly, and then at the piece of meat in Lucky Roux''s hand. Immediately, he became more yful and opened his palm towards Lucky Roux.


    Therefore, Lucky Roux handed the piece of meat over with all his reluctance.


    He took the meat.


    Shanks handed the meat to Luffy and shook it.


    This piece of meat is like a ma, which firmly attracts Luffy''s eyeballs.


    The meat is on the left, and Luffy''s eyes turn to the left.


    The meat is on the right, and Luffy''s eyes turn to the right.


    Luffy couldn''t bear it anymore, and in the end, he even took the flesh and sucked it hard. In the blink of an eye, all that was left was the drool-filled hand, the only bone left in the hand, and Luffy''s innocent chewing appearance.


    Luffy directed a ''what are you looking at?'' at Shanks.


    Hepletely ignored all the vigers who had already been frightened.


    Even Shanks himself was stunned by Luffy''s rude maniption.


    But he quickly reacted and didn''t mind, and said kindly: "How is it? Do you still hate pirates now?"


    Luffy swallowed the meat without thinking: "Hate!"


    Another piece of meat reappeared in Lucky Roux''s hand, and Luffy''s eyes were demented and his saliva was drooling.


    Shanks picks up the meat.


    Luffy ate it without hesitation and added a hateful sentence.


    After repeating several times, Luffy was so funny that the pirates in the audience couldn''t helpughing. In the end, the first contact between the two sides ended in an atmosphere full ofughter.


    Time flies, time flies.


    In a blink of an eye, half a year has passed.


    In the original book, Shanks stayed in Windmill Vige for more than two years in order to record the pointer/Log Pose, and of course he will not leave early. In the past six months, the friendliness shown by the Red Hair Pirates finallypletely opened the hearts of the vigers and became familiar with everyone.


    Luffy is still a nuisance.


    But hating pirates is not in conflict with eating meat.


    The meat that is handed to the mouth, to Luffy, it should be eaten and it must be eaten.


    Therefore, messing with Luffy has be one of the favorite daily programs of all the pirates in the Red Hair Pirates.


    this day.


    The pirates, as usual, came to Makino''s bar one after another after waking up, drinking and wasting time. As soon as they arrived, they saw their leader and Luffy drinking vigorously.


    Of course, Luffy drinks juice.


    "Cheers!"


    Luffy took a mouthful of juice and a mouthful of meat, feelingfortable and satisfied.


    Seeing Luffy, the pirates who just arrived couldn''t help but tease him every day: "Luffy! Do you still hate pirates today?"


    "Hate!"


    "Hahahahaha!" The audience was instantly filled withughter.


    Shanks, whose face was a little rosy, said at this time: "Luffy, it''s not me talking about you. Just your character... and only being a pirate is the most suitable for you."


    "No! I hate pirates!"


    Next is another boring day of drinking, dancing, singing, lol, eating meat, etc.


    Until sunset arrived.


    Just when everyone was a little drunk, an air door suddenly appeared in the bar.


    Theughter in the audience stopped.


    The people who seemed to be drunk, the smell of alcohol dissipated on the spot.


    Everyone''s faces became extremely solemn.


    Devil Fruit!


    There is a devil fruit power user!


    No matter who it is, as long as it is a devil fruit person, the opponent''s strength will definitely not be too bad. And the other party dares to find it here, which means that the other party is ready for a full-scale conflict with the Red Hair Pirates!


    quickly.


    Under the gazes of the pirates, the air door opened.


    A guy wearing a grim reaper mask came out of the air door.


    The visitor was about 1.8 meters tall, wearing a suit they had never seen before.


    It was the from the Tokyo Ghoul world, and it belonged to the exclusive white clothing of Special ss investigators.


    Seeing the other partying alone, the pirates not only did not let their guard down, but their expressions became more serious.


    There is no other reason.


    Since he dares toe alone, either he is not stupid or is really powerful.


    But the invisible pressure that people bring to them, no matter how you look at it, doesn''t look like the former.


    Li Yaoxiang nced at the crowd and walked directly towards Luffy.


    At the same time, that direction is also where Shanks is.


    Seeing that the iing people ignored them and walked directly towards their captain, all the pirates were about to draw their weapons and kill him on the spot. But they were stopped by a look from Shanks.


    Seeing the approaching people getting closer, Shanks, who was also serious, quickly changed his smile and said calmly, "Who is this majestic fe? Are you looking for me?"


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t even look at Shanks, he came directly to Luffy.


    Luffy, who was fighting with his own food, noticed Li Yaoxiang''s arrival and said with joy, "Big brother! You''re finally here! Are you taking me back to see sister today?"


    During the six months that Luffy was in Windmill Vige, Li Yaoxiang still kept in touch with Luffy.


    And he has informed Luffy in advance that he will lead Luffy back to Fishman Ind in the near future, because the time is ripe. At this moment, Hody Jones, who became a guard of the pce, is plotting to assassinate Otohime. Now her life is hanging by a thread. Li Yaoxiang came to lead Luffy to meet Queen Otohime for thest time.


    Li Yaoxiang nodded: "Yes."


    Luffy''s face was overjoyed, he even forgot to eat his favorite meat, jumped off the chair and was about to leave with Li Yaoxiang.


    But at this moment, Makino, who was still trembling with fear, finally couldn''t help shouting with a trembling voice: "You...you...you can''t leave!"

 Chapter 358: Conquerors Haki

    Chapter 358: Conqueror''s Haki


    Li Yaoxiang stopped and looked at Makino.


    Makino''s heart skipped a beat, she still held back her fear and summoned the courage to say, "You can''t lead Luffy away! Luffy''s grandfather told you not to let Luffy leave!"


    Li Yaoxiang just paused, and then continued to move forward.


    Luffy followed with excitement.


    In desperation, Makino had to shout again: "Luffy''s grandfather is the marine hero Vice Admiral Garp! You take Luffy away, Vice Admiral Garp will not let you go!"


    The voice of just fell.


    All the pirates in the audience were stunned, including Shanks.


    They didn''t expect Luffy to be the grandson of Vice Admiral Garp.


    Seeing that the mysterious man Li Yaoxiang continued to walk towards the air door regardless, Shanks set off. Since even Luffy''s grandfather Xin has urged this mysterious man not to take him away.


    That means that this mysterious person is likely to have bad thoughts on Luffy.


    Knowing Luffy as a new friend for a long time, he didn''t want to see Luffy being used, so he decided to stop this mysterious man.


    In an instant, Shanks appeared in front of Li Yaoxiang, and stretched out his hand to stop Li Yaoxiang''s way, the other hand was already on the hilt of the sword: "Since Luffy''s family doesn''t want you to continue dating Luffy. In my opinion... Your Excellency is better not be hard on others, right?"


    Silent...!


    The war seemed to be about to break out.


    Everyone dared not move.


    Li Yaoxiang was silent for a moment: "What if I refuse?"


    Shanks froze for a moment.


    Originally seemed a little rxed, but became solemn again.


    "Then see if your Excellency has the strength to leave my hands..."


    The voice of just fell.


    Shanks suddenly exuded a Conqueror''s Haki.


    is Conqueror''s Haki!


    In One Piece, Shanks'' Conqueror''s Haki belongs to the highest level. Not only can he be controlled freely, but when his Conqueror''s Haki collides with Whitebeard, its destructive power is so powerful that it can even crack the sky.


    And now this powerful Conqueror''s Haki is all locked on one person.


    He did not underestimate Li Yaoxiang.


    As soon as I move, I go all out!


    If you want to solve this trouble without blood, this is the best way. I hope that after Li Yaoxiang feels this power, he would retreat.


    The pirates who saw this were all in high spirits.


    Their boss is finally getting serious!


    He is going to show off!


    Everyone is waiting to see Li Yaoxiang''s good show.


    But at this moment, a more powerful Conqueror''s Haki swept towards Shanks! Shanks'' Haki didn''t even have a chance to collide, and waspletely shattered by this Haki!


    Crush!


    It also locked only Shanks.


    Shanks was under tremendous pressure.


    Even standing is unsteady, and he needs to rely on the hilt that sticked to the floor before he can support his body in front of him.


    This Haki power is exactly the mastery of Haki that Li Yaoxiang spent 400,000 darkening points redeemed from the system mall.


    And now Li Yaoxiang, his strength has already reached the invincible existence in the One Piece world. Of course, this Conqueror''s Haki was enhanced by him to an unimaginably terrifying level.


    If it wasn''t for Li Yaoxiang''s deliberate control.


    Maybe Shanks would have already been hit hard by this Haki and vomited blood.


    "Well? Can I go now?"


    In an instant.


    All the pirates in the Red Hair Pirates were dumbfounded.


    Of course they also saw the gaffe of their boss.


    But no matter how they thought about it, they would never have imagined that this mysterious man, Li Yaoxiang, would be so powerful. You know, their boss is an existence that can rival the admiral of the marine! How could it be so easily suppressed by this mysterious person in front of him?


    The strength of this mysterious person, isn''t it...


    "Will! Will! Will! Will!"


    The sound of knives being drawn in the bar rang out one after another.


    The pirates not only did not flinch because of Li Yaoxiang''s strength, but instead looked desperate.


    "Stop! What are you trying to do! Retract your weapons!"


    Shanks shouted suddenly.


    "Boss! But..."


    Shanks stared at him fiercely, the pirate swallowed the words immediately, and then the pirates took back their weapons one after another.


    Shanks turned his gaze back to Li Yaoxiang, gritted his teeth and said, "Isn''t it enough that you have this strength? What exactly do you want to do?"


    Li Yaoxiang did not answer him.


    He went straight past him and walked into the air door.


    Luffy didn''t understand what happened just now, so he followed Li Yaoxiang in.


    The air door disappears.


    The guys in the bar breathed a sigh of relief.


    There was really a moment just now, everyone thought they were going to exin it here today, and now that the crisis is over, it must be false to say that there is no trace of happiness.


    Shanks shook his body.


    His body was unstable and he almost fell to the ground.


    A pirate with sharp eyes and quick hands immediately rushed forward and helped him up.


    "Captain...!"


    "I''m fine." Shanks waved his hand, then looked at Makino, "Did Vice Admiral Garp say who this person is?"


    "No... No, Vice Admiral Garp just told me and the vige chief to not let Luffy leave with this person..."


    Shanks fell silent.


    At this time, Benn Beckman, the deputy head of the Red Hair Pirates, a man with a clear mind and a strengthparable to Shanks, walked to Shanks from not far away.


    "Shanks, what happened just now? Couldn''t we all fight him together?"


    In Benn Beckman''s view, as long as Shanks decides to make a move, he will definitely not give up easily. He hadn''t personally experienced Li Yaoxiang''s Haki, so he didn''t understand Shanks'' feelings, and wanted toe over to ask what happened.


    "We''re not his opponents..."


    The bar was quiet again.


    The crowd did not doubt Shanks'' judgment.


    But we have spent so many years together on Grand Line and experienced so many things, but we have never felt such powerlessness and frustration like today.


    For a while, they didn''t know how to ept this fact.


    Seeing this, Shanks immediately cheered up and said, "Hey, hey, what are your expressions? In the past, everyone thought that we were approaching the peak, and we could run freely in this sea without any danger. But now, knowing that there are still such powerful people in this world, wouldn''t the next journey be more interesting? Isn''t this kind of sea more worthy of our adventure?"


    "Captain is right!"


    "This kind of crisis and unknown is the flight we want!"


    "Yes! This is how life should be!"


    "Hahahahaha!"


    For a moment, the bar was full ofughter again.


    Shanks patted Benn Beckman on the shoulder beside him and smiled bitterly: "It seems we need to work harder..."

 Chapter 359: The death of Queen Otohime

    Chapter 359: The death of Queen Otohime


    At the same time.


    Fishman Ind, Gyoncorde za.


    After Queen Otohime was shot by Hody Jones, someone spread the news, "The Queen Otohime was killed by humans!", and now the entire Fishman Ind is in chaos.


    Everyone''s emotions were extremely tense.


    Assassination!


    Queen Otohime was assassinated by humans on Fishman Ind!


    The guards and the major princes, or go hunting wildly, or go to the imperial physician.


    The residents surrounded Queen Otohime one by one.


    Seeing Queen Otohime''s dying appearance, all looked sad.


    Princess Shirahoshi was already squatting beside Queen Otohime, supporting Queen Otohime, crying violently.


    "Mother! Mother! Don''t die! Don''t leave Shirahoshi alone!" Princess Shirahoshi''s nose was dripping with tears, and her voice was choked up from time to time.


    Blood dripped from the corners of Queen Otohime''s mouth, and she stroked Shirahoshi''s cheek with a smile: "Silly child, the mother will leave you one day. It''s just that this day is a little earlier...Cough! Cough! Cough!"


    "Mother! Mother!"


    "Mother is fine. Shirahoshi, you have grown up, don''t cry, mother will not be by your side in the future, remember to be sensible and good, you know?"


    Shirahoshi nodded wildly.


    The snot and tears that she just wiped off could not help but flow again.


    "Got it, Shirahoshi will definitely be sensible and obedient in the future. Mother, don''t leave me, okay?"


    Queen Otohime stroked Shirahoshi''s cheek while helping Shirahoshi to wipe the tears from her face: "Remember, don''t think about revenge, and don''t tell everyone the truth..."


    Princess Shirahoshi was stunned.


    She knew who the real murderer was.


    But in the current situation, she didn''t think too much about it, she agreed to whatever Queen Otohime said.


    She also nodded wildly.


    Seeing that her daughter agreed to her, Queen Otohime couldn''t help showing a satisfied smile, but there seemed to be a trace of regret in her eyes.


    Life hase to thest moment.


    She saw three princes.


    She saw her husband.


    She saw her daughter.


    But she couldn''t see her fourth son.


    I don''t know if Luffy is doing well now, has he eaten enough, and slept warmly


    At this moment, an air door just appeared not far from Queen Otohime.


    The air door opens.


    Before Luffy arrived, the voice had already arrived.


    "I''m back--!"


    Seeing Luffy in such a lively appearance, Queen Otohime couldn''t help shedding tears from the corners of her eyes. She finally put down the big stone in her heart and left this world peacefully with a gratified smile.


    And Luffy, who had just arrived not long ago, only saw thest smile of Queen Otohime before her death.


    The smile froze.


    He waspletely dumbfounded.


    What the hell happened?


    "Brother! Brother Luffy! The mother is dead! The mother is dead! What should I do? What should we do!" Princess Shirahoshi''s miserable cry instantly pulled Luffy back to reality in a dazzling state.


    Mom died?


    How did mom die?


    Luffy''s eyes became hollow.


    Some unbelievable steps, one step after another, slowly walked towards the corpse of Queen Otohime.


    Shirahoshi was still crying, shouting for his brother.


    But Luffy didn''t seem to hear any sound in his mind. He walked to the corpse of Queen Otohime, shook her gently, and muttered: "Mom, wake up. Mom, wake up. Don''t go to sleep again. Luffy is here. The next time Ie, will you take me to eat something delicious?"


    "Brother Luffy! Mother is dead! Mother is dead! What should I do?! How could this happen?!"


    The emotional Shirahoshi finally attracted a group of sea kings to start swimming in this direction.


    There are even some sea kings that areparable to the size of half an ind. They have already floated outside theyer of foam on the fish-man ind, watching the scene of the fish-man ind.


    The frightened residents of the entire Fishman Ind started jumping around.


    But these changes are like nothingness in Luffy''s eyes.


    At this time, Luffy only saw the serene corpse of Queen Otohime in his eyes.


    He suddenly roared at Shirahoshi: "Mom is not dead! How could my mom die!"


    Then he began to shake the corpse of Queen Otohime vigorously again: "Wake up! Mom, wake up! You promised me that you would take me to eat delicious food! Wake up! Don''t sleep anymore, okay! "


    Luffy, who was so mad, scared Shirahoshi on the spot.


    Shirahoshi was so frightened that she forgot to cry.


    Instead, her emotions calmed down, the sea kings gradually dispersed, and she slowly floated to Luffy''s side tofort him: "Brother, mother is dead..."


    At this moment, Luffy couldn''t hold back his tears.


    "Mommy isn''t dead! How could mommy die! She''s just asleep! Mom, wake up, wake up!"


    For the first time in his life, he encountered the departure of his rtives, and he was also the mother who loved him the most, a rtive who made him feel the warmth of his family. For a while, Luffy really couldn''t ept the fact in front of him.


    I don''t know how long it took.


    The three princes who came here because of the riot of the sea kings didn''t know what to say when they saw the situation here. They could only float to Luffy''s side and apany Luffy to guard the body of Queen Otohime.


    This guardsted for a day and a night.


    King Neptune finally couldn''t bear it anymore, and came here in person, saying that he was going to take away the body of Queen Otohime, to arrange a funeral for her, and to bury her properly.


    The always mature and prudent Great Prince Fukaboshi patted Luffy on the shoulder andforted: "Let go, Luffy. Mother is a spirit in the sky, and she doesn''t want to see us like this."


    Luffy didn''t stop him this time.


    Just looked at the corpse of Queen Otohime, who had be cold and stiff, and was carried away from here.


    The three princes and King Neptune still have a lot of follow-up things to deal with, so they didn''t stay here. The huge Shirahoshi whispered beside Luffy, "Brother..."


    At this moment, Li Yaoxiang, who disappeared under the eyes of everyone, suddenly made a voice in Luffy''s mind: "Want to take revenge?"


    Luffy''s mind went nk.


    There was no response for a while.


    Li Yaoxiang continued: "Your mother was killed, don''t you want to kill that murderer and avenge your mother?"


    Revenge?


    Right!


    Revenge!


    "Who? Who killed Mom?"


    "Ask your sister, she knows who the murderer is."


    In reality, Luffy, who had empty eyes at first, suddenly raised his head and asked Shirahoshi with a grim expression, "Who is it?! Who killed Mom?!"


    Shirahoshi was taken aback.


    But she remembered her mother''s instructions.


    She turned her head and said sadly, "Yes... it''s human."


    Li Yaoxiang: "She''s lying to you."


    Luffy opened his eyes and shouted again at Shirahoshi: "You lied! Who is it?! Who is it?! Tell me now!"

 Chapter 360: Darkening Hurricane

    Chapter 360: Darkening Hurricane


    "I...I...I..."


    Shirahoshi turned around, not daring to look directly at Luffy.


    Luffy tried hard and turned her around again: "Tell me! Sister! Tell me who killed mom?"


    Shirahoshi was instantly stunned by Luffy''s aura, and subconsciously said, "It''s... it''s Jones..."


    "It''s him--?"


    Luffy recalled what Hody Jones looked like.


    That fishman who was targeting him a lot!


    Degree of darkening:


    5%


    10%


    After saying that, Luffy was about to turn around and head towards Fishman Street.


    Shirahoshi quickly pulled Luffy''s clothes to dissuade him: "Brother, don''t go! Don''t go for revenge, okay? The queen mother told us not to take revenge..."


    Luffy gave Shirahoshi a vicious look: "She told you that, not me!"


    15%


    20%


    Luffy threw off Shirahoshi''s hand and continued to walk forward regardless.


    Shirahoshi, who saw this, looked flustered and didn''t know what to do.


    She hesitated for a while, then immediately floated in the direction of the pce for help.


    On the way to Fishman Street.


    Just as he was halfway through Luffy, Li Yaoxiang''s voice sounded in his mind: "Are you going to kill him?"


    "Even if I die, I will kill him to avenge my mother!"


    "Are you sure you have the strength to kill him?"


    "What else can I do?! Should I just let him go?!" Luffy was so angry that he stopped, and he hates it now! I hate myself for not being strong enough, so I can only stand there and roar.


    "I can help you."


    Luffy was dumbfounded.


    Before he could say anything, Li Yaoxiang continued: "I can borrow you a weapon that can kill him. But..."


    "But what?!"


    "Before you are strong enough to control this weapon, this weapon will indiscriminately attack the life around you. If you are determined to kill Hody Jones, I can help you suppress this weapon for a while. It let you take control smoothly. But if you can''t bear to kill him at that time... Then I won''t help you suppress it again!


    Remember, I will only help you this time."


    Hearing this, Luffy paused.


    He did not respond to Li Yaoxiang.


    Then continue to the direction of Fishman Street.


    After a while.


    Luffy came to Fishman Street and said fiercely to a fishman: "Where is Hody Jones?! Where is Hody Jones?!"


    This fishman didn''t know what Luffy wanted to do, but he still said truthfully: "Jones, he just established a new fishman pirate group, and now he ns to lead a group of brothers to seek revenge on humans onnd."


    Luffy became even more angry after hearing this: "Pirates! Pirates again!"


    25%


    30%


    "Lend me!"


    "Um?"


    "Lend me the weapon you mentioned!"


    The corners of Li Yaoxiang''s mouth twitched slightly.


    Suddenly, a silver suitcase appeared in front of Luffy out of thin air.


    In the past, any time Luffy saw such a novel scene, his eyes would lit up.


    But now he is not in this mood.


    Luffy picked up the suitcase: "How does this work?"


    "It''s called Quinque. As long as the switch is turned on, this suitcase will naturally transform into a weapon." Luffy was about to open it, but Li Yaoxiang reminded, "Before you n to kill, I advise you not try opening it. Trust me, if you''re not determined enough, you definitely won''t have the courage to open it a second time."


    Luffy''s movements stopped.


    "What should I do now? I swim to the surface to chase him?"


    "There''s no need to be so troublesome, I''ll take you there directly."


    An air door appeared in front of Luffy.


    Luffy stepped in without even thinking about it.


    At the same time.


    An ocean near the Fishman Ind.


    A pirate ship stopped on the sea.


    The pirate ship was intact, but the crew on the pirate ship had already been killed. No, rather than being killed, it is better to say that he was tortured to death.


    The corpses of the pirates are not intact at all.


    The deck was full of viscera, minced meat, and blood. Judging from the injuries left on the corpses, it is not difficult to imagine how much pain they suffered before dying.


    There was a strong smell of blood in the air.


    The one who upied this pirate ship was Hody Jones and the fishmen he led.


    It stands to reason that as long as they are not natives of the Chambord Inds, the pirates who have the ability toe to this sea area will not be too weak. A group of fishmen such as Hody Jones are unlikely to be the opponents of these pirates.


    But Hody Jones stole a lot of Energy Steroids from the pce this time.


    This is a murderous medicine that trades lifespan for powerful power in a short period of time.


    After taking it, the strength of the fishmen will be more than doubled.


    Even in the original book, the Straw Hats and his party after returning from special training were a little troublesome for them, let alone other people. This is also the main reason why they can easily capture this pirate ship.


    At this time, Hody Jones stood at the highest point on the deck, raised one hand, nced at the fishman men very domineeringly, and said: "In the future, we will ride on this human pirate ship to crusade humans! Let human beings pay the price of blood for the many fishmen that have been sacrificed in the past!"


    "Crazy humans!"


    "Crazy humans!"


    "Let them pay in blood!"


    The fishmen on the boat were all excited and responded.


    At this moment, there was an extra air door on the deck, and Luffy with a suitcase walked out from it. As soon as he appeared, Luffy nced around, but couldn''t find the person he was looking for: "Where is Hody Jones?! Where is Hody Jones?!"


    Hody Jones standing on the bow sneered: "Long time no see, human, are you looking for me?"


    "How did you be like this?"


    After taking the murderous drug ENERGY STEROIDS, Hody Jones became much stronger, so that Luffy couldn''t recognize him at the first time.


    "That''s none of your business." Before Luffy could say anything, Hody Jones nced at everyone and shouted, "Queen Otohime was killed by these humans! If it wasn''t for you, we wouldn''t have let down our vignce against human beings! If we hadn''t let down our vignce, Queen Otohime wouldn''t have been murdered by humans! Kill him too! We should kill to avenge Queen Otohime!"


    As soon as the words came out.


    There are fishmen eager to try.


    There are other fishmen still feelsplicated.


    Some of them fishmen have epted Luffy before, and regard Luffy as part of them. Another part of the fishmen never epted Luffy from beginning to end.


    Seeing that there were still people hesitating, Hody Jones continued: "Have you forgotten who Boss Tiger is being chased by now? It''s this group of humans! Boss Tiger is fighting for us in front of us. Are we gonna stay still at this time? Do you want to be soft on humans?!"


    Sure enough, when ites to Tiger.


    There are many fishmen that have gradually changed their minds.


    After all, Boss Tiger is the most respected person in their Fishmen Street.


    As for Luffy, he didn''t care what Hody Jones said, but when he heard the words Queen Otohime from Hody Jones'' mouth, the anger in his heart had already burned to the extreme.


    Hody Jones is not qualified to say that name!


    Luffy couldn''t bear it any longer, and charged directly towards Hody Jones: "You killed mom! I''m going to kill you!"


    35%


    45%


    52%

 Chapter 361: The Death of Hody Jones

    Chapter 361: The Death of Hody Jones


    In Luffy''s simple thoughts.


    There is no such thing as revenge.


    Queen Otohime died, he only felt very sad and very sad. But when the seed of revenge was ignited by Li Yaoxiang, the hatred buried deep in his heart seemed to grow stronger and stronger, and it became out of control.


    The death of Queen Otohime is very different from the death of Ace.


    In the original book, Luffy had a verbal agreement with Ace that no matter who was in danger in the future, the other party would not be allowed to rescue them, because it was part of their own adventure.


    From the moment they stepped out of the ocean, they had already put their life and death aside.


    So even if Luffy vited the agreement, he just wanted to rescue Ace, and never thought about taking revenge on Akainu.


    But Queen Otohime is different!


    Luffy is only 6 years old now, how has he experienced so many things?


    What kind of agreement?


    He only knew that his mother who loved him the most was killed!


    Whoever kills his mother, he will kill that person!


    Anger filled Luffy''s eyes, and he charged Hody Jones with a hysterical roar. Now, he can''t wait to tear down Hody Jones''s skin and bones, and cut it with a thousand cuts!


    His love for Queen Otohime is so deep and his heart hurts.


    How hateful it is now!


    He was blinded by anger, but he forgot what Li Yaoxiang told him. He forgot to press the switch on the suitcase. Just holding the suitcase up like a brick, trying to smash it at Hody Jones.


    Hody Jones threw Luffy out with a flick of his hand.


    Luffy hates him, and he also doesn''t like Luffy very much.


    If it wasn''t for Luffy, his most respected Arlong brother wouldn''t ignore him.


    If it wasn''t for Luffy, there wouldn''t be so many fishmen town residents who changed their minds on human beings.


    Some fishmen wanted to follow suit when they saw this, but they were stopped by Hody Jones: "Stop! I''m going to kill him myself..."


    Hody Jones walked towards Luffy step by step.


    Luffy, who fell to the ground, red at him fiercely.


    As soon as approached, Luffy punched him.


    But this punch was easily blocked by Hody Jones.


    By this time, Hody Jones was toozy to hide it. While catching Luffy''s fist, his face was close to Luffy and he said softly: "You''re right, I killed Queen Otohime. But what about this? What can you do to me? Since you''re mother and son, then I''ll send you to reunite with her..."


    After finished speaking, there was a yful mockery in his eyes.


    He wanted to see the expression of pain and hatred of this human being who greeted everyone with a smile all day long.


    Luffy became even crazier when he heard that.


    His eyes were red with hatred, and he kept smashing Hody Jones with his suitcase: "Kill you! I''m going to kill you!"


    But the suitcase can''t do any damage to Hody Jones at all.


    Hody Jones saw Luffy hated so much, and his smile became even brighter.


    Enough of the y, just when Hody Jones was about to end Luffy''s life, Li Yaoxiang''s voice sounded in Luffy''s mind at this moment: "Luffy, turn on the switch of Kuyink."


    When he hit Hody Jones'' sturdy arm with the next blow, he also subconsciously pressed the suitcase switch.


    The suitcase is like a Transformer, it is constantly assembled and finally turned into a samurai sword.


    Hody Jones'' seemingly solid arm was easily cut off by this Quinque.


    Hody Jones was suddenly dumbfounded.


    The nerves in his brain hadn''t sent a pain signal to him, but he did see his arm that caught Luffy''s fist falling on the deck.


    Soon, the pain signal spread to the whole body.


    It instantly brought him back to reality.


    "What--! My hand! My hand!"


    He backed away in pain, blood spurting from the cut on his arm, and he didn''t have time to think about how the suitcase suddenly turned into a samurai sword.


    "Kill him! Quickly kill him for me!"


    The fishmen dare not neglect.


    One by one rushing up to Luffy.


    Luffy is also crazy, holding a samurai sword and waving it in the surrounding air: "Kill you! Kill you! You are all murderers of mother! I''ll kill you!"


    The fishmen surrounded Luffy.


    They are going to attack Luffy from different directions.


    In this way, no matter how much Luffy waved the katana in his hand, he wouldn''t be able to hurt them.


    But just when they thought it was foolproof, the dark red samurai sword that was supposed to be in a fixed shape suddenly turned into a monster! The monster''s body is like a wriggling flesh, connected to the hilt of the sword. At the top of the de, a giant t tooth grew!


    Shoo!


    A gust of wind blew past.


    The monster disappeared under the eyes of everyone in the blink of an eye.


    Hody Jones only saw a shadow circle at a very fast speed towards the fishmen surrounding Luffy.


    When the monster reappeared under the eyes of everyone, the group of fishmen who were still surrounding Luffy just now, without exception, only had half of their bodies left.


    Everyone even saw the monster chewing some stumps in the giant t-toothed mouth.


    At this moment, there is nothing else on the pirate ship except the chewing sound of monsters.


    When the monster swallowed thest bite, everyone waspletely awakened from the shock.


    "What--! Run! Run! It''s a monster! It''s a monster! Run!"


    Resounded through all kinds of screams.


    Everyone ran for their lives frantically.


    Those fishmen who didn''t n to attack Luffy were better, they were far away, and they were fortunate enough to jump into the sea to escape. Those fishmen who are closer to Luffy and have bad intentions towards Luffy are not so lucky.


    All became ghosts in the monster''s mouth in an instant.


    And this t-toothed giant-mouthed monster is also an SS-level Quinque named Ginkui (Silver Eater) in the ghoul world. It was made from Noro''s Kakuhou.


    It''s not that the fish people didn''t think about resisting.


    But Kagune is an object that cannot prate even a bullet and is stiffer than steel.


    Without the ability to cut steel, how could it leave the slightest trace on it?


    The final result, of course, is that under the horrified, desperate, and regretful gazes of the fishmen, got their lives harvested one by one.


    Soon only the frightened Hody Jones remained.


    He never expected this to happen.


    Didn''t you and the others take the murderous medicine?


    Isn''t it time to sweep this ocean?


    How could this be?


    Why are they all dead now?


    Luffy was not frightened by monsters, nor was he frightened by the bloody scene around him. The hatred in his heart made him ignore all this. With a ferocious look in his eyes, he walked towards Hody Jones.


    Hody Jones was awakened by the ever-closer, t-toothed jaws of Ginkui.


    "No no! Don''te here! Don''t kill me! I didn''t kill Queen Otohime! Don''t kill me!"


    In the face of Hody Jones'' begging for mercy, the hatred in Luffy''s eyes did not diminish at all.


    Ginkui did not give Hody Jones a chance to continue talking.


    Hody Jones only saw the huge teeth in front of him and then darkness. His body was crunched and chewed by the Ginkui.


    So far, Hody Jones, [dead].

 Chapter 362: Can You Lend Me One More Time

    Chapter 362: Can You Lend Me One More Time


    At the same time.


    Fishman Ind.


    On the way of Shirahoshi to the rescue of the pce, a four-legged, two-armed, ugly-looking wide-striped tiger shark suddenly appeared in front of her and blocked her way.


    This wide-striped tiger shark man, in the original book, took the target fruit, and in the next 10 years, he would throw threats at Shirahoshi every other day, forcing Shirahoshi to marry him. Vander Decken IX.


    At the same time, he is also the leader of the Flying Pirates.


    The current Vander Decken IX looks much younger than when he appeared in the original book, but it still doesn''t change the fact that he looks weird.


    Simrly, he is now just like the original, witnessing the cry of Shirahoshi, and summoning all kinds of sea kings. He is also very clear that Shirahoshi is the legendary mermaid princess who can control the sea kings that his first-generation ancestors have been looking for!


    The purpose of this visit is to get to know Shirahoshi.


    I want to marry Shirahoshi and control Shirahoshi''s ability in the future.


    "Princess Shirahoshi, hello. It''s the first time we meet, I''m King Vander Decken IX." King Vander Decken IX took off his top hat and bowed to Shirahoshi.


    Shirahoshi was anxious: "You... can you let me go? I''m going to ask someone to help Brother Luffy."


    Vander Decken IX looked very gentlemanly: "Of course there is no problem, my princess. Just... Before that, can you, princess,plete a proper etiquette between the royal family and the nobles with me?"


    Vanderdeken IX took off his gloves and stretched out his hand in a handshake gesture.


    Shirahoshi didn''t think much of it, she shook it at will, and quickly floated towards the pce.


    Vanderdeken IX did not stop her this time.


    Looking at the back of Shirahoshi''s departure, a smile inadvertently flowed from the corner of his mouth.


    After a while.


    Shirahoshi found her big brother Fukaboshi near the pce and told Fukaboshi Luffy''s condition. But before Fukaboshi sent someone to rescue Luffy, the entire Fishman Ind fell into chaos again.


    Those fishmen who escaped, one by one, like crazy, shouting all over the fishman ind.


    "Dead! Everyone is dead!"


    "Monsters! There are monsters! Run away! Everyone run away!"


    "Jones! Jones was killed by a monster! Everyone, run away!"


    "Humans! Humans killed Jones!"


    After seeing this, Fukaboshi immediately caught one of the mad fish people and asked what happened. Although the fishman was a little confused by the fright, it did not prevent him from telling the scene on the pirate ship.


    And at the same time.


    Luffy also passed through the air door and once again appeared in Gyoncorde za.


    The sharp-eyed fishman immediately spotted his figure.


    "It''s him!"


    "it''s him!"


    "It was this human who killed Jones!"


    Those fishmen who have been scared crazy no longer call Luffy as Luffy.


    The people of Fishman Ind also began to gather in the direction of Luffy because of the shouting of these fishmen. The crowd around, some people haveplicated eyes, and some people point at them.


    But Luffy didn''t care about their eyes.


    He was just looking for his sister Shirahoshi in the crowd.


    Quickly.


    Fukaboshi also came here with Shirahoshi because of the riot here.


    Seeing Luffy safe and sound, Shirahoshi rushed up desperately and hugged Luffy. Luffy''s body is like a toy, letting Shirahoshi hold him in his arms.


    "Brother, you''re fine, it''s great."


    "It''s okay, the murderer who killed my mother has already been killed by me."


    The surrounding noise rang out again.


    Those frightened fishmen all pointed at Shirahoshi and Luffy in the center and roared.


    "It''s him! It''s this human who killed Jones!"


    "He was a murderer! He was a murderer! He also killed a lot of fishmen!"


    These frightened fishmen have forgotten the cause and effect of what happened. Forgetting that it was the fish people who had to act first, Luffy counterattacked after the fact.


    Seeing everyone pointing at Luffy and using him, Shirahoshi quickly shouted and exined: "It''s not like this! It''s not like this! Jones is the real murderer who killed our mother, so brother Luffy killed him instead!"


    As soon as the words came out.


    Another riot broke out immediately.


    The human who killed Queen Otohime was killed by Hody Jones long ago. In everyone''s eyes, Hody Jones is the hero who avenged Queen Otohime. Why did he suddenly be a murderer?


    After hearing this, Fukaboshi was also very excited.


    He came to Shirahoshi in the blink of an eye: "Shirahoshi, what you said is true?"


    Shirahoshi nodded anxiously.


    She was afraid that people would not believe her.


    Fukaboshi will certainly not doubt his sister.


    But it didn''t prevent some fishmen, who didn''t like to see humans very much, from questioning Shirahoshi''s statement.


    "Princess Shirahoshi, we all know that you have a good rtionship with this human being. But you can''t call Jones who killed the murderer a murderer?"


    "Everyone saw Jones brought back the murderer''s body. Jones is the hero who sessfully avenged our Fishman Ind! You ndered our hero for this human being, isn''t that bad?"


    Seeing that someone did not believe in him, Shirahoshi was also nervous.


    "It''s not like that! It''s not like that! Jones is really the murderer of his mother, I saw it with my own eyes!"


    "If Jones is really the murderer, why didn''t you say it in the first ce?"


    "My mother told me not to say it, so I didn''t say it..."


    There was a lot of noise.


    Some people believe in the Shirahoshi, some people don''t.


    But obviously, it is no longer suitable for Shirahoshi and Luffy to stay here.


    Fukaboshi floated to his sister andforted: "Let me handle it here, you and Luffy go back to the pce first."


    Shirahoshi hummed, and left here with Luffy and the pce guards.


    Afterwards, Fishman Ind was almost divided into two camps.


    One faction believes in Luffy.


    A faction is noisy that they do not wee Luffy on Fishman Ind, and Luffy cannot continue to stay here.


    But Luffy didn''t pay attention to them, and he didn''t intend to leave Fishman Ind for the time being, because he also had to attend the funeral of the Queen Otohime.


    Neptune and other royal families also kept Luffy under great pressure.


    Some residents, because they were dissatisfied with the decision of the royal family, began to spread rumors and troubles all over the Fishman Ind, causing the guards to lose their heads. During this period, what made Neptune and the major princes even more troublesome and annoyed was that the problem of the residents spreading rumors and causing troubles has not been resolved, and new troubles have arisen here at Shirahoshi.


    That is Vander Decken IX''s pursuit of Shirahoshi.


    It was fine at first.


    He used the ability of the Mark Mark Fruit, and all he sent was a love letter.


    It can be seen that Shirahoshi did not respond to him again and again.


    Gradually, the love letter turned into a terrorist package, and finally turned into a weapon.


    In the original book, it was also for this reason that Shirahoshi was unable to attend the funeral of Queen Otohime. Now, like the original, in order to avoid these weapons, Shirahoshi was forced to hide in a hard shell tower.


    Time flies, time flies.


    In a twinkling of an eye, the day of the funeral of Queen Otohime was held.


    Luffy stood outside the hard-shell tower, staring at the door full of weapons, in a daze for a while.


    Who knows how long it took, he finally said, "Big brother..."


    He did not get a response from Li Yaoxiang, but he was sure that Li Yaoxiang would definitely be able to hear what he said.


    He continued: "The weapon... can you lend me one more time?"


    Li Yaoxiang said with a smile: "Yes."


    53%


    54%

 Chapter 363: The Death of Vander Decken IX

    Chapter 363: The Death of Vander Decken IX


    At the same time.


    A certain area of the deep sea.


    After Vander Decken IX ate the mark fruit, he had lost the ability to swim, but he still prefers to stay in the seabed. However, now he needs to apply ayer of air foam on his body before he can move freely in the sea.


    At this time, near the ancient giant ship Noah, he was choosing what to throw with his next weapon.


    There are two crew members who are constantly ttering him.


    "Boss Decken, you are really wise! If you continue like this, I believe that Princess Shirahoshi will be your wife soon."


    "Probably..."


    "Yes, yes, the royal family will definitelypromise! Moreover, as long as we stay near Noah, we are not afraid of what they will do to us! Aren''t they afraid that the boss will smash the whole Noah to their fish-man ind?"


    "Probably..."


    "Hahahahahaha!"


    At this moment, an air door appeared behind several people.


    Several people obviously sensed the movement behind them and turned around to check.


    Soon, Luffy with a suitcase came out of the air door.


    At this time, Luffy''s body was also coated with ayer of air foam.


    "Human! How did youe here?!"


    "Do you know whose territory is here?!"


    As soon as the two subordinates saw Luffy, they immediately stepped forward to reprimand or do something.


    However, he was stopped by Vander Decken IX: "Hehehe! Human, I know you! You are the human who always stays by Princess Shirahoshi''s side! You''re called Luffy, it should be..."


    Vander Decken IX saw that Luffy wasing, and his mood suddenly became extremely bad.


    He is very possessive and jealous.


    Since he set his life goal on Shiro, he has been very indifferent to those of the opposite sex who are close to Shiro, let alone Luffy, a human who even lives in a hard-shell tower with Shiro.


    But, no matter how upset he was, he didn''t show it now.


    Vander Decken IX continued: "I know the purpose of youring here. You want me to stop embarrassing Princess Shirahoshi, right?"


    Luffy''s progress stopped.


    Nod.


    "Of course, there is no problem! You are the hero of our Fishman Ind, and it was you who avenged Queen Otohime. Although I like Princess Shirahoshi very much, since the hero has spoken, I will not lose face. As long as we be friends, then I will never trouble Shirahoshi again!"


    Having said this, Vander Decken IX extended his hand kindly, as if he wanted to shake hands with Luffy to make peace.


    Luffy did not speak.


    looked at the palm for a while, and finally chose to go forward and shake hands with Vander Decken IX.


    However, when Luffy shook hands, Van der Deaken IX immediately changed his style andughed wildly: "Hehehe! It''s so naive! You human being is so naive! I am dignified Vander Decken IX. How could the noble Princess Shirahoshi give up because of you, a despicable human being? What''s the matter, human? Do you really think that if you can kill Jones, you can also kill me? I''m not that idiot Jones! My body is a cursed one! As long as anyone I touch, can''t escape the fate that I control! Hehehehe! You seem to have a good rtionship with Princess Shirahoshi, don''t you? Then after I catch you, I will exchange you for Princess Shirahoshi! Thank you, human!


    Luffy never said a word from beginning to end.


    After watching the performance of Vander Decken IX, he just murmured.


    Sure enough...


    This is a pirate...


    55%


    56%


    Vander Decken IX was extremely upset when he saw Luffy''s indifferent appearance. When he looked angry, he immediately took out three flying knives from his arms and threw them directly at Luffy.


    I hummed in my heart!


    It depends on whether you can still be as calm as you are now after being hit with a flying knife!


    The three flying knives quickly took foam, like rockets, cut through the sea water, and flew towards the road.


    And just when the flying knife was about to reach Luffy, Luffy also pressed the switch of Quinque at this time, and the suitcase wasbined into a dark red samurai sword in a moment, Ginkui!


    Sea water cannot affect the speed of Ginkui.


    The suitcase turned into a monster, sweeping down all the three flying knives that swept in.


    crunch crunch


    The flying knife was like a candy, and the giant t-toothed mouth squeaked when chewing.


    The scene in front of him directly made the three fishmen on the opposite side dumbfounded.


    They heard that Jones was killed by a monster.


    But they never thought that the so-called monster was so disgusting and terrifying. The flying knives made of steel were easily chewed up by the monster in front of them like a candy bite. If they themselves fell into the monster''s mouth...


    The creepy scene made them shudder and dare not imagine it any longer.


    The two fishmen who had been loyal to their hearts just now turned around and ran away.


    However, before they could run far, Quinque swept away, biting the two of them at the waist.


    The sea water was instantly dyed blood red.


    There was only Vander Decken IX standing there stupidly.


    It wasn''t until Luffy walked towards him step by step that he was woken up on the spot: "Don''t! Don''te here! I promise you! I promise you everything! I will never trouble Princess Shirahoshi again!"


    Vander Decken IX was in a hurry, throwing things away when they caught them.


    The weapons that were originally going to be thrown at Shiraishi are now all thrown at Luffy one by one.


    But it doesn''t work!


    Whether it is a giant axe or a long knife, they are all easily chewed up by the Ginkui!


    Luffy walked to Vander Decken IX.


    Vander Decken IX also felt empty, and all the weapons were lost.


    He didn''t even think about it, he knelt down on his four legs, and was frightened by the huge t-toothed mouth at close range: "Please! Please forgive me! I swear, I will never harass the princess again."


    "You said the same just now..."


    "No! No! It''s true now! I swear! I swear!"


    ""


    Luffy was silent.


    Vander Decken IX was overjoyed, as if hope had rekindled.


    "Forget it, I can''t let you pirates hurt my family again, you should die..."


    The voice of just fell.


    Ginkui swept with a flick.


    Vander Decken IX looked horrified as he watched his body being chewed and swallowed by the giant t-toothed mouth. His eyes also began to cken, and eventually he lost consciousness and diedpletely.


    This sea area polluted by Vander Decken IX has finally returned to calm...

 Chapter 364: promise, leave

    Chapter 364: promise, leave


    Fishman Ind.


    After killed Vander Decken IX, Luffy picked up the head of Vander Decken IX, and returned to Fishman Ind through the air door. As soon as he appeared, he immediately attracted the attention of the people around him.


    Seeing the head in Luffy''s hand, they were all shocked.


    There are many extremists who hate human beings.


    Not long ago, the hero and leader of the younger generation of fishmen was killed by the human in front of them. I didn''t expect it to be a while, and another fishman was killed, and he was Vander Decken IX, who had some status among the fishmen.


    How can they tolerate it?!


    This human simply didn''t take them seriously!


    "Look! Come and see everyone!"


    "This human is going to kill our fishmen again!"


    "Will you let..."


    As soon as the words were on their lips, everyone noticed the Ginkui Luffy was holding in his left hand. At this time, the Ginkui is still in the form of a t-toothed giant mouth.


    It doesn''t matter if you don''t look at it.


    They were really startled when I saw it.


    The group of people who were causing ruckus just now have all swallowed the next words.


    They didn''t dare to squeak again.


    Luffy ignored them.


    Just like this, he continued to walk back in the direction of the pce.


    The news that Luffy came back with the head of Vander Decken IX soon spread to the pce.


    The royal family who heard the news immediately rushed in the direction of Luffy, including the Shirahoshi who was trapped in the hard shell tower.


    When they saw Luffy''s state at this time, Neptune and the three princes immediately felt guilty.


    A 6-year-old child.


    The right hand is holding a head.


    The left hand is holding a monster.


    Completely lost what a child should look like.


    They felt very guilty.


    If it wasn''t for their ipetence and inability to fulfill the responsibilities of a father and elder brother to protect Shirahoshi, Shirahoshi would not be in danger...


    If they weren''t afraid of the threat of Vander Decken IX, afraid that Vander Decken IX would really throw Noah''s giant ship on Fishman Ind, the little sister Shirahoshi wouldn''t need to be wronged and hide in the hard shell tower...


    If only they could do better


    Then Luffy doesn''t need to take this responsibility, he shouldn''t take responsibility at this age.


    Luffy doesn''t have the heartless and hearty smile of the past...


    Luffy was like this, and they felt more and more ashamed.


    Shirahoshi, who just arrived at the scene, saw Luffy''s appearance at this time, and her heart was filled with unspeakable sadness. She couldn''t hold back her tears.


    Not like this.


    Her brother Luffy shouldn''t be like this.


    Shirahoshi couldn''t hold back her emotions any longer, and rushed towards Luffy.


    However, she was soon stopped by Neptune''s hand on her shoulder.


    Neptune shook his head at Shirahoshi.


    He motioned for Shirahoshi to stay away.


    Anyone with discernment can see that Luffy''s state at this time is very wrong. In addition, the giant t-toothed mouth transformed by the Ginkui is still floating around Luffy.


    In such a dangerous situation, Neptune did not want Shiraishi to take risks.


    No one can guarantee that the monster in Luffy''s hand will harm Shirahoshi in the end.


    But Shirahoshi quickly shook off Neptune''s hand angrily. She knew what her father was thinking. She said stubbornly: "No, Luffy brother will not hurt me!"


    She just finished speaking.


    Shirahoshi turned around and charged towards Luffy.


    Her huge size and strength made it toote for Neptune to stop her.


    Shirahoshi came to Luffy in the blink of an eye.


    The disgusting and terrifying t-toothed giant mouth in the eyes of everyone, but she did not pay attention to it. He hugged him directly together with Luffy. This scene made everyone''s heart skip a beat.


    When they saw that the giant t-toothed mouth was restored to a samurai sword, everyone was a little relieved.


    At the same time, he gave up the idea of interrupting Shirahoshi and Luffy''s reunion.


    After hugging for a while, Shirahoshi finally let go of Luffy, with tears in her eyes and a cry in her voice: "Brother Luffy, can you stop doing this? I don''t want to see you take risks for me. The mother has left, so don''t leave me casually, okay?"


    Hearing what my sister Shirahoshi said.


    Luffy''s pupils, which were originally dted, finally regained a trace of anger.


    His expressionless face also regained a smile.


    He raised the head of Vander Decken IX high, and said with a hearty smile: "It''s okay, look! The guy who bullied you has been killed by me. No one will bully you in the future. I will not let anyone bully you. Come on, let''s go to Mom''s funeral together."


    The head of Vander Decken IX is disgusting.


    But Shirahoshi didn''t care at all at this time.


    She waspletely moved by what Luffy said just now.


    It turned out that everything my brother did was for her.


    Shirahoshi was moved to tears again.


    She choked up.


    She hugged Luffy tightly in his arms again.


    Luffy was stunned for a moment, and then showed a relieved smile.


    After the incident, the two of them didn''t pay attention to everyone''s eyes and walked directly to the location of Queen Otohime''s tomb. Seeing that Luffy had left, the group of fishmen suddenly became much more courageous.


    They began to make trouble.


    They forced Neptune and the three princes to stay and settle the dispute.


    Shirahoshi and Luffy came to the grave of Queen Otohime.


    They looked at the photo on the tombstone.


    Both of them couldn''t help feeling a little down.


    But soon, the two looked at each other and regained their spirits. Because they all knew that if Otohime was still alive, she would definitely not want to see them sad.


    Even if you are sad, you can''t show it in front of the grave of Queen Otohime.


    Shirahoshi wiped the tears on her face and pretended to be strong: "Mother, Shirahoshi has grown up. Shirahoshi will definitely learn to take care of herself in the future, and will not let the father emperor, brother Fukaboshi, brother Ryuboshi, brother Manboshi, and brother Luffy be worried!"


    Luffy quietly looked at Shirahoshi beside him, and made a promise at Queen Otohime''s grave.


    Silence for a moment.


    He also promised: "Mom, when I grow up, I will definitely fulfill your wish and bring everyone on Fishman Ind to live onnd."


    Shirahoshi was stunned and looked at Luffy.


    Luffy also turned to look at Shirahoshi.


    The two of them smiled knowingly at the same time, did not speak any more, and continued to silently guard the grave of Otohime.


    Time passed.


    Neptune and the three princes finally solved the troubles of the fishmen and came here. However, they brought bad news, that is, as long as Luffy stayed on Fishman Ind for a day, they would not stop making trouble.


    After hearing about it, Shirahoshi originally wanted to try her best to keep Luffy.


    But when she saw the door and Li Yaoxiang himself appearing here at the same time, she knew that it was impossible for Luffy to stay on Fishman Ind.


    Neptune and the three princes were relieved.


    Before leaving, Luffy made another promise to Shirahoshi: "I will definitelye back. When Ie back next time, I will definitely take everyone out of this sea with you. You have to work hard and be strong. Don''t cry again, okay?"


    "Um!"

 Chapter 365: Lost Control

    Chapter 365: Lost Control


    At the same time.


    Windmill Vige.


    In Makino''s bar.


    After Luffy left, although the crew of the Red Hair Pirates ran, danced, and drank, the atmosphere in the bar dropped significantly because Luffy was no longer a pistachio.


    Many crew members would say something like this for no reason when drinking: "I don''t know what happened to that kid Luffy now..."


    Even Shanks is no exception.


    On this day, the crew of the Red Hair Pirates came to the bar one after another after waking up as always.


    Shanks sat in front of the bar, shaking the transparent ss, staring at the beer inside for a long time, wondering what he was thinking. Seeing this, Deputy Captain Benn Beckman walked over, tapped Shanks on the shoulder, ordered a beer from Makino, and sat down beside Shanks.


    "What''s wrong? Still thinking about Luffy?"


    Shanks did not deny that he was really thinking about Luffy. In the few days that Luffy left, he thought of Luffy a lot. After all, he regarded Luffy as a true friend.


    "That man is so powerful, howe we haven''t heard of his reputation in this sea? Also, what is the purpose of him taking Luffy? Is it really because Luffy is a Monkey D Garp''s grandson?"


    Benn Beckman took the beer from Makino andforted: "Shanks, stop thinking about it. We don''t know anything about that person at all. It''s impossible to guess what''s behind him. What''s the purpose? Didn''t Makino also say it? Luffy left with this person before. Since that person didn''t hurt Luffy at that time, we can assume that he won''t hurt Luffy this time. Makino, you said so?"


    "Huh? Yes... it should be..."


    Benn Beckman said this tofort Shanks and also tofort Makino.


    Luffy has been missing for the past few days, and Makino has not been left behind.


    Shanks shook his head helplessly.


    Obviously, this was not the answer he wanted.


    He took a sip of the only remaining beer, and then drank happily: "One more drink!"


    At this time.


    An air door appeared out of nowhere in the bar.


    The scene that was originally noisy was silent in an instant.


    Seeing this air door, everyone was stunned.


    There is no other reason, the impression that Li Yaoxiang gave them a few days ago was really deep. Afterwards, everyone discussed with their captain Shanks about Li Yaoxiang''s strength.


    But it''s okay not to discuss this.


    The ignorant are fearless.


    After discussion, they realized how deadly they wanted to act at that time. They did not expect that their captain would give Li Yaoxiang such a high rating, and they even said that they were no match for Li Yaoxiang at all.


    Now I know that such an invincible character will appear in front of me and others again.


    It must be a lie to say that you are not nervous!


    Gulp


    The only thing left in the bar was the nervous voice of the pirates who could not help swallowing.


    The air door opens.


    Luffy came out of the air door.


    The air door disappears.


    Seeing that Li Yaoxiang had no intention of appearing, everyone breathed a sigh of relief. Immediately, the atmosphere of the entire bar was rekindled, and everyone''s mood was even higher than before.


    "Luffy! You''re finally back! Do you know how hard I waited for you?"


    "Luffy,e! Come here! Tell me, where have you been having fun these days?"


    "Luffy! Don''t listen to him! Come to us, we''ll make a new dance for you!"


    The pirates shouted Luffy''s name one after another.


    Everyone is happy for Luffy''s return.


    Even Shanks, who was originally sad, couldn''t help but smile.


    But just when everyone thought that Luffy was about to infiltrate their group and make a fool of himself as always, Luffy''s face was fierce, and he suddenly shouted towards the surrounding: "Shut up! You pirates shut up for me. I don''t want to see you again! I hate pirates the most!"


    Luffy had a stinky face and walked into the lounge of the bar without looking back.


    It doesn''t matter what the eyes of the crowd are.


    The sudden scene made everyone present stunned for a while.


    What happened?


    It''s only been a few days since I left, how could Luffy, who has always been lively and cheerful, be like this?


    You look at me, I look at you, and I don''t know what''s going on. Although the previous Luffy also said that he hates pirates, at least it was not be as extreme as it is now?


    One by one, they lost all interest of Luffy.


    didn''t stay long.


    All go back to the boat and continue drinking.


    When everyone had gone about the same, Shanks chose to walk into the lounge alone at this time. Pushing open the door, he saw Luffy alone facing the wall without making a sound.


    Shanks knocked on the door twice.


    Knock!


    Knock!


    "Can Ie in?"


    Luffy did not respond.


    After a moment of silence, Shanks chose to walk behind Luffy: "Can you tell me what happened?"


    Luffy still didn''t speak.


    "Although I don''t know where he took you these days, or what you''ve been through these days, I just want to tell you that I''ll always treat you as my friend. Feel free to let me know if you have any questions..."


    did not wait for Shanks to finish his words.


    Luffy suddenly jumped on a table in the lounge with emotion, grabbed Shanks by the cor, his eyes were bloodshot, and said viciously: "Friend?! Friend?! My mother was killed by a pirate! I don''t have a pirate friend like you! I don''t want to see you again! Get out of here! Get out of here!"


    Luffy is aplete explosion.


    Previously on Fishman Ind, in order not to worry Shirahoshi, he had been suppressing his emotions all the time.


    Now that he has finally returned to this familiar environment alone, he can no longer help venting all his emotions at once!


    Shanks was also a little surprised.


    He didn''t expect that in just a few days.


    Luffy went through so many things.


    Without Luffy saying it so clearly, he can also guess that it should be some inhuman pirates who killed Luffy''s ''mother'', so Luffy became so extreme.


    In the face of Luffy at this moment, he can''t say anything.


    He finally chose to remain silent, turned around and left.


    In the next few days, even if Luffy never locked himself in the lounge again, and even asionally sat in the bar, he still did not tell the crew of the Red Hair Pirates even a word again.


    The pirates were also distracted by Luffy, and they became less and less concerned about this bar.


    Until one day, a bandit with a bounty of 8 million Berry came here...

 Chapter 366: Arrogant Bandit, Partner

    Chapter 366: Arrogant Bandit, Partner


    Windmill Vige.


    Peaceful and serene as always.


    It was another cool day.


    Shanks came here after waking up with some pirates.


    As soon as they entered the bar, they already saw Luffy sitting there eating breakfast. However, Luffy was still like before, ignoring them, and everyone didn''t mean to force Luffy.


    Since they learned what happened to Luffy from Shanks, now everyone understands Luffy''s mood very well.


    Also know this kind of thing, outsiders can''t help.


    Only oneself can cross this threshold.


    That''s it.


    The pirates drink the wine of the pirates.


    Luffy eats Luffy''s food.


    The two have nothing to do with each other.


    However, this calm atmosphere was quickly overwhelmed by the sound of ''p!'' to break. The door of the bar was obviously kicked open with great force.


    Then, a guy with a height of about 1.9 meters, a knife hanging from his waist, a crossed scar on his forehead, and a group of younger brothers led by this guy appeared in everyone''s field of vision.


    The visitor is polite.


    The action is very rough.


    "I''m sorry to disturb you!"


    "Hehe... Are these all pirates..."


    "First time seeing so many funny faces."


    Everyone looked at these arrogant guys quietly.


    Of course, this is the bandit Higuma who almost led to the early ending of the One Piece world.


    Higuma didn''t care about the eyes of these stupid-looking pirates. He walked to the bar and said, "We are all bandits, but don''t be afraid. We''re not here to make trouble. I want to buy ten barrels of wine."


    "Yeah...sorry...the wine just sold out."


    "Oh, is it? It''s weird, then how can I see a group of stupid pirates still drinking?! Are they drinking urine?!"


    "This...our liquor just happened to be sold out."


    At this time, Shanks handed an unopened bottle of wine to Higuma who was standing next to him: "I''m so sorry, we seem to be drinking too much in the store, sorry. This is for you, not yet opened."


    Higuma: "..."


    "Ow!"


    A ssic scene appeared.


    Higuma took the bottle and knocked Shanks on the head.


    The wine bottle was broken.


    The wine spilled all over Shanks.


    Luffy, who was still eating, finally stopped what he was doing, his heart sank, and he stared gloomily at the arrogant guy in front of him.


    However, his abnormality did not attract the attention of everyone present.


    "Damn! Who do you think I am? How dare you look down on me so much?!" After that, Higuma took a reward from his pocket, "Look at this! This head is worth eight hundred on my top. I''m the most wanted criminal in the first ss! I have killed 56 white eyes like you! Be careful next time! Don''t think that if you''re on the sea, we can''t find you!"


    Shanks squatted down and began to pick up the ss fragments on the ground: "Miss Makino, I''m so sorry, can you lend me a rag?"


    ''Ouch!'' a loud bang.


    Higuma drew out the saber from his waist, a wine bottle that had been chopped on the bar.


    The wine bottle shattered, and the wine spilled onto Shanks again.


    This time, without waiting for Shanks to say anything, Luffy couldn''t help but stand up and shouted angrily: "Enough!"


    He hates pirates, yes.


    But he also couldn''t stand people like Higuma.


    In the original book, when Luffy first saw Higuma''s situation, he didn''t choose to stand up, but now maybe it''s because of a few lives on his hands and a great change in his mood, so it''s this butterfly effect.


    But Shanks didn''t intend to let Luffy continue.


    He raised his hand and blocked Luffy''s direction: "Okay Luffy, this is my own business, and I don''t need your intervention."


    Higuma originally wanted to teach Luffy a lesson, but when he saw Shanks'' performance, he couldn''t helpughing: "Hahahaha! Look at it! This is a pirate! This is a pirate! Ha ha ha ha!"


    The bandits allughed along with them.


    Afterughing to the fullest, a bandit walked away.


    "It''s boring without alcohol, let''s go to another town to drink!"


    After the bandits hadpletely left, it was the turn of the pirates tough loudly in the bar.


    "Hahahaha! Really, man, what are you doing?"


    "Hahaha! I was bullied!"


    Shanksughed along with him.


    But Luffy stood up, stared at Shanks and said, gritted his teeth: "Why!"


    Shanks looked indifferent: "What ''why''?"


    "Aren''t you pirates?"


    "So what? What if I''m a pirate? I just got wet and I should kill him?"


    ""


    For a moment, both fell silent.


    The pirates also stoppedughing and listened to the conversation between the two.


    Shanks was the first to break the atmosphere, ying with his taste: "By the way, don''t you hate pirates? Why did you want to help me just now?"


    Luffy was startled.


    As if Shanks told him about his scandal, he ran back into the lounge angrily.


    Theughter of the crowd sounded again in the bar.


    Benn Beckman walked over to Shanks at this time and patted Shanks on the shoulder: "It seems that Luffy will be fine soon."


    Shanks: "Hmm."


    Makino also walked to Shanks and thanked: "Captain, thank you, thank you for Luffy..."


    Shanks blocked Makino''s words: "No, even if there is no Luffy, I wouldn''t do it because of a little thing. Let alone, Luffy is my friend."


    At the same time.


    In the lounge.


    Theughter outside the lounge made Luffy feel a little bit annoyed.


    It made him feel ashamed.


    He sat cross-legged on the ground, looking annoyed, sulking with himself.


    Li Yaoxiang''s voice sounded in his mind just at this moment: "How long do you n to continue like this?"


    "Big brother?"


    ""


    "What''s the meaning?"


    "Didn''t you promise Otohime at her grave that you would lead all the inhabitants of Fishman Ind to live onnd? Do you think you can do it just by talking about it?"


    Luffy didn''t know how to answer.


    He really thought that as long as he grew up, he would definitely be able to fulfill the wish of Queen Otohime.


    "Do you know how strong the enemies of Fishman Ind are? You can''t even defeat Arlong, so why do you want to take everyone to live onnd? Are you going to take them to live onnd, or do you n to take them to death?"


    Another moment of silence.


    Luffy didn''t know what to answer.


    "Then what should I do?"


    "To fulfill your mother''s wish, you can''t do it alone. You need more partners."


    "Like Shanks?"


    "Right!"


    ""


    ""


    "Help me!"


    ""


    "Help me find more partners!"


    An air door appeared in the lounge out of thin air, and Luffy walked in without hesitation...

 Chapter 367: Trainee Chef

    Chapter 367: Trainee Chef


    One Piece World is a ce full of stories.


    When Li Yaoxiang and Luffy experience their own stories, different stories are also happening all over the world at every moment.


    These stories have joy, anger, sorrow, and joy.


    And the next story starts when Luffy was one year old.


    Somewhere in the North Sea, there was a child two years older than Luffy who was born into a declining royal family. In order to restore the glory of the past, his father did not hesitate to transform the bloodlines of his children, enhance their physique, and try to cultivate them into an emotionless killing machine.


    It''s a pity that this kid who is two years older than Luffy is kind by nature.


    He has never been able to get everyone''s approval.


    He was regarded as a failure by his father.


    The whole childhood can be said to have been bullied by brothers and sisters.


    And, even worse, in the whole family, the mother who loved the child the most, was seriously ill and was about to die soon. In order to make his mother happy, he chose to go to the kitchen secretly and cook some food for his mother to eat.


    How can a three-year-old child cook for the first time, how can the cooked food possibly enter her mouth?


    But no matter how unptable it was, his mother ate all the food and showed a happy smile.


    It was also because of this smile, and thenpletely changed the child''s life.


    In order to see his mother''s smile again, he put more attention on cooking.


    He even fell in love with cooking because of this.


    It''s a pity that the good times didn''tst long.


    He has been focusing on cooking for a long time, and of course the training his father carefully arranged for him has also fallen behind. His performance made his father very disappointed. In order to punish him and to use him as a negative teaching material, his father finally decided to put an iron hood on him and put him in a cell.


    This level was closed for half a year.


    However, this experience did not stop him from wanting to be a chef.


    Instead, he got a message in the book!


    This message gave him a dream!


    He''s going to find ''ALL BLUE''!


    An ocean that gathers ingredients from all over the world!


    So, he decided to run away! Escape from this home that does not belong to him. With the assistance of his eldest sister and his father and no obstruction, he finally escaped from this prison.


    After going around, he came to a passenger ship.


    Worked as a trainee cook on a passenger ship.


    8 years old this year.


    On this day, two uninvited guests suddenly came to this passenger ship drifting in the East China Sea. The two guests appeared on the deck of the passenger ship through a transparent air door.


    As soon as appeared, they immediately caused a sensation among the crew on board.


    Devil Fruit Abilities!


    It is a devil fruit power user!


    Have never eaten pork, haven''t you seen a pig run?


    TL note: one who has not tasted pork must have seen a pig running. One should have some knowledge about ordinary things.


    The Devil Fruit abilities are definitely not something that they can offend on this passenger ship.


    So, after getting the news, the captain of the passenger ship immediately came to the two of them respectfully, and said very politely: "Hehe, I''m sorry, I don''t know why the two adults are here? Just tell me if you have anything! People will definitely try their best to do it for the two adults!"


    Li Yaoxiang, who was wearing a death mask, said coldly, "It''s okay, you can just continue doing your own business. We just want to stay here for a while."


    "Oh! Good good! The little man will now order someone to prepare a good room for the two adults!"


    Li Yaoxiang did not refuse.


    He led Luffy to follow a crew member into the cabin.


    On the way, the stupid Luffy couldn''t help but ask: "Big brother, didn''t you say take me to find a new partner? My partner is here?"


    "From now on, I will only take you with me. As for what kind of partner to look for and how to find it, you can only decide and choose by yourself."


    Luffy frowned and fell silent.


    After 15 minutes.


    The two rested in the room for a while, and then came to the dining room of the passenger ship.


    Sit down and start ordering food.


    There is no difference between and the guests on ordinary passenger ships.


    Insiders, seeing that Li Yaoxiang really didn''t seem to be making trouble, couldn''t help but breathe a sigh of relief.


    Those who don''t know are no different.


    Gradually, everyone became less cautious and restored the atmosphere that this trip should have.


    But at this moment, a loud noise suddenly came from somewhere in the restaurant. I saw a guest in luxurious clothes swept the tableware on the table to the ground.


    The cutlery was broken and shards smashed all over the floor.


    The guests wearing luxurious clothes scolded the service staff in front of them for a long time.


    He scolded the service staff that the staff lowered his head and did not dare to lift it up.


    "How on earth do your passenger ships do business?! Who cooks these foods?! To entertain guests with this kind of food?!"


    The captain, who was watching Li Yaoxiang nearby, immediately rushed to the customer with a smile, apologizing, and gave the crew a wink, asking them to call out the scapegoat.


    "Hehehe, sorry, sorry. This guest, I don''t know what aspect of our food makes you dissatisfied?"


    "Oh, which one? Which one are you embarrassed to say?! Look for yourself! Even if it hits the floor, it won''t rot! It''s so hard, what do you want me to eat? You think I''m paying for stones?!"


    "I''m sorry, this dish was cooked by a trainee chef on our ship. Maybe it''s the inexperience, so there were some mistakes..."


    "The trainee chef?! You actually let the trainee chef cook something for me to eat?!"


    At this time, the so-called trainee chef also came here. The trainee, of course, had blond hair and with curled eyebrows: Sanji. At the same time, he is also the protagonist of the story. 8 years old this year, two years older than Luffy.


    It stands to reason that the ss of the kitchen is very strict.


    It is impossible for a trainee chef like Sanji to have the opportunity to cook this kind of food.


    As soon as Sanji arrived, the captain immediately put his arm on his shoulders and came to the guests: "Why don''t you apologize to the guests? What were you cooking? You are not allowed to touch the pot in the future!"


    The guest looked down at the 8-year-old, short-statured Sanji: "You cooked this food?"


    "Is there a problem?"


    "So hard, who are you going to cook for?!"


    "The food itself should be hard."


    Seeing that Sanji was still stubborn, the guests got angry again in an instant.


    The captain quickly covered Sanji''s mouth and pressed down on Sanji''s body, forcing him to bend over to apologize.


    Just when the guest dressed in luxurious clothes was going to teach Sanji a lesson, a figure even shorter than Sanji came here just at this moment...

 Chapter 368: Chef Pirates

    Chapter 368: Chef Pirates


    "Did you cook this food?"


    A crisp sound came into everyone''s ears.


    Then everyone noticed Luffy this little guy.


    At this time, Luffy picked up the food on the floor and asked Sanji again: "Did you cook this food?"


    Sanji didn''t answer.


    Because he really didn''t cook the food.


    Seeing that Sanji refused to admit it, the captain stood up and apologized repeatedly. Compared to this guest in luxurious clothes, the captain is afraid of Luffy! After all, Luffy has a Devil Fruit ability behind him.


    "I''m sorry, this food is indeed cooked by our trainee chef. If there is any offense, please forgive me." Heughed, turned his head and scolded Sanji viciously, "Hurry up and apologize to the two guests!"


    Sanji was very reluctant in his heart.


    But in order to continue learning cooking on this ship.


    He hesitated for a moment, and finally chose topromise.


    But when he was about to apologize and admit that it was his fault, Luffy put the food he picked up into his mouth in one bite, chewing and saying, "It''s delicious!"


    All were dumbfounded.


    Including Sanji.


    "I said, the food you cook is delicious!" He turned to look at the customer, "Why do you find it unptable?"


    "You!" The customer wearing luxurious clothes was instantly furious.


    I said it was not delicious, but you said it was delicious. Isn''t that breaking the table?


    Where are the wild children who don''t know how to discipline them?!


    As soon as he was about to get angry, the captain immediately pulled the luxuriously dressed customer to his side and whispered a few words in his ear. The customer''s eyes changed from anger to surprise, and finally turned extremely ugly in the direction of Li Yaoxiang.


    After saying that.


    The captain stood up again to smooth the game.


    "It''s all right, haha, it''s all a misunderstanding! Misunderstanding! Since this little customer said it was delicious, it should be delicious." The captain turned his head and gave the customer a wink, "Hahaha, I''m afraid this is the case. A guest has more seasoning, so there is a difference in the taste, right?"


    He winked hard.


    Customers wearing luxurious clothes were flushed with anger.


    But in the end, he chose to swallow this breath.


    "Hehe, that''s right, I must have put too much seasoning. Today I''ll give this little guest a face, and I won''t bother with you. Next time, don''t let the trainee chef cook for me."


    After saying that, the customer hurriedly left the restaurant with his partner in his head.


    The captain pped his palms and shouted around: "It''s alright! It''s alright! It''s all a misunderstanding! It''s all a misunderstanding! Let''s continue to enjoy your food! Customers who are here today get 50% off!"


    Sanji nced at the captain and said nothing.


    He turned around and wanted to go back to work in the kitchen.


    However, Luffy stopped him at this time: "Hey! What''s your name?"


    Sanji paused and hesitated for a moment: "Sanji."


    "Sanji, right? Come and be my partner!"


    Sanji: "..."


    Luffy with a sincere smile, smilingly waiting for Sanji to recover.


    "Idiot."


    Sanji ignored Luffy this time and went straight back to the kitchen.


    Luffy went back to Li Yaoxiang and continued to enjoy his food with great gulps.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Are you sure? Want to choose him?"


    Luffy: "Yeah!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Why choose him?"


    Luffy: "I don''t understand! But I like him very much!"


    Just like that, when Luffy first saw Sanji, he checked his eyes with Sanji and decided it was him. Then, in the following days, in order to invite Sanji to be his partner, Luffy has been following behind Sanji. Because of Li Yaoxiang, the rest of the boat did not dare to stop him.


    Sanji, who was a little annoyed by being followed, finally couldn''t help shouting at Luffy: "Just give up! I won''t be your partner! I have my own dreams! When I grow up in the future, I will definitely look for ALL BLUE!"


    Luffy''s eyes shed twice: "What''s ALL BLUE?"


    "ALL BLUE is the dream that every ocean chef dreams of reaching! You and I are not on the same road at all! Stop bothering me! Let me be a good trainee chef on this ship?!"


    Luffy was quiet for a moment.


    Currently, he has no dreams.


    Inviting partners to join the team is just to fulfill thest wish of Queen Otohime, which is not a dream.


    But the so-called ALL BLUE in Sanji''s mouth reminded him of the adventures at sea that Shanks and others once said.


    This made him unknowingly feel a sense of yearning in his heart.


    He subconsciously replied: "It doesn''t matter, after bing my partner, I can also go to ALL BLUE with you!"


    Luffy''s sincere attitude made Sanji really feel a little touched for a moment.


    But he quickly dismissed the thought.


    This fart boy in front of him is two years younger than himself.


    It is unreliable no matter how you look at it.


    He turned around and left, no longer wasting saliva with the brat in front of him.


    And Luffy followed again.


    At this moment, the entire passenger ship suddenly shook violently.


    Apanied by all kinds of panicked screams outside the ship warehouse: "It''s a pirate! It''s a pirate! The pirates attacked us!"


    "It''s over! It''s over!"


    "Run! Run!"


    The pirate group that attacked the passenger ship just used shells to bombard the sea water near the passenger ship, slowing down the speed of the passenger ship.


    The passenger ship itself and the people on board were not damaged.


    However, this passenger ship was quickly controlled by this pirate group called the "Chef Pirates" because it had no strength to resist.


    Everyone was forced by this group of pirates to gather on the deck.


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t make a move.


    He followed the rest of the passengers out of the cabin.


    As soon as appeared, the captain of the passenger ship was overjoyed and rushed to Li Yaoxiang to bow down and bow down.


    "My lord! This lord! Please help us! Your lord, you are a devil fruit person, you must be able to deal with them, right?"


    All the passengers on the deck looked either happy or pleading.


    On the contrary, the pirates looked ugly one by one.


    Even their leader, Zeff.


    "Please spare us, my lord! We''ll just take all the ingredients and that''s it. We won''t harm anyone!"


    Whether it was the captain''s kneeling or Zeff''s dialogue, Li Yaoxiang remained indifferent.


    Now, the most emotional ones on the entire passenger ship are Sanji and Luffy, the two children.


    Sanji heard that they were here to snatch ingredients, so his mood would naturally not be much better. He''s here to learn how to cook. The ingredients are gone, what should they ask him to do?


    One heard that it was a pirate again!


    Pirates are doing things again!


    Seeing that everyone was paying attention to Li Yaoxiang, Luffy also subconsciously showed a longing look, and shouted to Li Yaoxiang: "Big brother!"


    He hopes that Li Yaoxiang can teach these pirates a lesson!

 Chapter 369: Promise

    Chapter 369: Promise


    No response.


    "Big brother!"


    Luffy called Big Brother again, but Li Yaoxiang still didn''t respond.


    Seeing that Li Yaoxiang didn''t n to start, the pirates could not help but secretly relieved. Although their captain''s legs are also very strong, they really want to match the devil fruit ability...


    They are not entirely sure.


    "Alright, alright! Stop struggling! All we want is ingredients! As long as you cooperate well, not only will we not hurt anyone, but we will also leave enough food for you to reach the next supply point."


    A pirate stood up and said.


    His tone did not dare to be too harsh, for fear that he would anger Li Yaoxiang, a devil fruit user.


    The guests of the passenger ship, including the captain, saw that these pirates were so talkative, so they put out the idea of resisting or begging for mercy, even if they cooperated with them, anyway, it was just some ingredients and the loss was not big.


    It''s just that the rest of the people havepromised, but Luffy and Sanji, who have a strong sense of justice, have never seen this kind of behavior? The two quit immediately!


    Since no one wants toe forward, let use forward!


    The two did not discuss.


    No eye contacts.


    However, tacitly rushed to the leader of the pirates at the same time, Zeff!


    Zeff didn''t want to hurt the two children, so he showed mercy everywhere.


    But Sanji and Luffy are always persistent.


    They were knocked flying and rushed forward again.


    It made Zeff feel a little impatient, so he tried a little harder, intending to teach the two of them a lesson and stop tangling. Unexpectedly, Luffy and Sanji saw the opportunity, and they both bit the same leg of Zeff together.


    The bite caused Zeff to throw them away on the spot.


    Both were injured this time.


    But the two were still unwilling to admit defeat.


    Sanji said fiercely: "Damn! I will find ALL BLUE one day!"


    "Yes! I will find ALL BLUE with you one day!"


    Sanji is talking about his dream to cheer himself up and not give up easily. As for Luffy...it''s nothing, I''m just following along, it sounds like it''s very imposing.


    In an instant.


    The whole ship fell silent.


    Then almost all the pirates in the Chef Pirates groupughed together.


    "Hahahaha! ALL BLUE? How can there be ALL BLUE in this world?"


    "Just the two of you want to find ALL BLUE?"


    "Hahahaha! Another little guy who was tricked by books!"


    Sanji gritted his teeth: "There must be ALL BLUE in this world! I will definitely find ALL BLUE too!"


    "Yes! There must be! I will definitely find ALL BLUE with him!"


    The sarcasm, theughter, continued.


    Among the pirates, only Zeff did notugh, but instead looked a littleplicated. Because his dream is also ALL BLUE!


    But right now.


    The hull suddenly swayed violently again!


    But this time it wasn''t bombarded.


    Instead, it was covered by a huge wave!


    Being caught off guard, Sanji and Luffy were blown away by the huge waves! Li Yaoxiang used ''Universal Pull'' jutsu to suck Luffy back for the first time.


    Zeff saw that Sanji was in danger. Seeing that Li Yaoxiang did not help Sanji, Zeff jumped into the rolling sea without saying a word and went to rescue Sanji.


    Luffy was not happy because he was saved.


    Instead, he hurriedly shouted in the direction of the two of them: "Sanji!"


    At this time, the passenger ship was still shaking very badly.


    The waves are not over yet.


    There are many people who can''t even stand up, and need to hold some equipment to barely support their bodies and not be thrown out. But Luffy didn''t care so much, he shouted angrily at the surrounding crowd again: "Save them! Hurry up and save them! Isn''t that your captain? Hurry up and save them!"


    The pirates also want to save Zeff.


    But the problem is, jumping into the sea in this situation is not to save people!


    This is to die!


    Even if you want to save it, you have to wait for the ocean to calm down before you think of a way to save it?


    Seeing that the pirates were unable to protect themselves and were indifferent, Luffy looked at Li Yaoxiang again: "Big brother!"


    Li Yaoxiang''s eyes hidden under the mask were very indifferent and did not respond.


    Luffy gritted his teeth and chose to jump into the sea.


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t stop him this time.


    Time flies and years pass.


    An uninhabited ind in the East Blue.


    Sanji and Zeff were washed by the waves to this uninhabited ind.


    The development of the story is the same as in the original.


    At the beginning, because of Zeff''s identity, Sanji did not dare to approach Zeff, and chose to stay away from him. But when Sanji was so hungry that he could no longer bear it, he finally became ruthless in his heart and wanted to attack Zeff and snatch the food from Zeff''s hands.


    However, he didn''t wait for him to do it.


    Zeff gave him the whole bag of food, and imed that he still had a lot of food.


    And when Sanji ate all the food and was going to ask Zeff for food, he found out that Zeff cut off his leg in order to save him.


    Then of course the ssic scene appeared.


    Sanji burst into tears and couldn''t help falling into Zeff''s arms, asking him, "Why? Why did you do this?"


    "Because I have the same dream as you."


    ""


    Sanji was taken aback, could not speak.


    But they swear in their hearts that they must fulfill their dreams with Zeff! After the incident, the two began to rely on each other on the ind, waiting for rescue.


    But one day they were waiting for rescue.


    A very inconspicuous ssh suddenly appeared on the endless sea.


    When the two of them saw clearly what happened to the ssh...


    They were dumbfounded!


    The one who set off the spray was the water surface pping in a butterfly stroke, and Luffy was advancing at full speed! There is no boat behind him, what is he doing?


    Zeff, who had reacted, couldn''t help showing a hint of relief: "If it''s him... maybe you can really find ALL BLUE with him in the future..."


    Sanji originally wanted to refute, but wanted to refuse.


    But when he saw Zeff looking at his broken leg, he knew what Zeff wanted to say, and he didn''t argue any more.


    After a while.


    Luffy finally swam to the shore of this ind.


    Sanji rushed forward.


    "Idiot! Why are you here? Where are the others? Didn''t anyone elsee with you?"


    Luffy narrowed his eyes and showed a big smile: "Finally found you..."


    And then ''Bang!'' With a sound, he fell to the ground.


    So, the two people in the original book survived on the uninhabited ind for 48 days before they were finally rescued, and now they have be three people. Food is scarcer and the situation is worse than the original.


    Sanji also called Luffy an idiot during this time.


    After 48 days.


    A group of three was finally saved.


    Sanji decides to open a sea restaurant with Zeff, and learn martial arts legs and cooking with Zeff. The arrival of Li Yaoxiang also means that Luffy is about to leave.


    However, before parting, Sanji said this.


    "When we grow up, if there is still fate to meet, then I agree to be your partner!"


    "Okay! It''s a promise!"


    "It''s a promise!"

 Chapter 370: The Rubber Man and the Classic Reappearance

    Chapter 370: The Rubber Man and the ssic Reappearance


    Windmill Vige.


    In Makino''s bar.


    The atmosphere here is still so noisy. A month ago, everyone learned that Luffy had disappeared again, and they were no longer as nervous as before. After all, this mysterious man didn''t hurt Luffy the first time, and he didn''t hurt Luffy the second time, so he wouldn''t suddenly hurt Luffy the third time, right?


    On this day, all the pirates of the Red Hair Pirates spent time here as always.


    Just as everyone was having a good time, the air door appeared again.


    Everyone held their breath.


    Luffy came out from inside.


    They saw Luffy, but no mysterious man. After everyone was relieved, the lively atmosphere was restored. What made everyone even more happy and interested was that Luffy''s expression when he came back this time, not only was not as heavy as before, but he looked a little more cheerful.


    Some of the gossip crew couldn''t help but ask first: "Hahahaha! Luffy, you''re finally back! Your mood looks good?"


    "Um!"


    After the Bandit King Higuma incident, arge part of Luffy''s anger towards the Red Hair Pirates was transferred, otherwise he would not have stood up involuntarilyst time.


    "What happy thing happened? Come and listen?"


    Luffy has no scruples: "I found my first partner! In the future, I can go out to sea with my partners like you! Let''s go on an adventure together!"


    "Hahahaha! Luffy, it''s good for you to find a new partner, but didn''t you say you hate pirates the most? Why are you running to be a pirate by yourself now?"


    Luffy was dumbfounded.


    But he quickly regained his smile and said casually: "No, I''m not a pirate! I want to be a navy, and a navy will take my partners on an adventure! By the way, I''ll catch all of you pirates back!"


    The audience was quiet.


    Immediately,ughter erupted.


    "Hahahaha! Good, good! Then we will wait for you to catch us."


    "Yes, as long as youe, I will serve it with both hands, and I will never fight back!"


    "Come on, Luffy, you want to be a navy, it''s still early,e andpete with me to eat meat. I''ve been waiting for you for a long time!"


    Luffy replied stupidly, "Hmm!'', and then walked towards the table where arge te of meat had already been set. It caused the pirates present to burst intoughter again.


    That''s it.


    Luffy said that he wanted to be a navy, but he didn''t reject being crazy with the Red Hair Pirates.


    Three rounds of wine.


    A few hourster.


    The two pirates who had already been drinking alcohol suddenly began to fight for Luffy.


    "Luffy,e to me!"


    "No, Luffy,e to me!"


    The two of them pulled left and right.


    Luffy''s arms were pulled for a long distance by them. The eyes of everyone were so frightened that they almost popped out. Many people even spit out half of their beer.


    Luffy himself was also frightened.


    Then a group of people just screamed.


    "Ah ! How can this happen?! How can this happen! What the hell happened to my hand?!"


    "Luffy, what happened to you?!"


    "It''s over, it''s over! The rubber fruit we captured from the enemy ship is gone!"


    "Luffy, tell me, did you eat this thing?" A pirate quickly drew the appearance of a rubber fruit, and then showed it to Luffy.


    "Yeah, but it''s not delicious. This should be dessert..."


    Shanks: "The rubber fruit, also known as the devil fruit! It is the treasure of the ocean! Whoever eats it will be a rubber man! And any Devil Fruit user will never be able to swim for the rest of their life!"


    Luffy: "What?! No way!"


    Shanks: "Idiot!"


    The tavern was quiet for a while.


    After a while.


    Luffy resumed his smile: "It doesn''t matter, then I can be a navy who will never fall into the sea in my life!"


    ""


    So, Rubber Man Luffy was born on this day.


    Time flies, time flies.


    In a blink of an eye, a long time passed.


    On this day, Luffy woke up as usual and went to Makino''s tavern. However, the tavern was empty at this time.


    Makino: "Captain, they have been out to sea for several days. Are you feeling lonely, Luffy?"


    Luffy: "No, I''m going to be in the Navy! I won''t miss them!"


    "Crack!" The door of the tavern was opened, "Excuse me..."


    The person here is the Bandit King Higuma.


    "The pirates aren''t here today...it feels so quiet. We passed by this ce again. What a daze! We are guests! Why don''t you bring wine?!"


    Afterwards, of course, just like the original, Luffy couldn''t stand the behavior of Higuma and other bandits, so he rebuked them. As a result, it angered Higuma and made Luffy to teach him a lesson outside the tavern.


    "Yo, is there such a strange person in the world, Rubber Man? It''s worth a lot of money to sell to the circus..."


    "Damn! Apologize to me! 32 Brick Fist!"


    Snapped!


    Higuma took Luffy''s fist with one palm.


    That shook his arm and Higuma said with a slightly gloomy face: "You have some ability, stinky boy...very good! You have sessfully excited me! I have decided not to sell you now! It''s better to kill you now!"


    "No wonder you didn''te to the port to pick us up... So that''s how it is..." Shanks appeared at this moment, "It''s the bandit fromst time... Luffy, didn''t you say you wanted to be a navy and catch all the pirates? Are you going to catch even these bandits? How can you find the time for us?"


    "Shut up! You bastard!"


    "Heh, pirate? You''re still here? You better run for your life as soon as possible... We''ll shoot if you walk in."


    A gun pointed Shanks'' temple.


    "Since the pistol is drawn, it''s time for a duel."


    "Huh?! What are you talking about?"


    "I mean, this thing isn''t meant to be scary..."


    Ouch!


    The first pirate died on the spot.


    Immediately afterwards, a ssic scene appeared.


    First, Benn Beckman dealt with all the bandits in two strokes, and then the bandit king Higuma used his smoke bomb! Sessfully escaped from Shanks and other pirates!


    At this time, the Conqueror''s Haki is useless.


    This is for the sake of the plot of course.


    Quickly.


    Higuma took Luffy, took a small boat, and came to the sea.


    "Hahaha! I managed to escape, but I didn''t expect a bandit like me to escape to the sea. I took you as a hostage. I killed 56 people who angered me, and now you too go die!"


    Higuma kicked Luffy into the sea.


    Then there is the Lord of the Coast, the Sea King appeared, and took the Higuma and the ship in one bite.


    Shanks arrived and rescued Luffy, but his arm was bitten off by this sea king. At this time, all kinds of Haki will all be useless!


    Don''t ask!


    The plot needs it to happen!


    Luffy was deeply moved when he saw that Shanks lost an arm in order to save himself. At the same time as I burst into tears, my mind was even more confused: "Why...why... Aren''t you a pirate? Why did you want to save me?"


    The dialogue is different.


    Before that, Luffy forced himself to admit that pirates are bad.


    But after this incident, he could no longer lie to his true feelings.


    "Who told you that pirates must be bad people?"


    Luffy froze for a moment.


    Throwing into Shanks'' arms and crying again...

 Chapter 371: As expected of my grandson

    Chapter 371: As expected of my grandson


    After the missing arm incident, several days passed in a row.


    Windmill Vige.


    On the pier.


    All the pirates of the Red Hair Pirates have already bid farewell to Luffy one by one, and then returned to the pirate ship. Now only Shanks and Luffy are left facing each other.


    Luffy: "After you leave this time, won''t youe back?"


    Shanks: "Well, we''ve been in Windmill Vige long enough, and it''s time to continue our journey."


    ""


    ""


    Luffy was a little reluctant.


    Seeing Shanks'' empty sleeves made him even more ufortable.


    Shanks seemed to see something, walked up, touched Luffy''s head, and said without heart, "What''s the matter? Want me to take you out to sea? You''re going to die, idiot!"


    Luffy pushed Shanks'' hand away, his eyes were a little wet: "Bah! I don''t want to go out to sea with you! I want to be a marine, I want to catch all of you pirates, and then be the freest person in the ocean!"


    Shanks'' expression moved.


    He then smiled knowingly.


    He took off the straw hat on top of his head and pressed it on Luffy''s forehead: "Really? Then keep my straw hat with you first, and then return it to me when you have the ability to meet me on the ocean. I am very ;ooking forward to the day we meet you again."


    The tears in Luffy''s eyes couldn''t hold back anymore.


    While wiping away his tears, he watched Shanks leave in a dashing manner.


    Before Shanks left, he didn''t forget to be naughty, turned around andughed: "By the way, idiot. Forgot to tell you, I don''t think the marine is suitable for you. Looking forward to the day you be a pirate! Hahahahahaha!"


    Luffy got angry and shouted: "You''re the fool! I will definitely be a marine and arrest you all!"


    "Ha ha ha ha!"


    The ships of the Red Hair Pirates left the Windmill Vige withughter.


    Time flies, time flies.


    Another time passed.


    Fisher Tiger''s incident is finally over. He was ambushed by a human, was seriously injured, lost too much blood, and then was unwilling to ept human blood, and finally died just like the original.


    So far, the Sun Pirates were led by Jinbe, and invited by the World Government to be one of the seven seas.


    Arlong is different from Jinbe''s mind, so he gathered a group of people alone, ran to the East Blue, and did a great job by himself.


    Garp also had free time and returned to the Windmill Vige.


    In the tavern.


    Vige Chief Wood p: "That''s the way it is. During the time you were away, a group of pirates who imed to be the Red Hair Pirates came to the vige. Fortunately, they were not too difficult to get along with. Those people are not bad, and Luffy was saved by that captain Shanks."


    Ouch!


    Garp punched the bar.


    "Damn! Sure enough, Windmill Vige is still too peaceful? Luffy shouldn''t be left in Windmill Vige!"


    Makino and Wood p were both taken aback.


    They mistakenly thought they angered Garp.


    "Hug... I''m sorry, although you told us to tell Luffy not to leave with that person, but we really have no way to stop..."


    "What?! That guy appeared again?! Luffy left with him?!"


    Makino nodded repeatedly: "Yes...Yes, Luffy left with that person twice..."


    Ouch!


    "Twice--?! Where''s Luffy? Where is that kid now?!"


    Garp''s yelling woke Luffy up in the lounge.


    Luffy rubbed his eyes and walked out: "Who is it? It''s so noisy, how can people sleep?"


    Garp didn''t say a word, he rushed over and struck the iron fist of love.


    Boom!


    "It hurts! Old man, why are you beating me?!"


    Garp grabbed Luffy by the cor and lifted Luffy into the air: "Why beat you? You''re too embarrassed to ask why you beat you? Didn''t I tell you to stop leaving with that big brother?!"


    It pissed off Garp!


    He was worried to death, but Luffy was always heartless and unwilling to obey.


    He couldn''t get angry, and he wanted to hit Luffy with a few more iron fists of love, so that Luffy could feel his love for him.


    "Damn! Grandpa! Let go! I''m going to be a man in the Marine!"


    Garp waspletely dumbfounded.


    Nani?


    Garp couldn''t believe it: "You... what did you say?"


    Luffy''s small fist kept pping Garp''s arm, roaring: "I said, I want to be a marine! Let go!"


    Garp suffocated.


    Incredible.


    Really heard right!


    The iron fist of love that was about to be beaten, suddenly changed from a fist to a palm, and turned into a hug of love. Garp was moved to tears.


    Luffy, you finally understand Grandpa''s painstaking efforts.


    As expected of my grandson of Monkey D Garp!


    Fortunately, you look like grandpa.


    Not like a father.


    Garp''s beard was very ufortable for Luffy, he just pushed Garp''s old face away: "What are you doing? Let me go!"


    Garp''s anger subsided instantly: "Hahahaha! It''s good to be a marine! It''s good to be a marine! Luffy, don''t worry, your grandfather, I will definitely train you to be the best marine!"


    "No! I can do it myself, I don''t need you."


    Garp has no pipes to fly.


    He was still smiling from ear to ear.


    "Hahahaha, did you hear? Did you hear? Luffy said he wanted to be a marine! My grandson wants to be a marine!"


    Makino and Wood p nodded in agreement.


    "Yes, yes, Luffy is your grandson, and he will definitely be a great marine like you in the future."


    Garp''s face suddenly changed, and regardless of Luffy who was still pping his arm, he muttered to himself: "No, no, Windmill Vige is still too peaceful, there are pirates and bandits again. So many people are here, what if my lovely grandson is injured by them?"


    The overly happy Garp even forgot about Li Yaoxiang.


    He was only thinking about how to properly arrange Luffy.


    After all, he couldn''t stay here for a long time this time, and there was a new task from Sengoku, so it was impossible for him to take Luffy with him.


    Since this is the case, then only...


    Not long.


    Mt. Colubo.


    Knock! knock! knock!


    "Dadan,e out!"


    "Ka... Garp, just let us go. This guy Ace is already 10 years old..."


    "Oh, who is this kid?"


    After a while, Garp exined the matter of taking Luffy.


    "What?! How many more?! Or is this your grandson?!"


    "Okay, choose, whether to live in a pig cage for a lifetime, or to adopt this child. You havemitted more sins than the stars in the sky."


    "One Ace is enough... Do you want me to take one more?"


    The two people aremunicating here.


    Luffy strolled not far away.


    At this moment, a mouthful of saliva spit directly onto Luffy''s cheek.


    Luffy red at the perpetrator: "Damn! Dirty! Who are you?!"

 Chapter 372: Friendship

    Chapter 372: Friendship


    After Garp said goodbye.


    Dadan''s home.


    Luffy''s mind is full of images of Higuma: "I hate bandits the most!"


    "Shut up! We should be the ones who have a headache to take in a brat like you!! If you don''t want to stay here, it''s better! Get out and die on the side of the road!!"


    "Okay okay, boss, don''t be angry."


    Luffy ignored the angry Curly Dadan: "I don''t have enough food, I want to eat that meat too."


    Curly Dadan: "The meat is good, the meat is all the wild beef that Ace hunted back! We also lined up to eat at the table in order to get some wild beef! The bandit world is also in a recession! From tomorrow you will work hard for me!! Cleaning,undry, shoeshine, sharpening weapons! Listen! You must not let Garp do the things you are asked to do here. Stealing, robbery, fraud, murder!! That guy knows!!"


    "Once a day, a bowl of rice, a ss of water! We only protect you! Also, you can''t just grow up!"


    Luffy: "Got it."


    "So calm?! You should beg me with snot and tears?!"


    "Grandpa threw me into the jungle before. Earthworms, frogs, snakes, mushrooms, since this is a jungle, I''ll definitely be able to eat enough! I''m going to be a man in the marine! I can''t do it at this level!"


    Hearing the word "marine", Ace''s expression changed.


    In the original book, Luffy said that he was going to be a pirate, but Ace didn''t feel much. He just thought that as long as the stinky boy in front of him didn''te to hinder him, after all, the shadow of his childhood was so serious that he wanted him to ept it easily. Being alone is not an easy task.


    Not to mention that what Luffy is talking about now is the marine.


    Ace looked at Luffy with a little more disgust, then turned around, left Curly Dadan''s house.


    "Huh? Where is this guy going?"


    Luffy had no self-awareness at all, so he just followed.


    Followed to a certain ce.


    "Hey! My name is Luffy! I''m not angry anymore about spitting! Come and be my partner!"


    Ace mmed a stick on a giant tree in a rage.


    The giant tree broke in half, and then kicked the giant tree to Luffy fiercely.


    Luffy is not as pathetic as in the original book, and he has also trained on Fishman Ind.


    He quickly caught up with Ace and came to a bridge.


    Ace turned back and knocked Luffy off the cliff.


    So, the first contact between the two ended like this.


    In the original book, it took Luffy a week to return to Dadan''s house. Today, he is slightly stronger, and it took only 4 days to return to Dadan''s house.


    Afterwards, he still haunted Ace relentlessly, wanting Ace to be his partner.


    Ace''s shot is heavier than ever.


    Heavier than the original!


    Luffy, who aimed at the marine, made Ace even more annoying.


    The shot is also much heavier than in the original.


    Until one day in 3 months, Luffy chased Ace to the Gray Terminal, and he discovered Ace and Sabo''s secret base and heard their conversation.


    Luffy shouted to the two people on the giant tree: "Pirate ship?! You two want to be pirates?! Hey! Stop being a pirate! Be a marine with me, and be my buddy!"


    Ace and Sabo were taken aback on the spot.


    The secrets of both of them are here!


    All the money saved for 5 years is here!


    Without saying a word, the two of them worked together to bind Luffy.


    Luffy was still dumbfounded, he didn''t even resist.


    Sabo: "Is that him? You said the guy named Luffy..."


    Ace: "Have youe here after all? Obviously, the way toe here is not something ordinary people can take..."


    Luffy: "Are you Ace''s friend? Come and be my partner too! Let''s be a marine together!"


    "Shut up! Marine, marine! Do you know what that group of marines is all about?"


    "What should I do? The secret has been discovered. If you let him go, it will be revealed..."


    "Kill him..."


    "Okay, let''s decide..."


    "Hey~~~~~~~~~~~!!! Wait, wait for me! I never thought I would die! I can''t die yet!"


    "Idiot! Be honest with me!"


    "Sabo, hurry up!"


    "What are you talking about! Of course you do it!"


    "I''ve never killed anyone!"


    "Me too. I don''t know how to do it!"


    Two ten-year-old children in a deadlock. Luffy took the opportunity to call for help. The cry for help also sessfully attracted the attention of others. At the moment, Ace and Sabo were irritated.


    "Not good! Someone ising!"


    "Anyway, untie this guy first! If you don''t leave here quickly, the treasure will be discovered!"


    The two quickly untied Luffy, and then found a ce to hide.


    The little gangsters who were robbed by Ace before, also came here with Porchemy at this time. They are all pirates of the Bluejam Pirates.


    However, while the two were hiding, Luffy was caught by Porchemy.


    "Damn! You damn pirate! Let go of me! I will be a marine in the future and catch you pirates! 32 Brick Fist!"


    Snapped!


    "Stinky boy, I didn''t expect you to have some strength. What kind of strange body is this? Oh, want to be a marine? If I kill you now, you won''t be able to be a marine!"


    "Ace! Save me!"


    "What? You know Ace?"


    "Yes, he''s my buddy. But he nearly killed me just now."


    "Then let me ask you a question. Ace robbed our treasure before. These treasures are very important to our pirate group. Do you know where he hid the treasure?"


    Luffy doesn''t lie.


    His weird expression clearly betrayed his thoughts.


    Naturally, he was captured by Porchemy and tortured to extract a confession.


    Afterwards, because Luffy refused to betray Ace and Sabo, he finally won the approval of the two, and together they defeated Porchemy and brought Sabo back to Dadan''s house.


    Things have developed here, and everything is the same as the original.


    The difference is that the way the three of them get along has changed.


    Luffy was arguing all day long, saying that he wanted to be a marine and that two other people would join me as partners.


    The two went back every day, saying that the other party was an idiot and would never join, they wanted to be pirates.


    The three often quarrel.


    But it did not prevent the rtionship between the three of them from deepening day by day.


    Hunt together, exercise together, learn together, and rob together.


    During this period, they also knew Sabo''s true identity, but the rtionship between the three did not change because of this. One day soon after, Ace even stole a bottle of wine from Dadan''s house, saying that after drinking this bottle of wine, the three would be brothers.


    On this day, the three of them raised their sses at the same time, and stated their dreams and goals before the formal swear.


    Sabo: "I want to go to sea! I want to go out of this country, I want to see this vast world! I want to write these experiences into a book! I want to be stronger! I want to be a pirate!"


    Ace: "I want to be a pirate, keep winning, keep winning, keep winning! To get the highest reputation! No matter how people in this world don''t agree with me, hate me, I want to be a big pirate to make them look good!"


    Luffy: "I want to be a marine! I want to catch all the pirates! Then go on an adventure with my buddies! To chase everyone''s dreams!"


    Three people, look at me, and I look at you.


    "Sabo, what a big conspiracy, I thought you were going to be my navigator."


    "No! Ace! Aren''t you going to be my crew member?!"


    "No no no! Aren''t you two joining the Marine with me?"


    That''s it.


    Strange alliance was born.


    After drinking, they became brothers.


    The three of them looked at the sea with great pride.


    "In the future, I will definitely be the most powerful pirate!"


    "Me too!"


    "Luffy, if you meet us in the future, promise us, don''t hold back."


    "Yeah! Don''t hold back. If I defeat you, then you will join me and be a marine together!"

 Chapter 373: Sabos Death

    Chapter 373: Sabo''s Death


    Time flies, time flies.


    Another good day passed.


    Luffy brought Ace, Sabo, and the Dadan family to Lai Windmill Vige, Makino''s bar. This move made the vige head angry and cursed at him on the spot.


    "You, you, you! How can you bring these bad people into the vige?! The reputation of our Windmill Vige has been ruined by you!"


    Luffy smirked.


    He didn''t take the vige chief''s anger seriously at all.


    He enjoyed himself in the tavern with Ace, Sabo, and the Dadan family.


    Luffy: "This is the vige where I was born, how is it? It''s not bad, right?"


    Sabo: "Yes, this ce is much better than the royal city. Luffy, I really envy you being born in such a vige."


    Ace: "It''s really good."


    Luffy: "Hahahahaha! You are my friends! This will also be your vige in the future!"


    Ace was angry at Luffy: "Who is your partner?! How many times have I told you? It''s impossible for me to go to the marine with you! You idiot! You don''t even know what the marine is!"


    Luffy still smirked: "The marine catches bad guys!"


    Sabo: "Forget it, Luffy, the marine and the rubbish in the royal city are basically the same group. It''s impossible for me and Ace to be the marine with you."


    Luffy: "I won''t give up!"


    Time passed for a while.


    Garp finally found time toe back to visit Luffy.


    Knowing that Luffy was not taken away by Li Yaoxiang during this period of time, he felt a lot of joy. However, when he learned that Sabo and Ace''s dream was to be a pirate, he was so angry that he couldn''t help with an iron fist of love against a few bear children.


    "You two bastards! You want to learn, but you want to learn to be a pirate? Can''t you learn like Luffy?! To be a righteous marine is the right path you should take!"


    Garp didn''t intend to beat Luffy.


    But Luffy saw that Ace and Sabo were both beaten, so he fought back together.


    Garp hit so well, so he even beat up Luffy.


    Luffy was beaten to a pig face. This was the first time he felt that his grandfather''s words were so pleasing, and at the same time he was beaten, he did not forget to praise: "Yes! You should follow me to be the marine!"


    Ace and Sabo were beaten until they rolled their eyes and foamed at the mouth. They didn''t forget to insist: "We won''t be the marine with you even if you kill us..."


    Then the two of them werepletely unconscious.


    Not long after, Garp left again because of something.


    The beating has also been beaten, Sabo and Ace did not give up because of this, and still insisted on their dream. Even after the Garp incident, they chose to run away from home and want to be independent.


    Luffy, of course, followed them stupidly to be independent... independent.


    One day, Sabo''s father finally came to the door.


    He entrusted the Bluejam Pirates to capture all three of the kids.


    "Damn! Return Sabo!"


    "What are you talking about? Sabo is my son. It is a natural obligation for the child to live ording to the words of the parents who gave birth to him! Since you instigated my Sabo to run away from home!"


    "You rubbish! Are you staring at my property?!"


    Ace yelled and was pped hard by the pirate who looked after him.


    The blood was sticking to Sabo''s father.


    "Hey, hey, you have to be careful when you hit the children. It will be very dirty if you touch the blood of the Gray Terminal child. Now I need to disinfect it when I go back."


    "Shut up! I didn''t get instigated! It was me who wanted to run away from home!"


    This sentencepletely angered Sabo''s father.


    Sabo''s father also told the pirates topletely eliminate Ace and Luffy.


    In order to ask his father to spare Ace and Luffy, Sabo finally had to promise his father that he would live ording to his words in the future, and then left here with his father.


    Seeing Sabo leave like this, both Ace and Luffy were very annoyed.


    Luffy couldn''t help but roared at Ace who was on the side: "Look! Look! It''s pirates again! Again! If it wasn''t for these pirates, Sabo wouldn''t have been caught! You still have to be a pirate! Pirates?!"


    Ace also roared at Luffy: "Is the marine even that good?! The guys who took Sabo away are the same as the marine! If the marine was seriously trying, what could garbage like them do?!"


    The two brothers went head to head.


    Bluejam, the leader of the Bluejam Pirates, became a foil instead.


    "Hey, hey, you guys are really interesting. One wants to be a pirate, one wants to be a marine, and the other a noble. How did you get together? Compared to you guys...that noble boy must haveughed at you all in his heart..."


    "Bullshit! Sabo doesn''t do that!"


    "Sabo is our brother!"


    "Oh, yes? That''s sad, you can''t get close to him either. If you''re going to do that, I''ll just tear your throats right now... If you really think of him as a brother, for him, it''s even more important to let him leave."


    "Sabo hates the royal city!"


    "Forget him, some things, you will understand when you grow up... Forget it, I don''t care about that. Last time with Porchemy, you guys gave me a lot of attention. But I like strong guys. I need manpower now. As long as you help me transport the goods to the location, I will not embarrass you."


    The goods in Bluejem''s mouth are of course the explosives that are about to blow up the entire mountain of garbage. He reached an agreement with the king of the Goa Kingdom, as long as the area of the Gray Terminal was cleared before the World Nobles came, the king would allow him to be a noble afterwards.


    The current Luffy and Ace are just squeezing thest drop of value to him.


    The subsequent development is just like the original.


    Gray Terminal was blown up.


    However, the gate of the royal city was closed, and Bluejam and the rest of the Gray Terminal were isted outside the royal city. Clearly, the king was perfidious.


    The betrayed Bluejam also went to extremes.


    He swore that he would only do one thing for the rest of his life!


    He wants to take revenge on all the nobles in this world and the king of Goa Kingdom!


    He also marked the treasure that Ace and others had saved for a long time.


    Then came the battle with Ace and the others.


    Luffy was seriously injured in this battle and was taken away by the Dadan family first.


    Ace did not retreat.


    Curly Dadan chose to stay and fight with Ace in order to bring Ace back.


    After the incident, Luffy was recuperating at Dadan''s house, unable to move. Who knows how many days passed, and Ace finally came back here with injured Curly Dadan on her back.


    Everyone who heard the news was very happy.


    However, before they were happy for a long time, another member of the Dadan family received a piece of bad news from the pier near the royal city...


    "Sabo... died..."

 Chapter 374: The darkening is mad again

    Chapter 374: The darkening is mad again


    "You lied! That''s not even funny!"


    After hearing the news, Ace''s first reaction was to rush forward to beat the pirate.


    He doesn''t believe it!


    He doesn''t believe it''s true!


    The pirate didn''t fight back: "It''s neither a joke, nor a lie, this... This is also very sudden for me... I even doubt these eyes! I also said that I was dreaming or seeing a hallucination!" The pirate pushed Ace away, let Ace calm down and listened to him first: "Sabo was taken back by the noble parents, is that what Luffy said? To us, there are ces that we don''t want to go back! If that guy was really happy in the capital, why would he go to the sea?! Why would anyone hang a pirate g and go out to sea alone!!"


    Luffy was so excited that his whole body trembled, and he fell to his knees: "Sa... Is Sabo not happy?"


    Ace ruffled his hair wildly: "Why? Why didn''t we go and get him back?!"


    Two children, mistakenly thinking that Sabo can be happy as long as he returns to his parents.


    So he endured the pain of separation for a while and didn''t go looking for Sabo.


    Now both of them are remorseful.


    Ace rushed over again and grabbed the pirate''s cor: "Where is the guy who killed Sabo?!! I''m going to kill him!! I want to avenge Sabo!!"


    After saying that, Ace picked up his weapon and rushed out the door.


    Unfortunately, Curly Dadan took the lead in rushing forward and smashed his head to the ground, even smashing the floor: "Stinky boy! Why don''t you stop?!"


    "Go away! Asshole!"


    "Even if you don''t even have the strength, you''re just very arrogant! What can you do?! You will only die! If you die, you will be forgotten! You are no one!!"


    "This country killed Sabo!! This world!! What can you do?!!"


    "Your father changed the world with his death! When you be a man of that level, you can die or live as you please!! Quick! Help me tie up this idiot!"


    The bandits teamed up to clean up Ace.


    The scene was very chaotic.


    And the whole process, Luffy is in a unique state. It was noisy around, but he felt very quiet inside. No matter what the people around him are saying or doing, he can''t feel it.


    Empty eyes.


    His mind went nk.


    He fell on his knees motionless.


    "Why...why...why do the people around me die one by one..."


    58%


    61%


    63%


    Li Yaoxiang: "Because you are useless."


    "I am useless?"


    "Yes. If you''re strong enough, nothing before will happen. If you''re strong enough, Sabo won''t be taken in the first ce. He wouldn''t have been killed. Everything is your fault. You killed Sabo and killed your mother."


    "So... so... it''s all my fault... Yes, it''s my fault... If I wasn''t strong enough to protect them, they wouldn''t have died... Sabo and my mother were both killed by me..."


    68%


    72%


    75%


    78%


    Time passed second by second.


    Luffy still knelt there, motionless.


    I don''t know how long it took.


    He suddenly started muttering to himself.


    "Revenge... Revenge... I want revenge... I want revenge!!! Big brother! Lend me a weapon! I want avenge Sabo! I want to kill them!! I want to kill them all!!"


    The originalmunication of consciousness suddenly turned into yelling in reality.


    Luffy''s eyes turned red!


    Ferocious!


    Madness!


    Roaring into the surrounding air non-stop!


    The sudden scene immediately stunned everyone present. Even Ace, who was still in a state of madness, was also silent.


    Li Yaoxiang: "I won''t help you."


    "Why?! Why!! Big Brother! Why!! Why don''t you help me! I want revenge! I want revenge for Sabo!!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "As I said, from now on, you can only rely on yourself. I will not help you again."


    "I don''t need your help! You lend me a weapon! You just lend me a weapon! I''m going to kill them! Kill them all!"


    79%


    81%


    "Luffy..." Ace, who was crushed to the ground, couldn''t help but murmured in pain.


    Curly Dadan, who woke up, immediately shouted: "Quick! Quickly suppress him!"


    A group of pirates who had suppressed Ace, change their targets, and rushed towards Luffy, crushing Luffy to death.


    Ace looked at Luffy with a guilty look but didn''t move.


    But even so, Luffy''s emotions still haven''t calmed down.


    Having experienced the death of a rtive, he is far more emotional than in the original book!


    Crazy even more!


    Even his teeth were bitten with blood.


    Curly Dadan quickly discouraged: "Luffy! Wake up! Wake up! It''s not your fault! Calm down! Calm down first!"


    "It''s my fault! It''s all my fault! It''s because I''m not strong enough! That''s why Sabo died! I killed him, I killed him!"


    "No! It''s not your fault! Calm down! Luffy, calm down for me!"


    Luffy was crushed to death by a group of bandits.


    Even with all his strength, he couldn''t move.


    When he could not resist with thest ounce of strength, his faith copsed instantly. Hatred cannot give him more power. Finally, he couldn''t hold back his emotions and waspletely broken.


    Tears flowed.


    He cried his heart out.


    Seeing this, everyone present was also infected by Luffy''s painful appearance and shed tears.


    On this day, everyone in Dadan''s family was in grief.


    Time flies, time flies.


    Another good day passed.


    Luffy, who has always been lively and cheerful, has changed a lot during this time.


    Eat less, drink less, smile less.


    Everyone knows that he has not yete out of his grief.


    Today, he and Ace came to the cliff and looked at the distant sea together.


    Ace, who was also silent for a long time, finally spoke up: "Is the marine you want to be?"


    Luffy moved in his heart, bit his lower lip, and didn''t answer.


    "Sabo was killed by what you call the Marine."


    ""


    "If you be that kind of marine in the future, then I will definitely kill you with my own hands..."


    After saying that, Ace turned around and left.


    Leaving Luffy alone to watch the slowly setting sun.


    Luffy bit his red lips, and the tears couldn''t help flowing again: "Why...why is this... shouldn''t the marine only deal with bad guys..."


    His faith began to waver.


    He is veryplicated inside.


    He couldn''t tell who was good and who was bad.


    His idea of bing a marine, is it necessary to persist?


    I don''t know how long it took.


    The tears on his face are dry.


    Luffy suddenly wiped away his tears, stood up, regained his energy and said, "Big brother, I want to be stronger!"


    Li Yaoxiang did not respond.


    "Teach me to be strong!"


    No respond, but there was an air door in front of Luffy.


    Luffy looked happy, smiled knowingly, and stepped into the air door without hesitation...

 Chapter 375: I won again today

    Chapter 375: I won again today


    Shimotsuki (Frost Moon) Vige.


    Luffy and Li Yaoxiang wearing the Shinigami mask, one big and one small, walking on the mudstone road in the vige. Luffy looked at the surrounding environment curiously, and couldn''t help but look up and asked, "Big brother, why did you bring me here? Can you make me stronger here?"


    "Well, don''t you like my silver ghoul very much? I will bring you here to learn kendo. As long as you study hard, until you can suppress the silver ghoul with your own strength, then I will give it to you. "


    "Really?!"


    Li Yaoxiang nodded.


    Luffy''s eyes are bright and he is full of energy!


    After a while.


    One big and one small came to a kendo hall.


    The owner of the Kendo Hall, Koushiro, saw that it was Li Yaoxiang, so he greeted him very politely: "Wee, Mr. Li! Thank you for your donation to Shimotsuki Vige. I didn''t even have time to thank youst time. This time you have to stay for a while, so that you can meet with thendlord."


    "It''s okay, it was just a little effort, nothing to worry about..."


    While the two of them were talking all sorts of polite things here, Luffy was foolishly looking around at the surrounding environment,pletely ignoring the meaning of the dojo owner Koushiro''s answer.


    Walking along, he soon encountered a group of menacing bear children.


    The leader hadn''t spoken yet, but the bear children who looked like followers took the lead in questioning Luffy: "Hey, who are you? Do you know whose territory is here? What are you doing here?"


    "Me? My name is Luffy! I came here to be stronger!"


    "Being stronger? You are new here to learn kendo... Forget it, no matter what your purpose is, since you are a neer, let me introduce you first! The one standing in front of you is Koushiro-sensei who is the strongest. His apprentice, Zoro! Zoro can even defeat by adults! He will be your boss from now on! Come and meet me soon?"


    Hearing that Zoro is the strongest, Luffy''s expression became excited.


    "You are the strongest here?"


    Hearing this, he kept his eyes closed, looking cool, Zoro, who was holding two wooden swords, finally opened his eyes and stared at Luffy sharply.


    Luffy excitedly said: "I want to challenge you!"


    After saying that, without saying a word, he directly attacked.


    In the courtyard of the Kendo Hall, a shocking battle was staged!


    "Hahahaha! Your tricks are useless to me! I''m a rubber guy! Look at the rubber tricks! 32 Brick Fist!"


    "Damn! You bastard! You cheat!"


    The two were inextricably fighting.


    Luffy relies on the ability of his rubber fruit to be more and more brave.


    Zoro relied on his double swordsmanship to counterattack.


    The noise grew louder and louder, and finally received the attention of two adults, Koushiro and Li Yaoxiang. When the two came to the scene, one picked up the cors of Zoro and the other picked up Luffy with one hand and separated them.


    "Let go! Let go! We''re not done yet! As long as I defeat him, I''ll be the strongest here!"


    "Damn! If I use a real sword, you are definitely not my opponent!"


    Although the two have been hanged in midair by Koushiro and Li Yaoxiang, they still did not forget to confront each other. The two adults ignored them.


    Li Yaoxiang: "This is the kid. His name is Luffy. I n to keep him here to learn kendo with you. I hope you can help me take care of him for a while."


    Koushiro: "Alright, no problem."


    That''s it, Luffy stayed in Koushiro''s Kendo Dojo and learned Kendo with Zoro.


    Time flies, time flies.


    Luffy practiced his kendo day in and day out in the kendo hall.


    On this day, he routinelypeted with Zoro about how many times he swung the sword.


    "1001, 1002, 1003, 1004..." Zoro was very serious, and his movements were very orthodox to carry out his daily sword swinging exercise.


    Luffy on the side also swiped his sword carefully.


    Zoro swung as many he can.


    Zoro hung the boulder on his wrist, making it more difficult to swing the de. Luffy also added the boulder to his wrist, and he was not willing to lose to Zoro at all.


    The scorching sun is in the sky.


    Both of them were sweating profusely.


    The number of swings was finally about to reach the goal Zoro required. He swung thest and shouted: "3000!"


    Luffy followed closely behind and swung an extra: "3001!"


    Then he looked at Zoro with a smile, wiped the sweat from his forehead, sighed, and looked like he was emotional: "Hoo~ I won again today."


    "Idiot--! What kind of win is this?!"


    "I''ll give you a shot."


    "3000 is the goal of my morning exercise! You idiot! Don''t think that you can beat me by swinging more than me!"


    Luffy was still smiling, ignoring what Zoro was saying.


    Looks like I won.


    Then turn around and leave.


    But as soon as he turned around, Zoro''s voice came from behind him: "3001, 3002!"


    Luffy turned to look at Zoro with a dumbfounded face, only to see Zoro looking at him with a mean smile...


    "3002, 3003!"


    "3003, 3004!"


    Thus, this morning exercise will go on forever.


    I don''t know how many times this happened during Luffy''s stay at the Kendo Hall. Both were unwilling to admit defeat.


    The early morning struggle did note to an end until Koushiro''s daughter, Kuina, came to call them for dinner.


    However, the fight at the dinner table started again.


    "One more bowl!"


    "Two bowls!"


    "Three bowls!"


    "I want four bowls!"


    Ouch!


    Ouch!


    Kuina gave each of them a beating, and that was the end.


    After breakfast, it is the daily challenge. Of course, this was not a project arranged by Koushiro. This is just an addition that Zoro and Luffy added themselves.


    "Zoro! I''m going to challenge you!"


    "Idiot, I don''t want to fight you! If you could use a real sword, you would have been killed by me long ago. Kuina, I want to challenge you!"


    "Oh? After ying so many times, you don''t learn any lesson? You are not my opponent at all."


    "Damn! I''m stronger than yesterday! Today''s me will definitely be able to defeat you!"


    Luffy saw Zoro challenge Kuina, and he followed suit: "Kuina, I want to challenge you too!"


    "Idiot! You can''t even win against me, why would you challenge Kuina?!"


    "I don''t care, I will challenge!"


    "Since the two of you want to be beaten so much, then I''ll do it for you. Come on together."


    "Damn! Kuina! You are looking down on me! I am enough to deal with you! I don''t need this idiot!"


    Luffy also roared.


    After a while, several people came to the courtyard.


    Zoro and Luffy are of course unwilling to y two against one, so when one fights, the other will watch first. It''s just what Kuina want.


    Kuina took the initiative to attack Luffy while fighting Zoro.


    In the end, the two had to work together to deal with Kuina...

 Chapter 376: Kuinas Death

    Chapter 376: Kuina''s Death


    It''s nothing to fight alone, both of them can fight with Kuina in a few ways. But when the two yed against one another, their strength weakened a lot.


    They drag each other back.


    Often when attacking Kuina, as long as Kuina shes, their attack will fall on each other instead.


    As a result, Kuina solved the two perfectly with three strokes and two strokes.


    "Idiot! If you hadn''t made trouble here, I wouldn''t have lost to Kuina!"


    "You''re the fool! You messed me up!"


    The bear children who watched the battle did not forget to make a noise, and recorded the record of the three by the way.


    "Kuina vs Zoro, 2000 wins, 0 losses!"


    "Kuina vs Luffy, 78 wins, 0 losses!"


    After this battle, the two of them once again exercised desperately, and threatened to defeat Kuina tomorrow.


    It was that night.


    The night was quiet.


    Zoro sneaked into the Kendo Hall.


    He was careful, trying not to make any noise from his footsteps, and slipped into the ce where the real sword was ced in the dojo.


    Just as he was about to take away the real de on the wall, Luffy just happened to appear behind him, picking his nose and saying, "What are you doing?"


    Zoro was taken aback.


    He turned around and rushed forward to pounce on Luffy, covering Luffy''s mouth tightly.


    "Shh-! Idiot, don''t make a sound!" Luffy was about to resist when Zoro quickly added, "Don''t make a sound and I''ll tell you!"


    Luffy''s eyes flickered twice and nodded.


    "Kuina is practicing in the backyard, I''m going to fight her with these real swords! As long as I use real swords, I will definitely not lose to her!"


    Luffy''s reaction is even bigger!


    "You want to secretly be stronger?!"


    "Shh-! Don''t shout so loudly! If the owner of the dojo hears it, it''s over, idiot!"


    "I want to fight too!"


    "Idiot, your swordsmanship is so weak, if you use a real sword, you will be defeated all at once. What else can you do?"


    "I, too, want, yes, fight!"


    ""


    Zoro couldn''t beat Luffy, so in the end he had to hold a few real swords in both hands and ran to the backyard to find Kuina.


    In the backyard.


    Kuina swings a sword against the stake to exercise.


    Luffy and Zoro came here at this time.


    "Kuina! I brought a real sword! Try it with me!"


    "Me too! I''m going topete with you with a real knife too!"


    "With me? Okay."


    Moonlight shone on the three of them.


    Even a real sword could not change the gap between the two sides, Zoro and Luffy were defeated by Kuina in a while. Kuina didn''t be weaker because she was using a real sword, she was a bit more aggressive.


    Now, Zoro and Luffy no longer have to admit that they lost.


    Totally lost.


    "That''s outrageous!! I''m not giving up!" Zoro was very unwilling.


    His dream is to be the world''s greatest swordsman.


    But now he can''t beat Kuina even once, what kind of dreams does he have the face to talk about?


    He was so unwilling that he even shed tears.


    Luffy, who lost to Kuina, did the same, with tears in his eyes, and muttered unwillingly to himself: "Damn...why, why am I still so weak..."


    Kuina did not go tofort the two little boys in pain.


    Instead, Kuina said with a look of emotion: "Actually... I should be the one who say that..."


    "What?!" Zoro and Luffy said in unison.


    "When girls grow up, their physical strength will definitely be worse than boys... I''m about to fall behind you. Don''t you always say that you want to be the world''s number one swordsman? Dad said... a girl can never be the world''s number one swordsman..."


    Having said this, Kuina''s tears couldn''t help flowing down: "I envy you guys for being boys, I also wanted to be number one in the world..."


    Zoro: "I won and told me such a thing!! You are so despicable! You are my target!!"


    "Zoro..."


    "So, if one day I beat you, it wouldn''t be based on my strength?!! I''ve worked hard to promise you, don''t I look like a fool?!"


    "Let''s make a promise! One of us must be the world''s greatest swordsman! Let''s see who fulfills the dream first!"


    Luffy: "Me too! If you want to be the world''srgest swordsman, then I will be the strongest person in the world! I want to protect everyone around me! Let everyone not be hurt! Let''s see who Fulfill your dreams first!"


    "Fool... I defeated you two..."


    The picture is very moving.


    Kuina was also very moved.


    She knew that Zoro and Luffy wereforting her, cheering her up, and telling her not to give up.


    Packed up their mood, the three of them stretched out their hands and held hands.


    "I promise you."


    "Okay! It''s a promise!"


    "It''s a promise!"


    "By the way, the two of youe to be my partners too." The atmosphere was very good, and was instantly broken by Luffy.


    "Idiot! Is this the time to say such things?! You are so weak! Don''t expect me to join you!"


    The two fought each other again.


    It made Kuinaugh and cry.


    In this way, the three children made an oath that they would never give up for the rest of their lives...


    The next morning.


    They were so tiredst night.


    Zoro and Luffy both slept veryte today.


    But when they woke up to the Kendo Dojo, they heard a thunderbolt.


    "It''s not good! It''s not good! Zoro, Luffy! Kuina fell from the stairs... She died!"


    Zoro rushed in front of Kuina''s body and scolded: "Damn! You only made a promise to us yesterday!! Are you running away now?!!"


    "Zoro! Don''t do this!"


    Zoro was in trouble for a while, but his emotions finally calmed down a little.


    He immediately knelt down in front of Koushiro: "Teacher, please give me her sword!"


    Taking the saber, Zoro swore with tears on his face: "I want to be even better!! Be the world''s greatest swordsman who even heaven can hear my name!!"


    Compared to Zoro''s excitement.


    Luffy was much quieter when faced with this matter.


    There was no fuss during the whole process.


    But that doesn''t mean he''s not sad.


    On the contrary, he was very sad.


    He felt very ufortable.


    The tears werepletely uncontroble and kept flowing down.


    He kept wiping away tears.


    wiped and flowed.


    flowed and wiped.


    He stopped wiping.


    At the same time, he kept asking himself in a low voice: "Why... why is this happening? Why do people around me die one by one... Is it because I am too weak..."


    Koushiro heard Luffy''s muttering.


    The death of his daughter made him sad, but he still walked over to Luffy, patted Luffy on the shoulder andforted: "Don''t me yourself, it''s not your problem. This is an ident, no one would want this to happen..."


    Obviously, Zoro also noticed the movement here.


    He walked up to Luffy and scolded: "Idiot! Stop crying! Didn''t you say you want to be the most powerful person in the world?! This is what you promised Kuina! We have to do it! Let''s work hard together!"


    But Zoro''s own tears couldn''t be stopped either...

 Chapter 377: Duel, strength advances

    Chapter 377: Duel, strength advances


    The next morning.


    Neither Zoro nor Luffy became depressed orzy and didn''t exercise because of Kuina''s death. Instead, they worked out harder than ever!


    Both sides know in their hearts that they are not working alone now.


    They have to work hard together with Kuina''s share.


    This is a promise between them and Kuina.


    And just like that, the days went by for several days in a row.


    Nothing special has happened these days, Luffy and Zoro''s life is still exercise, exercise, and exercise.


    Until today.


    Zoro had just arrived at the Kendo Hall when he found that an uninvited guest hade to the dojo, and the master Koushiro was receiving this guy.


    He recognized this guy.


    This guy is the masked man who brought Luffy here to learn kendo.


    Just seeing the masked man, Zoro felt a tightness in his heart.


    Then he rushed out without saying a word.


    Running wildly in the gym.


    It wasn''t until he ran to the courtyard in the backyard of the gymnasium and found that Luffy had already bid farewell to the other students one by one. Then he stopped and asked Luffy out of breath, "Are you leaving?"


    Luffy''s eyes were filled with reluctance.


    But he still nodded.


    Zoro rushed forward and grabbed Luffy''s cor: "Damn! Didn''t you promise Kuina that you would work together?! You leave now, what''s up with that?!!"


    "Even if I leave, I won''t stop training."


    ""


    Hearing this sentence, Zoro slowly calmed down and slowly loosened Luffy''s cor.


    Under Luffy''s bewildered expression, Zoro suddenly turned and left.


    Cross the courtyard and return to the dojo.


    Ignoring Koushiro and Li Yaoxiang who were talking, he passed by them directly, took the four real swords hanging on the wall, and returned to Luffy.


    He threw one of the real swords at Luffy''s feet, bit the hilt of one of the real swords in his mouth, and said, "Before you leave, let''s have onest test!"


    Luffy smiled heartily.


    Pick up the real sword.


    The two sides set up their postures and rushed towards each other directly.


    Immediately afterwards, there was the sound of a collision between swords in the courtyard.


    Luffy''s swordsmanship is not as amateur as when he first arrived. Even with the three swords of Zoro, they still went back and forth.


    Zoro can''t take down Luffy as easily as before.


    ng! ng! ng! ng!


    They yed against each other for a while.


    Theye and go from both sides.


    It''s a pity that Luffy''s talent in kendo is always inferior to Zoro.


    He was finally caught by Zoro at the moment when he made a mistake, and he picked up the real sword in his hand and ended the match. The two stared at each other breathlessly for a while.


    No one spoke.


    I don''t know how long it took.


    Zoro retracted the de into its sheath.


    Then he said for no reason: "You are so weak, how can you be the strongest in the world?"


    "I will be stronger, stronger than anyone!"


    "Well, don''t you always say that you want me to join you and be your partner? When we meet next time, if you can defeat me, then I will join you!"


    Luffy''s mouth corners rose rapidly.


    But Zoro immediately added: "Don''t be too happy! If I find out that you have broken your promise to Kuina and me, then I will kill you with my own hands!"


    Luffy was startled.


    But he soon regained his smile.


    "OK!"


    "It''s a promise!"


    "It''s a promise!"


    After a while, Zoro seemed to remember something, and suddenly asked: "By the way, you have been inviting me to join you, what do you want to do when you grow up?"


    If it was before, Luffy would definitely answer without hesitation: I want to be a marine!


    But after the Sabo incident, Luffy hesitated.


    He discovered that not all marines are as good as he imagined.


    He started to get lost.


    I don''t know what I want to do.


    He only knew that he yearned for the sea and freedom.


    Seeing theplicated look on Luffy''s face, Zoro felt ashamed for a while, but he only felt that this time he was really in trouble. Zoro just knew that this kid was unreliable and didn''t even know what he wanted to do, so he just invited others to join him casually.


    After a while, Li Yaoxiang and Koushiro finished their conversation, came to the backyard, and was about to lead Luffy away.


    Just as the two were about to step out of the gate of the dojo, Zoro chased after him, crying and shouting, "Luffy! You idiot! Don''t forget our promise!"


    Luffy''s eyes were also a little wet, and he nodded hard.


    After leaving the Kendo Hall, Li Yaoxiang took Luffy to a hidden ce, called the air door, and took Luffy back to Mount Colubo.


    Luffy walked back into Dadan''s house as if nothing had happened.


    "I''m back! Huh? Are you eating meat? Well, I happen to be hungry too!"


    In an instant, everyone who was dining turned their heads and looked at Luffy in surprise.


    Ace rushed over and knocked Luffy to the ground with one punch: "Damn! You disappeared for so many days! Where did you go?!"


    Luffy was a little surprised.


    He covered his cheeks.


    He didn''t understand why Ace suddenly rushed over to beat him.


    "I...I...big brother took me to be stronger..."


    "Big brother?"


    Ace still knows a thing or two about Li Yaoxiang. During the time he spent with Luffy, Luffy talked a lot about him and Sabo.


    "Idiot! Even so, can you leave without any exnation?! Do you know how worried everyone is about you during this time?!"


    "I..."


    Luffy didn''t know what to answer.


    Ace also saw the real sword that Luffy was holding in his arms. Luffy''s current strength is not enough to suppress the Silver Eater, so Li Yaoxiang has not given the Silver Eater to Luffy.


    Luffy''s arms are just a real sword he brought back from Koushiro Kendo Dojo.


    Ace also picked up his weapon that looked like a faucet steel pipe, pointed at Luffy and said, "Very good! You said you ran and became stronger, right? That is your weapon? Pick up your weapon and follow me. We''re going out to duel! I want to see how strong you are, the missing guy, has be!"


    After a while.


    A group of people came to the open space outside Dadan''s house.


    Curly Dadan and other bandits were watching.


    Ace is holding a faucet steel pipe.


    Luffy is holding a real sword.


    The battle is about to break out!


    Ace, who was full of anger, took the lead in attacking. Before that, even though Luffy was stronger than he was in the original book when he was 7 years old, Luffy still never defeated Ace. After all, Ace was three years older than Luffy, and his training was better than Luffy.


    At this time, Ace was no weaker than Zoro, and could even be said to be stronger!


    However, thispetition is not a simple swordsmanshippetition.


    Luffy doesn''t only use swordsmanship like he did against Zoro.


    In this battle, Luffy used his swordsmanship and rubber man''s advantages to the fullest! Often when the real sword is suppressed, he will decisively abandon the sword, and use a few floor moves plus rubber legs, rubber fists, etc. to break Ace''s offensive.


    When the crisis is over, he will pick up the real sword back and continue to fight.


    Sometimes they use their feet instead of their hands, and use their ankles to roll up the hilt to fight.


    Ace not only had to avoid Luffy''s oing attack, but also had to beware of the attack when the rubber legs retracted. This battle made Ace feel a lot of pressure.


    Finally, after hundreds of turns, Ace''s weapon was kicked by Luffy.


    It''s not impossible to keep fighting, but Ace didn''t do that.


    He threw the steel pipe away and scolded Luffy angrily: "If you dare to leave without any exnation next time, I will never forgive you!"


    After saying that, he turned around and left for the jungle.


    He looked very angry, but the corners of his mouth curved slightly without anyone noticing.


    Because he knows that from now on, his troublesome brother is no weaker than him...

 Chapter 378: Seven years later

    Chapter 378: Seven yearster


    Time flies, time flies.


    In a blink of an eye, seven years have passed.


    Luffy is fourteen years old this year.


    Colubo Mountain, somewhere in the jungle.


    Luffy''s voice sounded in the jungle.


    "32 Brick Fist!"


    boom--!


    32 Brick Fist, which represents the strength that can break 32 tiles with one blow. However, the 32 Brick Fist that Luffy shouted, smashed the huge tree in front of him with a single blow and flew back a good distance. At the same time as it flew upside down, it also crashed and smashed other giant trees along the way.


    The whole jungle was covered in smoke.


    After 32 Brick Fist, should it be called 33 Brick Fist, or what, Luffy doesn''t know.


    He is toozy to care.


    So even though his punches are getting stronger day by day, he is still shouting a 32 Brick Fist.


    At this time, Ace appeared not far behind Luffy, he threw the suitcase in his hand to Luffy, and said, "Luffy! Let''s fight onest time!"


    Luffy took the suitcase, smiled brightly, and turned on the switch of the suitcase: "Okay, Silver! Come on!"


    After saying that, he rushed towards Ace together with the Silver in his hand.


    The duel begins!


    Silver Eater is sometimes turned into a de for shing and stabbing, and into a t-toothed monster that can expand and contract freely,bining with rubber fists and legs to cooperate with these attacks.


    Silver is used in Luffy''s hand, like the fifth arm he was born with.


    The attack caused Ace to retreat again and again.


    Finally, after dozens of rounds, just listen to ''Dang!'' a loud bang.


    The faucet steel pipe in Ace''s hand was cut off by the Silver ghee that turned into a de, and at the same time it turned into a t-toothed monster, and it was about to bite Ace''s head!


    "Silver, stop!"


    The giant t-toothed mouth approached Ace, stopped, and then slowly retreated, turning into a de again.


    Seeing this, Ace couldn''t help but sighed in relief.


    The saliva from the giant t-toothed mouth just now dripped onto his cheeks.


    If Luffy hadn''t stopped it, I guess he really wouldn''t have exined it here today.


    He scared him into a cold sweat.


    After 7 years of training, Luffy, the worry-free younger brother, finally defeated him. However, he was not discouraged by it.


    The reason why Luffy was able to defeat him so easily wasrgely because of this weapon.


    There is nothing to me.


    He believed that as long as he went to sea, even if he didn''t have a big brother like Li Yaoxiang to give him a weapon, he would definitely be able to find his own weapon in this sea and find another way to still be stronger.


    Luffy walked up to Ace and helped Ace by pulling his hand.


    "Going to sea today?"


    "Um."


    "Have you packed your bags?"


    "Not yet."


    "Let''s go, I''ll apany you."


    After a while, Dadan''s home.


    As soon as they entered the door, Curly Dadan threw the burden directly on Ace, and said fiercely: "If you want to get out, get out! Why are you still dawdling here?! I don''t have the spare time to continue to take care of you!"


    After saying that, Curly Dadan turned around as if sulking, sat down, and didn''t even look at Ace again.


    The rest of the bandits were not as enthusiastic as Curly Dadan, saying that they wanted to send Ace thest ride together.


    Ace was surrounded by a group of bandits like this, from Colubo Mountain to Windmill Vige, and then said goodbye to Windmill Vige''s acquaintances such as Makino and the vige chief.


    The vigers of Windmill Vige also joined the farewell team.


    Soon, a group of people came to the pier.


    Before leaving, Ace patted Luffy on the shoulder and said, "Remember, if you really want to be a marine, don''t be that kind of marine, otherwise, I wille back and kill you myself!"


    Luffy lookedplicated and bit his lower lip.


    Nod.


    Immediately afterwards, Ace immediately opened the topic and broke the heavy atmosphere: "By the way, help me tell Dadan, thank her for taking care of me for so many years!"


    Luffy resumed his smile: "Yeah!"


    Ace stepped onto the boat.


    The boat drifted away.


    "Goodbye! Ace!"


    "Wait and see! I''ll be famous for you soon!"


    Back at Dadan''s house, Luffy told Curly Dadan what Ace said.


    The seemingly vicious and unfeeling Curly Dadan was moved to tears on the spot, but she still insisted: "Stop talking, Idiot!!"


    So, the son of Pirate King, just embarked on his voyage...


    A few monthster, Luffy and others could even read Ace''s wanted notice in the newspaper, knowing that Ace and his partners founded the Spade Pirates, and that Ace was really famous.


    But that''s all forter.


    Because in the morning after Ace went to sea, Li Yaoxiang appeared in Colubo Mountain again and appeared in front of Luffy.


    In the past seven years, in addition to carrying out his own ns, Li Yaoxiang also instructed Luffy to train and be stronger from time to time. He intends toy the foundation for Luffy''s three-color Haki.


    "Big brother, where are we going this time?"


    "Take you to experience, you just follow along."


    "Oh..."


    Shells Town.


    This was originally a peaceful town.


    But since the Marine transferred a captain named Morgan, the whole town has never been peaceful. As soon as this marine captain named Morgan took office, he implemented a series of tyranny... which made the residents of Shells Town miserable.


    And, to make matters worse, Morgan also has a son named Helmeppo, who always likes to bully the market on the streets.


    He recently bought a wolf out of nowhere and kept it as a pet.


    He likes to take it for walks on the street.


    It was so frightening that the residents dared not even go out.


    On this day, Helmeppo walked on the street with his pet wolf again. But with slender hands and feet, he couldn''t hold the rope that tied the pet wolf at all.


    It happened that the pet wolf was staring at amoner on the street at this time, and he broke free from the shackles of Helmeppo and rushed towards themoners.


    Even if Helmeppo wanted to stop it, it was toote to stop it.


    Just when the pet wolf was about to catch up with themon man, a burst of anger suddenly came from everyone''s ears: "Rubber  32 Brick Fist!"


    The pet wolf was beaten so much that his eyes popped out.


    It flew upside down.


    It was still rolling on the ground continuously, rubbing dozens of times, and finally moaning twice, and it waspletely hups.


    Helmeppo was relieved to see that no one was injured.


    But he reacted at once, and immediately turned an ugly face: "My pet! Who is it?!! Who killed my pet?! Don''t you know who I am?! I am the son of the great naval captain, Morgan! How dare you kill my pet?!"


    Helmeppo looked around.


    Trying to find the attacker.


    Soon, he saw a guy in a straw hat and a suitcase not far away, and a guy behind him was wearing a mask, who was not a good person at first nce, walking towards him in a very conspicuous way

 Chapter 379: Helmeppos Difficulties

    Chapter 379: Helmeppo''s Difficulties


    "You, you, you! You killed my pet, right?! Do you know who I am?! You even shot at my pet?!! I''m a marine..."


    Before Helmeppo could finish speaking, Luffy punched him with a rubber fist.


    The picture came to a slow motion.


    Helmeppo''s eyes widened,pletely unaware that the guy in front of him would actually beat him. His cheeks were slowly beaten to one side, and then his saliva and teeth were beaten out. A few bloody teeth were still in the air with a fewrge 360-degree rotations.


    Immediately afterwards, the screen returned to normal speed.


    Helmeppo was also beaten to a 360-degree rotation, and then flew upside down andnded perfectly.


    boom!


    He plunged headlong into a cart on the side of the street.


    He smashed the whole cart.


    Not only was the group of guard seamen dumbfounded, they all stared, their chins dropped to their navels, and their mouths opened. Even themoner on the street never thought that someone would choose to offend Helmeppo in order to save himself.


    You said you could save him, why beat him?


    Is this consequence something that amoner like me can afford? !


    It wasn''t until the smashed cart came out of Helmeppo''s moan... that everyone came to their senses, and their facial expressions were still full of disbelief!


    Themon people did not look back and ran away from the scene in a sh.


    Faster than a certain Olympic gold medalist.


    The guards were also trembling with fear, and they quickly raised their guns and aimed them at Luffy and Li Yaoxiang.


    "Don''t move! Who are you?! How dare you be the son of the Captain!!"


    "Ouch~ it hurts~" Helmeppo got up from the pile of rubbish cars.


    His cheeks were swollen.


    Even the words leaked weakly.


    He subconsciously touched his hot cheeks, and he felt the pain on the spot and he didn''t want it. He immediately pointed at Luffy and Li Yaoxiang and scolded: "Damn! How dare you hit me?! I''m a mar..."


    Luffy dashed in front of Helmeppo.


    The speed of was so fast that it was toote for the guards to pull the trigger.


    Before Helmeppo finished speaking, Luffy grabbed Helmeppo''s cor and shouted angrily: "What did you say you were?! What did you say you were!!!"


    Helmeppo was stunned for a moment.


    He subconsciously replied: "I am the Marine..."


    "Marine?! Is there someone like you in the marine?! This is what the marine should do?!"


    "I...I...I..."


    "Quick... Quick... Let go of the young master! If you don''t let go of the young master, we will shoot!" Helmeppo was caught, and the guards were all nervous to death.


    "Yes... yes! Let me go! If you don''t let me go, I will tell them to shoot!" He pointed at Li Yaoxiang with a big hand, "Shoot him! Shoot him! If he doesn''t let me go, shoot him!"


    Luffy didn''t take Li Yaoxiang''s safety to heart at all.


    He knew that Li Yaoxiang would be fine.


    He picked up Helmeppo and beat him violently: "Marine! How dare you call yourself a marine! You think you still dare to call yourself a marine!"


    One punch.


    Fist to the flesh.


    Helmeppo was beaten so badly that Helmeppo''s head was full of stars.


    Finally, a certain marine who was too nervous couldn''t help but shoot. With the first gunshots, the rest of the people were too frightened to pull the trigger one after another. They don''t know who Luffy and Li Yaoxiang are.


    They just know the only thing they can do now is shoot.


    The people in front of them were indifferent to the warning to shoot, so they had no choice but to do so.


    However, when everyone regretted firing the shot and worried that they would kill a good man, a surprising scene appeared.


    They saw the bullets that were shot at the masked man, all strangely staying in the air.


    Then the masked man waved his hand.


    The bullets all fell to the ground.


    This once again made everyone look dumbfounded.


    Li Yaoxiang nced at the crowd around him and said coldly, "Go back and tell your Captain, if you want his son to be okay, ask him toe here in person."


    Seeing the weird abilities and strengths of Li Yaoxiang and Luffy.


    As everyone knows, they really have a big deal this time.


    Seeing that Li Yaoxiang didn''t do anything and didn''t seem to mean to kill the Captain''s son, everyone didn''t dare to neglect and ran back to the marine base immediately.


    Helmeppo watching this scene is in despair.


    He said with a leaky tone: "Don''t run, don''t run~ You can''t leave me alone~ My dad is a great Captain~"


    As soon as the voice fell, all the marines had already run away.


    The whole street was empty and it couldn''t be quieter.


    Luffy red fiercely at Helmeppo with a miserable face: "Marine? Are you the only one who deserves to say the word marine?"


    "Ah! Ah! Don''t, don''t kill me! My dad is Captain Morgan! You, you, you can''t kill me!"


    "Marine?! You still have the face to say you are a marine?!"


    Seeing Helmeppo''s abominable behavior, he couldn''t help but remind Luffy of Sabo''s death, and remembered that he had not been able to avenge Sabo until now: "Big brother, can I kill him and kill those marines?"


    Helmeppo heard Luffy say that he was going to kill him.


    He was frightened and copsed on the spot.


    He burst into tears, and he couldn''t hold back any longer. He said his difficulties all at once: "Don''t kill me! Don''t kill me! There''s no way I can do this! I don''t want it either!"


    Luffy''s expression changed: "What do you mean?"


    Belumeb cried loudly: "I don''t want to bully the market either, I do this to wake up my father. My father was not like this before. He was a good father, a good marine. When I was a child, he used to often tell me the story of the Marine punishing evil and promoting good. Warning me, I must be a righteous marine when I grow up! For some reason, everything has changed since he came back from the oceanst time! He became arrogant! Be greedy for power! I don''t care about this family anymore! I did this just to wake him up. If you don''t believe me, you can ask the residents nearby. Although my actions are abominable, I haven''t really hurt anyone. The wolf just now was just an ident... I didn''t mean to!"


    Morgan in this period has just taken office.


    Helmeppo''s evil deeds are indeed not as serious as three yearster.


    It is estimated that after three years, he has gradually changed from pretending to be a bully to an actual habit. He couldn''t even tell if he was pretending or what.


    Hearing this, coupled with Helmeppo''s crying, it didn''t look like he was lying.


    Luffy hesitated.


    He gradually loosened the cor of Belumebo, and couldn''t help but ask, "Big brother, is what he said true? Do you know what''s going on?"

 Chapter 380: Syrup Village

    Chapter 380: Syrup Vige


    "Some things are not as simple as they seem on the surface, and you need to distinguish those marines yourself. Pirates are not necessarily all bad people, and the marine is not necessarily all good people. After so many things over the years, haven''t you seen this simple truth clearly yet?"


    There is something in the words.


    In the clouds and fog,


    Luffy was at a loss.


    "Then... is what he said true or false?"


    "" After a long silence, Li Fan said, "He didn''t lie."


    "Then why did his father be like this?"


    "He was corrupted by a pirate."


    TL note: In his youth, Morgan was the sole survivor of an attack by Captain Kuro of the ck Cat Pirates, and was subsequently hypnotized into thinking he had captured the infamous pirate. Neither man is known to have thought about the other since, though Morgan continues to allude to the incident as justification for his Captain rank.


    This time, without waiting for Luffy to say anything, Helmeppo''s reaction was the first to get excited: "What?! You said that my father did this because of the pirates?! What the hell is going on?! Who is it? What?! What the hell did they do to my father?!"


    Luffy gritted his teeth: "Damn, pirate! Another pirate!"


    Li Yaoxiang did not answer.


    Helmeppo saw that Li Yaoxiang didn''t pay attention to him at all, he quickly shook Luffy''s body and begged: "Please, please! Please tell him, okay?"


    Luffy was startled.


    Immediately, he also looked at Li Yaoxiang with pleading eyes.


    "The reason why his father was able to be promoted to Captain was because he sessfully arrested the captain of the ck Cat Pirates when he went to sea for thest time, nicknamed Kuro of Hundred ns..."


    Hearing this, Helmeppo the chicken nodded again and again.


    He has also heard of these news.


    This masked man really knows his father''s problems!


    "However, the real situation is that the captain of the ck Cat Pirates was tired of the life of pirates. He killed all the marines on the military ship, leaving only Morgan, who was seriously injured andatose at the time, and then ordered his subordinates to hypnotize them separately. Morgan and one of the substitutes made Morgan really think that he had sessfully arrested the captain of the ck Cat Pirates and finally sent him to be executed. Since then, the captain of the ck Cat Pirates has managed to remain anonymous and get away with impunity.


    "What?! You, you, you mean, my father was hypnotized?! Great! Great! I knew my father wasn''t like this! I knew it!"


    He said that here.


    Morgan, not far away, has arrived here with a group of marines.


    "Okay...I want to see who is the one who has the gall to ate a bear''s and a leopard''s heart and dared to make me walk here! Are you two people who don''t know whether to live or die?" The giant axe on his arm walked over fiercely.


    Helmeppo rushed over without saying a word.


    Luffy didn''t stop it either.


    "Great, great, father! It turns out that you were hypnotized! Wake up! Wake up!" Helmeppo blocked Morgan''s way, shaking Morgan''s arm as hard as he could, trying to wake Morgan.


    Morgan swung his hand away, directly throwing Helmeppo away.


    "Go away! You idiot! I''ve lost my face! What are you talking about?! You think I''m here to save you?! I''m just here to teach those who disobey me! Remember, you can use my name, but the great man is your father, not you!"


    Helmeppo was taken aback.


    His father had never treated him so rudely.


    This made him more convinced that what Li Yaoxiang said was the truth.


    He looked panicked and shouted in the direction of Li Yaoxiang: "How can I wake up my father? Please tell me! Please!"


    Li Yaoxiang also did not answer.


    Helmeppo turned to look at Luffy.


    Luffy looked at Li Yaoxiang again.


    "If you want to wake him up, you can only find the person who hypnotized him and make that person break the hypnosis in person."


    "Oh, hypnosis? You two used these lies to confuse my idiot son, right?" After speaking, he continued to walk towards Li Yaoxiang and Luffy with a bad look.


    Helmeppo, who fell to the ground, rushed forward again and stopped Morgan.


    In order to stop Morgan, Helmeppo even hugged Morgan''s arm, letting Morgan toss him around without letting go.


    "Father, wake up! You are not like this! This is not the real you!" Then he looked at Luffy in the distance, "Run! Run! I''ll stop father for you! Please! Please help me find that person and let hime back to wake up father! As long as you help me, I''ll do anything!"


    Morgan was very annoyed when he was stopped by his idiot son.


    He threw hard.


    Hepletely threw Helmeppo to the ground, full of anger, he didn''t even think it was enough, and even stepped forward and kicked a few times: "It seems that I really indulged you too much before! Even you dare to disobey me?"


    Morgan kicked hard.


    Helmeppo still hugged Morgan''s feet while spitting blood, and even continued to shout in the direction of Luffy: "Please! Please!"


    Luffy looked at the scene in front of him with aplicated look, and then turned to Li Yaoxiang: "Big brother, can you help him?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "I know where that person is, and I can take you there. However, you can only decide what to do. I won''t help you. Are you sure you want to help him?"


    Luffy smiled brightly, nodding his head: "Yeah!"


    Li Yaoxiang waved his hand, and the air door appeared again.


    The two stepped into the air door one after the other.


    Seeing this, Morgan secretly scolded the bastard, but he wanted to stop it, but it was toote. He quickly ordered the seamen behind him: "Shoot! Shoot them! Why are you still standing there?!"


    Marines don''t dare to neglect him. They pulled the trigger one after another.


    boom!


    boom!


    boom!


    boom!


    Gunshots sounded one after another.


    It''s a pity, they''re already a step behind.


    Before the bullet arrived, the air door, together with Luffy and Li Yaoxiang, hadpletely disappeared from everyone''s eyes.


    This made Morgan even more annoyed, and yelled at the sailors: "Trash! You are all trash!"


    Immediately, he looked again at the idiot son who was still holding his calf, and even heaved a sigh of relief.


    He kicked hard again, directly knocked Helmeppo out.


    "Carry him!"


    At the same time.


    Syrup Vige.


    Another bright morning.


    It is a brand new day for the calm and peaceful Syrup Vige.


    And just when everyone was preparing to wee their beautiful day, a guy with a long nose suddenly ran around the vige, and shouted frantically: "No! No! There are piratesing! Run away Everyone, run away! The pirates areing in!"


    Some vigers are ustomed to it and have little reaction.


    "Oh, that Usopp guy again, looks like it''s time to go to work."


    "Ha, he really has perseverance and is still so energetic."


    "Wow ha ha ha ha! Liar!"


    Some vigers were angry.


    "You brat! I must teach you a lesson today!"


    Then a group of people carried brooms and hoes and ran after Usopp all over the vige.


    "Bastard! Don''t run!"


    "Hahahaha! Come and catch me!"


    After chasing him for a long time, Usopp escaped as always.


    Usopp is also enjoying himself, and he is very satisfied that he has brought another exciting day to the vigers...

 Chapter 381: Liar Cloth

    Chapter 381: Liar Cloth


    And while Usopp was resting on the tree trunk, two children came under the tree. They are little fans of Usopp. Dressed like a pirate.


    One is called Pepper.


    One is called Carrot.


    The two children were very excited when they saw Usopp on the tree.


    "Finally found you! Captain Usopp!"


    "Good morning! The Usopp Pirates are here!"


    Seeing the two children, Usopp was also very happy, he climbed down the tree: "Pepper, Carrot, is it just you two? Where are Onion?"


    "Must be still sleeping..."


    "Well, yes, very likely."


    "Is that so..."


    At this moment, a shouting child in the distance rushed towards several people: "Wow wow wow wow! It''s not good!"


    "Huh? Onion? What is he yelling about?"


    "It''s not good! It''s not good! There are bad peopleing!"


    "It''s true! I saw it with my own eyes! An air door appeared on the shore! Someone came out of the air door! One of them was wearing a very scary mask!"


    Usopp, Pepper, Carrot, the three of them said in unison, "Liar!!"


    "It''s true! Another one is wearing a straw hat and has a suitcase in his hand!"


    Hearing what Onion said, Usopp couldn''t help but doubt: "Is it true?!"


    "It''s true! This is bad!!"


    After confirming that the onion didn''t seem to be lying, Usopp turned around and ran away without saying a word: "It''s not good! It''s snack time! Run away!" And then stopped to exin: "Actually, I have a disease that will kill me if I don''t eat snacks."


    "Liar!!!"


    "Captain! Don''t you want to be a real pirate?! How can pirates be afraid of bad guys!"


    "That''s right! There are only two of them!"


    "What... what? Only two people? No one else?"


    "Well, just two."


    Hearing that there were only two people on the other side, Usopp regained his energy: "Okay! The Usopp Pirates are dispatched! Defend the peace of this vige! Come on,e with me!"


    "Yes!!!"


    After a while, several people came to a certain ce on the shore, hid, and quietly watched Luffy and Li Yaoxiang walking towards the vige.


    "Onion, are they the bad guys you''re talking about?"


    "Yes! It''s them! Look at his mask, how scary? How can a good person wear a mask and dare not see people?"


    "But they don''t look scary at all."


    "Yes, I feel the same way."


    At this moment, Li Yaoxiang squinted and looked at the ce where the four were hiding.


    "Wow! We''ve been discovered!" The Pepper, Carrot, and Onion turned and ran away, seeing Usopp''s eyes popping out.


    "Hey!! You guys! Don''t run away!"


    The three assholes don''t care so much, they have already escaped to the point where their shadows disappear.


    Feel the eyes of Li Yaoxiang and Luffy...


    Usopp''s neck slowly turned back like a mechanical card machine, this time...the atmosphere was really awkward...Usopp immediately became strong and calm. He walked towards Luffy and Li Yaoxiang.


    "Wow hahahaha! I''m the leader of the big pirate group that controls this vige, Usopp! Everyone calls me Captain Usopp! If you want to attack this vige, I advise you to give up!! Because my 80 million subordinates will not stand idly by!"


    Luffy said gloomily: "You are the pirate of this vige? Big brother, is he the one you are talking about?"


    Feeling Luffy''s anger, Usopp suddenly sensed something was wrong and stepped back: "Wait...wait! What are you talking about? Is there any misunderstanding between us?"


    Luffy looked bad and approached Usopp step by step: "You are the guy who hypnotized the marine and caused the whole town to be harmed by him?"


    Usopp waved his hands again and again and shook his head: "No... No! I don''t even know what you are talking about! In fact, I was just lying! I''m not a pirate!"


    "''Lying''?" Luffy looked at Li Yaoxiang suspiciously.


    Li Yaoxiang said coldly, "It''s not him."


    Luffy''s anger and murderous aura dissipated.


    Usopp also breathed a sigh of relief on the spot, and immediately asked: "By the way, what were you talking about just now? What pirates? What hypnosis? What marine?"


    After a while.


    Usopp took Luffy and Li Yaoxiang to a restaurant in the vige.


    Luffy also told Usopp about the future.


    After listening to this, Usopp nodded again and again, pretending to be a detective, and said, "Well, that is to say, there is a very evil big pirate hidden in our Syrup vige right now, right?"


    Just a moment of being handsome-


    His calm appearance was immediately broken.


    He said with a look of horror: "Then what should we do?! Who is he?! Will our vige be in danger?!"


    "The purpose of our visit this time is to catch him, to catch him and go back to relieve the hypnosis of the marine."


    "Then...then...then who is he?! Do you know?"


    Things that require brains, Luffy looked at Li Yaoxiang as a matter of course, and quietly waited for the answer.


    "It''s very simple, there aren''t many outsiders in Syrup Vige, right?"


    Usopp swallowed and nodded.


    "This incident happened not long ago. As long as you think back, if any outsiders suddenly came to the vige during this time, you will roughly know who it is."


    Speaking of this, Usopp''s mind immediately thought of the new housekeeper from his childhood sweetheart, Kaya''s house. It was said that he was living in the vige and happened to be met by Kaya''s father, so he took him in.


    But he quickly shook his head andughed at himself: "Impossible, how could it be him? That was the decision of Kaya''s father. How could uncle not see through a person?"


    He said so, but in fact he was so nervous in his heart.


    It''s not so much that I don''t believe it, he must think it''s impossible.


    Rather, Usopp doesn''t want to believe it.


    In case that new housekeeper is really an evil pirate, what should the Kaya family do? Are they okay? But the problem is that while he is thinking about this problem, he is also thinking about whether there are any other new outsiders in the vige during this period of time.


    After thinking about it, it was indeed only the new housekeeper.


    This made Usopp''s guts almost up to his throat.


    The cold sweat was dripping down.


    Luffy sensed something was wrong and asked, "What''s wrong? Do you know who it is?"


    "Oh, no, no. I''m sorry, I''m in a hurry at home, so I''ll go first. Next time I have a chance, I''ll help you find that person out."


    Having said that, Usopp left the restaurant in a hurry.


    He hurried to Kaya''s house.


    At this time, Kaya''s father hadn''t passed away, so Kaya''s family was not as terrible as three yearster, and Usopp was Kaya''s childhood sweetheart...

 Chapter 382: No One Believes

    Chapter 382: No One Believes


    Usopp shouted a few times outside the gate.


    The servant who heard the sound quickly walked in to report.


    However, before the servant was notified to let Usopp in, it was Kuro, the great pirate, who was now renamed new butler hadore''s, who came out first.


    He moved very gracefully and dressed very elegantly and walked towards Usopp.


    Seeing that it was the new housekeeper, Usopp couldn''t help shrinking his pupils.


    His legs couldn''t help shaking, and he wanted to run away.


    He pretended to be calm and forced a smile: "Hello, can I go in now?"


    When Kuro came out, he originally wanted to scold Usopp, so that Usopp would no longer pester the Kaya family, so as not to sabotage his n to seize the family property.


    But when he saw Usopp''s nervous and frightened appearance, his thoughts changed.


    His eyes shed sharply.


    He walked to Usopp and pushed his sses: "Are you afraid of me?"


    "No...No! I...I...I''m not afraid of you! What are you kidding me? I''m Usopp, the leader of the Great Pirate Squad! How could I be afraid of you?" trembling.


    He came here without Luffy, just want to take the Kaya family away from here without disturbing the new housekeeper, so as not to bring disaster to Kaya when the two sides really want to fight, after all, no one knows Luffy and Li Yaoxiang. Will strangers value the lives of the Kaya family?


    He didn''t expect that the one who came out to greet him was the new housekeeper.


    Usopp''s heart might stop any time.


    "Who told you about me?" How smart is Kuro? At a nce, he noticed that something was wrong with Usopp, and he was certain that his identity had been exposed.


    "What...what...what is your business? I...I don''t know what you''re talking about. I''m here just to meet Kaya..."


    Kuro slowly approached Usopp''s cheek and said in Usopp''s ear: "Really? Since it has been exposed, you don''t want to say it... Then I have to go in and kill this stupid family... "


    After saying that, he pushed his sses.


    He showed a weird smile.


    Then he turned and walked into the house.


    Seeing this, Usopp became anxious. He was very afraid of death, very timid, and wanted to just leave like this, but somehow, he couldn''t control himself, and shouted at Kaya: "Quickly. Run away! Kaya! Uncle! Everyone, run away! hadore is a pirate! Everyone, run away!"


    The sound of rmed the crowd in the house.


    There was indeed the sound of hurried footsteps walking towards the door.


    But instead of being nervous, Kuro turned to look at Usopp with a calm face, pushed his sses, and smiled: "You really know my identity..."


    Usopp''s face was pale, and he screamed badly!


    Obviously the other party was testing him just now!


    At this time, Kaya and some servants also came out from the door. Seeing that the person who came was really Usopp, Kaya said with a happy face: "Usopp, it''s really you who came,e in quickly."


    Everyone didn''t take Usopp''s words seriously.


    They are still smiling casually, not even trying to escape.


    "Escape! Everyone, run away! This person! This person is a pirate! He is here to harm everyone! Everyone, run away!"


    Kaya: "Usopp, don''t make trouble, how could hadore be a pirate? He was hired by father himself."


    Kaya''s parents, who were disturbed, also came out of the house at this moment, andughed heartily.


    Kaya''s mother also hooked her father''s arm, and the couple looked loving and sweet.


    "Hahahaha, Usopp,e in as soon as youe, and stop making ruckus."


    "That''s right, Usopp, how could hadore be a pirate? We can still trust Krabaatar as a person."


    "hadore, I hope you don''t mind, Usopp just wanted to y a joke on you."


    Kuro respectfully gave a very gentleman''s etiquette: "Sir, ma''am, how could I possibly care about the distinguished guests of Sir''s house? Mr. Usopp, please, Miss Kaya has been waiting for a long time, and we have already prepared refreshments for Mr." Kuro said so, but when he turned to face Usopp, he had a different face.


    He even showed Usopp his sharp cat ws from his arms.


    Posing: Go in, or I''ll kill them all right now.


    Usopp''s face paled even more.


    It''s over.


    No one believed him.


    Even now he doesn''t even have a chance to refuse.


    He had no choice but to walk into the house with his trembling legs and dry lips.


    After a while,


    The Kaya family entertained Usopp in the dining room, and several of them talked andughed. They also imed that Usopp''s lie this time was very realistic, and he still refused to give up, his expression was still as stiff.


    Refreshments were also brought out one after another.


    After the table was covered with refreshments, Kuro, who had been watching over him, suddenly said respectfully, "Sir, Madam, Miss, the refreshments are ready. If there is nothing else, I will leave first."


    Kaya''s father nodded with a smile and waved his hand.


    As soon as Kuro left the dining room, Usopp stood up in a hurry: "Uncle! Aunt! Kaya! I mean it! hadore is really a pirate! Let''s escape!"


    "Hahahaha! Usopp, are you still unwilling to give up? Come on,e on, after talking for so long, you must be tired. Let''s eat pastries first."


    "No, no! Listen to me..."


    Usopp defended himself in the dining room.


    Kuro was cleaning everyone in the big house. The reason why he didn''t do anything just now was to prevent the rumors from leaking, to alert the vigers on the ind, and to give everyone time to escape.


    Since the identity has been exposed, then the vige has to be ughtered.


    Don''t let one go!


    Soon, while Usopp was still trying to defend himself, Kuro had killed the rest of the room and returned to the dining room.


    However, at this time, his image is no longer as high-end and elegant as before.


    The clothes were scattered and covered in blood.


    The pair of cat-w weapons on his hands were even dripping with blood.


    His appearance shocked everyone in the dining room on the spot.


    Thinking of what Usopp had said before, a bad premonition had already filled the minds of the Kaya family.


    Kaya''s father''s voice trembled: "K...hadore, what''s wrong with you?"


    Kuro didn''t answer, pushed his sses with his hand pillow, and looked at Usopp: "Well? Can you tell me now who told you my identity now?"


    Usopp was stunned.


    Looking at the blood dripping from the paw, Usopp forgot to think.


    "What''s the matter? You still won''t say anything? How about I kill one every one minute until you say it?"

 Chapter 383: Silver Eater

    Chapter 383: Silver Eater


    He said so, one per minute, but Kuro didn''t n to follow it at all.


    His figure shed, and when his figure reappeared in ce, a hysterical wailing sounded from the direction of Kaya''s father: "Madam! Madam!"


    They saw Kaya''s mother''s neck suddenly dripping with blood, her face showing disbelief, she covered her neck, and her body slowly fell.


    Kaya''s father panicked and cried hysterically.


    Usopp was stunned by the scene in front of him.


    Kaya''s mother treated him very well, but he didn''t expect to be talking andughing at the same table just now, a living person, and he disappeared in the blink of an eye. Usopp''s eyes were instantly wet and red. He stared at Kuro and roared, "What the hell do you want?! What the hell are you doing?!!!"


    Kuro frowned slightly.


    "Am I not clear enough? Didn''t I ask you to tell me where did you get the news?" Kuro''s attitude was chillingly calm.


    Killing Kaya''s mother seemed like a trivial matter to him.


    But what he said next was what made Usopp feel the most despair and horror!


    "Forget it, depending on your reaction, the guy who told you the news should still be on the ind, right? As long as you kill all the people on the ind, I don''t have to worry about my identity being leaked out again. Hah, that''s not right. Since they know who I am, there may be more than one person in the loop. Before killing him, it seems that we need to cross-examine him first. If the situation is too bad, then I have to find another scapegoat and change my identity."


    While was talking, Kaya had already run to her father''s side, also crying bitterly while holding her mother''s body.


    Usopp took out his slingshot, rushed up, and roared in front of Kaya and his father: "If you want to kill them, then over my dead body!"


    At the same time.


    The scene returns to Luffy.


    Time also returned shortly after Usopp left.


    After Usopp left, Luffy looked at Li Yaoxiang dumbfoundedly, and the two stared at each other: "Big brother, what should I do now?"


    Li Yaoxiang looked at Luffy coldly and did not answer.


    Luffy, who saw this, remembered that Li Yaoxiang had said that he would not be able to help him, and he needed to solve it himself.


    Luffy scratched his head in annoyance.


    Oops.


    What to do now?


    He''s not good at brainstorming.


    Usopp said he would leave, so he didn''t know what to do now. Confused, he finally decided to find Usopp and act together.


    Then he kept asking for directions and asking about Usopp''s trail.


    Finally learned from the mouth of a viger that if you really can''t find Usopp, you can try to look for the rich man in the vige, maybe you can find Usopp there.


    So, Luffy followed the directions and walked towards Kaya''s house.


    Soon, with the distance between the two, the distance from Kaya''s house was getting closer, and Luffy felt that something was wrong.


    He smelled blood in the air.


    He also had a bad premonition in my heart.


    Luffy frowned, and hurriedly ran towards Kaya''s house.


    As soon as approached, he heard a scream from inside the house: "Father!"


    At this time, Usopp was already scarred and covered in blood, confronting Kuro. Kuro looked yful: "It seems that if I want to kill them, I have to step on your body first, right? Don''t worry, you ruined my n, and I won''t let you die so easily. Next, it should be the turn of the eldestdy you care about the most?"


    Kaya was still crying while hugging her parents'' corpses.


    Usopp was too ufortable to speak, and even looked a little dizzy, but now he is just relying on willpower to support it.


    ''Boom!'' a loud bang.


    Luffy broke through the wall and rushed in and saw the scene.


    Saw the corpse on the ground.


    Usopp was unwilling to back down when he saw the blood on his head.


    "It''s him! He''s the pirate!" Usopp roared at Kuro.


    Luffy turned his head, stared at Kuro, gritted his teeth and said, "You did everything here?"


    "You''re the guy who told this idiot about me? Where did you find out about me? Is there someone else with you?"


    Neither of them answered the question.


    At this time, Kuro also noticed Li Yaoxiang who was walking slowly towards here in the distance, and he couldn''t help but feel tight.


    Knowing and daring toe to him, he is either an idiot or extremely confident in his own strength.


    He looked at Luffy. He took another look at Li Yaoxiang in the distance.


    The former is like an idiot, he is not afraid.


    But no matter how you look at thetter, he doesn''t look like an idiot...


    The corners of Kuro''s mouth twitched, and he pushed up his sses with his hand pillow: "Unfortunately, it seems that there is no way to kill the vige..."


    His eyes swept away, his body moved, and he immediately flew towards Usopp! He wants to kill Usopp, the guy who sabotaged his n, before Li Yaoxiang, the true opponent, arrives, and then escape as soon as possible.


    Luffy, who saw this, was furious: "You dare!"


    Luffy unlocked the switch of the suitcase, and also ran in the direction of Usopp.


    Usopp himself waspletely unable to react.


    In his eyes, he could only see the figures of Kuro and Luffy disappearing at the same time, and he heard Luffy''s "You dare" in his ears. And at the moment when Usopp was stunned, Kuro''s w had already arrived in front of Usopp''s eyes.


    Just when the distance between the w and Usopp''s eyeballs was less than 5 millimeters, Kuro suddenly felt a creepy feeling all over his body.


    He was about to grab, but without even thinking about it, he immediately retreated.


    As soon as he stepped back, he just heard ''click!'' With a sound, a monster with a t tooth and a huge mouth appeared in his previous position.


    The scene in front of him made Kuro sweat in a cold sweat.


    If he hesitated for even 0.01 seconds, even if he could kill Usopp, he would have been killed by the monster in front of him now.


    Kuro''s heartbeat was unbelievably fast.


    He didn''t expect this guy who looked like an idiot in front of him to be so strong.


    This made him even more certain that the masked man who was still leisurely wandering in the distance must be even more extraordinary.


    He no longer hesitated, turned and fled in the opposite direction.


    In order to make it easier to escape, he even made a big move, cutting the roof of the entire mansion into countless pieces in an instant, trying to keep the other party busy saving people, toote to chase him.


    His idea is very good.


    But he heard a voice behind him: "Silver!"


    He turned his head to look.


    A terrifying scene appeared.


    The picture in front of him directly shocked him!


    He saw that t-toothed monster with a huge mouth, at a faster speed than him, swallowed half of the mansion in an instant!


    His feet did not stop.


    He is still running away.


    However, when he saw the t-toothed monster form a shadow and disappeared in front of his eyes, his feet suddenly became light and losing power, and he could no longer feel himself moving forward...

 Chapter 384: Darkening Usopp

    Chapter 384: Darkening Usopp


    Huh?


    Why don''t I move forward anymore?


    Is my body leaning to one side?


    Feet...why can''t my feet feel anything?


    Kuro looked down and saw that the part extending from the thigh to the foot te had disappeared for some reason. And his body was still in midair.


    With no support point, his body slowly fell to the ground.


    When the incision of the leg collided with the ground, the pain reflex nerves instantly spread all over the body! He was in so much pain that he rolled on the spot and yelled!


    "AHH!!!! Ahh--!!!!!"


    Luffy, who was full of anger, came to him in a sh. No pity for his misery! Those innocent people killed by him are a thousand times pitiful!"


    Luffy grabbed half of his body directly.


    Let his bloody wound drip all over the floor: "Fuck! Why?! Why are you doing this! Why?! Tell me why?!"


    Kuro was too in pain to answer.


    He couldn''t hear what Luffy was asking.


    At this time, he only felt heart-piercing pain.


    Man, he killed a lot.


    But he has never been so seriously injured as he is now.


    Luffy, who was burning with rage, pped him a few times. But this slight pain could not cover up the huge paining from the lower body.


    until he lost too much blood.


    until he became weaker and weaker.


    until he was numb from the pain.


    He regained some consciousness and finally understood what Luffy asked. He also knew that he would not survive, so he simply mocked Luffy: "Oh, do you need a reason to kill? Idiot..."


    Luffy''s pupils shrank and he red angrily!


    A few more ps in a row!


    "Say! Was it you?! Did you hypnotize that marine!"


    Kuro, who was dying, shed a glimpse of surprise in his eyes.


    It turns out to be...


    It turned out to be the reason why these guys were provoked...


    "Cough cough cough! Hahahahaha! Why should I tell you?" Even now, Kuro has no regrets.


    Before he died, he also had to see how the enemy was helpless to him and provoked by him.


    It''s not just Luffy who is angry at the scene.


    The mansion is gone, leaving a clear view of the surrounding scene.


    Seeing the death of the rest of the people, Usopp was dumbfounded.


    Until he sensed the movement on Luffy''s side, and heard Kaya''s grief-stricken cry behind him, and gradually, a nameless anger surged into his heart!


    He has never been so angry!


    He was so angry that his eyes were bloodshot!


    The facial features have be extremely ferocious!


    He rushed towards Luffy and grabbed half of Kuro from Luffy''s hand!


    "Why are you doing this! What the hell are you doing to everyone!" He turned to look at Luffy, "Don''t you want to know who hypnotized that marine?! If you can''t do it, I''ll help you!"


    After saying that, he bit off Kuro''s ear!


    Clue, who was numb from the pain at first, immediately re-stimted his pain-sensing nerves as soon as his ears were torn open, and the pain caused him to die again, and he couldn''t help screaming.


    "Kill me! You can kill me if you can!"


    Usopp''s eyes are not only bloodshot, but now even the whole pair of eyes are red!


    "Oh, want to die? I won''t let you die so easily!"


    He said, and ripped off the other ear of Kuro.


    Nextes the fingers, nails and more.


    The whole body was devastated by Usopp!


    "Ahh!!! Ah--!!! I''ll say it! I''ll say it all! You are looking for a hypnotist, right? His name is Zango, his name is Zango! He is the current captain of the ck Cat Pirates! Just find him! Please! Please, kill me! Kill me!"


    "No! You''re lying! What a scum like you say is not trustworthy at all!"


    While destroying Kuro.


    Usopp himself was also covered in blood.


    Mouth, chin, teeth, all are Kuro''s blood.


    At this time, he looks like a demon!


    "No! It''s true! Everything I say is true!"


    No matter what Kuro said, Usopp didn''t want to listen! He wants to return the pain of the dead to Kuro 10 times and 100 times!


    In an instant, in the rubble of the mansion in the main film, there was only Kuro''s terrifying scream.


    Kuro broke off one by one with his fingers.


    Ten fingers were broken, not enough to vent his anger.


    Usopp then broke his fingernails abruptly.


    Amidst the wreckage, there was only Kuro''s terrifyingly painful roar.


    Until Luffy got on Usopp''s shoulder: "Usopp, Usopp!"


    Usopp turned his head with red eyes and stared at Luffy: "Don''t! Don''t stop me! I can definitely help you find the answer! Leave me alone!"


    "Usopp... He is dead..."


    Usopp gasped.


    His world fell into silence.


    He looked at Kuro.


    At this time, Kuro had already lost his breath and died very cruelly.


    At this time, the vigers in the vige came here one after another because of the movement here. Seeing the tragic situation here, everyone was horrified.


    Someone went over to appease Kaya.


    Someone also came to ask about Usopp''s situation.


    Usopp nced around, his breathing gradually became less rapid than before, and his mood gradually calmed down a lot.


    He looked at Kaya, who was still crying with her parents'' corpses in her arms.


    A trace of grief andplexity shed in his eyes.


    He gritted his teeth and ran away from the scene.


    After a while.


    Luffy was on a cliff by the sea and found Usopp, who was looking at the sea and sitting on his knees.


    Luffy stepped forward and got to Usopp''s side.


    "Kaya''s fine, don''t worry. Some vigers have already brought Kaya back to rest."


    Usopp did not speak.


    "Let me tell you, don''t me yourself. Let''s go back and see her..."


    Having said this, Usopp''s tears finally flowed, and he cried very sadly: "How can you not me me? If I had told you about the pirate long ago, maybe everyone would not have died. Everyone is dead, how can you ask me to face Kaya in the future?"


    Luffy doesn''t know how tofort people.


    He could only sit quietly and watch Usopp cry.


    The sun sets.


    Usopp also cried until his tears dried up.


    Luffy finally said, "Be my partner!"


    "Huh?"


    "I heard them say that you''ve always wanted to go out to sea and be a pirate. I hate pirates. I won''t be a pirate either. But I like the sea! I like freedom! In three years, I will go out to sea. Then you will tooe join me and kill these scums in the sea with me!"


    The sea crashing filled silence for a while.


    Usopp suddenly asked, "You want to be a marine?"


    Luffy was taken aback.


    He bit his lower lip, not knowing how to answer.


    Usopp didn''t ask any further questions.


    Although he didn''t respond, he tacitly agreed...

 Chapter 385: A Different Luffy

    Chapter 385: A Different Luffy


    In a certain area of the East Blue.


    A ship that was devastated and tattered began to sink slowly.


    On the other side of the sunken ship, is a pirate ship with a cat-faced drum tower g hanging. At this time, the atmosphere on the pirate ship was very lively. They had just won a victorious battle and captured a lot of loot.


    Now the pirates of the ck Cat Pirates are all cheering on the boat.


    "Hahahahaha! Boss! This time the harvest is very rich!"


    "After this war, we won''t have to worry about food and drink for a long time!"


    "Yes, since the marine has revoked the arrest warrant for the old captain, the marine''s efforts to arrest us have also eased a lot. Now we can finally rx for a while!"


    A guy wearing pink heart sunsses stood in front of a group of pirates and said loudly: "It''s all thanks to the cat brothers. If it wasn''t for them, our battle would not have been so easy."


    This guy who talks is, of course, what Luffy is looking for, Jango.


    And just after Jango finished speaking, the cat brother on the side agreed with two sentences very shyly.


    Everyone is silent in the sense of superiority after this victory.


    They didn''t take the life of the entire ship that died just now seriously.


    Some people have even begun to push out a few barrels of wine from the cabin, ready to celebrate this big victory.


    And just when the pirates of the ck Cat Pirates were drinking happily, an air door suddenly appeared on the deck. The people who were drinking to their fullest hadn''t paid much attention at first.


    Until two people came out of the air door.


    One of them suddenly shouted around: "You are the ck Cat Pirates?!"


    For a moment.


    Everyone woke up and looked at the two of them.


    Who is this?


    Why did suddenly appear on our ship?


    New members?


    "Can''t you hear clearly? Are you the ck Cat Pirates! Where''s Jango?!"


    The person''s unkind tone finally made everyonepletely react from their doubts. Don''t care who the person is, just based on the other party''s tone, they are definitely here to find fault.


    "We are the ck Cat Pirates! Who are you?"


    "How dare youe to the site of our ck Cat Pirates and yell, don''t you know how to write the word ''dead''?!"


    "Don''t...don''t...don''t be like this, the other party looks so scary, I...I...let''s be more polite..." Among the cat brothers, Sham, tall and thin, has begun to pretend to be cowardly.


    This is his usual style when facing the enemy.


    The rest of the pirates did not dismantle it when they saw this, but instead felt a burst of joy in their hearts.


    "Jan...Jan...Jango is our captain, do you have anything to do with him?"


    Seeing someone responding, Luffy focused his eyes on Sham and said in a low voice, "Where is Jango?"


    Sham walked towards Luffy weakly, it seemed that he was really afraid of Luffy''s aura, so he didn''t dare not obey: "The boat...the boat...the captain is in the cabin, I will take you in to meet him. Bar..."


    Actually, Jango was standing next to Sham.


    Everyone gave Sham a sidelong nce.


    Theyughed heartily.


    Sham walked up to Luffy, pointed to the cabin, and let Luffy go first.


    Luffy didn''t care, so he took the lead.


    But Li Yaoxiang was unmoved.


    Sham still looked scared, turned his head to look at Li Yaoxiang: "Aren''t you going with me?"


    Li Yaoxiang gave Sham a sidelong nce, but did not speak.


    Sham didn''t seem to dare to ask, so he hurriedly turned around and followed Luffy, but at the same time, he also gave his brother Buchi a wink and signaled to the masked guy behind him, and left Lin Tian to him.


    Buchi''s mind will be met.


    The two sides exchanged nces, indicating that he understood.


    Just like that, the tall and thin Sham locked Luffy.


    The obese Buchi is locked on Li Yaoxiang.


    It is enough for the rest of the pirates to prepare to watch the show, they have absolute confidence in the cat brothers.


    Just as Luffy was about to step into the cabin, the two brothers showed their true colors in an instant, stretched out their pair of cat ws, and mmed towards their respective targets.


    But at the moment when the cat''s paw was about to hit Luffy, Luffy suddenly turned around suddenly. A rubber whip came from Buchi, who was about to attack Li Yaoxiang, also shot out.


    One was fat and one was thin, smashed the hull of the ship, and smashed directly into the sea.


    Those pirates who were waiting to see a good show and couldn''t help butugh at the corners of their mouths were all confused.


    Who am I?


    Where am I?


    This is where?


    The highestbat power of their ck Cat Pirates... Is that gone?


    Before everyone could react, Luffy only heard one sentence: "Do you really think I will believe you scumbags?! I ask for thest time! Who is Jango! If you don''t tell me, all of you will die for me!"


    During the whole process, Li Yaoxiang didn''t even move.


    But after seeing Luffy''s strength and attitude, no idiot hit Li Yaoxiang.


    "I count three! After three no one tells me who Jango is, then all of you go to hell!"


    In an instant, everyone pointed to Jango wearing pink heart sunsses.


    Jango: "..."


    Shells Town.


    After solving the problem of the ck Cat Pirates, Luffy and Li Yaoxiang came back here again through the air door. Jango was tied up like a zongzi, and was kicked to the ground by Luffy.


    As soon as the three people appeared, they immediately alerted the marines who were standing guard.


    The sea soldier trembled with fright, and immediately raised his gun and pointed at a few people: "Don''t...don''t...don''t move! If you move again, I''ll shoot!"


    Li Yaoxiang looked away like the marines.


    Feeling Li Yaoxiang''s gaze, all the marine soldiers finished their secret passage.


    Do bullets really work?


    The scene from thest time is still vivid in my mind.


    Luffy: "This person is the guy who hypnotized your Captain! Ask your Captain toe out, as long as you let him break the hypnosis, then your Captain can restore his true nature!"


    "Is the Captain really hypnotized?"


    Luffy: "What''s the matter? Don''t you even have the courage to try? Are you going to let that guy continue to run rampant? This is the so-called marine?!"


    Marines, you look into my eyes, and I look into yours.


    They finally gritted his teeth and chose to go back to report.


    After a while, Morgan came here.


    It''s just that the few marines who went to report before have already been beaten by him to the point of not being human-like, and he held it in his hand: "I can''t believe it, the two of you dare toe back and die! And it''s even more unexpected to me. What, these idiots actually believed your nonsense and said that I was hypnotized? Oh, who am I? I am the great Captain Morgan! How could I possibly be hypnotized!"

 Chapter 386: The time is ripe

    Chapter 386: The time is ripe


    Luffy is actually a little tired of this.


    He was restless.


    He wants to confirm as soon as possible whether Morgan was really hypnotized.


    If he was really hypnotized, it would be fine, at least it could prove that the marine was not as bad as he thought. After all, he actually had a little hope for the Marine in his heart.


    But if it''s fake...


    Then his perception of the marine will really fall to an unprecedented low point.


    If it''s not a nonsense either.


    He won''t waste time either.


    Before Morgan could finish his words that he couldn''t be a 2nd, Luffy took the lead in attacking with a look of disgust.


    The confident Morgan was originally overjoyed.


    After being hypnotized by Jango, he was someone who even dared to attack the marine hero Garp, let alone a guy like Luffy who didn''t juste out of a cave.


    Even though Li Yaoxiang had shown a few tricks in front of everyone before, he was still not afraid.


    The big axe is in hand, I have the world!


    But this confidence didn''tst long, when he saw Luffy, who was heading towards him, he suddenly copsed.


    followed.


    The back of the head only felt a huge pain.


    His eyes went ck, his vision swirled, and he passed outpletely.


    The whole process was incredibly fast.


    Before all the marines had time to worry, the battle was over.


    Luffy, regardless of their reaction, stunned Morgan, walked back and released Jango, then threw Jango to Morgan''s side: "Go, help me break the hypnosis now!"


    At this time, Jango had already been beaten until his nose was blue and his face was swollen.


    If it wasn''t for when Luffy beat him, he desperately said that it was all Kuro''s idea, and he was just following orders. It is estimated that his injuries were not as minor as they are now.


    Seeing Luffy''s angry eyes, he raised Jango and said, "You...you...you... if I break the hypnosis, will you let me go?"


    "If you don''t break it, then you should die now."


    Jango shrank in fright on the spot by Luffy''s aura.


    He did not dare to ask again.


    "He...he...is in aa, so there is no way to break the hypnosis..."


    Luffy is no nonsense.


    He went up and pped Morgan a few times.


    Feeling the burning pain in his cheek, Morgan gradually regained some consciousness. Soon, in the mist, he saw a guy with a bruised face and a pendant swaying in front of him.


    In his ears, there was a whisper like a spell.


    "I''m counting to three now."


    "After three, you will return to your original nature and be yourself."


    "one."


    "two."


    "three!"


    Morgan''s misty eyes suddenly widened! surprise! Terrified! Regret! Guilt! All kinds of thoughts arebined ande to my mind one after another!


    Once upon a time, he was also a passionate young man who vowed to defend justice even to the death.


    Otherwise, when facing Kuro at the beginning, he would not have been invincible.


    But when he woke up again, when he recalled what he had done during this time, he was stunned on the spot. I did all these things?


    After the panic, he turned into endless sadness and anger!


    He grieves for his colleagues who have been devastated by him, the residents who have been oppressed by him.


    He was angry at the pirates who caused him to do so many irreversible things!


    He recognized this guy with a blue nose and a swollen face!


    He hypnotized him!


    If it wasn''t for him, he wouldn''t have done those actions!


    He raised his big fist, turned over, and mmed Jango''s body to the ground. With an angry look, he also burst into tears: "It''s you! It''s all you! It''s you who made me like this!"


    Seeing Morgan''s reaction when he woke up, the marine soldiers couldn''t help but breathe a sigh of relief.


    Their Captain was really hypnotized.


    The marine''s symbol of justice rekindled in their hearts.


    Luffy, who was originally full of anger, also smiled.


    The matter has progressed here, and it finally came to an end.


    Morgan didn''t kill Jango. As a marine, he wouldn''t allow himself to lynch. He even took the initiative to ask Luffy to hand over Jango and the ck Cat Pirates to him, saying that if they are evil people like them, they will naturally be punished by thew.


    Luffy didn''t refuse either.


    After the incident, Jango was imprisoned in a cell.


    Morgan''s son, Helmeppo, was naturally released.


    As soon as the two fathers and sons met, of course they hugged and cried.


    But it didn''t take long to get together, Morgan, who had recovered his original personality, soon imed that he still had a lot of things waiting for him to deal with the aftermath, so he went with Helmeppo.


    Helmeppo, who had regained his freedom, immediately came to Luffy and cried out loudly: "Thank you! Thank you! If it wasn''t for you, my father would never havee back! Whatever you want me to do, I can do whatever you want! Say it! As long as I can do it, I will never refuse!"


    Luffy smiled brightly: "I don''t need you to do anything. You can treat the residents here well in the future and be a good marine with your father. If I find out that you have done the bad things you did before, then I wille back and kill you myself."


    Helmeppo patted his heart and assured: "No, don''t worry! I promise you! I will treat the residents here well in the future! Just like my father, be a good marine!"


    finished.


    Luffy followed Li Yaoxiang to the air door and left here.


    Back to Windmill Vige.


    Luffy was in a very happy mood.


    But before he could take a few steps, Li Yaoxiang suddenly said behind him, "You seem to be in a good mood? What''s wrong? You found out that the marine is not all bad guys, and you think you can make up your mind to be a marine again?"


    Luffy was taken aback.


    He didn''t know why the big brother said that,


    But he did have such a thought in his heart.


    "That Captain was indeed hypnotized, so he did so many bad things. But have you ever thought about why no one came out to stop him when he was bullying the residents of Shells Town? The marine side who did this can really represent justice? The world is so big, how do you know that the only people who are oppressed by the marines are the residents of Shells Town? Since the Marines didn''t stop Morgan from doing this, does that mean that other ces won''t stop it? Just like the marine ship that killed Sabo at the beginning, if you kill them, no one wille out and say something? Or are you naive enough to think that all bad marines are hypnotized?"


    Luffy was stunned.


    If there was no reminder from Li Yaoxiang, he really hadn''t thought about these issues.


    He stayed therepletely motionless.


    The thoughts in my heart wavered again.


    Seeing this, Li Yaoxiang raised the corner of his mouth hidden under the mask, and stopped talking. Open the air door and leave the windmill vige.


    Luffy''s knowledge and travels are here.


    At the same time, Li Yaoxiang''s n that has been nned for many years has finally made practical progress, and it is time to set off for thest wave of darkening...

 Chapter 387: The Battle Begins

    Chapter 387: The Battle Begins


    World Government Base.


    The Five Elders summoned a person today.


    The Room of Authority looks very domineering.


    Even in the face of the Five Elders, Li Yaoxiang only kneeled in front of them and his color remained unchanged.


    "I don''t know what the Five Elders called me for today." It was Li Yaoxiang who was not wearing a mask.


    Seven years ago, he has sessfully attracted the attention of the Five Elders.


    On this day, seven yearster, not only has he been promoted to Vice Admiral, but he has also passed the secret test of the Five Elders, sessfully swayed other opponents, and gained a lot of prestige in the Marine.


    The current younger generation in the Marine regard him as an idol and regard him as an ideal.


    There are also many people who regard him as the sessor of justice.


    It can be said that among the many vice admirals, apart from Garp, a marine hero, no one canpare with him.


    "Vice Admiral Li Yaoxiang, we have decided to promote you to the rank of Admiral. But, before that, we need to confirm one thing with you."


    Li Yaoxiang did not speak, only squinted at the talking Five Elders.


    The Five Elders all stared at Li Yaoxiang''s expression and observed his reaction.


    "Answer me, can you trust the World Government 100% and be loyal to the World Government? Listen, it''s the World Government, not the marine!"


    In the reception room, there was silence.


    If Li Yaoxiang''s expression is a little wrong, the Five Elders will immediately terminate their n.


    But Li Yaoxiang''s reaction is still like the test they gave before, there is no abnormality, and there is no anger or dissatisfaction.


    "Can."


    The Five Elders looked at each other and nodded.


    There is no hint of danger from Li Yaoxiang''s expression.


    Immediately, one of the Five Elders threw a document to Li Yaoxiang.


    "There is a task here. It is the first task given to you by the World Government after you are promoted to Admiral. As long as youplete this task, after Aokiji retires, the position ofmander-in-chief of the marine will be yours." The Five Elders pped his palm twice.


    Immediately, Rob Li, Kaku, Jabra, Blueno and other members of CP9 walked in from the door and stood in a row.


    The Five Elders continued: "At that time, CP9 will assist you inpleting that task, and they will obey you during the task."


    CP9 held their heads high and their faces expressionless.


    Li Yaoxiang nced at them, thinking in his heart that the butterfly effect had finally appeared. In the original book, CP9 at this time should have gone to the capital of the Water 7 to be undercover agents.


    But now they were sent to help him.


    This must have something to do with this mission.


    If there are no idents, the content of the document should be the n that he has made for many years.


    Open the file and take a look.


    Li Yaoxiang''s eyes shed a hint of excitement in the dark.


    A few hourster.


    The group of CP9 set foot on Li Yaoxiang''s warship and ran in a certain direction with Li Yaoxiang.


    Li Yaoxiang casually ordered several marines: "Take them to the cabin and arrange a room for them."


    Immediately, he looked at the group of CP9: "You guys are not allowed to step out of the door without my order."


    The expressions of the CP9 gang changed slightly. After thest time Garp made a scene on the Judicial Ind, almost every one of them has been reborn, and they are much stronger than before.


    Moreover, even if they don''t look at their strength, their status is not worse than the average Rear Admiral.


    I didn''t expect this new star of the marine to be so unwilling to see them.


    The hot-tempered Jabra originally wanted to get angry, but was stopped by a look from the captain Rob Li.


    Rob Li said yes on behalf of the rest of the members.


    Immediately followed the few marines to their room.


    Not long after the CP9 group left, Dory, who was with Li Yaoxiang at the time, said this for no apparent reason: "Do you need me to have them deal with them?"


    Today''s Dory, the whole person looks a lot calmer.


    There are a few more scars on the face.


    He was no longer the heartless sycophant he used to be.


    "Now is not the time to go against them."


    "Yes."


    A few monthster.


    On a certain sea area.


    Garp''s battleship sailed in this sea.


    Not long after, a battleship that was also a marine sailed towards Garp''s battleship. Even though the marines on the Garp''s battleship had ordered the other party to stay away, the other party continued to move forward, looking very domineering.


    After Garp saw the figure on the opponent''s battleship clearly, his pupils could not help shrinking, and his expression was furious!


    On the opposing battleship, the group standing on the deck was Li Yaoxiang and the group of CP9!


    Exactly.


    The so-called mission in the mouth of the Five Elders is for the Monkey D family!


    Seven years ago, because of Garp''s troubles on Judicial Ind, the World Government lost face. So they have been plotting how topletely solve the trouble of the Monkey D family with little loss.


    Li Yaoxiang, an extraordinary marine star, appeared, which just happened to give them hope.


    As long as Li Yaoxiang''s prestige and strength canpletely suppress Garp and prevent the marine from making mistakes, then they can take the lead inunching an offensive against the Revolutionary Army.


    And Li Yaoxiang has been umting prestige for so many years, just to meet this condition of the World Government.


    Let them have no worries and can do those bottomless behaviors to their heart''s content.


    Sure enough, when Li Yaoxiang, a guy who meets the conditions, appears, they don''t have to pretend anymore.


    "Humph! You brats still dare to appear in front of me? Do you think I didn''t teach you enoughst time?!" Immediately, Garp turned to look at Li Yaoxiang, who was headed by him, with aplicated expression, "I recognize you! You are the new admiral that everyone has been paying attention to recently, right? What''s the matter, what''s the matter with me this time?"


    Li Yaoxiang said indifferently: "At the order of the Five Elders, I will arrest you, a spy of the Revolutionary Army."


    The marines on the Garp battleship were shocked when they heard the words.


    Li Yaoxiang continued: "Oh, no, you are not a spy. It should be said that you are the mastermind of the Revolutionary Army. After all, the leader of the Revolutionary Army, Monkey D Dragon, is your son, right? Monkey D Garp..."


    Speaking of which.


    The guys were even more surprised.


    All looked at Garp in disbelief.


    Garp was so angry that his face flushed, and he didn''t bother to defend: "Are the Five Elders crazy?! Are they ready to provoke a world war?!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Provoking a world war? There''s a right question to ask you. If it weren''t for you, a marine hero, who has been letting your son''s Revolutionary Army grow bigger, how could this day havee? In order to reduce unnecessary sacrifice, take it easy, Monkey D Garp."


    "Okay! Originally I was very optimistic about you, little guy, but I didn''t expect you to join them! Want to catch me? Let''s see how much you got!"

 Chapter 388: CP9s Counterattack

    Chapter 388: CP9''s Counterattack


    "Bring the shells!"


    Garp was ready to attack.


    On his battleship, there were still some stunned marine soldiers, but he mmed him: "What''s the matter? Is my words useless now?! Sure enough, you, like them, you''re theckeys of the World Government!!"


    "No... Vice Admiral Garp..."


    There was a marine soldier who wanted to stand up and exin, but Garp ignored it and sent him flying with one punch.


    The strength doesn''t seem to be light.


    Then he roared frantically, and took care of the cannonball: "Get out! Get out of here! You bastards of the World Government! I knew you were unfamiliar dogs!"


    Garp''s series of tantrums, in the eyes of CP9, only caused a trace of disdain in everyone''s eyes. Jabra, who was the most obvious, even sneered.


    Everyone knows very well that Garp is just trying to distance himself from other people and not wanting to involve them.


    Li Yaoxiang looked at all this indifferently, and said coldly: "You won''t go?"


    Obviously, this sentence is aimed at the CP9 group.


    Because the marines on Li Yaoxiang''s battleship didn''t even move at all except standing neatly at the rear.


    Rob Li frowned slightly: "Admiral Li Yaoxiang, we are just sent by the World Government to assist you..."


    "You also say that the World Government sent you to assist me. If everything is resolved by me and my subordinates, why do you still need to do this mission? Just for decoration? Besides, you forgot what the Five Elders said before departure? Beforepleting the mission, you must all obey me. What''s the matter? Are you going to disobey the order now?"


    "You!" Jabra was so angry that he wanted to go rough.


    "Jabra!" Rob Li red at him.


    Jabra backed away.


    "Since Admiral Li Yaoxiang wants to see the strength of our CP9, let him see the effect of the special training we have done over the years."


    Having said that, Rob Li was the first to use the fruit ability to be a leopard man, and then he rushed towards Garp in the direction of Garp with several ''Moonwalk'' in the air.


    The rest of the CP9 members saw this, and the same was true.


    Transformation that can transform.


    Those who can''t transform are already ready to go, keeping up with Rob Li''s footsteps.


    Their enemy is Garp.


    Everyone dared not neglect, and nned to use all their strength as soon as they came.


    At this time, Garp had already picked up the first cannonball in his hand. Seeing that the Admiral Li Yaoxiang didn''t even mean to do anything, Garp was even more annoyed.


    The shell was directly thrown at Rob Li, who was the leader.


    The sound of breaking air sounded.


    The speed of the cannonballs is far more violent than the power of the cannon bombing!


    But, an unexpected ident happened to Garp.


    Rob Li, who became a leopard man, with an invisibleyer of armor on his legs, and kicked the cannonball into the sea with one foot, while he himself was unharmed and continued to use the Moonwalk, rushing towards Garp.


    Armament Haki!


    That''s right, this is how CP9 dared to face Garp again this time!


    7 years ago, their entire CP9 face was repeatedly rubbed by Garp to the ground!


    In the past 7 years, they have been improving all the time.


    Because of this, their current strength is far stronger than in the original work where they became undercover and neglected to exercise! Almost all members have already touched the field of Armament Haki and Observation Haki.


    As for Rob Li, the most talented genius of CP9 in the past 800 years, he is the one who has made the most rapid progress in the entire team!


    In the blink of an eye, he was already in front of Garp.


    The two of them punched at the same time!


    The two fists covered with domineering armed colors collided at the same time, and the resulting fluctuations, even the air was sted out visibly.


    Garp took a step back.


    Rob Li retreated for a long distance, and even the deck was scratched with ck smoke by his back momentum.


    The two CP9 members who had just arrived just happened to catch him at the back, which was able to stop the trend of retreating.


    Rob Li looked solemn.


    Worthy of being the famous marine hero Monkey D Garp for many years.


    Even though he is several times stronger than he was seven years ago, he is still no match for the old guy in front of him.


    "Let''s do it together!"


    "Yes!"


    Immediately, the members of CP9 formed an encirclement circle, surrounded Garp in it, and attacked in turn. Garp was like a god of war. Facing the beatings of the crowd, he still didn''t change his face and didn''t catch his breath.


    Beat the members of CP9 to the ground.


    Rushed back and punched again.


    The marines watching, let alone help, they couldn''t even get close.


    Seeing this, Rob Li, seeing that the situation was not good, instead withdrew from the battle.


    And just when all CP9 members were bruised by Garp, Rob Li, who had withdrawn from the battle, suddenly shouted at Garp in the encirclement: "Vice Admiral Garp! I will kill all your subordinates! I will do what I say! You know it."


    It turns out that after Rob Li quit the battle, he went to control all the marines on the Garp battleship.


    Now a group of people are also bruised by Rob Li and are sitting in a pile.


    "You!!"


    "Stop doing unnecessary struggles. If you don''t want your subordinates to have an ident, then just give up!"


    The members of CP9 stopped attacking.


    Everyone waits for Garp to make a choice.


    "Vice Admiral Garp! Leave us alone! If we die, then kill them all to avenge us!"


    "Yes! Vice Admiral Garp, leave us alone!"


    Garp''s expression wasplicated, but he finally released the fierce aura on his body, and snorted coldly: "Hmph, even if I go back with you, you are so confident that you can keep me?"


    "You don''t have to worry about Vice Admiral Garp. For you, we have prepared the best medical team to ensure that there will be no idents during the process of transporting you back."


    Garp is unwilling. Over the years, he has made so many contributions to the Marine, but he did not expect this result in the end.


    But in order to save the lives of his subordinates, he had topromise.


    "Okay! Let them go first, then I''ll go back with you!"


    Soon, CP9 brought Garp back to Li Yaoxiang''s battleship. After Garp''s warshippletely disappeared from view, Garp was willing to ept the ''treatment'' of the medical team.


    During the process, CP9 was not afraid that Garp would go back and resist.


    If Garp''s subordinates can escape, CP9 will naturally have the ability to catch up and kill them all. Garp probably doesn''t understand this.


    Wait until everything is done.


    Garp was also ''treated'' and bound, and the Li Yaoxiang''s battleship officially set sail, returning to the direction of the World Government Base.


    However, Jabra, who had umted a body of resentment, refused to give up.


    He wanted to give Garp the humiliation he suffered back then.


    He walked to Garp''s ear and said with a smile: "Oh, do you really think we''ll let your subordinates go? Didn''t you notice that two members of our CP9 were missing? Don''t worry, they will catch up and let your subordinates have a nicer walk."


    "You!" Garp, who was tied to the chair, flushed with anger.


    He struggled desperately.


    After being ''healed'', he has no ability to break free at all.


    At this time, Li Yaoxiang''s apuse suddenly sounded behind Jabra: "Very good! Your CP9s have done very well! Now that the task has beenpleted, then leave it to me, you can go back to your rooms and rest."

 Chapter 389: There is no misunderstanding between us

    Chapter 389: There is no misunderstanding between us


    As soon as these words came out, not only Jabra, who has always been hot, could no longer hide his murderous eyes, but even Rob Li, who was on the side, looked at Li Yaoxiang with a bad look!


    Rob Li was the first to speak: "Admiral Li Yaoxiang, you must have misunderstood something. The order of the World Government to assign us CP9 is to let us obey you until the task ispleted. Now Garp has arrived, and the task has beenpleted. We are not your subordinates, we no longer need to follow your orders."


    "Oh, that''s right. You reminded me. Thanks! Didn''t you hear what they said? The mission has beenpleted, why are they still here? Don''t you think our battleships are not crowded enough?"


    "Yes! Sorry, Admiral! We were negligent!"


    Having said that, all of Li Yaoxiang''s subordinates suddenly surrounded the members of CP9!


    Not only that, two more marines came back with two corpses and threw them in front of the CP9 group.


    "Sorry, these two guys went to sea without my consent. My warships are more disciplined than the norms. My subordinates found two guys who vited discipline, and they were settled at will. I hope you won''t mind."


    "Fukurou!"


    "Kalifa!"


    Killing these two is precisely the two CP9 members who were going to hunt down Garp''s subordinates.


    All CP9 members were shocked when they saw the bodies of the two!


    Even if they didn''t see the Admiral Li Yaoxiang right in front of them, they never had any murderous intentions towards Li Yaoxiang.


    They didn''t want to, but the other party actually attacked them first!


    And there is no warning or negotiation!


    Rob Li, who has been patient for a long time, can''t bear it any longer!


    Seven years ago, since they suffered Garp''s humiliation on Judicial Ind, they swore that they would never let this happen to them again!


    Before, Li Yaoxiang repeatedly challenged them again and again. Now he''s even directly killing them. How can they still be patient with this tone?!


    The other party has already urinated all over their head, and they have to endure it. Then why have everyone worked so hard to be stronger in the past 7 years?!


    The unbearable Rob Li rushed over first! The right leg attacked fiercely like a whip, and directly aimed at Li Yaoxiang''s temple, wanting to strike a critical hit "Shave"!


    But Li Yaoxiang stood there, motionless!


    He doesn''t need to.


    Dory, who was beside him, had already taken the initiative to stand up to meet Rob Li''s blow.


    It is also a leg whip.


    It is also shave.


    The calves of both sides collided violently in the air.


    A loud bang.


    They stared at each other, no one took a half step back.


    "Hah, how lucky. Look at you, you won''t have an advantage before someone else bes a beast. If he bes a beast, then how will you do?"


    "Sorry, Admiral. I''ll definitely work harder afterwards!"


    On Li Yaoxiang''s side, everyone looked calm.


    But the CP9 side had an ugly look on their faces.


    Although Rob Li didn''t be a leopard man, and although Rob Li didn''t use the Armament Haki, his shaving with all his strength was not something that a cat or a dog could stop him.


    If this attack was blocked by the Admiral Li Yaoxiang, it would be normal.


    Now even even


    Let''s say it''s a deputy, that can go toe to toe with Li?


    What is the strength of the other marines?


    What will be the strength of this Admiral, Li Yaoxiang?


    The more he thought about it, the uglier the faces of CP9 and his party, and there was even a faint feeling in their hearts.


    Of course Rob Li found this too. When he first got on the ship, he had already noticed the marines on the ship, and the aura seemed to be somewhat different from the marines he had seen before.


    But they were just marine soldiers, so he didn''t care much at the time.


    But after such a careful observation, he found that this battleship, every marine''s face, has an indescribable calm and self-confidence. Normal marines don''t have this. He doesn''t think it''s just something that can be done with discipline.


    Didn''t you see that the marines who followed Garp for many years were all flustered when they fought?


    Rob Li slowly retracted the whip, and cautiously nced at the surrounding crowd: "Admiral Li Yaoxiang, it seems that there is some misunderstanding between us. Our people left the ship without authorization, they are in the wrong. This matter- we will not investigate further, nor will we report it. Since you are not satisfied, Admiral, then we will go back to the room to rest..."


    Li Yaoxiang smiled: "No no no, there is no misunderstanding between us. I just want to kill you."


    Rob Li''s pupils shrunk!


    "Escape!"


    Immediately, the rest of CP9 fled in different directions at the same time.


    They n to smash through the hull and escape!


    Unfortunately, thest thing they wanted to see happened after all.


    They were greeted by the seemingly inconspicuous marines they had dismissed before. No matter how frantically they smashed, they couldn''t break through the siege.


    Every marine is proficient in the Rokushiki!


    Although none of them have learned Haki yet, the individual strength of each one can''tpare to any one of CP9, but the problem is that why are there so many of them?


    One person can''t evenpare, so what about a group fight?


    The battleship Li Yaoxiang has a total of hundreds of marines, 10 against 1 is not too much, right?


    There were even spare marines on board to deal with the aftermath of their battles. The result, of course, was that CP9 and his party were unable to smash the hull.


    Now that things have developed, there is no need for Li Yaoxiang to do it himself.


    This group of his subordinates had initially understood the Rokushiki seven years ago. On this day, seven yearster, the Rokushiki has already been mastered to the core by them. It''s enough for them to deal with CP9.


    Garp, who was going to watch the y, is now also surprised.


    The strength of these marines is more than enough to be a Rear Admiral.


    He didn''t expect that this newly promoted Admiral would gather such a terrifying force.


    Before he coulde back to his senses, Li Yaoxiang''s voice suddenly entered his ears: "Vice Admiral Garp, it''s a bit noisy here, why don''t youe into the study with me and have a good chat?"


    After saying that, Li Yaoxiang waved his arm.


    The rope that bound Garp was cut in half on the spot.


    Rob Li, who was fighting hard, obviously also sensed the movement here. He couldn''t care so much, and quickly grabbed thest straw: "Li Yaoxiang! You can''t kill us! If you kill us, the World Government will definitely not let it past you!"


    Li Yaoxiang waved his hand and said indifferently: "I will report of your heroic death in order to arrest Monkey D Garp, so you can go with confidence."


    Immediately, Li Yaoxiang turned towards Garp with a smile on his face: "Vice Admiral Garp, please."

 Chapter 390: Got Fooled

    Chapter 390: Got Fooled


    In the study.


    Garp rubbed his wrists that were bound a little painfully and stared vigntly at the young man in front of him who he really couldn''t see through.


    Li Yaoxiang poured himself a drink with a calm expression, and asked, "Whiskey? Or champagne?"


    "Admiral Li Yaoxiang, what is your purpose of arresting me here?"


    Li Yaoxiang handed a ss of wine to Garp: "Vice Admiral Garp, rx, don''t be so nervous. It''s not that I want to catch you, but the Five Elders sent me to catch you."


    "Then what''s going on now? You killed the group of people outside, aren''t you afraid that you won''t be able to exin to them?"


    "You don''t need to worry about that on this level, Vice Admiral Garp. I have already arranged the story for you. CP9 in the process of arresting the revolutionary leader Monkey D. Garp, died heroically, together with Monkey D. Garp die together. What? Is this script not okay? It can be considered a good name for them after they die."


    Garp looked angry: "What do you mean!"


    Garp knew very well what cunning guys the Five Elders are.


    Isn''t arresting him just to use him to threaten his son Monkey D. Dragon?


    So, the Five Elders will never kill him.


    But the marine star in front of him is not cooperating with them!


    He didn''t even care about him, even the Five Elders. Garp couldn''t see what the young man was thinking.


    For yourself, or for what?


    "It doesn''t make any sense? Vice Admiral Garp, please rest assured. I won''t really kill you. Of course, to the outside world, I will still dere that you are dead. And my request is very simple, while you are dead. Please stay in my battleship, don''t go out and show your face. As long as Vice Admiral Garp can cooperate with me well, I can cover all your needs during this period of time! I will satisfy you!"


    "Stop talking nonsense! I just want to know, what the hell are you doing this for!"


    "I naturally have my reasons for doing this, you don''t need to worry about it at this point..."


    "Oh, if you dere to the public that I am dead, then the medical team of the World Government will definitely not cooperate with you. At that time, without the medicine, will you be so confident that you can keep me?"


    "Hah, Vice Admiral Garp... I originally did not want to be so rude to you because you are Luffy''s grandpa... But you seem to me now that you are not willing to cooperate with me... "


    "Luffy?! What about Luffy?! Who are you?!"


    Li Yaoxiang waved his hand, and an air door appeared beside him.


    Needless to say.


    This air door alone.


    Everything is clear enough.


    Sure enough, when Garp saw this air door, his pupils shrank suddenly, and the blue veins were exposed on his temples: "It''s you! It''s you who kidnapped Luffy back then!"


    In an instant, various thoughts shed in Garp''s mind.


    What Li Yaoxiang did in the past made him wonder.


    The more he thinks about it, the more terrifying it feels!


    Imagine, if there is a person who has been beside your rtives all the time, don''t know what is going on, and it has been happening for more than ten years. And on this day more than ten yearster, this person appears in front of you unscrupulously. How terrifying is this?


    What is the meaning behind this?


    Moreover, thinking about the rumors of Li Yaoxiang, a rising star in the marine, and the powerful subordinates he had seen before, Garp was even more terrified!


    What a big game of chess.


    This game of chess was so big that he couldn''t see what the opponent''s goal was.


    "No no no, don''t say kidnapping. Luffy left with me voluntarily."


    "What the hell are you doing?!"


    "Hah, forget it. Judging from your attitude, you probably won''t cooperate well with me. There is no other way. Before my n is over, I have to apologise to you, Vice Admiral Garp."


    After that, Li Yaoxiang''s right hand stretched directly towards Garp''s chest.


    Garp thought that Li Yaoxiang was trying to beat him and force him to submit, but he didn''t even think about guarding.


    But then, a scene that surprised Garp happened.


    He saw that Li Yaoxiang''s palm did not touch his body, but prated directly! Immediately afterwards, he only felt a flower, and the sky was spinning for a while, and then half of his body suddenly left his body and floated lightly in the air.


    Garp looked at the translucent palms and the unconscious body behind him in disbelief.


    Before he coulde back to his senses, his translucent half body was suddenly pulled in front of Li Yaoxiang and smiled: "Who said that to keep you, I have to rely on the potion? You stay that way until I finish, Vice Admiral Garp."


    After saying that, Li Yaoxiang walked towards the door.


    Garp was shocked: "Wait! Wait!! Where are you going?! Come back! Come back! You can''t do anything to Luffy! If you dare to do anything to Luffy, I will never let you go!"


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t know what to do, and waved his hand: "Forgot to tell you, remember, you are in this state of soul, don''t drift out of this study room at will. You might get blown away by the strong wind, then I will really don''t know how to exin it to Luffy."


    Snapped!


    The door is closed.


    Kapp murmured in a stunned voice: "Spirit... soul?"


    This skill used by Li Yaoxiang is of course the ability of the Shinigami in the Naruto world. He took out Garp''s soul, and naturally he was not afraid that Garp would destroy his n. But there''s no need to make it so clear to Garp.


    He walked out of the study.


    There was no sound of battle in the cabin at this time.


    Except for Rob Li, who is still struggling, all the other CP9 members have long since died.


    Seeing that the person who came was Li Yaoxiang, Rob Li, who was covered in scars and bleeding, panted, "Let me go. As long as you let me go, I am willing to be your subordinate. I am stronger than them and useful!"


    Li Yaoxiang rubbed his nose in disgust and didn''t answer Rob Li: "It''s just these people, you haven''t solved it yet? You even made the whole cabin smell blood. I think I have been cking in giving you guys some military training, right?"


    Speaking of the word military training.


    The calm and confident marines on their faces changed their faces in an instant.


    All tightened, showing panic.


    "Report to Admiral! We will clean up the cabin now; make sure that there will be no bloody smell left!" After saying that, the momentum of the group of marines suddenly increased, and they all attacked Rob Li with all their might.


    Li Yaoxiang beckoned and summoned two marines at will: "Turn around. We''re not going back to the Holy Land. Go back to the base."


    "Yes!"


    A few dayster.


    After Li Yaoxiang''s full propaganda.


    Marine hero Monkey D. Garp is the real leader behind the Revolutionary Army, and the news that Monkey D. Garp and CP9 died together soon spread throughout the entire One Piece world.


    As soon as this news came out, all forces were immediately alerted.


    Everyone knows very well that since the World Government dares to move Monkey D. Garp, it means that the real war maye soon.


    The major forces have made full preparations to prepare for all emergencies.


    As for the Five Elders who also received the news, they were outraged on the spot, and they immediately used the phone bug to contact Li Yaoxiang.


    "Admiral Li Yaoxiang! What the hell is going on? Isn''t the content of the quest already made clear? What we want is to capture Monkey D. Garp alive! It''s alive!"


    "Hah, there''s no other way to do it. Don''t you know how old and strong Monkey D. Garp is? That''s the existence that can rival One Piece Roger. It''s not easy to capture him alive. Even the entire group of CP9 got in."


    "Okay! Even if the mission fails, why did the news of Monkey D. Garp''s death spread all over the world so quickly?! Didn''t I tell you before that this matter must be kept secret, and the news must not be spread?!"


    "Don''t be angry. I know why you want to capture Monkey D. Garp alive. Don''t worry, I have learned from the marines under Monkey D. Garp that he has a grandson named Monkey D. Luffy. Monkey D. Luffy is the son of Monkey D. Dragon, and he''s definitely more useful than Monkey D. Garp."


    ""


    The other end of the phone was silent for a while.


    After a while.


    "Even so, so what? What name do we use to arrest Monkey D. Luffy? If we let everyone know that we used the son of a hostile force to threaten each other. In the future, what will everyone think of our World Government?"


    "Don''t worry, I have already thought about this for you. ording to the information I got, this Monkey D. Luffy has a sworn brother named Portgas D Ace, but this was changedter. His real name was Gol D. Ace."


    "Gol D.?!"


    "Yes, you must already know what this means, right?"


    The other end of the phone was silent for a while.


    Obviously, the Five Elders are discussing quickly.


    After a while.


    "Is the message urate?"


    "100% urate!"


    "This Portgas D. Ace...isn''t that the one who was invited by our World Government a while ago to be the captain of the Spade Pirates who go to the Seven Warlords?"


    "Yes, we have countless evidence, and we can do something about this Portgas D. Ace. As long as we lure Monkey D. Luffy to the execution ground, at that time, we will not be afraid of excuses to deal with him. It''s just... To get our hands on this Portgas D. Ace, we still need to face a problem..."


    "What is the problem?"


    "I just got the information that this Portgas D. Ace, together with his Spade Pirates, seems to have been merged into the Whitebeard Pirates not long ago..."


    "Whitebeard... Admiral Li Yaoxiang, if this matter is left to you, how sure are you?"


    "No, no, you''re always misunderstanding. When I dealt with Monkey D. Garp, I was already heavily wounded. Now I can only reluctantly promise you that the Marine will be in chaos now that Garp is dead. As for the other things...I''m afraid there''s nothing I can do. Of course, if you really want to deal with Portgas D. Ace, I can give you a suggestion, your boss can raise Portgas D. Ace''s bounty and reveal his identity. As long as the promised reward is high enough, someone should be tempted to solve this trouble for us."


    As soon as the words came out.


    The Five Elders on the other end of the phone were confused on the spot.


    Their original idea was very simple, to capture Garp alive, use Garp to threaten Monkey D. Dragon, and then during the war, fool Li Yaoxiang, a young and energetic guy, to charge into the front line and stand in the forefront.


    Then they will minimize the loss of this battle to a minimum.


    Even if the Revolutionary Army can''t be uprooted this time, as long as Monkey D. Garp and Monkey D. Dragon are resolved, it will be a profit for them.


    But now this seemingly young and vigorous Li Yaoxiang, what nonsense is he talking about?


    Before you act, you are so loyal and obedient both outwardly and inwardly.


    Now that you ruined their n, the war is about to start, and you say you can''t fight?


    The Five Elders can''t even think about it.


    This wave waspletely deceived by Li Yaoxiang.


    After regaining his senses, his tone immediately changed from calm to anger. He gritted his teeth and said, "Okay! That is to say, you will not be able to participate in the next battle with the Revolutionary Army, right? Admiral Li Yaoxiang!"


    "I''m afraid it is, it''s such a pity..."


    "Humph!"


    One of the Five Elders who were talking to him snorted coldly and mmed the phone directly.


    At the same time.


    In the conference room of the Five Elders.


    "Damn! This Li Yaoxiang haspletely changed! His attitude ispletely different from the previous one! He is clearly ying tricks on us!"


    The Five Elders who contacted Li Yaoxiang scolded the air for a while.


    The meeting room soon fell into a heavy atmosphere.


    This time they were really tricked by Li Yaoxiang.


    But the problem is that the war drums have already been beaten, and their condition is on the bow and has to be yed. And they did have to rely on Li Yaoxiang to suppress the marine for the time being, Li Yaoxiang couldn''t help it. Otherwise, in the event of an enemy on the back and belly, even if the problem can be solved in the end, it will be a heavy loss.


    The faces of the Five Elders now are like those of dumb people eating berberine, and they are so aggrieved that they can''t tell what they are suffering from.


    There was silent for a long time.


    A sigh came from the mouth of one of the Five Elders.


    "Hey... This Li Yaoxiang... It seems that we have all misunderstood..."


    The rest nodded in agreement.


    "Leave him alone. At present we still need him to suppress the rebellion on the marine side. After the war is over, let''s find a way to deal with him!"


    "That''s all we can do..."


    In this way, this long-nned war has begun to brew and ferment all over the world.

 Chapter 391: 96%

    Chapter 391: 96%


    At the same time.


    The news of Garp''s death spread all over the world, even in the remote areas of the East Blue, of course.


    In a wooden house on Mount Colubo.


    A group of pirates from Dadan''s family whispered softly around a newspaper barrier like they were stealing chickens and dogs.


    "Unexpectedly... So Garp still has this level of identity."


    "No wonder he gave Luffy to us bandits to train him..."


    "Hah, Garp is so powerful, how could he die?"


    "What should I do now? Should I tell Luffy this news?"


    "Of course you can''t tell him! He''s an idiot. If you let him know this news, who knows what stupid things he''ll do?"


    At this moment, a hearty voice sounded from behind the group of bandits in a circle: "I''m back! Come and see what I hunted today? Everyone has a good time today!"


    All the bandits were shocked on the spot!


    All the gangs scrambled for the report obstacle in the middle in a very tacit understanding.


    In the process of snatching, the report was inevitably torn by everyone.


    They immediately tried their best to hide the part they grabbed.


    Some stuffed into the mouth.


    Some hide behind them.


    Some stuffed into clothes and so on.


    "Huh? What are you guys watching together? What''s so interesting? I''ll watch too!"


    The bandits were startled again, turned around one after another, stood up straight, and squeezed out a smile with a very stiff expression: "No...No! We''re not looking at anything!"


    Luffy walked towards the crowd with a suspicious look on his face.


    Everyone dared not look directly at Luffy.


    Either his eyes are erratic, or he is whistling.


    "Huh?! Boss Dadan, what is in your mouth?"


    Curly Dadan grunted, and without thinking, he directly swallowed the share of the report that she had captured, and then opened her mouth to show her innocence: "No! Ah-~ Look, there''s nothing in my mouth?"


    Luffy was stunned.


    This time, it aroused his curiosity even more.


    He started to snatch the ''mysterious objects'' hidden by the other bandits everywhere, even the ones that were in their mouths, and forcibly opened other people''s mouths.


    "I don''t care! I want to see it! You give it to me!!"


    "No, no! Luffy, there really isn''t any, so don''t look for it!"


    "Yes, we have nothing to hide!"


    A group of pirates are hiding behind some furniture, and some even want to escape outside the house.


    But with Luffy''s current strength and speed, why did they say they would run away if they wanted to? Luffy captured all the pirates alive in three ces and twice, and everyone couldn''t take him.


    After grabbing all the hidden reports, Luffy even smiled slyly: "Hehe, let me see what it is, making you two so mysterious..."


    After saying that, he began to spread the robbed newspaper barrier on the ground.


    Put those reported obstacles together like a jigsaw puzzle.


    "Luffy, don''t look at it! There''s nothing to see!"


    "Yes, Luffy! The news in this issue is full of nonsense, nothing to see!"


    All the bandits said that, but all of them stretched their necks and stared at the newspaper puzzle on the ground.


    They prayed secretly in my heart, hoping that the most crucial part of the content had already been swallowed by Curly Dadan just now.


    After a while.


    The newspaper was spelled back to its original shape.


    The bandits gritted their teeth and showed pity.


    Things are of course not so coincidental.


    The content of Garp is finally shown in Luffy''s eyes.


    Seeing the contents of the newspaper, the corner of Luffy''s mouth that had been raised gradually fell.


    The mood also changed from the original joy to fear.


    "What''s going on? How could this happen...?" His eyes widened, he kept repeating these two sentences, shaking his head, his face full of disbelief.


    "Luffy, don''t read it, these newspapers have been reporting some unreliable newstely, and if you believe it, you will just worry yourself!"


    "Yes, yes, Vice Admiral Garp is so powerful, he will definitely be fine."


    "Luffy, don''t think too much, let''s have a full meal!"


    "What''s going on?! Who can tell me, what''s going on?!!" Luffy yelled, then turned and rushed out of the house.


    Curly Dadan saw this, and hurriedly shouted: "Quick! Quickly stop him!"


    All the bandits rushed towards Luffy.


    Unfortunately, this was not 7 years ago.


    Seven years ago, the bandits of Dadan''s family could rely on the strength of the crowd to stop Ace, who was seriously injured and on the verge of madness.


    On this day 7 yearster, they couldn''t even match them.


    Not to mention that Luffy is in perfect condition today.


    The result was that although the bandits were all around Luffy''s body, they were dragged out by Luffy forcibly.


    Luffy bes a lot slower.


    The bandits refused to let go.


    Even though their bodies were rubbing the ground, they held onto him tightly.


    "Luffy! Don''t be stupid! What''s reported in the newspapers may not be true!"


    "Yes, Luffy! Calm down first! We''ll make a decision after discussing the countermeasures! Even if you want to take revenge, you still need to know who to seek revenge!"


    No matter what the bandits say, Luffy doesn''t care.


    "Let me go! You all let me go!"


    And just when the bandits were about to despair, Luffy''s footsteps suddenly stopped, because Li Yaoxiang''s voice also sounded in his mind at the same time.


    And also pull Luffy''s consciousness into the consciousness space.


    "Where are you going? Are you going to die?"


    In the space of consciousness. As soon as he saw Li Yaoxiang, Luffy rushed over and held on to Li Yaoxiang''s clothes.


    "Big brother? Big brother! You must know the truth, right?! Tell me quickly, what happened?! Did he really die- grandpa?! Also, what Revolutionary Army leader?! What''s going on? Isn''t my grandfather in the marine? Is the content in the newspapers true or false?!"


    "The content in the newspaper can be said to be true or false."


    "???"


    "Your grandfather is indeed dead."


    ""


    "However, he is not the leader of the Revolutionary Army as the newspapers say. All of this is a lie made up by the World Government in order to attack your grandfather. Besides, it is not just your grandfather. Next, they will even do something to you, to the people around you."


    "World Government...what is a World Government?! What the hell is going on? Why are they doing to me?!"


    "Luffy, do you know what the Revolutionary Army is?"


    Luffy was dazed and did not answer.


    "Everything you have experienced before, including arge number of mermaids being captured as ves, the marine''s oppression of civilians, the burning of the Gray Terminal by the king of the Goa Kingdom, and the people who want to kill the Gray Terminal, etc., all of this is because the World Government shelters and condones. Every year, there are countless people or races who have been tortured by the World Nobles, the leading group of the World Government. Even Sabo back then was ordered to be killed by the World Nobles. The fundamental reason was simply that the World Nobles at the time felt that Sabo''s ships were an eyesore. The so-called Revolutionary Army is a group of people who want to overthrow everything, especially the World Nobles, and change the world..."


    "This...this...what does this have to do with the World Government''s actions against me and my grandfather?"


    "Because your father is the leader of the Revolutionary Army, Monkey D. Dragon."


    Hearing this, Luffy waspletely dumbfounded.


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t mean to give him time to digest the information, and continued: "The World Government wants to eradicate your father, so they just made up a crime and started to attack your grandfather. And you will also be their next target."


    ""


    The weight of messages is too heavy.


    Luffy was still confused, and he couldn''t understand what was going on.


    He only knew one thing, his grandfather was wronged!


    His grandfather was killed!


    After figuring out the most crucial points, his dazed expression gradually turned into anger.


    He wants revenge!


    He wants to avenge Grandpa!


    However, just as he was about to go crazy, Li Yaoxiang continued: "What''s the matter? Want revenge? Do you know who your enemy is? Do you know how powerful your enemy is? Or do you think... anger and madness can solve the problem?"


    Hearing this, Luffy copsed.


    Tears could not stop flowing.


    "What can I do without revenge? What else can I do? Is that the case?!" Luffy has never felt as helpless and weak as he does now.


    Weak and young, I know that my grandfather was wronged and killed, and I can''t do anything.


    He knelt on the ground, helpless, crying.


    "The only thing you can do now is to work hard to be stronger. Be so powerful that everyone is afraid of you and dare not do anything to you or the people around you."


    That is right.


    The reason which Luffy also understands.


    But still can''t stop the grief in Luffy''s heart.


    One by one dead rtives and friends, now all came to his mind one by one.


    Otohime, Sabo, Kaya''s parents, Kuina, Garp...


    "Powerful? Is power useful? Everyone is dead, so what if I be powerful? Can theye back?"


    "Can."


    Li Yaoxiang was caught off guard, causing Luffy to stop crying on the spot.


    He was stunned for a while, then raised his head and looked at Li Yaoxiang stupidly, as if to confirm whether there was something wrong with his ears? Am I hallucinating?


    "As long as you are strong enough, even if they die, they can still be resurrected."


    Luffy rolled and crawled to his feet, and held on to Li Yaoxiang''s clothes again, "Big brother, really? Can someone really be resurrected after death?"


    "Over the years, I have taken you to so many ces, haven''t you seen it? Just like you became a rubber man, there are all kinds of strange abilities in this world, who can guarantee that there is no ability to resurrect the dead?"


    "Big brother, what about you?! You are so powerful, can you also resurrect others?"


    "I can."


    Luffy just had a sh of inspiration and asked casually.


    But he didn''t want to, but the two words can reallye out of Li Yaoxiang''s mouth.


    He looked confused, excited, and veryplicated.


    Confused because, since the big brother can resurrect others, why didn''t he help him resurrect his mother and resurrect Sabo...


    Excited because, since Big Brother can resurrect, doesn''t everyone don''t have to die?!


    But before he could say anything, Li Yaoxiang''s next sentence was a blow to him: "But...why should I resurrect them?"


    Luffy opened his mouth.


    Silly...


    The whole person is dumbfounded...


    "As long as you haven''t solved the root cause of the problem one day, the same thing will keep repeating itself. The World Government will target you, and the people around you will die because of you one by one. What will you do then? Resurrect and die again. Do you expect me to resurrect them every time?"


    Luffy''s face paled a bit...


    "Then...then...the big brother, how can you help me resurrect?"


    "Kill! Kill everyone! Kill all the guys who may be targeting you! Kill all the guys who are doing bad things! Only by killing them can you minimize everyone''s danger! At that time... I promise you, I will help you resurrect the people you care about."


    Luffy didn''t think much of it, and immediately agreed.


    "Big brother, then you must help me resurrect! You must help me resurrect! I promise you! I will definitely be stronger and kill them all!"


    "Luffy, think seriously. I''m not talking about ten, a hundred or a thousand. I''m talking about the lives of hundreds of millions of people! Do you know how many hundreds of millions of people are? Are you sure you can really be ruthless?"


    Luffy took two steps back.


    His hands were powerless to hold Li Yaoxiang''s clothes again.


    The whole person was sluggish.


    The scene turns.


    Luffy''s mind returned to reality again.


    The bandits were all worried when they saw that Luffy was suddenly dumbfounded.


    He shook his hand in front of Luffy a few times.


    "Luffy? Luffy?"


    "I''m fine, you don''t have to worry about me, just leave me alone." Luffy said dumbly, then turned around and left.


    A group of bandits saw that Luffy was no longer as out of control as before, and they did not stop him.


    It''s just that they don''t understand the situation, why Luffy suddenly bes like this...


    In the days that followed, although Luffy would eat, sleep, and exercise as usual, he kept this sluggish or silent state.


    Dadan''s bandits came to talk to him, but he didn''t respond.


    Curly Dadan came tofort him, but he still didn''t respond.


    Li Yaoxiang did notmunicate with him either.


    Days go by day by day.


    One monthter


    82%


    84%


    Half yearter...


    86%


    88%


    90%


    As the days go by, Luffy''s darkening level is slowly increasing every day at a slight rate.


    Until a day in three years.


    A loud explosion suddenly came from a certain jungle in Colubo Mountain: "Rubber 32 Brick Fist!"


    Boom!


    Smoke billows.


    Arge area of the jungle was smashed into ruins by Luffy''s rubber 32 Brick Fist.


    Luffy''s face finally returned to his old smile.


    It''s just that Luffy''s smile and eyes at this time are mixed with a ruthless meaning that was not there 3 years ago! He took the initiative to contact Li Yaoxiang in his mind: "Big brother, I will kill! As long as the people around me are okay, even if the group of scumbags die 100 million or 200 million, I don''t care!"


    92%


    94%


    96%

 Chapter 392: On the eve of going to sea, the Goya Kingdom was destroyed

    Chapter 392: On the eve of going to sea, the Goya Kingdom was destroyed


    Ever since Luffy made up his mind to revive the people he cares about even if he has to kill a lot of people, his state has returned to the cheerfulness he used to be.


    This made the bandits in the Dadan family who were worried about him finally relieved.


    But, it didn''t take long for the postman bird toe to the Goa Kingdom to wander around again.


    It scatters new newspapers from the sky to the entire Goa Kingdom.


    One of the bundled newspapers fell from a height to the door of Dadan''s house on Mount Colubo. One of the bandits, who was used to it, picked up the newspaper and walked back to Dadan''s house, ready to drink tea and watch thetest news.


    As soon as he sat down and opened it, the bandit even spit out tea on the spot.


    Then, the scene from three years ago was recreated in Dadan''s house.


    A group of bandits formed a circle, whispering softly around a newspaper.


    "How could this happen? Ace was caught, what should we do?"


    "Damn it! Which bastard caught Ace and got the bounty? The newspaper didn''t write it!"


    "It''s over, it''s over! Luffy''s condition has finally recovered a little bit. If Luffy finds out about this, will he go crazy again?"


    A few years ago, Ace''s identity was announced to the public, and the reward was greatly increased.


    This matter, everyone already knows.


    The bounty increased; everyone didn''t care, and they were even proud of Ace.


    Just as everyone was discussing countermeasures, and the discussion was in full swing, a voice that sounded hearty, but seemed like a nightmare to them, suddenly sounded behind everyone: "I''m back! Huh? What''s so interesting about you being together?"


    The group grabbed the newspaper, hid the newspaper, smiled, and a series of actions werepleted in one go.


    They were much smoother than three years ago.


    Luffy:"..."


    After a while.


    There is also a puzzle newspaper disyed in front of Luffy.


    It is about Ace, but they didn''t swallow them likest time.


    "Lu... Lu... Lu... Luffy, listen to us, you have to calm down first, Ace was captured this time by Marineford and publicly executed. This is the headquarters of the Marine, where there are many powerful Vice Admirals and even Admiral, don''t be impulsive, Luffy..."


    "Yes, yes, Ace has always been very independent, maybe he has found a way to escape now, don''t be impulsive, Luffy..."


    Luffy grinned: "Ace won''t run away."


    "Luffy! You...!"


    "Don''t worry, I''m fine. You don''t have to worry about me. I''ll save Ace, but I won''t mess around."


    At the same time.


    Luffy alsomunicated with Li Yaoxiang in his mind: "Brother, they attacked Ace. Their purpose is to lure me out?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "That''s right."


    Luffy: "I''m going to save him now, is it toote?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Don''t worry, their target is you. They won''tmence the execution so quickly. As long as you reveal your whereabouts, they will definitely arrange the execution date and wait for you to rush over."


    Luffy: "Oh, these scumbags really deserve to die!"


    A few dayster.


    Luffy finally officially turned 17 years old.


    Sabo once said that a nobleman will be called a real nobleman when he is 18 years old, so he will go to sea at the age of 17. In order tomemorate Sabo, Ace and Luffy also decided to go to sea at 17:00. This is also the main reason why Luffy did not rush to leave even though he knew that Ace was captured.


    Dadan''s home.


    Luffy still had that silly, hearty smile: "Aren''t youing to see me off?"


    "If we go down the mountain, even if the vige chief and Makino have nothing to do with it, the other guys in Windmill Vige will be scared, right? Hurry up and go!"


    "So guys, thank you all the time! Dadan!!!!"


    "Noisy! Stinky brat!"


    "I hate bandits, but I love you guys!"


    Curly Dadan, who wanted to pretend she didn''t care, was moved to the point where tears flowed from his nose, just like the scene when Ace left: "Stop talking stupid! Get out now! Damn it!"


    Dadan''s family of bandits still walked outside Dadan''s house in person to see Luffy off one by one.


    I want to watch Luffy leave with my own eyes.


    However, the direction that Luffy went, surprised the bandits for a while.


    "Huh? Luffy, that''s not the direction to Windmill Vige, did you go the wrong way?"


    Luffy''s hearty smile suddenly changed, and his eyes and smile suddenly became more ruthless: "No hurry, before leaving, I have to finish my business..."


    Having said that, regardless of the overwhelming reaction of the bandits.


    Luffy turned and walked towards the city of Goa Kingdom.


    After a while.


    At the city gate of the indeterminate terminal.


    "Hey hey hey! Who are you? What are you doing here? This is not a ce for lowly garbage like you toe! Go! Go!" Luffy yelled.


    "Rubber, 32 Brick Fist!"


    Boom!


    The huge city gate was directly smashed by Luffy!


    The guards on guard were so frightened that their eyes almost popped out, and they also hurriedly rang the rm bell.


    ng!


    ng!


    ng!


    ng!


    "Enemy attack! Enemy attack! It''s an enemy attack!"


    Luffy recklessly walked into the city from the center.


    However, he was soon surrounded by guards who came raising their guns.


    "Stop! Quickly stop! Put your hands on your head! Otherwise, we''re going to start shooting!" Seeing the iron city gate that was smashed by Luffy, the guards were actually nervous to death hoping Luffy doesn''t mess around.


    But those idiot nobles.


    A passing nobleman.


    Thinking that he is superior to others, thinking that a lowlymoner like Luffy would not dare to do anything to them, and show disgust and cheer on the side.


    "Bah, where''s the rubbish? He''s going to make a mess here."


    "Wow~, the air has been polluted by him. When you go back next time, you must clean it well."


    "Also, this street cannot be visited for at least a month before it has been thoroughly disinfected."


    Feeling those pair of eyes with contempt, Luffy also looked at them with a hearty smile. Immediately afterwards, while maintaining a hearty smile, Luffy murmured, "Rubber-whip!"


    Extend his right leg back.


    And then another hard sweep!


    The guards surrounding Luffy were swept away like a bowling ball hitting the targets!


    Blood sttered all over the street.


    Before the nobles who were still despising Luffy could react, Luffy had already walked up to them, tilted his head and smiled: "I''m curious, what makes you think that your lives are more valuable than others?"


    The nobles fell to the ground one by two.


    They were too frightened to speak.


    When they reacted, the bloody Luffy was already standing in front of them.


    "You...you...you...don''t mess around! We are nobles! You can''t touch us! If you touch us, the king will definitely not let you go!"


    "Oh, really?"


    tick.


    The switch of the suitcase is unlocked.


    The nobles looked horrified as they watched the unremarkable suitcase turn into a sword, and then from the sword, it slowly transformed into a monster with t teeth and huge mouths.


    The nobles could only stare in amazement as the monster gradually lifted into the sky, until it blocked all the sunlight, and the saliva dripped from the monster''s mouth onto their faces.


    "Silver..."


    Sweep.


    The giant teeth closed with a crunch.


    The former location of the nobles, except for a pool of urine, there is no trace of their appearance, as if they have never appeared in this world.


    What happened here soon spread throughout the city.


    The city is in chaos.


    You can see people running away in panic all around.


    As for Luffy, except for themoners, he will leave no one behind as long as he is a noble or a guy who helps nobles to do evil!


    The whole city is littered with corpses!


    This scene, coupled with Luffy''s approaching posture, to those nobles, it was the same as the end of the world.


    In the old days, what noble, what elegance, what manners are all gone now.


    They showed their ugly faces.


    Many people didn''t even need Luffy to do it, they died tragically while trying to escape.


    Luffy swept all the way and ughtered.


    There is no one in the entire Goa Kingdom who is his opponent now.


    He quickly smashed out of Center Street (a civilian residential area).


    He killed the high town (noble residential area).


    Finally, he reached the pce and in front of the king of Goa Kingdom.


    The king who was dressed in luxurious clothes was also smiling, but Luffy, who was covered in blood, frightened him so much that he fell to the ground, holding a dog that was also shivering in his hands, and there was not a single person beside him.


    They either died or ran away.


    Those ministers who kept saying that they would do their best to die for him on weekdays are now escaping faster than him.


    "Someone! Somebody! Guards! Guards!"


    "Stop shouting... they''re either dead or run away, don''t waste your saliva..."


    "You, you, what do you want?! Our Goa Kingdom is an ally of the World Government! I can tell you! If you kill me, the World Government will definitely not let you go!"


    Luffy scratched his ears and said indifferently: "Strange, do you guys all say the same thing? Several people have told me this before."


    The King of Goa Kingdom turned pale with fright.


    The dog in his arms finally couldn''t bear the pressure, and squeezed out of his arms with two woops, and then fled into the distance.


    "Come back! Come back to me!"


    "Hey~, now even the dog has abandoned you."


    "You... what do you want?!"


    "It''s nothing... I''m just curious, what''s the difference between you and the people at the terminal. How can you decide their life and death at will? Now it seems... You are nothing special except that you look ugly. ~~Oh, yes. You were the one who ordered to kill everyone at the terminal, right?"


    The King of Goa Kingdom swallowed.


    He finally knew why Luffy came.


    He quickly defended: "No... no... none of my business! That''s because the World Nobles were going to visit the Goa Kingdom at that time! The World Nobles are notorious for not allowing the slightest bit of sand in their eyes! I was forced to do it!"


    "Well, World Nobles. Speaking of World Nobles, I also heard that there was a small boat that blocked their route, so that boat, including the person on the boat, were also smashed by them, right?"


    "That''s right! The World Nobles are so domineering! If I don''t clean up the Goa Kingdom, more people will die by then!"


    "Do you know who is on that boat?"


    "A..."


    "His name is Sabo, that''s my brother."


    "I..."


    "You should go to hell to repent..."


    "No, no! Ah-!"


    At the same time.


    In a luxury residence of a nobleman in High Town.


    Sabo''s father and mother were busy packing up all the valuables in the residence.


    "Quick! Quick! Before it''s toote!"


    "Wait! Wait! I still have jewelry in the room on the second floor."


    At this time, a young man appeared behind the two, he was Sabo''s younger brother, Sterry (no blood rtionship): "Father, you are holding so many valuables, it is so fortunate for you to suffer, for letting your sone work for you."


    Sabo''s father''s anxious face suddenly appeared relieved: "Sterry, you are still sensible. The Goa Kingdom is gone, and the future of our couple will depend on you."


    After saying that, he handed arge bag of valuables to Sterry.


    But as soon as Sterry took the bag of valuables, he suddenly turned his face, revealing an ugly face, and kicked Sabo''s father to the ground: "You old man! You are still dawdling here! It''s long overdue for giving me these possessions!"


    "Sterry, you..."


    "You, you, what are you? Didn''t you adopt me to get benefits through me? Where is that idiot Sabo? Think I don''t know? Now that the Goa Kingdom is gone, stop pretending!"


    After saying that, Sterry ran out of the house without looking back.


    But as soon as he went out, he ran into someone and knocked himself to the ground.


    "Damn! Which idiot without eyes?!"


    Valuables are scattered all over the floor.


    Sterry raised his head and looked at him. It was a bloody Luffy who kept a smile.


    Seeing Luffy''s appearance, both Sterry and Sabo''s parents were shocked! Who destroyed the Goa Kingdom? They had long since seen who wasing from a distance when the incident happened.


    Now, seeing that the murderer came to the door, it was good that he was not scared to death.


    Sterry was nervous and panic: "You, you, your name is Luffy, right! You are my brother''s friend! I know you! It''s them that Sabo is dead! Kill them if you want! None of my business!"


    Hearing Sterry''s remarks, the Sabos turned pale with fright.


    But just when the two were about to fall into despair, Luffy suddenly did the leg whip at will, and directly kicked Sterry out of the house. Sterry smashed through the wall and flew out backwards, not knowing whether he was alive or dead.


    Luffy walked to Sabo''s father, squatted down, squinted and smiled: "Don''t worry, you are Sabo''s father, I will not kill you. Moreover, if the Goa Kingdom is gone, you will no longer be nobles. I also I want to see if you, who have no strength after bing civilians, can survive with so many valuables."


    Sabo''s father was too frightened to speak.


    "Also, I want you to help me deliver a message. Just say, all the things here are done by me, Monkey D. Luffy. And I''m going to sea to Marineford. How about it? Can it be done?"


    Sabo''s father nodded again and again.


    Immediately, Luffy turned around and left as if nothing had happened...

 Chapter 393: Goodbye, Zoro

    Chapter 393: Goodbye, Zoro


    When Luffy reappeared at the port of Windmill Vige, he had already changed into a new set of clothes, and the blood on his body had already been washed away by him.


    However, the news that he destroyed the Goa Kingdom was eventually spread by some people who escaped here by ident.


    After hearing the news, the residents of Windmill Vige were not only shocked, but also scared.


    They were even frightened and dared note to say goodbye to this ''unfamiliar'' Luffy.


    Now in the entire port, only the vige chief, Makino, and a few people are saying goodbye to Luffy.


    The vige chief nced at Luffy with aplicated look, and sighed, "Hah...Luffy, you shouldn''t be so impulsive..."


    Luffy said with a hearty smile: "Hahahaha, it''s okay! I won''t regret it! In fact, I have always wanted to do this for a long time. Now I have finally avenged Sabo."


    Everyone looked at Luffy like this and didn''t know what to say for a while.


    They were silent for a long time.


    One of the vigers said: "Luffy, why don''t you use my old fishing boat? Your little boat..."


    "It''s okay, this one is fine, I''m going to start here."


    With the first person to break the heavy atmosphere.


    Gradually, the remaining people also began to send theirst blessings before parting.


    "Stinky boy, don''t tell others that you came from Windmill Vige! Being a pirate will bring shame to the vige!"


    "Don''t worry, vige chief! I''m not a pirate, I''m an adventurer!"


    "What''s the difference between that and a pirate!!!"


    "Ha ha ha ha ha ha ha!"


    Luffy stepped on the boat with a heartyugh and waved goodbye to everyone.


    That''s it, it''s true that Luffy has turned ck, but his IQ has not improved much. With a boat and a barrel of wine, he begins his adventure.


    Oh, wait, there is an extra suitcase now.


    Not long after drifting, a behemoth soon appeared on the calm sea.


    A sea king!


    It is the sea king who bit Shanks'' arm back then.


    Seeing this sea king, Luffy pressed down his straw hat and grinned: "I finally see you again. It''s time for you to return pay for Shanks'' arm, right?"


    The originally ferocious Sea King were stunned on the spot!


    There was a sense of crisis in its heart.


    It faintly felt the aura of the red-haired human ten years ago from the human in front of him! Although weaker, it does feel it.


    Before it could react, Luffy shouted, "Eraser - 32 Brick Fist!"


    At the same time that the rubber 32 Brick Fist, Luffy''s fist is covered with ayer of armor that is invisible to the naked eye.


    Immediately, this sea king was smashed and flew out.


    It is so powerful that it is more terrifying than the original.


    This sea king has lost its life in the process of flying backwards.


    After solving this sea king ss, Luffy only felt a lot more rxed on the spot, and the haze buried in the bottom of his heartpletely disappeared.


    He sat down and continued his journey.


    A few dayster.


    Just like the original, he encountered a maelstrom.


    He escaped by hiding in a wine barrel.


    However, he was drifted to an ind, and was picked up by Coby who happened to pass by, and brought back to the wine cer belonging to the Alvida Pirates.


    Inside the wine cer.


    Several pirates are excited about the barrel of wine that Cobie picked up.


    "Very good! Let''s drink together!"


    "But, if the leader finds out, we..."


    "She wouldn''t know..."


    "Only us who clean the wine cer and Coby know about this."


    "that''s right!"


    After saying that, a group of three men approached Coby viciously, and said in a malicious tone: "Do you know what to do?! Coby..."


    "When...of course! I...I can''t see anything! Hahahaha! Please don''t hit me! I thought I was going to die! Hahahahaha!"


    Suddenly, there was a crisp sound!


    The barrel burst!


    Luffy stretched his waist and stood up from the wine barrel: "Slept well!! It seems to be safe! I thought I was going to die! Hahahaha! Huh? Who are you?"


    "We should be asking that!!!"


    "How could a person emerge from the barrel?!!"


    They did not wait for Luffy to respond.


    There was a sudden smashing sound from outside the wine cer, and a heavy mace smashed into the wine cer with an irresistible 360-degree rotation.


    "Don''t bezy!!"


    There was a loud bang.


    The entire wine cer was smashed into pieces by the mace in the blink of an eye.


    The aftermath of Luffy''s attack sent people and buckets into the jungle and rolled for a long distance.


    "I ask you, what is the most beautiful thing in this sea?"


    "Well... of course it''s you, Lord Alvida!!"


    "Well said! So are you trying to disobey me?"


    "No no no! There is no such thing!"


    "Stop acting stupid! I clearly heard you say on the boat that you slept so well!"


    "Ah! Right! Boss! Someone invaded!"


    "That''s right! Coby brought back a weird guy just now!"


    "Huh? Could it be the one who came to catch me back to collect the bounty?! Damn Coby, how dare you betray me?!"


    "Wouldn''t it be a famous person?"


    "Idiot! I heard he just arrived in Shells Town! How could he be here?!"


    "Oh, the notorious Roronoa Zoro, if he dares to appear in front of me, I beat him up!!"


    At the same time.


    In the jungle.


    Coby saw that Luffy was shocked by the aftermath of the mace attack and flew into the jungle, so he also chased after him in a hurry.


    The barrel finally stopped rolling.


    He walked up to Luffy.


    "You...Are you okay? Are you injured? You were shaken away just now."


    "Hahahaha! It''s okay! I was just a little shook, it was fun. Oh, by the way, my name is Luffy, what''s your name? What is this ce?"


    "This coast is where the Alvida Pirates rest. My name is Coby, and I''m a chore boy on their ship..."


    "Oh? Pirates?" Hearing the word pirate, Luffy''s expression was no longer as heartless as before, and even his tone became quite gloomy, "Then do you know what this group of pirates have done?"


    Hearing this, Coby suddenly felt indignant: "They steal and abduct, and do all kinds of evil! I just went out to fish two years ago! I identally walked on their boat, and they caught me to do chores on the boat! Did it for two years!"


    This bizarre encounter made Luffy stunned when he heard it.


    Coby saw his confused appearance and mistakenly thought that Luffy didn''t believe it, so he quickly exined: "It''s true! Come with me."


    After a while.


    The two came to a humble boat.


    "What is this? A coffin?"


    "This is a boat that I spent two years secretly building..."


    "Boat? What did you build the boat for?"


    "I originally wanted to build this ship to escape...but I didn''t have the courage...It seems that I''m going to be a chore all my life...Although I also have things I want to do..."


    "Then run away!"


    Coby shook his head like a rattle: "No, no, no, no! When I think of the possibility of being found by Alvida, my legs go weak and I''m scared to death!"


    "..." After listening to Coby''s story, Luffy''s attitude towards Coby immediately returned to being heartless, "You are really stupid and useless. And you still feel very cowardly, I don''t like you."


    "...you''re right, if I also have the courage to go out to sea with a wine barrel... by the way, Luffy, why are you going out to sea?"


    "Me? Hey, I want to be an adventurer!"


    "Adventurer? What is an adventurer?"


    "Wandering on the sea, seeing all over the world, and going on an adventure!"


    "This... isn''t that a pirate?"


    "No, an adventurer!"


    "Then what if you have no money?"


    "Pirating!"


    "Then are you also looking for the treasure of wealth, fame and power, ONE PIECE?"


    "Certainly!"


    "Isn''t that a pirate?!"


    "No, it''s an adventurer!"


    ""


    "What about you? What do you want to do?"


    "I...I want to be in the Marine!"


    Luffy''s expression changed, and his face became serious again: "Marine? Have you ever learned about the real marine?"


    "Of course! Although this is against your dream, joining the marine and eradicating bad guys has been my dream since I was a child!! As long as I join the marine, I will be able to arrest Alvida in person!"


    Luffy was taken aback.


    He seemed to see the self who wanted to be a marine back then...


    He covered his straw hat and raised the corners of his mouth: "Then I hope that after you be a marine, you won''t change your original intention... otherwise I might have to kill you with my own hands..."


    Hearing Luffy say he was going to kill him.


    Kerby was dumbfounded on the spot.


    However, before he had time to ask the reason, there was a loud roar behind him, and a very violent attack of mace: "Who do you say you want to arrest?!! Coby!!!"


    There was a loud bang.


    The humble boat that Coby spent two years building was smashed to pieces.


    "I...my boat..."


    "You think...you can escape from my palm?! Is that guy you hired to catch me? Oh, it looks like it''s not Roronoa Zoro, count him lucky! Before you die, let me ask you, what is the most beautiful thing in this sea, Coby...?"


    Coby was so frightened that his whole body trembled, and he subconsciously replied: "Well...of course..."


    But before he could finish his words, Luffy suddenly interjected: "Zoro? Auntie, do you know Zoro too?"


    A big aunt made everyone''s jaw drop to their navel in shock.


    Immediately, all kinds of panic and anger!


    "This... this guy... dare to..."


    Coby also quickly caught Luffy: "Luffy, hurry up! Follow me and say it again! Lord Alvida is the most..."


    It was just halfway through, when Luffy heard the dream Coby talked about with Luffy just now, and he changed his words in a strange way: "The most rude and hateful aunt!!!!"


    Alvida: "..."


    A group of bandits: "..."


    Luffy: "Hahahahaha!"


    Alvida: "You two brats! How dare you be so arrogant! I really thought you were Roronoa Zoro..."


    The voice of just fell.


    The situation has changed abruptly again.


    A voice suddenly sounded in the jungle that made all the pirates tremble: "Strange, why are you two calling my name? Are you looking for me?"


    A group of pirates, including Alvida, saw the appearance of the person who came, and their jaw dropped to the navel again in shock.


    "You... you... you... Ro... Ronoa Zoro, aren''t you in Shells Town? Howe you are here?!" Seeing Zoro, the pirate was so frightened that she even lost her tone.


    Zoro scratched his ears and said impatiently: "I went to Shells Town to collect the bonus, but they told me that there are still wanted criminals nearby. I saw that it was not far away, so I came here. What''s wrong? Is there a problem? Hmm?!"


    Zoro red.


    All the pirates were so frightened that they shook their heads and pointed to Alvida.


    Wanted criminals are here.


    Everything bes easy.


    Alvida was also sweating with fright.


    How could she be Zoro''s opponent. As a result, she can''t fight or run now, and she doesn''t know what to do.


    But just when she was about to despair, a figure suddenly shed in front of him!


    Luffy rushed towards Zoro with lightning speed!


    During the sprint, the switch of the suitcase was unlocked!


    The de was raised high, and it shed directly at Zoro!


    Zoro also pulled out the two swords from his waist in an instant, collided with Luffy''s de fiercely, both grinned and looked at each other from a close distance, neither would give in.


    "Zoro, I haven''t seen you for many years, are you ready to be my partner?"


    "Idiot, wait until you beat me!"


    The pirates were overjoyed.


    They couldn''t hear the conversation between Luffy and Zoro, but they mistakenly thought that the two were mortal enemies, and they all turned around quietly, trying to take the opportunity to escape.


    But as soon as this moved, Luffy and Zoro shouted at them at the same time: "Did we say you can leave?!"


    The pirates just turned over and shrank back.


    Alvida also swallowed, not daring to move.


    Coby said nervously: "You...you...you two know each other? Stop it! Now is not the time to quarrel!"


    Luffy: "Shut up! What''s the matter, wait until I''m done ying!"


    Zoro: "Idiot, I''ve been waiting for you for a long time!"


    Three des pushed hard at the same time!


    Both of them retreated at the same time!


    Immediately, he stepped on his toes and used his strength to rush towards the opponent again!


    The battle is about to break out!


    Luffy''s one-sword style vs Zoro''s double-sword style.


    In an instant, the entire jungle was chopped bare by the aftermath of the battle between the two. A group of people from the Alvida Pirates were dumbfounded.


    At the same time, they were also very frightened.


    Sword auras were close to hitting them, and the soil around had some extra sh marks.


    Everyone dares not even breathe.


    During the entire battle, they couldn''t see the silhouette of the two of them clearly.


    They can only see the light of a sword flickering in the air from time to time, the figures of the two appear and disappear, and then the trees are like being cut into tofu, one after another copses, or is directly cut into pieces.


    After the entire jungle is chopped down until there is no more cover, the figures of the two were clearly reproduced in everyone''s eyes.


    Just when everyone thought that the two of them fought so fiercely that they should have finished fighting, the next conversation made everyone in the room feel relieved and tense again!


    Luffy: "It''s time to get serious, yeah?"


    Zoro: "As you wish..."


    Zoro brought thest sword around his waist into his mouth.


    The de in Luffy''s hand slowly deformed, and finally turned into a monster with a t tooth and a huge mouth...

 Chapter 394: Darkening Zoro

    Chapter 394: Darkening Zoro


    Zoro was taken aback: "What is this?"


    Luffy replied with a smile: "This? It''s called Silver, and it''s also my partner."


    As if feeling the meaning of Luffy, Silver Eater was strangely close to Luffy, and rubbed a few greasy kisses on Luffy''s cheek. Zoro saw such a strange Silver Eater, not only did he not fear, but grinned, very excited!


    The stronger Luffy is, the happier he is!


    The battle between the two begins again!


    This battle is no longer about swords, lights, swords, and trees flying, but instead, a variety of tricks are emerging one by one by the two of them.


    Rubber fists, Rubber Whip, Rubber Pistol!


    Three Sword Ogre Cutter, Three Sword Tiger Hunt, Three Sword Dragon Twister!


    People sometimes saw countless fist shadows, sometimes saw very powerful sword moves, and sometimes saw the terrifying t-toothed monsters piercing left and right in the battlefield.


    This battle made Zoro very frustrated, and the Silver Eater that Luffy said restrained 50% of his strength.


    No matter how he attacked, he couldn''t slip in the slightest.


    On the other hand, Silver Eater can help Luffy block his sword moves in time whenever he is about to attack Luffy, and Luffy will also seize the opportunity and invite him to taste a rubber fist.


    The strength of is so powerful that Zoro''s body has been trained to the utmost by him, and he is also bombarded by Luffy''s punching power, causing faint symptoms of internal bleeding.


    The unbearable Zoro, with a trace of blood dripping from the corner of his mouth, couldn''t help but shout, "Damn it! What kind of monster are you, Silver Eater?!"


    "Hey, this is the weapon my brother gave me!"


    During the exchange, the attack of the two still did not stop.


    "Is that the person who brought you to the Sword Hall?"


    "Right!"


    Thinking of the masked man back then, Zoro couldn''t help feeling a chill. The invisible pressure that the masked man gave him made it difficult for him to forget until now.


    Even if he became a bounty hunter and had met so many opponents, he had never been able topare with the masked man, not even worthy of the masked man''s shoes!


    In a hurry, Zoro scolded subconsciously: "Damn! You are cheating!"


    As soon as these words came out, Luffy''s attack stopped.


    Zoro was stunned: "What''s wrong?"


    Luffy smiled: "Didn''t you say I''m cheating? Then I don''t need Silver."


    After saying that, Luffy threw the Silver to the side: "Silver, you should rest aside first."


    Silver turned back into a normal de.


    Zoro said with dissatisfaction: "I didn''t mean that, are you looking down on me?"


    Luffy said with a smile: "No, I''m confident enough! Even if I don''t have Silver, I can defeat you!"


    Zoro, who was just a little angry at first, became angry on the spot after hearing this!


    He gritted his teeth and said, "That''s what you said, so don''t regret it!"


    Having said that, Zoro assumed a three-sword style and charged towards Luffy. However, the next scene made Zoro even more annoyed!


    Luffy stood there motionless to greet him.


    He looks like he doesn''t care about him at all.


    Zoro was also ruthless in his heart, thinking that I would not attack you?


    Thinking too much!


    Three Sword Style - Bull Needles!


    Three Sword Bull Needles is a stabbing attack that can perform more than 8 times in a moment. It''s an instant kill move. Zoro is confident, Luffy dares to face him head-on, even if Luffy doesn''t die, at least he will get injured!


    ng! ng! ng! ng! ng!


    The move ends, and when Zoro sprinted through Luffy and appeared behind Luffy, he was stunned! He was pretty sure that he did hit Luffy.


    How do you feel that this is an attack on steel?


    Luffy turned around and smiled: "Hey, how is it? Can''t cut through?"


    Zoro also turned around, his expression was still confused, he took Kuina''s sword from his mouth, and said in a daze: "What''s going on?"


    "This is Haki!"


    "Haki?"


    "Yes, do you want to learn? I want to teach you!"


    ""


    Zoro was speechless.


    He stopped the swords.


    Before he figured out what Haki is, it didn''t matter whether Luffy used Silver or not.


    After a while, Luffy repeated what Li Yaoxiang had told him about Haki to Zoro.


    Zoro thoughtfully said: "That is to say... as long as I continue to exercise myself and be proficient in that feeling, in the end, I can convert my willpower into a weapon to use like you?"


    "Right!"


    Zoro shrugged. He hadn''t felt that feeling yet, and he couldn''t understand what Luffy was talking about for the time being. He only knew that there were still such powerful moves in this world. He had to work harder to learn them.


    "By the way, where are you going next? Are you going to be in the marine?"


    Luffy paused for a moment, then smiled: "No, that''s the past, I''m going to be an adventurer now! You''ll also go on an adventure with me and be a crew member on my ship!"


    Zoro shook his head and raised his forehead: "It''s up to you to be a pirate or an adventurer, anyway, you can''t stop me from bing the world''s greatest swordsman."


    "Of course! I want to be the most powerful person in the world too!"


    The two looked at each other and smiled knowingly.


    This was their promise back then.


    Chatting and chatting.


    The two returned to the side of the pirates.


    Zoro pointed to a group of people who were too frightened to move: "What are you going to do with this group of people?"


    Now that he has be Luffy''s partner, and Luffy is the leader of the group, Zoro quickly straightened his attitude. Except for giving a certain degree of advice, Luffy is in charge of everything.


    At the same time, he will no longer call Luffy an idiot.


    Luffy hesitated for a moment: "Kill them all..."


    As soon as these words came out, Zoro was stunned on the spot!


    In his impression, Luffy is not so bloodthirsty.


    A group of pirates, including Koby, were also shocked.


    "Ah!!! Don''t! Don''t kill us! It''s none of our business! This ugly woman instructed us to do everything!"


    Alvida was furious when she heard this!


    "You...!"


    But she was given a vicious stare by Zoro, and she shrank back, daring not to make a sound. But her eyes were also full of begging for mercy.


    Even the clerk Koby, who had been bullied by them for two years, couldn''t help but help at this time: "Luffy! No! You can''t kill them without authorization! You should hand them over to the marine to deal with!"


    "Yes yes yes! Leave us to the Marine!"


    "We are willing to surrender! We are willing to surrender!"


    The irritated Alvida couldn''t help but said, "Roronoa Zoro, aren''t you a bounty hunter?! I''m willing to go back with you! You tell him not to kill me! You tell him not to kill me!"


    "Shut up all of you!" Zoro yelled at everyone.


    Everyone hurried to shut up.


    They didn''t even dare to squeak.


    After all, they have seen the strength of the two before, how can they still resist? The only thing I can do is to pray for the mercy of the two people in front of me.


    After the angrily rebuke, Zoro turned to look at Luffy again, a trace ofplexity shed in his eyes: "Luffy, they are right. We can get a lot of bounty by handing them over to the marine. It might not be"


    Luffy gritted his teeth and said, "Zoro..."


    Zoro: "???"


    Luffy: "I have a reason to kill them..."


    Hearing this, Zoro looked even more solemn, he pulled Luffy aside: "Luffy, can you tell me why?"


    Luffy''s eyes suddenly looked at Zoro very seriously: "Zoro... Do you want to resurrect Kuina?"


    Zoro''s eyes widened and pupils contracted!


    "If I say this, maybe you won''t believe it. But my brother told me that he has the ability to resurrect the dead..."


    "No, I believe it! If this sentence came from him, I believe he really has the ability to resurrect the dead! What does he need you to do?"


    Luffy was taken aback.


    He didn''t expect Zoro to believe his words so easily.


    "He said that he wanted me to kill all the sources of all dangers. I only learned a few years ago that the leader of the Revolutionary Army was my dad. In order to deal with my father, the World Government even betrayed and killed my grandpa. And their next target is me! My brother said that if I don''tpletely eradicate them one day, then me and the people around me will be in danger all the time. He can''t resurrect them every time they die. So he promised me that as long as I eradicate all the sources of danger, then he will resurrect everyone I care about once."


    Silence for a moment.


    Luffy continued: "Zoro...my journey will be very dangerous. If you really don''t want to, I won''t force you..."


    Just as was halfway through, Zoro interrupted directly: "No, don''t say it! I will! As long as Kuina can be resurrected, even if I really be the devil in everyone''s mouth, I don''t care!"


    Luffy could feel Zoro''s determination in Zoro''s eyes.


    Originally, he was thinking about how to confess this matter to Zoro. He didn''t expect Zoro to agree so easily. He finally let go of the burden in his heart because of this, and smiled: "Then let''s kill this group of scums together!"


    After a while.


    The two returned to the crowd.


    Luffy said abruptly: "You do it, or I do it?"


    Zoro''s eyes at this time became extremely indifferent.


    He slowly drew out the de: "I''ll do it! Just take it as a sign of my determination!"


    Before all the pirates could react, Zoro''s de shed with a swoosh! The pirates were still in disbelief until thest moment!


    Why?


    Why do you want to kill us?


    Where did we offend you?


    The mind is still thinking, but sword marks have gradually appeared all over their bodies. The smell of blood began to fill the air.


    Sprinkle!


    Blood spurts!


    The bloody and terrifying scene made Kerby vomit constantly on the spot.


    Koby didn''t dare to look at those bloody pictures again. After he vomited, he asked Luffy and Zoro angrily: "Why?! Why didn''t you send them to the Marine?! Why are you so cruel? Why kill them!"


    Without waiting for Luffy to speak, Zoro took the lead in exining: "How much do you know about the Marine?"


    Koby was startled, this was the second person to ask him that.


    Luffy asked him this question not long ago.


    He couldn''t figure out why they both asked that.


    "Do you know how many marines work together with pirates? Do you know how many people have been tortured because of marines'' inaction?"


    "Impossible...impossible!"


    Koby stepped back again and again.


    He staggered and fell directly to the ground.


    Luffy: "Koby, it''s not that I don''t want to hand them over to the Marine. It''s that I can''t trust the Marine anymore. If I hand them over to the Marine with my left hand, the Marine will release them with their right hand. They can''t hurt me, but what if they go after my rtives and friends? I can''t entrust the lives of my rtives and friends to the marine..."


    "Impossible! The Marine can''t be like this! The Marine can''t be like this!"


    "Koby, my brother once taught me a sentence, and now I turn it to you. Don''t persuade others to do good without suffering others. You are not me, you have not experienced my pain, I hope you don''t put your ideas above the people you care."


    Koby waspletely silent.


    Although he doesn''t understand what Luffy has experienced, he can also see that things don''t seem to be as simple as they seem.


    Luffy didn''t care about Koby''s reaction any more: "We''ll take that pirate ship and leave here. If you don''t mind, I''ll be happy to send you a ride to a nearby marine base. If you don''t want to... let it go."


    Luffy turned around and prepared to leave when he saw that Koby didn''t respond.


    But before he took a few steps, Koby suddenly shouted: "Wait! I''m going with you! I must prove to you that the marine is not what you said!"


    Not long.


    A group of three took Alvida''s pirate ship to the nearest town, which is Shells Town.


    As soon as the marines discovered the pirate ship, they immediately reported to the Captain Morgan.


    After rehabilitating and returning to justice, Morgan led a group of marines to the pier to live up to expectations, and he vowed to protect the safety of the people of Shells Town.


    At this time, Helmeppo was also wearing a marine uniform and mixed in with a group of ordinary marines.


    Since Luffy solved his father''s problems, he didn''t break his promise either. From that moment on, he started as an ordinary marine. Never gave up until now.


    As the pirate ship got closer and closer, there was no intention of stopping, and just when everyone thought that it was inevitable to have a fight with this group of pirates today, the sharp-eyed Helmeppo suddenly said boldly: "Luffy? Is that Luffy?!"


    This sentence caused amotion among the surrounding marines.


    Even Morgan couldn''t help but narrow his eyes and looked at the pirate ship more carefully.


    They saw Luffy standing on the bow of the boat, pressing the straw hat with one hand, swinging the other hand greatly, and said excitedly: "Hahahaha! It turns out to be you! I didn''t expect my first ce to be here! Hahahaha!"


    Koby was dumbfounded on the spot.


    Don''t you distrust the Marine?


    Why are you so familiar with the marine here?

 Chapter 395: Nami debuts

    Chapter 395: Nami debuts


    The pirate ship docked.


    Helmeppo was so overwhelmed with joy that he rushed to the marine and shouted: "Put down the gun! Put down the gun! It''s Luffy! It''s Luffy!"


    The pirate ship docked, and of course all the marines clearly saw that it was Luffy, but just when their minds were about to rx, they heard Morgan mmed: "Lower marine Helmeppo! Who allowed you to leave the team without authorization?!!"


    Helmeppo was surprised.


    They immediately showed a pleading look: "Father...that''s Luffy..."


    "Don''t call me father! In the military, you can only call me a Captain! When you go back, run the yground for me 100ps! Now I order you to go back to the team and raise your guns!"


    "Father..."


    "Ha?!!"


    Helmeppo looked aggrieved, but eventually returned to the team and silently raised the gun. Those marines who were about to put down their guns were also tight on the spot.


    They secretly d they didn''t put down their guns.


    And at this time, Luffy finally got off the boat and stepped into the dock.


    Luffy, Zoro, Koby, the distance between the three of them, and the marines who surrounded them with their guns were getting closer and closer.


    The atmosphere became more and more solemn.


    Seeing this, Koby was scared to pee by the scene in front of him.


    However, the style of painting suddenly changed.


    Morgan, who was originally looking solemn, suddenly smiled at Luffy and a few others: "Now I announce that today''s work is officially over, and everyone is disbanded on the spot! Remember to report back to the base on time tomorrow! Otherwise, the militaryw waits!"


    The voice of just fell.


    The marines, who were originally nervous to death, were stunned at first, and then they couldn''t help but want to release their suppressed emotions for a long time.


    They looked up at the sky and cheered.


    What''s more, he didn''t even care about his image, he threw his marine hat into the air, and then rushed to Luffy to ask Luffy''s current situation.


    Helmeppo is also stunned.


    He was almost moved to tears by the scene in front of me.


    He looked at Morgan with a very numb affection: "Father..."


    Morgan pretended to be a strict father: "Remember to go back to the base tomorrow morning to do the penalty!"


    After saying that, he turned and left.


    Helmeppo immediatelybined his feet and gave a military salute: "Yes!"


    After Morgan''s groups gradually moved away, Helmeppo couldn''t hold back the ecstasy in his heart, he threw the marine hat and ran towards Luffy.


    He finally squeezed into the crowd and faced Luffy face to face.


    Without saying anything, a bear hug came on the spot, and then he showed off his biceps and said excitedly: "Luffy, look! I didn''t break my promise, I''m already a marine!"


    Luffy also smiled happily: "Yeah!"


    "What about you? How have you been all these years? Why are you here?"


    "I just went out to sea not long ago, hahahaha! I didn''t expect you to be so close to where I live!"


    Zoro kept looking at the surrounding environment, and suddenly said: "Strange, why does this ce look so familiar? Have I been here before?"


    After saying this, he touched his chin and seemed to be thinking about this very seriously.


    Helmeppo turned into a ''devil'' face on the spot: "Didn''t you juste here to collect the bounty soon?!! And I personally received you!!!"


    "Oh? Is that so? Whatever, anyway, your marine bases all look exactly the same, and you can''t tell which is which."


    Luffyughed: "Hahahahahaha!"


    "By the way, Luffy, why did you get mixed up with him?" Helmeppo pointed to Zoro, "By the way, you came on the ship of the Alvida Pirates, have you already taken care of it? Want to exchange the bounty?"


    The rest of the marines were also curious about this question.


    They looked left and right one by one.


    But they couldn''t see anyone else on the boat.


    "No, I''ve killed them all."


    All the marine soldiers were stunned, but their expressions quickly returned to their natural state. A group of pirates who have done many evils, they should kill them if they kill them. Anyway, they are just making up their minds automatically. Can only kill the opponent.


    After all, Zoro, the bounty hunter, is here.


    No one thought of anything else.


    This is, Helmeppo finally noticed the little Koby: "By the way, Luffy, this is..."


    "He was the hostage I rescued from that group of pirates. He wanted to join the marine, so I sent him here."


    Koby, who was already full of anger, finally couldn''t help pulling Luffy''s clothes and asked, "Luffy... Didn''t you say you would never trust the Marine again?"


    As soon as these words came out, the scene of cheers suddenly became quiet.


    In front of the marine, no one will feel good if anyone says they will not trust the marine.


    What''s more, the person who didn''t trust them was Luffy who saved their town of Shells? In an instant, everyone''s eyes were focused on Luffy, and everyone wanted to hear what Luffy had to say.


    Luffy said without hesitation: "Yeah."


    Koby: "Then why do you have such a good rtionship with them?! Since you have such a good rtionship with them, why didn''t you hand over that group of pirates to them?! Why did you have to kill them all!!"


    The marines were stunned on the spot.


    From what Koby said, they could also guess what was going on.


    Turns out to be...


    The Alvida Pirates were deliberately exterminated by Luffy...


    Luffy smiled brightly: "I don''t trust the marine, yes, but I didn''t say that all marines must be bad people? And the ones I don''t trust the most are usually the guys at the top of the marine. What they do is not worth my trust at all. If you don''t believe it, just ask the people who look after here and let them tell you what happened here before."


    Koby nced at the marine soldiers in a daze.


    Everyone avoided his eyes consciously or not.


    In the end, it was Helmeppo who sighed and briefly told Koby what had happened here before.


    After a while.


    Helmeppo finished speaking.


    Koby''s face became even moreplicated, but he still had to retort: "Isn''t that very good? You have already proved that everything is done by pirates. Then why don''t you want to leave the pirates to them? Why lynch those pirates?"


    Koby pestered Luffy to ask this question again and again, and gradually, Luffy''s smile faded a lot: "Have you still not understood it yet? The senior marine was allowed to be hypnotized and be evil. The Headquarters didn''t do anything to stop him. Do you think I can still rest assured after that?" When Koby seemed to say something, Luffy interrupted directly: "Enough, if you don''t want to be my friend, I won''t force you. But I hope you don''t try to force your ideals into me. After others have suffered, don''t persuade them to be kind. I hope you can understand the true meaning of this sentence."


    Seeing that something was wrong in the atmosphere, Helmeppo hurried out to smooth things out.


    "Hahahaha, Luffy, let''s not talk about the unhappy things! Come on, you only came here after a long time,e to the tavern with me to catch up with the old days, I will invite you to drink and eat meat!"


    Luffy''s angeres and goes quickly.


    He didn''t take it seriously anymore and left with a smile and a group of enthusiastic marine members. As for Koby, he was also weed. He was taken to the register to sign up for the Marine.


    Three rounds of wine.


    All the marine and Luffy were drinking very hard in the tavern.


    There are so many people that have to queue to go to the toilet.


    Just when Helmeppo was going to go out to take a rest near the tavern to take a nap, a wanted notice suddenly floated from the sky and was stuck on his face.


    It was just delivered by the postman bird, and it was fresh and hot.


    Drunk Helmeppo took a look and the content of the wanted notice scared him sober on the spot! Looking at the wanted order in his hand, his whole body trembled.


    Immediately, he turned and ran back.


    On the way, he also met Koby, who was also holding a wanted notice and changed into a marine uniform.


    The two looked at each other with ugly expressions, pushed open the door of the tavern together, and walked in.


    They hurriedly walked to Luffy and handed him the wanted warrant.


    "Lu... Lu... Luffy, what is on the wanted list... is it true?" When he said this, Helmeppo''s lips trembled.


    The content on the Wanted List is a matter of the Goa Kingdom.


    And now Luffy''s reward is as high as 18 million Berry.


    Even stated that if anyone could capture him alive, they would be able to get extra rewards.


    Luffy, who was full of food and drink, took a look at the wanted notice, and said with excitement: "Ha! Is this urate?"


    Then he said to the two of them indifferently: "Yes, the content is true!"


    At this time, the wanted order has been passed on to the marines, and everyone was shocked when they saw the content of the wanted order!


    At the same time, they were all stupid.


    For a while, they didn''t know how to face Luffy.


    But, before they could figure out how to deal with the embarrassing scene in front of them, Morgan came to the tavern aggressively!


    The door was opened, and Morgan''s figure just appeared.


    The atmosphere in the tavern immediately became extremely solemn.


    Helmeppo and Koby were even ready to rush to stop Morgan.


    "Father..."


    Morgan red at Helmeppo fiercely, so scared that Helmeppo did not dare to speak.


    On the contrary, Koby mustered up his courage in this situation and said: "Report to the Captain! I think Luffy must have a hard time for this to happen! Luffy has saved me, and everyone in Shells Town, and also you, Captain, sir! Please let Luffy go this time as a favor! Next time we meet, I will definitely arrest him personally!"


    Morgan said fiercely: "Do you know what you''re talking about?! Seaman Recruit Koby! Do you know what the consequences will be if you do this?!!"


    Koby''s face shed a hint of hesitation.


    immediately gritted his teeth: "I know very well, Captain! I am willing to suffer any punishment for this behavior!"


    "Huh, including being kicked out of the Marine and bing a wanted criminal?!"


    "...Yes, Captain!" Koby looked firm.


    Helmeppo also stood up at this time, and saluted with firm eyes: "Me too, Captain! As long as Luffy can leave this time, I am willing to bear any punishment!"


    Morgan narrowed his eyes slightly, looked at the two of them, and nced at the surrounding marines: "Do you think so too?!"


    A group of marines who were still hesitant at first, suddenly all saluted: "Yes, Captain! We are willing to suffer any punishment for this behavior!"


    "Very good! Then after you go back, follow me for 500ps! If you can''t finish the run, you can''t eat!"


    The people who looked solemn at first were instantly overjoyed!


    Immediately, they resumed their serious look: "Yessir!"


    At this time, Morgan took back the fierce aura before, and said to Luffy: "Although you were rebels, you saved our base and town, and we are very grateful to you. But since you are wanted criminals, we as the marine can''t turn a blind eye! Please leave here immediately, I am very tolerant and will not contact headquarters."


    Luffy lowered his straw hat and grinned: "Zoro, since we''re not wee, let''s go."


    Having said that, Zoro also stood up and followed Luffy away.


    The two soon came to the pier.


    Just as the two of them untied the ropes on the pier and were about to get on the boat and leave, Koby rushed to the two of them again and saluted and shouted: "Thank you! I will never forget your great kindness and virtue! Also, Luffy! I will definitely prove to you that the marine is trustworthy!!"


    Zoro: "It''s strange that the Marine thanking the wanted criminal..."


    Luffy: "Hee hee hee, let''s meet again one day!! Koby!"


    At this time, Morgan also brought a group of marines behind Koby: "All salute!!!"


    With the sound of neatly stepping on the ground, Luffy was officially sent off from Shells Town.


    Two dayster.


    A medium-sized boat with only two people drifts on the ocean.


    Alvida''s pirate g has been reced by Luffy with a in white sail. As for Luffy and Zoro, although the ship they are on is much more luxurious than in the original, they are still a duo with zero sailing knowledge.


    "I''m so hungry~~~~~~"


    "It''s ridiculous that you have no knowledge of sailing!"


    "What''s so funny, I''ve been drifting with water all the time. Didn''t you catch pirates everywhere at sea?"


    "I didn''t say I was a pirate hunter. I just went out to sea to find someone, and I didn''t even know how to get back to my vige, so I was forced to catch pirates to get a bounty and make a living for this."


    "So you were lost..."


    Zoro''s "devil" face: "Don''t twist like that!!!"


    Chatting and chatting, a seagull suddenly flew from the sky.


    In order to catch the bird, Luffy rushed up with a rubber rocket, but his head was caught by the seagull''s mouth, and he flew away from the ship with the seagull.


    In order to catch up, Zoro met Buggy the clown''s men who wanted to rob him.


    Luffy was flying when he was suddenly bombarded with a cannonball into a town.


    As soon as hended, he heard someone calling him boss...

 Chapter 396: I want this partner

    Chapter 396: I want this partner


    "Boss! Are you here to save me? Then please!!"


    "Hey, that girl ran away!!"


    "Don''t chase me, the boss is with me! This time it will save a lot of trouble..."


    Luffy:"???"


    Saying that, one of the pirates punched Luffy, and Luffy reached out and grabbed his wrist, his heartless appearance immediately became more murderous: "Since you attacked, are you also prepared to die?"


    "You...you...you, what do you want?! I''m Lord Buggy''s subordinate!!" Seeing this idiot-looking brat dare to block him, the pirate was very angry!


    In addition to being angry, he was also a little surprised and frightened.


    No matter how hard he struggled, he couldn''t break free from the brat''s hand in front of him.


    "I don''t know who Buggy is, but since you guys attacked me as soon as I came here, you probably aren''t a good person?"


    There is also no need to use the rubber fruit ability.


    Luffy just used ordinary fists, legs, and palms to overthrow the three pirates.


    At this time, Nami had already returned to the nearby roof, puffed up her palms and said, "Woah! That''s amazing, you are amazing. You can subdue people who use weapons with bare hands."


    "Who are you?"


    "My name is Nami, and I''m a pirate thief. Shall we cooperate?"


    "Pirate thief?"


    "That''s right, I am a thief who specializes in stealing pirate property. If you cooperate with me, you will definitely not suffer!"


    "No. I''m not interested in working with you."


    "Hey, wait a minute!"


    Even though Luffy has expressed his wishes, Nami still lingers on Luffy. After a while, Nami took Luffy to a private house.


    "Oh? Lost from yourpanions at sea? How many people are there?"


    "One. Is this your home?"


    "No, I''m a wandering pirate thief. This is someone else''s house. Everyone in this town has gone to the suburbs to escape from Buggy''s gang in the bar."


    "Is that scary? That pirate named Nami."


    "Nami is me!! Buggy is the pirate!!" Nami said seriously, "Buggy is a famous pirate who likes to use cannons. I heard that the pirates in a certain town made fun of him. His red nose, and he wiped out that town with a cannon. And, I heard, he can use magic!"


    Luffy picked his nostrils,pletely unable to understand what Nami was saying: "Why is there no one in this town?"


    "I said!! They all ran to take refuge!!!"


    "Haha! That''s why you came here to steal things?"


    "Nonsense!! I''m a pirate thief! Thief of pirates! Don''t confuse me with a low-level thief! Hah~ I''m tired of talking to you!"


    "Don''t worry, hahahahahaha!"


    "Hey, you don''t understand. My goal is to earn 100 million Berry! Then buy a certain vige!"


    "100 million Berry?! How can an ordinary pirate have 100 million Berry?"


    "I have a way! Look! This is the Grand Line chart I just stole! I want to steal Buggy''s property here, and then go to the Grand Line to steal other great pirates'' property!! How? Don''t want to follow me? Do you cooperate to make money? Your power can help me, and the reward will not be less!"


    At this time, Luffy finally realized a question: "Do you...have knowledge of navigation?"


    "Of course! Don''t underestimate me! I firmly believe that no one has more sailing knowledge than me! Because I like the sea!"


    "Really? That''s great! We are also preparing to go to the Grand Line! You can be our navigator! Be a part of the adventurer!"


    Nami paused and asked suspiciously, "Adventurer?"


    "Yes! It is a career that yearns for the sea, yearns for freedom, and dares to take risks!"


    "Then what do you rely on to survive at sea?"


    "Loot pirates! Or catch some not-so-bad pirates to collect bounties? My other partner has been doing this kind of thing, and it should be very good."


    "Why only catch not so bad pirates?"


    "Nope, just kill them."


    "..." Nami paused again. She hated pirates very much, but she didn''t expect this guy in front of her to be in line with her three views. She immediately grinned, "Sounds very good! You can also join me if you want, but you have to promise me that you will share half of the bonuses you rob, steal, or receive! After all, without me, you would not be able toplete this journey."


    Luffy is not very interested in money, he agreed without thinking: "Okay!"


    In the original book, because Luffy said he wanted to be a pirate, Nami wanted to trick Luffy. But it''s different now, Luffy''s three views are consistent with hers, she really wants to join Luffy, and then earn 100 million Berry as soon as possible, and buy back that vige from Arlong.


    With the future settled, Nami became very excited: "Come on, since we have be partners, let''s do the first transaction now! I have a n here..."


    Nami murmured about her n to use Luffy as a bait and snatch all of Buggy''s belongings.


    Luffy was at a loss when he heard it, and was very puzzled: "Why bother? Didn''t you say that Buggy did a lot of bad things? If it''s true, then we''ll kill him and grab all his belongings."


    Nami''s devil face: "Idiot!!! Do you know how many people Buggy has under hismand?!! Do you know how strong Buggy is?! If you fight like this rashly, don''t you just die?!"


    "But... I''m also very powerful?"


    "Are you strong? How strong are you?"


    "I don''t understand either, but no matter who the opponent is, I will definitely not back down! I will definitely knock him down!"


    Nami shook her head and supported her forehead: "Hah~ forget it, don''t worry about it so much, just follow my n."


    Luffy ttened his mouth, a little reluctantly said: "Okay..."


    ...


    At the same time.


    On the roof of the bar.


    Buggy sat on a high chair, looked at a wanted warrant in his hand, and looked very unhappy, mocking andining in front of all his subordinates: "Oh, young people nowadays really do anything in order to be famous. I can figure it out. If you destroy a small kingdom without a strong man casually, there will be a reward for this, are the brains of those marines broken?!"


    The arrest warrant in Buggy''s hand has a big photo of Luffy.


    His current reward is 15 million Berry.


    Luffy, a neer, actually has 3 million more Berry than him, which makes him very upset.


    He even forcibly imagined Luffy as a guy who would do whatever it takes to be famous, even capable of destroying a country.


    The pirates around saw Buggy''s dissatisfaction, and agreed one by one.


    "Yes, yes, yes! If the boss wants to do it, he can do it!"


    "Boss Buggy, why don''t we find a small country to destroy? Then our Buggy Pirates can quickly be famous in the entire East Blue!"


    Buggy pped the armrest of the chair hard: "Huh! Do I need to use these low tricks to be famous?!"


    Seeing that Buggy was angry, all the pirates tightened their asses, not daring to make a sound.


    Buggy nced at everyone, and suddenly turned into a cunning look: "Hah... If you want to be famous, isn''t there an easier way now? As long as we catch this kid to the marine, we can get what we want!!"


    "Yes! The boss is right!"


    "Boss is right!"


    "As long as the boss is willing to make a move, this kid is definitely not the boss'' opponent!"


    Buggy pped the armrest again, and angrily said: "Since you know what I said is right, why are you still standing here?! Why don''t you hurry up and find the whereabouts of this kid?!"


    "Yes!"


    Just now a few pirates left here, ready to start looking for Luffy''s whereabouts, and a few more pirates came back here in a hurry and panic.


    "Boss...boss...boss!! Not good!! That thief got away!"


    "What?!! You let go that thief?!! You three big men, what are you doing?!!"


    "Yes... I''m sorry, Captain Buggy... But... But the big brother in the straw hat is really amazing!!"


    Buggy''s expression froze: "Wait, what are you talking about? A dude wearing a straw hat? Come over and see if this guy is the same as the guy on the arrest warrant?"


    "Yes, yes, yes! Captain Buggy, that''s him! The thief was the one who left!"


    Buggy gritted his teeth: "Okay... I haven''t provoked you yet, youe here to provoke me... It seems that these neers have be more and more reckless recently! Very good! Since you came to your door, I will not be polite! Why are you still standing there?! Hurry up and block the entire town! If he escapes, you will all die!"


    "Yes, yes!"


    "Boss Buggy!" At this time, another pirate called Buggy from a distance.


    "What''s the matter?!!"


    "Then...the thief...she came to the door by herself."


    Buggy: "???"


    Pirates: "???"


    After a while.


    Luffy, who was bound, was brought to Buggy together with Nami.


    "I brought the thief back, Captain Buggy the Star Clown. Let me return the chart to you."


    "Boss...boss...boss! This is the guy!! It is exactly the same as the arrest warrant!"


    Nami froze.


    Wanted?


    What arrest warrant?


    Buggy didn''t care so much, he was very happy now: "Hahahahaha! Well done! Well done! I don''t care what your rtionship was with him before! But you have done a great job for me now! I will definitely not treat you badly!"


    While Buggy was speaking, he also handed over the arrest warrant to Nami for Nami to see for herself.


    And he himself walked up to Luffy to make money, admiring the spoils that could make him famous and rich in one fell swoop.


    When Nami saw the arrest warrant, she was dumbfounded.


    Is this really the same person?


    Didn''t you say you are an adventurer?


    How did you be a wanted criminal?


    A momentter, in order to celebrate the lost and recovered sea chart, and to capture the treasure of Luffy alive, the Clown Buggy Pirates held a party.


    Everyone had a great time drinking.


    And Nami, while everyone was not paying attention, went to the cage where Luffy was held, squatted down, and said with a gloomy face: "Didn''t you say you are an adventurer? Why did you lie to me? Why did you do such a thing."


    Luffy took it for granted: "Because they are bad people."


    Nami was stunned. She didn''t expect Luffy to speak so confidently. She gritted her teeth and said, "How can you do this? That''s a whole country! How many people did you kill?"


    When it came to this topic, Luffy''s smile gradually disappeared, and he became serious: "No matter how many people, as long as they are bad people, I will kill them. I have a reason to kill them."


    Nami looked at Luffy with aplicated expression for a while, and finally sighed and said: "Forget it, I have no way to agree with what you did. I said that I joined you before, just pretend that nothing happened. Wait for me. After I get their treasure, I will find a chance to let you go. At that time, we will not owe each other and go our separate ways."


    As she spoke, Buggy''s voice suddenly sounded behind Nami.


    Buggy viewed Luffy condescendingly: "Hahahahaha! The consequences of stealing my treasures are very serious. If the arrest warrant stated that I must capture you alive, I could get a higher reward. I wish I could kill you right now!"


    Luffy didn''t speak.


    But his unafraid eyes, that straw hat, made Buggy very unhappy.


    Buggy smiled grimly: "Although I can''t kill you, it''s okay to punish you appropriately! Nami! Cut off his hands!"


    After finishing speaking, Buggy threw a dagger to Nami.


    After taking the dagger, Nami was stunned.


    She couldn''t do it.


    Luffyughed and said, "Your hands are shaking. It''s all because you were not mentally prepared for dealing with pirates, that''s why this happens."


    "What... what preparations? Pirates who kill casually are mentally prepared?"


    "No! It''s a psychological preparation to protect your own life"


    Nami lingered, and finally after the pirate couldn''t see her, snatched the dagger from her hand, and prepared to do it herself.


    In desperation, Nami subconsciously pulled out herbined wooden stick hidden in her thigh, and hit the pirate on the head with one stick, preventing him from attacking Luffy.


    Seeing this, all the pirates were furious.


    Buggy was also extremely angry: "Nami!! It''s rare for me to allow you to join!! What''s your attitude?!"


    Luffy continued unhurriedly: "What''s wrong? Didn''t you say you want to join me? Are you still helping me now?"


    Nami stood in front of Luffy: "Nonsense! I''m just forced by the world! Even if I didn''t join you, I don''t want to do some pirate stuffs!! Pirates took the life of the person I value most!!"


    "Oh? So you also hate pirates because of this kind of thing?"


    Nami was stunned for a moment, wondering why Luffy said ''yes''.


    Luffy grinned: "I''ve decided..."


    Nami: "???"


    Luffy: "You, I''m going to make you my partner!"


    "Damn! Is this the time to say these things? Wait until you get out alive!"


    Just when all the pirates were rushing towards Nami with weapons in hand, Zoro''s shout happened to pass through in the distance: "Luffy!!! Catch it!!!"


    A suitcase, passing through the cage perfectly, fell into Luffy''s hands...

 Chapter 397: The Crew Gather

    Chapter 397: The Crew Gather


    "Damn it! It''s their partner who came!! Kill this stinky bitch first!!"


    "Come on!!"


    Luffy, who had just received the suitcase, grinned and said in an inaudible voice: "Silver..."


    Click.


    The switch of the suitcase is undone.


    A de appeared in Luffy''s hand. Immediately, the de began to squirm like a living thing, and gradually grew into a t-toothed monster.


    There is no need for Luffy to say anything, Silver Eater seems to be connected with Luffy, and with a swish, he bites off the rope that binds Luffy and the cage that looks extremely strong!


    The group of pirates rushing towards Nami all froze!


    They had already forgotten what they wanted to do, they all raised their heads one after another, looking at the top of their heads behind Nami in disbelief!


    The t-toothed monster shrouded all of them in darkness as if covering the sky and blocking out the sun.


    Nami, who was originally extremely nervous, couldn''t help but look back with a puzzled face when she saw their expressions.


    It also made her dumbfounded.


    Without waiting for everyone to react, they just heard Luffy say: "Let''s do it... Silver Eater..."


    Immediately afterwards, the t-toothed monster disappeared in vain!


    When it reappeared, the air was already filled with a strong smell of blood!


    There is a crisp sound of chewing bones in the mouth!


    At this time, the screams of the survivors sounded: "Ah!!! A monster! It''s a monster!! Run away!! Run away!!"


    At this moment, the roof of the bar is covered with blood and body parts.


    The surviving pirates were in a mess.


    Some people even jumped off the building in panic.


    Even if he fell seriously injured, he didn''t care, and ran with all his might. Buggy had already disappeared without a trace, he was the fastest one.


    After regaining consciousness, Nami bent down and vomited on the spot.


    "You...you...you...what kind of monster is this?!"


    Luffy squinted his eyes and smiled: "This is also my partner, named Silver Eater! How about it? I said that I am very powerful, but you don''t believe it. If we just kill them at the beginning, and there won''t be so much trouble gone."


    Zoro also came behind Luffy at this time.


    Nami couldn''t help but swallowed: "Roronoa Zoro? He...he...he...is the partner you said of?! The ''Bounty Hunter''?!"


    "Yes! You also know Zoro?"


    Nami with the Devil Face: "How could I not know?!"


    "Hahahahaha! Zoro, I found the navigator! It''s her, and his name is Nami!"


    Nami was about to get angry and wanted to say that she didn''t agree to Luffy, but just as the words came to her lips, she suddenly stopped...


    Zoro opened his eyes and closed his eyes: "Oh? Nami, right? I''m Zoro, please give me more advice in the future. The red nose seems to have escaped just now. Luffy, let''s go after him."


    After finishing speaking, Luffy and Zoro walked in the direction of Buggy''s escape one after the other.


    Nami, who came back to her senses, quickly stopped them: "Wait...wait!"


    Luffy: "???"


    Zoro: "???"


    "I told you just now, I will not do that kind of pirate behavior no matter what! You want me to join you, yes! But you also promise me one condition first!"


    Neither Luffy nor Zoro spoke, waiting for Nami to continue talking.


    Nami''s heart is veryplicated at the moment.


    Her savings have almost reached 100 million Berry. But she is also very clear that people like Arlong are likely to go back on their word at any time. The reason why she has not considered this issue is because she does not want to think about it.


    Because if Arlong really does not keep his promise, then she really has no way to save the vige.


    She deceived herself and others, and she just wanted to leave herself with a glimmer of hope.


    But!


    Now that Luffy''s appearance shows her real hope!


    The scene just now...


    Luffy''s strength...


    Maybe...maybe...maybe this person in front of her can really help her get rid of Arlong!


    "Didn''t I tell you before? I worked so hard to make money just to buy a certain vige! But I know that the guy who controls the vige may not keep his promise! If... If you can help me get rid of those pirates, then I will agree to join you! However, don''t me me for not reminding you, I won''t admit it until you solve them thoroughly! I don''t want you getting involved with the vige! Those pirates are very powerful, and I''m not sure if you are their opponents. If...if you don''t want to, then I...then I won''t force it!"


    Luffy didn''t even think about it, and smiled heartily: "Okay! It''s right to help the crew solve their troubles, right? And... Listen to what you said, those pirates should be bad guys, right? The people you value the most are being caught and killed by them?"


    Nami gritted her teeth with hatred: "Yes! They killed the people I cared!"


    "That would be even better! Even if you don''t tell me, Zoro and I will try our best to kill this bad guy! Right, Zoro?"


    Zoro nced at Luffy, and both of them agreed: "Oh, of course!"


    Nami was taken aback.


    They didn''t expect the two guys in front of her to agree to her request so easily.


    The vige has been saved!


    The vige is really saved this time!


    Nami was so moved that she covered her mouth and shed tears on the spot, then rushed to Luffy and hugged Luffy: "Thank you! Thank you!"


    After a while.


    The three continued to look for Buggy''s whereabouts.


    Nami said that Buggy would definitely not give up his treasure, so she took Luffy and Zoro to the storage room of Buggy''s treasure.


    As predicted.


    On the way to the treasure storage room, they met Buggy''s men who wanted to intercept them, Mohji riding a huge lion, and a guy with a sword.


    In the original book, Luffy got rid of Mohji and the huge lion in two or three ces.


    Not to mention now, Mohji couldn''tst even a few seconds.


    The same is true for the battle on Zoro''s side.


    In the original book, he got into a hard fight with this swordsman because he was seriously injured. Now, without the encounter in Shells Town, and without Buggy''s sneak attack, he is alive and well, and of course it is no problem for him to solve his opponent.


    Soon, they came to the treasure storage room.


    Sure enough, they saw Buggy trying to carry the treasure away.


    Buggy was taken aback when he saw theming so fast.


    He didn''t care about so much, he regarded wealth as his life, left the treasure, and ran away.


    It''s not that he''s timid.


    But he didn''t want to die in vain.


    He was also an intern on the ship of One Piece Roger, so he must have some knowledge. Seeing the speed and strength of the t-toothed monster before, he knew that he was definitely not Luffy''s opponent.


    Don''t run, what are you waiting for?


    If it weren''t for the fact that he was really reluctant to part with the property he had looted over the years, he really wanted to just run away.


    It''s a pity that he didn''t expect that those two subordinates couldn''t even stop him for a moment, so he would give up the treasure after all. He felt ruthless in his heart, and swore to himself, I will remember this hatred!


    One day I will make you pay!


    It''s a pity that when his eyes continued to look towards the bright road ahead, there was a very obtrusive ''unidentified object'' in the corner of his eyes.


    He took a closer look.


    Hand?


    No one is around, why is there an extra palm here?


    Before he could figure out what was going on, Luffy''s palm was tightly grasping the hard object beside him, and his body followed the stretched rubber hand, and flew in front of Buggy in an instant, and looked at Buggy with a smile on his face.


    Buggy at this time, the anger in his heart has not subsided.


    Seeing that Luffy refused to give up, he also felt ruthless in his heart, gritted his teeth, turned his thoughts of running away into an offensive, pushed his knee forward, and hit the ground hard! His forehead was punched forward even more violently!


    "Hero, spare my life!" Buggy knelt down.


    Luffy was stunned, but soon recovered his fierce look: "Spare you? Many people have begged for life, so you probably didn''t let them go?"


    Silver''s huge t-toothed mouth was almost close to Buggy''s cheek.


    Even the saliva dripped on Buggy''s face.


    Buggy backed away in fright: "Don''t, don''t! Don''t kill me! You...you...you know Shanks, right? That straw hat on your head was given to you by Shanks? I know Shanks too! I''m Shanks'' friend! Don''t kill me!"


    Silver Eater is about to open his mouth.


    But stopped at this moment.


    "Oh? You know Shanks too?"


    "Yes, yes, yes! Shanks and I used to be trainees on the ship of One Piece Roger, and our rtionship is very good!"


    Luffy touched his chin, a little annoyed: "Then it''s troublesome...you are Shanks'' friend, so I can''t kill you..."


    At this time, Zoro and Nami also walked to Luffy.


    Zoro: "Luffy, what''s wrong? Why don''t you kill him?"


    Nami didn''t care that much.


    Holding the bag of belongings left by Buggy in her arms, she felt ted. As long as she has these belongings, she is only a little bit away from the goal of 100 million Berry.


    If Luffy really fails, then she also has a way out.


    At that time, she will at most help by begging Arlong to let Luffy go.


    Luffy pointed to Buggy: "He is a friend of my savior, I don''t know whether to kill him..."


    Buggy looked overjoyed.


    Zoro frowned slightly: "Could he be lying to you?"


    While counting the belongings, Nami also nodded in agreement: "It is indeed possible. He is very cunning."


    Buggy said nervously: "No, no, no! I didn''t lie to you! I''m really Shanks'' friend! If you don''t believe me, you can leave me on the boat first! After you find Shanks, you can ask him!"


    Luffy still looked annoyed.


    Zoro: "Let''s leave him on the ship for chores. Wait until you find your benefactor."


    Luffy nodded: "Well, that''s the only way to go."


    Immediately, the group left the town.


    He came and went casually, but he didn''t meet the vige head of this town, nor did he meet that dog. When the people in the town were about toe back to rebel, they found that the Buggy Pirates were all gone.


    The ship that originally belonged to Alvida is now carrying Luffy, Zoro, Nami, and Buggy to the next location.


    ...


    A few dayster.


    In the jungle of a certain ind vige.


    A board like a target is hung on a certain tree.


    And about 300 meters away from this target, a guy with a long nose and goggles, carrying a slingshot, aimed at the target and shot!


    Snapped!


    The target was shot directly by an iron ball!


    Usopp took off the goggles, and the two little guys on the side were excited and kept praising.


    "It''s amazing!! As expected of our Captain Usopp!! You can shoot from such a distance!!"


    "Yes! Captain!! How did you do it?!"


    Usopp has lost the foolish look in the original book: "As long as you work hard, you can do it in the future."


    This serious look made the eyes of the two little fans shine.


    At this time, Onion ran over from a distance with a panicked expression: "It''s bad! It''s bad! It''s bad! Lu... Luffy is back!!"


    "Onion! Did you read it wrong? Is it really that Luffy back then?"


    "No! I''m sure I read it right! He''s still wearing that straw hat."


    Usopp grinned: "Really? It seems that my crew is here to pick me up as the captain and go back..."


    The three kids were very disappointed, tears were about to flow down: "Captain Usopp, are you really leaving?"


    Usopp messed up the hairs of the three people''s heads: "This is a man''s promise. I can''t do it if I don''t go. Moreover, they also need me as the captain."


    At this time, a burst of shouting suddenly came from the jungle: "Rubber Fist!"


    Usopp''s reflexes are extremely fast!


    The slingshot was raised almost instantly, and an iron ball was also shot at it!


    The iron ball collided with the rubber fist.


    It offset each other''s power.


    Immediately afterwards, Luffy and his party came out from the darkness: "Usopp, long time no see."


    "I''ve been waiting for you for a long time, Luffy!"


    After saying goodbye to Kaya and the people in the vige, Usopp followed everyone and left here. As for Kaya, just like the original book, she has to learn medical skills, saying that if one day in the future, Usoppes back from injury, then she can also heal him...


    ...


    A few dayster.


    A sea restaurant made of fish head, fish body and fish tail is floating in a certain area of the East Blue.


    Inside the restaurant.


    A guy with blond hair and curly eyebrows, with two big hearts shining in his eyes, approached the dining table of the two beauties with a courteous face and said, "How are you twodies? Is today''s dish to your liking? This is what I specially prepared for you two such beautifuldies."


    The twodies at the dining table covered their mouths and smiled.


    These shy smiles made the guy with curly eyebrows fascinated.


    At this time, a group of uninvited guests came to the boat.


    As soon as he entered the restaurant, someone yelled at the guy with curly eyebrows: "Hurry up and serve me all the delicious food!"


    Curly eyebrows looked angry: "You are so noisy, don''t you know that it will affect the appetite of other customers? What if food is wasted?"


    The visitor didn''t hold back just because he annoyed the curly eyebrows, but instead grinned: "Really? Then I''ll eat up all the leftovers! Is there any problem? Sanji?"


    Sanji also raised the corners of his mouth: "Then you''d better do what you say, Luffy!"

 Chapter 398: Darkened Adventure Group

    Chapter 398: Darkened Adventure Group


    Inside the restaurant.


    During this journey, they did not encounter the Krieg Pirates, nor did they encounter Hawk Eyes. Hawk Eyes was supposed to be recruited by the marine and rushed to Marlin Vandor, so he didn''t appear here.


    The same is true for the Krieg Pirates. If they hadn''t encountered Hawk Eyes, they would not have been wiped out by the group. Naturally, they would not appear here as losers like in the original book.


    The process of Sanji joining was very smooth, without any idents.


    The chef on the ship even held arge farewell + wee party to send off Sanji and wee Luffy''s group.


    All of a sudden, the crew of the entire restaurant on the sea went into a party.


    And when the atmosphere of this farewell + wee party reached its climax, Luffy suddenly called Sanji and Usopp to a lounge in the ship.


    Usopp: "Ha! Luffy, why are you being so secretive? Isn''t this your style?"


    Sanji: "Yes, Luffy. This is not like the you I used to know."


    Luffy no longer has a hippie smile, but a serious face.


    Seeing this, Sanji and Usopp couldn''t help but be serious.


    Luffy: "Usopp, I''m sorry, I just remembered that there is a very important thing that I forgot to tell you. Since Sanji is here, let me tell you as well!"


    Usoppughed dryly, not used to Luffy''s serious look: "Hahaha, Luffy, just say what you want, even if you want to give me the captain''s position, the atmosphere doesn''t have to be so serious?"


    Luffy didn''t speak.


    He took out a wanted warrant from his arms and handed it to the two of them.


    Luffy was stunned by the expressions of the two after seeing the arrest warrant. The imaginary shock and worry did not appear, but the two looked at each other and grinned.


    Sanji: "What''s the matter? Letting us see your reward, is it to show off to us?"


    Usopp: "Hey hey, Luffy, the reward is only 18 million Berry, you arecent, I will surpass you soon!"


    Luffy was confused: "You... you are not surprised?"


    Sanji and Usopp, although they didn''t know each other before this, and didn''t experience any battles to enhance the rtionship between the two, but at this moment, they both showed yful smiles in a very tacit understanding.


    Sanji: "What''s so surprising? Your arrest warrant has already spread throughout the East Blue."


    Usopp: "Yes, I have seen your arrest warrant a few years ago."


    Luffy was surprised: "Could it be... Aren''t you wondering why I did this?"


    Usopp closed his eyes very confidently, and shook his head: "Although I don''t know whether the content on the arrest warrant is true or not, even if it is true, I believe that you must have your reasons for doing this! It''s the Luffy I knew back then!"


    Sanji nodded.


    Obviously agreed with Usopp.


    Luffy''s heart warmed up, Sanji and Usopp trusted him so much, so of course it was even more necessary to confess to them!


    "The content on the arrest warrant is indeed true. I only found out that my father was the leader of the Revolutionary Army a few years ago. But my grandfather was ndered. It was a lie they made up because they wanted to deal with my father! And, he has already begun to target me now!"


    Usopp stroked his chin and nodded: "No wonder... No wonder your reward has soared so high all of a sudden. I''m surprised, there''s a reason why the gap between the famous Captain Usopp and you is so big. It turns out the problem is here."


    "I pulled you in this time mainly to tell you that they have arrested my brother and are going to lure me to the execution ground. And I will indeed go to rescue my brother. So it will be very dangerous for you to follow me to sea. I hope you will think carefully before deciding..."


    Sanji threw the cigarette butt on the ground, then extinguished the mes with his toes, and said with dissatisfaction: "Needless to say, Luffy. Since we arepanions, you shouldn''t need to ask us that question! Who are you looking down on?"


    Usopp agreed with his nostrils upturned: "Yes! Since you have decided to go out together, don''t be such a mother-inw."


    Luffy looked guilty: "Sorry, I was worrying too much."


    The two patted Luffy on the shoulder: "Let''s go, go out and continue drinking!"


    And just as the two were about to step out of the waiting room, Luffy suddenly said: "By the way, there is one more thing, I think, I also need to tell you."


    Sanji and Usopp stopped,


    They all turned around and looked at Luffy with doubts on their faces.


    "I don''t know if you can ept it, but during the next journey, Zoro and I will kill many, many people. As long as they are bad people, we will not let them go! If you really can''t ept it, I will not I force you to do it, but I hope you don''t stop us. Because we have reasons to kill them!"


    Usopp: "It''s also this reason that you destroyed the Kingdom of Goa?"


    Luffy nodded.


    Sanji: "If you really killed all the bad guys, although I don''t care, can you tell me why?"


    Luffy nodded: "My brother promised me that as long as I kill all the people who may target me and take revenge, then he will resurrect the people I care about."


    As soon as the words came out.


    Sanji''s reaction was not bad, he was just slightly surprised.


    He was a little surprised by the word ''resurrection''.


    But Usopp is different! While he was surprised, he felt a sense of suffocation in an instant! For a long time, although he was fine on the surface, in his heart he was always ming himself for killing Kaya''s parents back then.


    If there is really resurrection in this world...


    Aren''t Kaya''s parents...!!!


    Usopp said with a trembling tone: "Lu... Luffy... You... Didn''t you say that your brother was captured by the marine?"


    Luffy shook his head: "The brother who was captured by the marine is called Ace. He is my sworn brother. You have actually seen this brother. He is the one who was by my side back then. With his strength, and it''s impossible for him to be caught by the marine."


    Sanji and Usopp, who were still a little suspicious at first, heard that it was the masked man who had the ability to resurrect the dead, and the only suspicion in their hearts disappeared immediately!


    Others, maybe they won''t believe it!


    But if this person is the masked man from back then, then it is impossible for them not to believe it!


    After all, they had been in close contact with the masked man back then, and the mysterious and unfathomable feeling they have never forgotten.


    Sanji nodded: "If it''s that person... Maybe it''s really possible."


    Speaking of this, Usopp suddenly rushed towards Luffy, and emotionally grabbed Luffy''s cor: "Lu... Luffy!! You said that he can help people resurrect! Then...then...then can you helped me revive Kaya''s parents?!"


    Luffy: "Usopp, calm down first. Even if you hadn''t asked me, I''m going to ask my brother to help me revive Kaya''s parents..."


    Usopp''s eyes were moist, and his tone trembled: "Really...really?"


    Luffy nodded sincerely.


    Immediately, Usopp seemed to release the pressure that had been suppressed in his heart for many years. He copsed and knelt down on the ground, crying while wiping his tears: "That''s great...that''s really great..."


    Luffy smiled slightly.


    In this way, Usopp will not object to him killing bad guys.


    Luffy turned to look at Sanji.


    Sanji shrugged and spread his hands: "I don''t have anyone who I want alive again. However, I just want to ask, since he has the ability to resurrect the dead, can he also help people grow a brand new calf?"


    Luffy was taken aback.


    He knew that Sanji was talking about Zepp.


    After a while.


    Luffy replied: "My brother didn''t respond to me. He hasn''t looked for me for a long time. But I believe that with his ability, there will be no problem!"


    Receiving Luffy''s guarantee, Sanji felt a little excited in his heart.


    Suddenly a hint of fierceness shed in his eyes, and he grinned: "Then there is nothing more to say. I hope you don''t wait until the critical moment to be soft. If possible, I also want to take Mr. Zeff to find ALL BLUE!"


    Without waiting for Luffy to say anything.


    Usopp stood up abruptly again, and said excitedly: "Yes! Luffy! Don''t go back on your word! If you are too soft-handed, let me do it!"


    Seeing that both of them have the same beliefs as himself, Luffy smiled brightly: "Don''t worry, I will definitely not let you down!"


    After the farewell party + wee party, it was time for Sanji to bid farewell to his colleagues who had been with him for many years.


    After saying goodbye to everyone one by one, Sanji kowtowed to everyone to express his gratitude to everyone for taking care of him for so many years.


    Then before parting, he walked up to Zeff, pretending to be mysterious: "Old man, don''t die so soon! I will definitely bring you a surprise!"


    "Hmph! Don''t you die while I''m still alive!"


    Just like that, the old friends are all gathered together now.


    The adventure group, which was nearlypletely darkened, officially set off for their next location.


    ...


    At the same time.


    Northwest of the East Blue.


    Arlong Park.


    Captain Nezumi was killed by Li Yaoxiang back then, and took his ce. However, after Li Yaoxiang was promoted and transferred to other areas, the Marine Headquarters sent another captain to manage the sea area.


    And the style of this naval captain is no different from that of the original Captain Nezumi.


    On this day, she also came to Arlong Park to ask Arlong for a monthly ''protection fee''.


    Two people are sitting by the pool.


    Arlong puts a wad of money on the table: "This is the amount for this month, you can ept it."


    "Hehehe, you really know how to live in the world...then I''ll be polite..."


    "Hahahahaha! Do you still need to be polite? A wonderful world is a world where money is earned! Money is the best, more reliable than anything, isn''t it?"


    "That''s right!"


    "Hahahahahaha! Although I hate humans, a sensible person and woman like you is another matter!"


    "Okay, after the matter is settled, I will take my leave. It would be terrible if someone finds that the patrolling ship is parked here."


    "You are in such a hurry every time, why don''t you enjoy the wine a day earlier? If someone in the headquarters is nagging, I will kill him for you!"


    "No, I''m leaving."


    "Hey! The captain is going back! Take her back to the ship for me!"


    Immediately afterwards, the octopus fish-man, Hatcha, appeared in front of everyone, and he was responsible for sending the captain out of here. The development of things here is almost the same as in the original book, when Captain Nezumimunicates with Arlong.


    However, just when the captain was about to sit on Xiaoba''s octopus shell, the captain suddenly stopped and turned to look at Arlong: "By the way, there is news about the arrest warrant that was given to youst time. If you really want to help me, then you''d better help me capture the guy on the wanted list alive. As long as he is handed over to the headquarters, it will be of countless benefit to you and me."


    Speaking of which.


    Hatcha, who had a hearty smile on his face, suddenly darkened.


    Even the expression of Arlong subtly changed.


    Arlong said calmly: "Don''t worry, as long as there is news about him, I will definitely notify you as soon as possible. After all, no one dislike too much money, right?"


    "Well, that''s it."


    After the captain of the marine leaves.


    Arlong took out a wanted warrant from his pocket, and he said excitedly: "Yes, Luffy! You really didn''t disappoint me! The bounty is about to catch up with me so soon! Hahahahaha! Those marines actually value it so much! It seems that the content on the arrest warrant is true! You really destroyed a human country! Hahahahaha! Good! Very good!"


    ...


    A few dayster.


    On a certain sea area in the northwest of the East Blue.


    The closer she gets to Arlong Park, the more nervous and excited Nami bes!


    The crew on the ship were so excited that they could all see that something was wrong with her.


    Nami stood on the bow of the boat, trembling all over, looking in the direction of Elong Park.


    Sanji''s eyes shed with two big hearts, and he came to Nami courteously: "Nami, are you hungry? Just tell me if you are hungry, and I will definitely cook satisfactory food for you!"


    Luffy and Usopp hooked their shoulders: "Me too!!"


    At this time, Zoro, who was still exercising, suddenly said: "Nami, you don''t have to worry too much. If things are really as you said, as long as we meet them, we will not let them go!"


    Usopp patted his heart: "Yes! I guarantee it in the name of Usopp!"


    Sanji also put on a pose that he thinks is the most handsome at this time: "Yes, I, Sanji, will be the first to make a beautifuldy like you sad."


    Seeing that everyone was supporting her, Nami was very moved, but she was not overwhelmed by this touch of reason: "I know you are all powerful. But I can''t let the vige take a risk. Remember, you have promised me that you will not tell others that we met before this problem ispletely resolved."


    Luffy smiled and said: "Don''t worry, I will do what I promised you!"


    Everyone feels at ease with the members of the ship.


    However, after saying this sentence, everyone looked at Buggy, the handyman who was still mopping the floor.


    Sensing everyone''s stares, Buggy said angrily, "Look, what are you looking at? I''m not interested in meddling your affairs!"


    Zoro stopped exercising, shook his head, and walked towards Buggy: "No, no, even your promise doesn''t reassure us..."


    "You...you...you, what do you want?! Don''te here! Don''te here! No! Ah!!!"

 Chapter 399: Goodbye Arlong

    Chapter 399: Goodbye Arlong


    Cocoyasi Vige.


    Luffy and his party parked the boat in Nami''s hometown, a hidden ce in Cocoyasi Vige.


    Except for Zoro to stay on the boat to guard Buggy and the others, the rest followed Nami all the way to the Arlong Park.


    After following for a long time, Nami turned around and told everyone: "Okay, you can follow here. Next, you just need to walk in this direction, and you can go to the location of the pirates. From now on, you''d better keep a little distance from me."


    Luffy: "Yeah! Don''t worry, Nami, we won''t let you down."


    Seeing that the crowd really stopped following, Nami breathed a sigh of relief and continued walking to the Arlong Park.


    After Nami walked away, Luffy said: "Let''s go, follow."


    Usopp: "Didn''t Nami say, let''s keep a longer distance?"


    Luffy: "If those pirates are really as bad as Nami said, I don''t feel relieved to hand Nami over to them. If something happens, we can rescue it in time."


    Immediately, several people followed up together.


    After a while.


    The entrance to the Arlong Park.


    A child is holding a de, facing Nami who is in the way.


    "Hey! Get out of the way!! I''m going to kill Arlong!! He killed my father! If you don''t get out of the way, I''ll kill you too!! I''m serious!!"


    Nami drew out thebination stick.


    Not only did she knock over the child with a stick, but she didn''t even intend to stop after knocking the child down.


    "Arlong doesn''t have time to y with kids like you!! Go back if you understand!"


    After finishing speaking, she stepped on the child and threw a wad of money in front of the child: "Here''s the money for you, use it for yourself."


    After finishing speaking, leave this child alone.


    Turn around and officially step into the entrance of the Arlong Park, which is simr to the gate of a courtyard.


    Come to the pool.


    Arlong soon noticed Nami''s arrival.


    Arlong: "Oh? After so long, have you finallye back?"


    Nami: "The defense in this room is always sox."


    Arlong: "Huh! Who do you think I am?! What''s the result of this round?"


    Nami: "A good harvest, but my heart seems to be empty."


    "Hahahahaha! When did you be so sentimental? Isn''t deceiving people your forte, Nami?"


    "Yes..."


    "Comrades!! Friends are back!! Banquet!!!"


    "Yes!!"


    And just when the fish-men were busy preparing for the banquet, a fish-man suddenly ran back from the entrance in a hurry: "Brother Arlong!! Brother Arlong!! Hahahahahaha! Come and see! Come quickly look who is here! Hahahahaha!"


    Everyone looked behind the fish-man.


    After seeing the personing, everyone had the same reaction as the fish-man.


    Very excited.


    "Hahahahaha! Luffy! It''s you! Long time no see!"


    "Luffy! Do you still remember who I am?"


    "You did it, kid. You''ve made such a big name without saying a word!"


    Luffy was also very excited, one by one pounced on or hugged each other, or greeted each other.


    "Hatcha! Kuroobi! Chew!..." He almost called out the names of all the fish-men one by one. The fish-men at the scene were almost all the same group that went out to fight together back then.


    Everyone already regarded Luffy as one of their own.


    Even Arlong didn''t put on an aloof attitude anymore, stood up himself, and walked in front of Luffy.


    The two looked at each other, and then hugged very enthusiastically.


    "Arlong!"


    "Luffy!"


    "Ha ha ha ha ha ha ha!"


    The atmosphere of the entire Arlong Park was instantly ignited to the extreme because of the arrival of Luffy! More than ten years! I haven''t seen you for over ten years! The fart boy who went to fight with them back then has grown so big in the blink of an eye!


    Moreover, what Luffy did not disappoint them.


    Dealing with humans ruthlessly!


    It''s just that they are lively and happy, but Sanji and Usopp, who arepletely unclear about the situation, are confused.


    Not only confused, but also surprised.


    What''s wrong?


    What happened?


    How could Luffy be so familiar with the fish-men here?


    Butpared to Nami''s shock, Sanji and Usopp''s surprise is not so exaggerated.


    Ever since Luffy greeted the fish-men in Arlong Pirates familiarly, she waspletely dumbfounded. Incredible written all over her face. Her head was even dizzy from the shock of the scene in front of her.


    Shock, fear, scalp tingling, all kinds ofplicated thoughts came to her mind all at once.


    Before the guys who were out of the situation woke up, Arlong passed Nami with Luffy''s shoulders on his shoulders. Several people even heard the conversation between the two clearly.


    "Hahahahaha! I''m telling you, Luffy. Don''t even think about leaving until you drink all my wine! By the way, even though I know you are also in the East Blue, why did youe to me?"


    As soon as these words came out, Nami was even more frightened.


    My heart is almost in my throat.


    It''s a pity that thest thing she wanted to happen happened after all. What Luffy did next made her fall into the bottomless abyss even more.


    "Me, I''m here to help others beat the bad guys." After saying that, Luffy suddenly stopped and turned to look at Nami who had just been passed by him, "By the way, Nami, where are the bad guys you mentioned? Just say it directly, fish-men are very strong. With their help, they will definitely be able to help you deal with those bad guys, so you don''t need to worry anymore, right?"


    The voice just fell.


    All the pirates, who were still smiling, suddenly fell silent.


    Everyone looked at Nami.


    The tall figure of Arlong was even more condescending, with yful eyes, he looked at Nami with deep meaning and said, "Yes, Nami, Luffy told you to tell me, just say it... you want to solve the problem?" Who is the bad guy? Luffy is our brother, we will definitely help you."


    Hearing these words, the fish-men all smiled and looked at Nami.


    Nami''s face was ugly.


    Laughed, also very stiffly.


    "Lu... Luffy...don''t be kidding me... when did I ever say these things?"


    "Did you not? Didn''t you say that those bad guys killed the people you value most?"


    The fish-menughed even more interestingly now.


    Sensing everyone''s gazes, Nami didn''t know what to do anymore, she gritted her teeth, and suddenly turned angrily: "If I say no, then I didn''t!!! I never said these words at all!! Luffy, stop ndering me!"


    After finishing speaking, Nami covered her eyes to cover her tears that were about to fall, and ran out with her head buried.


    Luffy just wanted to catch up, but was blocked by the hand of Arlong on his shoulder: "Luffy, leave her alone. With me, Nami will be fine. We haven''t seen each other for so long, you don''t want to slip away right now, do you?"


    It doesn''t matter whether Luffy agrees or not.


    Arlong insisted on going to drink and eat meat with Luffy.


    Sanji and Usopp were also entertained by the fish-men.


    But the two are not the same as Luffy, they have obviously seen what is going on. So during the whole banquet, the two of them didn''t talk much, nor did theymunicate with everyone.


    ...


    Two dayster.


    The banquetsted a full day and night.


    Sanji and Usopp left in the middle of the banquet, saying they were going back to the boat to rest. After returning to the ship, they also told Zoro the situation here.


    As a result, the faces of the three of them became unattractive.


    Did not disembark again, and did not speak.


    As for Luffy, he was surrounded by brothers he had known in the past, toasting in turn, and he enjoyed the whole banquet very happily.


    It wasn''t until noon two dayster, when the sun was about to hit his face, that he woke up and remembered to look for Nami.


    Ask while walking.


    Finally he found Nami in a hut.


    Just entered the door.


    When Nami saw that it was Luffy.


    There was a smile on her face immediately, and she was very polite, no longer the casual attitude she used to treat Luffy before.


    "Huh? Luffy, you''re here. What''s the matter? Do you need me?"


    Luffy pursed his lips, and said with some dissatisfaction: "You just left the other day? Didn''t you promise to help you deal with the bad guys?"


    Nami smiled awkwardly: "Luffy, there is no such thing at all. The things I told you before are actually all false. I have been lying to you all this time, so forget about it. In the future, none of us won''t look for each other anymore, just go your own way."


    Luffy was still pouted, very dissatisfied: "How can that be? I want you to be my navigator. Besides, I don''t think you were lying to me before. You hate the eyes of pirates, that was not fake!"


    Hear here.


    Nami silently closed her eyes.


    Take a deep breath.


    Her fists were clenched even more tremblingly.


    She lowered her head and murmured, "Enough is enough..."


    Luffy seemed to hear clearly: "Huh???"


    Nami suddenly got angry, and mmed: "I said, are you enough?!! You think I''m not miserable enough, so you came here to see my jokes?!!!"


    Luffy was at a loss.


    Confused.


    He couldn''t figure out why Nami scolded him.


    "Enough! Stop acting like this!! Do you know that your current appearance makes me feel very sick?!! It was my fault! I lost! I admit defeat, I admit my fate, isn''t it okay?! How long are you going to hate me?!!"


    "Nami...what the hell are you talking about?"


    At this time, Nami was overwhelmed by the anger umted in her heart for a long time.


    Even her eyes became ferociously red!


    "Huh? What am I talking about?! You still have the face to ask me what the hell I''m talking about?!! You and Arlong are all in the same group!! What adventurers are you talking about in front of me! Do you think you are ying me? Don''t you y enough?!! What do you still think about me?!!"


    Nami yelled out hysterically the grievances she had suffered over the years.


    Tears couldn''t stop flowing.


    But she didn''t show a cowardly look, instead she red fiercely at the Luffy who was still "pretending to be".


    Luffy was surprised, his head knotted: "Nami... Is there some misunderstanding between us?"


    Nami sneered: "Oh, a misunderstanding? Okay! You said it was a misunderstanding, so go and help me kill the so-called Arlong brother you said right now!! They are the ones who killed the people I loved!! You said it was a misunderstanding, you go now! Go kill them! Didn''t you say you want to kill all the bad guys?! What''s wrong? Why don''t you go now?! Go quickly!"


    Nami panted heavily, ring at Luffy viciously.


    Luffy seemed to be shocked when he heard the most incredible thing in the world.


    There was a long silence.


    Luffy turned pale and said, "You...you mean...all those things were done by Arlongs?"


    Nami took a deep breath, wiped away the tears on her face, smiled again, and said politely: "Okay, Luffy. You should have seen enough of the jokes. I don''t wee you here, please don''t appear in front of me again?"


    Finished speaking.


    Luffy still stood there stupidly, motionless.


    A trace of disgust shed across Nami''s face: "Well, since you don''t want to leave, then I''ll go. If you want this house, then I''ll give it to you. Anyway, even if I don''t give it to you, people like you will just take directly, right?"


    After saying that, Nami swaggered past Luffy and left the house.


    In the room, only Luffy was left in a panic.


    I don''t know how long it has been.


    Luffy''s thoughts gradually recovered.


    He finally figured out the situation.


    As a result, his expression changed from bewildered to angry!


    His eyes are full of murderous intent!


    Not crazy.


    All the anger, at this moment, seemed to be tightly suppressed in the bottom of my heart.


    He turned and left the house.


    Walked unhurriedly towards the Arlong Park.


    After a while.


    He came back to Arlong Park.


    All the fish-men were still lying there staggering.


    However, at this moment, these fish-men seemed to not exist in Luffy''s eyes.


    Now in his eyes, there is only one person.


    Arlong!


    He walked straight towards Arlong who was also lying drunk on the recliner in a daze, and grabbed Arlong without saying a word! Arlong was also awakened by the sudden movement, and his eyes slowly opened into a slit from the mist.


    The face is still flushed and drunk: "Huh? Luffy? It''s you. What''s the matter? Want to drink more? Come,e, don''t be shy."


    Luffy shook Arlong vigorously a few times.


    The group of fish-men who were lying like corpses were also awakened by the movement here.


    One or two got up one after another, shaking their heads and looking in the direction of Luffy and Arlong.


    "Ha! So it''s Big Brother Arlong and Luffy, haven''t they had enough?"


    "Haha, as expected of them, I know they won''t fall so easily..."


    However, just when everyone thought this was the beginning of the next banquet, Luffy''s next move woke up everyone present, including Arlong.


    "Is it you?! The viin that Nami mentioned before, is it you?! Did you kill her rtives?! The group of nasty pirates who control Nami''s vige, is it you?! Answer me! Arlong!!"

 Chapter 400: Must Have You Be My Navigator

    Chapter 400: Must Have You Be My Navigator


    Woke up...


    Everyone is sober.


    However, Arlong didn''t show any surprise, instead he looked indifferent: "Luffy... We''ve known each other for so many years, you don''t want to turn against me for a human being you just met, right?"


    Arlong pulled Arlong''s face closer to him again: "Tell me! Did you do those things?!"


    Arlong pped Luffy''s hand away.


    Slowly stood up.


    Looking down at Luffy, he spread his arms and exined: "So what if I did it? Human beings can enve us and sell us, why can''t we do the same to them? Is there anything wrong with us..."


    Before Arlong finished speaking, Luffy could no longer suppress the anger in his heart.


    He punched Arlong on the cheek with one punch.


    Arlong has no intention of guarding against it.


    He was directly knocked to the ground by Luffy.


    "What''s the difference between you doing this and those hateful pirates back then?!"


    "Difference? Oh, do I need to be different from them?" Arlong didn''t stand up immediately. Hey on the ground and muttered something, then stood up slowly, and said excitedly, "What I want is to be like them! How humans treat us, we will treat them like that right back! This is fair, isn''t it? And you see, even humans don''t value human lives, and they waste the lives of theirpatriots here for so many years, how can humans value the lives of fish-men?"


    "Bastard!!! Even if it is, you can''t do this!!"


    Arlong sneered gloomyly: "No? Why not? Luffy... You left early back then, and you may not be clear about some things. We have a big brother respected by all the fish-men in Fish-man Street, named Fisher Tiger, do you know how stupid Big Brother Tiger is? In order to rescue all the enved fish-men and humans, even if he knew that he would be fully wanted by the world government afterwards, he did not hesitate to climb up to the holynd of Mary Geoise with his bare hands and bear all of that alone! But that is not enough! He was so stupid that he picked up a human girl and said that he wanted to send her back to her hometown in person. In the end, the girl was indeed delivered safely... But do you know what the final result of Big Brother Tiger is? Heh, he was killed by the betrayal of the humans in that girl''s hometown!!! They ran off to inform the Marine for a bounty! Let Brother Tiger die under the ambush of the marine!! Look?! Isn''t that ridiculous? How ridiculous is that?! Human beings don''t know how to be grateful, and they don''t deserve our sympathy! You look here? Look around here? I just need to pay some money every month, and I can do whatever I want in this sea! Human beings can even sell their ownpatriots for money! They themselves don''t feel pity for theirpatriots, so why should we be polite to them?! Then let the humans in this sea feel the pain we fish-men have suffered!!"


    Arlong said that until Luffy couldn''t refute.


    I don''t know how to refute.


    But he just couldn''t ept Arlong''s approach: "Asshole!! They are all innocent!"


    Luffy couldn''t suppress the anger in his heart, and punched Arlong again.


    Arlong didn''t intend to take this blow from Luffy in vain this time, he took the punch very easily: "Luffy...you can''t do it again...you won''t forget how you were beaten by me back then... Did you even beat me? Or do you really think that if you destroy a small human country casually and approach me with a bounty, you are qualified to fight me?"


    Luffy didn''t speak.


    His head bowed.


    No one can see his expression of extreme anger now. When he used to beat Arlong, he only wanted to wake him up, so he didn''t use his real strength.


    But now it is different.


    Arlong''s answer made him feel that Arlong has no intention of repentance at all!


    This made his anger reach the point where he couldn''t bear it.


    Luffy slowly withdrew the fist held by Arlong, and then stretched it back vigorously. The whole arm was stretched by him to exceed the length of the swimming pool like a rubber band. He said in a light and then heavy tone. He yelled: "Rubber - 32-Brick Fist!!"


    Immediately after.


    The outstretched arm shrank back at an extremely fast speed!


    However, in the eyes of Arlong, all this is ridiculous.


    32 Brick Fist?


    After so many years, your power is still only 32 Brick Fist?


    Sure enough, humans can''tpare with fish-men at all.


    After so many years, Luffy has not improved in strength at all.


    The destruction of a small human country does not mean anything.


    Seeing that Luffy''s contracted fist was about to bounce back and hit him, Arlong didn''t even have the intention of dodging. He wants to take this blow hard and prove to Luffy who is the boss!


    Not only did Arlong think so, even the surrounding fish-men didn''t react much when they heard that the fish-man karate used by Luffy was only at 32 Brick Fist.


    Everyone knows that only 32 Brick Fist of power can''t hurt their big brother Arlong.


    But all these self-righteous thoughts, when Luffy''s 32 Brick Fist really fell on Arlong, they were all dumbfounded!


    Arlong who personally suffered this blow waspletely nk.


    Just listen to ''Boom'' There was a loud bang.


    Immediately, they saw Arlong, who was two cups stronger than Luffy, was blown away by this blow! They couldn''t even see his figure, but they heard a series of bang bang bang!


    He smashed through one wall after another.


    In the end, even the outer city wall of the Arlong Park was smashed through, but it didn''t stop.


    It wasn''t until the shadow of Arlong flying upside down broke several giant trees in the jungle that the upside down trend stoppedpletely.


    Everyone was stunned by the scene in front of them.


    Arlong fell on the ground, with only thest trace of strength left, barely raised his head, looked in the direction of Luffy, and said very speechlessly: "I... fuck you, this is 32 Brick Fist...?"


    The words are not finished.


    He rolled his eyes and passed outpletely.


    As for Luffy, he is not in the mood to care about other people''s eyes now, and his anger towards Arlong still hasn''t subsided.


    After this blow, he didn''t intend to stop.


    Continue walking in the direction where Arlongnded.


    Come in front of Arlong and see that Arlong is unconscious, but he has no intention of stopping.


    He picked up Arlong and continued to beat Arlong furiously: "You bastard! Do you think you''re fine if you''re unconscious?! Do you think that after receiving this punch, you can pretend that nothing happened?! Don''t you like beating people very much?! Don''t you really like killing people?! Wake up! You like to fight so much, wake up and fight with me!! You bastard!!"


    Arlong was beaten up by Luffy until his face was swollen and his nose was crooked. Only then did he slowly regain some consciousness from the bewilderment.


    But he didn''t mean to beg for mercy, instead he sneered and said, "Yes, keep beating me, kill me. It''s much better to die by your hands than by those hateful humans..."


    If Arlong didn''t say these words, Luffy, who was dazzled by anger, really wanted to kill Arlong.


    But after hearing Arlong say these words, his raised fist suddenly stopped in mid-air.


    Looking at Arlong with aplicated expression.


    Seeing Luffy''s appearance, Arlong taunted: "Kill, why won''t you kill me? You are so soft-hearted, do you think your enemy will appreciate you? No, Luffy, I tell you, they won''t. Especially human beings! When one day the enemy you face is human beings, they will not be grateful because you let them go, but will wait for the opportunity to retaliate against you! Hahahahahaha!"


    Luffy''s mood is veryplicated now.


    Li Yaoxiang once told him that only by solving the root of all dangers can he help him revive the person he cares about. But now the one who he wants to kill him is the partner who was born and died together in the past, but he still can''t do it.


    In the end, he just punched Arlong hard again, knocking Arlong unconscious again.


    Then he turned and left the scene.


    The fish-men who came to check the situation didn''t dare to talk to Luffy when they saw Luffy''s appearance. They all looked at Luffy quietly and let Luffy leave here.


    Then one or two went up very anxiously to check the situation of Arlong.


    "Brother Arlong!"


    "Brother Arlong!"


    ...


    After a while.


    Walking and walking, Luffy returned to their boat.


    The atmosphere on the ship was very solemn.


    Although everyone was on the deck, no one spoke.


    Everyone seems to be thinking about something.


    When seeing Luffye back, Zoro opened one eye: "Back?"


    Luffy paused in his footsteps, responded with a ''hmm'', and then continued walking, as if he wanted to go back to the cabin to rest. However, before he could take a few more steps, Zoro continued: "The group of pirates that Nami mentioned earlier, you should know who they are by now, right?"


    Luffy stopped again.


    There was a moment of silence: "Well..."


    "Did you kill him?"


    "No..."


    "Then what are your ns next?"


    The rest of the people on the boat didn''t seem to be paying attention to Luffy, but at this moment everyone''s minds were actually focused on Luffy, waiting for Luffy to give a definite answer.


    Seeing that Luffy didn''t respond for a long time, Usopp''s reaction was the most excited. He rushed forward to grab Luffy and said viciously: "What did you promise me?! You promised that you would help revive Kaya''s parents! What is it now?! If you don''t kill Arlong, are you nning to give up?!"


    Sanji and Zoro are calm.


    But their faces are obviously not very good-looking.


    After all, it''s okay if you don''t give them hope in the first ce. But when you give hope, and everyone is moving towards this goal, but you withdraw all hope in the middle, saying that you don''t care, it must be false.


    "I... I have no intention of giving up! Not killing Arlong will not affect the agreement between me and my brother! He wants me to solve the root of all dangers, and he wants me to solve the people who are against me or who may take revenge on me! I have known Arlong for a long time, and the rtionship is very good, they will not target me or take revenge on me! So Arlong is not among the targets I must kill!"


    "Are you sure?! Are you sure?! Are you in charge of this matter?! Have you asked your brother clearly?!"


    "I...my brother hasn''t contacted me for a while..."


    "Then how do you make sure your guess is correct!"


    Luffy didn''t answer.


    He really didn''t know if Li Yaoxiang wouldn''t help him resurrect people if he didn''t kill Arlong.


    "Usopp! What are you doing?! Is this how you treat the captain?!" Zoro mmed at Usopp.


    Usopp also realized that he was going too far.


    But he can''t get angry, and he still can''t afford to apologize.


    Just snorted coldly, loosened Luffy''s cor, then turned around and no longer looked at Luffy.


    At this time, Zoro continued: "Luffy, your brother. Even if he only resurrect, it is only to help you. We know that we are not qualified to ask you to do anything. But if things develop to the end, if your brother really won''t help you resurrect because you didn''t kill Arlong... then, please take our feelings into consideration."


    After saying that, Zoro closed his eyes again.


    On the deck, no one spoke anymore.


    Luffy was silent for a moment, then continued to walk back to the cabin to rest.


    In a blink of an eye, a day passed.


    That night, no onemunicated much.


    Until the next morning, Sanji prepared a sumptuous breakfast. While everyone sat and enjoyed it, Luffy was in a good mood. After feasting on the te after te of food, he patted his belly in satisfaction, stood up, with a firm expression and a hearty tone, he said: "I have decided! Next, we will continue to move forward for the same goal!"


    Immediately, he nced at several people and said, "Don''t worry, I''ve already thought it through. He is the elder brother who watched me and grew up with me! Even if the result is what you are worried about, I will definitely convince him help me resurrect! I believe that he will not reject me because of a trivial matter!"


    Without waiting for everyone to respond, Luffy continued: "You guys continue to eat! I will go out to deal with things first, and when Ie back, we will set sail and go to the next target!"


    After saying that, Luffy turned around and left the cabin.


    And Sanji, Zoro, and Usopp couldn''t help but smile because of what Luffy said...


    ...


    After a while.


    Luffy came to Nami''s house.


    Seeing Luffying, the disgust shed in Nami''s eyes, which was a little stronger than yesterday. It''s not that he didn''t imagine that after Luffy left yesterday, he would really help her kill Arlong.


    For this reason, she secretly ran to check the situation.


    Obviously, the final result disappointed her.


    This made her hate Luffy even more.


    "Why are you still here?"


    Luffy smiled heartily: "I want you to be my navigator!"


    Nami sneered: "I know you have a very good rtionship with Arlong. If you speak out, maybe Arlong will really give me to you. But you should give up, even if Arlong is willing, I will not help you."


    Luffy: "No! I must have you as my navigator!"


    Nami looked angry: "What do you mean? Are you nning to threaten me?"

 Chapter 401: The Reality You Have to Face

    Chapter 401: The Reality You Have to Face


    "Sorry, on the Grand Line, there is something I must do waiting for me to do, I need you as a navigator."


    "What does that have to do with me?! I won''t help you!"


    "Didn''t you say that your dream is to save 100 million Berry and redeem your vige from Arlong? I can let Arlong let your vige go..."


    "Do I need your help?! I''ll save 100 million Berry in a short time! I don''t need your help at all!"


    "..."


    The room fell into a silence.


    The two sides looked at each other and remained silent for a long time.


    After a while, Luffy continued: "Didn''t you always question me before, and even disapprove of my practice of killing too many people? Actually, there is a reason for that."


    Speaking of this, Nami became even more angry.


    Before you kept saying that you wanted to kill all the bad guys in the world, didn''t I see you kill Arlong now? It''s just farting!


    Nami sneered: "People like you, if you want to kill people, kill them. What''s so surprising? Do you need a reason?"


    Luffy ignored Nami''s cynicism, and continued: "I have an agreement with my brother, as long as I solve all the sources of danger around me, then he will help me revive the people I care about."


    Hearing this, Nami finally felt a little moved.


    Even stopped the cynicism and waited for Luffy to speak.


    "As long as you are my navigator, although I can''t guarantee that my brother will help you resurrect your family, I can promise you that I will try to ask my brother to help you resurrect them..."


    "..."


    "Also, I will make Arlong let your vige go."


    "..."


    After a while.


    Nami returned to the ship belonging to Luffy and the others.


    As soon as he saw Nami, Sanji ran forward excitedly: "Nami! Are you back?"


    Zoro and Usopp also focused their attention on Nami, but Nami just gave them a cold look, didn''t respond to Sanji, and went straight into the cabin to rest...


    ...


    At the same time.


    In the Arlong Park.


    Luffy did not go back to the ship with Nami, but came to Arlong Park again.


    Along the way, all the fish-men who saw Luffy hadplicated expressions, and they didn''t know whether to stop him or not. But Luffy didn''t care that much, just continued to move forward in a daze.


    Until he walks to the pool.


    Seeing Arlong at this time, he was surrounded by a group of fish-men lying on a reclining chair to heal his injuries.


    Some fish-men who were loyal to Arlong originally wanted to go forward to stop Luffy, but they were quickly scolded by Arlong: "Hey, hey, what do you want? What are you doing? Luffy He is a member of our Fish-man Ind! He cane whenever he wants! No one can stop him!"


    The fish-men made way for Luffy to pass.


    Luffy came to Arlong.


    At this time, Arlong had some bandages wrapped around his body, but he didn''t mean to show weakness, and said mockingly: "What''s the matter? Are you determined to kill me and avenge those humans?"


    "I won''t kill you, but I want you to apologize to Nami! I want you to atone!"


    Arlong was stunned for a moment, and thenughed loudly: "Hahahahaha! You want me to atone for those human beings? Hahahahaha! Then you might as well kill me! Hahahaha!"


    Arlongughed so hard that he almost burst into tears.


    But Luffy still looked at him seriously, not joking at all.


    Seeing this, Arlong gradually put away his smile, and said sharply, "Are you serious?"


    Luffy said stubbornly: "I promised Nami, as long as she is my navigator, I will make you let her vige go."


    "Since it''s Luffy who speaks up in person, it''s certainly not a problem to let Nami''s vige go..."


    "However, I am worried about keeping you here."


    "..." There was a moment of silence, and Arlong said with a yful tone, grinning, "Oh? Then what do you want?"


    "Next, you wille with me to the Grand Line. One of my goals is to kill all those who endanger Fish-man Ind! Don''t you want revenge? Then follow me to fight! Use the rest of your life to fight, as repayment for the damage you caused to everyone!"


    Originally, no matter what Luffy said, Arlong would never surrender.


    But when he heard that Luffy''s goal was to kill people, a hint of excitement shed in his eyes immediately, he became very interested in Luffy''s goal, and his tone softened a lot because of this: "Oh... If I don''t want to?"


    "Then beat you until you are willing to go!"


    "..."


    After a while.


    Luffy brought Arlong and a group of fish-men to Luffy''s boat.


    As soon as she saw Arlong, Nami red at Luffy viciously: "What do you mean?! I promised you to be your navigator! But it doesn''t mean you can do it again and again. And he disgusts me!!!"


    Luffy: "I brought Arlong to apologize to you."


    As soon as the voice fell, Arlong cooperated very well, looked down at Nami, and then said with a mean smile: "Nami, I''m sorry, hehehehe..."


    No doubt, Arlong didn''t do it on purpose.


    This is a question of appearance.


    Nami: "..."


    Usopp, Sanji, and Zoro: "..."


    After apologizing, Luffy continued: "Also, Arlongs will go to the Grand Line with us next."


    "Impossible!!!" Nami snapped, pointing at Arlong at random, "I can''t stay on the same boat as them!"


    Without waiting for Luffy to answer, Arlong first exined: "It''s okay, my little Nami. This ship can''t hold so many of us. My ship will follow behind you, so you can rest assured."


    Originally, Nami wanted to say something more, but Zoro pat Nami''s shoulder and exined, "Nami, this is actually a good thing for your vige. At least we can be sure that they will not stay here again in your vige, isn''t it?"


    Nami''s face was full of unwillingness.


    But she also knew that Zoro''s words were all right.


    In the end, she could onlypromise, gritted her teeth, turned around and returned to the cabin, not wanting to care about anything.


    That''s it.


    In the days toe, apart from fulfilling her responsibilities as a navigator, Nami will not care about the rest.


    Even though she sometimes sat and ate together, she didn''tmunicate much with the people on board.


    Compared to the original book, the rtionship between Nami and Luffy is much worse.


    As for Arlong, there is nothing to say, they just sailed behind Luffy''s ship all the way, and so did the huge bull-headed sea king.


    If you look at it from the perspective of God, you can see a medium-sized battleship on the sea, arge battleship behind the medium-sized battleship, and two huge horns floating on the sea behind therge battleship. It is such a wonderfulbination, sailing forward with great momentum.


    Such a huge momentum, there are good and bad.


    The good thing is, they are less likely to get into trouble.


    Small powers saw them from afar, and dared not even approach them, let alone provoke them.


    The downside is that they are like fireflies in the dark, trying to keep a low profile and avoid attracting the attention of others. And this shoring soon became apparent.


    Because their next location is Loguetown.


    Loguetown is a ce where the marine is stationed.


    They appeared so ostentatiously within the control range of Loguetown, of course, it is impossible not to be focused on by the local marine.


    So, before they arrived, they had already been "warmly received" by Smoker who was stationed there.


    Smoker is a Zoan fruit user, the ability user of the smoke fruit.


    Except for Luffy, who can use Haki, who can deal with him, the rest are not Smoker''s opponents at all. And it''s impossible for Luffy to protect everyone on the two ships, and Smoker isn''t so stupid as to just fight with Luffy.


    So in this battle, except for Luffy, everyone else suffered injuries to varying degrees.


    It can be described as extremely embarrassing.


    Even the hull of the ship was damaged a lot by shells.


    Although in the end they still won the battle with Luffy''s strength, but for them, it can only be regarded as a miserable victory.


    Many navies died.


    Many fish-men also died.


    Now Smoker and his subordinate Tashigi have been handcuffed by Luffy with sea stone handcuffs and taken back to the ship. But even so, everyone couldn''t be happy, and the atmosphere on the ship was very heavy.


    Seeing that the group of pirates said nothing, Smoker was the first to lose his temper: "If you want to kill us, just do it!! Who are you pretending to show?! You don''t deserve it at all!!"


    Except for Luffy, the rest of the people on board are scarred.


    Still not saying a word.


    Luffy frowned slightly, and said coldly: "If you hadn''t attack us first, we wouldn''t have done anything to you at all."


    Smoker sneered: "Oh, arresting you pirates is our marine''s duty! Do you want me to let you wander here? Do you think that''s possible?"


    Luffy didn''t bother to exin to Smoker about adventurers or pirates.


    Suddenly drove the Silver sword, and bit off the handcuffs of Smoker and Tashigi.


    Suddenly, Smoker and Tashigi were stunned and at a loss.


    "What does this mean?"


    "Let''s go, you are different from those evil marines, I will not kill you. But if youe back and dare to stop me again, then I will not hold back next time."


    Smoker and Tashigi both lookedplicated.


    The group of people in front of them seems to be very different from the pirates in their impression, but they don''t want to admit that Luffy and the others are good people.


    After all, there are even arrest warrants, so how can he be a good person?


    Tashigi said stubbornly: "Don''t think that we will be grateful to you if you let us go! We will still report today''s incident to the headquarters! And, one day, I will definitely take all the famous swords in the world from you, from the hands of the wicked!"


    After speaking, Tashiki looked at the Silver sword in Luffy''s hand, and then at Zoro''s saber.


    "Just go ahead and report. Just go back and tell those guys that I, Monkey D. Luffy, am already on my way. Just wait quietly."


    Until they left, Smoker and Tashigi were still inplicated moods.


    They didn''t expect Luffy to let them go so easily.


    They could only take the boat left by Luffy with mixed feelings and return to Loguetown.


    As for Luffy, they didn''t mean to set sail immediately.


    Including Arlong, they are all surrounded together now, crowded on the medium-sized ship of Luffy, and everyone is silent.


    After an unknown amount of time, Zoro finally couldn''t help but asked: "You said... the enemies on the Grand Line are several times stronger than the people just now, is that true?"


    Arlong also said solemnly: "More than several times? People like the ones just now is not well-known on the Grand Line!"


    This is the problem that everyone is struggling with today.


    They all already know that the enemy Luffy faces is the entire marine and even the world government. If they couldn''t handle just Smoker, how could they have the qualifications to challenge each other?


    Luffy''s mood is also not much better.


    He originally thought that his strength was enough to solve the problem. But he didn''t want to admit that turned out that an opponent like Smoker was only a small role in the enemy''s forces. How does this tell him to rx?


    Zoro: "If this continues, even if we get to Marineford, we will only drag Luffy back."


    Sanji: "..."


    Usopp: "..."


    Nami: "..."


    Arlong: "..."


    After a long silence, Zoro finally couldn''t help but said again: "Luffy, since your brother can train you, can you contact him and ask him to help train us?"


    Luffy nodded solemnly: "I''ll try to contact him."


    Immediately, Luffy began to call in his mind: "Brother! Brother, are you there? I need to ask you for help! What you asked me to do, with the current strength of my partner and I, there is no way toplete it. Both my partner and I need to be stronger! I need you to help us be stronger! Brother? Brother?"


    Luffy called for a long time, but Li Yaoxiang didn''t respond.


    Just when he was about to give up, showing a disappointed look in reality, and shaking his head to Zoro and the others to express that he could not contact his brother, an extra air door suddenly appeared on the deck.


    The original heavy atmosphere was instantly broken!


    All of them were frightened and vignt, and their hearts beat faster!


    Soon, an air door opens.


    Li Yaoxiang, wearing a mask, came out from the air door.


    The invisible aura emanating from Li Yaoxiang''s body immediately made everyone present feel quite stressed. Everyone is excited and nervous.


    Finally saw Li Yaoxiang in person again.


    Everyone really wanted to ask whether Li Yaoxiang could really resurrect the dead.


    But no one dared to speak.


    Even to say to Li Yaoxiang any simple sentence, everyone didn''t know how to say it.


    Luffy didn''t care as much as them.


    He looked overjoyed and said, "Brother!"

 Chapter 402: Doing Miscellaneous or Miscellaneous

    Chapter 402: Doing Misceneous or Misceneous


    Facing the excited Luffy, Li Yaoxiang just nodded in response, and then coldly nced at everyone on board.


    "I already know your request. I also know what you are thinking now. I will give you a clear answer now."


    Except for Arlong, who didn''t know the truth, who was at a loss, the rest of the people were extremely nervous.


    All hold breath!


    "If you want me to help you resurrect, yes. But it also depends on how much you can help Luffy. If you only n to fish in troubled waters, threaten Luffy with moral kidnapping and ask me instead to help you resurrect... Sorry, I advise you it''s better to abandon this idea as soon as possible. I am not a great sage, and I don''t care about your tricks nor intention."


    Li Yaoxiang''s words sounded like a warning to everyone, but everyone didn''t get scared at all!


    On the contrary, the expressions of excitement are written all over the face!


    There is no other reason, just because Li Yaoxiang also assured them from his own side that he can really resurrect and is willing to help them resurrect.


    However, seeing everyone''s expressions, Arlong was dumbfounded: "Wait...wait! What are you talking about? What resurrection?"


    Li Yaoxiang ignored him.


    Luffy replied with a smile: "My brother has the ability to resurrect. He promised me that as long as I solve the root cause of all dangers, he will help me resurrect the people I care about! At that time, Sister Bai Xing will be able to see her mother again."


    Arlong was too shocked to speak.


    If he can really resurrect, then of course he hopes to resurrect Big Brother Tiger!


    But it is impossible for him to easily believe in Li Yaoxiang, a human being.


    He couldn''t help being so excited that he wanted to rush forward to grab Li Yaoxiang and question Li Yaoxiang. It can even be said that he is not thinking about it, but he is actually doing it!


    He, a big man, rushed forward regardless of his image.


    Before he could get close to Li Yaoxiang, an invisible force suddenly sent him flying! He was directly bombarded and flew into the hull of the ship and smashed into the sea.


    "Brother Arlong!" Luffy shouted fiercely.


    The rest of the people were stunned by fright, surprised that Li Yaoxiang would do it when he said he would do it, and at the same time shocked by Li Yaoxiang''s strength.


    Unexpectedly, Arlong couldn''t even hold a face-to-face meeting in front of a big brother like Luffy.


    Arlong doesn''t need Luffy to rescue it. When the fish-men saw Arlong being smashed into the sea, they jumped into the sea to rescue their elder brother.


    As for Li Yaoxiang, he didn''t care so much about them.


    With a wave of his hand, air doors suddenly appeared around everyone out of thin air.


    "These air doors lead to ces where you can be stronger..."


    In the middle of the conversation, Nami suddenly interrupted: "Wait...wait! You said that you need to see how much we can help Luffy before you consider whether you will help us resurrect. Then how do you measure this help? If after the matter is over, you suddenly say that I didn''t help Luffy much, what should I do if you don''t help me revive?"


    If it was Nami in the original book, maybe she wouldn''t ask this question.


    But today''s Nami, the rtionship with Luffy is much worse than the original book.


    It''s really hard for her not to ask.


    Li Yaoxiang looked at Nami coldly: "Do I need to answer you? If you are dissatisfied, you can quit now."


    As soon as these words came out, Nami was so angry that she couldn''t speak.


    But she was helpless.


    Because she simply has no leverage to bargain with Li Yaoxiang.


    She could only swallow it hard.


    Seeing that she didn''t speak, Li Yaoxiang nced at everyone again: "Now everyone should have no more problems, right?"


    All remain silent.


    At this time, Arlong was also supported by two fish-men back to the deck. However, he is no longer as arrogant as before, and he does not dare to be powerless in front of Li Yaoxiang like before.


    He looked a little embarrassed: "Wait! You said just now that as long as you help Luffy enough, you can help everyone revive. Does that mean I can do it too?"


    Li Yaoxiang looked at Arlong, then at Luffy''s pleading appearance, and said coldly, "Yes."


    Received Li Yaoxiang''s affirmative answer, Arlong immediately shook off the two fish-men who were supporting him as if his whole body was full of strength, and then stared at Li Yaoxiang full of fighting spirit.


    Li Yaoxiang is not long-winded either.


    An air door also appeared beside Arlong.


    He continued: "The air door of each of you corresponds to different ces. And these ces are very dangerous for you. What you need to do is toplete the training items I give you every day. You have to try your best to survive in it! As I said in advance, if you die on the way, you will really die, and I will not save you."


    Nami: "Wait! What about this ship if we all go?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "I will not close the air door. You can go back to the ship to rest every night. You don''t have to worry when there is no one else, I will ensure that the ship will sail towards the Grand Line at a normal speed. Of course, if some of you people can''t stand it, and it''s okay to give up halfway ande back, but, when the timees, don''t expect me to open the air door for you again."


    After speaking.


    Everyone on the boat looked at each other, and everyone could see the fighting spirit and excitement in each other''s eyes. Just by the eyes, you can see that everyone will not give up this opportunity.


    Nami didn''t even say hello, she just turned around and walked into the air door beside her.


    The rest of the people didn''t say anything when they saw it.


    They didn''t leave without saying anything like Nami did.


    Everyone take a few steps forward and form a circle.


    Luffy stretched out his hand first, and then the rest naturally put their palms on one by one.


    Luffy raised his mouth, "Don''t die."


    Simrly, everyone showed the same smile, and then turned around and walked into their respective air doors.


    Soon, only a few people remained on the bustling boat. But just when everyone thought the matter was over, Li Yaoxiang suddenly looked at Buggy who was standing in the corner, trying to minimize his sense of existence.


    Feeling Li Yaoxiang''s eyes, Buggy was taken aback immediately.


    However, this is not the most terrifying thing. The most terrifying thing is that an air door appeared beside Buggy. Buggy''s jaw dropped to his navel in shock.


    When he came back to his senses, he quickly exined: "Brother, Brother Luffy! I... I... I''m just a handyman, so I don''t need it? I don''t have anyone to resurrect..."


    Before Buggy finished speaking, Li Yaoxiang suddenly appeared in front of Buggy. Before he could react, Li Yaoxiang picked him up like a chicken, and threw him into the air door.


    As soon as hended, Buggy wanted to crawl back: "Wait! Wait! I give up! I give up now!"


    However, before he climbed into the air door, the air door suddenly disappeared.


    Buggy was dumbfounded.


    Then he yelled hysterically: "No! Didn''t you say that we can go back to rest every day?! What happened to me, the treatment is different!!!"


    ...


    At the same time.


    In the air door of Zoro.


    Zoro is different from others.


    In the original book, the Straw Hat Pirates were scattered to different ces to be stronger during the two years they separated. Now, except for a few people, Li Yaoxiang also sent the rest of them to the original ce where they became stronger.


    The difference with Zoro is that in the original book, he became stronger after bing Hawk Eyes''s disciple. Now that Hawk Eyes was recruited by the marine to Marineford, Zoro would certainly not be able to worship Hawk Eyes as his teacher.


    After entering the air door, it was another Li Yaoxiang who appeared in front of Zoro.


    Seeing Li Yaoxiang who was also wearing a mask appearing in front of him, Zoro was stunned for a moment.


    Although Li Yaoxiang put on a mask, Zoro would not admit the sense of oppression that Li Yaoxiang brought to Zoro! He can be sure that the Li Yaoxiang in front of him is the same person as the Li Yaoxiang on the deck just now.


    Zoro was shocked: "You..."


    Li Yaoxiang: "Don''t think too much. Your path is different from others. From now on, I will personally guide you."


    Zoro took a deep breath first, and then said excitedly: "Then please!"


    ...


    Time flies, time flies.


    In a blink of an eye, the ship is about to reach the entrance of the great shipping route.


    During that period of time, the people on board not only had to try their best to survive the trialnd given to them by Li Yaoxiang, but also had toplete the training tasks that Li Yaoxiang gave them every day, which caused their speed of strengthening to be much faster than in the original.


    Although the strength is still not as good as the two years of training in the original work, it is estimated that they will soon catch up with them, and even surpass the progress in the original work.


    And on this day, the first one who sessfully returned to the boat after practicing was none other than Buggy the star clown who was once as famous as one of the Four Emperors, the red-haired Shanks!


    The moment Buggy stepped onto the deck from the air door, Buggy''s aura changedpletely!


    It looks full of confidence, the majestic feeling of the earth under my feet.


    The second one toe out of the air door was Usopp.


    As soon as he saw Usopp, Buggy smiled sinisterly and said, "I didn''t expect that the first thing I saw when I came back was you, this trash! Okay! I''ll deal with you first, and make you pay back as a humiliation these days!"


    After finishing speaking, Buggy took out several daggers and attacked Usopp.


    Usopp''s reaction was not slow either.


    In an instant, he took out his slingshot and a strange seed to fight back.


    But Buggy''s body was torn apart and hid.


    Buggy didn''t say anything, and immediately drove all parts of his body to fly towards Usopp. In the past, he couldn''t fly on the soles of his feet, but after fruit development during this period of time, he has also solved this weakness.


    Now, it flew towards Usopp together with the soles of his feet.


    While flying, he still did not forget to tease: "You can only attack from a distance, but you can''t beat me in closebat, right?"


    Buggy was right.


    Being approached by Buggy so quickly, Usopp really seemed a little panicked.


    And at this moment, the third person returned to the boat.


    Before Buggy''s dagger fell on Usopp, a blue-skinned, Arlong''s powerful arm suddenly appeared in front of Usopp, helping Usopp take the blow.


    There was only a crisp sound.


    The arms are not worn down at all.


    Immediately, Usopp saw the tall figure of Arlong, showing a ferocious face, turned his head, and said to him in a rough yet gentle tone, "Are you alright?"


    It looks like that, if Usopp is not sure that Arlong blocked the knife for himself, he doesn''t know whether Arlong is going to kill him or save him.


    On the other hand, Buggy, who was hit by Arlong immediately, angrily scolded Arlong, "You damned fish-man! What does it matter to you if I want to kill him? Don''t you hate him the most? Human?! He''s not Luffy! Why do you want to save him?!"


    Arlong grinned: "It''s very simple, Luffy''s partner is my partner. How about it? Are you satisfied with this answer?"


    Buggy was so angry that his face was flushed, he gritted his teeth and said, "Okay! I thought you and I were all the same, and I didn''t think about what to do to you! Since you are so ignorant, then die with him!"


    After finishing speaking, Buggy''s two palms suspended in the air simultaneously used finger guns to attack Arlong and Usopp.


    Both legs were not idle, and they also used shave to attack the two.


    After training for this period of time, Arlong has also strengthened a lot. He used the iron block to block all the attacks for Usopp.


    Buggy''s fragmented skills, coupled with the marine''s six-style all-round attack without dead ends, are too frequent.


    Although Arlong was not injured, it was not easy for him to fight back.


    While the two sides were fighting fiercely, no one noticed that the fourth person on the boat had returned.


    They didn''t even notice that the originally sunny sky suddenly turned into dark clouds.


    Only heard a loud bang.


    Then a bolt of lightning fell directly, perfectly hitting Buggy who was stillcent. It''s useless even if it''s torn apart. This wave of lightning directly threw Buggy in a pot, making his skin crispy and tender, and his whole body scorched ck.


    Arlong and Usopp looked up at Nami standing on the cabin at the same time.


    Nami looked at them coldly and said coldly: "It''s not that I want to help you. But I know that the enemies Luffy will face next will be very powerful. I just want you to die in a more useful ce."


    Arlong looked at Nami with a wicked smile, but didn''t speak.


    Immediately after.


    That is, one by one, the crew members came out of the air door.


    Everyone''s looks are not very good, but their aura is much stronger than before they received Li Yaoxiang''s training.


    Luffy looked at the messy deck with some dissatisfaction: "Why is it so messy? Is no one cleaning it? Where are the handymen?"


    The scorched ck Buggy quickly used torn apart, raised his palms, and said, "I... sorry, I identally messed up, I will clean it now..."


    Immediately, Luffy and his party officially embarked on the Grand Line...

 Chapter 403: Nico Robin

    Chapter 403: Nico Robin


    Reverse Mountain, also known as a certain sea area near Laboon''s Mountain.


    Luffy and a group of people are discussing how to cross this mountain and embark on the Grand Line.


    And just as they were discussing and working hard, suddenly there were several dpidated giant warships sailing towards them not far away.


    Obviously, these battleships are the losers who returned from challenging the Reverse Mountain.


    However, this group of losers did not lose the arrogance that should belong to the overlord of the East Blue because of their failure to challenge Reverse Mountain. Krieg, the captain of this pirate group, even thought about grabbing the wealth as soon as possible, rebuilding the strongest fleet in the East Blue, and making aeback!


    Now, the first target they aim at is Luffy and his group.


    "Hey! You guys! Hand over all the food on your boat! Also, your boat too! Be wise, I can save your life! Hey! Didn''t you hear me talking to you?"


    Luffy and the others all stared at them, making Crick shrink back in fright. But he didn''t forget that he was the overlord of this East Blue. No one in East Blue can disobey his orders!


    He quickly regained his confidence, and stared back fiercely again.


    Just when he was about to order the crew to attack Luffy and the others, Sanji came out from the cabin with tes of steaming and fragrant delicacies, and jumped onto Krieg''s ship with one jump.


    "Everyone has been waiting for a long time. As a chef, I can''t let people go hungry in front of me." te after te of food was served by Sanji one by one.


    The crew of the Krieg Pirates, like hungry tigers pouncing on their food, gobbled up the food in front of them and ate it.


    During the whole process, Luffy and the others ignored them.


    Continue to discuss the matter of the Grand Line.


    Nami: "It''s the current. If all the huge currents in the four seas flow towards that mountain, the four streams will rush up the mountain along the canal, collide with each other at the top of the mountain, and then flow out to the Grand Line! Now this ship We are about to enter the current zone, and the next step is to see how to steer the boat. Since Reverse Mountain is a winter ind, the water that hits it will flow from the surface to the bottom. If something goes wrong entering the canal..."


    Speaking of this, Nami looked at the dpidated giant ships of the Krieg Pirates.


    Everyone followed Nami''s gaze.


    "The consequences are estimated to be like them, or even worse."


    At this time, the pirates of the Krieg Pirates finally ate up all the food, alleviating their hunger.


    Krieg touched the corner of his mouth, stood up, and said very boldly: "Very good! It seems that you are very knowledgeable! I just lost a group of subordinates, so I will let you be my subordinates!"


    Sanji, who had been waiting for a long time with a cigarette in his mouth, flicked the cigarette butt to the ground, pinched his breath with his toes, and said impatiently, "Is it finished?"


    Krieg: "???"


    Sanji: "After that, you can go die."


    Immediately afterwards, there were various screams and begging for mercy on the ship of the Krieg Pirates.


    A momentter, Sanji stepped on the deck of Luffy''s ship again, one after the other. Regarding the strength shown by Sanji, and the fact that the other party waspletely solved by Sanji in a moment, everyone on the ship did not show any surprise.


    It seemed normal for everyone that Sanji could destroy the overlord of the East Blue by himself.


    Luffy: "The trouble is solved? Then let''s go."


    ...


    Next, crossing the Reverse Mountain is not difficult for Luffy and his party today.


    In the original book, they were all able to ovee it, let alone the present which is stronger than the original book.


    After crossing the Reverse Mountain, they also encountered the huge whale.


    Encountered the same plot and was swallowed.


    Then they got the Log Pose from the old man who lived in the stomach of the whale, made a promise with the whale to see him next time, and met Mr.9 and Miss Wednesday (Nefertari Vivi).


    Lost the Log Pose, the boat was gone, Mr.9 and Miss Wednesday knew that there was no way for them to return to Whiskey Peak.


    In order to go back to Whiskey Peak, the two had no choice but to kneel down and beg Luffy and others to take them back.


    And Luffy readily agreed.


    ...


    A few dayster.


    Whiskey Peak, that is, the ind that resembles a cactus.


    In the original book, as soon as Luffy and the others arrived here, they were immediately warmly received by a group of bounty hunters from Baroque Works disguised as ordinary residents, and then got drunk by them.


    Only Zoro, who is a swordsman, has been keeping awake.


    But now it''s different.


    When the group of Baroque Works was preparing to subdue Luffy and the others, it wasn''t just Zoro who woke up this time, the rest of them also had already set their positions and were ready to do it at any time.


    Usopp: "I''m just saying... How could someone wee us so warmly for no reason?"


    Sanji also squeezed out his cigarette butt: "Although I am a bit reluctant, but for the sake of the old man''s legs back, I have to give up my beauty first..."


    Luffy lowered the straw hat: "Then let''s do it..."


    After a while.


    The 100 bounty hunters were all bruised and lying on the ground.


    And just when Luffy and the others were about to give them a fatal blow, Ms. Wednesday, also known as Nefertari Vivi, finally couldn''t help but rushed out to intercede for everyone.


    Tell Luffy that they are actually not bad.


    The nominal purpose of the Baroque Work Syndicate is to establish an ideal kingdom so that the people will no longer suffer. Everyone is just working towards this goal.


    The really bad one is actually the president of the Baroque Work Syndicate.


    Speaking of this, Neferutari Weiwei directly blew up her identity and exined the ins and outs of the matter to Luffy.


    At the same time, he also asked Luffy to send her back to the Kingdom of basta as soon as possible, so that she could dismantle the conspiracy of the president of the Baroque Work Syndicate and prevent the civil war.


    Luffy''s idea is very simple.


    Baroque Work Syndicate President = Bad Guy


    So he agreed very simply.


    However, not long after they set off, an unexpected guest came to the boat.


    Nefertari Vivi looked at the uninvited guest with horror on her face: "You...you...you...you, Miss All Sunday!!! Why are you here?!!"


    All eyes were on Nico Robin.


    Luffy: "Who is she?"


    Nefertari Vivi: "Her partner is the president of Baroque Works, Mr.0! In fact, only she knows the identity of the president! We also followed her, and only then did we discover the president''s true color!"


    Nico Robin: "The correct way to say it is that I should be the one who followed you."


    Luffy: "Oh? Then she is a good person?"


    Nefertari Vivi: "That''s not it!! Actually, we already knew it! You told the president, right?!! What''s your purpose?!"


    Nico Robin: "This... because you are so serious, I can''t help but help you... Do you really n to fight against Baroque Works and save the kingdom? The princess... so cute, hehe... "

 Chapter 404: Nami, Arlong, Chopper

    Chapter 404: Nami, Arlong, Chopper


    Luffy: "Since it''s the enemy, let''s take it down first."


    Nico Robin: "Oh? It seems that you are very confident in your strength?"


    A momentter, Nico Robin was pinned to the ground by Arlong, unable to move.


    There is no way, neither Zoro nor Sanji will do anything to the girl, and the only way is to let Arlong do it himself. Arlong''s face and voice are indeed very suitable for ying this role.


    He didn''t even need to pretend, just being himself, he behaved superbly enough.


    Arlong: "If you''re just an ordinary devil fruit user... then I''m sorry, your tricks won''t work for us."


    Nico Robin was also shocked at this time, she didn''t expect that she would be subdued so easily.


    At the same time, it also causedplicated thoughts in her heart.


    Her purpose of helping Princess Vivi is actually very simple, that is, to prevent the loss of life, and she doesn''t want to see Crocodile''s plot seed.


    But she couldn''t tantly sabotage Crocodile''s n.


    She didn''t want to put herself in it.


    But now it''s different.


    Seeing the strength of Luffy and the others, she had a faint thought in her heart, maybe... Maybe this group of people can really stop Crocodile?


    Then she won''t kill arge number of innocent people just to interpret the historical text!


    Nico Robin said regardless of her appearance: "Wait! Wait! If it were you, maybe you could really stop that crazy man!"


    Luffy: "What do you mean?"


    Immediately, Nico Robin told everyone about Crocodile''s real purpose. Princess Vivi was surprised and angry when she heard about it! What Crocodile did did not treat the people of the Kingdom of basta as human lives at all!


    Luffy: "So what about you? Aren''t you with him?"


    Nico Robin: "I joined him just to interpret the inscriptions left over from history through Poneglyphs! As for the ''Pluton'' or something, I don''t care at all! I even always hope that someone cane out to stop him! If you don''t believe me! You make him let me go! I''ll prove it to you!"


    Luffy and Arlong looked at each other.


    Immediately, Arlong let go of Nico Robin.


    Nico Robin took out a permanentpass (Eternal Pose) from her bosom, threw it to Princess Vivi and continued: "Thispass points to the front of the basta Kingdom, so there will be no pursuers. I specially brought this to help you escape the pursuit of the Baroque Work Syndicate."


    Speaking of this, Nico Robin paused for a moment, and nced at the people on board: "But... now, it seems that you don''t have to worry about chasing soldiers..."


    Luffy: "Then what about the man you mentioned?"


    Nico Robin: "He is one of the Seven Warlords. Not long ago, he was summoned by the marine to Marineford, so you don''t need to worry about it for the time being. He should notunch his n so soon."


    Luffy grinned: "Really? It just so happens that our goal is also Marineford. Since you don''t agree with what he did, why don''t youe with us to Marineford to kill him."


    Nico Robin said in horror: "Are you crazy?! Why are you going to Marineford?! That''s the headquarters of the Marine! Aren''t you throwing yourself into a trap when you go there?!"


    Luffy and his party were able to defeat Crocodile, Nico Robin could barely believe it. But it is absolutely impossible for her to believe that Luffy and others can fight against the entire naval force!


    Having been hunted down for so many years, she knows the strength of the world government and marine best, but they are existences that no one else can match!


    Luffy: "We''re going there- naturally we have our reasons. Since you also want to get rid of that man''s control, don''t you n to give it a try?"


    At this time, Luffy certainly didn''t really invite Nico Robin.


    He just wanted to test Nico Robin''s mind.


    Nico Robin crossed her hands in front of her: "I''m sorry, the Kingdom of basta is still waiting for me, I don''t want to apany you crazy people to die."


    After finishing speaking, she disyed her flowery fruit ability.


    Countless pairs of arms quickly formed a bridge, instantly supporting her back on the back of the huge tortoise, and then urged the tortoise to speed up and leave here without looking back.


    Luffy and the others did not stop her either.


    They just watched her leave silently.


    ...


    A few dayster, since there was no other Eternal Pose to the Kingdom of basta, Luffy and his party had to sail in the direction of the pointer given by Nico Robin.


    Then came to the next location, a Little Garden.


    In the original book, Luffy and his party will meet the two giants Dorry and Brogy here, as well as Mr.3 and Mr.5 who are nning to hunt them down.


    In this process, the two sides experienced a bitter battle.


    Zoro was even in this battle, and almost chopped off his own feet with his own hands.


    However, after meeting Li Yaoxiang, they are now different.


    The giant Dorry wanted to attack Luffy because of the misunderstanding of the wine explosion, but he was easily taken down by Luffy. Even dealing with the group of Mr.3 and Mr.5 is extremely easy.


    Finally, they sessfully won the Eternal Pose to the Kingdom of basta from Mr.13''s pair of birdies.


    Finally, they can officially set off to the Kingdom of basta without waiting a year in this Little Garden to record the pointer.


    However, after leaving the Little Garden, the gears of fate returned to the original track.


    No one noticed that Nami was bitten by a poisonous insect.


    The result is that the high fever persists, and her life is in danger.


    Originally everyone nned to let Nami go through the air door to receive treatment. But this idea was rejected by Li Yaoxiang. Said that this is also one of the tests given to them.


    In desperation, in order to treat Nami, Luffy and others had to decide to go to the nearest ind, which is the Drum Kingdom. But on the way, they encountered a huge tornado and the fleeing King of Drum Kingdom, which made their journey even slower.


    Nami''s situation became worse and worse.


    Inside the cabin.


    Nami''s face was flushed with heat, and she was lying on the futon with difficulty breathing.


    The rest surrounded her.


    Nami covered her eyes, couldn''t help crying, and said unwillingly, "Why? Why am I so useless... How can I revive my mother..."


    As soon as the words came out.


    The faces of everyone in the cabin were also ugly.


    Li Yaoxiang once said that he would decide whether to revive them or not depending on how much they helped Luffy. And Nami''s current situation is obvious, she has be a burden, how could she not worry about Li Yaoxiang''s opinion of her?


    For a while, everyone didn''t know how tofort Nami.


    After all, resurrection is not something they can decide.


    After a moment of silence, Luffy said: "Nami, don''t worry about it so much. The most important thing now is to cure your illness. As for the resurrection...don''t worry, I will try my best to convince my brother when the timees."


    That''s right.


    But everyone knows the persuasion that Luffy said, so there should be little hope.


    After all, they all saw how clear Li Yaoxiang''s attitude was.


    And just when everyone felt a little overwhelmed, the voice of Arlong suddenly sounded in everyone''s ears: "Let me do it..."


    Everyone looked at Arlong in bewilderment.


    Arlong was a little annoyed by everyone''s eyes: "I mean, now we can see the ind in front of us. Although the distance is still a bit far, there is no way to get there as soon as possible. I will carry her on my back. Let Nami go there to seek medical treatment first, so the speed should be much faster. You can catch upter."


    Everyone looked at Arlong, still in a daze.


    Nami, who was so ill and delirious, also heard what Arlong said, but she still insisted: "No, I don''t need your help..."


    Luffy, who came back to his senses, quickly persuaded him: "Nami, let him help you! Take it as atonement for what he did to you before..."


    Nami: "No, no matter what, I don''t want to be helped by him..."


    At this time, Arlong pushed away everyone, came to Nami, and looked down at Nami condescendingly: "Oh, do you think I''m helping you? I just don''t want to lose an excellent navigator on our ship!"


    Nami covered her eyes even more tightly now.


    She bit her lower lip tightly and said nothing.


    Arlong picked her up aggressively, walked out of the cabin, jumped directly into the sea, and swam towards the ind in front at an extremely fast speed.


    As for Luffy and the others, they didn''t dare to neglect, and hurriedly took the helm to catch up.


    After a while.


    Luffy and his party finally arrived at this ''ind without a name''. But the situation is not as good as expected, because they have seen Arlong with Nami on his back being besieged by a group of people!


    In the original book, this ce was originally the Drum Kingdom.


    But because of the fleeing of the king of Drum Kingdom, the residents here will not recognize this name and n to re-establish a new country. They are very wary of outsiders at this stage, especially pirates. After all, they were destroyed by pirates not long ago.


    In the original book, Princess Vivi was the first to kneel and kowtow for help, and then Luffy knelt and kowtowed to avoid this dispute.


    But now it is different.


    The actions of Arlong caused everything to go haywire!


    Moreover, even if there is no Arlong, it is estimated that Luffy will not kneel and kowtow like in the original book. Because it is no longer possible for Luffy to put his emphasis on human life on the other party''s thoughts.


    Seeing that the situation was wrong, Luffy immediately jumped to the ind and shouted: "Do it!"


    Immediately, everyone took action to deal with those who besieged Arlong.


    After a while.


    Everyone, including Dalton, the captain of the former Drum Royal Guard who had the ability of the Ox fruit, was also subdued.


    Dalton red at Luffy and his party resentfully: "You pirates, what else do you want?! We have nothing here worth grabbing!"


    Arlong shouted loudly: "Didn''t I say it already?! I want to find a doctor! It''s a doctor!"


    Dalton turned his head: "You pirates, can''t believe it at all!"


    Luffy didn''t have the heart to entangle with them any longer, so he picked up Dalton directly: "Let me tell you for thest time, we are adventurers, not pirates! Also, do you have a doctor on this ind? Where is the doctor? I don''t care if you believe or not, I will kill you all right now!"


    Princess Vivi: "Luffy..."


    Luffy stared back fiercely, staring so hard that Princess Vivi didn''t dare to make a sound.


    I have to say, this trick is still useful. In the end, Dalton couldn''t bear the pressure, and told the information about the only doctor on the ind, who was the "witch" in their mouths.


    After getting the information from the witch, Arlong ran madly on the snow with Nami on his back without saying a word.


    Luffy also chased after him.


    The next situation is simr to the original.


    During the process, they encountered many ferocious big snow rabbits. The difference is that in the original book, Sanji and Luffy sent Nami here together.


    And this time, Arlong and Luffy sent Nami here.


    And finally sessfully climbed to the top of the mountain, allowing Nami to receive treatment.


    At the same time, the king of Drum Kingdom also came back here at this time. However, they were all easily dealt with by Zoro and the others.


    A few hourster.


    Nami finally woke up from the hospital bed.


    And the first thing she saw was the cute Chopper.


    "Who are you?"


    Chopper was so frightened by Nami''s sudden voice that he slipped and fell, which was very exaggerated. Then Chopper hid behind the wall for the first time.


    Of course, apart from covering up a little antlers, most of the rest of the body is still exposed.


    "???"


    "..."


    "Normal people should hide their bodies..."


    Chopper trembled when he heard this, and quickly changed direction to hide.


    "It''s toote, I have already found you, and you haven''tpletely hidden yourself, who are you?"


    "Less... less wordy, human! Your high fever should have subsided, right?!"


    "You can talk?!"


    "Whoa whoa whoa!!"


    At this time, a voice came from outside: "Chopper, what are you arguing about?"


    The next thing is that it is the same as the original.


    After learning the importance of the ship''s doctor, Luffy immediately invited the 139-year-old grandma to join them. Of course, it was impossible for the witch to agree.


    And Chopper''s sudden appearance was mistaken by Luffy for food, and he followed Arlong to catch up.


    In the end, the witch chased Arlong and Luffy and ran around in the castle.


    Chopper secretly hid back.


    Staying in the same room with Nami, he poked Nami cautiously: "You...you are adventurers? What is an adventurer?"


    Nami smiled and replied: "The definition of an adventurer is simr to that of a pirate. But we will never do the hateful behavior of a pirate."


    Chopper: "Really...really?"


    "Really."


    "Then do you have a g?"


    "It''s just a white sail. Are you interested in adventurers?"


    "No! Not at all! Don''t talk nonsense!"


    "Yes, yes, yes, I said the wrong thing, don''t be nervous. Otherwise... you cane too!"

 Chapter 405: Chopper and Robins determination

    Chapter 405: Chopper and Robin''s determination


    "What nonsense are you talking about?!! I''m a reindeer! How can reindeer be with humans?!!"


    The voice just fell.


    There was a snap.


    The door of the room is opened.


    Both Arlong and Luffy showed hideous faces at the same time: "So you''re here!"


    Chopper stared wide-eyed in fright, turned around and ran away.


    Luffy and Arlong catch up again.


    Luffy: "It looks delicious!"


    Arlong: "It should be even good to eat raw!"


    During the chase, Chopper used all his fruit abilities. Luffy''s eyes sparkled. However, the strength of Arlong and Luffy today are much stronger than they were in the original book at this time. In the end, Chopper was caught by them.


    Luffy grabbed Chopper''s hoof, let Chopper sway and struggle in mid-air, returned to Nami, and said with a hearty smile: "Look, Nami! See what I caught? Wait until I kill it, help you replenish your body."


    "Whoaaaah!! Don''t eat me! Don''t eat me! Don''t! NO!"


    Both Luffy and Arlong were taken aback.


    "Reindeer can talk?!"


    Nami: "Don''t bully him anymore. His name is Chopper, he is a doctor, and he has been taking care of me before."


    "Doctor?!"


    Luffy''s expression changed from shock to surprise, recalling Chopper''s various strange skills when he was escaping before, he was even more excited: "Chopper! Come to my ship as a ship doctor!"


    Chopper who kept shaking and struggling was suddenly taken aback.


    Nami, a human being, invited him.


    He didn''t expect that another human in front of him would invite him.


    However, when he turned to Arlong, he woke up again! Shaking and struggling again: "No! You are really lying to me! You are just trying to eat me!!"


    Luffy: "No. We are short of a ship doctor on board, you can be our ship doctor."


    "No, no! You lied to me! You lied to me! Look at his appearance, look at his appearance, he just wants to eat me! I am a reindeer, how can a reindeer be with humans?! Also, are you not afraid of a talking reindeer? Are you not afraid of my blue nose?!" Chopper pointed at Arlong and struggled desperately.


    Arlong looked down from above, and gave Chopper a hard look: "Huh?! Are you discriminating against me? A fish like me who can also talk?"


    Chopper had another meal.


    A brand new idea shed in my mind.


    Yup.


    They can ept talking fish as a partner, but can they also ept talking reindeer as a partner?


    However, when this thought touched the face of Arlong again, it immediately dissipated, struggling desperately unwillingly: "No! I don''t want it! I don''t taste good! Don''t eat me!"


    Luffy''s eyes lit up, and he said domineeringly, "I don''t care! I want you to be my ship''s doctor!"


    In this way, in the original book, Luffy originally broke Chopper''s heart, and then Chopper, who had been hurt by humans, was willing to join Luffy.


    But now Luffy is much more domineering.


    Even though Chopper still refuses to believe that Luffy and others really want him to join, Luffy still directly brings Chopper aboard.


    Of course, before leaving, he reassured Dr. Kureha that they would take good care of Chopper.


    Then, Chopper was lifted by his ankles all the way, hung upside down in mid-air, and was brought back to the boat with desperate struggles.


    A few hourster.


    The battleship has beenunched for several hours, and Chopper has already been thrown into Chopper''s private room by them.


    Inside the room.


    Seeing that there was no one around, Chopper no longer struggled to die like before. Instead, his face was full of excitement and excitement, and he looked out at the sea through the round window in the room in disbelief.


    "I really went to sea? Do I really have partners?"


    With a click, Nami opened Chopper''s door, smiled and said, "You seem to be in a good mood?"


    Chopper was taken aback, and quickly retreated to the corner: "Woo...hu...nonsense!! How can I be excited?!"


    "Yes, yes, yes, you are not excited, I made a mistake. Anyway, thank you very much for taking care of me before."


    Chopper was so happy that his eyes narrowed into crescents, and he couldn''t help shaking and farting. He said tteredly, "Here wee again~ Don''t say that~ How could human beings be grateful to reindeer~ Hehehe~"


    "..." Nami was speechless for a while, "Sorry, my partner brought you here without your consent."


    Hearing Nami talk about his partners, Chopper immediately became vignt again: "He...are they trying to eat me? Please help me and tell them that I don''t taste good!"


    Nami: "No, they don''t want to eat you. I know, our actions are too much, but our team really needs an excellent ship doctor like you. And we have no time to waste, everyone have very important things waiting for us to do, so we will be so rude to you..."


    "Hee hee hee, no~~ I''m not as good as you said~~"


    At this time, the door was opened again, and Luffy walked in carelessly: "Chopper! It''s time to eat! Huh? Nami, are you here too?"


    Chopper retreated to the corner in an instant, his face full of horror: "You, you, you! You said they didn''t want to eat me?!!"


    Nami smiled bitterly: "They didn''t want to..."


    Before Nami finished speaking, Luffy patted Nami on the shoulder: "It''s okay, Nami, let me do it!"


    Immediately, Luffy walked straight to Chopper in a daze.


    "Hello! Let me introduce myself again. I''m Luffy! I''m the captain of this ship! I heard from Dr. Kureha that you have been hurt by humans. I shouldn''t have used such a strong method to put you here. But sorry, I really don''t have time. I have to rescue my brother. We also have people who want to be resurrected. So, if you are really scared and don''t want to participate in our subsequent battle, I won''t force you. You can be a ship doctor on our ship with peace of mind! I will never let you get hurt."


    "Wait... wait, what happened to your brother? And... what is the resurrection you said?"


    "There is a veryrge force targeting me. I have a sworn brother who was captured by them. Their purpose is to lure me to show up. Although I know this is a trap, but that is my brother, I still have to go. As for the resurrection..." Speaking of this, Luffy paused for a moment, and said with a hearty smile: "I also have a big brother who grew up with me. He is very powerful! Moreover, he also promised me, as long as I target all these things against me, or anyone who will endanger me or those around me is eradicated, then he will help me and my partners and revive the people we care about! Now on this ship, almost everyone is working hard towards this goal. So in order to achieve our goal, we will be a little tougher on you."


    Chopper eximed: "Wait...wait! You mean...resurrection? How can a person be resurrected after death?! You are lying to me, right?!"


    Luffy shook his head: "My big brother is very powerful. I believe he wouldn''t lie to me. He must have the ability to resurrect! And, did you see those air doors on the deck before? He made those air doors to help us be stronger. Our strength can be stronger so quickly, all thanks to the help of my big brother!"


    Chopper: "No! Impossible! If your elder brother is so powerful that even the dead can be resurrected, why didn''t you ask him to help heal Nami?"


    There was a moment of silence.


    Luffy smiled and said, "Maybe you''re right. There is indeed a doubt in everyone''s mind whether my big brother can really resurrect the dead. But do you know why, even if everyone has doubts in their hearts, they still work hard in this direction?"


    Chopper stared nkly at Luffy, waiting for Luffy''s answer.


    "Because even if there is really no way to resurrect in the end, then we should regard it as clearing away all the ''evil'' in this world! Whether it is revenge for the former family members or future generations, let the tragedy that happened to me never happen to anyone else!"


    Hear here.


    Chopper even forgot to be afraid.


    His head is full ofplicated thoughts.


    Who knows how long it took, but when Luffy saw that he didn''t speak, heforted him again: "Go, go out to eat. You can just be your ship''s doctor, and you don''t have to worry about other things. We will definitely protect you."


    After saying that, Luffy turned and left.


    But before he could take a few steps, Chopper suddenly gritted his teeth and said, "Wait!"


    Luffy: "???"


    Nami: "???"


    Chopper seemed a little embarrassed, not knowing what to say. But in the end, he gritted his teeth and summoned up the courage to say, "The resurrection you mentioned...can I do it too?"


    Luffy: "???"


    Chopper: "I mean, if I join the war, can you ask your elder brother to help me resurrect too? I also have people who I want back alive!"


    Luffy and Nami looked at each other and smiled.


    After meals.


    That night, there was an extra air door belonging to Chopper on the deck.


    In this way, Chopper joined the ranks of Luffy and others bing stronger.


    ...


    Time flies, time flies.


    After finishing the trip to the Drum Country, after sailing for a long time, Luffy and his party finally came to the Kingdom of basta.


    Crocodile was summoned to Marineford. The Kingdom of basta had no one in charge except Nico Robin. Princess Vivi''s goal was much smoother than expected.


    Although there is still some friction between the rebel army and the king''s army.


    But after clearing up the misunderstanding and learning that the previous king who formted a series of policies to oppress civilians was actually Mr. 2 in disguise, the war between the two sides quickly subsided.


    As for Nico Robin here.


    After Luffy and others arrived, she knew that she was no match for Luffy and others. Disobeying Crocodile''s orders and losing the kingdom of basta is also a dead end for her.


    She didn''t intend to stop Luffy and the others.


    Her only hope is to explore the historical text of this country before she dies.


    So when the rebel army was fighting with the king''s army, she took the opportunity to sneak into the funeral hall, nning to bury it underground along with the country''s historical text.


    But at the most critical moment, Luffy found her and rescued her very domineeringly.


    Nico Robin, who was lying in Luffy''s arms, smiled wryly: "I don''t have the motivation to live anymore, just kill me."


    Luffy ignored it: "Why should I listen to you?"


    Nico Robin was surprised for a while, and then smiled wryly: "You don''t understand... I have been running away since I was 8 years old, and I am already tired. It is not just Crocodile who will hunt me down next, the World Government will no longer allow me to exist."


    Luffy was still running, dodging the boulders falling from the sky one after another: "So what?"


    Nico Robin: "???"


    Luffy: "They want to kill you, do you want to wait to be killed? Can''t resist?"


    Nico Robin was slightly angry: "You don''t understand how powerful they are..."


    Luffy: "Since you don''t want to resist, then find a ce to hide and wait. Just wait, I will definitely kill these guys!"


    Nico Robin was taken aback.


    Immediately, a tear flowed from the corner of the eye, and the corner of the mouth turned up...


    A few dayster.


    Luffy and his party officially set sail to leave the Kingdom of basta.


    The situation in the Kingdom of basta is different now.


    As long as Crocodile is not dead, the kingdom of basta is in danger. But Princess Vivi still chose to stay in the Kingdom of basta, because she has confidence in Luffy and others, and believes that Luffy and the others will be able to solve him when they go to Marineford and encounter Crocodile!


    Before parting.


    Princess Vivi ran to the shore and shouted through the national broadcaster: "Sorry! I can''t go with you! Thank you very much before! Although I like adventure, I really can''t give up! Because I am too Love my country! That''s why I can''t go with you!!"


    Speaking of this, Princess Vivi''s tears began to fall: "I... Although I decided to stay here, but... If there is a chance to meet again someday, will you call me your partner again??"


    Luffy wanted to respond to Princess Vivi, but was stopped by Nami.


    Because Princess Vivi has already received the attention of the Marine.


    However, although there was no response, everyone on the boat turned their backs to Princess Vivi and raised the arm with an ''X'' to express their meaning.


    This is the sign of their partner.


    In this way, the trip to the Kingdom of basta has finallye to an official end.


    It''s just that before Luffy and the others sailed far, they found that there was one more person on board this time.


    Everyone''s jaws dropped to their navels in shock.


    "You, you, why are you here?!"


    Nico Robin was wearing Luffy''s clothes, drinking coffee and said: "I''ve been on the boat since the beginning, but I just woke up, so you haven''t found me."


    "No! It''s not! That''s not the point!!"


    Nico Robin ignored the others, turned to Luffy and said, "Didn''t he tell you what he did? He needs to be responsible for me."


    Sanji couldn''t breathe when he heard it!


    He grabbed Luffy ferociously, shaking desperately: "What did you do to her?!! What did you do that you need to be responsible!!!"


    Luffy was confused: "I don''t..."


    Nico Robin continued: "Didn''t you say, don''t resist? Since you insist on me surviving, then you will be responsible for my future."


    Everyone was taken aback for a moment, and then Luffy smiled heartily: "Okay!"


    So, that night, there was another air door belonging to Nico Robin on board.


    Everyone continued to sail to the next location...

 Chapter 406: Early Encounter, Blackbeard

    Chapter 406: Early Encounter, ckbeard


    Time flies, time flies.


    In a blink of an eye, a long time has passed since Luffy and his party left the basta Kingdom.


    Halfway through their voyage, they first encountered the ''rain of warship wreckages'' falling from the sky, and the Log Pose pointing up, to the Sky Ind.


    However, when they dived into the water wearing wine barrels, they met Saruyama Alliance just at that time.


    After that, they came to Mock Town on the west coast of Jaya Ind.


    Luffy and his team quickly learned that Mock Town is an illegal area where people who are insted from their dreams gather.


    Just arrived here, Luffy and his party, who nned to wander around, soon ran into their first trouble.


    That is the deputy captain of the Bemy Pirates, Sarquiss.


    Sarquiss just came back from outside with a beautiful girl in his arms, when he found that Luffy and his party appeared within the range of the hotel booked by their pirate group.


    Sarquiss: "Hey, hey, what''s the matter? Where did those dirty kidse from, wild kids?"


    The hotel owner was shocked on the spot: "Master Sarquiss, you are back! They...they...they...they are..."


    The chick next to him: "Stop talking nonsense! Throw them out! How much do you think we paid for this ce? Huh?"


    Sarquiss: "That''s right! What are you looking at?! Brat!"


    Luffy looked at Sarquiss for a while, then turned to look at Nami and said, "He must be a bad guy, right?"


    Before Nami could answer, Zoro, who was looking at the wanted notice, had already said first: "It should be right. You can see that he looks exactly like the guy on this wanted notice, so must be. And This Mock Town is said to be an illegal area, usually a ce where bad guys gather."


    The chick next to him: "How is it? Are you scared? You read that right. Standing in front of you is Mr. Sarquiss, 38 million Berry on his head."


    Sarquiss: "Hey, did you hear what I asked you?"


    Sarquiss and his chick were arguing non-stop, but Luffy still didn''t take them seriously, and continued to say to Zoro, "Then, killing all the people here should not be wrong?"


    Zoro nodded: "Well, there is a high probability that the killing will not be wrong."


    Sarquiss''s expression became yful: "Yo? I didn''t hear it wrong, did I? What did you say? You mean you want to kill us all? Country bumpkins, do you really think the Grand Line is still your country?"


    Luffy still didn''t pay attention to this guy, but instead looked at Chopper who lookedplicated and bowed his head silently: "Chopper, if you don''t have the heart to do it, then go back to the boat first. Just leave it to us here."


    Chopper saidplicatedly: "Really... really want to kill them all?"


    Luffy nodded: "Well, it was because of these people that those things happened to your grandfather. If we meet them now and don''t solve them, then they will only cause more tragedies."


    Chopper gritted his teeth and hardened his heart: "No, I want to stay here! If any good people are identally injured, then I will treat them in time!"


    Again and again, being ignored by the hillbillies in front of him finally annoyed Sarquiss. However, just when he was about to explode, the other members of Bemy pirates came to him tremblingly and tugged at his sleeves.


    He turned his head and said impatiently: "What are you doing?!"


    One of the pirates handed him a wanted warrant, and whispered in his ear: "Sarquiss, this group of people doesn''t seem to be easy to mess with, you can see for yourself."


    The profile picture on the wanted notice is exactly what Luffy looks like.


    In the original book, when Luffy arrived here, the actual reward was 100 million Berry. However, the arrest warrant in Mock Town hadn''t been updated at that time, so the Bemy Pirates and their party saw that Luffy''s reward at that time was still 30 million Berry. Because of this, he looked down on Luffy and his party very much.


    But now it is different.


    Luffy''s actual reward is of course higher than the 100 million Berry in the original book.


    Even if the reward has not been updated, it is as high as 80 million Berry! The bounty was more than 20 million higher than Bemy, the captain of their Bemy Pirates.


    This made all the pirates in the Bemy Pirates lose the disdainful attitude in the original book on the spot.


    Sarquiss, who received the arrest warrant, was also surprised, looked up and down Luffy for a while, coupled with the attitude of his partners wanting to calm down, he then let go and said: "Forget it. This restaurant has been booked by us. You should leave here as soon as possible!"


    Luffy and the others remained motionless.


    Now Sarquiss was really annoyed: "Hey! Do you want to toast and not eat fine wine?! Really think that if the reward is so high, you can be defiant?!! Country bumpkin, this is Mock Town! Sometimes, a high reward does not mean everything! Your high reward does not mean that your strength must be strong!"


    Luffy: "Finished?"


    Sarquiss: "???"


    Luffy: "Finished, then go to hell."


    "what--!"


    After a while.


    In a tavern in Mock Town.


    "It''s not good! It''s not good! Lord Bemy! Lord Bemy! Lord Sarquiss and the others..." After hearing the news, Bemy, who was still betting against others, rushed away without saying a word. Go back to the hotel.


    Seeing a messy scene and the corpses of his subordinates one after another.


    Bemy was so angry that he couldn''t even speak.


    He picked up the restaurant owner: "Speak! Who did it?!"


    The hotel owner trembled all over, and handed over Luffy''s arrest warrant to Bemy with trepidation. This is what Luffy and others told him before they left. If anything, just tell them where they are.


    As predicted.


    When Bemy knew that the murderer was Luffy, he left the hotel owner aside, ignored him, stared at the arrest warrant, and finally crumpled into a ball, gritted his teeth and said, "Oh, straw hat Luffy, is it 80 million Berry? You better not let me find you, otherwise... I will definitely tear you to pieces!!!"


    ...


    At the same time.


    It is also a tavern in Mock Town.


    After dealing with Sarquiss and his group, Luffy and others came to this tavern for dinner.


    Sitting on Luffy''s left are Zoro and Nami.


    On the right is a fat uncle with a beard.


    At this time, the owner of the bar is introducing the situation of the Mock Town to Luffy and others, and telling them that as long as they stay in this town for four days, they can store the pointer records.


    At this time, Luffy and the fat uncle suddenly shouted at the same time.


    "Hey! Uncle!"


    "Hey! Boss!"


    Tavern owner: "Huh? What''s wrong?"


    Luffy: "This cherry pie is terrible!"


    Fat Uncle: "This cherry pie is delicious!"


    The two red at each other viciously, and immediately drained the ss of wine beside them in one gulp.


    Luffy was pleasantly surprised: "Why is this ss of wine so delicious!"


    The fat uncle''s face twisted: "Why is this ss of wine so bad!"


    Looking at each other again, this time it even has the effect of lightning colliding together. Immediately afterwards, the two said at the same time that they would buy 50 pieces of meat/50 cherries to send back as gifts.


    The result is tit for tat again.


    51, 52, 52...


    Shouting non-stop.


    Like children bickering.


    And just when the two were fighting vigorously, there was a loud bang at the door of the tavern, and they were kicked away forcefully. Immediately afterwards, Bemy''s figure in a jacket appeared in everyone''s eyes.


    As soon as he appeared, the customers were shocked.


    "It''s Bemy!"


    "Shh! Don''t look!"


    Bemy was concerned about other things, so he stared straight at the guy in the straw hat not far away.


    "Straw Hat Luffy, it''s you, right?"


    Luffy turned around: "Is there something wrong?"


    Immediately, without further ado, Bemy kicked Luffy with a spring leg!


    Luffy caught the blow firmly.


    Bemy retracted this leg.


    While the two were confronting each other, the arrest warrant rolled up by Bemy also fell from Bemy''s arms and rolled to the fat uncle''s feet.


    The fat uncle picked up the wanted warrant, opened it, and said nothing.


    On the other side, neither Bemy, nor Luffy, Zoro and others noticed the movement of the fat uncle.


    Bemy said ferociously: "Sure enough... No wonder you were able to kill Sarquiss and the others..."


    As soon as the words came out, there were exmations of people around.


    Even the fat uncle was a little surprised.


    But Luffy ignored them.


    Instead, he pped his hands foolishly: "So you''re their captain? Great! We were worried about how to find you before, but now you came here by yourself!"


    Bemy: "..."


    Luffy''s appearance made Bemy even more annoyed!


    The war is about to break out.


    Bemy was also bouncing back and forth in the entire Mock Town, the speed was so fast that the people who were eating melons were shocked. However, Luffy in the original book interrupted Bemy''s pretense with one punch.


    Today is not an exception.


    And the strength of the punch is much stronger than in the original book, Luffy has no intention of holding back at all.


    Bemy''s head was tilted when he was smashed into the ground.


    While everyone''s eyes were staring out, Luffy said indifferently: "It''s finally resolved, because you almost affected my appetite, and I was worried that you would run away."


    After finishing speaking, Luffy turned his head nonchntly, looked at the fat uncle again and said, "Hey, uncle, let''s continue! You were sincerely against me just now, weren''t you!"


    I just finished speaking.


    The obese uncle suddenly changed his entire aura.


    "Papapapapapa!" He first puffed up his palms, and then gradually more figures appeared around him, "Very good! So you are Monkey D Luffy! Do you know that the World Government gave all orders to capture you alive? The rewards make me very greedy~~ They promised me better treatment than capturing Ace alive!"


    Luffy nced at the few people who suddenly appeared around him.


    His attitude was no longer as stupid as before, but he looked at the fat man in front of him very sharply: "What does this mean?"


    "What do you mean? Zehahaha! It''s understandable that you don''t know me! After all, my name has only just started! Just wait! Before long, our ckbeard Pirates will be famous all over the world! What you are familiar with The Fire Fist Ace, I handed him to the Marine! Zehahaha! I was worrying about how to get into everyone''s field of vision, but I didn''t expect that even you Monkey D Luffy woulde to your door by yourself! God really is looking after our ckbeard Pirates~ Lafitte, and others?"


    The voice just fell.


    The members of ckbeard stood out from the crowd one by one.


    Fighting champion Jesus Burgess pped his chest like a gori, stepped out of the crowd, and responded to their captain.


    Sniper The Supersonic, Van Augur raised his gun, and with a loud bang, he shot down a bee that flew past Luffy and the others. They also responded to ckbeard in this way.


    The ship''s doctor, Grim Reaper Q, also rode his white horse and came out of the crowd coughing, but wherever he passed, people fell to the ground and foamed at the mouth.


    Finally, it was Lafitte who walked out of the crowd very gracefully. With a sh of sword light, those who blocked his path were all hacked to death in an instant, causing the surrounding crowd to retreat quickly in fright.


    "That''s right, Captain ckbeard. That''s why we''re all joining you, isn''t it?"


    "Zehahaha!"


    Luffy looked unhappy and said: "You mean... you caught Ace, right?"


    While saying this, Zoro and the others also came to Luffy one by one, confronting the ckbeard Pirates.


    ckbeard: "Ha! You also know Ace? Then we are really destined! Why don''t you let us catch you without a fight? Then I won''t kill you by mistake!"


    Luffy''s emotions have been suppressed to the extreme.


    He didn''t care about what ckbeard was saying.


    Luffy said coldly: "Chopper, can you do it? It seems that the opponent who can capture my brother Ace alive this time is not easy. If you don''t want to do anything, go back to the boat and wait for us."


    Chopper looked at Doc Q very angrily: "No! Leave this guy to me to deal with! I will never let him poison half an innocent person to death again!"


    Zoro looked at Lafitte: "Leave this to me!"


    Usopp looked at Van Augur standing on the roof: "He asked me toe, right!"


    Sanji dropped the cigarette butt, squeezed the cigarette butt with his toes, looked at the fighting champion Jesus Burgess: "Then leave this orangutan to me."


    ckbeard said excitedly: "Hehehe, it seems that you are not going to give in~ Then do it!"


    Immediately afterwards, the second battle in Mock Town started immediately.


    Before those people who eat melons leave the battlefield, everyone has already fallen into the scope of the battle.


    Usopp jumped onto the roof and shot at Van Augur.


    Will Van Augur''s attack affect the people of Mock Town?


    Chopper rushed towards Doc Q, and Doc Q had already begun to use poison gas on arge scale, and some people who couldn''t back down turned blue on the spot.


    The movements of Zoro and Sanji were even more exaggerated. Their opponents had no intention of restraining at all, and they fought like hell.


    As for ckbeard, he alsounched his ultimate move as soon as he came, and the ck shadow began to spread from his feet, slowly extending to everyone''s feet...

 Chapter 407: Blackbeard, arrives in the sea of clouds

    Chapter 407: ckbeard, arrives in the sea of clouds


    The battlefield between Chopper and Doc Q.


    At the beginning of the battle, Chopper didn''t choose to attack Doc Q immediately, but rushed to check on the people who were poisoned by the poisonous gas released by Doc Q, and healed everyone as best he could.


    Doc Q: "Cough! Cough! Cough! Hehehe, it seems that you are also good at medical skills~~ Then let''spare, is it me who poisoned faster, or you who saved faster, cough! Cough! Cough!"


    Chopper was so anxious that he was healed, and he yelled at Doc Q with red eyes: "Enough!! There are many innocent people here!! Stop releasing poisonous gas!!"


    Doc Q nced at ckbeard''s direction: "Cough! Cough! Cough! That''s not okay~ ckbeard boss seems to be serious. If you don''t solve it as soon as possible and leave here, maybe even I will be affected... Cough! Cough! cough!"


    After finishing speaking, another cloud of blue-ck poisonous gas began to spread from around Doc Q.


    Now, Chopper is reallypeting speed against Doc Q.


    Seeing that Chopper really rescued those blue-faced and foaming guys one by one, Doc Q couldn''t help admiring Chopper: "Cough! Cough! Cough! Awesome... amazing... I The poisonous gas released has never been deciphered so quickly, you are the first one. Cough! Cough! Cough! Then try another poison and see how much you can save..."


    After all, another purple-ck smoke spread from Doc Q''s body.


    Once the purple-ck smoke is released, Chopper''s speed of saving people is obviously not as fast as Doc Q''s speed of poisoning people.


    The more this happened, the more anxious he became.


    The more anxious he gets, the angrier he gets.


    Annoyed to an extreme level, Chopper finally gradually lost his mind!


    He didn''t go to rescue people first, but went to Doc Q instead.


    Doc Q saw this, and after coughing, he also grinned: "Cough! Cough! Cough! Aren''t you kind-hearted? Didn''t you have the heart to save people being poisoned to death? What''s wrong? Give up now?"


    Seeing that Chopper is walking towards him faster and faster.


    Doc Q did not panic.


    He unhurriedly took out a bottle of all ck venom from his arms.


    Before he could open the bottle cap, his heart suddenly skipped a beat.


    Something is wrong!


    Chopper, the petite reindeer, is getting more and more strange!


    As the distance between the two sides got closer, he saw that Chopper''s body was growing rapidly at a speed visible to the naked eye! Getting bigger! It''s so big that it can block the sky and the sun, and Doc Q who sees that forgot what he was going to do, where it was, and began to doubt life.


    What came to Doc Q was Chopper''s strongest form, Monster Point!


    Chopper came to Doc Q with crazy emotions and a huge figure. He didn''t give Doc Q a chance to speak or react, so he folded his palms together and mmed Doc Q crazily!


    Even the white horse suffered.


    boom!


    boom!


    boom!


    boom!


    The deafening sound of smashing the ground continued to sound, and Chopper seemed to be afraid that Doc Q would not die after that: "I already told you not to do it! Why don''t you listen! Why won''t you just listen!!!"


    boom!


    boom!


    boom!


    ...


    The battle between Sanji and fighting champion Jesus Burgess.


    Legs and giant fists are constantly colliding in the air!


    Both sides areing and going, and every hit and collision will bring about a strong aftermath, causing strong winds to blow around.


    Those melon-eating people who had no time to escape, if they hadn''t held on tightly to the iron rods or heavy objects around them, they would probably have been blown away by these strong winds.


    After dozens of rounds of fighting in an instant.


    The two sides bounced for a long distance.


    Jesus Burgess mmed two giant fists together several times, and said with a smirk: "Weehahaha! It''s a pity, you are a very good opponent. If it wasn''t for ckbeard boss to use that move, I really want to have a good time with you! Weehahaha! How about one move to determine the oue?"


    Sanji''s facial expression: "Our time is precious, and I don''t intend to spend too much time on you..."


    The voice just fell.


    Sanji''s right leg suddenly began to burst into thick mes.


    The surrounding temperature suddenly increased a lot.


    The ground is dry and cracked!


    ...


    The battle between Zoro and Lafitte.


    The movement caused by the two is not much different from that of Sanji and fighting champion Jesus Burgess.


    Sword light and sword shadow.


    Zoro''s dual des collided with Lafitte''s crutch.


    The battle between the two sides seems to be fast and fierce, but both sides still have the energy to talk to each other.


    Lafitte frowned: "What kind of sword technique are you doing?"


    Zoro''s gesture of holding the sword backhanded and straightened at that time made Lafitte a little confused. It seems to be waving it randomly, but it has a certain method.


    The corner of Zoro''s mouth raised: "Killing Sword."


    The voice just fell.


    With a swish, the sword shed.


    The top hat that Lafitte had been clutching was swept off by Zoro, and Lafitte became disheveled because of this, staring at Zoro with an ugly expression.


    Zoro was indifferent, stopped the offensive, slowly raised the third saber to his mouth, and bit it tightly: "It''s over, I''m no longer interested in you..."


    ...


    The battle between Usopp and Van Augur.


    The two jumped up and down on the roofs of Mock Town, while avoiding each other''s attacks, they kept shooting at each other.


    Van Augur often shoots countless bullets to attack Usopp, but they will be blocked by the strange seeds and nts shot by Usopp.


    The seeds and nts that Usopp shoots towards Van Augur will also be stopped by Van Augur in mid-air.


    Both parties seem to be unable to do anything about each other.


    However, Van Augur is very confident that he will be the one who wins in the end! He could feel that he was slightly better than the opponent in terms of speed and physical strength.


    Moreover, he did not believe that Usopp''s strange attacks were endless.


    On the contrary, I have absolutely sufficient ammunition.


    After fighting for a while.


    The result was exactly as Van Augur expected.


    Usopp''s weird seeds and nts are shot. Without these strange nts, the slingshot in the long nose''s hand in front of him would definitely not be his opponent.


    The battle situation has developed to this point, and Van Augur is not in a hurry to finish Usopp.


    He stopped attacking and scanned the remaining battlefields: "Yourpanions are all very strong. It''s a pity that you may be the cause of their defeat. As long as I finish you and help them, this battle will soon be over."


    Usopp yed with taste: "Really? Why don''t you take a look around you?"


    Van Augur didn''t pay much attention to it at first, but when he really observed the surrounding environment carefully, he realized that he had been surrounded by those strange nts!


    This made him constrict his pupils!


    ...


    The battle between Luffy and ckbeard.


    The two of them didn''t do anything.


    Luffy just let the shadow under ckbeard''s feet continue to spread and spread.


    ckbeard looked around at the enemies who were confronting his partner, and then looked at Luffy: "What''s wrong? Haven''t made a move yet? Are you really so confident in your partner? Don''t me me for not reminding you, this is Yourst chance to make a move. If you want to make a moveter, you won''t have a chance..."


    Luffy stared at ckbeard coldly, not speaking.


    ckbeard, who was still very arrogant, suddenly changed his face.


    Doc Q is dead!


    Was pped to death by that monster!


    Before he could calm down, fighting champion Jesus Burgessna also ended the fight. He was kicked through the abdomen by that inconspicuous-looking guy with curly eyebrows, and his whole body was instantly red and smoking, and he could faintly see that even the bones of Jesus Burgess were scorched ck!


    Immediately afterwards, there was another scream: "Ah!"


    Van Augur''s body was torn apart by several ferocious nts at the same time!


    Before he had time to think about it, his vision suddenly turned to Lafitte who made him feel most reliable! He saw Lafitte and Zoro keeping a certain distance back to back.


    However, before he could calm down, Lafitte, who seemed to have no scars at first, suddenly had bloodstains all over his body.


    He could even see the bloodstains on Lafitte''s body. Before it was sliced open, Lafitte still gave him hisst gaze to ckbeard!


    Spurt!


    Crazy blood spurting!


    The body is in disarray!


    In just a split second, all his proudpanions died!


    He looked at all this in disbelief, as if he still couldn''t believe that what he saw was a fact. However, soon, Luffy''s cold voice brought his thoughts back to reality.


    "It seems... your partners are not very good... What about you?"


    ckbeard''s shocked face slowly turned into anger!


    "Hmph! So what?! Those trashes are dead! They''re not qualified to be my partner at all! To solve you, I alone is enough!"


    After finishing speaking, the shadow under ckbeard''s feet suddenly spread rapidly!


    All the buildings that were spread by the shadows began to sink!


    Seeing this, Luffy shook his head in disappointment, and suddenly appeared in mid-air in front of ckbeard with a sh: "That''s it? I really doubt how Ace was captured alive by you. If you rely on What you need is only the ability of the fruit...then you can die now..."


    ckbeard showed horror on his face.


    Before he could react, his eyes suddenly went dark! Before the consciousnesspletely disappeared, only one sound was heard in the ear: "Silver..."


    ckbeard is dead.


    So far, the battle is over.


    The damage and momentum caused by the battle between the two sides seemed to be veryrge. But the process of the battle was incredibly fast.


    Before the spectators around could react, the battle was over.


    Leave a messy Mock Town.


    If it weren''t for the surrounding scene, they really couldn''t believe that what happened before was true. Broken buildings, wriggling nts, ferocious monsters turned into reindeer to treat the wounded...


    Everything is so many dreams.


    Everyone couldn''t help swallowing, and then looked at Luffy, at his t-toothed monster who was still chewing on ckbeard...


    At this time, Zoro, who had finished the battle, also retracted his de, and came to Luffy: "What should we do with the remaining people?"


    Luffy said coldly: "Anyway, it''s almost cleared up, so let''s clean it up at once."


    Immediately, in the next few hours, there would be tragic begging, roaring, or screams in Mock Town from time to time, and the atmosphere in Mock Town seemed to turn into a purgatory on earth.


    The guy who was identified as a bad guy by Luffy and others, no one survived...


    ...


    A few dayster.


    After the recording pointer records the direction, Luffy and his party will officially leave Jaya Ind.


    Then it is the same as the original.


    First, they met the group of Saruyama Alliance, and learned more about Sky Ind from them. Then with their assistance, they sessfully boarded the huge waves that soared into the sky and came to the sea of clouds.


    However, when things developed to this point, there were some changes.


    The bull-headed sea king who sailed with them all the way did not sessfully board the sea of clouds due to his overweight. Arlong''s battleship also missed the huge wave that soared into the sky.


    In desperation, some of them had no choice but to wait for the return of Luffy and others.


    So, except for Arlong, all the other fish-men stayed on the surface of the sea. Only Arlong, who has been riding on Luffy''s battleship, followed Luffy and his party to Skypiea.


    Then there is Luffy''s reaction.


    After seeing the sea of clouds, everyone was also shocked.


    Usopp even thought he was dreaming.


    As a result, under Luffy''s repeated instigation, he jumped to swim in the sea of clouds. In the end, it was the ability of Luffy + Nico Robin to work together to rescue Usopp.


    After epting that the scene in front of them is a fact, except for Luffy, a heartless guy, the rest of the people still feel so heavy.


    Their battleship suffered huge damage, and they didn''t need professionals to recognize it. Theyaould predict that the battleship would notst long.


    Nami: "What should we do? If things go on like this, this ship shouldn''tst long..."


    Zoro: "Let''s see if anyone on this so-called Sky Ind can repair ships, or if there are new warships..."


    Just halfway through speaking, Chopper suddenly pointed to the distance and shouted: "Yes... Yes! There is a boat over there!"


    But when everyone looked at Chopper, Chopper''s face turned blue with fright.


    "Chopper, what''s wrong with you?"


    "What the hell did you see?"


    "Didn''t it say there was a boat?"


    Qiaoba stammered: "No... No! I saw the boat! But the boat is gone! And... And there is a square cow running towards this direction!! Something bad is happening!!"


    Zoro: "I don''t understand...can you calm down?"


    Sanji: "What and what?"


    Immediately afterwards, everyone found that someone was rushing in this direction at an extremely fast speed.


    "It''s man! Someone ising!! And he''s running on clouds!"


    Halfway through the speech, the guy wearing the four-sided mask with the bull''s head jumped forward and jumped towards them.


    Sanji stepped forward and scolded: "Hey! What do you want to do? We didn''t ask you toe up!"


    However, the bull-headed four-face mask man responded to him with a low voice: "Leave!"


    Sanji: "The visitor is not animal..."


    Zoro: "There''s an animal!"


    Luffy: "What is he trying to do?"

 Chapter 408: Only 9 million Berry

    Chapter 408: Only 9 million Berry


    In the original book, this guy wearing a cow-headed four-sided mask, holding a shield in his hand, and all kinds of strange things on his body knocked Luffy, Sanji, and Zoro down in the ground with just three hits.


    The main reason is that this ce called White Sea is located 7000m above the blue sea.


    The air is very thin.


    This caused Luffy, Sanji, and Zoro to be overwhelmed because they couldn''t adapt for a while.


    But now it is different.


    Compared with them in the original book, even if their strength drops drastically, they cannot be easily defeated by this bull-headed four-faced masked figure.


    The bull-headed four-faced mask man made the first leg whip, but Sanji caught it firmly with his palm.


    The second move, he turned over and kicked again, but was also caught by Zoro.


    The fist that attacked Luffy with the third move was also tightly held by Luffy.


    The time interval between these three attacks will not exceed half a second.


    The resulting picture is that the two ankles and one fist of the bull-headed masked man are all clenched in the hands of Luffy, Sanji, and Zoro.


    Can''t move.


    Sanji panted heavily: "Hey, don''t you feel that it''s much more difficult to move around?"


    Zoro also panted heavily: "That''s just because you didn''t cultivate well. I don''t have any problems."


    Sanji turned into a devil face on the spot.


    While they were fighting each other, they still held on to the ankle of the man with the four-faced bull-headed mask.


    Luffy also panted heavily: "Yes, how could this happen?"


    Nico Robin: "It must be... this is where the air is too thin."


    "So it''s like that... so why is the air thin?" Luffy couldn''t understand what Nico Robin meant. He suddenly looked at the man with the bull-headed four-sided mask, opened the suitcase, and squirmed into a t-toothed monster staring at the silver scorpion. At the same time as the bull-headed masked man, he said in a low voice, "Hey, you... you''d better give me a reasonable exnation why you attacked us, otherwise... I won''t rule out seeing you as ''the person who targets me''."


    The bull-headed four-face mask man was surprised not only by the strength of Luffy and others, but also what kind of monster Luffy was holding in his hand.


    For a while, he really didn''t know how to respond.


    At this time, another unexpected guest suddenly came to the sky.


    "Enough! Let him go!" As soon as he came, he attacked the three of Luffy, trying to make the three of them let go of the bull-headed four-faced masked man.


    But the three of Luffy seem to have eyes in the back of their heads.


    Without looking back, he dodged the attack of the uninvited guest very tacitly.


    And the man with the bull-headed four-sided mask is still in their hands.


    "Who are you?" The three said in unison.


    The uninvited guest in armornded on the deck and stood with the giant bird he brought: "I am... the Knight of the Sky!"


    Giant Bird: "Pier!"


    "..." Luffy, "He attacked us without saying hello. Why should I let him go?"


    This so-called Knight of the Sky is of course the old "god" Gan Fall of Sky Ind.


    Gan Fall''s face was surprised andplicated. He didn''t expect this group of people from the blue sea to be so powerful. I have already made a sneak attack, but I still can''t rescue the Shandian in front of me.


    Gan Fore: "He is a guerri. If you kill him, you will only attract more guerri revenge. Moreover, he is not just targeting you. It is these guerris who do not wee outsiders to the ind."


    Several people looked at each other, not letting go of the bull-headed masked man.


    On the contrary, Arlong suddenly moved and appeared behind Gan Fall.


    Gan Fall turned around and saw only the tall figure of Arlong, plus its ferocious face. Gan Fall was stunned for a moment, and the giant bird was taken aback on the spot: "Pier!"


    Arlong grinned and said, "In my opinion... you two should stay here!"


    "Pier!"


    A momentter, Gan Fall and the masked man with the bull head were subdued by Luffy and others.


    Nami walked towards the two and asked, "Tell me everything you know. Also, is there anyone here who can repair ships, or is it possible to get a brand new warship? How long does the record pointer need to stay here before the record isplete?"


    Wyper, one of the Shandians are proud and not afraid of death.


    Even if he is caught, he is unwilling to tell any news.


    Instead, the old Gan Fall sighed, and then told everything about Sky Ind in detail.


    After a while.


    Luffy, Usopp, and Chopper, the three took off the Shandian shoes, studied them with bright eyes, and evenpeted for who would try them on first.


    Nami continued to estimate the current situation: "Great! There is a power modification like ''Dials'' here, so our next voyage should be much faster! It solves the trouble of our warship damage."


    Nico Robin: "What about the so-called God in his mouth? Are you nning to join in?"


    Zoro nodded: "That''s for sure. We can''t predict what ''that'' will think. We have to deal with all the bad guys we encounter."


    Arlong: "I agree, I would rather kill the wrong ones than let them go!"


    Nico Robin: "Alright, I have no objection. Anyway, I am also very interested in the Poneglyph of this Sky Ind."


    Sanji''s eyes shed with love: "Miss Robin, let me apany you to witness the history of this sky ind~~"


    Everyone said nothing to each other, and they didn''t take Gan Fall and the Shandian seriously.


    The two were shocked when they heard their conversation.


    I thought that as long as I told these blue sea people about the power of God Enel, they would retreat in spite of difficulties. But I don''t think, this group of people in front of me not only have no intention of retreating, but want to take the initiative to trouble God?


    Gan Fall''s voice was trembling: "Everyone, everyone, are you serious? Are you really going to fight against god? Have you misunderstood my meaning? God is powerful, have I not described enough? Clear?"


    At this time, Usopp''s cheers came through his ears.


    "Aww~~!"


    The three of them yed rock-paper-scissors, and Usopp won, so it was up to him to try the Breath Dial shoes first.


    "Damn it! How could I make scissors like Chopper!" Luffy looked enviously at Usopp, who was having a great time, and then turned his head to Gan Fall and said, "The god you described should be a devil fruit ability user?"


    Gan Fall was surprised: "His Excellency also knows about Devil Fruits?!"


    Luffy picked his nostrils with a dumbfounded expression: "Don''t worry, it''s not like we haven''t fought a devil fruit user before. Besides, no matter how strong he is, we still have reasons why we can''t back down."


    After finishing speaking, he looked at the Shandian: "And you, if you don''t intend to target me or a bad person, as long as you promise not to trouble us again, I can let you go now."


    Now, the Shandian finally spoke.


    Besides, he no longer had the same death-defying look as before, and said excitedly: "You...you blue sea people, are you really willing to help us deal with Enel?!"


    Luffy picked his nostrils and waved his hands: "We are not helping you, but if Enel is really like what you said, then he will also be a problem we need to solve."


    After receiving Luffy''s affirmation, the Shandian people became even more excited: "Although I don''t know whether what you blue sea people are saying is true or not. But if you really want to attack the god, please allow me to go back immediately and inform my people! Our Shandian warriors will definitely participate in this battle!"


    Luffy waved his hand: "Whatever you want, as long as you don''t hinder us."


    After saying that, Luffy directly untied the Shandian''s rope.


    However, the Shandian still stayed where he was, looking at Luffy with some embarrassment, and remained motionless.


    Luffy tilted his head: "Why don''t you leave?"


    The Shandian looked at Usopp who was still having fun in the distance, and then looked at Luffy.


    After a while.


    Luffy and Chopper were crying on the boat.


    Usopp put on a handsome face andforted him: "Believe me, this is not fun at all!"


    The Shandian who put on his own equipment rushed back, but also repeatedly assured: "Don''t worry! When I go back, I will definitely ask the warrior to give you a few pairs of Breath Dial shoes!"


    Nami punched Luffy and Chopper on the head with a devil face: "Have you cried enough?"


    Zoro: "Then what should we do now? Go straight to him?"


    Gan Fall said solemnly: "If you really want to deal with Enel, then I suggest you go to the trial of God first. There will be four priests waiting for you. If you fail, at least retreat is still possible..."


    "Trial of God?"


    Gan Fall began to exin the information about the forces under Enel''smand again.


    Sanji rubbed his chin: "So...we''re going to the God''s Forbidden Land first?"


    Nami: "Let''s go to Angel Ind to solve the problem of the battleship first! If this battleship is damaged again, it probably won''t be able to sail."


    Immediately afterwards, Gan Fall brought Luffy and his party to the vicinity of the Gate of Heaven.


    Gan Fall: "Everyone, I will not be able to apany you for the rest of the journey. I am the key criminal of Enel and the others. If I enter the gate of heaven with you, it is very likely that before I meet Enel, everyone will be punished by God together because of me. However, I can assure you here that if you really want to fight against Enel, then, I will definitely apany you to the end! Everyone, let''s meet againter!"


    Say it.


    The giant bird turned into a very ugly pegasus and left here with Gan Fall.


    Not long after Gan Fall left, they saw the magnificent Gate of Heaven, and before entering the gate, they met the olddy who guarded the gate.


    As soon as Luffy and his group left, the olddy immediately took out her camera and took a picture of Luffy and the others: "Are you here for sightseeing? Or for a war?"


    "It doesn''t matter which one it is."


    "If you think about the Upper Yard, please pay the entry fee, 1 billion Extols per person, this is stipted byw."


    Usopp stared wide-eyed in shock: "Then... Then, how much is 1 billion Extols in Berry?"


    The current wealth of Luffy and his party is actually much more than in the original book. After all, they have just robbed the viins of Mock Town not long ago.


    It''s just that, when she heard the topic rted to money, Nami became sensitive all of a sudden: "Uh...excuse me...if we don''t have money, what should we do?"


    Olddy: "You can go in without money..."


    So, Luffy and his group became illegal immigrants and entered the Kingdom of God just like the original book.


    However, this time their goal is clear.


    Although they also met the kind-hearted Angel Ind resident and her father, Conis and Pagaya, but they didn''t stay for too long. After inquiring about the exact situation, the group immediately set off for the town of Angel Ind.


    After arriving at Angel Ind, before they got off the boat, they immediately met the captain of the guard of Angel Ind, McKinley. It is also necessary to arrest them on charges of illegal entry.


    McKinley: "Everyone are illegal immigrants from the blue sea, right? None of you are going to leave!! This is a photo taken by the surveince officer of the Gate of Heaven with a camera. The evidence is solid, and you have no room for defense."


    Sanji: "Illegal entry into the country? How can we enter the country illegally?"


    Nico Robin: "The entry fee of 1 billion Extols per person... We didn''t pay at the beginning..."


    Usopp: "But that grandma still let us go! That angel grandma!"


    McKinley: "It''s useless to justify again. Please admit the crime immediately. However, you don''t need to panic too much. There is still room for things to be reversed. Illegal entry into the country is an 11th-level crime in the sanction of heaven. If you are willing to ept the punishment, you can be released on the spot and continue to travel with peace of mind."


    "What kind of punishment do we need to ept?" Nami firstforted and dealt with it, and then solemnly told Luffy and the others, "Before the battleship is in hand, it is not appropriate to break up with them now. You all here just stay with me obediently; I''ll take care of this matter!"


    As soon as he finished speaking, McKinley''s solution sounded over there: "It''s very simple, just pay ten times the entry fee! That''s 10 billion Extols per person! If this penalty is paid on the spot, the crimesmitted by everyone crime, the case can be dismissed on the spot."


    Nami looked like an old god, and nodded: "So, as long as money can solve the problem, it is not a problem. Then how much is your Extols converted to our Berry?"


    McKinley: "Berry... Is it themon currency of the Blue Ocean? If it is converted into Extols... 10,000 Extols is one Berry. There are 9 of you in total, and you only need to pay 9 million Berry."


    "Yeah, only 9 million Berry, right?" Nami, who was still there, suddenly threw a box at McKinley, and said with a devilish face, "Only 9 million Berry?! Why don''t you shove it up your ass?!!!"


    Usopp, Chopper, and Luffy felt that they were pulling Nami, preventing her from rushing forward.


    "Calm down, calm down, it''s not time to break. Now is not the time to break."


    "Eat shit!! Attack now!! Don''t talk so much!!"


    McKinley touched the wound on his head, looked at the blood on his hands, and shouted angrily on the spot: "How dare you disobey God''s will!! You are about to suffer God''s punishment!!"


    The voice just fell.


    A boom sounded.


    Suddenly a bright blue light shed above the heads of Luffy and the others.


    Immediately afterwards, a thick lightning bolt fell directly towards them...

 Chapter 409: Gods Trial

    Chapter 409: God''s Trial


    The moment the lightning condensed in the sky, Luffy, Sanji, Zoro, and Arlong took the rest of the people on board away from the ce.


    Immediately afterwards, there was a loud bang.


    The stout lightning fell.


    The battleship and the clouds are all gone.


    was bombarded by this lightning bolt into a big ck hole.


    Usopp: "What''s going on? What''s going on?"


    Chopper: "Scared to death!"


    Nami: "Where''s the boat?! Where''s our boat?! Our belongings are still on it!!!"


    Nico Robin: "This...is the punishment?"


    Different from Luffy and others. Usopp, Chopper, Nami, and Buggy have not yet learned Haki. They are not aware of the dangering, and they have no idea what the situation is.


    On the contrary, Luffy, Zoro, Sanji, and Arlong, who have learned Haki, all looked in one certain direction in the distance after rescuing the rest from the boat.


    This made Enel, who was originally bored andzily lying on his side on the cloud bed, suddenly sobered and sat up. Also looking at the positions of the four with piercing eyes.


    Zoro, Sanji, and Arlong are alright, they just vaguely feel that the person attacking them is in that direction.


    But Luffy is different.


    Luffy''s eyes seemed to be really looking at Enel.


    This made Enel couldn''t help turning all his attention to Luffy.


    He saw Luffy staring at him, and said coldly: "It seems... the enemy is more anxious than we imagined..."


    Arlong: "The ship and the stuffs are gone."


    Sanji threw away the cigarette butt and crushed it out with his toes: "Then let the other party pay for it..."


    Enel also looked happy, as if he saw some novel ything, hepletely lost his previouszy expression, and also contacted the four priests through the "heartwork": "Put down everything, ande here immediately!"


    The four priests who were still chasing and killing the testers all stopped and looked at each other.


    Immediately, even the testers were ignored, and they rushed directly to the ind of god.


    And the fact that the tester escaped from the Forbidden Land of God was quickly known by the Shandian people.


    Inside the tent.


    The guy with the bull-headed four-sided mask before said very anxiously: "Wyper! It must be those blue ocean people who did it! Otherwise, these people would not be able to escape from the Forbidden Land of God!"


    Wyper, known as Berserker Wyper.


    The current leader of the Shandian people and a great warrior.


    That is the Shandian man who fought fiercely with Luffy in the original book with a cannon barrel in his hand.


    Originally, he didn''t believe what the bull-headed masked man said, but now what happened in the Forbidden Land of God made him shaken.


    The man with the bull-headed four-face mask: "Wyper! Let''s go! Those blue sea people are very powerful! Maybe this is a great opportunity for us to capture the ind of the gods!"


    Wyper looked at the masked man with the bull''s head solemnly. After hesitating for a moment, he stood up and shouted: "Let''s go! All fighters will attack the ind of God with me!"


    Immediately, more than 20 Shandians were fully armed and rushed to the ind of God at full speed.


    Simrly, somewhere in Sky Garden on Sky Ind.


    The movement of that lightning bolt was also sensed by Gan Fall.


    He, who was still watering the flowers, put down the kettle, looked in the direction of the lightning bolt, and said softly, "Pierre, let''s go too."


    Giant Bird: "Pier!"


    Just like that, people from all directions are rushing in the same direction...


    ...


    The shrine of the gods.


    The shrine of the gods is like a pce, with arge wall around it.


    Four priests havee here.


    Gedatsu bit lower lip tight: "We are errrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrhmm!"


    Ohm: "Of course you can''t speak while biting your lower lip."


    Gedatsu was surprised: "!!!"


    Shura pointed at Ohm and yelled: "I told you! God Enel must have summoned us because we haven''t dealt with Gan Fall!"


    "God, the priests have arrived."


    "Well, go and open the door."


    As soon as the door opened, the four priests were very vignt and put on a defensive posture.


    Soldier Commander: "Here again, what are you doing again? Really useless..."


    Shura: "Shut up!! These guys are in the way, so I can''t exert my full strength! I''ve said it long ago! I''m enough for the ind''s guards! I can be worth hundreds of them!!"


    Ohm: "It''s really shameless. People who don''t know how are still talking here are the most pitiful. The iron trial will make you cry and beg for mercy."


    Gedatsu: "Boring, your trials are trivial to me! My marsh is the supreme trial, try it."


    Soldier Commander: "Okay! Don''t be presumptuous before God!!"


    Shura: "In front of you? Where is the God you mentioned?"


    "There is a w!" As soon as the words fell, Enel knocked down the four priests at the same time like a bolt of lightning, and then returned to his bed to lie on his side.


    "Ahahaha! I am a god... I''m right here. You did really bad... Maybe today you will be ughtered by the intruders..."


    Shura: "How is this possible?! A new intruder hase to the Ind of God?"


    Ohm said coldly: "God Enel, stop joking. Besides you, who else can defeat us?"


    Enel put his face in boredom: "Whatever you think...they will arrive here soon. This may also be a good test for you. If you fail to pass, maybe you will also die. After all, you are just mortals..."


    Ohm: "..."


    Shura: "..."


    Gedatsu: "..."


    Dawu: "..."


    ...


    At the same time, the scene returns to Luffy and the others.


    Discovering that Luffy and his party escaped the sanction of God, McKinley, the captain of the guard, was indomitable and still yelled from the sidelines: "Bold! How dare you dodge the sanction of God! You will only encounter more terrible sanctions!!"


    Nami rushed forward with a devilish face, and hit McKinley on the forehead with a stick: "Sanctions?! You still have the face to impose sanctions on me?! Do you know how much property was on board?! Do you want to pay?! Huh? Sanctions? Try doing that again!"


    Nami is out of control.


    Aiming the stick at McKinley means knocking and knocking all the time.


    Chopper and Usopp rushed up to pull her at the same time, so no one was killed.


    "Calm down, Nami, calm down. Didn''t you listen to Luffy and others?! Let''s find them to apany us."


    "Yes, yes, calm down, calm down!"


    Immediately, ignoring the funny captain of the guard, a group of people walked in the direction of Enel Road. Nami is the most energetic one. If Enel doesn''t pay her ten times and a hundred times, it is estimated that Nami will never end with him in this matter.


    During the period, of course, they also encountered some blockers.


    However, Nami took the lead in striking lightning, and their skin became crispy and tender.


    Soon, a group of people came to the Shrine of God.


    However, before they got close to the gate of the Shrine of God, they were stopped by a group of priests and soldiers...

 Chapter 410: Debt Collection

    Chapter 410: Debt Collection


    On the way to the Shrine of God.


    The Shandian people can pass unimpeded along the way, even if they sometimes encounter troubles, they are already in a state of being scorched andid aside by Nami, which makes them more convinced that Luffy and the blue sea people are real deals. They are ready to deal with the god Enel.


    Seeing the surrounding scenes, the man in the four-sided mask with the bull head was very excited, and seemed to want to ask for credit from the great warrior Wyper: "Wyper! Look! Look at everyone! Let me just say, those blue sea people are very great! And they are really going to attack the Shrine of God! This might be the chance to regain our hometown!"


    The rest of the Shandian didn''t say anything.


    But everyone''s face is also written with excitement.


    However, Wyper did not show much reaction: "You are right! This time may be a great opportunity for us to regain our hometown. But everyone, don''t forget, if we can''t kill Enel, then what we have done is in vain! We can''t count on those blue sea people too much, we have to rely on ourselves!"


    As soon as the words came out.


    The faces of the people who were originally excited became serious again.


    Wyper, their great warrior, was right.


    Even if they were reluctant, they had to admit Enel''s strength.


    Quickly.


    A group of Shandians rushed to the Shrine of God.


    Arriving at the same time as them, there were Gan Fall and the giant bird Pierre.


    As soon as they arrived, they happened to meet the time when Luffy and his party were confronting the priests and soldiers.


    Gan Fall rode the giant bird andnded beside Luffy and the others. His eyes were also looking directly at the group of priests and soldiers in front of him: "People of the Blue Sea, I am here to assist you."


    Giant Bird: "Pier!"


    A group of Shandian also came to the other side of Luffy and others, led by Wyper. Wyper nced at Luffy, and said coldly: "Blue Sea people, although I don''t know why you attacked the Shrine of the Gods, but the power of Enel is beyond what you can imagine. Let us Shandians deal with it. The group of people outside, it''s okay to leave them to you, right?"


    Luffy: "???"


    Zoro: "???"


    Sanji: "???"


    Arlong: "???"


    Wyper saw that the group of blue sea people in front of him were stunned and did not speak, and his brows were furrowed. He didn''t bother to talk to these blue ocean people anymore, and immediately ordered: "Kamakiri! Braham! Genbo! Raki! The four of you follow me! The rest stay to help the blue sea people!"


    "Yes!"


    Immediately, the five Shandians headed by Wyper rushed directly towards the shrine of the gods. A group of Shandian also rushed forward to open the way for their partners.


    The war is about to break out.


    Luffy: "..."


    Zoro: "..."


    Sanji: "..."


    Arlong: "..."


    Sanji: "What happened to them?"


    Arlong: "Leave those idiots alone. What shall we do next? Just join the battle?"


    Nami was so excited that she wanted to rush forward, but Usopp and Chopper quickly stopped Nami: "Stop! Tell those idiots to stop! He''s mine! Even if he doens''t have money, I''m going to make him do chorse for the rest of his life!"


    When Luffy and others spoke, Shandian and his party were already in a hard fight.


    Gan Fall was terrified and worried, and said, "Everyone... Everyone... Are you still going to help?"


    Luffy didn''t speak.


    Although the shrine was blocked by the wall, Luffy''s eyes were always on Enel''s position from the beginning to the end. The same is true for Enel.


    Seeing that Gan Fall was about to die of anxiety, Luffy set off this time and said: "You guys stay and help, I will deal with that guy, they are not his opponents."


    With Luffy''s decision.


    The Straw Hats immediately surged with endless fighting spirit, and walked towards the battlefield one after another.


    Within a few steps, the four priests blocked their way first.


    Gedatsu pressed her lower lip: "You guys are errrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr~


    Shura: "Idiot! Let go of your lips and talk again!"


    Gedatsu: "!!!"


    Ohm: "There is no way. You are the group of blue sea people that the Great God Enel said, right? You don''t look very good? Let you try my iron test and prove it to the Great God Enel. His judgment this time was wrong."


    Satori: "No, you should ept the trial of my ball!"


    Shura: "I''m the one who put the trial!"


    Gedatsu: "Only the trial of my marsh is the strongest trial!"


    Luffy ignored these idiots and continued to move forward.


    Ohm was very dissatisfied and blocked in front of him: "Hey, you! Can''t you hear what I said? Blue Sea people!"


    Zoro also stepped forward and met Ohm''s gaze: "Don''t worry, your opponent is me."


    Immediately after.


    There is no need for Luffy to say anything.


    Everyone found their opponents with a tacit understanding.


    Sanji walked up to Gedatsu.


    Arlong walked up to Shura.


    The only remaining Satori is confronted by Usopp, Chopper, Nami, and Buggy at the same time.


    As soon as Luffy passed Ohm, the big battle started!


    ...


    Zoro vs Ohm.


    Ohm is the priest who holds the cloud shell that can eject the iron cloud. At the same time, he is also in charge of the Iron Trial with a survival rate of 0%, and symbolizes joy, anger, sorrow, and sorrow.


    Among the four priests, he is the strongest.


    Luffy passed him, but he didn''t stop him. Instead, he looked at Zoro confidently: "The most pitiful thing about human beings is that they don''t know how far they are from gods. Your sacrifice can''t win much for yourpanions'' time. After finishing you, I will also go back and prevent him from going before God."


    Zoro: "Don''t you think you talk too much?"


    Ohm pushed the sunsses: "You humans are like this, you always like to fight for each other... Seeing you today makes me more convinced that my philosophy is correct. The only way to stop the war...is to kill them all!"


    As soon as the word ''light'' fell, the sword in Ohm''s hand suddenly shot out four thick iron streams, attacking Zoro.


    Zoro just turned sideways a few times in a row, and dodged all the attacks.


    However, this is not the end.


    Ohm stepped on the iron transport, like a slide, and slid towards Zoro along the four iron transport roads.


    Thenunched a series of fierce attacks on Zoro.


    But simrly, they were all easily dodged by Zoro.


    Ohm frowned slightly: "You also know the mind rope?"


    While dodging the attack, Zoro said with a rxed smile: "You call this mind rope? We call it Observation Haki."


    Ohm: "It''s no wonder that the great god Enel looks at you blue sea people with special regard. If that''s the case...then I will go all out..."


    ...


    Sanji VS Gedatsu.


    Gedatsu, holding the Breath Dial and the cloud shell that can produce swamp clouds. At the same time, he is also the priest in charge of the trial of the swamp.


    He is a bit of an idiot, and his whole body is out of coordination.


    At this moment, he was facing Sanji in a strange posture.


    Seeing Sanji''s curled eyebrows, he couldn''t help but twitch a few times.


    Gedatsu: "My opponent, where are you? You really think you have captured my vision, so I can''t do anything to you?"


    Sanji: "Are you an idiot? I''m standing right in front of you. You rolled your eyes so much, how did you not see me?"


    Gedatsu: "!!!"


    Sanji looked at Zoro and Ohm: "Damn! Why is my opponent such an idiot!"


    Before Gedatsu could attack, Sanji attacked first.


    Choose such an idiot as an opponent.


    This annoyed him a lot.


    The only thing he can do now is to deal with the opponent faster than the nasty Zoro, so he won''t be so ashamed.


    ...


    Arlong VS Shura.


    Shura, the priest holding Heat Dial and Heat Javelin. Like Gan Fall, he also has a giant bird that fights with him.


    Shura looked at the hideous opponent in front of him with satisfaction.


    Shura: "You should be the most powerful among these blue ocean people?"


    Arlong raised its nose a few points, and exhaled two breaths: "That''s right!"


    Shura sneered and said: "You have a good eye! Since you also know that I am the strongest among these people, I will let you die more happily!"


    Arlong also grinned grinningly: "Thank you so much..."


    Shura rode on the three-foot bird, flying higher and higher, higher and higher. After flying to a certain height, dive directly towards Arlong!


    Unparalleled speed and momentum, impable!


    Shura intents to kill the opponent with one blow.


    It''s just that when the spear in his hand stabbed Arlong, there was only a loud noise, and then, before he could figure out what was going on, the three-footed bird under his crotch suddenly disappeared.


    Look back again.


    He saw the sharp teeth of Arlong chewing on his bird, and the whole body of Arlong was even covered with the blood of the bird, which looked very bloody and terrifying.


    Shura shouted fiercely: "Fuza!"


    This time it was Arlong''s turn to retaliate: "Don''t worry, I will make your death less painful..."


    Shura: "..."


    ...


    Nami, Usopp, Chopper, Buggy VS Satori.


    Satori, that is, the fat and round priest who was first defeated by Luffy and others in the original book. The appearance of Li Yaoxiang changed the whole plot, causing him not to meet Luffy in advance.


    Naturally, he was lucky enough to survive until now.


    However, his luck ended here.


    Meeting such a cautiousbination of Nami, Usopp, Chopper, and Buggy, it zooms in as soon as ites. Nami summons thunder and lightning, Usopp shoots monsters and nts continuously, Chopper''s monster point is strengthened, and Buggy has torn apart ability from the Devil Fruit + six styles/Rokushiki.


    Satori immediately became pathetic.


    This is not the worst.


    The worst thing is that he can''t even die.


    Nami refused to let him die.


    While asking Chopper to hang his life for him, he forced him to ask him what he could do topensate their losses.


    Just like that, Luffy and his party gained the upper hand in the blink of an eye.


    Gan Fall, the old man who looked at death like home, was dumbfounded before he even made a move. Even his pet bird, Pierre, was too shocked to speak...


    ...


    At the same time.


    Inside the Shrine of God.


    As soon as Luffy came in, he saw the four Shandian warriors brought in by Wyper, all of whom were seriously injured and fell to the ground.


    Even Wyper himself is not much better.


    He obviously had multiple scars burned by lightning on his body, and he barely supported his body, standing there panting heavily. He can''t even hold themonly used cannon barrel.


    Sensing Luffy''s arrival, Wyper gave Luffy a slight nce, and then stared at Enel: "Blue sea people, thank you foring. But while there is still a chance, you should take your partner and run. We all miscalcted the strength of this monster. This is the defeat of us Shandian, we are not his opponent..."


    Wyper was talking to himself there alone.


    But he didn''t realize that, in fact, neither Luffy nor Enel took him seriously at all.


    Eneru looked excitedly: "You are very good! You are the first mortal who can match me on the heartwork! If you are willing to be loyal to me, I will allow you to enter the priesthood! Come with me to pursue the kingdom of God!"


    "???" Luffy picked his nostrils and looked dumbfounded, "I don''t know what you''re talking about, I''m here to ask for a debt. You destroyed my battleship and all the belongings on it, how do you n topensate me?"


    Hearing what Luffy said, Enel was not angry, but was very excited and said: "Hahahahahaha! The most important thing you need is human wealth! Wantpensation? Yes! It depends on whether you have the ability to take it!"


    After finishing speaking, Enel controlled a thunderbolt of moderate size to fly towards Luffy.


    The power of this thunderbolt is not too strong, and Enel just wants to test Luffy''s strength.


    The stupid Luffy didn''t intend to dodge.


    But at this moment, Wyper suddenly pounced on Luffy and blocked the blow for Luffy, which made his injuries more serious, and ck smoke came out even when he spoke: "Blue Sea people, un away, stop struggling..."


    Luffy: "???"


    Enel shook his head and raised his forehead: "You ants, God''s patience is limited..."


    It was also a bolt of lightning that hit Wyper.


    Enel intends to deal with Berserker Wyper first this time.


    But it was Luffy''s turn to push Wyper away and block the blow for him.


    Enel didn''t care whether Luffy helped Wyper block the blow: "Are you okay?"


    Luffy: "???"


    The unbelieving Enel strikes again.


    The power of this blow is even faster.


    But Luffy is still unharmed.


    Now, not only Enel and Wyper are dumb, but even Luffy himself is dumbfounded. He originally wanted to experience Enel''s attack. But this seemingly powerful attack didn''t feel at all to him.


    Enel: "How did this happen?! What did you do?"


    Luffy: "???"


    1 million volts... 5 million volts... 20 million volts...


    Lightning bolts fell one after another.


    The power is getting stronger and stronger, and Enel is getting more and more frightened: "What did you do?!"


    Enel was startled, but Luffy was picking his nose, feeling more and more bored. Finally, seeing Luffy''s attitude of belittling him like this, Enel couldn''t sit still.


    My heart is getting more and more annoyed!


    Since lightning doesn''t work, let''s use physical attacks!


    He held his golden stick, and with a half-lightning body, he attacked Luffy.


    Hearing a loud noise, Enel felt as if he had hit a piece of steel, and then saw Luffy digging his nostrils and said to him, "Have you hit enough? If you''ve hit enough, then it''s my turn."

 Chapter 411: Scarlet Eyes with Spots

    Chapter 411: Scarlet Eyes with Spots


    "Impossible!! Even if I can''t hurt you! But don''t expect to be able to hurt me!!" He suffered setbacks again and again.


    Enel, a god who is used to overriding everything, finally couldn''t calm down anymore.


    "Strange, can''t you use Observation Haki? Didn''t you notice the movement outside? The battle is almost over." Luffy picked his nostrils. Enel''s face full of doubts, he was very surprised that Luffy had arrived at this time, why? There is also this kind of thinking.


    Sure enough.


    Before, Enel focused on dealing with Luffy, ignoring the battle outside.


    Now, after Luffy reminded him, his heartwork spread out again.


    As soon as he checked, his pupils shrank suddenly!


    He shook his head again and again, with an expression of disbelief.


    He sensed it.


    Sensed that even Ohm and his Iron Cloud were cut off.


    Sensed that Gedatsu was kicked ck and blue by the opponent.


    Sensed that Shura was already covered in blood, lying unconscious on the ground.


    Sensed that Satori was being manipted by the enemy with his look of lovelessness.


    This is not the most shameful thing, the most shameful thing is that none of his subordinates died. The enemy is still treating them and not letting them die.


    Gradually, the movement outside became smaller and smaller.


    Enel''s mind returned to the scene.


    Looked at Luffy foolishly.


    Immediately he said angrily again: "Who the hell are you?! You are not mortals! You are gods just like me!! Why?! Why are you invading my domain?! Are you afraid that I will find the kingdom of God?!"


    Luffy frowned even tighter: "I really don''t know what you''re talking about. You sunk my battleship, do you have any money to pay for it? Forget it, they all say you are a bad person, let''s talk about itter."


    RubberRubber


    32 Brick Fist!


    When the rubber fist struck, Enel subconsciously wanted to turn into lightning to dodge. But when the fist approached, he realized that this trick didn''t work.


    But it was toote to realize it at this time, he was punched by Luffy so abruptly that his eyes almost popped out. The pain distorted his facial features. Then the whole person flew out backwards.


    And just when Luffy wanted to rush up to make up a few more punches, Nami, who had already finished the fight, rushed in and shouted: "Luffy! Stop! Don''t kill him! We need to ask for gold! If they won''t pay, don''t let them die so easily!"


    That''s right.


    Luffy didn''t intend to do anything, but Enel was not willing to give in easily.


    The result, of course, was that Enel continued to attack Luffy relentlessly, but was then beaten up by Luffy until Enel had no more strength to fight back, which ended the battle.


    Wyper saw the whole process.


    In addition to being dumbfounded, he no longer knew how to respond.


    Then he began to ept Chopper''s treatment in an ignorant manner.


    As for Luffy, he doesn''t care that much. After the battle was over, Enel and the priests were thrown together like trash.


    Nami said very domineeringly: "Tell me now! Where is that batch of gold?!"


    Enel seemed weak, but still sneered: "Give up... Even if you find the batch of gold, you won''t be able to take it away..."


    Hearing this, Nami went mad again, and was about to rush up to beat someone with a stick in her hand. She said with a devilish face, "Why do you care if we take it away?! Just tell me!"


    Satori couldn''t take it anymore, and hurriedly shouted: "Stop beating! I say! I say!"


    Enel: "You!"


    There were twists and turns again, but in the end Enel still couldn''t stop Satori from breaking the news. As a result, the whole group was taken by Satori to the ce full of gold.


    Now, it''s Nami''s turn to be shocked...


    Seeing those unbelievablyrge gold pieces, I don''t know how to express my current mood. Moreover, the unbelievablyrge gold, that is the second. What''s even more exaggerated is the huge battleship made of gold, which is really unimaginable for them.


    Seeing the stunned look of Luffy and his party, Enel felt superior instead, and sneered, "Oh, don''t you want me topensate your battleship? The battleship is here, and if you have the ability to drive it, just take it away, alright? But don''t me me for not reminding you, there is no one else who can control this battleship except me, so you should give up on it!"


    Now Luffy and his party are really embarrassed.


    All of them looked ugly, and surrounded the city to discuss countermeasures.


    Arlong: "What about now? Can we not find other warships?"


    Zoro: "This should be the only way to go, and the gold is too heavy for us to take away."


    Nami gritted her teeth and said unwillingly: "No! Even if it melts down, I have to take the gold away!"


    Zoro: "The question now is how long do we need to stay on this Sky Ind? Although Luffy''s big brother didn''t limit our time, we can''t dy for too long..."


    As soon as Li Yaoxiang was mentioned, everyone''s expressions became serious...


    And just when everyone was at a loss for what to do, a voice that made everyone''s hair stand on end suddenly sounded: "Worried?"


    Everyone held their breath and raised their chests on the spot!


    Even the hideous guy, Arlong, is no exception!


    All turned around quickly and saw that the person who came was really Li Yaoxiang, all of them had stiff expressions. Only Luffy greeted him very warmly: "Brother!"


    However, Li Yaoxiang didn''t give Luffy a good look, and snorted coldly: "Huh. Are you traveling in the mountains and rivers? It''s been so long and you haven''t arrived at Marineford and you still have the time to smile here?"


    Luffy was stunned, and then he said aggrievedly, "Is it soon? Don''t we still have to wait for the pointer to record?"


    "The road is made by people. If you really want to hurry, can''t you find a way?"


    After saying this sentence, Li Yaoxiang turned his gaze towards Nami and the others, and swept them one by one. It seemed that everyone was afraid to speak.


    Although they all felt that they and others were on their way as soon as possible, they still didn''t dare to say anything in front of Li Yaoxiang.


    Especially Buggy, he has even been torn into pieces and pretended to be a corpse, trying to reduce his sense of existence as much as possible.


    After sweeping around, Li Yaoxiang said in a cold voice, "Then you can take this golden boat and go on your way."


    Luffy''s eyes lit up, and he immediately remembered the difficulty: "But...!"


    Li Yaoxiang ignored him and went directly to Enel.


    Enel''s first reaction when he saw Li Yaoxiang was shock. Compared to himself, he felt that Li Yaoxiang made him feel more like a god. However, he quickly came to his senses and said stubbornly: "You...you should give up. Don''t expect me to help them drive my golden boat..."


    Before Enel finished speaking, he only felt a blur in front of his eyes.


    A pair of dappled scarlet eyes seemed to be gazing at him.


    Immediately after.


    Suddenly, a brand new memory and a brand new thinking merged into his mind.


    When he became conscious again, the way he looked at Li Yaoxiang had changed.


    Be very respectful.


    Immediately afterwards, under the incredulous eyes of everyone, he knelt down on one knee towards Li Yaoxiang in public, bowed his head and said respectfully: "Enel pay his homage to God!"


    Luffy: "..."


    Zoro: "..."


    Arlong: "..."


    Sanji: "..."


    In an instant, everyone was dumbfounded.


    Everyone knows that Li Yaoxiang is very strong, that''s right. But they never thought that Li Yaoxiang could still do it to this extent? If this kind of weird ability can be used indefinitely and without limitation, then how can there be anything in this world that Luffy''s big brother can''t do?


    Thinking of this, everyone couldn''t help but feel a chill down their backs.


    Even the four priests who are still in a state of ignorance are the same.


    Looking at Li Yaoxiang''s eyes again, he looked extremely fearful.


    However, the treatment of the four priests was not much better.


    Before they gave any statement, they had already encountered the same thing as Enel.


    Immediately afterwards, everyone bowed their heads and knelt down on one knee.


    Ohm: "Ohm greets God!"


    Shura: "Shura greets the God!"


    Gedatsu: "Gedatsu greets the upper god!"


    Satori: "Satori is greatly enlightened, and I worship the upper god!"


    Li Yaoxiang looked down at the five people indifferently: "From now on, the five of you will all belong to Luffy, and you must not disobey orders."


    Enel and the four priests said in unison: "Yes! God!"


    After giving the order, Li Yaoxiang didn''t intend to talk to these five people anymore, and walked in front of Luffy with a nk expression: "These five people are under your control from now on, don''t give me sloppy eyes anymore."


    Luffy pretended to give a military salute, squinted his eyes and smiled: "Yes!"


    In the entire scene, if anyone was least surprised by Li Yaoxiang''s strange ability, it would be Luffy. In Luffy''s heart, Li Yaoxiang is omnipotent.


    So, no matter how powerful Li Yaoxiang shows, he won''t be surprised.


    Li Yaoxiang red at Luffy angrily.


    He snorted coldly.


    Walk into the air door.


    Air door disappears.


    It was as if he had never appeared before, and everything returned to the original state. But even though Li Yaoxiang had left, everyone still couldn''t calm down from the shock.


    Until Luffy yelled: "Golden Boat, let''s go!"


    Everyone breathed a sigh of relief, and the pressure was instantly relieved.


    They all looked at each other, both helpless and excited.


    With this golden boat, their itinerary should be much faster...


    Two dayster.


    Luffy and his team spent two days recuperating on the sky ind, and then got the recorded record pointer from the residents of the sky ind, and then left the sky ind and returned to the blue ocean.


    A certain sea area on the Grand Line.


    Since the battleship of Luffy and his party was swept away by the huge waves rising into the sky, the battleship of Arlong Pirate and the bull-headed sea king have been waiting in this sea area for a long time.


    On this day, a group of fish-men sat on the battleship in boredom, staring and waiting.


    Some fish-men who couldn''t bear the loneliness even jumped into the sea for a swim.


    "Hey, tell me, Brother Arlong and Luffy, can theye back safely?"


    "Don''t worry, Hachi. Have you forgotten the prophecy back then? Luffy will definitely lead everyone on Fish-man Ind tond. They will definitely be fine."


    While talking, another huge battleship came not far away.


    This is the battleship of Saruyama Alliance.


    As soon as they saw Hatchan and other fish-men, they greeted happily: "Hey! Hatchan! Good morning! Won''t you give up today? Luffy and the others went to Sky Ind. It''s impossible toe back so soon. You just go back to our ind and rest first!"


    Hatchan: "I don''t want it! What if Luffy and Brother Arlong fall from the sky and no one catches them? I must wait here until theye back!"


    At this time, a dazzling light appeared in the sky, almost blinding everyone''s eyes.


    Everyone couldn''t help blocking the dazzling light with their hands, so that they could barely take a closer look at what the sudden light was.


    With the bright light in the sky getting closer and closer.


    The eyes of the guys widened and their mouths opened wider and wider.


    Until they see the whole picture of the light, their jaws are about to drop to their navels.


    Before they could get over their heads, they just heard Luffy shout excitedly from the huge golden boat: "Hello everyone! We''re back!"


    A group of fish-men: "..."


    Saruyama Alliance: "..."


    In this way, after having the golden boat, they even abandoned the battleship of Arlong Pirates for the next trip. Together with the bull-headed Neptune, boarded the golden boat and headed to the next location together.


    As for Nami, with this period of getting along, and the chance for her adoptive mother to be resurrected, her prejudice against Arlong and the fish-men is no longer as extreme as it was at the beginning, and she no longer opposes riding in a same ship.


    So, the Enel party joined the Straw Hat Adventure Group, and continued to move forward at full speed...


    ...


    At the same time.


    Sitting in the world government office in the capital of Water 7.


    Spandam, that is, the chief officer of CP9 in the original book. In the original book, he was responsible for CP9 and others bing undercover agents in the capital of Water 7.


    However, there are some changes now.


    The CP9 in this life have already been affected by the appearance of Li Yaoxiang, which has affected their life trajectory. When they were sent by the World Government to assist Li Yaoxiang in catching Karp, they were killed by Li Yaoxiang a long time ago.


    Today''s capital of Water 7, of course, has nothing to do with them.


    It''s just that, although CP9 is gone, there are still some things that should be done.


    So the Five Elders in this life sent CP8 to rece CP9 and became the undercover agent in the capital of Water 7.


    As for Spandam, he is also the person in charge here.


    Now he has just received a call from Five Elders himself, which makes him very excited. Being able to let Five Elders personally ept the order, it is estimated that his future can be described as bright.


    "Yes!"


    "Yes!"


    "I understand!"


    "Don''t worry, I will not let you down!"


    Den Den Mushi ends.


    While Spandam was excited, he did not forget what the Five Elders had told him, and immediately ordered people to summon the hidden CP8, and all of them gathered here.


    After a while.


    In this office, there are a few more guys dressed like shipwrights, bar owners, and secretaries...

 Chapter 412: Capital of Water 7

    Chapter 412: Capital of Water 7


    "Spandam, why are you calling us so urgently? I don''t want to waste our years of pretending here because of some boring things."


    "To make a long story short, we have to get back to work as soon as possible before they find out."


    Everyone was questioning him, and no one respected him, which made Spandam very annoyed. He gritted his teeth and said, "Don''t forget that I am your chief. Is this how you treat your chief?"


    No one responded.


    Facing Spandam''s anger, the CP8 group still remained very calm and didn''t care.


    "So what?"


    "The reason why you summoned us here is to see our attitude?"


    "If that''s all it is, you''ve finished watching it now?"


    "We''re going to go back to work after we finish watching."


    Spandam pped the table vigorously: "Crack! I order you, from now on, stop all tasks at hand!"


    As soon as the words came out.


    The faces of CP8 and his group couldn''t help but be more serious.


    They have been undercover agents here for so many years, and they want to dismiss them just by saying ''stop''. How is this possible? They need a rational exnation!


    Everyone stared at Spandam with unfriendly faces.


    When Spandam saw that these guys dared to look at him like this, he was even more annoyed: "This is the order of the Five Elders! It is because you guys are useless, and you have been unable toplete this task for a long time, so the Five Elders changed their mind! You don''t need to continue now! From now on, you just follow my orders!"


    "Why?"


    Spandam: "No reason! My word is an order!"


    "If you can''t give a reasonable exnation, maybe Five Elders will relieve us of our mission. I''m sorry. I''m sorry that we can''t obey your order."


    Spandam: "You!"


    The eyes of the CP8 group remained unchanged.


    Obviously, everyone will notpromise easily.


    Everyone also doesn''t trust this guy in front of them.


    Spandam''s face was ugly, he gritted his teeth, and said: "I think you don''t understand the current situation between the World Government and the Revolutionary Army, right? When you were sent here, you were sent here to peacefully seize Pluton''s blueprint. But in this situation, do you think it is necessary to wait?"


    Everyone in CP8 was speechless.


    Although they are undercover agents, they are still well informed.


    The World Government and the Revolutionary Army are now almost at a fever pitch.


    The facts are indeed as Spandam said, if we really have to wait, maybe the winner has already been decided, and then they willplete the task, so what?


    "Then what does the World Government say now? What do we need to do next? Just let us give up here and let us go to war?"


    Spandam: "No, it''s impossible to give up. We don''t have time to spend with them anymore! Since they don''t know good from bad, don''t me us for turning our faces and ignoring people!"


    "Do you want to do it directly?"


    "But we don''t know where he keeps the blueprint?"


    Spandam: "Heh, since we can''t get it, let''s just destroy it. Let the entire capital of Water 7 be buried with that blueprint!"


    "When do we do it?"


    After finishing speaking, Spandam pped a wanted warrant on the table.


    That is Luffy''s arrest warrant.


    "The reputation of the World Government cannot be destroyed because of this, we still need to wait for a scapegoat. This is our goal, Monkey D. Luffy! ording to the clues provided by Five Elders, they will arrive in the capital of Water 7 soon. Five Elders means that this person is more important than Pluton''s blueprint! It would be best if we could capture him alive. If you can''t capture them alive, at least you have to prove their crimes and test their strength. This is the brand new mission given to me by Five Elders!"


    "..."


    The discussion is over.


    That night, the CP8 team started to act in the dark.


    The whole process went very smoothly.


    Without rming anyone, they controlled the important officials of Tom Shipbuilding Company, including the main target Iceburg.


    Since the face has been torn, there is no need to be polite.


    In the next period of time, they will try their best to pry open Iceburg''s mouth and let him hand over the Pluton blueprint.


    It would be best if it could be done.


    It doesn''t matter if it doesn''t work.


    They only need to wait for the arrival of Monkey D. Luffy, and then me all the crimes on Luffy and his party, and destroy the entire Water 7 City, then their mission this time is also a sessful conclusion, and they can go back...


    ...


    Time flies, time flies.


    In a blink of an eye, a period of time has passed.


    During this period, although Iceburg and some important officials disappeared, undercover agents like CP8 tried their best to cover it up, and no one found anything wrong.


    On this day, the people of the capital of Water 7 are still living their peaceful lives as usual. Those who should open a shop open a shop, go shopping when they should go shopping, and build a ship when they should build a ship.


    However, this peace was quickly broken by the noise from the street.


    "Hey, look! What is that?!"


    "Bird?"


    "No, why is there a golden bird?"


    As the mysterious bright giant bird got closer and closer, people''s voices changed from arguing and noisy to dead silence.


    Everyone opened their mouths wide, looking at the golden boat flying towards their capital of Water 7 in disbelief.


    Until the golden boat was built on top of their heads, everyone hadn''t recovered for a long time.


    Who knows how long it has been.


    Seeing this golden boat floating above the capital of Water 7, refusing to leave.


    At this moment, everyone waspletely flustered.


    The entire city of Water 7 is in chaos.


    The people fled and ran, forming a situation where people ran into people. Even those bulls that looked like seahorses were frightened and flustered.


    Tom Shipbuilding Company, Iceburg''s office.


    Spandam pped the table and cursed: "Damn! What kind of monsters are those old guys telling us to face?!"


    No need to fight anymore.


    Being able to control such a huge golden boat, as long as anyone with a discerning eye sees it, they will know that this force must not be messed with.


    How could Spandam be so idiotic that he couldn''t even understand this?


    Now, he really might die.


    In his heart, he cursed those old men of Five Elders desperately.


    "What now? Are we still on track?"


    Spandam: "Okay? Okay shit! Don''t you see what''s in the sky?! Are you sure we can take them down?!"


    "..."


    CP8 and his group stayed there quietly without saying anything.


    Spandam''s thoughts began to run rapidly in his mind.


    After a while.


    He gritted his teeth and said: "Let Iceburg deal with those guys! If he refuses to agree, then threaten him with his partner''s life! We ready to evacuate here at any time! As long as we blow up the capital of Water 7 before we evacuate, that''s fine! Although there will be many things that need to be dealt with after this, but for now, this is the only way to go."


    ...


    At the same time.


    On the golden boat.


    Luffy stared excitedly at this unique city below, and wanted to go down and see it. But the rest of them looked terrified and refused to let him go down.


    Luffy: "I want to go down! I want to go down! Don''t you see? How strange is this city! It''s all surrounded by waterways! No way! I want to go down! I must go down and see it!"


    In the past, usually at this time, Usopp and Chopper would go crazy with Luffy.


    But this time even the two of them shook their heads again and again.


    "No, no!"


    "Luffy, your elder brother has already expressed his dissatisfaction before! We can''t waste any more time!"


    Yes, after witnessing Li Yaoxiang''s strange ability to deal with Enel, the people on the entire ship are afraid of none other than Li Yaoxiang.


    Everyone was worried that if Li Yaoxiang was dissatisfied with the performance of the others, they might encounter something that even they themselves could not imagine.


    Luffy: "No, I''m going down!"


    All the people said in unison: "No!"


    Luffy: "But don''t we have to wait for thepass to finish recording? What''s the point of going down now? If it records a long time, maybe we can y here for a while longer."


    All the devil faces, with one voice: "Absolutely not!!!"


    Immediately, Luffy wanted to jump directly, no matter what.


    Usopp and Chopper held him alive and refused to let him go down.


    Zoro and the others began to seriously discuss the issue of pointer records.


    Zoro: "There are some things that Luffy said are right. Anyway, we still have to go down and ask about the situation of the Log Pose. It''s okay if the time is short, just in case if it takes too long..."


    Nami gritted her teeth and said: "If it really doesn''t work, let''s ask if there is anyone in this city who can sell the Eternal Pose to Marineford!"


    At the end of the discussion, they inevitably had to go down.


    So, Luffy happily set foot on this strange city.


    Although Nami and the others have repeatedly reminded him that they didn''te down to y. As long as they bought the Eternal Pose pointing to Marinefordo, they would set off immediately, but Luffy was already smiling, stepping into the city with a yful mood.


    Actually, it''s not that Luffy doesn''t worry about Ace''s life.


    It was Luffy who believed in Li Yaoxiang.


    Because Li Yaoxiang once said that the goal of the World Government is him. Therefore, as long as he doesn''t procrastinate for too long, the other party will not rashly attack in advance.


    He has always believed in what Li Yaoxiang said, so he has always maintained such a hearty attitude and faced everything.


    After a while.


    After being exposed to the friendliness of Luffy and his party, the people in the capital of Water 7 are not as flustered as before. Some people were even bold enough to rush to take pictures with the golden boat.


    Just like that, everything slowly returned to its original state.


    Iceburg also went to receive Luffy and his party ording to Spandam''s instructions.


    There was nothing wrong with the whole process.


    It''s just that when Spandam saw that Nico Robin was also among Luffy''s group, he had bad thoughts on the spot and had new ideas.


    Immediately afterwards, just like the original book, he ordered his subordinates to contact Nico Robin.


    Nico Robin did ept the appointment.


    However, when facing Spandam, she is not as timid as in the original book.


    In a secret room.


    Spandam sat in the secret room waiting for a long time.


    As soon as Nico Robin sat down, Spandam said with a dark smile: "Congrattions, Nico Robin. It seems that you have found a new partner."


    Nico Robin said coldly: "Say it straight, what do you need from me?"


    Nico Robin''s attitude made Spandam a little different, but he still didn''t give up. He took out a golden phone bug from his pocket to test it out: "This phone bug... surely you can''t forget it?"


    Sure enough, Nico Robin''s expression changed immediately when she saw this phone bug.


    This phone bug is the tool that destroyed her hometown back then.


    The phone bug has a button on its shell.


    As long as that button is pressed, it means that arge number of naval warships will be dispatched to destroy everything at the target location.


    Nico Robin said with an ugly face: "What do you mean?"


    Spandam: "It''s nothing, I just want to tell you, if you are willing to do me a small favor and join me, maybe I can help you intercede and let the World Government revoke your wanted warrant..."


    Nico Robin: "What do you want me to do?"


    Spandam: "It''s very simple, as long as you help me deal with Monkey D. Luffy. This matter should not be difficult for you, right? After all, you have not been looking for partners just to protect you from disasters?"


    Nico Robin: "..."


    ...


    After Nico Robin and Spandam Agent finished, they returned to Luffy and the others.


    Not long after, news spread from the entire capital of Water 7.


    Mayor Iceburg was attacked and injured.


    The murderer pointed directly at the Straw Hats.


    imed that they came here to upy the capital of the Water 7.


    As a result, the capital of the Water 7 of course fell into chaos again. The shipwrights were not afraid of death, they all ran to trouble Luffy and the others.


    Things have developed to this point, and for Spandam, everything is going very smoothly.


    With shipwrights dealing with Luffy, they can naturally test out the strength of Luffy and others, and they can sit back and watch the tigers fight.


    In case Luffy is a paper tiger, that would be the best.


    They can take Luffy down on the spot.


    In case the strength of Luffy and others is really beyond their reach, the matter of the thief ming has been done. They can evacuate early, and then blow up the entire capital of Water 7.


    Spandam and the others have indeed seen the strength of Luffy and his party.


    So, they no longer hesitated, and immediately boarded the boat and evacuated the capital of Water 7.


    But when Spandam pressed the button to control the bomb, he realized that no matter how much he pressed the button, there was no response.


    They nted nearly a hundred bombs all over the capital of Water 7, but none of them detonated.


    At this moment, Arlong''s voice suddenly came from the boat: "Are you looking for these things?"


    After all, Arlong dropped a lot of destroyed bombs.


    Spandam first showed a look of panic, and then immediately red at Nico Robin: "Nico Robin! You betrayed me?!"

 Chapter 413: Cyborg Joins

    Chapter 413: Cyborg Joins


    Nico Robin looked down on Spandam: "Don''t say it''s so ugly to betray... I never promised to cooperate with you from the beginning to the end. Everything is just your wishful thinking."


    Spandam roared: "Are you crazy?! Do you know who I represent?! You are not afraid that I will press the gold phone bug and die with you?!"


    After all, Spandam actually took out a gold bug from his bosom as a threat.


    Arlong grinned and said: "Try it! We also want to see how much power the World Government can gather in this situation. It would be even better if they came! It''s convenient for us to weaken their strength!"


    Spandam: "You!"


    Facing Nico Robin''s cold gaze and Arlong''s mockery, Spandam had nothing to do. Because he knew Arlong was right. The World Government can no longer muster the extra power tounch the order of the gold bug.


    Finally, he had no choice but to grit his teeth and mmed: "Do it!"


    Immediately, the CP8 teamunched an attack on Arlong and Nico Robin.


    But it was soon subdued by Arlong and Nico Robin.


    Then take them back to the capital of Water 7.


    At this time, in the capital of Water 7, the previous chaos has long since ended, and all of this is a big drama jointly made by Luffy and others and Iceburg.


    Afterpletely disarming the bombs in the city, they don''t need to pretend anymore.


    The people were amazed that this was a big show, and angry at the cruelty of the officials of the World Government, angry that the World Government did not care for the people in this whole city at all!


    When Arlong and Nico Robin brought tied Spandam and his party back, many people threw trash at them.


    Soon, the group were brought to Iceburg and Luffy in a very embarrassing manner.


    As soon as Spandam saw the two, he knelt down and crawled over to beg for a detour: "Please! Please let me go! All this is an order issued by the World Government! It''s none of my business! I just obey orders. That''s all!"


    Luffy looked down at Spandam, and said coldly: "Do you have an Eternal Pose pointing to Marineford?"


    Spandam froze for a moment, then frantically fumbled in his arms, finally took out a pointer, and handed it to Luffy in a panic: "I... I don''t have a permanent record needle for Marineford, but I have an Eternal Pose to Judicial Ind! The sea area of Judicial Ind is the same as that of Marineford! As long as you go to Judicial Ind, follow the current to the prison Impel Down, and then follow the current again and you can reach Marineford!" Speaking of this, Spandam suddenly nced at the golden boat floating above the capital of Water 7, and then quickly changed his words: "No, no, if I were you, maybe you don''t have to follow the current to the city! Maybe fly over it and you can reach Marineford!"


    Luffy took the record pointer, and then looked at Spandam coldly: "How much do you know about Marineford? Also, have you heard of Ace? What is his current situation?"


    Spandam was stunned first: "You...you want to Marineford to save Fire Fist Ace?"


    Luffy is upset.


    Now am I asking you, or are you asking me?


    Of course, Spandam understood Luffy''s eyes, and he quickly replied: "I know that Marineford''s guards are very strict! I don''t know much about other things! As for Fire Fist Ace... before the execution, the prisoner usually will all be imprisoned in Impel Down! If you really n to put out Fire Fist Ace, maybe you can go to Impel Down to have a look before you go to Marineford, that would be even better!"


    Hearing this, Luffy frowned slightly.


    Iceburg on the side added: "What he said is not much different from the information we have. He should not be lying."


    Spandam: "Yes, yes! I''m not lying! I''ve told you everything I know! Please let me go!"


    At this time, Arlong also walked to Luffy: "That''s not far from Fish-man Ind, do we need to go back to Fish-man Ind first to ask people to help? In this way, the possibility of our sess may be higher."


    Luffy shook his head: "No, I don''t want Fish-man Ind to be involved in this incident until the opponent''s strength is determined."


    Luffy''s decision, although not very rational.


    But he really cared about the fish-man''s life, but Arlong had no choice but to show a satisfied smile.


    Zoro: "So... what is your decision?"


    Luffy: "Since the pointer is in hand, let''s go now!"


    "Wait!" A cry came from the crowd. Immediately afterwards, everyone saw the bruised Franky walking out of the crowd with his group of ponies, "If your goal is really to fight against the World Government, then please allow me to join you!"


    Franky in front of him is no stranger to Luffy.


    Before when he and Iceburg teamed up to make a big show, seeing Iceburg and others lost, it was this Frank who came out to help Iceburg and others resist them.


    Knowing that they are invincible, they are still willing to stand up and help Iceburg and the others...


    Luffy also has a good impression of him.


    However, this is not the reason for Luffy to let Franky join. Franky''s current strength is too low for Luffy and the others.


    Letting him participate is just letting him die in vain.


    So after thinking for a while, Luffy decided to reject Franky.


    However, before Luffy could speak, Franky seemed to see what Luffy was thinking, and continued: "I know my current strength is nothing to you. But I am a cyborg. As long as you give me enough Resources, I can be stronger soon! Also, don''t you still need a shipbuilder in your team? I can guarantee that my ship repairing skills are no worse than anyone in the capital of Water 7!"


    Luffy was stunned, and looked at Iceburg.


    Iceburg nodded: "Franky and I are brothers, and we both worked under Tom. His skills in shipbuilding are no worse than mine."


    As soon as these words came out, everyone looked at Franky in shock.


    Franky said in shock: "Iceburg! You!"


    Iceburg shook his head: "At this point, there is no need to hide it anymore. Since the World Government has chosen to destroy the capital of Water 7, we cannot let this blueprint fall into the hands of others. That means there is no room for us to reverse it."


    As soon as the voice fell, Spandam suddenly looked at Franky and eximed: "So it''s you! So you are the kid back then! So you haven''t died yet! The design is in your hands, right?"


    Iceburg nced at Spandam, and sneered, "What''s wrong with that? Forgot what your current situation is? You still refuse to give up?"


    Spandam came to his senses, and quickly lowered his head: "No, it''s not... I was just shocked by this news for a while. How could I think about the blueprint right now..."


    Spandam was very timid and cowardly.


    But secretly, he was ruthless. As long as he survived this time, he would definitely lobby Five Elders to give him another chance! Let him bring stronger troops to snatch the blueprints!


    No one noticed Spandam''s thoughts.


    No one paid attention to him.


    Iceburg continued to tell Luffy: "Back then, the World Government tried every means to target us in order to get the blueprint in the hands of our master. Our master refused topromise and was killed in the end. I am the Mayor of Water 7, so I can''t leave here. Please give Franky a chance and let him do his part for all of us in the city of Water 7!"


    Speaking of this, Iceburg suddenly bowed to Luffy.


    Immediately afterwards, Franky knelt down and kowtowed: "Please! Please give me a chance to join you and avenge Tom!"


    Luffy smiled: "Okay! I represent our Straw Hat Adventure Group, and you are wee to join."


    Franky was a little taken aback.


    He didn''t expect Luffy to agree so easily.


    Slowly stood up and shook hands with Luffy.


    Then Franky joined the team in such a stupid way.


    After the matter was over, Luffy and his party were about to leave the capital of Water 7.


    But at this time, Iceburg suddenly said: "What about them? How are you going to deal with them?"


    Iceburg refers to Spandam and his team.


    Spadam immediately wanted to kill Iceburg. He thought that as long as he minimize his sense of existence, this matter can disappear. Unexpectedly, at thest moment, he was reminded by the damn Iceburg again.


    Spandam was furious in his heart, but on the surface he said tremblingly: "I have already told you everything I know! I beg you to let me go!"


    Luffy nced at them, didn''t speak, and stepped directly on the golden boat.


    But Zoro stood up automatically, and with a sh of the sword, Spandam and CP8 and his party hadn''t realized what was going on, and they were silent...

 Chapter 414: Empress Hancock

    Chapter 414: Empress Hancock


    Time flies, time flies.


    In a blink of an eye, another period of time passed.


    Luffy finally decided to go to Impel Down first.


    So, a group of them crossed Judiciary Ind in a golden boat, and then continued to advance along the current to the city.


    However, on the way to Impel Down, they encountered a naval warship sailing on the sea which suddenly fired shells at them.


    A series of shell attacks were so powerful that the golden boat, which was flying smoothly, couldn''t help shaking.


    Immediately, all the people on the boat furrowed.


    "Again?"


    "Why did someone suddenly attack us?"


    At this time, Buggy, the general manager of the handyman, brought his subordinates, No. 1 handyman, to the crowd in arrogance, with his nostrils upturned: "Speak! Tell us what''s going on."


    "Yes!" Misceneous No. 1 Enel knelt down on one knee very respectfully: "Reporting to the gods, there is a naval warship below that is using shells to attack our Ark Maxim. May I ask the gods, do you need to us to get rid of the group of ants that offended you?"


    "No need, you continue to drive this Ark Maxim! I''ll go down and have a look."


    As soon as he finished speaking, Zoro said, "Do you need us to be with you?"


    Luffy: "No need, I''ll just go down by myself."


    ...


    At the same time.


    Located on the naval battleship below the golden boat.


    This is the naval battleship of Vice Admiral Momonga.


    On board the naval battleship, besides a group of sailors, there was also Pirate Empress Boa Hancock. The mission of Momonga this time is to invite Boa Hancock, one of the Seven Warlords, to go to Marineford to participate in the fierce battle against Whitebeard.


    Obviously, even without the appearance of Luffy, in order to continue to enjoy the title of Warlord of the Sea to protect the Amazon Lily Kingdom (Maiden Ind), the Pirate Empress Boa Hancock finally chose topromise and followed Momonga to Marineford.


    However, during the voyage, they suddenly found a golden boat appeared above their heads.


    Momonga originally didn''t intend to meddle in other people''s business. After all, at present, the most important thing for him is toplete the task.


    But Momonga can bear it, but the Pirate Empress Boa Hancock can''t bear it.


    She despises them to the extreme, pointing her face up to the sea soldiers: "I now orders you to shoot down the ship that offended me!"


    Immediately, a group of sea soldiers seemed to have been hit by a "head drop", all eyes were full of love, and they ran to fire with great enthusiasm.


    Momongas can''t be stopped even if they want to.


    Momonga: "Hancock! You...!"


    Pirate Empress Boa Hancock looked up at Momonga with her nostrils: "What''s wrong? This golden boat doesn''t belong to the marine at first nce. As a marine, are you nning to cover it? Your ipetence is something that I can''t bear this anger about your matter."


    Momonga was too angry to speak.


    But looking at his subordinates who were fascinated by each other, he was helpless.


    What''s more, if you don''t attack, I will attack, so what else?


    We have to wait and see.


    Soon, they saw a little ck dot jumping off the golden boat. Not long after, Luffy pressed the straw hat andnded on the deck very handsomely on one knee.


    The moment he stood up, Momonga''s expression turned extremely ugly.


    He recognized Luffy.


    For a while, Luffy''s bounty has increased at an extremely fast speed.


    Moreover, as the news of Monkey D. Garp broke out, there''s no way he couldn''t even recognize him.


    Although he doesn''t understand why Luffy and his party appear here, he can at least be sure that they cannot be allies!


    "Why did you attack my ship?"


    Without waiting for Momonga to say anything, the Pirate Empress Boa Hancock said first: "That''s needless to say? Who allowed you to pass above mine''s house?"


    After all, the Pirate Empress Boa Hancock directly used Love-Love Beam on Luffy without saying a word.


    A few heart-shaped circles of light shot towards Luffy.


    A momentter...


    Luffy tilted his head: "???"


    Pirate Empress Boa Hancock: "?!! What''s going on?! Why does the ability to mourn your family not work for you?!"


    The Pirate Empress, who doesn''t believe in evil, once again used sweet sweet wind on Luffy.


    Moreover, this time the scope isrger and the power is stronger!


    Seeing Momonga frightened: "Hancock!"


    But she couldn''t stop it even if he wanted to.


    Luffy is nothing but shit.


    On the contrary, the sailors who surrounded Luffy turned into stone statues.


    Luffy picked his nose: "Are you an idiot? Why are you attacking your own people?"


    Hancock is surprised!


    He...


    He actually scolded me...


    He actually scolded me!


    Hancock suddenly felt numb all over her body!


    A feeling that she has never had before came to her heart!


    This feeling... this feeling... is really amazing~


    In an instant, she felt hot and hot all over, and felt weak all over. She used all her strength to suppress it, and only then managed to ease the feeling.


    But she had just recovered, and Luffy said again: "Are you sick? My golden boat flies, and if it doesn''t pass over your head, where else will it pass over? Or do you want to start a war with me?"


    Hancock took a deep breath.


    Blush and hot ears.


    Here we go again!


    That feeling came again!


    How dare he say that I is sick?


    How dare he start a war with I?


    Then... what exactly does he want to fight?


    Luffy: "Hey, didn''t you hear me talking to you?"


    Momonga: "Monkey D. Luffy! Why did you appear here?!"


    Luffy''s originally silly appearance suddenly became serious: "Oh? Do you recognize me? That is to say, did you target me just now?"


    Momonga wanted to say something more, but he was interrupted by Hancock: "I''m sorry, humble man. There are some things that I have to figure out first. Please rest for a while."


    After finishing speaking, another burst of Love-Love Beam shot past.


    However, the target here is not Luffy, but Momonga.


    "Hancock! What the hell are you trying to do?!"


    Hancock''s Love-Love Beam is only ineffective for two kinds of people.


    One, people without lust


    Two, people who are not paying attention to her.


    When Hancock shoots sweet wind at him, Momonga immediately stabs himself with the de, trying to divert attention.


    The result is valid.


    In the original book, when Momonga first came into contact with Hancock, Momonga also used this method to break the beam.


    But this time is different.


    In the original book, Hancock just wanted to give Momonga a bad start, so after using once, she didn''t do it again.


    But now Hancock is determined to petrify Momonga.


    So she has no intention of stopping the attack.


    And Momonga, after several times of self-muttion, could not resist this ability after all, and was petrified by Hancock and the rest of the sailors on the battleship.


    Luffy was puzzled: "Hey, I said you, what are you trying to do?"


    When Hancock looked at Luffy again, his eyes became shy: "Are you Monkey D. Luffy?"


    Luffy took it for granted: "That''s right. What''s wrong? You know me too?"


    "Fufu... I heard that the leader of the Revolutionary Army is your father. Is your family really nning to rebel against the World Government?"


    "What I do has nothing to do with my father. But I do have to deal with those scumbags. What''s wrong? You want to stop me?"


    "Ah? No, no, I didn''t mean to stop you..." Hancock was startled by Luffy''s questioning, and then quickly exined, "I just want to know, are you really going to deal with those World Nobles?"


    Speaking of the World Nobles, Luffy suddenly became angry: "They are my target! If you intend to prevent me from dealing with them, then I will not be polite to you!"


    Hancock''s whole body softened again.


    She felt hot, blushed, and fell limp to the ground.


    She was short of breath, and said with an aggrieved face, "I... I didn''t want to stop you... How about this, let me show you something, maybe you will understand my position..."


    As he spoke, Hancock suddenly unbuttoned her clothes.


    Then turned her face away, not daring to look directly at Luffy.


    Luffy tilted his head: "Hey, what are you doing naked?"


    "It''s still such a rude reaction...forget it." Hancock said resentfully at first, and then parted her hair, showing her back in front of Luffy, "Have you... seen this pattern?"


    Luffy bit his lower lip.


    Seriously looked at this pattern.


    "I have seen simr patterns, but your pattern is still somewhat different from what I have seen. There are many fish-men with patterns simr to yours on my boat."


    Hancock was startled, and turned around again: "Fish-men? Do you know those fish-men too?"


    Luffy: "Yes! They are all my partners! They will go with me this time to kill those scumbags."


    Hancock suddenly burst into tears with excitement: "In this world, there is such a stupid existence...! Desperately challenge the heaven, just like that person..."


    Luffy: "Him?"


    Hancock: "As long as that person is you, I will tell you everything. I will also tell you about the pattern on your fish-manpanion... This is the w of the Celestial Dragons, the emblem of the World Noble."


    "It is branded on every person raised by the nobles of the world... It is the proof of the lower race that cannot be erased in a lifetime...!"


    "My two sisters and I used to be ves to the nobles of the world!"


    Luffy was shocked: "You! You and your sister...ves?!"


    "That happened when I was twelve years old... My two sisters and I were on the pirate ship of Kusnake, and fell into the hands of traffickers. After that... is the dark past that I don''t want to touch at all! The men we see for the first time since we were born are all disrespectful horrors..."


    This time, Hancock cried even more painfully.


    Luffy quicklyforted: "Enough is enough, don''t force it! You don''t need to say anything anymore! I won''t attack you!"


    "No, memories are always indelible...Those feelings of utter misery and hopelessness...the only thing in my head is the thought of getting out of death!"


    Luffy: "Hey!"


    "However, one night after four years, an event that shocked the World Government happened. No one in the World Nobles could disobey this matter, and it was regarded as an iron rule by the world. But there was such a man whonded on the Red Line with bare hands, sneaked into Mary Geoise, the holynd where the World Nobles lived... He is... Fisher Tiger who led the Fish-man Pirates after that..."


    Luffy eximed: "Fisher Tiger? Uncle Tiger?!"


    Hancock was also surprised: "You know him?"


    Luffy nodded: "Although I haven''t met him in person, I have heard a lot about him from Arlong. This time, brother Arlong followed me to fight against the World Government. One of the purposes is to revive Uncle Tiger."


    Hancock: "Wait...wait! What did you say? Revive?!"


    Luffy nodded: "I have a big brother, he is very powerful. There is almost nothing he can''t do in this world. He once promised me that as long as I solve the root cause of all dangers, he will help me resurrect the people I care. This of course includes Uncle Tiger. Moreover, I also had a brother who was killed by the World Nobles (Sabo). So, whether it is for selfishness or for revenge, I will definitely kill all these World Nobles!"


    Having said that, Hancock is even more convinced of Luffy''s determination.


    At the same time, I also had a faint admiration for Luffy in my heart.


    In the original book, she and Luffy went through a series of events before she finally fell in love. But in this life, even though she did not meet Luffy in advance, it does not prevent her from paying attention to everything about Luffy in advance through Luffy''s reputation.


    Coupled with this meeting, she felt an unprecedented feeling...


    As a result, it has be the current situation.


    "Then...then is there anything I can do to help you? Oh, by the way, I am Boa Hancock, the Pirate Empress of one of the Seven Warlord of the Sea... you can call me Hancock..." Having said that, Hancock blushed again.


    In the past, everyone only called her Pirate Empress.


    She didn''t know what was going on, so she asked Luffy to call her by her real name.


    "Okay, then I will call you Hancock from now on. There is no need to help me. You are not strong enough, and you will only die if you go. Just wait for our good news."


    From Luffy''s point of view, Hancock willpletely miss her attacks, so she must be very weak.


    "No, I... My strength is still very strong... But, it seems that it doesn''t work only to you... I must have something to help you... By the way, why did you appear here?"


    "Fire Fist Ace, who is about to be executed, is my sworn brother. The World Government captured him just to lure me to rob the execution ground, and then try to capture alive to threaten my father Monkey D. Dragon."


    Hearing this, Hancock immediately understood what was going on, and she smiled and said, "Then I will definitely be able to help you. I was invited by them this time to help fight against Whitebeard. I just didn''t expect to secretly find their real purpose here, that is you..."


    After a while.


    Hancock is taken to the golden boat.


    Luffy took it for granted: "That''s the way it is! Next, Hancock will help us sneak into the marine''s camp. She still has a whole country to shoulder behind her, and she can''t help us on the bright side. But if the war starts, if When we both meet, she can assist us as good."


    There was an extra helper from one of the Seven Warlords for no reason, and everyone on board was at a loss.


    See Hancock looking at Luffy affectionately.


    Sanji couldn''t help but rushed up to grab Luffy, and said with a devilish face, "What did you do to Ms. Hancock?! Why is she like this?!"


    Luffy: "???"


    Hancock looked up and pointed at Sanji: "Who are you, ant? Who allows you to call mine by name? Also, I order you now, let go of Luffy immediately!"


    Treated so differently by Hancock.


    Sanji was so hurt on the spot that he huddled in a corner and cried.


    So, Luffy''s team fighting against the World Government has Hancock as a hidden strength...


    TL note: While referring to herself, Hancock uses "warawa" an antiquated pronoun that signifies nobilityinstead of the moremon "watashi".

 Chapter 415: Impel Down, Jinbe joins

    Chapter 415: Impel Down, Jinbe joins


    Momonga''s naval battleship.


    "Snake...you!"


    When Momonga and a group of sailors woke up again, everything around them had returned to normal. Luffy disappeared, and so did the golden ship floating in the air.


    Momonga looked around for a while, and then yelled at Hancock: "Snake, what have you done?! Are you really nning to be an enemy of the World Government?! Also, where is Monkey D. Luffy?! Where did he go?!"


    Hancock: "He has already left. Didn''t I just say that? I have some things to confirm with Monkey D. Luffy, so I had to take action against you. Why are you so unreasonable?"


    Momonga: "You!"


    "Don''t talk about it. Kuja is already tired and wants to go to rest first." Hancock turned and walked towards the cabin, halfway there, but stopped, "Oh, yes. Before going to Marineford, I am oing to Impel Down."


    Momonga: "Impel Down? What do you want to do in Impel Down? That is not a ce for you Warlord of the Sea to go!"


    Hancock turned around, dissatisfied: "I just want to meet the man who caused this war that even I have to participate in, isn''t that okay?"


    "You want to see Fire Fist Ace?" Momonga frowned slightly, "Then there is no need to go to Impel Down, I have received news not long ago that in order to ensure that Fire Fist Ace can be executed on time, he has to be taken into custody to Marineford, you really want to see him, I''ll just ask for it for you when the timees."


    Luffy, who was hiding in Hancock''s cloak, trembled slightly.


    His original idea was to sneak into Impel Down alone, first check if Ace is there. If Ace is inside, it would be better to rescue Ace first, and then attack Marineford together.


    At least Ace''s life can be guaranteed.


    But this n is obviously bankrupt.


    In the original book, when Luffy arrived in Impel Down, Ace was indeed still in Impel Down. However, this life is different. In this life, since the real purpose of the World Government is Luffy, they imprisoned Ace in Marineford in advance and guarded it well without any mistakes.


    Momonga seemed to have noticed the movement in Hancock''s cloak, and Hancock quickly changed the subject and said, "Even so, I will go to Impel Down. I am also very curious. Jinbe, why did you make such a choice..."


    Luffy trembled again.


    But this time, Hancock covered up the movement with the snake following her in advance.


    As for Momonga, he was indeed distracted by the Hancock question.


    Hesitated for a moment.


    Momonga said: "Yes, I can arrange for you to go to Jinbe to see Jinbe. But you can''t stay in Impel Down for long!"


    Hancock didn''t answer, turned around coldly, and walked back into the cabin.


    After a while.


    In Hancock''s boudoir.


    Hancock was very nervous and released Luffy from the cloak: "Luffy... Luffy... am I bored to you? It''s really hard for you to work so hard in my cloak...?"


    Luffy suddenly grasped Hancock''s arms, shaking, "Hancock, Jinbe is really in Impel Down?"


    Hancock was dizzy for a while.


    Luffy grabbed me, calling Hancock~


    Luffy pulling me so close~


    Is this confession?


    "Well, I heard before that Jinbe was indeed imprisoned in Impel Down because he didn''t want to assist the marine to participate in this war. What''s the matter? Luffy, you also know Jinbe? But isn''t Jinbe at odds with Arlong? So what do we do now? Ace is no longer in Impel Down, Luffy, do you still want to venture in?"


    Luffy nodded seriously: "Well, it''s their business that they don''t agree. Whether it''s a mermaid or a fish-man. All the residents of the Fish-man Ind are my family. I won''t watch them have trouble! It''s still the same as before. It''s the same as I said, I''ll sneak into Impel Down with you. After you leave, I''ll wait for my partner toe to meet me, so that I won''t get you involved..."


    ...


    After 30 minutes.


    As soon as they entered Impel Down, Hancock and Momonga were greeted by the vice warden of Impel Down: "Hello everyone, wee to my Impel Down. Ah, I was wrong. Saying that seem to have exposed my ambition...I am Hannyabal who is still in the position of vice warden. Please take care of me."


    The next situation is simr to the original.


    Hancock first sneaked into a testing room.


    Then, using the ability of Love-Love Beam, she instantly petrified the female warden and those monitoring bugs who were guarding her, so as to help Luffy get out of their sight.


    Immediately after.


    She was brought to the ne as expected.


    While Magen was arguing with the prisoners on the sixth floor, Hancock told Jinbe about Luffy.


    Jinbe, who was caught by the iron chain of Seastone, said with blood on his face, "You mean... that kid Luffy ising to save me?"


    Hancock: "Yes, although I don''t want to see him take such risks for you. But, who taught him that he is such a big fool that even he dares to fight the World Nobles..."


    While the two weremunicating, the dispute between Magen and the prisoners was over.


    Magen: "Snake, what do you need to talk to Jinbe, you can talk about it now. But you can''t..."


    Hancock: "No need, we''ve already talked."


    Immediately after.


    After Hancock left Impel Down, Luffy officially started making trouble in Impel Down...


    ...


    At the same time.


    After Luffy started to make a fuss in Impel Down, Marineford''smander''s room also received a call from Magen: "Someone is making trouble in Impel Down, and the troublemaker is Monkey D. Luffy!"


    Sengoku in themander-in-chief''s room muttered: "Really...he finally arrived."


    Magen: "Don''t worry, Admiral, I will definitely not let there be any problems here!"


    Sengoku looked a bitplicated, but he still said: "No! If you can, capture him alive. If you can''t capture him alive, then don''t hurt him and let him go away..."


    Magen: "Admiral! That''s...?!"


    Sengoku: "Don''t ask so many questions, just follow my instructions."


    Magen: "..."


    ...


    While Magen and Sengoku are discussing.


    Impel Down.


    The golden ship flew towards the sky above Impel Down.


    All the guards in the Impel Down were very nervous.


    "Please pay attention to the flying ship in front! Please pay attention to the flying ship ahead! You have entered the territory of our Impel Down! Please stop moving forward immediately and ept the investigation! Please stop moving forward immediately and ept the investigation! Otherwise, we will treat you as Deal with the intruders!"


    The guards have issued a warning.


    But the golden ship still has no intention of stopping.


    The chief guard who was in charge of guarding the outskirts of the Impel Down gritted his teeth when he saw this, and ordered: "Fire!"


    boom!


    boom!


    boom!


    boom!


    Countless cannon shots sounded.


    Countless shells shot towards the golden ship.


    On the golden ship, Zoro, Sanji, Arlong and a group of people all stood on the edge of the deck, looking down very indifferently, facing these attacks, they were all indifferent.


    At this time, in the cabin, Buggy, the general manager of the handyman, came out of the cabin very arrogantly, leading the handymen No. 1 to No. 5.


    Immediately after.


    He also stood on the edge of the deck, looked down with a smirk, and waved his hand: "Go!"


    Enel and the four priests knelt down on one knee and said in unison: "Yes! Lord Buggy!"


    Immediately, the five of them dodged while rushing down.


    Immediately after.


    Before the cannonballs hit the golden ship, everyone can see countless strange abilities suddenly appearing in the air to meet these cannonballs.


    Or a cloud of iron.


    or fire dragon.


    or ball cloud.


    Or lightning and so on.


    Before the shells hit the golden ship, these attacks had already detonated in advance.


    The guards of the Impel Down did not give up and continued to fire.


    Enel and the four priests also blocked all attacks.


    As time passed, the golden ship also came directly below Impel Down.


    Zoro: "Let''s go down, Luffy has already started to move...!"


    As soon as the voice fell, everyone jumped down without hesitation.


    Even the group of fish-men, bull-headed sea kings, Buggy, etc. are not excluded.


    Only Enel and the four priests returned to the helm of the golden ship again.


    The war is about to break out.


    The sounds of various battles resounded all over Impel Down.


    Zoro, Sanji, and Arlong, the mainbat forces, had no intention of staying outside to fight, and all rushed straight into Impel Down.


    In Impel Down.


    After Hannyabal saw the movement outside Impel Down from the monitor, he was so angry that he stood up straight! He was very happy when Luffy was making trouble.


    He was nning to work without any effort, and to shirk all the mistakes afterwards to Magen, the warden, so that he could ascend to the position of chief warden more smoothly.


    But now he can''t even think about it.


    The strength of Zoro and others has exceeded what he can bear.


    If Zoro and the others are allowed to go on messing around, maybe even his position as the vice warden will be lost. Moreover, there are arge number of criminals in the Impel Down, and it is not something he can tolerate if they really want to take the opportunity to escape.


    Hannyabal: "Let''s go! Get rid of all these intruders!"


    Immediately, Hannyabal led all the guardian beasts in Impel Down to meet Zoro and the others...


    ...


    At the same time.


    The scene returns to Luffy.


    When he first started making trouble, he was indeed quickly discovered by the enemy.


    While looking for a way to Jinbe''s cell, he was indeed attacked by many enemies.


    But since Hannyabal took away all the defensive forces, Luffy suddenly became unimpeded along the way. Even Luffy himself is confused.


    Of course, Hannyabal also had his own selfish intentions in doing so.


    He handed Luffy over to Magen to deal with it alone, and if something went wrong, it would all be ounted for by Magen.


    As for the enemies outside Impel Down, or whether there will be chaos here after he takes away all the defenses...


    This is not what he needs to worry about.


    With him leading the general mobilization to defend Impel Down gate, it is estimated that there will be no problems.


    So ever since.


    Luffy walked all the way to the sixth level of the Impel Down just like that.


    And just as he was about to reach Jinbe''s cell, Magen appeared in front of him, blocking his way: "Monkey D. Luffy is you, right?"


    Luffy tilted his head: "You know me?"


    Magen: "Although I don''t know what your purpose of attacking Impel Down is, and I don''t know what rtionship you have with the marine, but if you want to move forward...then defeat me first!"


    "Marine?" Luffy was taken aback for a moment, then smiled, "They asked you to capture me alive, or let me go?"


    This time it was Magen''s turn to be taken aback: "You...you know?"


    "Of course, my grandpa is Monkey D. Garp, you didn''t know it? My grandpa was ndered. They wanted to use my grandpa to threaten my father. They identally killed him, and now they n to use me. How could they let you kill me here?"


    Hearing this, Magen''s eyes shed with confusion, and he gritted his teeth and said, "Then why are you here?"


    Luffy still smiled heartily: "Fire Fist Ace is my sworn brother. They dyed the execution for so long, just to wait for my arrival."


    Magen was taken aback, and his face became even uglier now: "Ace has been transferred to Marineford a long time ago. If you n toe here to save him, then you can leave. As long as you don''t mess here, I won''t do anything."


    Luffy: "I know. But there are still people here who I need to rescue."


    "Impossible! The imprisoned in Impel Down are all heinous guys! I can''t let you take the guys here! Even if you disobey the order, I will kill you here!"


    Luffy ignored Magen''s anger, and said with a smile: "Are you so sure that all the people imprisoned here are heinous people? Are you so sure that there are no wronged people among them?"


    Magen thumped in his heart.


    His face turned ugly again.


    "Whether they are guilty or not is not up to me! My responsibility is to keep an eye on every prisoner in the Impel Down! Make sure they don''t have any chance to leave here!"


    "Really? Then do it."


    Magen stared at Luffy for a long time withplicated expression and hesitation.


    Seeing that Luffy has always refused to give up, he no longer has the mentality of being lucky.


    Blue venom began to seep out of him slowly.


    Venom more and more.


    Finally condensed into a blue dragon.


    The leader stared at this little guy Luffy with a ferocious face: "I will give you onest chance, if you give up now and leave here, I will not hold you and yourpanions ountable."


    Luffy didn''t answer him.


    Creak.


    The suitcase is opened.


    Immediately afterwards, Silver Eater, a small beast with a huge t-toothed mouth, slowly wriggled like this, confronting the giant cyan dragon.


    Seeing this, Magen stopped talking, and controlled the venom to attack Luffy.


    The one who greets the poisonous dragon is the silver sword covered with Armament Haki.


    And Luffy himself also attacked Magen.


    Luffy, who is armed with Observation Haki and Armament Haki, has the upper hand when facing Magen. However, Magen''s venom is not to be underestimated. Luffy knew that he could not get even a drop of venom to him. In order to solve this battle as soon as possible, Luffy directly turned on Gear 2.


    Luffy after turning on the Gear 2.


    Whether it is strength or speed, it is more than one level higher than before.


    So Luffy quickly settles the fight, knocking Magen to the ground.


    As for the silver sword that was full of venom, it turned back into an ordinary de as if nothing happened. However, the originally ck de has faintly turned dark green in color, and the RC cells seem to have undergone some evolution.


    However, these are not what Luffy wants to focus on at the moment.


    Because his attention has been attracted by the huge movementing down from the 5th level.


    He saw Zoro and his party rushing here with Hannyabal''s guards who had been subdued. Not only that, but behind them, there were Buggy and a group of prisoners pushing into Impel Down.


    It turned out that Buggy was the first to release all the prisoners when everyone was not paying attention.


    The purpose is to create chaos, which is beneficial to their actions.


    However, he didn''t expect that without these prisoners, Impel Down would be taken down so easily by them.


    Hannyabal and his party seem to be throwing garbage.


    Generally, all were thrown to Magen.


    Hannyabal yelled angrily: "If you want to kill or cut, it''s up to you! You released so many heinous prisoners, sooner orter there will be retribution!"


    Luffy ignored him, and just told Zoro: "Look at them."


    Immediately, he walked towards thest cell.


    As predicted.


    He saw Jinbe locked in the cell.


    Luffy smiled heartily: "Uncle Jinbe, long time no see!"


    "Heh, it really is you kid. I didn''t expect you to have such a powerful strength after seeing each other for more than ten years. Are you going to take your siblings to fight against the World Government?"


    At this time, Arlong suddenly appeared from behind Luffy: "Jinbe, Jinbe, Jinbe... I haven''t seen you for many years, your situation doesn''t look good..."


    "Is it you? You and this kid also came together?"


    "Stop this kid or that kid again." Arlong patted Luffy on the shoulder, "The strength he possesses now is beyond your imagination. Don''t be a grandma trying to persuade Luffy to stop resurrect Brother Tiger, I won''t let you do that."


    "Resurrect...?"


    Immediately, Arlong told Jinbe about Li Yaoxiang again.


    Jinbe bowed his head and pondered: "Is that so... If it was that person back then... maybe the resurrection you mentioned..."


    Luffy: "How? Uncle Jinbe, do you want to join us to fight against the World Government?"


    Arlong: "This is thest chance for us fish-men tond onnd. If you are not willing to help... I don''t want to see you stop."


    Jinbe was silent for a moment, and then pulled the iron chain with both hands, directly tearing the iron chain to pieces.


    He stood up and turned his wrist: "Since you are all willing to give it a go, then I will naturally apany you to the end!"


    The exchange ends here.


    Several people returned to the front of the group.


    Seeing that Jinbe was released and joined Luffy''s camp, all the fish-men were very excited and rushed to talk about the past.


    On the other side, Ivankov and his party, the Okama King who heard the huge noise, also came here from the 4th level. After some self-introduction, and after learning about the outside world, they also agreed to join Luffy and follow Luffy to fight in the outside world.


    And just as Ivankov began to heal some wounded.


    Magen, who had been neglected for a long time, couldn''t help covering his wound and said, "Kill me if you want, you sinners of the world, stop being hypocritical here!"


    Luffy, who was still chatting with everyone, turned his head and said, "Why should I kill you?"


    Magen: "???"


    Hannyabal: "???"


    A group of guards: "???"


    "I said, I just want to rescue the wronged people. Your duty is to guard the prisoners, and you haven''t done anything bad. Why should I kill you?"


    Magen and his party were all confused.


    However, Magen nced at the released prisoners again, and said with a sneer, "Oh, even if you don''t kill us, you are still a sinner in this world. Do you know what the criminals imprisoned here have done? If you release them back like this, you will only kill more innocent people!"


    Luffy squinted his eyes and smiled again: "Did I say that I would let them go?"


    Magen was taken aback again.


    Before he coulde to his senses, some prisoners who heard Luffy''s conversation were not calm at all.


    "No! You can''t do this! You can''t lock us back!"


    "No! Don''t shut me up! Aren''t you going to attack Marineford?! We have so many people here, we can definitely help you!"


    Apanied by the unwilling voices of the prisoners, they sounded one after another.


    The news that Luffy would not release them quickly reached the ears of every prisoner.


    All the prisoners who gathered on the sixth level immediately rioted.


    Some people angrily called Luffy and others ungrateful.


    Some people began to encourage everyone to run away.


    Some begged for mercy.


    In short, the noise on the entire floor was made louder and louder by these prisoners, and the scene became more and more chaotic. Finally, after the first prisoner who took the lead in escaping appeared in the crowd, all the gangs began to swarm up towards the fifth level, using their own skills, scrambling to escape upwards.


    Seeing this, Luffy said coldly, "Do it."


    Immediately afterwards, people in Luffy''s camp all attacked those escapers with all their strength.


    Suppress what can be suppressed.


    If you really want to resist tenaciously, just get killed then.


    After a while, the sixth level regained its calm.


    It''s just that there are many more corpses on the ground at this time, and none of the prisoners who wanted to escape were allowed to escape.


    The rest of the prisoners did not dare to resist anymore, and all stayed there obediently.


    Luffy yelled at the prisoners: "I''ll give you a chance now. Either you go back to your cells obediently. Or you just die here."


    After Luffy''s domineering speech.


    The prisoners had no choice but to ept their fate obediently.


    One by one, they lined up, and they were guarded by the subordinates of the demon king, and they returned to the cell.


    After finishing all this, Luffy came to Magen again, and politely said: "I have finished my work here. Then I will return this ce to you."


    After finishing speaking, Luffy led a group of new partners to leave Impel Down.


    Magen and his party who are still in the muddle are left behind.


    Hannyabal couldn''t help but asked, "Will you just let them go like this, warden? They''re going to attack Marineford..."


    "..." Looking at the back of Luffy and others leaving, after a moment of silence, Magen said, "Let''s do our duty and guard Impel Down. As for who will be in charge of this world... we will wait and see..."


    As a result, the incident in Impel Down came to a sessful conclusion.


    Afterwards, Magen received another call bug from the Sengoku.


    However, Magen didn''t tell the real situation here, nor did he show Luffy''s real strength. He just exined very briefly that he couldn''t capture Luffy alive and let Luffy leave...

 Chapter 416: Marineford, the Great War Begins

    Chapter 416: Marineford, the Great War Begins


    Marineford.


    Seeing that Luffy is about to arrive here.


    Sengoku does not intend to dy any longer.


    He first summoned all the marines, including Seven Warlords, to gather in the square. Then he ordered someone to take Ace in the detention center to the towering execution tform at the end of the square.


    Immediately afterwards, he also came to the execution tform, beside Ace.


    "Give me the phone bug..." After receiving the phone bug from broadcast and speaker, Sengoku continued, "I have something to exin to you all. Portgas D Ace, about this man, it is very important to die here today... and that significance-! Ace, please tell me your father''s name..."


    "My dad is Whitebeard!"


    "No!"


    "No mistake! Only Whitebeard! No one else!"


    "At that time, we kept our eyes open and desperately searched. There might be that man''s child on a certain ind... Based on the little information and possibilities provided by the CP, we looked around for the newly born or about to be born child and his mother, but still can''t find... It''s no wonder...you were born with some tricks. It can be said that as a mother, she put her life on the line! And deceived our eyes... No! It deceived the eyes of the whole world! In the East Blue, in an ind called Bateri, and your mother is Portgas Rogue! The woman did things far beyond ourmon sense. She kept you in her womb for more than 20 months for the sake of the child! Then she died on the spot because of exhaustion after giving birth to you. After the death of the father, one year and three months have passed... the child who inherited the world''s evil blood and was born, that is you, you can''t possibly not know it!"


    "Your father is the Pirate King! Gol D. Roger!!"


    The voice just fell.


    There was a loud noise in the audience.


    However, Sengoku didn''t mean to stop, and continued: "It happened two years ago... You used your mother''s name, and as the captain of the Spade Pirates, you used your superpower and speed to gallop across the sea. At that time, we finally realized that Roger''s bloodline has not been cut off! However, Whitebeard, who noticed this at the same time as us, in order to train you to be the next Pirate King, did not hesitate to let a child who was once his opponent board his own pirate ship..."


    "No! No! I got on that ship to make Dad the Pirate King!!!"


    "It''s only you who think so. In fact, we couldn''t attack you at will in the past because you were protected by Whitebeard!! If we just ignore it like this, you will definitely disy the apex of the next generation of pirates! So it is of great significance to go to your head here today! We will not hesitate to break out an all-out war with Whitebeard!!"


    The audience once again made a deafening noise.


    Nearly 100,000 marines all roared out their aura!


    At this moment, under the execution tform, a marine came to salute and reported: "Admiral Sengoku! There is a report!! Without receiving any instructions from anyone, the Gate of Justice opened!! And the power room cannot be contacted!!"


    The voice just fell.


    The huge door that blocked the entire Marineford opened slowly with a rumbling sound.


    Immediately afterwards, everyone saw that there were arge number of pirate warships galloping in this direction outside the door.


    They are all forces under themand of Whitebeard.


    Seeing this, the marines at the bottom have a tendency to mess up their positions.


    "Are we going to attack?!"


    "Wait a second! Whitebeard must be nearby! He must be nning something!"


    "Pay attention to the sea!!"


    Marineford is a sea town that resembles a crescent moon.


    So, when the door of justice is opened, this circr sea area is connected to the sea outside.


    When the cry of "attention to the sea" was uttered.


    Soon, many bubbles suddenly appeared in this circr sea area, which was rtively calm at first. Immediately afterwards, Whitebeard''s Moby Dick appeared in the waters of the bay like a whaleing out of the water.


    Immediately following, there are three other battleships of the Whitebeard Pirates.


    Four warships were arranged in a ''cross'' formation, confronting marines from all directions.


    "Gurarara! My dear boy, it''s all right! Wait for me, Ace..."


    "Dad!!!"


    Seeing Whitebeard standing on the bow of the Moby Dick, who still looks full of vigor, Fleet Admiral Sengoku couldn''t help showing an ugly look.


    Whitebeard grinned grinningly and said, "Sengoku, why bother pretending to be ignorant?"


    Sengoku''s face was gloomy: "I don''t know what you''re talking about..."


    "Gurarara! Your marine is still so hypocritical, daring to act... Is your purpose this time really Ace? The World Government and the Revolutionary Army have already provoked a full-scale war. Your marine is be an idiot to choose to provoke me right now."


    The marines at the bottom are all at a loss.


    They don''t know what Whitebeard is talking about.


    The faces of those who knew it turned ck, after all, this matter is indeed somewhat disgraceful. But in order to reduce the sacrifice, they had to.


    "Since you already know, whye?"


    "Gurarara! Sorry, although your behavior makes me feel very contemptible, I will not participate in your crap because of this! But... this does not mean that I can tolerate you using my child! I don''t feel at ease in entrusting my child''s life to your hands!"


    After finishing speaking, Whitebeard hit two heavy blows on both sides of him.


    The air on both sides was cracked by him on the spot.


    Immediately after.


    The sea water on both sides of Marineford suddenly turned into huge waves.


    No, it should not be said to be a huge wave!


    It is more appropriate to say that it is a tsunami!


    The tsunami on both sides has the tendency to destroy Marineford with one blow!


    ...


    Below the execution tform.


    Three admirals, Akainu, Aokiji, and Kizaru, sat respectively.


    Their faces are not very pretty.


    They are not as calm as in the original book. After all, even they are struggling with the current situation in the world. At this time, Akainu said, who had been silent for a long time, "Is that guy Li Yaoxiang nning to do nothing?"


    The voice just fell.


    A marine hurried over with a phone bug in hand: "Report to Admiral Akainu, Admiral Kizaru, and Admiral Aokiji! Calling Admiral Li Yaoxiang is connected!"


    Akainu took the phone bug.


    Li Yaoxiang''szy voice came from the other end of the phone: "What''s the matter? Do you need me?"


    Akainu said in a deep voice: "Li Yaoxiang, you have reached this point, don''t you n to join the war?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "I''m misunderstood~ Admiral Akainu, didn''t I already say it earlier? I was seriously injured in the battle against Monkey D. Garp~ It''s not that I don''t want to help, but that I really have no power~"


    Akainu was so angry that he crushed the phone bug.


    Needless to say, Aokiji and Kizaru beside him also knew that Li Yaoxiang''s answer was not ideal.


    Seeing the huge waves on both sides, which were about to hit Marineford, Aokiji no longer sat idly by.


    He dodged and suddenly appeared in mid-air.


    Stretch your hands to the left and right sides respectively.


    Two ice picks extended from his hands, reaching directly to the tsunami.


    When the ice cone touched the tsunami, the tsunami instantly formed two icebergs.


    The surrounding temperature dropped to the extreme in a moment.


    The war is about to start!


    Both attacked each other.


    The marine side is desperately trying not to let the piratesnd.


    The pirates tried their best to attack the shore.


    The scene was chaotic.


    Aokiji stopped the attack of the tsunami, and shot a few ice spears at Whitebeard with his backhand. With a casual blow from Whitebeard, not only did the ice spear shatter into pieces, but even the green pheasant, which was made of ice, was also shattered into pieces and fell to the surface of the sea.


    When the ice was about to touch the sea surface, Aokiji turned into a human again and froze the entire circr sea area in the bay into ice!


    The pirates set foot on the ice one after another, attacking the marine.


    Marine also wees the pirates'' offensive.


    At this time, the vice admirals began to act.


    Seven Warlords also acted.


    Hawk Eyes was the first to attack.


    Hawk Eyes cut off with a single swing of his sword.


    The shock wave of this sword cut a long crack along with the bottom of the ice, and went straight to Whitebeard.


    There was a loud bang.


    The person who greeted the world''s number one sher was the captain of the third division under Whitebeard, a person with the ability of Twinkle Devil Fruit, Diamond Jozu.


    It''s not over yet.


    Kizaru couldn''t sit still anymore.


    He also fired countless luminous waves at Whitebeard.


    What greeted him was a blue me!


    The captain of the first team under Whitebeard, the Phoenix Devil Fruit ability user, Marco!


    The two directly fought together.


    Kizaru was hit by Marco and smashed into the ground, but he himself was not injured. Quickly recovering his real body, he turned his head and said: "Giant troops, pay attention to the sky too."


    The troop of giants answered yes.


    Then a whole row of giants put on a posture, trying to make a move.


    Diamond Jozu was not to be outdone, turned around and pulled out a huge ice block that was one-third the size of Marineford, and threw it at the crowd of giants.


    The giant looked small in an instant in front of the ice.


    This time it was Akainu''s turn to make the move.


    Akainu casted the giantva dog and punched the giant ice cube.


    Immediately afterwards, while the giant ice cube was melting and evaporating, the wave of attacks by Akainu was still not over. That giantva fist disintegrated into countless pieces, and smashed towards the direction of Whitebeard''s camp like a meteor shower.


    The next step is the debut of Little Oars Jr.


    That is, the Oars family that is dozens of times bigger than the giants.


    With his huge stature, he still became a target on the field.


    Still made use of his own sacrifice, using his body as a bridge, allowing his partners to step over him to help everyone get ashore.


    Things have developed to this point, and they are almost the same as the original.


    The battle between the two sides is getting more and more intense.


    It''s just that when the battle was about to fall into a fever, a huge golden ship suddenly flew from the distant sky.


    The low-level personnel who are fighting didn''t notice at all.


    But those bigwigs could not help but stop, and looked at the golden ship that was getting closer and closer.


    Whitebeard and Sengoku have very ugly faces.


    Whitebeard mistakenly thought this was the backhand of the Sengoku.


    Simrly, Sengoku thought this was Whitebeard''s backhand.


    The two sides just watched the golden ship flying quietly.


    Vignce has been raised to the extreme.


    Until the golden ship floated directly above Marineford, and there was a cry from the golden ship: "Ace~~~~!! I finally see you!!"


    Ace on the execution tform was startled: "Luffy?!!"


    "I''m here to save you~~~!!"


    After saying this sentence, Luffy led Zoro, Sanji, Arlong, Jinbe, Okama King and other members, and jumped off the golden ship.


    Now.


    The faces of both parties finally changed.


    Whitebeard''s serious face gradually revealed a smile.


    On the other hand, the marine''s faces were extremely ugly.


    "Damn!! That''s Monkey D. Luffy?!"


    "Who can tell me why he has such a powerful influence? Why didn''t we receive any news beforehand?!"


    Akainu: "Mistake, we seriously miscalcted Monkey D. Luffy''s strength."


    Kizaru: "..."


    Aokiji: "..."


    Sengoku: "..."


    Akainu: "In this case, don''t worry about capturing alive or not. Catch or kill them on the spot! Then go to assist the World Government and wipe out the Revolutionary Army in one fell swoop before the pirates have time to react. End this war!"


    Kazuru and Aokiji looked back at Sengoku at the same time.


    Seeing that Sengoku did not refute, he knew that Sengoku acquiesced to Akainu''s statement.


    The two of them stopped talking, and followed Akainu and swooped towards Luffy and the others.


    The three admirals attacked arge area with one strike by one person.


    In an instant, Luffy and the others, who were about to fall beside Ace, smashed into Impel Down wall in a corner of Marineford.


    In an instant.


    Countless buildings were smashed.


    Smoke and dust billowed.


    When the smoke and dust gradually dissipated, they saw Luffy and his party stand up one by one from the smoke, dust and gravel, showing their whole picture in front of everyone.


    Luffy stood at the forefront, pped his fists, and said excitedly: "Finally, there are some decent opponents."


    Zoro opened his closed eyes suddenly: "After this battle...it''ll be the end."


    Sanji crushed out the cigarette butt with his toes: "Stop talking so much nonsense, I can''t wait to see the scene where the old man''s right leg is healed..."


    Arlong, Jinbe, Usopp, Buggy, etc.


    No one was injured.


    They all looked very excited.


    It seems that they can''t wait to join this feast.


    As for Akainu and others, seeing that Luffy and the others were still unharmed after being hit by the three of them, the faces of the three couldn''t help but cast ayer of gloom.


    Seeing this, Whitebeard alsoughed heartily: "Gurarara! Ace, it seems that you have underestimated your brother''s strength."


    Immediately after.


    It was the pirates who cheered everywhere.


    Morale bes stronger.


    On the other hand, the marine''s faces were solemn.


    Ace looked confused...

 Chapter 417: There is only one target, Monkey D. Luffy

    Chapter 417: There is only one target, Monkey D. Luffy


    On the execution tform.


    After seeing the strength of Luffy and others, this made Sengoku very annoyed. Some backers who were originally prepared had to beunched in advance.


    "Fleet Admiral! Everything is ready!"


    "Is the deployment of the Gulf also in ce?"


    "Everything isplete!"


    As soon as he finished speaking, the big screen that was broadcast simultaneously to all parts of the world showed two sailors holding knives walking towards Ace, as if they were about to execute him.


    This immediately caught everyone''s attention.


    "Huh? Preparations for the execution have already begun?"


    "Those guys...!! What are you going to do to Ace?! It''s not time for execution yet!"


    "The execution is about to start? This is much earlier than the announced time!!"


    Sengoku ignored the noise of the crowd and ordered to the rear: "Cut off the signal of the video bug immediately! Don''t let the world have a sense of distrust of us. The tragedy that will happen next is not something that ordinary people can bear. Not everything must be announced to the world."


    Immediately, when the Sengoku looked at the battlefield in front of them again, their eyes had be extremely firm and cold: "A few hourster... what our army wants to convey to the world... only needs the word ''victory''!"


    After all, it seems that the port of Marineford has received a secret signal from the Sengoku.


    There was a huge movement.


    They saw that some of the pirate ships that were still hovering around the periphery suddenly began to sink slowly and werepletely destroyed.


    Immediately after.


    Everyone can only see a row of figures at the port.


    Those are all tall, cold-faced ''bears''.


    That is, the backhand prepared by the Sengoku, the Pacifista!


    The leader of the Pacifista is Bartholomew Kuma, the captain of the science unit, and he responded dissatisfiedly: "I''m getting impatient!!!"


    "It''s Bartholomew Kuma from Seven Warlords!! Why are there so many of him?!"


    "What happened?!"


    Bartholomew Kuma ignored the exmation of these pirates, scanned the battlefield, and said to the phone bug: "Master, the situation seems to be a little different from the n?! Didn''t you say the pirates will be surrounded in the harbor? Why are they covering the entire bay now!"


    The old man Bartholomew Kuma is talking about is Kizaru.


    However, it was Sengoku who responded to Bartholomew Kuma at this time: "The n has changed! Even if the left and right ends of the siegework are disintegrated, you can also attack vertically!! You should follow the original n and start attacking the pirates within the attack range first. Destroy the pirates outside the encirclement!"


    Bartholomew Kuma: "Master, this will affect the warship, is it really okay?"


    Kizaru: "Keep it to a minimum..."


    Before everyone could react, Sengoku suddenly added a sentence through the radio: "Also, all marines obey order! From now on, you have only one goal! Even if you let some fish that slip through the escape, you must catch Monkey D. Luffy! As long as you take Monkey D. Luffy down, the one who wins in the end will belong to us righteous side!!"


    As soon as the words came out.


    Hundreds of thousands of eyes on the battlefield all looked in the direction of Luffy and the others.


    Immediately after.


    The horn of war was sounded again by Bartholomew Kuma''s order.


    "Then let''s go to war!!"


    As soon as Bartholomew Kuma''s order came down, a whole row of Pacifista raised their palms one after another andunched a series of fierce attacks on the pirates in front.


    Booming.


    This huge movement instantly woke up the people from the two camps, and they fought again.


    However, things have developed here, and the situation of the battle has changed dramatically.


    The marine side all attacked in the direction of Luffy and the others. Some marines, who were still fighting fiercely with the pirates, insisted on attacking Luffy without hesitation that they abandon their opponents in front of them.


    The same is true for Seven Warlords.


    Even the defense of a whole row of Pacifista is focused on the direction of Luffy and others. Even if there was a slight gap in the defense to allow the pirates to pass through, they didn''t care.


    Everyone''sbat policy is very clear, there is only one!


    Monkey D. Luffy!


    Seeing this, Whitebeard also knew that the opportunity must not be missed! If Luffy is dead, and the marine will deal with them next with all their might! Instead of letting the marine defeat them one by one, it is better to turn from offense to defense now and try to weaken the strength of the marine as much as possible.


    Whitebeard felt ruthless in his heart, and shouted fiercely: "Go and stop them!! Help the Straw Hat Boy with all your strength!!"


    As soon as the words came out.


    The fierce admirals on Whitebeard''s side also charged up to face those admirals, vice admirals, Seven Warlords, etc., preventing them from approaching Luffy''s direction.


    As a result, the battlefield presented a very strange scene.


    The battlefield of more than 100,000 people all flocked in the same direction.


    The marines who tried their best to prevent the pirates from going ashore, now don''t even care about the pirates going ashore, and just keep rushing in the direction of Luffy.


    Of course, the Sengoku would not allow the pirates to gain the upper hand so easily, he shouted suddenly: "Activate the encirclement wall!! Don''t let the pirates join Monkey D. Luffy!! Today, we will make the Worst Generation stay herepletely!!!"


    The voice just fell.


    The entire city wall of Marineford was suddenly raised by several floors.


    In front of Impel Down wall, a seemingly indestructible steel protective wall was raised.


    In an instant, the entire mouth of the bay was surrounded.


    Although the steel protective wall was blocked by Little Oars'' body, leaving a gap, the slight advantage that Whitebeard''s side had just won with great difficulty waspletely destroyed by the steel protective wall in an instant.


    With the barrier of the protective wall, it will be even more difficult for Whitebeard to join Luffy to fight the enemy together.


    Marineford is a crescent-shaped town.


    The current position of Luffy and others is at the corner on the shore.


    That is to say, if the Whitebeards want to join Luffy, they have to go ashore through the gap in Little Oars first, and then go around for a long distance before they can join Luffy.


    During this period, you have to go throughyers of obstacles such as the execution tform, Akainu, Kizaru, and green pheasant.


    Whitebeard''s attempt to assist Luffy is undoubtedly an idiot''s nonsense.


    There is no possibility at all.


    The only ones who can help Luffy and others now are the fierce admirals who rushed ashore first, such as Phoenix Marco, Diamond Joss and a small number of pirates.


    However, they were suddenly separated by a steel protective wall.


    Facing arge number of marines, their current situation is not much better.


    The help that can be given to Luffy and others can be said to be very small...


    ...


    At the same time.


    The scene returns to Luffy and the others.


    Seeing the series of aggressive maneuvers by the marine, and the nearly 100,000 marine rushing towards them, Luffy and his party not only showed no fear, but were also full of energy!


    Zoro had a look of disgust on his face: "This group of marine is really shameless..."


    Luffy looked at the group of marines rushing forward, smiled and said: "They''ve always been like this, haven''t they? There''s nothing to say, if they want to fight, then let''s fight!"


    After saying that, Luffy rushed towards the marines first.


    Followed by Zoro, Sanji, Arlong, Nami, Usopp, Chopper and so on.


    Everyone''s face is full of determination!


    For a long time, everyone has epted such hard training, why?


    Isn''t it just for this moment?


    No matter how severe the situation is.


    At this moment, for them, there is no shrinking back!


    As soon as the two sides came into contact, the scene fell into chaos in an instant.


    Nami''s climate thunder and lightning, Usopp''s various monster nts, Zoro''s swords sh, Sanji''s legwork that makes the air dry, Chopper''s monster enhanced form smashing and hammering, and Luffy''s sweeping big rubber fists, rubber legs and more.


    In an instant, arge area of the marine ahead was resolved.


    Even the mid-range has some damage of varying degrees.


    From time to time, the golden ship will drop some huge thunderbolts to attack them.


    The shorings of therge number of people on the marine side are also exposed to everyone at this moment.


    Crowded people blocked the front, on the contrary, it blocked all the truly powerful people behind.


    Moreover, Luffy has no intention of holding back at all.


    Summoned Yin Chi, a monster with a square mouth and a huge mouth, it just ran wild in the crowd.


    At this scene, the faces of Sengoku, Aokiji, Kizaru, Akainu and others all turned ck. The Akainu couldn''t see it even more. After knocking the phoenix Marco into the air with one blow, he yelled at the front: "Everyone spread out!! Let Seven Warlords and people above the major general level go up and deal with them!"


    The voice just fell.


    The marine in front squeezed to the sides one after another.


    The middle begins to slowly give way to a loose path.


    Immediately afterwards, shadows shed across the road.


    Domingo: "It''s long overdue, you bastards."


    Moria: "Hahahahaha! Don''t say that, they contributed a lot of corpses to me anyway, didn''t they?"


    Vice Admirals and Seven Warlords rushed forward.


    The first one to arrive in front of Luffy was Smoker who directly used the ability of the smoke fruit. His lower body turned into smoke, holding a weapon made of Seastone, and flew towards Luffy.


    Arrived in front of Luffy in a moment.


    A thorn in the face!


    Luffy tilted his head slightly, dodged the blow, then took a step forward, and whispered in Smoker''s ear: "I said before, if you dare to block my way again, I won''t hold back from you ..."


    While speaking, Luffy''s right hand stretched to an endless distance.


    Smoker''s pupils constrict!


    When he found out about Luffy''s attack, it was already toote.


    "Rubber, 32 Brick Fist!"


    This 32 Brick Fist, wrapped in Armament Haki, hit Smoker in the abdomen! Immediately afterwards, Smoker was thrown into the crowd like a bowling ball.


    All down.


    Another group of marines suffered heavy losses, and Smoker''s life and death were unknown.


    The second person who arrived in front of Luffy and his party was Crocodile, who also possesses the ability of Zoan fruit. But he didn''t go at Luffy, but at Nico Robin, the betrayer.


    He was biting his cigar at the corner of his mouth, and his lower body was also turned into grains of sand. While flying towards Nico Robin, he gritted his teeth angrily and said, "Robin, you messed with the things I entrusted to you!"


    Nico Robin, who was still fighting, was also frightened by Crocodile''s aura.


    Although these days, Nico Robin has been specially trained by Li Yaoxiang to be much stronger than in the original book. But in the presence of the Crocodile she had been unrivaled in the past, old fears came back again.


    Following a natural reaction, she couldn''t help losing her mind and took a few steps back.


    Even Desert King Crocodile had alreadye before her, raising the hook with her right hand was about to give her a fatal blow, Nico Robin still couldn''t control the fear in her heart, she was slow to react, and forgot dodge.


    But just when the hook of Crocodile''s right hand was about to hit Nico Robin''s face, a foot wrapped in high temperature and wrapped in Armament Haki suddenly mmed hard on her back!


    There was a loud bang.


    The ground was cracked, Crocodile sprayed blood, and rolled his eyes.


    Sanji stared with love in his eyes, and held Nico Robin''s hand tightly: "Robin, are you okay? Don''t worry, I''m here, I won''t let anyone hurt you."


    After finishing speaking, he looked down at Crocodile on the ground with disgust and disgust: "You scum, do you treat everydy like this?"


    Luffy didn''t even look here.


    He has great confidence in his members.


    Just said coldly: "Kill him."


    Immediately afterwards, Sanji raised his hot right foot and stepped on him hard!


    Crocodile died.


    The Kingdom of basta was thuspletely liberated.


    This is the promise Luffy made to Princess Vivi before he left the Kingdom of basta, and he has not forgotten it until now.


    Luffy and his group solved two powerful opponents in an instant.


    One is the Vice Admiral.


    One is Seven Warlords.


    At this moment, the strong men who were still rushing towards Luffy and the others at full speed could not help but pause.


    There is no way, this kind of result is unimaginable for everyone.


    Luffy is a powerful leader, and they can still understand.


    But if even his partner is that strong... then they really have to be more cautious. It is impossible to back down. They didn''t flinch when facing Whitebeard, and it was even more impossible to face Luffy.


    But at least the rising star can no longer be underestimated.


    Can no longer rush alone.


    The third person who attacked Luffy and the others was Moria.


    But he didn''t rush over by himself.


    Instead, when they came within the scope of their abilities, they resurrected all the marines killed by Luffy and others into zombie legions.


    In an instant.


    Luffy and his group of more than a hundred people were all surrounded.


    However, Moria was not happy for long.


    His zombie legions fell one by one at a speed visible to the naked eye.


    Moria was surprised at first, and then angry.


    "Jinbe!!! It''s you!"


    "Moria, your zombies are afraid of salt..."


    "Damn it! As long as you bastard is around, I can''t use zombie soldiers at all! How dare you y such a poor trick on me!"


    Luffy: "Uncle Jinbe, thank you!"


    Jinbe: "This is what I should do...Leave this guy to me!"


    Luffy ignored the two of them and continued to charge forward.


    Jinbe stayed where he was and continued to fight Moria...

 Chapter 418: Zoros battle, save Whitebeard

    Chapter 418: Zoro''s battle, save Whitebeard


    Next.


    The one who appeared in front of Luffy was Vice Admiral Momonga.


    Momonga attacked Luffy with anger and self-me: "Monkey D. Luffy! I didn''t expect you to be the real core of this n. I should have done my best to keep you!"


    Unfortunately.


    The aura was there, but before Momonganded on Luffy, he was already kicked away by a long slender leg wrapped in Armament Haki.


    Momonga turned over in the air andnded on one knee.


    Shouted fiercely at the attacker: "Snake Princess!! Are you nning to give up Warlord of the Sea status?!!"


    Hancock showed her long legs very domineeringly, and stepped on the giant snake: "Shut up! I am too angry to listen to anything! You guys dare to use this on the person I like! nting three indiscriminate means!! I will never let you live! I have never been so angry! I will feed you to the wild beasts as food!"


    Seeing Hancock standing up to block the enemy for him, Luffy showed a sunny smile: "Hancock!"


    Hancock, who was still extremely angry, changed her attitude 180 degrees in an instant.


    Turned his head with a red face, and looked at Luffy delicately: "Yes~"


    Luffy called me Hancock again.


    Is this a confession?


    Hancock came to her senses, walked up to Luffy affectionately, handed a key to Luffy, and said very gently: "I know that you will be able toe here safely. This is for you... it is your key. The key to your brother''s handcuffs..."


    Luffy was overjoyed.


    After receiving the key, he gave Hancock a big hug: "Hancock~~~~!! Thank you so much!! I owe you a lot!"


    Hancock''s whole body was hot and hot, her face was flushed, and her breath was short.


    After letting go of Hancock, Luffy said thank you again, and then continued to rush forward.


    Unable to bear the stimtion, Hancock fell limply to the ground.


    Hancock panted heavily: "Haha...haha...is this the rumored...marriage?"


    Momonga: "I won''t let you go, Monkey D. Luffy!!"


    Momonga suddenly drank, and then, together with the two vice admirals who had just rushed to the side, attacked Luffy. However, before they could attack Luffy, Hancock, who was lying on the ground, suddenly put his hands on the ground, and the Armament Haki man with his legs made a big rotation in the air, blocking the attack of the three.


    Then he looked up to the sky and pointed at the three of them with contempt to the extreme: "Those who act apostately, I will punish you and others!! I will not let you and others pass through here!"


    Momonga: "Do you know the consequences of blocking the way of the navy?!"


    Hancock: "No matter what you do, I will be forgiven!"


    Just like that, Hancock blocked the three vice admirals.


    Luffy continued to charge forward.


    However, this seemingly smooth situation did notst long. Because there are already many Pacifista in the rear who have been assigned here by Bartholomew Kuma, whichpletely cut off the back road of hundreds of people like Luffy, forming a double-sided attack.


    Arlong in the battle yelled at the back: "Don''t worry about the back!! Everyone keep going!!"


    Now, in order to avoid the pursuit of the Pacifista, the offensive that Luffy and his group pushed forward became even more violent.


    Soon, Luffy met the next obstacle.


    Kuma and Domingo.


    At the same time, it was Ivankov, Okama King, who rushed to Luffy''s side.


    Ivankov: "Stop kidding, Kuma!! Are you really going to do something to your old acquaintance?!!"


    Domingo: "Fufufu, don''t waste your time, Kuma you knew is dead."


    Ivankov: "Kuma is dead? Don''t be silly! Isn''t he standing in front of me alive?!"


    Domingo: "The guy you know is not the same as this bear~"


    Ivankov: "How is it possible?! A person with the ability to have meatball fruit, this is Kuma! Absolutely right! Call me back! Kuma!"


    Domingo: "Can''t you understand it now? This guy has been transformed into a Pacifista who only obeys the orders of the world government, just like the group of humanoid weapons behind him."


    Ivankov: "Don''t lie!! Kuma hates the world government! He will never give his life to the world government!!"


    Domingo: "It''s useless for you to get angry. I don''t know what deal this guy has made with the World Government. Just a few days ago, this guy''s personality did exist. However, he has nothing to do with you now. People''s memories are gone, and they are already the same as dead people."


    Speaking of which.


    Kuma in front of him opened its mouth, with a dazzling light emitting from the mouth, andunched a shock wave towards Luffy and Ivankov.


    Luffy didn''t dodge.


    He used the silver sword wrapped in the Armament Haki to block the blow.


    The aftermath of the collision between the two sides caused a lot of smoke to rise around.


    When the smoke dissipated, Luffy, who was holding a silver sword, was already staring at the two guys in front of him with an unfriendly expression, as if he was about to take action to deal with them.


    But Ivankov stopped him and said, "Wait, Straw Hat BOY! I''m here!"


    Luffy said in a deep voice, "Is it really all right?"


    Ivankov: "Of course no problem! I''m very angry now! It''s the first time since I was born that someone I''ve met has forgotten my face! I don''t care if his memory disappears or what, even if he forgets my horror, then let him feel the horror of me again!!" After finishing speaking, Ivankov turned to the group of demons behind and ordered: "Sweethearts, take good care of the Straw Hat BOY~!"


    "Got it!!"


    After a moment of silence, Luffy continued to charge forward.


    Kuma and Domingo wanted to attack Luffy, but Ivankov blocked them all: "Wake up!! I won''t let them attack Straw Hat BOY!"


    Therge group of people just crossed Ivankov''s battlefield and continued to rush forward.


    After rushing for a short distance, another figure appeared in front of him.


    The figure pulled out the ck sword from behind: "I''m sorry, red-haired... the ck sword is ruthless. Then fate... the fate of the proud son of heaven in this next era, is it for this purpose, or... can you still get out of this ck sword smoothly?"


    The person who came was Hawk Eyes!


    Seeing Hawk Eyes, the transvestites not only did not flinch, but took the initiative to speed up and block Luffy: "Straw Hat Boy~ Go ahead! Leave this to us!"


    Hawk Eyes didn''t take these people to heart.


    His eyes were extremely sharp.


    With a wave of the ck sword in his hand, the sword energy passed through the small gap between people at a very precise angle, and directly attacked Luffy''s position.


    Facing Hawk Eyes''s attack, Luffy didn''t even intend to block it.


    The corners of the mouth even slightly raised.


    It''s not that he despises Hawk Eyes.


    Rather, he knew that someone would be more eager than him to block the blow.


    Sure enough, Luffy''s vision shed, and there was an extra figure in front of him.


    Only hearing a loud bang, Zoro, who had put on a two-sword style stance,pletely dispelled the sword energy without any injuries.


    Hawk Eyes, who was always indifferent and expressionless, couldn''t help showing a hint of emotion on his face.


    In this world, there are not many people who can block his sh.


    Almost all of them can be named.


    But he has never heard of the person in front of him.


    Hawk Eyes frowned slightly: "Who are you?"


    Zoro appears to be nothing on the surface. But his slightly trembling body obviously couldn''t hide his mood at the moment.


    Excited!


    Excited!


    Zoro drew the third sword from his waist.


    That was the sword that belonged to Kuina.


    Biting the sword in his mouth, he said, "Roronoa Zoro, a person who is about to defeat you and be the world''s number one swordsman!"


    After saying that, Zoro directly attacked Hawk Eyes.


    Luffy didn''t say anything.


    He did not stop.


    Because he knew that this was Zoro''s battle.


    Before the battle is over, even if Zoro might get killed, he will not participate in the battle between the two.


    Just like that, the next opponents were either blocked by Ivankov, or blocked by Arlong, Sanji, Nami, Usopp and other members.


    Along the way, apart from asional pauses in the pace, it can be said to be unimpeded.


    Luffy holds a silver sword and fights his way out among nearly 100,000 marines!


    ...


    At the same time.


    The scene returns to Whitebeard.


    Whitebeard: "Don''t worry about the enemies behind you!! Boys!! Attack the square in one breath!"


    One order.


    The pirates on the side of Whitebeard rushed forward frantically.


    With no regard for the rear attacked by Pacifista.


    At this time, a person suddenly appeared on the Moby Dick with Whitebeard.


    Whitebeard asked in surprise, "Squard? Are you okay? I contacted you just now..."


    Squard: "Ah, I''m sorry, Dad! The pirate group attacked by the Pacifistater seems to have suffered heavy losses..."


    Whitebeard: "Press all thebat power to the front line, and the enemy only chases from behind. This is the best. I will also dispatch! What we have to do now is to break through the enemy''s formation in one go!"


    Speaking of this, Squard stood in front of Whitebeard: "It is true, we have all received great favor from you. For the Whitebeard Pirates, we will go through fire and water, and we will not hesitate!"


    As soon as he finished speaking, Squard suddenly turned around, and the big sword in his hand was about to stab at Whitebeard!


    Whitebeard waspletely unguarded against him.


    Didn''t expect Squard to attack him unexpectedly.


    If this sword is stabbed by Squard, judging by Whitebeard''s age, his fate will probably be the same as in the original book, ending in this battle.


    But an ident happened.


    When Squard''s sword was about to stab Whitebeard, a shout suddenly came to everyone''s ears from far to near: "Rubber-rubber Whip!"


    Impel Down walls in the bay are elevated.


    But that doesn''t stop Luffy from jumping off Impel Down''s wall.


    Luffy kicked Squard into the ice with one kick.


    Whitebeard first nced in Squard''s direction with an ugly expression, and then turned to Luffy aside: "Straw hat boy, why are you here?"


    Luffy didn''t look at Whitebeard, but still stared at Ace on the execution tform: "You are Whitebeard, right? I heard that Ace likes you very much. I think... Ace doesn''t want to see you either ei on something like this."


    Whitebeard: "Youe down to save me... you don''t care about the lives of yourpanions?"


    Luffy shook his head: "It''s too far and too long to break through to Ace''s position from above. It''s easier to attack from your position. Besides, wouldn''t they be safer if Ie here?"


    As predicted.


    After saying this, Whitebeard raised his head and scanned his surroundings.


    The naval side has concentrated their firepower on them.


    Luffy''s departure, on the contrary, greatly relieved the pressure on Zoro and the others.


    Even the Pacifista who were originally sent to attack Luffy''s rear began to return to the team and re-block the exit in the bay.


    Whitebeard: "Didn''t you really want to save me, but you used me as a shield?"


    Luffy: "Uncle, don''t say that. Everyone wants to rescue Ace, right?"


    At this time, Squard, who was smashed into the bottom of the ice, had stood up again. The pirates around were all very angry and asked him why he did this.


    Squard: "Whispering!! It''s you who forced me to do this?! Don''t continue this farce, Whitebeard! Didn''t you already collude with the Navy?! Didn''t you already guarantee that the Whitebeard Pirates will be okay with Ace?! We''ve all been tricked!! I never heard you say that Ace is... the son of Gol D. Roger!!! When I was taken in by you, I was alone! You know why, right? Because the partners who have been fighting with me for a long time were all killed by Roger!! You should know how much I hate Roger! Even so, you should say it! Say Ace is Roger''s son! And you want Ace to be the next Pirate King! At that time, I was betrayed by you for a long time... I actually got along with Ace... Do you think I''m a fool?! Then Ace, who is so important to you now, was captured, so you betrayed the 43 captains of the pirates under hismand in exchange for Ace''s life! The Whitebeard Pirates will be spared! You''ve already colluded with Sengoku, right?! Look, everyone! Isn''t it us who are now the target of the navy?! I''ve finished what I wanted to say! You can kill me if you want! I only hate that I can''t stab you and avenge my brothers!"


    Luffy sneered: "So that''s how it is... It''s these marine tricks again... Uncle, I don''t care about the problems between you and your partner. I''ll move first."


    After all, Luffy jumped several times in a row.


    Continue to rush towards the execution tform.


    Whitebeard looked at Squard with a gloomy expression: "Squard... You were going to confront Dad with a sword... You stupid son! But even so... I will love you..."


    After finishing speaking, Whitebeard suddenly gave Squard a hug.


    Squard became nervous: "You...you are talking nonsense! You betrayed us!"


    Whitebeard: "I deeply know how much you hate Roger...but how funny is the father''s debt? Has Ace done anything to you? Let''s live in harmony...It''s not just Ace who is the most special. You are all my family..."


    Speaking of which.


    Squard finally realized that he had been tricked.


    Whitebeard didn''t care so much, and shouted to the surroundings: "You are a pirate! You decide whether you want to believe it or not! If you want to follow me, give up your old life and follow me!"


    After finishing speaking, Whitebeard jumped up!


    He took the lead in attacking the only gap in the steel city wall...

 Chapter 419: The end of the war, the momentum is huge

    Chapter 419: The end of the war, the momentum is huge


    At the same time.


    The battlefield not far in front of the execution tform.


    The previous vice admirals and Seven Warlords rushed forward to deal with Luffy and his party.


    Akainu, Kizaru, and green pheasant, the three admirals were not far from the execution tform, and they were stubbornly bnced by the immediate captain under Whitebeard.


    Although there are more top powerhouses on Whitebeard''s side.


    Almost always two-on-one.


    But no matter how much they can fight, they can''t resist therge number of people on the marine side.


    What''s more, even if it was a one-to-two fight, the three admirals Akainu, Kizaru, and Aokiji were not at a disadvantage, which made even the battle between the two sides more and more intense. What can be hurt is always the captains on the Whitebeard side, as well as the bottom marines who were identally injured or killed.


    The captains of Whitebeard''s side were sent flying, but got up again and continued to fight.


    Was beaten to the side of the body and injured, but still desperately continued.


    Akainu, Kizaru, and Aokiji became more and more impatient with them.


    In addition, during the battle, seeing that the battle situation in the distance did not have an advantage, the faces of the three became even more ugly.


    After fighting, the matter has developed to a situation where all the vice admirals and Warlord of the Sea are restrained by Luffy and his party. Then Luffy jumped off the wall and saved Whitebeard''s life.


    Seeing that thest hole card prepared by his side waspletely resolved by Luffy.


    Now, the mood of the three admirals, including the Sengoku, is even more difficult to calm down.


    Akainu, who was in a fierce battle with the two white-bearded team captains, suddenly made a strong effort, and double-clicked the two captains to fly to the ground in the distance.


    When the two captains just got up and wanted to continue fighting again, Akainu shouted at Kizaru and Aokiji: "Help me block them!"


    Immediately, Akainu jumped several times in a row and came to the execution tform.


    Staring at Ace with a bad face.


    Sengoku: "What are you doing here?"


    Akainu: "Not only did the n fail, Monkey D. Luffy''s strength far exceeded our estimation. Do you still have illusions about this battle?"


    Sengoku: "Then what are you going to do?"


    Akainu turned to Ace who was kneeling on the execution tform: "Even if we lose the battle, at least we kill this guy who inherited the evil blood!"


    After saying that, Akainu''s fist, which turned intova, was about to hit Ace.


    Sengoku''s eyes expanded!


    With a single palm, Akainu''s blow flew away: "Are you crazy?! Kill him, will Whitebeard and Monkey D. Luffy give up?! Even if we can evacuate here, but facing their crazy revenge, do you know how many people will die?!"


    Akainu: "As long as the evil blood ispletely cut off here, all the sacrifices are worth it! When we rejoin the world government and concentrate all ourbat power, we can also achieve the final victory!"


    Ace, who had been listening to the conversation between the two, sneered and said, "Oh, this is what you call justice?"


    Akainu: "You, who shouldn''t havee into this world, are not qualified to judge!"


    Say it, regardless of the Sengoku dissuasion.


    Akainu''s right fist turned intova again and attacked Ace!


    The speed is very fast.


    The distance is also very close.


    Never thought that Akainu would ignore Sengoku who he dissuaded, and this time there was no time to react to stop it.


    And just when Akainu''sva fist was about to hit Ace, he pped Akainu''sva fist with his armed palm.


    Theva fall through.


    The person who came was Luffy who had turned on Gear 4!


    At this moment, Luffy is steaming all over his body, his upper body is very strong, and his facial expression has be very fierce! After flying Akainu''sva fist, he stared at Akainu: "Who gave you the courage to attack Ace?"


    Regardless of the shocked expressions of Akainu and Sengoku.


    Holding his right leg into his body, he kicked Akainu fiercely!


    Rubber Rubber Rhino Schneider!


    Kicked the Akainu upside down with one kick, broke through dozens of buildings, and smashed into the edge of Marin Fando.


    Seeing the situation of the Sengoku, he also reacted quickly.


    He has never participated in the war, and he has never done anything to Ace. What he wants is the result!


    If Luffy dared to appear in front of him alone, he would be sure to take Luffy down!


    As long as Luffy is taken down, the battle will be over!


    The timing of the Sengoku was very urate.


    At this time, Luffy had just used a palm to save Ace, and then used a kick to kick Akainu away. The offensive momentum has not been retracted at all, and it is impossible to have enough energy to withstand the next blow of Sengoku.


    Sengoku instantly turned into a golden Buddha statue!


    Raise the giant palm, aiming at Luffy is a fierce blow!


    However, when the giant golden palm was about to touch Luffy, a feeling of palpitation suddenly came to his heart. Sengoku quickly retracted the golden giant palm.


    Immediately afterwards, the ce where the golden giant palm was originally located was given a ''KA!'' a loud bite.


    The t-toothed monster slowly retracted.


    Sengoku looked at Luffy with an ugly face: "What is this?"


    It is not the turn of the Sengoku to be careless.


    Because he clearly felt the threat from the t-toothed giant-mouth monster in front of him.


    If he hadn''t retracted his palm just now...


    At this moment, the palm of my hand may have been bitten off by this monster, and there is even a possibility of poisoning!


    Luffy''s fierce eyes moved to Sengoku.


    pped away the palm ofva fist, and pulled back.


    The leg that kicked the flying Akainu was also retracted.


    Sengoku had a strange change at the same time. He saw the silver scorpion that turned into a t-toothed giant-mouth monster began to squirm and shrink, and finally turned into a set of dark green shiny armor, covering Luffy''s body.


    The surface of the armor even has huge t-toothed mouths flowing with venom.


    It looks very disgusting and terrifying.


    Gives the feeling of Sengoku, as if he can''t wait to devour him quickly.


    This is Luffy''s strongest form today!


    The Arata Armor transformed from the fourth level of Silver Eater!


    Luffy just said coldly: "The weapon that kills you!"


    Then they attacked the Sengoku.


    The two sides soon fought together.


    Seeing Kizaru and Aokiji, who are in a bad situation, they both make eye contact. Immediately, regardless of the consequences of the decline in strength, the two of them used all their strength topletely knock down several admirals under Whitebeard''smand in one fell swoop, and then rushed back to support the Sengoku.


    On the other side, Sengoku also stood up from the pile of rubble.


    He rushed to the battlefield again.


    Luffy, who originally had a slight advantage in the battle against the Sengoku, fell into a disadvantage instantly when Kizaru and Aokiji arrived and joined forces to besiege him.


    When Akainu also arrived and joined the battlefield, Luffy fell into a bitter fight.


    The four teamed up and defeated Luffy steadily.


    Ace yelled: "Luffy, run away!! Leave me alone!!"


    Luffy ignored Ace, blood oozes from the corner of his mouth, clenched his teeth, and fought to the end.


    Seeing that Luffy is about to lose his hold, Ace is about to be panicked to death. At this time, Whitebeard finally arrived here.


    Ace was overjoyed: "Dad!"


    "Ace, your brother is very good. Just wait a moment, Dad wille back as soon as he can..." Whitebeard didn''t dare to neglect, and rushed forward to join the battle.


    The situation on both sides reversed instantly.


    Whitebeard is old and his strength has declined, but he is not injured like in the original book, so it is not a problem to fight against the Sengoku alone.


    During the battle, he turned to Luffy: "Straw hat boy, I will deal with Sengoku first, and after I finish him, I wille to support you again, is that okay?"


    Luffy: "Yes."


    A deal is reached.


    This time it was Whitebeard''s turn to defeat the Sengoku.


    Luffy and the weakened Kizaru and Aokiji, as well as the already injured Akainu, fought equally. However, both sides are top powerhouses, and it will not happen overnight if he wants to win.


    But, with the passage of time.


    The battle in the rear gradually came to fruition.


    Zoro and Hawk Eyes are still fighting, and the two are tied.


    Moria was killed by Jinbe.


    Domingo was killed by Nami, Usopp, Chopper, Nicole Robin, and Buggy who arrived.


    Kuma was smashed by Ivankov and Arlong together, and was rushed to itter. Franky, who is familiar with the transformation of people, stopped his action.


    The vice admirals were also killed by everyone''s joint efforts, and other members were seriously injured.


    Everyone came to the battlefield here one by one.


    Originally, Luffy, Akainu, Aokiji, and Kizaru, who were still fighting like equals, joined the battle one after another after Sanji, Arlong, and Jinbe.


    The battle situation immediately became one-sided.


    The three admirals were thrown into the ground by everyone''s joint efforts at the same time.


    Sengoku was also smashed to the ground by Whitebeard from a high altitude.


    Four consecutive rumbling sounds.


    Smoke and dust billowed.


    When the four stood up again, they all looked very embarrassed.


    Not only are there wounds all over the body, but the military uniform that represents justice has also be tattered at this moment.


    Neither side attacked each other again, and just kept a distance from each other.


    Whitebeard: "It''s over... Sengoku."


    Sengoku shouted angrily: "Why are you so stubborn?! Do you know how many people will be sacrificed in this war started by the Revolutionary Army?!"


    Nami said indignantly: "You are the ones who are stubborn! If your marine hadn''t helped others to do evil, how could this world have be like this?! How could so many people not stand up to resist!!"


    Sengoku: "..."


    Akainu: "..."


    Kizaru: "..."


    Aokiji: "..."


    The four of them were speechless for a while.


    After a moment of silence, Sengoku continued: "The world cannot be chaotic. If it is chaotic, it will only make more ordinary people suffer..."


    Arlong said unkindly: "So this is why you allow the World Nobles to harm the world?"


    Sanji frowned: "Why is there chaos from that? Could it be that without the World Nobles, no one in this world can govern?"


    Sengoku: "..."


    Akainu: "..."


    Kizaru: "..."


    Aokiji: "..."


    The concept is different, and the Sengoku doesn''t know what to say.


    Sengoku: "So what''s going on now? Are you really nning to fight us to the end?"


    The battle here is over.


    But the battle on the side is still not over.


    From time to time, you can hear the screams of the men and horses on the Whitebeard''s side fighting with the Pacifista or the marine in the rear. At this time, arge number of surviving marines also rushed here and surrounded Luffy and his party.


    The group of people scanned the surrounding area.


    No one spoke.


    As long as the fight continues, it is not impossible, but both sides know very well that if the fight continues, no matter which side wins, the loss will be very serious.


    Everyone who was undecided suddenly looked at Luffy, waiting for Luffy''s decision.


    Even Whitebeard.


    Luffy: "Let''s go. You take everyone to evacuate now, and we will not stop it. However, when we meet next time, if you still choose to continue to guard the current government, then I will not be polite to you..."


    Sengoku, Akainu, Kizaru, and Aokiji looked at each other in dismay.


    Although they were very unwilling to be expelled from their territory by ''evil'', they had to do so in order to keep most of the strength of the marine.


    In the end, they had no choice but topromise and choose to evacuate here.


    The Pacifista stopped attacking.


    The war is over.


    While the marine was evacuating, the cheers of the pirates resounded throughout Marineford. This battle is destined to put an eternal and indelible shame on the marine side.


    Zoro and Hawk Eyes stopped their hands one after another when they saw the surrounding situation.


    Hawk Eyes: "It won''t be interesting to continue fighting."


    Zoro nodded in agreement: "I am still unable to decide the oue with you."


    Hawk Eyes: "Roronoa Zoro, right? I will remember you. I hope that when we meet next time, we can decide the oue..."


    After finishing speaking, Hawk Eyes turned and left.


    Just like that, the Great War officially ended.


    ...


    The scene returns to Luffy.


    The first thing after the battle is of course to uncuff Ace.


    As soon as the handcuffs were released, Ace and Luffy had a bear hug on the spot.


    Luffy smiled heartily: "Ace!"


    Ace, who was still very moved, suddenly turned into a scowling expression: "Are you an idiot?! Why are you messing around like this?!"


    Ace kept scolding Luffy constantly.


    Luffy went in his left ear and out of his right ear, just looking at him with a smirk.


    Who knows how long it took, but Ace finally got tired of scolding, and he said seriously: "What''s your n next? Are you really going to fight against the world government? Luffy, the world government has controlled the world for nearly 800 years. Their strength is far from as simple as you imagined. With your current power alone, it is impossible to be their opponent."


    Luffy smirked and said: "I know! So uncle, are you interested in ending this era with me?"


    Luffy looked at Whitebeard.


    Whitebeard gave Luffy an interesting look, and said, "Straw Hat Boy, can you tell me why? What makes you so persistent in fighting against this world?"


    Luffy said calmly: "I just want to protect the people around me so that they won''t be harmed again."


    As soon as the words came out.


    The audience suddenly became quiet.


    Luffy''s words seem to have touched the thoughts buried in many people''s hearts.


    Whitebeard obviously saw the expressions of his children.


    Looking around for a week, Whitebeard smiled generously and said, "In that case, I''ll go crazy with you for a while!"


    Everyone was stunned, and cheers erupted immediately.


    In this way, the Whitebeard Pirates officially joined Luffy''s camp against the World Government, and the two sides sailed together towards thest location, the Holy Land Mary Geoise...

 Chapter 420: Return to Fish-Man Island

    Chapter 420: Return to Fish-Man Ind


    On the sea not far from Marineford.


    Luffy and others are still enjoying the joy of victory in Marineford. The marine side has already evacuated to this sea area on dozens of naval warships.


    On a naval battleship.


    Sengoku, Akainu, Kizaru, and Aokiji are all on this naval battleship.


    At this time, all 4 people gathered in the office in the cabin.


    Sengoku held a phone bug andmunicated with Woxing on the other side of the phone bug. And Akainu, Kizaru, and Aokiji stood there quietly, waiting for theirmunication to end.


    After a while.


    Sengoku covered the phone bug.


    Akainu: "What did they say?"


    Sengoku shook his head: "Things have developed to the worst possible situation. What they mean is to gather allbat forces in the holynd of Mary Geoise, and then wipe out these viins."


    The faces of the three are not very good-looking.


    And the most obvious one is Aokiji.


    Sengoku obviously noticed something wrong with Aokiji, and he asked: "Aokiji, what''s wrong? Ever since you left Marineford, your behavior has been very unnatural. What''s the problem?"


    Aokiji frowned slightly.


    After hesitating for a moment, he said, "I''m thinking... Is it really right for us to do this?"


    Akainu pped the desktop: "Aokiji! What do you mean?! Are you doubting the decision of the World Government?! Is your brain broken?! How could you be shaken by those viins'' belief?!"


    Sengoku looked at Aokiji coldly: "Admiral Aokiji, I hope you can give me a reasonable exnation."


    Aokiji: "Is the justice we uphold all this time really correct? Forget it, this is just my own idea. I will not participate in the next battle..."


    Akainu: "You...!"


    Sengoku and Akainu both looked at Aokiji with ugly faces.


    Akainu even seems to have a tendency to do it.


    Aokiji: "Don''t worry, even if I leave here, I won''t join them and be your enemy..." After finishing speaking, Aokiji took off his marine cloak and threw it on the ground: "That''s all. I''m leaving."


    Sengoku: "..."


    Kizaru: "..."


    Akainu: "..."


    ...


    At the same time.


    In the sea area of the Holy Land Mary Geoise.


    Whitebeard''s side, dozens of pirate ships sailing on the sea.


    The golden ship is above them, moving forward simultaneously.


    Whitebeard, who was still drinking and carousing on the ship, suddenly received a message.


    Whitebeard quickly found Luffy after learning the news.


    At this time, Whitebeard was once again covered with various medical equipment.


    Luffy came to him: "Uncle, you called me over so urgently, what''s the matter?"


    Whitebeard: "Straw Hat Boy, the people on my side have just received news that people from the World Government are rushing from all directions to the Holy Land Mary Geoise. With our currentbat power alone, we are definitely not their opponents..."


    Luffy frowned: "But... I must solve them."


    Whitebeard: "No, I don''t mean you to give up fighting them. But we also need to find more helpers."


    Luffy pped his hands and suddenly realized.


    Whitebeard: "There are more than a few people who are dissatisfied with the behavior of the World Government. Don''t you know Redhead? I believe he is also willing to participate in this battle to end the era."


    Luffy: "Shanks? Red-Haired Shanks? But I don''t know where Shanks is now..."


    Whitebeard: "Don''t worry, I will help you get in touch. And I will also look for more like-minded helpers. Let''s separate here for now. You can also find helpers you can find. Two monthster, we meet at the Sabaody Archipgo."


    Luffy nodded in agreement.


    Go back to the golden ship and tell everyone the news,


    Immediately, Hancock also stood up and said to Luffy: "Luffy, I need to go back first. Two monthster, I will lead the entire Kuja Pirates to support you..."


    Just like that, not long after departure, everyone went their separate ways to find more helpers.


    ...


    Time flies, time flies.


    In the blink of an eye, a period of time has passed.


    And on this day, the golden ship of Luffy and his party finally arrived at the sky above Fish-Man Ind.


    Luffy, who had painted the scene, and Arlong and Jinbe stood on the edge of the golden ship, looking at the deep blue sea below.


    The three of them couldn''t tell they were excited.


    More than ten years.


    After going around for more than ten years, I finally came back here today!


    And this day is also the time when Luffy fulfills the promise he made to Shirahoshi back then.


    The three looked at each other, nodded to each other, and jumped down together.


    With the three of them taking the lead, the fish-men behind also cheered and jumped into the sea one after another.


    ...


    At the same time.


    Outside the royal pce on Fish-Man Ind.


    A huge mermaid rests on a huge shell with its chin in both hands, looking up at the sky. Although the scenery outside the bubble of Fish-Man Ind was still as boring as before, the huge fish-man was still staring in the same direction in a daze.


    Her habit has been maintained for more than ten years.


    Since Luffy left, she has been like this from time to time.


    Looking at the sky in a daze.


    It seems to be able to see through the ocean and reach thend.


    It was alright at first, but the time of daze was not long. But since she learned about Luffy through the arrest warrant, the situation has be even more serious.


    She also changed from an expectant expression to a worried one.


    On this day, as usual, she looked up at the sky for several hours with a worried expression. There is also a wanted warrant for Luffy on the shell.


    At this time, Fukaboshi, the prince of the Fish-Man Kingdom, came to her side and said, "Okay, Shirahoshig Don''t worry, Luffy will be fine. Have you forgotten Madam Sharley''s ophecy? Luffy is sure toe here safe and sound, and lead our Fish-Man Ind tond."


    Shirahoshi nced at the little big brother beside him, then looked up at the sky, and sighed: "Brother Fukaboshi, I know what you said. But I''m still very worried about Brother Luffy..."


    At this time, a guard suddenly rushed towards the two of them in a hurry, and shouted while rushing: "They''re back! They''re back!! They''re back!!"


    Soon, the guards rushed to Shirahoshi and Fukaboshi panting heavily.


    Fukaboshi was very dissatisfied: "So anxious, what''s the matter?"


    The guard soldier was still panting heavily.


    It was not easy to calm down, so he said: "Wh...wh... Jinbe, Arlong, and Luffy, they are all back!"


    As soon as the words fell, the two were swept around by a strong gust of wind.


    Fukaboshi managed to stabilize his body, but Shirahoshi was already gone.


    ...


    Somewhere in Fish-Man Ind.


    Luffy, Jinbe, Arlong, and a group of fish-men crossed the 7,000-meter-deep sea and finally returned to Fish-Man Ind.


    And their arrival quickly attracted the attention of the residents of Fish-Man Ind.


    At the beginning, seeing such arge group of people swimming towards the Fish-Man Ind suddenly, everyone was very nervous and vignt. But when everyone saw the appearance of the visitor clearly, they all changed from the original vignce to excitement.


    Luffy and the others swam to the entrance of Fish-Man Ind, and everyone followed inside the ind.


    Follow them all the way.


    More and more people have heard the news.


    More and more people followed them.


    When Luffy and others arrived at the entrance of Fish-Man Ind, it was already overcrowded. Almost one-third of the residents have already arrived here.


    As soon as Luffy and the others stepped into Fish-Man Ind, a group of them were already impatient, and rushed up directly, or gave a bear hug, or asked questions.


    "Arlonog!"


    "Jinbe!"


    "Luffy!"


    "Are you finally back? Hahahahaha!"


    The atmosphere in the audience instantly became extremely lively.


    However, this happy atmosphere was quickly interrupted by a huge movement in the distance, and everyone''s attention was attracted by this movement.


    In the direction of the pce, there was a huge object rushing towards them at a very high speed.


    While rushing, it also raised a lot of dust.


    Even some buildings were destroyed by this huge object.


    Objects are getting closer and bigger.


    Everyone didn''t have time to think about it, so they immediately gave way to a path very conscientiously.


    Immediately afterwards, this huge object rushed across the road and came in front of Jinbe. The giant object looked left and right nervously, and her eyes finally fixed on Luffy, and then immediately rushed over, holding Luffy tightly in her arms.


    Immediately after.


    It was the deafening cry of tears.


    "Woooooooooh~ Brother Luffy, you are finally back! Shirahoshi misses you, why did it take you so long toe back?"


    Cried for a while, but Luffy didn''t respond.


    Shirahoshi felt strange.


    Why didn''t Brother Luffy respond?


    She pulled the ''little man'' Luffy out of her arms full of curiosity.


    Only then did she realize that Luffy was almost suffocated by her.


    Shirahoshi was very nervous: "Ah! I''m sorry! I''m sorry! Brother Luffy, are you okay? I didn''t mean to! Are you okay? Are you okay?"


    After shaking for a few times, Luffy finally woke up from the dizziness: "Okay! Shirahoshi, I''m alright, I''m alright!"


    Shirahoshi quickly put Luffy down, and then looked at Luffy with an aggrieved and embarrassed face.


    Luffy smiled: "Shirahoshi, you are the same as before, you still like to cry so much."


    Shirahoshi was startled, and quickly defended: "That''s not it! After you left, I have be much stronger! Isn''t it so long since I haven''t seen you that I can''t help but cry? It''s all because of you! You left for so many years, I don''t know if you''de back and see me!"


    While talking, Shirahoshi''s eye sockets started to get wet again.


    Luffy patted Shirahoshi''s fish scales, andforted her: "Sorry, I only found out after I went to sea that you''re so far away from my hometown."


    Although Luffy has exined it, Shirahoshi is still dissatisfied. She grabbed Luffy again and rubbed her face desperately against Luffy: "I don''t care! I don''t care! You have to promise me that you won''t be able to leave for so long again!"


    The rubber man Luffy was rounded and ttened by Shirahoshi on the spot.


    After finally calming down Shirahoshi, the next thing was to catch up with the crowd, and I don''t know who brought a bunch of wine and meat from where, and then everyone reveled on the spot.


    Even the three princes got involved.


    Luffy and the others respectively narrated their experiences over the years, and everyone present was terrified and palpitated, each with emotions.


    After they were almost full, it was the turn of the guards toe, saying that King Neptune wanted to summon the three of them, and the feast was over.


    After a while.


    Inside the royal pce.


    Neptune sits on the throne, the three princes stand in the left row, the left and right ministers stand in the right row, Luffy, Jinbe, and Arlong stand in the center, and Shirahoshi lies down outside the pce, with her full face blocking the pce gate.


    After talking about scenes and polite words for a long time, Neptune finally got to the point.


    Neptune: "Luffy, what are your ns next?"


    Luffyughed and said, "I n to lead everyone to attack Marie Geoise!"


    As soon as the words came out.


    The faces of the left and right ministers were tense on the spot.


    The faces of the three princes were serious.


    Neptune held his breath for a moment, and then sighed: "Hah, the time is here, and it really came. After I heard the prophecy from Sharley back then, I knew that this day woulde..."


    Neptune''s reaction made Arlong''s face not very good-looking.


    Jinbe looked calm.


    Luffy tilted his head, looking at Neptune with question marks on his face.


    I don''t know why Neptune is upset.


    After a moment of silence, Neptune continued: "Luffy, how sure are you for the next battle?"


    Luffyughed and said, "I don''t know, but I will definitely defeat them!"


    Now, the left and right ministers finally couldn''t bear it.


    "Your Majesty! Absolutely not, Your Majesty!"


    "We can''t gamble with the future of Fish-Man Ind! We must never let Fish-Man Ind participate in this battle, Your Majesty!"


    Neptune waved his hand to silence the two ministers, and then looked at Jinbe: "Jinbe, what do you think about this matter?"


    Jinbe answered truthfully: "To be honest, we still don''t know how much power the World Government still hides. But we are not the only ones involved in this battle. All forces that are dissatisfied with the World Government will choose toe out at this time. If we want to change the status quo, we must seize this opportunity. Besides, I don''t think no matter the oue is, the World Government would treat us Fish-Man Ind kindly."


    Arlong red at Neptune dissatisfied: "Huh, if you are afraid, then don''t join the battle! I will lead the fish-men from Fish-Man Street to participate in this final battle together! Besides, don''t me me for not reminding you. Luffy is against the World Government this time not just for himself! One of his purposes is to resurrect your family, Her Majesty the queen!"


    As soon as the words came out.


    Everyone can no longer calm down!


    "What resurrection? What''s going on?"


    "Arlong! What you said is true?! Can you really resurrect mother?!"


    Even Shirahoshi outside the pce, after hearing these words, shouted anxiously towards the pce: "Really? Can you really resurrect mother? Brother Luffy, can you really resurrect mother?"


    Next, Luffy will exin the ins and outs to everyone...

 Chapter 421: The Two Sides Gather

    Chapter 421: The Two Sides Gather


    After exining the ins and outs.


    Neptune: "So that''s how it is... If it was that person back then... Maybe it is really possible to resurrect the dead..."


    Fukaboshi: "Father! Please also ask your sons to lead the army to assist Luffy!"


    Manboshi: "Yes, Father! No matter what, we have to try!"


    Shirahoshi outside the pce blocked the gate of the pce with his face, summoned and shouted: "Father! Shirahoshi is going too! Regardless of whether you agree or not, Shirahoshi must try it! Shirahoshi also wants to resurrect mother!"


    Left and right ministers: "No! Absolutely not, Your Majesty! We can''t let Fish-Man Ind take this risk!"


    There was a lot of noise in the pce.


    The princes and princess mored that they must participate in this war no matter what.


    The left and right ministers kept opposing.


    The two sides were in a quarrel.


    "Enough!" Neptune waved his hand, everyone stopped talking, and the pce fell into silence.


    Neptune nced at everyone majestically and fiercely. When his eyes met Jinbe and Arlong, he couldn''t help but sighed again, and his whole momentum was lost.


    Even if he can prevent the princes and princess from going to war.


    But how can he stop Arlong and Jinbe?


    If they can''t stop Arlong and Jinbe, it means that they will definitely bring a group of fish-men or merfolk to join the battle. Now that the fish-men or merfolk have joined the battle, if the battle is lost, will the World Government really not settle ounts after the fall?


    "Father!"


    "Father!"


    Neptune waved his hand again: "I know! No matter what I say, you won''t listen. I also want to go with you, but I am the king of this country after all, and I need to be responsible to my people. If you want to go, just go. As long as you are willing to go with them, I will not stop you. But... I need to stay and leave a way out for our Fish-Man Ind. In case you fail, I will take the only remaining people and hide all of us."


    "Father!"


    "Father!"


    After another scene of a loving father and filial sons.


    The news that the three princes would lead the army of Fish-Man Ind to follow Luffy to attack thend quickly spread throughout the entire Fish-Man Ind.


    Those who can and are willing to fight ount for almost 70% of the poption of Fish-Man Ind.


    Soon, the Fish-Man Ind army was ready to go and gathered at the entrance of the Fish-Man Ind.


    Everyone looked back, it was Neptune and a group of old and weak women and children standing not far away, waving goodbye to them. Such a touching scene made Shirahoshi unable to hold back her tears: "Father..."


    The rest of the people were deeply moved when they saw this situation.


    The three princes, Arlong, Jinbe, and Luffy, all watching the same scene, standing side by side.


    Manboshi: "Brother, do you think... can we still see our father?"


    Fukaboshi: "Luffy, do you think we can win this battle?"


    Luffy is full of self-confidence, and said with a smile: "I will definitely do it!"


    Arlong: "We will not lose."


    Jinbe: "You can''t lose either!"


    Luffy: "Don''t worry, we will meet again soon!"


    After finishing speaking, everyone immediately put aside any thoughts they shouldn''t have, regained their mood, and turned to leave with infinite fighting spirit. The people who were originally standing behind them gave way one after another, allowing them to walk from the front end of one side to the front end of the other side.


    Luffy suddenly frowned and said: "Shirahoshi, how long are you going to cry? If you are still as useless as you were back then, only crying all day long, then I won''t take you into battle."


    When Shirahoshi heard this, she was anxious and angry: "Who says I''m useless! In the years you''ve been away, I''ve be much stronger than before!"


    After saying that, Shirahoshi suddenly closed his eyes and began to sense the fluctuations around him.


    Brain waves are also transmitted.


    "I need your help..."


    "I need your help..."


    "Will you help me?"


    Immediately afterwards, various chirping sounds came from all directions.


    Everyone soon saw arge number of giant sea kingsing towards them with friendly eyes. Soon, everyone was surrounded by these sea kings.


    Shirahoshi just opened her eyes, proudly: "Look! I said that I have be very useful! They all came to help me!"


    When everyone saw this, the faintly worried faces that were still on their faces disappeared in an instant!


    The momentum is soaring!


    Arlong, Jinbe, and Luffy looked at each other and smiled knowingly.


    "Then let''s go!"


    After saying that, Luffy took the lead and rushed towards the sea.


    Immediately afterwards, the scene of that prophecy was presented in front of everyone. Luffy leads a group of people from Fish-Man Ind, Arlong, Jinbe, Shirahoshi, the three princes, and a group of huge sea kings to the surface of the sea...


    ...


    Holy Land Mary Geoise.


    In the pce of the Empty Throne Im.


    Im sits on the throne.


    Standing on the red carpet in the hall are the Five Elders, themander-in-chief of the world''s army ''Kong'', the Sengoku, the Akainu, Kizaru and other high-level officials.


    Im swept away the wine sses and saucers on the armrest, and shouted angrily: "Trash! They are all trash! After so many years of preparation, you still give them a chance to attack here?!"


    One of the Five Elders: "Master Im, we let them gather here, this is just a strategy for us to wipe them all out."


    Im: "Strategy? Do you still have the face to tell me about strategy? Where is the Li Yaoxiang you rmended?! Where is he now?! Has he still refused to join the war for me?!"


    When ites to Li Yaoxiang, the Five Elders are silent.


    Because they really missed it.


    At this time, the gate of the pce was suddenly kicked open.


    The guard standing by the door was barely knocked away by the door.


    Immediately afterwards, Li Yaoxiang''szy voice came: "Hey~ No wonder I always feel that someone is nagging me all day long. It turned out to be you. Am I here now?"


    The moment they saw Li Yaoxiang appearing, expressions of anger appeared on everyone''s faces.


    If he hadn''t ruined the n, this world war wouldn''t have started earlier!


    If it weren''t for him being useless to participate in the top war, maybe we wouldn''t have been defeated!


    All the people said in unison: "Li Yaoxiang!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Yes! What''s wrong? What are you talking about me again?"


    Akainuu: "Hmph! Didn''t you say you were seriously injured? Why are you here again now?"


    Li Yaoxiang shrugged and said helplessly: "There is no way ~ you keep talking about me, don''t you want me to join the war? I''m here right now? Hey ~ everything is for justice."


    Kong: "Do you really want to go to war?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Of course! Otherwise, why am I here?"


    Everyone in the venue looked at each other, and immediately, everyone had a tacit understanding and said nothing more. If there is any debt, they will settle it with him after this battle is over.


    Five Elders: "Very good! Then you will follow Kong''s arrangement! He will arrange you in the most appropriate position."


    Li Yaoxiang shrugged, did not refute, and agreed.


    ...


    Time flies, time flies.


    In the blink of an eye, the agreed time of two months hase.


    Thebat power of the World Government is almost the same.


    The forces of the Revolutionary Army, Pirates, etc. are simrly gathered.


    Fish-Man Ind is very close to the Sabaody Archipgo, so Luffy and others are among the first to arrive here. Those human traffickers in the past were all dealt with in advance by them.


    On this day, Sabaody Archipgo was very lively.


    The forces that dared to participate in this great war arrived here one after another. Or catch up with some acquaintances, or get acquainted with like-mindedrades who are about to berades-in-arms.


    At this time, two huge pirate ships sailed here in the distance.


    Seeing these two pirate ships, all the pirates present were very excited.


    When Luffy saw the gpole of the pirate ship clearly, he even ran to the shore from a long distance, and shouted impatiently: "Shanks! Hahahahaha! You are finally here!"


    Before the battleship of the red-haired pirates docked, Luffy took the lead in using the rubber hand and flew to Shanks'' ship.


    "Shanks!"


    "Luffy!"


    The two had a bear hug, let go, and Luffy smiled and said, "Let me just say it, I found partners who surpasses you and go to sea together one day!"


    Shanks hooked Luffy''s neck and grind his temple with his fist: "Stinky boy, you want to overtake us, you are still too early! Wait until you win the battle!"


    The actions of the two caused everyone on the ship tough.


    It seems to have returned to the time when we drank and ate meat together in the bar.


    Shanks let go of Luffy, and Luffy taunted everyone: "Hahahahahahaha! You are getting so old!"


    "Luffy, you''re looking for a fight?"


    There was another fight.


    In this way, the reunion of Shanks and Luffy ended perfectly in this happy atmosphere. Next, Whitebeard, Hancock and other forces also came here one by one.


    Luffy also went up to greet them one by one.


    Finally, seeing that there were no forcesing, everyone officially set off for the Holy Land Mary Geoise.


    ...


    The sea area is about 5,000 meters away from the holynd of Mary Joya.


    It is the forces of the Revolutionary Army that are confronting the World Government. They have already arrived here and have been confronting the World Government for a long time.


    This is also the main reason why Luffy and the others can gather in the Sabaody Archipgo without being disturbed.


    Soon.


    The World Government and the Revolutionary Army saw a scene that they had to pay attention to.


    They saw a golden ship flying from afar.


    Below the golden ship, there are dense battleships and various sea kings.


    Judging from the momentum and formation alone, the neers to this side are not much weaker than any of them at all.


    But they all know who this force is.


    So on the marine side, the faces of each and every one changed from dignified to ugly.


    The Revolutionary Army raised their eyebrows one by one.


    The two forces quickly joined together.


    Whitebeard stood on the bow of the ship, and said to Monkey D. Dragon first: "Dragon, why don''t you go up and see your son? By the way, let''s discuss how to fight this war."


    After finishing speaking, regardless of whether Monkey D. Dragon agreed or not, Whitebeard jumped forward and jumped towards the golden ship.


    Shanks nced at Monkey D. Dragon, followed Whitebeard''s pace and jumped onto the golden ship.


    Monkey D. Dragon felt a little helpless, so he had to jump up too.


    After a while, all the leaders gathered on the golden ship.


    The moment we met, the most awkward one was Dragon. He didn''t know what to say to the son. Luffy didn''t think about it that much, and there was no picture of throwing himself into his father''s arms as soon as he came.


    Just asked with an ordinary opening dialogue: "Can you win?"


    Monkey D. Dragon was stunned for a moment, and quickly returned to the mentality he should have as a leader of the Revolutionary Army, and didn''t think so much anymore. He nced at everyone and said with a smile: "Before I saw you, I was not sure. But after seeing you...don''t worry, I will definitely win!"


    ...


    At the same time.


    On the high tform of the World Government camp.


    All the top brass are here now.


    Didn''t ask naive questions about whether you can win. Seeing the situation in front of them, everyone actually had a rough estimate in their hearts.


    So at this moment, everyone on the high tform did not look very good-looking.


    It is impossible to fight as soon as youe.


    The two sides will definitelye to an exchange negotiation.


    Kong stared at the enemy in the distance, and said in a deep voice: "Next, who will volunteer to test them?"


    No one speaks.


    People who passed away are likely to die first.


    Because the other party probably doesn''t even want to talk about it, just do it directly. Everyone present is not afraid of death, but they don''t want to die so uselessly, and die before the war begins.


    Seeing that no one responded, when Kong was about to send a Vice Admiral to negotiate, Li Yaoxiang said at this moment: "Let me do it."


    "Ok?"


    Everyone was a little surprised.


    This guy who has never been very proactive, unexpectedly volunteered for the first time?


    Kong: "Are you sure?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Don''t worry, just leave it to me, you just watch."


    After finishing speaking, without waiting for Kong to agree, Li Yaoxiang flew directly towards the opposing camp.


    No one is surprised that Li Yaoxiang can fly.


    After all, there are too many weird abilities in this world.


    They just felt a little strange in their hearts, and they didn''t understand what kind of trick Li Yaoxiang was going to do...


    ...


    At the same time.


    The scene returns to Luffy and the others.


    At this time, the golden ship has dropped to the same level as other warships. It''s also convenient for everyone to arrange their subordinates and what to do next.


    While waiting for the response from the World Government, Monkey D. Dragon suddenly said to Luffy: "By the way, there is someone you must really want to meet."


    After finishing speaking, he gave his crew a wink.


    Immediately after.


    A guy in aristocratic uniform and top hat jumped into the golden ship from the Revolutionary Army ship.


    Luffy looked at this guy suspiciously: "You are..."


    Sabo threw the top hat on his head to Luffy: "Luffy, did you really forget your brother?"


    "Sabo?! Are you Sabo?!"


    "You, you, aren''t you dead?! Since you''re not dead, why didn''t you find us?"


    "Sorry, Luffy. I lost my memory. I only recovered my memory during the recent war. But it was still in the war, so it was hard for me toe to you."


    "Hahahahaha! Ace! Come here quickly! Come here quickly and see who''s here!"


    Ace was a little puzzled, but he still jumped up from Whitebeard''s ship.


    "Look! It''s Sabo! Sabo is not dead! Hahahahaha!"


    The three brothers reunited.


    Next, Sabo briefly talked about his experiences over the years.


    The three of them were excited and emotional, but they didn''t forget the current situation.


    Sabo: "Okay, there will be plenty of time in the future. After this battle is won, let''s get together again!"


    Luffy: "Yeah!"


    Ace: "Good!"


    Immediately after.


    As soon as the World Government heard the news, Sabo and Ace returned to their ship...

 Chapter 422: 100%, Finale One Piece

    Chapter 422: 100%, Finale One Piece


    On the golden ship.


    Led by Luffy, Zoro, Sanji, Usopp, Nami, etc., all stand side by side on the bow of the ship. Looking at the scene in the distance, everyone is full of emotion and excitement at this moment.


    After working hard for so long, they finally reached the final step.


    As long as today''s battle is over, the goal that everyone has insisted on for so long can finally be realized.


    Zoro: "After this battle, I will defeat Hawk Eyes in front of Kuina, and let her see that I have not forgotten the promise I made to her back then."


    Sanji: "I want to go back and bring the old man, let him go to ALL BLUE with me."


    Usopp: "Hehe, Kaya will be very happy to see her parents resurrected!"


    Luffy: "Don''t worry, we will definitely seed!"


    Arlong: "Stop talking nonsense, the other party has alreadye."


    There is no need for Arlong to remind you. In fact, everyone has already seen a figure flying towards them from the camp of the World Government.


    The flying speed of the figure is not fast.


    The distance is too far.


    Everyone couldn''t see who the figure was.


    But as time passed, and as the figure got closer, everyone gradually saw clearly that the owner of this figure was wearing a mask.


    The moment they saw this person, many people were more or less strange.


    The sharp Whitebeard obviously noticed this too, and he turned to Ace who was not far away: "Ace, what''s the matter? Do you know this person?"


    He saw Ace trembling slightly all over his body, but he couldn''t speak.


    Simrly, Monkey D. Dragon also noticed something wrong with Shanks, and he asked, "What''s the matter, Red Hair, is there something wrong with this person?"


    Shanks looked at the personing very seriously, but didn''t speak.


    The result is that the atmosphere here has already be weird before the shadow people arrive.


    On the golden ship.


    Luffy looked excited.


    Zoro frowned slightly, feeling a bad premonition in his heart.


    Arlong looked unfriendly, gritted his teeth and said, "Why is he there?"


    Usopp''s expression looked stiff, but he was also a little nervous and afraid: "Hahahahaha, I understand! Luffy''s brother must have sneaked into the World Government to be an undercover agent, and he is waiting for us toe and wipe out each other in one fell swoop already! Hahahahaha! Don''t worry, everyone, we will definitely win this battle!"


    At the same time that people from all sides have different ideas.


    Li Yaoxiang is already very close to them.


    Normally speaking, on the eve of the war, the negotiations between the two sides will at most stop in the middle of the battlefield, waiting for the other party to respond. Never go deep into the opponent''s camp.


    But Li Yaoxiang did not intend to stop at all.


    This made everyone feel even more weird.


    Seeing that Li Yaoxiang would continue to approach him, Monkey D. Dragon originally nned to step forward to stop him, but he just took a step with his front foot and found that he couldn''t move his whole body.


    He then wanted to activate Conqueror''s Haki to stop that weird ability.


    But still can''t do it.


    Now, he finally understood why everyone''s faces were so solemn when they saw the person in front of them. Even he himself broke out in cold sweat facing the current situation.


    On the other side, Whitebeard saw that Monkey D. Dragon did not stop Li Yaoxiang from moving forward, so he also nned to stop him.


    Swing out a punch.


    A shock wave directly attacked Li Yaoxiang.


    However, when the shock wave was halfway through, Li Yaoxiang cast a nce in the direction of Whitebeard. Immediately afterwards, a stronger invisible force bounced back together with the shock wave, even smashing Whitebeard who hadn''t reacted directly into the sea.


    "Dad!"


    "Dad!"


    A group of people jumped into the sea to save Whitebeard.


    Although there was an element of unresponsiveness, even Whitebeard was knocked into the air. Now, everyone''s expressions became more serious and ugly, and they didn''t dare to act rashly again.


    And Li Yaoxiang, just like this, flew to the golden ship slowly andnded on the golden ship.


    ...


    The World Government side camp.


    Now everyone is shocked.


    Whitebeard was shot down into the water, everyone saw it.


    Moreover, the people on their side did it single-handedly.


    On the contrary, on the high tform where Sengoku and others were standing, all of them had serious faces.


    Kong: "He has this strength, why didn''t we receive any information before?"


    Sengoku: "..."


    Akainu: "..."


    Kizaru: "..."


    ...


    At the same time.


    On the golden ship.


    Both camps, it is estimated that only Luffy has a rubber brain now, and it is not clear what the situation is now.


    As soon as Li Yaoxiangnded, he rushed up, with a smile on his face, and said excitedly: "Brother! Why are you here? Why are you here?"


    Li Yaoxiang ignored Luffy.


    Scanned the crowd behind Luffy.


    Slowly take off that mask.


    After seeing Li Yaoxiang''s true face and that cold gaze, everyone''s hearts tightened even more. Everyone is not as stupid as Luffy.


    Seeing that Whitebeard was blown away, he still doesn''t understand what happened.


    The Li Yaoxiang in front of him, no matter how he looks at it, he doesn''t look like a friendly army.


    This made everyone''s expressions uglier than eating shit.


    Arlong was very unwilling, his fists were almost bleeding, and he stared at Li Yaoxiang.


    Zoro, Jinbe, Sanji, etc., who are a little bit more sensible, are all heavy-hearted and speechless.


    And those like Nami, who have rtively low endurance, have even fallen into a state of despair.


    Luffy was alone beside Li Yaoxiang, talking to him excitedly: "Hahahaha! Brother, are you here to see how I win this battle? Don''t worry! I will definitely not let you down!"


    At this time, Usopp walked towards Li Yaoxiang with trembling steps as if he couldn''t ept the fact in front of him.


    Zoro put Usopp on the shoulder: "Usopp! Don''t go there!"


    Usopp pushed Zoro''s hand away, and with a stiff smile, he first stepped back and said these words to Zoro and the others: "Don''t...don''t be joking...what are you thinking about? That''s Luffy''s brother...how could he lie to us?"


    He bumped into Li Yaoxiang.


    He just turned around and said with a trembling smile and expectant eyes: "You must be an undercover agent at the World Government, right? Waiting for us toe here and destroy with us, right?"


    Li Yaoxiang didn''t do anything, just looked down at Usopp coldly.


    "Poof!"


    Suddenly, everyone didn''t see clearly what was going on, and there was a long wound on Usopp''s body, as if he had been shed.


    Blood spurted from the wound.


    Usopp rolled his eyes and copsed on a pool of blood.


    "Usopp!"


    "Usopp!"


    Zoro, Sanji, and Chopper rushed forward one by one to check on Usopp''s situation.


    Luffy was dumbfounded.


    Froze there motionless.


    Chopper hurriedly took out the first aid kit and helped Usopp first aid.


    Zoro looked angry, stood up, turned to face Li Yaoxiang, put his hand on the hilt of his sword: "Why! Why did you do this?!"


    Li Yaoxiang swept towards Zoro.


    Zoro didn''t even have time to pull out the sword, and a long wound appeared on his body. Blood gushed out and copsed on the pool of blood.


    "Zoro!"


    "Zoro!"


    Now, no matter how unwilling everyone is to ept the facts in front of them, they have to ept it.


    Nami fell limp and knelt on the ground. She waspletely desperate, and even her eyes became empty.


    Arlong could no longer suppress his anger.


    He rushed up to grab Li Yaoxiang, and questioned him viciously: "Why?! Why did you do this?! Aren''t you Luffy''s brother?! Since you have given us hope, why do you want us to despair?!"


    Speaking of this, there are already various noises around.


    "It''s him! He''s the one who hurt Dad!"


    "Let''s rush up to avenge Dad!"


    "Come on!"


    At this time, Ace finally came to his senses, and shouted at everyone: "Don''t! Don''t go there! You are not his opponent! Come back!!"


    Although Ace was already shouting hysterically, unfortunately, it was toote.


    Li Yaoxiang ignored Arlong in front of him, but instead raised his right hand towards the group of pirates rushing towards him.


    Immediately after.


    It was a loud bang.


    This group of pirates were all bombarded into the sea by an invisible force, life or death is unknown.


    Now, more people jumped into the sea to rescue them.


    Li Yaoxiang then turned his head back to look at this Arlong that was much taller than him.


    Arlong''s face became extremely ugly: "You...!"


    Without exception.


    Arlong also received the same treatment as Zoro and Usopp.


    A long wound appeared on the chest, blood spurted out, and copsed on the pool of blood.


    The blood sttered on Li Yaoxiang''s face, making him even more ruthless at the moment.


    And at this moment, Luffy finally came to his senses. With a trembling body and tone, he said in disbelief: "No... it''s fake, it''s all fake. It can''t be like this. Brother, tell me quickly, all of this is fake, right?"


    "Have you still not understood it?" Li Yaoxiang turned around and looked at Luffy, "Then I will let you see it more clearly..."


    Saying that, Li Yaoxiang turned his eyes to Sanji again.


    The same scene happened again to Sanji.


    Luffy: "Sanji!"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Well? Is it clear enough? Not only the people here, even your grandpa was killed by me..."


    Luffy was startled, his eyes widened, and he looked at Li Yaoxiang in disbelief.


    Li Yaoxiang: "Looking at you, it seems that you still don''t believe it? Okay, then I will let you look more carefully..."


    "Chopper! Chopper!" Luffy rushed forward and helped Chopper up. But obviously, Chopper has passed out. Luffy finally realized that what happened in front of him was not an illusion.


    97%...


    ...


    ...


    He red at Li Yaoxiang angrily: "Enough! Enough! Why?! Why did you do this?! Tell me! Why?!"


    98%...


    ...


    ...


    Li Yaoxiang narrowed his eyes slightly.


    Did not answer Luffy.


    The same trick, this time on Nami and Nico Robin.


    "Nami!!"


    "Robin!!"


    This time Luffy seemed even more angry: "Stop! You stop! Why?! What is your purpose?! Don''t kill! Don''t kill again!! If you want to kill so much, then you kill me first! !"


    99%...


    ...


    ...


    Li Yaoxiang''s gaze became even colder this time.


    It was so cold that Luffy felt chills.


    The elder brother who had apanied him for countless years seemed to be a person he didn''t know now. Moreover, the way he looked at Li Yaoxiang seemed to have no intention of stopping at all.


    What frightened him even more was that he had caught Li Yaoxiang''s next target!


    That''s Shirahoshi!


    He can''t stand it anymore!


    Even if that person is Li Yaoxiang, he can''t bear to hurt the people he cares about one after another!


    Gear 4!


    "RubberRubberKong Gun!"


    Pa!


    Li Yaoxiang caught the blow with his palm.


    Removing his fist, Li Yaoxiang only saw Luffy''s ring face: "Enough...I can''t tolerate the people around me leaving me one by one...Even you can''t do it!!"


    100%...


    ...


    ...


    In an instant.


    The scene became silent.


    Luffy withdrew his fist, but Li Yaoxiang didn''t make a move for a long time. Luffy said in a cold tone: "What''s the matter? Don''t do it yet? Don''t you like to kill? Then kill my brother too! Come on!"


    It was also silent.


    No one speaks.


    I don''t know how long it took, Li Yaoxiang''s eyes suddenly stopped being cold, and heughed loudly: "Hahahahaha!! Hahahaha! Hahahaha!"


    Theughter was so loud that even people from the marine camp could hear it.


    In an instant, everyone was confused.


    What''s going on here?


    "Why are youughing?"


    "Hahahahahaha! Sorry, Luffy. I made you sad."


    After finishing speaking, Li Yaoxiang waved his hand.


    Within a hundred miles, a healing halo suddenly appeared.


    Immediately afterwards, all the wounds of those injured by Li Yaoxiang recovered at a speed visible to the naked eye.


    People who were still unconscious.


    They started waking up one by one.


    Everyone is confused.


    Usopp sat up: "Huh? Am I dead? Where''s my wound?"


    Chopper: "I''m okay? Huh? Usopp! Zoro! Are you okay?!"


    Such things, doubts, happened to everyone who was injured by Li Yaoxiang, and everyone couldn''t figure out what was going on.


    Even Luffy himself was confused.


    He is ready to fight Li Yaoxiang desperately, what''s the situation now?


    Li Yaoxiang ignored everyone''s reactions, and snapped his fingers with a long-lost happy face and smile. Immediately afterwards, there was an additional air door behind him.


    Air door opens.


    All unexpected people came out of the air door one after another.


    Garp, Kuina, Kaya''s parents, Tiger, Nami''s adoptive mother, Chopper''s adoptive father, Otohime, Zeff who has regrown his calf, etc. In short, those who promised that Luffy would be resurrected/healed in the past, now it''s all in front of everyone.


    Seeing familiar faces, they all rushed towards each other.


    Usopp: "Uncle and aunt! Kaya!"


    Kuina looked at the sword on Zoro''s waist, tilted her head, and smiled sweetly: "Are you Zoro?"


    Zoro blushed and nodded: "Yes."


    Arlong: "Brother Tiger!"


    Sanji: "Old man!"


    "Luffy? Is that you? Luffy?" Otohime walked over quickly, hugging Luffy who was still in a daze. Immediately, she saw Shirahoshi and the others not far away, and rushed towards them with tears streaming down her face, "Shirahoshi! Fukaboshi! -My children..."


    During the whole process, Luffy was still in a daze.


    His current form has already returned to the state of an ordinary person.


    He looked at Li Yaoxiang in a daze: "Brother...brother, what''s going on?"


    "Hahahaha! "Li Yaoxiangughed and walked over and patted Luffy on the shoulder, "I don''t know how to exin it to you. In short, I can only say sorry to you, and I have reasons for doing so..."


    Luffy''s head was nk at the moment, and he didn''t know what to say: "You...didn''t you tell me you will help me resurrect after I solve all the troubles..."


    Before he finished speaking, Li Yaoxiang said boldly: "You don''t need to bother!"


    After finishing speaking, Li Yaoxiang turned around and flew towards the World Government camp.


    Immediately after.


    In front of the World Government camp, twelve giants suddenly appeared out of thin air.


    6 wooden giants respectively.


    Complete bodies of Susanoo of all six colored mes.


    This is the skill that Li Yaoxiang used to use the reincarnation side tomb.


    Next, under the incredulous eyes of everyone, the 12 giants swept wildly at the World Government camp.


    One death is a big piece.


    Even people with natural fruit abilities are no exception.


    No one can stop the attack of the 12 giants covered with Armament Haki.


    Soon, the World Government was defeated by the 12 giants.


    And Li Yaoxiang returned to Luffy as if nothing had happened, and said with a smile, "Look? There''s the solution."


    Luffy: "Brother, this..."


    Li Yaoxiang did not answer Luffy, but instead looked at Monkey D. Dragon: "I will leave the rest to you, no problem?"


    Monkey D. Dragon: "..."


    Li Yaoxiang looked at Luffy again, and patted him on the shoulder: "Luffy, with your father in charge of governance, the situation in this world should not be chaotic for too long. I''m leaving, and it''s up to you to take the next step. Choose for yourself! Don''t think about me anymore. If there is fate, we brothers will meet again naturally."


    After finishing speaking, Li Yaoxiang flew into the sky with a heartyugh.


    It wasn''t until his figurepletely disappeared that Luffy came to his senses and shouted to the sky: "Brother! Brother!"


    It''s a pity that he can no longer get any response from his brother...

 Chapter 423: Finale

    Chapter 423: Finale


    Thest time.


    Time flies, time flies.


    In the blink of an eye, Li Yaoxiang doesn''t know how many years have passed and how many worlds he has traveled through. Who knows whether he ckened others or the system ckened him.


    Since he left the world of One Piece, he has never had any real affection for anyone.


    Now he does not need the help of the system, and can travel to various worlds with his own strength, bing one of the most powerful existences in the endless universe.


    At this time, he was floating in the midair of a certain world.


    Looking down below at histest masterpiece.


    A person who has been so ckened by him that can no longer be ckened is doing destructive actions to this world.


    As long as he has a single thought, Li Yaoxiang can save countless creatures in this world, but he didn''t do so, just quietly watching the scene in front of him, developing towards the worst situation.


    Suddenly, his expression changed.


    Turn around and look in a certain direction behind.


    His gaze was as deep as if he had passed through the atmosphere, passed through the universe, and reached a certain ce.


    "Who is trying to influence my past?"


    He faintly felt that someone seemed to be trying to change his past trajectory in a certain parallel space and at a certain point in time. Although even if it is changed, it is not a big deal for him at present. But he has a strong interest in this person who is trying to change his past.


    The cold face revealed a long-lost smile.


    "Interesting..."


    Immediately, with a wave of his hand, everything in this world returned to normal.


    He himself was also in the air, tearing apart a crack in time and stepping in...


    ...


    At the same time.


    Naruto world. (At the ending of the side story)


    The Ninja Alliance led by Naruto is confronting Akatsuki headed by Li Yaoxiang.


    The two sides are full of gunpowder.


    There is a tendency to go to war if there is a disagreement.


    Looking at Li Yaoxiang in front of him, Naruto felt very unwilling. Before Li Yaoxiang left, he was given a chance to be reborn.


    After being reborn, the only thing he wanted to do was to keep Li Yaoxiang to make up for the past regrets.


    Unexpectedly, his elder brother would be so obsessed with the idea of leaving this world. He didn''t hesitate to be hostile to himself, but also topletely liberate his dark side.


    Seeing that both sides could hardly bear to fight.


    Gritting his teeth, Naruto turned to Li Yaoxiang and asked onest time: "Brother! Can''t you really stay for me?"


    At this time, Li Yaoxiang was surrounded by friends.


    "Naruto! You don''t understand! I don''t belong in this world! I don''t want to be stuck here forever!"


    Such a question and answer.


    Neither side would budge.


    knows that this war is inevitable.


    Seeing that both sides could not bear to fight, Li Yaoxiang''s expression suddenly changed, he looked around suspiciously, and becamepletely devoid of fighting spirit.


    Naruto obviously noticed this too.


    He quickly stopped everyone''s thoughts of doing something, and shouted with some uncertainty: "Brother...is that you?"


    "Naruto?"


    Li Yaoxiang frowned slightly, first he was puzzled, and then he was stunned.


    The memories at this point in time have all been integrated into his mind, and through the memory fragments in his mind, he quickly understood what was going on.


    Immediately, a long-lost warmth suddenly came to my heart.


    How many years...


    I don''t know how many years I haven''t felt this feeling...


    Feelings?


    Li Yaoxiangughed at himself.


    The word "feeling" is already very unfamiliar to him.


    I don''t know how many years it hasn''t happened to me.


    Turns out to be...


    It turns out that in this world... someone misses me?


    Memories of the past began to sh quickly in my mind. When Li Yaoxiang''s mind returned to reality again, his eyes were no longer as cold and ruthless as before, and there was a trace of tenderness in his eyes...


    Li Yaoxiang nodded: "Well, it''s me."


    Naruto was overjoyed: "Ha! Brother! Is it really you?"


    Naruto ignored everyone''s reaction and rushed towards Li Yaoxiang directly. But he didn''t realize that everything around him had stopped moving.


    Time was stopped by Li Yaoxiang.


    Naruto rushed in front of Li Yaoxiang, pounced on him as soon as he came, hugged him again, and patted his shoulder again: "Hahahahaha! Brother! It''s really you! It''s really you! You''re finally back! Hahahahaha!"


    Li Yaoxiang just looked at Naruto with a smile, and let Naruto or Kuma hug or pat him on the shoulder, without any other reaction.


    Naruto cheered himself up for a long time before he realized the abnormality around him: "Brother, this..."


    Li Yaoxiang smiled and said, "It''s nothing, I just stopped time."


    Naruto was surprised, but soon relieved.


    The omnipotent elder brother, no matter how powerful he is, Naruto will not be surprised.


    "Brother, since you havee back, don''t leave again! You abandoned me in your previous life, and you can''t leave me alone in this life!"


    Li Yaoxiang shook his head: "No, Naruto. This world is too small for me, I won''t stay here."


    When Naruto heard this, he became anxious all of a sudden.


    Before he could say anything, Li Yaoxiang continued: "Although I won''t stay here, you can leave with me. Naruto, would you like to go on an adventure with me in a new world?"


    Naruto was taken aback.


    He never thought that Li Yaoxiang would give this suggestion.


    After all, didn''t Li Yaoxiang once said that he couldn''t take people away?


    There is no need for Naruto to say anything, Li Yaoxiang seems to have seen through Naruto''s mind, and said with a smile: "I used to be unable to take people away, or even leave on my own. But now these things are not a big deal anymore."


    Naruto''s anxious face gradually became overjoyed.


    The corners of the mouth are raised on both sides.


    However, his expression soon changed again.


    He became a little hesitant.


    He looked at the familiar faces behind him, hesitating.


    Li Yaoxiang draped Naruto''s shoulders, and also looked at the familiar figures in the past: "If you are really willing to leave with me...they, you don''t have to worry. I will cut a part of your soul and stay here. ''He'' I will help you stay here and continue to live. Of course, if you don''t want to leave with me, I will also leave part of my soul here, and you can spend this life peacefully with me in this world."


    The voice just fell.


    Naruto''s originally hesitant face became instantly overjoyed.


    He didn''t even think about it, just smiled and faced Li Yaoxiang, and gave a very firm ''hmm''.


    Needless to say it so clearly, Li Yaoxiang already knows what the younger brother''s choice is.


    After a while.


    Time no longer stands still.


    Everything is back to normal.


    ''Naruto'' was also so excited that he rushed towards ''Li Yaoxiang''. Li Yaoxiang also recovered his memory, and then readily epted this younger brother.


    The leaders of both camps have made peace.


    Does this battle still need to be fought?


    So, this ninja world war ended inexplicably under the circumstances of everyone''s ignorance.


    In the state of the soul, Naruto, who was invisible and floating in mid-air with Li Yaoxiang, saw such a scene, and finally let go of thest big stone in his heart.


    Looking at the backs of ''Naruto'' and ''Li Yaoxiang'' arming their shoulders and leaving.


    Naruto no longer has any regrets in this world.


    He looked at Li Yaoxiang: "Let''s go!"


    Li Yaoxiang nodded with a smile.


    Take the lead and fly towards the sunset in the distance.


    Naruto took onest look in Konoha''s direction, and followed closely behind.


    The two brothers flew towards the sunset one after the other, until their figurespletely disappeared from this world...


    At the same time.


    When the two disappearedpletely, ''Naruto'' and ''Li Yaoxiang'', who were still hooking their shoulders, suddenly turned around and looked at the direction in which they disappeared.


    ''Naruto'': "They''re gone..."


    "Hmm." ''Li Yaoxiang'' turned to ''Naruto'', "Envious?"


    ''Naruto'': "Yes."


    ''Li Yaoxiang'': "Don''t worry...our strength is inferior to the original body. But I firmly believe that one day, we will have an adventure that belongs to our brothers."


    The two looked at each other.


    They smiled knowingly.


    "Naruto! Senior Li Yaoxiang! Why are you still standing there?" The one who spoke was Sasuke, who looked very bright.


    ''Naruto'' responded excitedly to Sasuke: "Oh! Here!"


    Immediately, the two trotted towards the crowd together...


    ...


    Tokyo Ghoul World.


    Night.


    On the balcony of an apartment.


    Kaneki Ken stood in front of the railing, looking at the bustling night scene of Tokyo. But his expression is not as simple as admiring the night scene. It seemed that there were countless troubles bothering him.


    At this time, a small hand pulled his clothes: "Dad, why do you go to bed sote?"


    Kaneki Ken reacted.


    He squatted down, brushed her daughter''s hair, and said softly: "Ichika, daddy has something to think about, can you go to bed first?"


    Kaneki Ken''s daughter gave an obedient ''oh'', and immediately ran back into the room with her short legs.


    After a while.


    The lights in the room went out.


    Kirishima Touka- Kaneki Touka walked out of the room, walked behind Kaneki Ken, and gently massaged Kaneki Ken''s shoulders: "What''s the matter? Still thinking about other countries?"


    Kaneki Ken touched the back of Kaneki Touka''s hand, and smiled gently at her sideways: "It''s okay, you go to sleep first..."


    Kaneki Touka knew that Kaneki Ken didn''t want to worry her, so she didn''t want to think about it, but she still said: "Ken, the current life is already very good for us ghouls. Everyone is very satisfied. You don''t have to fight so much for everyone anymore..."


    Kaneki Ken smiled, but did not speak.


    Kaneki Touka understands Kaneki Ken''s meaning, this is to let her not think too much.


    Kaneki Ken knows how to measure himself.


    Kaneki Touka: "Okay then, don''t think about it too long, go to bed early, lest you won''t feel refreshed tomorrow."


    After finishing speaking, Kaneki Touka turned and left.


    Kaneki Ken once again stared at the night view of Tokyo in a daze.


    Since the establishment of TSC, the lives of the ghouls have indeed improved a lot. However, the rest of the countries did not agree with the n of peaceful coexistence with ghouls, and even imposed restrictions on them in various aspects. These ghouls living in Tokyo were almost overwhelmed.


    Kaneki Ken has been unable to think of a solution.


    At this time, Li Yaoxiang suddenly remembered in his mind, and he couldn''t help murmuring: "If it were you... what would you do?"


    The voice just fell.


    Out of the corner of his eye, he suddenly saw the shadow of Kaneki Touka on the ground.


    Strange.


    Didn''t I tell her to go back to sleep first?


    Why are you still here?


    He turned around and looked, only to find that Kaneki Touka''s figure was frozen there, motionless.


    "Touka!" Kaneki Ken was so anxious that he wanted to rush forward to check the situation.


    But just as he took a step forward, a long-lost voice suddenly came from his ear: "Ken..."


    Kaneki Ken was stunned.


    He quickly turned around and took a look.


    Sure enough, he saw Li Yaoxiang standing not far behind him.


    "It''s you?!"


    "It''s me."


    "Where have you been all these years?! Are you ''him''?!" The him Kaneki Ken said was Li Yaoxiang who grew up with him and looked exactly like him.


    However, the appearance of Li Yaoxiang at this time is the appearance of Li Yaoxiang, the special investigator of CCG.


    Over the years, he has also been guessing that Li Yaoxiang, the special investigator of CCG, is the same guy as the guy who grew up with him!


    Li Yaoxiang nodded again: "It''s me."


    "Why? Why did you leave?"


    Li Yaoxiang gave a brief exnation.


    But the huge and unbelievable amount of information is still difficult for Kaneki Ken to digest.


    His three views for so many years have been subverted.


    Li Yaoxiang: "I came back this time to ask you, do you n to leave with me? After leaving this time, I will note back again. Of course, before leaving, I will help you solve all your troubles. Even if it is thest gift I must give you..."


    Early the next morning.


    Kaneki Touka had already prepared breakfast and put it on the dining table.


    But neither Kaneki Ken, Kaneki Touka, or their daughter, didn''t have much appetite for today''s breakfast.


    The two adults are okay, but they feel a little strange why they feel this way.


    But the daughter can''t do it.


    Immediately yelled: "I don''t want to eat these! I don''t want to eat these!"


    Kaneki Touka: "Ichi-chan, we can only eat these foods now, can you bear with it for a while? When scientists make breakthroughs in research, then we will have better food."


    Ichika spread food all over the table: "I don''t want it! I don''t want it! I suddenly want to see French fries, burgers, and ice cream! Even if I can''t eat it, I can smell it!"


    Let alone Ichika.


    Even ''Kaneki Ken'' and Kaneki Touka suddenly felt this way for some reason.


    They seem to be interested in those foods.


    The two couldn''t survive their daughter, so they had no choice but to take their daughter to the street to have a look.


    A family of three came to a fast food restaurant and ordered a fast food.


    Before the couple could react, Ichika grabbed a handful of French fries and stuffed them into her mouth. The two couples are in no hurry to stop it.


    Kaneki Touka felt like taking out the vomiting bag, ready to catch her daughter''s vomit.


    But the next scene shocked both of them!


    Not only did Ichika not vomit, but she opened her eyes and said excitedly: "Mom and Dad, the French fries are delicious eh~~!"


    As he spoke, another french fries were stuffed into his mouth one after another.


    This simply made the two of them dumbfounded.


    The two also quickly stuffed the French fries into their mouths.


    Immediately afterwards, the two also widened their eyes, looking at each other in disbelief!


    At the same time.


    It''s not just the family of three in the ''Kaneki Ken'' family that has changed.


    There are many ces around the world that went like this.


    This is Li Yaoxiang''sst gift to this world, so that ghouls can eat the food of ordinary people normally. As long as this fundamental problem is solved, ghouls and humans will no longer feel natural hostility towards each other anymore.


    The problems facing Tokyo will be easily solved.


    At the same time.


    The scene returns to Kaneki Ken who is in the soul state.


    Seeing the scene in front of him, thest boulder weighing on his heart was alsopletely let go.


    Time stands still.


    He walked up to the still Kaneki Touka and his daughter, and gently kissed the foreheads of the mother and daughter respectively: "I''m sorry, Touka, Ichika, I hope you can forgive my waywardness..."


    After saying goodbye for thest time, Kaneki Ken returned to Li Yaoxiang.


    At this time, Naruto, who had a physical body of about 10 years old, also jumped and jumped from a distance, holding a lot of food in his arms, and ran back full of food.


    Kaneki Ken: "Hello, my name is Kaneki Ken, pleased to meet you."


    Naruto took a mouthful of hamburger and a mouthful of Coke on the left, andughed heartily: "Hahahaha! My name is Naruto! Uzumaki Naruto! Please give me your advice!"


    Kaneki Ken then shifted his gaze to Li Yaoxiang: "Let''s go..."


    Immediately, the figures of the three of them slowly disappeared into the world of Tokyo Ghoul...


    ...


    One Piece World.


    Many years have passed since Li Yaoxiang left the world of One Piece.


    Back then, the defeat of the World Government did not cause much turmoil. Monkey D. Dragon soon led his men and some marines who were willing to surrender, and together stabilized the situation in the entire One Piece world.


    Although there will still be pirates.


    The new government is also still on the opposite side of the pirates.


    But at least in this brand new world, there are no more officials who harm themon people, and there is no such thing as human traffickers. The lives of all races and ordinary people have be more stable and happier.


    The people of Fish-Man Ind can finally move to thend and truly experience the warmth of the sun.


    As for Luffy, in these years.


    He finally seeded in conquering the entire sea.


    Now, their golden ship is staying right above ALL BLUE, holding a grand banquet. It was the wedding of Zoro and Kuina, and Usopp and Kaya.


    Many people came here to celebrate and send blessings to them.


    Even Shirahoshi and other fish-men and merfolk were no exception.


    The scene is so lively.


    Luffy, who ate like a big ball, managed to get out of the crowd and rolled onto the deck of the golden ship. He patted his stomach, hupped, looked at the clouds in the sky and the suitcase in his hand with a smile on his face, and murmured: "Brother, did you see? I have seeded, I have sessfully conquered the whole world. The One Piece. Are you still noting back to see me?"


    Suddenly.


    Time in the entire One Piece world stopped flowing.


    When everything returned to normal, Hancock was already holding a flower ball, walked out of the cabin shyly, and said with a blushing face: "Luffy..."


    ''Luffy'' ate too much and couldn''t even stand up.


    He could only lie down, looking up at Hancock: "Hancock, what''s wrong?"


    "I... I just grabbed the flower ball... I heard from them that if I get a flower ball... it means that I and Luffy are about to get married..."


    Without waiting for Hancock to finish speaking.


    ''Luffy'' suddenly nervously said: "Where''s the silver sword?! Where''s my silver sword?! Wasn''t it still in my hand just now?! How could it disappear?!"


    At this time, Luffy, who was hiding not far away, looked at the suitcase in his hand, and then at the anxious ''Luffy'', not knowing what else to think in his mind.


    After a while.


    As if he had figured it out, he threw the suitcase at Hancock''s feet.


    Li Yaoxiang looked down at him and smiled, "Really?"


    Luffy raised his head, squinted his eyes and looked at Li Yaoxiang with a smile: "I don''t need the silver sword anymore. He needs it more than me."


    Immediately, Hancock picked up the suitcase in the distance, and Jiao Didi said, "Luffy... are you looking for this?"


    ''Luffy'' saw the suitcase in Hancock''s hand, and quickly rolled to Hancock''s side.


    After holding the suitcase in his arms, he breathed a sigh of relief.


    Silver is the only thing Li Yaoxiang left for him, he must not lose the silver.


    "Luffy... Then did you agree to marry me?"


    ''Luffy'' tilted his head: "Marry? Okay!"


    Hancock was so excited that she passed out immediately.


    ''Luffy'' shook her body at a loss: "Hancock, what''s wrong with you? Did you eat too much like me? Chopper! Chopper!"


    Seeing this, Luffy, who was invisible, looked at Li Yaoxiang: "Let''s go!"


    Then he looked at the 10-year-old Naruto and the 10-year-old Kaneki Ken.


    Luffy: "Luffy, Monkey D. Luffy!"


    Kinkiken: "Ken, Kaneki Ken."


    Naruto: "Naruto, Uzumaki Naruto!"


    Immediately, the three followed Li Yaoxiang and turned to leave.


    Luffy also gradually changed from a soul state to a 10-year-old state with a physical body.


    Li Yaoxiang walked on the sea, holding Naruto with his left hand and Kaneki Ken with his right hand. Luffy jumped up and rode on Li Yaoxiang''s neck.


    The group of four seemed to return to the childhood scene.


    Naruto: "By the way, brother, you haven''t told me yet, why do we have to be 10 years old?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Not only will I turn you into 10-year-olds, but I will also seal your strength. This seal will never be released until the moment of life and death. Don''t you think that this kind of adventure will be more interesting ?"


    Kaneki Ken: "Then what world will we go to next?"


    Li Yaoxiang: "Go to the world of cultivating immortals first, there must be a lot of interesting things that you haven''t seen before."


    Hearing this, Naruto and Luffy, the two active children, immediately yelled and jumped with excitement.


    Kaneki Ken, who was rtively quiet, looked at the two lively and active people.


    Can''t help showing a smile at the corner of his mouth.


    The one who didn''t make a sound held Li Yaoxiang''s hand and continued to walk forward.


    Luffy raised his right fist and shouted in high spirits, "Let''s go!"


    Immediately after.


    The figure of a group of four people slowly disappeared into the world of One Piece...


    ...


    ...


    [Following words: ckened trio]


    The world of cultivating immortals.


    The kingdom of mortals.


    On the streets of an imperial city.


    A monster car is running fast on this bustling street. Those who can drive a monster car in the imperial city will not have a low status.


    People on the street retreated three feet when they saw this, for fear of offending such a dignitary.


    Even if he was hit to death, there is no ce to say that he was wronged.


    The general sitting in the monster car enjoyed enjoying the beautiful scenery outside the window. He has only just been promoted. This was his first time riding a monster car in the imperial city.


    Seeing the awe the people have for him makes him feel superior.


    He feels even more the dignity of his current status.


    After so many years of ttery, it was hard to get promoted to this position, and it was finally not in vain...


    And just as he wasmenting the bitterness of these years, the monster car suddenly shook violently.


    Immediately afterwards, the entire carriage overturned.


    He managed to climb out of the carriage in a mess.


    Seeing the strange eyes of everyone made him angry and angry! Which bastard made him make a fool of himself? ! ! He soon saw a group of four people in strange clothes standing in the middle of the road.


    One adult, and three children.


    There is no time to think about it.


    He walked forward and yelled at the four people: "How unreasonable!! How dare you block the way of this admiral?!! Do you know who this admiral is?! Do you want to die?!"


    The cursing is over.


    The anger is also gone.


    The general finally had the heart to look at the four people in front of him.


    It doesn''t matter if you don''t see it, but it really shocked him when you saw it. Ordinary people would be so frightened that they would kowtow to their knees and apologize repeatedly when they encountered such a situation.


    How can anyone be as calm as them?


    Having been in the officialdom for many years, he immediately realized that the identities of the four people in front of him must not be simple! Coupled with the exotic clothes on the other party, he immediately thought of a piece of news he received not long ago.


    He heard that there will be an immortal visiting the imperial city recently.


    Could it be that the four people in front of me are the legendary Immortal?!


    There is no time to think about it.


    The general quickly knelt down and kowtowed.


    "I''m sorry! It is I, the lower officials, who have blind eyes. I don''t know that it''s the great immortals who are here! Please also have arge number of upper immortals, and forgive the crime of offending!" While speaking, the general kowtowed several times in session.


    Bleeding froom the forehead.


    But on the surface he looked terrified, but in fact he was very calm in his heart.


    Based on his many years of experience as an official, he kowtowed and apologized immediately. The other party has a noble status and should not care about him.


    Moreover, the other party also brought three lovely children with him, so he must be very caring immortal.


    Would never kill in front of children.


    This wave... steady!


    But at this moment, the conversation between the three children made him, who was originally full of confidence, drop to the bottom of his mood in an instant.


    Naruto smiled: "Kill him? Let him go and maybe he will find someone to take revenge."


    Luffy also showed a bright smile, nodded and said: "Well, to prevent future troubles!"


    Comparatively quiet Kaneki Ken: "I have no objection."


    General: "..."


    The Novel will be updated first on this website. Come back and


    continue reading tomorrow, everyone!